summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/old
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
-rw-r--r--old/14625-8.txt15124
-rw-r--r--old/14625-8.zipbin0 -> 211757 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h.zipbin0 -> 3434522 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/14625-h.htm19389
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/image-1.jpgbin0 -> 114314 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/image-2.jpgbin0 -> 203423 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/image-3.pngbin0 -> 64906 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/image-4.pngbin0 -> 41410 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/image-5.pngbin0 -> 31560 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate10.pngbin0 -> 132841 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate11.pngbin0 -> 222891 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate12.pngbin0 -> 76248 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate13.pngbin0 -> 129117 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate14.pngbin0 -> 62761 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate14a.pngbin0 -> 30707 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate15.pngbin0 -> 89698 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate16.pngbin0 -> 155079 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate16a.pngbin0 -> 25874 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate17.pngbin0 -> 162868 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate18.pngbin0 -> 171636 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate19.pngbin0 -> 43258 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate20.pngbin0 -> 27403 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate21.pngbin0 -> 170868 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate22.pngbin0 -> 46313 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate23.pngbin0 -> 83185 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate26.pngbin0 -> 94935 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate27.pngbin0 -> 64592 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate28.pngbin0 -> 87678 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate3.pngbin0 -> 121260 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate4.pngbin0 -> 189173 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate5.jpgbin0 -> 162629 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate7.pngbin0 -> 171872 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate8.pngbin0 -> 159697 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625-h/images/plate9.pngbin0 -> 94895 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/14625.txt15124
-rw-r--r--old/14625.zipbin0 -> 211759 bytes
36 files changed, 49637 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/14625-8.txt b/old/14625-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39c6af2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15124 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Military Instructors Manual, by James P. Cole
+and Oliver Schoonmaker
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Military Instructors Manual
+
+Author: James P. Cole and Oliver Schoonmaker
+
+Release Date: January 9, 2005 [eBook #14625]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Jeannie Howse, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+ file which includes the original illustrations.
+ See 14625-h.htm or 14625-h.zip:
+ (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625/14625-h/14625-h.htm)
+ or
+ (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625/14625-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL
+
+by
+
+CAPTAIN JAMES P. COLE, 59th INFANTRY
+Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training Regiment,
+Plattsburg, N.Y.
+
+and
+
+MAJOR OLIVER SCHOONMAKER, 76th DIVISION
+Assistant Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training
+Regiment, Plattsburg, N.Y.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ TO
+ COLONEL WOLF
+
+ Under whose careful supervision so many have
+ received their Military Training in order that
+ they may show the world in battle the true spirit
+ of American manhood.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Acknowledgment.
+
+
+To have prepared this book within the time allotted to it, without the
+assistance of Candidates ALCOTT FARRAR ELWELL and LYLE MILTON PROUSE
+would have been impossible, and grateful recognition is made of their
+services. Not only much of the manual labor, but the preparation of
+entire chapters, has been in their hands.
+
+Candidates CHARLES HUNTINGTON JACOBS and MICHAEL FRANCIS MCALEER have
+rendered very valuable assistance and we wish to thank the following
+candidates for the loan of materials used elsewhere, for typewriting
+and other work:
+
+ GLENN MACK AINSWORTH.
+ PHILIP M. BROWN.
+ NELSON P. BUMP.
+ EDWIN G. BURROWS.
+ PHILIP DOREMUS.
+ WALTER LANE HARDENBROOK.
+ ALBERT BLANCHARD KELLOGG.
+ HENRY PRATT MCKEAN.
+ LOREN RAY PIERCE.
+ HARRY RAPHAEL SAFTEL.
+ ROLAND EMERY PACKARD.
+ HOYT SHERMAN.
+
+
+
+
+
+Introduction.
+
+
+The officer of to-day has big problems to face at short notice. His
+training has necessarily been so intensive that he cannot absorb a
+large amount of it. He has little time to make out schedules or even
+to look over the hasty notes he may have made during his training
+period, yet he finds himself facing problems which force him to
+immediate action.
+
+This book so condenses and systematizes general military instruction
+and the work done at Plattsburg so that it may be easily utilized in
+training other troops. No broad claim for originality is made except
+in the arrangement of all available material; the bibliography makes
+acknowledgment to all texts so utilized. Besides bringing helpful
+reminders to new officers regarding the elements of modern warfare,
+much of the material will be found of radical importance, as it is
+practically new and never before condensed. Since under the new army
+organization the platoon leader virtually has assumed the roll of a
+captain of a company, it is not enough for him to know simply his own
+part; he must be ready with all the information that his
+non-commissioned officers and men should know, and more important
+still, he must know how to teach them. Having little or no time to
+work over and digest for himself this mass of new material pouring in
+upon him, the officer may find in this book, material condensed and
+already arranged.
+
+It is hoped that this work will serve to recall to many officers,
+valuable points of military training which would otherwise be lost,
+to them in the mass of notes never looked at since the day they were
+made. More than this, every reader will find help in planning his
+work, saving thereby precious hours already too full of necessary
+duties, and will find fresh material for progress in the game of war.
+
+It is the purpose of this book to help men who are in the service of
+the United States, and through them to share in bringing victory.
+
+
+
+
+Table of Contents.
+
+ PAGE.
+
+Chapter 1. SCHEDULES 1
+
+Chapter 2. INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS 31
+
+Chapter 3. PHYSICAL TRAINING 91
+ VOICE CULTURE.
+
+Chapter 4. USE OF MODERN ARMS 105
+ 1. S.A.F.M.
+ 2. Range Practice.
+ 3. Pistol.
+ 4. Bayonet.
+ 5. Machine Guns.
+ 6. Grenade Instruction.
+
+Chapter 5. MAP SKETCHING 143
+
+Chapter 6. ARTICLES OF WAR. (Courts-Martial.) 161
+
+Chapter 7. ARMY REGULATIONS 175
+
+Chapter 8. PRACTICE MARCHES 187
+ FIELD WORK.
+
+Chapter 9. FEEDING MEN 213
+ CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION.
+
+Chapter 10. PERSONAL HYGIENE 221
+ FIRST AID.
+
+Chapter 11. SIGNALING 229
+
+Chapter 12. GUARD DUTY 237
+
+Chapter 13. COMPANY ADMINISTRATION 245
+
+Chapter 14. CONFERENCES 259
+ Study.
+ Small Problems in Infantry.
+ Examinations.
+
+Chapter 15. TRENCH WARFARE 287
+ 1. General Principles.
+ 2. Siting Trenches.
+ 3. Construction.
+ 4. Occupation.
+
+CONCLUSION 396
+
+BIBLIOGRAPHY 397
+
+CHAPTER INDEX 403
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 1.
+
+Schedules.
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., August 27 to September 1, 1917_
+
+ Organization. | | |
+Issue of Equipment. | | Drill |
+ Organization of | Drill | Physical |
+ Barracks | I.D.R. | M.P.T. |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | | |
+Monday, Aug. 27 | | |
+7.00-12.00 a.m. | | |
+1.30-4.30 p.m. | | |
+ | | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+Tuesday, Aug. 28 | Without arms | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | pgs. 1-30 |
+ | pars 48-73 | |
+ | --------------- | |
+ | 8.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | With arms | |
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | |
+ | pars 48-100 | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+Wednesday, Aug. 29 | --------------- | pgs. 1-33 |
+ | 8.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | par. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | par. 48-100 | pgs. 1-36 |
+ | | |
+Thursday, Aug. 30 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+ | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | par. 48-100 | pgs. 1-39 |
+ | | |
+Friday, Aug. 31 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+ | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|====================================|
+Saturday, Sept. 1. | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+====================|=====================================
+
+ | | |
+ | Musketry | |
+ Practice | Training | |
+ March | S.A.F.M. | Study | Conferences
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+ | | par. 1-21 |
+ | | par. 48-73- |
+ | | 101-132 |
+ | | I.D.R. |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | 1.30-3.30 p.m. |
+ | | par. 1-21 |
+ | | S.A.F.M. | 2.30-4.30 p.m.
+ | | | Care of arms and
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | equipment
+ | | par. 74-100 |
+ | | I.D.R. |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | 2.30-3.30 p.m. |
+ | | par. 1-31 |
+Without arms | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | S.A.F.M. | 3.30-4.30 p.m.
+10.45-11.45 a.m. | par. 1-21 | -------------- | Assembling and
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | adjusting pack
+ | | par. 159-198 |
+ | | I.D.R. |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+10.45-11.45 a.m. | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | 2.30-4.30 p.m.
+With arms | par. 1-31 | par. 159-198 | Assembling and
+ | | I.D.R. | adjusting pack
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | |
+ | | |
+With arms and | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | 3.30-4.30 p.m.
+light pack | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 199-257- | Military
+10.45-11.45 a.m. | par. 1-31 | 758-765 | Courtesy
+ | | I.D.R. |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=================|================|================|==================
+
+======================================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917_
+
+ | | Drill |
+ | Drill | Physical |
+ | I.D.R. | M.P.T. |
+===================|================|===================|
+Monday, Sept. 3 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-42 |
+ | 159-193 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Tuesday, Sept. 4 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 48-100 | pgs. 1-45 |
+ | 158-198 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Wednesday, Sept. 5 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-48 |
+ | 158-198 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Thursday, Sept. 6 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.30 p.m. |
+ | pars. 48-100 | pgs. 1-52 |
+ | 159-198 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Friday, Sept. 7 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-55 |
+ | 159-198 | |
+===================|====================================|
+Saturday, Sept. 8 | As prescribed by Senior Instructor.
+===================|=====================================
+
+Musketry | | Companies
+Training | Semaphore | Practice March
+S.A.F.M. | Signalling | Full Kit
+=================|==================|=================
+8.45-9.45 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.45 a.m. |
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+10.00-11.00 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | 8.45-9.45 a.m.
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+8.45-9.45 p.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.15 a.m. |
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+10.30-11.30 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | | 8.45-10.15 a.m.
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+8.45-9.45 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.15 a.m. |
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+
+======================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Grenade Instruction [A] | Bayonet Drill |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lesson 1 |
+Monday, Sept. 3 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 2 |
+Tuesday, Sept. 4 | 11.30-12.00 m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 3 |
+Wednesday, Sept. 5 | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+ | | |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 4 |
+Thursday, Sept. 6 | 11.30-12.00 m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 5 |
+Friday, Sept. 7 | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+Saturday, Sept. 8 | As prescribed by Senior Instructor.
+===================|=============================================
+
+Voice Culture | Conferences | Study
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | pars. 1-158 I.D.R
+11.30-12.00 m. | par. 1-100 I.D.R. | pgs. 7-46
+ | pgs. 7-46 M.G.D. | M.G.D.
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 159-174 I.D.R.
+ | pars. 101-158 I.D.R. | pgs. 47-88
+ | pgs. 7-88 M.G.D. | M.G.D.
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | Physical Exam. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 175-198 I.D.R.
+11.00-12.00 m. | pars. 159-174 | part III--U.S.
+ | part 5, 6, 10, 19 | Signal Book
+ | U.S.S.B. |
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 792-798 I.D.R.
+ | pars. 175-198, 1-61 | par. 1-61
+ | S.A.F.M. | S.A.F.M.
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+11.00-12.00 m. | pars. 792-798 I.D.R. | par. 199-220 1-61
+ | 1-61 S.A.F.M. | S.A.F.M.
+ | |
+===================|=========================|====================
+
+==================================================================
+
+[Footnote A: As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917_
+
+ | | |
+ | Drill | Musketry Training |
+ | I.D.R. | S.A.F.M. |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | 7.00-7.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 133-150 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. |
+ | ------------------ | pars. 35-43 |
+Monday, Sept. 10 | 7.30-8.00 a.m. | Sight setting |
+ | pars. 123-127 | and loadings |
+ | ------------------ | |
+ | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | | 9.30-10.30 a.m. |
+ | | pars. 35-51 |
+Tuesday, Sept. 11 | Same as for Monday | Sight setting |
+ | | and loadings |
+====================|====================|===================|
+Wednesday, Sept. 12 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 p.m. |
+ | pars. 199-211 | pars. 35-57 |
+ | ------------------ | Sight setting |
+ | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | and loadings |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | |
+Thursday, Sept. 13 | pars. 199-224 | 10.00-11.00 a.m. |
+ | ------------------ | pars. 35-60 |
+ | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | Sight setting |
+ | pars. 159-198 | and loadings |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 a.m. |
+Friday, Sept. 14 | pars. 159-224 | pars. 35-61 |
+ | | Sight setting |
+ | | and loadings |
+====================|====================|===================|
+Saturday, Sept. 15 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+==============================================================
+
+First Aid Manual, | Signaling |
+N.C.O's and | Morse Code | Practice March
+Privates | (wig wag) | Full Kit
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+ | |
+9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+Wounds | 10.30-11.00 a.m. |
+pgs. 286-288 | |
+ | |
+ | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+ | |
+ | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 a.m.
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+Fractures | 10.30-11.00 a.m. |
+pgs. 288-290 | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+ | |
+ | | 8.30-10.00 a.m.
+ | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+9.30-10.00 a.m. | |
+Resuscitation | 10.00-11.00 a.m. |
+pgs. 290-296 | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+
+============================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Grenade Instruction | Drill, Physical |
+ | [B] | M.P.T. |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Monday, Sept. 10 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-58 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Tuesday, Sept. 11 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-61 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+Wednesday, Sept. 12 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | | pgs. 1-64 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Thursday, Sept. 13 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-67 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Friday, Sept. 14 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-70 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=======================================|
+Saturday, Sept. 15 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+==============================================================
+
+Bayonet Drill | Conference | Study
+ | |
+===============|======================|============================
+ | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | Mon. | 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | pars. 123-127, | | pars. 123-127,
+ | 199-223 I.D.R. | | 199-223 I.D.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | -------------------- | | ------------------
+ | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M. | | pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M.
+===============|======================| |=====================
+ | | | 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | | pars. 225-248 I.D.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | pars. 225-248 I.D.R. | | --------------------
+ | pgs. 5-11 | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | Notes on | | pgs. 5-11
+ | Bayonet Training | | Notes on
+ | | | Bayonet Training
+===============|======================|======|=====================
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | Tues.| 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | pars. 249-257 I.D.R. | | pars. 249-257 I.D.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 12-19 | | pgs. 12-19
+ | Notes on | | Notes on
+ | Bayonet Training | | Bayonet Training
+===============|======================|======|=====================
+ | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | Wed. | 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | Patrolling, messages,| | Patrolling, messages,
+ | orders, etc. | | orders, etc.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 12-24 F.S.R. | | pgs. 12-24 F.S.R.
+ | -------------------- | | --------------------
+ | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | Notes on | | Notes on
+ | Grenade Warfare | | Grenade Warfare
+===============|======================|======|=====================
+ | 1.30-2.30 p.m. |Thurs.| 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | Advance and | | Advance and
+ | Rear Guards | | Rear Guards
+ | pgs. 25-34 F.S.R. | | pgs. 25-24 F.S.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | -------------------- | | --------------------
+ | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | Training & | | Training &
+ | Employment of | | Employment of
+ | Bombers | | Bombers
+===================================================================
+
+===================================================================
+
+[Footnote B: As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 17 to September 22, 1917_
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Musketry Training |
+ | | S.A.F.M. |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+Monday, Sept. 17 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 |
+ | close order only | |
+ | | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+Tuesday, Sept. 18 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 |
+ | close order only | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+Wednesday, Sept. 19 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 |
+ | close order only | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+Thursday, Sept. 20 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-70 |
+ | close order only | |
+ | | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+Friday, Sept. 21 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-70 |
+ | close order only | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+Saturday, Sept. 22 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+============================================================
+
+Drill, Physical | Sketching | Study
+M.P.T. | [C] |
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-73, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 20-34
+ | | Notes on Bayonet
+ | | Training
+ | | pars. 232-257, I.D.R.
+ | | pars. 258-276, I.D.R.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-76, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | Outposts
+ | | pgs. 35-42, F.S.R.
+ | | pars. 277-289, I.D.R.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-79, 133-184 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | Orders
+ | | pgs. 43-50, F.S.R.
+ | | pars. 290-326, I.D.R.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-82, 133-132 | 1.30-4:30 p.m. | Marches
+ | | pgs. 51-65, F.S.R.
+ | | pars. 1-9, 14-18,
+ | | E.F.M.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11:30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-85, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | pars. 37-42, 61-72,
+ | | 101-109, E.F.M.
+============================================================
+
+============================================================
+
+[Footnote C: As prescribed by Senior Instructor in Sketching.]
+
+_September 24-29, 1917_. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES.
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917._
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical |
+ | | M.P.T. |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Monday, Oct. 1 | 1/2 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pgs. 86-89 and 142 |
+ | | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Tuesday, Oct. 2 | Company | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 90-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 48-198 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Wednesday, Oct. 3 | Battalion | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 90-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Thursday. Oct. 4 | Battalion | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 17-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Friday, Oct. 5 | Battalion | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 17-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=======================================|
+Saturday, Oct. 6 |As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+===========================================================
+
+Bayonet | Range Practice | Signalling
+ [D] | [E] |
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1 hour
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | Semaphore and
+ | | Wigwag
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1 hour
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | Semaphore and
+ | | Wigwag
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+===============================================
+
+===============================================
+
+
+[Footnote D: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote E: Per schedule Senior Instructor Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | Pistol |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Monday, Oct. 1 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Patrolling | Nomenclature |
+ | | 1/2 hour |
+ | | Manual |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Tuesday, Oct. 2 | | Same as for Monday |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Wednesday, Oct. 3 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Patrolling | Manual |
+ | | 1/2 hour |
+ | | Position and Aiming |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Thursday, Oct. 4 | | Same as for Wednesday |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Friday, Oct. 5 | 1 hour | Same as for Wednesday |
+ | Patrolling | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Saturday, Oct. 6 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+==================|=======================================
+
+Conference | Study |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 258-274, I.D.R. | pars. 263-285, I.D.R. |
+Prob. 1 to Situation 3. | Problem 1, S.P.I. |
+S.P.I. | |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 275-285, I.D.R. | pars. 286-304, I.D.R. |
+Situation 3, Prob. 1, to | Problem 2, S.P.I. |
+end of Problem, S.P.I. | |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 286-304, I.D.R. | pars. 305-326, I.D.R. |
+Problem 2, S.P.I. | Problem 3 to Situation 4 |
+ | S.P.I. |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 305-326, I.D.R. | pars. 327-349, I.D.R. |
+Prob. 3 to Situation 4, | Situation 4, Problem 3 to |
+S.P.I. | end of Problem, S.P.I. |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 327-349, I.D.R. | Per later |
+Situation 4, Prob. 3, to | announcement |
+end of Problem, S.P.I. | |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+
+==============================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917_.
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical Drill |
+ | | M.P.T. |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Monday, October 8 | 1 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Tuesday, October 9 | 1 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Wednesday, October 10 | 1/2 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Thursday, October 11 | 1 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Friday, October 12 | | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Saturday, October 13 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+=============================================================
+
+ Bayonet | Range Practice | Signaling
+ [F] | [G] |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | 1/2 hour
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+=========================================
+
+=========================================
+
+[Footnote F: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote G: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | |
+ | (Company) [H] | Conferences |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Monday, October 8 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Prob. 4 to Situation 5 |
+ | | exclusive, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 596-622, I.D.R. |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Tuesday, October 9 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Situation 5, Prob. 4 to |
+ | | end of Problem, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 623-660, I.D.R. |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Wednesday, October 10 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 5, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 661-677, I.D.R. |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Thursday, October 11 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 6, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 678-707, I.D.R. |
+ | | |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Friday, October 12 | 7.00-11.30 a.m. | |
+ | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | |
+ | Advance and rear | |
+ | guards, outposts, | |
+ | patroling, messages | |
+ | and orders | |
+======================|===============================================|
+Saturday, October 13 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+======================|================================================
+
+ | |
+Study | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 4, S.P.I | |
+pars. 596-660, I.D.R. | |
+ | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 5, S.P.I. | |
+pars. 661-677, I.D.R. | |
+ | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 6, S.P.I. | |
+pars. 678-707, I.D.R. | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 7 to | |
+Situation 5, exclusive | |
+pars. 350-370, I.D.R. | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+ | |
+ | |
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+as per later | |
+announcement | |
+ | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+
+=======================|=======|=======
+
+[Footnote H: To include conferences and critique on the ground of
+exercise conducted.]
+
+_October 15-17, 1917_. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES.
+_October 18-19, 1917_. OCCUPATION OF THE TRENCHES FROM 8.00 A.M.
+_October 18, 1917_ TO 8.00 A.M. _October 19, 1917._
+_October 20, 1917_. 7.30 A.M.-11 A.M. CONFERENCE OF TRENCH OCCUPATION,
+11 A.M. INSPECTION.
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917_
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical Drill |
+ | | M.P.T. |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Monday, October 22 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Tuesday, October 23 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Wednesday, October 24 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Thursday, October 25 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Friday, October 26 | | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Saturday, October 27 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+=============================================================
+
+ Bayonet | Range Practice | Signaling
+ [I] | [J] |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1/2 hour
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+
+============================================
+
+[Footnote I: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote J: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | |
+ | [K] | Conferences |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Monday, October 22 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 350-370, I.D.R. |
+ | | Review Problems 1-6 |
+ | | S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Tuesday, October 23 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 371-401, I.D.R |
+ | | Prob. 7 to Situation 5 |
+ | | S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Wednesday, October 24 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 402-442, I.D.R. |
+ | | Situation 6, Prob. 7 |
+ | | to end of prob. |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Thursday, October 25 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 442-494, I.D.R. |
+ | | Problem 8, S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Friday, October 26 | | 7.00-11.30 a.m. |
+ | | 1.30-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Companies in attack |
+ | | and defense (to include |
+ | | siting of trenches) |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Saturday, October 27 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+======================|========================================
+
+ | |
+Study | |
+========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 371-401, I.D.R. | |
+Prob. 7 to Situation 5, | |
+S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 402-441, I.D.R. | |
+Situation 6, Prob. 7 to | |
+end of Prob. S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 442-494, I.D.R. | |
+Prob. 8, S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 495-536, I.D.R. | |
+Problem 9, S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+as per later | |
+announcement | |
+ | |
+ | |
+========================|========|========
+
+========================|========|========
+
+[Footnote K: To include conferences and critique on the ground of
+exercise conducted.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917_
+
+ | Drill | Physical Drill |
+ | | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Monday, October 29 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Tuesday, October 30 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Wednesday, October 31 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Thursday, November 1 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Friday, November 2 | | |
+=======================|==================|===================
+Saturday, November 3 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+=======================|======================================
+
+ Bayonet | Signaling | Range Practice
+ [L] | [M] |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | 1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+
+============================================
+
+[Footnote L: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote M: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | Conferences |
+ | [N] | |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Monday, October 29 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 495-536, I.D.R. |
+ | | Problem 9, S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Tuesday, October 30 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 10, S.P.I. |
+ | | Battle Fire Training |
+ | | (lesson scheduled |
+ | | later) |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Wednesday, October 31 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 11, S.P.I. |
+ | | Battle Fire Training |
+ | | (lesson scheduled |
+ | | later) |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Thursday, November 1 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 12, S.P.I. |
+ | | Battle Fire Training |
+ | | (lesson scheduled |
+ | | later) |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Friday, November 2 | Battalions in attack | |
+ | and defense | |
+ | (Field Kit) | |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Saturday, November 3 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+======================|===============================================
+
+ | |
+Study | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 10, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 11, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 12, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 13, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+as per later | |
+announcement[O] | |
+=========================|========|=========
+
+=========================|========|=========
+
+[Footnote N: To include conferences and critique on the ground of
+exercise conducted.]
+
+[Footnote O: During the week each Battalion will be given 1/2 day's
+instruction in camouflage under direction Senior Engineer Instructor.]
+
+
+SCHEDULES.
+
+_November 5th-9th, 1917._
+
+ Infantry Drill Regulations, 2 hours.
+ March in full kit, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Signaling, 1/2 hour.
+ Physical drill, 2-1/2 hours,
+ Bayonet, 2-1/2 hours,
+ Machine gun instruction, 7-1/2 hours.
+ Field fortification, 10 hours.
+ Conferences, 10 hours.
+ Study, 10 hours.
+In the study and conferences the following will be taken up:
+ Manual of Courts-Martial--pp. 305 to end.
+ First Aid.
+ Personal Hygiene.
+ Camp Sanitation.
+
+_November 12th-17th, 1917._
+
+ Physical, drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Bayonet drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Battalion ceremonies, 1-1/2 hours.
+ Battalion march, full kit, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Field fortification and trench warfare, 23 hours.
+ Study and conferences, 10 hours.
+In the study and conference's the following will be taken up:
+ Trench Warfare.
+ Grenades
+ Gas Attack and Defense.
+ Communication.
+
+_November 19th-23rd, 1917._
+
+Physical, drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+Bayonet drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+Infantry Drill Regulations, 2-1/2 hours.
+Company administration and Army regulations, 40 hours.
+Ceremonies, parades and reviews, 5 hours.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 2.
+
+Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+
+The greatest lesson of the present war is that the keynote of success
+is discipline. In trenches the direct control of the men is even less
+than in extended order in open warfare, and only thoroughly
+disciplined troops with a trusted leader can hope to succeed.
+
+The successful officer will show anger or irritation only in rare
+cases, and then by design: he will know his men individually and be as
+considerate of them as possible, ready to do himself what he asks to
+have done; just in administering punishments; clear in giving his
+commands and insistent that they be carried out promptly; he will
+learn from drilling his men the quickest way a desired result can be
+accomplished, and to give the necessary commands in the most effective
+manner.
+
+He will read his Infantry Drill Regulations through each month and
+will always find something that he never knew or has forgotten. He
+will always consult it before going to drill. In explaining movements
+he will use blackboard diagrams in conferences. On the field he will
+take the fewest possible men and have movement executed by the numbers
+properly before the other men. Then have all the men go through the
+movement a number of times.
+
+The object of each exercise or drill should be explained to the men
+whenever possible.
+
+"Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training."
+
+
+School of the Soldier.
+
+INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.
+
+The object of the facings and marchings is to give the soldier
+complete control of his body in drills so that he can move easily and
+promptly at any command.
+
+Attention.
+
+POSITION OF ATTENTION.--This is the position a soldier assumes when in
+ranks or whenever the command _attention_ is given.
+
+In the training of anyone nothing equals the importance of a proper
+posture; it is the very foundation upon which the entire fabric of any
+successful training must be founded.
+
+Instructors must persist in the development of this position until the
+men assume it from habit.
+
+At the command, 1. Company (Squad, etc.), 2. Attention, the following
+position is assumed:
+
+ 1. HEELS TOGETHER AND ON A LINE.--If the heels are not on a line,
+the hips and sometimes even the shoulders, are thrown out of line.
+ 2. FEET TURNED OUT EQUALLY, FORMING AN ANGLE OF 45 DEGREES.--If the
+feet are not turned out equally, the result will be the same as above.
+ 3. KNEES EXTENDED WITHOUT STIFFNESS.--Muscles should be contracted
+just enough to keep the knees straight. If locked, men tire easily and
+faint if at attention a long time.
+ 4. THE TRUNK ERECT UPON THE HIPS, the spine extended throughout its
+entire length; the buttocks well forward.
+ The position of the trunk, spine and buttocks is most essential. In
+extending the spine the men must feel that the trunk is being
+_stretched up_ from the waist until the back is as straight as it can
+be made.
+ In stretching the spine the _chest_ should be _arched_ and raised,
+_without_, however, _raising the shoulders or interfering with natural
+respiration_.
+ 5. SHOULDERS FALLING NATURALLY and moved back until they are square.
+ Being square, means having the shoulder ridge and the point of the
+shoulder at right angles to a general anterior-posterior plane running
+through the body. They should never be forced back of this plane, but
+out rather in line with it.
+ 6. ARMS HANGING NATURALLY, thumbs against the seams of the trousers,
+fingers extended, and back of hand turned out.
+ The arms must not be forcibly extended nor held rigidly; if they are,
+a compensating faulty curve will occur in the lumbar region.
+ 7. HEAD ERECT, CHIN RAISED until neck is vertical, eyes fixed upon
+some object at their own height.
+ Every tendency to draw the chin in must be counteracted.
+ 8. When this position is correctly assumed, the men will be taught to
+_incline the body forward_ until the weight rests chiefly upon the
+balls of the feet, heels resting lightly upon the ground.
+ When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of the head
+should pass in front of the ear, shoulder and thighs, and find its
+base at the balls of the feet.
+ Every tendency toward rigidity _must be avoided_; all muscles are
+contracted only enough to maintain this position, which is one of
+co-ordination, of _physical and mental alertness_, that makes for
+mobility, activity and grace. A man who faints standing at attention
+has not taken the proper position.
+
+
+Rests.
+
+POSITION OF REST AND AT EASE.--When men are standing _at rest_ or _at
+ease_ they must be cautioned to avoid assuming any position that will
+nullify the object of the position of Attention. Standing on one leg,
+folding arms, allowing shoulders or head to droop forward, must be
+discountenanced persistently until the men form the habit of resting
+with feet separated but on the same line, hands elapsed behind the
+back,--head, shoulders and trunk erect, (m.p.t., pp. 21 and 22.)
+
+ FALL OUT.--Leave ranks.
+ REST.--One foot in place. Can talk.
+ AT EASE.--One foot in place. Silence.
+ PARADE REST.--Do not slouch down on right foot. Keep chest well up.
+ EYES RIGHT, 2. FRONT.--Have it snappy.
+ RIGHT FACE.--To face _in marching_ and advance, turn on the ball of
+either foot and step off with the other foot in the new line of
+direction. (Do not confuse with the ordinary command, "Right Face.")
+ RIGHT HALF FACE.--45 degrees, used to show position in Right Oblique.
+ ABOUT FACE.--Have weight well back. Not necessary to move right foot
+after turn is made.
+ HAND SALUTE.--Manner of rendering is index to manner in which all
+other duties are performed.
+ FORWARD MARCH.--Shift weight to right foot, _mentally_.
+ DOUBLE TIME, MARCH.--Tendency to go too fast. Time it. 30 steps in 10
+seconds. Take one step quick time, then take up double time.
+ MARK TIME, MARCH.--Given as either foot strikes the ground. To resume
+full step, _Forward, March._
+ HALF STEP, MARCH.--All steps and marchings executed from a halt,
+except Right Step, begin with left foot.
+ RIGHT STEP, MARCH. BACKWARD, MARCH.--Executed in quick time only and
+at trail, without command. 15 inch Step.
+ SQUAD, HALT.--Given as either foot strikes the ground.
+ BY THE RIGHT FLANK, MARCH.--Step off with right foot.
+ TO THE REAR, MARCH.--Given as right foot strikes the ground. If
+marching in double time, turn to the rightabout taking 4 steps, in
+place, in cadence, and step off with left foot.
+ CHANGE STEP, MARCH.--Being in march; given as either foot strikes the
+ground.
+
+
+Manual of Arms.
+
+PURPOSE.--To make the man so accustomed to the rifle that he handles
+it without a thought.
+
+Eight rules govern the carrying of the piece. See paragraph 75,
+Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+Six rules govern the execution of the manual. See paragraph 76,
+Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+
+Commands and Cautions.
+
+ORDER, ARMS.--See that all the fingers of the right hand are around
+the piece.
+
+PRESENT, ARMS.--Left forearm horizontal and against the body.
+
+PORT, ARMS.--Right forearm horizontal. Left forearm against the body.
+
+RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.--Insist on an angle of 45 degrees. Trigger guard
+in hollow of shoulder. Right hand does the work.
+
+LEFT SHOULDER, ARMS.--Right hand in next to last position grasps small
+of stock.
+
+PARADE, REST.--Left hand grasps piece just below stacking swivel.
+Right foot straight back 6 inches.
+
+TRAIL, ARMS.--Piece at angle of about 30 degrees, about 3 inches off
+the ground.
+
+RIFLE SALUTE.--Left forearm horizontal.
+
+FIX BAYONET.--Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is fixed.
+
+UNFIX BAYONET.--Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is unfixed.
+
+INSPECTION ARMS.--Be sure men glance down in chamber and keep hold of
+bolt handle.
+
+Parade, Rest can be executed only from order arms, and the command
+Attention follows Parade, Rest.
+
+Any movement not in the manual, _e.g._, Right, Face, breaks the
+execution of movements by the numbers. The number of counts in the
+execution of each command must be remembered.
+
+Distinguish between _raise_ and _carry_ and _throw_.
+
+
+School of the Squad.
+
+OBJECT.--To give basic element, the squad, its first lesson in team
+work.
+
+Team work wins battles just as it does football games.
+
+Avoid keeping men too long at the same movement.
+
+COMPOSITION OF SQUAD.--7 men and a corporal. Never less than 6 nor
+more than 11 men.
+
+FALL IN.--Instructor 3 paces in front of where center is to be.
+
+FALL OUT.--If under arms, always preceded by Inspection Arms. Does not
+mean dismissed.
+
+COUNT OFF.--Right file front and rear do not execute eyes right. Front
+and rear rank men count off together.
+
+INSPECTION ARMS.--
+RIGHT DRESS, FRONT:
+
+ (1) Company Commander must establish base file or files before
+ giving the command Right Dress.
+ (2) Right flank men remain facing to front.
+ (3) Be sure first four men are on desired line and rest of
+ company can easily be made to conform.
+ (4) Right guide may be established at any point desired and at
+ command Right Dress all march to their proper positions
+ without other command, and at the trail.
+ (5) Have men beyond base files step forward until one pace
+ beyond where new line is to be and then dress back on line
+ established.
+
+GUIDE RIGHT.--Keep head and eyes off the ground. Close in or open out
+gradually.
+
+TAKE INTERVAL, TO THE RIGHT, MARCH, SQUAD, HALT.--(At command "To the
+Right") Rear rank falls back 60 inches. At March, all face to right
+and leading man of each rank steps off, followed by the others at
+four-pace intervals, rear-rank men marching abreast of their file
+leaders. When halted all face to the front.
+
+To REFORM, ASSEMBLE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.
+
+TAKE DISTANCE, MARCH.--1-2-3-4 front rank, 1-2-3-4 rear rank, 4-pace
+intervals. Guide in each four is right.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--No. 1, Front rank stands fast.
+
+STACK ARMS.--Piece of even number front rank: butt between his feet,
+barrel to front. Even number rear rank passes piece to file leader.
+
+TAKE ARMS.--Loose pieces are returned by even numbers front rank. If
+No. 2 of rear rank is absent, No. 1 rear rank takes his place in
+making or breaking stacks and resumes his post. Pieces are never
+stacked with bayonet fixed.
+
+OBLIQUE, MARCH.--Taught from Right half face. Half faced to front
+after obliquing, Forward, March. If at half step or mark time while
+obliquing, Oblique, March.
+
+IN PLACE, HALT.--All halt and stand fast without changing position of
+pieces.
+
+RESUME MARCH.--Only given after In place, Halt.
+
+RIGHT TURN.--Turn on moving pivot is used by subdivisions of a column
+in executing change of direction.
+
+Each rank successively and on same ground executes movement. All
+except pivot man execute two right obliques. No marking time. Arriving
+on new line, all take the half step, glance toward marching flank and
+take full step without command as last man arrives on the line.
+
+RIGHT HALF TURN.--Executed in similar manner.
+
+SQUADS RIGHT.--Turn on fixed pivot is used in all formations from line
+into column and the reverse. No half step. Right flank man faces to
+right in marching and marks time. Rest of front rank oblique once to
+new position. Step off on 5th step.
+
+SQUAD RIGHT ABOUT.--Front rank twice executes squads right.
+
+In rear rank, No. 3 with No. 4 abreast of him on his left and followed
+in column by the second and first moves straight forward until on
+prolongation of new line he is to occupy; faces to right in marching
+and proceeds to place. Then all face to the right in marching, mark
+time and glance toward marching flank. As last man arrives on new line
+all step off without command on 9th step.
+
+Deploying as skirmishers and following the corporal are covered under
+Company Extended Order.
+
+
+School of the Company.
+
+The company is the basic fighting and administrative unit, and must be
+easily handled and capable of promptly carrying out the will of its
+commander.
+
+Team work among the squads, so that the company can be easily managed
+as a whole, is the purpose of company drill.
+
+Close order drill is for discipline.
+
+Numerical designations of squads or platoons do not change.
+
+Center squad is middle or right middle squad of the company.
+
+ 8 (6-11) men = 1 squad.
+ 7 (2-7) squads = 1 platoon.
+ 4 platoons = 1 company (250 men, 6 officers).
+ 4 (2-6) companies = 1 battalion (1,026 officers and men).
+ 3 battalions = 1 regiment (3,755, including medical detachment).
+ 2 regiments = 1 brigade (8,210 officers and men).
+ 2 brigades = 1 division (27,152 officers and men).
+
+First Sergeant when not commanding a platoon is opposite the 3rd file
+from outer flank of first platoon, in line of file closers.
+
+FALL IN.--First Sergeant 6 paces front of center, facing company.
+Right guide takes post at such point that the center will be 6 paces
+from and opposite the First Sergeant.
+
+Squad leaders salute and report all present; or Private(s) ----
+absent. First Sergeant does not return salute of squad leaders.
+
+Captain takes post 12 paces in front of center of company in time to
+receive report of First Sergeant, "Sir, all present or accounted for,"
+or names of unauthorized absentees. E.G. A man in hospital might be
+reported absent by squad leader if he did not know where he was, but
+First Sergeant would know, and would not report him absent.
+
+Captain returns salute of First Sergeant who then takes his post
+_without command_.
+
+
+PLATOON MOVEMENTS IN PLATOON COLUMN.
+
+_Leading Platoon, C.O._
+
+On Right into Line ... Right Turn.
+Column Right ... Right Turn.
+Right Front into Line ... Continue. (Caution) If halted, Forward.
+
+
+_Rear Platoon, C.O._
+
+On Right into Line ... Continue. (caution) If halted, Forward.
+Column Right ... Continue. (caution) If halted, Forward.
+Right Front into Line ... Right Oblique
+
+
+QUESTIONS WHICH COME UP IN DAILY MILITARY LIFE.
+
+It is well to have a solution on hand.
+
+(1) The company is in line reversed,--16th squad where 1st squad
+should be. Bring the company into proper line, 1-2-3-4; 5-6-7-8;
+9-10-11-12; 13-14-15-16.
+
+(2) You are platoon leader. Your platoon is drilling separately and
+you get assembled in company line.
+
+16-15-14-13; 12-11-10-9; 4-3-2-1; 5-6-7-8.
+
+What commands do you give to get the platoon into line properly
+arranged?
+
+(3) You are in charge of the company and find yourself marching into
+the company street in reverse order. What commands do you give to
+correct this?
+
+(4) You are marching your company to the rear along a road through a
+narrow cut. Suddenly around a bend comes an ambulance. To let it pass,
+you must immediately reduce your marching front. What is the quickest
+method? (This can be used also in arranging the advance party of the
+outguard.)
+
+(5) You are marching your company in company front, and wish to march
+in column of platoons. What do you command?
+
+ANSWERS.
+
+ (1) Right (left) by squads.
+ Column left (right).
+ Squads right (left)
+ Company, Halt.
+ (2) Forward; 2 March.
+ On left into line; 2 Platoon; 3 Halt.
+ (3) On right (left) into line.
+ (4) 1 Squads right; 2 March.
+ 2 By the left flank; 2 March.
+ (5) 1 Right by squads; 2 March.
+ 2 Platoons left front into line; Double time;
+ 2 March.
+
+On the O.D. Shirt Collar Insignia is worn as follows:
+
+"On the right side, in the middle of the collar, the letters (U.S.),
+(U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.), and the insignia of rank; the letters one inch
+from the end of the collar and the insignia of rank one-half inch from
+letters."
+
+"On the left side in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the
+end, the insignia of the arm of the service."
+
+
+_For Second Lieutenants._
+
+On the right side, in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the
+end, the letters (U.S.), (U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.).
+
+On the left side, in the middle of the collar and one inch from the
+end, the insignia of the arm of service.
+
+When the Star Spangled Banner is played, an officer in uniform if
+uncovered stands at Attention. If covered he salutes. An officer
+"Presents his compliments" only to his juniors.
+
+1. COMPANY RIGHT, MARCH; COMPANY, Halt; Forward March.
+ Being in line to turn. Right-flank man is pivot. Right guide steps
+back at command March, and marks time.
+
+2. PLATOONS RIGHT, MARCH; Company, Halt; Forward March.
+ Line to Column Platoons, reverse.
+ Guides must be covering.
+
+3. SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH; Company, Halt.
+ Line to Column Squads, reverse.
+ Line of Platoon to Column Platoons, reverse.
+
+4. RIGHT TURN, MARCH; Forward, March.
+ Line to change direction. Right guide is pivot. Men do not glance
+toward flank. Rear rank begins oblique on same ground as front rank.
+ All take full step at command, Forward, March.
+
+5. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ First Platoon Leader, Right Turn.
+ Other Platoon Leaders (if halted), Forward; (if marching), cautions,
+continue the march. All Platoons execute right turn on same ground.
+ Column of Platoons to change direction.
+
+6. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Column Squads to change direction.
+
+7. PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Column Squads to Line of Platoons.
+
+8. SQUADS RIGHT, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Right by Squads, March.
+ Line to Column Squads and change direction.
+ Right guide posts himself and takes 4 short steps. Right Squad
+conforms.
+
+9. SQUADS RIGHT, PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Platoons right by Squads, March.
+ Line to line of Platoons. Guide same as in 8.
+
+10. SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH; Company, Halt.
+ To face or march to the rear.
+ _About Face_; Forward, March.
+ To the rear a few paces.
+
+11. ON RIGHT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front.
+ Column Platoons or Squads to line to side.
+ If executed in double time, leading squad marches double time until
+halted.
+
+12. RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front.
+ Column Platoons or Squads to line (front).
+ In double time, halting and aligning are omitted. Guide is toward side
+of first unit in line. If halted, leader of leading unit commands,
+Forward.
+
+13. PLATOONS, RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front.
+ Column Squads to Column Platoons.
+ Line of Platoons to Company line.
+
+14. ROUTE STEP, MARCH.
+ Muzzles kept elevated. Ranks cover, preserve distances. (If halted,
+at rest.)
+ At ease, March. Silence preserved. (Halted, at ease.)
+
+15. RIGHT BY TWOS, MARCH.
+ All but 2 right files of leading Squad execute in place, Halt.
+ RIGHT BY FILES, MARCH.
+ To diminish the front in Column Squads.
+
+16. SQUADS RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH.
+ Twos right front into line, march.
+ Twos or files, to Column Squads. Leading file or files halt.
+ N.B.--If right by twos, then left into line or reverse.
+
+DISMISS THE COMPANY.--First Sergeant places himself 3 paces to front.
+2 paces from nearest flank, salutes, faces toward opposite flank,
+commands, Inspection Arms, Port Arms, Dismissed.
+
+TO FALL IN COMPANY WHEN IT CANNOT BE FORMED BY SQUADS.--Inspection
+Arms.
+ Right Shoulder Arms.
+ Roll Call. Each man as name is called, executes Order Arms.
+
+FOR MUSTER, COMMANDS ARE: Open Ranks, MARCH, FRONT. (At command Open
+Ranks, Rear Rank drops back 4 steps, 5 counts.)
+ (As mustering officer approaches) Right Shoulder Arm's. Attention to
+Muster.
+ Each man, as name is called, answers "Here" and comes to Order Arms.
+ Company Commander is on right flank, in same place as "Prepare for
+Inspection."
+
+IN ALIGNING COMPANY.--Captain places himself 2 paces from and facing
+the flank toward which dress is made, verifies alignment and commands
+Front.
+ (Platoon leaders same position for Platoon alignment.)
+
+TO MARCH SQUAD WITHOUT UNNECESSARY COMMANDS.--The Corporal commands,
+_Follow Me_.
+ Men always at ease. Squad conform to pace of Corporal, and carry
+pieces as he does.
+ In line or skirmish line, No. 2 front rank follows in trace of
+Corporal at 3 paces. Others guide on No. 2.
+
+AS SKIRMISHERS, MARCH.--At run. Rear rank men on right of file
+leaders. All conform to Corporals gait. In squad alone, skirmish line
+is formed on No. 2, front rank, Corporal ahead when advancing, in rear
+when halted.
+ Regular interval in skirmish line 1/2 pace = 1 yard per man.
+ Squad deployed = 10 paces.
+ Any number of paces may be specified, _e.g._ As Skirmishers, at 10
+paces, March.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--Men form on corporal. If he continues to advance,
+move in double time, form and follow. Do not assemble while marching
+to rear.
+
+KNEEL.--Left forearm and left lower leg form straight line.
+
+LIE DOWN.--On both knees, then both elbows.
+
+RISE.--Stand on point marked by both knees.
+ (When deployed, may sit instead of kneel.)
+
+LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.--Loadings are executed only in line and skirmish
+line.
+ Firings are always executed at a halt.
+ When kneeling and lying down in double rank, rear rank does not
+load, aim or fire.
+ In both cease firing and suspend firing pieces are loaded and
+locked. (Sec. 150, i.d.r., April, 1917, is incorrect.)
+ 1. AIMING.--Target carefully pointed out.
+ 2. SIGHT-SETTING ANNOUNCED. (Battle sight if none announced.)
+ 3. (If by volley), Ready, Aim, Squad FIRE.
+ To continue volley firing, Aim, Squad FIRE.
+ Volley fire is used against large, compact enemy or in fire of
+position.
+
+FIRE AT WILL.--Normally employed in attack and defense; 3 shots per
+minute at effective ranges (600 to 1,200 yards); 5 to 6 shots per
+minute at close ranges (up to 600 yards).
+
+CLIP FIRE:
+ Used (1) To steady men.
+ (2) To produce a short burst of fire.
+
+UNLOAD.--Safety lock up.
+
+
+EXTENDED ORDER.
+
+ A squad acting alone, as one out on a patrol or for instruction,
+the corporal acts as the leader of a small platoon leading the advance,
+and in rear when halted.
+ Men come to trail as they come on the skirmish line.
+ On halting, a deployed line faces front (direction of real or
+assumed enemy), and takes cover.
+
+CORPORAL CAUTIONS.--By the Right Flank (if halted). Corporal steps out
+looking back to get his 10-pace interval. Squad Halt.
+
+LEFT FACE.--Base squad deploys as soon as it has room.
+ Guide of a deployed squad is center without command.
+ Captain indicates point on which corporal of base squad is to march.
+
+COMPANY RIGHT is executed as explained for front rank of Company, but
+at 1/2 pace intervals.
+
+
+DEPLOYMENTS.
+
+_From Line, to Form Skirmish Line to Front._
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT, MARCH.--1. If marching, corporal
+commands, Follow Me. Corporal of base squad moves straight to front,
+deploys as soon as possible and advances until Company, Halt, is
+given.
+ Other squads move to left front and place squads on the line.
+ If guide is center, other corporals on right of center squad move to
+the right, and squads on the left to the left, and bring their squads
+on the line.
+ If guide is left, other corporals move to right front.
+
+2. If at halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal, 3 paces in
+front of the former line, as soon as it has room.
+ Other squads are conducted by the left flank, to their places.
+
+TO DEPLOY FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS, FORMING SKIRMISH LINE TO THE
+FRONT.--If at a halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal 3
+paces in front of its former position.
+ If marching, base squad deploys and moves straight to the front.
+ If guide is right, other corporals move to left front and place
+squads on line.
+ If guide is center, corporals in front move to right (if at a halt,
+to right rear), the corporals in rear of center squad move to left and
+come on line in succession.
+ Column of twos or files are deployed by same commands in same manner.
+ If deployment in an oblique direction is desired, the captain points
+out desired direction.
+ Column of squads may be turned to the flank or rear and then deployed.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--In skirmish line, men assemble at a run, to their
+places individually. Squads do not assemble and march to places as
+units as do platoons.
+
+PLATOONS, ASSEMBLE.--Men assemble individually on the run, in their
+platoons and are then marched to relative position on base platoon as
+indicated by position or command of captain.
+
+PLATOON COLUMNS.--Platoon leaders should be sure to go through center
+of platoon.
+ Platoon guides in rear.
+ Columns should be 20 yards apart, or more.
+ (Used to take advantage of few favorable routes where cover is poor
+or ground difficult.)
+
+SQUAD COLUMNS.--Men oblique and follow squad leader. No advantage in
+cover, but used to advance more quickly over rough or brush grown
+ground.
+ (It might be desirable to teach men to take squad columns from
+column of squads.)
+ In assembling from Platoon or Squad columns, the men reform by
+platoons or squads and are conducted by their leaders to point
+indicated by captain.
+ _Thin lines_ are used to cross wide stretches under artillery fire or
+heavy, long range rifle fire which cannot be profitably returned.
+
+No. 1's FORWARD, MARCH.
+ First line is led by platoon leader, right platoon.
+ Second line is led by platoon guide, right platoon.
+ Third line is led by platoon leader, next platoon, etc.
+ Quick time, unless conditions otherwise demand.
+
+CAPTAIN POINTS OUT NEW LINE.--Original intervals preserved.
+
+DISADVANTAGE.--Serious loss of control over company.
+
+ADVANTAGE.--Offers less definite target and is less likely to draw
+fire.
+
+
+BEING IN SKIRMISH LINE.
+
+BY PLATOON (2 PLATOONS, SQUADS, 4 MEN, ETC.), FROM THE RIGHT,
+RUSH.--Leader of rush usually platoon leader.
+
+ (1) Selects new line.
+ (2) Cease firing.
+ (3) Prepare to rush.
+ (4) Follow me.
+ (5) Commence firing.
+
+When whole company rushes, it is led by Captain. Platoon leader lead
+their platoons.
+
+
+COMMANDS.
+
+Commands should be so given as to be distinctly heard by all the men
+who have to execute them. It is unfair to expect good execution of a
+slovenly command or one that cannot be heard. A sufficient interval
+should be allowed between the preparatory command and the command of
+execution, proportioned to the size of the command, so that each man
+has time to grasp the movement before execution is required.
+
+
+School of the Battalion.
+
+BASIS.--4 companies to a battalion.
+
+ARRANGEMENT.--Right to left by rank of Captains. After formation order
+is not kept with reference to rank of Captains.
+
+NUMBER.--From right to left in whatever direction.
+
+CENTER.--Actual center or right center company.
+
+BAND.--Places itself as if it were an adjoining battalion on right.
+
+DRESSING.--Each company is dressed by its Captain who places himself
+on the flank toward which the dress is to be made.
+
+In battalion line beside the guide (or beside flank file of the front
+rank if guide is not in line) facing front.
+
+In column of companies--2 paces from the guide and facing down the
+line.
+
+
+To Form the Battalion.
+
+OTHER THAN CEREMONIES.--Column of squads. Adjutant does not take his
+post until companies are formed. Each Captain halts company and
+salutes Adjutant. Adjutant returns salutes and when last Captain has
+saluted, faces Major and reports "Sir, the Battalion is formed." He
+joins Major without command.
+
+FOR CEREMONIES.--Or when directed, Battalion is formed in line.
+Adjutant places himself 6 paces to right of right company and facing
+in direction line is to extend. Guides precede companies on line by 20
+paces. Adjutant causes guides to cover. Companies are halted one pace
+in rear of line and dressed to right against arm of guide. When guides
+of left company have been posted, Adjutant by shortest route moves to
+post facing Battalion midway between post of Major and center of
+Battalion. Adjutant commands: 1. Guides, 2. Posts, 3. Present, 4.
+Arms. He then faces about and reports, "Sir, the Battalion is formed."
+Major commands, "Take your post, sir."
+
+TO DISMISS THE BATTALION.--Dismiss your companies.
+
+TO RECTIFY THE ALIGNMENT.--See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraphs
+273-274.
+
+TO RECTIFY THE COLUMN.--See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraph 275.
+
+HELPFUL HINTS TO BEGINNERS.--These hold good with few exceptions.
+ When in column of squads; first command of Captain begins with word
+"Column."
+ When in column of companies; first command of Captain begins with
+word "Squads."
+
+IN COLUMN OF SQUADS.--
+
+Major: _On right (left) into line._
+
+First Captain: Squads right. (Captain marches beside right guide.)
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (If halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: (Upon uncovering preceding company) Squads right.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+First Captain: Right Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: (Coming on line). Company Halt, Right Dress, Front.
+
+Major: _Right (left) front into line._
+
+First Captain: Column right.
+
+Rear Captains: Column half right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: (Halts and allows company to pass him and form column
+of squads to right.) Squads left, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: When company in column of squads arrives one pace in
+rear of the right flank of the company that has formed in line. Column
+half right, March. The Captain then takes 5 paces beyond the flank of
+the last company in line, allows company to pass him, and as rear
+guide reaches him, commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left
+Dress, Front.
+
+Major: _Line of companies at_ (seven) paces, guide left (right).
+(Close on first company from column of squads is no longer used in
+Battalion drill.)
+
+First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Rear Captains: Column half right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: (When company reaches a position 7 paces to the flank
+of the leading company.) Column half right.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+All Captains: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+Major: _Column of companies, first company_ squads right (left).
+
+First Captain: Squads right.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward.).
+
+As each company reaches the point where the first company formed line
+the Captain commands: Squads right, March.
+
+IN COLUMN OF COMPANIES OR CLOSE COLUMN OF COMPANIES.--
+
+Major: _On right (left) into line._
+
+First Captain: Right turn.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: Each Captain takes 5 paces beyond the left flank of the
+company that has just executed the turn and commands: Right turn,
+March.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+First Captain: Right Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: (As they come on line.) Company Halt, Right Dress,
+Front.
+
+Major: _Right (left) front into line._
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Second Capt: Right by Squads.
+
+Third and fourth Captains: Squads Right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: Halt, Left Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: Column half left, March, Column half right March.
+Taking 5 paces from the flank of the company last on line and allowing
+the company to pass by him until the rear guide reaches him, Captain
+commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front.
+
+Major: _Close on first company_ (Never any other).
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: Halt.
+
+Rear Captains: As each successive company closes to 8 paces from the
+company immediately in front, the Captain commands: Company Halt.
+
+Major: _Extend on fourth company._ (Never any other.)
+
+First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Rear Captains: Company.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: Halt. Then as each company in rear of the leading
+company gets the proper distance (company front plus 5 paces) the
+Captain commands: Forward March.
+
+Close column not extended in double time.
+
+Major: _Column of squads, first company_ squads right (left).
+
+First Captain: Squads right.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward). As each company
+reaches the point where the first company formed column of squads, the
+Captain commands: Squads right, March.
+
+Major: _Column right (left)._
+
+First Captain: Right turn.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to March (if halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: When the marching flank of the company is one pace from
+the new line the Captain commands: Forward March.
+
+Rear Captains: Other companies march squarely up to the turning point
+and each changes direction at the Captain's command: Right turn,
+March, Forward, March.
+
+LINE OF COMPANIES OR CLOSE LINE OF COMPANIES.
+
+Major: _Battalion right (left)._
+
+First Captain: Column right.
+
+Flank Captains: Column half right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Flank Captains: When each company has moved 7 paces to the flank of
+the base company the command is: Column half right, March. The
+companies are then marched echeloned with an interval of 7 paces.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+Flank Captains: Continue to march. As each company comes into line
+with the base company the Captain commands: Company, Halt.
+
+Major: _Close on first (fourth) company._
+
+_Extend on first (fourth) company._ Both movements executed in the
+same manner.
+
+First Captain: (If marching.) Halt. (If halted, cautions "Stand
+Fast.")
+
+Flank Captains: Squads right.
+
+Major: _March._
+
+Flank Captains: Right Oblique, March. (When the company has closed
+sufficiently): Forward March, Squads left, March. (Then as the company
+comes on the line with first company): Company, Halt.
+
+Major: _Column of Squads, first (fourth) company, forward._
+
+First Captain: Forward.
+
+Flank Captains: Column half right (left).
+
+Major: _March._
+
+Flank Captains: As their companies come onto the line behind the
+leading company (at 4.4 paces) the Captain commands: Column half
+right, March.
+
+
+IN BATTALION LINE.
+
+Major: _Close on first (fourth) company._
+
+First Captain: Stand fast (Caution).
+
+Second Captain: Squads right, column right.
+
+Third and fourth Captains: Squads right, column half right.
+
+Major: _March._
+
+Second, third and fourth Captains: As each company reaches a point 8
+paces behind the company just preceding it into close column, the
+command is given: Column half right, March. (Cautioning "Guide left"
+when closing on first company--"Guide right" when closing on fourth
+company): Squads left, March, Company, Halt.
+
+Major: _Halt._
+
+First Captain: Right Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: (As they come on the line): Company Halt, Right Dress,
+Front.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE No. 2A. CO. I--N.E. PROPER ARRANGEMENT OF SHELTER
+TENTS.]
+
+[Illustration: PLATE No. 2B. LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT FOR INSPECTION.
+TENT PINS SHOULD BE LAID IN ECHELON THREE INCHES APART.]
+
+
+Inspections.
+
+(Kitchen and mess inspections have been covered under Feeding Men.)
+
+Daily inspection of the barracks should be made and rigid discipline
+enforced as to the floors being kept clean, scrubbed once a week,
+bedding and bed clothes aired out of doors every Tuesday, shoes
+cleaned and kept in order under bunks, lockers under bunks, toilet
+articles and books all kept in order. Sheets, comforters and blankets
+should be shaken out, folded as for pack and laid on top of pillow
+until afternoon, each day.
+
+In inspecting men every week see that hair is kept short and feet
+clean and in good condition, toe nails trimmed. Insist on woolen
+socks.
+
+Equipment must be inspected carefully, each week, to see that it is in
+good condition.
+
+
+SPECIAL POINTS OF COMPANY INSPECTION.
+
+After Open Ranks, March, given from usual position in front of
+Company, the Captain takes his post 3 paces in front of Right Guide,
+facing to the left and commands:
+
+1. Front. 2. Prepare for Inspection.
+
+The Lieutenants are 3 paces in front of the center of their
+respectives Platoons, facing to front.
+
+If equipment is also to be inspected, commands are as follows:
+
+1. Close Ranks. 2. March. Stack Arms. Backward, March. Take Interval
+to the Right, March. Company, Halt.
+
+1. Unsling Equipment. 2. Open Packs. Close Packs. Sling Equipment.
+
+
+Battalion Inspection.
+
+At command, Prepare for Inspection, given by the Major, each Captain
+commands, Open Ranks. They do not salute when the Major and Inspector
+approach.
+
+The Lieutenants take their places as in Company Inspection. Each
+Captain commands:
+
+Company Attention. Prepare for Inspection.
+
+Lieutenants face about and stand at ease, after being inspected or
+passed.
+
+After inspection:
+
+Close Ranks, march.
+
+Rest.
+
+
+Regimental Inspection.
+
+Commands mean and principles are same as for Battalion. (Look up Post
+of Colonel, par. 754, Infantry Drill Regulations.)
+
+
+Ceremonies.
+
+BATTALION REVIEW.
+
+After Battalion is formed in line, Major faces front.
+
+When Reviewing Officer halts, Major turns about and commands:
+
+Present Arms; turns to front and salutes. Major turns about; commands
+Order Arms, and again faces front.
+
+When Reviewing Officer is within 6 paces, the Major salutes, takes
+post on the right and accompanies him.
+
+On arriving at the right of the line again, Major salutes, halts,
+takes his post in front of Battalion and commands:
+
+Pass in Review. Squads Right, March.
+
+Major and Staff execute Eyes Right and take post on right of Reviewing
+Officer remaining until Battalion has passed, when he salutes and
+rejoins it.
+
+Double time is given by Major when the Battalion comes to its original
+starting place and the Battalion passes in review as before except
+that Eyes Right is omitted and Major salutes only when he leaves
+Reviewing Officer.
+
+Major and Staff may be dismounted at discretion of Commanding Officer.
+
+
+BATTALION PARADE.
+
+When band sounds off, the Reviewing Officer and his Staff stands, if
+dismounted, with arms folded: if mounted they remain at attention at a
+convenient distance in front of the center and facing the Battalion.
+
+The Battalion is not presented for Battalion Parade.
+
+The Lieutenants take posts in front of center of their Platoons at
+Captain's command for dressing his Company on the line.
+
+After Guides Posts, the Adjutant commands:
+
+(To Battalion) Parade Rest.
+
+(To Band) Sound Off.
+
+Battalion, Attention. Present Arms.
+
+At conclusion of National Anthem Adjutant reports:
+
+Sir: The parade is formed.
+
+The Major directs: _Take your post, sir_.
+
+Major then commands: _Order Arms_.
+
+At conclusion of Manual of Arms, Major directs: _Receive the reports,
+sir_.
+
+Captains report "'C' Company present or accounted for," or "'C'
+Company, 1 officer, 7 enlisted men are absent."
+
+Publish the orders, sir:
+
+After publishing them, Adjutant commands: Officers, Center, March. At
+command Center, Officers face center: at command March, march to
+center and halt, facing front.
+
+Commands Forward and Halt are given by Senior Officer. Left Officer of
+center Company is guide and marches on the Major. Halt at 6 paces from
+Major, salute and come down with the Major.
+
+At command Officers Posts, March, Officers face about at command
+"posts" and are conducted by Senior Officer who halts them 3 paces
+from line. Officers, Halt. Posts, March. Face outward at command,
+Posts, step off with 4 pace intervals. Lieutenants go to their posts
+by shortest route, in rear of Company.
+
+
+REGIMENTAL PARADE.
+
+Lieutenants remain in file closers.
+
+At command, Officers Center, Captains remain at their posts with their
+Companies.
+
+
+REGIMENTAL REVIEW.
+
+Regiment formed in line or line of masses.
+
+Colonel commands: Pass in Review.
+
+Each Major commands: 1, _Squads Right_; 2, _March_.
+
+If in line of masses, Colonel commands: "Pass in Review." Major of
+Right Battalion commands: _Column of Squads, First Company Squads,
+Right, March_.
+
+ FIRE DIRECTION IS THE FUNCTION OF THE CAPTAIN AND HIGHER
+ COMMANDERS. ABOVE THE GRADE OF CAPTAIN AND DIRECTION IS
+ PRINCIPALLY TACTICAL. WITH A CAPTAIN IT IMPLIES THE ABILITY TO
+ ISSUE CORRECT FIRE ORDERS TO MEET GIVEN SITUATIONS IN ORDER
+ THAT THE FIRE OF THE COMPANY MAY BE AS EFFECTIVE AS POSSIBLE.
+
+ FIRE CONTROL IS THE COMBINED PRODUCT OF THE FIRE UNIT
+ COMMANDERS AND THE FIRERS. THE FIRE UNIT IS THE PLATOON.
+
+ FIRE DISCIPLINE MEANS STRICT ATTENTION TO THE SIGNALS AND
+ ORDERS OF THE COMMANDER, AND IS THE FACULTY DEVELOPED IN THE
+ MEN BY INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING, OF COMMENCING, CEASING, OR
+ DIMINISHING FIRE, OR OF CONCENTRATING IT UPON A DEFINED OBJECT
+ IN OBEDIENCE TO THE DELIBERATE WILL OF THE COMMANDER.
+
+NOTE.--It is to be remembered that all grades of commanders are
+supposed to be familiar with the duties of all below them.
+
+In issuing orders all Officers, in addition to announcing where they
+will be found will give the location of the next higher Commander.
+
+The authorities for statements under the Platoon Leader and below are
+not given after each statement but the paragraphs from which they are
+deduced are given under the heading for each grade. This course was
+thought necessary to avoid repetition.
+
+
+I. THE COLONEL.
+
+POSITION--(369, 380, 528--i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. Advancing to the battlefield: as
+ (a) Independent commander ordinarily with the advance guard
+ in order that he may:
+ 1. Receive information promptly.
+ 2. Personally see the situation (reconnoiter).
+ 3. Order the deployment.
+ 4. Begin the action strictly in accordance with his own
+ wishes.
+ (b) Subordinate commander (427, i.d.r.).
+ After receiving his order for the action, precedes his
+ command as far as possible in order to:
+ 1. Personally reconnoiter the ground.
+ 2. Be prepared to issue his orders promptly.
+
+Note--For a discussion of the position of leaders see Subject V.
+
+ 2. During the action; such as will enable him to:
+ (a) Observe the progress of events.
+ (b) Receive and transmit messages and orders.
+ (c) Be in constant, direct, and easy communication with the
+ reserve. (369, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ a. After having received his orders, the regimental commander
+ leads his regiment forward in a column, or in line of columns,
+ until the time arrives for issuing the regimental order, he
+ then: (426, i.d.r.)
+ b. Assigns targets and sectors or tasks to battalions and special
+ units. (312, 381 and 426, i.d.r.)
+ c. Provides for necessary reconnaissance to front and flank. (428,
+ i.d.r.)
+ d. Announces his position and also that of the next higher
+ commander.
+ e. Controls the reserve as the tactical situation demands. (441,
+ i.d.r.)
+ f. Regulates ammunition supply. (316, f.s.r. and 552, i.d.r.) See
+ also full discussion of the ammunition supply in Subject VIII.
+
+Note--The colonel is assisted in the performance of his duties by the
+regimental staff.
+
+
+II. THE MAJOR.
+
+The battalion is the attack unit whether acting alone or as part of a
+larger force. (305, i.d.r.)
+
+POSITION:
+
+ (The general rules for a colonel apply)
+
+ 1. Where he can best:
+ a. Direct the reinforcing of the firing line from the
+ support. (315, i.d.r.)
+ b. Observe the progress of events, (369, i.d.r.)
+ c. Maintain contact with regimental headquarters. (369,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+ 2. On the firing line when all the supports have joined. (315,
+ i.d.r.) (See Subject V.)
+
+GENERAL.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ 1. Conducts his battalion according to sector and mission assigned
+ him.
+ 2. Directs first disposition of battalion by tactical orders,
+ giving subordinates--
+ a. Information of the enemy.
+ b. Position of supporting and neighboring troops.
+ c. The general object to be attained.
+ d. The special problem for each company (291, i.d.r.)
+ (This includes making the primary apportionment of the
+ target.) (303, i.d.r.)
+ e. If practicable, the point or time at which the fire fight
+ is to open. (304, i.d.r.)
+ f. Orders for flank protection and reconnaissance, unless
+ specifically provided for by higher authority. (293, 397
+ and 398, i.d.r.)
+ g. His position and that of the next higher commander.
+ 3. Controls supports, dispatches reinforcements from support to
+ firing line. (226 and 297, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Controls subsequent movements by suitable orders or commands.
+ (291, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Regulates ammunition supply--(See Subject VIII, also Pars.
+ 316-317, f.s.r.) (The combat train is the immediate reserve
+ supply of the battalion.)
+ a. Is responsible for the proper use of the combat train.
+ b. Insures maintenance of the prescribed allowance at all
+ times.
+ c. Causes combat trains to march immediately in rear of the
+ battalion unless directed otherwise. (548, i.d.r.)
+ d. When battalion deployed on his own initiative, indicates
+ whether extra ammunition shall be issued. (294, i.d.r.)
+ e. When battalion deployed pursuant to orders from higher
+ authority, causes issue of extra ammunition unless
+ specifically ordered not to do so. (294, 548, i.d.r.)
+ f. When combat wagons are emptied, directs them to proper
+ rendezvous to be refilled. (548, i.d.r.)
+ g. Sees that combat wagons and belts of men are refilled as
+ soon as possible after an engagement. (553, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Maintains contact with adjoining troops. (399 i.d.r.)
+ 7. May harmonize ranges used by the companies on the firing line.
+ 8. Determines when bayonets shall be fixed. (318, i.d.r.)
+ 9. Subject to orders from higher authority, determines the point
+ from which the charge to be made. (319, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Orders the charge. (318, i.d.r.)
+
+SPECIAL.
+
+ 1. _In attack_:
+ a. May select formation in which companies advance. (212,
+ i.d.r.)
+ b. Designates--
+ 1. The direction of the objective. (303, i.d.r.)
+ 2. The companies for the firing line.
+ 3. The companies for the support.
+ 4. The order and front of the companies in the firing line.
+ 5. The right or left company of the firing line as the base
+ company.
+ 6. May indicate when the advance by rushes is to start.
+ (311, i.d.r.)
+ 2. _In defense_:
+ a. Describes front of each company. (292, i.d.r.)
+ b. Assigns sector of fire. (244, 302, i.d.r.)
+ c. Locates fire, communicating and cover trenches.
+ d. Directs preparation of obstacles.
+ e. Assigns companies to construct trenches and obstacles.
+ f. Details troops to occupy trenches. (321, i.d.r.)
+ g. Causes firing line and supports to fix bayonets when a
+ charge by the enemy is imminent. (324, i.d.r.)
+ h. Seeks opportunities for counter attacks. (326, i.d.r.)
+
+
+III. BATTALION STAFF.
+
+POSITIONS:
+
+Battalion Adjutant }
+Battalion Sergeant Major } with Major.
+
+ Mounted orderlies--both with Major (one with major and one with
+ Adjutant) until horses are sent to rear when both may be with
+ the horses or one take the horses and the other remain with the
+ major, as he may direct.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ All assist the major in any way directed, by
+ a. Reconnaissance. (565, i.d.r., 25, f.s.r.)
+ b. Observation of the firing line.
+ c. Maintaining contact with regimental headquarters.
+ d. Maintaining contact with the support.
+ e. Receiving, communicating, and sending visual signals from and
+ to front and rear.
+ f. Observing fire effect and progress of events.
+ g. Keeping copies of all orders, messages, and other data
+ necessary, for his war diary. (35, f.s.r.)
+
+When there is only one range finder to the battalion, the Battalion
+Sergeant Major is the Battalion Range Taker. When not actually engaged
+in taking ranges, he assists the Major as above or, preferably, he may
+be charged with the duty of maintaining communication with the
+companies of the firing line.
+
+The major designates a sergeant to take charge of the battalion combat
+train. Under the Major's direction, he
+ a. Conducts combat train as far to the front with the battalion
+ as directed.
+ b. Issues ammunition to the battalion.
+ c. Takes combat train to rendezvous for refilling, under
+ direction of the regimental commander.
+ d. Rejoins battalion, if it is not in action, or, if it be
+ engaged, joins or establishes communication with the
+ regimental reserve. (548, 549 and 553, i.d.r.)
+ (This sergeant is not provided for in the present
+ organization. Recommendation has been made to the War
+ Department that he be included in the Tables of
+ Organization.)
+
+IV. THE CAPTAIN.
+(The Fire Director.)
+
+POSITION: _Where he can best:_
+
+ 1. Control his four platoons. (248, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Observe fire effect. (249, i.d.r.)
+ 3. See the major and platoon chiefs. (234, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES: _Before fire action:_
+
+ 1. Conducts his company to place of deployment assigned by the
+ major's orders (297, i.d.r.) in best manner. (212, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Designates target, and allots part to each platoon. (245 and
+ 249, i.d.r.) (See Overlapping Method, page 15, Subject V. Fire
+ Tactics.)
+ 3. Determines the range. (240 and 249, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Announces the sight setting. }
+ 5. Indicates class of fire and } (249, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Time to open fire. }
+ 7. Informs the subordinates as to the location of the battalion
+ commander, and, when necessary, announces his own position.
+
+_During the Action:_
+
+ 1. Observes fire effect. (249, 414, 415, i.d.r., and 216,
+ s.a.f.m.)
+ 2. Corrects material errors in sight setting. (249, i.d.r.)
+ 3. Prevents exhaustion of ammunition supply. (249, 550, 551,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 4. Distributes ammunition received from rear. (249, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Provides for the collection and distribution of the ammunition
+ of the dead and wounded. (551, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Is on the alert for the Major's signals or commands. (226 and
+ 234, i.d.r.)
+ 7. In the absence of express directions from the major, if
+ commanding a flank company, determines when advances by rushes
+ shall be attempted. (311, i.d.r.)
+ 8. Indicates size of fractions to rush. (311, i.d.r.)
+ 9. Leads a rush by entire company. (223, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Leads the charge. (319, i.d.r.)
+ 11. When necessary, designates new platoon leaders and sees that new
+ squads are organized and new squad leaders designated to replace
+ those disabled. (104, 375, i.d.r.)
+
+V. BUGLERS.
+
+POSITION:
+
+Join the Captain when the company deploys. (164, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES: (235, i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. _One Bugler_--
+ a. Observes the enemy.
+ b. Observes the target.
+ c. Observes for fire effect.
+ d. Watches platoon leaders for signals.
+ e. Transmits signals to platoon leaders.
+ 2. _The other_--
+ a. Watches the Major for signals and repeats them back.
+ b. Transmits information to the Major.
+ 3. BOTH--
+ a. Repeat bugle signals "charge." (319, i.d.r.)
+ b. Carry field glasses, message pads, pencils and signal flags.
+ (i.u.a.e.m., 387, i.d.r.)
+ c. Act as messengers.
+
+ ALL OF THE ABOVE IMPLIES THAT THEY MUST BE PROFICIENT IN:
+ a. Signaling--Hand, Arm and Letter Codes.
+ b. Observation for fire effect.
+ c. Location and definition or description of targets.
+ d. Bugle calls.
+
+
+VI. RANGE ESTIMATORS.
+
+Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
+estimators in the company are designated "Range Finders." (240,
+i.d.r.)
+
+The term "Range Finder" is a misnomer as a range finder is an
+instrument. The school uses the term "Range Estimator" when applied to
+an individual. The attention of the War Department has been called to
+this.
+
+The range estimators are given special training in the estimation of
+ranges.
+
+When an action is pending, the Captain receives from the Major the
+primary apportionment of the target or sector of fire. (303, i.d.r.)
+
+The Captain returns to the company, and, avoiding dangerous grouping,
+assembles the platoon leaders and range estimators, and points out to
+both the target of the Battalion and Company.
+
+The Range Estimators immediately begin their estimation of the range
+to the company target; the Captain meanwhile continues with his
+instructions to the Platoon Leaders.
+
+The instructions to the Platoon Leaders completed, the Range
+Estimators announce to the Captain either their individual estimates,
+or the mean of their estimates as deduced by one of the estimators.
+The Range Estimators then take their customary posts (240, i.d.r.),
+and the Captain indicates to the Platoon Leaders the range to be used.
+
+The Range Estimators act in an advisory capacity to the Captain. The
+mean of their estimates will usually be the most accurate deduction
+available in battle. The adoption by the Captain of the range thus
+determined, however, is not obligatory.
+
+Range Estimators should be ready to signal their estimates of the
+range to the platoon leaders at any time during the action.
+
+
+VII. THE PLATOON LEADER.
+
+(The Fire Controller.)
+
+POSITION: Where he can best:
+
+ 1. Control the squads constituting his platoon. (252, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Observe the target and fire effect. (252, 414, 415, i.d.r., and
+ 216, s.a.f.m.)
+ 3. Observe the captain for signals or commands. (234, 251, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ (6, 42, 104, 229, 231-233, 244, 245-257, 319, 375, 550, i.d.r.)
+ Controls the fire of his platoon and in his fire orders.
+
+ 1. Receives his orders from the company commander.
+ 2. If necessary, may indicate the fire position that has been
+ ordered.
+ 3. Announces sight setting.
+ 4. Points out designated target to his platoon, if practicable,
+ otherwise to his corporals only, or
+ 5. When the target cannot be seen, indicates an aiming target. (247
+ and 251, i.d.r., call this an aiming "point", but the occasions
+ upon which infantry would use an aiming "point" are so rare that
+ it is believed aiming "target" is a more accurate term as it
+ includes both point and line.)
+ 6. Assigns target so as to insure that the entire front or sector
+ given him by the company commander will be covered with fire.
+ 7. Gives class of fire.
+ 8. Announces rate of fire.
+ 9. If commanding a flank platoon, details a man to watch for
+ signals from the combat patrols.
+ 10. When his Corporals have signaled that their squads are ready to
+ fire, signals the Captain by looking toward him and holding up
+ his hand.
+ 11. When Captain signals a "commence firing", repeats same to the
+ corporals.
+
+THEREAFTER:
+
+ 1. Observes for fire effect.
+ 2. When platoon is not firing, insures that the front assigned is
+ kept under constant observation for any appearance of the enemy
+ or any change of position.
+ 3. Changes sight-setting of his platoon when necessary.
+ 4. Regulates rate of fire.
+ 5. Increases rate of fire when large and distinct targets appear
+ and decreases it when the target becomes small and indistinct.
+ 6. Prevents decrease in rate of fire when--
+ (1) Changing sight-setting,
+ (2) Preparing for rushes,
+ (3) Fixing bayonets,
+ (4) Transmitting firing data to supports,
+ (5) Distributing ammunition.
+ 7. Increases the rate of fire to cover the advance of adjacent
+ units. For this purpose progress and movements of adjoining
+ units are kept under observation.
+ 8. Maintains direction of advance of his platoon in rushing, so as
+ not to blanket fire of adjacent units.
+ 9. Is on the alert for Captain's commands or signals, for this
+ purpose he may use his platoon guide.
+ 10. May use his platoon guide to observe adjoining units.
+ 11. Must understand all signals.
+ 12. Leads his platoon in advancing and charging.
+ 13. Prevents changing fire to unauthorized targets.
+ 14. Insures distribution of ammunition brought up from the rear and
+ the collection and distribution of same from the dead and
+ wounded. (540, i.d.r.).
+ 15. In coming up with re-enforcements, he takes over the duties of
+ disabled platoon leaders of the platoon into which his men have
+ dropped, or it may be some other section of the line needs his
+ service in which case he goes there.
+ 16. Endeavors to preserve the integrity of squads, designates new
+ squad leaders to replace those disabled, organizes new squads
+ when necessary, sees that every man is placed in a squad and
+ takes every opportunity for restoring order in the firing line.
+ (104, 375, i.d.r.)
+ 17. In "Advance by thin lines", leads odd numbered lines. (218,
+ i.d.r.).
+
+
+VIII. THE FIRST SERGEANT.
+
+Commands a Platoon, Never a Guide.
+
+
+GUIDES.
+
+GENERAL RULES:
+
+1. Guides must be resourceful, have good health, vigorous physique,
+keen eyesight, presence of mind and courage, with good judgment,
+military training and experience. They must be able to read maps, make
+sketches and send clear and concise messages.
+
+2. EQUIPMENT.--Guides are equipped with whistle, watch, compass,
+message book, knife, pencil, wire cutters, map, pace scale and glasses
+if possible.
+
+3. As instructors they go where needed.
+
+4. As file closers they insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.
+
+5. In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
+charged with the step and direction.
+
+CLOSE ORDER.--The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear,
+platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear guides
+respectively of the company when it is in line or in column of squads.
+Other guides are in the line of file closers.
+
+In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
+the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
+in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
+flanks of the platoon does not change.
+
+The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank
+opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to
+the other flank, the Captain commands: 1. _File closers on left
+(right) flank;_ 2. March. The file closers dart through the column;
+the captain and guides change.
+
+In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side
+of the guide.
+
+Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or
+firings.
+
+Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
+of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
+the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements.
+
+IN TAKING INTERVALS AND DISTANCES.--Unless otherwise directed, the
+right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in the
+line of file closers, and with them take a distance of 4 paces from
+the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command "March", the file
+closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file nearest
+him. In _assembling_ the guides and file closers resume their places
+in line.
+
+To FORM THE COMPANY.--At the sounding of the assembly the first
+sergeant takes position 6 paces in front of where the center of the
+company is to be, faces it, draws saber, and commands "Fall in".
+
+The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
+where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
+center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
+sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
+right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
+posts.
+
+For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, when
+small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close order
+movements only are executed. The single rank executes all movements as
+explained for the front rank of the company.
+
+ALIGNMENTS.--The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School
+of the Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file.
+The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the
+front and covers his file leader.
+
+At each alignment the Captain places himself in prolongation of the
+line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
+made, verifies the alignment and commands: "Front".
+
+Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify the
+alignments.
+
+In "Company right" the right guide steps back on the command "March",
+aligning the first two men next to him as he does so, to establish the
+correct line.
+
+In "Platoon right" the Captain announces the guide and the guides
+cover promptly.
+
+In "Right turn" the right guide is the pivot of the front rank.
+
+In "Column right" the right flank man of the leading squad is the
+pivot, _not the guide_.
+
+In "Right by squads" the right guide (when he has posted himself in
+front of the right squad) takes four short steps and then resumes the
+full step. The right squad conforms.
+
+"Squads right about." If the company or platoons are in column of
+squads, file closers turn about toward the column and take posts. If
+in line, each darts through the nearest interval between squads. The
+right and left guides place themselves in the new front rank. File
+closers on facing about, maintain their relative positions.
+
+When the company executes "About face", guides place themselves in the
+new front rank.
+
+In "Right front into line, double time" halting and aligning commands
+are omitted. Guide is toward side of the first unit.
+
+In "Take interval" or "Take distance" guides drop back at the first
+command.
+
+In "Squads right" or "Platoons, column right" interior guides of
+platoons cross the company. A good rule for beginners is always to
+cross over (except in "column right").
+
+Guide of a company in line is right (unless otherwise announced).
+
+Guide of a platoon in line is right.
+
+Guide of a battalion in line is center.
+
+Guide of a line of subdivisions is center.
+
+Guide of a deployed line is center.
+
+Guide of a squad is toward the side of the guide of the company.
+
+Guide of successive formations into line is toward the point of rest.
+
+File closers remain on the same side of the company except when in so
+doing they would be left in front of the company.
+
+If the battalion is in line, the guide away from the point of rest (in
+each company) comes to the "Right shoulder arms" at the command to
+dress.
+
+At the command "Eyes right", guides who are charged with the direction
+do not execute "Eyes right", but simply salute.
+
+At "Retreat" guides unarmed stand at "Attention". Only officers
+salute.
+
+In "Stack arms" the right guide should align the stacks.
+
+In squads (acting alone) the corporal is the guide; number 2 of the
+front rank, if the corporal is not in line.
+
+The guides of rear units are charged with the step, trace and
+distance.
+
+EXERCISE FOR GUIDES.--Lay out a course of arbitrary distance; 200
+yards will answer the purpose. Instruct the guides to march the course
+as they would if they were guiding a company, but being sure to count
+their steps (a pebble transferred to the left hand at 100 steps is
+often found useful).
+
+RESULT.--The number of steps will range from 205 to 225. After getting
+the number of steps taken by each man, show them that they should have
+taken 240 steps and that each man took too long a step. Have them
+march back guiding on two points in line as before, cautioning them to
+cut down the length of the step to 30 inches from the start, and not
+to wait until they get half way down the course and find that they
+have less than 120 steps.
+
+RESULT.--All of the men, even after the caution, will have taken too
+long a step.
+
+Instructor times the guides both ways, and calls attention to the fact
+that in ALL cases the cadence was under 120 steps per minute.
+
+After repeating above as much as desired have the men march in pairs,
+one man keeping time and the other counting steps and marching on two
+points.
+
+They may check up every 10 seconds if desired.
+
+
+IX. PLATOON GUIDES.
+
+POSITION:
+
+ 1. Behind the firing line, on left of platoon leader. (163,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 2. Advancing in line--behind center of platoon. (213 and 223,
+ i.d.r.) To insure prompt and orderly advance.
+ 3. "Advance by thin lines"--lead even numbered lines. (218, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Advancing in squad or platoon column--in rear.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ (104, 213, 223, 229, 255, 367, 375, and 376, i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. The platoon leader's assistant and may be assigned any duty the
+ platoon leader sees fit.
+ 2. Keeps adjoining units under observation.
+ 3. Watches firing line.
+ 4. Checks every breach of fire discipline.
+ 5. Prevents skulking, men leaving the ranks at any time to care for
+ wounded, etc.
+ 6. Designates new squad leaders and organizes new squads when
+ necessary.
+ 7. Attaches men that have become separated from squads to other
+ squads.
+ 8. Insures prompt and orderly advance.
+ 9. On joining firing line from the support takes over duties of
+ sergeants disabled.
+ 10. May receive and transmit signals to the Captain.
+ 11. If the platoon leader is disabled, he takes over his duties.
+ Hence he should know what the platoon leader is doing and how.
+ 12. When taking over the duties of the platoon leader he calls the
+ senior corporal of his platoon out to act as guide.
+
+
+X. CORPORAL.
+
+POSITION:
+
+ 1. Marching in line, as center skirmisher of squad (124, i.d.r.)
+ or
+ 2. When skirmish line is halted, immediately behind his squad.
+
+ Note.--The School has recommended to the War Department that the
+ Infantry Drill Regulations be changed to provide that the
+ Corporal's position be as prescribed above and in paragraph 20,
+ page 10.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ Paragraphs 42, 222, 252, 254, 255, 411, and 551, i.d.r., cover in
+ general the corporal's duties.
+ The squad leader (Corporal) controls the fire of his squad, he must
+ understand the duties of the private and in issuing his fire
+ orders:
+
+ 1. Receives his instructions from the platoon leader.
+ 2. Points out indicated objective to his squad.
+ 3. Takes as the squad target that portion of the platoon target
+ which corresponds to the position of the squad in the platoon.
+ 4. Announces sight setting.
+ 5. Announces class and rate of fire.
+ 6. When his squad is ready to fire looks toward the platoon leader
+ and holds up his hand. At the platoon leader's signal to
+ commence firing he sees that the squad opens fire.
+
+THEREAFTER:
+
+ 1. Makes all fire from the shoulder.
+ 2. Makes all use ordered rate of fire.
+ 3. Insures that all fire at designated objective.
+ 4. Prevents slighting of invisible portions of the target for more
+ visible parts.
+ 5. Prevents men from changing fire to unauthorized targets not in
+ the assigned front or sector.
+ 6. Maintains constant observation to the front; when squad is
+ firing, for effect of fire--when squad is not firing, for
+ appearance of enemy.
+ 7. Insures prompt obedience to orders to suspend and cease firing.
+ 8. Makes men utilize ground to fullest extent for concealment in
+ firing and advancing.
+ 9. In sight-setting, changing sights and fixing bayonets, has front
+ rank perform operation first (rear-rank men increasing rate of
+ fire) and then the rear-rank follow while the front-rank men
+ make up for loss of fire for the rear rank, thus insuring that
+ the rate of fire for the squad does not fall off.
+ 10. Prevents increasing vulnerability of squad while preparing for
+ a rush, and rushes as soon after cease firing as possible.
+ 11. When other squads of his platoon, are rushing, or the platoon
+ which is covering the same target as is his platoon, is rushing
+ he has his squad increase its rate of fire to make up for lost
+ fire effect of the rushing element.
+ 12. In rushing causes men to spring to feet running at full speed,
+ all men to drop to the ground at the same time, and those who
+ are in rear to crawl up to the line.
+ 13. When re-enforcing the firing line, takes over the duties of
+ disabled squad leaders. For this purpose his squad may drop into
+ line at one place and he may move to the next squad on the right
+ or left where there is a squad leader needed. If there are no
+ vacancies caused by disabled squad leaders, he drops into line
+ and assists the squad leaders who are there.
+ 14. Prevents decreasing rate of fire when men are transmitting data
+ to arriving supports.
+ 15. Prevents wasting of ammunition.
+ 16. Prevents use of 30 rounds in right pocket section of belts
+ except on order of an officer.
+ 17. Distributes ammunition of dead and wounded and ammunition
+ brought up from the rear.
+ 18. Prevents decreasing the rate of fire while ammunition is being
+ distributed.
+ 19. Looks to the rear only at his platoon leader's whistle
+ "Attention." Pays no attention to any other except suspend
+ firing.
+ 20. Takes his position in rear of his squad when it is firing and
+ remains there, where he can control its fire, and only crawls
+ into line and adds his rifle when all control is lost. (Short
+ ranges.)
+ 21. To control his squad he does not walk up and down behind his
+ squad but rolls along behind his line and keeps down.
+ 22. Leads his squad in moving to the front or rear.
+ 23. Must know thoroughly the drill regulation signals and have a
+ good practical knowledge of the theory of fire.
+ 24. In rushing, maintains the direction of advance of his squad so
+ as not to blanket the fire of squads in his rear.
+ 25. Takes advantage of every lull in the action and every favorable
+ opportunity to reorganize his squad and get it more under
+ control.
+ 26. Checks every breach of fire discipline, abates excitement, and
+ prevents any man from leaving the squad to go to the rear for
+ any purpose whatsoever.
+ 27. If called out of line to act as guide, notifies designated
+ private (103, i.d.r.) to take command of squad.
+
+
+XI. THE PRIVATE.
+
+POSITION:
+
+ Deployed in line: One man per yard (125, i.d.r.), unless a greater
+ extension is directed in the order for deployment. (126,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ (6, 42, 104, 133, 134, 138, 139, 149, 152-156, 203, 209, 233, 247,
+ 251, 254, 255, 319, 354, 367, i.d.r., and 209, s.a.f.m.)
+
+ The individual soldier must be trained:
+
+ 1. To recognize targets from description quickly.
+ 2. To describe and define targets.
+ 3. To use rear sight in describing targets.
+ 4. To use horizontal and vertical clock systems, singly or in
+ combination in describing target.
+ 5. To set sights quickly and accurately as ordered.
+ 6. To bring piece to shoulder, aim carefully and deliberately from
+ habit, and to reload quickly.
+ 7. To fire at the ordered rate. (Par. 18, Standard for Field
+ Firing.)
+ 8. To fire at the part of the designated objective which
+ corresponds to his position in the firing line.
+ 9. To continue firing in the designated sector and not to change
+ therefrom unless ordered.
+ 10. Not to slight invisible parts of the target for more visible
+ ones.
+ 11. To maintain constant observation to the front.
+ 12. To utilize folds of ground for concealment in advancing and
+ firing.
+ 13. To select firing positions.
+ 14. To understand effects of visibility and the selection of
+ backgrounds.
+ 15. To fire from all positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps
+ of earth and rocks, depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways and
+ windows.
+ 16. To obey promptly orders to suspend and cease firing.
+ 17. To ignore whistle signals, except suspend firing.
+ 18. To watch closely for the expected target after having suspended
+ firing.
+ 19. To obey promptly all orders from his squad leader.
+ 20. To drop into the nearest interval when reinforcing the firing
+ line and obey the orders of the nearest squad leader.
+ 21. To transmit firing data to men of the supports coming into the
+ line rapidly and accurately, without decreasing his rate of
+ fire.
+ 22. To call for range and target when reinforcing the firing line.
+ 23. To have confidence in his own ability to hit.
+ 24. To a system of sight setting and fixing bayonets in order that
+ there may be no cessation of fire in the unit during this
+ operation.
+ 25. To prepare for rushes without decreasing fire of the unit
+ unduly.
+ 26. To avoid unnecessary movement in preparing for rushes.
+ 27. To spring forward at command "Rush" or "Follow Me" without
+ preliminary rising.
+ 28. To avoid bunching in rushing.
+ 29. Not to swerve to the right or left in search of cover but to
+ advance in a straight line, in order not to blanket the fire of
+ men in his rear.
+ 30. To drop quickly at end of rush and crawl up to line if in rear
+ of it.
+ 31. To remain with his own company, but if he accidentally becomes
+ detached from his company or squad to join the nearest one.
+ 32. To maintain silence except when transmitting or receiving firing
+ data and charging.
+ 33. To retain presence of mind.
+ 34. To be careful not to waste ammunition.
+ 35. To use the thirty rounds of ammunition in the right pocket
+ section of the belt only upon the order of an officer.
+ 36. To remain with the firing line after bringing up ammunition.
+ 37. To utilize ammunition of dead and wounded.
+ 38. Never to attempt to care for dead or wounded during the action.
+ 39. To have confidence in his ability to use the bayonet.
+ 40. To a firm determination to close with the enemy.
+ 41. To preserve the line in charging.
+ 42. To understand that a charge should be slow and steady (the
+ faster men must not run away from the slower ones).
+ 43. To form up immediately after the charge and follow the enemy
+ with fire, not attempting a disorganized pursuit.
+ 44. To understand that it is suicidal to turn his back to an enemy
+ and that, if he cannot advance, he must intrench and hold on
+ until dark.
+ 45. To count distant groups of object or beings.
+ 46. To recognize service targets.
+ 47. NEVER TO FIRE UNTIL HE UNDERSTANDS WHAT THE TARGET IS, AT WHAT
+ PART HE IS TO FIRE, AND WITH WHAT SIGHT SETTING.
+
+
+Packs.
+
+INSTRUCTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING THE INFANTRY EQUIPMENT, MODEL OF 1910.
+
+1. THE CARTRIDGE BELT.--(a) To assemble the belt.
+ Place the adjusting strap on the ground, eyeleted edge to the front;
+place the pocket sections on the ground in prolongation of the
+adjusting strap, pockets down, tops of pockets to the front; insert
+end of adjusting strap in outer loop of metal guide, from the upper
+side, carry it under the middle bar and up through the inner loop;
+engage the wire hook on the end of adjusting strap in the eyelets;
+provided on the inner surface of the belt.
+
+(b) To adjust the belt.
+ Adjust the belt to fit loosely about the waist--i.e., so that when
+buckled it may rest well down over the hip bones on the sides of the
+body and below the pit of the abdomen in front. Care should be taken
+that the adjustment be made equally from both ends of the adjusting
+strap, so that the center eyelet will be in the middle of the belt.
+
+(c) To fill the belt.
+ Unsnap the flap of the pocket and the interior retaining strap; lay
+the retaining strap out flat in prolongation of the pocket, insert a
+clip of cartridges, points of bullets up, in front of the retaining
+strap; press down until the base of the clip rests on the bottom of
+the pocket; pass the retaining strap over the bullet points and fasten
+it to the outside of the pocket by means of the fastener provided;
+insert a second clip of cartridges, points of bullets down, in rear of
+the first clip; press down until the points of the bullets rest on the
+bottom of the pocket; close the flap of the pocket and fasten by means
+of the fastener provided.
+
+The remaining nine pockets are filled in like manner.
+
+2. TO ATTACH THE FIRST-AID POUCH.--Attach the pouch under the second
+pocket of the right section of the belt by inserting one hook of the
+double-hook attachment in the eyelet, from the inside of the belt;
+pinch the base of the pocket, bringing eyelets close together, and
+insert the other hook in the same manner in the adjoining eyelet.
+ Place the first-aid packet in the pouch and secure the cover.
+
+3. TO ATTACH THE CANTEEN COVER.--Attach the canteen cover to the belt
+under the rear pocket of the right section in the same manner as the
+first-aid pouch.
+ Place the canteen and cup (assembled) in the cover and secure the
+flaps.
+
+4. TO ATTACH THE PACK CARRIER TO THE HAVERSACK.--Spread the haversack
+on the ground, inner side down, outer flap to the front (Fig. 4);
+place the buttonholed edge of the pack carrier on the buttonholed edge
+of the haversack, lettered side of carrier up; buttonholes of carrier
+superimposed upon the corresponding ones of the haversack; lace the
+carrier to the haversack by passing the ends of the coupling strap
+down through the corresponding buttonholes of the carrier and
+haversack nearest the center of the carrier, bringing the ends up
+through the next buttonholes and continuing to the right and left,
+respectively, to the sides.
+
+5. TO ATTACH THE CARTRIDGE BELT TO THE HAVERSACK.--Place the haversack
+and pack carrier (assembled) on the ground, inner side down (Fig. 5);
+place the cartridge belt, pockets down, tops to the front, along the
+junction of the haversack and carrier; insert hook on rear of belt
+suspender in the center eyelet of the adjusting strap, so that the end
+of the hook will be on the outside of the belt; insert hooks on ends
+of front belt suspenders in the eyelets between the second and third
+pockets from the outer ends of the belt, so that the end of the hooks
+will be on the outside of the belt.
+
+6. TO ATTACH THE BAYONET SCABBARD TO THE HAVERSACK.--Attach the
+scabbard by passing its lower end through the loop provided on the
+side of the haversack body, then engage the double-hook attachment in
+the eyelets on the outer flap on the haversack, inserting the hooks
+from the inside.
+ Place the bayonet in the scabbard.
+
+7. TO ATTACH THE INTRENCHING TOOL CARRIER TO THE HAVERSACK.--Fold the
+outer flap of the haversack over so that the meat-can pouch is
+uppermost; pass the intrenching tool carrier underneath the meat-can
+pouch and engage the double-hook attachment in the eyelets in the flap
+provided, inserting the hooks from the underside.
+ Place the intrenching tool in the carrier and secure.
+ Place the meat-can, knife, fork, and spoon in the meat-can pouch.
+ The equipment is now assembled and is never disassembled except to
+detach the pack carrier and its contents as hereinafter provided for.
+
+
+To ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.
+
+(_With Rations._)
+
+Place the assembled equipment on the ground, suspender side of
+haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversack spread out,
+inside flap and pack carrier extended their full length to the rear
+(Fig. 6).
+
+Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haversack body,
+the lower one on the line of attachment of the inside flap; lay the
+remaining carton of hard bread, the condiment can and the bacon can on
+the top of these, the condiment can and the bacon can at the bottom,
+top of the bacon can to the front; the socks and toilet articles are
+rolled, towel on the outside, into a bundle of the same approximate
+dimensions as a carton of hard bread, and are placed in front of the
+two rows thus formed.
+
+The inside flap of the haversack is folded over these articles, the
+end of the flap being turned in so that the flap, thus shortened,
+extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row; the sides of
+the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows; the upper binding
+straps are passed through the loops on the outside of the inside flap,
+each strap through the loop opposite the point of its attachment to
+the haversack body, and fastened by means of the buckle on the
+opposite side, the strap being passed through the opening in the
+buckle next to its attachment, over the center bar, and back through
+the opening of the buckle away from its attachment; the strap is
+pulled tight to make the fastening secure; the outer flap of the
+haversack is folded over and fastened by means of the lower haversack
+binding strap and the buckle on the inside of the outer flap; the
+strap is pulled tight, drawing the outer flap snugly over the filled
+haversack.
+
+The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the reception
+of the pack (Fig. 7).
+
+If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu
+of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner
+described above, except that two cartons of hard bread and the bacon
+can form the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom; the condiment
+can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles form the top layer.
+
+If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack
+rations, it is packed on top of the top layer.
+
+TO MAKE THE PACK (Fig. 8).--Spread the shelter half on the ground and
+fold in the triangular ends, forming an approximate square from the
+half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once across its shortest
+dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, and lay it in the
+center of the shelter half; fold the blanket as described for the
+poncho and place it on the latter; place the shelter tent pins in the
+folds of the blanket, in the center and across the shortest dimension;
+fold the edges of the shelter half snugly over the blanket and poncho
+and, beginning on either of the short sides, roll tightly and
+compactly. This forms the pack.
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK (Fig. 9).--Place the pack in the pack carrier and
+grasp the lower suspension rings, one in each hand; place the right
+knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down and force
+the pack up close against the bottom of the packed haversack; without
+removing the knee, pass the lower carrier binding strap over the pack
+and secure it by means of the opposite buckle; in a similar manner
+secure the lower haversack binding strap and then the upper carrier
+binding strap.
+ Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the lower suspension
+rings.
+ The equipment is now assembled and packed as prescribed for the full
+equipment.
+
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.
+
+(_Without Rations._)
+
+Place the assembled equipment on the ground as heretofore described;
+fold up the inside flap of the haversack so that its end will be on a
+line with the top of the haversack body; fold up the lower haversack
+strap in the same manner.
+
+TO MAKE UP THE PACK.--Fold the poncho, blanket and shelter half, and
+make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except that the condiment
+and bacon can (the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles
+and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case the pack is rolled,
+beginning on either of the long sides instead of the short sides, as
+heretofore described.
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK.--Place the pack on the haversack and pack
+carrier, its upper end on a line with the upper edge of the haversack
+body; bind it to the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack
+and pack binding straps; fold down the outer flap on the haversack and
+secure it by means of the free end of the middle haversack banding
+strap and the buckle provided on the underside of the flap; engage the
+snap hooks of the pack suspenders in the lower suspension rings.
+
+The equipment is now packed and assembled (Fig. 10).
+
+TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER.--Put on the equipment,
+slipping the arms one at a time through the pack suspenders as through
+the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting buckles on the belt
+suspenders, raise or lower the belt until it rests well down over the
+hip bones on the sides and below the pit of the abdomen in front;
+raise or lower it in rear until the adjusting strap lies smoothly
+across the small of the back; by means of the adjusting buckles on the
+pack suspenders, raise or lower the load on the back until the top of
+the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders, the pack
+suspenders, from their point of attachment to the haversack to the
+line of tangency with the shoulder, being horizontal. _The latter is
+absolutely essential to the proper adjustment of the load_.
+
+The position of the belt is the same whether filled or empty.
+
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.
+
+(_With Rations._)
+
+(Fig. 11.)
+
+Detach the carrier from, the haversack; place the rest of the
+equipment on the ground as heretofore described; place the four
+cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the condiment can, and the
+toilet articles in one row in the middle of the haversack body, the
+toilet articles at the top, the bacon can at the bottom, top to the
+front, the row extending from top to bottom of the haversack; fold the
+inside flap over the row thus formed; fold the sides of the haversack
+up and over; pass the three haversack binding straps through the loops
+on the inside flap and secure by means of the buckles on the opposite
+side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding strap through
+the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the haversack, fold the
+outer flap of the haversack over the whole and secure by means of the
+buckle on its underside and the lower haversack binding strap.
+
+Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes
+in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the
+ends of the pack suspenders.
+
+If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu
+of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner
+described above, except that one emergency ration is substituted for
+two of the cartons of hard bread.
+
+If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack
+rations, it is packed on top of the layer.
+
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.
+
+(_Without Rations._)
+
+Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the equipment
+on the ground as heretofore described; fold up the inside flap of the
+haversack until its upper end is on a line with the top of the
+haversack body; fold the sides of the haversack over, pass the three
+haversack binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and
+secure by means of the buckles on the opposite side of the haversack;
+pass the lower haversack binding strap through the small buttonhole in
+the lower edge of the haversack; place the condiment and bacon can
+(the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles and socks in
+the bottom of the pouch thus formed; fold the outer flap of the
+haversack over the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its
+underside and the lower haversack binding strap.
+
+Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes
+in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the
+ends of the pack suspenders.
+
+TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER.--Put on the equipment as
+prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the cartridge belt as
+prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack suspenders so that
+the top of the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders.
+
+
+TO DISCARD THE PACK WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE BODY.
+
+Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap them
+into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of the rear pockets of
+the right and left pocket sections; support the bottom of the pack
+with the left hand and with the right hand grasp the coupling strap at
+its middle and withdraw first one end, then the other; press down
+gently on the pack with both hands and remove it. When the pack has
+been removed, lace the coupling strap into the buttonholes along the
+upper edge of the carrier. Adjust the pack suspenders.
+
+For illustration of how packs are made up and carried, see Privates'
+Manual, Chapter 2.
+
+
+CARE OF EQUIPMENT.
+
+LEATHER.--1. Keep leather clean. Use material furnished by Ordnance
+Department, or castile soap and water.
+
+2. Oil leather frequently to keep it pliable. Use Neatsfoot oil,
+Viscol or Harness soap.
+
+3. Dry in the shade; never in the sun or in artificial heat. Always
+store in a cool, dry place without artificial heat. Shoe polishes are
+almost always injurious.
+
+WOOLEN CLOTHES.--Wash in tepid or cold water with a non-alkaline soap;
+do not wring it out; dry in the shade.
+
+MENDING.--Always keep equipment ready for use.
+
+CLOTH EQUIPMENT.--DRY CLEANING.--Scrub with a stiff brush frequently.
+
+WASHING.--Only under the direction of an officer.
+
+Dissolve 1 piece of Q.M. soap (not yellow), in 9 cups of water. One
+cup will clean the equipment of one man. Apply with a brush and lather
+well. Rub soap directly on persistent spots. Wash off in cold water
+and dry in the shade.
+
+
+INSTRUCTIONS ON MAKING PACKS.
+
+FOUR METHODS:
+
+ Full equipment with rations.
+ Full equipment without rations.
+ Full equipment less pack, with rations.
+ Full equipment less pack, without rations.
+
+ Haversack, Weight 9-1/4
+ Carrier Cartridge belt, canteen, Weight 11-1/2
+ Suspenders Mess Rations Weight 10-1/2
+ Mess pouch Gun 9
+ Clothing 7
+ -------
+ 40
+
+ADJUSTING CARTRIDGE BELT.--1. Fits loosely around waist. 2. Resting on
+hips. 3. Hole between buckles. Insert ammunition: First, clip in
+front, points up, fastened with retaining strap, Second clip points
+down. First aid pouch under 4th pocket, left. Canteen under rear
+pocket, right. Bayonet between 3rd and 4th pocket, left. (New bayonet
+scabbard fastens on haversack.)
+
+
+DISTRIBUTION OF INTRENCHING TOOLS IN THE SQUADS.
+
+ No. 3 rear of each odd-numbered squad ... Bolo
+ No. 3 rear of each even-numbered squad ... Hand Axe.
+ No. 1 rear of each squad ... Pick Mattock.
+ Nos. 1, 2 and 3 front of each squad ... Shovels
+ No. 2 rear of each squad ... Wire Cutter.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 3.
+
+Physical Training.
+
+
+Only the carefully trained and conditioned man can make victory
+possible. For this reason the first and most important concern of a
+nation at war is the physical training of its soldiers.
+
+The setting-up exercises are the basis for all other activities and
+their disciplinary value is almost as great as their physical value.
+
+PHYSICAL TRAINING.--Each period should include exercises for all parts
+of the body. Following the setting-up exercises the following should
+be given in the order named: marching, jumping, double timing,
+gymnastic contests, and concluding or restorative exercises.
+
+Rifle exercises have for their purpose the development of "handiness"
+with the piece. They should be used moderately and with frequent
+rests, for they develop big muscles at the expense of agility--a
+muscle bound man cannot use his strength.
+
+BAYONET TRAINING in addition to its military value calls into play
+every muscle of the body and makes for alertness, agility, quick
+perception, decision, aggressiveness and confidence.
+
+
+Time Schedule.
+
+A.M. (Begins 1/2 hour P.M. (End 1/2 hour
+after breakfast): before retreat):
+
+1. Disciplinary exercises, 1. Bayonet training, 30
+ 2 minutes. minutes.
+2. Starting positions, 1 2. Games and contests,
+ minute. 30 minutes.
+3. Setting up exercises, Alternating daily with:
+ 20 minutes. 1. Bombing practice, 20
+4. Marching and marching minutes.
+ exercises, 5 to 8 2. Conditioning exercises,
+ minutes. 15 minutes.
+5. Jumping, 5 to 8 minutes. Double timing.
+6. Double timing, 5 minutes Vaulting and overcoming
+ obstacles.
+ 3. Rifle practice, 10 minutes.
+
+Instructions must be:
+
+ 1. An inspiration to the men.
+ 2. Well prepared themselves.
+ 3. Stripped for action.
+ 4. An example to the men.
+ 5. Must make drill attractive.
+ 6. Never have men overdo. Temper the exercises to the endurance of
+ the weakest man.
+ 7. Accompany every exercise with the proper breathing.
+ 8. See that the men are clothed according to the season.
+ 9. Have the drills short and snappy.
+ 10. Have frequent rests at the beginning--less frequent as work
+ progresses.
+
+The platoon is the best unit for physical drills.
+
+FORMATIONS.--When exercising in small squads, the men "fall in" in a
+single rank and, after having "counted off" by fours, threes or twos,
+as the instructor may direct, distance is taken at the command: Take
+distance, March, Squad Halt. At "March" No. 1 moves forward, being
+followed by the other numbers at intervals of four paces. Halt is
+commanded when all have taken their distances.
+
+At the discretion of the instructor the distance may be any number of
+paces, the men being first cautioned to that effect.
+
+When distance is taken from the double rank, No. 1 of the rear rank
+follows No. 4 of the front rank, and he is in turn followed by the
+other numbers of the rear rank.
+
+If the instructor desires the files to cover, he commands: In file
+_Cover_. Nos. 1 stand fast, the others moving to the right with the
+side step, until the Nos. 1 are covered.
+
+To return to the original formation, the instructor commands: Assemble
+March. No. 1 of the front rank stands fast and the other members move
+forward to their original places.
+
+_Second Formation._ To the right and left. Take interval, March.
+
+_Front Rank:_ _Rear Rank:_
+No. 1, 6 steps right step. No. 1, 3 steps right step.
+No. 2, 3 steps right step. No. 2, Stands fast.
+No. 3, Stands fast. No. 3, 3 steps left step.
+No. 4, 3 steps left step. No. 4, 6 steps left step.
+
+
+Commands.
+
+KINDS OF COMMANDS, AND HOW GIVEN.--There are two kinds, _preparatory_
+and _executive_.
+
+The _preparatory command_ describes and specifies what is desired and
+the _executive command_ calls what has been described into action.
+
+The tone of the command should always be animated, distinct, and of a
+loudness proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.
+
+Instructors should cultivate a proper command, as its value as a
+tributary to the success of any military drill cannot be
+overestimated.
+
+After an exercise has been described, its various movements or parts
+should be performed at _executive words_, which indicate not only the
+movement that is desired but the manner of the execution. Thus: 1.
+Trunk forward, 2. Bend, 3. Recover (or Raise), here the word _bend_ is
+drawn to indicate moderately slow execution; the recovery being a
+little faster, the word _recover_ should be spoken to indicate it.
+
+The word Recover should always be used to bring the men back to the
+original position.
+
+If it is desired to continue an exercise, the command Exercise should
+be used and the cadence or rhythm should be indicated by words or
+numerals. If numerals are used, they should equal the number of
+movements composing the exercise. Thus an exercise of two movements
+will be repeated at _one, two_; one of four movements will require
+four counts, etc.
+
+The numeral or word preceding the command Halt should always be given
+with a rising inflection in order to prepare the men for the command
+Halt.
+
+Thus: 1. Thrust arms forward, 2. Exercise one, two, one, two, one,
+Halt.
+
+If any movement of any exercise is to be performed with more energy
+than the others, the word or numeral corresponding to that movement
+should be emphasized.
+
+FIRST LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. 1. Attention; 2. At Ease; 3.
+Rest; 4. Facings.
+ B. Starting Positions. (m.p.t., pp. 25 to 29.)
+ C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions)[P]:
+
+ 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and forward.
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head backward; same, forward.
+ (38.)
+ 4. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn trunk right; same, left. (40.)
+ 5. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Half bend knees slowly. (35.)
+ 6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.)
+ 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Raise and lower shoulders. (32.)
+ 8. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right; same,
+ left. (37.)
+ 9. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Stretch arms sideward. (43.)
+ 10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Raise knees forward alternatingly.
+ (41.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward; exhale,
+ lowering arms.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in column in quick time and halting.
+ 2. Same, marking time, marching forward and halting.
+ 3. Same, marching on toes.
+
+[Footnote P: Note.--Jumping and double-timing exercises and contests
+should not be included in the first week's work.
+Bracketed numbers refer to pages in "Manual of Physical Training,"
+where similar exercises are illustrated and described.]
+
+
+SECOND LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. Same as in first lesson.
+ B. Starting positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions):
+
+ 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms sideward.
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right; same, left. (41.)
+ 4. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Turn trunk sideward, right;
+ same, left. (40.)
+ 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Full bend knees, slowly. (39.)
+ 6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.)
+ 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward and
+ backward. (35.)
+ 8. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right; same,
+ left. (31.)
+ 9. From Attention. Stretch arms forward and sideward.
+ 10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend right and left leg forward.
+ (44.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward and upward;
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in column in quick time, mark time, marching in
+ quick time and halting. (88.)
+ 2. Marching on toes. (89.)
+ 3. Marching on toes and rocking.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Rise on toes and arms forward, 2 Raise. Swing arms downward
+ and bend knees; swing arms forward and extend knees, and
+ recover Attention.
+ 2. Jumping in place. (193.)
+
+ F. Double Timing:
+
+ 1. Double timing, change to quick time and halting. (92.)
+
+ G. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Breathing exercise, raising and lowering arms sideward.
+
+
+THIRD LESSON.--A disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson.
+ B. Starting Positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises:
+
+ 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and sideward. (4
+ motions.)
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on right and left toes,
+ alternatingly. (4 motions.) (46.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head forward and backward. (4
+ motions.) (38.)
+ 4. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4
+ motions.) (53.)
+ 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes and full bend knees
+ slowly. (4 motions.) (39.)
+ 6. Fingers in rear of head, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (2
+ motions.) (42.)
+ 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward, upward,
+ backward, and recover. (4 motions.)
+ 8. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right, and
+ left. (4 motions.) (37.)
+ 9. From Attention. Stretch arms sideward, upward, sideward, and
+ recover. (4 motions.)
+ 10. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (2
+ motions.) (34.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2 Place. Extend right and left leg backward.
+ (2 motions.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms forward, upward; and
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward, down.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in quick time, raising knees. (89.)
+ 2. Thrusting arms sideward.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Standing broad jump.
+ 2. Three successive broad jumps.
+
+ F. Double Timing:
+
+ 1. Double timing. (92.)
+ 2. Double timing, marking time in the double and forward.
+ 3. Double timing and halting from the double.
+
+ G. Gymnastic Contests. Two of these games should be included in
+ each lesson. See pp. 39-40.
+ H. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Breathing exercise, as in 12.
+
+
+FOURTH LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson.
+ B. Starting Positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises:
+
+ 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Extend arms forward; swing
+ sideward, forward, and recover. (4 motions.)
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes quickly. (2 motions.)
+ (33.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right and left. (4
+ motions.) (41.)
+ 4. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4
+ motions.)
+ 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Half bend knees, quickly. (2
+ motions.) (35.)
+ 6. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk forward. (2 motions.)
+ 7. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Move elbows forward, and
+ stretch backward. (2 motions.) (45.)
+ 8. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right and left.
+ (4 motions.)
+ 9. From Attention. Stretch, arms forward, sideward, upward,
+ sideward, forward, and recover. (6 motions.)
+ 10. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk backward. (2 motions.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend legs sideward. (2 motions.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: 1. Inhale, raising arms forward, upward;
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in quick time, raising knees, and rising on toes of
+ other foot.
+ 2. Raising heels.
+ 3. Thrusting arms sideward.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Three successive standing broad jumps.
+ 2. Jumping in place, raising knees.
+
+ F. Double Timing:
+
+ 1. Double timing.
+ 2. Raising heels.
+ 3. Double timing, sideward, crossing legs.
+
+ G. Gymnastic Contests.
+ H. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Swing arms forward, upward, relaxed.
+ 2. Breathing exercise, as in 12.
+
+
+FIFTH LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises.
+ B. Starting Positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises:
+
+ 1. Arms to thrust. Thrust arms upward; swing downward; forward;
+ upward, and recover. (4 motions.) (55.)
+ 2. Hands in rear of head. Rise on toes and rock. (2 motions.)
+ (39.)
+ 3. Hands on hips. Bend head forward and backward. (4 motions.)
+ 4. Hands on shoulders. Turn trunk right and left, stretching
+ arms sideward. (4 motions.) (52.)
+ 5. Full bend knees. Hands on ground between knees, squatting
+ position, extend right and left leg backward, alternatingly.
+ (4 motions.) (65.)
+ 6. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk forward and stretch arms
+ sideward. (2 motions.) (51.)
+ 7. From Attention. Curl shoulders forward and stretch backward.
+ (2 motions.) (38.)
+ 8. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk sideward, right and left,
+ extending arms sideward. (4 motions.) (65.)
+ 9. From Attention. Flex forearms vertically; extend upward; flex
+ and recover. (4 motions.) (54.)
+ 10. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk backward, stretching arms
+ sideward. (2 motions.) (56.)
+ 11. From Attention. Raise arms forward and extend leg forward;
+ stretch arms sideward, extending leg backward; move arms and
+ leg to first position and recover Attention. (4 motions.)
+ (53.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Raise arms sideward; upward; and lower
+ laterally quickly. (4 motions.)
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. March in quick time and swing extended leg forward, ankle
+ high.
+ 2. Raising knee and hopping on other foot.
+ 3. From arms forward. Swing arms upward.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Standing hop, step and jump.
+ 2. Preliminary running broad jumps.
+ 3. Broad jump from a walking start of four paces. (197.)
+
+ F. Double timing.
+
+ 1. Double timing.
+ 2. Double timing sideward, crossing leg in front.
+ 3. Double timing, raising knees.
+
+ G. Gymnastic Contests.
+ H. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Bend trunk forward and backward, relaxed.
+ 2. Breathing exercise, as in 12.
+
+For further work for recruits and work to be given trained soldiers,
+see Special Regulation No. 23, "Field Physical Training of the
+Soldier."
+
+To prevent grumbling, keep men at work. Idle men are the ones who
+growl. The French consider periods spent in the trenches as periods of
+rest; instead of letting the men go on pass when relieved, they
+restore discipline by close order drill.
+
+The physical benefit is less than half of physical exercises. There
+should be mental exertion in every exercise. But the most important
+part is the disciplinary benefit. The exercises must teach men to jump
+at commands, and by this means must make the organization a
+homogeneous mass.
+
+The principal thing in the position of attention is "chest lifted; and
+arched." There should be a stretch upward at the waist. The position
+should give the impression of a man as proud of himself as he can be.
+This is a bluff which works, not only by making a good first
+impression on others, but by causing the man himself to live up to it.
+
+Insist on precision. Especially when men are losing interest, don't
+let the work sag, but make it interesting by requiring concentration.
+At the beginning of each exercise, wake the men up by calling them to
+attention until they do it well, giving the facings, etc.
+
+COMMANDS.--There is a tone at which each voice carries best. Each man
+must find it for himself. To make commands understood, enunciate
+carefully with lips and teeth. Sound especially first and last letters
+of words. Officer's posture adds to effect of command. His personality
+is impressed on his men largely by his voice. Preparatory command
+should be vibrant and cheerful--not a harsh tone that grates on the
+men and antagonizes them. The command of execution must be short and
+sharp; drill can be made or marred by it.
+
+MARCHING.--A cadence faster than 120 a minute adds snap to marching,
+but snap can not be gained in proportion as the cadence is run up.
+Snap is attained chiefly by the proper gait. Soldiers should march,
+not with knees always slightly bent, but should straighten them
+smartly at the end of each step. This adds drive to the step, and
+gives the men confidence and a mob spirit of courage. After long drill
+at attention, this spirit can be carried into extended order work.
+
+Marching exercises are useful and can be greatly varied. The command
+"Exercise" should always be given as the left foot strikes the ground.
+"Exercise" is a command of execution, and the first movement should be
+executed at once when it is given. The count "One" is given when this
+first position is reached. The command to stop all marching exercises
+is "Quick time--March."
+
+In all exercises the instructor should cultivate the ability to pick
+mistakes. He can develop this until he can watch much larger groups
+than at first.
+
+
+Voice Culture.
+
+Mastery of the voice is a necessity for every officer; for without it
+the giving of commands will soon make his throat look and feel like a
+piece of raw Hamburg steak. Quality of voice is more effective than
+quantity. Brute force may produce a roar that has tremendous volume at
+a short distance; but the sound will not carry unless it is so placed
+that it gets the benefit of the resonance spaces in the head. If the
+tone is produced properly, so that it has the singing quality
+necessary in all right commands, quantity of tone will come of itself.
+
+This singing quality has nothing to do with music; it may be attained
+by a man who can hardly distinguish a bar of music from a bar of soap.
+It depends upon three principles, which are very simple in themselves
+but can not be applied without careful practise. The first covers
+proper use of the breath. Air must be drawn into the lungs by
+expanding the diaphragm and abdomen, a process best seen in the
+natural breathing of a man who is lying on his back with all muscles
+relaxed. Filling the upper part of the lungs by raising the chest puts
+the work on the comparatively small muscles between the ribs; but
+filling the base of the lungs by pulling downward brings into play the
+diaphragm, the largest muscle in the body. The sensation which
+accompanies proper deep control of the breath is as if the tone were
+not pushed out of the mouth, but drawn in and upwards. It is partly
+described by the phrases of singing teachers, "drawn tone" and
+"singing on the breath."
+
+The diaphragm must not only relieve the muscles between the ribs, but,
+still more important, the small muscles of the throat. The second
+great principle of voice production is that the throat must be
+perfectly relaxed. Any tension there interferes with the free
+vibration which is essential for strong and resonant tone. This
+relaxation is most easily gained by drawing the chin in slightly,
+loosening the muscles under it. The base of the tongue can be relaxed
+by rolling the letter "R," even to the extent of making two syllables
+of such words as "gr-rand." Talking with the teeth closed loosely will
+also help to ease incorrect, tension about the throat. If the throat
+is properly relaxed, there will be no sensation in it during the
+production of the voice. Any sensation between the diaphragm and the
+resonance chambers of the head is a sign of wrong and harmful tension.
+
+The use of these resonance chambers is required by the third
+principle--that the tone must be reinforced by resonance in all the
+hollow spaces of the head. These are found in the nose, above the
+palate and even above the eyes. They have the same effect as the
+sounding board of a musical instrument, in giving quality to the tone.
+The best way to put this principle into practice is to learn the
+sensation of the clear and ringing tone which is produced by proper
+placing of the voice. Exercises containing the letters "M" and "N"
+will give this effect. This does not mean that the sound should be
+nasal; it should be made in the nose, but not through it. Another way
+to increase resonance is to think of crying the words rather than
+talking them. A slightly whining intonation or a sound like that of a
+laugh has more ring to it than an ordinary flat talking tone.
+
+These principles should not be neglected because they are simple. They
+can not be mastered without work, and unless they are mastered the
+voice will not be heard at a distance and will not last under the work
+of giving commands. Further suggestions on the manner of giving
+commands will be found under Physical Training.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 4.
+
+Use of Modern Arms.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #3]
+
+
+Small Arms Firing.
+
+Under this heading we have many phases of the training and exercises
+given to our armed forces. It has been found best to use simple every
+day methods to get the best results.
+
+There are two principal factors--the rifle and the pistol. The former
+only will be taken up now. The scheme is to make the soldier a good
+shot singly and collectively, in time of peace and in time of war.
+
+The course of instruction at this camp was arranged as follows:
+
+ (a) Nomenclature and care of the rifle.
+ (b) Sighting drills.
+ (c) Position and aiming drills.
+ (d) Deflection and aiming drills.
+ (e) Range practice.
+ (f) Estimating distance drill.
+ (g) Combat firing.
+
+(a) Every man should be taught the names of the principal parts (see
+cut) of the rifle and how to clean and keep it clean.
+
+(b) If time permits, the sighting bar described on page 26, s.a.f.m.
+should be used. To illustrate the normal and peep sight make a drawing
+on a blackboard of page 30, s.a.f.m.
+
+Using a sand bag or some convenient rest for the rifle. The instructor
+sights it on some object showing the normal and peep sight. Using the
+above rests have a marker hold a disk against a large piece of paper
+towards which the rifle is pointed. There is a pin hole in the center
+of the bull's eye on the disk. The range should be about 50 feet, and
+the bull's eye about 1 inch in diameter. The marker moves it about
+until the man sighting tells him to "hold," at which time he marks the
+center with the point of a pencil. This is done three times, the three
+points are then connected. The triangle thus formed is then used by
+the instructor to show the man whether he took too much or too little
+front sight or whether he leaned to one side or the other while
+aiming.
+
+Use for this exercise both the normal and peep sight.
+
+To show the effect of canting the piece use a sight setting of 1,000
+yards, take out the bolt, aim the rifle while lying on a sand bag at a
+1-inch bull's eye 50 feet away. Then look through the bore of the
+rifle and have the place where the target would be approximately hit
+by a bullet marked. Cant the piece to the right and aim at the same
+bull's eye. Then look through the bore of the rifle and mark the place
+where the bullet would approximately strike the target. The last mark
+would be lower and to the right of the first mark. It should be
+readily seen that in canting the piece to the right your sight is to
+the right of its original position--that is right windage. Also by
+canting it to the right your elevation is lowered, that is, lessened.
+Canting the piece to the left would make the bullet strike low and to
+the left.
+
+(c) Preliminary command "Position and aiming drill," command of
+execution "Squad (platoon, or company) Ready." At the command "Ready"
+each man faces half right and carries the right foot about 1 foot to
+the right, in such a position that will insure the greatest firmness
+and steadiness, raises the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb along the stock, muzzle at the height of the
+breast. If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is
+similar--if kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh--if
+sitting the elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left
+hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the
+butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. From the
+position of ready the four exercises--position, aiming, trigger
+squeeze, and rapid fire--are given. These exercises given on pages
+38-42, s.a.f.m. should be carefully studied. Do not leave it to the
+sergeant, etc., to do--give your company your own instruction when
+practicable, and in time of battle they will know you and you will
+know them, and there will grow up between you that mutual
+understanding which is necessary for the real success of any
+undertaking. Do not forget to give these exercises in all positions of
+firing, namely, standing, sitting, kneeling, and prone.
+
+(d) A change of one point of windage at the 100 yard range will change
+the point struck by the bullet of the next shot 4 inches. If right
+windage is taken the bullet will strike to the right, if left windage
+is taken it will strike to the left:
+
+ number of
+ Range. windage. direction. inches change.
+ 100 1 point right or left 4
+ 200 1 point right or left 8
+ 300 1 point right or left 12
+ 500 1 point right or left 20
+ 600 1 point right or left 24
+
+Remember to take windage in the direction you want the bullet to
+strike.
+
+A change of 25 yards in your sight setting raises or lowers the point
+struck by the bullet of the next shot at the 100 yards range 1 inch:
+
+ Number inches
+ Range. Change in sight. change on target.
+ 100 25 yards 1
+ 200 25 yards 2
+ 300 25 yards 3
+ 500 25 yards 5
+ 600 25 yards 6
+ 300 75 yards 9
+ 500 150 yards 30
+
+(e) Range practice.
+
+Target details must be thoroughly familiar with paragraphs 106-110,
+s.a.f.m. Scorers must be familiar with the method of recording
+scores. The following schedule is the one that was followed at this
+camp:
+
+SLOW FIRE.
+
+=====+==========+=====+======+==========+====================+==========
+Range| Time |Shots|Target| Position | Sights |Ammunition
+-----|----------|-----|------|----------|--------------------|----------
+ 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | Leaf | Guard
+ 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Kneeling | Leaf | Guard
+ 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Standing | Leaf | Guard
+ 200 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+ 200 | No limit | 15 | A | Kneeling | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+ 300 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+ 300 | No limit | 15 | A | Sitting | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+=====+==========+=====+======+==========+====================+==========
+
+
+RAPID FIRE.
+
+=====+=========+=====+=======+========================+======+==========
+Range| Time |Shots|Target |Position |Sights|Ammunition
+-----|---------|-----|-------|------------------------|------|----------
+ 100 | 1 min | 10 | D | Prone | Leaf | Service
+ 100 | 1 min. | 10 | H | Prone | Leaf | Service
+ 200 | 1 min. | 10 | D | Kneeling from standing | Leaf | Service
+ 200 | 1 min. | 10 | H | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service
+ 300 | 1'-10" | 10 | D | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service
+ 300 | 1'-10" | 10 | H | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service
+=====+=========+=====+=======+========================+======+==========
+
+At each range with the rapid fire 5 additional shots should be fired
+with the battle sight and with half the allotted time.
+
+(f) A course should be laid off in an open field. The base should be
+marked. At least 5 natural objects whose distances are to be estimated
+should be placed so that they are clearly visible from the base. The
+objects should be men standing, kneeling or prone, and should be
+placed from 550 to 1,200 yards from the base. Each company should be
+conducted to the base and extended along it, backs towards the
+objects, in single rank. Each man should have a pencil and paper. The
+objects whose distances are to be estimated are pointed out by the
+company commander and the men told to estimate and record their
+estimates. At the conclusion of the exercise, the company commander
+should read off the correct distances, and have each man figure his
+per cent of error. It is important that the men know the correct
+distances while the objects are still in view.
+
+For record, paragraph 85, s.a.f.m. should be followed.
+
+Remember that there are four principal ways to estimate distances by:
+1, it cannot be more than a certain distance, and it cannot be less
+than a certain distance--take the mean; 2, divide the distance into a
+certain number of familiar lengths; select a halfway point, estimate
+this and multiply by 2; 3, estimate the distance along a parallel
+line, as a road having well defined objects; 4, take the mean of
+several estimates.
+
+(g) In combat the platoon is the fire unit. The fire of the company,
+battalion or regiment is nothing more than the combined fire of all
+the fire units. The enemy can be imaginary, outlined or represented.
+The exercise must be conducted under an assumed tactical situation.
+The commander must lead his men according to the assumptions made by
+the umpire. Signals are used to indicate the enemy's actions,
+strength, etc. The situation should be simple, and after the exercise
+a critique should be held on the ground. Combat practice with ball
+ammunition against disappearing targets, and at estimated ranges, gets
+excellent results. The officer conducting the exercise will prohibit
+the advance if it would be impossible were the enemy real.
+
+Have every man play the game.
+
+A point to be remembered is that for battle sight the sight slide must
+be as far to the rear as it will go. If it is part way up the leaf,
+the drift correction cut in the slot upon which it moves will throw it
+to the left, and left windage will be taken.
+
+Point blank range is 530 yards. Battle sight is set for this distance
+because this is the extreme range at which a bullet would strike a man
+kneeling between the rifle and the target.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #4.]
+
+Pistol.
+
+NOMENCLATURE AND CARE.--The soldier is first taught the nomenclature
+of the parts of the pistol. Ordinance Pamphlet No. 1866 gives this
+information, (See cut of pistol.)
+
+
+MANUAL FOR THE PISTOL.
+
+1. The pistol being in the holster: 1. Raise, 2. Pistol.
+
+At the command Raise, unbutton the flap of the holster with the right
+hand and grasp the stock, back of hand outward.
+
+At the command Pistol, draw the pistol from the holster, reverse it,
+muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three
+fingers; forefinger outside of the guard; barrel to the rear, and
+inclined to the front at an angle of about thirty degrees; hand as
+high as the neck and six inches in front of the point of the right
+shoulder. This is the position of Raise Pistol, and it may be
+similarly taken from any position.
+
+2. To withdraw magazine, pistol in any position: 1. Withdraw. 2.
+Magazine.
+
+At the command Magazine, place pistol, barrel down, in left hand and
+clasp barrel in full grip of left hand, thumb clasped over barrel in
+front of trigger guard, butt of pistol up, barrel pointing to the left
+front and slightly downward. With tip of right forefinger press stud
+releasing magazine and then place tip of same finger under projection
+at front of magazine base. Raise magazine about an inch then close
+thumb and second finger on sides of magazine, giving a secure grasp
+with which it can be withdrawn from socket, placed inside belt (in
+pocket of shirt or otherwise disposed of without throwing it away).
+Right hand then grasps stock, back of hand to the left.
+
+3. To open chamber, the pistol in any position: 1. Open. 2. Chamber.
+
+Carry the pistol to the left hand (if not already there) barrel to the
+left, front end of slide grasped between the thumb and forefinger of
+left hand; right hand grasping stock, back of hand up; right thumb
+under slide stop. Hold left hand steady and push forward with right
+hand till slide reaches end of stroke; engage slide stop, and come to
+Raise Pistol. Should the pistol be cocked and locked, it will be
+unlocked so that the slide can move.
+
+4. To close chamber, being at Raise Pistol, chamber open: 1. Close. 2.
+Chamber.
+
+At the command Chamber, release slide top with right thumb and let
+hammer down gently. To let hammer down, pull downward with point of
+right thumb till hammer presses against grip safety and forces it
+home; then while continuing this pressure on hammer, pull trigger; and
+while continuing pull on trigger, let the hammer down. While letting
+hammer down, grasp stock firmly between the palm and last three
+fingers to prevent pistol rotating in hand.
+
+5. To insert magazine, pistol being in any position, no magazine in
+socket: 1. Insert. 2. Magazine.
+
+Lower pistol into left hand as in Withdrawn Magazine, grasp magazine
+with tip of right forefinger on projection at base of magazine,
+withdraw from pocket and insert in pistol. To make sure that magazine
+is home, strike base of magazine with palm of right hand. Bring the
+pistol to the position of Raise Pistol.
+
+6. To return pistol, being at Raise Pistol: 1. Return. 2. Pistol.
+
+Lower the pistol and raise the flap of the holster with the right
+thumb; insert the pistol in the holster and push it down; button the
+flap with the right hand. If the pistol be loaded and cocked the
+command. 1. Lock, 2. Pistol must precede the command "Return."
+
+7. To load, having loaded magazine in pistol, pistol in any position,
+chamber empty: 1. Load. 2. Pistol.
+
+Place pistol in left hand, barrel down, butt of pistol up, barrel
+pointing to left front and downward, slide grasped between thumb and
+forefinger. Push forward with right hand until the slide is fully
+open, then release slide allowing it to move forward and load
+cartridge into chamber. Come to Raise Pistol. If the last shot in the
+magazine has been fired, to reload; same command, but execute
+Withdrawn Magazine, Insert Magazine, Close Chamber. As soon as the
+pistol is loaded, it will be immediately locked by the commands. 1.
+Lock. 2. Pistol. Should the command for locking pistol be
+inadvertently omitted it will be locked without command.
+
+8. To unload pistol, being in any position, loaded:
+
+Execute by the commands, Withdraw Magazine, Open Chamber, Close
+Chamber, Insert Magazine.
+
+9. To inspect pistol, it being in the holster: 1. Inspection. 2.
+Pistol.
+
+Execute, Raise Pistol.
+
+To inspect the pistol more minutely, add 3. Withdraw. 4. Magazine. 5.
+Open. 6. Chamber.
+
+To avoid accidents, individual men out of ranks, in barracks or camp
+will first Withdraw Magazine then Open Chamber whenever the pistol is
+removed from the holster for cleaning, for examination, or for any
+other purpose. Accidental discharges will not occur if the above rule
+is always observed, and failure to observe it must be considered a
+military offense, whether or not accident results.
+
+10. Whenever men fall in ranks with the automatic pistol the officer
+or non-commissioned officer in charge will command:
+
+ 1. Raise, 2. Pistol;
+ 1. Withdraw, 2. Magazine;
+ 1. Open, 2. Chamber;
+ 1. Close, 2. Chamber.
+
+ 1. Insert, 2. Magazine.
+ 1. Return, 2. Pistol.
+
+When falling in the above commands are given after chamber of rifles
+have been opened and closed, and the order resumed--the rifle being
+held against the left wrist. The commander of any company or
+detachment thereof is responsible for giving the necessary commands to
+put the pistols in a safe condition.
+
+11. The pistol with cartridge in chamber is habitually carried cocked
+and locked, whether in the hand or in the holster. The hammer will not
+be lowered while a cartridge is in the chamber.
+
+12. In campaign, the pistol should habitually be carried with a
+magazine in the socket, loaded with seven ball cartridges, chamber
+empty, hammer down. The extra magazines should also be loaded with
+seven ball cartridges each.
+
+When action seems imminent, the pistol should be loaded by command. It
+may then be returned by command to the holster till the time for its
+use arrives.
+
+13. Recruits are first taught the motions of loading and firing
+without using cartridges. However, the automatic action and the effect
+of ball cartridges in operating the slide cannot be taught without
+firing ball cartridges. Practice without cartridges is very necessary
+to acquire facility in the exact movements of the manual and in
+aiming, holding and trigger squeeze.
+
+To execute the movements without cartridges, first Withdraw Magazine,
+Open Chamber, and Examine both Pistols and magazines to assure that
+none contain ball cartridges.
+
+14. All the movements in loading pistol should be practiced without
+looking at it. In order to do this successfully it is necessary to
+know exactly where the magazines are carried so the hand may find them
+without fumbling. Also, since the projection at the front of the
+magazine base is on the same side as the bullets, and the magazine
+must be inserted in the socket with these to the front, the magazine
+should be carried in the pocket with the projection to the left and
+should be withdrawn from the pocket with the same grasp as is
+prescribed for Withdrawn Magazine.
+
+15. This manual must be practiced with all the precision and exactness
+required for the manual for the rifle. Accidents will be reduced to a
+minimum and familiarity with the pistol gained.
+
+
+POSITION
+
+Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced and erect and
+turned at such an angle as is most comfortable when the arm is
+extended toward the target; the feet far enough apart (about 8 to 10
+inches) as to insure steadiness; weight of body borne equally upon
+both feet; right arm fully extended but not locked; left arm hanging
+naturally.
+
+THE GRIP.--Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and last
+three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the thumb
+extended along the stock. The barrel hand and fore-arm should be as
+nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed toward the
+target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors but
+should be firm enough to avoid losing grip. The lower the stock is
+grasped the greater will be the movement or jump of the muzzle caused
+by recoil. If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of
+the stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon
+toward the opposite side.
+
+The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle,
+generally to the left. The position and pressure of the thumb along
+the stock overcomes much of this movement.
+
+To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same
+grip for each shot, not only must the hand grasp the stock at the same
+point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uniform.
+
+THE TRIGGER SQUEEZE.--The trigger must be squeezed in the same manner
+as in rifle firing. The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger
+should be steadily increased and should be straight back, not
+sideways. The pressure should continue to that point beyond which the
+slightest movement will release the sear. Then when the aim is true,
+the additional pressure is applied and the pistol fired. When the
+pistol is fired the greatest effort should be taken to hold the pistol
+to the mark as nearly as possible. This will be of great benefit in
+automatic firing.
+
+POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS.--The Squad is formed with an interval of
+one pace between files. Black pasters are used as aiming points. The
+pasters are ten paces distant from the squad. The instructor command,
+1. Raise, 2. Pistol and cautions "Position and Aiming Drill." The men
+take the position prescribed in paragraph 3. At the command, 1. Squad,
+2. Fire, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly horizontal, the
+pistol directed at a point; about six inches below the bull's-eye. At
+the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger guard and
+gradually feel the trigger. Inhale enough air to comfortably fill the
+lungs and gradually raise the piece until the line of sight is
+directed at the point of aim, _i.e._, just below the bull's-eye at six
+o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark, gradually
+increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that point where
+the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. Then, when
+the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece
+is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the sights.
+The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the hammer
+falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the squeezing
+of the trigger has had on his aim.
+
+When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position
+the exercise is conducted "At Will."
+
+QUICK FIRE.--Being at the Raise Pistol, chamber and magazine empty, 1.
+Quick Fire Exercise, 2. One. Lower the forearm until it is nearly
+horizontal, pistol pointing at the target, 3. Two. Thrust the pistol
+forward to the position of aim, snapping the pistol just before the
+arm reaches its full extension. Then look through sights to verify the
+pointing. 4. Three. Return to Raise Pistol and cock the pistol.
+
+In this exercise the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon the mark.
+He should constantly practice pointing the pistol until he acquires
+the ability to direct it on the mark in the briefest interval of time
+and practically without the aid of the sights. In other words, the
+pistol in this exercise is accurately pointed instead of accurately
+aimed. In night firing pointing the pistol is the only method that can
+be used. After careful practice in this exercise it is surprising what
+good results can be obtained at night.
+
+This exercise should then be practiced from the position of the pistol
+in the holster instead of Raise Pistol.
+
+CLASSES OF FIRE: 1. SLOW FIRE.--As described above. Target L or A or
+improvised target.
+
+2. QUICK FIRE.--Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked, at the command
+"Commence Firing" fire and return to Raise Pistol after each shot
+following the principles of Quick Fire Exercise. Target E, five yards
+apart, one for each man firing. This firing should be done by the
+numbers as described in Quick Fire Exercise.
+
+3. AUTOMATIC FIRE (TARGET E).--Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked.
+At the command "Commence Firing" empty the magazine in seven seconds,
+keeping the arm extended. Target E, 5 yards apart, one for each man
+firing.
+
+4. TRENCH FIRE (TARGET E).--Two lines of targets. The first line is
+composed of F targets, 5 yards apart, one figure for each man firing.
+The second line is composed of two E figures, one yard apart, for each
+man firing, placed in a trench immediately in rear of the figures of
+the first line. This gives for each firer a group of three figures,
+one placed on top at the near edge of the trench and the other two in
+the trench immediately in rear. In case a trench is not available the
+rifle pit can be used. A gutter, sunken road, embankment, or hedge can
+be used for this purpose so long as trench fire is simulated.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #5. TRENCH TARGET COURSE FOR THE AUTOMATIC
+PISTOL.]
+
+The firing line advances at a walk from 100 yards takes up a double
+time 50 yards from trench, fires one shot at the double time when
+within ten yards of the first target continues to the trench and fires
+the remaining six shots, automatic fire, at the two targets in the
+trench in rear of the first line target.
+
+SCORE (TARGET E, BOBBING).--A score will be seven shots. Targets will
+be marked after the men in the firing line have completed their
+scores. All loading and firing should be done by command.
+
+COURSE: 1. SLOW FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of five
+scores.
+2. QUICK FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores.
+3. AUTOMATIC FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores.
+4. TRENCH FIRE.--Minimum of one maximum of three scores.
+
+
+Bayonet Training.
+
+A. THE FUNCTIONS OF BAYONET TRAINING ARE:
+
+ 1. To teach the correct use of the bayonet until it becomes
+ instinctive.
+ 2. To develop the fighting spirit.
+ 3. To develop speed, accuracy, and coördination.
+
+B. GENERAL PRINCIPLES:
+
+ 1. Fencing, in modern combat, is out of the question. Almost every
+ fight will consist of but one or two motions. Hence the class
+ must be taught that the best defence is the quickest offensive.
+ 2. Every available means of offence, with hands and feet as well as
+ with rifle and bayonet, is a part of bayonet training.
+ 3. Teamwork is essential. Men must be taught, especially in the
+ combat, to exercise, to seize every opportunity to act together.
+ 4. Personal control during combat, especially at night, will be
+ nearly impossible. Control should be practiced, therefore, in
+ the form of clear instructions delivered to the men before
+ assault, and fulfilled individually.
+ 5. In every assault and combat exercise, the men must be taught
+ never to leave an enemy alive, or who may be alive, behind them.
+
+C. TECHNIQUE OF BAYONET COMBAT:
+
+ 1. The _point_ is the main reliance. Its use should be practiced
+ in every possible situation, until a correct choice or
+ combination of long point, short point, and jab, and the
+ execution thereof, becomes a matter of instinct.
+ 2. The point must always be directed at a definite target. The most
+ vulnerable points of the body are: Lower abdomen, base of the
+ neck, small of the back (on either side of the spine), chest,
+ and thighs. Bony parts of the trunk must be avoided by accurate
+ aim.
+ 3. The use of the rifle as a club, swinging or striking, is
+ valuable only:
+ a. When the point is not available.
+ b. In sudden encounters at close quarters, when a sharp butt
+ swing to the crotch may catch an opponent unguarded.
+ c. After parrying a swinging butt blow, when a butt strike to
+ the jaw is often the quickest possible riposte.
+ The use of butt swings overhead or sidewise to the head or
+ neck, is to be avoided; they are slow, inaccurate, easily
+ parried or side-stepped, and leave the whole body unguarded.
+ After every butt blow a thrust must immediately follow, since
+ no butt blow, of itself, is apt to be fatal.
+ 4. The parries must be regarded and practiced chiefly as means of
+ opening the opponent's guard; hence, a thrust must immediately
+ follow each parry.
+ 5. The foot movements shown in the old manual are useful only to
+ promote quickness and steadiness. They should, therefore, be
+ practiced in combination with the points and butt blows, and so
+ combined can be executed in the oblique directions as well as at
+ right angles. The left foot moves in the direction of the
+ thrust.
+
+D. MANUAL OF THE BAYONET: There are only 7 exercises to learn in the
+ new bayonet drill:
+
+ 1. _Guard_.--Point of the bayonet directed at the opponent's
+ throat, the rifle held easily and naturally with both hands,
+ barrel inclined slightly to the left, right hand at the height
+ of the navel and grasping the small of the stock, left hand
+ holding the rifle at a convenient position above the lower
+ band, so that the left arm is slightly bent, making an angle of
+ about 150 degrees. The legs should be well separated and in an
+ easy position. Lean forward, on your toes, left knee slightly
+ bent, right foot flat on the ground and turned to the right
+ front. Remember in this position to have your eye on your
+ opponent, do not restrain your muscles, keep them taut, but
+ flexible.
+ 2. "_High Port_."--The hands hold the rifle as in guard; the left
+ wrist level with, and directly in front of the left shoulder;
+ the right hand above the right groin and on level with the
+ navel.
+ Remember that the barrel in this position is to the rear. This
+ position is assumed on the advance without command.
+ 3. "_Long Point_."--Being in the position of "guard," grasp the
+ rifle firmly, vigorously deliver the point to the full extent
+ of the left arm, butt along side and close to the right
+ forearm; body inclined forward; left knee well bent, right leg
+ braced, and weight of the body pressed well forward with the
+ fore part of the right foot, heel raised. The right hand gives
+ the power to the point, while the left guides it. If a point is
+ made in the oblique direction the left foot should move in that
+ direction. This exercise is done in 3 counts. At 1 the point is
+ made; at 2, the withdrawal; at 3, resume the guard. The
+ withdrawal must be straight back, and not with the downward
+ motion, until the right hand is well behind the hip.
+ 4. _Right (Left) Parry_.--1. Straighten the left arm, without
+ bending the wrist or twisting the rifle in the hand, and force
+ the rifle forward far enough to the right (left) to ward off
+ the opponent's weapon, 2. Resume "guard."
+ Remember to keep your eyes on the weapon to be parried.
+ 5. _Short Point_.--1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the
+ muzzle and draw the rifle back to the full extent of the right
+ arm, butt either high or low as a low or high point is to be
+ made. 2. Deliver the point vigorously to the full extent of the
+ left arm. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Resume the "guard."
+ 6. _Jab Point_.--1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the muzzle,
+ draw the rifle back, and shift the right hand up the rifle and
+ grasp it above the rear sight, at the same time bringing the
+ rifle to an almost vertical position close to the body. Bend the
+ knees. 2. Straighten the knees, jab the point of the bayonet
+ upward into the throat or under the chin of the
+ opponent--chiefly by a body movement. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Carry
+ the rifle forward with the left hand, grasping the small of the
+ stock with the right. 5. Resume guard. Remember in the first
+ motion to have the hands at least 4 inches apart.
+ 7. _Butt swing--butt strike_--out.--1. Swing the butt up at the
+ opponent's ribs, forearms, etc., using a full arm blow, bringing
+ the rifle to a horizontal position over the left shoulder, butt
+ to the front. 2. Advance the rear foot, and dash the butt into
+ the opponent's face. 3. Advance the rear foot and at the same
+ time slash the bayonet down on the opponent's head or neck. 4.
+ Resume the "guard."
+ (The easiest guard to a swing at the crotch is simply to get
+ the left knee in the opponent's right.)
+
+E. PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES:
+
+ 1. The class works in pairs with scabbards on bayonets. One man
+ alternately in each pair signals; the other promptly executes
+ the movement, at the target, designated by the signal. The
+ following signals are suggested:
+ The hand, placed against the body, indicates the target.
+ Long point--Back of hand outward.
+ Short point--Palm of hand outward.
+ Jab point--Hand horizontal against chin, palm down.
+ High port--Fist against left breast.
+ Parry right (left)--Hand waved to right (left).
+ Butt swing--Fist against crotch.
+ Butt strike--Fist against jaw.
+ Instead of signals, thrusting sticks are then used. These are
+ strong wands having a padding of paper and burlap over one end
+ and a rope ring tied to the other. Points and butt swings are
+ executed at the padding and rings, respectively, as these are
+ presented. The man holding the stick must remember to stand to
+ one side of the man with the bayonet.
+ 2. AS IN FIRST EXERCISE.--One man thrusts with a stick: the other
+ parries.
+ 3. THRUSTS ARE PRACTICED AT DUMMIES, first from a distance of five
+ feet, then by advancing two paces or more. To simulate fighting
+ conditions, a frame is then arranged in which dummies are slung
+ on ropes passed over pullies, and so manipulated that as the man
+ withdraws his bayonet from one dummy another swings at, him from
+ a different direction.
+ 4. As SOON AS PROFICIENCY HAS BEEN GAINED in the above exercises,
+ the assault practice is taken up.
+ a. _A course is laid out as follows:_
+ (1) A fire trench about 60 yards long, well _revetted_.
+ (2) 20 yards in front of the trench, smooth wire
+ entanglements.
+ (3) 15 yards further, another trench, parallel to the first,
+ 60 yards long, 4 feet deep and 4 feet wide. In this
+ trench prone dummies are placed, one per yard.
+ (4) 15 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to
+ the trenches.
+ (5) 15 yards further, a hurdle 4 feet high and 60 yards
+ long, parallel to the trenches.
+ (6) 10 yards further, a low trip wire, stretched parallel to
+ the trenches.
+ (7) 10 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to
+ the trenches.
+ (8) 15 yards further, a large trench, 60 yards long, 6 feet
+ deep, 10 feet wide, containing 60 prone dummies, 1 per
+ yard.
+ b. _Procedure:_
+ Each platoon, in turn, enters the first trench at skirmish
+ intervals, bayonets fixed. On signal, all move out at a
+ walk, guiding carefully in line on a leader previously
+ designated. After passing each obstacle, the line is again
+ carefully formed. On each of the swinging dummies one of
+ the seven movements of the manual is used; a long or short
+ point is used on each prone dummy. All go down into the
+ last trench together, with a good loud yell, point of the
+ bayonet level with the toe, and land on the dummies in the
+ bottom, stabbing as they land. This course should be
+ repeated several times at quick time, then at double time,
+ and finally at a run. Remember that in the advance the
+ rifle is carried at high port.
+ 5. COMBAT EXERCISES (to be used in conjunction with the assault
+ practice):
+ a. _Equipment for each man:_
+ Thrusting stick or other wooden rod with wooden ball or
+ thick padding covering one end. (Old rifles with
+ spring-bayonets are even better.)
+ Plastron.
+ Baseball mask.
+ Pair of broadsword or single stick gloves.
+ b. _Procedure_:
+ The class is formed in two lines of about equal numbers,
+ facing each other, about fifty paces apart, with intervals
+ in each line of about two paces. A leader is designated
+ for each line. The instructor stands at one end of the
+ space between; an assistant at the other end. On the
+ instructor's whistle, the lines advance, guiding carefully
+ on their leaders. When about ten paces apart, they charge,
+ each seeking to break and roll up the opposing line.
+ Sticks are carried and used as rifles with bayonets fixed.
+ Any other use disqualifies. Use of the butt is barred. One
+ thrust on the plastron or mask, or two hits on the
+ extremities, disables the recipient, who must promptly
+ retire--or be retired. The combat continues until the
+ second whistle, blown not more than 30 seconds after
+ contact; when they cease fighting promptly, separate, and
+ form as before.
+ c. _Criticism:_
+ After each combat, the instructor will criticize the manner
+ of advance and of fighting, especially the alignment kept
+ in the advance and the team work in combat, and the
+ advantage taken of opponents' mistakes. He counts the
+ casualties and awards the decision. He must continually
+ urge the men never to lag behind nor advance ahead of the
+ line, never to allow large gaps to occur in the line, and
+ always to seize the advantage given by opponents who
+ disregard these principles.
+ d. _The terrain for this exercise_ should be frequently varied.
+ It may also be conducted at night, the opposing sides
+ being clearly distinguished.[Q]
+
+[Footnote Q: The last exercise was devised and perfected by M. Jules
+Leslabay, Master of Fencing, Harvard R.O.T.C., 1917. It is more
+completely described in his "Manual of Bayonet Training."]
+
+
+Machine Guns.
+
+1. Properties of the machine guns are divided into three general
+classes: Mode of action, fire, and inconspicuousness.
+
+ (a) THE MODE OF ACTION.--The machine gun acting only by its fire
+ can prepare an attack or repulse an offensive movement, but it
+ does not conquer ground. The latter role is almost exclusively
+ that of infantry which is fitted for crossing all obstacles.
+ When it will suffice to act by fire, employ the machine gun in
+ preference to infantry, preserving the latter for the combined
+ action of movement and fire. By the employment of the machine
+ gun economize infantry, reserving a more considerable portion
+ of it for manoeuvre purposes.
+ (b) FIRE.--Machine gun fire produces a sheath, dense, deep but
+ narrow. The increase of the width of the sweeping fire gives to
+ the sheath a greater breadth, but when the density becomes
+ insufficient, the effect produced is very weak. Machine gun
+ fire will have its maximum power upon an objective of narrow
+ front and great depth. With the infantry fighting normally in
+ thin lines the preceding conditions will generally only be
+ realized when these lines are taken in the flank. "The fire of
+ the machine gun parallel to the probable front of the enemy--a
+ flanking fire--must therefore be the rule." The fire
+ perpendicular to the front will be employed generally on
+ certain necessary points of passage as, bridges, roads,
+ defiles, cuts, roadways, communicating trenches, etc., where
+ the enemy is generally forced to take a deep formation with a
+ narrow front, or where he is in massed formation.
+ (c) INCONSPICUOUSNESS.--By reason of its small strength the machine
+ gun section can utilize the smallest cover, and can consequently
+ hide from the enemy; the machine gun therefore, more than the
+ infantry, has the chance to act by surprise. The opening of the
+ fire by surprise will be the rule; the machine gun will avoid
+ revealing itself upon objectives not worth the trouble. Flank
+ action and surprise are the two conditions to try for under all
+ circumstances.
+
+2. OFFENSIVE REINFORCEMENT OF A FRONT MOMENTARILY STATIONARY.--The
+machine guns assisted by small elements of infantry cover thoroughly
+the getting in hand of the main body, the machine guns presenting to
+the enemy a line of little vulnerability. The machine guns assist in
+securing the possession of the ground previously taken, and will
+permit time to prepare for the resumption of the forward movement.
+Preparation of the attack--machine gun fire completes the preparation
+done by the artillery, either by acting on the personnel or by opening
+breaches in the accessary defenses. At times the machine guns alone
+may be charged with the preparation of the attack where it is
+necessary to act very quickly as in pursuit, exploitation of a
+success. Whatever the situation, concentrate the machine gun fire on
+one or several points. Machine guns cover the flanks of attacking
+troops. They follow the advance of these troops remaining on the
+flanks, so as to be able to fire instantly on all points from which an
+attack might come. Machine guns will likewise be employed in intervals
+created intentionally or accidentally between units. It is here a
+powerful weapon which can rapidly be put into action by the Commander.
+The personnel and material must be protected as far as possible from
+the effects of fire.
+
+3. DEFENSIVE.--It is here that the flanking fire is especially
+necessary. In the defensive preparation of a position the machine guns
+must be so placed that they will provide along the front several
+successive fire barriers. The machine guns must be ready at all times
+to stop by instantaneous fire all hostile attack. In order to have
+machine gun protection at all, it is absolutely necessary that they be
+protected from bombardment. This is best done by the following: Place
+the machine guns under solid cover; make their emplacement invisible;
+echelon the machine guns in depth. The cover must be placed where it
+can be hidden from the sight of the enemy, such as a counter slope, a
+position where it is impossible to blend it, relief with an
+accentuated slope of the ground, woods, brush, etc. It is essential
+that the principal parts of the machine gun casemate be prepared in
+the rear. Only in this manner will the work be done solidly and
+rapidly. While the machine gunners and helpers do the excavating,
+specialists in rear prepare the parts for assembling. The latter are
+then transported to the position and, the casemate is established,
+hiding the work with the greatest care from enemy observation.
+Remember that it is of the utmost importance that the machine gun be
+invisible, so the firing emplacements must be made outside of the
+shelter, but near enough for the gun to be brought out instantly and
+put into action. All communicating trenches leading to the firing
+emplacement must be concealed. Enough emplacements should be built to
+avoid firing daily from the emplacements especially reserved for cases
+of attack. Do not place too many machine guns in the first line; in
+case of a violent bombardment they are sure to be destroyed. The
+object to be attained is to install the machine guns in conditions
+such that if the enemy penetrates our first line, by aid of his
+bombardment or asphyxiating gas, his infantry, as it advances, comes
+under the fire of machine guns echeloned previously in depth, under
+whose fire it must stop. It is not a matter of sweeping a wide sector,
+but of giving over certain strips of ground flanking fire which will
+cut down surely the enemy's waves when they push forward. The
+commander should, therefore, divide between the first line and the
+terrain in rear, the machine guns which he controls, organizing for
+each particular case a firing emplacement in accord with the
+surrounding ground and the purpose in view.
+
+
+GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION.
+
+Machine gunners must under no circumstances abandon their positions.
+They must, when necessary, allow themselves to be surrounded and
+defend themselves in their place to the end. In many cases the
+heroism and tenacity of a few machine gunners have permitted the rapid
+retaking of a lost position. To provide for this resistance to a
+finish, the machine gun emplacements must fulfil the following
+conditions:
+
+ 1. Be surrounded by a wire entanglement of irregular trace and as
+invisible as possible.
+ 2. In the enclosure thus created having several firing emplacements,
+in case one or more becomes useless.
+ 3. The personnel must have all the means for protection against gas
+and have in addition rations, water and abundant ammunition.
+
+
+EMPLOYMENT OF FIRE AND INSTRUCTION.
+
+The more grazing the fire of a machine gun the more effective it is.
+This causes the principal employment of the machine gun to be at
+distances where the trajectory is flattest, that is under 800 or 1,000
+yards. However, the effort to obtain a grazing fire must not exclude
+long distance fire. This latter will always be justified when directed
+upon important objectives, or necessary points of passage. For this
+fire to have some efficacy, it is necessary to calculate the range
+with the greatest precision. On the defensive indirect fire will be
+employed sometimes to annoy the supply, reliefs, etc. To give results,
+great quantities of ammunition will have to be expended. All of the
+officers and non-commissioned officers and as many men as possible
+must be capable of firing the machine gun, so that at the time of an
+attack no gun will remain idle for want of personnel. It is, moreover,
+essential to keep up the training of the personnel by having them fire
+at least twice a month, and, if possible, once a week.
+
+
+RESUME.
+
+Machine guns must be utilized in the greatest measure in order to
+_economize the infantry._
+
+Seek to employ them always in a, _flank fire_.
+
+Conceal them so as to get _surprise fire_.
+
+_Echelon_ them and _shelter_ them so as to avoid their premature
+destruction.
+
+
+POINTS BEFORE FIRING.
+
+ 1. Thoroughly overhaul the gun to see that no part is deficient,
+and that the mechanism works freely.
+ 2. See that the barrel is clean and dry.
+ 3. See that the barrel mouthpiece is tight.
+ 4. See that small hole in gas regulator is to the rear.
+ 5. Thoroughly oil all working parts, especially the cam slot and
+exterior of the bolt, and the striker post and piston.
+ 6. Weigh and adjust the mainspring.
+ 7. See that the mounting is firm.
+ 8. Examine the magazines and ammunition.
+ 9. See that the spare parts and oil reserve are handy.
+
+POINTS DURING FIRING
+
+ 1. During a temporary cessation of fire, re-oil all working parts.
+ 2. Replace a partly emptied magazine with a full one.
+ 3. Examine the mounting to see that it is firm.
+ 4. See that empty magazines are refilled without delay.
+
+POINTS AFTER FIRING.
+
+ 1. Unload.
+ 2. Oil the bore and chamber, piston rod and gas cylinder.
+ 3. Sort out live rounds from empty cases.
+ 4. See that mainspring is eased.
+ 5. Thoroughly clean and oil the gun on returning to quarters. Clean
+the bore daily for several days.
+
+It is of the greatest importance that the points before, during, and
+after firing, should be carefully attended to as otherwise the number
+of stoppages will be unnecessarily increased.
+
+Nine out of ten stoppages are due to want of care.
+
+Immediate action must become instinctive and automatic.
+
+
+Grenade Instruction.
+
+INTRODUCTION.--War, as it is being fought on the western front, has
+brought to light many new weapons; but no other weapon that this
+struggle has brought forth exceeds the grenade in importance. It is
+not a new weapon, but its present importance is entirely new. Its
+extensive use has grown out of conditions on the western front;
+conditions which have never been seen previous to this war. The fact
+that armies have taken to "digging themselves in" has necessitated the
+use of some other weapon than the rifle. The rifle with its flat
+trajectory is of little use against an enemy who is completely hidden
+from view and who can go on existing under ground. Hence the reversion
+to the ancient grenade--but with all its modern improvements. The
+grenade has shown itself to be the weapon that can solve the problem
+of seeking out an enemy who is under ground; its trajectory is high
+and its fire is plunging, so that it can be thrown from a place of
+concealment and protection and into a place equally well concealed
+from ordinary view.
+
+The importance of the grenade may be judged from its extensive use by
+both the Allies and the Germans; and also by the formations now
+adopted by both British and French armies for the purpose of
+exploiting its use. In a British Battalion the normal percentage of
+expert bombers is 25. In the French Company 36 per cent of the men are
+devoted to grenade work.
+
+A grenade has been defined as a slow moving, high trajectory missile
+containing high explosive and exploding by contact or time fuse.
+Grenades may be divided roughly into two classes--1, hand grenades,
+and 2, rifle grenades, and each of these classes may be subdivided as
+regards means of explosion, into 1, time fuse, or 2, percussion
+grenades.
+
+Among the time-fuse hand grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 5,
+Stokes bomb, smoke bombs, fumite bombs, etc. The Mills is easily the
+most important and has come to be the standard adopted by the Allies.
+The percussion grenade is little used--the most important among those
+of this type is the so-called "mushroom," named from its shape.
+
+Chief among the rifle grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 23, the
+Hale No. 3 and the Newton No. 24. Just as the Mills hand grenade has
+become the standard, so has the Mills rifle grenade attained that
+pre-eminence. A more detailed description of the various sorts of
+grenades cannot be attempted in this brief space; but one or two
+diagrams at the close of the chapter may serve to clarify the subject
+to some extent.
+
+Any course in grenade training should have a three-fold purpose:
+
+ 1st. To give the individual a practical knowledge of the working
+of the grenades in use.
+ 2nd. To teach him how to throw them.
+ 3rd. To make him acquainted with the general principles of
+organization and the execution of a grenade attack, either as a
+separate operation or as a part of a general attack. The time spent on
+any such course of training is a matter to be settled in the light of
+local considerations; but for purposes of preliminary training of a
+great number of men a period of two weeks is usually sufficient, with
+time allotted according to some such plan as this: (1) 10 separate
+half-hour sessions of practice in throwing from various positions and
+at the various targets; (2) 2 hours of study and a like amount of time
+spent in a conference for the purpose of clearing up matters that are
+hazy. In this brief time (only 9 hours) the foundation may be laid for
+a more thorough training of the specialists later on. In any such
+course the use of dummy grenades should always precede the use of any
+live ones; and men should be taught caution above all other things.
+This is a point easily lost sight of when men are using only dummies;
+but it is well worth remembering, for obvious reasons.
+
+
+FIRST: GIVING THE INDIVIDUAL A PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE WORKING OF
+THE GRENADES IN USE.--The differences in the construction and the uses
+of hand and rifle grenades should be brought out clearly. The various
+sorts of grenades should be explained and men should not forget the
+importance of knowing the grenades of the enemy as well as our own.
+This knowledge may one day prove of no little importance. As has
+already been stated, the Mills No. 5 is the standard among hand
+grenades of the Allies. It conforms to the general description of hand
+grenades; _i.e._, it is an egg-shaped projectile, more or less hollow,
+and loaded with a charge of explosive. Besides this it has an
+apparatus for setting off the bursting charge. It weighs 1 pound 5
+ounces approximately, and 4 ounces of this is high explosive. The
+shell being of serrated cast-iron, an explosion will scatter a sort of
+shrapnel over an area equal to three times the height. No more need be
+said of the effectiveness of such a weapon. Among rifle grenades the
+Mills is also the standard more or less, although the French make
+great use of a rifle grenade that fits over the muzzle of the rifle,
+fired by ball cartridge, in contrast to the Mills No. 23, which has a
+rod running down the barrel of the rifle and which is propelled by the
+explosion of a blank cartridge. The maximum range of this grenade with
+a 5-1/2-inch stem is 120 yards, the gun being fired at an angle of 45
+degrees. The Newton Improved (a rifle grenade which explodes on
+contact) has a range of 250 yards; the Hale No. 3 also explodes on
+contact and has a range of 200-225 yards.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #7]
+
+SECOND: INSTRUCTION IN THROWING.--As previously stated the use of
+dummy grenades should precede the use of any live ones. Due
+precautions should be taken at all times, even when working with dummy
+grenades, for a habit of carelessness is not to be tolerated with this
+sort of weapon. Men should be instructed to throw from standing,
+kneeling and prone positions; although this last-named position is
+little used. Distance is important but ACCURACY IS ESSENTIAL. Men
+should always be taught to throw at a definite target, even when
+throwing in the open during preliminary work. The men may work in
+groups, one group throwing and the other returning. This method keeps
+all hands occupied and furnishes a medium for a little competition,
+which is a very helpful thing in training of this sort. A manual of
+the following sort may be of use in acquiring the proper sort of
+throw.
+
+ 1. Pick up the grenade with the left hand.
+ 2. Prepare to throw--face to the right and transfer the grenade to
+ the right hand.
+ 3. Take aim--left hand and arm extended up and straight toward the
+ target, right hand and arm behind the thrower in the same plane
+ as the left.
+ 4. Withdraw pin with left hand.
+ 5. Throw--use a straight overhead motion and do not bend the arm at
+ the elbow. It is not a baseball throw. The tendency for most of
+ us Americans is to follow a perfectly natural habit--try to use
+ the baseball throw. This is to be discouraged for several
+ reasons, the chief one being that the grenade weighs about a
+ pound and a half, whereas our baseball weighs only a third of
+ this amount. Then, too, it often happens in the trenches that a
+ grenade duel will last for hours. Under such circumstances the
+ last grenade may decide the issue and endurance will be a
+ mighty telling factor. Hence, the insistence upon the overhead
+ throw.
+
+The preliminary throwing should take place in the open but always with
+a definite target, an outline of a section of trench being the best
+sort of target. Another excellent idea is to have a target arranged
+according to the diagram shown herewith and to keep score. This
+procedure will also add incentive for competition and will produce
+results. After men have thrown in the open for a sufficient period,
+they should proceed to the next stage: This is the stage of throwing
+in a cage or from behind and over obstacles. There are three distinct
+phases of this feature of the training: (1.) The thrower sees the
+target but must throw over an obstacle. (2.) The target is invisible;
+the thrower is aided by an observer and a periscope; the observer
+notes the fall of the grenades and gives directions as follows--"So
+many yards right or left" or "Shorten or lengthen so many yards." (3.)
+Actual throwing in trenches. This stage immediately precedes that of
+"working up a trench."
+
+THIRD: INSTRUCTION IN GRENADE ORGANIZATION.--Men should be given a
+certain amount of theoretical instruction as to the composition of the
+armies now on the western front; this in order that they may see the
+part that grenadiers and bombers are playing in the struggle. They
+should be shown the organization of the British Infantry and how the
+first section of each platoon is composed exclusively of bombers
+and--rifle grenadiers; they should also be taught how the bombers and
+grenadiers are concentrated in the French organization. The typical
+bombing squad consists of 7 or 8 men and a leader who take positions
+as follows: 1 and 2, bayonet men; 3, first thrower; 4, first carrier;
+5, leader; 6, rifle bomber; 7, second thrower; 8, second carrier; 9,
+rifle bomber. One of these bayonet men may be reserved to act as a
+sniper. The leader acts as an observer and directs the work of the
+bombers. The rifle bombers outrange the hostile bombers and also
+afford protection on the flanks. Every man must be taught his job and
+must be thoroughly instructed in the work of the squad as a whole in
+order that each man may be able to fill any position and that there
+may be perfect teamwork.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #8]
+
+POINTS TO REMEMBER.
+
+ 1. Men should always have a definite target for their throwing--an
+outline of a trench is usually to be preferred.
+ 2. Caution in handling grenades should be made a habit.
+ 3. Accuracy is essential.
+ 4. Training should be progressive, both for men and organizations.
+ 5. Keep up competition among the men; rivalry will increase practice
+and men will throw grenades for recreation. This will get results. Let
+two men throw at each other. A good shot will make the other man move.
+ 6. Insist upon the straight overhead throw. It is less tiresome and
+when developed properly will give equal accuracy with any other
+method.
+ 7. Teamwork in a bombing squad is essential.
+ 8. Under new methods of warfare every infantryman is a bomber; but
+specialists must be trained.
+ 9. Officer must be a real leader and the best fighter in his
+platoon.
+ 10. Qualification tests should be arranged and the better qualified
+men taken for special training in this art.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 5.
+
+Map Sketching.
+
+
+Map sketching is an important factor in trench warfare to-day as it is
+in a war of movement. A fairly accurate map will indicate more than
+many words and in much less time. Time is the great factor in war.
+Instruction must also be rapid. Here are ten lessons which would
+occupy a week if taken morning and afternoon. The aim of the
+instruction as in company rifle shooting is to train many men to do a
+satisfactory job, not to make a few finished topographers. Neatness,
+accuracy and initiative are cardinal points.
+
+For the instructor, reference should be made to _Grieves'_ "_Military
+Sketching and Map Reading_", 2nd edition, if he desires to supplement
+any points given here.
+
+
+LESSON 1. (CLASS ROOM--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+_Problem--Map Reading._
+
+Study the conventional signs found in the "Manual for Non-commissioned
+Officers and Privates of Infantry of the Army of the U.S.," 1917, page
+273, or in Grieves, pages 28-35. These conventional signs are not
+universal and must be used only as indications of the general
+practice.
+
+In map sketching in the field few conventional signs are used, and the
+items of importance are written on the map, such as WOODS, CULTIVATED,
+HEDGE, SWAMP, etc.
+
+TAKING UP MAP SCALES.--There are three ways of indicating the relation
+between the actual distance on the ground and the space the same
+distance occupies on the map:
+
+1. The graphic scale is a straight line divided into units, as miles,
+yards, feet or meters, which represents the actual ground distance.
+Thus if 6" = 1 mile the line would be six inches long and marked at
+one end and 1 mile at the other, three inches being marked 1/2 mile,
+etc. It is important to always have this graphic scale on a map so
+that if the paper gets wet or is stretched from its original size the
+scale will change in the same proportion.
+
+2. A Statement in words or figures, e.g., 3 inches equal one mile,
+meaning that 3 inches measured anywhere on the map represent 1 mile on
+the actual ground.
+
+3. The Representative Fraction (generally known abbreviated as R.F.)
+having a number above the line that shows the unit length on the map
+and below the line the number of units which are in the corresponding
+actual ground distance. For example, if 1" = 1 mile, then the R.F. is:
+
+ 1" (map distance)
+ -----------------------------------
+ 63,360" (1 mile--ground distance)
+
+if 3" = 1 mile the R.F. is:
+ 3" (map distance) 1
+ ----------------------------------- or -------
+ 63,360" (1 mile--ground distance) 21120
+
+if 6" = 1 mile:
+ 6" 1
+ -------- or -------
+ 63360" 10560
+
+if 12" = 1 mile:
+ 12" 1
+ --------- or ------
+ 63360" 5280
+
+In reading a map one must know the scale and also where the North is.
+This is always indicated by an arrow pointing either to the magnetic
+North or the true North. If to the magnetic North the needle will have
+but one barb away from the true North. The angle between the magnetic
+and the true North is the declination.
+
+Placing the map in proper relation to the ground so that points of the
+compass coincide on map and ground is called _orienting the map_.
+
+In map work there is one vital point to remember; practically all the
+ground surface is in its present form as a result of water action
+
+ 1. Look for the water courses, that is the drainage system. It will
+give the general slope of the land.
+ 2. Look for the high points between the water courses, remembering
+that there is always a valley then a hill then a valley again
+continued in succession.
+ 3. Finally locate towns, railroads, main highways and work down to the
+minor details.
+
+In measuring a map to get the actual distances on the ground, copy the
+graphic scale on any piece of paper and apply this directly or if your
+distances exceed your scale use the edge of a piece of paper and then
+apply it to the graphical scale on the map.
+
+
+LESSON 2. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+_Problem--Stride Scale Map Making_.
+
+Producing a map from the actual ground requires certain instruments.
+The second lesson takes up the preparation of the stride scale on the
+alidade and the different kinds of maps, made in military sketching.
+
+The alidade is a triangular ruler with one or more working scales on
+it beside other measurements. The _working scale_ is, for infantry,
+the stride or the space of ground covered from left foot to left foot
+again in walking, reduced to the proper map distance. This varies with
+individuals of course. Any scale of units, however, can be used as,
+horse trot, telegraph poles, etc.
+
+The working scale for each man is made by having him step off a
+measured course, say 440 yards. The ground should not be too even as a
+general average is needed, moreover the pace must be the natural gait
+of the individual under ordinary circumstances. Let him count the
+course three times then average the three results for the final
+estimate.
+
+Now to convert this into a working scale for the alidade made on a
+scale of six inches to the mile; take the case of a man who takes 220
+strides in 440 yards:
+
+ 440 yards = 15,840 inches
+ 15,840 ÷ 220 = 72, or his stride in inches
+ then 880 strides = 1 mile or 6" on the scale.
+
+It is better to have a scale of 1,000 strides which is easily done by
+the proportion:
+
+1,000 sts. : 880 sts. : : x : 6
+ x = 6.8
+
+now draw a line 6.8 inches long and a diagonal line from it; divide
+this diagonal line into 10 equal parts for each 100 paces at any
+convenient scale and draw a line from the end of the tenth part to the
+end of the 6.8 inches line; draw lines parallel to this line from each
+of the divisions. The 6.8" line is then divided into 10 equal parts;
+each of these parts may be divided in the same manner into tenths.
+
+Your scale is ready to be pasted or transferred to the alidade and
+each 6.8. inches on the map will equal 1,000 of your strides on the
+ground, or about 1-1/12 miles (2,000 yards).
+
+There are two general classes of sketches:
+
+1. ROAD SKETCH.--A traverse (passing over) made along a definite rout
+showing all features of military importance for a distance of 200 or
+300 yards on each side of the road. A road sketch is always made on a
+scale of 3 inches to 1 mile.
+
+2. AREA SKETCH.--A map of a definite locality. There are 3 kinds of
+area sketches according to opportunity for observation:
+
+ (a) Position Sketch--when access may be had to the whole area.
+ (b) Outpost Sketch--where part of the ground must be mapped without
+ passing over it. This form is applicable particularly to trench
+ warfare. Intersection and resection are used to locate points
+ within the enemy's lines.
+ (c) Place Sketch--when sketch must be made from one point, as when
+ the proximity of the enemy would prevent any movement; as from
+ trench observation stations, etc.; also an elaboration of the
+ _landscape_ or _horizon_ sketch which is used everywhere in the
+ trenches today. From one point an actual outline of the
+ opposite trench and background is made in perspective,
+ reference points on the horizon being marked on the edge of a
+ pad at arm's length. These marks are then prolonged on the
+ paper and the horizon is sketched. In like manner the middle
+ distance and the foreground come under observation and are put
+ on in one below the other.
+
+Time must be allowed the men to make their stride scales and to paste
+or transfer them to their alidades.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #9]
+
+LESSON 3. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+The problem is to make a Position Sketch about one mile square closing
+the traverse. First considering the sketch board, compass, pencils,
+etc.; next the orienting, sighting and pacing; finally the uses of
+intersection and resection and in making allowance for error.
+
+The sketch board should be about 12 to 18 inches square, being used
+with or without a tripod. A cheap camera tripod is excellent. The
+board should have a compass attached so that it will remain in the
+same relative position on the board. If iron thumb tacks are used
+avoid getting them too near the compass. A hard pencil must be used to
+obtain good results. The paper must be smooth and where possible
+covered with another sheet fastened on but one side which will
+readily fold back when one desires to work on the sketch.
+
+By always placing the board so that the compass reads North it will be
+oriented correctly. Care must be used when near electric wires or
+masses of metal as automobiles, railroad tracks, etc., which will
+attract the needle from its true azimuth (N. and S. direction) and
+thus throw off the whole map. In such cases it is far better to back
+sight and use the compass only at intervals to verify the sights.
+
+This brings up the matter of sighting. It is important to make long
+shots thus reducing the amount of individual error. In taking a
+sighting point make sure it can be recognized when reached and make
+sure to look at the reverse side in order to recognize it in case of
+back sighting if necessary. Always carry several large-headed pins
+using one at your present station and resting the side of the alidade
+against it, swinging the other end for sighting.
+
+After sighting and lining the sight on your sketch, step off evenly to
+pace the distance. Time is always a factor in military mapping and
+where possible make mental notes as you go along as to where roads or
+other important features are located, so that you can place them in
+their proper place on the map when you have reached the next station.
+It is well always to set a good pace for here time can be readily
+saved.
+
+Making an _intersection_ is very simple. For as the sketcher moves
+along he ties his map together by sighting at any prominent object
+near his area, running these lines very lightly and only where he
+assumes the points to lie on his map. An abbreviation on the line or a
+number referring to a list off to one side will answer to recall the
+object. At any other station where the same point can be seen a
+similar line is drawn and where the two lines cross will be the
+location of the object. In the case of three lines not crossing at the
+same point take the middle of the triangle so formed.
+
+_Resection_ is just the reverse of this process. The mapper wants to
+know where he is located on the map. If he is properly oriented and
+can aim at two points on the ground which he has located on the map,
+he places a pin at one of these locations on the map and aims with the
+alidade at the object on the ground drawing a line towards himself;
+this is repeated with the other known point and where the two lines
+cross on the map will be the point he is standing at.
+
+In intersection the greatest accuracy is obtained by running the rays
+so as to meet as nearly as possible at right angles.
+
+In running a traverse the sketcher must expect to find some error at
+his closing point. This error must be distributed over the whole
+traverse so as not to have all the error concentrated at one point.
+
+
+LESSON 4. (FIELD WORK--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Make a simple sketch, containing topographical details using
+the traverse made during the preceding lesson. Use of conventional
+signs should be emphasized and the appreciation of features of
+military importance impressed. A tendency is to put in details to a
+point of confusion. Judgment must be developed to choose telling
+points.
+
+A sharp pencil is always needed in sketching; in putting in the
+topographical details special attention must be given to the pencil.
+Keep the point sharp and make clear, distinct signs.
+
+
+LESSON 5. (CLASS ROOM--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Contours, the Vertical Interval, Use of the Slope Board, Map
+Distance, Visibility and Profiles.
+
+A contour is an imaginary line on the surface of the earth all points
+of which have the same elevation from a base or datum level, sea level
+usually being this base. Slice an apple into pieces 1/2-inch thick;
+where the cuts come may represent the contour lines. Take these
+individual slices, beginning at the bottom and outline them on a sheet
+of paper with a pencil (having run a nail through the apple first to
+keep each piece in place). The resulting circles will represent the
+apple's outline at 1/2-inch intervals.
+
+Contours are always at equal elevations from each other, and the
+Vertical Interval (known by the abbreviation V.I.) is the measure
+between successive contour lines. In military maps the V.I. is always
+the same for each map scale:
+
+ 1 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 60 feet.
+ 3 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 20 feet.
+ 6 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 10 feet.
+ 12 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 5 feet.
+
+Note that the V.I. changes in proportion to the scale, a map on a 3
+inch to the mile scale is 3 times as large as one on a scale of 1 inch
+to the mile, while the V.I. is 1/3 as great, hence the former shows 3
+times as many contours as the latter.
+
+Map Distance means the horizontal distance between two contour lines
+on a map and indicates a certain degree of slope. As the scale
+increases the V.I. decreases in proportion and the M.D. therefore
+remains the same for the same degree of slope whatever the scale of
+the map. By computation we find that a one degree slope rises one foot
+for every 57.3 feet horizontal distance, so a one degree slope would
+have a 20 foot rise in 1,146 feet horizontal distance, this distance
+equals .65 of an inch on the map if the scale is 3" to 1 mile.
+
+The term "Map Distance" is also loosely used to denote distance
+between points as measured on the map. Care should be taken to
+distinguish between these two meanings.
+
+Distances between contours, scale 3" to 1 mile: 1/2° slope = 1.3", 1°
+slope =.65", 2° slope =.32", 3° slope =.22". These distances are
+already on the alidade and if you get a slope of 2° with the slope
+board and have the distance from your station on the map to the point
+of aim either by pacing, intersection or resection, apply the M.D.
+scale as many times as it will go. This will give the number of
+contour lines crossing the traverse and the difference in elevation.
+The spacing of the contours may not be even between your station and
+the point of aim in which case the position of the contours must be
+estimated by eye.
+
+If your elevation above the datum or sea level is unknown at the start
+assume any elevation which is great enough to put the datum lower than
+the lowest spot of the area to be sketched.
+
+The sketching board is easily made to serve as a slope board in this
+manner. Hang a plumb bob about an inch below the center of a straight
+edge of the board while pointing at the horizon, using the back of the
+board. Mark a point 5.7" directly below and draw a semicircle through
+it with the same radius. Now mark the point below the center zero and
+from it divide the arc using chords one tenth of an inch long. This
+will give a scale reading in degrees. By sighting along the top of the
+board at some object at the height of the eye from the ground the
+degree of slope is shown by the plumb bob on the scale below. Care
+must be exercised to prevent the wind from disturbing the reading. A
+protractor may be used in the same manner by sighting along the top
+and using a plumb bob to record the angle.
+
+In reading maps it is important to know whether points are visible
+from each other due to intervening ridges or other topographical
+features. This can be told by laying off accurately the distance on
+the map between the points in question and using as datum the lowest
+of the 3 points, then draw vertical lines, from the 2 higher points,
+making them in proportion to their elevation with any convenient
+scale. Draw a line between the first and last points and, if the
+intervening vertical cuts this line the second point is not visible
+from the first. Take for example, two points A and B, 1,760 yards
+apart, by the map, A 500 feet and B 450 feet above sea level, the
+intervening point C is 475 feet above sea level and 500 yards from B.
+As B is the lowest we will call its elevation zero or at datum, then
+elevation of A is 50 feet and C 25 feet.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #10]
+
+Another method of deciding visibility is by proportion. Measure the
+distance between the three points A, B, and C, and obtain their
+elevations above the datum (lowest of the 3) and using similar
+triangles. Take the same case as above, letting X represent the point
+above which the view is clear at 1,260 yards from point A, the line of
+sight passes through this point.
+
+1760 (A--B) : 500 (B--C) : : 50 (elev. A) : X
+ solving, X = 14.2
+
+Now, since the ground at point C is 25 feet above the base and the
+line of sight passes within 14.2 feet of the base at this place, an
+observer at A is unable to see B.
+
+The matter of profiling is very simple. Merely mark where the contours
+cut the edge of a piece of co-ordinate paper and extend the proper
+elevations, then pass a line through these points, remembering that
+the surface of the ground has a natural curve.
+
+
+LESSON 6. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--By use of the slope scale on the sketch board and the
+contour interval scale on the alidade, each man will secure vertical
+data on the flat sketch made in the fourth lesson. Certain critical
+elevations will be determined and marked with red flags before hand.
+The elevations of two points on the ground will be furnished, one as
+the datum and the other as a check. Draw in contours of this sketch
+with the help of drainage lines and elevations already secured.
+
+The chief points to be considered are to take slopes from points
+established on the sketch; to take several sights and average the
+angle of slope; to properly lay off the elevation by using the slope
+scale on the alidade; and finally to put in the contours along these
+lines of sight _on the spot_ thus allowing for difference in
+topography between the point of sight and the station from which the
+elevation is taken. Careful note must be made of the drainage systems
+as these are the keynotes to the sketch and finally the contours are
+connected together, keeping in mind always that no contour stops
+unless it makes a closed curve or goes off the map. Remember also
+that contours make fingers pointing up stream and are blunt around
+hill sides. Contours cross streams to opposite points and break at
+roads, continuing on the other side. Uniform slopes have
+equally-spaced contours. Do not try to measure every slope, two
+intersecting elevation sights on a hill will check the height. Put the
+intervening contours in by eye.
+
+
+LESSON 7. (CLASSROOM--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Completing the map sketch previously made and making a
+landscape sketch.
+
+It is important to complete a map and no matter how good it is, if
+certain points are omitted, the value of the work is very much
+decreased. The sketcher must clear the sketch of all unnecessary lines
+and notes and make his lettering clear on the map. Be sure that the
+following items are on the sketch before it is turned in.
+
+ 1. Location of the ground shown.
+ 2. Line of magnetic north shown by an arrow, and if declination is
+known, the true north also.
+ 3. Graphic scale and representative fraction--R.F.
+ 4. Vertical interval--V.I.
+ 5. Sketcher's name and organization to which he belongs.
+ 6. Date.
+
+A landscape sketch is a place sketched with details shown in
+perspective. The horizon is always of military importance and should
+be shown as well as intervening crests, woods, houses, etc. Landscape
+sketching in trench warfare is a necessary accomplishment of the
+observer. The beginner will at first be confused by a mass of details,
+but he must note only the outline of the features sketched. First draw
+the sky line and crests, then fill in the other details with fewest
+lines possible. Unnecessary shading tends to detract from the
+clearness of the sketch. There will be great difficulty in getting the
+perspective, note the size of objects, the further away they are the
+smaller they seem. Make them so. In making the sketch, hold the pad in
+front with one eye closed, the upper edge of the pad horizontal; a
+string 20 inches long is tied to the pad and held between the teeth to
+insure the same distance from the eye each time. Moreover, if it is
+desired to locate objects by deflection of an angle from a reference
+point, this can be done by using _mils_. One mil is 1-6400 of a
+circle. At 20 inches a half-inch interval subtends 25 mils.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #11]
+
+The paper is oriented by bringing the sector desired along the upper
+edge of the pad. The points desired are then in proper positions, both
+horizontally and vertically.
+
+Place a mark at the upper edge for points desired. The sky line should
+be located first. Now carry these lines down, having drawn three
+horizontal lines about 1/2 inch apart, beginning with the highest
+point on the top line. Marks locating the other features are likewise
+transposed in vertical and horizontal portions.
+
+Now draw sky line connecting transposed marks, then such other points
+as crests, trenches, houses, etc. After practice most other features
+can be drawn in without reorienting, the sky line having been drawn.
+The vertical elevation should be slightly exaggerated. Objects in the
+background should be drawn in lightly while nearby features are
+indicated by _heavy lines_. Avoid details, draw only silhouette, shade
+only in showing woods.
+
+
+LESSON 8. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Make complete area sketch including contours, with no data
+furnished other than the initial elevation.
+
+Before commencing the work summarize the important points involved.
+
+ 1. If possible select a base line.
+ 2. Locate as many points by intersection as possible.
+ 3. Make traverse by road, check locations by resection.
+ 4. At good observation points observe and complete the sketch as far
+as possible.
+
+At each station keep the following points in view:
+
+ 1. Back sight on previous station.
+ 2. Select new sighting point ahead.
+ 3. Determine elevation by slope board.
+ 4. Put in contours where possible noting the drainage and critical
+points of the general slope and the terrain.
+ 5. Put in details along traverse just made of all topographical
+features of military importance.
+ 6. Determine your present elevation.
+ 7. Make as many shots for intersection as you can and mark them.
+ 8. Look for possible resection shots.
+
+
+LESSONS 9 AND 10. (FIELD WORK--NINE HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Make a road sketch of about 12 miles with scale of 3 inches
+to the mile, V.I. 20 feet. This should include details of military
+importance to a distance of 300 yards on either side of the road.
+
+Keep in mind these points:
+
+ 1. Start carefully and give attention to every part of the map.
+ 2. Keep the board properly oriented.
+ 3. Watch the water drainage systems.
+ 4. Put down all necessary details at each _setup_.
+ 5. Note high hills and towns not on immediate route, condition of
+roads, fences, cultivation, hedges, cuts and fills, bridges (kind and
+length), railroads, telegraph and telephone lines, schools, churches,
+etc., notice particularly woods and points of concealment for hostile
+troops.
+
+Do the work at each station for elevation, contours and the noting of
+necessary details so that the sketch will be complete as you go along.
+Make certain that the title of the sketch, scale, orientation, etc.,
+are all clearly indicated, for a road map may have to be completed by
+another or may be called for suddenly when it will be useless without
+these details.
+
+Remember there are but two things absolutely essential to a good road
+sketch; a good traverse and the location of the drainage system in its
+relation to this traverse. With this control approximate contours can
+be drawn by anyone having a knowledge of the principles of topography.
+Never plot unimportant details. Prominent buildings and farm houses
+are of value for locating oneself. Woods and orchards are shown for
+tactical reasons but no one can expect to show every fence, ditch or
+bit of cover that might hide a patrol.
+
+
+Map Reading.
+
+(GETTYSBURG 3" MAP--HUNTERSTOWN SHEET.) Plattsburg Barracks, N.Y.,
+Sept. 17, 1917:
+
+1. What is the shortest distance by road from Biglersville to Texas?
+
+2. Describe the road between Texas and Table Rock.
+
+3. Is it a cut or a fill along the railroad about 1/2 mile east of
+Granite Hill Station?
+
+4. What is meant by 931 on Chestnut Hill?
+
+5. Can a man on the summit of hill 712 (about one mile southwest of
+Plainview) be seen from the town of Plainview?
+
+6. Point out two fords on the Conewago River.
+
+7. Where is the highest point on the road from Plainview to
+Heidlersburg?
+
+8. Describe the fences along the road from Texas to Table Rock
+Station.
+
+9. Is Hill 566 S.W. from D. Wert visible from Henderson Meeting House?
+
+10. Of what material is the bridge at Bridge School House constructed?
+
+Harvard College:
+
+1. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see road fork 535 (about 1,500 yards
+south)?
+
+2. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road, and has
+crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544.) Can this patrol see the
+Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and cross roads 616?
+
+3. Can the sentinel at 712 see the road fork 518 (1,850 yards
+southwest from 712)?
+
+4. Can the sentinel at 712 see the cross roads 561 (about 1,200 yards
+southeast)?
+
+Assuming the height of a man as 5' 0" above the ground and trees and
+buildings as 30' 0".
+
+1. Is the ground at road fork 552 near D. Wirt visible to a patrol on
+Hill 712? If not what is the obstructing point? Turn in profile, using
+cross section paper.
+
+2. Disregarding trees, is a man standing on Bridge 523 near Bridge
+S.H. visible from Hill 712?
+
+Solve by any method desired indicating the method.
+
+1. Make a profile from location of the letter "U" of Chestnut Hill
+near Center Mills to Hill 712, 2-1/2 miles to the south.
+
+2. Is the location of the letter "B" of Beatrich visible from "U" of
+Chestnut Hill? If not what obstructs?
+
+1. Can a man on Hill 712 see a man at cross roads 554 in Hunterstown
+(disregard trees)?
+
+2. To a man standing at the point where contour 680 crosses the road
+just south of 707, where does the roadbed first become invisible?
+
+1. When the point arrives at Hill 647 can it see the road fork 610 to
+the northwest?
+
+2. When the flank patrol reaches Benders Church cross roads can it see
+an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile to
+the northeast?
+
+3. Looking north along the Center Mills road from Hill 647, where does
+the road first become invisible?
+
+1. What does 1/21120 mean?
+
+2. What direction is the general drainage system on this sheet?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 6.
+
+Helpful References to the Articles of War.
+
+(Extracted from M.C.M. and Guide to the Articles of War--Waumbaugh's
+Lectures.)
+
+
+MILITARY LAW is the body of rules that governs members of the army.
+Military Law is based upon the Articles of War approved by Congress,
+August 27, 1916, effective March 1, 1917. This body of rules defines:
+
+ (1) Punishable offenses of members of the army.
+ (2) The Method of determining guilt.
+ (3) Punishment.
+
+The present Articles of War are revisions of those from the
+Revolution.
+
+
+ARTICLE 1.
+
+DEFINITIONS:
+
+ (1) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a
+ commissioned officer (and no one else).
+ (2) The word "soldier" to include non-commissioned officer or any
+ other enlisted man.
+
+
+ARTICLE 2.
+
+PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW:
+
+ (1) All officers and soldiers of the Regular Army.
+ (2) All volunteers in the service of the U.S.
+ (3) All other persons lawfully called, drafted or ordered into such
+ service.
+ (4) West Point cadets.
+ (5) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for
+ service with the army, by order of the President.
+ (6) All retainers to the camp, or accompanying or serving with the
+ army in time of war, both within and without territorial
+ jurisdiction of U.S.
+ (7) All persons under sentence by court-martial.
+
+
+ARTICLES 3-18.
+
+COURTS MARTIAL CLASSIFIED:
+
+ (A) General Courts Martial.
+ Appointed by
+ (1) President,
+ (2) Commanding officer of department or territorial division.
+ (3) Commanding officer of separate army division brigade.
+ (4) Commanding officer of district or force empowered by
+ President.
+ Jurisdiction.
+ Over all persons subject to Military Law as regards all
+ offenses punishable by Military Law.
+ Sentence.
+ Everything.
+ (B) Special Courts Martials (3 to 5 officers inclusive).
+ Appointed by
+ (1) Commanding officer of district, garrison, fort or camp.
+ (2) Commanding officer of brigade, detached battalion.
+ Jurisdiction.
+ Over any person subject to military law (except an officer),
+ and for any crime not capital. (Only soldiers excluding
+ those having certificate of eligibility for promotion.)
+ Sentence.
+ (1) No power to adjudge dishonorable discharge.
+ (2) No confinement in excess of six (6) months.
+ (3) No forfeiture of pay in excess of six (6) months.
+ (C) Summary Courts Martial (one (1) officer).
+ Appointed by
+ (1) Commanding officer of garrison, fort, camp, etc.
+ (2) Commanding officer of regiment, detached battalion, etc.
+ (N.B.) When but one (1) officer is present with command he
+ shall be the summary court martial.
+ Jurisdiction.
+ (1) Only privates holding no certificate of eligibility for
+ promotion--and
+ (2) For crimes not capital.
+ Sentence.
+ (1) Confinement not over 3 months.
+ (2) No dishonorable discharge.
+ (3) No punishment over one (1) month without higher
+ authority.
+
+
+METHOD OF ENTERING A CHARGE AGAINST A MAN:
+
+Example:
+
+ Charge: Violation of the ---- Article of War.
+
+ Specification: In that (rank, name, organization) did at
+ (place) on or about (date) etc. (brief description
+ of offence committed).
+
+ Signed
+ (Name)
+ (Rank and Branch of Service)
+
+In cases where there are more than one charge the number of each A.W.
+is put down in the charge. A description of each offence is put down
+separately under SPECIFICATION.
+
+Note that double lines are drawn under CHARGE, single line under
+SPECIFICATION.
+
+
+GENERAL REMARKS:
+
+The three (3) Courts Martial are alike in the following:
+
+ (a) Composed only of officers of Army or Marine Corps on detached
+ service with the Army by order of the President.
+ (b) Pass upon both law and fact.
+ (c) Criminal Courts only.
+ (d) Unable to promulgate any finding that does not require approval
+ of appointing authority.
+
+The three (3) Courts Martial differ in the following:
+
+ (a) Number of members.
+ (b) Appointing authority.
+ (c) Punishments.
+
+
+ARTICLE 31.
+
+ORDER OF VOTING:
+
+Members in General or Special Courts Martial shall vote from junior to
+senior.
+
+
+ARTICLE 39.
+
+LIMITATIONS UPON PROSECUTIONS:
+
+Military offences fall into three (3) groups:
+
+ (1) War desertion, mutiny, murder. Have no limitations.
+ (2) Burglary, etc. (A W. 93) and frauds against Government (A.W.
+ 94). Prosecution limited to 3 years.
+ (3) All other offences. 2 years.
+
+In some cases the Statute of Limitations is suspended (A.W. 39),
+especially in cases of absence from the United States.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following Articles of War are the important ones for officers to
+be acquainted with in the ordinary course of his duties:
+
+
+ARTICLE 54.
+
+FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT:
+
+Punishment: Court Martial.
+
+ "Any person procuring himself to be enlisted by means of
+ willful misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications
+ for enlistment and shall receive pay or allowance," ...
+ This offense requires two (2) steps:
+ (1) Misrepresentation or concealment.
+ (2) Receiving pay or allowances.
+
+
+ARTICLE 58.
+
+DESERTION:
+
+Punishment: (Wartime) Death or Court Martial. (Peacetime) Court
+Martial.
+
+ "Any person--who deserts or attempts to desert in time of War
+ ... death or such other punishment as the court martial may
+ direct ... any other time any punishment except death."
+ Essential features are:
+ (1) An intent not to return.
+ (2) An overt act of separation from duty.
+ Drunkenness tends to show absence of the intent.
+ Minority is no defense.
+ Enlistment while in desertion does not remove the charge
+ of desertion.
+
+
+ARTICLE 61.
+
+ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE:
+
+Punishment: Court Martial.
+
+ "Any person who fails to repair at the fixed time to duty, or
+ goes from same without leave of absence, or absents himself from
+ his command, guard, quarters, station or camp without proper
+ leave...."
+ Does not require to prove intent, yet persons ignorant of
+ military law, drunk or victims of mistake are dealt with gently.
+
+
+ARTICLE 62.
+
+DISRESPECT TOWARD PRESIDENT, VICE-PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY OF
+WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES:
+
+Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal from the service,
+ (Soldier) Court martial.
+
+ "Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words
+ against the President, etc.... any other person subject to
+ military law who so offends."
+ Contemptuous language is objectionable and liable to court
+ martial whether
+ (1) Used in public or private.
+ (2) In official or private capacity.
+ (3) Written or spoken.
+ (4) True or untrue.
+
+
+ARTICLE 63.
+
+DISRESPECT TOWARD A SUPERIOR OFFICER:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with
+ disrespect toward his superior officer...."
+ Unlike Article 62, disrespect toward a superior officer requires
+ no words--acting or neglecting to act (such as rudeness or failure
+ to salute) are enough.
+
+
+ARTICLE 64.
+
+ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER:
+
+Punishment: Death or court-martial.
+
+ (1) "Any person subject to military law who on any pretense
+ whatsoever, strikes his superior officer--lifts a weapon, or
+ offers violence against him, being in the execution of his
+ office."
+ (2) "Or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior
+ officer."
+ Drunkenness here tends to show absence of the essential
+ willfullness.
+ Self defense is not forbidden nor violence to suppress mutiny.
+
+
+ARTICLE 65.
+
+INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD A NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICER:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ (1) "Any soldier who assaults or attempts or threatens to
+ strike or assault."
+ (2) "Or willfully disobeys the lawful order of a
+ non-commissioned officer while in the execution of his office."
+ (3) "Or uses threatening or insulting language."
+ (4) "Or behaves in an insubordinate or disrespectful manner."
+ Drunkenness will not have the effect here of showing an absence
+ of willfullness.
+
+
+ARTICLE 68.
+
+
+DISORDERS:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "All officers and non-commissioned officers have power to quell
+ disorders and to order officers who take part in the same into
+ arrest, and other persons into arrest or confinement.
+ Whosoever, being so ordered:
+ (1) Refuses to obey.
+ (2) Draws a weapon.
+ (3) Otherwise threatens or does violence shall be punished."
+ This is one instance (except a.w., 67, mutiny) where even a
+ corporal might order a general into arrest.
+ This is the only instance:
+ (1) Where anyone other than a commissioned officer can put an
+ officer under arrest.
+ (2) Where anyone other than an officer can order, arrest or
+ confinement of a soldier except on power given by C.O.
+
+
+ARTICLE 69.
+
+BREAKING ARREST:
+
+Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal, (Soldier) Court-martial.
+
+ "Any officer charged with crime shall be placed in arrest by
+ C.O.... in exceptional cases ... confined."
+ "A soldier charged with crime ... shall be placed in confinement
+ ... when charged with minor offense placed in arrest."
+ "Any person placed in arrest ... shall be restricted to
+ barracks, quarters, tent, unless limits are enlarged by proper
+ authority."
+ "An officer or any other person breaking his arrest or who
+ escapes from confinement before being set at liberty by proper
+ authority shall be punished by...."
+ To break arrest is punishable even though a person is innocent
+ of the charge or ought to have been released.
+
+
+ARTICLE 75.
+
+MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY:
+
+Punishment: Death or court-martial.
+
+ "Any officer or soldier who:
+ (1) Misbehaves before the enemy--runs away, or shamefully
+ abandons post.
+ (2) Or speaks words inducing others to do so.
+ (3) Or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage.
+ (4) Occasions false alarms in camp or quarters shall suffer
+ ...."
+ The word "enemy" implies "any hostile body" such as a mob or
+ riot crowd.
+
+
+ARTICLE 83.
+
+NEGLECT OF MILITARY PROPERTY:
+
+Punishment: Make good the loss and court-martial.
+
+ "Any person subject to military law who willfully or through
+ neglect suffers to be lost, damaged, or wrongfully disposed of,
+ any military property belonging to United States of
+ America--shall make good the loss and...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 84.
+
+WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSAL OF PROPERTY ISSUED TO SOLDIERS:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of any property
+ issued for military service shall be punished...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 85.
+
+DRUNK ON DUTY:
+
+Punishment: (War time) dismissal and court-martial, (Peace time)
+court-martial.
+
+ "Any officer ... drunk on duty shall ... in time of war be
+ dismissed ... and
+ Any other person subject to military law, drunk on duty ...
+ shall be punished...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 86.
+
+MISBEHAVIOR OF A SENTINEL:
+
+Punishment: (War time) death or court-martial, (Peace time)
+court-martial.
+
+ "Any sentinel found:
+ (1) Drunk.
+ (2) Asleep.
+ (3) Or who leaves before being regularly relieved shall be
+ punished...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 92.
+
+MURDER OR RAPE:
+
+Punishment: Death or life imprisonment.
+
+ "Any person who commits murder or rape shall suffer death or
+ life imprisonment as the court-martial may direct."
+ No person shall be tried for murder or rape committed in the
+ limits of the U.S.A. in time of peace. This is left to civil
+ courts.
+
+
+ARTICLE 93.
+
+VARIOUS CRIMES:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "Any person who commits
+ (1) Manslaughter,
+ (2) Mayhem (cutting),
+ (3) Arson,
+ (4) Burglary,
+ (5) Larceny,
+ (6) Embezzlement,
+ (7) Perjury,
+ (8) Assault with intent to commit any felony.
+ (9) Assault with intent to do bodily harm. shall be
+ punished...."
+ Definition of these crimes is left to local law.
+
+
+ARTICLE 94.
+
+FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ Article of War No. 94 is equivalent to prohibiting any person
+ subject to military law from defrauding or attempting, or
+ conspiring to defraud the Government of the U.S.A.--also from
+ stealing, embezzling any Government property.
+
+
+ARTICLE 95.
+
+CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN:
+
+Punishment: Dismissal.
+
+ "Any officer or cadet convicted of unbecoming conduct shall be
+ dismissed...."
+ Misconduct may be official or unofficial.
+
+
+ARTICLE 96.
+
+GENERAL ARTICLE, THE CATCH ALL:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "... all disorders and neglects to the prejudice of good
+ military discipline.
+ All conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military
+ service.
+ All crimes and offences not capital shall be taken cognizance of
+ by
+ (1) General,
+ (2) Special,
+ (3) Summary court-martials according to the nature and degree
+ of the offense and punished....
+ Article of War 96 covers all crimes and is handy when no other
+ Article of War fits. It is wise, however, to use this Article
+ sparingly on Charges, finding if possible the exact Article
+ necessary to cover the case at hand."
+
+
+EXAMPLES.
+
+PROBLEM 1:
+
+Charge.--Violation of ---- Article of War.
+
+Specification.--In that Private John Doe, Company C. 301st Regiment
+Infantry, did at Albany, New York, on or about September 15th, 1917,
+dress himself in the uniform of a 1st Lieutenant and attend a dance at
+Odd Fellows Hall.
+
+(Signed) JOHN HANCOCK,
+ Captain, 301st Infantry.
+
+Under what article of war, if any, does this belong?
+
+
+PROBLEM 2:
+
+Charge.--Violation of ---- and ---- Articles of War.
+
+Specification.--In that Sergeant James Hopkins, Company H, 205th
+Infantry, did at Franconia, N.H., on or about July 4th return to
+barracks intoxicated.
+
+In that Sergeant James Hopkins, moreover, refused to appear at
+reveille July 5th.
+
+(Signed) WILLIAM HITCHCOCK,
+ Captain, 205th Infantry.
+
+Under what articles of war do these offenses belong?
+
+What kind of court-martial required?
+
+
+PROBLEM 3:
+
+Charge.--Violation of ---- Article of War.
+
+Specification.--In that Captain George Jones, 125th Infantry did at
+Laconia, Maine, on or about August 20, 1917, make a speech in which he
+stated that the Reichstag of Germany was a more efficient and
+democratic body than the United States Congress.
+
+(Signed) ALBERT SMITH,
+ Major, 125th Infantry.
+
+Under what article of war does this offense belong?
+
+
+NO. ARTICLES OF WAR. PUNISHMENT.
+54. Fraudulent enlistment Court martial
+58. Desertion War: Death or court martial
+ Peace: Except death
+61. Absence without leave Court martial
+62. Disrespect to Presidents Officer: Dismissal
+ Vice-President, Secretary Soldier: Court martial
+ of War, Congress, etc.
+63. Disrespect to superior officer Court martial
+64. Assaulting or disobeying Death or court martial
+ superior officer
+65. Insubordination to a Court martial
+ non-commissioned officer
+69. Arrest or confinement Officer: Dismissal
+ of accused persons Soldier: Court martial
+75. Misbehavior before the enemy Death or court martial
+83. Loss, etc., military property Make good the loss and court martial
+84. Loss of military property Court martial
+ issued to soldiers
+85. Drunk on duty { Officers--
+ { War: Dismissal
+ { Peace: Court martial
+ { Soldiers: Court martial
+86. Misbehavior of sentinel { War: Death or
+ { Peace: Court martial (except death)
+93. Various crimes Court martial
+94. Frauds against the Government Court martial
+95. Conduct unbecoming an officer Dismissal
+96. General article Court martial
+ (General or special)
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 7.
+
+Notes on Army Regulations
+
+
+1. OBEDIENCE required in the military service--strict and prompt.
+
+2. AUTHORITY EXERCISED with firmness, kindness and justice--prompt and
+lawful punishment.
+
+3. ABUSIVE LANGUAGE or conduct by superiors forbidden.
+
+4. RESPECT TO SUPERIORS will be extended upon all occasions, whether
+on duty or not.
+
+5. REMARKS BY OFFICERS or soldiers upon others in the military
+service, whether praise or censure, public or private, written or
+spoken, is prohibited. Any effort to affect legislation for a personal
+favor will be entered against a man's military record.
+
+106. FURLOUGHS not granted to men about to be discharged. Not more
+than five per cent of a company shall be absent at one time.
+
+109. MEN ON FURLOUGH may not leave the United States.
+
+111. FOR MEN IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES furlough can begin on date of
+reaching United States.
+
+113. No PAYMENTS made to men while on furlough. Arms not to be taken
+on furlough or while reporting sick.
+ (N.B.--There will unquestionably be a modification of this ruling,
+as the custom abroad is to have every man keep his complete equipment
+with him whenever possible.)
+
+116. DESERTION. Property lost or destroyed will be charged against
+deserter.
+
+117. ABANDONED CLOTHES turned over to Quartermaster. Personal effects
+sold and credited to United States.
+
+121. REWARD OF $50 for apprehension and delivery of deserter or
+military prisoner.
+
+127. COSTS OF APPREHENSION will be charged against deserter.
+
+129. NO PAY OR CLOTHES drawn by soldier awaiting trial on charge of
+desertion.
+
+131. WILL BE RESTORED to duty only by court martial or authority
+competent to order trial.
+
+132. ABSENT WITHOUT LEAVE. Enlisted man forfeits all pay and
+allowances while away.
+ Soldier will not be charged with desertion until commanding officer
+has reason to believe he intended to desert. Absence of less than 24
+hours will not be noted upon the muster roll.
+
+139. DISCHARGE of enlisted man only
+ 1. By order of President or Secretary of War.
+ 2. By order of General Court Martial.
+ 3. By order of United States court or justice or judge, on writ of
+ habeas corpus.
+ 4. By command of territorial department.
+ 5. By disability in line of duty.
+ 6. By sentence of civil court.
+ 7. By purchase.
+(N.B.--In time of war it is probable that the last two methods would
+not be effective for discharge from the service.)
+
+140. FINAL STATEMENTS. The company commander will furnish each
+enlisted man a final statement (or duplicate) or a full statement in
+writing explaining why such final statement is not furnished. No final
+statement will be furnished a soldier who has forfeited all pay and
+allowances or who has no deposits due him.
+
+147. CERTIFICATE will give
+ 1. Character certified by company commander.
+ 2. Whether recommended for re-enlistment.
+ In case of negative opinion, the soldier should be notified at
+ least 30 days prior to discharge. In that case the company
+ commander shall convene a board of three officers (if possible) to
+ determine what kind of discharge shall be given. The soldier will
+ be given a hearing.
+
+151. LOSS OF DISCHARGE CERTIFICATE. Discharge certificates will not be
+made in duplicate. Upon proper proof of loss or destruction without
+fault of person entitled to it, the War Department will issue a
+certificate of service, showing date of enlistment and discharge from
+the army and character given in original certificate.
+ Discharge certificates should never be forwarded to the War
+Department in correspondence unless called for.
+
+159. PHYSICAL DISABILITY CERTIFICATE issued when an enlisted man is
+permanently unfitted for service, in line of duty. Certificates of
+disability not made in duplicate.
+
+162. DEATH OF SOLDIER.
+ 1. Effects are secured.
+ 2. Nearest relatives notified.
+ 3. Adjutant General of army notified.
+
+In active service the War Department requires the following reports:
+ 1. Report of company commander to Adjutant General, covering death
+ and disposal of remains.
+ 2. Report of surgeon or company commander embodying
+ a. Cause of death.
+ b. Whether in line of duty.
+ c. Whether due to another soldier's misconduct.
+ 3. Inventory of effects in duplicate.
+
+163. EFFECTS, when not claimed within reasonable time, sold and
+credited to United States.
+ No authority for officers to pay debts of dead soldiers.
+ Trinkets will not be sold but sent to the Adjutant General's office.
+
+165. EFFECTS will be delivered, if called for, to legal representative
+of deceased after arrears are paid.
+
+167. MEDAL OF HONOR. Authorized by Congress to be awarded to officers
+and men for extreme acts of gallantry in action, beyond line of duty.
+Recommendations will be considered by standard of extraordinary merit,
+and must have incontestible proof.
+
+184. CERTIFICATE OF MERIT. Granted by President to any enlisted man in
+the service for distinguished acts in line of duty, on recommendation
+of company commander, based upon statement of eye witness, preferably
+the immediate company commander. $200 permanent additional pay is
+allowed.
+
+285. QUARTERS. Name of each soldier on bunk. Arms on rack.
+Accoutrements hung up by the belts.
+
+287. SATURDAY INSPECTION preceded by thorough policing. Leaders of
+squads will see that everything is clean.
+
+1011. NEGLECT OF ROOMS or furniture by officer or soldier a military
+offense. All necessary costs shall be paid by him.
+
+1178. DESTRUCTION OF TABLEWARE or kitchen utensils by soldiers will be
+charged against their pay.
+
+288. CHIEFS OF SQUADS are responsible
+ 1. For cleanliness of men.
+ 2. For their proper equipment for duty.
+ 3. For their proper dress when going "on pass."
+
+374. PREMISES shall be policed daily after breakfast.
+
+290. COMPANY COMMANDER will see that public property held by men is
+kept in good order, and missing or spoiled articles paid for.
+
+292. ARMS shall not be taken down without proper supervision and by
+order of commissioned officer.
+ No changing of parts or finish.
+ Tompions (muzzle plugs) in small arms forbidden.
+
+657. ACCOUNTABILITY AND RESPONSIBILITY--Both devolve upon persons
+entrusted with public property.
+ Responsibility without accountability devolves upon one to whom
+property is entrusted, but who does not have to make returns
+therefor. Responsibility does not end until property has been given
+back to accountable officer and a receipt taken, or he has been
+relieved by regulations or by orders.
+ Accountability without responsibility occurs when an officer holds
+proper memorandum receipts for property delivered to others.
+
+EXAMPLE.--The Company Commander is accountable and responsible for the
+rifles turned over to his company. He is accountable without
+responsibility when each enlisted man has been issued a rifle and has
+signed a receipt for it. Each enlisted man is then responsible for his
+rifle, without accountability, until he returns it in proper
+condition. In general, therefore: Accountability requires evidence of
+the disposition that has been made of property. Responsibility implies
+possession, and requires return of the property or payment for it.
+
+685. LOSS OF PUBLIC PROPERTY by neglect of any officer or soldier
+shall be paid by him, at such rates as a survey of the property may
+determine.
+ Charges will be made only after conclusive proof, and not without a
+survey if the soldier demands one.
+ Signing the payroll will be regarded as an acknowledgment of the
+justice of the charge.
+
+1202. RATION is the allowance of food for one person or animal for one
+day.
+
+1229. FORFEITURE of ration is made when a soldier overstays furlough.
+
+1339. PAY for continuous service is credited a soldier if he enlists
+within three months after honorable discharge.
+ For privates an increase of $3 per month is allowed up to and
+including the third enlistment, beyond this $1 per month increase
+given up to and including the seventh enlistment.
+ For non-commissioned officers the increase of $3 per month continues
+to and includes the seventh enlistment.
+ No increased pay is given after the seventh enlistment to private or
+non-commissioned officer.
+
+1347. ALLOTMENTS (revised by Act of Congress, October, 1917).
+ The new law does away with future pensions. Allotments may be made to:
+ 1. Family.
+ 2. Bank.
+
+ For married men or those with dependents, such as children, parents
+divorced wives, whose support is required by court order, allotments
+are compulsory, and must not be less than $15 a month and not more
+than one-half of his pay. The Company Commander is responsible for
+finding who comes under this rule. By this arrangement soldiers cannot
+shirk the support of dependents.
+ The government will double the amount allotted by each soldier, to a
+limit of $37.50 a month. In cases where the soldier allots half of his
+pay the government will add to the allotment according to the
+following scale, even though it more than doubles the amount paid by
+the soldier:
+
+ Class A.
+ Wife, no child, $15.
+ Wife, one child, $25.
+ Wife, two children, $32.50.
+ For each additional child, $5 more.
+ No wife living, one child, $5.
+ Two children, $12.50.
+ Three children, $20.
+ Four children, $30.
+ For each additional child, $5.
+ Class B.
+ One parent, $10.
+ Two parents, $20.
+ Each grandchild, brother, sister or additional dependent, $5.
+ Nurses can make allotment.
+
+When both A and B classes are in need of allotment from a soldier's
+pay, and he has allotted half of his pay to Class A, he may allot an
+additional one-seventh of his pay for the support of Class B
+dependents, and the government will pay the sums listed above to the
+Class B dependents, to the limit of $20 a month. Payments under this
+act were begun November 1, 1917. In case less than one-half of a
+soldier's pay is allotted, the Secretary of War may require the
+allotment to be increased up to one-half of the pay.
+
+COMPENSATION FOR DEATH OR DISABILITY in line of duty. In all cases
+must be applied for. In case of death, monthly compensation shall be
+as follows per month:
+
+ Widow, $25.
+ Widow and 1 child, $35.
+ Widow and 2 children, $47.50.
+ Each additional child, $5.
+ One child alone, $20.
+ Two children, $30.
+ Three children, $40.
+ Each additional child, $5.
+ Widowed mother, $20.
+ For transportation of body, $100.
+
+ No women can receive compensation from two sources. The government
+will continue to pay compensation to a dependent wife until her death
+or remarriage, and to children until they are 18 years old, unless
+they are insane or helpless, in which case it will continue to pay the
+compensation during such incapacity.
+ In case of total disability, compensation will be as follows per
+month:
+
+ Soldier alone, $30.
+ With wife, no child, $45.
+ With wife, one child, $55.
+ With wife, two children, $65.
+ Three children or more, $75.
+ No wife living, one child, $40.
+ No wife living, each additional child, $10.
+ Soldier and widowed mother, $40.
+
+ In case of total disability where attendance is needed, $20 per month
+will be added to the compensation, unless the soldier is blind,
+bedridden, or has lost both feet or hands, in which case the
+compensation will be $100 per month, with no extra allowance for
+attendance. In case of partial disability, compensation will be a
+percentage of the amount paid in case of total disability. These
+annuities continue only during the life of the person for whom they
+are first paid.
+
+ADDITIONAL INSURANCE.--Uniform compensation for all ranks can go only
+to blood relations. In case of death or disability in line of duty, it
+is paid in monthly instalments for 20 years. Insurance is from $1,000
+to $10,000 in multiples of $500. The rate is exceedingly low.
+Insurance must be applied for within 120 days after entering the
+service. Premiums are paid monthly, quarterly or yearly from the pay
+of the insured man. After the war this insurance must be converted
+within five years into a policy either of straight life insurance,
+20-year payment or endowment, maturing at the age of 62. In case of
+death when there is no blood relationship, the reserve value,
+according to the American insurance mortality tables, is paid to the
+estate. None of these payments can be attached for debt, nor legal
+action started against them except in a United States Court. The
+maximum lawyer's fee in any such case is $500.
+
+1361. DEPOSITS of not less than $5 may be made by an enlisted man (not
+retired) to any quartermaster. Deposit book, signed by quartermaster
+and company commander, given to man who makes the deposit. This book
+is not transferable.
+
+1363. A LOST DEPOSIT BOOK is not replaced without an affidavit of the
+soldier, testifying that he has not sold nor assigned it.
+
+1364. PAYMENT made only on final statement. The soldier should be
+informed of the importance of keeping the deposit book.
+
+1365. WITHDRAWAL OF DEPOSIT when discharged or furloughed to reserve.
+
+1366. INTEREST on sum greater than $5 is 4 per cent.
+
+1368. FORFEITURE due to desertion, but not by sentence of court
+martial. Deposits not exempt from liabilities due the United States.
+
+1371. OFFICERS AND MEN lose pay while confined by civil authorities.
+
+1375. FURLOUGHED TO RESERVE or discharged, a soldier is given a final
+statement in duplicate. This must be presented to be valid.
+
+1378. TRANSPORTATION and subsistence is allowed to the point of
+enlistment, or for the same distance. Not subject to deduction for
+debts due the United States.
+
+1380. DISCHARGED SOLDIER under charge of fraudulent enlistment is not
+entitled to transportation and subsistence.
+
+1383. TRANSFER OF CLAIMS on the government made by an enlisted man are
+only recognized after discharge or furlough to the reserve. They must
+be in writing and must be endorsed by a commissioned officer or other
+responsible person known to the quartermaster.
+
+1437. No one is allowed to accompany sick or wounded from the battle
+line to the rear except those specifically authorized.
+
+1530. Ammunition lost or used without orders or not in line of duty
+shall be charged to the soldier using it.
+
+
+NOTES ON THE LAWS OF WAR.
+
+ (From Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons, translated from
+ the French at the Army War College, 1917. War Department
+ Document No. 626.)
+
+The laws of war were instituted under the generous error that certain
+well-organized peoples had entirely emerged from barbarism and that
+they considered themselves bound by the placing of their signatures to
+international conventions, freely agreed to.
+
+An infinite number of acts minutely and officially investigated have
+established that our troops and our Nation should never count on the
+observance of these laws and that the atrocities committed prove to be
+not only individual violations dishonoring merely the perpetrator, but
+violations premeditated and ordered in cold blood by the commanders
+with the moral support of the heads of the enemy nation.
+
+These laws are nevertheless repeated here in order that:
+
+1. The knowledge of how the war should have been conducted may develop
+in the heart of each man the sentiment of hate (applicable only to
+foes such as we actually have), that in no case should a chief of
+platoon tolerate any intercourse between his men and the enemy other
+than that of the rifle; this duty is explicit and not to be departed
+from except in the case of the wounded and prisoners incapable of
+doing harm.
+
+2. That every violator of these laws, taken in the act, shall be the
+subject of an immediate report with witnesses, then sent to the
+division headquarters to be tried as to the facts of the case.
+
+The laws of war resulted from the Geneva convention, from the
+declaration of St. Petersburg (Petrograd), and from the different
+Hague conventions. All these diplomatic papers were signed by Germany,
+Austria-Hungary, Turkey and Bulgaria.
+
+The following are the principal articles:
+
+Protect the wounded on the field of battle from pillage and from bad
+treatment; respect ambulances and evacuation convoys; respect the
+personnel exclusively concerned with the transportation, treatment and
+guarding of wounded; do not treat this personnel as prisoners of war
+if it falls into the hands of the enemy; but return such personnel, as
+well as material, when its retention shall be no longer necessary for
+the care of the wounded prisoners.
+
+Refrain from employing any projectile which weighs less than 400 grams
+that is either explosive or loaded with incendiary or inflammable
+material, from all projectiles having for their sole object the
+spreading of asphyxiating or harmful gases, all expanding bullets or
+those which will easily flatten out inside the human body, such as
+jacketed bullets whose jacket does not entirely cover the core or is
+nickel.
+
+Forbid the use of poisons or of poisoned arms, killing or wounding an
+enemy who has thrown down his arms and surrendered; declarations that
+there will be no quarter; refrain from bombarding towns and cities
+which are not defended, from firing on churches, historical monuments,
+edifices devoted to the arts, to science, to charity, to sick and
+wounded and which are marked by a conspicuous signal known to the
+enemy.
+
+Prisoners should be treated as to rations, housing and clothing the
+same as troops of the country which has captured them. All their
+personal belongings, except their arms and military papers, should be
+left in their possession.
+
+The following should be inviolate: The emissary--that is to say, an
+individual authorized by a belligerent to enter into talks with the
+authorities of the other side and coming under a white flag; also his
+trumpeter, his standard bearer, and his interpreter. He loses his
+inviolability if it is proven that he has profited by his privilege to
+provoke or commit treachery.
+
+An undisguised military man can never be treated as a spy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 8.
+
+Practice Marches.
+
+
+"Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the care
+of the feet." (i.d.r., 627.)
+
+Short marches from 2 to 4 miles should be made daily and at a uniform
+rate until the troops become hardened. Particular attention must
+always be paid to the rate of march--it is imperative for the leading
+element to keep a uniform rate per hour.
+
+Be careful and see to it that your troops march on the right-hand side
+of the road, and during halts, no one, not even officers, must be
+permitted on the left. Keep closed up, and during the last mile of
+your march have your company sing some real snappy song, and they will
+come in in jubilant spirits. Keep the muzzles of your rifles always
+elevated on the march so that men marching in rear wont be bothered.
+
+On the march the first halt is for 15 minutes taken after 45 minutes
+of marching. The men should be taught to use this time to adjust their
+clothing and equipment, and answer the calls of nature. Do not halt
+where there are houses, etc., on this first halt, as a great many men
+want to relieve themselves.
+
+The succeeding halts are for 10 minutes after 50 minutes of
+marching--except of course during a forced march--when you would march
+for a longer period. During rainy or very hot weather the halts should
+be made oftener.
+
+Do not have any straggling, remember if a man falls out he must have a
+certificate signed by an officer stating the cause. Have one officer
+march in rear of the company. Be careful about the use of water. Have
+your men take a good drink early in the morning just after reveille,
+and on the march use their canteen sparingly. One canteen of water
+must last one man one day. Do not allow men to drink until after the
+second halt.
+
+On reaching camp the kitchens are put up, latrines are dug, and tents
+are pitched. When everything has been tended to each man should give
+his feet a good salt water bath. Put them in the water and let them
+remain there for 2 minutes. Do not dry them by rubbing, but sponge
+them--this will harden the feet. This should be done for the first
+three days, after which it can be dispensed with. A change of socks
+daily should be made, take one pair of socks from the pack, and wash
+out the dirty pair.
+
+Try to avoid night marching.
+
+The leading company in each regiment regulates the rate of march.
+
+"The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the amount of
+straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at the end of
+the march." (i.d.r., 632.)
+
+Remember a sanitary squad should be detailed daily to police the
+immediate vicinity after each halt.
+
+
+Field Work.
+
+Field work will be classified under the following heads: Orders,
+Deployment, Fire, Attack, Defense, Leadership, Communications, Night
+Operations, Patrols, Advance Guards, Rear Guards, Flank Guards, Camp,
+March Outpost, and Outpost.
+
+(a) AN ORDER is the will of the commander expressed verbally or in
+writing to his subordinates. It should be clear, concise and to the
+point. A field order should be given as follows:
+ 1. Information of the enemy and supporting troops.
+ 2. General plan of the commander.
+ 3. Dispositions of the troops.
+ 4. Instructions for the trains.
+ 5. Place where messages are to be sent.
+
+(b) DO NOT DEPLOY too early. It is very fatiguing, and has a tendency
+to disorganize the skirmish line. The major designates the companies
+to be on the firing line, and those to remain in support. The distance
+between the firing line and support is from 50 to 500 yards. The
+support should be as close as possible under cover.
+
+(c) FIRE DIRECTION is the function of the company commander. He gives
+each platoon its sector or objective, determines the range, target,
+indicates the class of fire, and the time to open fire. Fire control
+is given to platoon commanders. The platoon is the fire unit. "Fire
+control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight setting
+and target, and resume a well directed fire. The best troops are those
+that submit longest to fire control." Fire discipline is the function
+of the individual soldier. "It implies that in a firing line without
+leaders, each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective
+fire upon the target."
+
+(d) THE TROOPS march in column of squads until under the observation
+of the enemy. Platoon columns are used in crossing ground where there
+is cover. Squad columns are used across the artillery zone. At
+approximately 800 yards a skirmish line is formed. Thin lines may then
+be used to advance to the attack. Remember the Major has assigned each
+company in the firing line an objective. Be sure to watch out for
+flank protection. If the Major has forgotten to have combat patrols on
+the exposed flank or flanks, it is up to the flank company to send out
+a combat patrol. This patrol should be slightly in advance of the
+front line, and off to the right or left. The advance is made by a
+fraction rushing forward. These rushes are from 20 to 80 yards. When a
+rush is made the remaining troops fire faster. The firing line should
+not be reinforced by less than a platoon. The Major determines when to
+fix bayonets. The front rank men fix bayonets first, the rear rank men
+fire faster, then the rear rank men fix bayonets while the front rank
+fire faster. A battalion is the smallest unit in the firing line to
+inaugurate a charge. Remember the battalion is the attack unit.
+
+In changing sight setting follow same plan as fixing bayonet, _i.e._,
+each front rank first, the rear rank man firing faster, etc.
+
+(e) DEFENSE.--In defense the line is usually stronger and the support
+weaker than in the attack. Do not give up your ground unless you have
+written orders from the High Command. Watch out for flank protection
+by combat patrols.
+
+(f) LEADERSHIP.--A good leader should possess self reliance,
+initiative, aggressiveness, superior knowledge, and have a conception
+of teamwork. Make your work a game in which each man has a part to
+play. Reward merit and give the disagreeable things to be done to the
+"knockers." A leader must know his men. Never give them a job to do
+that you couldn't do yourself. Train yourself to estimate the
+situation quickly and calmly. Have your men well disciplined, well
+drilled, well equipped, and well dressed. It might be called
+unmilitary by some of the sterner characters in our service, but we
+believe by occasionally drawing comparisons to something real
+amusing--a good joke--you show your men that the "old Man" is really
+made of human stuff. Be sympathetic, and it has been shown by
+experience that, for some slight breach of discipline a "little talk"
+in the orderly room does the most good, and is the best form of
+punishment. Do your work cheerfully, and your men will do likewise.
+Keep yourself abreast of the times in all matters military--remember
+your men look to you in time of action and excitement and you must be
+ready to deliver the goods. Work out and plan your orders, etc.,
+simply. Morale is the greatest asset an organization can have. Keep
+all your troubles and have the men keep theirs within the company.
+Have _esprit de corps_. The real successful leader knows and plays the
+game.
+
+(g) COMMUNICATIONS.--Communication is maintained by wireless,
+telegraph, telephone, signals, runners, carrier pigeons, aeroplanes,
+motor cars, patrols, and connecting files. Each unit usually maintains
+communication with the next higher command, and with similar commands
+on the flanks.
+
+(h) NIGHT OPERATIONS.--They are used to minimize losses from hostile
+fire, to escape observation, and to gain time. The ground to be
+traversed at night should be carefully looked over in daylight. Some
+distinctive badge should be worn by our troops. The bayonet is chiefly
+used at night. Avoid firing. The enemy should be surprised. Place
+obstacles in front of your own lines at night. Usually 50 yards is the
+maximum range to fire at night.
+
+(i) PATROLS.--"A commander may be excused for being defeated, but
+never for being surprised."
+
+
+PATROLS.
+
+Commander selects leader, strength, gives it a mission, when to report
+back, and where to send messages. He gives it a number if more than
+one patrol is sent out, information of the enemy, and location of any
+friendly patrols that may be or have been sent out. Patrol leader is
+then allowed to ask questions.
+
+_Patrol Leader_.--He should have a compass, watch, pencil, note-book,
+knife, and a map of the country. He should then do the following:
+
+ 1. Assemble his men.
+ 2. Inspect them.
+ a. To see if they are fit for this duty.
+ b. That they have no valuable maps or papers, that their
+ equipment does not rattle or shine.
+ c. Rations and water.
+ 3. He repeats the instruction that he has received.
+ 4. He explains any signals that are to be used.
+ 5. Designates a rallying point in case they are scattered.
+ 6. Details a second in command.
+ 7. Takes a formation that will favor the escape of at least one
+ man.
+
+_Conduct of the Patrol_.--1. Move cautiously but not timidly.
+ 2. Do not flinch or show consciousness of it in case you become
+ suddenly aware that you are under the observation of the enemy.
+ Not knowing that you are aware of his presence he will let you
+ come on, and suddenly, when you see cover, make a dash for it
+ and escape.
+ 3. Do not get lost.
+ 4. Do not allow yourself to think of the enemy as being in one
+ direction only.
+ 5. In entering or passing through woods take an extended skirmish
+ line formation.
+ 6. In passing any short defile bridge or ford, send one man ahead.
+ 7. If you suspect the presence of the enemy under certain cover, a
+ good way to find out is to let one man approach within a
+ reasonable distance and then, acting as though he had been
+ discovered, turn and run. This will generally draw his fire.
+ 8. Keep quiet. Forbid unnecessary talking.
+ 9. From time to time select suitable rallying points in case you
+ become separated.
+ 10. Remember that you do not fight unless in self defense.
+
+_Report_.--1. Do not report the presence of small patrols unless you
+have been ordered to do so. Locate the main body or a large command.
+ 2. Determine his strength, kind of troops and movements.
+ 3. Remember the indispensable qualities of a report are: accuracy
+ as to facts, simplicity, clearness, legibility and correct
+ spelling. Surmises must not be given as facts. Separate what you
+ know and what has been told you. A report should not be
+ expressed carelessly in ten words when it could be clearly
+ stated in twenty. Send a sketch if practicable.
+ 4. Do not send a verbal message.
+ 5. Address it to C.O. Support or C.O. Advance Guard, etc., not to
+ the commander of a certain body of troops. Give date, place and
+ time.
+ 6. Remember to state what you intend to do.
+ 7. In hostile country send two messages by different routes. In
+ friendly country one will suffice.
+ 8. When the capture of your message is likely, give messenger a
+ false one that will be easily found and conceal the true message
+ carefully.
+
+_Return_.--1. Do not return over the same route as you avoid ambuscade
+and widen your field of reconnaissance.
+ 2. Report any special features of military value that you have
+ seen to your C.O.
+ 3. Compliment your men.
+
+(j) _Advance Guard._--"An advance guard is a detachment of the main
+body which precedes it and covers it on the march" (i.d.r. 639). The
+commander of troops designates the advance guard, the distance between
+it and the main body, and also designates a commander. The advance
+guard commander if he has more than a battalion designates the
+reserve, support, distance between them. If the advance guard is a
+battalion or less it would have no reserve, and in that case the
+advance guard commander would designate the support, advance party,
+and the distance between them. In the former case the support
+commander would designate the advance party, and the distance between
+the support and the advance party. In both cases the advance party
+commander designates the point, and the distance between the point and
+the advance party. Usually it is the duty of the advance party to send
+out flank patrols. The strength varies from 1/20 to 1/3 of the main
+body. Remember "the formation of the advance guard must be such that
+the enemy will first be met by a patrol, then in turn by one or more
+larger detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next
+in rear has time to deploy before coming under effective fire." The
+advance guard must be aggressive. Do not put up with a cautious point.
+Have a double connecting file, and if possible every 100 yards. "Each
+element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its
+front." On the road in order are: point--advance
+party--support--reserve (if there is one)--main body. Have the point
+precede the advance party, all the remaining elements follow the one
+ahead. This has been found by experience to be the best method of
+getting "there."
+
+(k) _Rear Guards_.--"A rear guard is a detachment detached to protect
+the main body from attack in the rear." "The general formation is that
+of the advance guard reversed." i.e. rear point, rear party, support,
+and main body. "In retreat a column is preceded by a body of troops
+designated 'leading troops,' whose principle duty is to clear the road
+of obstacles and to facilitate the withdrawal of the command."
+
+(l) _Flank Guards_.--As their name imply protect the flanks. They
+should be in constant communication with the column. Their formation
+usually conforms to that of patrols.
+
+(m) _Camps_.--The four principal factors to be considered in the
+selection of the camp site are: near a good road or roads, have good
+drainage, plenty of room to accommodate your troops, and have a good
+water supply. Immediately after camp is made sinks are dug for the
+disposal of excreta. One should be dug for each company on the
+opposite flank from the kitchen for the disposal of human excreta, and
+one near the kitchen for the disposal of wastes, etc., that cannot be
+burned around the kitchen.
+
+(n) _March Outpost_.--A march outpost is usually an advance guard
+halted, with observers in each unit on the alert. A cossack post
+might be established on a good near by observation point. The march
+outpost is the protection furnished the main body at short halts, or
+on making camp before the outpost is established.
+
+(o) _Outpost_.--The outpost may be best illustrated by circles:
+
+Each support is numbered from right to left. Each outguard in each
+support is numbered from right to left. Each sentinel post in each
+outguard is numbered from right to left. Outguards are divided into
+three classes, cossack posts, sentry squads and packets. A cossack
+post consists of 4 men, 1 posted in observation near the posts of the
+remaining three.
+
+A sentry squad consists of one squad, posts a double sentinel post in
+observation near the post of the squad. A picket consists of two or
+more squads not exceeding half a company. It furnishes cossack posts,
+sentry squads, sentinel posts, and patrols. It is usually placed at
+the more important points of the outguard line, as a road fork, etc.
+The post furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away. There
+should be also a sentinel post near the picket in observation. If the
+outguard consists of two or more companies there is a reserve. The
+reserve is held at some suitable point, where it can readily support
+the line. The reserve maintains connection with the main body and the
+support. The support occupies the line to be held. This line should be
+entrenched. The support maintains communication with its outguards and
+with each support on its flanks. It also sends out the necessary
+reconnoitering patrols. The outguards furnish sentinel posts and
+maintain communication with them, and with the outguards on each
+flank. It is the duty of the support commander to inspect his line and
+make such changes in the outguards as he deems necessary, then to
+report to the outpost commander with a sketch if practicable of his
+line when his dispositions are completed. The outpost commander should
+inspect the line, order such changes as he deems necessary, and
+report with a sketch of the outpost line to the commander of troops
+when his outpost has taken up its position. "The support commander
+must practice the greatest economy on men consistent with the
+requirements of practical security." Instead of using outguards along
+the whole front, part of it may be covered by patrols.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #12 DIAGRAM OF OUTPOST LINE]
+
+Outline of Field Service Regulations.
+
+LAND FORCES OF U.S.
+
+ Regular Army.
+ Organized Land Militia.
+ Volunteer forces.
+
+ How Grouped:
+ Mobile Army.
+ Coast Artillery.
+
+Mobile Army:
+
+For offensive operations against enemy and so requires maximum degree
+of mobility.
+
+Basis of organization the division, a self-contained unit composed of
+all necessary arms and services.
+
+Coast Artillery:
+ (1) Permanent fortifications for defense against naval attack.
+ (2) Semi-permanent fortifications for protection of permanent from
+raiders.
+ (3) Organization of mobile troops to prevent landing of enemy.
+
+
+MILITARY INFORMATION.
+
+Essential:
+ (1) To enable War Department to estimate equipment and size of force
+necessary.
+ (2) To enable commander properly to estimate the situation in the
+field of operations.
+
+
+TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
+
+Wire, Signaling, Radio and Messenger:
+ Message.--Concise, written information sent by messenger or wire.
+ Source always given.--"Heard" separated from "seen."
+ Report.--Formal account of some enterprise.
+ War Diary.--Record of events kept in campaigns.
+ Maps.
+
+Reconnaissance:
+ The work of individuals or units in gathering information.
+ To keep contact with the enemy--to be acquainted with the terrain;
+to protect flanks and rear and guard against surprise.
+ Reconnaissance begins on entering theater of operations and lasts
+through campaign.
+ Effected by patrols and air craft.
+
+Indications of enemy:
+ Tracks on road.
+ Abandoned camps and clothing.
+ Infantry, thick, low cloud of dust.
+ Cavalry, high, thin cloud of dust.
+ Artillery and wagons, broken cloud.
+
+Determination of Enemy Forces:
+ Timing past a given point.
+ Cavalry (walk), 110 per minute.
+ Cavalry (trot), 200 per minute.
+ Infantry, 175 per minute.
+ Artillery and wagons, 5 per minute.
+
+Security:
+ Those measures taken to protect a command from enemy observation,
+annoyance and surprise.
+ Obtained by covering the front with detachments.
+ March.--Advance, flank and rear guards.
+ Camp.--Outposts.
+ March and camp detachments.--To give warning and resist attack until
+such time as detachment in rear can deploy.
+
+Advance Guard:
+ Detachment from main body to cover its advance.
+ Against surprise for information.
+ Push back small bodies.
+ Check enemy's advance until deployment in rear.
+ Seize good position and locate enemy lines.
+ Remove obstacles.
+ Strength 1-20 to 1-3 of entire command.
+
+Divisions of Advance Guard:
+ Cavalry point.
+ Infantry point.
+ Advance party.
+ Support.
+ Reserve.
+
+Leading Troops:
+ A detachment protecting the head of a column in retreat.
+
+Rear Guard:
+ Detachments protecting the rear of a retreating column.
+ Formation like that of advance guard.
+
+Flank Patrols:
+ Detachments for protecting the flanks of marching column.
+
+March Outpost:
+ Detachments for protection of column halted on march.
+ Formation, that of the marching protection.
+
+Outpost:
+ The detachments forming the protection for a force in camp or
+bivouac.
+
+Divisions of Outpost:
+ Reserve.
+ Line of supports.
+ Line of outguards.
+ Pickets.
+
+Sentinel Posts:
+ Sentry squads. Cossack posts. Sentinels.
+ Detached posts (from support).
+
+Hours of Special Danger:
+ Evening and dawn; thus good times to relieve outposts.
+
+Examining Post:
+ Intelligence and a place where prisoners, etc., are brought in.
+
+Orders:
+ The expression of the will of a commander, either written or verbal.
+ Letters of instruction--plans of the superior leaders.
+
+Field Orders:
+ Regulate tactical and strategical actions of troops.
+
+General Orders Include:
+ (1) All necessary detailed instructions.
+ (2) All standing instructions (avoid repetition).
+ (3) Proceedings of general and special courts-martial.
+
+Special Orders:
+ Relate to assignment and movement of individuals, not necessary to
+be communicated to the whole command.
+
+ Bearers of verbal orders must _repeat._
+
+Field Orders:
+ (1) Heading.--Title, place, date, hour and number.
+ (2) Distribution of troops.--Division of command.
+ (3) Body:
+ (a) Information of enemy and supporting troops.
+ (b) General plan of commander.
+ (c) Detailed tactical dispositions to carry out general plan.
+ (d) Instructions for trains--also the positions of ammunition
+ and dressing stations.
+ (4) Ending.--Authentication and method of sending.
+
+Marches and Convoys:
+ Successful march.--That which places troops at destination on time,
+and in best possible condition.
+
+Rates of March:
+ Infantry.--2 to 2-1/2 miles per hour.
+ Cavalry.--4 miles (walk), 8 miles (trot), 12 miles (gallop).
+ Artillery.--(Same.)
+
+Average Marches:
+ Infantry.--15-20 miles per day.
+ Cavalry.--25 miles per day.
+ Artillery.--15-20 miles per day.
+ Load of pack mules equals 250 pounds.
+
+March Orders, State:
+ (1) Object of march.
+ (2) Distribution of troops.
+ (3) Order of march of main body.
+ (4) Manner of forming the column.
+
+Halts:
+ First hour, 15 minutes' rest. Each successive hour, a 10-minute
+rest.
+ Weather conditions create exceptions to above rule.
+
+Marches in Peace:
+ (1) Changing station.
+ (2) Practice.
+
+In War:
+ (1) Concentration.
+ (2) In presence of enemy.
+ (3) Forced marches.
+ (4) Night marches.
+
+Convoys (on Land):
+ Those trains by which supplies are forwarded to an army from depots,
+etc., in the rear--also trains bringing supplies collected by
+requisition.
+
+Security Furnished by an Escort:
+ (1) Advance guard.
+ (2) Main body.
+ (3) Flank guard when necessary.
+ (4) Rear guard.
+
+Favorable places for attacking convoys:
+ Through woods defile.
+ Over hedges.
+ Sharp bends.
+ Ascending or descending slopes.
+ Farming corral, watering.
+ Whenever conditions are such that escort cannot quickly prepare for
+defense.
+
+Conducting Prisoners:
+ 10 foot soldiers to every 100 prisoners.
+
+Infantry:
+ The principal arm, charged with the main field work. Its role is
+the role of the entire force and its success is the success of the
+whole force.
+
+Artillery:
+ The close supporting arm of the infantry.
+ Its targets are those most dangerous in the eyes of the infantry.
+
+Cavalry:
+ Reconnaissance--supports the other arms and is valuable in pursuit.
+
+Combat:
+ Offensive.
+ Defensive.
+ (a) Temporary.
+ (b) Passive defense.
+
+Combat Principles:
+ Fire superiority.
+ Unity of command.
+ Simple and direct plans and methods.
+ All troops necessary to mission must be assigned at beginning.
+ Detachments justifiable only when they can contribute directly to
+success of main battle.
+ Some reserves must be kept.
+ Flank protection and reconnaissance.
+
+Fire Superiority:
+ Must be gained early and maintained.
+
+Frontage of Units:
+ Depth in formation for combat rather than extension of line.
+
+Reserves:
+
+Fresh troops must be on hand to
+
+ (1) Give fire line impetus.
+ (2) To penetrate enemy lines.
+ (3) To fill gaps and help reorganization.
+ (4) To meet counter attacks.
+
+Plan of Action:
+ Mission of army is to win battle.
+ Offensive action must be the rule.
+ When enemy is near every available means must be taken to gain
+information, in order to prepare for deployment.
+
+Offensive Combat:
+The attack develops into 2 parts.
+ (1) Assaulting hostile position at selected points.
+ (2) Threaten or assault all other parts of enemy line in order
+to hold enemy from reinforcing operations.
+
+Enveloping Attack:
+ Advantage of converging fire upon position.
+
+Holding Attack:
+ An attack for holding enemy in one place, while assaults made at
+another point.
+
+Assaults:
+ The local concentrated offensive.
+
+Pursuit:
+ Only by energetic pursuit can the full fruit of victory be gleaned.
+Its purpose is to cause the greatest loss in personnel and morale
+possible cavalry and artillery active.
+
+Defensive Combat:
+ Passive defense--to gain time, or to hold certain points pending
+results in other parts of the line.
+ Defense seeking a favorable decision--a parrying of blows while
+seeking a favorable opening.
+ Counter attack the crisis of this form.
+ Counter attack--made by launching reserves at the flank, while the
+enemy is fully committed to the attack.
+
+Defensive Positions:
+ Requisites:
+ Clear field of fire.
+ Flanks naturally secure.
+ Extent of ground suitable to strength of force.
+ Effective corps for reserves.
+ Good lines of retreat.
+ Good communication.
+
+Position in Readiness:
+ A position intended to resist the advance of an enemy in the
+immediate vicinity information of whose movements is not full enough
+to warrant definite action.
+
+Withdrawal From Action:
+ Troops most readily disengaged from the enemy should be withdrawn
+first.
+ Demands highest order of skill in troop leadership.
+ Covering Positions--those positions chosen to cover the retreating
+force.
+ Retreat--a step by step opposition to the enemy's advance on a
+prearranged plan.
+ Delaying actions:
+ 1. Advance delayed as long as possible, consistent with safe
+ withdrawal.
+ 2. Delayers must hold position.
+
+Night Combat:
+ Offensive advisable.
+ 1. Where fire superiority is impossible by day.
+ 2. To avoid heavy losses by advance to assaulting position by
+ day.
+ 3. To capture posts or patrols.
+ 4. To surprise for moral effect.
+
+Defensive:
+ Obstacles in front of position.
+ Trenches heavily manned and supports drawn close.
+
+Shelter:
+ Troops under canvas--in camp.
+ Troops on ground without canvas--bivouac.
+ Troops in huts or villages--cantonment.
+ Tactical considerations are paramount in the selection of camp sites
+in the theater of operations.
+
+Selection of Camp Site:
+ 1. Suitably large to accommodate command.
+ 2. Water supply sufficient and accessible.
+ 3. Good roads to and in camp.
+ 4. Wood and grass forage near at hand.
+ 5. Sandy subsoil for drainage.
+ 6. Hot weather shade--cold protection.
+
+ To maintain the efficiency of a command, troops must have adequate
+shelter.
+
+Sanitary Considerations Around Camp:
+ Latrines on opposite side of camp from kitchens.
+ Short camps, straddle trenches.
+ Long camps, trenches 2 by 6 by 12 with seats.
+ Have latrines screened.
+ Burn the trenches out daily and keep covered.
+ Wash boxes and paint with tar.
+
+
+QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ON F.S.R.
+
+1. How are the land forces of the U.S. organized?
+
+_Ans_.--The _Mobile Army_ consisting of Regular Army, organized land
+militia when called to Federal service, drafted army, volunteers and
+the field artillery and the _Coast Artillery._
+
+Basis of organization is the Division composed of all arms and
+self-sufficient. Several divisions may be grouped into a field army,
+to which are attached field army troops. These are organized into a
+brigade for purpose of supply and administration when necessary
+through numbers.
+
+Coast Artillery is charged with the care and use of land and coast
+fortifications, including submarine mines and torpedo defenses.
+
+2. What is the object of collecting military information?
+
+_Ans_.--To enable the War Department to decide upon the size of army
+or expedition, the proportions of different arms, the character of
+clothing, equipment, etc., needed for any operation.
+
+Information collected by the Gen. Staff in time of peace should
+include geography, physical resources, and military strength of the
+various nations.
+
+3. Define reconnaisance.
+
+_Ans_.--Reconnaisance is used to designate the work of troops or
+individuals when gathering information in the field.
+
+It is necessary during combat for the tactical use of troops.
+
+It is carried on by: (a) aero squadron; (b) independent cavalry; (c)
+divisional cavalry; (d) by infantry as reconnoitering patrols.
+
+4. What are some indications of the presence of the enemy?
+
+_Ans_.--Clothing or material on roads or in abandoned camps.
+
+A thick, low cloud of dust indicates infantry.
+
+A high, thin cloud cavalry.
+
+A broken cloud artillery or wagon trains.
+
+How would you determine from these indications what the number and
+organization of the enemy might be?
+
+_Ans_.--Estimate strength by length of time it takes to pass a given
+point. Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard
+per man, cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per trooper, and artillery
+in single column 20 yards per gun or caisson, a given point would be
+passed in one minute by about: 175 infantry, 110 cavalry at walk, 200
+cavalry at trot, 5 guns or caissons.
+
+5. Suppose on patrol and safely concealed for sighting the enemy at no
+great distance, by what rough method would you ascertain the
+approximate strength of the force assuming it to be composed of
+infantry, cavalry and artillery?
+
+See answer No. 4.
+
+6. What is the composition and arrangement of the advance guard?
+
+_Ans_.--All arms of the service. In open country much cavalry and
+field artillery, the latter seldom assigned to command smaller than a
+brigade. Also machine guns, ambulance company if the force is large
+and engineers for purpose of removing obstacles to the march.
+
+Large command; advance cavalry, support, reserve.
+
+Small command; point, advance party, support, reserve.
+
+Strength should be 1/20 to 1/3, depending on size of command and
+character of terrain.
+
+Advance guard increases in size proportionately with size of command.
+Why?
+
+7. Define: (a) Outguard; they constitute small detachments farthest to
+the front and nearest to the enemy.
+
+(b) Cossack post; observation group at indicated point consisting of
+four men, post single sentinel.
+
+(c) Picket; small command up to platoon placed in line of outguards at
+more important points such as road forks.
+
+8. What is an order?
+
+_Ans_.--Orders are used by commanders of divisions and separate
+brigades for regulating the movement and supply of field trains,
+fixing position of distributing points for rations and forage, in
+short, have to do with supplies of all kinds, especially food.
+
+ Form:
+ The heading.
+ The distribution of troops (in certain orders).
+ The body.
+ The ending.
+
+ The Body contains:
+ 1. Information about the enemy and our supporting troops.
+ 2. General plan of the commander.
+ 3. Disposition of the troops.
+ 4. Instructions for the trains.
+ 5. Where the commander may be found or messages are to be sent.
+
+9. During an advance what is the general order of advance of a column?
+
+_Ans_.--Cavalry and horse artillery.
+ Infantry and light artillery.
+ Engineering and signal troops.
+ Trains.
+
+10. What is the average march per day of various arms?
+
+_Ans_.--Infantry, 15 miles per day.
+ Infantry in large bodies, 12 miles per day.
+ Cavalry, 25 miles per day.
+ Field artillery, 15 to 20 miles per day.
+ Horse artillery, same as cavalry, to which it may be attached.
+
+Forced marches are from 28 to 30 miles for infantry.
+
+11. How is the escort distributed in guarded convoys?
+
+_Ans._--Advance guard, with advance cavalry 3 to 5 miles ahead.
+
+Main body may be opposite most important point of the train, usually
+opposite its center.
+
+Section of infantry at head and tail of train.
+
+Flank guard--if necessary.
+
+Rear guard--1/6 of escort.
+
+What places are most favorable for attacking convoy?
+
+When passing through woods, defile, or over bridge, when going around
+sharp bends in the road; when convoy is forming corral.
+
+12. Discuss uses of the various arms in combat.
+
+_Ans._--Infantry: The most important arm, charged with the main work
+of the battle.
+
+Artillery: Supporting arm of infantry. Its target is the opposing arm
+most dangerous to the infantry.
+
+Cavalry: Reconnaisance before combat, support of other arms during
+combat.
+
+13. What is the difference between the attack and the assault?
+
+_Ans._--In combat where the force is as large or larger than a
+division, a simultaneous advance against the entire hostile front is
+out of the question. Attack is made up of a number of local combats.
+Some where enemy is engaged with view to driving him out. This is
+called the assault. Other parts of attack with fewer troops simply to
+keep the enemy from coming to the support of those troops of the
+assaulted lines. The entire advance against the enemy is the attack.
+
+After the firing lines have advanced some distance the weak and the
+strong points of the enemy's lines are disclosed. The weak points of
+course are selected.
+
+14. Discuss the manner in which a pursuit should be carried out?
+
+_Ans._--If enemy commences withdrawal before front lines have given
+way, troops in action push forward until enemy in their front are
+driven away. Cavalry and horse artillery are thrown against flanks of
+retreating enemy, or on their front. Purpose to further disorganize
+the enemy, beat him to bridges, defiles, etc. In meantime reserve is
+sent into the pursuit, while troops engaged are assembling to
+constitute a new reserve. General scheme is to keep in continuous
+contact with enemy, giving him no chance to reorganize. Boldness
+necessary.
+
+15. What are the different kinds of defense, and what is the purpose
+of each?
+
+_Ans._--(a) Passive; to retain position for specified time with or
+without combat, or to prevent enemy from carrying position.
+
+(b) Defense seeking favorable decision; troops forced temporarily to
+assume the defensive, with intention of assuming the offensive at
+first favorable opportunity.
+
+16. What is the purpose of the counter attack?
+
+_Ans._--To win victory, stave off defeat or prevent lines from being
+entered. It may be launched either at the enemy's strong or weak
+points depending on conditions. If enemy are beaten off and
+disorganized at some point, it may be good opportunity to follow up
+the advantage by counter attack. Also at other points where weakness
+develops. Counter attack is made at strength of enemy to prevent him
+from penetrating the defensive position.
+
+17. How should advance position be organized and held?
+
+_Ans._--Force should not be so weak that it can be driven back to main
+body before it accomplishes its purpose, nor so strong that it will
+hold out too long, thereby committing the entire force to action in
+advance line instead of the line selected.
+
+Trenches. What is position in readiness?
+
+Troops placed in readiness for action where it is intended to resist
+the advance of enemy in immediate vicinity, but knowledge of his
+movements not yet sufficiently definite to decide upon plan of action.
+Preliminary to taking up offensive, or more usually to taking up and
+occupying defensive position. Hasten deployment when time comes.
+
+18. If it becomes necessary to withdraw troops from action state steps
+necessary to insure the safety of troops during the withdrawal and
+retreat.
+
+_Ans._--Last reserves should be used. If none, troops least pressed
+used to cover withdrawal. Cavalry and artillery used unsparingly.
+Depends on the terrain. First covering position well to the rear so as
+not to suffer demoralization. On flanks of line of retreat. There
+should also be facilities to withdraw the occupying force. Firing line
+made as strong as possible, minimum of reserves held. Use M.G. Perhaps
+successive covering points necessary further to rear before advance of
+enemy can be checked. When a few miles to the rear, or far enough to
+free troops from all contact with the enemy, reorganize. Step-by-step
+opposition useless. Number of covering positions should be reduced to
+the minimum.
+
+Retreat; trains at once put into march. Other forces at once put into
+order of march. All roads used, separate roads for divisions.
+
+Effective rear guard from troops whose strength and morale is least
+impaired.
+
+Divisional cavalry and as much artillery as can effectively be used.
+Use artillery at long range to keep the enemy deployed, destroy
+bridges, etc.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 9.
+
+Feeding Men.
+
+
+IN CAMP.--You will usually have plenty of food but continual
+inspecting is necessary to have it properly cared for, prepared and
+served. The kitchen must be kept clean: company commanders inspect
+daily and insist on the following:
+
+ 1. Have cooks and enlisted men come to attention at the command of
+the first man who sees you approach.
+ 2. Have all refrigerators opened, and put your head in far enough
+to detect any bad odors.
+ 3. Check the bill of fare and see that food not consumed one day is
+utilized later--waste bread for bread pudding, for example.
+ 4. See that doors close properly, that windows are screened and roof
+is tight--allow no flies.
+ 5. Have floors, tables and refrigerators scrubbed daily.
+ 6. Have the ground around the mess shack raked and thoroughly
+policed. Towels hung out to dry must be so hung as not to fall to the
+ground. Raked ground does not allow flies to build undisturbed.
+ 7. Taste the coffee and look in the coffee bins.
+ 8. Inspect pans, knives, meat grinder (have latter taken apart for
+you occasionally).
+ 9. See that the mess sergeant looks after the incinerator properly;
+that he makes the cooks use what he tells them to. Cooks should not be
+allowed to help themselves to things; the mess sergeant should weigh
+out or set out just what is to be used each day.
+ 10. Have the food served hot and in individual portions as far as
+possible; see that the food is not put on the table too soon.
+ 11. During each month talk with an old soldier, a raw recruit and a
+non-commissioned officer about the mess to see what the men think of
+it.
+
+ON THE MARCH.--(1. i.d.r., 669-673.)
+
+If portable kitchens accompany troops, the men should fall in in
+single file and be helped to food as they pass by in companies.
+
+FOR INDIVIDUAL COOKING.--Rations issued might be: 1 carton of
+hard-tack, 1 ration of bacon, 1 potato, 2 tablespoons of rice, 1
+heaping tablespoon of coffee, sugar.
+
+Fires for individual cooking are best made out of small dried twigs to
+produce a hot fire large enough for a group of four men.
+
+There are two methods of cooking with the issue mess-kit.
+
+First Method: Each man cooking for himself. As there are but two
+cooking utensils, the tin cup and the frying pan, the cooking must be
+systematized in order to cook four articles on the two utensils. To do
+this, the rice is first cooked in the tin cup filling the tin cup
+one-third full of water throwing in the rice. The water is brought to
+a boil and boiled until the individual grains of rice are soft
+through. The tin cup is then removed from the fire, the water poured
+off, and the cup covered with the lid of the mess tin, the rice being
+allowed to steam. In the meantime, the bacon should be fried in the
+frying pan, the grease being saved. When the rice is well steamed, it
+is turned out in the lid of the meat can, then the bacon placed on top
+of it. The tin cup is washed out and the man is then ready to fry his
+potato and boil his coffee. The cup is filled two-thirds full of water
+and the coffee placed in it and boiled until the desired strength is
+attained. To prevent the coffee from boiling over, a canteen of water
+should be handy and water thrown in whenever the coffee begins to boil
+over. When the coffee is strong enough, the addition of cold water
+will settle the grounds. In the meantime, cut the potatoes very thin
+and fry them in the bacon grease and the meal is ready: hard-tack,
+potatoes, rice, bacon and coffee.
+
+Second Method: Squads of four may specialize; one man to collect the
+frying pans and fry all the bacon, another the potatoes, another the
+rice and coffee, and the other for collection of wood. Either method
+may be followed.
+
+Mess-kits should be cleaned immediately after using, sand being used
+for scouring. Mess-kits must be cleaned thoroughly.
+
+IN THE TRENCHES.--Usually rations and stores will be carried up to the
+trenches by the supports and the reserves. If this is not possible and
+it becomes necessary that men from the front line trenches be
+employed, not more than 10 per cent of the men in the firing line are
+to be away from the trenches at the same time.
+
+RATIONS AND COOKING:
+
+(a) Ration parties from the support and reserve trenches will be made
+up in complete units, _i.e._, platoons or companies.
+
+(b) The company mess sergeant will accompany the ration parties for
+his company and will report his arrival to the company commander.
+
+(c) Great care is to be taken that ration and carrying parties make as
+little noise as possible.
+
+(d) Cooking if possible will be done behind the front line trenches,
+and should be concentrated by sections or companies. Steps must be
+taken to insure that as little smoke as possible is made by the cook's
+fires.
+
+(e) Waste in any form will be discouraged.
+
+(f) Arrangements should be made to insure that soup or some hot drink
+be available for the men between midnight and 7 a.m.
+
+Each company commander must see that timely requisitions for rations
+are made and to have no delays at meal times. Food should be brought
+up in tin boilers about the size of wash boilers so that two men can
+handle one of them easily without a relief. In front line, men send
+mess kit relayed from hand to hand to these boilers at stations in
+each platoon or section and they are relayed back. Sometimes men in
+the front line are relieved for a few minutes. Always carry 24 hours
+rations.
+
+
+Camping and Camp Sanitation.
+
+GENERAL PRINCIPLES:
+
+Great care must be exercised in selecting a camp site, but it must
+never be forgotten that the tactical situation is of paramount
+importance.
+
+The following principles govern the selection:
+ (1) Sufficient supply of pure water.
+ (2) Good roads, but not too near a main highway on account of dust
+ and noise.
+ (3) Wood and forage must be obtainable.
+
+ The ground should:
+ (1) Give ample room without crowding.
+ (2) Have porous soil.
+ (3) Have high elevation to make site dry.
+
+ Avoid:
+ (1) Marshy ground and mosquitoes.
+ (2) Woods or dense vegetation.
+ (3) Ravines or depressions in terrain or dry stream beds subject to
+ sudden freshets.
+
+ Water must be obtainable:
+ (1) Arrange immediately where to obtain
+ (a) Drinking and cooking water.
+ (b) Water for animals.
+ (c) Water for bathing and washing.
+ In the case of running water, the point furthest up-stream shall be
+guarded for drinking and cooking water. Bathing shall be done at a
+point furthest down-stream.
+
+Successful military camping depends upon three (3) things:
+ (1) Discipline.
+ (2) Cooking.
+ (3) Sanitation.
+
+Discipline means control; it means order. Nowhere are these more
+essential. Confusion is loss of control, loss of time, and loss of
+respect by the men.
+
+Upon arrival at a favorable camp site get the men off their feet. Do
+not wait around. As C.O. have your decisions made and the work
+organized, so that each squad will be under a leader. Keep squads
+together, allowing none to stray off until the work is done, then let
+everyone rest except the sentinels.
+
+Do not omit to post sentinels over the water supply and at important
+points, even though you have not decided upon the exact location of
+camp.
+
+Organize the work by platoons or squads and rotate, if camp is to be
+made every few days.
+
+Discipline in camp means more than order and dispatch, however, men
+must understand that they are under discipline when off duty--that
+they cannot disregard sanitary measures, eat promiscuously, destroy
+property, vegetation, or timber and must police the grounds at all
+times. Papers, cigarette butts, and newspapers, should never be
+allowed on the ground near camp. Eatables should never be kept in
+tents to draw vermin. Where possible, in dry weather, the company
+street should be wet down to keep the dust out of the tents. Have men
+ditch around tents immediately upon making camp. Though it may seem
+somewhat of a hardship, a sudden down pour of rain, will recompense
+them for this labor many times over. In ditching the tents, completely
+circle them, for if this is not done a great deal of rain will come in
+the front of the tent.
+
+Food means everything to a soldier. The camp cooking is a barometer of
+the organized efficiency and of the enlisted men's attitude. Nothing
+else can do so much to help or hinder.
+
+The Company Commander should realize the controlling power exercised
+by the company cook and keep the matter in his own hands. He should
+accept no excuse for burnt or dirty food.
+
+If officers mess with their companies they will appreciate the
+attitude of the men and be able to judge the real situation. Officers
+will be well repaid for doing this, as it gives them an idea of the
+food that is being served their men.
+
+In the mechanical details of preparing food, the fire is of first
+importance. A quick method of cooking is by laying a pair of large
+green logs on the surface of the ground just wide enough to place the
+pots between them, so that the bottom of the pots will be resting upon
+them. Build a fire between these logs, making sure to place the logs
+parallel to the direction of the wind.
+
+A pit may be dug, with a sloping bottom, and across this may be placed
+the pots, and if iron rails are available, the utensils may be placed
+on these. For longer stays this pit may be lined with stone. Stones
+retain the heat and less wood is required. Four trenches radiating
+from a central chimney will give one flue whatever may be the
+direction of the wind. (For more specific data on the subject of fires
+and camp cooking, see Manual for Army Cooks--U.S.A.--also notes in
+i.d.r., pp. 154-155.)
+
+Make a rule never to allow food to remain in tin cans after opening
+them. Remember to place kitchen near available water supply and
+furthest from latrines, horse picket lines, or dumps of any kind.
+
+Sanitation comes last in the thoughts of the enlisted man, but it is
+no less important for that.
+
+The first requisite is cleanliness. Food receptacles must be scoured
+and covers and cracks in tin ware scraped as well as scalding the tins
+themselves. Have boiling hot water in tanks (galvanized iron ash cans
+are good) for men to wash mess kits in after meals. One can should
+contain soapy water so as to cut the grease from the dishes, and the
+second tank should contain clean, boiling water for scalding the kits.
+Scraps of food should be scraped from the mess tins before immersing
+them in water, otherwise washing water becomes filled with small
+particles of food. Wiping cloths will greatly add to the convenience
+of the men and takes but a short time to make them clean and fit for
+use again.
+
+Care must be exercised over three kinds of waste:
+ (1) Garbage.
+ (2) Kitchen slops.
+ (3) Excreta.
+
+Garbage can be burned in the kitchen fires. It should never stand
+exposed to the air, but should be tightly covered in iron cans, and
+should be disposed of every twenty-four hours. Kitchen help have an
+aversion to prompt disposal of garbage and need watching. Fly traps
+should be made of muslin and used freely about the kitchen.
+
+Kitchen slops, fats, greasy water, etc., must be drained into covered
+pits, never allowing them to be tossed on the ground around the cook
+tent. A hole dug and partially filled with stones with a barrel placed
+upside down on them, makes a very good receptacle for kitchen slops.
+The barrel should be placed so that the inverted top will be a little
+way beneath the surface of the ground. A hole should be bored in the
+bottom of the barrel and a funnel inserted, through which the slops
+may be poured. If the soil is porous, a trough may be dug and covered
+with mosquito netting or cheese cloth, and the water poured through
+this and allowed to drain off.
+
+Excreta is the most deadly form of waste, and too much care cannot be
+exercised in disposing of it. Impress upon every man that he must
+cover completely with dirt all excreta so that flies may not have a
+chance to approach it.
+
+For short stops and while working in the field "straddle," latrines
+are the best. These are shallow trenches the width of a shovel, about
+12 inches wide, and several feet in length. For long stops a deep
+latrine is dug of the following dimensions: 2 feet wide, 6 feet deep
+by 15 feet long. Two posts with crotches, driven at the ends of this
+trench, supporting a substantial pole to make a seat * * * for
+convenience a hand rail placed in front of this improvised seat will
+add to the comfort of the men.
+
+A more permanent latrine is made by covering the pit with a wooden
+box, in the top of which are cut holes of the necessary diameter. To
+these holes should be fitted spring covers which will shut down
+tightly. A wooden frame boarded around this arrangement makes a
+satisfactory enclosure.
+
+A urinal made of two long boards joined together to form a V-shaped
+trough and drained by a pipe into the pit completes the whole. A pitch
+sufficient for rapid drainage should be given the urinal trough.
+
+When necessary to utilize separate urinals, a hole filled with stone
+and sprinkled daily with quicklime is sufficient for short periods. At
+night there should be a galvanized iron can placed in each company
+street and emptied before reveille each morning. This can must be
+disinfected by burning out, as must be the latrines when earth or sand
+is not used as a covering each time.
+
+Pits must be covered daily with quicklime, ashes, earth and filled
+when within two (2) feet of the surface. Their position should be
+distinctly marked so as to prevent reopening.
+
+It is a safe rule never to use an old camp ground, but select a new
+one, even if less conveniently located. Camp sites should be changed
+if it is found that the soil is becoming polluted, or if the ground is
+cut up and dusty from constant use.
+
+The condition in which a camp site is left by an organization will
+clearly indicate the efficiency and discipline in a command.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 10.
+
+Personal Hygiene and First Aid.
+
+
+This is a purely arbitrary grouping of topics for the purpose of
+saving space. Either of the topics mentioned could be treated at
+length; detailed information will be found in any of the reference
+books mentioned in the bibliography.
+
+PERSONAL HYGIENE means "the preservation of health by attention to the
+care of the body;" it is determined by the formation of correct
+habits. Cleanliness of person, clothing and bedding should become a
+habit of life with the soldier; but some men will always require
+watching and admonition. These habits are: personal cleanliness;
+regulation of diet; avoidance of excesses (eating, drinking and sexual
+matters); wearing suitable clothing; keeping the bodily processes at
+work (kidneys, bowels and skin); taking sufficient exercise,
+preferably in the open air; rest of body and mind, with recreation for
+the latter; maintaining the surroundings in which one lives in a
+cleanly state.
+
+BATHING is easily the most important requirement in matters of
+personal hygiene; men should bathe as often as conditions of life in
+barracks and camp will permit. On the march a vigorous "dry rub" with
+a coarse towel will often prove an excellent substitute when water is
+not available. _Teeth_ should be cleaned at least twice daily.
+_Clothing_ should be kept clean, particularly underclothing. _Diet_ is
+not a matter which a soldier can determine to any extent for himself;
+but he can follow a certain few precautions:
+
+ 1. Don't eat hurriedly; chew the food properly.
+ 2. Don't overload the stomach.
+ 3. Don't eat green or overripe fruit.
+ 4. Don't eat anything while away from camp or barracks, whose
+materials or manner of preparation seem questionable.
+ 5. Don't bring a "grouch" to the table with you.
+ 6. Don't eat on the march; don't drink too much water on the march.
+
+SEXUAL INDULGENCE is a matter to be handled tactfully, but with
+absolute frankness. Men should be taught that it is not a matter of
+necessity; that their health will not suffer by any lack of it; that
+they themselves will be the sufferers for any violations of rules of
+health. The procedure directed by the War Department for purposes of
+combatting infection is as follows:
+
+1. That physical inspections of enlisted men be made twice each month
+for the detection of venereal disease.
+
+2. That any soldier who exposes himself to infection shall report for
+cleansing and preventive treatment immediately upon return to camp or
+garrison.
+
+3. That any soldier who fails so to report, if found to be suffering
+from a venereal infection, shall be brought to trial by court martial
+for neglect of duty.
+
+4. That men so infected shall be confined strictly to the limits of
+the post during the infectious stages of the disease.
+
+5. That all officers serving with troops shall do their utmost to
+encourage healthful exercises and physical recreation and to supply
+opportunities for cleanly social and interesting mental occupations
+for the men under their command.
+
+6. That company and medical officers shall take advantage of favorable
+opportunities to point out the misery and disaster that follow upon
+moral uncleanliness; and the fact that venereal disease is never a
+trivial affair.
+
+With a great many men these precautions and measures will not be
+necessary but for the sake of those who are ignorant or neglectful,
+proper steps should at all times be taken.
+
+EXERCISE.--A sufficient amount of exercise to maintain health is
+ordinarily provided by military drills and other duties requiring
+active movement. But this should be regarded only as the minimum of
+exercise; athletic work should be encouraged (and this will be done by
+the present activities of those "higher up"); bayonet training will be
+found an excellent medium of accomplishing a double purpose;
+calisthenics should be short but snappy and vigorous. A vigorous
+policy of an officer as regards things of this sort will ward off a
+great many minor ills and particularly "colds," which are often the
+result of poor ventilation.
+
+CLEANLINESS OF SURROUNDINGS.--Men should be taught that cleanliness of
+surroundings is not merely for purposes of inspection; but that it is
+absolutely necessary where a great number of men are living together
+in close quarters. Quarters should be well policed; the company street
+should be kept clean; refuse of all sorts should be kept in
+receptacles provided for that purpose and frequently removed. A police
+squad appointed daily should be charged with this work, and the
+corporal of the same made responsible for the condition of quarters
+and the company street.
+
+PREVENTABLE DISEASES.--Men should be given a certain amount of
+theoretical knowledge of preventable diseases. These matters will be
+taken care of to a large extent by the Medical Corps; but men should
+be taught just what precautions are necessary to avoid recourse to the
+hospital.
+
+VENEREAL diseases have already been touched upon.
+
+TYPHOID FEVER is a germ disease and communicable. Vaccination is the
+first preventive; protection of water supply is the second; thorough
+disposal of wastes is a third; and sharp punishment for violation of
+sanitary regulations is a fourth. Habits of personal cleanliness will
+do much to prevent any such disease.
+
+DYSENTERY is very common in field service, but may be prevented by
+same methods as for typhoid fever, save for vaccination; men suffering
+from this malady should be isolated, if possible, and utmost
+precaution taken to prevent spread of the disease.
+
+MALARIA is a mosquito disease; get rid of mosquitoes and then you will
+get rid of the carrier of the germs. Quinine may act as a preventive.
+Cases should be isolated, if possible.
+
+TONSILITIS AND COLDS may be combatted very effectively by proper
+precautions as to ventilation.
+
+MEASLES.--Very important but little known; isolation recommended.
+
+There are many other diseases concerning which the men should be
+instructed, but lack of space prevents further treatment of them. They
+should be taught the proper treatment of blistered feet, for they
+incapacitate a great many men; the chief causes are ill-fitting shoes
+and our old friend "uncleanliness." Shoes are the most important
+article of clothing of the infantryman; each man should have one pair
+well broken in for marching, and two other pairs. Socks should be
+soft, smooth and without holes--also _clean_. Further steps for the
+prevention of blisters are; hardening of the skin by appropriate baths
+for the feet; soaping the feet; or adopting some other means of
+reducing the friction of the foot against the sock. _Treatment_--Wash
+the feet; open the blister at the lowest point, with a clean needle;
+dress with vaseline or other ointment and protect with adhesive
+plaster, care being taken not to shut out the air. Zinc oxide plaster
+is excellent. Sterilize a needle; thread it with a woolly thread and
+run it through blister, leaving ends projecting about one-half inch;
+this will act as a wick and dry up blister in short time.
+
+FIRST AID.--Explain to the men the uses of the first aid packet and of
+the pouch carried by the Medical Corps. (This pouch is being replaced
+by web-belts with pockets.)
+
+WOUNDS may be classed as ordinary cuts, inside wounds, lacerated,
+punctured and poisoned wounds. For ordinary minor wounds--iodine and
+exposure to the air are usually sufficient. _War wounds_ are usually
+caused by something having an explosive effect and may be accompanied
+by hemorrhage, shock and even loss of function; they may be arterial
+or venous.
+
+POISONED WOUNDS are of two sorts; external and internal.
+
+DIAGNOSIS TAG.--This tag placed on a soldier shows wound, name, rank,
+regiment, treatment received, etc. This tag should be carefully read
+before further treatment is accorded.
+
+TREATMENT OF WOUNDS.--The compress, of the first aid packet will
+always prove of help.
+
+BLEEDING WOUNDS.--The bandage of the first aid packet will stop all
+ordinary bleeding; but in aggravated cases the bleeding may be stopped
+by pressure on the artery, between the wound and the heart. This may
+be done by hand or by means of the forceps in the medical pouch. The
+points of compression should be learned and located; in front of the
+ear just above the socket of the jaw; in the neck in front of the
+strongly marked muscle reaching from behind the ear to the upper part
+of the breast bone; in the hollow behind the collar bone; just behind
+the inner border of the larger muscle of the arm; the femoral artery
+at the middle of the groin where the artery passes over the bone.
+Bleeding may also be stopped to some extent by elevating the wounded
+part. A tourniquet may be improvised by using the compress, running a
+stick or the bayonet through the band, and taking up the slack by
+twisting.
+
+POISONED WOUNDS.--For a _snakebite_ make a tight constriction just
+above the wound; make an incision at the bite and suck out the poison.
+_Do it quickly_. If this is impossible, follow the same plan but give
+a stimulant; repeatedly loosen the constriction and let a little of
+the poison into the system at a time to be neutralized. In cases of
+chemical poisoning do not follow the usual method of treating
+poisoning. _Do not make the patient vomit_, but give him something fat
+or albuminous such as raw eggs or milk. This forms mercurial
+albuminate. _Ptomaine_ poisoning (symptoms are headache, cramps,
+nausea, high fever and chills, etc.). Drink salt water, vomit and
+repeat the procedure to clean out the stomach. A purgative should also
+be taken. Ice cream and milk kept too long are frequent causes of this
+sort of poisoning, as are dishes kept in the icebox over night.
+
+FAINTING, HEAT EXHAUSTION AND SHOCK are all of the same class;
+symptoms are the same--weak pulse, paleness and low temperature,
+tendency to fall to ground. Often follows taking too much water on the
+march. Treatment should be in nature of stimulant; make patient lie
+down, get blood to his head, wrap him in blankets, give him hot
+drinks, etc.
+
+SUNSTROKE.--Symptoms and treatment are different. Patient has a high
+temperature. Keep his head high and feet low; disrobe him and pour
+cold water on him; keep him in a cool place until temperature lowers
+to 101; then remove cold water and temperature will go down itself. Do
+not apply cold water too long as the temperature may go to sub-normal
+which is just as dangerous as a temperature abnormally high.
+
+BURNS AND SCALDS.--Air should be shut out; otherwise treat like
+blister, care being taken not to remove skin. Do not put on anything
+that will stick and do not try to remove anything that has a tendency
+to stick; put on linseed oil and water, cotton and a loose bandage.
+
+FREEZING AND FROSTBITES.--Use ice water and snow to start with. Keep
+the patient cool until he is thawed out. Massage and gradually work up
+to a warmer temperature.
+
+FRACTURES are of three kinds; simple, compound and comminuted.
+
+ Simple: Bones do not penetrate the skin (may be single or double).
+ Compound: Bones penetrate the skin and cause infection.
+ Comminuted: Bone is shattered.
+
+Indications of a fracture are: Pain, redness, swelling and mobility
+where it ought not to be.
+
+TREATMENT.--Find out the kind of fracture. Paint the wound and put on
+first aid packet; replace the clothes and splint the break. Splints
+should not be too long so as to cause any friction or annoyance to the
+patient. They may be made out of any available material, such as
+rifle, bayonet, shingle, piece of board, scabbard, etc. Bind them
+firmly but not too tightly.
+
+ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION.--This subject is worthy of more treatment than
+it can be accorded here. Any text on first aid will explain thoroughly
+the Schaefer method, which is now the standard method in the army.
+Points to be remembered in this method are; remove foreign articles
+from the mouth; curl the little finger over the 12th rib; avoid the
+pelvic bones; hold the arms straight and apply the pressure by means
+of the whole body brought forward; take care not to break a rib; do
+not give up too soon.
+
+TRENCH FOOT.--This is due to long standing with legs and feet in wet
+clothes. There are three types:
+
+ Mild: Symptoms are numbness and a slight swelling.
+ Medium: Additional symptom of a bluing of the leg; also large
+blisters.
+ Severe: Gangrene sets in.
+
+Tight clothes help to bring on these things. Keep the shoes, socks and
+breeches loose; keep the clothes dry; furnish the men with hot food in
+the trenches and so keep up the circulation. _Do not use grease_.
+Trench foot can be avoided by proper treatment, and punishment should
+follow upon its contraction.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 11.
+
+Signaling.
+
+
+This chapter proposes to cover a large amount of ground in a small
+compass; hence treatment must be brief. A more liberal treatment will
+be found at different sources; here a few suggestions and hints will
+be given.
+
+SEMAPHORE.--Time spent, 61 hours: 6 sessions 1/2 hours, 1 session 1
+hour, 1 conference 2 hours. It is easy to say "just learn the
+semaphore," but to learn it quickly and well is another matter. A few
+suggestions as to the methods followed by others will usually prove
+helpful. Learn the semaphore by what may be called the "cycle" method,
+_i.e._, teach and illustrate how the successive letters are formed by
+moving the arm or arms around the body in a clockwise direction
+through successive stages. There are a few exceptions to the rule as
+will be pointed out; but they only serve as a few landmarks and help
+to fix the whole matter more firmly in mind.
+
+FIRST CYCLE.--1 arm. A to G. One arm always at the interval. Be sure
+to make the "D" with right arm straight overhead--then it is more
+distinct at a distance. (Plate.)
+
+SECOND CYCLE.--2 arms. H to N, inclusive, with exception of J. One arm
+always in the A position. In making I always be sure that the left
+hand is at the A position. Some men insist in making this letter wrong
+by crossing the body with the left hand uppermost. This is very
+awkward and also very indistinct at a distance. P changes arms but
+retains same relative position of flags.
+
+THIRD CYCLE.--2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U
+actually resembles that letter.
+
+THIRD CYCLE.--2 arms. O to S. One arm always in B position. In letter
+O, left arm is in B position; in all others, right arm.
+
+FOURTH CYCLE.--2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U
+actually resembles that letter.
+
+DOUBLES.--L, U, R, N. These letters are keys to many others and should
+be promptly learned.
+
+OPPOSITES.--V and K, O and W, Q and Y, S and M, Z and H, X and I, M
+follows L in cycle and is opposite of S, S follows E in cycle and is
+opposite of M, K precedes L in cycle and is opposite of V. Figures are
+first 10 letters of alphabet, preceded by crossing flags overhead.
+
+INSTRUCTING.--This plan of teaching the semaphore will be found very
+helpful, for it helps to reason out the alphabet for the student. By
+fixing firmly in mind a few things the student can soon reason out the
+alphabet for himself by a very logical plan.
+
+SECOND STEP.--After the men have been taught the alphabet they should
+either pair off and one man send to the other, or one man should be
+selected to send for the entire class. At first only letters should be
+sent until the men have learned the alphabet thoroughly. In this way
+the key characters of the alphabet can be fixed in mind, as well as
+their relation to the other letters.
+
+THIRD STEP.--The men should next be paired off and instructed to send
+simple messages to each other. You should insist that there be no
+other communication between the men than by means of their flags.
+
+FOURTH STEP.--Proceed to simple qualification tests, four men working
+in two pairs and the pairs alternating in sending and receiving. One
+man of first pair should read for his companion to send. On the other
+end, one man should read and the other copy. The distances should be
+such as to preclude the possibility of conversation. Forty letters per
+minute is a fair test; or this system may be followed: Have a good
+signalman send 10 combinations of 5 letters each to the whole class.
+The men should read these and write them down, _one combination at a
+time_. Time limit should be 3 minutes.
+
+[Illustration: Plate 13]
+
+WIG WAG.--Time spent: Same as semaphore course. The alphabet can be
+found in any standard signal book, or in the "Manual for
+Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates." The dots are made to the
+right of the body, the dashes to the left; interval at the end of a
+word by dipping the flag once to the front, at the end of a sentence
+by dipping it twice, and at the end of a message by dipping it three
+times. The alphabet should be learned first according to the same
+general plan as in the semaphore; _i.e._, the key letters to certain
+combinations should first be learned. The following grouping of
+letters may be found helpful:
+
+E I S H; T M O; A U V; N D B; R F L; K C Y; W P J; G Z Q.
+
+The instructor can find many other groupings that will aid him. It
+should also be pointed out that each number from one to ten consists
+of five characters, and that each succeeding number follows the
+previous one according to a regular method.
+
+After the men have studied the alphabet sufficiently, have them send
+to each other, limiting the work at first to letters only. Then
+gradually work up to the point where they may send simple messages.
+Make them rely upon the flags for communicating during the practice.
+Do not permit conversation--separate the men by a considerable
+distance. In both wig wag and semaphore instruction the same plan
+should be followed as in teaching a foreign language; _i.e._, confine
+all communication to the medium under study. Qualification tests are
+similar to those for the semaphore, except that less speed can be
+exacted; 15 characters per minute or 10 combinations of 5 letters each
+to be received and written down in 5 minutes.
+
+In both the semaphore and the wig wag men should be taught the
+conventional signals used in field work. These can be found in any
+manual on the subject.
+
+
+POINTS TO REMEMBER.
+
+The semaphore is a quicker means of communication than the wig wag;
+but the wig wag can be used in a prone position under shelter.
+
+Lanterns can be used at night for semaphoring.
+
+Acetylene lamps can be used at night in place of the wig wag. In this
+case a short flash represents a dot, a long flash a dash.
+
+A few men in each company should be developed into expert signalers;
+some men always show aptitude for this sort of thing.
+
+Frequent use should be made of signaling in field work.
+
+
+Letter Codes.
+
+INFANTRY.
+
+For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.
+
+--------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
+ Letter of | If signaled from the rear | If signaled from the firing
+ alphabet | to the firing line | line to the rear
+--------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
+ AM | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required.
+ CCC | Charge (mandatory at | Am about to charge if
+ | all times). | no instructions to the
+ | | contrary.
+ CF | Cease firing | Cease firing.
+ DT | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush."
+ F | Commence firing. |
+ FB | Fix bayonets. |
+ FL | Artillery fire is causing |
+ | us losses. |
+ G | Move forward. | Preparing to move forward.
+ HHH | Halt. |
+ K | Negative. |
+ LT | Left. |
+ O | What is the (R.N., etc.)? | What is the (R.N., etc.)?
+ (Ardois and | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.
+ semaphore | |
+ only). | |
+ | |
+ ..--.. | What is the (R.N., etc.)? | What is the (R.N., etc.)?
+ (All methods | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.
+ but Ardois | |
+ and | |
+ semaphore). | |
+ P | Affirmative. | Affirmative.
+ RN | Range. | Range.
+ RT | Right. | Right.
+ SSS | Support going forward. | Support needed.
+ SUF | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing.
+ T | Target. | Target
+--------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
+
+
+Arm Signals.
+
+The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either arm
+may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line "retreat
+back" at once to prevent misunderstandings.
+
+FORWARD MARCH.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
+the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. This signal
+is also used to execute quick time from double time.
+
+HALT.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and hold
+the arm vertically.
+
+DOUBLE TIME, MARCH.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
+the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.
+
+SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH.--Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
+between the vertical and horizontal positions.
+
+SQUADS LEFT, MARCH.--Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
+downward and horizontal positions.
+
+SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH (if in close order) or, TO THE REAR, MARCH
+(if in skirmish line).--Extend the arm vertically above the head;
+carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several times
+between the vertical and downward positions.
+
+CHANGE DIRECTION OR COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.--The hand on the side
+toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried across
+the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a
+horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction.
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE CENTER, MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally until
+horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
+to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally
+until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
+the horizontal position: swing the other upward until vertical and
+return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and
+describe horizontal circles.
+
+RANGE, OR CHANGE ELEVATION.--To announce the RANGE, extend the arm,
+toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist
+closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by
+opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
+equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short
+horizontal line with forefinger. _To change elevation_, indicate the
+_amount of increase or decrease_ by fingers as above; point upward to
+indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease.
+
+WHAT RANGE ARE YOU USING? OR WHAT IS THE RANGE?--Extend the arms
+toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
+on the other hand, fist closed.
+
+ARE YOU READY? OR I AM READY.--Raise the hand, fingers extended and
+joined, palm toward the person addressed.
+
+COMMENCE FIRING.--Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm
+down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.
+
+FIRE FASTER.--Execute rapidly the signal "COMMENCE FIRING."
+
+FIRE SLOWER.--Execute slowly the signal "COMMENCE FIRING."
+
+TO SWING THE CONE OF FIRE TO THE RIGHT, OR LEFT.--Extend the arm in
+full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to
+right (left), and point in the direction of the new target.
+
+FIX BAYONET.--Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix
+Bayonet."
+
+SUSPEND FIRING.--Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
+position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.
+
+CEASE FIRING.--Raise the forearm as in _suspend firing_ and swing it
+up and down several times in front of the face.
+
+PLATOON.--Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
+describe small circles with the hand.
+
+SQUAD.--Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
+the hand, up and down from the wrist.
+
+RUSH.--Same as _double time_.
+
+The signals PLATOON and SQUAD are intended primarily for communication
+between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal PLATOON or
+SQUAD indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the signal
+which follows to be executed by platoon or squad.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 12.
+
+Guard Duty.
+
+Time spent: Study, 2 hours.
+ Conference, 2 hours.
+ Formal guard mounting.
+
+Guards are divided roughly into four classes:
+ 1. Exterior--(Which come more properly under head of field service).
+ 2. Interior--Their purpose is to preserve order, protect property
+and enforce police regulations.
+ 3. Military Police--Also treated of in field service.
+ 4. Provost Guards--Used in the absence of military police to aid
+civil authorities in preserving order among soldiers beyond the
+interior guard.
+
+Here we are concerned chiefly with interior guards. We shall make up a
+brief summary of what an officer must know and what he ought to teach
+his non-coms. and men. Also we shall touch upon the subject of guard
+duty as it has been changed by trench warfare.
+
+An officer ought to have a good grasp of the following subjects
+relative to guard duty:
+ 1. Guard mounting (both formal and informal).
+ 2. Posting reliefs.
+ 3. Preparation and running of rosters.
+ 4. General orders--also special orders at post No. 1.
+ 5. Duties of the following in reference to guard duty:
+ 1. Commanding officer.
+ 2. Officer of the day.
+ 3. Adjutant.
+ 4. Sergeant Major.
+ 5. Commander of the guard.
+ 6. Sergeant of the guard.
+ 7. Corporal of the guard.
+ 8. Musicians.
+ 9. Orderlies and color sentinels.
+ 10. Privates of the guard.
+ 6. Compliments of the guard.
+ 7. Prisoners: General.
+ Garrison.
+ Awaiting trial.
+ Awaiting result of trial.
+
+ How is an officer arrested? Can an enlisted man arrest him?
+ How is a non-com. arrested?
+ How is a soldier arrested?
+ How is a civilian arrested?
+ (See a.w. No. 68.)
+
+An officer ought to-teach to his non-coms. as much of the above as is
+consistent with time and other demands; he ought to teach to his
+privates all that is necessary to the proper discharge of their duties
+in this connection.
+
+FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING.--Here follow a few reminders that may help the
+reader to keep the ceremony in mind:
+
+1. Weather conditions permitting, guard mounting takes place every day
+at the discretion of the C.O.
+
+2. Tour of duty is 24 hours; there are 3 reliefs, 2 hours on and 4
+hours off. No organization is detailed for guard duty more than once
+in 5 days if this can be prevented.
+
+CEREMONY.--1. The band takes post, its left 12 paces to the right of
+where the right of the guard is to be.
+
+2. Adjutant's Call.--The Adjutant marches to the parade ground
+(Sergeant Major on his left) and takes post 12 paces in front of and
+facing the center of where the guard is to rest. The Sergeant Major
+continues on, marches by the left flank and takes post 12 paces to the
+left of the band and facing in the direction the line is to extend.
+
+3. The details are marched to the parade ground by the senior
+non-commissioned officers, halted and dressed as follows:
+
+FIRST DETAIL.--Non-commissioned officer.--1. Detail; 2. Halt. The
+detail is halted against the left arm of the Sergeant Major; the
+non-commissioned officer steps out, faces the Sergeant Major at a
+distance slightly greater than the front of the detail and commands:
+1. Right; 2. Dress. The detail dresses on the line formed by the
+Sergeant Major and the Commander of the detail. 3. Front. The
+Commander of the detail salutes and reports: "The detail is correct"
+(or otherwise). When the report is made the Sergeant Major returns the
+salute. The Commander of the detail passes by the right of the guard
+and takes post in rear of the right file of his detail.
+
+OTHER DETAILS.--Non-commissioned officers.--1. Detail; 2. Halt; 3.
+Right; 4. Dress; 5. Front. Each commander of a detail halts his
+detail, dresses it on the general line, salutes and reports as does
+the first; then takes his post in a similar manner. Should the
+commander of a detail not be a non-commissioned officer he passes by
+the right of the guard and retires.
+
+4. SERGEANT MAJOR.--He takes one step to the right, draws sword and
+verifies the detail, and then commands: "Count off." He completes the
+last squad if necessary and indicates the division into platoons: then
+takes his post and commands: 1. Open ranks; 2. March. This is executed
+as laid down in the Infantry Drill Regulations. 3. Front. He then
+moves parallel to the front rank until opposite the center, turns to
+the right, halts half-way to the Adjutant, salutes and reports: "Sir,
+the details are correct" (or otherwise).
+
+5. ADJUTANT: "Take your post." (Adjutant draws saber.)
+
+6. SERGEANT MAJOR.--Faces about, approaches to within two paces of the
+center of the guard, turns; to the right and moves three paces beyond
+the left of the guard, turns to the left, halts on the line of the
+front rank, faces about and brings his sword to the order. (When the
+Sergeant Major has reported the Officer of the Guard takes his post,
+as shown in the diagram, and draws saber.)
+
+7. ADJUTANT.--1. Officer (officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2.
+Front and center; 3. March. At "Center" the officer carries saber; at
+"March" the officer advances and halts 3 paces from the Adjutant,
+remaining at the carry; non-commissioned officers pass by the flank,
+move along the front and form in order of rank from right to left, 3
+paces behind the officer, remaining at the right shoulder. If there is
+no officer of the guard the non-commissioned officers halt 3 paces
+from the Adjutant. The Adjutant assigns them to their positions in
+order of rank--commander of the guard; leader of the first platoon;
+leader of the second platoon, etc., and commands: 1. Officer
+(officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2. Posts; 3. March. At the
+command "March" they take their posts as prescribed in the School of
+the Company with open ranks (Platoon leaders 3 paces in front of
+center of their platoons).
+
+8. ADJUTANT: "Inspect your guard, sir."
+
+9. OFFICER OF THE GUARD.--Faces about and commands: "Prepare for
+inspection."
+
+10. ADJUTANT (after the inspection is ended, and after posting himself
+30 paces in front of and facing center of the guard--at the same time
+the new Officer of the Day takes position about 30 paces behind the
+Adjutant, facing the guard, and with the old officer of the day 1 pace
+in rear and 3 paces to the right): 1. Parade; 2. Rest; 3. Sound off.
+(The band, playing passes in front of the Officer of the Guard to the
+left of the line, returns to its post and ceases to play.) 1. Guard;
+2. Attention; 3. Close ranks; 4. March. (As in the School of the
+Company.) 1. Present; 2. Arms. He then faces the new officer of the
+day, salutes, and reports: "Sir, the guard is formed."
+
+11. NEW OFFICER OF THE DAY (returning salute): "March the guard in
+review, sir."
+
+12. ADJUTANT.--He carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to the
+order and commands: "1. At trail, platoons right; 2. March; 3. Guard;
+4. Halt." The band takes post 12 paces in front of the first platoon,
+the Adjutant 6 paces from the flank and abreast of the Commander of
+the Guard, and the Sergeant Major 6 paces from the flank of the second
+platoon. Adjutant commands: "1. Pass in review; 2. Forward; 3. March."
+
+13. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD (as the guard reaches a position 6 paces
+from the Officer of the Day): 1. Eyes; 2. Right; (at 6 paces beyond
+the Officer of the Day) 3. Front.
+
+At 12 paces beyond the Officer of the Day the Adjutant and the
+Sergeant-Major halt, salute and retire.
+
+14. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD (as the Adjutant and the Sergeant Major
+retire): 1. Platoons, right by squads; 2. March. The guard is then
+marched to its post; the old guard is then relieved and sentinels
+posted according to the principles laid down in the Manual of Interior
+Guard Duty. (See diagrams at the end of this chapter.)
+
+GUARD DUTY IN THE TRENCHES.--It differs from guard duty as we are
+accustomed to it. The challenge is not "Who is there?" but rather a
+sudden and imperative "Hands up." The party challenged throws up his
+hands and gives the countersign in a low voice. Sentinels are posted
+in the front line and in the line of dugouts, one at each entrance to
+a dugout to give immediate warning. Watchers are posted at places
+having a good range of view; at night they keep watch over the
+parapets rather than through the loopholes since the latter afford
+only a narrow range of view. Auto riflemen (6 or 7 to a post) are used
+as watchers, one being on duty at a time. They should have a favorable
+background to provide concealment.
+
+[Illustration: Plate 14]
+
+[Illustration: Plate 14A.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 13.
+
+Company Administration.
+
+
+Company administration is a very broad subject and can be really
+learned only by experience. However, this chapter will attempt to
+point out a few suggestions and practices that may prove of some
+assistance, particularly to the new officer. We shall treat briefly of
+the first organization of the company; then we shall try to reproduce
+in some slight measure the actual work of a day in camp (more
+particularly of a training camp such as Plattsburg); then finally we
+shall treat of the orderly room and some of the problems that come up
+in army paper work.
+
+
+Notes on Organization.
+
+(By MAJOR W.H. WALDRON, Twenty-Ninth Infantry.)
+
+
+1. PREPARE IN ADVANCE TO RECEIVE MEN ASSIGNED TO COMPANY.
+
+(a) Detail one of the Lieutenants in charge of the company mess.
+
+DUTIES.--Secure the necessary kitchen and dining room equipment and
+prepare everything to start the mess; make up a bill-of-fare for a
+week based on the ration components and supplies available; secure the
+rations and issue them to the cooks daily. Train a mess Sergeant in
+the duties that fall to him. In fine, this Lieutenant will have
+complete charge of the company mess, the cooking, and serving of the
+meals, training of cooks and men detailed for duty in connection with
+the mess.
+
+(b) Detail the other Lieutenant in charge of property.
+
+DUTIES.--Procure all the articles of individual and company equipment
+from the Regimental Supply Officer. Get into the company storeroom and
+prepare it for issue. Train the Company Supply Sergeant in the duties
+that will fall to him.
+
+(c) This leaves the Company Commander free to organize the orderly
+room and make the necessary preparations to receive the men as they
+report.
+
+IF IN CANTONMENT.--Lay out the quarters into platoon sections and
+subdivide these into squads, allowing space for platoon leaders and
+guides. Starting at the end of the quarters plainly mark each squad
+section, 8 beds, four on each side of the aisle with the number of the
+squad--first squad, second squad, etc.
+
+IF IN TENTS.--Number the tents, one for each squad, leaving two tents
+in the center for platoon leaders, guides, etc. Prepare a sheet having
+a space for each squad, large enough to enter eight names in it.
+Prepare a measuring post where the men can be measured for height as
+they report.
+
+2. MEN REPORTING:
+
+(a) When the men arrive they will be sent to Regimental Headquarters
+direct. There they will receive their assignment to a company. When so
+assigned they will be directed to join the company.
+
+(b) A table on which is spread the squad assignment sheet is located
+at the head of the company street. Nearby is located the measuring
+post. When a man reports, look him over, receive him in the company,
+make him feel at home. Make him feel that he is welcome. This little
+act will pay you large dividends in contentment and company _esprit de
+corps_ later on. Turn him over to the man in charge of the measuring
+post to get his height. Assign him to a squad corresponding to his
+height. Enter his name in the squad space to which he is assigned and
+send him to the section of the cantonment designated for that
+particular squad. Detail a few of the first men who report for duty to
+assist in this work.
+
+Say you have 16 squads. They will run in height about as follows:
+
+1st squad, over 6 feet; 2nd, 6 feet; 3rd, 6 feet; 4th, 5 feet 11
+inches; 5th, 5 feet 11 inches; 6th, 5 feet 10 inches; 7th, 5 feet 10
+inches; 8th, 5 feet 9 inches; 9th, 5 feet 9 inches; 10th, 5 feet 8
+inches; 11th, 5 feet 8 inches; 12th, 5 feet 7 inches; 13th, 5 feet 7
+inches; 14th, 5 feet 6 inches; 15th, 5 feet 6 inches; 16th, 5 feet 5
+inches. If there are more squads put them in the 5 feet 7 to 5 feet 9
+inches class.
+
+(c) As soon as practicable place one member of the squad in charge for
+the ensuing 24 hours, change this detail every day until every man of
+the squad has had an opportunity to demonstrate his ability. This will
+assist you greatly in the selection of your non-commissioned officers.
+
+(d) Should the entire company be assigned in a body, line them up in a
+row according to height and assign them to squads. Place the most
+likely looking man in each squad in charge for the time being.
+
+3. ISSUE OF EQUIPMENT:
+
+(a) The articles of camp equipment, bedding and poncho should be
+issued as soon as practicable. These are necessary for the immediate
+comfort of the men.
+
+(b) Hold the articles of personal equipment for issue later on. Do not
+dump the entire equipment on a man all at once. There is nine-tenths
+of it that he knows nothing about. He does not know what it is for. As
+the training progresses you can issue it to him, an article or two at
+a time until he has finally gotten all of it. Before issuing an
+article, explain at a company formation, what it is for, the purpose
+it serves and where it is carried.
+
+(c) Uniforms and clothing should be procured as soon as practicable.
+The commanding officer will indicate whether or not the clothing will
+be requisitioned for in bulk or on individual clothing slips. The
+supply officer will provide a quartermaster publication which shows
+the sizes of clothing by the numbers. Seek out a couple of tailors in
+the company, have them measure the men and make a record of the sizes
+of clothing that they require. Shoes will have to be fitted to each
+man. Make them large enough. The average recruit will want to wear a
+shoe at least one size too small for him. When he gets the pack on and
+drags it around all day his feet will swell and fill his small shoes
+to the bursting point. Do not let the men decide what size shoes they
+will wear; you decide it for them and make them plenty big. This work
+of measuring the men can be started right out the first day. The
+captain that gets in his requisition first, properly made out, will be
+the first to get his clothing.
+
+4. ORGANIZATION:
+
+(a) As soon as practicable get the company organized into permanent
+squads. Try out squad leaders for a few days. You will soon be able to
+select the men that you will want for non-commissioned officers. Be
+careful in their selection so that you will not have to make many
+changes. Don't be in too much of a hurry about making sergeants; try
+them out as corporals first. Try to get a good man and start him in as
+mess sergeant. A man with hotel experience, especially the kitchen and
+dining room end of the business, give him a trial. Your lieutenant in
+charge of the mess can tell in a day or two how he stacks up. Make it
+plain that the men detailed from day to day are merely acting
+non-commissioned officers and that you are merely placing them in
+charge to give them an opportunity to demonstrate their ability. It's
+better to work this proposition out in a systematic manner than it is
+to jump in and make a lot of non-commissioned officers that you will
+have to break later on to make way for better men.
+
+Give your acting non-commissioned officers all the responsibility you
+can. Assign tasks with their squads and see how they get away with it.
+
+(b) At one of the first formations explain the rules of camp
+sanitation and personal cleanliness and the necessity for their strict
+observance.
+
+(c) Start right out with a system of rigid inspections so that the men
+will acquire habits of cleanliness and tidiness of their surroundings.
+Once this is acquired it is easily maintained. The reverse of this
+statement is equally true. Let a company get started in a slovenly,
+untidy manner and it is difficult to get it back on the right track
+again.
+
+(d) As soon as uniforms are issued have every man dispose of his
+civilian clothing, dress suit cases, trunks, etc. There is no place
+for them in the cantonments or tents. Strip right down to uniforms and
+allow no civilian clothing around.
+
+(e) Before issuing rifles provide places for their safe keeping in
+cantonments. If wooden trunks are used, a wire staple driven into the
+upright of the bed at the height of the slacking swivel forms an
+excellent support; simply hook the slacking swivel into the staple.
+
+(f) Get every man interested in the company. Be personally interested
+in every man yourself. Do not permit any swearing at the men or around
+the barracks. Explain the idea of military courtesy and the salute and
+insist on its being carried out at all times. By doing all of these
+things and systematizing your work of training and instruction right
+from the start you lay the foundation for a "good company." Fifteen
+good companies make a "good regiment" and so on up to the division,
+and that's what we want "good divisions"--the basis of which lies in
+the "good company" which you are going to command.
+
+DAY'S ROUTINE.--The day's routine will soon develop and cannot be a
+stereotyped thing. It will be determined to a large extent by local
+conditions. But in all training camps some such model as the
+following will no doubt be followed:
+
+ REVEILLE:
+ First call, 5.30 a.m.
+ March, 5.40 a.m.
+ Assembly, 5.45 a.m.
+
+At first call the non-commissioned officer in charge of quarters, or
+some other charged with that duty, will go through the barracks and
+awaken the men. After a short time this may be dispensed with.
+
+ MESS:
+ First call (followed by mess call), 5.55 a.m.
+ Assembly, 6.00 a.m.
+
+Allow the men approximately 20 minutes for breakfast and the privilege
+of returning individually--this for purposes of attending to the calls
+of nature.
+
+SICK CALL, 6.30 a.m.--Have the non-commissioned officer in charge of
+quarters put through this call; the sick will report to the orderly
+room, be entered on the sick report and marched to the hospital by the
+same non-commissioned officer. All men answering sick call should be
+questioned as to the nature of their trouble and its cause; men who
+are trying to dodge work should be caught up with. Care should be
+exercised in making out the sick report; be careful what you put on it
+and where you put it. The sick report will be treated further under
+"Paper Work."
+
+ MORNING INSTRUCTION:
+ First call, 6.50 a.m.
+ Assembly, 7.00 a.m.
+ Recall, 12.00 m.
+
+Utilize this time according to the schedule laid down by higher
+authorities. It will no doubt be insisted that the schedule be closely
+adhered to; but this can be done without completely destroying
+individual initiative.
+
+ MESS:
+ First call (followed by mess call), 12.10 p.m.
+ Assembly, 12.15 p.m.
+
+Allow 30 minutes for noon mess. The men may not consume it all; but
+judgment must be used in this matter. After mess have the company
+formed and marched back to barracks. This plan should be followed for
+a time, at least, particularly with "green" men purely for
+disciplinary purposes.
+
+ AFTERNOON INSTRUCTION:
+ First call, 1.20 p.m.
+ Assembly, 1.30 p.m.
+ Recall, 4,30 p.m.
+
+Same general procedure as for morning work.
+
+SICK CALL, 4.45 p.m.--When the sick report is sent to the hospital in
+the afternoon, it is customary to make a new entry for all men who are
+in the hospital. In this way a running account is kept and quickly
+referred to without running all through the book.
+
+The time from recall to retreat at 5.30 or thereabouts can usually be
+used to advantage in cleaning up and getting ready for this ceremony.
+
+ RETREAT.--(Formal--on the parade grounds).
+ First call, 5.30 p.m.
+ Assembly, 5.35 p.m.
+ Retreat, 5.50 p.m.
+
+ MESS:
+ First call, followed by mess call, 6.00 p.m.
+ Assembly, 6.05 p.m.
+
+ SCHOOL CALL (except Saturdays), 7.00 p.m.
+ TATTOO, 9.00 p.m.
+ CALL TO QUARTERS, 9.30 p.m.
+ TAPS, 9.45 p.m.
+
+At taps lights should be out and absolute quiet should prevail. This
+rule should be insisted upon from the very beginning of the training
+period. A check roll call is often taken at taps and the company
+reported to the Officer of the Day. Likewise, the company is reported
+to the Officer of the Day at reveille, retreat and mess formations;
+however, these things are determined entirely by local conditions.
+
+SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS.--Calls are 1/2 hour later, except retreat,
+tattoo, call to quarters and taps. In case an entertainment is given
+on the post, taps usually follow its close by a half hour.
+
+DETAILS for any day should be published at retreat formation the day
+previous; bulletins and notices should also be published to the
+company at this formation.
+
+PAPER WORK.--Paper work in the Army is generally viewed askance. A
+certain amount of it is absolutely necessary, but the amount can be
+reduced by careful attention to the way in which the work is done. A
+good first sergeant and a good company clerk will take a load of
+trouble off the shoulders of the company commander in this respect;
+but usually these men must be trained. Instructions on the blank forms
+should be carefully read the first time a certain paper is made out.
+Attend to all paper work promptly and make a note of anything that
+cannot be handled immediately. Do not let anything get into the
+company files until it has been O.K'd. by the company commander or
+initialed by the officers. Have a basket for the company commander and
+one for the other officers where they may expect to find matters that
+are of interest to them. Get reports, requisitions and other papers in
+on time. Do not wait until they are called for. Establish a daily, as
+well as a monthly, system of doing things in the orderly room and then
+stick to it as nearly as possible. Have a file for:
+
+ 1. General orders, post and W.D.
+ 2. Special orders.
+ 3. Memorandums, bulletins and notices may be included under this
+ head.
+ 4. Company orders.
+ 5. Document file (copies of letters, etc.).
+
+The needs for files will be determined largely by local conditions.
+The point is to have things where they can be found readily under an
+appropriate heading; and to have them accessible to others besides the
+company clerk. Keep a copy of everything, as nearly as possible, but
+do not clutter up your company files with unimportant items. Keep your
+orderly room looking as neat as possible.
+
+MILITARY CORRESPONDENCE.--A very important feature of Army Paper Work.
+Neatness, brevity and clarity are to be sought--ceremonial forms are
+avoided.
+
+References to Army Regulations: Paragraphs 225, 512, 776, 778, 779,
+780, 786, 789, 790, 822 (g.o. 23 w.d.).
+
+A letter consists of three parts; heading, body and signature. The
+heading consists of designation of the command, place and date, all
+placed in the upper right-hand corner. At the left, and with a margin
+of about an inch, should be:
+
+ From:
+
+ To:
+
+ Subject:
+
+A double space should be left between these lines.
+
+The body should be divided into numbered paragraphs, each paragraph
+treating of but one topic. The lines should be single-spaced, but a
+double space should be left between the paragraphs. The signature
+should be made without any unnecessary forms.
+
+Any good treatise on this subject will show the proper forms for a
+military letter.
+
+Indorsements follow the signature in succession on the same page or on
+added pages. They are very brief, follow a prescribed form and, if
+necessary, are paragraphed in the same way as the letter. Letters
+should be made in three, four, five or six copies, according to
+destination. They should always be handled through military channels;
+time will be lost if you try to dodge it.
+
+MORNING REPORT.--This is a complete record of daily events and should
+be kept with great care. It is submitted daily to the proper
+authority, checked and returned. Any standard work on this subject
+will show the proper method of making entries. Be sure to make entry
+of all events affecting your company, its numbers or condition. If
+there is no change, say so.
+
+RATION RETURN.--This form is made out in duplicate for periods of from
+10 days to a month. In case men join the company after the ration
+return has been submitted for a given period, one ration for each man
+for each day from date of joining to date of submitting next return,
+may be drawn on the next return. The same plan is followed in making
+deductions for men in the hospital or absent from the company. For
+ration allowances see a.r. 1202-1252.
+
+SICK REPORT.--A commissioned officer of the company and the medical
+officer sign on one line following the last entry for the occasion.
+Neither may encroach on the territory of the other and both enter
+their opinions as to whether the sickness is in line of duty. No
+erasures are allowed.
+
+DUTY ROSTER.--For any roster the key word should be "equality of all
+duties." It means the difference between contentment and
+dissatisfaction among your men. Keep an exact list of men available
+for every duty and detail them in exact rotation; adjust to complete
+satisfaction any little differences that arise. Let the men know that
+you want to give them a square deal and they will respond. The longest
+man off duty is the first man to be called. In the regular service the
+roster covers guard duty and other duties, notably kitchen, police and
+other fatigue work.
+
+MONTHLY RETURN.--The form is self explanatory. Read the instructions
+on the blanks before filling them in. By keeping in the company a
+record of events you can easily fill out the return properly when the
+time comes.
+
+SERVICE RECORD.--References in Army Regulations: Paragraphs 115, 118,
+124, 135, 138, 938, 1337, 1361, 1451, 1535. Article 16.
+
+The service record is a complete personal history of the soldier and
+follows him wherever he goes. It contains: a descriptive list, report
+of assignment, record of prior service, current enlistment, military
+record, record of allotments, clothing account and settlement,
+deposits, indorsements (this latter to give reasons for change of
+status or station of the soldier).
+
+DISCHARGE.--Discharges are of three kinds: honorable, dishonorable and
+plain discharge. The first is on a white sheet and entitles the
+soldier to re-enlist; the second is on a yellow sheet and is given
+following sentence of a general court-martial; the third is on a blue
+sheet and is given on account of physical disability--it does not
+entitle the soldier to re-enlist.
+
+FINAL STATEMENT, a.r., Art. 21.--The final statement is issued to
+every enlisted man upon his discharge unless he has forfeited all pay
+and allowances and has no deposits due him.
+
+The final statement is not to be prepared on the type-writer. Money
+amounts shall be written in both figures and words. The final
+statement should show the amount due the soldier for: additional pay;
+clothing; deposits; pay detained; miscellaneous causes. It also should
+show the amounts due the United States by the soldier for various
+reasons. In addition it should also state the period covered by the
+last pay of the soldier.
+
+Officers signing and certifying to the various entries are
+responsible.
+
+MUSTER ROLL. a.r. ARTICLE 42.--The muster roll is made bi-monthly and
+great care should be taken in its preparation to make it both correct
+and complete. All officers and enlisted men are taken up on the muster
+roll from the date of receipt of notice of assignment. The following
+are entered on the rolls:
+
+ 1. Commissioned officers belonging to the organization, in order of
+rank.
+ 2. Commissioned officers attached to the organization, in order of
+rank.
+ 3. Non-commissioned officers in order of grade.
+ 4. All others except musicians and privates, alphabetically arranged
+in order of grade.
+ 5. Musicians.
+ 6. Privates.
+
+All names, except those entered by rank, are entered in alphabetical
+order with the last name first.
+
+The names of enlisted men attached to the company are borne on a
+detachment roll. This is not true of officers attached to an
+organization, however.
+
+Remarks should be entered according to the model which can be obtained
+from the Adjutant General's Office.
+
+All changes should be noted which affect the status of the soldier. An
+excellent idea for retaining this data is to keep a separate card for
+each man and to enter thereon anything that affects his status.
+
+PAY ROLL. a.r. 1315-1383.--The pay roll is made out monthly in
+triplicate, one copy being retained and two copies being sent to the
+Quartermaster. On the pay roll there are four certificates to be
+signed:
+
+ 1. The commander of the organization examines the roll carefully and
+certifies that all entries are correct.
+ 2. The inspecting and mustering officer signs certifying that all
+are present or accounted for--or notes exceptions.
+ 3. The commanding officer witnesses the payment of each man and
+certifies to that effect.
+ 4. The commanding officer certifies that the duplicate and triplicate
+are exact copies of the original.
+
+NAMES.--The last name is entered first; _e.g._, Smith, John A. But the
+soldier signs as follows: John A. Smith.
+
+LOSSES.--The losses should follow immediately on the next line after
+the last entry. They include those by reason of: Discharge, transfer,
+retirement, desertion and the fact that the man has been dropped.
+
+Each officer should check his knowledge and be sure that he knows the
+purpose of, and is familiar with the following papers: (References are
+to Army Regulations and to Adjutant and Quartermaster forms.)
+
+ (1) Morning Report (a.r. 280).
+ (2) Daily Sick Report (a.r. 280), (339 a.g.o.).
+ (3) Duty Roster (a.r. 282), (339 a.g.o.).
+ (4) Company Fund Book (a.r. 280), (452 q.m.c.).
+ (5) Delinquency Record (a.r. 280), (509 q.m.c.).
+ (6) Property Responsibility:
+ Quartermaster (a.r. 280), (501cc q.m.c.).
+ Ordnance (a.r. 280), (501c q.m.c.).
+ (7) Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account (a.r.
+ 280), (29 a.g.o.).
+ (8) Memorandum Receipts (a.r. 281), (448 a.g.o.).
+ (9) Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts (par. 1, g.o., 6, 1916),
+ (448b a.g.o.).
+ (10) Summary Court Records (a.r. 9570), (594 a.g.o.).
+ (11) Statement of Clothing charged to Enlisted man (165b q.m.c.).
+ (12) Abstract of Clothing (180 q.m.c.).
+ (13) Company Target Records (307 a.g.o.).
+ (14) Individual Clothing Slips (165 q.m.c.).
+ (15) Files of Orders (a.r. 280).
+ (16) Correspondence Book with Index (a.r. 280).
+ (17) Document File.
+ (18) Record of Rifles (p. 14, Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1965).
+ (19) Record of Sizes of Clothing (g.o. 48, 1911).
+ (20) Company Return (a.r. 811), (30 a.g.o.).
+ (21) Muster Roll (a.g. 807).
+ (22) Returns (a.g. 811).
+ (23) Return of Casualties.
+ (24) Pay Roll (366 q.m.c.).
+
+As well as numerous other forms for special occasions which are not
+here listed.
+
+Except for the morning report, sick report, duty roster,
+correspondence book and various files, practically all the
+afore-mentioned records are now kept at regimental headquarters
+instead of in the company orderly room.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 14.
+
+Conferences.
+
+(Time--2 hours each day in afternoon.)
+
+
+1. Know your subject and be thoroughly prepared.
+
+2. Have an outline to refer to, showing main points you wish to cover.
+
+3. Do not allow a man to give an entire chapter in reply to a
+question. Make your questions short and specific--and require answers
+to be the same.
+
+4. Get every man on his feet at least once every day.
+
+5. Have a laugh every little while--keep the men awake.
+
+6. Vary your system of calling on men so that no one will know when he
+is likely to be called on.
+
+7. Avoid reading to the men.
+
+8. Require men to put things on the blackboard when possible.
+
+9. In case of a conference for which no time has been given for
+preparation, use all possible schemes to get the points home without
+having either a lecture or a study period. Allot--a definite time and
+require definite results--_e.g._, allow 10 minutes for a rough map
+showing the placing of a picket--15 minutes for an outline of a
+certain chapter, etc.
+
+10. Never forget that there are 2 sides to every conference--what you
+plan to give and what you plan to get. You must test the men to see
+how well they know the work but you must also make sure that every man
+knows it when he goes out even if he didn't when he came in.
+
+
+Study.
+
+The study period usually comes after a full day in the open, and the
+warm air and artificial light soon make the most ardent soldier doze
+off into cat-naps. Something must be done to counteract these
+influences and keep the men on the job. The terror of the next day's
+conference will not do it, as that time seems safely distant, with all
+night ahead.
+
+Assign the men three to five questions on the work to be studied,
+which will be asked in conference and which require a pretty general
+knowledge of the subject. Every man will then have a definite
+objective and a certain minimum of attainment for the evening. Or
+reverse the process and let each of the class write several questions
+about what they have studied. The following day let these questions,
+with the names of the men who asked them, be read before the class and
+answered. The effect of reading the name of the writer is to insure
+careful preparation of the question and study of the subject. A good
+question can hardly be asked without a basis of knowledge, and a
+foolish question condemns its author.
+
+Another plan is to let the men, whenever possible, instruct the class.
+Announce that any man may be called upon to take charge, and the
+uncertainty will keep everyone studying. This plan will also give the
+men valuable practice in teaching others. Their periods of
+instruction, of course, must be limited, and unsatisfactory parts of
+their work reviewed before the conference is dismissed.
+
+Another way to stimulate study is to have a short discussion, talk or
+quiz just before the close of the study hour, when the men, if left to
+themselves, will incline to look at their watches more often than at
+their books. A brief explanation of the work assigned, with emphasis
+upon a few especially important points, makes good use of this closing
+time, especially when the men are required to write down the points
+emphasized.
+
+
+Syllabus: Small Problems for Infantry.
+
+(References, f.s.r., p. 26-30, 33-39.)
+
+First Problem: Advance Guard and Point:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Small patrol sent ahead from advance
+party for disclosing enemy's position and strength, in time for
+larger bodies to make suitable defensive and offensive dispositions.
+Function primarily warning; but to give specific information, it may
+have to fight and thus feel enemy out.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Formed zig-zag; distance from advance party =?
+ 2. Controlled by leader of advance party.
+ 3. Speed must be great enough not to impede the main column.
+ Must not halt at first sign of enemy, nor go off on a flank.
+ 4. Interest and co-operation of inferiors, by adequate
+ explanation of situation and of individual duties
+ ("repeats").
+ 5. Rules for estimating numerical strength of the moving body of
+ troops (cf., f.s.r., sec. 27).
+ 6. Point as a "march outpost" (=?) when the column is halted.
+ Only then may the A.G. point make any lateral arrangement of
+ its members (cf. 3 above).
+
+Second Problem: Advance Guard Connecting File, cf., f.s.r., reference
+above:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Two men (usually) for liaison en
+route where elements too widely separated or roads too curved and
+wooded. Distance 200 to 5 yards apart.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Constant touch with elements before and behind.
+ 2. Relay both ways messages sent to or from remoter parts of the
+ column. Speed and accuracy of signaling.
+ 3. Guide to be forward in daytime, at night on the main body.
+
+Third Problem: Advance Guard Flank Patrol, pp. 31-32:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--For protecting a marching column from
+attack, by warning it on the basis of information gained in
+reconnaissance. Interval between men depends on circumstances.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Start from near head of the column, _i.e._, from smallest
+ element in the advance guard that can afford to cut down its
+ numbers.
+ 2. Speed rather than safety, to keep abreast of own column and
+ to force the enemy to disclose himself by firing on F.P.
+ rather than on main body.
+ 3. Sent to investigate suspicious areas, _e.g._ in woods, behind
+ houses.
+ 4. Action in case of firing on main body; advance and
+ counterfire, deployed.
+ 5. Get-away man in rear of column.
+ 6. _Stick to the job_: no wandering or chasing of enemy beyond
+ range of column. Job is to warn and protect against flank
+ attack.
+
+Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party:
+
+ A. Definition and Function:
+
+ Body of infantry, amounting to 1/8 to 1/2 the Support
+ (depending on the number of cavalry ahead) cf., f.s.r., p.
+ 28.
+ Duty.--To back up the point and the advance cavalry (if any) if
+ fired upon; remove enemy bodies and other obstacles.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Describe general mission to inferiors.
+ 2. Explain individual duties to inferiors.
+ 3. Send out point and connecting files.
+ 4. Form in platoon; zig-zag.
+ 5. Keep going; prosecute engagements briskly, not to delay main
+ column.
+ 6. Procedure under fire: deploys and drops, when fired upon;
+ looks for enemy's direction and assigns target and range.
+ Advance under cover if any, when fire light; when heavy seek
+ to divert fire to you away from main body of advance guard to
+ facilitate latter's disposition for advance to your support.
+ Seek to drive off a weaker enemy, and to hold off a stronger.
+ 7. Speedy decisions. Value of imaginary situations, while on the
+ march; and planning your commands.
+
+Fifth Problem: Combat Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Contrasted with covering detachment,
+which is large enough to offer considerable resistance, the combat
+patrol is primarily to _Warn_, especially against flank attacks. Size
+varies widely because of looseness in definition, _e.g._, 100 men
+might be _covering detachment_ for a regiment, but a combat patrol
+for a brigade.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Comparison of thin line versus thin column, regarding: (a)
+ vulnerability, (b) fatigue, (c) tactical advantage, when
+ engagement materializes, (e) control of movement and of
+ fire.
+ 2. Agent between advance and main body.
+ 3. Attack any enemy of reasonable size that attacks main body.
+ 4. Corn as concealment versus corn as obstruction to sight.
+ 5. Vulnerability of charging cavalry.
+ 6. Lieutenant as tactical chief, sergeant as disciplinarian, in
+ a platoon; except when?
+ 7. Messages concise, not ambiguous, written versus oral?
+ Repeats.
+ 8. Limitations of use of map. Vegetation changes; errors in
+ contouring.
+
+Sixth Problem and Seventh Problem: Two Pickets:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Outpost contrasted with advance guard
+in that former is stationed around a camp or bivouac, while latter
+precedes a marching column. To check enemy attempting to attack main
+body, and hold him till larger force is able to deploy. Consists of
+outpost reserve, outpost line of supports, line of outguards
+(pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts), plus sentinels, patrols,
+etc.
+
+ Picket ordinarily merely warns of an attack, but may offer
+resistance.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Smooth posting of outpost very desirable; influence of delay
+ on spirits of men, after day's march.
+ 2. Outpost support sends out pickets.
+ 3. Picket sends out sentry squads, cossack posts, sentinels,
+ etc.
+ 4. Provisional dispositions by leaders of outguard elements;
+ importance of good sketch; intrenchments?
+ 5. Confirmation and alteration by higher officers; especially
+ changes at night regarding layout and manning. Fire
+ ineffective at night except at short ranges.
+ 6. Roster =?
+ 7. Instructions regarding enemy's position and strength, and the
+ friendly outguards to right and left.
+ 8. Mode of numbering elements (from right to right). Arrangement
+ for smooth withdrawal of each element upon stronger one.
+ 9. Disposition of strangers; use for information.
+ 10. Need of explicit arrangements in case of attack in day or
+ night.
+ 11. Sleep near arms.
+
+Eighth Problem--Cossack Post and Sentry Squad:
+
+ A. Definition and Function:
+
+ 1. Cossack Post: 4 men in charge of a corporal (usually)
+ primarily to observe and warn; secondarily to keep
+ concealed, and intercept strangers who might be useful to
+ enemy or to us.
+ 2. Sentry Squad: 8 men in charge of a corporal. Duties similar
+ but strength is greater. Posts double sentinel.
+ 3. Post important enough for a cossack post is often doubled
+ into a sentry squad at night.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Opportunity to "pick off" enemies ought to be ignored until
+ position of c.p. or s.s. or of its supporting body has
+ unquestionably been learned by enemy. Then fire away.
+ 2. _Stop_ enemy's patrolling. Is as important as to _force_ your
+ own observation.
+ 3. Advantages of s.s. over c.p. for night work: (a) strength,
+ (b) sureness, (c) adequacy of observation before firing
+ alarm.
+ 4. Use of prisoners, and papers on dead bodies.
+ 5. Value of imagining yourself in position of enemy commander in
+ deciding what enemy dispositions you will combat him with.
+
+Ninth Problem: Reconnoitering Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Gather information in the field. No
+resistance unless compelled. Concealment and flight rather than
+resistance by fire: opposite of "covering detachment."
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Judgment in deciding what equipment is appropriate to the
+ particular patrol.
+ 2. Sketch copies; contours as guides for concealed route.
+ 3. Fight only in self defence.
+ 4. How to question hidden sentinel without disclosing his
+ position to enemy.
+ 5. Judicious choice of cover in approaching destination.
+ 6. Dating and placing of messages.
+ 7. Rate of passage of troops: "Rule of 2-2-2."
+
+Tenth Problem--Visiting Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function:
+
+ Two men or more sent from supports and pickets liaison between
+ adjoining outguards. More useful at night, because of
+ reduced visibility of terrain between outguards.
+
+ 1. Inform the sending body of conditions at sentinel posts.
+ 2. Prevent enemy from penetrating lines between posts.
+ 3. Exchange information between adjoining posts.
+ 4. Take back captured strangers to commander.
+ 5. Reenforce feeling of mutual support among the isolated
+ sentinels.
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Keen sight and hearing; silence.
+ 2. Need of signals. Both countersign and check--countersign.
+ 3. Equipment; nothing that rattles or glistens.
+ 4. Disposition: leader in front, because of need for quick
+ decision.
+ 5. Distance not over two miles even in most open country.
+ 6. Danger of startling a friend sentinel by unwarned approach.
+
+Eleventh Problem--Detached Post:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Posted where connection cannot be
+easily maintained with other elements of outpost. Sent usually by
+outpost reserve or by main body, and retires to them, rather than to
+the line of supports. Function same as element of outpost
+proper,--_observation, resistance, reconnaissance_; but less
+resistance than _warning_. May be as small as 2 men, or as large as a
+support, depending on location and importance of detached position.
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Established under precautions, because of danger of enemy
+ breaking between the main body and the detached post.
+ 2. Entrenchment: what time of day? What other circumstances?
+ Treatment of bridges? Night?
+ 3. Requisitioning order: Need of payment; for justice, for
+ military advantage later (reassure farmers through whose
+ territory you will need to pass and keep supplied).
+
+Twelfth Problem--Requisitioning Detachment or Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--A patrol may have any mission: here
+it is sent to take (on payment) the provender designated. A.r.d. sent
+by commander with specific instructions, is legal; a raid for booty
+illegal. (See f.s.r., sec, 290.)
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Preparation essential.
+ 2. Sending of men singly or in pairs across open spaces.
+ 3. Deliberate start on _wrong_ road to deceive enemy scouts.
+ 4. Not to fire unless obliged,--until return trip.
+
+Thirteenth Problem--A Contact Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--A small patrol sent out from a
+stationary body of troops, usually at night, to find out whether
+enemy is starting a retreat. (Compact formation in column.)
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Travel light, but prepare to spend some time lying still.
+ 2. Route rear and parallel to a road, but not on it.
+ 3. Do not attack enemy patrols unless necessary.
+ 4. Get through enemy line of observation and watch support or
+ larger body.
+ 5. Return together when you have definite information. Do not
+ send single messengers.
+
+Fourteenth Problem.--A Small Outguard:
+
+ The principles used in 14 are same as those listed under 1-13; and
+should be clinched by assigning yourself the problem of completely
+arranging an outpost for a brigade to be encamped or bivouacked at
+some assigned position on the Hunter's Town sheet. Exchange
+solutions, for mutual criticism.
+
+
+Examinations.
+
+The following examinations, given at the second Plattsburg Training
+Camp, will enable students of military matters to form some idea as to
+where they stand in their grasp of the subject:
+
+Plattsburg Training Camp:
+
+ 1. Explain the "Position of the Soldier." (Par. 51, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Being at parade rest, explain position of right foot. (Par. 53,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 3. Explain the "Hand Salute." (Par. 58, i.d.r.)
+ 4. (1) Give length of full step (a) in quick time, (b) in double time.
+ (2) How is the full step measured? (Par. 60, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Explain "Halt" from quick time. (Par. 70, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Explain position of butt of rifle at "Order Arms" standing.
+ (Par. 77, i.d.r.)
+ 7. Explain position of left forearm at present arms. (Par. 78,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 8. At parade rest under arms (rifle), explain position of left
+ hand. (Par. 90, i.d.r.)
+ 9. The squad being in line explain "Squad Right." (Par. 119,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 10. The company in line, give commands and explain "To dismiss the
+ company." (Par. 174, i.d.r.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ 1. Being in any formation assembled, give commands and explain
+ movements for deploying the squad as skirmishers. (Par. 124,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 2. When deployed as skirmishers (a) How do the men march? (b) How
+ are the pieces carried? (c) Who is the guide? (d) What is the
+ normal interval between skirmishers? (e) What is the length of
+ the front of the squad when deployed at normal intervals? (Par.
+ 124, i.d.r.)
+ 3. In what formations are the loadings executed? (Par. 133, i.d.r.)
+ 4. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, what does
+ each squad leader do? (Par. 200, i.d.r.)
+ 5. In what direction does a deployed line face on halting? (Par.
+ 203.)
+ 6. Being in skirmish line, explain the movement "Platoon columns."
+ March. (Par. 213, i.d.r.)
+ 7. What is the purpose of the advance in a succession of thin
+ lines? (Par. 219, i.d.r.)
+ 8. Name three classes of fire. Which class is normally employed in
+ action? (Par. 241-2-3, i.d.r.)
+ 9. Why is it necessary to have proper distribution of fire? (Par.
+ 246, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Explain briefly the functions of platoon leaders, platoon
+ guides and squad leaders in the fire fight. (Par. 252, i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. Explain the position of parade rest (without arms). (Par. 53,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 2. Being in the position of the soldier, explain the position of
+ the heels, feet and knees. (Par. 51, i.d.r.)
+ 3. Give the commands for and explain the execution of "Right Face."
+ 4. Being at a halt, give the commands for moving forward in quick
+ time and explain the execution thereof. (Par. 62, i.d.r.)
+ 5. (a) Being in march in quick time, give the commands necessary
+ to march in double time and explain the execution thereof,
+ (Par. 63, i.d.r.)
+ (b) What is the length of step and the rate of steps per minute
+ in double time? (Par. 60, i.d.r.)
+ 6. At "Right Shoulder Arms":
+ (a) Explain the position of the trigger guard. (Par. 83,
+ i.d.r.)
+ (b) What is the position of the barrel? (Par. 88, i.d.r.)
+ 7. In the rifle salute (right shoulder arms), describe the
+ position of the:
+ (a) Left forearm on first count, (Par. 93, i.d.r.)
+ (b) Left hand on first count. (Par. 93, i.d.r.)
+ 8. Explain the position of the left forearm on the second count of
+ right shoulder arms from order arms. (Par. 83, i.d.r.)
+ 9. The squad being in line explain "Squad right about." (Par. 121,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 10. Explain the execution of "Right by Squads," 2 March. (Par. 183,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. What are the two general classes of military information? (Par.
+ 9, f.s.r.)
+ 2. What do you understand by the term "reconnaissance?" (Par. 11,
+ f.s.r.)
+ 3. (a) Name the various kinds of patrols. (Note to Par. 23,
+ f.s.r.)
+ (b) What are the advantages of small patrols over strong
+ patrols? (Par. 24, f.s.r.)
+ 4. What governs the formation adopted by the patrol? (Par. 26,
+ f.s.r.)
+ 5. What is a field message? (Par. 32, f.s.r.)
+ 6. (a) What is the function of an advance guard? (Par. 40, f.s.r.)
+ (b) What of a flank guard? (Par. 53, f.s.r.)
+ 7. (a) What is an outpost? (Par. 60, f.s.r.)
+ (b) How are the outguards classified? (Par. 64, f.s.r.)
+ 8. Define a successful march. (Par. 96, f.s.r.)
+ 9. What rules govern the halts of a column of troops on the march?
+ (Par. 102, f.s.r.)
+ 10. (a) From a certain point off the road you observe a column of
+ troops marching on the road. You can distinguish that these
+ troops are infantry in column of squads. It requires 20
+ minutes for them to pass a given point. How much infantry
+ is in the column? (Par. 27, f.s.r.)
+ (b) The day is still, no wind blowing, further to the rear you
+ can see a broken cloud of dust extending in prolongation of
+ the road but cannot see the cause. What does this indicate?
+ (Par. 27, f.s.r.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+Harvard College. School of the Soldier:
+
+ 1. Define depth, distance, interval, front, base, point of rest,
+ deployment, pace. (i.d.r. definitions.)
+ 2. (a) What is the guide of the leading subdivision, in column of
+ subdivisions, charged with? (Par. 20, i.d.r.)
+ (b) What is the guide of the subdivisions in rear charged with?
+ (Par. 20, i.d.r.)
+ 3. What are orders, commands and signals. (Par. 31, 37, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Describe position of the soldier or attention (without arms.)
+ (i.d.r. 51.)
+ 5. What are the rests? Describe each. (Par. 52, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Describe about face. (Par. 57, i.d.r.)
+ 7. (a) Being at a halt, or marching in quick time, to march in
+ double time. Describe commands and how executed. (Par. 63,
+ i.d.r.)
+ (b) Marching in double time, to resume quick time. Describe
+ commands and how executed. (Par. 64, i.d.r.)
+ 8. What are the rules that govern the carrying of the piece? (Par.
+ 75, i.d.r.)
+ 9. What general rules govern the execution of the manual of arms?
+ (Par. 76, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Give the rate per minute and length of the half step and full
+ step in quick and double time. (Par. 60, i.d.r.)
+ 11. What are the arm signals for: Column left, march; halt; as
+ skirmishers, march; assemble, march; suspend firing; range, 250
+ yards; fix bayonets. (Par. 43, i.d.r.)
+ 12. Explain the execution of the command "Right Dress." (Par. 107,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+School of the Squad:
+
+ 1. To suspend firing: Give the commands and describe execution.
+ Same, to cease firing. (Par. 149-150, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Describe in detail the execution of "Squads Right." (Par. 119,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 3. Give the commands and explain execution for taking intervals.
+ How does it differ from taking distances? (Pars. 109, 110, 111,
+ 112, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Describe in detail "Right oblique, March." (Par. 116, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Explain the use of "In place, Halt." (Par. 14, i.d.r.)
+ 6. When can the following commands be used: Resume March. (Par. 14,
+ i.d.r.) Oblique March. (Par. 117, i.d.r.) By the right flank,
+ March. (Par. 71, i.d.r.) Take Arms. (Par. 114, i.d.r.)
+ 7. Describe by what commands and in what manner a squad is formed.
+ 8. (a) Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements
+ for turning on a moving pivot.
+ (b) Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements
+ for turning on a fixed pivot.
+ 9. Being in any formation, assembled, give the commands and
+ describe the movements for deploying as skirmishers.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+School of the Company:
+
+ 1. Give the proper commands for the following movements:
+ (a) Company being in line, to march to the front in column of
+ squads. (Par. 183, i.d.r.)
+ (b) Company being in line, to form column of squads to the
+ flank. (Par. 178, i.d.r.)
+ (c) Company being in line, to form skirmish line. (Par. 206,
+ 200, 202, i.d.r.)
+ (d) Company being in column of squads, to form line to the right
+ so the leading squad shall be on the right of the line.
+ (Par. 188, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Being in line, to align the company. Give the commands and
+ explain the movement. (Pars. 175, 107, i.d.r.)
+ 3. The company having gone from line into column of squads by the
+ command: "Squads right, March," state the position of the
+ captain, two lieutenants and right and left guides. (Pars. 163,
+ 168 and Plate II, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Show by diagram: (a) A company of two platoons in column of
+ platoons, (b) A company of three platoons in line of platoons.
+ (Plate II, i.d.r.)
+ 5. What commands are given to form the company?
+ 6. (a) Who is the pivot in executing "Company Left?"
+ (b) Who is the pivot in executing "Left Turn?"
+
+
+Military Science and Tactics.
+
+MINOR TACTICS.
+
+MAP: GETTYSBURG--ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET).
+
+First Problem: An Advance Party--Situation I:
+
+_Your battalion_ and the _machine gun_ company occupy _Center Mills_,
+in enemy's country. The remainder of the _Harvard Regiment_ is
+encamped _two miles north of Center Mills_. The Battalion has an
+outguard _at J. Fohl, 1150 yards southeast_ of Center Mills. _It is
+mid-winter;_ there is _no snow_, but the _streams are frozen_.
+
+At 6.45 a.m., 1 Feb., 17, your battalion and the machine gun company
+are _hurriedly assembled, pieces are loaded_, and the column, _your
+company in the lead_, is marched out of town, over the southeast
+road. Your captain calls the _officers and non-commissioned officers_
+to the head of the company and gives the following verbal order:
+
+_A Blue force, estimated at one battalion with machine guns, is
+marching north from Granite Hill Sta. Blue patrols have been reported
+in vicinity of Henderson meeting house (700 yards north of
+Hunterstown). There are no Red troops south of here. Our battalion and
+the machine gun company are going to take up a position on the 712-707
+hills, which flank this road, about 3 miles south of here. This
+company will be the advance guard. The main body, which is the rest of
+our column, follows at 600 yards. Lieutenant Allen, your platoon (1st)
+and the second platoon will constitute the_ ADVANCE PARTY. _The third
+and fourth platoons will form the_ SUPPORT, _and will follow the
+advance party at 300 yards. Here is a map for you. Follow this road
+(pointing and indicating on map) through J. Fohl--554-534--Bridge
+S.H., to crossroads 666, where you will halt and establish a_ MARCH
+OUTPOST. _I will be with the support. When we reach the outguard at J.
+Fohl the column will halt and the advance guard will move out. Posts._
+
+The column halts at the outguard. You are Lieutenant Allen.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions, and dispositions in detail.
+
+Situation II:
+
+The _advance party_ has just cleared roadfork 534 when it is fired
+upon from the woods along the stream about _500 yards southeast_.
+There are probably _20 rifles firing upon you_. The enemy's fire is
+well-directed. The _point_ has crossed the first bridge, 300 yards
+south of 534. The _support_ has halted; but is not under fire.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions.
+
+Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point--Situation I:
+
+The situation is the same as in the First Problem.
+
+You are the commander of the point.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions as the _point_ clears the outguard.
+
+Required:
+
+The _point_ has just crossed the first bridge 300 yards southeast of
+534, when you hear firing and observe that the _advance party_ is
+being fired upon from the woods directly east of you. A few moments
+later you note a few dismounted men crossing the island about 400
+yards to the east. The firing has ceased.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions.
+
+Situation III:
+
+The _advance guard_ has resumed its march. When the point reaches
+Bridge S.H., it is fired upon from the woods 400 yards to the east.
+About ten cavalrymen are hurriedly mounting, others are already riding
+into the woods.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions.
+
+Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol--
+
+Situation:
+
+The situation is the same as in the _First Problem_, and follows
+_Situation III, Second Problem_.
+
+When the _advance party_ is two hundred yards from the roadfork where
+unimproved road leads northeast, about 600 yards southeast of Bridge
+S.H., Lieutenant Allen gives the following instructions to Corporal
+Adams, 3d Squad:
+
+_Corporal, about fifteen Blue cavalry have been driven back through
+those woods (pointing out woods to east). When we reach the roadfork
+in front of us take your squad and comb the woods until you reach
+southern edge. From there go east until you observe the crossroads
+(616) which are about 1200 yards beyond. Return over first improved
+road running southwest to the crossroads (666) about 1-1/2 miles south
+of here and just under the hilltop, where you will rejoin advance
+party._
+
+You are Corporal Adams.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions, dispositions, and route of the patrol.
+
+
+MAP READING. VISIBILITY PROBLEMS.
+
+MAP: GETTYSBURG--ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET).
+
+NOTE.--_Observation points 707 and 712 are the hills referred to in
+the First Problem under Minor Tactics._
+
+_Where one point is invisible from another, state points of
+interference._
+
+_Problem 1_. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see the roadfork 535
+(about 1500 yards south)?
+
+_Problem 2_. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road,
+and has crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544). Can this patrol
+see the Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and
+crossroads 616?
+
+_Problem 3_. Can the sentinel at 712 see the roadfork 581 (1850 yards
+southwest from 712)?
+
+_Problem 4_. Can the sentinel at 712 see the crossroads 561 (about
+1200 yards southeast)?
+
+ * * * * *
+
+General Situation--Hunterstown Sheet.
+
+The _Harvard Regiment_ camps the night of May 31-June 1 on Opossum
+Creek just west of Friends Grove S.H. (A-7) in hostile territory. The
+regiment is part of a brigade, the remainder of the brigade being in
+camp one day's march north of Center Mills.
+
+Problem I: An Advance Guard Point:
+
+At daylight of June 1st the regimental commander receives the
+following message from brigade headquarters: "Our aeroplanes report a
+large force of the enemy near Hunterstown. Move at once on
+Hunterstown. Develop the strength of this enemy and locate his exact
+position. I will send reinforcements to you by motor-train if
+necessary."
+
+Officers call is sounded, and this information transmitted to all the
+officers of the regiment. The _First Battalion_ is designated as
+_advance guard_ and ordered to move out at once by crossroads 554 and
+561, and road forks 535 and 552 towards Hunterstown. Major A,
+commanding the First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of
+"D" company as advance party and C company and the remainder of D
+company as support.
+
+Lieut. X, commanding the advance party, calls up all his
+non-commissioned officers and explains the situation to them. He then
+says: "Sergeant Mason, take 4 men and move out on that road (pointing)
+as the point. At crossroads and road forks semaphore W.W. and I will
+indicate the direction. The remainder of these two platoons will be
+the advance party. I will be with it. Move out."
+
+You are Sergeant Mason.
+
+(_a_) What instructions, and information do you give the point before
+you reach crossroads 554?
+
+After passing crossroads 561 about 300 yards one of your men reports
+about a squad of hostile cavalry on the road south of road fork 544,
+1500 yards east of you.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Problem II: An Advance Guard Connecting File:
+
+Situation as in preceding problem.
+
+After the advance party has moved out about 100 yards, Captain Y,
+commanding the support, says: "Smith, you take Jones and move out as
+connecting file." After Smith and Jones have moved about 100 yards,
+he says: "Donnelly, you take Burke and move out as connecting file."
+You are Donnelly.
+
+(_a_) What instructions do you give Burke before reaching crossroads
+554?
+
+After passing crossroads 561 you go about 150 yards without seeing the
+connecting file in rear of you.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Problem III: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol:
+
+Situation as in preceding problem.
+
+On arriving at crossroads 561 Lieut. X commanding the advance party
+calls up Sergeant Clifford and says: "Sergeant, the point has just
+reported a squad of hostile cavalry about a mile down this road
+(pointing toward road fork 544). Take _your squad_ and scout down this
+road. I will take the next road to the left leading to Hunterstown.
+Rejoin me on that road."
+
+You are Sergeant Clifford.
+
+(_a_) What formation do you adopt for your patrol?
+
+Nothing happens until you arrive near road fork 544, when you hear
+firing from the woods southwest of you. This fire is not directed
+toward you. There is evidently about a squad firing. You can see no
+enemy in any direction.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Problem IV: Platoon as an Advance Party:
+
+General situation same as before.
+
+You are Lieut. X commanding the advance party. You have arrived near
+the small orchard southeast of road fork 535. A sharp fire is suddenly
+opened from the woods to the southeast, apparently from a _squad or
+small platoon_.
+
+(_a_) Give your orders and dispositions.
+
+After firing about a minute the fire of the enemy stops. You move out
+into the road and can see no sign of your point or connecting files.
+The support is closing up on you.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Visibility Problems:
+
+(_a_) Can a man on hill 712 see a man at crossroads 554 in
+Hunterstown? (Disregard trees.)
+
+(_b_) A man stands at the point where contour 680 crosses the road
+followed in above problem, just south of hill 707. Where does the
+roadbed first become invisible?
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MAP: GETTYSBURG--- ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET).
+
+First Problem: A Connecting File--Situation I:
+
+The Harvard Regiment is in camp in hostile country the night May 1-2
+in the corn field 1000 yards east of Boyd S.H., just northeast of
+cross roads 488. The line of outguards extends approximately through
+Boyd S.H., Hill 527, McElheny.
+
+At 1.00 a.m.; May 1st, the regimental commander receives the following
+telephone message from brigade headquarters at Gettysburg (just off
+the map to the south)--An enemy force estimated strength one regiment
+is in camp 6 miles north of Center Mills. His patrols were seen
+yesterday by our advance cavalry near Guernsey and Center Mills. It is
+reliably reported that this force will march by Center Mills and
+Guernsey on Biglersville to-morrow morning to destroy a large amount
+of rolling stock at that point. Move at once toward Center Mills to
+stop and drive back this force.
+
+Officers call is sounded. The situation is explained to the officers
+and they are told to have their companies ready to move at 2.00 a.m.
+The 1st battalion is designated as advance guard.
+
+The advance guard is directed to move across the field to road fork
+511 thence north by the main road. The _first platoon_ of "A" company
+is designated as advance party. "B" company and the remainder of "A"
+company form the support. As the advance party moves out Captain Smith
+commanding the support, says to Private Long, "Long, you and Williams
+move out as connecting files. This is a dark night so be careful to
+keep connection both front and rear." Before Long is out of sight; he
+says, "Scott, you and Hunt move out as connecting files following
+Long." You are Scott.
+
+Required:
+
+(a) What instructions do you give Hunt?
+
+(b) What do you do up to the time you reach the main road at 511?
+
+Situation II:
+
+After you have passed road fork in _Table Rock_ about 100 yards you
+notice that Hunt who has been watching to the rear does not seem to be
+alert. You look back and can see no sign of the connecting file in
+rear of you. It is still dark.
+
+Required:
+
+What do you do?
+
+Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point--General Situation same as in
+Problem I:
+
+Sergeant Hill and four men constitute the point. The situation has
+been explained to Sergeant Hill by the advance party commander.
+
+About daylight the point arrives at crossroads 600. A sharp fire
+evidently from about a squad is received from the house on the rise
+500 yards north along the road. You are Sergeant Hill.
+
+Required:
+
+What do you do?
+
+Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol--Situation I--General
+Situation same as Problem I:
+
+Up to daylight no flank patrols have been sent out. When the support
+reaches Table Rock the support commander calls Corporal Bell and says
+to him "Corporal take your squad as a flank patrol up this road to the
+right. Take the left hand road at the first two road forks and follow
+the road past the church and school-house until you reach this road
+again about 1-1/2 miles north of here. Report every thing you have
+seen when you rejoin. Your squad consists of seven men besides
+yourself."
+
+Required:
+
+(a) The disposition of your squad on the march.
+(b) What do you do when you hear the firing near crossroads 600?
+
+Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party--Situation--General Situation
+same as in the First Problem:
+
+When you arrive at a point about 200 yards south of hill 646 you hear
+firing 1000 yards north of you. You cannot see who is firing nor can
+you see the point. You are Lieutenant Clark commanding the advance
+party.
+
+Required:
+
+What do you do?
+
+Visibility Problems:
+
+(a) When the point arrives at hill 647 can it see the crossroads 610
+to the northeast?
+
+(b) When the flank patrol reaches Benders' Church crossroads can it
+see an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile
+to the northeast?
+
+(c) Looking north along the Center Mills road from hill 647 where does
+the road first become invisible?
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MAP: HUNTERSTOWN SHEET.
+
+General Situation:
+
+The Harvard regiment encamped on the night of July 12-13 at
+Biglerville (B-8) in hostile territory. The remainder of the brigade
+of which the regiment is a part is in camp 5 miles west of
+Biglerville.
+
+Problem I:
+
+At daylight, July 13, the regimental commander receives the following
+message from brigade headquarters:
+
+"It is reported that the enemy is in force near Heidlersburg. Move on
+Heidlersburg at once; locate the position of the enemy, and develop
+his strength. Reinforcements will be sent you, if necessary."
+
+This information is transmitted to all officers of the regiment. The
+First Battalion is ordered to move out at once as advance guard on
+Biglerville-610-582 road toward Heidlersburg. Major Dunn, commanding
+First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of C Company as
+advance party, and D Company and the remainder of C Company as
+support.
+
+Lieut. Gibbs, commanding the advance party, explains the situation to
+his non-commissioned officers, and then orders:
+
+ "Sergeant Dow, take four men and move out on that road
+ (indicating road to Heidlersburg) as point. The remainder of these
+ two platoons will be the advance party and will follow you at 200
+ yards. I shall be with it. Move out."
+
+You are Sergt. Dow.
+
+How do you place your men, and what information and instructions do
+you give the point before you pass the orchard east of Biglerville?
+
+Situation 2:
+
+You are still Sergt. Dow.
+
+The point has reached crossroads 582. You are informed by a farmer
+living at crossroads 582 that about half an hour before there were
+some soldiers half a mile north of 582 on the road to Center Mills. He
+says he does not know where they went.
+
+What do you do?
+
+Problem II:
+
+The advance party has arrived at crossroads 582. Information has come
+to Lieut. Gibbs, both from the point and from the farmer direct, that
+Red Soldiers have been seen on road to north leading to Center Mills.
+Lieut. Gibbs on arrival at 582 sends out a squad under Sergt. Jones
+to patrol north on the Center Mills road half a mile, then east by
+farm road to corner, then by fence south of house and barn to Opossum
+Creek and down creek to main road again.
+
+The advance party then proceeds about 300 yards easterly from 582,
+when the point signals "Enemy in small numbers in creek bottom due
+north."
+
+ (a) What does Lieut. Gibbs and the advance party do?
+ (b) What does he tell the point to do?
+ (c) What does the flank patrol under Sergt. Jones do?
+
+Problem III:
+
+Because of the action taken in Problem II the Reds have ceased to
+menace the left flank of the advance guard:
+
+ (a) What does the advance party and its commander do?
+ (b) What does he tell the point to do?
+
+Another Situation--Problem IV:
+
+Enemy is in the vicinity of Hunterstown. Your brigade has marched
+south through Guernsey to road fork 610, and has turned east, and is
+about to camp in grass field north of road 610-582, 1-3 of a mile west
+of 582. Your battalion is to form the outpost. You are its major.
+
+Where do you post:
+
+ (a) The outpost reserve?
+ (b) The outpost supports?
+ (c) The outguards?
+
+ (NOTE: The sector up to and including the road Center
+ Mills--554-534--Bridge S.H. is covered by another brigade
+ to your left.)
+
+Problem V:
+
+On the same general scheme as in Problem IV. You are Sergt. Robinson
+of Support No. 1. You are ordered by its commander to move out with 3
+squads to form a picket, outguard No. 1, putting out observation
+posts on the road about half a mile south of the support.
+
+ (a) State what directions you give to your picket and how you move
+ to your position.
+ (b) Where do you post the picket and its observation posts?
+ (c) What orders and instructions do you give on arrival at the
+ place selected?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 15.
+
+Trench Warfare.
+
+General Principles.
+
+
+1. Defense may be made in depth by all organizations, down to and
+including the platoon, or it may be made laterally.
+
+2. The smallest active segment, be it only three men, must have a
+chief and a second in command, who is responsible for the proper
+upkeep and defense of the segment. All occupants of active segments
+must know all instructions which should be simple.
+
+3. Any troops in charge of a portion of trench must never abandon it,
+no matter what happens, even if surrounded.
+
+4. All ground lost must be retaken at once by immediate counter attack
+launched by the unit which lost the ground. As a matter of fact a
+counter attack is difficult for a platoon or company; it is really
+necessary for it to be made by a battalion.
+
+5. Each company must provide for emplacements for mine throwers to be
+served by the artillery and for pneumatic guns to be served by their
+own men.
+
+
+Instructions to be Issued by Battalion Commander.
+
+1. Disposition of companies in sector assigned (best done by sketch
+showing sectors assigned to companies).
+
+2. Special orders to companies (concerns field of fire to be obtained
+not only in own sector, but also in those adjoining it).
+
+3. Improvement of defense. (Brief reports from company commanders to
+be followed by work being done on order of battalion commander after
+inspection.)
+
+4. Organization of watching (not sentry duty) (by company commander
+under supervision of battalion commander).
+
+5. Organization of observation (not sentry duty) (by company commander
+under supervision of battalion commander).
+
+6. Organization of supply (procuring, routing, etc., of tools,
+ammunition, food, water, etc.), (by company commander under
+supervision of battalion commander).
+
+7. Organization of liaison (communication) (runners, telephone,
+telegraph visual signaling, pigeons, etc., by company commander under
+the supervision of battalion commander). _All telephonic communication
+must be in code_.
+
+8. Organization of supplies to include amounts to be expected daily
+from the rear.
+
+9. Knowledge of enemy must be imparted to company commanders in order
+to assist them in making their dispositions.
+
+10. Frequent reports to be made of existing conditions at the front
+for information of higher commanders.
+
+11. Lateral defense of boyaux must not be overlooked.
+
+12. Wide turning movements are not possible. Enveloping movements are
+possible only on local attacks against small portions of the hostile
+line after it has been pierced. All main attacks are confined to
+purely frontal attacks.
+
+13. The most important obstacle is barbed wire entanglements.
+
+14. Communication (liaison) between and co-ordination and co-operation
+of, the different elements of a command is of the utmost importance.
+
+15. Artillery co-operates more closely than ever with infantry. Its
+reconnaissance officers accompany infantry lines in order to obtain
+information. _There is a certain number of artillery observers
+attached to each battalion of infantry_.
+
+The general method of attack is to smother the defense with a torrent
+of explosive shells, kept up incessantly for one or more days, and
+shatter the defense so they will offer but slight resistance to the
+infantry; then rush forward with the infantry and seize the positions
+while the enemy is demoralized, and consolidate them before
+reenforcements can be brought up.
+
+ The artillery bombardment is necessary to prepare the way for the
+ infantry advance. It has for its objects:
+ (1) To destroy the hostile artillery, wire entanglements and
+ infantry trenches.
+ (2) To produce curtains of fire and prevent bringing up
+ reenforcements.
+
+_Light guns are assigned to_ EACH BATTALION OF INFANTRY, subject only
+to orders of regimental and battalion commanders concerned.
+
+Save under exceptional circumstances the light gun is always attached
+to the Machine Gun Company for the attack.
+
+The essential role of the light gun is to destroy with direct fire the
+visible machine guns; they are employed separately and not grouped.
+
+The infantry is divided into two classes: Holding troops--and
+attacking or shock troops. Holding troops are those doing routine or
+trench duty; shock troops are picked organizations of young and
+vigorous men and are kept in camps well behind the battle front.
+Holding troops are two weeks in and two weeks out of the trenches.
+
+All specialist groups, _i.e._, Machine Gun Companies, etc., are
+officered, allowing company and battalion commanders to concentrate
+them, if the situation requires.
+
+_They play the normal part in combat if they do not receive special
+instructions._
+
+
+Attack of a Defensive Position.
+
+Unity of command in depth must be preserved everywhere, unless there
+is an imperative reason for doing otherwise.
+
+The front of each regiment should be divided between two or three
+battalions.
+
+_Each battalion commander having to look after a front of from 500 to
+600 yards, can exercise efficient control of his command._
+
+In preparing for an assault, seniors must take steps to organize it
+and make all necessary preparations themselves, and not leave all the
+responsibility with the juniors.
+
+In the assault each unit must know its special task beforehand, and it
+should be rehearsed in rear of the line of trenches. Each commander
+must know the exact time he is to start and must start on time.
+
+The first waves of men are placed at 4 or 5 pace interval. Chief of
+section can command only a front of 80 to 100 paces and it is
+necessary to form the section in two (2) waves. The first containing
+the grenadiers and automatic riflemen, the latter in the center. The
+second wave contains the riflemen and rifle grenadiers, the latter in
+the center.
+
+If the terrain is cut up by woods, villages, etc., the proportion of
+grenadiers may be increased by taking them from the sections in
+support and the automatic riflemen sent back to the second wave.
+
+If the distance to cross exceeds 300 or 400 yards, the number of
+automatic riflemen should be increased.
+
+_Two or three sections are usually placed abreast on the company
+front, which thus covers two to three hundred yards._
+
+The support sections follow the leading sections of their company at
+about 50 yards, marching in two lines, if possible in two lines of
+squad columns at 20 yard intervals.
+
+The first wave of the support is usually formed of the one-half
+section of specialists.
+
+The echeloning of the specialists in front is also the most favorable
+formation to progress by rushes in a terrain cut up by shell holes.
+
+The chief of section is between the two (2) waves of his section.
+
+The captain is usually in front of the support sections.
+
+The support sections are closely followed by a powerful line of
+machine guns, which are thrown into the fight when needed to reenforce
+the leading units.
+
+"Trench Cleaners" usually march immediately after the leading sections
+and may be taken from the support sections. They are armed with
+pistols, knives and hand grenades.
+
+The captain can use his section complete, or take out the specialists
+and use them for a particular purpose.
+
+The specialists carry only the weapons of their specialty and have
+their loads lightened. The ordinary riflemen carry the usual packs and
+equipment.
+
+Officers no longer lead the assault, but direct it. They are equipped
+with the rifle and bayonet, the same as the enlisted man.
+
+Each unit of the first wave of the attack is given a definite
+objective. Different waves must not break upon the first wave.
+
+Fire is opened by the assaulting troops only at short ranges, the
+advance being protected by a curtain of artillery fire. The advancing
+line makes use of shell holes and all other available cover.
+
+When the first section reaches its objective it is joined by the half
+section of riflemen; it immediately organizes the captured ground.
+
+
+Attacking From Trenches.--The commanders of brigades and battalions,
+with the commander of the artillery detailed to support them, study on
+the ground the artillery plan so far as it affects them. Immediately
+after the advance of the infantry begins, the artillery supporting it
+commences an intense bombardment with the object of forcing the enemy
+to take cover. At the moment laid down in the table of artillery fire
+the barrage lifts clear of the trench and the infantry rush in and
+capture it. The infantry must be taught that their success depends
+upon their getting within 75 yards of the barrage before it lifts, in
+order that they may reach the trenches before the enemy can man them.
+The secret of a successful assault is exact synchronization of the
+movements of the infantry with those of the barrage.
+
+The pace of a barrage depends, to a certain extent, on the pace of the
+infantry, which varies with the condition of the ground, the length of
+the advance, the number of enemy trenches to be crossed, etc. It may
+be from 15 to 75 yards per minute. The pace of the barrage should be
+quicker at first, and should gradually slow down as the men become
+exhausted, in order to give them time to get close to the barrage and
+pull themselves together for the final rush.
+
+In an attack each unit must have sufficient driving power in itself to
+carry it through to its objective and enable it to hold its ground
+when it gets there. When a number of trenches have to be carried,
+considerable depth will be required, and the frontage must be reduced.
+A brigade usually has a front in attack of 250 to 350 yards, but this
+may be increased to 1,000 or 1,200 yards.
+
+A battalion should have a front of 250 to 350 yards. The battalion
+must be organized in depth in a series of waves. Two companies are
+usually put abreast in the first line and the others in the second
+line. Each company in both lines attacks in column of platoons at
+about 50 yards' distance, with intervals of three to five paces
+between men, so there would be eight lines of waves, of two platoons
+each. The 8th and 16th platoons, the two in rear forming the eighth
+wave, are usually not employed in the attack, but are left behind as a
+nucleus to form on in case of heavy casualties.
+
+The front line must not be less than 200 yards from the enemy's front
+line.
+
+The leading two or three waves are likely to meet machine gun fire,
+and generally move in extended order. Not more than two waves can be
+accommodated in one trench. Subsequent waves will move in line or in
+line of section columns in single file. Russian saps must be run out
+as far as possible across "No Man's Land" to be opened up immediately
+after the assault, as approach trenches. Ladders or steps are
+necessary to assist the leading waves in leaving the trenches, as they
+must move in lines. Provision must be made for bridges over the first
+line trenches for the rear waves. In the original assault line will be
+more suitable for both leading and rear waves. In later stages it is
+better for the rear waves to move in small and handy columns. In the
+original assault the distance between waves may be 75 to 100 yards; in
+later stages they may follow each other at 50 yards.
+
+In the original assault, zero, or the time for the assault to begin,
+may be fixed for the moment at which our barrage lifts from the enemy
+front trench, the infantry timing their advance so as to be close
+under our barrage before it lifts. In the later stages zero must be
+the moment at which our barrage commences, and this commencement will
+be the signal for the infantry to leave their trenches. Each wave is
+assigned its own objective. All watches must be synchronized in order
+that all units may start off at the appointed time.
+
+The first wave is composed of bombers and rifle grenade men, and
+attacks the enemy's first line of trenches. It must go straight
+through to its objective, following the artillery barrage as closely
+as possible. The second and third waves, composed of riflemen with
+bayonets and Lewis guns, re-enforce the first wave after the latter
+has occupied the enemy's first line trench, and attack the second line
+trench. The fourth wave takes up tools, ammunition and sand bags and
+assists in consolidating the line. The fifth wave is a mopping-up
+party to clear the enemy's dugouts. The sixth wave comprises
+battalion headquarters and has two Lewis guns, kept for a special
+purpose. The seventh and eighth waves, if used, seize and consolidate
+the enemy's third line trench.
+
+Bombing squads (1 non-commissioned officer and 8 men) are on the flank
+of each attacking wave. Battalion bombers are assigned a special task.
+
+All movements must be over the top of the ground. The pace throughout
+should be a steady walk, except for the last 30 or 40 yards, when the
+line should break into a steady double time, finishing up the last 10
+yards with a rush.
+
+Barrage is continued 20 or 30 minutes after the objective has been
+reached.
+
+Mopping parties must be trained with great care under selected
+officers. They should always wear a distinguishing mark. They must at
+once dispose of any occupants who may have emerged from their dugouts,
+and picket the dugout entrances.
+
+The ultimate unit in the assault is the platoon. It must be organized
+and trained as a self-contained unit, capable of producing the
+required proportion of riflemen, bombers, rifle bombers, Lewis
+gunners, and carriers, all trained to work in combination.
+
+Assaulting troops should have twelve hours of daylight in the trenches
+before the assault begins, to enable them to get acquainted with the
+ground and get some rest. All ranks must be given a hot meal,
+including hot tea or coffee, before the assault.
+
+Take every precaution to prevent the enemy from realizing that the
+assault is about to take place. Bayonets must not be allowed to show.
+No increase in rate of artillery fire. No unusual movements must be
+made in the trenches, and there must be no indication of the impending
+assault until the barrage is dropped.
+
+When the trench has been taken, it should be consolidated at once to
+prevent counterattack. To protect this consolidation, throw out an
+outpost line, the posts consisting of one non-commissioned officer and
+6 riflemen with a Lewis gun, about 150 to 200 yards apart and 100 to
+300 yards beyond the line. These posts should be established in
+shellholes, which are to be converted into fire trenches, protected by
+wire entanglements, as soon as possible.
+
+Approach trenches toward the enemy should be blockaded and hand and
+rifle grenadiers posted to guard them. The main captured trench should
+be converted at once into a fire trench facing the enemy. If it is
+badly knocked to pieces, a new trench may be constructed 40 or 50
+yards in front of the captured line. The commander must reorganize in
+depth to provide supports and reserves for counterattacks. Situation
+reports should be sent back frequently. Rough sketches are better than
+messages.
+
+Tanks follow infantry as closely as possible to deal with strong
+points. They are employed in sections of four.
+
+Machine guns may be used to provide covering fire for attacking
+infantry, cover its withdrawal if the attack fails, fill gaps in the
+assaulting lines, assist in the consolidation of positions and repel
+counterattacks.
+
+Lewis guns are of great value in knocking out hostile machine guns.
+They usually move on the flanks of the second wave of assault. Later
+they are used to back up patrols and to hold the outpost line while
+the garrison line is being consolidated.
+
+As soon as consolidation begins, wire entanglements should be
+constructed. Every effort should be made to secure the objective
+against recapture. Any men available should be used to continue the
+offensive.
+
+All commanders down to and including company commanders must keep some
+portion of their command as a reserve. The company commander needs his
+reserve to work around points which are holding against the leading
+lines, to protect his flanks in case the companies on his right and
+left are delayed in their advance and to exploit his success and gain
+ground to the front. He must keep it well in hand behind the company.
+
+Battalion reserves must start with the assaulting column and get
+across "No Man's Land" as soon as possible; they must not get out of
+hand. Such a reserve is usually checked in the vicinity of the enemy's
+front line trench, where it can be thrown in to assist the advance or
+extend a flank as needed.
+
+The brigade reserve is kept well in hand just clear of the friendly
+front line and support trenches. Reserves of companies and battalions
+must start moving over the top of the ground with the rest of the
+assaulting troops.
+
+
+Defense Of Trenches.--The latest methods consist in constructing,
+supporting and strong points at the most favorable points to be held,
+such as villages, woods, etc. These are separated by intervals not too
+great for mutual support. They are of such resisting power that they
+must be taken before the attack can progress. In the intervals between
+them fire and communicating trenches are constructed, but these are
+only held lightly. Dummy trenches may be placed in these intervals.
+Lines of the various works are so traced that they bring enfilading
+fire on troops attacking adjacent positions. The lines need not be
+continuously occupied, but the obstacles extend in an unbroken line
+along the whole front. Wire entanglements are set in front of
+important positions in belts 20 feet wide, in two or three rows, each
+20 yards apart.
+
+Each supporting point usually is occupied by a battalion, and consists
+of a series of trenches formed into strong points, each held by a
+garrison of one or more platoons or a company. The supporting points
+are from 600 to 800 yards in depth and have a front of 600 to 1,000
+yards. The first line of strong points is occupied by one or two
+companies in firing and cover trenches, while the remainder of the
+battalion occupies the support and reserve trenches. Bomb-proofs are
+built along the cover trenches and are connected with the firing
+trenches. Approach trenches are protected on both flanks by wire
+entanglements. Strong points in support and reserve trenches are
+prepared for an all-around defense and divided into two or more
+separate strong points by wire entanglements.
+
+A body of infantry attacked is to oppose to the assailant its high
+powered weapons, machine guns, automatic rifles, rifle grenades and
+hand grenades and to reserve for the counter attack the grenadiers and
+riflemen. There is always one line upon which the resistance must be
+made with the greatest energy; for its defense the following methods
+have been found successful. Machine guns should be placed where they
+can secure the best flanking fire, and every one put out of action
+should immediately be replaced by an automatic rifle. If machine gun
+barrage fire is to play its role successfully at the moment of
+assault, the guns must survive the bombardment. Their protection is
+secured by placing them under shelter during the bombardment and
+making their emplacements as nearly invisible as possible. They should
+be echeloned in depth as far as practicable. They are generally placed
+in re-entrants of the firing trenches and cover the intervals between
+the adjoining supporting and strong points. Where the ground will
+permit they are often placed in concealed positions 20 to 30 yards in
+front of the trenches, to break up attacks made by hostile infantry.
+Not too many should be placed in the front line, and they should be
+echeloned in depth so as to confuse their disposition. The value of
+machine guns depends on the possibility of using them suddenly for
+brief periods, and in using them as long as they are effective.
+Machine guns disposed for flanking fire must be well covered by
+grenadiers; this is also true of automatic rifles.
+
+Automatic rifles, rifle grenades and hand grenades are used to
+constitute a barrage to keep back the enemy. The entire front should
+be defended by a barrage of hand grenades, while the barrage of
+automatic rifles and rifle grenades is superposed farther to the
+front, up to 400 yards.
+
+All riflemen and those grenadiers not employed in forming barrages are
+reserved to make a counterattack.
+
+Companies on the second line operate on similar principles; machine
+guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades are arranged so as to cover
+every portion of the first line that might be invaded. After a short
+preparation by fire from these, the grenadiers and riflemen make the
+counterattack.
+
+The captains in charge of the two lines are responsible for the
+arrangement of the machine guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades,
+the distribution of barrages and the distribution of groups for the
+counterattack. The real strength of the defense consists, not in
+holding the fire and cover trenches, nor even the support trenches,
+but in holding the supporting and strong points until the
+counterattack can be launched.
+
+
+Liaison.--The question of liaison in battle is of the utmost
+importance, and complete co-ordination of the different arms is
+absolutely necessary. Each battalion sends an officer or
+non-commissioned officer and a cyclist to the colonel, and each
+colonel sends a soldier to the battalion commander.
+
+The principal means of communication are the telephone, telegraph,
+wireless, aeroplane, mounted messengers, autos and motorcycles; and at
+the front runners, visual signals, rockets and carrier pigeons.
+
+Each battalion commander is connected by telephone with each company
+commander, with the artillery observers, with the artillery commander,
+with his own colonel and with the adjacent battalions on either side.
+
+The signallers of assaulting companies move with the company
+commander. All signallers should be given a special training in
+repeating a message several times to a known back station which may
+not be able to reply forward.
+
+At the commencement of the assault the pigeons and pigeon carriers
+must be kept back at battalion headquarters, and sent forward as soon
+as the position has been gained.
+
+Runners can be relied upon when all other means fail. They must be
+trained with their companies. Runners should be lightly equipped and
+wear a distinctive mark. They must be familiar with all the principal
+routes to all the principal centers within their battalion sector. The
+quicker they go the safer they are. Company and platoon runners must
+go forward with their respective commanders. Messages to be carried
+long distances will be relayed. Never send a verbal message by a
+runner; ignore any received; all messages must be written.
+
+Company and battalion commanders must be prepared to assist artillery
+liaison officers in getting their messages back. Liaison officers must
+be exchanged by all the assaulting battalions with the battalion on
+either flank.
+
+
+Trench Orders.--(Battalion): Trenches are usually divided into a
+certain number of bays; the number of men to defend these bays depends
+upon the length of trench allotted to each company. Each section is
+detailed to guard a certain number of bays.
+
+Non-commissioned officers and men must always wear their equipment by
+day and night. Every company will "Stand To" arms daily one-half hour
+before dusk and one-half hour before dawn, and will remain until
+dismissed by the company commander.
+
+The enemy's trenches are so close that it is very important for the
+men to have their rifle sights always at battle sight, so that there
+will be no necessity to alter their sights in case of alarm. By night
+all bayonets are to be fixed and half of the men on duty in the
+trenches are to be sitting on the firing platform with their rifles by
+their side. In case of attack, especially at night, it should be
+impressed upon the men that they fire low.
+
+Section commanders are responsible that the men under their command
+have sufficient standing room for the purpose of firing over the
+parapet. They must have a clear field of fire, and not only be able to
+see the enemy trenches but the ground in the immediate vicinity of
+their trench. When making new trenches parapets should be at least
+five feet thick at the top in order to be bullet proof.
+
+Repairs or alterations of the parapet should be reported at once by
+the section commander to the platoon commander, who will report it to
+superior authority. Repairing of trenches, fatigue, etc., will be
+carried on either by day or night according to company arrangement.
+Certain hours will be allotted for these tasks and no man is to be
+employed upon any kind of work out of these hours. No man should leave
+his post in the trenches at any time without the permission of the
+non-commissioned officer in charge of that post. At night there should
+be at least one sentry post to each ten yards of parapet. At night,
+double sentries should be posted if possible, and no sentry should be
+kept on duty for longer than an hour at a time. The arrangement should
+be such that when one sentry is doing his last half hour, his comrade
+will be doing his first half hour.
+
+Sentries at night should always have their rifles resting on the
+parapet, ready to fire at a moment's notice. As few sentries as
+possible should be posted by day, so as to give as much rest as
+possible to the remainder of the men.
+
+By day any existing loop-holes may be used by a sentry for observation
+purposes, but this must be strictly prohibited at night, when the
+sentry must look over the parapet. If a sentry is continually fired
+at, the section commander will post him in another position, but not
+too far from his original position. There is no excuse for a man going
+to sleep on sentry duty; if he is sick he should report the fact to
+the non-commissioned officer, who will report to superior authority.
+
+An armed party of the enemy approaching the trench under a flag of
+truce should be halted at a distance, ordered to lay down their arms,
+and the matter at once reported to the company commander. If the party
+fails to halt when ordered to do so, or does not convey a flag of
+truce, they should be fired upon. An unarmed party should be halted in
+the same way. It is not necessary to challenge at night; open fire at
+once. This is modified only by special instructions.
+
+Men especially picked for listening patrols and sharp-shooters will be
+given special privileges. All loud talking must be checked at night by
+officers and non-commissioned officers. All working parties must wear
+their equipment and carry their rifles. All picks and shovels will be
+returned after use to the company store room. Ration parties and
+parties carrying materials for repairs, etc., need not wear their
+equipment or carry rifles; they should be accompanied by a fully armed
+non-commissioned officer as an escort. Not more than 20 men are to be
+away from the company at one time; one non-commissioned officer and
+four men per platoon.
+
+Rifles must be kept clean and in good condition while in the trenches.
+They will be cleaned every morning during an hour appointed by the
+company commander for the purpose. Platoon commanders will be
+responsible that section commanders superintend this work. All rifles
+except those used by sentries are to be kept in racks during the day.
+
+Trenches must be kept in sanitary condition. Platoon commanders will
+be responsible for the latrines in their sections of the trenches. All
+water for drinking and cooking is to be taken from a water cart or
+tank provided for this purpose.
+
+Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a place designated by the
+commanding officer. No soldier will be buried nearer than 300 yards
+from the trenches.
+
+In every platoon a non-commissioned officer will be detailed for duty
+by day; he will do no night duty. He will post the day sentries and
+see that they are on the alert and carry out their orders correctly.
+He will be responsible for the cleanliness of his lines and will
+frequently visit the latrines. He will see that all loose ammunition
+is collected.
+
+The platoon commander will always send a non-commissioned officer to
+draw rations and he will be responsible for their delivery.
+
+The passing along of messages by word of mouth will not be used. All
+messages should be written.
+
+Special instructions will be issued as to precautions against gas.
+
+
+Selection of Site.
+
+(a) Fire trench should be selected with due regard to tactical
+requirements and the economy of men.
+
+(b) Every fire trench should have a good field of fire, at least 250
+yards.
+
+(c) The trenches should have the best possible cover.
+
+(d) The forward position on a slope for the first line has the best
+advantage. The support trench should be on the reverse slope from 100
+to 600 yards in rear of the first line to prevent direct observation
+and to be practically free from artillery fire. The reserve trench is
+usually from 1/2 to 1 mile in rear of the first line. Remember that
+the first line, the support line, and the reserve line are all fire
+trenches. Do not put them on a crest.
+
+(e) The communicating trenches (boyaux) should be zigzagged, wide and
+deep, and should follow the low ground. The longest straight trench
+should not exceed thirty paces. The angle made by each turn should be
+less than 140 degrees.
+
+(f) The fire trenches should have salients and re-entrants so as to
+flank the wire entanglements. The bays are usually 27 feet long with 9
+feet of traverse.
+
+(g) There are two problems in the siting of trenches, one for those to
+be constructed under fire and another for those that will be
+constructed without any danger from fire. Trenches built under fire
+are usually made by connecting up individual shelters made by the
+front line when forced to halt. Trenches built under quiet conditions
+can be laid out according to the best possible plan.
+
+
+Trench Construction.
+
+Several kinds of difficulties face the trench digger: Sand, clay,
+water and bullets. In order to overcome them he must be familiar with
+the general arrangement of a trench, the principles which govern its
+construction and the standard trench as it has been worked out in the
+present war at the cost of thousands of lives.
+
+
+General Arrangement.--A position is a combination of trenches,
+consisting of: The fire trench, or first line, nearest the enemy; the
+cover trench, just behind the first line, where all but sentinels of
+the fire trench garrison are held in dugouts or shelters; the support
+trench, from 150 to 200 yards in rear of the cover trench, and the
+reserve, from 800 to 1,200 yards still further to the rear.
+
+The support trench is placed far enough from the first line to prevent
+the enemy from shelling both trenches at once. By a concentration of
+artillery fire and a determined advance of the hostile infantry the
+first line may be captured. The support trench must be so organized
+that it will then act as a line of resistance upon which the enemy's
+advance will break. Lieutenant Colonel Azan of the French army says:
+"As long as the support trenches are strongly held, the position is
+not in the hands of the enemy."
+
+[Illustration: Plate #16]
+
+The reserve is usually a _strong point_, so organized that it can
+maintain independent resistance for several days if necessary, should
+the enemy obtain control of adjacent areas.
+
+Where possible trenches should be on reverse slopes, with the
+exception of the first line; but usually the outline of a trench is
+determined in actual combat, or is a part of hostile trench converted.
+Under these circumstances it cannot be arranged according to tactical
+ideals.
+
+Artillery and the automatic gun are the determining factors in trench
+warfare to-day. The effect of artillery fire must be limited in its
+area as far as possible, and trenches are, therefore, cut by
+_traverses_, which are square blocks of earth not less than nine feet
+square, left every 27 feet along the trench. They should overlap the
+width of the trench by at least one yard, thereby limiting the effect
+of shell burst to a single _bay_, the 27-foot length of firing trench
+between two traverses. Sharp angles have the same effect as traverses,
+but angles of more than 120 degrees cannot be utilized in this way.
+
+The sides of the trench are kept as nearly perpendicular as possible,
+to give the maximum protection from shell burst and the fall of high
+angle projectiles. The _parados_, the bank of earth to the rear of the
+trench, has been developed during the war to give protection from
+flying fragments of shells exploding to the rear, and to prevent the
+figure of a sentinel from being outlined through a loop-hole against
+the sky. The _berm_, a ledge or shelf left between the side of the
+trench and the beginning of the parados, has come into general use in
+order to take the weight of the parados off the earth at the immediate
+edge of the trench, and so prevent the reverse slope from caving in
+easily under bombardment or heavy rain.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #16A]
+
+Automatic guns have made it necessary to break the line of the trench
+at every opportunity, in order to secure a flanking fire for these
+arms. Auto-rifles and machine guns have tremendous effectiveness only
+in depth, and flanking fire gives them their greatest opportunity.
+
+
+Trench Construction.--The methods of building trenches are the same
+whether the work is carried on under fire or not. In an attack, upon
+reaching the limit of advance, the men immediately dig themselves in,
+and later connect these individual holes to make a continuous line of
+trench.
+
+Most of the digging must be done at night, and must be organized to
+obtain the most work with the least confusion. There are three ways of
+increasing the efficiency of the men. In the first of these, squad
+shifts, the squad leader divides his men into reliefs and gives each
+man a limited period of intensive work. Reliefs may be made by squads
+or by individuals. The second way of increasing efficiency is to
+induce competition among the man and squads, thus making the work a
+game in which each soldier's interest will be aroused in the effort to
+do better than the others. The third method is to assign a fixed
+amount of work to each man. An average task, which all ought to
+accomplish in a given time, is found by experience, and those who
+finish before their time is up are relieved from further work during
+that shift, and allowed to return to their shelters.
+
+Continual care must be used to check up the tools on hand, as the men
+are prone to leave them where they were working rather than carry them
+back and forth to work. Each unit must guard its property from
+appropriation by neighbors on its flanks.
+
+
+System of Laying Out Trenches.--The trace of the trench is first
+staked out, particularly at traverses and corners when the work is to
+be done at night. Measurements should be exact, and the men should be
+required to line the limits of each trench so as not to exceed them
+in digging. All sod should be taken up carefully and used on the
+parapet for concealment or on the berm to make a square back wall for
+the dirt of the parapet. If possible this should be done with the
+parados wall, so as to make it as inconspicuous as possible from the
+front.
+
+Men should begin to dig at the center of the trench and throw the dirt
+as far out on the sides as possible, so that as they go deeper the
+earth can be thrown just over the berm. The slope of the sides will be
+kept steep and the men prevented from widening the trench as they dig.
+In sandy soil the sides of the trench should be allowed to reach their
+angle of repose (which is wider at the top than required), then the
+trench walls supported with _revettments_ to the proper width, which
+are filled in behind with sand. Always dig to full depth before
+beginning to revet, as it is impossible to dig deeper afterwards
+without loosening the revetting.
+
+
+Revettments.--Every trench at points needs support, and this
+_revetting_ may be done with any of the following materials: Sod;
+corduroy of logs laid lengthwise; sand bags (size 20 in. x 10 in. x 5
+in.); galvanized iron; chicken wire and cloth made in a frame about
+six feet long; _hurdles_, wicker mats made by driving three-inch
+stakes into the ground, leaving uprights as high above the ground as
+the depth of the trench, then weaving withes and slender saplings
+between the uprights; expanded metal; _gabions_, cylindrical baskets
+made like hurdles except that the stakes are driven in a circle;
+_fascines_, bundles of faggots about 10 inches in diameter by 9 feet
+long. The faggots are laid together on a horse or between stakes
+driven in the ground, then "choked," or bound tightly together, by a
+rope 3 feet 8 inches long with loops at each end, tightened with two
+stiff levers. The bundle is then bound with wire at intervals of two
+feet. The circumference of a fascine should be 25 inches.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #17]
+
+Capt. Powell of the C.E.F. found during 18 months' service in the
+trenches, that a separate construction for the bottom and firing step
+from that of the parapet made repair much simpler when the trench was
+damaged by shell fire. The upper part of the trench usually suffers
+most, while the bottom section, if unattached, often remains intact
+and the drainage system needs only to be cleared out. If the portion
+above the firing step is one piece with that below, however, the whole
+trench has to be reconstructed.
+
+There is nothing more important than the supports used to keep
+revetting in place. With sods, sand bags, concrete and gabions, a
+proper arrangement in the first place will make other support
+unnecessary.
+
+
+Sod should be placed carefully, with a slope of not more than one
+inch on four, with the vegetation uppermost. This type is least
+affected by rain.
+
+
+Sand Bags should be used like brickwork, laid in alternate headers
+(binders) and stretchers. Their use should be confined as far as
+possible to emergency and repair work, because after a few weeks the
+bags rot and cannot be moved about. If the trench wall has been
+demolished by artillery fire, the particles of cloth make digging out
+the bottom of the trench a very difficult matter.
+
+
+Concrete Work has been used extensively by the Germans, but the
+chips fly like bullets under shell explosion, and the concrete cracks
+and disintegrates in severe weather. It is used in the bottom of
+trenches for drainage and for the firing step.
+
+
+Gabions may be set into the wall of the trench and filled with
+earth, or used at corners to prevent the wearing down of the edge,
+which reduces the protective effect of the trench. Set in at a slight
+angle they will hold the side without further re-enforcement.
+
+With the other forms of revetting some secondary support is required.
+This is usually furnished by sinking stakes into the bottom of the
+trench and securing their upper ends to a "dead man"--a stake or log
+sunk in the ground more than three feet away. The tendency is to sink
+the dead men too near to the trench, and to attach too many wires to
+one of them. It is important to sink the stakes at least one foot
+below the bottom of the trench. By digging holes for them instead of
+driving them in directly, the sides of the trench need not be
+disturbed by the concussion of driving the stakes. This is especially
+important in sandy soils. Stakes should be placed about two feet
+apart. Dead men should be buried deeply enough to prevent cutting by
+shell explosions.
+
+
+Trench Armament.--A few machine guns are set in concealed
+emplacements along the trench to cover important salients. The
+automatic rifle is used over the parapet. Besides these there is the
+rifle grenade and trench mortar. The rifle grenade has a simple
+emplacement. After securing the proper elevation, the butt of the
+rifle is placed between posts or blocks of wood and the muzzle rested
+against a log on the wall of the trench. A trench mortar emplacement
+is dug in the rear wall of the trench, or a shell hole is utilized,
+care being taken to conceal it from aerial observation.
+
+
+Loopholes.--Loopholes are still much in use for observation, but
+they are employed less and less for firing, as they are difficult to
+conceal from the enemy and almost useless when the enemy is close.
+They should cut the parapet diagonally, not directly to the front, and
+should be concealed by vegetation and by a curtain over the opening
+when they are not in use. Sheet steel plates with small peep holes are
+used on the parapet. They are set up with a slope to the rear to
+deflect bullets.
+
+
+Trench Bottoms.--In clay or hard soil special arrangements must be
+made for drainage. Where possible the trench should have a convex
+surface and should be smooth. A rough bottom means delay in reliefs,
+and possible injuries. Where trenches are used for long periods
+board walks should be constructed. Under these drains or sink holes
+can be placed to collect water. A sink hole may be constructed by
+digging a pit filled with small stones, or a barrel may be sunk into
+the ground and filled with stone. Where there is not sufficient slope
+to carry off the water, or at the lowest point of a drainage system, a
+water hole should be dug in front of the trench large enough to handle
+the drainage water.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #18]
+
+Communication Trench (or Boyau).--Running to the rear and joining
+the different parallel resistance trenches are communication trenches
+or boyaux. These are for transportation of men and material as well as
+for communication. Communication trenches should be made wide enough
+to allow travel for men with loads, should be at least seven feet deep
+and as smooth as possible on the bottom. Rough places will delay
+traffic. They are dug with turns every 20 or 30 yards to prevent their
+being swept by gun fire. When boyaux are built by night sharp zig-zag
+corners should be used, or the angles will not be acute and protection
+will be lost. During daylight when the directions can be seen, the
+construction may be a serpentine curve, with no stretch of more than
+30 yards visible from one point.
+
+Boyaux are sometimes used for lateral defence and often emplacements
+for automatic guns are arranged to cover stretches of them. Bombing
+stations are placed near by to protect the guns and to clear the boyau
+of the enemy. At these points the boyau is left straight for a short
+distance in front. Where provision is made for lateral or frontal
+defence by rifle fire, firing steps are constructed. If this is
+inconvenient for movement along the boyau, individual emplacements
+must be made in the side wall for firing. Sentry posts are dug at
+right angles to the boyau.
+
+Arrangements for passage of men moving in opposite directions may be
+made by extending short spurs at the corners, enlarging the boyau at
+the bends, digging niches or passing points here and there, or
+constructing island traverses with the boyau running around on each
+side.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #19]
+
+Every boyau should be marked where it meets a trench with a sign
+indicating the place and trench. Without this messengers, reliefs and
+re-enforcements may easily be lost in the maze of trenches.
+
+
+Latrines should be run out about 20 feet from boyaux at points
+directly in rear of lateral trenches. If possible they should be
+placed so that men cannot enter them without passing near the platoon
+leaders. This will prevent men from leaving the front line, under the
+pretense of going to latrines, during bombardments or mining
+operations. The trench leading to a latrine should be constructed like
+a boyau, and the pit should be close to the side nearest the enemy, to
+give the best possible protection from shell fire. There are three
+types of trench latrines: Deep boxes which are covered and have rough
+seats; short straddle trenches or trenches equipped with a single
+horizontal bar, and portable cans, used where the ground or the
+limited space make it impossible to dig pits. These cans should be
+emptied daily into holes behind the trenches, which are covered after
+the cans are emptied into them.
+
+Urinals should be separate from the latrines. They may be either holes
+about three feet deep filled with stone, troughs with a covered pit at
+the end, or portable cans.
+
+
+Shelters. For the protection of men not actually on duty three forms
+of shelters are used. The _splinter-proof_ is a form of light shelter
+whose covering affords protection only against splinters. These are
+usually on the reserve line. About 12 inches to 20 inches of earth
+over a roof of logs or planks will afford protection from splinters
+and shrapnel. Curved sheets of iron may also be used. The _deep
+shelter_ or _bomb-proof_ is a chamber constructed by digging from the
+surface and constructing a roof. To protect against eight-inch
+shells the top of the chamber should be twenty feet below the surface.
+Heavy beams or sections of railroad iron are laid across the roof.
+Above them is a layer of earth several feet thick; then another layer
+of timber extending to undisturbed ground on the sides with concrete,
+crushed stone, metal, etc., above to make a percussion surface for
+exploding projectiles that penetrate the upper layer of earth. This
+layer fills in the rest of the space to the level of the ground.
+
+[Illustration: Plate No. 20.]
+
+Shelters should not exceed six feet in width, but can be of any
+length. This will prevent the crushing in of the roof timber by the
+explosion of a projectile buried in the upper layer of earth. The
+principles of constructing shelters will be considered under
+"Dugouts," as they are similar for the two types.
+
+
+Dugouts are chambers tunnelled into the ground with twenty feet or
+more of undisturbed earth above them. They are used in the cover
+trenches and sometimes in the first line. Enough of them must be built
+to shelter the garrison of each sector, allowing one man per yard of
+front. They must also be built for machine gun and trench mortar
+detachments.
+
+
+Sentries must be stationed in observation posts which command the
+ground in front of each dugout. They must be connected with the
+dugouts by telephone or speaking tube.
+
+
+Position.--Dugouts must always be on the side of the trench toward
+the enemy. This prevents flying shells from falling into the
+entrances. They should connect with lateral trenches, not with boyaux,
+as men at the entrance obstruct traffic through the boyaux.
+
+
+Entrances and exits must be well concealed, with not less than five
+feet of head cover. This should be provided with a bursting layer. All
+dugouts must have at least two openings, one on the opposite side of
+the traverse or angle from the other. It is well to have an exit
+behind the parados leading to a surprise position for a machine gun
+and bombers. All openings must have a sill 6 inches to 8 inches high,
+to prevent water from entering the dugout.
+
+
+Galleries leading to dugouts should be built at an incline of 45
+degrees. Their dimensions should be 2 feet 6 inches by 6 feet. Frames
+are of squared timber. The sill and two side posts should be not less
+than 6 inches square, and the frames in the passageways 2 feet 6
+inches by 4 feet 6 inches. They must be placed at right angles to the
+slope of the gallery, with distance pieces between uprights. In
+treacherous soil the frames rest on sills. Steps in the passageway are
+1 foot broad and 1 foot high.
+
+
+Bomb-traps, extensions of the gallery about 3 feet long, should be
+dug beyond the point where the entrance to the dugout chamber leads
+off from the gallery. These will catch bombs thrown in from the
+surface and protect the chamber from the effects of their explosion.
+
+
+Interior. The standard section is 6 feet by 8 feet, to allow for
+bunks on each side. Frames of 6 by 6 timber spaced 2 feet 6 inches
+apart support the sides and roof. Roof planking should be 2 inches
+thick, and the sides should be covered with 1-1/2 inch plank or
+corrugated iron. Two shovels and two picks for emergencies should
+always be kept in each dugout. The construction of the chamber should
+be that of a very strong box, so that it will stand strain, if
+necessary, from within as well as from without.
+
+
+Depots for Supplies must be near the headquarters of the platoon,
+company, battalion and regiment. Shelters may be made with ammunition
+boxes set into the side of the trench. Places should be provided for
+the following: Food, ammunition for rifles and auto-rifles, grenades,
+rockets, tools and other supplies. Places must also be arranged in
+the front line for ammunition, rockets and hand and rifle grenades.
+
+
+Telephones. Communication is established as speedily as possible
+with the various units. In the forward trenches wires do not last long
+under bombardment and fire left open along the side of the trench,
+where quick repairs can be made. All soldiers must be taught to
+respect these wires and to care for them when they are found under
+foot or hanging. Conduits are dug for wires to battalion and
+regimental headquarters, and these are fairly safe from shell fire.
+
+
+Departure Parallel. In preparing for an advance upon the enemy, a
+straight line trench without traverses, and with steps at the end for
+exit to the surface, is built in front of the first line trench. This
+line of departure is generally brought within about 200 yards of the
+hostile line by means of _saps_, short trenches run out from the front
+line to the new parallel. Since this line of departure can be seen by
+the enemy, it is sometimes better to construct steps in the front line
+trench itself, or when possible to build a _Russian sap_. This is a
+tunnel very near the ground, which can be broken through at a moment's
+notice when troops are ready to advance.
+
+
+Machine Gun Emplacements.--Shell-holes with a good field of fire and
+emplacements along boyaux are the best location for machine guns. Few
+guns are placed in the front line, and these only at strong points in
+the line, which command a maximum field of effectiveness. Shell-holes
+may be imitated for machine gun emplacements, but in any case they
+should be connected by underground passage with the trenches. Thus
+when trenches are destroyed by bombardment the machine guns remain
+intact. The field of fire for each machine gun should be carefully
+determined and marked by three stakes, one for the position of the
+gun, the other two for the limits of the field of fire. Using these as
+guides, the gun can be fired correctly at night. During the day it
+is never left in place nor fired from its actual emplacement.
+
+[Illustration: No. 21]
+
+Listening Posts.--These stations are usually carried out to the edge
+of the entanglements nearest the enemy. The listening station must be
+large enough for half a squad, and often has an automatic rifle and
+grenade thrower. There should be not more than two posts for each
+battalion. They are not occupied during the day. They are hard to
+defend and easily captured by a raiding party which cuts the wire to
+one of the flanks and comes in from the rear. The boyau leading to the
+post should be zig-zagged. The post itself should be deep enough for
+good head cover.
+
+
+Wire Entanglements.--The object of the entanglement is not to stop
+completely the advance of the enemy, but to delay him at close range
+under machine gun, auto rifle and rifle fire, and within range of
+grenades and bombs. Entanglements should be concealed as much as
+possible from the enemy's trenches and from aerial observation. If
+possible, they should be placed on a reverse slope or in a dead angle.
+They should be from 50 to 100 yards in front of the trench, so that
+artillery fire directed upon the trench will not be effective on the
+wire. At the same time the wire must not be far enough advanced so
+that the enemy's raiding parties can cut the entanglements.
+
+Wire entanglements are classified as high entanglements, low
+entanglements and loose wire.
+
+
+High Entanglements are strung on metal or wood posts about four feet
+high, both wire and posts being painted for camouflage. The driving of
+posts must be muffled, and metal screw posts are used when near the
+enemy's line. Posts are placed in two parallel lines, two yards apart,
+spaced alternately so that the posts in one line are opposite the
+middle of the interval in the other.
+
+
+Tracing Entanglements is done by a sergeant followed by two stake
+placers, two holders and two drivers, who in turn are followed by men
+attaching wire. Two men carry each roll of wire, and each pair (there
+are twelve pairs in all) strings one wire. A panel between stakes is
+composed of four strands. Each wire should be wrapped around each
+post. The same arrangement of panels should run between the two lines
+of posts. The entanglements are in three lines about 20 yards apart,
+the nearest being 20 yards from the front line trench. The
+entanglement nearest the enemy should be constructed first, so that
+men always work nearest their own trenches. All wire entanglements
+should be at all points commanded by the flanking fire of machine
+guns. High entanglements (known as abatis) may be made by felling
+trees toward the enemy, and similar entanglements made of brushwood
+are useful in emergency.
+
+
+Low Entanglements are formed of pickets two feet high, 2-1/2 inches
+in diameter, wired in all directions. Vegetation renders the
+entanglement invisible from the enemy and from aerial observation.
+This type may also be placed in shallow excavations which are
+concealed from the enemy and partly protected from artillery fire.
+Sharpened stakes, with their points hardened by fire, driven obliquely
+into the ground, may also be used.
+
+
+Loose Wire in the form of loops of small diameter fastened to
+stakes, or wire laid along the ground and attached at the ends, or
+spirals of barbed wire in racks, is used for entanglements. It is
+reported that this form is coming into considerable use, but the
+details have not been published. Such entanglements are much harder to
+locate by aerial observation.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following are a number of criticisms made by Lieut. Henri Poire of
+the French army, detailed as instructor at Plattsburg, upon the system
+of field works constructed by the 17th and 18th Provisional Training
+Regiments. The ground was of loose sand, with some gravel at a depth
+of about six feet.
+
+ 1. Dimensions of trenches as laid out were not followed.
+ (a) Bottom of trenches behind firing steps too narrow.
+ (b) Firing step too deep. It should never be more than 3 feet 4
+ inches below berm of parapet.
+ (c) Parapet much too thin in most cases. It should be at least
+ three feet thick.
+ (d) Communication trenches (boyaux) generally too narrow.
+ (e) Islands in communication trenches should never be less than
+ 10 x 12 yards--otherwise one shell will demolish the entire
+ passageway.
+
+ 2. Revettment work not well anchored. In some cases too many wires
+from supports fastened to one dead man. Another fault is that dead
+men were not buried deeply enough in the ground, nor far enough back
+from the trench. In one case a dead man (a stake) supported all four
+sides of an island in a communication trench. The destruction of this
+post would have completely blocked every passage around the island.
+Furthermore, dead men rot quickly and tend to break off. It is
+necessary, therefore, to have a number of them, each holding only a
+portion of the weight. All projecting branches and irregularities
+along a trench should be removed by occupying troops.
+
+ 3. Too many loop-holes. Except for snipers, riflemen and automatic
+riflemen fire over the parapet.
+
+ 4. Machine gun loop-holes not wide enough. They should not be less
+than 36 inches wide. There must be vegetation planted in front and a
+curtain hung over the loop-holes to prevent detection. The growing
+plants in front will be easily swept away at the first discharge.
+
+ 5. Remember never to imitate shell-holes until after a real
+bombardment by the enemy.
+
+ 6. The dugouts made were never deep enough and afforded no
+protection. In fact it would be far better to have none than to be
+caught inside when a shell exploded in a shallow one, because the
+confinement of the explosion would intensify the effect.
+
+ 7. Shelters were all too wide. Six feet is the maximum.
+ The platoon headquarters dugout should be of the same width as the
+trench, not over three feet, but as long as necessary. Company
+headquarters is six feet wide and of whatever depth required.
+
+ 8. In digging, not enough care was used to conceal the fresh earth
+from the enemy. Make false emplacements to utilize this dirt; also dig
+dummy trenches about one foot deep, leaving the sides sharp so that
+they will show clearly on aerial photographs.
+
+ 9. In using plants as camouflage, distinct care must be exercised
+not to put growing plants too freely nor to place them where they
+never existed. The actual ground conditions must be copied.
+
+ 10. Some latrines were not arranged with the stools close beneath
+the wall nearest the enemy. This caused the loss of protection, which
+it is imperative to consider, as many casualties occur here.
+
+ 11. Too many listening posts. They are easily captured by hostile
+fighting patrols. There should never be more than two listening posts
+to a battalion.
+
+ 12. The observation stations in many instances had no good field of
+fire or were outlined against the sky on the crest of some rise. The
+site for an observation post should always be placed over the crest
+and have a good field of fire for use in case of attack.
+
+
+Occupation.
+
+I. Relief in the Trenches.
+
+
+ A. THE TWO MAIN CLASSES OF RELIEF:
+ 1. General Relief. Applied to the relief of a whole position
+ manned by a division or more. Executed when large units are
+ going to "full rest" in the rear or being removed from one
+ part of the front to another. Executed in the same way as
+ interior relief; i.e., by successive relief of the
+ battalions involved.
+ 2. Interior Relief. Applied to the relief of one sector or
+ portion of a sector manned by a brigade or less.
+
+ B. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF RELIEF:
+
+ 1. Interior relief is executed about once every six days; more
+ frequently when the stay in the trenches is particularly
+ arduous, less frequently when it is unusually comfortable.
+ 2. The battalion is the relieving unit.
+ 3. It is advisable to arrange the relief between units which
+ have friendly relations to one another; e.g., battalions of
+ the same regiment; and, so far as possible, to assign each
+ unit to the same trenches on each relief. This promotes
+ continuity of effort.
+ 4. Relief is executed at night; the hour must be varied; secrecy
+ is imperative.
+ 5. Prompt execution is essential, to prevent fatigue of the
+ troops and congestion of the boyaux.
+
+ C. THE MECHANISM OF RELIEF:
+
+ 1. Reconnaissance, 24 hours in advance, by the captain of each
+ relieving company, accompanied by his platoon leaders and
+ non-commissioned officers. He ascertains:
+ (1) The plan of occupation; i.e., the dispositions and
+ duties of the unit to be relieved.
+ (2) The shelter accommodations.
+ (3) Work being done and proposed.
+ (4) Condition of the wire and other defences.
+ (5) The available water supply.
+ (6) Artillery support.
+ (7) Communications.
+ (8) The location, amount and condition of stores.
+ (9) Danger points.
+ (10) All available information of the enemy; his habits,
+ location of his snipers, what work he is doing.
+ (11) The ways and means of liaison, both lateral and from
+ front to rear.
+ To the success of this reconnaissance, the closest
+ co-operation between all officers of the companies
+ relieving and relieved, is indispensable.
+
+ 2. The march from billets to the trenches:
+ (a) Transportation, by auto-trucks and wagons, is utilized
+ to a point as near the lines as possible, to carry the
+ packs of the men, the auto rifles, extra ammunition and
+ other heavy equipment. When the distance is great the
+ men themselves should be carried by auto-truck; this
+ saves time and fatigue. The men will carry rifles loaded
+ and locked, full cartridge belts, gas masks, and all
+ other lighter equipment, with rations for 24 hours at
+ least. Grenades will be secured in the trenches.
+ Electric torches will be carried by company and platoon
+ commanders.
+ (b) The strictest discipline must be maintained. On arrival
+ within sight of the enemy, noise and smoking (or other
+ lights) will be prohibited.
+ (c) Guides, from the company to be relieved, will meet the
+ relieving company promptly at a point definitely agreed
+ upon in advance.
+
+ 3. The march through the boyaux (communicating trenches):
+ (a) Distance; often as much three or four miles.
+ (b) Order of march: company in single file, captain at the
+ head; each platoon leader at the head of his platoon; a
+ non-commissioned officer at rear of each platoon.
+ (c) The column must be kept closed up. Each man must consider
+ himself a connecting file, guiding on the head, and
+ behave accordingly. A guide should accompany the
+ commander of the last platoon.
+ (d) Rate of march: roughly, about 40 yards per minute. It
+ takes 250 men about 20 minutes to pass a given point.
+ (e) Route and right of way:
+ The first line and support trenches will never be used
+ as roads. Separate boyaux should, if possible, be
+ assigned to the troops relieving and relieved. In no
+ case will one company cross the path of another. In case
+ of two columns meeting, one moving forward, the other to
+ the rear, the former has the right of way.
+
+ 4. No man of the unit in occupation will leave his post until
+ he has actually been relieved and has transmitted all orders
+ and information relative to that post.
+
+ 5. Liaison must be established, immediately on arrival, with the
+ units on the flanks and with headquarters in the rear.
+ Captains must make sure that their runners are thoroughly
+ acquainted with the routes of communication.
+
+ 6. As soon as relief is accomplished both captains will report
+ that fact to their respective commanders.
+
+ 7. The relieving commander then inspects his trenches. He
+ ascertains that all his watchers are at their posts and that
+ the balance of his men know their posts and duties and are
+ prepared to assume them quickly.
+
+ 8. The duties of the relieved commander are:
+ (1) To turn over his sector thoroughly policed and in good
+ condition as regards its construction and the new work,
+ if any, in progress.
+ (2) To turn over his supplies in good condition and fully
+ accounted for.
+ (3) After reporting the relief, to march his men back to
+ billets as promptly and secretly as possible, in column
+ of files, platoon leaders in the rear of their platoons,
+ a non-commissioned officer and guide at the head of each.
+ (4) On the evening preceding relief, to send his cooks back
+ to billets so that his men may be provided with a hot
+ meal immediately on arrival.
+
+ D. If an attack occurs during the march through the boyaux, to or
+ from relief, the company affected occupies the nearest
+ defensive position and at once notifies its battalion
+ commander. If an attack occurs during the actual process of
+ relief, the senior officer present takes command.
+
+
+II. The Stay in the Trenches.
+
+
+ A. THE FOUR OBJECTS OF A TRENCH COMMANDER:
+
+ 1. Security of his sector.
+ 2. Protection of his troops.
+ 3. Constant and accurate observation.
+ 4. A continuous offensive.
+
+ B. HIS PLAN OF DEFENSE:
+
+ 1. General principles of defense:
+ (a) Arrangement in depth. The most dependable defense is in
+ prearranged counter attacks. The system of defense must
+ react like a helical spring.
+ (b) Tenacity of defense.
+ 1. Each unit must be prepared to hold its post to the last
+ extremity.
+ 2. Orders to withdraw will never be obeyed unless
+ unmistakably valid.
+ 3. All ground lost must be retaken at once in counter attack
+ by the unit which lost it.
+ (c) Apportionment of responsibility. Each active segment must
+ have a commander responsible for its defense, upkeep and
+ sanitation, and the discipline and instruction of his men.
+
+ 2. Basis:
+ (a) The plan of defense turned over by the preceding commander.
+ This will usually suffice for the first 24 hours after
+ relief.
+ (b) General information of the enemy's lines, dispositions, and
+ intentions, based chiefly on aerial photographs.
+
+ C. ORGANIZATION OF DEFENSE:
+
+ 1. Allocation of front. (The front of an American battalion will
+ average about 1,000 yards.)
+ Diagrams: A. The Regiment. B. The Battalion. C. The Company. D.
+ The Platoon.
+ 2. Distribution of effectives. Determined chiefly by the terrain
+ and by 3.
+ 3. Employment of the several arms:
+ (a) Machine guns. Crew of 8 men per gun. (Furnished by
+ detachments of a machine gun company.) Located by the
+ infantry commander, in concealed emplacements behind the
+ first line, to deliver successive barrages from flanking
+ positions. Effective range: up to 700 yards.
+ (b) Automatic rifles. Crew of 3 men per rifle. Usually posted to
+ enfilade the entanglements of the first line. They
+ concentrate the fire effect of from 7 to 10 riflemen.
+ Effective range: up to 300 yards.
+ (c) Rifle Grenadiers. Located near enough to first line to hold
+ the enemy trenches under fire and deliver effective barrages
+ near the mouths of our own communicating trenches. Should be
+ located near observation posts so that their fire can be
+ promptly corrected.
+ (d) Trench mortars. Located similarly to (c). Manned by
+ riflemen.
+ (e) Bombers. One supply man to each 2 grenadiers. Used for
+ protection of auto-rifles, in counter attacks, for
+ protection of communicating trenches and fighting in close
+ quarters.
+ (f) Riflemen. Posted to deliver frontal fire. Grouped according
+ to the plan of counter attacks.
+ (g) As many men as possible should be instructed in the use of
+ the enemy's weapons.
+
+ D. LIAISON:
+
+ (a) By telephone. Quickest and most accurate. Maintained
+ between each platoon and its company headquarters, and
+ between adjoining companies. Especially subject to
+ destruction in bombardment. Wireless and ground telegraphy
+ are used only between brigade and division headquarters.
+ (b) By runners ("liaison agents"). Five detailed from each
+ company to battalion headquarters; one sent to each
+ adjoining company headquarters; one from each platoon to
+ company headquarters; four or five on duty at each platoon
+ headquarters; five from each machine gun company to
+ battalion headquarters. Messages sent by them should, if
+ practicable, be written and signed, and should be receipted
+ for by the addressee.
+ (c) By rockets and flares. Quickest means of liaison with the
+ artillery in rear.
+ (d) Domestic (message carrying) grenades.
+ (e) Dogs and carrier pigeons. Sent out to the rear from
+ battalion headquarters.
+ (f) One searchlight--with a radius of 3 miles--is furnished to
+ each company.
+ (g) Noise. Klaxon signals, etc., give warning of gas attacks.
+
+ E. OBSERVATION:
+
+ (a) Observers:
+ 1. Must be men of infinite patience, keen hearing and
+ eyesight.
+ 2. They are located behind the first line in positions
+ combining good view with concealment.
+ 3. Each is provided with a panoramic map, made from
+ aeroplane photographs, of the enemy's trenches. On this
+ must be promptly noted every slightest change in the
+ trace, height of parapet, etc., of the enemy's line. Such
+ notes greatly assist in locating machine gun
+ emplacements.
+ 4. Each observer will also record in a note book everything
+ of importance, with the time observed.
+ 5. A report of changes, with an abstract of observer's
+ notes, is forwarded daily to regimental headquarters.
+ (b) Watchers (sentinels):
+ 1. Stationed, one near the door of each dugout, in the
+ first line, support and intermediate trenches.
+ 2. They must be carefully concealed.
+ 3. They must watch over the parapet (never through slits or
+ loopholes) so as to have unrestricted view.
+ 4. They are furnished with signal rockets and flares for
+ prompt communication with the artillery, and have
+ authority to use them.
+ 5. Double sentinels are posted at night.
+ (c) Listening Posts:
+ 1. Located, usually in shell holes, just inside the
+ entanglements. Connected with front line by tunnels.
+ Protected from grenades by heavy gratings, when
+ possible, and by concealment.
+ 2. Occupied by 4 men (1 in command), in 3 reliefs. Usually
+ occupied only at night unless our trenches are on a
+ reverse slope.
+ 3. Chief function is protection of the entanglements.
+ (d) Microphone Posts.--Installed usually behind the first line.
+ Intercept the enemy's telephone and ground-telegraph
+ messages and any loud conversation in his trenches.
+ (e) Fixed Patrols.--Generally remain in shell holes in front of
+ our entanglements.
+ (f) Reconnoitering Patrols:
+ 1. Composed of from 3 to 5 men, commanded by a
+ non-commissioned officer. Sent out at night only.
+ 2. The company commander must promptly notify commanders of
+ adjoining companies of the dispatch of these patrols,
+ their time of departure, route and probable time of
+ return.
+ 3. Men should be assigned to this duty by roster.
+
+F. TRENCH WORK:
+
+ 1. Constant battle with the elements, care for drainage,
+ revettment, sanitation and storage.
+ 2. Repair of the effects of bombardment.
+ 3. New work, for better security, communication and observation.
+ 4. Work in the open.
+ (a) Usually consists of repair or rearrangement of wire
+ entanglements, digging new listening posts, etc.
+ (b) Effected by parties detailed by roster.
+ (c) They are guarded by fighting patrols, composed like
+ reconnaissance patrols. Their best protection is in silence
+ and concealment.
+ (d) Adjoining companies must be notified of their dispatch,
+ location and probable time of return.
+ (e) This work, like all operations conducted outside the
+ protection of the trenches, offers a valuable tonic to the
+ morale.
+
+ G. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS:
+
+ 1. Sniping:
+ (a) Snipers constitute one of the most dependable and
+ productive agencies of attrition.
+ (b) The best shots of the company are especially trained and
+ assigned for this duty exclusively.
+ (c) They operate in pairs and post themselves to cover any
+ exposed portions of the enemy's trenches, especially his
+ communicating trenches.
+ (d) They should be well supplied with all necessary special
+ equipment; _e.g._, sniperscopes, telescopic sights, painted
+ headgear, etc.
+
+ 2. Mining Operations.
+
+ 3. Raiding:
+ (a) Object of raids: destruction of the enemy's defenses,
+ disturbance of his morale, collection of prisoners and
+ information.
+ (b) The personnel of raiding parties will usually include: A
+ commander and second in command, bayonet men, bombers,
+ engineers, signal men, stretcher bearers. Their numbers and
+ proportions are regulated by the nature and difficulty of
+ the task.
+ (c) Co-ordination with the artillery barrage is the essential of
+ their success. The limit of advance, extent of operations,
+ and time of return will therefore be set in advance and
+ rigidly adhered to.
+
+ H. ROLE OF THE TRENCH COMMANDER:
+
+ 1. Inspections: The men will be formally inspected twice daily at
+ the general "stand to" by the company commander. Particular
+ attention will be paid to the health of the men, condition of
+ their feet and their clothing. Each man must have at least one
+ pair of dry socks always available. Arms, gas masks, and other
+ equipments will also be rigidly inspected.
+ 2. Roster: The company commander will carefully supervise the
+ preparation of the duty roster. An obviously equal distribution
+ of the arduous duties involved in trench life is essential to
+ the maintenance of morale.
+ 3. Reports and Records: (Additional to those already required by
+ regulations.) Log Book, Report of Casualties, Wind Report
+ (daily), Bombardment Report (daily), Intelligence Report, which
+ will include observer's notes and changes (twice daily), and a
+ daily report of Work completed and Undertaken.
+ 4. "One principle which the trench commander should never forget is
+ the necessity for his frequent presence in the midst of his men.
+ * * * Direct contact with the troops on as many occasions as
+ possible is the most certain way to gain their confidence."
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+Duties of the Company Commander.
+
+ 1. To inspect the sector his company is to occupy, one day in
+ advance of occupying it.
+ 2. To assign segments to the platoons.
+ 3. To prepare a plan of defense.
+ 4. To connect by liaison with the companies on his flanks.
+ 5. To have an agent or runner at Battalion Headquarters.
+ 6. To prepare a plan for counter attacks.
+ 7. To report to the Battalion Commander when his company has taken
+ up its position:
+ (a) Its situation.
+ (b) Security.
+ (c) Liaison.
+ (d) State of position left by predecessor.
+ (e) Defense of sector.
+ (f) Plan of counter attacks.
+ 8. To inspect the trenches frequently to see that everything is in
+ proper condition and that his men are in jubilant spirits.
+ 9. To have platoon guides report to Battalion Headquarters on the
+ date for the relief of his company and act as guides to the
+ company that relieves him.
+ 10. To keep a special log book in which the following are kept:
+ (a) Work completed by his unit.
+ (b) Work under way.
+ (c) Work proposed.
+ 11. Turn over to his successor:
+ (a) Measures taken for security.
+ (b) Plan of attacks.
+ (c) Plan of counterattacks.
+ 12. Have one officer on duty at all times.
+ 13. "Stand to" will take place one (1) hour before daylight, and all
+ available men will attend. There will be a thorough inspection.
+ Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing position of every
+ man will be tested to see if he can hit the bottom of our wire.
+ Gas helmets will be inspected.
+ 14. Time table--allot hours of work, rest and meals.
+ 15. Supplies--make timely requisitions for them--be especially
+ watchful about meals and rations--have no delays.
+ 16. To have one watcher and one relief on duty near Company
+ Headquarters at all times.
+ 17. To get a good field of fire to the front and cover the sectors
+ of each company on flanks.
+ 18. (Subject to change) Red Rocket-Artillery Barrage wanted.
+ White Rocket Gas Attack.
+ 19. To report twice daily all changes in wind direction.
+ 20. To report to Battalion Commander when relieved.
+
+
+Duties of Platoon Leaders as Officers on Duty with Company.
+
+ 1. Report with old officer at company headquarters.
+ 2. Make frequent inspections of all trenches occupied by company.
+ 3. Visit each Listening Post; at least once during tour of duty.
+ 4. Visit all sentinels and receive their reports.
+ 5. See that one non-commissioned officer per platoon is on duty.
+ 6. Receive reports of non-commissioned officers after they have
+ posted sentinels.
+ 7. At end of tour hand over to new officer all orders, a report of
+ work in progress, and any useful information.
+ 8. Report with new officer at Company Headquarters on completion of
+ tour.
+ 9. To report anything unusual to Company Headquarters.
+ 10. To send dead and wounded to dressing station trenches.
+ 11. To send patrols to front at night.
+
+
+Duties of Platoon Leaders.
+
+ 1. Must accompany company commander on inspection of trenches one
+ day previous to occupying them.
+ 2. Make necessary reliefs for his men in his segment.
+ 3. Make a plan of defense and counterattack for his position or
+ approve the one left there.
+ 4. Establish sniping posts and arrange reliefs.
+ 5. Establish Listening Posts and arrange reliefs.
+ 6. Assign non-commissioned officer to duty with platoon and arrange
+ relief.
+ 7. Instruct every man as to his place in case of attack.
+ 8. Establish liaison with platoons on both flanks; and one runner
+ to Company Headquarters.
+ 9. Have one platoon guide report to Company Headquarters on day his
+ platoon is to be relieved.
+ 10. On completion of posting his platoon, report to his company
+ commander.
+ 11. Turn over to platoon relieving him all orders and data
+ pertaining to his position.
+ 12. Be especially attentive to rigid military discipline; _i.e._,
+ every soldier to be neat; equipment must be clean at all times;
+ to render the required salute when not observing or firing at
+ the enemy.
+ 13. Have one non-commissioned officer on duty at all times.
+ 14. To inspect rifles, equipment and latrines twice daily.
+ (a) To have at least one latrine in working order at all times.
+ (b) To have a sentry on duty at each platoon dugout at all
+ times.
+ (c) Establish one Observation Post in daytime.
+ 15. In Front Line Trenches:
+ (a) No smoking or talking to be allowed at night.
+ (b) Every man to wear his equipment except packs.
+ (c) Have rifle within reaching distance.
+ (d) All reliefs to be within kicking distance of soldier on
+ duty.
+ 16. Inspect at "Stand to" and report results to Company
+ Headquarters, especially if each man has 170 rounds of
+ ammunition and necessary grenades and bombs.
+ 17. To be especially attentive to sanitation and care of the men's
+ feet.
+ 18. To have one (1) watcher and relief on duty at all times near
+ platoon dugouts.
+ 19. To get a good field of fire to his front and to cover the sector
+ of each platoon on his flanks.
+ 20. Make requisition for material.
+ 21. To see that all of his men are properly fed.
+ 22. Report to company commander when relieved.
+ 23. Must know what every man is doing at all times.
+
+
+Duties of Non-Commissioned Officer on Duty (Each Platoon).
+
+ 1. To make frequent inspections of the position occupied by his
+ platoon.
+ 2. To be responsible that each soldier knows his duties.
+ 3. To report anything of special importance to officer on duty.
+ 4. On being relieved to report with the new non-commissioned
+ officer to the officer on duty.
+ 5. After posting sentinels to report "All is Well" to officer on
+ duty.
+ 6. Explain to his sentinel his duties, the position of Section and
+ Platoon Commanders and of sentries on either side; and to
+ caution his sentries when friendly patrols are out, the probable
+ time and place of return.
+ 7. Bayonets will always be fixed in front line trenches.
+ 8. At night time to have double sentinel.
+ 9. To see that each sentinel in daytime has a periscope.
+ 10. Rifles to be loaded; no cartridge shall be in the chamber
+ except when necessary to shoot.
+ 11. To report to Company Headquarters any change in direction of
+ wind.
+
+
+Patrols.
+
+ 1. Usual orders about patrols.
+ 2. Always go out at night via the Listening Post; tell the men in
+ the Listening Post your mission and probable time of return.
+
+
+Sentinels.
+
+ 1. To sound Klaxon horn on approach of gas attack.
+ 2. To report immediately to non-commissioned officer on duty any
+ change in direction of wind.
+ 3. In cold weather to work bolt frequently to keep it from
+ freezing.
+ 4. At night to challenge only in case of necessity, and then only
+ in a low tone. Challenge "_Hands up._"
+ 5. Number of posts depends on assumed nearness of enemy and local
+ conditions. Normally one per platoon by day and three double
+ sentinels per platoon at night.
+ 6. Relief kept close at hand. Report "All is Well," or otherwise,
+ when officer passes.
+ 7. Screened from observation.
+ 8. Remain standing unless height of parapet renders this
+ impossible.
+
+
+Machine Guns.
+
+ 1. Non-commissioned officer and one (1) watcher on duty at all
+ times.
+ 2. Except in emergency they will not be fired from their regular
+ emplacements.
+ 3. Unless emplacements are well concealed, guns will not be mounted
+ except between evening and morning "stand to."
+ 4. Before dusk each gun will be sighted on some particular spot
+ either in front of or behind the enemy's line.
+ 5. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun.
+
+
+Snipers.
+
+ 1. Sniping Post consists of one (1) observer and one (1) rifleman
+ with relief of two (2) men posted close by.
+ 2. Sniping post should be well concealed.
+ 3. Daily report from each post, of
+ (a) Any work done by enemy.
+ (b) Enemy seen; place, uniform, apparent age, physique,
+ equipment.
+ (c) Any other information of interest.
+ 4. Sniper to be appointed from each section.
+ 5. Must be intelligent, alert, good scout, good shot, courageous.
+ 6. Snipers should spend 24 hours in trenches with those of command
+ which theirs is to relieve, before relief takes place.
+ 7. No night work required of these men since they must be
+ constantly on the alert during the day.
+
+Organization of a Platoon--Rifle Company--Table No. 7
+
+ PLATOON
+
+ Platoon Headquarters
+ 1 Lieut.
+ 1 Sgt.
+ 4 Privates.
+
+1st Section | 2d Section | 3d Section | 4th Section
+ Hand Bombers |Rifle Grenadiers| Riflemen | Auto-Riflemen
+----------------+----------------+-------------------+--------------------
+ 3 Teams, each | 1 Team of | 1 Sgt. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Corps.
+1 Leader | 6 Grenadiers | 2 Squads of | 4 Teams, each
+1 Thrower | 3 Carriers | 8 men each | 1 Gunner
+1 Carrier | (May be | 4 Extra | 2 Carriers
+1 Scout | subdivided) | riflemen[R] |
+2 Corps. | 2 Corps. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Cpl. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Cpls.
+4 Pvts. 1st Cl. | 1 Pvt. 1st Cl. | 6 Pvts. 1st Cl. | 4 Pvts. 1st Cl.
+6 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 12 Pvts. | 8 Pvts.
+ Total--12 | Total--9 | Total--21 | Total--15
+
+[Footnote R: Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With
+Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.]
+
+
+_Suggested Organization of Platoon in Close Order and for
+Administration._
+
+1st Squad | 2d Squad | 3d Squad | 4th Squad |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------|
+Bomber Section | 1/2 Auto Rifle | 1/2 Auto Rifle | |
+(less 1 bomber | Section i.e., | Section i.e., | Grenadier |
+ team) | Cpl and 2 teams | Cpl and 2 teams | Section |
+ | | | |
+ 1 Corp | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. |
+ 7 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. |
+ | | | (Extra Cpl. in |
+ | | | File Closers) |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------+
+
+
+5th Squad | 6th Squad | 7th Squad |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------|
+ 1 Rifle Squad | 1 Rifle Squad | 1 Bomber Team |
+ | | plus 4 extra |
+ | | riflemen[S] |
+ | | |
+ 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. |
+ 7 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------+
+
+Right Guide--Automatic Gun Sgt. Left Guide--Rifle Sgt.
+Chief of Platoon--Lieut. File closer or acting 1st Sgt.--Sgt.-Asst.
+
+Note.--If desirable the 4 mechanics and 4 privates (signalmen) who are
+not assigned to platoons regularly, can be used to fill the blank
+files in the 2d and 3d squads.
+
+[Footnote S: Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With
+Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.]
+
+
+Deployments.
+
+GENERAL PRINCIPLES:
+
+ (a) The following plans for deployment are not to be regarded as
+rigid. The positions of the various squads depends upon tactical
+considerations.
+ (b) The platoon in attack will be used only for accomplishment of
+its offensive mission. Moppers-up, additional carriers, etc., will be
+furnished by other organizations.
+ A. Being in line, to form single skirmish line to the front.
+ 1. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right (left or
+ center). 2. March.
+ Executed as described in pars. 206 and 208, i.d.r.
+ Normal interval to be ordered, 4 or 5 paces.
+ This formation to be regarded as exceptional.
+ B. Being in column of squads, to form single skirmish line. Same
+ command as in (A). Executed as described in para 207 and 208,
+ i.d.r.
+ C. Being in line to form double skirmish line to the front (_i.e._,
+ to take the "Formation for Attack" in the diagram.)
+ 1. In two lines. 2. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right
+ (left or center). 3 March.
+ Executed according to the principles in pars. 206 and 208,
+ i.d.r., except that at the command March the even-numbered
+ squads stand fast while the odd-numbered squads form the
+ first line by deploying on the base squad as in the case of
+ deployment in single line. Similarly, the even-numbered
+ squads form the second line by deploying on their base squad
+ after the odd-numbered squads have moved forward about 20
+ paces.
+
+[Illustration: NORMAL BATTALION FORMATION IN ATTACK]
+
+ D. Being in line or column of squads to deploy in line of squad
+ columns in one or two lines. Use same commands and execute in
+ same manner as described in (A), (B), (C), except that in the
+ command "Squad Columns" is substituted for "as skirmishers,"
+ and in the execution each corporal on approaching the line
+ forms his squad in "squad column" instead of deploying it as
+ skirmishers.
+ _E.G._ 1. In two lines--2. Squad columns (so many) paces, Guide
+ right (left or center)--3. March.
+ This gives a "Formation of Approach" as the French describe it,
+ or as an "Artillery Formation" as the British describe it; which
+ may be used directly or indirectly (by means of echelons) for
+ advancing when not liable to infantry fire.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #22]
+
+ E. Being in above formation to vary the intervals.
+ 1. Squad columns (so many) paces, 2. Guide right (left or
+ center). Executed in the same manner as similar movement
+ described in i.d.r. 126.
+
+
+General Principles of the Platoon Formation in the Assault of
+Fortified Positions in Trenches. (Points of Resistance, Etc.).
+
+1. The platoon is now a complete fighting unit within itself. It
+contains riflemen, bombers, auto-riflemen, and rifle grenadiers. With
+this combination the platoon commander has, under his immediate
+control, all the different kinds of fire available to the infantry.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #23]
+
+2. This formation was developed so that the platoon commander could
+meet the different contingencies that arise from being opposed by
+points of resistance in a "Trench-to-Trench" attack or the
+"Semi-Open-Warfare;" that is the secondary stage of a push.
+
+3. When strong opposition develops, the principle on which the platoon
+works is to develop or surround the point of resistance, the platoon
+acting either alone or in conjunction with neighboring platoons. The
+four different kinds of fire are then used to their best advantages to
+silence or diminish the enemy fire thus making this manoeuvre
+possible.
+
+4. In order to obtain success it is first necessary to impress on the
+officers and men that the primary advantage of the entire formation is
+its mobility, and the scope it gives to the initiative of the platoon
+section, squad and team leaders. In studying this formation it is
+first necessary to free the mind of all parade ground formations and
+to feel that there is nothing to hinder any desired movement of the
+sections, so long as the movement is not contrary to the operation
+orders for the attack. Until this idea is grasped thoroughly no
+progress can be made.
+
+5. There is no typical or "normal formation." The one given at the
+beginning of this instruction here is a drill or parade ground
+formation, and while it may be used under actual conditions of
+warfare, it is simply utilized at this time as a basis from which the
+necessary variations may be worked out. In an attack, every platoon in
+the battalion may use a different formation.
+
+6. The formation to be used is decided upon after a careful study of
+air-photographs. As far as possible all points of resistance are
+picked out and the best method of meeting the situations that may
+arise are then considered. The platoon is then arranged so as to best
+facilitate this manoeuvre. It must be realized that there will be
+other platoons on the flanks and in the rear, and their dispositions
+must be studied with a view of their probable bearing on the points of
+resistance.
+
+7. In order to know how to get results it is first necessary to have a
+very clear conception of the uses and limitations of the different
+weapons in the platoon.
+
+Briefly they can be used in the following ways:
+
+(a) The auto-rifles open up a point blank fire on the strong point as
+soon as it is discovered. Their function is to either draw the fire of
+the enemy or to silence him by a hit or forcing him to take cover.
+Their work may be compared to the work of the field artillery in a
+barrage. They cover the movement of the infantry across the open. The
+auto rifles so place themselves at such points that their line of fire
+will in no way interfere with the manoeuvre of the commander of the
+platoon or the remaining units of the platoon interfere with the
+effective use of the auto rifles of the platoon.
+
+(b) The rifle grenadiers advance at once just as close as possible,
+but at all costs to within effective grenade range. They then take
+cover in shell holes, trenches, etc., and open up a rapid fire. They
+are the long distance howitzers of the platoon and are very valuable.
+By a well placed grenade the whole resistance may be overcome. This
+section usually works around a flank.
+
+(c) The riflemen work up by squad as far as practicable and to a
+flank, when an opportunity presents itself, the squad opens fire in
+such a manner as to protect advance of other squads or teams.
+
+(d) The bombers endeavor to get well around behind the enemy and
+taking advantage of cover get to within bomb range. They may be
+compared to the close range howitzers or trench mortars.
+
+When all four sections are in action at proper ranges, the opposition
+can probably last but a short time, and as soon as the machine guns
+cease fire the platoon, especially the riflemen, go after the
+remainder of the garrison with the bayonet.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #27]
+
+It may happen that the barrage put up will so demoralize the enemy
+that the riflemen can advance before his machine guns are even put out
+of action. This operation allows the rifle men to get in with the
+bayonet, if the resistance is not sooner overcome.
+
+When the different sections are getting to their places, they usually
+find enough shell holes or old trenches to obtain cover. They should
+not move as entire sections, but as small groups of three or four at a
+time.
+
+8. After the encircling movement has once begun, the platoon commander
+loses all control, and the action is then conducted by the section,
+squad or team leaders. They must be trained to act on their own
+initiative, as further orders are rarely practicable.
+
+The resistance will finally be overcome, either because the enemy will
+retreat or surrender under the menace of encirclement, or by the
+losses caused by our fire or by the attack at close range of our
+bombers or else by the final assault with the bayonet led by our
+riflemen.
+
+It must be remembered that under an artillery barrage it is never
+possible to issue verbal orders, so the sections must be trained to
+understand and obey the arm signals of its officer, or more often to
+work without orders.
+
+9. A sequence of command must be arranged in each section, squad and
+team down to the last man.
+
+
+REMARKS REGARDING THE FORMING OF WAVE FROM CLOSE ORDER.
+
+The sketch of deployment attached is an illustration of one of the
+formations that may be adopted. It is given as an example. Any other
+wave formation may be practically as easily formed up. The platoon
+commander simply calls out the squads he wants in the first line.
+
+_It must not be imagined that this transition from close order to
+extended is done in the field when actually under fire or as a result
+of surprise._
+
+Before the platoon goes into an attack it is all arranged so as to
+allow it to be changed with ease from column of sections at extended
+intervals (formation for approach) to the wave formation decided upon.
+This arrangement is made when the platoon is miles to the rear.
+
+When the change is made from column of sections to the wave formation
+there must be no crossing of sections as they go to their places.
+
+
+Some of the Many Questions a Platoon Commander Should Ask Himself on
+Taking Over a Trench, and at Frequent Intervals Afterwards.
+
+1. _I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all
+circumstances, and to do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I
+doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as_
+OFFENSIVE _as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle
+grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?_
+
+2. Do I connect up all right with the platoons on my right and left?
+Do I know the position of my nearest support?
+
+3. Does every man know his firing position and can he fire from it,
+over the parapet, at the foot of the wire?
+
+4. Where are my S.A.A. and bomb stores? Are they under cover from the
+weather?
+
+5. Do all my men know their duties in case of attack--bombers
+especially?
+
+6. Are all my rifles and ammunition clean and in good order? Have all
+the men got rifle covers? Are the magazines kept charged?
+
+7. Is my wire strong enough?
+
+8. Are my parapets and traverses bullet-proof everywhere?
+
+9. Where are my sally ports?
+
+10. Where are my listening posts? Are my listening patrols properly
+detailed?
+
+11. What points in front particularly require patrolling at night?
+
+12. Are my sentries in their right places? Are they properly posted by
+N.C.O's.? Have they received proper instructions?
+
+13. Have I got the S.O.S. message in my pocket, and do I know the
+orders regarding its use?
+
+14. Are the trenches as clean and as sanitary as they might be? Are
+live rounds and cases properly collected? Are my bags for refuse and
+empties in position?
+
+15. Are my trenches as dry as I might make them?
+
+16. Am I doing all I can to prevent my men getting "Trench Feet"?
+
+17. How can I prevent my parapets and dugouts from falling in?
+
+18. Have I got at least one loophole, from which men can snipe, for
+every section? Have I pointed out to Section Commanders the portion of
+the enemy's trench they are responsible for keeping under fire, and
+where his loopholes are?
+
+19. Have my men always got their smoke helmets on and are they in good
+order?
+
+20. Are the arrangements, in case of gas attack, complete and known to
+all ranks?
+
+21. Are the orders as to wearing equipment carried out?
+
+22. Are my men using wood from the defences as firewood?
+
+23. Are my men drinking water from any but authorized sources?
+
+24. _I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all
+circumstances, and I do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I
+doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as_
+OFFENSIVE _as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle
+grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?_
+
+
+Defensive Measure Against Gas Attacks.
+
+I. Introduction.
+
+A. General Considerations:
+
+In the absence of suitable means of protection the poison gases used
+in war are extremely deadly and the breathing of only very small
+quantities of them may cause death or serious injury. This being the
+case, it is essential that not the slightest time should be lost in
+putting on the anti-gas device on the gas alarm being given.
+
+It cannot be too strongly insisted on that the measures to meet
+hostile gas attacks afford _perfect protection_, and if they are
+carried out properly no one will suffer from gas poisoning.
+
+The whole basis of protecting troops against gas lies (a) in keeping
+the appliances in perfect working order; (b) in learning to adjust
+them rapidly under all conditions, and (c) in ensuring that every man
+is given immediate warning. These results can only be attained:
+
+ (1) By frequent and thorough inspection of all protective
+ appliances.
+ (2) By thorough instruction and training in their use.
+ (3) By every man understanding and complying with all standing
+ orders on the subject of defense against gas.
+
+If these are effectually carried out, there is nothing to fear from
+hostile gas attacks. Officers must impress this on their men, as an
+important object of all anti-gas instruction should be to inspire
+complete confidence in the efficacy of the methods which are adopted.
+
+
+B. Nature of Gas Attacks:
+
+(1) GAS CLOUDS:
+
+This method of making a gas attack is entirely dependent on the
+direction of the wind. The gas is carried up to the trenches
+compressed in steel cylinders. These are dug in at the bottom of the
+trench and connected with pipes leading out over the parapet. When the
+valves of the cylinders are opened, the gas escapes with a hissing
+sound, which, on a still night, can frequently be heard at a
+considerable distance. It mixes with the air and is carried by the
+wind towards the opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes forward.
+A continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, the color of which
+may vary:
+
+ (a) Because of the weather conditions. In very dry air it may be
+ almost transparent and slightly greenish in color, while in
+ damp weather it forms a white cloud.
+ (b) Because it may be mixed with smoke of any color.
+
+A cloud attack can only take place when there is a steady but not too
+strong wind blowing from the enemy's lines towards our own. A wind
+between 4 and 8 miles an hour is the most likely condition. An 8-mile
+wind will carry the gas cloud twice as quickly as a man walks rapidly.
+
+Gas attacks may occur at any time of the day, but are most likely to
+be made during the night or in the early morning.
+
+Gentle rain is without appreciable effect on a gas attack, but strong
+rain washes down the gas. Fogs have hardly any effect and may, in
+fact, be taken advantage of to make an attack unexpectedly. Water
+courses and ponds are no obstruction to a gas cloud.
+
+The gas used by the enemy is generally a mixture of chlorine and
+phosgene, both of which are strongly asphyxiating. The gases are
+heavier than air, and therefore, tend to flow along the ground and
+into trenches, shelters, craters and hollows. The gas cloud may flow
+round slight eminences, thus leaving patches of country which remain
+free from gas.
+
+Chlorine and phosgene strongly attack the mucous membranes of the
+respiratory organs, causing bad coughing. In strong concentrations of
+gas, or by longer exposure to low concentrations, the lungs are
+injured and breathing becomes more and more difficult and eventually
+impossible, so that the unprotected man dies of suffocation. Death is
+sometimes caused by two or three breaths of the gas. Even when very
+dilute, chlorine can be recognized by its peculiar smell, which is
+like chloride of lime, but stronger and more irritating.
+
+Both chlorine and phosgene also exert a strongly corrosive action on
+metals, so that the metal parts of arms must be carefully protected by
+greasing them.
+
+The speed with which the gas cloud approaches depends entirely on the
+wind velocity. Gas attacks have been made with wind velocities varying
+from 3 to 20 miles per hour, _i.e._, from 1-1/2 to 10 yards per
+second. In a 9-mile wind, the gas would reach trenches 100 yards
+distant in 20 seconds.
+
+Gas attacks have been made on fronts varying from 1 to 5 miles; their
+effects at points up to 8 miles behind the front trenches have been
+sufficiently severe to make it necessary to wear helmets.
+
+(2) GAS PROJECTILES:
+
+The use of these is not entirely dependent on the direction of the
+wind. In gas projectiles such as shells, hand grenades, and trench
+mortar bombs, a part or the whole of the explosive charge is replaced
+by a liquid which is converted into gas by the explosion. The
+explosive force and noise of detonation of these projectiles is less
+than that of the ordinary kind, and a large number of them are usually
+discharged into a comparatively small space. After the explosion, the
+irritant chemicals form a small gas cloud, though some may sink to the
+ground and remain active for a considerable time.
+
+For using gas shells, the best condition is calm, or a wind of low
+velocity.
+
+Gas projectiles can be used in all types of country. Woods, bushes,
+corn fields and clumps of buildings may hold the gas active for a
+considerable time.
+
+Two kinds of shell gases are used by the enemy, viz., lachrymators,
+which mainly affect the eyes, and poison gases, which may affect the
+eyes and are just as deadly as the gases used in the form of clouds.
+
+(1) TEAR, OR LACHRYMATORY SHELLS:
+
+These shells on explosion drive the liquid chemical which they contain
+into the air as a mist. They cause the eyes to water strongly and
+thereby gradually put men out of action.
+
+Their actual smell may be slight. Large concentrations of lachrymators
+begin to affect the lungs and cause sickness, coughing and general
+irritation.
+
+(2) POISON SHELLS:
+
+Besides the comparatively harmless lachrymators the enemy also uses
+projectiles which contain a gas, the action of which is very similar
+to that of phosgene. Because of their slight detonation, these shells
+are liable to be mistaken for blinds, but they emit large quantities
+of a gas which attacks the lungs strongly and is very dangerous, and
+even in slight cases may cause serious after effects.
+
+(3) SMOKE:
+
+The enemy may make use of smoke, either in the form of a cloud or
+emitted from shells and bombs. Smoke may be used with gas or between
+gas clouds; it may also be used alone to distract attention from a
+real discharge of gas, to cover the advance of infantry, or merely as
+a false gas attack.
+
+(4) MINE AND EXPLOSION GASES:
+
+The poisonous gases which occur in mines, and which are formed in
+large quantities when high explosive goes off in an enclosed space,
+_e.g._, from a direct hit in a shelter, or on the explosion of a
+charge in a mine, are not protected against by the ordinary anti-gas
+appliances. The chief of these gases is carbon monoxide. Protection
+against such gases will not be considered in these notes.
+
+Officers are held responsible that all the anti-gas appliances for
+protecting their men are maintained in perfect condition, and that all
+ranks under their command are thoroughly trained in the use of these
+appliances and in all other measures which may affect their safety
+against gas.
+
+Summary of Protective Measures:
+
+ (a) Provision to each man of individual protective devices.
+ (b) Arrangement for the inspection of those appliances and training
+ in their use and instruction in all other measures of gas
+ defense.
+ (c) Provision of protected and gas-proof shelters.
+ (d) Weather observations to determine periods when the conditions
+ are favorable to a hostile gas attack.
+ (e) Arrangement of signals and messages; for immediate warning of a
+ gas attack.
+ (f) Provision of appliances for clearing gas from trenches and
+ shelters.
+
+
+C. Protection of Shelters:
+
+(1) METHODS OF PROTECTION:
+
+Protection of dugouts, cellars, buildings, etc., is given if all
+entrances are closed by well-fitting doors or by blankets sprayed with
+hypo. solution. Practically no gas passes through a wet blanket, and
+the protection depends on getting a good joint at the sides and bottom
+of a doorway, so as to stop all draughts. This can be effected by
+letting the blanket rest on battens, fixed with a slight slope,
+against the door frame. The blanket should overlap the outer sides and
+a fold should lie on the ground at the bottom. A pole is fastened to
+the blanket, which allows the latter to be rolled up on the frame and
+causes it to fall evenly.
+
+Wherever possible, particularly where there is likely to be movement
+in and out of the shelter, two blankets fitted in this way but sloping
+in opposite directions should be provided. There should be an interval
+of at least three feet between the two frames, and the larger this
+vestibule is made the more efficient is the dugout.
+
+When not in use, the blankets should be rolled up and held so that
+they can be readily released, and should be sprayed occasionally with
+water or a little Vermorel sprayer solution.
+
+If the blankets became stiff from a deposit of chemicals, they should
+be sprayed with water.
+
+All ranks must be taught how to use gas-proof dugouts, _e.g._, how to
+enter a protected doorway quickly, replacing the blanket immediately,
+and carrying in as little outside air as possible.
+
+The protection afforded by these means is just as complete against
+lachrymatory gases as it is against cloud gas and poisonous shell
+gases.
+
+(2) SHELTERS WHICH SHOULD BE PROTECTED:
+
+The following should always be protected:
+
+Medical aid posts and advanced dressing stations; Company, Battalion
+and Brigade Headquarters; signal shelters and any other place where
+work has to be carried out during a gas attack.
+
+In addition to the above, it is desirable to protect all dugouts,
+cellars and buildings within the shell area, particularly those of
+artillery personnel. It should be noted, however, that the protection
+of dugouts for troops in the front line of trenches is usually
+inadvisable on account of the delay involved in getting men out in
+time of attack. It is desirable to protect stretcher bearers' dugouts
+with a view to putting casualties in them.
+
+
+D. Protection of Weapons and Equipment:
+
+Arms and ammunition and the metal parts of special equipment (_e.g._,
+telephone instruments) must be carefully protected against gas by
+greasing them or keeping them completely covered. Otherwise,
+particularly in damp weather, they may rust or corrode so badly as to
+refuse to act. A mineral oil must be used for this purpose. The
+following in particular should be protected:
+
+(1) SMALL ARMS AND S.A.A.
+
+Machine guns and rifles must be kept carefully cleaned and well oiled.
+The effects of corrosion of ammunition are of even more importance
+than the direct effects of gas upon machine guns and rifles.
+
+Ammunition boxes must be kept closed. Vickers belts should be kept in
+their boxes until actually required for use. The wooden belt boxes are
+fairly gas-tight, but the metal belt boxes should be made gas-tight by
+inserting strips of flannelette in the joint between the lid and the
+box.
+
+Lewis magazines should be kept in some form of box, the joints of
+which are made as gas-tight as possible with flannelette.
+
+A recess should be made, high up in the parapet if possible, for
+storing ammunition and guns. A blanket curtain, moistened with water
+or sprayer solution, will greatly assist in keeping the gas out.
+
+(2) HAND AND RIFLE GRENADES:
+
+Unboxed grenades should be kept covered as far as possible. All safety
+pins and working parts, especially those made of brass, should be kept
+oiled to prevent their setting from corrosion by the gas.
+
+(3) LIGHT TRENCH MORTARS AND THEIR AMMUNITION:
+
+As far as the supply of oil permits, the bore and all bright parts of
+light trench mortars and their spare parts should be kept permanently
+oiled. When not in use, mortars should be covered with sacking or
+similar material.
+
+Unboxed ammunition should be kept covered as far as possible and the
+bright parts oiled immediately after arrival. Ammunition which has
+been in store for some time should be used up first.
+
+Sentries must be prepared to give the alarm on the first appearance of
+gas, as a few seconds delay may involve very serious consequences.
+Signals must be passed along by all sentries as soon as heard.
+
+The earliest warning of a gas attack is given:
+
+ (a) By the noise of the gas escaping from the cylinders.
+ (b) By the appearance of a cloud of any color over the enemy's
+ trenches. If the attack takes place at night, the cloud will
+ not be visible from a distance.
+ (c) By the smell of the gas in listening posts.
+
+ (1) ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN THE TRENCHES ON GAS ALARM:
+ (a) Respirators to be put on immediately by all ranks (a
+ helmet, if no box respirator is available).
+ (b) Rouse all men in trenches, dug-outs and mine shafts, warn
+ officers and artillery observation posts and all employed
+ men.
+ (c) Artillery support to be called for by company commanders by
+ means of prearranged signals.
+ (d) Warn battalion headquarters and troops in rear.
+ (e) All ranks stand to arms in the front trenches and elsewhere
+ where the tactical situation demands.
+ (f) Blanket curtains at entrances to protected shelters to be
+ let down and carefully fixed.
+ (g) Movement to cease except where necessary.
+
+ (2) ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN BILLETS AND BACK AREAS:
+ (a) All men in cellars or houses to be roused.
+ (b) The blanket curtains of protected collars, etc., to be let
+ down and fixed in position.
+ (c) Box respirators to be put on immediately, the gas is
+ apparent.
+
+
+H. Action During a Gas Attack:
+
+(1) PROTECTIVE MEASURES:
+
+There should be as little moving about and talking as possible in the
+trenches. Men must be made to realize that with the gas now used by
+the enemy, observance of this may be essential for their safety.
+
+When an attack is in progress, all bodies of troops or transport on
+the move should halt and all working parties cease work until the gas
+cloud has passed.
+
+If a relief is going on, units should stand fast as far as possible
+until the gas cloud has passed.
+
+Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only be moved up if the
+tactical situation demands it.
+
+If troops in support or reserve lines of trenches remain in, or go
+into, dug-outs, they must continue to wear their anti-gas appliances.
+
+Officers and N.C.O's must on no account remove or open up the masks of
+the box respirators or raise their helmets to give orders. The
+breathing tube may be removed from the mouth when it is necessary to
+speak, but it must be replaced.
+
+Men must always be on the look-out to help each other in case an
+anti-gas device is damaged by fire or accident. When a man is wounded,
+he must be watched to see that he does not remove his respirator or
+helmet until he is safely inside a protected shelter; if necessary,
+his hands should be tied.
+
+Men must be warned that if they are slightly gassed before adjusting
+their respirators or helmets they must not remove them. The effect
+will wear off.
+
+(2) TACTICAL MEASURES:
+
+From the point of view of protection against gas, nothing is gained by
+men remaining in unprotected dug-outs or by moving to a flank or to
+the rear. It is, therefore, desirable that on tactical and
+disciplinary grounds all men in the front line of trenches should be
+forbidden to do these things. In support or reserve lines where there
+are protected dug-outs, it is advisable for men to stay in them unless
+the tactical situation makes it desirable for them to come out.
+
+Nothing is gained by opening rapid rifle fire unless the enemy's
+infantry attacks. A slow rate of fire from rifles and occasional short
+bursts of fire from machine guns will lessen the chance of their
+jamming from the action of the gas and tends to occupy and steady the
+infantry.
+
+It should be remembered that the enemy's infantry cannot attack while
+the gas discharge is in progress and is unlikely to do so for an
+appreciable time--at least 10 minutes--after it has ceased. It is, in
+fact, a common practice for the enemy infantry to retire to the second
+and third line of trench whilst gas is being discharged. There is,
+therefore, no object in opening an intense S.O.S. barrage of artillery
+on "No man's land" during the actual gas cloud and it is advisable
+that the warning to the artillery of a gas attack should be a signal
+differing from the ordinary S.O.S. signal, as the latter may have to
+be sent later if an infantry attack develops.
+
+It must be remembered that smoke may be used by the enemy at the same
+time as, or alternately with, the gas and that under cover of a smoke
+cloud he may send out assaulting or raiding parties. A careful
+look-out must, therefore, be kept; hostile patrols or raiders may be
+frustrated by cross-fire of rifles and machine guns and should an
+assault develop the ordinary S.O.S. procedure should be carried out.
+
+
+I. Precautions Against Gas Shells:
+
+Owing to the small explosion which occurs with these shells, they are
+liable to be mistaken for blinds, and even when the gas is smelt men
+may not realize its possibly dangerous character at once and so may
+delay putting on respirators or helmets until too late. Men sleeping
+in dug-outs may be seriously affected unless they are roused. Men in
+the open air are unlikely to be seriously affected by poison gas
+shells, provided they put on respirators or helmets on first
+experiencing the gas. The following points should therefore be
+attended to:
+
+(i) All shells which explode with a small detonation or appear to be
+blind should be regarded with particular attention; the respirator or
+helmet should be put on at the first indication of gas and blanket
+protection of shelters adjusted.
+
+(ii) Arrangements must be made for giving a _Local_ alarm in the event
+of a sudden and intense bombardment with poison gas shells, but care
+must be taken that this alarm is not confused with the main alarm.
+Strombos horns must on no account be used to give warning of a gas
+shell bombardment.
+
+(iii) All shelters in the vicinity of an area bombarded with poison
+gas shells must be visited and any sleeping men roused.
+
+(iv.) Box respirators or helmets should continue to be worn throughout
+the area bombarded with poison gas shells until the order is given by
+the local unit Commander for their removal.
+
+Lachrymatory or "tear" shells are frequently used by the enemy for the
+purpose of hindering the movements of troops, for preventing the
+bringing up of supports, or for interfering with the action of
+artillery. Owing to the deadly nature of poison gas shells, however,
+the precautions given in paragraph 60 above, must be taken for all gas
+shells. The goggles are intended for use after lachrymatory
+bombardments only, in cases where the irritant gas persists in the
+neighborhood.
+
+
+K. Action Subsequent to a Gas Attack:
+
+1. GENERAL:
+
+The most important measure to be taken after a cloud gas attack is to
+prepare for a further attack. The enemy frequently sends several
+successive waves of gas at intervals varying from a few minutes up to
+several hours and it is therefore necessary to be on the alert to
+combat this procedure. The following measures should be adopted as
+soon as the gas cloud has passed:
+
+ (a) Removal of respirators.--Anti-gas fans should be used to
+ assist in clearing the trenches of gas, so as to admit of
+ respirators being removed. Respirators and helmets must not
+ be removed until permission has been given by the Company
+ Commander.
+
+A sharp look out must be kept for a repetition of the gas attack, as
+long as the wind continues in a dangerous quarter.
+
+2. MOVEMENT:
+
+Owing to the enemy gas sometimes causing bad after effects, which are
+intensified by subsequent exertion, the following points should be
+attended to:
+ (a) No man suffering from the effects of gas, however slightly,
+ should be allowed to walk to the dressing station.
+ (b) The clearing of the trenches and dugouts should not be
+ carried out by men who have been affected by the gas.
+ (c) After a gas attack, troops in the front trenches should be
+ relieved of all fatigue and carrying work for 24 hours by
+ sending up working parties from companies in rear.
+ (d) Horses which have been exposed to the gas should not be
+ worked for 24 hours if it can be avoided.
+
+3. CLEARING DUGOUTS AND OTHER SHELTERS:
+
+It is essential that no dugout be entered after a gas attack event
+with box respirators or helmets adjusted, until it has been
+ascertained that it is free from gas. The only efficient method of
+clearing dugouts from gas is by thorough ventilation. The older method
+of spraying is not efficient.
+
+An appreciable quantity of gas may be retained in the clothing of men
+exposed to gas attacks and also in bedding, coats, etc., left in
+shelters. Precaution should, therefore, be taken to air all clothing.
+
+4. VENTILATION:
+
+_Natural Ventilation_.--Unless a shelter has been thoroughly
+ventilated by artificial means, as described below, it must not be
+slept in or occupied without wearing respirators, until at least 12
+hours after a gas attack. It must not be entered at all without
+respirators on for at least 3 hours. The above refers to cloud gas
+attacks. In the case of gas shell bombardments the times cannot be
+definitely stated, as they depend on the nature of the gas used and
+the severity of the bombardment. With lachrymatory gases the times
+after which shelters can be used without discomfort may be
+considerably longer than those mentioned above.
+
+_Ventilation by Fire_.--All kinds of shelters can be efficiently and
+rapidly cleared of gas by the use of fires. Shelters with two openings
+are the easiest to ventilate and where possible, dugouts with only one
+entrance should have a second opening made, even a very small one, to
+assist in ventilation.
+
+In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a short passage,
+the best results are obtained if the fire is placed in the center of
+the floor of the dugout and at a height of about 9 inches.
+
+In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a long and nearly
+horizontal passage, the best results are obtained if the fire is
+placed about one-third of the distance from the inner end of the
+passage.
+
+In dugouts provided with two or more exits, the fire should be placed
+at the inner end of one of the exit passages.
+
+In general, 1 pound of dry wood per 200 cubic feet of air space is
+sufficient for clearance of any gas. The best fuel is split wood, but
+any fuel which does not smoulder or give off thick smoke can be used.
+The materials for the fire, _e.g._, the split wood, newspaper, and a
+small bottle of paraffine for lighting purposes, should be kept in a
+sand bag, enclosed in a biscuit tin provided with a lid. An improvised
+brazier should be kept ready for use.
+
+The fire must be kept burning for at least ten minutes and the
+atmosphere in the shelter should be tested from time to time.
+
+_Ventilation by Fanning_.--Dugouts can be ventilated by producing air
+currents in them by means of special anti-gas fans.
+
+If no anti-gas fans are available, ventilation can be assisted by
+flapping with improvised fans such as sand bags, ground sheets, etc.
+
+5. CLEANING OF ARMS AND AMMUNITION:
+
+Rifles and machine guns must be cleaned after a gas attack and then
+re-oiled. Oil cleaning will prevent corrosion for 12 hours or more,
+but the first available opportunity must be taken to dismantle machine
+guns and clean all parts in boiling water containing a little soda. If
+this is not done, corrosion continues slowly even after oil cleaning
+and may ultimately put the gun out of action.
+
+After a gas attack, S.A.A. should be carefully examined. All rounds
+affected by gas must be replaced by new cartridges immediately and the
+old ones cleaned and expended as soon as possible.
+
+All hand and rifle grenades exposed to the gas should have their
+safety-pins and working parts cleaned and re-oiled.
+
+All bright parts of light trench mortars, together with all
+accessories and spare parts exposed to the gas, must be cleaned and
+wiped dry as soon as possible after the attack and in any case within
+24 hours, after which they should be thoroughly coated afresh with
+oil. The same applies to ammunition which may have been exposed to the
+gas.
+
+Ammunition which, for any reason, had not been oiled, must be cleaned
+and oiled and expended as soon as possible.
+
+For details regarding the cleaning of guns and artillery ammunition
+and signal equipment, see paragraphs 116 and 123.
+
+6. TREATMENT OF SHELL HOLES:
+
+In the neighborhood of shelters or battery positions where gas from
+shell holes is causing annoyance, the holes and the ground round them
+should be covered with at least a foot of fresh earth. Shell holes so
+treated should not be disturbed, as the chemical is not thereby
+destroyed and only disappears slowly.
+
+
+Concealment From Aerial Observers.
+
+A. 1. An aeroplane cannot conduct reconnaissance at a height of less
+ than 5,000 feet without being within easy range of
+ anti-aircraft artillery; nor of less than 2,000 feet without
+ coming into range of machine-gun and rifle fire.
+ 2. To be observed from such heights, objects on the ground must be
+ distinguished by:
+ (a) Motion.
+ (b) Color contrast.
+ (c) Line contrast, or
+ (d) Shadows.
+
+B. Concealment:
+ 1. (a) On warning of hostile aircraft, troops on the march should
+ withdraw to the side of the road (if possible, into shade),
+ or lie down flat in the road and remain motionless.
+ (b) If it is necessary to continue the march, this should be
+ done in broken detachments, which are far less distinct
+ than continuous column.
+ (c) Troops in a trench should crouch down in the shadowy side
+ and remain motionless.
+ (d) Faces should never be turned up, as the high lights on
+ cheek-bones and foreheads then show up distinctly.
+ (e) Bright metal on arms, equipment and headgear must be kept
+ covered.
+ 2. Artillery wagon-trains, etc., should if possible be halted
+ promptly on warning. When halted, their neutral coloring
+ protects them.
+ 3. Trenches are best concealed:
+ (a) By avoiding, in construction, a too regular outline, and
+ following as far as possible the contours of the ground.
+ (b) By coloring the parapet and parados to match the ground.
+ This may be done most quickly by painted canvas; if the
+ latter is not available, by planting or strewing the loose
+ earth with surrounding herbage. In this work care must be
+ taken not to make the covering itself too conspicuous by
+ brightness or monotony of coloring.
+ (c) By covering the trench itself, where convenient, with a thin
+ material, colored like the parapet and parados.
+ (d) By avoiding all overt movement of troops in the trenches
+ under observation.
+ 4. Buildings, _e.g._, ammunition dumps, hangars, etc., can be
+ completely concealed by being painted the color of the
+ ground they stand on and fitted with canvas curtains,
+ similarly painted and stretched from the eaves to the
+ ground at a horizontal angle of 35 degrees. These curtains
+ completely eliminate shadows.
+ 5. Success in each work of concealment by camouflage is best
+ assured by the assistance of an aeroplane observer to test
+ and correct it.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+Orders Governing Intrenchment Problems at Second Plattsburg Training
+Camp.
+
+HEADQUARTERS PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP,
+PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, NEW YORK.
+SEPTEMBER 22, 1917.
+
+DIVISIONAL ENTRENCHING PROBLEM.
+
+General Situation:
+
+The Salmon river forms the boundary line between two states, the
+"Blue" on the north and the "Red" on the south. War has been declared
+and the Red Army is mobilizing near Keeseville. Mobilization by the
+first Blue Army at Plattsburg has been completed.
+
+Special Situation, Blue:
+
+Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river against
+strong detachments of the Red Army. The commanding general of the Blue
+Army has decided to establish a second position on the line, _Bluff
+Point to the bend_ (248) _in the Saranac river_.
+
+The following order is issued by the Division Commander:
+
+HEADQUARTERS, 101st Div.,
+PLATTSBURG, N.Y.
+23 Sept., '17, 9:00 A.M.
+
+FIELD ORDERS,
+No. 1.
+
+1. Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river.
+
+2. This division and 1 Brigade 102 Division will entrench along the
+line: _Bluff Point_--_Chateaugay Branch Railroad_--_Saranac River_
+(248).
+
+3. (a) The Chief of Artillery will prepare the positions, and lines of
+communication for his Brigade, determine his sectors, and submit his
+plan of action.
+
+(b) The 1st Brig. and 2 Bns. 267th Inf. will entrench the sector,
+_Saranac River_ (248) to _Sand Road_, exclusive. The 2nd Brig. will
+entrench the sector _Sand Road to Bluff Point_, both inclusive. The
+supports will entrench on the line, _Saranac River_ (182)--_Cliff
+Haven_.
+
+(c) The Reserve--1 Brig. 102 Div. less 2 Bns., will construct
+crossings on the _Saranac River_--under direction of the Chief of
+Engineers, and prepare them for defense.
+
+(d) The Chief of Engineers will supply tools for entrenching and lay
+out the lines of entrenchments. He will repair the following trunk
+roads: _Peru Road_, _Sand Road_, _Lake-Shore Road_; and construct a
+transverse trunk line road from _Pulp Mill to O'Connell's Farm_, and
+the necessary tram lines. The Engineer Depot for stores and material
+will be established at _Plattsburg Barracks_.
+
+(e) The Chief Signal Officer will establish necessary lines of
+communication, utilizing equipment at _Plattsburg Barracks, Central
+Station_. Aero Squadron at _Chazy_.
+
+4. (a) The Chief Medical Officer will establish his dressing stations
+in the _Butts_ of the rifle range and in ravine on _O'Connell's Farm_.
+A field hospital will be established at the _Lozier Works_.
+
+(b) Ammunition train and supply train will be parked in the _Fair
+Ground_. Ammunition distributing stations at railroad spurs,
+_Plattsburg Barracks_, and _O'Connell's Farm_. The Division Ordnance
+Officer will locate the Ammunition Dumps along transverse trunk line
+road.
+
+(c) Field trains, until further orders, at north end of _Plattsburg
+Barracks Reservation_. Distributing point, _Plattsburg Railroad
+Station_--Regimental Supply Stations: _Saranac River_ 182;
+intersection _Peru Road_ and _Rifle Range Road_, _Sand Hole_ in _Rifle
+Range_, _Sand Road on O'Connell's Farm_, _Ravine on O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+(d) The commander of trains will establish traffic regulations for all
+roads.
+
+5. Messages to _Statistical Office_.
+
+WOLF,
+Major General.
+
+Official copy:
+ J.A. BAER,
+ Genl. Staff,
+ Chief of Staff.
+
+Copies to:
+ Brig. and Regt. Commanders.
+ C. of E.
+ Div. Q.M.
+ C.S.O.
+ C.M.O.
+ Div. O.O.
+ C. of Tr.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+HEADQUARTERS, 1ST BRIGADE, 101ST DIVISION,
+PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, N.Y.
+23RD SEPT., 1917, 6 P.M.
+
+FIELD ORDERS
+No. 1.
+
+1. Strong detachments of the Red Army, now mobilizing at _Keeseville_,
+are south of the _Salmon River_. Our advance troops are holding the
+line of the _Salmon River_.
+
+2. Our division and one brigade, 102nd Division, will entrench and
+occupy the line _Bluff Point-Chateaugay Branch (D. & H.R.R.), Saranac
+River_ (248). This brigade, reinforced by two Battalions, 267th
+Infantry, will entrench and occupy the sector, _Saranac River_ (248),
+_Sand Road_, exclusive.
+
+3. (a) The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th infantry will entrench and
+occupy the sector from the _Saranac River_ to a point 600 yards east.
+
+(b) The 266th Infantry, the sector from a point 600 yards east of the
+_Saranac River_, connecting with the trenches of the 267th Infantry,
+to a point 100 yards east of _Peru Road_.
+
+(c) The 265th Infantry, the sector from a point 100 yards east of the
+_Peru Road_, and connecting with the trenches of the 266th Infantry,
+to the _Sand Road_ exclusive.
+
+(d) The Brigade Machine Gun Battalion will organize and maintain
+strong points along line regimental reserves. The C.O. of this
+organization will, at once, consult with the regimental commanders
+relative to preparation of machine gun emplacements and probable need
+for re-enforcements within their respective sectors.
+
+(e) The Brigade Signalmen will establish telephonic communications
+between Brigade and Regimental Headquarters.
+
+4. (a) The regimental commanders and senior officers of the two
+battalions, 267th Infantry, will at once report to the Chief Engineer
+of the Division for plan of entrenchments in their respective sectors.
+
+(b) Tools and materials for entrenching will be supplied at the trench
+sites.
+
+5. Messages to Brigade Headquarters near _Peru Road_, east Savoy
+Hotel.
+
+GOODRICH,
+Brigadier General, Commanding.
+
+Official Copy:
+ WM. KIRBY,
+ Major of Cavalry, U.S.R.,
+ Adjutant.
+
+Copies to:
+ C.O., 265th Infantry.
+ C.O., 266th Infantry.
+ C.O., 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th Infantry.
+ C.O., Brigade M.G. Co.
+ Headquarters, 101st Division.
+
+HEADQUARTERS, 1ST BATTALION, 265TH INFANTRY
+PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, N.Y.
+OCT. 16, 1917.
+
+FIELD ORDERS
+No. 1.
+
+Blue print of trenches; scale 24 inches equals 1 mile.
+
+1. The enemy strongly occupies a line of trenches immediately _South_
+of the _Chateaugay Branch Railroad_, the center of their line being
+about opposite the center sector of our first line of trench, _Sand
+Road-Target Range Fence_, their line of trenches being within 50 yards
+of the railroad at that point, and then retiring slightly from the
+railroad to the _East_ and _West_.
+
+The 264th Infantry occupies the section of trenches directly to the
+East of us and the 266th Infantry occupies the section of trenches
+directly to the West of us.
+
+2. This battalion will take up a defensive position in the nearly
+completed line of trenches, _Sand Road-Target Range Fence_, and as
+rapidly as possible complete the trench system in the following order
+of work:
+ a. Deepen all trenches to at least three feet.
+ b. Construct latrines.
+ c. Provide cover.
+ d. Revet work previously done.
+
+3. a. Front lines, _i.e._, fire, communicating and support trenches:
+Company "B" will occupy the _East_ sector, _i.e._, _Sand Road_ to
+_Belgium Boyau_, inclusive, including _Slum Boyau_ and the salient at
+_South_ end Reserve Trench immediately in rear of _East_ end of
+Support trench.
+
+Company "C" will occupy the _Central_ sector, _i.e._, from _East_
+sector (_Belgium Boyau_, exclusive), to _Cardona Boyau_, inclusive,
+including _Poire Boyau_.
+
+Company "A" will occupy the _West_ sector, _i.e._, from _Central_
+sector (_Cardona Boyau_, exclusive), to and including salient near
+_Southwest_ corner of _Target Range Fence_.
+
+b. Reserve Line: Company "D" will occupy the line from the _Target
+Range Fence_ on the _West_ to a point 165 yards _East_ of the _Verdun
+Salient_, one-half of the Company occupying the sector, _Target Range
+Fence_, to a point 75 yards _East_ of the _Rams Horn Boyau_, including
+_Rams Horn Boyau_, and the other half of the Company occupying the
+sector from a point 75 yards _East_ of the _Rams Horn Boyau_ to a
+point 165 yards _East_ of the _Verdun Salient_.
+
+c. Machine Guns: Headquarters, 1st Platoon and 1st Platoon Machine Gun
+Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company "A," for
+assignment to the shell craters (converted) and dugouts (constructed
+for machine guns), four in all, in the _West_ sector.
+
+Headquarters, 2nd Platoon and Third Section (2nd Platoon) Machine Gun
+Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company "C," for
+assignment to the shell crater (converted), and dugout (constructed
+for machine gun), two in all, in the _Central_ sector. Fourth section
+(2nd Platoon), Machine Gun Company, will report to the Commanding
+Officer, Company "B," for assignment to the shell crater (converted),
+two in all, in the _East_ sector.
+
+d. Trench Mortars: Two trench mortars have been assigned to the
+_Central_ sector and the Commanding officer, Company "C," is charged
+with the construction of emplacements therefor and the manning of
+them.
+
+4. a. Dressing stations have been established in the _Butts_ of the
+rifle range and in ravine on _O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+b. Ammunition distributing points are located at _Plattsburg Barracks_
+and _O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+c. Regimental supply stations are located at _Saranac River_ (182),
+intersection _Peru Road_ and _Rifle Range Road_, _Sand Hole in Rifle
+Range_, _Sand Road_ on _O'Connell's Farm_, and _Ravine_ on
+_O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+5. Battalion Headquarters are located in dugout in _Support_ trench
+(West Tremont), midway between _Rams Horn_ and _Poire Boyaux_, to
+which place messages will be sent.
+
+BOSCHEN,
+Captain, 56th Infantry, Commanding.
+
+Copies to:
+ C.O., 265th Infantry.
+ C.O., Companies A, B, C and D.
+ C.O., M.G. Company.
+ C.O., Headquarters Company.
+ R.S.O.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+HDQTRS. 1ST BATT., 265TH INFTY.,
+PLATTSBURG BCKS., N.Y., _Oct. 17, 1917._
+
+FIELD ORDERS
+No. 2
+
+ 1. DISPOSITIONS:
+ a. The assignment of companies to sectors is as announced in
+ Field Orders No. 1, these headquarters.
+ b. Company commanders are charged with the details of occupation
+ of the trenches and the proper disposition of the
+ "specialists" (bombers, grenadiers, auto-riflemen, etc.),
+ directing particular attention to the active and passive
+ areas of their sectors.
+
+ 2. FIELDS OF FIRE: Company commanders must arrange for and obtain
+ the best fields of fire in their own sectors, and provide
+ for protection of visible areas in adjoining sectors by
+ lateral fire.
+
+ 3. IMPROVEMENTS OR CHANGES IN TRENCHES: Company commanders before
+ making any changes or improvements in trenches will render to
+ battalion headquarters brief recommendations of changes
+ desired. These recommendations will be submitted at 11.00
+ a.m. and 3.00 p.m., after which hours the battalion
+ commander will inspect and if deemed necessary will be
+ ordered.
+
+ 4. ORGANIZATION FOR WATCHING AND OBSERVATION:
+ a. Each company commander will organize a system for watching
+ the enemy by day and will establish look-out posts for this
+ purpose; this system will be augmented at night by patrols
+ if necessary.
+ b. The watching of the enemy must be continuous and long
+ occupation of the sector will not warrant any laxity.
+
+ 5. ORGANIZATION FOR SUPPLY:
+ a. Company commanders will make the necessary details for
+ obtaining supplies; these details to be in charge of Mess or
+ Supply Sergeants and will not exceed three squads for each
+ lettered company.
+ b. _Food_: Machine guns details and members of the Medical Corps
+ assigned to each sector are attached to the lettered
+ companies for rations.
+ c. Cooked food will be at the _Food Station_ at 6.00 a.m., 11.50
+ a.m. and 5.00 p.m. daily, and will be distributed at that
+ point.
+ d. Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an
+ appropriate detail (about 2 squads) to proceed to _Food
+ Station_, which is located at the wire entanglement on the
+ _west_ side of the _Target Range_ about 400 yards _north of
+ Brigade Headquarters_.
+ e. The details mentioned above will proceed via trenches,
+ leaving same at junction of _Tipperary_ trench and _Rams
+ Horn_ boyau in the following order:
+ Co. D: Detail will clear junction _Rams Horn_ boyau and
+ _Tipperary_ trench at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m.
+ Co. A: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench, and
+ _Rams Horn_ boyau at 5.30 a.m., 11.00 a.m. and 4.30 p.m.,
+ proceeding via _Rams Horn_ boyau.
+ Co. B: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench, and
+ _Poire_ boyau at 5.35 a.m., 11.05 a.m. and 4.55 p.m.,
+ proceeding via _Poire_ boyau and _Tipperary_ trench.
+ Co. C: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench and _Slum_
+ boyau at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m., proceeding via
+ _Slum_ boyau and _Tipperary_ trench.
+ f. These details will return to their respective sectors via
+ the indicated routes, moving in reverse order at five-minute
+ intervals, and company commanders will make necessary
+ arrangements for distribution of food within their
+ respective sectors.
+ g. Company commanders will cause the necessary police after each
+ meal to insure sanitary condition of trenches.
+ h. Food containers will be held in company until the next meal
+ hour when they will be returned to the _Food Station_.
+ i. _Water_: Water wagon will be at the _Food Station_ from 10.00
+ a.m. to 4.30 p.m. daily.
+ j. Containers for water will be furnished by Regimental Supply
+ Officer at the _Food Station_.
+ k. All men will carry full canteens of water when entering the
+ trenches.
+ l. Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an
+ appropriate detail (about 2 squads), to proceed to the _Food
+ Station_ to procure water in containers; these details will
+ proceed via the routes indicated in paragraph 5, section "e":
+ Co. D, 2.00 p.m.; Co. A, 2.05 p.m.; Co. B, 2.10 p.m.; Co. C,
+ 2.15 p.m.
+ m. These details will return to their respective sectors in
+ reverse order at five-minute intervals.
+ n. _Miscellaneous_: Details for obtaining tools, ammunition,
+ trench supplies, etc., will be arranged for as required.
+ o. Requisitions for miscellaneous supplies required will be
+ submitted by company commanders to the Regimental Supply
+ Officer not later than 3.00 p.m., October 17, 1917.
+
+ 6. ORGANIZATION FOR LIAISON:
+ a. The Signal Officer will establish necessary telephonic
+ communications.
+ b. Each organization will detail one runner to report to the
+ battalion commander at regimental headquarters at 8.00 a.m.
+ c. Four runners will be detailed for duty with each company
+ headquarters and one runner will be detailed for duty with
+ each platoon headquarters. These runners should be lightly
+ equipped and wear a distinctive mark.
+ d. At least two men per section must be able to act as guides to
+ all company headquarters of the battalion.
+ e. Verbal messages will not be sent by runners; all messages
+ must be written.
+ f. Company commanders, or their representatives, will report
+ daily at battalion headquarters at 5.00 p.m.
+ g. There must be accurate communication between platoons in
+ company, and companies in battalion, in order to insure
+ co-ordinated action.
+
+ 7. DEFENSE:
+ a. Immediately after the occupation of the trenches, company
+ commanders will make a careful estimate of all tactical
+ situations presented in their sectors and will plan for a
+ stubborn defense. Care must be exercised in providing for
+ defense in depth and lateral defense. The front line
+ trenches of each sector will be held until actually entered
+ by the enemy, and no sector will be abandoned until the
+ occupants are actually forced out.
+ b. The main line of resistance will be the support trenches
+ (_Tremont_) and special attention must be given to the
+ preparation for defense. If the front line trenches of any
+ sector be captured by the enemy there will be no withdrawal
+ from any other sector of the front line trenches for the
+ purpose of establishing a continuous line in the support
+ trench.
+ c. The company commander of the reserve will organize parties
+ for counterattacks and these parties will be held in
+ readiness at convenient points to insure prompt movement to
+ the front.
+ d. Continuous occupation of the trenches without fire action
+ must not cause a feeling of security and result in being
+ surprised by the enemy.
+
+ 8. STAND TO: "Stand to" will take place at 5.00 a.m. and 5.00 p.m.,
+ daily. At this formation every available man will be
+ present. Rifles, ammunition, equipment, clothing, etc., will
+ be inspected. Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing
+ position of every man will be tested to see whether he can
+ hit the bottom edge of our wire. Gas helmets and respirators
+ will be inspected if worn. After "stand to" in the morning
+ and before "stand to" in the evening rifles will be
+ thoroughly cleaned and oiled.
+
+ 9. TRENCH ORDERS:
+ a. Current "Trench Standing Orders" recently published from
+ Brigade Headquarters are in force.
+ b. During the occupation of the trenches it will be assumed
+ that, the trenches are under the observation and fire of the
+ enemy and all movement in the trenches will be conducted
+ accordingly. All movements of troops, either individuals or
+ groups, will be via the trenches at all times.
+ c. No one will be allowed to go overland between trenches or to
+ enter the trenches by the flank. All persons will enter the
+ trenches from the reserve trenches and no visitors will be
+ allowed in the trenches except on passes issued from the
+ Regimental Headquarters.
+ d. Commanding officers, Companies A and B, are responsible for
+ the posting of the necessary sentinels along the flanks of
+ the position (during the day), with instructions covering the
+ provisions contained in paragraph 9, sections "b" and "c."
+
+ 10. REPORTS:
+ a. Company commanders will submit by 1.00 p.m., October 18,
+ 1917, a report showing the dispositions and plan of defense
+ of their respective sectors.
+ b. Frequent reports of information obtained and any change of
+ conditions at the front will be made to battalion
+ headquarters when necessary.
+
+BOSCHEN,
+_Captain, 56th Infantry._
+_Commanding._
+
+Copies to:
+ C.O. 265th Infty.
+ C.O. Cos, A, B, C and D.
+ C.O. M.G. Co.
+ C.O., Hdq. Co.
+ R.S.O.
+
+
+Company Organization (in Detail):
+
+Company Headquarters:
+
+ 1 Captain, commanding company,
+ 1 First Lieutenant (senior), second in command,
+ 1 First Sergeant, armed with pistol,
+ 1 Mess Sergeant, armed with rifle,
+ 1 Supply Sergeant, armed with rifle,
+ 1 Corporal, company clerk, armed with rifle,
+ 4 Mechanics, armed with rifle,
+ 5 Wagoners (from Supply Company),
+ 4 Cooks, armed with rifle,
+ 2 Buglers, armed with pistol,
+ 4 Privates, first class, company agent and signalmen.
+
+ _Equipment_: 15 rifles, 5 pistols, 8 automatic rifles (for
+ replacement), 40 trench knives (to be distributed as needed), 2
+ bicycles. Following from Supply Company: 1 rolling kitchen,
+ 4-mule; 1 combat wagon, 4-mule; 1 ration and baggage wagon,
+ 4-mule; 1 ration cart, 2-mule; 1 water cart, 2-mule; 16 mules,
+ draft.
+
+_4 Platoons, each organized as follows_ (numbered 1 to 4 in company):
+
+
+Headquarters:
+
+ 1 First Lieutenant; 1st and 4th Platoons commanded by First
+ Lieutenants; 2nd and 3rd Platoons commanded by Second
+ Lieutenants, armed with pistol.
+
+ 1 Sergeant, assistant to platoon commander, armed with pistol and
+ rifle.
+
+ _Equipment_: 1 rifle, 2 pistols.
+
+ 1st SECTION: Bombers and rifle grenadiers:
+
+ 1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle,
+
+ 3 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle, 1 trained as rifle
+ grenadier; remainder trained as bombers,
+
+ 6 Privates, first class, 2 armed with pistol and rifle, and
+ remainder with rifle only; 1 trained as rifle grenadier, and
+ remainder as bombers.
+
+ 12 Privates, armed with rifles; 4 trained as rifle grenadiers,
+ remainder trained as bombers.
+
+ _Equipment_: 22 rifles, 6 pistols.
+
+2nd SECTION: Riflemen:
+ 2 Corporals, armed with pistols and rifles,
+ 3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle,
+ 7 Privates, armed with rifle,
+ _Equipment_: 12 rifles, 2 pistols.
+
+3rd SECTION: Riflemen:
+ 2 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle,
+ 3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle,
+ 7 Privates, armed with rifle.
+ _Equipment_: 12 rifles, 2 pistols.
+
+4th SECTION: Auto-riflemen:
+ 1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle,
+ 1 Corporal, armed with pistol and rifle,
+ 3 Privates, first class; 1 armed with rifle, 2 armed with pistols;
+ auto-rifle gunners, including 1 extra,
+ 6 Privates, armed with rifle.
+ _Equipment_: 9 rifles, 4 pistols, 2 auto-rifles.
+
+NOTE.--Sections numbered from 1 to 16 in company.
+
+
+Personnel:
+
+Commissioned:
+
+ Captain 1
+ First Lieutenants 3
+ Second Lieutenants 2
+ ----
+ Total 6
+ ====
+
+Enlisted:
+
+ First Sergeant 1
+ Mess Sergeant 1
+ Supply Sergeant 1
+ Sergeants 12
+ Corporals 33
+ Mechanics 4
+ Wagoners (from Supply Company) (5)
+ Cooks 4
+ Buglers 2
+ Privates, first class 64
+ Privates 128
+ -----
+ Total 250
+ =====
+
+
+Equipment:
+
+Rifles 239
+Pistols 69
+Auto rifles 16
+Trench knives 40
+Bicycles 2
+From Supply Company:
+ Rolling kitchen, 4-mule 1
+ Combat wagon, 4-mule 1
+ Ration and baggage wagon, 4-mule 1
+ Ration cart, 2-mule 1
+ Water cart, 2-mule 1
+ Mules, draft 16
+ ====
+
+
+Trench Standing Orders.
+
+1. Duties.--A. One officer per company and one non-commissioned
+officer per platoon will always be on duty. During their tour of duty
+they will not be in their dugouts. They will frequently visit all
+trenches occupied by their units. Every listening post will be visited
+at least once by an officer during his tour of duty.
+
+B. The officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will, when his
+tour of duty is completed, turn over to the officer or
+non-commissioned officer relieving him all orders, a report of the
+work in progress, if any, and any other information of use.
+
+C. At night the officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will
+frequently patrol the trench line, to see that the sentries are alert
+and to receive any reports they may desire to make.
+
+D. The-non-commissioned officer coming on duty will go round and post
+new sentinels with the non-commissioned officer coming off duty.
+
+E. The length of the tour of duty will depend upon the number of
+officers and non-commissioned officers on duty. Normally each tour
+should be, by night, two hours; by day, four hours. This may be
+modified, however, so that all officers and non-commissioned officers
+will have an equal amount of this duty while in the trenches.
+
+F. Non-commissioned officers, after posting sentinels, will report
+"all is well" or otherwise to the officers on duty.
+
+G. No man will be detailed for a duty in the trench without being
+given suitable warning of this duty and be informed at which hour he
+will come on duty.
+
+H. The Company Commander will be responsible for sending any report
+required by Battalion Headquarters.
+
+2. Sentries.--A. The number of sentry posts required will depend on
+the assumed propinquity or distance of the enemy, strength of
+obstacles, ease with which sentry posts can be re-enforced and other
+local conditions. Normally by day this should be one sentinel for each
+platoon and at night three double sentinels for each platoon. There
+must be sentries enough to insure alarm being given promptly in case
+of attack and that local resistance is sufficient until help can
+arrive.
+
+B. The next relief will remain within an easy distance of the sentry
+on post, usually in shelters provided for this purpose.
+
+C. Every sentry is to be regularly posted by a non-commissioned
+officer who will explain to him his duties and ascertain that the
+sentry is aware of the position of the section and platoon commanders
+and of the sentries on either side, and whether there are any patrols
+or working parties out in front.
+
+D. Every sentinel will report when an officer passes his post, "All is
+well," or otherwise.
+
+E. Every sentinel by day will be provided with a head-cover to blend
+with the ground (this may be improvised), and while observing the
+ground to the front will remain perfectly still. An empty sand bag or
+some other suitable material may be utilized for this purpose.
+
+3. Patrols.--A. It is the duty of all the troops holding the front
+lines to establish a command of the ground in front of their parapet
+up to the enemy's wire. This can be done by extended and constant
+patrolling by night and reconnaissance by day so that the ground is
+thoroughly well known to as large a portion as possible of officers
+and men and so no enemy can move or remain in his front by night or
+day without detection. One of the particular duties of these patrols
+is to observe the condition of the wire entanglements.
+
+B. Every patrol must have definite orders as to its mission; broadly
+speaking, patrols may be divided into two classes: (1) reconnoitering
+patrols, (2) fighting patrols.
+
+C. The first duty of reconnoitering patrols is to obtain the
+information for which they are sent out. They fight only in
+self-defense or if any especially favorable opportunity arises to
+inflict loss upon the enemy without prejudice to their mission. They
+usually consist of two to six men, under an officer or
+non-commissioned officer.
+
+D. Fighting patrols are sent out for the express purpose of causing
+loss or damage to the enemies by such means as engaging the enemy's
+patrols or working parties, or by raiding saps, listening posts or
+trenches. For identification purposes they should always endeavor to
+secure at least one prisoner. Their strength depends upon the
+resistance they are likely to meet with.
+
+E. Company commanders are responsible for the orders given to patrols,
+subject to any instructions which may be issued by higher authority.
+They are also responsible that all troops, whom it concerns, including
+companies on both flanks, are warned when and where patrols will be
+out, length of time they will be out, and of the points to which they
+will return.
+
+F. Information gained by patrols is of little value unless transmitted
+quickly to those whom it concerns. Patrol reports will be made out by
+the commander of the patrol immediately upon his return and sent at
+once to the company commander unless orders to the contrary have been
+given.
+
+4. Stand To.--A. "Stand to" will take place one-half hour after a
+relief has been posted and one-half hour before being relieved. At
+this parade every available man will be present. Rifles, equipment,
+clothing, etc., will be inspected. Firing steps will be tested as soon
+as practicable after reliefs have been posted to see that each man can
+fire on the foot of the nearest part of the wire entanglement which he
+is required to cover by his fire. The same procedure will be gone
+through at the "stand to" one-half hour before being relieved. Other
+"stand tos" may be ordered in the discretion of the company commander.
+These should be sufficiently often to insure that every man turns out
+promptly and knows his place in case of attack.
+
+5. Machine Guns.--A. The concealment of machine gun emplacements is
+important. Consequently, it is only at night or in case of attack that
+machine gun crews will occupy their defense emplacements. At night
+guns should take up other position than their defense emplacements and
+fire a stated number of rounds in order to test out the guns and
+mislead the enemy as to their numbers and real emplacements, after
+which they will at once go back to their defense emplacements.
+
+B. The guns and their crews will be tactically under the orders of the
+company commander in whose sector they are located, but no alteration
+will be made by him in their disposition or arcs of fire; he will,
+however, bring before the senior machine gun instructor any
+suggestions for improvements in machine gun dispositions for defense.
+
+C. Two men per gun will always be on duty with the guns.
+
+D. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun.
+
+E. Officers and non-commissioned officers in charge of guns will
+remain in close proximity to the guns. They will frequently inspect
+their guns, emplacements, etc. They are responsible for cleanliness
+and maintenance of the emplacements.
+
+F. Machine gun commanders are responsible for guns always being ready
+for action, and that emplacements are clear of all material except
+such as is required for the service of the guns; that embrasures or
+loopholes are kept clear of all obstructions which may interfere with
+fire or view.
+
+6. Reliefs.--A. Reconnaisance. Prior to taking over the line of
+trenches the company commander, accompanied by his senior First
+Lieutenant and First Sergeant, will reconnoiter the trenches.
+
+B. Points to be noted by the company commanders. The following points
+will be specially noted by company commanders before taking over
+trenches:
+
+ 1. Plan of occupation (number of men holding lines to be taken
+ over, their distribution and duties).
+ 2. Shelter accommodations.
+ 3. Work being done and proposed.
+ 4. Conditions of the wire and defenses generally.
+ 5. Information as to the enemy, his habits, snipers, and the work
+ he is doing, etc.
+ 6. Water supply.
+ 7. Artillery support.
+ 8. Communications.
+ 9. Danger points.
+ 10. Location and condition of stores.
+ 11. Liaison.
+
+7. Guides.--A. Arrangements will be made between the company
+commanders of the incoming and outgoing companies as to the rendezvous
+where guides will be provided by the latter to conduct the incoming
+troops to the trenches.
+
+B. One guide per platoon, one for each company and one for battalion
+headquarters will be provided. These guides must know the exact spot
+where they will meet the relief troops and the best way to conduct the
+units to the particular section of the trench they will occupy.
+
+8. Smoking and Talking.--A. After leaving the rendezvous there will
+be no smoking and talking until arrival in trenches. Strictest march
+discipline will be enforced on the way to and from the trenches.
+
+9. Procedure on Arrival at Trenches.--A. The troops being relieved
+will not leave the trenches until the relieving troops are in position
+and the new sentries have been posted, all trench stores have been
+handed over and receipted for, and orders to move have been received
+from the Company Commander.
+
+B. Platoon commanders will at once personally see that all sentinels
+are properly posted, that the non-commissioned officer is on duty,
+that every man knows his place in case of attack, and that both flanks
+of his platoon are in liaison with the adjoining platoon.
+
+C. When reliefs are completed, Platoon Commanders will report to that
+effect to the Company Commander.
+
+D. Men will not be dismissed until the Company Commander has received
+the reports from all of his Platoon Commanders that everything is in
+order.
+
+10. Log Books.--A. Each Company Commander will keep a log book in
+which will be entered:
+
+ 1. Work done.
+ 2. Number of men working.
+ 3. Hours worked.
+ 4. Any information obtained from sentries, patrols, or other
+ sources.
+
+They will also enter in this book a list of any trench stores that
+come into their possession.
+
+11. Equipment.--A. Equipment will be worn in the front trenches.
+Haversacks, packs, and trench tools need not be worn, these will be
+left in the shelters. In support and reserve trenches, they will be
+worn at the discretion of the Company Commander.
+
+B. Ration and carrying parties will wear equipment and carry rifles
+unless otherwise ordered.
+
+C. Pieces will be assumed to be loaded and locked at all times.
+
+D. In the firing trenches bayonets will be fixed at night.
+
+E. Non-commissioned officers and men of the firing line will at all
+times be in possession of their rifles and bayonets. The rifles of men
+in the support and reserve trenches or dugouts will be where they can
+be quickly seized, even in the dark.
+
+12. Stretcher Bearers.--A. Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a
+point designated by the Company Commander.
+
+13. Discipline.--A. Sleeping in the firing trenches will not be
+permitted.
+
+B. No man will enter the firing trench, except in discharge of his
+duty, unless so ordered by his Company or Platoon Commander.
+
+C. Sentries will remain standing unless the height of the parapet
+renders this impossible.
+
+D. Saluting and standing at attention, etc., will be as carefully
+adhered to as when in camp except that sentinel will not let this
+interfere with their duties.
+
+14. Rations and Cooking.--A. Cooking will be done in the rear of the
+reserve at a point to be designated.
+
+B. Company Quartermaster Sergeants will accompany ration parties,
+which will be limited in size to the actual needs for bringing up
+cooked rations from the point where cooking is done, to the trenches.
+At no time should this exceed ten per cent of the effective strength
+of the unit from which sent.
+
+C. Care will be taken that as little noise as possible be made by
+these carrying parties.
+
+15. Sanitation.--A. The importance of strict attention to sanitation
+will be impressed upon all ranks.
+
+B. The commanding officer of each unit is responsible for sanitation
+in his sector. He will make frequent inspections of latrines, refuse
+pits and trenches to ascertain that no unsanitary conditions exist.
+
+C. Latrines will be constructed in the trenches, excreta kept covered
+at all times and such disinfectants as may be provided will be used at
+regular intervals. When filled within eighteen inches of the top, pits
+will be filled with earth and labeled.
+
+D. Urinal cans will be provided and men required to use these cans and
+contents will be emptied as often as necessary into deep pits at least
+one hundred yards from the trenches. Empty tin cans, particles of food
+and other refuse will be collected in receptacles kept in the trenches
+for that purpose and carried to the rear and buried in pits. This is
+usually done at night.
+
+
+Emergency Dumps for Companies (Material).
+
+1. Any large shell crater will do for these or holes can be dug 10' x
+10,' x 5' deep.
+
+
+CONTENTS OF DUMP.
+
+ 10 rolls barbed wire.
+ 8 coils French accordion wire.
+ 30 long screw stakes.
+ 50 short screw stakes.
+ 4 prepared wire blocks (gooseberries).
+
+
+STORES FOR COMPANY.
+
+ 100 very flares.
+ 6 S.O.S. rockets.
+ 2 verminal sprayers.
+ 1 strombos horn. (gas alarm)
+ rubber boots.
+ periscopes.
+ 200 revolver ammunition.
+ 1 log book.
+ 1 set maps.
+ 1 set air photos.
+ 1 defense scheme.
+
+2. These are taken over and signed for. Each dugout must have a gas
+blanket and some form of gas alarm (usually empty shell case.)
+
+
+STORES AT BATTALION HEADQUARTERS.
+
+ 1 strombos horn.
+ 2 verminal sprayers.
+ 300 very flares.
+ 20 S.O.S. rockets.
+ 500 revolver ammunition.
+ 50 ground flares.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #28]
+
+
+
+
+Conclusion.
+
+
+The present army of the United States had its inception at Plattsburg
+in 1915. The first regiment of the Business Mens' Training Camp will
+go down in history as the first chapter of preparedness.
+
+The training camps of 1916, not only at Plattsburg, but at various
+other places throughout the United States, constituted the second
+chapter.
+
+We are just finishing chapter three in the officers' training camps of
+1917.
+
+This book brings together the essential points of the instruction
+given at the second and probably the last of the officers' training
+camps at Plattsburg, in such a way that an officer may refresh his
+memory when he is about to take up with his men any of the subjects
+covered.
+
+It is hardly necessary to add that no attempt has been made to cover
+fully any branch of the work. The bibliography provides for further
+study and the books in it should be at every officer's command.
+
+As the war progresses many changes will be made; not only will methods
+change but some branches now considered essential may be cast aside as
+useless.
+
+Nothing but work can make the pages of any military book have real
+meaning. This book gives what are now considered the essentials of
+military training. If it has brought to the conscientious officer
+points he might otherwise have forgotten to the detriment of his
+command, it will have served its purpose.
+
+
+
+
+Bibliography.
+
+
+CHAPTER II. I.D.R.
+
+ Balck "Tactics" Vol. 1. Infantry.
+
+ Howell "Lectures on the Swiss Army."
+
+ Bjornstadt "Lectures on the German Army."
+
+ "Drill and Field Training" (English)--Imperial Army Series.
+
+ "Instructions on the Offensive Conduct of Small Units." War
+Department, May, 1917.
+
+ "Notes on the methods of attack and defense to meet the Conditions
+of Modern Warfare." Army War College, April, 1917.
+
+ Privates Manual. (Moss.)
+
+ "Instructions for assembling the Infantry Pack," Ordnance
+Department. Pamphlet No. 1717 Manual of Military Training. (Moss.)
+
+
+CHAPTER III. PHYSICAL TRAINING.
+
+ "Manual of Physical Training." (Koehler.)
+
+ "Field Physical Training of the Soldier." Special Regulation No.
+23.
+
+ Voice Culture. (Robert Lloyd.) (In lecture form.)
+
+
+CHAPTER IV. SMALL ARMS FIRING MANUAL.
+
+ Bull's Eye Scorebook.
+
+ U.S. Marines Scorebook.
+
+ "How to Shoot." (Moss.)
+
+ "Notes on training for Rifle Fire in Trench Warfare." Army War
+Coll., April, 1917.
+
+ "The Rifle in War." (Eames.)
+
+ "Suggestions to Military Riflemen." (Whelen.)
+
+ "Musketry" sheets from First Camp, Plattsburg, New York.
+
+ "Control of the Firing Line." Army Service School.
+
+ "Musketry Training." (Pickering.)
+
+ "A Synopsis of the Rifle in War." Army Service Schools.
+
+ British--"Aids in Musketry." "Fire Problems." (Pilcher.)
+
+ "Fire Orders"--"Direction and Control"--"Musketry"--Imperial Army
+Series.
+
+ "Lecture and Lessons on Musketry and Instructions for Officers and
+N.C.O.S. Musketry Diagrams." (Clutterbuck.)
+
+ "Notes on Bayonet Training." Army War College, March, 1917.
+
+ "British Manual of the Bayonet." Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1715 and No.
+1866. (Pistol.)
+
+ "Notes on Bombing." (McClintock.)
+
+ "Notes on Grenade Training"--Plattsburg Training Camp.
+
+ "Notes on Grenade Warfare." Army War College.
+
+
+CHAPTER V. MILITARY SKETCHING AND MAP HEADING.
+
+ "Military Map Reading." (Sherrill.)
+
+ "Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Grieves.)
+
+ "An Officer's Notes" (Parker.)
+
+ "Topography." (Sherrill.)
+
+ Engineers Field Manual.
+
+ "Manual of Infantry Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Training Manual in Topography, Map Reading and Reconnaissance."
+(By Major Spalding, U.S.A.)
+
+ "Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Capt. Barnes.)
+
+
+CHAPTER VI. ARTICLES OF WAR.
+
+ "A Guide to the Articles of War." (Professor Eugene Waumbaugh.)
+
+ Manual of Courts Martial.
+
+
+CHAPTER VII. ARMY REGULATIONS.
+
+ "Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons." Translated from the
+French by the Army War College, 1917, War Department Document No.
+626. a.r., 1913.
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII. (FIELD WORK.)
+
+ "Notes on Field Fortification." Army Service Schools, 1916.
+
+ "E.F.M." and Addendum thereto.
+
+ "Elements of Trench Warfare." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Field Entrenchments." (Solano.)
+
+ "Scouting and Patrolling." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Scout Instruction." (McKenney.)
+
+ "Scout's Handwork." (McKenney.)
+
+ "The 2nd Matabele War." (Baden Powell.)
+
+ "Aids to Scouting." (Baden Powell.)
+
+ "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Small Problems in Infantry." (Bjornstadt.)
+
+ "S.M. Tactics."
+
+ "A Military Primer." (Marshall & Simonds.)
+
+ "Technique of Modern Tactics." (Von Allen.)
+
+ "Night Movements." (Burnett.)
+
+ "Night Operations for Infantry." (Dawkins.)
+
+
+CHAPTER IX. (FEEDING MEN.)
+
+ "Manual for Army Cooks."
+
+ "Mess Sergeant's Handbook." (Holbrook.)
+
+ "Mess Officer's Assistant."
+
+ "Mess Account Book." (Frink.)
+
+ "Handling the Straight Army Ration." (Holbrook.)
+
+ "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Field Service." (Moss.)
+
+
+CHAPTER X. (PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID.)
+
+ "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Lectures on Military Sanitation and Management of Sanitation
+Service," Army Service Schools.
+
+ "Lectures" delivered at Plattsburg Training Camp, 1917.
+
+ "Elements of Military Hygiene." (Ashburn.)
+
+ "Red Cross Pamphlet on First Aid."
+
+ "Manual for Non-Coms. and Privates."
+
+
+CHAPTER XI. (SIGNALING.)
+
+ "United States Signal Book."
+
+ "Infantry Drill Regulations."
+
+
+CHAPTER XII. (GUARD DUTY.)
+
+ "Manual of Interior Guard Duty."
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII. (COMPANY ADMINISTRATION.)
+
+ "Company Administration." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Army Paper Work." (Perrin-Smith Pub. Co.)
+
+ "Notes on Organizations." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Synopsis of Work Done at 1st Plattsburg Camp." (Farley.)
+
+ "Army Paper Work." (Moss.)
+
+ "Army Regulations."
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV. (CONFERENCES. STUDY. S.P.I. EXAMINATIONS.)
+
+ "Examinations in Military Science," Harvard University, 1917.
+
+
+CHAPTER XV. (TRENCH WARFARE.)
+
+ "Field Fortifications." (Lt. Henri Poire.) Plattsburg, N.Y., 1917.
+
+ "The French Automatic Rifle." (Capt. Gene Loriot.)
+
+ "Notes on Liaison in Modern Warfare."
+
+ "Notes on the Method of Attack and Defense to Meet the Conditions
+of Modern Warfare."
+
+ "Machine Gun Tactics." (Applin.)
+
+ "Grenades, Hand and Rifle." (Solano.)
+
+ "Training for the Trenches." (Vickers.)
+
+ "Studies in Leading Troops." (Vernois.)
+
+ "Tactical Decisions and Orders." (Buddecke.)
+
+ "Problems in Leading Troops--Army Service Schools."
+
+ "Battle Orders." (Von Kiesling.)
+
+ "70 Problems." (Morrison.)
+
+ "Tactical Principles and Problems." (Hanna.)
+
+ "Technique of Modern Tactics." (Bond and McDonough.)
+
+ "Estimating Tactical Situations." (Fitch.)
+
+
+The Book Department, Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas,
+or the United States Infantry Association, Washington, D.C., will get
+any books available.
+
+
+
+
+
+INDEX.
+
+
+CHAPTER 1. PAGE.
+
+Schedules; 1
+
+CHAPTER 2.
+
+Infantry drill regulations; 31
+ School of the soldier; 31
+ Instruction without arms; 31
+ Attention; 32
+ Position of; 32
+ Heels together and on a line; 32
+ Feet turned out equally, forming angle of 45 degrees; 32
+ Knees extended without stiffness; 32
+ Trunk erect upon hips; 32
+ Shoulders falling naturally; 32
+ Arms hanging naturally; 33
+ Head erect, chin raised; 33
+ Rests; 33
+ Position of rest and at ease; 33
+ Fall out; 34
+ Rest; 34
+ At ease; 34
+ Parade rest; 34
+ Eyes right; 34
+ Right face; 34
+ Right half face; 34
+ About face; 34
+ Hand salute; 34
+ Forward march; 34
+ Double time, march; 34
+ Mark time, march; 34
+ Half step, march; 34
+ Right step, march; 34
+ Squad, halt; 34
+ By right flank, march; 34
+ To the rear, march; 34
+ Change step, march; 34
+ Manual of arms; 35
+ Purpose; 35
+ Commands and cautions; 35
+ Order, arms; 35
+ Present, arms; 35
+ Port, arms; 35
+ Right shoulder, arms; 35
+ Left shoulder, arms; 35
+ Parade, rest; 35
+ Trail, arms; 35
+ Rifle salute; 35
+ Fix bayonet; 35
+ Unfix bayonet; 36
+ Inspection arms; 36
+ School of the squad; 36
+ Object; 36
+ Composition of squad; 36
+ Fall in; 36
+ Fall out; 36
+ Count off; 36
+ Inspection arms--right dress, front; 36
+ Guide right; 37
+ Take interval; 37
+ To reform; 37
+ Take distance; 37
+ Assemble, march; 37
+ Stack arms; 37
+ Take arms; 37
+ Oblique, march; 37
+ In place, halt; 37
+ Resume march; 38
+ Right turn; 38
+ Right half turn; 38
+ Squads right; 38
+ Squad right about; 38
+ School of the company; 38
+ Object; 38
+ Composition; 39
+ Fall in; 39
+ Platoon movements; 40
+ Leading platoon; 40
+ Rear platoon; 40
+ Questions which come up in daily military life; 40
+ Answers; 41
+ Insignia; 41
+ For second lieutenants; 41
+ Company right, march; 42
+ Platoons right, march; 42
+ Squads right, march; 42
+ Right turn, march; 42
+ Column right, march; 42
+ Platoons, column right, march; 42
+ Squads right, column right, march; 42
+ Squads right, platoons, column right, march; 42
+ Squads right about, march; 43
+ Right into line, march; 43
+ Right front into line, march; 43
+ Platoons, right front into line, march; 43
+ Route step, march; 43
+ Right by twos, march; 43
+ Squads right front into line, march; 43
+ Dismiss the company; 43
+ To fall in company when it cannot be formed by squads; 44
+ For muster; 44
+ In aligning company; 44
+ To march squad without unnecessary commands; 44
+ As skirmishers, march; 44
+ Assemble, march; 45
+ Kneel; 45
+ Lie down; 45
+ Rise; 45
+ Loadings and firings; 45
+ Arming; 45
+ Sight-setting announced; 45
+ Fire at will; 45
+ Clip fire; 45
+ Unload; 45
+ Extended order; 45
+ Corporal cautions; 46
+ Left face; 46
+ Company right; 46
+ Deployments; 46
+ As skirmishers, guide right, march; 46
+ To deploy from column or squad; 46
+ Assemble, march; 47
+ Platoons, assemble; 47
+ Platoons, columns; 47
+ Squad columns; 47
+ No. 1's forward, march; 48
+ Captain points out new line; 48
+ Disadvantage; 48
+ Advantage; 48
+ Being in skirmish line; 48
+ By platoon; 48
+ Commands; 48
+ School of the Battalion; 49
+ Basis; 49
+ Arrangement; 49
+ Number; 49
+ Center; 49
+ Band; 49
+ Dressing; 49
+ To form the battalion; 49
+ Other than ceremonies; 49
+ For ceremonies; 49
+ To dismiss the battalion; 50
+ To rectify the alignment; 50
+ To rectify the column; 50
+ Helpful hints to beginners; 50
+ In column of squads; 50
+ In column of companies; 51
+ Line of companies; 53
+ In battalion line; 54
+ Inspections; 55
+ Special points of company; 55
+ Battalion inspection; 56
+ Regimental inspection; 56
+ Ceremonies; 56
+ Battalion review; 56
+ Battalion parade; 57
+ Regimental parade; 58
+ Regimental review; 58
+ Fire direction; 58
+ Fire control; 58
+ Fire discipline; 58
+ The colonel; 59
+ Position; 59
+ Duties; 60
+ The major; 60
+ Position; 60
+ The general; 61
+ Duties; 61
+ Special; 62
+ Battalion staff; 63
+ Positions; 63
+ Duties; 64
+ Position; 65
+ Duties: before fire action; 65
+ during the action; 65
+ Buglers; 66
+ Position; 66
+ Duties; 66
+ Must be proficient in; 67
+ Range estimators; 67
+ Platoon leader; 68
+ Position; 68
+ Duties; 68
+ Thereafter; 69
+ First sergeant; 70
+ Guides; 70
+ General rules; 70
+ Equipment; 70
+ Close order; 71
+ Taking intervals and distances; 71
+ To form the company; 72
+ Alignments; 72
+ Exercise for; 74
+ Result; 74
+ Platoon Guides; 75
+ Position; 75
+ Duties; 75
+ Corporal; 76
+ Position; 76
+ Duties; 76
+ Thereafter; 76
+ The private; 78
+ Position; 78
+ Duties; 79
+ Packs; 81
+ Cartridge belt; 81
+ To attach first-aid pouch; 82
+ To attach canteen cover; 82
+ To attach pack carrier to haversack; 82
+ To attach cartridge belt to haversack; 83
+ To attach bayonet scabbard to haversack; 83
+ To attach intrenching tool carrier to haversack; 83
+ To assemble the full equipment (without rations); 84
+ To make the pack; 85
+ To assemble the pack; 85
+ To assemble the full equipment (with rations); 86
+ To make the pack; 86
+ To assemble the pack; 86
+ To adjust to the soldier; 86
+ To assemble full equipment, less the pack (with
+ rations); 87
+ To assemble full equipment, less the pack (without
+ rations); 88
+ To discard pack without removing equipment from
+ body; 88
+ Care of equipment; 89
+ Leather; 89
+ Woolen clothes; 89
+ Mending; 89
+ Cloth equipment--dry cleaning; 89
+ Washing; 89
+ Instructions on making packs; 89
+ Methods; 89
+ Adjusting cartridge belt; 90
+ Distribution of intrenching tools in the squad; 90
+
+CHAPTER 3.
+
+Physical training; 91
+ Physical training; 91
+ Bayonet training; 91
+ Time schedule; 91
+ Formations; 92
+ Second formation; 93
+ Commands; 93
+ Kinds of and how given; 93
+ First lesson; 94
+ Second lesson; 95
+ Third lesson; 96
+ Fourth lesson; 98
+ Fifth lesson; 99
+Voice culture; 103
+
+CHAPTER 4.
+
+Use of modern arms; 105
+ Small arms firing; 106
+ Slow fire; 109
+ Rapid fire; 109
+ Pistol; 112
+ Nomenclature and care; 112
+ Manual for the pistol; 112
+ Position; 116
+ The grip; 116
+ The trigger squeeze; 117
+ Position and aiming drills; 117
+ Quick fire; 118
+ Classes of fire; 118
+ Slow fire; 118
+ Quick fire; 118
+ Automatic fire; 118
+ Trench; 118
+ Score; 119
+ Course; 120
+ Slow fire; 120
+ Quick fire; 120
+ Automatic fire; 120
+ Trench fire; 120
+ Bayonet training; 120
+ Functions of; 120
+ General practice; 120
+ Technique of bayonet combat; 121
+ Manual of the bayonet; 122
+ Progressive exercises; 124
+ Machine guns; 128
+ Mode of action; 128
+ Fire; 129
+ Inconspicuousness; 129
+ Offensive reinforcement of a front momentarily stationary; 130
+ Defensive; 130
+ General rules for installation; 131
+ Employment of fire and instruction; 132
+ Resume; 132
+ Points before firing; 133
+ Points during firing; 133
+ Points after firing; 133
+ Grenade instruction; 134
+ Introduction; 134
+ Working of grenades in use; 136
+ Instruction in throwing; 138
+ Instruction in grenade organization; 139
+ Points to remember; 141
+
+CHAPTER 5.
+
+Map sketching; 143
+ Class room--map reading; 143
+ Taking up map scales; 143
+ Field work--strict scale map making; 145
+ Road sketch; 146
+ Area sketch; 146
+ Problem; 150
+ Class room--problem; 150
+ Field work--problem; 154
+ Class room--problem; 155
+ Field work--problem; 157
+ problem; 158
+Map reading; 159
+
+
+CHAPTER 6.
+
+Helpful references to the articles of war; 161
+ Military law; 161
+ Article 1; 161
+ Definitions; 161
+ Article 2; 161
+ Persons subject to military law; 161
+ Articles 3-18; 162
+ Courts martial classified; 162
+ Method of entering a charge against a man; 163
+ Specification; 164
+ General remarks; 164
+ Article 31; 164
+ Order of voting; 164
+ Article 39; 164
+ Limit upon prosecutions; 164
+ Article 54; 165
+ Fraudulent enlistment; 165
+ Article 58; 165
+ Desertion; 165
+ Article 61; 166
+ Absence without leave; 166
+ Article 62; 166
+ Disrespect toward President and others; 166
+ Article 63; 166
+ Disrespect toward a superior officer; 166
+ Article 64; 167
+ Assaulting or wilfully disobeying superior officer; 167
+ Article 65; 167
+ Insubordinate conduct toward a non-commissioned officer; 167
+ Article 68; 167
+ Disorders; 167
+ Article 69; 168
+ Breaking arrest; 168
+ Article 75; 169
+ Misbehavior before the enemy; 169
+ Article 83; 169
+ Neglect of military property; 169
+ Article 84; 169
+ Waste or unlawful disposal of property issued to soldiers; 169
+ Article 85; 169
+ Drunk on duty; 169
+ Article 86; 170
+ Misbehavior of sentinel; 170
+ Article 92; 170
+ Murder or rape; 170
+ Article 93; 170
+ Various crimes; 170
+ Article 94; 171
+ Frauds against the government; 171
+ Article 95; 171
+ Conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman; 171
+ Article 96; 171
+ General articles, the catch all; 171
+ Examples; 172
+ Problem 1; 172
+ Problem 2; 172
+ Problem 3; 172
+
+
+CHAPTER 7.
+
+Notes on army regulations; 175
+ Authority exercised; 175
+ Abusive language; 175
+ Respect to superiors; 175
+ Remarks by officers; 175
+ Furloughs; 175
+ Men on furloughs; 175
+ Men in foreign countries; 175
+ No payments; 175
+ Desertion; 175
+ Abandoned clothes; 175
+ Reward; 175
+ Costs of apprehension; 176
+ No pay or clothes; 176
+ Will be restored; 176
+ Absent without leave; 176
+ Discharge of enlisted men; 176
+ Final statements; 176
+ Certificate; 176
+ Loss of discharge certificate; 177
+ Physical disability certificate; 177
+ Death of soldier; 177
+ Effects; 177
+ Will be delivered; 177
+ Medal of honor; 178
+ Certificate of merit; 178
+ Quarters; 178
+ Saturday; 178
+ Neglect of rooms; 178
+ Destruction of tableware; 178
+ Chiefs of squads; 178
+ Premises; 178
+ Company commanders; 178
+ Arms; 178
+ Accountability and responsibility; 178
+ Example; 179
+ Loss of public property; 179
+ Ration; 179
+ Forfeiture; 179
+ Pay; 179
+ Allotments; 180
+ Class A; 180
+ Class B; 180
+ Compensation for death or disability; 181
+ Additional insurance; 182
+ Deposits; 182
+ A lost deposit book; 182
+ Payment; 183
+ Withdrawal of deposits; 183
+ Interest; 183
+ Forfeiture; 183
+ Officers and men; 183
+ Furloughed to reserve; 183
+ Transportation; 183
+ Discharged soldier; 183
+ Transfer of claims; 183
+ Notes on the laws of war; 183
+
+
+CHAPTER 8.
+
+Practice marches; 187
+Field work; 188
+ An order; 188
+ Do not deploy too early; 188
+ Fire direction; 189
+ The troops; 189
+ Defense; 190
+ Leadership; 190
+ Communications; 191
+ Night operations; 191
+ Patrols; 191
+ Leader; 191
+ Conduct of; 192
+ Report; 192
+ Return; 193
+ Advance guard; 193
+ Rear guard; 194
+ Flank guard; 194
+ Camps; 194
+ March outpost; 194
+ Outpost; 195
+ Outline of field service regulations; 197
+ Land forces of U.S.; 197
+ Military information; 197
+ Transmission of information; 198
+ Questions and answers on; 206
+
+
+CHAPTER 9.
+
+Feeding men; 213
+ In camp; 213
+ On the march; 214
+ For individual cooking; 214
+ In the trenches; 215
+ Rations and cooking; 215
+Camping and camp sanitation; 216
+ General principles; 216
+
+
+CHAPTER 10.
+
+Personal hygiene and first aid; 221
+ Personal hygiene; 221
+ Bathing; 221
+ Sexual indulgence; 222
+ Exercise; 222
+ Cleanliness of surroundings; 223
+ Preventable diseases; 223
+ Typhoid fever; 223
+ Dysentery; 223
+ Malaria; 224
+ Tonsilitis and colds; 224
+ Measles; 224
+ First aid; 224
+ Grounds; 224
+ Poisoned wounds; 225
+ Diagnosis tag; 225
+ Treatment of wounds; 225
+ Bleeding wounds; 225
+ Fainting, heat exhaustion and shock; 226
+ Sunstroke; 226
+ Burns and scalds; 226
+ Freezing and frostbites; 226
+ Fractures; 226
+ Treatment; 227
+ Artificial respiration; 227
+ Trench foot; 227
+
+
+CHAPTER 11.
+
+Signaling; 229
+ Semaphore; 229
+ First cycle; 229
+ Second cycle; 229
+ Third cycle; 229
+ Fourth cycle; 230
+ Doubles; 230
+ Instructing; 230
+ Second step; 230
+ Third step; 230
+ Fourth step; 230
+ Wig wag; 232
+ Points to remember; 233
+ Letter codes; 233
+ Arm signals; 234
+ Forward, march; 234
+ Halt; 234
+ Double time, march; 234
+ Squads right, march; 234
+ Squads left, march; 234
+ Squads right about, march; 234
+ Change direction or column right, march; 234
+ As skirmishers, march; 234
+ As skirmishers, guide center, march; 235
+ As skirmishers, guide right, march; 235
+ Assemble, march; 235
+ Range, or change elevation; 235
+ What range are you using?; 235
+ Are you ready?; 235
+ Commence firing; 235
+ Fire faster; 235
+ Fire slower; 235
+ To swing the cone of fire; 235
+ Fix bayonet; 236
+ Suspend firing; 236
+ Cease firing; 236
+ Platoon; 236
+ Squad; 236
+ Rush; 236
+
+
+CHAPTER 12.
+
+Guard duty; 237
+ Guards; 237
+ Formal guard mounting; 238
+ Ceremony; 238
+ First detail; 239
+ Other details; 239
+ Sergeant major; 239
+ Adjutant; 239, 240, 241
+ Officer of the guard; 240
+ New officer of the day; 240
+ Commander of the guard; 241
+ Guard duty in the trenches; 241
+
+
+CHAPTER 13.
+
+Company administration; 245
+ Notes on organization; 245
+ Prepare in advance to receive men; 245
+ Duties; 245
+ If in cantonments; 246
+ If in tents; 246
+ Men reporting; 246
+ Issue of equipment; 247
+ Organization; 248
+ Day's routine; 249
+ Reveille; 250
+ Mess; 250, 251
+ Sick call; 250, 251
+ Morning instruction; 250
+ Afternoon instruction; 251
+ Retreat; 251
+ School call; 251
+ Tattoo; 251
+ Call to quarters; 251
+ Taps; 251
+ Sundays and holidays; 252
+ Details; 252
+ Paper work; 252
+ Military correspondence; 253
+ Morning report; 254
+ Ration return; 254
+ Sick report; 254
+ Duty roster; 254
+ Monthly return; 255
+ Service record; 255
+ Discharge; 255
+ Final statement; 255
+ Muster roll; 255
+ Pay roll; 256
+ Names; 257
+ Losses; 257
+
+
+CHAPTER 14.
+
+Conferences; 259
+ Study; 259
+ Syllabus: Small problems for infantry; 261
+ Examinations; 269
+ Military science and tactics; 275
+ Minor tactics; 275
+
+
+CHAPTER 15.
+
+Trench warfare; 287
+ General principles; 287
+ Instructions to be issued by battalion commander; 287
+ Attack of a defensive position; 289
+ Attacking from trenches; 291
+ Defense of trenches; 296
+ Liaison; 298
+ Trench orders; 299
+ Selection of site; 302
+ Trench construction; 303, 307
+ General arrangement; 303
+ System of laying out trenches; 307
+ Revettments; 308
+ Sod; 310
+ Sand bags; 310
+ Concrete work; 310
+ Gabions; 310
+ Trench armament; 311
+ Loopholes; 311
+ Trench bottoms; 311
+ Communication trench; 313
+ Latrines; 315
+ Shelters; 315
+ Dugouts; 317
+ Sentries; 317
+ Position; 317
+ Entrances; 317
+ Galleries; 318
+ Bomb-traps; 318
+ Interior; 318
+ Depots for supplies; 318
+ Telephones; 319
+ Departure parallel; 319
+ Machine gun emplacements; 319
+ Listening posts; 321
+ Wire entanglements; 321
+ High entanglements; 321
+ Tracing entanglements; 322
+ Low entanglements; 322
+ Loose wire; 322
+ Criticisms by Lieut Henri Poire; 322
+Occupation; 325
+ Two main classes of relief; 325
+ General principles of relief; 325
+ Mechanism of relief; 325
+ Attack during the march; 328
+ The stay in the trenches; 329
+ Four objects of a trench commander; 329
+ His plan of defense; 329
+ Organization of defense; 329
+ Liaison; 331
+ Observation; 331
+ Trench work; 333
+ Offensive operations; 334
+ Rule of the trench commander; 335
+ Duties of the company commander; 335
+ Duties of platoon leaders as officers on duty; 339
+ Duties of platoon leaders; 339
+ In front line trenches; 340
+ Duties of non-commissioned officer on duty; 341
+ Patrols; 342
+ Sentinels; 342
+ Machine guns; 342
+ Snipers; 343
+ Organization of a platoon; 344
+ Deployments; 346
+ Normal battalion formation in attack; 347
+ General principles of the platoon formation in assault of
+ fortified positions; 349
+ Remarks regarding forming of wave from close order; 353
+ Some questions a platoon commander should ask himself; 354
+ Defensive measure against gas attacks; 356
+ General considerations; 356
+ Nature of gas attacks; 356
+ Gas clouds; 356
+ Gas projectiles; 358
+ Tear or lachrymatory shells; 359
+ Poison shells; 359
+ Smoke; 359
+ Mine and explosion gases; 359
+ Protection of shelters; 360
+ Methods of protection; 360
+ Shelters which should be protected; 361
+ Protection of weapons and equipment; 361
+ Small arms and S.A.A.; 362
+ Hand and rifle grenades; 362
+ Light trench mortars; 362
+ Action to be taken in trenches on gas alarm; 363
+ Action to be taken in billets and back areas; 363
+ Action during gas attack; 364
+ Protective measures; 364
+ Tactical measures; 364
+ Precautions against gas shells; 365
+ Action subsequent to a gas attack; 367
+ General; 367
+ Movement; 367
+ Clearing dugouts and other shelters; 367
+ Ventilation; 368
+ Natural; 368
+ By fire; 368
+ By fanning; 369
+ Cleaning arms and ammunition; 369
+ Treatment of shell holes; 370
+ Concealment from aerial observers; 370
+ Orders governing intrenchment problems; 372
+ Company organization; 384
+ Company headquarters; 384
+ Headquarters; 384
+ Personnel; 385
+ Commissioned; 385
+ Enlisted; 386
+ Equipment; 386
+ Trench standing orders; 386
+ Duties; 386
+ Sentries; 387
+ Patrols; 388
+ Stand to; 389
+ Machine guns; 389
+ Reliefs; 390
+ Guides; 391
+ Smoking and talking; 391
+ Procedure on arrival at trenches; 391
+ Log books; 392
+ Equipment; 392
+ Stretcher bearers; 392
+ Discipline; 392
+ Rations and cooking; 393
+ Sanitation; 393
+ Emergency dumps for companies (material); 394
+ Contents of dump; 394
+ Stores for company; 394
+ Stores at battalion headquarters; 394
+Conclusion; 396
+Bibliography; 397
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 14625-8.txt or 14625-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations. To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/14625-8.zip b/old/14625-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1bc9dfb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-8.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h.zip b/old/14625-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..236dfd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/14625-h.htm b/old/14625-h/14625-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d7b879
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/14625-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,19389 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Military Instructors Manual, by James P. Cole and Oliver Schoonmaker</title>
+ <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */
+<!--
+ P { margin-top: .5em;
+ text-align: justify;
+ margin-bottom: .5em;
+ text-indent: 1em;
+ }
+ H1 {
+ text-align: center; font-size: 175%; font-family: garamond, serif; /* all headings centered */
+ }
+ H5,H6 {
+ text-align: center; font-family: garamond, serif; /* all headings centered */
+ }
+ H2 {
+ text-align: center; font-size: 145%; font-family: garamond, serif; /* centered and coloured */
+ }
+ H3 {
+ text-align: center; font-size: 125%; font-family: garamond, serif; /* centered and coloured */
+ }
+ H4 {
+ text-align: center; font-family: garamond, serif; font-weight: normal;/* all headings centered */
+ }
+ H1.pg {text-align: center;
+ font-size: 100%;
+ font-family: Times Roman, serif; }
+ H3.pg {text-align: center;
+ font-size: 100%;
+ font-family: Times Roman, serif; }
+ HR { width: 33%;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em;
+ }
+ BODY{margin-left: 10%;
+ margin-right: 10%;
+ font-family: "Times New Roman", garamond, Times, serif;
+ }
+ dt { margin-left: 5%; text-indent: -5% }
+ a.noline {text-decoration: none}
+ ol.decimal {list-style-type: decimal}
+ ol.lroman {list-style-type: lower-roman}
+ ol.uroman {list-style-type: upper-roman}
+ ol.lalpha {list-style-type: lower-alpha}
+ ol.ualpha {list-style-type: upper-alpha}
+ div.ctr table { margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+ .indent1 {margin-left: 5em;}
+ .indent2 {margin-left: 10em;}
+ .indent3 {margin-left: 15em;}
+ .indent4 {margin-left: 3em;}
+ .indent5 {margin-left: .5em;}
+ .indent6 {margin-left: 4.5em;}
+ .indent7 {margin-left: 4em;}
+ .noindent {text-indent: 0em;}
+ .cen {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} /* centering paragraphs */
+ .sc {font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 100%;} /* small caps, normal size */
+ .sc2 {font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 110%;} /* small caps, 110% size */
+ .sc3 {font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 90%;} /* small caps, 90% size */
+ .img {text-align: center;} /* centering images */
+ .tble {text-align: center;} /* centering tables */
+ .tble2 {text-align: center; font-family: times, serif; font-size: 10pt;} /* centering tables, font change */
+ .tble3 {margin-left: 2em;}
+ .tdright {text-align: right;} /* aligning cell content to the right */
+ .tdcenter {text-align: center; white-space: nowrap;} /* aligning cell content to the center, no wrap */
+ .tdleft {text-align: left; white-space: nowrap;} /* aligning cell content to the left */
+ .tdleftsc {text-align: left; font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 110%; white-space: nowrap;} /* aligning cell content and small caps */
+ .tdleftn {text-align: left; white-space: nowrap; font-variant: normal; font-size: 90%;} /* aligning cells normal font, no wrap */
+ .dedic {margin-left: 20em; margin-right: 20em; text-align: center;}
+ .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */
+ .totoc {position: absolute; right: 2%; font-size: 85%; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */
+ .note {margin-left: 2em; margin-right: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} /* footnote */
+ .blkquot {margin-left: 4em; margin-right: 4em;} /* block indent */
+ .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */
+
+ .poem {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;}
+ .poem br {display: none;}
+ .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+ .poem span {display: block; margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+ .poem span.i2 {display: block; margin-left: 2em;}
+ .poem span.i4 {display: block; margin-left: 4em;}
+ hr.full { width: 100%; }
+ a:link {color:blue;
+ text-decoration:none}
+ link {color:blue;
+ text-decoration:none}
+ a:visited {color:blue;
+ text-decoration:none}
+ a:hover {color:red}
+ pre {font-size: 8pt;}
+ // -->
+ /* XML end ]]>*/
+ </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Military Instructors Manual, by James P. Cole
+and Oliver Schoonmaker</h1>
+<pre>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at <a href = "https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre>
+<p>Title: Military Instructors Manual</p>
+<p>Author: James P. Cole and Oliver Schoonmaker</p>
+<p>Release Date: January 9, 2005 [eBook #14625]</p>
+<p>Language: English</p>
+<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p>
+<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL***</p>
+<br /><br /><h3>E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Jeannie Howse,<br />
+ and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br />
+ (https://www.pgdp.net)</h3><br /><br />
+<hr class="full" />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<h1><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i"></a>MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL</h1>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<h3 style="font-size: 115%;">BY</h3>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<h2>CAPTAIN JAMES P. COLE, 59th INFANTRY</h2>
+<h4>Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training Regiment, Plattsburg, N.Y.</h4>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<h3 style="font-size: 115%;">AND</h3>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<h2>MAJOR OLIVER SCHOONMAKER, 76th DIVISION</h2>
+<h4>Assistant Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training Regiment, Plattsburg, N.Y.</h4>
+<a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii"></a>
+
+<div style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 105%">To<br />
+Colonel Wolf</div>
+<br />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 35.5%; margin-right: 35.5%; text-align: justify;">
+ <p style="text-indent: 0em; text-align: justify;">
+ Under whose careful supervision so many
+ have received their Military Training in
+ order that they may show the world in
+ battle the true spirit of American manhood.</p>
+</div>
+<a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<br />
+
+<a name="Acknowledgment" id="Acknowledgment"></a><h3><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v"></a>Acknowledgment.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>To have prepared this book within the time allotted to it, without the
+assistance of Candidates <span class="sc">Alcott Farrar Elwell</span>
+and <span class="sc">Lyle Milton Prouse</span>
+would have been impossible, and grateful recognition is made of their
+services. Not only much of the manual labor, but the preparation of
+entire chapters, has been in their hands.</p>
+
+<p>Candidates <span class="sc">Charles Huntington Jacobs</span> and
+<span class="sc">Michael Francis Mcaleer</span> have
+rendered very valuable assistance and we wish to thank the following
+candidates for the loan of materials used elsewhere, for typewriting
+and other work:</p>
+
+<div class="sc" style="margin-left: 35%;">
+Glenn Mack Ainsworth.<br />
+Philip M. Brown.<br />
+Nelson P. Bump.<br />
+Edwin G. Burrows.<br />
+Philip Doremus.<br />
+Walter Lane Hardenbrook.<br />
+Albert Blanchard Kellogg.<br />
+Henry Pratt Mckean.<br />
+Loren Ray Pierce.<br />
+Harry Raphael Saftel.<br />
+Roland Emery Packard.<br />
+Hoyt Sherman.<br />
+<a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi"></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<br />
+
+<a name="Introduction" id="Introduction"></a><h3><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii"></a>Introduction.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>The officer of to-day has big problems to face at short notice. His
+training has necessarily been so intensive that he cannot absorb a
+large amount of it. He has little time to make out schedules or even
+to look over the hasty notes he may have made during his training
+period, yet he finds himself facing problems which force him to
+immediate action.</p>
+
+<p>This book so condenses and systematizes general military instruction
+and the work done at Plattsburg so that it may be easily utilized in
+training other troops. No broad claim for originality is made except
+in the arrangement of all available material; the bibliography makes
+acknowledgment to all texts so utilized. Besides bringing helpful
+reminders to new officers regarding the elements of modern warfare,
+much of the material will be found of radical importance, as it is
+practically new and never before condensed. Since under the new army
+organization the platoon leader virtually has assumed the roll of a
+captain of a company, it is not enough for him to know simply his own
+part; he must be ready with all the information that his
+non-commissioned officers and men should know, and more important
+still, he must know how to teach them. Having little or no time to
+work over and digest for himself this mass of new material pouring in
+upon him, the officer may find in this book, material condensed and
+already arranged.</p>
+
+<p>It is hoped that this work will serve to recall to many officers,
+valuable points of military training which <a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii"></a>would otherwise be lost,
+to them in the mass of notes never looked at since the day they were
+made. More than this, every reader will find help in planning his
+work, saving thereby precious hours already too full of necessary
+duties, and will find fresh material for progress in the game of war.</p>
+
+<p>It is the purpose of this book to help men who are in the service of
+the United States, and through them to share in bringing victory.</p>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<br />
+
+<a name="toc" id="toc"></a><h3><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix"></a><b>Table of Contents</b>.</h3>
+
+ <table border="0" width="100%"><tr><td width="50%" align="center">
+ <table border="0" width="60%" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="1" summary="Table of Contents">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="25%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_1">Chapter 1.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Schedules</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_2">Chapter 2.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Infantry Drill Regulations</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_3">Chapter 3.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Physical Training<br />
+ Voice Culture</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_4">Chapter 4.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Use of Modern Arms
+
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Table of Contents">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftn">1. S.A.F.M.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftn">2. Range Practice.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftn">3. Pistol.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftn">4. Bayonet.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftn">5. Machine Guns.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftn">6. Grenade Instruction.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_5">Chapter 5.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Map Sketching</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_6">Chapter 6.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Articles Of War.
+ (<span style="font-variant: normal; font-size: 90%">Courts-Martial</span>.)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_7">Chapter 7.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Army Regulations</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_8">Chapter 8.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Practice Marches<br />
+ Field Work</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_9">Chapter 9.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Feeding Men<br />
+ Camping And Camp Sanitation.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_10">Chapter 10.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Personal Hygiene</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_11">Chapter 11.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Signaling</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_12">Chapter 12.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Guard Duty</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_13">Chapter 13.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Company Administration</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x"></a><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_14">Chapter 14.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Conferences
+
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Table of Contents">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">Study.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">Small Problems in Infantry.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">Examinations.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top"><a class="noline" href="#CHAPTER_15">Chapter 15.</a></td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc">Trench Warfare
+
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Table of Contents">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">1. General Principles.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">2. Siting Trenches.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">3. Construction.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="90%" class="tdleftn">4. Occupation.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc"><a class="noline" href="#Conclusion">Conclusion</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc"><a class="noline" href="#Bibliography">Bibliography</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="15%" valign="top">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleftsc"><a class="noline" href="#INDEX">Chapter Index</a></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+ </td></tr></table>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_1" id="CHAPTER_1"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1"></a>CHAPTER 1.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Schedules.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_2-3" id="Page_2-3"></a><span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Reserve Officers' Training Camp</span> <br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., August 27 to September 1, 1917</i></p>
+
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 1">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> Organization.<br />
+ Issue of Equipment.<br />
+ Organization of<br />
+ Barracks</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill<br />
+ Physical<br />
+ M.P.T. </td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Practice<br />
+ March</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Musketry<br />
+ Training<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conferences</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter"> Monday, Aug. 27</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> 7.00-12.00 a.m. <br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> &nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> &nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-21<br />
+ par. 48-73- 101-132<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter"> Tuesday, Aug. 28</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> Without arms<br />
+ 7.00-8.00 a.m. <br />
+ pars 48-73<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.30-10.30 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 101-132</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> 8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-30</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> &nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> &nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> 1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-21<br />
+ S.A.F.M. <br />
+ <br />
+ 7.00-9.00 p.m. <br />
+ par. 74-100<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter"> 2.30-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Care of arms and<br />
+ equipment</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Aug. 29</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">With arms<br />
+ 7.00-8.00 a.m. <br />
+ pars 48-100<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.30-10.30 a.m.<br />
+ par. 101-132</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-33</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Without arms<br />
+ 10.45-11.45 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-2.30 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-21</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31<br />
+ S.A.F.M. <br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 7.00-9.00 p.m. <br />
+ par. 159-198<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.30 p.m. <br />
+ Assembling and<br />
+ adjusting pack</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Aug. 30</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ par. 48-100<br />
+ <br />
+ 8.30-9.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 101-132<br />
+ <br />
+ 9.30-10.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 159-198</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-36</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.45-11.45 a.m.<br />
+ With arms</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-2.30 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 159-198<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2.30-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Assembling and<br />
+ adjusting pack </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Friday, Aug. 31</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m. <br />
+ par. 48-100<br />
+ <br />
+ 8.30-9.30 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 101-132<br />
+ <br />
+ 9.30-10.30 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 159-198</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-39</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">With arms and<br />
+ light pack<br />
+ 10.45-11.45 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 199-257-<br />
+ 758-765<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="14%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Military<br />
+ Courtesy </td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Sept. 1.</td>
+ <td colspan="6" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_4-5" id="Page_4-5"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Reserve Officers' Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917</i></p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 2">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill<br />
+ Physical<br />
+ M.P.T.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Musketry<br />
+ Training<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Semaphore<br />
+ Signalling</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Companies<br />
+ Practice March<br />
+ Full Kit</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Monday, Sept. 3</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 101-158<br />
+ 159-193</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-42</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.45-9.45 a.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.45-10.45 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Sept. 4</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-100<br />
+ 158-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-45</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.00-11.00 a.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.45-9.45 a.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Sept. 5</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 101-158<br />
+ 158-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-48</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.45-9.45 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.45-10.15 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Sept. 6</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-100<br />
+ 159-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-52</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.45-10.15 a.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Friday, Sept. 7</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 101-158<br />
+ 159-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-55</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.45-9.45 a.m.<br />
+ par. 1-31 </td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.45-10.15 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Sept. 8.</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_6-7" id="Page_6-7"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917</i>&mdash;(<i>Concluded</i>)</p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 3">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Grenade Instruction<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_A_1"><sup>[A]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Bayonet Drill</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Voice Culture</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conferences</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, Sept. 3</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Lesson 1<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.30-12.00 m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ par. 1-100 I.D.R.<br />
+ pgs. 7-46 M.G.D.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 1-158 I.D.R<br />
+ pgs. 7-46<br />
+ M.G.D.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Sept. 4</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.30-12.00 m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Lessons 1 and 2<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 101-158 I.D.R.<br />
+ pgs. 7-88 M.G.D.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 159-174 I.D.R.<br />
+ pgs. 47-88<br />
+ M.G.D.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Sept. 5</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.30-11.00 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Lessons 1 and 3<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-12.00 m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Physical Exam.<br />
+ 1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 159-174<br />
+ part 5, 6, 10, 19<br />
+ U.S.S.B.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 175-198 I.D.R.<br />
+ part III&mdash;U.S. <br />
+ Signal Book</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Sept. 6</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.30-12.00 m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Lessons 1 and 4<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 175-198, 1-61<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 792-798 I.D.R.<br />
+ par. 1-61<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, Sept. 7</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.30-11.00 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Lessons 1 and 5<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-12.00 m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 792-798 I.D.R.<br />
+ 1-61 S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ par. 199-220 1-61<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Sept. 8.</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em">
+<a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_A_1">[A]</a> As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_8-9" id="Page_8-9"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917</i></p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 4">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill<br />
+ I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Musketry Training<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">First Aid Manual,<br />
+ N.C.O's and<br />
+ Privates</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Signaling<br />
+ Morse Code<br />
+ (wig wag)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Practice March<br />
+ Full Kit</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, Sept. 10</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-7.30 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 133-150<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 7.30-8.00 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 123-127<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-8.30 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 159-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.30 a.m. <br />
+ pars. 35-43<br />
+ Sight setting<br />
+ and loadings</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.30-10.30 a.m. <br />
+ Wounds<br />
+ pgs. 286-288</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.30-11.00 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Sept. 11</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Same as for Monday</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.30-10.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 35-51<br />
+ Sight setting<br />
+ and loadings</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.30-11.00 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.30 a.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Sept. 12</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 199-211<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 159-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 35-57<br />
+ Sight setting<br />
+ and loadings</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.30-10.30 a.m.<br />
+ Fractures<br />
+ pgs. 288-290</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.30-11.00 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Sept. 13</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 199-224<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 159-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.00-11.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 35-60<br />
+ Sight setting<br />
+ and loadings</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-10.00 a.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, Sept. 14</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 159-224</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 35-61<br />
+ Sight setting<br />
+ and loadings</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.30-10.00 a.m.<br />
+ Resuscitation<br />
+ pgs. 290-296</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">10.00-11.00 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Sept. 15.</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_10-11" id="Page_10-11"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917</i>&mdash;(<i>Concluded</i>)</p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 5">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Grenade Instruction<a name="FNanchor_B_2" id="FNanchor_B_2"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_B_2"><sup>[B]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill, Physical<br />
+ M.P.T. </td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Bayonet Drill</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conference</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, Sept. 10</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-58<br />
+ pgs. 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-2.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 123-127,<br />
+ 199-223 I.D.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 2.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 123-127,<br />
+ 199-223 I.D.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M.<br />
+ <br />
+ 7.00-8.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 225-248 I.D.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 5-11<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Sept. 11</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-61<br />
+ pgs. 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 225-248 I.D.R.<br />
+ pgs. 5-11<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 249-257 I.D.R.<br />
+ pgs. 12-19<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Sept. 12</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-64<br />
+ pgs. 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 249-257 I.D.R.<br />
+ pgs. 12-19<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Bayonet Training</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 p.m.<br />
+ Patrolling, messages,<br />
+ orders, etc.<br />
+ pgs. 12-24 F.S.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Grenade Warfare</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Sept. 13</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-67<br />
+ pgs. 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-2.30 p.m.<br />
+ Patrolling, messages,<br />
+ orders, etc.<br />
+ pgs. 12-24 F.S.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 2.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ Notes on<br />
+ Grenade Warfare</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 p.m.<br />
+ Advance and<br />
+ Rear Guards<br />
+ pgs. 25-24 F.S.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 8.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Training &amp;<br />
+ Employment of<br />
+ Bombers</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, Sept. 14</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">11.00-11.30 a.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3.30-4.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-70<br />
+ pgs. 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">4.00-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1.30-2.30 p.m.<br />
+ Advance and<br />
+ Rear Guards<br />
+ pgs. 25-34 F.S.R.<br />
+ &mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;&mdash;<br />
+ 2.30-3.30 p.m.<br />
+ Training &amp;<br />
+ Employment of<br />
+ Bombers</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Sept. 15.</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_B_2" id="Footnote_B_2"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em">
+<a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_B_2">[B]</a> As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_12-13" id="Page_12-13"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., September 17 to September 22, 1917</i></p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 6">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Musketry Training<br />
+ S.A.F.M.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill, Physical<br />
+ M.P.T.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Sketching<a name="FNanchor_C_3" id="FNanchor_C_3"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_C_3"><sup>[C]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, Sept. 17</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-198<br />
+ close order only</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-61</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.00 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-73, 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.00-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pgs. 20-34<br />
+ Notes on Bayonet<br />
+ Training<br />
+ pars. 232-257, I.D.R.<br />
+ pars. 258-276, I.D.R.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Sept. 18</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-198<br />
+ close order only</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-61</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.00 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-76, 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.00-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Outposts<br />
+ pgs. 35-42, F.S.R.<br />
+ pars. 277-289, I.D.R.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Sept. 19</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-198<br />
+ close order only</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-61</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.00 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-79, 133-184</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.00-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Orders<br />
+ pgs. 43-50, F.S.R.<br />
+ pars. 290-326, I.D.R.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Sept. 20</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-198<br />
+ close order only</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-70</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.00 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-82, 133-132</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.00-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4:30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Marches<br />
+ pgs. 51-65, F.S.R.<br />
+ pars. 1-9, 14-18,<br />
+ E.F.M.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, Sept. 21</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-8.00 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 48-198<br />
+ close order only</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.00-8.30 a.m.<br />
+ pars. 32-70</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">8.30-9.00 a.m.<br />
+ pgs. 1-85, 133-134</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">9.00-11:30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 37-42, 61-72,<br />
+ 101-109, E.F.M.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Sept. 22</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_C_3" id="Footnote_C_3"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_C_3">[C]</a> As prescribed by Senior Instructor in Sketching.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;"><i>September 24-29, 1917.</i>
+<span class="sc2">
+Construction Of Trenches.</span></p>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_14-15" id="Page_14-15"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917.</i></p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 7">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Physical<br />
+ M.P.T.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Bayonet<a name="FNanchor_D_4" id="FNanchor_D_4"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_D_4"><sup>[D]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Range Practice<a name="FNanchor_E_5" id="FNanchor_E_5"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_E_5"><sup>[E]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Signalling</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, Oct. 1</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pars. 48-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 86-89 and 142<br />
+ Arm Combinations</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Oct. 2</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Company<br />
+ &frac12; hour<br />
+ pars. 48-198</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 90-93 and 142<br />
+ Arm Combinations</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Semaphore and<br />
+ Wigwag</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Oct. 3</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Battalion<br />
+ &frac12; hour<br />
+ pars. 258-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 90-93 and 142<br />
+ Arm Combinations</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday. Oct. 4</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Battalion<br />
+ &frac12; hour<br />
+ pars. 258-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93 and 142<br />
+ Arm Combinations</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Semaphore and<br />
+ Wigwag</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, Oct. 5</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Battalion<br />
+ &frac12; hour<br />
+ pars. 258-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93 and 142<br />
+ Arm Combinations</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Oct. 6</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_D_4" id="Footnote_D_4"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_D_4">[D]</a> Per Bayonet Program.</p></div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_E_5" id="Footnote_E_5"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_E_5">[E]</a> Per schedule Senior Instructor Musketry Training.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_16-17" id="Page_16-17"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917</i>&mdash;(<i>Concluded</i>)</p>
+
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 4">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Field Work</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Pistol</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conference</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, Oct. 1</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Patrolling
+</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ Nomenclature<br />
+ &frac12; hour<br />
+ Manual</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 258-274, I.D.R.<br />
+ Prob. 1 to Situation 3.<br />
+ S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 263-285, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 1, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, Oct. 2</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Same as for Monday</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 275-285, I.D.R.<br />
+ Situation 3, Prob. 1, to<br />
+ end of Problem, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 286-304, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 2, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, Oct. 3</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Patrolling</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ Manual<br />
+ &frac12; hour<br />
+ Position and Aiming</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 286-304, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 2, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 305-326, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 3 to Situation 4<br />
+ S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, Oct. 4 </td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Same as for Wednesday</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 305-326, I.D.R.<br />
+ Prob. 3 to Situation 4,<br />
+ S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 327-349, I.D.R.<br />
+ Situation 4, Problem 3 to<br />
+ end of Problem, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, Oct. 5</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Patrolling</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Same as for Wednesday</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 327-349, I.D.R.<br />
+ Situation 4, Prob. 3, to<br />
+ end of Problem, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Per later<br />
+ announcement</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, Oct. 6</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_18-19" id="Page_18-19"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917</i>.</p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 9">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Physical Drill<br />
+ M.P.T.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Bayonet<a name="FNanchor_F_6" id="FNanchor_F_6"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_F_6"><sup>[F]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Range Practice<a name="FNanchor_G_7" id="FNanchor_G_7"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_G_7"><sup>[G]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Signaling</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, October 8</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289<br />
+ 1 hour<br />
+ pars. 123-158<br />
+ 199-224</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93, 133-142</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7-30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, October 9</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289<br />
+ 1 hour<br />
+ pars. 123-158<br />
+ 199-224</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93, 133-142</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7-30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, October 10</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289<br />
+ 1 hour<br />
+ pars. 123-158<br />
+ 199-224</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93, 133-142</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7-30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, October 11</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289<br />
+ 1 hour<br />
+ pars. 123-158<br />
+ 199-224</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93, 133-142</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7-30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, October 12</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, October 13</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_F_6" id="Footnote_F_6"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_F_6">[F]</a> Per Bayonet Program.</p></div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_G_7" id="Footnote_G_7"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_G_7">[G]</a> Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor Musketry Training.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_20-21" id="Page_20-21"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917</i>&mdash;(<i>Concluded</i>)</p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 10">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Field Work<br />
+ (Company) <a name="FNanchor_H_8" id="FNanchor_H_8"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_H_8"><sup>[H]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conferences</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, October 8</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Prob. 4 to Situation 5<br />
+ exclusive, S.P.I.<br />
+ pars. 596-622, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 4, S.P.I<br />
+ pars. 596-660, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, October 9</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Situation 5, Prob. 4 to<br />
+ end of Problem, S.P.I.<br />
+ pars. 623-660, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 5, S.P.I.<br />
+ pars. 661-677, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, October 10</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Problem 5, S.P.I.<br />
+ pars. 661-677, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 6, S.P.I.<br />
+ pars. 678-707, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, October 11</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Problem 6, S.P.I.<br />
+ pars. 678-707, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 7 to<br />
+ Situation 5, exclusive<br />
+ pars. 350-370, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, October 12</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Advance and rear<br />
+ guards, outposts,<br />
+ patroling, messages<br />
+ and orders</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ as per later<br />
+ announcement</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, October 13</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_H_8" id="Footnote_H_8"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em">
+<a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_H_8">[H]</a>
+ To include conferences and critique on the ground of exercise conducted.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;"><i>October 15-17, 1917</i>.
+<span class="sc2">Construction Of Trenches.</span></p>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;"><i>October 18-19, 1917</i>.
+<span class="sc2">Occupation Of The Trenches From 8.00 a.m.</span>
+<i>October 18, 1917</i> <span class="sc2">To 8.00 a.m.</span> <i>October 19, 1917.</i></p>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em"><i>October 20, 1917</i>.
+<span class="sc2">7.30 a.m.-11 a.m. Conference Of Trench Occupation,
+11 a.m. Inspection.</span></p>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_22-23" id="Page_22-23"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917</i></p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 11">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill, I.D.R.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Physical Drill<br />
+ M.P.T.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Bayonet
+<a name="FNanchor_I_9" id="FNanchor_I_9"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_I_9"><sup>[I]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Range Practice
+<a name="FNanchor_J_10" id="FNanchor_J_10"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_J_10"><sup>[J]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Signaling</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, October 22</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93<br />
+ pg. 149</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, October 23</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93<br />
+ pg. 149</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, October 24</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93<br />
+ pg. 149</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, October 25</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ pars. 48-289</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour<br />
+ pgs. 17-93<br />
+ pg. 149</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, October 26</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, October 27</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_I_9" id="Footnote_I_9"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_I_9">[I]</a> Per Bayonet Program.</p></div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_J_10" id="Footnote_J_10"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_J_10">[J]</a> Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_24-25" id="Page_24-25"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917</i>&mdash;(<i>Concluded</i>)</p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 12">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Field Work<a name="FNanchor_K_11" id="FNanchor_K_11"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_K_11"><sup>[K]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conferences</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, October 22</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 350-370, I.D.R.<br />
+ Review Problems 1-6<br />
+ S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 371-401, I.D.R.<br />
+ Prob. 7 to Situation 5,<br />
+ S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, October 23</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 371-401, I.D.R<br />
+ Prob. 7 to Situation 5<br />
+ S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 402-441, I.D.R.<br />
+ Situation 6, Prob. 7 to<br />
+ end of Prob. S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, October 24</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 402-442, I.D.R.<br />
+ Situation 6, Prob. 7<br />
+ to end of prob.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 442-494, I.D.R.<br />
+ Prob. 8, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, October 25</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 442-494, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 8, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ pars. 495-536, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 9, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, October 26</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.30-4.30 p.m.<br />
+ Companies in attack<br />
+ and defense (to include<br />
+ siting of trenches)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ as per later<br />
+ announcement</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, October 27</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_K_11" id="Footnote_K_11"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_K_11">[K]</a> To include conferences and critique on the ground of exercise conducted.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_26-27" id="Page_26-27"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917</i></p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 13">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Drill</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Physical Drill</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Bayonet<a name="FNanchor_L_12" id="FNanchor_L_12"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_L_12"><sup>[L]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Signaling<a name="FNanchor_M_13" id="FNanchor_M_13"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_M_13"><sup>[M]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Range Practice</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, October 29</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Attack Formation<br />
+ [Trench]</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, October 30</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Attack Formation<br />
+ [Trench]</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, October 31</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Attack Formation<br />
+ [Trench]</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, November 1</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">1 hour<br />
+ Attack Formation<br />
+ [Trench]</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&frac12; hour</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.30-11.30 a.m.<br />
+ 1.15-4.15 p.m.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, November 2</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, November 3</td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_L_12" id="Footnote_L_12"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_L_12">[L]</a> Per Bayonet Program.</p></div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_M_13" id="Footnote_M_13"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_M_13">[M]</a> Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc., as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.</p></div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><a name="Page_28-29" id="Page_28-29"></a>
+<span class="sc2">
+Schedule Of Instruction, Plattsburg Training Camp</span><br />
+<i>Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917</i>&mdash;(<i>Concluded</i>)</p>
+
+<div class='tble2'>
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" width="100%" summary="Schedule 14">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Field Work<a name="FNanchor_N_14" id="FNanchor_N_14"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_N_14"><sup>[N]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Conferences</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Study</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Monday, October 29</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ pars. 495-536, I.D.R.<br />
+ Problem 9, S.P.I.</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 10, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Tuesday, October 30</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Problem 10, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled<br />
+ later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 11, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Wednesday, October 31</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Problem 11, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled<br />
+ later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 12, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Thursday, November 1</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">2 hours<br />
+ Problem 12, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled<br />
+ later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">3 hours&mdash;1 hour daily<br />
+ and 7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ Problem 13, S.P.I.<br />
+ Battle Fire Training<br />
+ (lesson scheduled later)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Friday, November 2</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">Battalions in attack<br />
+ and defense<br />
+ (Field Kit)</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">7.00-9.00 p.m.<br />
+ as per later<br />
+ announcement<a name="FNanchor_O_15" id="FNanchor_O_15"></a>
+ <a class="noline" href="#Footnote_O_15"><sup>[O]</sup></a></td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="16%" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="16%" valign="top" class="tdcenter">Saturday, November 3 </td>
+ <td colspan="5" valign="middle" class="tdcenter">As prescribed by Senior Instructors.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_N_14" id="Footnote_N_14"></a><div class="note">
+<p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_N_14">[N]</a>
+ To include conferences and critique on the ground of exercise conducted.</p></div>
+
+<a name="Footnote_O_15" id="Footnote_O_15"></a><div class="note">
+<p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_O_15">[O]</a>
+ During the week each Battalion will be given &frac12; day's instruction in camouflage
+ under direction Senior Engineer Instructor.</p></div>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30"></a>
+<span class="sc2">Schedules.</span></p>
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><i>November 5th-9th, 1917.</i></p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5%;">
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Infantry Drill Regulations, 2 hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">March in full kit, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Signaling, &frac12; hour.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Physical drill, 2-&frac12; hours,</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Bayonet, 2-&frac12; hours,</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Machine gun instruction, 7-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Field fortification, 10 hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Conferences, 10 hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Study, 10 hours.</span><br />
+In the study and conferences the following will be taken up:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Manual of Courts-Martial&mdash;pp. 305 to end.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">First Aid.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Personal Hygiene.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Camp Sanitation.</span><br />
+</div>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><i>November 12th-17th, 1917.</i></p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5%;">
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Physical, drill, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Bayonet drill, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Battalion ceremonies, 1-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Battalion march, full kit, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Field fortification and trench warfare, 23 hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Study and conferences, 10 hours.</span><br />
+In the study and conference's the following will be taken up:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Trench Warfare.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Grenades</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Gas Attack and Defense.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Communication.</span><br />
+</div>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em"><i>November 19th-23rd, 1917.</i></p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5%;">
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Physical, drill, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Bayonet drill, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Infantry Drill Regulations, 2-&frac12; hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Company administration and Army regulations, 40 hours.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2em;">Ceremonies, parades and reviews, 5 hours.</span><br />
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_2" id="CHAPTER_2"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31"></a>CHAPTER 2.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Infantry Drill Regulations.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>The greatest lesson of the present war is that the keynote of success
+is discipline. In trenches the direct control of the men is even less
+than in extended order in open warfare, and only thoroughly
+disciplined troops with a trusted leader can hope to succeed.</p>
+
+<p>The successful officer will show anger or irritation only in rare
+cases, and then by design: he will know his men individually and be as
+considerate of them as possible, ready to do himself what he asks to
+have done; just in administering punishments; clear in giving his
+commands and insistent that they be carried out promptly; he will
+learn from drilling his men the quickest way a desired result can be
+accomplished, and to give the necessary commands in the most effective
+manner.</p>
+
+<p>He will read his Infantry Drill Regulations through each month and
+will always find something that he never knew or has forgotten. He
+will always consult it before going to drill. In explaining movements
+he will use blackboard diagrams in conferences. On the field he will
+take the fewest possible men and have movement executed by the numbers
+properly before the other men. Then have all the men go through the
+movement a number of times.</p>
+
+<p>The object of each exercise or drill should be explained to the men
+whenever possible.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training.&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%"><b>School of the Soldier</b>.</p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Instruction Without Arms.</p>
+
+<p>The object of the facings and marchings is to give the soldier
+complete control of his body in drills so that he can move easily and
+promptly at any command.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%;">
+<a name="Page_32" id="Page_32"></a><b>Attention</b>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Position Of Attention</span>.&mdash;This is the position a soldier assumes when in
+ranks or whenever the command <i>attention</i> is given.</p>
+
+<p>In the training of anyone nothing equals the importance of a proper
+posture; it is the very foundation upon which the entire fabric of any
+successful training must be founded.</p>
+
+<p>Instructors must persist in the development of this position until the
+men assume it from habit.</p>
+
+<p>At the command, 1. Company (Squad, etc.), 2. Attention, the following
+position is assumed:</p>
+
+<p>1. <span class="sc">Heels Together And On A Line</span>.&mdash;If the heels are not on a line, the
+hips and sometimes even the shoulders, are thrown out of line.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">Feet Turned Out Equally, Forming An Angle Of 45 Degrees</span>.&mdash;If the
+feet are not turned out equally, the result will be the same as above.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">Knees Extended Without Stiffness</span>.&mdash;Muscles should be contracted
+just enough to keep the knees straight. If locked, men tire easily and
+faint if at attention a long time.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">The Trunk Erect Upon The Hips</span>, the spine extended throughout its
+entire length; the buttocks well forward.</p>
+
+<p>The position of the trunk, spine and buttocks is most essential. In
+extending the spine the men must feel that the trunk is being
+<i>stretched up</i> from the waist until the back is as straight as it can
+be made.</p>
+
+<p>In stretching the spine the <i>chest</i> should be <i>arched</i> and raised,
+<i>without</i>, however, <i>raising the shoulders or interfering with natural
+respiration</i>.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="sc">Shoulders Falling Naturally</span> and moved back until they are square.</p>
+
+<p>Being square, means having the shoulder ridge and the point of the
+shoulder at right angles to a general anterior-posterior plane running
+through the body. <a name="Page_33" id="Page_33"></a>They should never be forced back of this plane, but
+out rather in line with it.</p>
+
+<p>6. <span class="sc">Arms Hanging Naturally</span>, thumbs against the seams of the trousers,
+fingers extended, and back of hand turned out.</p>
+
+<p>The arms must not be forcibly extended nor held rigidly; if they are,
+a compensating faulty curve will occur in the lumbar region.</p>
+
+<p>7. <span class="sc">Head Erect, Chin Raised</span> until neck is vertical, eyes fixed upon
+some object at their own height.</p>
+
+<p>Every tendency to draw the chin in must be counteracted.</p>
+
+<p>8. When this position is correctly assumed, the men will be taught to
+<i>incline the body forward</i> until the weight rests chiefly upon the
+balls of the feet, heels resting lightly upon the ground.</p>
+
+<p>When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of the head
+should pass in front of the ear, shoulder and thighs, and find its
+base at the balls of the feet.</p>
+
+<p>Every tendency toward rigidity <i>must be avoided</i>; all muscles are
+contracted only enough to maintain this position, which is one of
+co-ordination, of <i>physical and mental alertness</i>, that makes for
+mobility, activity and grace. A man who faints standing at attention
+has not taken the proper position.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%"><b>Rests.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Position Of Rest And At Ease</span>.&mdash;When
+men are standing <i>at rest</i> or <i>at
+ease</i> they must be cautioned to avoid assuming any position that will
+nullify the object of the position of Attention. Standing on one leg,
+folding arms, allowing shoulders or head to droop forward, must be
+discountenanced persistently until the men form the habit of resting
+with feet separated but on the same line, hands elapsed behind the
+back,&mdash;<a name="Page_34" id="Page_34"></a>head, shoulders and trunk erect, (m.p.t., pp. 21 and 22.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fall Out</span>.&mdash;Leave ranks.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Rest</span>.&mdash;One foot in place. Can talk.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">At Ease</span>.&mdash;One foot in place. Silence.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Parade Rest</span>.&mdash;Do not slouch down on right foot. Keep chest well up.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Eyes Right, 2. Front</span>.&mdash;Have it snappy.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right Face</span>.&mdash;To face <i>in marching</i> and advance, turn on the ball of
+either foot and step off with the other foot in the new line of
+direction. (Do not confuse with the ordinary command, &quot;Right Face.&quot;)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right Half Face</span>.&mdash;45 degrees, used to show position in Right Oblique.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">About Face</span>.&mdash;Have weight well back. Not necessary to move right foot
+after turn is made.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Hand Salute</span>.&mdash;Manner of rendering is index to manner in which all
+other duties are performed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Forward March</span>.&mdash;Shift weight to right foot, <i>mentally</i>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Double Time, March</span>.&mdash;Tendency to go too fast. Time it. 30 steps in 10
+seconds. Take one step quick time, then take up double time.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Mark Time, March</span>.&mdash;Given as either foot strikes the ground. To resume
+full step, <i>Forward, March.</i></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Half Step, March</span>.&mdash;All steps and marchings executed from a halt,
+except Right Step, begin with left foot.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right Step, March. Backward, March</span>.&mdash;Executed in quick time only and
+at trail, without command. 15 inch Step.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squad, Halt</span>.&mdash;Given as either foot strikes the ground.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">By The Right Flank, March</span>.&mdash;Step off with right foot.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35"></a><span class="sc">To The Rear, March</span>.&mdash;Given as right foot strikes the ground. If
+marching in double time, turn to the rightabout taking 4 steps, in
+place, in cadence, and step off with left foot.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Change Step, March</span>.&mdash;Being in march; given as either foot strikes the
+ground.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Manual of Arms.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Purpose</span>.&mdash;To make the man so accustomed to the rifle that he handles
+it without a thought.</p>
+
+<p>Eight rules govern the carrying of the piece. See paragraph 75,
+Infantry Drill Regulations.</p>
+
+<p>Six rules govern the execution of the manual. See paragraph 76,
+Infantry Drill Regulations.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Commands and Cautions.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Order, Arms</span>.&mdash;See that all the fingers of the right hand are around
+the piece.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Present, Arms</span>.&mdash;Left forearm horizontal and against the body.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Port, Arms</span>.&mdash;Right forearm horizontal. Left forearm against the body.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right Shoulder, Arms</span>.&mdash;Insist on an angle of 45 degrees. Trigger guard
+in hollow of shoulder. Right hand does the work.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Left Shoulder, Arms</span>.&mdash;Right hand in next to last position grasps small
+of stock.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Parade, Rest</span>.&mdash;Left hand grasps piece just below stacking swivel.
+Right foot straight back 6 inches.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Trail, Arms</span>.&mdash;Piece at angle of about 30 degrees, about 3 inches off
+the ground.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Rifle Salute</span>.&mdash;Left forearm horizontal.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fix Bayonet</span>.&mdash;Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is fixed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36"></a>Unfix Bayonet</span>.&mdash;Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is unfixed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Inspection Arms</span>.&mdash;Be sure men glance down in chamber and keep hold of
+bolt handle.</p>
+
+<p>Parade, Rest can be executed only from order arms, and the command
+Attention follows Parade, Rest.</p>
+
+<p>Any movement not in the manual, <i>e.g.</i>, Right, Face, breaks the
+execution of movements by the numbers. The number of counts in the
+execution of each command must be remembered.</p>
+
+<p>Distinguish between <i>raise</i> and <i>carry</i> and <i>throw</i>.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>School of the Squad.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Object</span>.&mdash;To give basic element, the squad, its first lesson in team
+work.</p>
+
+<p>Team work wins battles just as it does football games.</p>
+
+<p>Avoid keeping men too long at the same movement.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Composition Of Squad</span>.&mdash;7 men and a corporal. Never less than 6 nor
+more than 11 men.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fall In</span>.&mdash;Instructor 3 paces in front of where center is to be.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fall Out</span>.&mdash;If under arms, always preceded by Inspection Arms. Does not
+mean dismissed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Count Off</span>.&mdash;Right file front and rear do not execute eyes right. Front
+and rear rank men count off together.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Inspection Arms</span>.&mdash;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right Dress, Front</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1">
+<li> Company Commander must establish base file or files before giving the command Right Dress.</li>
+<li> Right flank men remain facing to front.</li>
+<li> Be sure first four men are on desired line and rest of company can easily be made to conform.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37"></a>Right guide may be established at any point desired and at command Right Dress all march to their proper positions
+ without other command, and at the trail.</li>
+<li> Have men beyond base files step forward until one pace beyond where new line is to be and then dress back on line
+ established. </li></ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Guide Right</span>.&mdash;Keep head and eyes off the ground. Close in or open out
+gradually.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Take Interval, To The Right, March, Squad, Halt</span>.&mdash;(At
+command &quot;To the
+Right&quot;) Rear rank falls back 60 inches. At March, all face to right
+and leading man of each rank steps off, followed by the others at
+four-pace intervals, rear-rank men marching abreast of their file
+leaders. When halted all face to the front.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">To Reform, Assemble To The Right (Left), March.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Take Distance, March</span>.&mdash;1-2-3-4 front rank, 1-2-3-4 rear rank, 4-pace
+intervals. Guide in each four is right.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Assemble, March</span>.&mdash;No. 1, Front rank stands fast.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Stack Arms</span>.&mdash;Piece of even number front rank: butt between his feet,
+barrel to front. Even number rear rank passes piece to file leader.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Take Arms</span>.&mdash;Loose pieces are returned by even numbers front rank. If
+No. 2 of rear rank is absent, No. 1 rear rank takes his place in
+making or breaking stacks and resumes his post. Pieces are never
+stacked with bayonet fixed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Oblique, March</span>.&mdash;Taught from Right half face. Half faced to front
+after obliquing, Forward, March. If at half step or mark time while
+obliquing, Oblique, March.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">In Place, Halt</span>.&mdash;All halt and stand fast without changing position of
+pieces.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+<a name="Page_38" id="Page_38"></a>Resume March</span>.&mdash;Only given after In place, Halt.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Right Turn</span>.&mdash;Turn on moving pivot is used by subdivisions of a column
+in executing change of direction.</p>
+
+<p>Each rank successively and on same ground executes movement. All
+except pivot man execute two right obliques. No marking time. Arriving
+on new line, all take the half step, glance toward marching flank and
+take full step without command as last man arrives on the line.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right Half Turn</span>.&mdash;Executed in similar manner.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squads Right</span>.&mdash;Turn on fixed pivot is used in all formations from line
+into column and the reverse. No half step. Right flank man faces to
+right in marching and marks time. Rest of front rank oblique once to
+new position. Step off on 5th step.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squad Right About</span>.&mdash;Front rank twice executes squads right.</p>
+
+<p>In rear rank, No. 3 with No. 4 abreast of him on his left and followed
+in column by the second and first moves straight forward until on
+prolongation of new line he is to occupy; faces to right in marching
+and proceeds to place. Then all face to the right in marching, mark
+time and glance toward marching flank. As last man arrives on new line
+all step off without command on 9th step.</p>
+
+<p>Deploying as skirmishers and following the corporal are covered under
+Company Extended Order.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>School of the Company.</b></p>
+
+<p>The company is the basic fighting and administrative unit, and must be
+easily handled and capable of promptly carrying out the will of its
+commander.</p>
+
+<p>Team work among the squads, so that the company can be easily managed
+as a whole, is the purpose of company drill.</p>
+
+<p>Close order drill is for discipline.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39"></a>Numerical designations of squads or platoons do not change.</p>
+
+<p>Center squad is middle or right middle squad of the company.</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 10%;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="90%" summary="Table1">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">8 (6-11) men</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 squad.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">7 (2-7) squads</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 platoon.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">4 platoons</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 company.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">4 (2-6) companies</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 battalion (1,026 officers and men).</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">3 battalions</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 regiment (3,755, including medical detachment).</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">2 regiments</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 brigade (8,210 officers and men).</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">2 brigades</td>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdcenter">=</td>
+ <td width="75%" class="tdleft">1 division (27,152 officers and men).</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<p>First Sergeant when not commanding a platoon is opposite the 3rd file
+from outer flank of first platoon, in line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fall In</span>.&mdash;First Sergeant 6 paces front of center, facing company.
+Right guide takes post at such point that the center will be 6 paces
+from and opposite the First Sergeant.</p>
+
+<p>Squad leaders salute and report all present; or Private(s) &mdash;&mdash;
+absent. First Sergeant does not return salute of squad leaders.</p>
+
+<p>Captain takes post 12 paces in front of center of company in time to
+receive report of First Sergeant, &quot;Sir, all present or accounted for,&quot;
+or names of unauthorized absentees. E.G. A man in hospital might be
+reported absent by squad leader if he did not know where he was, but
+First Sergeant would know, and would not report him absent.</p>
+
+<p>Captain returns salute of First Sergeant who then takes his post
+<i>without command</i>.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em;">
+<a name="Page_40" id="Page_40"></a>Platoon Movements In Platoon Column.</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 23%;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="55%" summary="Platoon Movements">
+ <tr>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdcenter"><i>Leading Platoon, C.O.</i></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">On Right into Line</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Right Turn.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Column Right</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Right Turn.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Right Front into Line</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Continue. (<span style="font-size: 80%;">Caution</span>) If halted, Forward.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 23%;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="55%" summary="Platoon Movements">
+ <tr>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdcenter"><i>Rear Platoon, C.O.</i></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">On Right into Line</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Continue. (<span style="font-size: 80%;">Caution</span>) If halted, Forward.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Column Right</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Continue. (<span style="font-size: 80%;">Caution</span>) If halted, Forward.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Right Front into Line</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">Right Oblique.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em;">
+Questions Which Come Up In Daily Military Life.</p>
+
+<p>It is well to have a solution on hand.</p>
+
+<p>(1) The company is in line reversed,&mdash;16th squad where 1st squad
+should be. Bring the company into proper line, 1-2-3-4; 5-6-7-8;
+9-10-11-12; 13-14-15-16.</p>
+
+<p>(2) You are platoon leader. Your platoon is drilling separately and
+you get assembled in company line.</p>
+
+<p>16-15-14-13; 12-11-10-9; 4-3-2-1; 5-6-7-8.</p>
+
+<p>What commands do you give to get the platoon into line properly
+arranged?</p>
+
+<p>(3) You are in charge of the company and find yourself marching into
+the company street in reverse order. What commands do you give to
+correct this?</p>
+
+<p>(4) You are marching your company to the rear along a road through a
+narrow cut. Suddenly around a bend comes an ambulance. To let it pass,
+you must immediately reduce your marching front. What is the quickest
+method? (This can be used also in arranging the advance party of the
+outguard.)</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41"></a>(5) You are marching your company in company front, and wish to march
+in column of platoons. What do you command?</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em;">
+Answers.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent3">
+<li> Right (left) by squads.<br />
+Column left (right).<br />
+Squads right (left)<br />
+Company, Halt.
+</li>
+<li> Forward; 2 March.<br />
+On left into line; 2 Platoon; 3 Halt.</li>
+<li> On right (left) into line.</li>
+<li> 1 Squads right; 2 March.<br />
+2 By the left flank; 2 March.</li>
+<li> 1 Right by squads; 2 March.<br />
+2 Platoons left front into line; Double time;<br />
+2 March.</li></ol>
+
+<p>On the O.D. Shirt Collar Insignia is worn as follows:</p>
+
+<p>&quot;On the right side, in the middle of the collar, the letters (U.S.),
+(U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.), and the insignia of rank; the letters one inch
+from the end of the collar and the insignia of rank one-half inch from
+letters.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>&quot;On the left side in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the
+end, the insignia of the arm of the service.&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em"><i>For Second Lieutenants.</i></p>
+
+<p>On the right side, in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the
+end, the letters (U.S.), (U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.).</p>
+
+<p>On the left side, in the middle of the collar and one inch from the
+end, the insignia of the arm of service.</p>
+
+<p>When the Star Spangled Banner is played, an officer in uniform if
+uncovered stands at Attention. If covered he salutes. An officer
+&quot;Presents his compliments&quot; only to his juniors.</p>
+
+<a name="Page_42" id="Page_42"></a><ol class="indent4">
+<li><span class="sc">
+Company Right, March; Company</span>, Halt; Forward March.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Being in line to turn. Right-flank man is pivot.
+Right guide steps back at command March, and marks time.</p>
+</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Platoons Right, March</span>;
+Company, Halt; Forward March.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line to Column Platoons, reverse.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Guides must be covering.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Squads Right</span>,
+MARCH; Company, Halt.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line to Column Squads, reverse.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line of Platoon to Column Platoons, reverse.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Right Turn, March</span>; Forward, March.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line to change direction. Right guide is pivot. Men do not glance
+toward flank. Rear rank begins oblique on same ground as front rank.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">All take full step at command, Forward, March.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Column Right, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">First Platoon Leader, Right Turn.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Other Platoon Leaders (if halted), Forward; (if marching), cautions,
+continue the march. All Platoons execute right turn on same ground.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Column of Platoons to change direction.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Column Right, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Column Squads to change direction.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Platoons, Column Right, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Column Squads to Line of Platoons.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Squads Right, Column Right, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Right by Squads, March.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line to Column Squads and change direction.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Right guide posts himself and takes 4 short steps. Right Squad
+conforms.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Squads Right, Platoons, Column Right,
+March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Platoons right by Squads, March.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line to line of Platoons. Guide same as in 8.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43"></a>
+Squads Right About, March</span>; Company, Halt.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">To face or march to the rear.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;"><i>About Face</i>; Forward, March.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">To the rear a few paces.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">
+On Right Into Line, March</span>; Company, Halt, Front.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Column Platoons or Squads to line to side.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">If executed in double time, leading squad marches double time until
+halted.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">
+Right Front Into Line, March</span>; Company, Halt, Front.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Column Platoons or Squads to line (front).</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">In double time, halting and aligning are omitted. Guide is toward side
+of first unit in line. If halted, leader of leading unit commands,
+Forward.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">
+Platoons, Right Front Into Line, March</span>; Company, Halt, Front.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Column Squads to Column Platoons.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Line of Platoons to Company line.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Route Step, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Muzzles kept elevated.
+Ranks cover, preserve distances. (If halted, at
+rest.)</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">At ease, March. Silence preserved. (Halted, at ease.)</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Right By Twos, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">All but 2 right files of leading Squad execute in place, Halt.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Right By Files, March.</span></p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">To diminish the front in Column Squads.</p></li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Squads Right Front Into Line, March.</span><br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Twos right front into line, march.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Twos or files, to Column Squads. Leading file or files halt.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">N.B.&mdash;If right by twos, then left into line or reverse.</p></li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Dismiss The Company</span>.&mdash;First Sergeant places himself 3 paces to front.
+2 paces from nearest flank, salutes, <a name="Page_44" id="Page_44"></a>faces toward opposite flank,
+commands, Inspection Arms, Port Arms, Dismissed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Fall In Company When It Cannot Be Formed By Squads</span>.&mdash;Inspection
+Arms.</p>
+
+<p>Right Shoulder Arms.</p>
+
+<p>Roll Call. Each man as name is called, executes Order Arms.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">For Muster, Commands Are</span>: Open Ranks,
+<span class="sc">March, Front</span>. (At command Open
+Ranks, Rear Rank drops back 4 steps, 5 counts.)</p>
+
+<p>(As mustering officer approaches) Right Shoulder Arm's. Attention to
+Muster.</p>
+
+<p>Each man, as name is called, answers &quot;Here&quot; and comes to Order Arms.</p>
+
+<p>Company Commander is on right flank, in same place as &quot;Prepare for
+Inspection.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">In Aligning Company</span>.&mdash;Captain
+places himself 2 paces from and facing
+the flank toward which dress is made, verifies alignment and commands
+Front.</p>
+
+<p>(Platoon leaders same position for Platoon alignment.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To March Squad Without Unnecessary Commands</span>.&mdash;The Corporal commands,
+<i>Follow Me</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Men always at ease. Squad conform to pace of Corporal, and carry
+pieces as he does.</p>
+
+<p>In line or skirmish line, No. 2 front rank follows in trace of
+Corporal at 3 paces. Others guide on No. 2.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">As Skirmishers, March</span>.&mdash;At
+run. Rear rank men on right of file
+leaders. All conform to Corporals gait. In squad alone, skirmish line
+is formed on No. 2, front rank, Corporal ahead when advancing, in rear
+when halted.</p>
+
+<p>Regular interval in skirmish line &frac12; pace = 1 yard per man.</p>
+
+<p>Squad deployed = 10 paces.</p>
+
+<p>Any number of paces may be specified, <i>e.g.</i> As Skirmishers, at 10
+paces, March.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45"></a><span class="sc">
+Assemble, March</span>.&mdash;Men form on corporal. If he continues to advance,
+move in double time, form and follow. Do not assemble while marching
+to rear.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Kneel</span>.&mdash;Left
+forearm and left lower leg form straight line.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Lie Down</span>.&mdash;On both knees, then both elbows.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Rise</span>.&mdash;Stand on point marked by both knees.</p>
+
+<p>(When deployed, may sit instead of kneel.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Loadings And Firings</span>.&mdash;Loadings are executed only in line and skirmish
+line.</p>
+
+<p>Firings are always executed at a halt.</p>
+
+<p>When kneeling and lying down in double rank, rear rank does not load,
+aim or fire.</p>
+
+<p>In both cease firing and suspend firing pieces are loaded and locked.
+(Sec. 150, i.d.r., April, 1917, is incorrect.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+1. Aiming</span>.&mdash;Target carefully pointed out.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+2. Sight-setting Announced</span>. (Battle sight if none announced.)</p>
+
+<p>3. (If by volley), Ready, Aim, Squad <span class="sc">Fire</span>.</p>
+
+<p>To continue volley firing, Aim, Squad <span class="sc">Fire</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Volley fire is used against large, compact enemy or in fire of
+position.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fire At Will</span>.&mdash;Normally
+employed in attack and defense; 3 shots per
+minute at effective ranges (600 to 1,200 yards); 5 to 6 shots per
+minute at close ranges (up to 600 yards).</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em"><span class="sc">Clip Fire</span>:</p>
+
+<div class="tble3">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="65%" summary="Clip Fire">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="8%" valign="middle" class="tdleft">Used</td>
+ <td width="4%" class="tdleft">(1)</td>
+ <td width="88%" class="tdleft">To steady men.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="8%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="4%" class="tdleft">(2)</td>
+ <td width="88%" class="tdleft">To produce a short burst of fire.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em;">
+Extended Order.</p>
+
+<p>A squad acting alone, as one out on a patrol or for instruction, the
+corporal acts as the leader of a small platoon leading the advance,
+and in rear when halted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46"></a>Men come to trail as they come on the skirmish line.</p>
+
+<p>On halting, a deployed line faces front (direction of real or assumed
+enemy), and takes cover.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Corporal Cautions</span>.&mdash;By the Right Flank (if halted). Corporal steps out
+looking back to get his 10-pace interval. Squad Halt.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Left Face</span>.&mdash;Base squad deploys as soon as it has room.</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a deployed squad is center without command.</p>
+
+<p>Captain indicates point on which corporal of base squad is to march.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Company Right</span> is executed as explained for front rank of Company, but
+at &frac12; pace intervals.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Deployments.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<i>From Line, to Form Skirmish Line to Front.</i></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">As Skirmishers, Guide Right, March</span>.&mdash;1. If marching, corporal
+commands, Follow Me. Corporal of base squad moves straight to front,
+deploys as soon as possible and advances until Company, Halt, is
+given.</p>
+
+<p>Other squads move to left front and place squads on the line.</p>
+
+<p>If guide is center, other corporals on right of center squad move to
+the right, and squads on the left to the left, and bring their squads
+on the line.</p>
+
+<p>If guide is left, other corporals move to right front.</p>
+
+<p>2. If at halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal, 3 paces in
+front of the former line, as soon as it has room.</p>
+
+<p>Other squads are conducted by the left flank, to their places.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Deploy From Column Of Squads, Forming Skirmish Line To The
+Front</span>.&mdash;If at a halt, base <a name="Page_47" id="Page_47"></a>squad deploys abreast of its corporal 3
+paces in front of its former position.</p>
+
+<p>If marching, base squad deploys and moves straight to the front.</p>
+
+<p>If guide is right, other corporals move to left front and place squads
+on line.</p>
+
+<p>If guide is center, corporals in front move to right (if at a halt, to
+right rear), the corporals in rear of center squad move to left and
+come on line in succession.</p>
+
+<p>Column of twos or files are deployed by same commands in same manner.</p>
+
+<p>If deployment in an oblique direction is desired, the captain points
+out desired direction.</p>
+
+<p>Column of squads may be turned to the flank or rear and then deployed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Assemble, March</span>.&mdash;In skirmish line, men assemble at a run, to their
+places individually. Squads do not assemble and march to places as
+units as do platoons.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Platoons, Assemble</span>.&mdash;Men assemble individually on the run, in their
+platoons and are then marched to relative position on base platoon as
+indicated by position or command of captain.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Platoon Columns</span>.&mdash;Platoon leaders should be sure to go through center
+of platoon.</p>
+
+<p>Platoon guides in rear.</p>
+
+<p>Columns should be 20 yards apart, or more.</p>
+
+<p>(Used to take advantage of few favorable routes where cover is poor or
+ground difficult.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Squad Columns</span>.&mdash;Men oblique and follow squad leader. No advantage in
+cover, but used to advance more quickly over rough or brush grown
+ground.</p>
+
+<p>(It might be desirable to teach men to take squad columns from column
+of squads.)</p>
+
+<p>In assembling from Platoon or Squad columns, the men reform by
+platoons or squads and are conducted by their leaders to point
+indicated by captain.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48"></a><i>Thin lines</i> are used to cross wide stretches under artillery fire or
+heavy, long range rifle fire which cannot be profitably returned.</p>
+
+<p>No. 1's <span class="sc">Forward, March</span>.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em">First line is led by platoon leader, right platoon.</p>
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em; margin-top: .1em;">Second line is led by platoon guide, right platoon.</p>
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em; margin-top: .1em;">Third line is led by platoon leader, next platoon, etc.</p>
+<p style="margin-top: .1em">Quick time, unless conditions otherwise demand.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Captain Points Out New Line</span>.&mdash;Original intervals preserved.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Disadvantage</span>.&mdash;Serious loss of control over company.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Advantage</span>.&mdash;Offers less definite target and is less likely to draw
+fire.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Being In Skirmish Line.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+By Platoon (2 Platoons, Squads, 4 Men, Etc.), From The Right,
+Rush</span>.&mdash;Leader of rush usually platoon leader.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1">
+<li>Selects new line.</li>
+<li>Cease firing.</li>
+<li>Prepare to rush.</li>
+<li>Follow me.</li>
+<li>Commence firing.</li></ol>
+
+<p>When whole company rushes, it is led by Captain. Platoon leader lead
+their platoons.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Commands.</p>
+
+<p>Commands should be so given as to be distinctly heard by all the men
+who have to execute them. It is unfair to expect good execution of a
+slovenly command or one that cannot be heard. A sufficient interval
+should be allowed between the preparatory command and the command of
+execution, proportioned to the size of the command, so that each man
+has time to grasp the movement before execution is required.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_49" id="Page_49"></a><b>School of the Battalion.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Basis</span>.&mdash;4 companies to a battalion.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Arrangement</span>.&mdash;Right to left by rank of Captains. After formation order
+is not kept with reference to rank of Captains.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Number</span>.&mdash;From right to left in whatever direction.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Center</span>.&mdash;Actual center or right center company.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Band</span>.&mdash;Places itself as if it were an adjoining battalion on right.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Dressing</span>.&mdash;Each company is dressed by its Captain who places himself
+on the flank toward which the dress is to be made.</p>
+
+<p>In battalion line beside the guide (or beside flank file of the front
+rank if guide is not in line) facing front.</p>
+
+<p>In column of companies&mdash;2 paces from the guide and facing down the
+line.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>To Form the Battalion.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Other Than Ceremonies</span>.&mdash;Column of squads. Adjutant does not take his
+post until companies are formed. Each Captain halts company and
+salutes Adjutant. Adjutant returns salutes and when last Captain has
+saluted, faces Major and reports &quot;Sir, the Battalion is formed.&quot; He
+joins Major without command.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+For Ceremonies</span>.&mdash;Or when directed, Battalion is formed in line.
+Adjutant places himself 6 paces to right of right company and facing
+in direction line is to extend. Guides precede companies on line by 20
+paces. Adjutant causes guides to cover. Companies are halted one pace
+in rear of line and dressed to right against arm of guide. When guides
+of left company have been posted, Adjutant by shortest route moves to
+post facing Battalion midway between post of Major and center of
+Battalion. Adjutant commands: <a name="Page_50" id="Page_50"></a>1. Guides, 2. Posts, 3. Present, 4.
+Arms. He then faces about and reports, &quot;Sir, the Battalion is formed.&quot;
+Major commands, &quot;Take your post, sir.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Dismiss The Battalion</span>.&mdash;Dismiss your companies.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Rectify The Alignment</span>.&mdash;See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraphs
+273-274.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Rectify The Column</span>.&mdash;See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraph 275.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Helpful Hints To Beginners</span>.&mdash;These hold good with few exceptions.</p>
+
+<p>When in column of squads; first command of Captain begins with word
+&quot;Column.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>When in column of companies; first command of Captain begins with word
+&quot;Squads.&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+In Column Of Squads</span>.&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>On right (left) into line.</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Squads right. (Captain marches beside right guide.)</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Continue to march (If halted, forward).</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: (Upon uncovering preceding company) Squads right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Battalion</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Halt</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Right Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: (Coming on line). Company Halt, Right Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Right (left) front into line.</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Column right.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Column half right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: (Halts and allows company to pass him and form column
+of squads to right.) Squads left, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51"></a>Rear Captains: When company in column of squads arrives one pace in
+rear of the right flank of the company that has formed in line. Column
+half right, March. The Captain then takes 5 paces beyond the flank of
+the last company in line, allows company to pass him, and as rear
+guide reaches him, commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left
+Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Line of companies at</i> (seven) paces, guide left (right).
+(Close on first company from column of squads is no longer used in
+Battalion drill.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward).</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Column half right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: (When company reaches a position 7 paces to the flank
+of the leading company.) Column half right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Battalion</i>.</p>
+
+<p>All Captains: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Halt</i>.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Column of companies, first company</i> squads right (left).</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Squads right.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward.).</p>
+
+<p>As each company reaches the point where the first company formed line
+the Captain commands: Squads right, March.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+In Column Of Companies Or Close Column Of Companies</span>.&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>On right (left) into line.</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Right turn.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward).</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52"></a>Rear Captains: Each Captain takes 5 paces beyond the left flank of the
+company that has just executed the turn and commands: Right turn,
+March.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Battalion</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Halt</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Right Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: (As they come on line.) Company Halt, Right Dress,
+Front.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Right (left) front into line.</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Second Capt: Right by Squads.</p>
+
+<p>Third and fourth Captains: Squads Right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Halt, Left Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Column half left, March, Column half right March.
+Taking 5 paces from the flank of the company last on line and allowing
+the company to pass by him until the rear guide reaches him, Captain
+commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Close on first company</i> (Never any other).</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward).</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Halt.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: As each successive company closes to 8 paces from the
+company immediately in front, the Captain commands: Company Halt.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Extend on fourth company.</i> (Never any other.)</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward).</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53"></a>Rear Captains: Halt. Then as each company in rear of the leading
+company gets the proper distance (company front plus 5 paces) the
+Captain commands: Forward March.</p>
+
+<p>Close column not extended in double time.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Column of squads, first company</i> squads right (left).</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Squads right.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward). As each company
+reaches the point where the first company formed column of squads, the
+Captain commands: Squads right, March.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Column right (left).</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Right turn.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Continue to March (if halted, forward).</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: When the marching flank of the company is one pace from
+the new line the Captain commands: Forward March.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: Other companies march squarely up to the turning point
+and each changes direction at the Captain's command: Right turn,
+March, Forward, March.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Line Of Companies Or Close Line Of Companies</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Battalion right (left).</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Column right.</p>
+
+<p>Flank Captains: Column half right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Flank Captains: When each company has moved 7 paces to the flank of
+the base company the command is: Column half right, March. The
+companies are then marched echeloned with an interval of 7 paces.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Battalion</i>.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Company.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Halt</i>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54"></a>Flank Captains: Continue to march. As each company comes into line
+with the base company the Captain commands: Company, Halt.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Close on first (fourth) company.</i></p>
+
+<p><i>Extend on first (fourth) company.</i> Both movements executed in the
+same manner.</p>
+
+<p>First Captain: (If marching.) Halt. (If halted, cautions &quot;Stand
+Fast.&quot;)</p>
+
+<p>Flank Captains: Squads right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March.</i></p>
+
+<p>Flank Captains: Right Oblique, March. (When the company has closed
+sufficiently): Forward March, Squads left, March. (Then as the company
+comes on the line with first company): Company, Halt.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Major: <i>Column of Squads, first (fourth) company, forward.</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Forward.</p>
+
+<p>Flank Captains: Column half right (left).</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March.</i></p>
+
+<p>Flank Captains: As their companies come onto the line behind the
+leading company (at 4.4 paces) the Captain commands: Column half
+right, March.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+In Battalion Line.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Close on first (fourth) company.</i></p>
+
+<p>First Captain: Stand fast (Caution).</p>
+
+<p>Second Captain: Squads right, column right.</p>
+
+<p>Third and fourth Captains: Squads right, column half right.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>March.</i></p>
+
+<p>Second, third and fourth Captains: As each company reaches a point 8
+paces behind the company just preceding it into close column, the
+command is given: Column half right, March. (Cautioning &quot;Guide left&quot;
+when closing on first company&mdash;&quot;Guide right&quot; when closing on fourth
+company): Squads left, March, Company, Halt.</p>
+
+<p>Major: <i>Halt.</i></p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55"></a>First Captain: Right Dress, Front.</p>
+
+<p>Rear Captains: (As they come on the line): Company Halt, Right Dress,
+Front.</p>
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 85%;">
+<a href="images/image-1.jpg">
+<img border="0" src="images/image-1.jpg" width="100%" alt="Proper Arrangement Of Shelter Tents" /></a>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<span class="sc">Plate No. 2A. <br />CO. I&mdash;N.E. Proper Arrangement Of Shelter Tents</span>.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 85%;">
+<a href="images/image-2.jpg">
+<img border="0" src="images/image-2.jpg" width="100%" alt="Layout Of Equipment For Inspection" /></a>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<span class="sc">Plate No. 2B. <br /> Layout Of Equipment For Inspection.<br />
+Tent Pins Should Be Laid In Echelon Three Inches Apart</span>.</p>
+</div>
+<br />
+
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Inspections.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; margin-bottom: 1em; text-indent: 0em;">
+(Kitchen and mess inspections have been covered under Feeding Men.)</p>
+
+<p>Daily inspection of the barracks should be made and rigid discipline
+enforced as to the floors being kept clean, scrubbed once a week,
+bedding and bed clothes aired out of doors every Tuesday, shoes
+cleaned and kept in order under bunks, lockers under bunks, toilet
+articles and books all kept in order. Sheets, comforters and blankets
+should be shaken out, folded as for pack and laid on top of pillow
+until afternoon, each day.</p>
+
+<p>In inspecting men every week see that hair is kept short and feet
+clean and in good condition, toe nails trimmed. Insist on woolen
+socks.</p>
+
+<p>Equipment must be inspected carefully, each week, to see that it is in
+good condition.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Special Points Of Company Inspection.</p>
+
+<p>After Open Ranks, March, given from usual position in front of
+Company, the Captain takes his post 3 paces in front of Right Guide,
+facing to the left and commands:</p>
+
+<p>1. Front. 2. Prepare for Inspection.</p>
+
+<p>The Lieutenants are 3 paces in front of the center of their
+respectives Platoons, facing to front.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>If equipment is also to be inspected, commands are as follows:</p>
+
+<p>1. Close Ranks. 2. March. Stack Arms. Backward, March. Take Interval
+to the Right, March. Company, Halt.</p>
+
+<p>1. Unsling Equipment. 2. Open Packs. Close Packs. Sling Equipment.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_56" id="Page_56"></a><b>Battalion Inspection.</b></p>
+
+<p>At command, Prepare for Inspection, given by the Major, each Captain
+commands, Open Ranks. They do not salute when the Major and Inspector
+approach.</p>
+
+<p>The Lieutenants take their places as in Company Inspection. Each
+Captain commands:</p>
+
+<p>Company Attention. Prepare for Inspection.</p>
+
+<p>Lieutenants face about and stand at ease, after being inspected or
+passed.</p>
+
+<p>After inspection:</p>
+
+<p>Close Ranks, march.</p>
+
+<p>Rest.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Regimental Inspection.</b></p>
+
+<p>Commands mean and principles are same as for Battalion. (Look up Post
+of Colonel, par. 754, Infantry Drill Regulations.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Ceremonies.</b></p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Battalion Review.</p>
+
+<p>After Battalion is formed in line, Major faces front.</p>
+
+<p>When Reviewing Officer halts, Major turns about and commands:</p>
+
+<p>Present Arms; turns to front and salutes. Major turns about; commands
+Order Arms, and again faces front.</p>
+
+<p>When Reviewing Officer is within 6 paces, the Major salutes, takes
+post on the right and accompanies him.</p>
+
+<p>On arriving at the right of the line again, Major salutes, halts,
+takes his post in front of Battalion and commands:</p>
+
+<p>Pass in Review. Squads Right, March.</p>
+
+<p>Major and Staff execute Eyes Right and take post on right of Reviewing
+Officer remaining until Battalion has passed, when he salutes and
+rejoins it.</p>
+
+<p>Double time is given by Major when the Battalion comes to its original
+starting place and the Battalion <a name="Page_57" id="Page_57"></a>passes in review as before except
+that Eyes Right is omitted and Major salutes only when he leaves
+Reviewing Officer.</p>
+
+<p>Major and Staff may be dismounted at discretion of Commanding Officer.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Battalion Parade.</p>
+
+<p>When band sounds off, the Reviewing Officer and his Staff stands, if
+dismounted, with arms folded: if mounted they remain at attention at a
+convenient distance in front of the center and facing the Battalion.</p>
+
+<p>The Battalion is not presented for Battalion Parade.</p>
+
+<p>The Lieutenants take posts in front of center of their Platoons at
+Captain's command for dressing his Company on the line.</p>
+
+<p>After Guides Posts, the Adjutant commands:</p>
+
+<p>(To Battalion) Parade Rest.</p>
+
+<p>(To Band) Sound Off.</p>
+
+<p>Battalion, Attention. Present Arms.</p>
+
+<p>At conclusion of National Anthem Adjutant reports:</p>
+
+<p>Sir: The parade is formed.</p>
+
+<p>The Major directs: <i>Take your post, sir</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Major then commands: <i>Order Arms</i>.</p>
+
+<p>At conclusion of Manual of Arms, Major directs: <i>Receive the reports,
+sir</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Captains report &quot;'C' Company present or accounted for,&quot; or &quot;'C'
+Company, 1 officer, 7 enlisted men are absent.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Publish the orders, sir:</p>
+
+<p>After publishing them, Adjutant commands: Officers, Center, March. At
+command Center, Officers face center: at command March, march to
+center and halt, facing front.</p>
+
+<p>Commands Forward and Halt are given by Senior Officer. Left Officer of
+center Company is guide and marches on the Major. Halt at 6 paces from
+Major, salute and come down with the Major.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58"></a>At command Officers Posts, March, Officers face about at command
+&quot;posts&quot; and are conducted by Senior Officer who halts them 3 paces
+from line. Officers, Halt. Posts, March. Face outward at command,
+Posts, step off with 4 pace intervals. Lieutenants go to their posts
+by shortest route, in rear of Company.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Regimental Parade.</p>
+
+<p>Lieutenants remain in file closers.</p>
+
+<p>At command, Officers Center, Captains remain at their posts with their
+Companies.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc">Regimental Review</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Regiment formed in line or line of masses.</p>
+
+<p>Colonel commands: Pass in Review.</p>
+
+<p>Each Major commands: 1, <i>Squads Right</i>; 2, <i>March</i>.</p>
+
+<p>If in line of masses, Colonel commands: &quot;Pass in Review.&quot; Major of
+Right Battalion commands: <i>Column of Squads, First Company Squads,
+Right, March</i>.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">
+ Fire Direction Is The Function Of The Captain And Higher
+ Commanders. Above The Grade Of Captain And Direction Is
+ Principally Tactical. With A Captain It Implies The Ability To
+ Issue Correct Fire Orders To Meet Given Situations In Order
+ That The Fire Of The Company May Be As Effective As Possible.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">
+ Fire Control Is The Combined Product Of The Fire Unit
+ Commanders And The Firers. The Fire Unit Is The Platoon.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">
+ Fire Discipline Means Strict Attention To The Signals And
+ Orders Of The Commander, And Is The Faculty Developed In The
+ Men By Instruction And Training, Of Commencing, Ceasing, Oe
+ Diminishing Fire, Or Of Concentrating It Upon A <a name="Page_59" id="Page_59"></a>defined Object
+ In Obedience To The Deliberate Will Of The Commander.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Note</span>.&mdash;
+It is to be remembered that all grades of commanders are
+supposed to be familiar with the duties of all below them.</p>
+
+<p>In issuing orders all Officers, in addition to announcing where they
+will be found will give the location of the next higher Commander.</p>
+
+<p>The authorities for statements under the Platoon Leader and below are
+not given after each statement but the paragraphs from which they are
+deduced are given under the heading for each grade. This course was
+thought necessary to avoid repetition.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+I. The Colonel.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>&mdash;(369, 380, 528&mdash;i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Advancing to the battlefield as:
+ <ol class="lalpha">
+ <li>Independent commander ordinarily with
+ the advance guard in order that
+ he may:
+ <ol class="decimal">
+ <li>Receive information promptly.</li>
+ <li>Personally see the situation (reconnoiter).</li>
+ <li>Order the deployment.</li>
+ <li>Begin the action strictly in accordance with his own wishes.</li>
+ </ol>
+ </li>
+ <li>Subordinate commander (427, i.d.r.).<br />
+ &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;After receiving his order for the action,
+ precedes his command as far
+ as possible in order to:
+ <ol class="decimal">
+ <li>Personally reconnoiter the ground.</li>
+ <li>Be prepared to issue his orders promptly.</li>
+ </ol>
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+ <li>During the action; such as will enable him to:<a name="Page_60" id="Page_60"></a>
+ <ol class="lalpha">
+ <li>Observe the progress of events.</li>
+ <li>Receive and transmit messages and orders.</li>
+ <li>Be in constant, direct, and easy communication with the
+ reserve. (369, i.d.r.) </li>
+ </ol>
+ </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Note&mdash;For a discussion of the position of leaders see Subject V.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Duties</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>After having received his orders, the regimental commander
+ leads his regiment forward in a column, or in line of columns,
+ until the time arrives for issuing the regimental order, he
+ then: (426, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Assigns targets and sectors or tasks to battalions and special
+ units. (312, 381 and 426, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Provides for necessary reconnaissance to front and flank. (428,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Announces his position and also that of the next higher
+ commander.</li>
+<li>Controls the reserve as the tactical situation demands. (441,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Regulates ammunition supply. (316, f.s.r. and 552, i.d.r.) See
+ also full discussion of the ammunition supply in Subject VIII. </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Note&mdash;The colonel is assisted in the performance of his duties by the
+regimental staff.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+II. The Major.</p>
+
+<p>The battalion is the attack unit whether acting alone or as part of a
+larger force. (305, i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">Position</span>:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">(The general rules for a colonel apply)</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Where he can best:
+ <ol class="lalpha">
+ <li>Direct the reinforcing of the firing line from the
+ support. (315, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61"></a>Observe the progress of events, (369, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Maintain contact with regimental headquarters. (369,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>On the firing line when all the supports have joined. (315,
+ i.d.r.) (See Subject V.) </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+General.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Duties</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Conducts his battalion according to sector and mission assigned
+ him.</li>
+<li>Directs first disposition of battalion by tactical orders,
+ giving subordinates&mdash;
+
+ <ol class="lalpha">
+ <li>Information of the enemy.</li>
+ <li>Position of supporting and neighboring troops.</li>
+ <li>The general object to be attained.</li>
+ <li>The special problem for each company (291, i.d.r.) <br />
+ (This includes making the primary apportionment of the
+ target.) (303, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>If practicable, the point or time at which the fire fight
+ is to open. (304, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Orders for flank protection and reconnaissance, unless
+ specifically provided for by higher authority. (293, 397
+ and 398, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>His position and that of the next higher commander.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Controls supports, dispatches reinforcements from support to
+ firing line. (226 and 297, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Controls subsequent movements by suitable orders or commands.
+ (291, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Regulates ammunition supply&mdash;(See Subject VIII, also Pars.
+ 316-317, f.s.r.) (The <a name="Page_62" id="Page_62"></a>combat train is the immediate reserve
+ supply of the battalion.)
+
+ <ol class="lalpha">
+ <li>Is responsible for the proper use of the combat train.</li>
+ <li>Insures maintenance of the prescribed allowance at all
+ times.</li>
+ <li>Causes combat trains to march immediately in rear of the
+ battalion unless directed otherwise. (548, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>When battalion deployed on his own initiative, indicates
+ whether extra ammunition shall be issued. (294, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>When battalion deployed pursuant to orders from higher
+ authority, causes issue of extra ammunition unless
+ specifically ordered not to do so. (294, 548, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>When combat wagons are emptied, directs them to proper
+ rendezvous to be refilled. (548, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Sees that combat wagons and belts of men are refilled as
+ soon as possible after an engagement. (553, i.d.r.) </li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Maintains contact with adjoining troops. (399 i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>May harmonize ranges used by the companies on the firing line.</li>
+<li>Determines when bayonets shall be fixed. (318, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Subject to orders from higher authority, determines the point
+ from which the charge to be made. (319, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Orders the charge. (318, i.d.r.) </li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Special.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li><i>In attack</i>:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>May select formation in which companies advance. (212,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63"></a>Designates&mdash;
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+ <li>The direction of the objective. (303, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>The companies for the firing line.</li>
+ <li>The companies for the support.</li>
+ <li>The order and front of the companies in the firing line.</li>
+ <li>The right or left company of the firing line as the base
+ company.</li>
+ <li>May indicate when the advance by rushes is to start.
+ (311, i.d.r.) </li>
+ </ol>
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+<li><i>In defense</i>:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Describes front of each company. (292, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Assigns sector of fire. (244, 302, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Locates fire, communicating and cover trenches.</li>
+ <li>Directs preparation of obstacles.</li>
+ <li>Assigns companies to construct trenches and obstacles.</li>
+ <li>Details troops to occupy trenches. (321, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Causes firing line and supports to fix bayonets when a
+ charge by the enemy is imminent. (324, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Seeks opportunities for counter attacks. (326, i.d.r.) </li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+III. Battalion Staff.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+Positions</span>:</p>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="65%" summary="aligning headings">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="25%" class="tdleft" valign="middle" style="white-space: nowrap">
+ Battalion Adjutant<br />
+ Battalion Sergeant Major</td>
+ <td width="5%" valign="middle" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap; font-size: 28pt">
+ }</td>
+ <td valign="middle" width="67%" class="tdleft">
+ with Major.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td colspan="3" class="tdleft" valign="middle" style="white-space: nowrap">
+ Mounted orderlies&mdash;both with Major (one with major and one with
+ <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adjutant) until horses are sent to rear when both may be with
+ <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;the horses or one take the horses and the other remain with the
+ <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;major, as he may direct.
+ </td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+<br />
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+<a name="Page_64" id="Page_64"></a>Duties:</span></p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">All assist the major in any way directed, by</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Reconnaissance. (565, i.d.r., 25, f.s.r.)</li>
+ <li>Observation of the firing line.</li>
+ <li>Maintaining contact with regimental headquarters.</li>
+ <li>Maintaining contact with the support.</li>
+ <li>Receiving, communicating, and sending visual signals from and
+ to front and rear.</li>
+ <li>Observing fire effect and progress of events.</li>
+ <li>Keeping copies of all orders, messages, and other data
+ necessary, for his war diary. (35, f.s.r.)</li>
+ </ol>
+
+<p>When there is only one range finder to the battalion, the Battalion
+Sergeant Major is the Battalion Range Taker. When not actually engaged
+in taking ranges, he assists the Major as above or, preferably, he may
+be charged with the duty of maintaining communication with the
+companies of the firing line.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">The major designates a sergeant to take charge of the battalion combat
+train. Under the Major's direction, he</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Conducts combat train as far to the front with the battalion
+ as directed.</li>
+ <li>Issues ammunition to the battalion.</li>
+ <li>Takes combat train to rendezvous for refilling, under
+ direction of the regimental commander.</li>
+ <li>Rejoins battalion, if it is not in action, or, if it be
+ engaged, joins or establishes communication with the
+ regimental reserve. (548, 549 and 553, i.d.r.)<br />
+ (This sergeant is not provided for in the present
+ organization. Recommendation has been made to the War
+ Department that he be included in the Tables of
+ Organization.)
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<a name="Page_65" id="Page_65"></a>IV. The Captain.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+(The Fire Director.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>: <i>Where he can best:</i></p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Control his four platoons. (248, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Observe fire effect. (249, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>See the major and platoon chiefs. (234, i.d.r.) </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Duties</span>: <i>Before fire action:</i></p>
+
+<div class="indent4">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="95%" summary="align">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">1.</td>
+ <td colspan="3" class="tdleft">
+ Conducts his company to place of deployment assigned by the
+ major's orders (297, i.d.r.) in best manner. (212, i.d.r.)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">2.</td>
+ <td colspan="3" class="tdleft">
+ Designates target, and allots part to each platoon. (245 and
+ 249, i.d.r.) (See Overlapping Method, page 15, Subject V. Fire
+ Tactics.)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">3.</td>
+ <td colspan="3" class="tdleft">
+ Determines the range. (240 and 249, i.d.r.)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">4.</td>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">
+ Announces the sight setting.</td>
+ <td rowspan="3" width="5%" valign="middle" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap; font-size: 36pt">
+ }</td>
+ <td rowspan="3" width="69%" valign="middle" class="tdleft">(249, i.d.r.)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">5.</td>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">
+ Indicates class of fire and</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">6.</td>
+ <td width="20%" class="tdleft">
+ Time to open fire.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="3%" class="tdleft">7.</td>
+ <td colspan="3" class="tdleft">
+ Informs the subordinates as to the location of the battalion
+ commander, and, when necessary, announces his own position.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em"><i>During the Action:</i></p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Observes fire effect. (249, 414, 415, i.d.r., and 216,
+ s.a.f.m.)</li>
+<li>Corrects material errors in sight setting. (249, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Prevents exhaustion of ammunition supply. (249, 550, 551,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Distributes ammunition received from rear. (249, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Provides for the collection and distribution of the ammunition
+ of the dead and wounded. (551, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Is on the alert for the Major's signals or commands. (226 and
+ 234, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66"></a>In the absence of express directions from the major, if
+ commanding a flank company, determines when advances by rushes
+ shall be attempted. (311, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Indicates size of fractions to rush. (311, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Leads a rush by entire company. (223, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Leads the charge. (319, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>When necessary, designates new platoon leaders and sees that new
+ squads are organized and new squad leaders designated to replace
+ those disabled. (104, 375, i.d.r.) </li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+V. Buglers.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Join the Captain when the company deploys. (164, i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Duties</span>: (235, i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li><i>One Bugler</i>&mdash;
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Observes the enemy.</li>
+ <li>Observes the target.</li>
+ <li>Observes for fire effect.</li>
+ <li>Watches platoon leaders for signals.</li>
+ <li>Transmits signals to platoon leaders.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+<li><i>The other</i>&mdash;
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Watches the Major for signals and repeats them back.</li>
+ <li>Transmits information to the Major.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Both</span>&mdash;
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Repeat bugle signals &quot;charge.&quot; (319, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Carry field glasses, message pads, pencils and signal flags.
+ (i.u.a.e.m., 387, i.d.r.)</li>
+ <li>Act as messengers.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+<span class="sc">
+All Of The Above Implies That They Must Be Proficient In</span>:<br />
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Signaling&mdash;Hand, Arm and Letter Codes.</li>
+ <li>Observation for fire effect.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67"></a>Location and definition or description of targets.</li>
+ <li>Bugle calls.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+VI. Range Estimators.</p>
+
+<p>Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
+estimators in the company are designated &quot;Range Finders.&quot; (240,
+i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<p>The term &quot;Range Finder&quot; is a misnomer as a range finder is an
+instrument. The school uses the term &quot;Range Estimator&quot; when applied to
+an individual. The attention of the War Department has been called to
+this.</p>
+
+<p>The range estimators are given special training in the estimation of
+ranges.</p>
+
+<p>When an action is pending, the Captain receives from the Major the
+primary apportionment of the target or sector of fire. (303, i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<p>The Captain returns to the company, and, avoiding dangerous grouping,
+assembles the platoon leaders and range estimators, and points out to
+both the target of the Battalion and Company.</p>
+
+<p>The Range Estimators immediately begin their estimation of the range
+to the company target; the Captain meanwhile continues with his
+instructions to the Platoon Leaders.</p>
+
+<p>The instructions to the Platoon Leaders completed, the Range
+Estimators announce to the Captain either their individual estimates,
+or the mean of their estimates as deduced by one of the estimators.
+The Range Estimators then take their customary posts (240, i.d.r.),
+and the Captain indicates to the Platoon Leaders the range to be used.</p>
+
+<p>The Range Estimators act in an advisory capacity to the Captain. The
+mean of their estimates will usually be the most accurate deduction
+available in <a name="Page_68" id="Page_68"></a>battle. The adoption by the Captain of the range thus
+determined, however, is not obligatory.</p>
+
+<p>Range Estimators should be ready to signal their estimates of the
+range to the platoon leaders at any time during the action.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+VII. The Platoon Leader.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+(The Fire Controller.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>: Where he can best:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Control the squads constituting his platoon. (252, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Observe the target and fire effect. (252, 414, 415, i.d.r., and
+ 216, s.a.f.m.)</li>
+<li>Observe the captain for signals or commands. (234, 251, i.d.r.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+Duties</span>:</p>
+
+<p>(6, 42, 104, 229, 231-233, 244, 245-257, 319, 375, 550, i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Controls the fire of his platoon and in his fire orders.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Receives his orders from the company commander.</li>
+<li>If necessary, may indicate the fire position that has been
+ ordered.</li>
+<li>Announces sight setting.</li>
+<li>Points out designated target to his platoon, if practicable,
+ otherwise to his corporals only, or</li>
+<li>When the target cannot be seen, indicates an aiming target. (247
+ and 251, i.d.r., call this an aiming &quot;point&quot;, but the occasions
+ upon which infantry would use an aiming &quot;point&quot; are so rare that
+ it is believed aiming &quot;target&quot; is a more accurate term as it
+ includes both point and line.)</li>
+<li>Assigns target so as to insure that the entire front or sector
+ given him by the company commander will be covered with fire.</li>
+<li>Gives class of fire.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69"></a>Announces rate of fire.</li>
+<li>If commanding a flank platoon, details a man to watch for
+ signals from the combat patrols.</li>
+<li>When his Corporals have signaled that their squads are ready to
+ fire, signals the Captain by looking toward him and holding up
+ his hand.</li>
+<li>When Captain signals a &quot;commence firing&quot;, repeats same to the
+ corporals.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">Thereafter</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Observes for fire effect.</li>
+<li>When platoon is not firing, insures that the front assigned is
+ kept under constant observation for any appearance of the enemy
+ or any change of position.</li>
+<li>Changes sight-setting of his platoon when necessary.</li>
+<li>Regulates rate of fire.</li>
+<li>Increases rate of fire when large and distinct targets appear
+ and decreases it when the target becomes small and indistinct.</li>
+<li>Prevents decrease in rate of fire when&mdash;
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+ <li>Changing sight-setting,</li>
+ <li>Preparing for rushes,</li>
+ <li>Fixing bayonets,</li>
+ <li>Transmitting firing data to supports,</li>
+ <li>Distributing ammunition.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+<li>Increases the rate of fire to cover the advance of adjacent
+ units. For this purpose progress and movements of adjoining
+ units are kept under observation.</li>
+<li>Maintains direction of advance of his platoon in rushing, so as
+ not to blanket fire of adjacent units.</li>
+<li>Is on the alert for Captain's commands or signals, for this
+ purpose he may use his platoon guide.</li>
+<li>May use his platoon guide to observe adjoining units.<a name="Page_70" id="Page_70"></a></li>
+<li>Must understand all signals.</li>
+<li>Leads his platoon in advancing and charging.</li>
+<li>Prevents changing fire to unauthorized targets.</li>
+<li>Insures distribution of ammunition brought up from the rear and
+ the collection and distribution of same from the dead and
+ wounded. (540, i.d.r.).</li>
+<li>In coming up with re-enforcements, he takes over the duties of
+ disabled platoon leaders of the platoon into which his men have
+ dropped, or it may be some other section of the line needs his
+ service in which case he goes there.</li>
+<li>Endeavors to preserve the integrity of squads, designates new
+ squad leaders to replace those disabled, organizes new squads
+ when necessary, sees that every man is placed in a squad and
+ takes every opportunity for restoring order in the firing line.
+ (104, 375, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>In &quot;Advance by thin lines&quot;, leads odd numbered lines. (218,
+ i.d.r.).</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+VIII. The First Sergeant.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Commands a Platoon, Never a Guide.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">Guides.</p>
+
+<p class="sc2">General Rules:</p>
+
+<p>1. Guides must be resourceful, have good health, vigorous physique,
+keen eyesight, presence of mind and courage, with good judgment,
+military training and experience. They must be able to read maps, make
+sketches and send clear and concise messages.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">Equipment</span>.&mdash;Guides are equipped with whistle, watch, compass,
+message book, knife, pencil, wire cutters, map, pace scale and glasses
+if possible.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71"></a>3. As instructors they go where needed.</p>
+
+<p>4. As file closers they insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.</p>
+
+<p>5. In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
+charged with the step and direction.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Close Order</span>.&mdash;The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear,
+platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear guides
+respectively of the company when it is in line or in column of squads.
+Other guides are in the line of file closers.</p>
+
+<p>In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
+the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
+in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
+flanks of the platoon does not change.</p>
+
+<p>The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank
+opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to
+the other flank, the Captain commands: 1. <i>File closers on left
+(right) flank;</i> 2. March. The file closers dart through the column;
+the captain and guides change.</p>
+
+<p>In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side
+of the guide.</p>
+
+<p>Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or
+firings.</p>
+
+<p>Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
+of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
+the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+In Taking Intervals And Distances</span>.&mdash;Unless otherwise directed, the
+right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in the
+line of file closers, and with them take a distance of 4 paces from
+the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command &quot;March&quot;, the file
+closers face to the flank and each steps off with <a name="Page_72" id="Page_72"></a>the file nearest
+him. In <i>assembling</i> the guides and file closers resume their places
+in line.</p>
+
+<p>To <span class="sc">
+Form The Company</span>.&mdash;At the sounding of the assembly the first
+sergeant takes position 6 paces in front of where the center of the
+company is to be, faces it, draws saber, and commands &quot;Fall in&quot;.</p>
+
+<p>The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
+where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
+center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
+sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
+right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
+posts.</p>
+
+<p>For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, when
+small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close order
+movements only are executed. The single rank executes all movements as
+explained for the front rank of the company.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Alignments</span>.&mdash;The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School
+of the Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file.
+The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the
+front and covers his file leader.</p>
+
+<p>At each alignment the Captain places himself in prolongation of the
+line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
+made, verifies the alignment and commands: &quot;Front&quot;.</p>
+
+<p>Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify the
+alignments.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Company right&quot; the right guide steps back on the command &quot;March&quot;,
+aligning the first two men next to him as he does so, to establish the
+correct line.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Platoon right&quot; the Captain announces the guide and the guides
+cover promptly.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Right turn&quot; the right guide is the pivot of the front rank.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Column right&quot; the right flank man of the leading squad is the
+pivot, <i>not the guide</i>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73"></a>In &quot;Right by squads&quot; the right guide (when he has posted himself in
+front of the right squad) takes four short steps and then resumes the
+full step. The right squad conforms.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;Squads right about.&quot; If the company or platoons are in column of
+squads, file closers turn about toward the column and take posts. If
+in line, each darts through the nearest interval between squads. The
+right and left guides place themselves in the new front rank. File
+closers on facing about, maintain their relative positions.</p>
+
+<p>When the company executes &quot;About face&quot;, guides place themselves in the
+new front rank.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Right front into line, double time&quot; halting and aligning commands
+are omitted. Guide is toward side of the first unit.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Take interval&quot; or &quot;Take distance&quot; guides drop back at the first
+command.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Squads right&quot; or &quot;Platoons, column right&quot; interior guides of
+platoons cross the company. A good rule for beginners is always to
+cross over (except in &quot;column right&quot;).</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a company in line is right (unless otherwise announced).</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a platoon in line is right.</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a battalion in line is center.</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a line of subdivisions is center.</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a deployed line is center.</p>
+
+<p>Guide of a squad is toward the side of the guide of the company.</p>
+
+<p>Guide of successive formations into line is toward the point of rest.</p>
+
+<p>File closers remain on the same side of the company except when in so
+doing they would be left in front of the company.</p>
+
+<p>If the battalion is in line, the guide away from the point of rest (in
+each company) comes to the &quot;Right shoulder arms&quot; at the command to
+dress.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74"></a>At the command &quot;Eyes right&quot;, guides who are charged with the direction
+do not execute &quot;Eyes right&quot;, but simply salute.</p>
+
+<p>At &quot;Retreat&quot; guides unarmed stand at &quot;Attention&quot;. Only officers
+salute.</p>
+
+<p>In &quot;Stack arms&quot; the right guide should align the stacks.</p>
+
+<p>In squads (acting alone) the corporal is the guide; number 2 of the
+front rank, if the corporal is not in line.</p>
+
+<p>The guides of rear units are charged with the step, trace and
+distance.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Exercise For Guides</span>.&mdash;Lay out a course of arbitrary distance; 200
+yards will answer the purpose. Instruct the guides to march the course
+as they would if they were guiding a company, but being sure to count
+their steps (a pebble transferred to the left hand at 100 steps is
+often found useful).</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Result</span>.&mdash;The number of steps will range from 205 to 225. After getting
+the number of steps taken by each man, show them that they should have
+taken 240 steps and that each man took too long a step. Have them
+march back guiding on two points in line as before, cautioning them to
+cut down the length of the step to 30 inches from the start, and not
+to wait until they get half way down the course and find that they
+have less than 120 steps.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Result</span>.&mdash;All of the men, even after the caution, will have taken too
+long a step.</p>
+
+<p>Instructor times the guides both ways, and calls attention to the fact
+that in <span class="sc">All</span>
+cases the cadence was under 120 steps per minute.</p>
+
+<p>After repeating above as much as desired have the men march in pairs,
+one man keeping time and the other counting steps and marching on two
+points.</p>
+
+<p>They may check up every 10 seconds if desired.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<a name="Page_75" id="Page_75"></a>IX. Platoon Guides.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Behind the firing line, on left of platoon leader. (163,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Advancing in line&mdash;behind center of platoon. (213 and 223,
+ i.d.r.) To insure prompt and orderly advance.</li>
+<li>&quot;Advance by thin lines&quot;&mdash;lead even numbered lines. (218, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Advancing in squad or platoon column&mdash;in rear.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+Duties</span>:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">(104, 213, 223, 229, 255, 367, 375, and 376, i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>The platoon leader's assistant and may be assigned any duty the
+ platoon leader sees fit.</li>
+<li>Keeps adjoining units under observation.</li>
+<li>Watches firing line.</li>
+<li>Checks every breach of fire discipline.</li>
+<li>Prevents skulking, men leaving the ranks at any time to care for
+ wounded, etc.</li>
+<li>Designates new squad leaders and organizes new squads when
+ necessary.</li>
+<li>Attaches men that have become separated from squads to other
+ squads.</li>
+<li>Insures prompt and orderly advance.</li>
+<li>On joining firing line from the support takes over duties of
+ sergeants disabled.</li>
+<li>May receive and transmit signals to the Captain.</li>
+<li>If the platoon leader is disabled, he takes over his duties.
+ Hence he should know what the platoon leader is doing and how.</li>
+<li>When taking over the duties of the platoon leader he calls the
+ senior corporal of his platoon out to act as guide.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<a name="Page_76" id="Page_76"></a>X. Corporal.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Marching in line, as center skirmisher of squad (124, i.d.r.)
+ or</li>
+<li>When skirmish line is halted, immediately behind his squad.<br />
+
+Note.&mdash;The School has recommended to the War Department that the
+ Infantry Drill Regulations be changed to provide that the
+ Corporal's position be as prescribed above and in paragraph 20,
+ page 10.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">Duties</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Paragraphs 42, 222, 252, 254, 255, 411, and 551, i.d.r., cover in
+ general the corporal's duties.</p>
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">The squad leader (Corporal) controls the fire of his squad, he must
+ understand the duties of the private and in issuing his fire
+ orders:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Receives his instructions from the platoon leader.</li>
+<li>Points out indicated objective to his squad.</li>
+<li>Takes as the squad target that portion of the platoon target
+ which corresponds to the position of the squad in the platoon.</li>
+<li>Announces sight setting.</li>
+<li>Announces class and rate of fire.</li>
+<li>When his squad is ready to fire looks toward the platoon leader
+ and holds up his hand. At the platoon leader's signal to
+ commence firing he sees that the squad opens fire.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Thereafter</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Makes all fire from the shoulder.</li>
+<li>Makes all use ordered rate of fire.</li>
+<li>Insures that all fire at designated objective.</li>
+<li>Prevents slighting of invisible portions of the target for more
+ visible parts.</li>
+<li>Prevents men from changing fire to unauthorized targets not in
+ the assigned front or sector.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77"></a>Maintains constant observation to the front; when squad is
+ firing, for effect of fire&mdash;when squad is not firing, for
+ appearance of enemy.</li>
+<li>Insures prompt obedience to orders to suspend and cease firing.</li>
+<li>Makes men utilize ground to fullest extent for concealment in
+ firing and advancing.</li>
+<li>In sight-setting, changing sights and fixing bayonets, has front
+ rank perform operation first (rear-rank men increasing rate of
+ fire) and then the rear-rank follow while the front-rank men
+ make up for loss of fire for the rear rank, thus insuring that
+ the rate of fire for the squad does not fall off.</li>
+<li>Prevents increasing vulnerability of squad while preparing for
+ a rush, and rushes as soon after cease firing as possible.</li>
+<li>When other squads of his platoon, are rushing, or the platoon
+ which is covering the same target as is his platoon, is rushing
+ he has his squad increase its rate of fire to make up for lost
+ fire effect of the rushing element.</li>
+<li>In rushing causes men to spring to feet running at full speed,
+ all men to drop to the ground at the same time, and those who
+ are in rear to crawl up to the line.</li>
+<li>When re-enforcing the firing line, takes over the duties of
+ disabled squad leaders. For this purpose his squad may drop into
+ line at one place and he may move to the next squad on the right
+ or left where there is a squad leader needed. If there are no
+ vacancies caused by disabled squad leaders, he drops into line
+ and assists the squad leaders who are there.</li>
+<li>Prevents decreasing rate of fire when men are transmitting data
+ to arriving supports.</li>
+<li>Prevents wasting of ammunition.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78"></a>Prevents use of 30 rounds in right pocket section of belts
+ except on order of an officer.</li>
+<li>Distributes ammunition of dead and wounded and ammunition
+ brought up from the rear.</li>
+<li>Prevents decreasing the rate of fire while ammunition is being
+ distributed.</li>
+<li>Looks to the rear only at his platoon leader's whistle
+ &quot;Attention.&quot; Pays no attention to any other except suspend
+ firing.</li>
+<li>Takes his position in rear of his squad when it is firing and
+ remains there, where he can control its fire, and only crawls
+ into line and adds his rifle when all control is lost. (Short
+ ranges.)</li>
+<li>To control his squad he does not walk up and down behind his
+ squad but rolls along behind his line and keeps down.</li>
+<li>Leads his squad in moving to the front or rear.</li>
+<li>Must know thoroughly the drill regulation signals and have a
+ good practical knowledge of the theory of fire.</li>
+<li>In rushing, maintains the direction of advance of his squad so
+ as not to blanket the fire of squads in his rear.</li>
+<li>Takes advantage of every lull in the action and every favorable
+ opportunity to reorganize his squad and get it more under
+ control.</li>
+<li>Checks every breach of fire discipline, abates excitement, and
+ prevents any man from leaving the squad to go to the rear for
+ any purpose whatsoever.</li>
+<li>If called out of line to act as guide, notifies designated
+ private (103, i.d.r.) to take command of squad.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+XI. The Private.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+Position</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Deployed in line: One man per yard (125, i.d.r.), unless a greater
+ extension is directed in the order for deployment. (126,
+ i.d.r.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;"><span class="sc">
+<a name="Page_79" id="Page_79"></a>Duties</span>:</p>
+
+<p>(6, 42, 104, 133, 134, 138, 139, 149, 152-156, 203, 209, 233, 247,
+ 251, 254, 255, 319, 354, 367, i.d.r., and 209, s.a.f.m.)</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">The individual soldier must be trained:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>To recognize targets from description quickly.</li>
+<li>To describe and define targets.</li>
+<li>To use rear sight in describing targets.</li>
+<li>To use horizontal and vertical clock systems, singly or in
+ combination in describing target.</li>
+<li>To set sights quickly and accurately as ordered.</li>
+<li>To bring piece to shoulder, aim carefully and deliberately from
+ habit, and to reload quickly.</li>
+<li>To fire at the ordered rate. (Par. 18, Standard for Field
+ Firing.)</li>
+<li>To fire at the part of the designated objective which
+ corresponds to his position in the firing line.</li>
+<li>To continue firing in the designated sector and not to change
+ therefrom unless ordered.</li>
+<li>Not to slight invisible parts of the target for more visible
+ ones.</li>
+<li>To maintain constant observation to the front.</li>
+<li>To utilize folds of ground for concealment in advancing and
+ firing.</li>
+<li>To select firing positions.</li>
+<li>To understand effects of visibility and the selection of
+ backgrounds.</li>
+<li>To fire from all positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps
+ of earth and rocks, depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways and
+ windows.</li>
+<li>To obey promptly orders to suspend and cease firing.</li>
+<li>To ignore whistle signals, except suspend firing.</li>
+<li>To watch closely for the expected target after having suspended
+ firing.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80"></a>To obey promptly all orders from his squad leader.</li>
+<li>To drop into the nearest interval when reinforcing the firing
+ line and obey the orders of the nearest squad leader.</li>
+<li>To transmit firing data to men of the supports coming into the
+ line rapidly and accurately, without decreasing his rate of
+ fire.</li>
+<li>To call for range and target when reinforcing the firing line.</li>
+<li>To have confidence in his own ability to hit.</li>
+<li>To a system of sight setting and fixing bayonets in order that
+ there may be no cessation of fire in the unit during this
+ operation.</li>
+<li>To prepare for rushes without decreasing fire of the unit
+ unduly.</li>
+<li>To avoid unnecessary movement in preparing for rushes.</li>
+<li>To spring forward at command &quot;Rush&quot; or &quot;Follow Me&quot; without
+ preliminary rising.</li>
+<li>To avoid bunching in rushing.</li>
+<li>Not to swerve to the right or left in search of cover but to
+ advance in a straight line, in order not to blanket the fire of
+ men in his rear.</li>
+<li>To drop quickly at end of rush and crawl up to line if in rear
+ of it.</li>
+<li>To remain with his own company, but if he accidentally becomes
+ detached from his company or squad to join the nearest one.</li>
+<li>To maintain silence except when transmitting or receiving firing
+ data and charging.</li>
+<li>To retain presence of mind.</li>
+<li>To be careful not to waste ammunition.</li>
+<li>To use the thirty rounds of ammunition in the right pocket
+ section of the belt only upon the order of an officer.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81"></a>To remain with the firing line after bringing up ammunition.</li>
+<li>To utilize ammunition of dead and wounded.</li>
+<li>Never to attempt to care for dead or wounded during the action.</li>
+<li>To have confidence in his ability to use the bayonet.</li>
+<li>To a firm determination to close with the enemy.</li>
+<li>To preserve the line in charging.</li>
+<li>To understand that a charge should be slow and steady (the
+ faster men must not run away from the slower ones).</li>
+<li>To form up immediately after the charge and follow the enemy
+ with fire, not attempting a disorganized pursuit.</li>
+<li>To understand that it is suicidal to turn his back to an enemy
+ and that, if he cannot advance, he must intrench and hold on
+ until dark.</li>
+<li>To count distant groups of object or beings.</li>
+<li>To recognize service targets.</li>
+<li><span class="sc">
+ Never To Fire Until He Understands What The Target Is, At What
+ Part He Is To Fire, And With What Sight Setting</span>.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%"><b>Packs.</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<span class="sc">
+Instructions For Assembling The Infantry Equipment, Model Of 1910</span>.</p>
+
+<p>1. <span class="sc">The Cartridge Belt</span>.&mdash;(a) To assemble the belt.</p>
+
+<p>Place the adjusting strap on the ground, eyeleted edge to the front;
+place the pocket sections on the ground in prolongation of the
+adjusting strap, pockets down, tops of pockets to the front; insert
+end of adjusting strap in outer loop of metal guide, from the upper
+side, carry it under the middle bar and up through the inner loop;
+engage the wire hook on the end of adjusting strap in the eyelets;
+provided on the inner surface of the belt.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82"></a>(b) To adjust the belt.</p>
+
+<p>Adjust the belt to fit loosely about the waist&mdash;i.e., so that when
+buckled it may rest well down over the hip bones on the sides of the
+body and below the pit of the abdomen in front. Care should be taken
+that the adjustment be made equally from both ends of the adjusting
+strap, so that the center eyelet will be in the middle of the belt.</p>
+
+<p>(c) To fill the belt.</p>
+
+<p>Unsnap the flap of the pocket and the interior retaining strap; lay
+the retaining strap out flat in prolongation of the pocket, insert a
+clip of cartridges, points of bullets up, in front of the retaining
+strap; press down until the base of the clip rests on the bottom of
+the pocket; pass the retaining strap over the bullet points and fasten
+it to the outside of the pocket by means of the fastener provided;
+insert a second clip of cartridges, points of bullets down, in rear of
+the first clip; press down until the points of the bullets rest on the
+bottom of the pocket; close the flap of the pocket and fasten by means
+of the fastener provided.</p>
+
+<p>The remaining nine pockets are filled in like manner.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">
+To Attach The First-aid Pouch</span>.&mdash;Attach the pouch under the second
+pocket of the right section of the belt by inserting one hook of the
+double-hook attachment in the eyelet, from the inside of the belt;
+pinch the base of the pocket, bringing eyelets close together, and
+insert the other hook in the same manner in the adjoining eyelet.</p>
+
+<p>Place the first-aid packet in the pouch and secure the cover.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">
+To Attach The Canteen Cover</span>.&mdash;Attach the canteen cover to the belt
+under the rear pocket of the right section in the same manner as the
+first-aid pouch.</p>
+
+<p>Place the canteen and cup (assembled) in the cover and secure the
+flaps.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">
+To Attach The Pack Carrier To The Haversack</span>.&mdash;Spread the haversack
+on the ground, inner side <a name="Page_83" id="Page_83"></a>down, outer flap to the front (Fig. 4);
+place the buttonholed edge of the pack carrier on the buttonholed edge
+of the haversack, lettered side of carrier up; buttonholes of carrier
+superimposed upon the corresponding ones of the haversack; lace the
+carrier to the haversack by passing the ends of the coupling strap
+down through the corresponding buttonholes of the carrier and
+haversack nearest the center of the carrier, bringing the ends up
+through the next buttonholes and continuing to the right and left,
+respectively, to the sides.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="sc">
+To Attach The Cartridge Belt To The Haversack</span>.&mdash;Place the haversack
+and pack carrier (assembled) on the ground, inner side down (Fig. 5);
+place the cartridge belt, pockets down, tops to the front, along the
+junction of the haversack and carrier; insert hook on rear of belt
+suspender in the center eyelet of the adjusting strap, so that the end
+of the hook will be on the outside of the belt; insert hooks on ends
+of front belt suspenders in the eyelets between the second and third
+pockets from the outer ends of the belt, so that the end of the hooks
+will be on the outside of the belt.</p>
+
+<p>6. <span class="sc">
+To Attach The Bayonet Scabbard To The Haversack</span>.&mdash;Attach the
+scabbard by passing its lower end through the loop provided on the
+side of the haversack body, then engage the double-hook attachment in
+the eyelets on the outer flap on the haversack, inserting the hooks
+from the inside.</p>
+
+<p>Place the bayonet in the scabbard.</p>
+
+<p>7. <span class="sc">
+To Attach The Intrenching Tool Carrier To The Haversack</span>.&mdash;Fold the
+outer flap of the haversack over so that the meat-can pouch is
+uppermost; pass the intrenching tool carrier underneath the meat-can
+pouch and engage the double-hook attachment in the eyelets in the flap
+provided, inserting the hooks from the underside.</p>
+
+<p>Place the intrenching tool in the carrier and secure.</p>
+
+<p>Place the meat-can, knife, fork, and spoon in the meat-can pouch.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84"></a>The equipment is now assembled and is never disassembled except to
+detach the pack carrier and its contents as hereinafter provided for.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<span class="sc">
+To Assemble The Full Equipment</span>.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">(<i>With Rations.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>Place the assembled equipment on the ground, suspender side of
+haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversack spread out,
+inside flap and pack carrier extended their full length to the rear
+(Fig. 6).</p>
+
+<p>Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haversack body,
+the lower one on the line of attachment of the inside flap; lay the
+remaining carton of hard bread, the condiment can and the bacon can on
+the top of these, the condiment can and the bacon can at the bottom,
+top of the bacon can to the front; the socks and toilet articles are
+rolled, towel on the outside, into a bundle of the same approximate
+dimensions as a carton of hard bread, and are placed in front of the
+two rows thus formed.</p>
+
+<p>The inside flap of the haversack is folded over these articles, the
+end of the flap being turned in so that the flap, thus shortened,
+extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row; the sides of
+the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows; the upper binding
+straps are passed through the loops on the outside of the inside flap,
+each strap through the loop opposite the point of its attachment to
+the haversack body, and fastened by means of the buckle on the
+opposite side, the strap being passed through the opening in the
+buckle next to its attachment, over the center bar, and back through
+the opening of the buckle away from its attachment; the strap is
+pulled tight to make the fastening secure; the outer flap of the
+haversack is folded over and fastened by means of the lower haversack
+binding strap and the buckle on the inside of the outer flap; the
+strap is pulled tight, drawing the outer flap snugly over the filled
+haversack.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85"></a>The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the reception
+of the pack (Fig. 7).</p>
+
+<p>If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu
+of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner
+described above, except that two cartons of hard bread and the bacon
+can form the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom; the condiment
+can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles form the top layer.</p>
+
+<p>If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack
+rations, it is packed on top of the top layer.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Make The Pack</span> (Fig. 8).&mdash;Spread the shelter half on the ground and
+fold in the triangular ends, forming an approximate square from the
+half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once across its shortest
+dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, and lay it in the
+center of the shelter half; fold the blanket as described for the
+poncho and place it on the latter; place the shelter tent pins in the
+folds of the blanket, in the center and across the shortest dimension;
+fold the edges of the shelter half snugly over the blanket and poncho
+and, beginning on either of the short sides, roll tightly and
+compactly. This forms the pack.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Assemble The Pack</span> (Fig, 9).&mdash;Place the pack in the pack carrier and
+grasp the lower suspension rings, one in each hand; place the right
+knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down and force
+the pack up close against the bottom of the packed haversack; without
+removing the knee, pass the lower carrier binding strap over the pack
+and secure it by means of the opposite buckle; in a similar manner
+secure the lower haversack binding strap and then the upper carrier
+binding strap.</p>
+
+<p>Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the lower suspension
+rings.</p>
+
+<p>The equipment is now assembled and packed as prescribed for the full
+equipment.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86"></a>
+<span class="sc">To Assemble The Full Equipment</span>.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">(<i>Without Rations.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>Place the assembled equipment on the ground as heretofore described;
+fold up the inside flap of the haversack so that its end will be on a
+line with the top of the haversack body; fold up the lower haversack
+strap in the same manner.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Make Up The Pack</span>.&mdash;Fold the poncho, blanket and shelter half, and
+make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except that the condiment
+and bacon can (the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles
+and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case the pack is rolled,
+beginning on either of the long sides instead of the short sides, as
+heretofore described.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Assemble The Pack</span>.&mdash;Place the pack on the haversack and pack
+carrier, its upper end on a line with the upper edge of the haversack
+body; bind it to the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack
+and pack binding straps; fold down the outer flap on the haversack and
+secure it by means of the free end of the middle haversack banding
+strap and the buckle provided on the underside of the flap; engage the
+snap hooks of the pack suspenders in the lower suspension rings.</p>
+
+<p>The equipment is now packed and assembled (Fig. 10).</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Adjust The Equipment To The Soldier</span>.&mdash;Put on the equipment,
+slipping the arms one at a time through the pack suspenders as through
+the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting buckles on the belt
+suspenders, raise or lower the belt until it rests well down over the
+hip bones on the sides and below the pit of the abdomen in front;
+raise or lower it in rear until the adjusting strap lies smoothly
+across the small of the back; by means of the adjusting buckles on the
+pack suspenders, raise or lower the load on the back until the top of
+the haversack is on a level with the top of the <a name="Page_87" id="Page_87"></a>shoulders, the pack
+suspenders, from their point of attachment to the haversack to the
+line of tangency with the shoulder, being horizontal. <i>The latter is
+absolutely essential to the proper adjustment of the load</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The position of the belt is the same whether filled or empty.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<span class="sc2">
+To Assemble The Full Equipment Less The Pack</span>.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">(<i>With Rations.</i>)</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">(Fig. 11.)</p>
+
+<p>Detach the carrier from, the haversack; place the rest of the
+equipment on the ground as heretofore described; place the four
+cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the condiment can, and the
+toilet articles in one row in the middle of the haversack body, the
+toilet articles at the top, the bacon can at the bottom, top to the
+front, the row extending from top to bottom of the haversack; fold the
+inside flap over the row thus formed; fold the sides of the haversack
+up and over; pass the three haversack binding straps through the loops
+on the inside flap and secure by means of the buckles on the opposite
+side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding strap through
+the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the haversack, fold the
+outer flap of the haversack over the whole and secure by means of the
+buckle on its underside and the lower haversack binding strap.</p>
+
+<p>Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes
+in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the
+ends of the pack suspenders.</p>
+
+<p>If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu
+of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner
+described above, except that one emergency ration is substituted for
+two of the cartons of hard bread.</p>
+
+<p>If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack
+rations, it is packed on top of the layer.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<span class="sc2">
+<a name="Page_88" id="Page_88"></a>To Assemble The Full Equipment Less The Pack</span>.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">(<i>Without Rations.</i>)</p>
+
+<p>Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the equipment
+on the ground as heretofore described; fold up the inside flap of the
+haversack until its upper end is on a line with the top of the
+haversack body; fold the sides of the haversack over, pass the three
+haversack binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and
+secure by means of the buckles on the opposite side of the haversack;
+pass the lower haversack binding strap through the small buttonhole in
+the lower edge of the haversack; place the condiment and bacon can
+(the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles and socks in
+the bottom of the pouch thus formed; fold the outer flap of the
+haversack over the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its
+underside and the lower haversack binding strap.</p>
+
+<p>Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes
+in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the
+ends of the pack suspenders.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+To Adjust The Equipment To The Soldier</span>.&mdash;Put on the equipment as
+prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the cartridge belt as
+prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack suspenders so that
+the top of the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+<span class="sc2">
+To Discard The Pack Without Removing The Equipment From The Body</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap them
+into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of the rear pockets of
+the right and left pocket sections; support the bottom of the pack
+with the left hand and with the right hand grasp the coupling strap at
+its middle and withdraw first one end, then the other; press down
+gently on the pack with both hands <a name="Page_89" id="Page_89"></a>and remove it. When the pack has
+been removed, lace the coupling strap into the buttonholes along the
+upper edge of the carrier. Adjust the pack suspenders.</p>
+
+<p>For illustration of how packs are made up and carried, see Privates'
+Manual, Chapter 2.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<span class="sc2">
+Care Of Equipment</span>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Leather</span>.&mdash;1. Keep leather clean. Use material furnished by Ordnance
+Department, or castile soap and water.</p>
+
+<p>2. Oil leather frequently to keep it pliable. Use Neatsfoot oil,
+Viscol or Harness soap.</p>
+
+<p>3. Dry in the shade; never in the sun or in artificial heat. Always
+store in a cool, dry place without artificial heat. Shoe polishes are
+almost always injurious.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Woolen Clothes</span>.&mdash;Wash in tepid or cold water with a non-alkaline soap;
+do not wring it out; dry in the shade.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Mending</span>.&mdash;Always keep equipment ready for use.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Cloth Equipment.&mdash;Dry Cleaning</span>.&mdash;Scrub with a stiff brush frequently.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Washing</span>.&mdash;Only under the direction of an officer.</p>
+
+<p>Dissolve 1 piece of Q.M. soap (not yellow), in 9 cups of water. One
+cup will clean the equipment of one man. Apply with a brush and lather
+well. Rub soap directly on persistent spots. Wash off in cold water
+and dry in the shade.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<span class="sc2">
+Instructions On Making Packs</span>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Four Methods</span>:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Full equipment with rations.</p>
+<p style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Full equipment without rations.</p>
+<p style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Full equipment less pack, with rations.</p>
+<p style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Full equipment less pack, without rations.</p>
+
+<div class="tble3">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="50%" summary="weights">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="25%" class="tdleft">Haversack,</td>
+ <td width="40%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="9%" class="tdleft">Weight</td>
+ <td width="7%" style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: left;">&nbsp;9-&frac14; <a name="Page_90" id="Page_90"></a></td>
+ <td width="19" class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Carrier</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Cartridge belt, canteen,</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Weight</td>
+ <td style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: left;">11-&frac12;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Suspenders</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Mess Rations</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Weight</td>
+ <td style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: left;">10-&frac12;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Mess pouch</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Gun</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: left;">&nbsp;&nbsp;9</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft" valign="top">Clothing</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: left; text-decoration: underline;">&nbsp;&nbsp;7&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: left;">40</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Adjusting Cartridge Belt</span>.&mdash;1. Fits loosely around waist. 2. Resting on
+hips. 3. Hole between buckles. Insert ammunition: First, clip in
+front, points up, fastened with retaining strap, Second clip points
+down. First aid pouch under 4th pocket, left. Canteen under rear
+pocket, right. Bayonet between 3rd and 4th pocket, left. (New bayonet
+scabbard fastens on haversack.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Distribution Of Intrenching Tools In The Squads.</p>
+
+<div class="tble3">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="70%" summary="Distribution of Intrenching Tools">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="45%" class="tdleft">
+ No. 3 rear of each odd-numbered squad</td>
+ <td width="10%" style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: center;">...</td>
+ <td width="45%" class="tdleft">
+ Bolo</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">No. 3 rear of each even-numbered squad</td>
+ <td width="10%" style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: center;">...</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Hand Axe.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">No. 1 rear of each squad</td>
+ <td width="10%" style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: center;">...</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Pick Mattock.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Nos. 1, 2 and 3 front of each squad</td>
+ <td width="10%" style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: center;">...</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Shovels</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">No. 2 rear of each squad</td>
+ <td width="10%" style="white-space: nowrap; text-align: center;">...</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Wire Cutter.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_3" id="CHAPTER_3"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91"></a>CHAPTER 3.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Physical Training.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>Only the carefully trained and conditioned man can make victory
+possible. For this reason the first and most important concern of a
+nation at war is the physical training of its soldiers.</p>
+
+<p>The setting-up exercises are the basis for all other activities and
+their disciplinary value is almost as great as their physical value.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Physical Training</span>.&mdash;Each period should include exercises for all parts
+of the body. Following the setting-up exercises the following should
+be given in the order named: marching, jumping, double timing,
+gymnastic contests, and concluding or restorative exercises.</p>
+
+<p>Rifle exercises have for their purpose the development of &quot;handiness&quot;
+with the piece. They should be used moderately and with frequent
+rests, for they develop big muscles at the expense of agility&mdash;a
+muscle bound man cannot use his strength.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Bayonet Training</span> in addition to its military value calls into play
+every muscle of the body and makes for alertness, agility, quick
+perception, decision, aggressiveness and confidence.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Time Schedule.</b></p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 10%;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="90%" summary="Time Schedule">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="40%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap; font-size: 102%;">
+ A.M. (Begins &frac12; hour after breakfast):</td>
+ <td width="10%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td width="40%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap; font-size: 102%;">
+ P.M. (End &frac12; hour before retreat):</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 1. Disciplinary exercises, 2 minutes.</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 1. Bayonet training, 30 minutes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 2. Starting positions, 1 minute.</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 2. Games and contests, 30 minutes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 3. Setting up exercises, 20 minutes.</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ Alternating daily with:</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 4. Marching and marching exercises, 5 to 8 minutes.</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 1. Bombing practice, 20 minutes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 5. Jumping, 5 to 8 minutes.</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td rowspan="3" class="tdleft">
+ 2. Conditioning exercises, 15 minutes.<br />
+ Double timing.<a name="Page_92" id="Page_92"></a><br />
+ Vaulting and overcoming obstacles.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 6. Double timing, 5 minutes</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">
+ 3. Rifle practice, 10 minutes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+<br />
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Instructions must be:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>An inspiration to the men.</li>
+<li>Well prepared themselves.</li>
+<li>Stripped for action.</li>
+<li>An example to the men.</li>
+<li>Must make drill attractive.</li>
+<li>Never have men overdo. Temper the exercises to the endurance of
+ the weakest man.</li>
+<li>Accompany every exercise with the proper breathing.</li>
+<li>See that the men are clothed according to the season.</li>
+<li>Have the drills short and snappy.</li>
+<li>Have frequent rests at the beginning&mdash;less frequent as work
+ progresses.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p>The platoon is the best unit for physical drills.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Formations</span>.&mdash;When exercising in small squads, the men &quot;fall in&quot; in a
+single rank and, after having &quot;counted off&quot; by fours, threes or twos,
+as the instructor may direct, distance is taken at the command: Take
+distance, March, Squad Halt. At &quot;March&quot; No. 1 moves forward, being
+followed by the other numbers at intervals of four paces. Halt is
+commanded when all have taken their distances.</p>
+
+<p>At the discretion of the instructor the distance may be any number of
+paces, the men being first cautioned to that effect.</p>
+
+<p>When distance is taken from the double rank, No. 1 of the rear rank
+follows No. 4 of the front rank, and he is in turn followed by the
+other numbers of the rear rank.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93"></a>If the instructor desires the files to cover, he commands: In file
+<i>Cover</i>. Nos. 1 stand fast, the others moving to the right with the
+side step, until the Nos. 1 are covered.</p>
+
+<p>To return to the original formation, the instructor commands: Assemble
+March. No. 1 of the front rank stands fast and the other members move
+forward to their original places.</p>
+
+<p><i>Second Formation.</i> To the right and left. Take interval, March.</p>
+
+<div class="tble3">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="50%" summary="Rank Movements">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Front Rank:</i></td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Rear Rank:</i></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 1, 6 steps right step.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 1, 3 steps right step.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 2, 3 steps right step.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 2, Stands fast.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 3, Stands fast.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 3, 3 steps left step.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 4, 3 steps left step.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft">No. 4, 6 steps left step.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%; margin-bottom: 1em"><b>Commands.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Kinds Of Commands, And How Given</span>.&mdash;There are two kinds, <i>preparatory</i>
+and <i>executive</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>preparatory command</i> describes and specifies what is desired and
+the <i>executive command</i> calls what has been described into action.</p>
+
+<p>The tone of the command should always be animated, distinct, and of a
+loudness proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.</p>
+
+<p>Instructors should cultivate a proper command, as its value as a
+tributary to the success of any military drill cannot be
+overestimated.</p>
+
+<p>After an exercise has been described, its various movements or parts
+should be performed at <i>executive words</i>, which indicate not only the
+movement that is desired but the manner of the execution. Thus: 1.
+Trunk forward, 2. Bend, 3. Recover (or Raise), here the word <i>bend</i> is
+drawn to indicate moderately slow execution; the recovery being a
+little faster, the word <i>recover</i> should be spoken to indicate it.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94"></a>The word Recover should always be used to bring the men back to the
+original position.</p>
+
+<p>If it is desired to continue an exercise, the command Exercise should
+be used and the cadence or rhythm should be indicated by words or
+numerals. If numerals are used, they should equal the number of
+movements composing the exercise. Thus an exercise of two movements
+will be repeated at <i>one, two</i>; one of four movements will require
+four counts, etc.</p>
+
+<p>The numeral or word preceding the command Halt should always be given
+with a rising inflection in order to prepare the men for the command
+Halt.</p>
+
+<p>Thus: 1. Thrust arms forward, 2. Exercise one, two, one, two, one,
+Halt.</p>
+
+<p>If any movement of any exercise is to be performed with more energy
+than the others, the word or numeral corresponding to that movement
+should be emphasized.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+First Lesson</span>.&mdash;A. Disciplinary Exercises. 1. Attention; 2. At Ease; 3.
+Rest; 4. Facings.</p>
+
+<p>B. Starting Positions. (m.p.t., pp. 25 to 29.)</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions):
+<a name="FNanchor_P_16" id="FNanchor_P_16"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_P_16"><sup>[P]</sup></a></p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and forward.</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head backward; same, forward.
+ (38.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn trunk right; same, left. (40.)</li>
+<li>Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Half bend knees slowly. (35.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95"></a>Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Raise and lower shoulders. (32.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right; same,
+ left. (37.)</li>
+<li>Arms forward, 2. Raise. Stretch arms sideward. (43.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Raise knees forward alternatingly.
+ (41.)</li>
+<li>Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward; exhale,
+ lowering arms.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<a name="Footnote_P_16" id="Footnote_P_16"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_P_16">[P]</a>
+Note.&mdash;Jumping and double-timing exercises and contests
+should not be included in the first week's work.</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-top: .2em">Bracketed numbers refer to pages in &quot;Manual of Physical Training,&quot;
+where similar exercises are illustrated and described.</p></div>
+
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">D. Marching Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Marching in column in quick time and halting.</li>
+<li>Same, marking time, marching forward and halting.</li>
+<li>Same, marching on toes.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Second Lesson</span>.&mdash;A. Disciplinary Exercises. Same as in first lesson.</p>
+
+<p>B. Starting positions.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions):</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms sideward.</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right; same, left. (41.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Turn trunk sideward, right;
+ same, left. (40.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Full bend knees, slowly. (39.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96"></a>Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward and
+ backward. (35.)</li>
+<li>Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right; same,
+ left. (31.)</li>
+<li>From Attention. Stretch arms forward and sideward.</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend right and left leg forward.
+ (44.)</li>
+<li>Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward and upward;
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">D. Marching Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Marching in column in quick time, mark time, marching in
+ quick time and halting. (88.)</li>
+<li>Marching on toes. (89.)</li>
+<li>Marching on toes and rocking.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">E. Jumping Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Rise on toes and arms forward, 2 Raise. Swing arms downward
+ and bend knees; swing arms forward and extend knees, and
+ recover Attention.</li>
+<li>Jumping in place. (193.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">F. Double Timing:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Double timing, change to quick time and halting. (92.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">G. Concluding Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Breathing exercise, raising and lowering arms sideward.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Third Lesson</span>.&mdash;A disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson.</p>
+
+<p>B. Starting Positions.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97"></a>C. Setting-up Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and sideward. (4
+ motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on right and left toes,
+ alternatingly. (4 motions.) (46.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head forward and backward. (4
+ motions.) (38.)</li>
+<li>Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4
+ motions.) (53.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes and full bend knees
+ slowly. (4 motions.) (39.)</li>
+<li>Fingers in rear of head, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (2
+ motions.) (42.)</li>
+<li>Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward, upward,
+ backward, and recover. (4 motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right, and
+ left. (4 motions.) (37.)</li>
+<li>From Attention. Stretch arms sideward, upward, sideward, and
+ recover. (4 motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (2
+ motions.) (34.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2 Place. Extend right and left leg backward.
+ (2 motions.)</li>
+<li>Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms forward, upward; and
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward, down.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">D. Marching Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Marching in quick time, raising knees. (89.)</li>
+<li>Thrusting arms sideward.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">E. Jumping Exercises:</p><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98"></a>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Standing broad jump.</li>
+<li>Three successive broad jumps.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">F. Double Timing:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Double timing. (92.)</li>
+<li>Double timing, marking time in the double and forward.</li>
+<li>Double timing and halting from the double.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>G. Gymnastic Contests. Two of these games should be included in
+ each lesson. See pp. 39-40.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">H. Concluding Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Breathing exercise, as in 12.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Fourth Lesson</span>.&mdash;A. Disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson.</p>
+
+<p>B. Starting Positions.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">C. Setting-up Exercises: </p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Extend arms forward; swing
+ sideward, forward, and recover. (4 motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes quickly. (2 motions.)
+ (33.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right and left. (4
+ motions.) (41.)</li>
+<li>Arms upward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4
+ motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Half bend knees, quickly. (2
+ motions.) (35.)</li>
+<li>Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk forward. (2 motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Move elbows forward, and
+ stretch backward. (2 motions.) (45.)</li>
+<li>Arms upward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right and left.
+ (4 motions.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99"></a>From Attention. Stretch, arms forward, sideward, upward,
+ sideward, forward, and recover. (6 motions.)</li>
+<li>Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk backward. (2 motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend legs sideward. (2 motions.)</li>
+<li>Breathing Exercise: 1. Inhale, raising arms forward, upward;
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">D. Marching Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Marching in quick time, raising knees, and rising on toes of
+ other foot.</li>
+<li>Raising heels.</li>
+<li>Thrusting arms sideward.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">E. Jumping Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Three successive standing broad jumps.</li>
+<li>Jumping in place, raising knees.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">F. Double Timing:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Double timing.</li>
+<li>Raising heels.</li>
+<li>Double timing, sideward, crossing legs.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>G. Gymnastic Contests.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">H. Concluding Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Swing arms forward, upward, relaxed.</li>
+<li>Breathing exercise, as in 12.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Fifth Lesson</span>.&mdash;A. Disciplinary Exercises.</p>
+
+<p>B. Starting Positions.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">C. Setting-up Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Arms to thrust. Thrust arms upward; swing downward; forward;
+ upward, and recover. (4 motions.) (55.)</li>
+<li>Hands in rear of head. Rise on toes and rock. (2 motions.)
+ (39.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100"></a>Hands on hips. Bend head forward and backward. (4 motions.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders. Turn trunk right and left, stretching
+ arms sideward. (4 motions.) (52.)</li>
+<li>Full bend knees. Hands on ground between knees, squatting
+ position, extend right and left leg backward, alternatingly.
+ (4 motions.) (65.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk forward and stretch arms
+ sideward. (2 motions.) (51.)</li>
+<li>From Attention. Curl shoulders forward and stretch backward.
+ (2 motions.) (38.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk sideward, right and left,
+ extending arms sideward. (4 motions.) (65.)</li>
+<li>From Attention. Flex forearms vertically; extend upward; flex
+ and recover. (4 motions.) (54.)</li>
+<li>Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk backward, stretching arms
+ sideward. (2 motions.) (56.)</li>
+<li>From Attention. Raise arms forward and extend leg forward;
+ stretch arms sideward, extending leg backward; move arms and
+ leg to first position and recover Attention. (4 motions.)
+ (53.)</li>
+<li>Breathing Exercise: Raise arms sideward; upward; and lower
+ laterally quickly. (4 motions.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">D. Marching Exercises: </p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>March in quick time and swing extended leg forward, ankle
+ high.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101"></a>Raising knee and hopping on other foot.</li>
+<li>From arms forward. Swing arms upward.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">E. Jumping Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Standing hop, step and jump.</li>
+<li>Preliminary running broad jumps.</li>
+<li>Broad jump from a walking start of four paces. (197.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">F. Double timing.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Double timing.</li>
+<li>Double timing sideward, crossing leg in front.</li>
+<li>Double timing, raising knees.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>G. Gymnastic Contests.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">H. Concluding Exercises:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Bend trunk forward and backward, relaxed.</li>
+<li>Breathing exercise, as in 12.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>For further work for recruits and work to be given trained soldiers,
+see Special Regulation No. 23, &quot;Field Physical Training of the
+Soldier.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>To prevent grumbling, keep men at work. Idle men are the ones who
+growl. The French consider periods spent in the trenches as periods of
+rest; instead of letting the men go on pass when relieved, they
+restore discipline by close order drill.</p>
+
+<p>The physical benefit is less than half of physical exercises. There
+should be mental exertion in every exercise. But the most important
+part is the disciplinary benefit. The exercises must teach men to jump
+at commands, and by this means must make the organization a
+homogeneous mass.</p>
+
+<p>The principal thing in the position of attention is &quot;chest lifted; and
+arched.&quot; There should be a stretch upward at the waist. The position
+should give the impression of a man as proud of himself as he can be.
+This is a bluff which works, not only by making a good <a name="Page_102" id="Page_102"></a>first
+impression on others, but by causing the man himself to live up to it.</p>
+
+<p>Insist on precision. Especially when men are losing interest, don't
+let the work sag, but make it interesting by requiring concentration.
+At the beginning of each exercise, wake the men up by calling them to
+attention until they do it well, giving the facings, etc.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Commands</span>.&mdash;There is a tone at which each voice carries best. Each man
+must find it for himself. To make commands understood, enunciate
+carefully with lips and teeth. Sound especially first and last letters
+of words. Officer's posture adds to effect of command. His personality
+is impressed on his men largely by his voice. Preparatory command
+should be vibrant and cheerful&mdash;not a harsh tone that grates on the
+men and antagonizes them. The command of execution must be short and
+sharp; drill can be made or marred by it.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Marching</span>.&mdash;A cadence faster than 120 a minute adds snap to marching,
+but snap can not be gained in proportion as the cadence is run up.
+Snap is attained chiefly by the proper gait. Soldiers should march,
+not with knees always slightly bent, but should straighten them
+smartly at the end of each step. This adds drive to the step, and
+gives the men confidence and a mob spirit of courage. After long drill
+at attention, this spirit can be carried into extended order work.</p>
+
+<p>Marching exercises are useful and can be greatly varied. The command
+&quot;Exercise&quot; should always be given as the left foot strikes the ground.
+&quot;Exercise&quot; is a command of execution, and the first movement should be
+executed at once when it is given. The count &quot;One&quot; is given when this
+first position is reached. The command to stop all marching exercises
+is &quot;Quick time&mdash;March.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>In all exercises the instructor should cultivate the ability to pick
+mistakes. He can develop this until he can watch much larger groups
+than at first.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_103" id="Page_103"></a><b>Voice Culture.</b></p>
+
+<p>Mastery of the voice is a necessity for every officer; for without it
+the giving of commands will soon make his throat look and feel like a
+piece of raw Hamburg steak. Quality of voice is more effective than
+quantity. Brute force may produce a roar that has tremendous volume at
+a short distance; but the sound will not carry unless it is so placed
+that it gets the benefit of the resonance spaces in the head. If the
+tone is produced properly, so that it has the singing quality
+necessary in all right commands, quantity of tone will come of itself.</p>
+
+<p>This singing quality has nothing to do with music; it may be attained
+by a man who can hardly distinguish a bar of music from a bar of soap.
+It depends upon three principles, which are very simple in themselves
+but can not be applied without careful practise. The first covers
+proper use of the breath. Air must be drawn into the lungs by
+expanding the diaphragm and abdomen, a process best seen in the
+natural breathing of a man who is lying on his back with all muscles
+relaxed. Filling the upper part of the lungs by raising the chest puts
+the work on the comparatively small muscles between the ribs; but
+filling the base of the lungs by pulling downward brings into play the
+diaphragm, the largest muscle in the body. The sensation which
+accompanies proper deep control of the breath is as if the tone were
+not pushed out of the mouth, but drawn in and upwards. It is partly
+described by the phrases of singing teachers, &quot;drawn tone&quot; and
+&quot;singing on the breath.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>The diaphragm must not only relieve the muscles between the ribs, but,
+still more important, the small muscles of the throat. The second
+great principle of voice production is that the throat must be
+perfectly relaxed. Any tension there interferes with the free
+vibration which is essential for strong and resonant tone. This
+relaxation is <a name="Page_104" id="Page_104"></a>most easily gained by drawing the chin in slightly,
+loosening the muscles under it. The base of the tongue can be relaxed
+by rolling the letter &quot;R,&quot; even to the extent of making two syllables
+of such words as &quot;gr-rand.&quot; Talking with the teeth closed loosely will
+also help to ease incorrect, tension about the throat. If the throat
+is properly relaxed, there will be no sensation in it during the
+production of the voice. Any sensation between the diaphragm and the
+resonance chambers of the head is a sign of wrong and harmful tension.</p>
+
+<p>The use of these resonance chambers is required by the third
+principle&mdash;that the tone must be reinforced by resonance in all the
+hollow spaces of the head. These are found in the nose, above the
+palate and even above the eyes. They have the same effect as the
+sounding board of a musical instrument, in giving quality to the tone.
+The best way to put this principle into practice is to learn the
+sensation of the clear and ringing tone which is produced by proper
+placing of the voice. Exercises containing the letters &quot;M&quot; and &quot;N&quot;
+will give this effect. This does not mean that the sound should be
+nasal; it should be made in the nose, but not through it. Another way
+to increase resonance is to think of crying the words rather than
+talking them. A slightly whining intonation or a sound like that of a
+laugh has more ring to it than an ordinary flat talking tone.</p>
+
+<p>These principles should not be neglected because they are simple. They
+can not be mastered without work, and unless they are mastered the
+voice will not be heard at a distance and will not last under the work
+of giving commands. Further suggestions on the manner of giving
+commands will be found under Physical Training.</p>
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_4" id="CHAPTER_4"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105"></a>CHAPTER 4.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Use of Modern Arms.</h3>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 85%;">
+<a href="images/plate3.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate3.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 3: U.S. Magazine Rifle Model 1903" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_106" id="Page_106"></a><b>Small Arms Firing.</b></p>
+
+<p>Under this heading we have many phases of the training and exercises
+given to our armed forces. It has been found best to use simple every
+day methods to get the best results.</p>
+
+<p>There are two principal factors&mdash;the rifle and the pistol. The former
+only will be taken up now. The scheme is to make the soldier a good
+shot singly and collectively, in time of peace and in time of war.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">The course of instruction at this camp was arranged as follows:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Nomenclature and care of the rifle.</li>
+<li>Sighting drills.</li>
+<li>Position and aiming drills.</li>
+<li>Deflection and aiming drills.</li>
+<li>Range practice.</li>
+<li>Estimating distance drill.</li>
+<li>Combat firing.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>(a) Every man should be taught the names of the principal parts (see
+cut) of the rifle and how to clean and keep it clean.</p>
+
+<p>(b) If time permits, the sighting bar described on page 26, s.a.f.m.
+should be used. To illustrate the normal and peep sight make a drawing
+on a blackboard of page 30, s.a.f.m.</p>
+
+<p>Using a sand bag or some convenient rest for the rifle. The instructor
+sights it on some object showing the normal and peep sight. Using the
+above rests have a marker hold a disk against a large piece of paper
+towards which the rifle is pointed. There is a pin hole in the center
+of the bull's eye on the disk. The range should be about 50 feet, and
+the bull's eye about 1 inch in diameter. The marker moves it about
+until the man sighting tells him to &quot;hold,&quot; at which time he marks the
+center with the point of a pencil. This is done three times, the three
+points are then connected. The triangle thus formed is then used by
+the <a name="Page_107" id="Page_107"></a>instructor to show the man whether he took too much or too little
+front sight or whether he leaned to one side or the other while
+aiming.</p>
+
+<p>Use for this exercise both the normal and peep sight.</p>
+
+<p>To show the effect of canting the piece use a sight setting of 1,000
+yards, take out the bolt, aim the rifle while lying on a sand bag at a
+1-inch bull's eye 50 feet away. Then look through the bore of the
+rifle and have the place where the target would be approximately hit
+by a bullet marked. Cant the piece to the right and aim at the same
+bull's eye. Then look through the bore of the rifle and mark the place
+where the bullet would approximately strike the target. The last mark
+would be lower and to the right of the first mark. It should be
+readily seen that in canting the piece to the right your sight is to
+the right of its original position&mdash;that is right windage. Also by
+canting it to the right your elevation is lowered, that is, lessened.
+Canting the piece to the left would make the bullet strike low and to
+the left.</p>
+
+<p>(c) Preliminary command &quot;Position and aiming drill,&quot; command of
+execution &quot;Squad (platoon, or company) Ready.&quot; At the command &quot;Ready&quot;
+each man faces half right and carries the right foot about 1 foot to
+the right, in such a position that will insure the greatest firmness
+and steadiness, raises the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb along the stock, muzzle at the height of the
+breast. If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is
+similar&mdash;if kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh&mdash;if
+sitting the elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left
+hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the
+butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. From the
+position of ready the four exercises&mdash;position, aiming, trigger
+squeeze, and rapid fire&mdash;are given. These exercises given on pages
+38-42, s.a.f.m. should be carefully <a name="Page_108" id="Page_108"></a>studied. Do not leave it to the
+sergeant, etc., to do&mdash;give your company your own instruction when
+practicable, and in time of battle they will know you and you will
+know them, and there will grow up between you that mutual
+understanding which is necessary for the real success of any
+undertaking. Do not forget to give these exercises in all positions of
+firing, namely, standing, sitting, kneeling, and prone.</p>
+
+<p>(d) A change of one point of windage at the 100 yard range will change
+the point struck by the bullet of the next shot 4 inches. If right
+windage is taken the bullet will strike to the right, if left windage
+is taken it will strike to the left:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 27.5%;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="45%" summary="Windage">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="25%" class="tdleft">Range.</td>
+ <td width="25%" class="tdleft">windage.</td>
+ <td width="25%" class="tdleft">direction.</td>
+ <td width="25%" class="tdcenter">number of inches<br /> change.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;100</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">1 point</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">right or left</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;4</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;200</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">1 point</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">right or left</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;8</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;300</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">1 point</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">right or left</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">12</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;500</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">1 point</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">right or left</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">20</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;600</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">1 point</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">right or left</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">24</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>Remember to take windage in the direction you want the bullet to
+strike.</p>
+
+<p>A change of 25 yards in your sight setting raises or lowers the point
+struck by the bullet of the next shot at the 100 yards range 1 inch:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 27.5%;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="45%" summary="Platoon Movements">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="33%" class="tdcenter">Range.</td>
+ <td width="33%" class="tdcenter">Change in sight.</td>
+ <td width="34%" class="tdcenter">Number inches <br /> change on target.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">100</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;25 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">200</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;25 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">300</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;25 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">3</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">500</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;25 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">5</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">600</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;25 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">6</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">300</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">&nbsp;75 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">9</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">500</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">150 yards</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">30</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<p>(e) Range practice.</p>
+
+<p>Target details must be thoroughly familiar with paragraphs 106-110,
+s.a.f.m. Scorers must be familiar <a name="Page_109" id="Page_109"></a>with the method of recording
+scores. The following schedule is the one that was followed at this
+camp:</p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Slow Fire.</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 10em; white-space: nowrap;">
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="0" width="70%" summary="Platoon Movements">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="12%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Range</td>
+ <td width="14%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Time</td>
+ <td width="10%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Shots</td>
+ <td width="10%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Target</td>
+ <td width="14%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Position</td>
+ <td width="22%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Sights</td>
+ <td width="18%" class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">Ammunition</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">100</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Guard</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">100</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Kneeling</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Guard</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">100</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Standing</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Guard</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">200</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10 leaf, 5 battles</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">200</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Kneeling</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter" style="white-space: nowrap;">10 leaf, 5 battles</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">300</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10 leaf, 5 battles</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">300</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">No limit</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">15</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">A</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Sitting</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10 leaf, 5 battles</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Rapid Fire.</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 10em; white-space: nowrap;">
+ <table border="1" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="0" width="70%" summary="Platoon Movements">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="12%" class="tdcenter">Range</td>
+ <td width="12%" class="tdcenter">Time</td>
+ <td width="10%" class="tdcenter">Shots</td>
+ <td width="10%" class="tdcenter">Target</td>
+ <td width="26%" class="tdcenter">Position</td>
+ <td width="13%" class="tdcenter">Sights</td>
+ <td width="17%" class="tdcenter">Ammunition</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">100</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1 min.</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">D</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">100</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1 min.</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">H</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">200</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1 min.</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">D</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Kneeling from standing</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">200</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1 min.</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">H</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone from standing</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">300</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1'-10&quot;</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">D</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone from standing</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdcenter">300</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">1'-10&quot;</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">10</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">H</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Prone from standing</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Leaf</td>
+ <td class="tdcenter">Service</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<p>At each range with the rapid fire 5 additional shots should be fired
+with the battle sight and with half the allotted time.</p>
+
+<p>(f) A course should be laid off in an open field. The base should be
+marked. At least 5 natural objects whose distances are to be estimated
+should be placed so that they are clearly visible from the base. The
+objects should be men standing, kneeling or prone, and should be
+placed from 550 to 1,200 yards from the base. Each company should be
+conducted to the base and extended along it, backs towards the
+objects, in single rank. Each man should have a pencil and paper. The
+objects whose distances are to be estimated are pointed out by the
+company commander and the men told to estimate and record their
+estimates. At the conclusion of the exercise, the company commander
+<a name="Page_110" id="Page_110"></a>should read off the correct distances, and have each man figure his
+per cent of error. It is important that the men know the correct
+distances while the objects are still in view.</p>
+
+<p>For record, paragraph 85, s.a.f.m. should be followed.</p>
+
+<p>Remember that there are four principal ways to estimate distances by:
+1, it cannot be more than a certain distance, and it cannot be less
+than a certain distance&mdash;take the mean; 2, divide the distance into a
+certain number of familiar lengths; select a halfway point, estimate
+this and multiply by 2; 3, estimate the distance along a parallel
+line, as a road having well defined objects; 4, take the mean of
+several estimates.</p>
+
+<p>(g) In combat the platoon is the fire unit. The fire of the company,
+battalion or regiment is nothing more than the combined fire of all
+the fire units. The enemy can be imaginary, outlined or represented.
+The exercise must be conducted under an assumed tactical situation.
+The commander must lead his men according to the assumptions made by
+the umpire. Signals are used to indicate the enemy's actions,
+strength, etc. The situation should be simple, and after the exercise
+a critique should be held on the ground. Combat practice with ball
+ammunition against disappearing targets, and at estimated ranges, gets
+excellent results. The officer conducting the exercise will prohibit
+the advance if it would be impossible were the enemy real.</p>
+
+<p>Have every man play the game.</p>
+
+<p>A point to be remembered is that for battle sight the sight slide must
+be as far to the rear as it will go. If it is part way up the leaf,
+the drift correction cut in the slot upon which it moves will throw it
+to the left, and left windage will be taken.</p>
+
+<p>Point blank range is 530 yards. Battle sight is set for this distance
+because this is the extreme range at which a bullet would strike a man
+kneeling between the rifle and the target.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<a name="Page_111" id="Page_111"></a>
+<div class="img" style="width: 85%;">
+<a href="images/plate4.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate4.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 4: Small Arms" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_112" id="Page_112"></a><b>Pistol</b>.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Nomenclature And Care</span>.&mdash;The soldier is first taught the nomenclature
+of the parts of the pistol. Ordinance Pamphlet No. 1866 gives this
+information, (See cut of pistol.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Manual For The Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>1. The pistol being in the holster: 1. Raise, 2. Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>At the command Raise, unbutton the flap of the holster with the right
+hand and grasp the stock, back of hand outward.</p>
+
+<p>At the command Pistol, draw the pistol from the holster, reverse it,
+muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three
+fingers; forefinger outside of the guard; barrel to the rear, and
+inclined to the front at an angle of about thirty degrees; hand as
+high as the neck and six inches in front of the point of the right
+shoulder. This is the position of Raise Pistol, and it may be
+similarly taken from any position.</p>
+
+<p>2. To withdraw magazine, pistol in any position: 1. Withdraw. 2.
+Magazine.</p>
+
+<p>At the command Magazine, place pistol, barrel down, in left hand and
+clasp barrel in full grip of left hand, thumb clasped over barrel in
+front of trigger guard, butt of pistol up, barrel pointing to the left
+front and slightly downward. With tip of right forefinger press stud
+releasing magazine and then place tip of same finger under projection
+at front of magazine base. Raise magazine about an inch then close
+thumb and second finger on sides of magazine, giving a secure grasp
+with which it can be withdrawn from socket, placed inside belt (in
+pocket of shirt or otherwise disposed of without throwing it away).
+Right hand then grasps stock, back of hand to the left.</p>
+
+<p>3. To open chamber, the pistol in any position: 1. Open. 2. Chamber.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113"></a>Carry the pistol to the left hand (if not already there) barrel to the
+left, front end of slide grasped between the thumb and forefinger of
+left hand; right hand grasping stock, back of hand up; right thumb
+under slide stop. Hold left hand steady and push forward with right
+hand till slide reaches end of stroke; engage slide stop, and come to
+Raise Pistol. Should the pistol be cocked and locked, it will be
+unlocked so that the slide can move.</p>
+
+<p>4. To close chamber, being at Raise Pistol, chamber open: 1. Close. 2.
+Chamber.</p>
+
+<p>At the command Chamber, release slide top with right thumb and let
+hammer down gently. To let hammer down, pull downward with point of
+right thumb till hammer presses against grip safety and forces it
+home; then while continuing this pressure on hammer, pull trigger; and
+while continuing pull on trigger, let the hammer down. While letting
+hammer down, grasp stock firmly between the palm and last three
+fingers to prevent pistol rotating in hand.</p>
+
+<p>5. To insert magazine, pistol being in any position, no magazine in
+socket: 1. Insert. 2. Magazine.</p>
+
+<p>Lower pistol into left hand as in Withdrawn Magazine, grasp magazine
+with tip of right forefinger on projection at base of magazine,
+withdraw from pocket and insert in pistol. To make sure that magazine
+is home, strike base of magazine with palm of right hand. Bring the
+pistol to the position of Raise Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>6. To return pistol, being at Raise Pistol: 1. Return. 2. Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>Lower the pistol and raise the flap of the holster with the right
+thumb; insert the pistol in the holster and push it down; button the
+flap with the right hand. If the pistol be loaded and cocked the
+command. 1. Lock, 2. Pistol must precede the command &quot;Return.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114"></a>7. To load, having loaded magazine in pistol, pistol in any position,
+chamber empty: 1. Load. 2. Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>Place pistol in left hand, barrel down, butt of pistol up, barrel
+pointing to left front and downward, slide grasped between thumb and
+forefinger. Push forward with right hand until the slide is fully
+open, then release slide allowing it to move forward and load
+cartridge into chamber. Come to Raise Pistol. If the last shot in the
+magazine has been fired, to reload; same command, but execute
+Withdrawn Magazine, Insert Magazine, Close Chamber. As soon as the
+pistol is loaded, it will be immediately locked by the commands. 1.
+Lock. 2. Pistol. Should the command for locking pistol be
+inadvertently omitted it will be locked without command.</p>
+
+<p>8. To unload pistol, being in any position, loaded:</p>
+
+<p>Execute by the commands, Withdraw Magazine, Open Chamber, Close
+Chamber, Insert Magazine.</p>
+
+<p>9. To inspect pistol, it being in the holster: 1. Inspection. 2.
+Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>Execute, Raise Pistol.</p>
+
+<p>To inspect the pistol more minutely, add 3. Withdraw. 4. Magazine. 5.
+Open. 6. Chamber.</p>
+
+<p>To avoid accidents, individual men out of ranks, in barracks or camp
+will first Withdraw Magazine then Open Chamber whenever the pistol is
+removed from the holster for cleaning, for examination, or for any
+other purpose. Accidental discharges will not occur if the above rule
+is always observed, and failure to observe it must be considered a
+military offense, whether or not accident results.</p>
+
+<p>10. Whenever men fall in ranks with the automatic pistol the officer
+or non-commissioned officer in charge will command:</p>
+
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">1. Raise, 2. Pistol;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">1. Withdraw, 2. Magazine;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">1. Open, 2. Chamber;</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">1. Close, 2. Chamber.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">1. Insert, 2. Magazine.</span><br /><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115"></a>
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">1. Return, 2. Pistol.</span><br />
+
+<p>When falling in the above commands are given after chamber of rifles
+have been opened and closed, and the order resumed&mdash;the rifle being
+held against the left wrist. The commander of any company or
+detachment thereof is responsible for giving the necessary commands to
+put the pistols in a safe condition.</p>
+
+<p>11. The pistol with cartridge in chamber is habitually carried cocked
+and locked, whether in the hand or in the holster. The hammer will not
+be lowered while a cartridge is in the chamber.</p>
+
+<p>12. In campaign, the pistol should habitually be carried with a
+magazine in the socket, loaded with seven ball cartridges, chamber
+empty, hammer down. The extra magazines should also be loaded with
+seven ball cartridges each.</p>
+
+<p>When action seems imminent, the pistol should be loaded by command. It
+may then be returned by command to the holster till the time for its
+use arrives.</p>
+
+<p>13. Recruits are first taught the motions of loading and firing
+without using cartridges. However, the automatic action and the effect
+of ball cartridges in operating the slide cannot be taught without
+firing ball cartridges. Practice without cartridges is very necessary
+to acquire facility in the exact movements of the manual and in
+aiming, holding and trigger squeeze.</p>
+
+<p>To execute the movements without cartridges, first Withdraw Magazine,
+Open Chamber, and Examine both Pistols and magazines to assure that
+none contain ball cartridges.</p>
+
+<p>14. All the movements in loading pistol should be practiced without
+looking at it. In order to do this successfully it is necessary to
+know exactly where the magazines are carried so the hand may find them
+without fumbling. Also, since the projection at the front of the
+magazine base is on the same side as the bullets, <a name="Page_116" id="Page_116"></a>and the magazine
+must be inserted in the socket with these to the front, the magazine
+should be carried in the pocket with the projection to the left and
+should be withdrawn from the pocket with the same grasp as is
+prescribed for Withdrawn Magazine.</p>
+
+<p>15. This manual must be practiced with all the precision and exactness
+required for the manual for the rifle. Accidents will be reduced to a
+minimum and familiarity with the pistol gained.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Position</p>
+
+<p>Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced and erect and
+turned at such an angle as is most comfortable when the arm is
+extended toward the target; the feet far enough apart (about 8 to 10
+inches) as to insure steadiness; weight of body borne equally upon
+both feet; right arm fully extended but not locked; left arm hanging
+naturally.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+The Grip</span>.&mdash;Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and last
+three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the thumb
+extended along the stock. The barrel hand and fore-arm should be as
+nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed toward the
+target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors but
+should be firm enough to avoid losing grip. The lower the stock is
+grasped the greater will be the movement or jump of the muzzle caused
+by recoil. If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of
+the stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon
+toward the opposite side.</p>
+
+<p>The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle,
+generally to the left. The position and pressure of the thumb along
+the stock overcomes much of this movement.</p>
+
+<p>To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same
+grip for each shot, not only must the hand grasp the stock at the same
+point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uniform.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117"></a><span class="sc">
+The Trigger Squeeze</span>.&mdash;The trigger must be squeezed in the same manner
+as in rifle firing. The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger
+should be steadily increased and should be straight back, not
+sideways. The pressure should continue to that point beyond which the
+slightest movement will release the sear. Then when the aim is true,
+the additional pressure is applied and the pistol fired. When the
+pistol is fired the greatest effort should be taken to hold the pistol
+to the mark as nearly as possible. This will be of great benefit in
+automatic firing.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Position And Aiming Drills</span>.&mdash;The Squad is formed with an interval of
+one pace between files. Black pasters are used as aiming points. The
+pasters are ten paces distant from the squad. The instructor command,
+1. Raise, 2. Pistol and cautions &quot;Position and Aiming Drill.&quot; The men
+take the position prescribed in paragraph 3. At the command, 1. Squad,
+2. Fire, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly horizontal, the
+pistol directed at a point; about six inches below the bull's-eye. At
+the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger guard and
+gradually feel the trigger. Inhale enough air to comfortably fill the
+lungs and gradually raise the piece until the line of sight is
+directed at the point of aim, <i>i.e.</i>, just below the bull's-eye at six
+o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark, gradually
+increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that point where
+the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. Then, when
+the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece
+is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the sights.
+The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the hammer
+falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the squeezing
+of the trigger has had on his aim.</p>
+
+<p>When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position
+the exercise is conducted &quot;At Will.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118"></a><span class="sc">
+Quick Fire</span>.&mdash;Being at the Raise Pistol, chamber and magazine empty, 1.
+Quick Fire Exercise, 2. One. Lower the forearm until it is nearly
+horizontal, pistol pointing at the target, 3. Two. Thrust the pistol
+forward to the position of aim, snapping the pistol just before the
+arm reaches its full extension. Then look through sights to verify the
+pointing. 4. Three. Return to Raise Pistol and cock the pistol.</p>
+
+<p>In this exercise the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon the mark.
+He should constantly practice pointing the pistol until he acquires
+the ability to direct it on the mark in the briefest interval of time
+and practically without the aid of the sights. In other words, the
+pistol in this exercise is accurately pointed instead of accurately
+aimed. In night firing pointing the pistol is the only method that can
+be used. After careful practice in this exercise it is surprising what
+good results can be obtained at night.</p>
+
+<p>This exercise should then be practiced from the position of the pistol
+in the holster instead of Raise Pistol.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Classes Of Fire: 1. Slow Fire</span>.&mdash;As described above. Target L or A or
+improvised target.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">
+Quick Fire</span>.&mdash;Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked, at the command
+&quot;Commence Firing&quot; fire and return to Raise Pistol after each shot
+following the principles of Quick Fire Exercise. Target E, five yards
+apart, one for each man firing. This firing should be done by the
+numbers as described in Quick Fire Exercise.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">
+Automatic Fire (Target E)</span>.&mdash;Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked.
+At the command &quot;Commence Firing&quot; empty the magazine in seven seconds,
+keeping the arm extended. Target E, 5 yards apart, one for each man
+firing.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">
+Trench Fire (Target E)</span>.&mdash;Two lines of targets. The first line is
+composed of F targets, 5 yards apart, <a name="Page_119" id="Page_119"></a>one figure for each man firing.
+The second line is composed of two E figures, one yard apart, for each
+man firing, placed in a trench immediately in rear of the figures of
+the first line. This gives for each firer a group of three figures,
+one placed on top at the near edge of the trench and the other two in
+the trench immediately in rear. In case a trench is not available the
+rifle pit can be used. A gutter, sunken road, embankment, or hedge can
+be used for this purpose so long as trench fire is simulated.</p>
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 85%;">
+<a href="images/plate5.jpg">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate5.jpg" width="100%" alt="Plate 5: Trench Target Course" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>The firing line advances at a walk from 100 yards takes up a double
+time 50 yards from trench, fires one shot at the double time when
+within ten yards of the first target continues to the trench and fires
+the remaining six shots, automatic fire, at the two targets in the
+trench in rear of the first line target.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Score (Target E, Bobbing)</span>.&mdash;A score will be seven shots. Targets will
+be marked after the men in the firing line have completed their
+scores. All loading and firing should be done by command.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120"></a><span class="sc">
+Course: 1. Slow Fire</span>.&mdash;10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of five
+scores.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">
+Quick Fire</span>.&mdash;10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">
+Automatic Fire</span>.&mdash;10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">
+Trench Fire</span>.&mdash;Minimum of one maximum of three scores.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<b>Bayonet Training.</b></p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha;">
+<li><span class="sc">The Functions Of Bayonet Training Are:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>To teach the correct use of the bayonet until it becomes
+ instinctive.</li>
+ <li>To develop the fighting spirit.</li>
+ <li>To develop speed, accuracy, and co&ouml;rdination. </li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">General Principles:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>Fencing, in modern combat, is out of the question. Almost every
+ fight will consist of but one or two motions. Hence the class
+ must be taught that the best defence is the quickest offensive.</li>
+ <li>Every available means of offence, with hands and feet as well as
+ with rifle and bayonet, is a part of bayonet training.</li>
+ <li>Teamwork is essential. Men must be taught, especially in the
+ combat, to exercise, to seize every opportunity to act together.</li>
+ <li>Personal control during combat, especially at night, will be
+ nearly impossible. Control should be practiced, therefore, in
+ the form of clear instructions delivered to the men before
+ assault, and fulfilled individually.</li>
+ <li>In every assault and combat exercise, the men must be taught
+ never to leave an enemy alive, or who may be alive, behind them.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+
+<li><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121"></a><span class="sc">
+Technique Of Bayonet Combat:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>The <i>point</i> is the main reliance. Its use should be practiced
+ in every possible situation, until a correct choice or
+ combination of long point, short point, and jab, and the
+ execution thereof, becomes a matter of instinct.</li>
+ <li>The point must always be directed at a definite target. The most
+ vulnerable points of the body are: Lower abdomen, base of the
+ neck, small of the back (on either side of the spine), chest,
+ and thighs. Bony parts of the trunk must be avoided by accurate
+ aim.</li>
+ <li>The use of the rifle as a club, swinging or striking, is
+ valuable only:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+ <li>When the point is not available.</li>
+ <li>In sudden encounters at close quarters, when a sharp butt
+ swing to the crotch may catch an opponent unguarded.</li>
+ <li>After parrying a swinging butt blow, when a butt strike to
+ the jaw is often the quickest possible riposte.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ <p style="text-indent: 0em">The use of butt swings overhead or sidewise to the head or
+ neck, is to be avoided; they are slow, inaccurate, easily
+ parried or side-stepped, and leave the whole body unguarded.
+ After every butt blow a thrust must immediately follow, since
+ no butt blow, of itself, is apt to be fatal.</p> </li>
+
+ <li>The parries must be regarded and practiced chiefly as means of
+ opening the opponent's guard; hence, a thrust must immediately
+ follow each parry.</li>
+ <li>The foot movements shown in the old manual are useful only to
+ promote quickness and steadiness. They should, therefore, be
+ <a name="Page_122" id="Page_122"></a>practiced in combination with the points and butt blows, and so
+ combined can be executed in the oblique directions as well as at
+ right angles. The left foot moves in the direction of the
+ thrust.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">
+Manual Of The Bayonet</span>: There are only 7 exercises to learn in the
+ new bayonet drill:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li><i>Guard</i>.&mdash;Point of the bayonet directed at the opponent's
+ throat, the rifle held easily and naturally with both hands,
+ barrel inclined slightly to the left, right hand at the height
+ of the navel and grasping the small of the stock, left hand
+ holding the rifle at a convenient position above the lower
+ band, so that the left arm is slightly bent, making an angle of
+ about 150 degrees. The legs should be well separated and in an
+ easy position. Lean forward, on your toes, left knee slightly
+ bent, right foot flat on the ground and turned to the right
+ front. Remember in this position to have your eye on your
+ opponent, do not restrain your muscles, keep them taut, but
+ flexible.</li>
+ <li>&quot;<i>High Port</i>.&quot;&mdash;The hands hold the rifle as in guard; the left
+ wrist level with, and directly in front of the left shoulder;
+ the right hand above the right groin and on level with the
+ navel.<br />
+
+ Remember that the barrel in this position is to the rear. This
+ position is assumed on the advance without command.</li>
+
+ <li>&quot;<i>Long Point</i>.&quot;&mdash;Being in the position of &quot;guard,&quot; grasp the
+ rifle firmly, vigorously deliver the point to the full extent
+ of the left arm, butt along side and close to the right
+ forearm; body inclined forward; left <a name="Page_123" id="Page_123"></a>knee well bent, right leg
+ braced, and weight of the body pressed well forward with the
+ fore part of the right foot, heel raised. The right hand gives
+ the power to the point, while the left guides it. If a point is
+ made in the oblique direction the left foot should move in that
+ direction. This exercise is done in 3 counts. At 1 the point is
+ made; at 2, the withdrawal; at 3, resume the guard. The
+ withdrawal must be straight back, and not with the downward
+ motion, until the right hand is well behind the hip.</li>
+
+ <li><i>Right (Left) Parry</i>.&mdash;1. Straighten the left arm, without
+ bending the wrist or twisting the rifle in the hand, and force
+ the rifle forward far enough to the right (left) to ward off
+ the opponent's weapon, 2. Resume &quot;guard.&quot; <br />
+
+ Remember to keep your eyes on the weapon to be parried.</li>
+
+ <li><i>Short Point</i>.&mdash;1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the
+ muzzle and draw the rifle back to the full extent of the right
+ arm, butt either high or low as a low or high point is to be
+ made. 2. Deliver the point vigorously to the full extent of the
+ left arm. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Resume the &quot;guard.&quot;</li>
+
+ <li><i>Jab Point</i>.&mdash;1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the muzzle,
+ draw the rifle back, and shift the right hand up the rifle and
+ grasp it above the rear sight, at the same time bringing the
+ rifle to an almost vertical position close to the body. Bend the
+ knees. 2. Straighten the knees, jab the point of the bayonet
+ upward into the throat or under the chin of the
+ opponent&mdash;chiefly by a body movement. 3. Withdrawal. 4. <a name="Page_124" id="Page_124"></a>Carry
+ the rifle forward with the left hand, grasping the small of the
+ stock with the right. 5. Resume guard. Remember in the first
+ motion to have the hands at least 4 inches apart.</li>
+
+ <li><i>Butt swing&mdash;butt strike</i>&mdash;out.&mdash;1. Swing the butt up at the
+ opponent's ribs, forearms, etc., using a full arm blow, bringing
+ the rifle to a horizontal position over the left shoulder, butt
+ to the front. 2. Advance the rear foot, and dash the butt into
+ the opponent's face. 3. Advance the rear foot and at the same
+ time slash the bayonet down on the opponent's head or neck. 4.
+ Resume the &quot;guard.&quot;<br />
+
+ (The easiest guard to a swing at the crotch is simply to get
+ the left knee in the opponent's right.)</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">Progressive Exercises:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>The class works in pairs with scabbards on bayonets. One man
+ alternately in each pair signals; the other promptly executes
+ the movement, at the target, designated by the signal. The
+ following signals are suggested:<br />
+
+ <ul style="list-style-type: none">
+ <li>The hand, placed against the body, indicates the target.</li>
+ <li>Long point&mdash;Back of hand outward.</li>
+ <li>Short point&mdash;Palm of hand outward.</li>
+ <li>Jab point&mdash;Hand horizontal against chin, palm down.</li>
+ <li>High port&mdash;Fist against left breast.</li>
+ <li>Parry right (left)&mdash;Hand waved to right (left).</li>
+ <li>Butt swing&mdash;Fist against crotch.</li>
+ <li>Butt strike&mdash;Fist against jaw.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+ Instead of signals, thrusting sticks are then used. These are<a name="Page_125" id="Page_125"></a>
+ strong wands having a padding of paper and burlap over one end
+ and a rope ring tied to the other. Points and butt swings are
+ executed at the padding and rings, respectively, as these are
+ presented. The man holding the stick must remember to stand to
+ one side of the man with the bayonet.</li>
+
+ <li><span class="sc">
+ As In First Exercise</span>.&mdash;One man thrusts with a stick: the other
+ parries.</li>
+ <li><span class="sc">
+ Thrusts Are Practiced At Dummies</span>, first from a distance of five
+ feet, then by advancing two paces or more. To simulate fighting
+ conditions, a frame is then arranged in which dummies are slung
+ on ropes passed over pullies, and so manipulated that as the man
+ withdraws his bayonet from one dummy another swings at, him from
+ a different direction.</li>
+ <li><span class="sc">
+ As Soon As Proficiency Has Been Gained</span> in the above exercises,
+ the assault practice is taken up.
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+ <li><i>A course is laid out as follows:</i>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>A fire trench about 60 yards long, well <i>revetted</i>.</li>
+ <li>20 yards in front of the trench, smooth wire
+ entanglements.</li>
+ <li>15 yards further, another trench, parallel to the first,
+ 60 yards long, 4 feet deep and 4 feet wide. In this
+ trench prone dummies are placed, one per yard.</li>
+ <li>15 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to
+ the trenches.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126"></a>15 yards further, a hurdle 4 feet high and 60 yards
+ long, parallel to the trenches.</li>
+ <li>10 yards further, a low trip wire, stretched parallel to
+ the trenches.</li>
+ <li>10 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to
+ the trenches.</li>
+ <li>15 yards further, a large trench, 60 yards long, 6 feet
+ deep, 10 feet wide, containing 60 prone dummies, 1 per
+ yard.</li>
+ </ol>
+ </li>
+ <li><i>Procedure:</i><br />
+ Each platoon, in turn, enters the first trench at skirmish
+ intervals, bayonets fixed. On signal, all move out at a
+ walk, guiding carefully in line on a leader previously
+ designated. After passing each obstacle, the line is again
+ carefully formed. On each of the swinging dummies one of
+ the seven movements of the manual is used; a long or short
+ point is used on each prone dummy. All go down into the
+ last trench together, with a good loud yell, point of the
+ bayonet level with the toe, and land on the dummies in the
+ bottom, stabbing as they land. This course should be
+ repeated several times at quick time, then at double time,
+ and finally at a run. Remember that in the advance the
+ rifle is carried at high port.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+<li><span class="sc">
+Combat Exercises</span> (to be used in conjunction with the assault<a name="Page_127" id="Page_127"></a>
+ practice):
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+ <li><i>Equipment for each man:</i><br />
+
+ <ul style="list-style-type: none">
+ <li>Thrusting stick or other wooden rod with wooden ball or
+ thick padding covering one end. (Old rifles with
+ spring-bayonets are even better.)</li>
+ <li>Plastron.</li>
+ <li>Baseball mask.</li>
+ <li>Pair of broadsword or single stick gloves.</li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li><i>Procedure</i>: <br />
+
+ The class is formed in two lines of about equal numbers,
+ facing each other, about fifty paces apart, with intervals
+ in each line of about two paces. A leader is designated
+ for each line. The instructor stands at one end of the
+ space between; an assistant at the other end. On the
+ instructor's whistle, the lines advance, guiding carefully
+ on their leaders. When about ten paces apart, they charge,
+ each seeking to break and roll up the opposing line.
+ Sticks are carried and used as rifles with bayonets fixed.
+ Any other use disqualifies. Use of the butt is barred. One
+ thrust on the plastron or mask, or two hits on the
+ extremities, disables the recipient, who must promptly
+ retire&mdash;or be retired. The combat continues until the
+ second whistle, blown not more than 30 seconds after
+ contact; when they cease fighting promptly, separate, and
+ form as before.</li>
+ <li><i>Criticism:</i><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128"></a><br />
+ After each combat, the instructor will criticize the manner
+ of advance and of fighting, especially the alignment kept
+ in the advance and the team work in combat, and the
+ advantage taken of opponents' mistakes. He counts the
+ casualties and awards the decision. He must continually
+ urge the men never to lag behind nor advance ahead of the
+ line, never to allow large gaps to occur in the line, and
+ always to seize the advantage given by opponents who
+ disregard these principles.</li>
+ <li><i>The terrain for this exercise</i> should be frequently varied. It
+ may also be conducted at night, the opposing sides being
+ clearly distinguished.
+ <a name="FNanchor_Q_17" id="FNanchor_Q_17"></a><a class="noline" href="#Footnote_Q_17"><sup>[Q]</sup></a></li>
+ </ol>
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<a name="Footnote_Q_17" id="Footnote_Q_17"></a><div class="note"><p style="text-indent: 0em"><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_Q_17">[Q]</a> The last exercise was devised and perfected by M. Jules
+Leslabay, Master of Fencing, Harvard R.O.T.C., 1917. It is more
+completely described in his &quot;Manual of Bayonet Training.&quot;</p></div>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Machine Guns.</b></p>
+
+<p>1. Properties of the machine guns are divided into three general
+ classes: Mode of action, fire, and inconspicuousness.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li><span class="sc">
+ The Mode Of Action</span>.&mdash;The machine gun acting only by its fire
+ can prepare an attack or repulse an offensive movement, but it
+ does not conquer ground. The latter role is almost exclusively
+ that of infantry which is fitted for crossing all obstacles.
+ When it will suffice to act by fire, employ the machine gun in
+ preference to infantry, preserving the latter for the combined
+ action of movement and <a name="Page_129" id="Page_129"></a>fire. By the employment of the machine
+ gun economize infantry, reserving a more considerable portion of
+ it for manoeuvre purposes.</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">
+ Fire</span>.&mdash;Machine gun fire produces a sheath, dense, deep but
+ narrow. The increase of the width of the sweeping fire gives to
+ the sheath a greater breadth, but when the density becomes
+ insufficient, the effect produced is very weak. Machine gun
+ fire will have its maximum power upon an objective of narrow
+ front and great depth. With the infantry fighting normally in
+ thin lines the preceding conditions will generally only be
+ realized when these lines are taken in the flank. &quot;The fire of
+ the machine gun parallel to the probable front of the enemy&mdash;a
+ flanking fire&mdash;must therefore be the rule.&quot; The fire
+ perpendicular to the front will be employed generally on
+ certain necessary points of passage as, bridges, roads,
+ defiles, cuts, roadways, communicating trenches, etc., where
+ the enemy is generally forced to take a deep formation with a
+ narrow front, or where he is in massed formation.</li>
+
+<li><span class="sc">
+ Inconspicuousness</span>.&mdash;By reason of its small strength the machine
+ gun section can utilize the smallest cover, and can consequently
+ hide from the enemy; the machine gun therefore, more than the
+ infantry, has the chance to act by surprise. The opening of the
+ fire by surprise will be the rule; the machine gun will avoid
+ revealing itself upon objectives not worth the trouble. Flank
+ action and surprise are the two conditions to try for under all
+ circumstances. </li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130"></a>2. <span class="sc">
+Offensive Reinforcement Of A Front Momentarily Stationary</span>.&mdash;The
+machine guns assisted by small elements of infantry cover thoroughly
+the getting in hand of the main body, the machine guns presenting to
+the enemy a line of little vulnerability. The machine guns assist in
+securing the possession of the ground previously taken, and will
+permit time to prepare for the resumption of the forward movement.
+Preparation of the attack&mdash;machine gun fire completes the preparation
+done by the artillery, either by acting on the personnel or by opening
+breaches in the accessary defenses. At times the machine guns alone
+may be charged with the preparation of the attack where it is
+necessary to act very quickly as in pursuit, exploitation of a
+success. Whatever the situation, concentrate the machine gun fire on
+one or several points. Machine guns cover the flanks of attacking
+troops. They follow the advance of these troops remaining on the
+flanks, so as to be able to fire instantly on all points from which an
+attack might come. Machine guns will likewise be employed in intervals
+created intentionally or accidentally between units. It is here a
+powerful weapon which can rapidly be put into action by the Commander.
+The personnel and material must be protected as far as possible from
+the effects of fire.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">
+Defensive</span>.&mdash;It is here that the flanking fire is especially
+necessary. In the defensive preparation of a position the machine guns
+must be so placed that they will provide along the front several
+successive fire barriers. The machine guns must be ready at all times
+to stop by instantaneous fire all hostile attack. In order to have
+machine gun protection at all, it is absolutely necessary that they be
+protected from bombardment. This is best done by the following: Place
+the machine guns under solid cover; make their emplacement invisible;
+echelon the machine guns in depth. The cover must be placed where it
+can be hidden from the sight of the enemy, such as a counter slope, a
+position where <a name="Page_131" id="Page_131"></a>it is impossible to blend it, relief with an
+accentuated slope of the ground, woods, brush, etc. It is essential
+that the principal parts of the machine gun casemate be prepared in
+the rear. Only in this manner will the work be done solidly and
+rapidly. While the machine gunners and helpers do the excavating,
+specialists in rear prepare the parts for assembling. The latter are
+then transported to the position and, the casemate is established,
+hiding the work with the greatest care from enemy observation.
+Remember that it is of the utmost importance that the machine gun be
+invisible, so the firing emplacements must be made outside of the
+shelter, but near enough for the gun to be brought out instantly and
+put into action. All communicating trenches leading to the firing
+emplacement must be concealed. Enough emplacements should be built to
+avoid firing daily from the emplacements especially reserved for cases
+of attack. Do not place too many machine guns in the first line; in
+case of a violent bombardment they are sure to be destroyed. The
+object to be attained is to install the machine guns in conditions
+such that if the enemy penetrates our first line, by aid of his
+bombardment or asphyxiating gas, his infantry, as it advances, comes
+under the fire of machine guns echeloned previously in depth, under
+whose fire it must stop. It is not a matter of sweeping a wide sector,
+but of giving over certain strips of ground flanking fire which will
+cut down surely the enemy's waves when they push forward. The
+commander should, therefore, divide between the first line and the
+terrain in rear, the machine guns which he controls, organizing for
+each particular case a firing emplacement in accord with the
+surrounding ground and the purpose in view.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+General Rules For Installation.</p>
+
+<p>Machine gunners must under no circumstances abandon their positions.
+They must, when necessary, allow themselves to be surrounded and
+defend themselves in <a name="Page_132" id="Page_132"></a>their place to the end. In many cases the
+heroism and tenacity of a few machine gunners have permitted the rapid
+retaking of a lost position. To provide for this resistance to a
+finish, the machine gun emplacements must fulfil the following
+conditions:</p>
+
+<p>1. Be surrounded by a wire entanglement of irregular trace and as
+invisible as possible.</p>
+
+<p>2. In the enclosure thus created having several firing emplacements,
+in case one or more becomes useless.</p>
+
+<p>3. The personnel must have all the means for protection against gas
+and have in addition rations, water and abundant ammunition.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Employment Of Fire And Instruction.</p>
+
+<p>The more grazing the fire of a machine gun the more effective it is.
+This causes the principal employment of the machine gun to be at
+distances where the trajectory is flattest, that is under 800 or 1,000
+yards. However, the effort to obtain a grazing fire must not exclude
+long distance fire. This latter will always be justified when directed
+upon important objectives, or necessary points of passage. For this
+fire to have some efficacy, it is necessary to calculate the range
+with the greatest precision. On the defensive indirect fire will be
+employed sometimes to annoy the supply, reliefs, etc. To give results,
+great quantities of ammunition will have to be expended. All of the
+officers and non-commissioned officers and as many men as possible
+must be capable of firing the machine gun, so that at the time of an
+attack no gun will remain idle for want of personnel. It is, moreover,
+essential to keep up the training of the personnel by having them fire
+at least twice a month, and, if possible, once a week.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Resume.</p>
+
+<p>Machine guns must be utilized in the greatest measure in order to
+<i>economize the infantry.</i></p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133"></a>Seek to employ them always in a <i>flank fire</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Conceal them so as to get <i>surprise fire</i>.</p>
+
+<p><i>Echelon</i> them and <i>shelter</i> them so as to avoid their premature
+destruction.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Points Before Firing.</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Thoroughly overhaul the gun to see that no part is deficient,
+and that the mechanism works freely.</li>
+<li>See that the barrel is clean and dry.</li>
+<li>See that the barrel mouthpiece is tight.</li>
+<li>See that small hole in gas regulator is to the rear.</li>
+<li>Thoroughly oil all working parts, especially the cam slot and
+exterior of the bolt, and the striker post and piston.</li>
+<li>Weigh and adjust the mainspring.</li>
+<li>See that the mounting is firm.</li>
+<li>Examine the magazines and ammunition.</li>
+<li>See that the spare parts and oil reserve are handy.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Points During Firing</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>During a temporary cessation of fire, re-oil all working parts.</li>
+<li>Replace a partly emptied magazine with a full one.</li>
+<li>Examine the mounting to see that it is firm.</li>
+<li>See that empty magazines are refilled without delay.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Points After Firing.</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Unload.</li>
+<li>Oil the bore and chamber, piston rod and gas cylinder.</li>
+<li>Sort out live rounds from empty cases.</li>
+<li>See that mainspring is eased.</li>
+<li>Thoroughly clean and oil the gun on returning to quarters. Clean
+the bore daily for several days.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134"></a>It is of the greatest importance that the points before, during, and
+after firing, should be carefully attended to as otherwise the number
+of stoppages will be unnecessarily increased.</p>
+
+<p>Nine out of ten stoppages are due to want of care.</p>
+
+<p>Immediate action must become instinctive and automatic.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%"><b>
+Grenade Instruction.</b></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Introduction</span>.&mdash;War, as it is being fought on the western front, has
+brought to light many new weapons; but no other weapon that this
+struggle has brought forth exceeds the grenade in importance. It is
+not a new weapon, but its present importance is entirely new. Its
+extensive use has grown out of conditions on the western front;
+conditions which have never been seen previous to this war. The fact
+that armies have taken to &quot;digging themselves in&quot; has necessitated the
+use of some other weapon than the rifle. The rifle with its flat
+trajectory is of little use against an enemy who is completely hidden
+from view and who can go on existing under ground. Hence the reversion
+to the ancient grenade&mdash;but with all its modern improvements. The
+grenade has shown itself to be the weapon that can solve the problem
+of seeking out an enemy who is under ground; its trajectory is high
+and its fire is plunging, so that it can be thrown from a place of
+concealment and protection and into a place equally well concealed
+from ordinary view.</p>
+
+<p>The importance of the grenade may be judged from its extensive use by
+both the Allies and the Germans; and also by the formations now
+adopted by both British and French armies for the purpose of
+exploiting its use. In a British Battalion the normal percentage of
+expert bombers is 25. In the French Company 36 per cent of the men are
+devoted to grenade work.</p>
+
+<p>A grenade has been defined as a slow moving, high trajectory missile
+containing high explosive and exploding by contact or time fuse.
+Grenades may be divided <a name="Page_135" id="Page_135"></a>roughly into two classes&mdash;1, hand grenades,
+and 2, rifle grenades, and each of these classes may be subdivided as
+regards means of explosion, into 1, time fuse, or 2, percussion
+grenades.</p>
+
+<p>Among the time-fuse hand grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 5,
+Stokes bomb, smoke bombs, fumite bombs, etc. The Mills is easily the
+most important and has come to be the standard adopted by the Allies.
+The percussion grenade is little used&mdash;the most important among those
+of this type is the so-called &quot;mushroom,&quot; named from its shape.</p>
+
+<p>Chief among the rifle grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 23, the
+Hale No. 3 and the Newton No. 24. Just as the Mills hand grenade has
+become the standard, so has the Mills rifle grenade attained that
+pre-eminence. A more detailed description of the various sorts of
+grenades cannot be attempted in this brief space; but one or two
+diagrams at the close of the chapter may serve to clarify the subject
+to some extent.</p>
+
+<p>Any course in grenade training should have a three-fold purpose:</p>
+
+<p>1st. To give the individual a practical knowledge of the working
+of the grenades in use.</p>
+
+<p>2nd. To teach him how to throw them.</p>
+
+<p>3rd. To make him acquainted with the general principles of
+organization and the execution of a grenade attack, either as a
+separate operation or as a part of a general attack. The time spent on
+any such course of training is a matter to be settled in the light of
+local considerations; but for purposes of preliminary training of a
+great number of men a period of two weeks is usually sufficient, with
+time allotted according to some such plan as this: (1) 10 separate
+half-hour sessions of practice in throwing from various positions and
+at the various targets; (2) 2 hours of study and a like amount of time
+spent in a conference for the purpose of clearing up matters that are
+hazy. In this brief time (only 9 hours) the foundation may be laid for
+a more <a name="Page_136" id="Page_136"></a>thorough training of the specialists later on. In any such
+course the use of dummy grenades should always precede the use of any
+live ones; and men should be taught caution above all other things.
+This is a point easily lost sight of when men are using only dummies;
+but it is well worth remembering, for obvious reasons.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+First: Giving The Individual A Practical Knowledge Of The Working Of
+The Grenades In Use</span>.&mdash;The differences in the construction and the uses
+of hand and rifle grenades should be brought out clearly. The various
+sorts of grenades should be explained and men should not forget the
+importance of knowing the grenades of the enemy as well as our own.
+This knowledge may one day prove of no little importance. As has
+already been stated, the Mills No. 5 is the standard among hand
+grenades of the Allies. It conforms to the general description of hand
+grenades; <i>i.e.</i>, it is an egg-shaped projectile, more or less hollow,
+and loaded with a charge of explosive. Besides this it has an
+apparatus for setting off the bursting charge. It weighs 1 pound 5
+ounces approximately, and 4 ounces of this is high explosive. The
+shell being of serrated cast-iron, an explosion will scatter a sort of
+shrapnel over an area equal to three times the height. No more need be
+said of the effectiveness of such a weapon. Among rifle grenades the
+Mills is also the standard more or less, although the French make
+great use of a rifle grenade that fits over the muzzle of the rifle,
+fired by ball cartridge, in contrast to the Mills No. 23, which has a
+rod running down the barrel of the rifle and which is propelled by the
+explosion of a blank cartridge. The maximum range of this grenade with
+a 5-&frac12;-inch stem is 120 yards, the gun being fired at an angle of 45
+degrees. The Newton Improved (a rifle grenade which explodes on
+contact) has a range of 250 yards; the Hale No. 3 also explodes on
+contact and has a range of 200-225 yards.</p>
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a href="images/plate7.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate7.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 7: Hand Grenade" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138"></a><span class="sc">Second: Instruction In Throwing</span>.&mdash;As
+previously stated the use of
+dummy grenades should precede the use of any live ones. Due
+precautions should be taken at all times, even when working with dummy
+grenades, for a habit of carelessness is not to be tolerated with this
+sort of weapon. Men should be instructed to throw from standing,
+kneeling and prone positions; although this last-named position is
+little used. Distance is important but <span class="sc">Accuracy Is Essential</span>. Men
+should always be taught to throw at a definite target, even when
+throwing in the open during preliminary work. The men may work in
+groups, one group throwing and the other returning. This method keeps
+all hands occupied and furnishes a medium for a little competition,
+which is a very helpful thing in training of this sort. A manual of
+the following sort may be of use in acquiring the proper sort of
+throw.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Pick up the grenade with the left hand.</li>
+<li>Prepare to throw&mdash;face to the right and transfer the grenade to
+ the right hand.</li>
+<li>Take aim&mdash;left hand and arm extended up and straight toward the
+ target, right hand and arm behind the thrower in the same plane
+ as the left.</li>
+<li>Withdraw pin with left hand.</li>
+<li>Throw&mdash;use a straight overhead motion and do not bend the arm at
+ the elbow. It is not a baseball throw. The tendency for most of
+ us Americans is to follow a perfectly natural habit&mdash;try to use
+ the baseball throw. This is to be discouraged for several
+ reasons, the chief one being that the grenade weighs about a
+ pound and a half, whereas our baseball weighs only a third of
+ this amount. Then, too, it often happens in the trenches that a
+ grenade duel will last for hours. Under such circumstances the
+ last grenade may decide the <a name="Page_139" id="Page_139"></a>issue and endurance will be a
+ mighty telling factor. Hence, the insistence upon the overhead
+ throw.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The preliminary throwing should take place in the open but always with
+a definite target, an outline of a section of trench being the best
+sort of target. Another excellent idea is to have a target arranged
+according to the diagram shown herewith and to keep score. This
+procedure will also add incentive for competition and will produce
+results. After men have thrown in the open for a sufficient period,
+they should proceed to the next stage: This is the stage of throwing
+in a cage or from behind and over obstacles. There are three distinct
+phases of this feature of the training: (1.) The thrower sees the
+target but must throw over an obstacle. (2.) The target is invisible;
+the thrower is aided by an observer and a periscope; the observer
+notes the fall of the grenades and gives directions as follows&mdash;&quot;So
+many yards right or left&quot; or &quot;Shorten or lengthen so many yards.&quot; (3.)
+Actual throwing in trenches. This stage immediately precedes that of
+&quot;working up a trench.&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a href="images/plate8.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate8.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 8" /></a>
+</div>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Third: Instruction In Grenade Organization</span>.&mdash;Men should be given a
+certain amount of theoretical instruction as to the composition of the
+armies now on the western front; this in order that they may see the
+part that grenadiers and bombers are playing in the struggle. They
+should be shown the organization of the British Infantry and how the
+first section of each platoon is composed exclusively of bombers
+and&mdash;rifle grenadiers; they should also be taught how the bombers and
+grenadiers are concentrated in the French organization. The typical
+bombing squad consists of 7 or 8 men and a leader who take positions
+as follows: 1 and 2, bayonet men; 3, first thrower; 4, first carrier;
+5, leader; 6, rifle bomber; 7, second thrower; 8, second carrier; 9,
+rifle bomber. One <a name="Page_141" id="Page_141"></a> of these bayonet men may
+be reserved to act as a sniper. The leader acts as an observer and
+directs the work of the bombers. The rifle bombers outrange the
+hostile bombers and also afford protection on the flanks. Every man
+must be taught his job and must be thoroughly instructed in the work
+of the squad as a whole in order that each man may be able to fill any
+position and that there may be perfect teamwork.</p>
+<br />
+
+<a name="POINTS_TO_REMEMBER" id="POINTS_TO_REMEMBER"></a>
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Points To Remember.</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Men should always have a definite target for their throwing&mdash;an
+outline of a trench is usually to be preferred.</li>
+<li>Caution in handling grenades should be made a habit.</li>
+<li>Accuracy is essential.</li>
+<li>Training should be progressive, both for men and organizations.</li>
+<li>Keep up competition among the men; rivalry will increase practice
+and men will throw grenades for recreation. This will get results. Let
+two men throw at each other. A good shot will make the other man move.</li>
+<li>Insist upon the straight overhead throw. It is less tiresome and
+when developed properly will give equal accuracy with any other
+method.</li>
+<li>Teamwork in a bombing squad is essential.</li>
+<li>Under new methods of warfare every infantryman is a bomber; but
+specialists must be trained.</li>
+<li>Officer must be a real leader and the best fighter in his platoon.</li>
+<li>Qualification tests should be arranged and the better qualified
+men taken for special training in this art.</li>
+</ol>
+<a name="Page_142" id="Page_142"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_5" id="CHAPTER_5"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143"></a>CHAPTER 5.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Map Sketching.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>Map sketching is an important factor in trench warfare to-day as it is
+in a war of movement. A fairly accurate map will indicate more than
+many words and in much less time. Time is the great factor in war.
+Instruction must also be rapid. Here are ten lessons which would
+occupy a week if taken morning and afternoon. The aim of the
+instruction as in company rifle shooting is to train many men to do a
+satisfactory job, not to make a few finished topographers. Neatness,
+accuracy and initiative are cardinal points.</p>
+
+<p>For the instructor, reference should be made to <i>Grieves'</i> &quot;<i>Military
+Sketching and Map Reading</i>&quot;, 2nd edition, if he desires to supplement
+any points given here.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>LESSON 1. (CLASS ROOM&mdash;FOUR HOURS.)</p>
+
+<p><i>Problem&mdash;Map Reading.</i></p>
+
+<p>Study the conventional signs found in the &quot;Manual for Non-commissioned
+Officers and Privates of Infantry of the Army of the U.S.,&quot; 1917, page
+273, or in Grieves, pages 28-35. These conventional signs are not
+universal and must be used only as indications of the general
+practice.</p>
+
+<p>In map sketching in the field few conventional signs are used, and the
+items of importance are written on the map, such as WOODS, CULTIVATED,
+HEDGE, SWAMP, etc.</p>
+
+<p>TAKING UP MAP SCALES.&mdash;There are three ways of indicating the relation
+between the actual distance on the ground and the space the same
+distance occupies on the map:</p>
+
+<p>1. The graphic scale is a straight line divided into units, as miles,
+yards, feet or meters, which represents the actual ground distance.
+Thus if 6&quot; = 1 mile the line <a name="Page_144" id="Page_144"></a>would be six inches long and marked at
+one end and 1 mile at the other, three inches being marked &frac12; mile,
+etc. It is important to always have this graphic scale on a map so
+that if the paper gets wet or is stretched from its original size the
+scale will change in the same proportion.</p>
+
+<p>2. A Statement in words or figures, e.g., 3 inches equal one mile,
+meaning that 3 inches measured anywhere on the map represent 1 mile on
+the actual ground.</p>
+
+<p>3. The Representative Fraction (generally known abbreviated as R.F.)
+having a number above the line that shows the unit length on the map
+and below the line the number of units which are in the corresponding
+actual ground distance. For example, if 1&quot; = 1 mile, then the R.F. is:</p>
+
+<div class="indent2">
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">1&quot; (map distance) <b>/</b> 63,360&quot; (1 mile&mdash;ground distance)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">if &nbsp; 3&quot; = 1 mile the R.F. is:</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">
+3&quot; (map distance) <b>/</b> 63,360&quot; (1 mile&mdash;ground distance) or 1 <b>/</b> 21120</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">if &nbsp; 6&quot; = 1 mile:</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">6&quot; <b>/</b> 63360&quot; or 1 <b>/</b> 10560</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">if &nbsp; 12&quot; = 1 mile:</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">12&quot; <b>/</b> 63360&quot; or 1 <b>/</b> 5280</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>In reading a map one must know the scale and also where the North is.
+This is always indicated by an arrow pointing either to the magnetic
+North or the true North. If to the magnetic North the needle will have
+but one barb away from the true North. The angle between the magnetic
+and the true North is the declination.</p>
+
+<p>Placing the map in proper relation to the ground so that points of the
+compass coincide on map and ground is called <i>orienting the map</i>.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145"></a>In map work there is one vital point to remember; practically all the
+ground surface is in its present form as a result of water action</p>
+
+<p>1. Look for the water courses, that is the drainage system. It will
+give the general slope of the land.</p>
+
+<p>2. Look for the high points between the water courses, remembering
+that there is always a valley then a hill then a valley again
+continued in succession.</p>
+
+<p>3. Finally locate towns, railroads, main highways and work down to the
+minor details.</p>
+
+<p>In measuring a map to get the actual distances on the ground, copy the
+graphic scale on any piece of paper and apply this directly or if your
+distances exceed your scale use the edge of a piece of paper and then
+apply it to the graphical scale on the map.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 2. (Field Work&mdash;five Hours.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<i>Problem&mdash;Stride Scale Map Making</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Producing a map from the actual ground requires certain instruments.
+The second lesson takes up the preparation of the stride scale on the
+alidade and the different kinds of maps, made in military sketching.</p>
+
+<p>The alidade is a triangular ruler with one or more working scales on
+it beside other measurements. The <i>working scale</i> is, for infantry,
+the stride or the space of ground covered from left foot to left foot
+again in walking, reduced to the proper map distance. This varies with
+individuals of course. Any scale of units, however, can be used as,
+horse trot, telegraph poles, etc.</p>
+
+<p>The working scale for each man is made by having him step off a
+measured course, say 440 yards. The ground should not be too even as a
+general average is needed, moreover the pace must be the natural gait
+of the individual under ordinary circumstances. Let him count the
+course three times then average the three results for the final
+estimate.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146"></a>Now to convert this into a working scale for the alidade made on a
+scale of six inches to the mile; take the case of a man who takes 220
+strides in 440 yards:</p>
+
+<div class="indent2">
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">440 yards = 15,840 inches</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">15,840 &divide; 220 = 72, or his stride in inches</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">then 880 strides = 1 mile or 6&quot; on the scale.</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>It is better to have a scale of 1,000 strides which is easily done by
+the proportion:</p>
+
+<div class="indent2">
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">1,000 sts. : 880 sts. :: x : 6</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;x = 6.8</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>now draw a line 6.8 inches long and a diagonal line from it; divide
+this diagonal line into 10 equal parts for each 100 paces at any
+convenient scale and draw a line from the end of the tenth part to the
+end of the 6.8 inches line; draw lines parallel to this line from each
+of the divisions. The 6.8&quot; line is then divided into 10 equal parts;
+each of these parts may be divided in the same manner into tenths.</p>
+
+<p>Your scale is ready to be pasted or transferred to the alidade and
+each 6.8. inches on the map will equal 1,000 of your strides on the
+ground, or about 1-1/12 miles (2,000 yards).</p>
+
+<p>There are two general classes of sketches:</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+1. Road Sketch</span>.&mdash;A traverse (passing over) made along a definite rout
+showing all features of military importance for a distance of 200 or
+300 yards on each side of the road. A road sketch is always made on a
+scale of 3 inches to 1 mile.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+2. Area Sketch</span>.&mdash;A map of a definite locality. There are 3 kinds of
+area sketches according to opportunity for observation:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Position Sketch&mdash;when access may be had to the whole area.</li>
+<li>Outpost Sketch&mdash;where part of the ground must be mapped without
+ passing over it. This form is applicable particularly to trench
+ warfare. Intersection and resection are used to locate points
+ within the enemy's lines.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148"></a>Place Sketch&mdash;when sketch must be made from one point, as when
+ the proximity of the enemy would prevent any movement; as from
+ trench observation stations, etc.; also an elaboration of the
+ <i>landscape</i> or <i>horizon</i> sketch which is used everywhere in the
+ trenches today. From one point an actual outline of the
+ opposite trench and background is made in perspective,
+ reference points on the horizon being marked on the edge of a
+ pad at arm's length. These marks are then prolonged on the
+ paper and the horizon is sketched. In like manner the middle
+ distance and the foreground come under observation and are put
+ on in one below the other.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Time must be allowed the men to make their stride scales and to paste
+or transfer them to their alidades.</p>
+<br />
+
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 60%;">
+<a name="Page_147" id="Page_147"></a>
+<a href="images/plate9.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate9.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 9" /></a>
+</div>
+
+
+<br />
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 3. (Field Work&mdash;five Hours.)</p>
+
+<p>The problem is to make a Position Sketch about one mile square closing
+the traverse. First considering the sketch board, compass, pencils,
+etc.; next the orienting, sighting and pacing; finally the uses of
+intersection and resection and in making allowance for error.</p>
+
+<p>The sketch board should be about 12 to 18 inches square, being used
+with or without a tripod. A cheap camera tripod is excellent. The
+board should have a compass attached so that it will remain in the
+same relative position on the board. If iron thumb tacks are used
+avoid getting them too near the compass. A hard pencil must be used to
+obtain good results. The paper must be smooth and where possible
+covered with another sheet fastened on but one side which will
+<a name="Page_149" id="Page_149"></a>readily fold back when one desires to work on the sketch.</p>
+
+<p>By always placing the board so that the compass reads North it will be
+oriented correctly. Care must be used when near electric wires or
+masses of metal as automobiles, railroad tracks, etc., which will
+attract the needle from its true azimuth (N. and S. direction) and
+thus throw off the whole map. In such cases it is far better to back
+sight and use the compass only at intervals to verify the sights.</p>
+
+<p>This brings up the matter of sighting. It is important to make long
+shots thus reducing the amount of individual error. In taking a
+sighting point make sure it can be recognized when reached and make
+sure to look at the reverse side in order to recognize it in case of
+back sighting if necessary. Always carry several large-headed pins
+using one at your present station and resting the side of the alidade
+against it, swinging the other end for sighting.</p>
+
+<p>After sighting and lining the sight on your sketch, step off evenly to
+pace the distance. Time is always a factor in military mapping and
+where possible make mental notes as you go along as to where roads or
+other important features are located, so that you can place them in
+their proper place on the map when you have reached the next station.
+It is well always to set a good pace for here time can be readily
+saved.</p>
+
+<p>Making an <i>intersection</i> is very simple. For as the sketcher moves
+along he ties his map together by sighting at any prominent object
+near his area, running these lines very lightly and only where he
+assumes the points to lie on his map. An abbreviation on the line or a
+number referring to a list off to one side will answer to recall the
+object. At any other station where the same point can be seen a
+similar line is drawn and where the two lines cross will be the
+location of the object. In the case of three lines not crossing at the
+same point take the middle of the triangle so formed.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150"></a><i>Resection</i> is just the reverse of this process. The mapper wants to
+know where he is located on the map. If he is properly oriented and
+can aim at two points on the ground which he has located on the map,
+he places a pin at one of these locations on the map and aims with the
+alidade at the object on the ground drawing a line towards himself;
+this is repeated with the other known point and where the two lines
+cross on the map will be the point he is standing at.</p>
+
+<p>In intersection the greatest accuracy is obtained by running the rays
+so as to meet as nearly as possible at right angles.</p>
+
+<p>In running a traverse the sketcher must expect to find some error at
+his closing point. This error must be distributed over the whole
+traverse so as not to have all the error concentrated at one point.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 4. (Field Work&mdash;four Hours.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Problem</span>.&mdash;Make a simple sketch, containing topographical details using
+the traverse made during the preceding lesson. Use of conventional
+signs should be emphasized and the appreciation of features of
+military importance impressed. A tendency is to put in details to a
+point of confusion. Judgment must be developed to choose telling
+points.</p>
+
+<p>A sharp pencil is always needed in sketching; in putting in the
+topographical details special attention must be given to the pencil.
+Keep the point sharp and make clear, distinct signs.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 5. (Class Room&mdash;four Hours.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Problem</span>.&mdash;Contours, the Vertical Interval, Use of the Slope Board, Map
+Distance, Visibility and Profiles.</p>
+
+<p>A contour is an imaginary line on the surface of the earth all points
+of which have the same elevation from a base or datum level, sea level
+usually being this base. <a name="Page_151" id="Page_151"></a>Slice an apple into pieces &frac12;-inch thick;
+where the cuts come may represent the contour lines. Take these
+individual slices, beginning at the bottom and outline them on a sheet
+of paper with a pencil (having run a nail through the apple first to
+keep each piece in place). The resulting circles will represent the
+apple's outline at &frac12;-inch intervals.</p>
+
+<p>Contours are always at equal elevations from each other, and the
+Vertical Interval (known by the abbreviation V.I.) is the measure
+between successive contour lines. In military maps the V.I. is always
+the same for each map scale:</p>
+
+<div>
+<span style="margin-left: 12em;">1 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 60 feet.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 12em;">3 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 20 feet.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 12em;">6 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 10 feet.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 11.5em;"> 12 inch to the mile, the V.I. is &nbsp; 5 feet.</span><br />
+</div>
+
+<p>Note that the V.I. changes in proportion to the scale, a map on a 3
+inch to the mile scale is 3 times as large as one on a scale of 1 inch
+to the mile, while the V.I. is 1/3 as great, hence the former shows 3
+times as many contours as the latter.</p>
+
+<p>Map Distance means the horizontal distance between two contour lines
+on a map and indicates a certain degree of slope. As the scale
+increases the V.I. decreases in proportion and the M.D. therefore
+remains the same for the same degree of slope whatever the scale of
+the map. By computation we find that a one degree slope rises one foot
+for every 57.3 feet horizontal distance, so a one degree slope would
+have a 20 foot rise in 1,146 feet horizontal distance, this distance
+equals .65 of an inch on the map if the scale is 3&quot; to 1 mile.</p>
+
+<p>The term &quot;Map Distance&quot; is also loosely used to denote distance
+between points as measured on the map. Care should be taken to
+distinguish between these two meanings.</p>
+
+<p>Distances between contours, scale 3&quot; to 1 mile: &frac12;&deg; slope = 1.3&quot;, 1&deg;
+slope =.65&quot;, 2&deg; slope =.32&quot;, <a name="Page_152" id="Page_152"></a>3&deg; slope =.22&quot;. These distances are
+already on the alidade and if you get a slope of 2&deg; with the slope
+board and have the distance from your station on the map to the point
+of aim either by pacing, intersection or resection, apply the M.D.
+scale as many times as it will go. This will give the number of
+contour lines crossing the traverse and the difference in elevation.
+The spacing of the contours may not be even between your station and
+the point of aim in which case the position of the contours must be
+estimated by eye.</p>
+
+<p>If your elevation above the datum or sea level is unknown at the start
+assume any elevation which is great enough to put the datum lower than
+the lowest spot of the area to be sketched.</p>
+
+<p>The sketching board is easily made to serve as a slope board in this
+manner. Hang a plumb bob about an inch below the center of a straight
+edge of the board while pointing at the horizon, using the back of the
+board. Mark a point 5.7&quot; directly below and draw a semicircle through
+it with the same radius. Now mark the point below the center zero and
+from it divide the arc using chords one tenth of an inch long. This
+will give a scale reading in degrees. By sighting along the top of the
+board at some object at the height of the eye from the ground the
+degree of slope is shown by the plumb bob on the scale below. Care
+must be exercised to prevent the wind from disturbing the reading. A
+protractor may be used in the same manner by sighting along the top
+and using a plumb bob to record the angle.</p>
+
+<p>In reading maps it is important to know whether points are visible
+from each other due to intervening ridges or other topographical
+features. This can be told by laying off accurately the distance on
+the map between the points in question and using as datum the lowest
+of the 3 points, then draw vertical lines, from the 2 higher points,
+making them in proportion to their elevation with any convenient
+scale. Draw a line <a name="Page_153" id="Page_153"></a>between the first and last points and, if the
+intervening vertical cuts this line the second point is not visible
+from the first. Take for example, two points A and B, 1,760 yards
+apart, by the map, A 500 feet and B 450 feet above sea level, the
+intervening point C is 475 feet above sea level and 500 yards from B.
+As B is the lowest we will call its elevation zero or at datum, then
+elevation of A is 50 feet and C 25 feet.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a href="images/plate10.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate10.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 10" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>Another method of deciding visibility is by proportion. Measure the
+distance between the three points A, B, and C, and obtain their
+elevations above the datum <a name="Page_154" id="Page_154"></a>(lowest of the 3) and using similar
+triangles. Take the same case as above, letting X represent the point
+above which the view is clear at 1,260 yards from point A, the line of
+sight passes through this point.</p>
+
+<div>
+<span style="margin-left: 18em;">1760 (A&mdash;B) : 500 (B&mdash;C) :: 50 (elev. A) : X</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 21em;">solving,&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; X = 14.2</span><br />
+</div>
+
+<p>Now, since the ground at point C is 25 feet above the base and the
+line of sight passes within 14.2 feet of the base at this place, an
+observer at A is unable to see B.</p>
+
+<p>The matter of profiling is very simple. Merely mark where the contours
+cut the edge of a piece of co-ordinate paper and extend the proper
+elevations, then pass a line through these points, remembering that
+the surface of the ground has a natural curve.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 6. (Field Work&mdash;five Hours.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Problem</span>.&mdash;By use of the slope scale on the sketch board and the
+contour interval scale on the alidade, each man will secure vertical
+data on the flat sketch made in the fourth lesson. Certain critical
+elevations will be determined and marked with red flags before hand.
+The elevations of two points on the ground will be furnished, one as
+the datum and the other as a check. Draw in contours of this sketch
+with the help of drainage lines and elevations already secured.</p>
+
+<p>The chief points to be considered are to take slopes from points
+established on the sketch; to take several sights and average the
+angle of slope; to properly lay off the elevation by using the slope
+scale on the alidade; and finally to put in the contours along these
+lines of sight <i>on the spot</i> thus allowing for difference in
+topography between the point of sight and the station from which the
+elevation is taken. Careful note must be made of the drainage systems
+as these are the keynotes to the sketch and finally the contours are
+connected together, keeping in mind always that no contour stops
+unless it makes a closed curve or goes off the map. <a name="Page_155" id="Page_155"></a>Remember also
+that contours make fingers pointing up stream and are blunt around
+hill sides. Contours cross streams to opposite points and break at
+roads, continuing on the other side. Uniform slopes have
+equally-spaced contours. Do not try to measure every slope, two
+intersecting elevation sights on a hill will check the height. Put the
+intervening contours in by eye.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 7. (Classroom&mdash;four Hours.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Problem.</span>&mdash;Completing the map sketch previously made and making a
+landscape sketch.</p>
+
+<p>It is important to complete a map and no matter how good it is, if
+certain points are omitted, the value of the work is very much
+decreased. The sketcher must clear the sketch of all unnecessary lines
+and notes and make his lettering clear on the map. Be sure that the
+following items are on the sketch before it is turned in.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Location of the ground shown.</li>
+<li>Line of magnetic north shown by an arrow, and if declination is
+known, the true north also.</li>
+<li>Graphic scale and representative fraction&mdash;R.F.</li>
+<li>Vertical interval&mdash;V.I.</li>
+<li>Sketcher's name and organization to which he belongs.</li>
+<li>Date.</li>
+</ol>
+
+
+<p>A landscape sketch is a place sketched with details shown in
+perspective. The horizon is always of military importance and should
+be shown as well as intervening crests, woods, houses, etc. Landscape
+sketching in trench warfare is a necessary accomplishment of the
+observer. The beginner will at first be confused by a mass of details,
+but he must note only the outline of the features sketched. First draw
+the sky line and crests, then fill in the other details with fewest
+lines possible. Unnecessary shading tends to detract from the
+clearness of the sketch. There will be great difficulty in getting the
+perspective, note the size of objects, the further away they are the
+smaller they seem. Make them so. In making the sketch, hold the pad in
+front <a name="Page_157" id="Page_157"></a>with one eye closed, the upper edge
+of the pad horizontal; a string 20 inches long is tied to the pad and
+held between the teeth to insure the same distance from the eye each
+time. Moreover, if it is desired to locate objects by deflection of an
+angle from a reference point, this can be done by using <i>mils</i>. One
+mil is 1-6400 of a circle. At 2 inches a half-inch interval subtends
+25 mils.</p>
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_156" id="Page_156"></a>
+<a href="images/plate11.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate11.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 11" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>The paper is oriented by bringing the sector desired along the upper
+edge of the pad. The points desired are then in proper positions, both
+horizontally and vertically.</p>
+
+<p>Place a mark at the upper edge for points desired. The sky line should
+be located first. Now carry these lines down, having drawn three
+horizontal lines about &frac12; inch apart, beginning with the highest
+point on the top line. Marks locating the other features are likewise
+transposed in vertical and horizontal portions.</p>
+
+<p>Now draw sky line connecting transposed marks, then such other points
+as crests, trenches, houses, etc. After practice most other features
+can be drawn in without reorienting, the sky line having been drawn.
+The vertical elevation should be slightly exaggerated. Objects in the
+background should be drawn in lightly while nearby features are
+indicated by <i>heavy lines</i>. Avoid details, draw only silhouette, shade
+only in showing woods.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lesson 8. (Field Work&mdash;five Hours.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Problem</span>.&mdash;Make complete area sketch including contours, with no data
+furnished other than the initial elevation.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Before commencing the work summarize the important points involved.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>If possible select a base line.</li>
+<li>Locate as many points by intersection as possible.</li>
+<li>Make traverse by road, check locations by resection.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158"></a>At good observation points observe and complete the sketch as far
+as possible.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">At each station keep the following points in view:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Back sight on previous station.</li>
+<li>Select new sighting point ahead.</li>
+<li>Determine elevation by slope board.</li>
+<li>Put in contours where possible noting the drainage and critical
+points of the general slope and the terrain.</li>
+<li>Put in details along traverse just made of all topographical
+features of military importance.</li>
+<li>Determine your present elevation.</li>
+<li>Make as many shots for intersection as you can and mark them.</li>
+<li>Look for possible resection shots.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Lessons 9 And 10. (Field Work&mdash;nine Hours.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Problem</span>.&mdash;Make a road sketch of about 12 miles with scale of 3 inches
+to the mile, V.I. 20 feet. This should include details of military
+importance to a distance of 300 yards on either side of the road.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Keep in mind these points:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Start carefully and give attention to every part of the map.</li>
+<li>Keep the board properly oriented.</li>
+<li>Watch the water drainage systems.</li>
+<li>Put down all necessary details at each <i>setup</i>.</li>
+<li>Note high hills and towns not on immediate route, condition of
+roads, fences, cultivation, hedges, cuts and fills, bridges (kind and
+length), railroads, telegraph and telephone lines, schools, churches,
+etc., notice particularly woods and points of concealment for hostile
+troops.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Do the work at each station for elevation, contours and the noting of
+necessary details so that the sketch will be complete as you go along.
+Make certain that the title of the sketch, scale, orientation, etc.,
+are all <a name="Page_159" id="Page_159"></a>clearly indicated, for a road map may have to be completed by
+another or may be called for suddenly when it will be useless without
+these details.</p>
+
+<p>Remember there are but two things absolutely essential to a good road
+sketch; a good traverse and the location of the drainage system in its
+relation to this traverse. With this control approximate contours can
+be drawn by anyone having a knowledge of the principles of topography.
+Never plot unimportant details. Prominent buildings and farm houses
+are of value for locating oneself. Woods and orchards are shown for
+tactical reasons but no one can expect to show every fence, ditch or
+bit of cover that might hide a patrol.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Map Reading.</b></p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+(Gettysburg 3&quot; Map&mdash;hunterstown Sheet.)</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em">Plattsburg Barracks, N.Y., Sept. 17, 1917:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>What is the shortest distance by road from Biglersville to Texas?</li>
+<li>Describe the road between Texas and Table Rock.</li>
+<li>Is it a cut or a fill along the railroad about &frac12; mile east of
+Granite Hill Station?</li>
+<li>What is meant by 931 on Chestnut Hill?</li>
+<li>Can a man on the summit of hill 712 (about one mile southwest of
+Plainview) be seen from the town of Plainview?</li>
+<li>Point out two fords on the Conewago River.</li>
+<li>Where is the highest point on the road from Plainview to
+Heidlersburg?</li>
+<li>Describe the fences along the road from Texas to Table Rock
+Station.</li>
+<li>Is Hill 566 S.W. from D. Wert visible from Henderson Meeting House?</li>
+<li>Of what material is the bridge at Bridge School House constructed?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em">Harvard College:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Can a sentinel standing at 707 see road fork 535 (about 1,500 yards
+south)?</li>
+<li><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160"></a>An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road, and has
+crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544.) Can this patrol see the
+Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and cross roads 616?</li>
+<li>Can the sentinel at 712 see the road fork 518 (1,850 yards
+southwest from 712)?</li>
+<li>Can the sentinel at 712 see the cross roads 561 (about 1,200 yards
+southeast)?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Assuming the height of a man as 5' 0&quot; above the ground and trees and
+buildings as 30' 0&quot;.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Is the ground at road fork 552 near D. Wirt visible to a patrol on
+Hill 712? If not what is the obstructing point? Turn in profile, using
+cross section paper.</li>
+<li>Disregarding trees, is a man standing on Bridge 523 near Bridge
+S.H. visible from Hill 712?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Solve by any method desired indicating the method.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Make a profile from location of the letter &quot;U&quot; of Chestnut Hill
+near Center Mills to Hill 712, 2-&frac12; miles to the south.</li>
+<li>Is the location of the letter &quot;B&quot; of Beatrich visible from &quot;U&quot; of
+Chestnut Hill? If not what obstructs?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Can a man on Hill 712 see a man at cross roads 554 in Hunterstown
+(disregard trees)?</li>
+<li>To a man standing at the point where contour 680 crosses the road
+just south of 707, where does the roadbed first become invisible?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>When the point arrives at Hill 647 can it see the road fork 610 to
+the northwest?</li>
+<li>When the flank patrol reaches Benders Church cross roads can it see
+an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile to
+the northeast?</li>
+<li>Looking north along the Center Mills road from Hill 647, where does
+the road first become invisible?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>What does 1/21120 mean?</li>
+<li>What direction is the general drainage system on this sheet?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_6" id="CHAPTER_6"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161"></a>CHAPTER 6.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Helpful References to the Articles of War.</h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+(Extracted from M.C.M. and Guide to the Articles of War&mdash;Waumbaugh's
+Lectures.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc" style="margin-bottom: .2em">
+Military Law</span> is the body of rules that governs members of the army.
+Military Law is based upon the Articles of War approved by Congress,
+August 27, 1916, effective March 1, 1917. This body of rules defines:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Punishable offenses of members of the army.</li>
+<li>The Method of determining guilt.</li>
+<li>Punishment.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>The present Articles of War are revisions of those from the
+Revolution.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 1.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Definitions:</span></p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>The word &quot;officer&quot; shall be construed to refer to a
+ commissioned officer (and no one else).</li>
+<li>The word &quot;soldier&quot; to include non-commissioned officer or any
+ other enlisted man.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 2.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Persons Subject To Military Law</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>All officers and soldiers of the Regular Army.</li>
+<li>All volunteers in the service of the U.S.</li>
+<li>All other persons lawfully called, drafted or ordered into such
+ service.</li>
+<li>West Point cadets.</li>
+<li>Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for
+ service with the army, by order of the President.</li>
+<li>All retainers to the camp, or accompanying or serving with the
+ army in time of war, both <a name="Page_162" id="Page_162"></a>within and without territorial
+ jurisdiction of U.S.</li>
+<li>All persons under sentence by court-martial.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Articles 3-18.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Courts Martial Classified</span>:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: upper-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>General Courts Martial.<br />
+ <p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em">Appointed by</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>President,</li>
+ <li>Commanding officer of department or territorial division.</li>
+ <li>Commanding officer of separate army division brigade.</li>
+ <li>Commanding officer of district or force empowered by
+ President.</li>
+ </ol>
+ <br />
+
+ Jurisdiction.<br />
+ <p>Over all persons subject to Military Law as regards all
+ offenses punishable by Military Law.</p>
+ Sentence.<br />
+ <p>Everything.</p>
+</li>
+
+<li>Special Courts Martials (3 to 5 officers inclusive).<br />
+ <p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em">Appointed by</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Commanding officer of district, garrison, fort or camp.</li>
+ <li>Commanding officer of brigade, detached battalion.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ <br />
+ Jurisdiction.<br />
+ <p>Over any person subject to military law (except an officer),
+ and for any crime not capital. (Only soldiers excluding
+ those having certificate of eligibility for promotion.)</p>
+ Sentence.<br />
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>No power to adjudge dishonorable discharge.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163"></a>No confinement in excess of six (6) months.</li>
+ <li>No forfeiture of pay in excess of six (6) months.</li>
+ </ol>
+<br />
+</li>
+<li>Summary Courts Martial (one (1) officer). <br />
+ <p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em">Appointed by</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Commanding officer of garrison, fort, camp, etc.</li>
+ <li>Commanding officer of regiment, detached battalion, etc.<br />
+ (N.B.) When but one (1) officer is present with command he
+ shall be the summary court martial.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ <br />
+ Jurisdiction.<br />
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Only privates holding no certificate of eligibility for
+ promotion&mdash;and</li>
+ <li>For crimes not capital.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ Sentence.<br />
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Confinement not over 3 months.</li>
+ <li>No dishonorable discharge.</li>
+ <li>No punishment over one (1) month without higher
+ authority.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Method Of Entering A Charge Against A Man:</span></p>
+
+<p>Example:</p>
+
+<p><span style="border-bottom: solid 1px #000000; text-decoration: underline;">Charge</span>:
+Violation of the &mdash;&mdash; Article of War.</p>
+
+<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Specification</span>:
+ In that (rank, name, organization) did at
+ (place) on or about (date) etc. (brief description
+ of offence committed).</p>
+
+<span style="margin-left: 9.5em;">Signed &nbsp;(Name)</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 9.5em;">(Rank and Branch of Service)</span><br />
+
+<br />
+
+<p>In cases where there are more than one charge the number of each A.W.
+is put down in the charge. A <a name="Page_164" id="Page_164"></a>description of each offence is put down
+separately under <span class="sc">Specification</span>.</p>
+
+<p>Note that double lines are drawn under <span class="sc">
+Charge</span>, single line under <span class="sc">
+Specification</span>.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+General Remarks</span>:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">The three (3) Courts Martial are alike in the following:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Composed only of officers of Army or Marine Corps on detached
+ service with the Army by order of the President.</li>
+<li>Pass upon both law and fact.</li>
+<li>Criminal Courts only.</li>
+<li>Unable to promulgate any finding that does not require approval
+ of appointing authority.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">The three (3) Courts Martial differ in the following:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Number of members.</li>
+<li>Appointing authority.</li>
+<li>Punishments.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 31.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Order Of Voting</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Members in General or Special Courts Martial shall vote from junior to
+senior.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 39.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Limitations Upon Prosecutions</span>:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Military offences fall into three (3) groups:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>War desertion, mutiny, murder. Have no limitations.</li>
+<li>Burglary, etc. (A W. 93) and frauds against Government (A.W.
+ 94). Prosecution limited to 3 years.</li>
+<li>All other offences. 2 years.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165"></a>In some cases the Statute of Limitations is suspended (A.W. 39),
+especially in cases of absence from the United States.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<hr style='width: 45%;' />
+
+<br />
+
+<p>The following Articles of War are the important ones for officers to
+be acquainted with in the ordinary course of his duties:</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 54.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Fraudulent Enlistment</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court Martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person procuring himself to be enlisted by means of
+ willful misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications
+ for enlistment and shall receive pay or allowance,&quot; ...</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+This offense requires two (2) steps:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Misrepresentation or concealment.</li>
+<li>Receiving pay or allowances.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 58.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Desertion</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: (Wartime) Death or Court Martial. (Peacetime) Court
+Martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person&mdash;who deserts or attempts to desert in time of War
+ ... death or such other punishment as the court martial may
+ direct ... any other time any punishment except death.&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+Essential features are:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>An intent not to return.</li>
+<li>An overt act of separation from duty.<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em">Drunkenness tends to show absence of the intent.<br />
+Minority is no defense.<br />
+Enlistment while in desertion does not remove the charge of
+ desertion.</p>
+</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_166" id="Page_166"></a>Article 61.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Absence Without Leave</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court Martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person who fails to repair at the fixed time to duty, or
+ goes from same without leave of absence, or absents himself from
+ his command, guard, quarters, station or camp without proper
+ leave....&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+Does not require to prove intent, yet persons ignorant of
+ military law, drunk or victims of mistake are dealt with gently. </p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 62.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Disrespect Toward President, Vice-president, Congress, Secretary Of
+War, Governors, Legislatures</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal from the service,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 6em;">&nbsp;(Soldier) Court martial.</span></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words
+ against the President, etc.... any other person subject to
+ military law who so offends.&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+Contemptuous language is objectionable and liable to court
+ martial whether</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Used in public or private.</li>
+<li>In official or private capacity.</li>
+<li>Written or spoken.</li>
+<li>True or untrue.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 63.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Disrespect Toward A Superior Officer</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with
+ disrespect toward his superior officer....&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+Unlike Article 62, disrespect toward a superior officer requires
+ no words&mdash;acting or neglecting to act (such as rudeness or failure
+ to salute) are enough.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_167" id="Page_167"></a>Article 64.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Assaulting Or Willfully Disobeying Superior Officer</span>:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">Punishment: Death or court-martial.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>&quot;Any person subject to military law who on any pretense
+ whatsoever, strikes his superior officer&mdash;lifts a weapon, or
+ offers violence against him, being in the execution of his
+ office.&quot;</li>
+<li>&quot;Or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior
+ officer.&quot;<br />
+Drunkenness here tends to show absence of the essential
+ willfullness.<br />
+ Self defense is not forbidden nor violence to suppress mutiny.
+</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 65.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Insubordinate Conduct Toward A Non-commissioned Officer</span>:</p>
+
+<p style=" margin-bottom: .2em">Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>&quot;Any soldier who assaults or attempts or threatens to
+ strike or assault.&quot;</li>
+<li>&quot;Or willfully disobeys the lawful order of a
+ non-commissioned officer while in the execution of his office.&quot;</li>
+<li>&quot;Or uses threatening or insulting language.&quot;</li>
+<li>&quot;Or behaves in an insubordinate or disrespectful manner.&quot;<br />
+Drunkenness will not have the effect here of showing an absence
+ of willfullness.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 68.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Disorders</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;All officers and non-commissioned officers have power to quell
+ disorders and to order officers who take part in the same into
+ arrest, and other persons into arrest or confinement.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+<a name="Page_168" id="Page_168"></a>Whosoever, being so ordered:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Refuses to obey.</li>
+<li>Draws a weapon.</li>
+<li>Otherwise threatens or does violence shall be punished.&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+This is one instance (except a.w., 67, mutiny) where even a
+ corporal might order a general into arrest.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+This is the only instance:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Where anyone other than a commissioned officer can put an
+ officer under arrest.</li>
+<li>Where anyone other than an officer can order, arrest or
+ confinement of a soldier except on power given by C.O.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 69.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Breaking Arrest</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal, (Soldier) Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any officer charged with crime shall be placed in arrest by
+ C.O.... in exceptional cases ... confined.&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;A soldier charged with crime ... shall be placed in confinement
+ ... when charged with minor offense placed in arrest.&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person placed in arrest ... shall be restricted to
+ barracks, quarters, tent, unless limits are enlarged by proper
+ authority.&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;An officer or any other person breaking his arrest or who
+ escapes from confinement before being set at liberty by proper
+ authority shall be punished by....&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+To break arrest is punishable even though a person is innocent
+ of the charge or ought to have been released. </p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_169" id="Page_169"></a>Article 75.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Misbehavior Before The Enemy</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Death or court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+&quot;Any officer or soldier who:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Misbehaves before the enemy&mdash;runs away, or shamefully
+ abandons post.</li>
+<li>Or speaks words inducing others to do so.</li>
+<li>Or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage.</li>
+<li>Occasions false alarms in camp or quarters shall suffer
+ ....&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-top: .2em;">
+The word &quot;enemy&quot; implies &quot;any hostile body&quot; such as a mob or
+ riot crowd.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 83.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Neglect Of Military Property</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Make good the loss and court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person subject to military law who willfully or through
+ neglect suffers to be lost, damaged, or wrongfully disposed of,
+ any military property belonging to United States of
+ America&mdash;shall make good the loss and....&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 84.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Waste Or Unlawful Disposal Of Property Issued To Soldiers</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of any property
+ issued for military service shall be punished....&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 85.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Drunk On Duty</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: (War time) dismissal and court-martial, (Peace time)
+court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any officer ... drunk on duty shall ... in time of war be
+ dismissed ... and</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+<a name="Page_170" id="Page_170"></a>Any other person subject to military law, drunk on duty ...
+ shall be punished....&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 86.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Misbehavior Of A Sentinel</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: (War time) death or court-martial, (Peace time)
+court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+&quot;Any sentinel found:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Drunk.</li>
+<li>Asleep.</li>
+<li>Or who leaves before being regularly relieved shall be
+ punished....&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 92.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Murder Or Rape</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Death or life imprisonment.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any person who commits murder or rape shall suffer death or
+ life imprisonment as the court-martial may direct.&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+No person shall be tried for murder or rape committed in the
+ limits of the U.S.A. in time of peace. This is left to civil
+ courts.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 93.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Various Crimes</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+&quot;Any person who commits</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Manslaughter,</li>
+<li>Mayhem (cutting),</li>
+<li>Arson,</li>
+<li>Burglary,</li>
+<li>Larceny,</li>
+<li>Embezzlement,</li>
+<li>Perjury,</li>
+<li>Assault with intent to commit any felony.</li>
+<li>Assault with intent to do bodily harm. shall be
+ punished....&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-top: .2em;">
+Definition of these crimes is left to local law. </p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_171" id="Page_171"></a>Article 94.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Frauds Against The Government</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+Article of War No. 94 is equivalent to prohibiting any person
+ subject to military law from defrauding or attempting, or
+ conspiring to defraud the Government of the U.S.A.&mdash;also from
+ stealing, embezzling any Government property.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 95.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+Conduct Unbecoming An Officer And A Gentleman</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Dismissal.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;Any officer or cadet convicted of unbecoming conduct shall be
+ dismissed....&quot;</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+Misconduct may be official or unofficial.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Article 96.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em"><span class="sc">
+General Article, The Catch All</span>:</p>
+
+<p>Punishment: Court-martial.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+&quot;... all disorders and neglects to the prejudice of good
+ military discipline.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em;">
+All conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military
+ service.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+All crimes and offences not capital shall be taken cognizance of
+ by</p>
+
+<ol class="indent2" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>General,</li>
+<li>Special,</li>
+<li>Summary court-martials according to the nature and degree
+ of the offense and punished....</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 6em; margin-right: 6em; margin-top: .2em;">
+Article of War 96 covers all crimes and is handy when no other
+ Article of War fits. It is wise, however, to use this Article
+ sparingly on Charges, finding if possible the exact Article
+ necessary to cover the case at hand.</p>
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_172" id="Page_172"></a>Examples.</p>
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-indent: 0em;">Problem 1:</p>
+
+<p>Charge.&mdash;Violation of &mdash;&mdash; Article of War.</p>
+
+<p>Specification.&mdash;In that Private John Doe, Company C. 301st Regiment
+Infantry, did at Albany, New York, on or about September 15th, 1917,
+dress himself in the uniform of a 1st Lieutenant and attend a dance at
+Odd Fellows Hall.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 6em;">(Signed)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span class="sc">
+John Hancock</span>,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 9.5em;">Captain, 301st Infantry.</span></p>
+
+<p>Under what article of war, if any, does this belong?</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-indent: 0em;">Problem 2:</p>
+
+<p>Charge.&mdash;Violation of &mdash;&mdash; and &mdash;&mdash; Articles of War.</p>
+
+<p>Specification.&mdash;In that Sergeant James Hopkins, Company H, 205th
+Infantry, did at Franconia, N.H., on or about July 4th return to
+barracks intoxicated.</p>
+
+<p>In that Sergeant James Hopkins, moreover, refused to appear at
+reveille July 5th.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 6em;">(Signed)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span class="sc">
+William Hitchcock</span>,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 10em;">Captain, 205th Infantry.</span></p>
+
+<p>Under what articles of war do these offenses belong?</p>
+
+<p>What kind of court-martial required?</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-indent: 0em;">Problem 3:</p>
+
+<p>Charge.&mdash;Violation of &mdash;&mdash; Article of War.</p>
+
+<p>Specification.&mdash;In that Captain George Jones, 125th Infantry did at
+Laconia, Maine, on or about August 20, 1917, make a speech in which he
+stated that the Reichstag of Germany was a more efficient and
+democratic body than the United States Congress.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 6em;">(Signed)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span class="sc">
+Albert Smith</span>,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 9.5em;">Major, 125th Infantry.</span></p>
+
+<p>Under what article of war does this offense belong?</p>
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<a name="Page_173" id="Page_173"></a>
+<div style="margin-left: 10em;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="0" width="75%" summary="Punishments">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft">
+ <span class="sc">No.</span></td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft">
+ <span class="sc">Articles Of War.</span></td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ <span class="sc">Punishment.</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft">
+ 54.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft">
+ Fraudulent enlistment</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 58.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Desertion</td>
+ <td width="2%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap;">
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span> </td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ War: Death or court martial<br />
+ Peace: Except death</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft">
+ 61.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft">
+ Absence without leave</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 62.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Disrespect to Presidents Vice-President, <br />
+ Secretary of War, Congress, etc.</td>
+ <td width="2%" class="tdleft">
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span> </td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Officer: Dismissal<br />
+ Soldier: Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 63.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Disrespect to superior officer</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 64.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Assaulting or disobeying superior officer</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Death or court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 65.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Insubordination to a non-commissioned officer</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 69.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Arrest or confinement of accused persons</td>
+ <td width="2%" class="tdleft">
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span> </td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Officer: Dismissal<br />
+ Soldier: Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 75.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Misbehavior before the enemy</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Death or court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 83.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Loss, etc., military property</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Make good the loss and court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 84.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Loss of military property issued to soldiers</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 85.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Drunk on duty</td>
+ <td width="2%" class="tdleft">
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span><br />
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span></td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Officers&mdash;<br />
+ War: Dismissal<br />
+ Peace: Court martial<br />
+ Soldiers: Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 86.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Misbehavior of sentinel</td>
+ <td width="2%" class="tdleft">
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span> </td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ War: Death or<br />
+ Peace: Court martial (except death)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 93.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Various crimes</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 94.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Frauds against the Government</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 95.</td>
+ <td colspan="2" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ Conduct unbecoming an officer</td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Dismissal</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ 96.</td>
+ <td width="50%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">
+ General article</td>
+ <td width="2%" class="tdleft">
+ <span style="font-size: 210%;">{</span> </td>
+ <td width="43%" class="tdleft">
+ Court martial<br />
+ (General or special)</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<a name="Page_174" id="Page_174"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_7" id="CHAPTER_7"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175"></a>CHAPTER 7.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Notes on Army Regulations</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>1. <span class="sc">
+Obedience</span> required in the military service&mdash;strict and prompt.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">
+Authority Exercised</span> with firmness, kindness and justice&mdash;prompt and
+lawful punishment.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">
+Abusive Language</span> or conduct by superiors forbidden.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">
+Respect To Superiors</span> will be extended upon all occasions, whether
+on duty or not.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="sc">
+Remarks By Officers</span> or soldiers upon others in the military
+service, whether praise or censure, public or private, written or
+spoken, is prohibited. Any effort to affect legislation for a personal
+favor will be entered against a man's military record.</p>
+
+<p>106. <span class="sc">
+Furloughs</span> not granted to men about to be discharged. Not more
+than five per cent of a company shall be absent at one time.</p>
+
+<p>109. <span class="sc">
+Men On Furlough</span> may not leave the United States.</p>
+
+<p>111. <span class="sc">
+For Men In Foreign Countries</span> furlough can begin on date of
+reaching United States.</p>
+
+<p>113. <span class="sc">
+No Payments</span> made to men while on furlough. Arms not to be taken
+on furlough or while reporting sick.</p>
+
+<p>(N.B.&mdash;There will unquestionably be a modification of this ruling, as
+the custom abroad is to have every man keep his complete equipment
+with him whenever possible.)</p>
+
+<p>116. <span class="sc">
+Desertion</span>. Property lost or destroyed will be charged against
+deserter.</p>
+
+<p>117. <span class="sc">
+Abandoned Clothes</span> turned over to Quartermaster. Personal effects
+sold and credited to United States.</p>
+
+<p>121. <span class="sc">
+Reward Of</span> $50 for apprehension and delivery of deserter or
+military prisoner.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176"></a>127. <span class="sc">
+Costs Of Apprehension</span> will be charged against deserter.</p>
+
+<p>129. <span class="sc">
+No Pay Or Clothes</span> drawn by soldier awaiting trial on charge of
+desertion.</p>
+
+<p>131. <span class="sc">
+Will Be Restored</span> to duty only by court martial or authority
+competent to order trial.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">132. <span class="sc">
+Absent Without Leave</span>. Enlisted man forfeits all pay and
+allowances while away.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em;">
+Soldier will not be charged with desertion until commanding officer
+has reason to believe he intended to desert. Absence of less than 24
+hours will not be noted upon the muster roll.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">139. <span class="sc">
+Discharge</span> of enlisted man only</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>By order of President or Secretary of War.</li>
+<li>By order of General Court Martial.</li>
+<li>By order of United States court or justice or judge, on writ of
+ habeas corpus.</li>
+<li>By command of territorial department.</li>
+<li>By disability in line of duty.</li>
+<li>By sentence of civil court.</li>
+<li>By purchase.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em;">(N.B.&mdash;In time of war it is probable that the last two methods would
+not be effective for discharge from the service.)</p>
+
+<p>140. <span class="sc">
+Final Statements</span>. The company commander will furnish each
+enlisted man a final statement (or duplicate) or a full statement in
+writing explaining why such final statement is not furnished. No final
+statement will be furnished a soldier who has forfeited all pay and
+allowances or who has no deposits due him.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">147. <span class="sc">
+Certificate</span> will give</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Character certified by company commander.</li>
+<li>Whether recommended for re-enlistment.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; text-indent: 0em;">In case of negative opinion, the soldier should be notified at
+ least 30 days prior to discharge. In that case the company
+ commander shall convene a board of three officers (if possible) to
+ determine <a name="Page_177" id="Page_177"></a>what kind of discharge shall be given. The soldier will
+ be given a hearing.</p>
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>151. <span class="sc">
+Loss Of Discharge Certificate</span>. Discharge certificates will not be
+made in duplicate. Upon proper proof of loss or destruction without
+fault of person entitled to it, the War Department will issue a
+certificate of service, showing date of enlistment and discharge from
+the army and character given in original certificate.</p>
+
+<p>Discharge certificates should never be forwarded to the War Department
+in correspondence unless called for.</p>
+
+<p>159. <span class="sc">
+Physical Disability Certificate</span> issued when an enlisted man is
+permanently unfitted for service, in line of duty. Certificates of
+disability not made in duplicate.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">162.
+<span class="sc">Death Of Soldier</span>.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Effects are secured.</li>
+<li>Nearest relatives notified.</li>
+<li>Adjutant General of army notified.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">
+In active service the War Department requires the following reports:</p>
+
+<ol class="ident1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Report of company commander to Adjutant General, covering death
+ and disposal of remains.</li>
+<li>Report of surgeon or company commander embodying
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .3em; margin-bottom: .3em;">
+ <li>Cause of death.</li>
+ <li>Whether in line of duty.</li>
+ <li>Whether due to another soldier's misconduct.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+<li>Inventory of effects in duplicate.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>163. <span class="sc">
+Effects</span>, when not claimed within reasonable time, sold and
+credited to United States.</p>
+
+<p>No authority for officers to pay debts of dead soldiers.</p>
+
+<p>Trinkets will not be sold but sent to the Adjutant General's office.</p>
+
+<p>165. <span class="sc">
+Effects</span> will be delivered, if called for, to legal representative
+of deceased after arrears are paid.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178"></a>167. <span class="sc">
+Medal Of Honor</span>. Authorized by Congress to be awarded to officers
+and men for extreme acts of gallantry in action, beyond line of duty.
+Recommendations will be considered by standard of extraordinary merit,
+and must have incontestible proof.</p>
+
+<p>184. <span class="sc">
+Certificate Of Merit</span>. Granted by President to any enlisted man in
+the service for distinguished acts in line of duty, on recommendation
+of company commander, based upon statement of eye witness, preferably
+the immediate company commander. $200 permanent additional pay is
+allowed.</p>
+
+<p>285. <span class="sc">
+Quarters</span>. Name of each soldier on bunk. Arms on rack.
+Accoutrements hung up by the belts.</p>
+
+<p>287. <span class="sc">
+Saturday Inspection</span> preceded by thorough policing. Leaders of
+squads will see that everything is clean.</p>
+
+<p>1011. <span class="sc">
+Neglect Of Rooms</span> or furniture by officer or soldier a military
+offense. All necessary costs shall be paid by him.</p>
+
+<p>1178. <span class="sc">
+Destruction Of Tableware</span> or kitchen utensils by soldiers will be
+charged against their pay.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">288. <span class="sc">
+Chiefs Of Squads</span> are responsible</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>For cleanliness of men.</li>
+<li>For their proper equipment for duty.</li>
+<li>For their proper dress when going &quot;on pass.&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>374. <span class="sc">
+Premises</span> shall be policed daily after breakfast.</p>
+
+<p>290. <span class="sc">
+Company Commander</span> will see that public property held by men is
+kept in good order, and missing or spoiled articles paid for.</p>
+
+<p>292. <span class="sc">
+Arms</span> shall not be taken down without proper supervision and by
+order of commissioned officer.</p>
+
+<p>No changing of parts or finish.</p>
+
+<p>Tompions (muzzle plugs) in small arms forbidden.</p>
+
+<p>657. <span class="sc">
+Accountability And Responsibility</span>&mdash;Both devolve upon persons
+entrusted with public property.</p>
+
+<p>Responsibility without accountability devolves upon one to whom
+property is entrusted, but who does not <a name="Page_179" id="Page_179"></a>have to make returns
+therefor. Responsibility does not end until property has been given
+back to accountable officer and a receipt taken, or he has been
+relieved by regulations or by orders.</p>
+
+<p>Accountability without responsibility occurs when an officer holds
+proper memorandum receipts for property delivered to others.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Example</span>.&mdash;The Company Commander is accountable and responsible for the
+rifles turned over to his company. He is accountable without
+responsibility when each enlisted man has been issued a rifle and has
+signed a receipt for it. Each enlisted man is then responsible for his
+rifle, without accountability, until he returns it in proper
+condition. In general, therefore: Accountability requires evidence of
+the disposition that has been made of property. Responsibility implies
+possession, and requires return of the property or payment for it.</p>
+
+<p>685. <span class="sc">
+Loss Of Public Property</span> by neglect of any officer or soldier
+shall be paid by him, at such rates as a survey of the property may
+determine.</p>
+
+<p>Charges will be made only after conclusive proof, and not without a
+survey if the soldier demands one.</p>
+
+<p>Signing the payroll will be regarded as an acknowledgment of the
+justice of the charge.</p>
+
+<p>1202. <span class="sc">
+Ration</span> is the allowance of food for one person or animal for one
+day.</p>
+
+<p>1229. <span class="sc">
+Forfeiture</span> of ration is made when a soldier overstays furlough.</p>
+
+<p>1339. <span class="sc">
+Pay</span> for continuous service is credited a soldier if he enlists
+within three months after honorable discharge.</p>
+
+<p>For privates an increase of $3 per month is allowed up to and
+including the third enlistment, beyond this $1 per month increase
+given up to and including the seventh enlistment.</p>
+
+<p>For non-commissioned officers the increase of $3 per month continues
+to and includes the seventh enlistment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180"></a>No increased pay is given after the seventh enlistment to private or
+non-commissioned officer.</p>
+
+<p>1347. <span class="sc">
+Allotments</span> (revised by Act of Congress, October, 1917).</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">
+The new law does away with future pensions. Allotments may be made to:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Family.</li>
+<li>Bank.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>For married men or those with dependents, such as children, parents
+divorced wives, whose support is required by court order, allotments
+are compulsory, and must not be less than $15 a month and not more
+than one-half of his pay. The Company Commander is responsible for
+finding who comes under this rule. By this arrangement soldiers cannot
+shirk the support of dependents.</p>
+
+<p>The government will double the amount allotted by each soldier, to a
+limit of $37.50 a month. In cases where the soldier allots half of his
+pay the government will add to the allotment according to the
+following scale, even though it more than doubles the amount paid by
+the soldier:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Class A.</p>
+ <ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+ <li>Wife, no child, $15.</li>
+ <li>Wife, one child, $25.</li>
+ <li>Wife, two children, $32.50.</li>
+ <li>For each additional child, $5 more.</li>
+ <li>No wife living, one child, $5.</li>
+ <li>Two children, $12.50.</li>
+ <li>Three children, $20.</li>
+ <li>Four children, $30.</li>
+ <li>For each additional child, $5.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Class B.</p>
+ <ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+ <li>One parent, $10.</li>
+ <li>Two parents, $20.</li>
+ <li>Each grandchild, brother, sister or additional dependent, $5.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+<p>Nurses can make allotment.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181"></a>When both A and B classes are in need of allotment from a soldier's
+pay, and he has allotted half of his pay to Class A, he may allot an
+additional one-seventh of his pay for the support of Class B
+dependents, and the government will pay the sums listed above to the
+Class B dependents, to the limit of $20 a month. Payments under this
+act were begun November 1, 1917. In case less than one-half of a
+soldier's pay is allotted, the Secretary of War may require the
+allotment to be increased up to one-half of the pay.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;"><span class="sc">
+Compensation For Death Or Disability</span> in line of duty. In all cases
+must be applied for. In case of death, monthly compensation shall be
+as follows per month:</p>
+
+ <ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+ <li>Widow, $25.</li>
+ <li>Widow and 1 child, $35.</li>
+ <li>Widow and 2 children, $47.50.</li>
+ <li>Each additional child, $5.</li>
+ <li>One child alone, $20.</li>
+ <li>Two children, $30.</li>
+ <li>Three children, $40.</li>
+ <li>Each additional child, $5.</li>
+ <li>Widowed mother, $20.</li>
+ <li>For transportation of body, $100.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+<p>No women can receive compensation from two sources. The government
+will continue to pay compensation to a dependent wife until her death
+or remarriage, and to children until they are 18 years old, unless
+they are insane or helpless, in which case it will continue to pay the
+compensation during such incapacity.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">In case of total disability, compensation will be as follows per
+month:</p>
+
+ <ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+ <li>Soldier alone, $30.</li>
+ <li>With wife, no child, $45.</li>
+ <li>With wife, one child, $55.</li>
+ <li>With wife, two children, $65.</li>
+ <li>Three children or more, $75.</li>
+ <li>No wife living, one child, $40.<a name="Page_182" id="Page_182"></a></li>
+ <li>No wife living, each additional child, $10.</li>
+ <li>Soldier and widowed mother, $40.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+<p>In case of total disability where attendance is needed, $20 per month
+will be added to the compensation, unless the soldier is blind,
+bedridden, or has lost both feet or hands, in which case the
+compensation will be $100 per month, with no extra allowance for
+attendance. In case of partial disability, compensation will be a
+percentage of the amount paid in case of total disability. These
+annuities continue only during the life of the person for whom they
+are first paid.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Additional Insurance</span>.&mdash;Uniform compensation for all ranks can go only
+to blood relations. In case of death or disability in line of duty, it
+is paid in monthly instalments for 20 years. Insurance is from $1,000
+to $10,000 in multiples of $500. The rate is exceedingly low.
+Insurance must be applied for within 120 days after entering the
+service. Premiums are paid monthly, quarterly or yearly from the pay
+of the insured man. After the war this insurance must be converted
+within five years into a policy either of straight life insurance,
+20-year payment or endowment, maturing at the age of 62. In case of
+death when there is no blood relationship, the reserve value,
+according to the American insurance mortality tables, is paid to the
+estate. None of these payments can be attached for debt, nor legal
+action started against them except in a United States Court. The
+maximum lawyer's fee in any such case is $500.</p>
+
+<p>1361. <span class="sc">
+Deposits</span> of not less than $5 may be made by an enlisted man (not
+retired) to any quartermaster. Deposit book, signed by quartermaster
+and company commander, given to man who makes the deposit. This book
+is not transferable.</p>
+
+<p>1363. <span class="sc">
+A Lost Deposit Book</span> is not replaced without an affidavit of the
+soldier, testifying that he has not sold nor assigned it.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183"></a>1364. <span class="sc">
+Payment</span> made only on final statement. The soldier should be
+informed of the importance of keeping the deposit book.</p>
+
+<p>1365. <span class="sc">
+Withdrawal Of Deposit</span> when discharged or furloughed to reserve.</p>
+
+<p>1366. <span class="sc">
+Interest</span> on sum greater than $5 is 4 per cent.</p>
+
+<p>1368. <span class="sc">
+Forfeiture</span> due to desertion, but not by sentence of court
+martial. Deposits not exempt from liabilities due the United States.</p>
+
+<p>1371. <span class="sc">
+Officers And Men</span> lose pay while confined by civil authorities.</p>
+
+<p>1375. <span class="sc">
+Furloughed To Reserve</span> or discharged, a soldier is given a final
+statement in duplicate. This must be presented to be valid.</p>
+
+<p>1378. <span class="sc">
+Transportation</span> and subsistence is allowed to the point of
+enlistment, or for the same distance. Not subject to deduction for
+debts due the United States.</p>
+
+<p>1380. <span class="sc">
+Discharged Soldier</span> under charge of fraudulent enlistment is not
+entitled to transportation and subsistence.</p>
+
+<p>1383. <span class="sc">
+Transfer Of Claims</span> on the government made by an enlisted man are
+only recognized after discharge or furlough to the reserve. They must
+be in writing and must be endorsed by a commissioned officer or other
+responsible person known to the quartermaster.</p>
+
+<p>1437. No one is allowed to accompany sick or wounded from the battle
+line to the rear except those specifically authorized.</p>
+
+<p>1530. Ammunition lost or used without orders or not in line of duty
+shall be charged to the soldier using it.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Notes On The Laws Of War.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 10em; margin-right: 10em;">
+(From Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons, translated from
+ the French at the Army War College, 1917. War Department
+ Document No. 626.)</p>
+
+<p>The laws of war were instituted under the generous error that certain
+well-organized peoples had entirely <a name="Page_184" id="Page_184"></a>emerged from barbarism and that
+they considered themselves bound by the placing of their signatures to
+international conventions, freely agreed to.</p>
+
+<p>An infinite number of acts minutely and officially investigated have
+established that our troops and our Nation should never count on the
+observance of these laws and that the atrocities committed prove to be
+not only individual violations dishonoring merely the perpetrator, but
+violations premeditated and ordered in cold blood by the commanders
+with the moral support of the heads of the enemy nation.</p>
+
+<p>These laws are nevertheless repeated here in order that:</p>
+
+<p>1. The knowledge of how the war should have been conducted may develop
+in the heart of each man the sentiment of hate (applicable only to
+foes such as we actually have), that in no case should a chief of
+platoon tolerate any intercourse between his men and the enemy other
+than that of the rifle; this duty is explicit and not to be departed
+from except in the case of the wounded and prisoners incapable of
+doing harm.</p>
+
+<p>2. That every violator of these laws, taken in the act, shall be the
+subject of an immediate report with witnesses, then sent to the
+division headquarters to be tried as to the facts of the case.</p>
+
+<p>The laws of war resulted from the Geneva convention, from the
+declaration of St. Petersburg (Petrograd), and from the different
+Hague conventions. All these diplomatic papers were signed by Germany,
+Austria-Hungary, Turkey and Bulgaria.</p>
+
+<p>The following are the principal articles:</p>
+
+<p>Protect the wounded on the field of battle from pillage and from bad
+treatment; respect ambulances and evacuation convoys; respect the
+personnel exclusively concerned with the transportation, treatment and
+guarding of wounded; do not treat this personnel as prisoners of war
+if it falls into the hands of the enemy; but return such personnel, as
+well as material, when its <a name="Page_185" id="Page_185"></a>retention shall be no longer necessary for
+the care of the wounded prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>Refrain from employing any projectile which weighs less than 400 grams
+that is either explosive or loaded with incendiary or inflammable
+material, from all projectiles having for their sole object the
+spreading of asphyxiating or harmful gases, all expanding bullets or
+those which will easily flatten out inside the human body, such as
+jacketed bullets whose jacket does not entirely cover the core or is
+nickel.</p>
+
+<p>Forbid the use of poisons or of poisoned arms, killing or wounding an
+enemy who has thrown down his arms and surrendered; declarations that
+there will be no quarter; refrain from bombarding towns and cities
+which are not defended, from firing on churches, historical monuments,
+edifices devoted to the arts, to science, to charity, to sick and
+wounded and which are marked by a conspicuous signal known to the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Prisoners should be treated as to rations, housing and clothing the
+same as troops of the country which has captured them. All their
+personal belongings, except their arms and military papers, should be
+left in their possession.</p>
+
+<p>The following should be inviolate: The emissary&mdash;that is to say, an
+individual authorized by a belligerent to enter into talks with the
+authorities of the other side and coming under a white flag; also his
+trumpeter, his standard bearer, and his interpreter. He loses his
+inviolability if it is proven that he has profited by his privilege to
+provoke or commit treachery.</p>
+
+<p>An undisguised military man can never be treated as a spy. </p>
+<a name="Page_186" id="Page_186"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_8" id="CHAPTER_8"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187"></a>CHAPTER 8.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Practice Marches.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>&quot;Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the care
+of the feet.&quot; (i.d.r., 627.)</p>
+
+<p>Short marches from 2 to 4 miles should be made daily and at a uniform
+rate until the troops become hardened. Particular attention must
+always be paid to the rate of march&mdash;it is imperative for the leading
+element to keep a uniform rate per hour.</p>
+
+<p>Be careful and see to it that your troops march on the right-hand side
+of the road, and during halts, no one, not even officers, must be
+permitted on the left. Keep closed up, and during the last mile of
+your march have your company sing some real snappy song, and they will
+come in in jubilant spirits. Keep the muzzles of your rifles always
+elevated on the march so that men marching in rear wont be bothered.</p>
+
+<p>On the march the first halt is for 15 minutes taken after 45 minutes
+of marching. The men should be taught to use this time to adjust their
+clothing and equipment, and answer the calls of nature. Do not halt
+where there are houses, etc., on this first halt, as a great many men
+want to relieve themselves.</p>
+
+<p>The succeeding halts are for 10 minutes after 50 minutes of
+marching&mdash;except of course during a forced march&mdash;when you would march
+for a longer period. During rainy or very hot weather the halts should
+be made oftener.</p>
+
+<p>Do not have any straggling, remember if a man falls out he must have a
+certificate signed by an officer stating the cause. Have one officer
+march in rear of the company. Be careful about the use of water. Have
+your men take a good drink early in the morning just after reveille,
+and on the march use their canteen sparingly. One canteen of water
+must last one man one day. Do not allow men to drink until after the
+second halt.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188"></a>On reaching camp the kitchens are put up, latrines are dug, and tents
+are pitched. When everything has been tended to each man should give
+his feet a good salt water bath. Put them in the water and let them
+remain there for 2 minutes. Do not dry them by rubbing, but sponge
+them&mdash;this will harden the feet. This should be done for the first
+three days, after which it can be dispensed with. A change of socks
+daily should be made, take one pair of socks from the pack, and wash
+out the dirty pair.</p>
+
+<p>Try to avoid night marching.</p>
+
+<p>The leading company in each regiment regulates the rate of march.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the amount of
+straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at the end of
+the march.&quot; (i.d.r., 632.)</p>
+
+<p>Remember a sanitary squad should be detailed daily to police the
+immediate vicinity after each halt.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Field Work.</b></p>
+<br />
+
+<p>Field work will be classified under the following heads: Orders,
+Deployment, Fire, Attack, Defense, Leadership, Communications, Night
+Operations, Patrols, Advance Guards, Rear Guards, Flank Guards, Camp,
+March Outpost, and Outpost.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">(a) <span class="sc">
+An Order</span> is the will of the commander expressed verbally or in
+writing to his subordinates. It should be clear, concise and to the
+point. A field order should be given as follows:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .3em;">
+<li>Information of the enemy and supporting troops.</li>
+<li>General plan of the commander.</li>
+<li>Dispositions of the troops.</li>
+<li>Instructions for the trains.</li>
+<li>Place where messages are to be sent.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>(b) <span class="sc">
+Do Not Deploy</span> too early. It is very fatiguing, and has a tendency
+to disorganize the skirmish line. <a name="Page_189" id="Page_189"></a>The major designates the companies
+to be on the firing line, and those to remain in support. The distance
+between the firing line and support is from 50 to 500 yards. The
+support should be as close as possible under cover.</p>
+
+<p>(c) <span class="sc">
+Fire Direction</span> is the function of the company commander. He gives
+each platoon its sector or objective, determines the range, target,
+indicates the class of fire, and the time to open fire. Fire control
+is given to platoon commanders. The platoon is the fire unit. &quot;Fire
+control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight setting
+and target, and resume a well directed fire. The best troops are those
+that submit longest to fire control.&quot; Fire discipline is the function
+of the individual soldier. &quot;It implies that in a firing line without
+leaders, each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective
+fire upon the target.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>(d) <span class="sc">
+The Troops</span> march in column of squads until under the observation
+of the enemy. Platoon columns are used in crossing ground where there
+is cover. Squad columns are used across the artillery zone. At
+approximately 800 yards a skirmish line is formed. Thin lines may then
+be used to advance to the attack. Remember the Major has assigned each
+company in the firing line an objective. Be sure to watch out for
+flank protection. If the Major has forgotten to have combat patrols on
+the exposed flank or flanks, it is up to the flank company to send out
+a combat patrol. This patrol should be slightly in advance of the
+front line, and off to the right or left. The advance is made by a
+fraction rushing forward. These rushes are from 20 to 80 yards. When a
+rush is made the remaining troops fire faster. The firing line should
+not be reinforced by less than a platoon. The Major determines when to
+fix bayonets. The front rank men fix bayonets first, the rear rank men
+fire faster, then the rear rank men fix bayonets while the front rank
+fire faster. A battalion is the smallest unit in the firing line to
+<a name="Page_190" id="Page_190"></a>inaugurate a charge. Remember the battalion is the attack unit.</p>
+
+<p>In changing sight setting follow same plan as fixing bayonet, <i>i.e.</i>,
+each front rank first, the rear rank man firing faster, etc.</p>
+
+<p>(e) <span class="sc">
+Defense</span>.&mdash;In defense the line is usually stronger and the support
+weaker than in the attack. Do not give up your ground unless you have
+written orders from the High Command. Watch out for flank protection
+by combat patrols.</p>
+
+<p>(f) <span class="sc">
+Leadership</span>.&mdash;A good leader should possess self reliance,
+initiative, aggressiveness, superior knowledge, and have a conception
+of teamwork. Make your work a game in which each man has a part to
+play. Reward merit and give the disagreeable things to be done to the
+&quot;knockers.&quot; A leader must know his men. Never give them a job to do
+that you couldn't do yourself. Train yourself to estimate the
+situation quickly and calmly. Have your men well disciplined, well
+drilled, well equipped, and well dressed. It might be called
+unmilitary by some of the sterner characters in our service, but we
+believe by occasionally drawing comparisons to something real
+amusing&mdash;a good joke&mdash;you show your men that the &quot;old Man&quot; is really
+made of human stuff. Be sympathetic, and it has been shown by
+experience that, for some slight breach of discipline a &quot;little talk&quot;
+in the orderly room does the most good, and is the best form of
+punishment. Do your work cheerfully, and your men will do likewise.
+Keep yourself abreast of the times in all matters military&mdash;remember
+your men look to you in time of action and excitement and you must be
+ready to deliver the goods. Work out and plan your orders, etc.,
+simply. Morale is the greatest asset an organization can have. Keep
+all your troubles and have the men keep theirs within the company.
+Have <i>esprit de corps</i>. The real successful leader knows and plays the
+game.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191"></a>(g) <span class="sc">
+Communications</span>.&mdash;Communication is maintained by wireless,
+telegraph, telephone, signals, runners, carrier pigeons, aeroplanes,
+motor cars, patrols, and connecting files. Each unit usually maintains
+communication with the next higher command, and with similar commands
+on the flanks.</p>
+
+<p>(h) <span class="sc">
+Night Operations</span>.&mdash;They are used to minimize losses from hostile
+fire, to escape observation, and to gain time. The ground to be
+traversed at night should be carefully looked over in daylight. Some
+distinctive badge should be worn by our troops. The bayonet is chiefly
+used at night. Avoid firing. The enemy should be surprised. Place
+obstacles in front of your own lines at night. Usually 50 yards is the
+maximum range to fire at night.</p>
+
+<p>(i) <span class="sc">
+Patrols</span>.&mdash;&quot;A commander may be excused for being defeated, but
+never for being surprised.&quot;</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Patrols.</p>
+
+<p>Commander selects leader, strength, gives it a mission, when to report
+back, and where to send messages. He gives it a number if more than
+one patrol is sent out, information of the enemy, and location of any
+friendly patrols that may be or have been sent out. Patrol leader is
+then allowed to ask questions.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em">
+<i>Patrol Leader</i>.&mdash;He should have a compass, watch, pencil, note-book,
+knife, and a map of the country. He should then do the following:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Assemble his men.</li>
+<li>Inspect them.
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>To see if they are fit for this duty.</li>
+ <li>That they have no valuable maps or papers, that their
+ equipment does not rattle or shine.</li>
+ <li>Rations and water.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+<li>He repeats the instruction that he has received.</li>
+<li>He explains any signals that are to be used.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192"></a>Designates a rallying point in case they are scattered.</li>
+<li>Details a second in command.</li>
+<li>Takes a formation that will favor the escape of at least one
+ man.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><i>Conduct of the Patrol</i>.&mdash;1. Move cautiously but not timidly.</p>
+
+<p>2. Do not flinch or show consciousness of it in case you become
+ suddenly aware that you are under the observation of the enemy.
+ Not knowing that you are aware of his presence he will let you
+ come on, and suddenly, when you see cover, make a dash for it
+ and escape.</p>
+
+<p>3. Do not get lost.</p>
+
+<p>4. Do not allow yourself to think of the enemy as being in one
+ direction only.</p>
+
+<p>5. In entering or passing through woods take an extended skirmish
+ line formation.</p>
+
+<p>6. In passing any short defile bridge or ford, send one man ahead.</p>
+
+<p>7. If you suspect the presence of the enemy under certain cover, a
+ good way to find out is to let one man approach within a
+ reasonable distance and then, acting as though he had been
+ discovered, turn and run. This will generally draw his fire.</p>
+
+<p>8. Keep quiet. Forbid unnecessary talking.</p>
+
+<p>9. From time to time select suitable rallying points in case you
+ become separated.</p>
+
+<p>10. Remember that you do not fight unless in self defense.</p>
+
+<p><i>Report</i>.&mdash;1. Do not report the presence of small patrols unless you
+have been ordered to do so. Locate the main body or a large command.</p>
+
+<p>2. Determine his strength, kind of troops and movements.</p>
+
+<p>3. Remember the indispensable qualities of a report are: accuracy
+ as to facts, simplicity, clearness, legibility and correct
+ spelling. Surmises must not be given as facts. Separate what you
+ know and what has been told <a name="Page_193" id="Page_193"></a>you. A report should not be
+ expressed carelessly in ten words when it could be clearly
+ stated in twenty. Send a sketch if practicable.</p>
+
+<p>4. Do not send a verbal message.</p>
+
+<p>5. Address it to C.O. Support or C.O. Advance Guard, etc., not to
+ the commander of a certain body of troops. Give date, place and
+ time.</p>
+
+<p>6. Remember to state what you intend to do.</p>
+
+<p>7. In hostile country send two messages by different routes. In
+ friendly country one will suffice.</p>
+
+<p>8. When the capture of your message is likely, give messenger a
+ false one that will be easily found and conceal the true message
+ carefully.</p>
+
+<p><i>Return</i>.&mdash;1. Do not return over the same route as you avoid ambuscade
+and widen your field of reconnaissance.</p>
+
+<p>2. Report any special features of military value that you have
+ seen to your C.O.</p>
+
+<p>3. Compliment your men.</p>
+
+<p>(j) <i>Advance Guard.</i>&mdash;&quot;An advance guard is a detachment of the main
+body which precedes it and covers it on the march&quot; (i.d.r. 639). The
+commander of troops designates the advance guard, the distance between
+it and the main body, and also designates a commander. The advance
+guard commander if he has more than a battalion designates the
+reserve, support, distance between them. If the advance guard is a
+battalion or less it would have no reserve, and in that case the
+advance guard commander would designate the support, advance party,
+and the distance between them. In the former case the support
+commander would designate the advance party, and the distance between
+the support and the advance party. In both cases the advance party
+commander designates the point, and the distance between the point and
+the advance party. Usually it is the duty of the advance party to send
+out flank patrols. The strength varies from 1/20 to 1/3 of the main
+body. <a name="Page_194" id="Page_194"></a>Remember &quot;the formation of the advance guard must be such that
+the enemy will first be met by a patrol, then in turn by one or more
+larger detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next
+in rear has time to deploy before coming under effective fire.&quot; The
+advance guard must be aggressive. Do not put up with a cautious point.
+Have a double connecting file, and if possible every 100 yards. &quot;Each
+element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its
+front.&quot; On the road in order are: point&mdash;advance
+party&mdash;support&mdash;reserve (if there is one)&mdash;main body. Have the point
+precede the advance party, all the remaining elements follow the one
+ahead. This has been found by experience to be the best method of
+getting &quot;there.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>(k) <i>Rear Guards</i>.&mdash;&quot;A rear guard is a detachment detached to protect
+the main body from attack in the rear.&quot; &quot;The general formation is that
+of the advance guard reversed.&quot; i.e. rear point, rear party, support,
+and main body. &quot;In retreat a column is preceded by a body of troops
+designated 'leading troops,' whose principle duty is to clear the road
+of obstacles and to facilitate the withdrawal of the command.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>(l) <i>Flank Guards</i>.&mdash;As their name imply protect the flanks. They
+should be in constant communication with the column. Their formation
+usually conforms to that of patrols.</p>
+
+<p>(m) <i>Camps</i>.&mdash;The four principal factors to be considered in the
+selection of the camp site are: near a good road or roads, have good
+drainage, plenty of room to accommodate your troops, and have a good
+water supply. Immediately after camp is made sinks are dug for the
+disposal of excreta. One should be dug for each company on the
+opposite flank from the kitchen for the disposal of human excreta, and
+one near the kitchen for the disposal of wastes, etc., that cannot be
+burned around the kitchen.</p>
+
+<p>(n) <i>March Outpost</i>.&mdash;A march outpost is usually an advance guard
+halted, with observers in each unit on <a name="Page_195" id="Page_195"></a>the alert. A cossack post
+might be established on a good near by observation point. The march
+outpost is the protection furnished the main body at short halts, or
+on making camp before the outpost is established.</p>
+
+<p>(o) <i>Outpost</i>.&mdash;The outpost may be best illustrated by circles:</p>
+
+<p>Each support is numbered from right to left. Each outguard in each
+support is numbered from right to left. Each sentinel post in each
+outguard is numbered from right to left. Outguards are divided into
+three classes, cossack posts, sentry squads and packets. A cossack
+post consists of 4 men, 1 posted in observation near the posts of the
+remaining three.</p>
+
+<p>A sentry squad consists of one squad, posts a double sentinel post in
+observation near the post of the squad. A picket consists of two or
+more squads not exceeding half a company. It furnishes cossack posts,
+sentry squads, sentinel posts, and patrols. It is usually placed at
+the more important points of the outguard line, as a road fork, etc.
+The post furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away. There
+should be also a sentinel post near the picket in observation. If the
+outguard consists of two or more companies there is a reserve. The
+reserve is held at some suitable point, where it can readily support
+the line. The reserve maintains connection with the main body and the
+support. The support occupies the line to be held. This line should be
+entrenched. The support maintains communication with its outguards and
+with each support on its flanks. It also sends out the necessary
+reconnoitering patrols. The outguards furnish sentinel posts and
+maintain communication with them, and with the outguards on each
+flank. It is the duty of the support commander to inspect his line and
+make such changes in the outguards as he deems necessary, then to
+report to the outpost commander with a sketch if practicable of his
+line when his dispositions are completed. The outpost commander should
+inspect the line, order such <a name="Page_197" id="Page_197"></a>changes as he deems necessary, and
+report with a sketch of the outpost line to the commander of troops
+when his outpost has taken up its position. &quot;The support commander
+must practice the greatest economy on men consistent with the
+requirements of practical security.&quot; Instead of using outguards along
+the whole front, part of it may be covered by patrols.</p>
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_196" id="Page_196"></a>
+<a href="images/plate12.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate12.png" width="80%" alt="Plate 12: Diagram of Outpost Line" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%"><b>
+Outline of Field Service Regulations.</b></p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Land Forces Of U.S.</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none">
+<li>Regular Army.</li>
+<li>Organized Land Militia.</li>
+<li>Volunteer forces.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">How Grouped:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Mobile Army.</li>
+<li>Coast Artillery.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Mobile Army:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>For offensive operations against enemy and so requires maximum degree
+of mobility.</li>
+<li>Basis of organization the division, a self-contained unit composed of
+all necessary arms and services.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Coast Artillery:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Permanent fortifications for defense against naval attack.</li>
+<li>Semi-permanent fortifications for protection of permanent from
+raiders.</li>
+<li>Organization of mobile troops to prevent landing of enemy.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Military Information.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Essential:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>To enable War Department to estimate equipment and size of force
+necessary.</li>
+<li>To enable commander properly to estimate the situation in the
+field of operations.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_198" id="Page_198"></a>Transmission Of Information.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Wire, Signaling, Radio and Messenger:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Message.&mdash;Concise, written information sent by messenger or wire.</li>
+<li>Source always given.&mdash;&quot;Heard&quot; separated from &quot;seen.&quot;</li>
+<li>Report.&mdash;Formal account of some enterprise.</li>
+<li>War Diary.&mdash;Record of events kept in campaigns.</li>
+<li>Maps.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Reconnaissance:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The work of individuals or units in gathering information.</li>
+<li>To keep contact with the enemy&mdash;to be acquainted with the terrain; to
+protect flanks and rear and guard against surprise.</li>
+<li>Reconnaissance begins on entering theater of operations and lasts
+through campaign.</li>
+<li>Effected by patrols and air craft.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Indications of enemy:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Tracks on road.</li>
+<li>Abandoned camps and clothing.</li>
+<li>Infantry, thick, low cloud of dust.</li>
+<li>Cavalry, high, thin cloud of dust.</li>
+<li>Artillery and wagons, broken cloud.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Determination of Enemy Forces:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Timing past a given point.</li>
+<li>Cavalry (walk), 110 per minute.</li>
+<li>Cavalry (trot), 200 per minute.</li>
+<li>Infantry, 175 per minute.</li>
+<li>Artillery and wagons, 5 per minute.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Security:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Those measures taken to protect a command from enemy observation,
+annoyance and surprise.</li>
+<li>Obtained by covering the front with detachments.</li>
+<li>March.&mdash;Advance, flank and rear guards.</li>
+<li>Camp.&mdash;Outposts.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199"></a>March and camp detachments.&mdash;To give warning and resist attack until
+such time as detachment in rear can deploy.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Advance Guard:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Detachment from main body to cover its advance.</li>
+<li>Against surprise for information.</li>
+<li>Push back small bodies.</li>
+<li>Check enemy's advance until deployment in rear.</li>
+<li>Seize good position and locate enemy lines.</li>
+<li>Remove obstacles.</li>
+<li>Strength 1-20 to 1-3 of entire command.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Divisions of Advance Guard:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Cavalry point.</li>
+<li>Infantry point.</li>
+<li>Advance party.</li>
+<li>Support.</li>
+<li>Reserve.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Leading Troops:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>A detachment protecting the head of a column in retreat.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Rear Guard:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Detachments protecting the rear of a retreating column.</li>
+<li>Formation like that of advance guard.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Flank Patrols:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Detachments for protecting the flanks of marching column.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">March Outpost:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Detachments for protection of column halted on march.</li>
+<li>Formation, that of the marching protection.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Outpost:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The detachments forming the protection for a force in camp or
+bivouac.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Divisions of Outpost:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Reserve.</li>
+<li>Line of supports.</li>
+<li>Line of outguards.<a name="Page_200" id="Page_200"></a></li>
+<li>Pickets.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Sentinel Posts:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Sentry squads. Cossack posts. Sentinels.</li>
+<li>Detached posts (from support).</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Hours of Special Danger:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Evening and dawn; thus good times to relieve outposts.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Examining Post:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Intelligence and a place where prisoners, etc., are brought in.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Orders:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The expression of the will of a commander, either written or verbal.</li>
+<li>Letters of instruction&mdash;plans of the superior leaders.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Field Orders:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Regulate tactical and strategical actions of troops.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">General Orders Include:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>All necessary detailed instructions.</li>
+<li>All standing instructions (avoid repetition).</li>
+<li>Proceedings of general and special courts-martial.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Special Orders:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Relate to assignment and movement of individuals, not necessary to
+be communicated to the whole command.</li>
+<li>Bearers of verbal orders must <i>repeat.</i></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Field Orders:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Heading.&mdash;Title, place, date, hour and number.</li>
+<li>Distribution of troops.&mdash;Division of command.</li>
+<li>Body:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+ <li>Information of enemy and supporting troops.</li>
+ <li>General plan of commander.</li>
+ <li>Detailed tactical dispositions to carry out general plan.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201"></a>Instructions for trains&mdash;also the positions of ammunition
+ and dressing stations.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Ending.&mdash;Authentication and method of sending.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Marches and Convoys:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Successful march.&mdash;That which places troops at destination on time,
+and in best possible condition.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Rates of March:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Infantry.&mdash;2 to 2-&frac12; miles per hour.</li>
+<li>Cavalry.&mdash;4 miles (walk), 8 miles (trot), 12 miles (gallop).</li>
+<li>Artillery.&mdash;(Same.)</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Average Marches:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Infantry.&mdash;15-20 miles per day.</li>
+<li>Cavalry.&mdash;25 miles per day.</li>
+<li>Artillery.&mdash;15-20 miles per day.</li>
+<li>Load of pack mules equals 250 pounds.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">March Orders, State:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Object of march.</li>
+<li>Distribution of troops.</li>
+<li>Order of march of main body.</li>
+<li>Manner of forming the column.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Halts:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>First hour, 15 minutes' rest. Each successive hour, a 10-minute rest.</li>
+<li>Weather conditions create exceptions to above rule.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Marches in Peace:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Changing station.</li>
+<li>Practice.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">In War:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Concentration.</li>
+<li>In presence of enemy.</li>
+<li>Forced marches.</li>
+<li>Night marches.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202"></a>Convoys (on Land):</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Those trains by which supplies are forwarded to an army from depots,
+etc., in the rear&mdash;also trains bringing supplies collected by
+requisition.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Security Furnished by an Escort:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Advance guard.</li>
+<li>Main body.</li>
+<li>Flank guard when necessary.</li>
+<li>Rear guard.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Favorable places for attacking convoys:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+<li>Through woods defile.</li>
+<li>Over hedges.</li>
+<li>Sharp bends.</li>
+<li>Ascending or descending slopes.</li>
+<li>Farming corral, watering.</li>
+<li>Whenever conditions are such that escort cannot quickly prepare for
+defense.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Conducting Prisoners:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>10 foot soldiers to every 100 prisoners.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Infantry:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The principal arm, charged with the main field work. Its role is the
+role of the entire force and its success is the success of the whole
+force.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Artillery:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The close supporting arm of the infantry.</li>
+<li>Its targets are those most dangerous in the eyes of the infantry.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Cavalry:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Reconnaissance&mdash;supports the other arms and is valuable in pursuit.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Combat:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Offensive.</li>
+<li>Defensive.
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+ <li>Temporary.</li>
+ <li>Passive defense.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203"></a>Combat Principles:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Fire superiority.</li>
+<li>Unity of command.</li>
+<li>Simple and direct plans and methods.</li>
+<li>All troops necessary to mission must be assigned at beginning.</li>
+<li>Detachments justifiable only when they can contribute directly to
+success of main battle.</li>
+<li>Some reserves must be kept.</li>
+<li>Flank protection and reconnaissance.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Fire Superiority:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Must be gained early and maintained.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Frontage of Units:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Depth in formation for combat rather than extension of line.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Reserves:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: .2em;">Fresh troops must be on hand to</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Give fire line impetus.</li>
+<li>To penetrate enemy lines.</li>
+<li>To fill gaps and help reorganization.</li>
+<li>To meet counter attacks.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Plan of Action:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Mission of army is to win battle.</li>
+<li>Offensive action must be the rule.</li>
+<li>When enemy is near every available means must be taken to gain
+information, in order to prepare for deployment.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Offensive Combat:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">The attack develops into 2 parts.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Assaulting hostile position at selected points.</li>
+<li>Threaten or assault all other parts of enemy line in order to hold enemy
+ from reinforcing operations.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Enveloping Attack:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Advantage of converging fire upon position.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204"></a>Holding Attack:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>An attack for holding enemy in one place, while assaults made at
+another point.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Assaults:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The local concentrated offensive.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Pursuit:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Only by energetic pursuit can the full fruit of victory be gleaned.
+Its purpose is to cause the greatest loss in personnel and morale
+possible cavalry and artillery active.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Defensive Combat:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Passive defense&mdash;to gain time, or to hold certain points pending
+results in other parts of the line.</li>
+<li>Defense seeking a favorable decision&mdash;a parrying of blows while
+seeking a favorable opening.</li>
+<li>Counter attack the crisis of this form.</li>
+<li>Counter attack&mdash;made by launching reserves at the flank, while the
+enemy is fully committed to the attack.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Defensive Positions:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: .2em;">Requisites:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Clear field of fire.</li>
+<li>Flanks naturally secure.</li>
+<li>Extent of ground suitable to strength of force.</li>
+<li>Effective corps for reserves.</li>
+<li>Good lines of retreat.</li>
+<li>Good communication.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Position in Readiness:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>A position intended to resist the advance of an enemy in the immediate
+vicinity information of whose movements is not full enough to warrant
+definite action.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Withdrawal From Action:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Troops most readily disengaged from the enemy should be withdrawn
+first.</li>
+<li>Demands highest order of skill in troop leadership.</li>
+<li>Covering Positions&mdash;those positions chosen to cover the retreating
+force.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205"></a>Retreat&mdash;a step by step opposition to the enemy's advance on a
+prearranged plan.<br />
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: .2em;">Delaying actions:</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+ <li>Advance delayed as long as possible, consistent with safe
+ withdrawal.</li>
+ <li>Delayers must hold position.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Night Combat:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Offensive advisable.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Where fire superiority is impossible by day.</li>
+<li>To avoid heavy losses by advance to assaulting position by
+ day.</li>
+<li>To capture posts or patrols.</li>
+<li>To surprise for moral effect.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Defensive:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Obstacles in front of position.</li>
+<li>Trenches heavily manned and supports drawn close.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Shelter:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Troops under canvas&mdash;in camp.</li>
+<li>Troops on ground without canvas&mdash;bivouac.</li>
+<li>Troops in huts or villages&mdash;cantonment.</li>
+<li>Tactical considerations are paramount in the selection of camp sites
+in the theater of operations.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Selection of Camp Site:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent6" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Suitably large to accommodate command.</li>
+<li>Water supply sufficient and accessible.</li>
+<li>Good roads to and in camp.</li>
+<li>Wood and grass forage near at hand.</li>
+<li>Sandy subsoil for drainage.</li>
+<li>Hot weather shade&mdash;cold protection.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: 1.2em;">
+To maintain the efficiency of a command, troops must have adequate
+shelter.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">Sanitary Considerations Around Camp:</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Latrines on opposite side of camp from kitchens.</li>
+<li>Short camps, straddle trenches.</li>
+<li>Long camps, trenches 2 by 6 by 12 with seats.</li>
+<li>Have latrines screened.</li>
+<li>Burn the trenches out daily and keep covered.</li>
+<li>Wash boxes and paint with tar.</li>
+</ul>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_206" id="Page_206"></a>Questions And Answers On F.S.R.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em;">1. How are the land forces of the U.S. organized?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;The <i>Mobile Army</i> consisting of Regular Army, organized land
+militia when called to Federal service, drafted army, volunteers and
+the field artillery and the <i>Coast Artillery.</i></p>
+
+<p>Basis of organization is the Division composed of all arms and
+self-sufficient. Several divisions may be grouped into a field army,
+to which are attached field army troops. These are organized into a
+brigade for purpose of supply and administration when necessary
+through numbers.</p>
+
+<p>Coast Artillery is charged with the care and use of land and coast
+fortifications, including submarine mines and torpedo defenses.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+2. What is the object of collecting military information?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;To enable the War Department to decide upon the size of army
+or expedition, the proportions of different arms, the character of
+clothing, equipment, etc., needed for any operation.</p>
+
+<p>Information collected by the Gen. Staff in time of peace should
+include geography, physical resources, and military strength of the
+various nations.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+3. Define reconnaisance.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;Reconnaisance is used to designate the work of troops or
+individuals when gathering information in the field.</p>
+
+<p>It is necessary during combat for the tactical use of troops.</p>
+
+<p>It is carried on by: (a) aero squadron; (b) independent cavalry; (c)
+divisional cavalry; (d) by infantry as reconnoitering patrols.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+4. What are some indications of the presence of the enemy?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;Clothing or material on roads or in abandoned camps.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207"></a>A thick, low cloud of dust indicates infantry.</p>
+
+<p>A high, thin cloud cavalry.</p>
+
+<p>A broken cloud artillery or wagon trains.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+How would you determine from these indications what the number and
+organization of the enemy might be?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;Estimate strength by length of time it takes to pass a given
+point. Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard
+per man, cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per trooper, and artillery
+in single column 20 yards per gun or caisson, a given point would be
+passed in one minute by about: 175 infantry, 110 cavalry at walk, 200
+cavalry at trot, 5 guns or caissons.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+5. Suppose on patrol and safely concealed for sighting the enemy at no
+great distance, by what rough method would you ascertain the
+approximate strength of the force assuming it to be composed of
+infantry, cavalry and artillery?</p>
+
+<p>See answer No. 4.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+6. What is the composition and arrangement of the advance guard?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;All arms of the service. In open country much cavalry and
+field artillery, the latter seldom assigned to command smaller than a
+brigade. Also machine guns, ambulance company if the force is large
+and engineers for purpose of removing obstacles to the march.</p>
+
+<p>Large command; advance cavalry, support, reserve.</p>
+
+<p>Small command; point, advance party, support, reserve.</p>
+
+<p>Strength should be 1/20 to 1/3, depending on size of command and
+character of terrain.</p>
+
+<p>Advance guard increases in size proportionately with size of command.
+Why?</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+7. Define: (a) Outguard; they constitute small detachments farthest to
+the front and nearest to the enemy.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208"></a>(b) Cossack post; observation group at indicated point consisting of
+four men, post single sentinel.</p>
+
+<p>(c) Picket; small command up to platoon placed in line of outguards at
+more important points such as road forks.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+8. What is an order?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;Orders are used by commanders of divisions and separate
+brigades for regulating the movement and supply of field trains,
+fixing position of distributing points for rations and forage, in
+short, have to do with supplies of all kinds, especially food.</p>
+
+<ul class="indent4" style="list-style-type: none">
+<li>Form:
+
+ <ul style="list-style-type: none">
+ <li>The heading.</li>
+ <li>The distribution of troops (in certain orders).</li>
+ <li>The body.</li>
+ <li>The ending.</li>
+ </ul>
+<br />
+</li>
+<li>The Body contains:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+ <li>Information about the enemy and our supporting troops.</li>
+ <li>General plan of the commander.</li>
+ <li>Disposition of the troops.</li>
+ <li>Instructions for the trains.</li>
+ <li>Where the commander may be found or messages are to be sent.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+9. During an advance what is the general order of advance of a column?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;Cavalry and horse artillery.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Infantry and light artillery.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Engineering and signal troops.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Trains.</span></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+10. What is the average march per day of various arms?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans</i>.&mdash;Infantry, 15 miles per day.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Infantry in large bodies, 12 miles per day.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Cavalry, 25 miles per day.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Field artillery, 15 to 20 miles per day.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">&nbsp;Horse artillery, same as cavalry, to which it may be attached.</span></p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209"></a>Forced marches are from 28 to 30 miles for infantry.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+11. How is the escort distributed in guarded convoys?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;Advance guard, with advance cavalry 3 to 5 miles ahead.</p>
+
+<p>Main body may be opposite most important point of the train, usually
+opposite its center.</p>
+
+<p>Section of infantry at head and tail of train.</p>
+
+<p>Flank guard&mdash;if necessary.</p>
+
+<p>Rear guard&mdash;1/6 of escort.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+What places are most favorable for attacking convoy?</p>
+
+<p>When passing through woods, defile, or over bridge, when going around
+sharp bends in the road; when convoy is forming corral.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+12. Discuss uses of the various arms in combat.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;Infantry: The most important arm, charged with the main work
+of the battle.</p>
+
+<p>Artillery: Supporting arm of infantry. Its target is the opposing arm
+most dangerous to the infantry.</p>
+
+<p>Cavalry: Reconnaisance before combat, support of other arms during
+combat.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+13. What is the difference between the attack and the assault?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;In combat where the force is as large or larger than a
+division, a simultaneous advance against the entire hostile front is
+out of the question. Attack is made up of a number of local combats.
+Some where enemy is engaged with view to driving him out. This is
+called the assault. Other parts of attack with fewer troops simply to
+keep the enemy from coming to the support of those troops of the
+assaulted lines. The entire advance against the enemy is the attack.</p>
+
+<p>After the firing lines have advanced some distance the weak and the
+strong points of the enemy's lines are disclosed. The weak points of
+course are selected.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+14. Discuss the manner in which a pursuit should be carried out?</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210"></a><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;If enemy commences withdrawal before front lines have given
+way, troops in action push forward until enemy in their front are
+driven away. Cavalry and horse artillery are thrown against flanks of
+retreating enemy, or on their front. Purpose to further disorganize
+the enemy, beat him to bridges, defiles, etc. In meantime reserve is
+sent into the pursuit, while troops engaged are assembling to
+constitute a new reserve. General scheme is to keep in continuous
+contact with enemy, giving him no chance to reorganize. Boldness
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+15. What are the different kinds of defense, and what is the purpose
+of each?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;(a) Passive; to retain position for specified time with or
+without combat, or to prevent enemy from carrying position.</p>
+
+<p>(b) Defense seeking favorable decision; troops forced temporarily to
+assume the defensive, with intention of assuming the offensive at
+first favorable opportunity.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+16. What is the purpose of the counter attack?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;To win victory, stave off defeat or prevent lines from being
+entered. It may be launched either at the enemy's strong or weak
+points depending on conditions. If enemy are beaten off and
+disorganized at some point, it may be good opportunity to follow up
+the advantage by counter attack. Also at other points where weakness
+develops. Counter attack is made at strength of enemy to prevent him
+from penetrating the defensive position.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+17. How should advance position be organized and held?</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;Force should not be so weak that it can be driven back to main
+body before it accomplishes its purpose, nor so strong that it will
+hold out too long, thereby committing the entire force to action in
+advance line instead of the line selected.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+Trenches. What is position in readiness?</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211"></a>Troops placed in readiness for action where it is intended to resist
+the advance of enemy in immediate vicinity, but knowledge of his
+movements not yet sufficiently definite to decide upon plan of action.
+Preliminary to taking up offensive, or more usually to taking up and
+occupying defensive position. Hasten deployment when time comes.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-top: 1.2em;">
+18. If it becomes necessary to withdraw troops from action state steps
+necessary to insure the safety of troops during the withdrawal and
+retreat.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ans.</i>&mdash;Last reserves should be used. If none, troops least pressed
+used to cover withdrawal. Cavalry and artillery used unsparingly.
+Depends on the terrain. First covering position well to the rear so as
+not to suffer demoralization. On flanks of line of retreat. There
+should also be facilities to withdraw the occupying force. Firing line
+made as strong as possible, minimum of reserves held. Use M.G. Perhaps
+successive covering points necessary further to rear before advance of
+enemy can be checked. When a few miles to the rear, or far enough to
+free troops from all contact with the enemy, reorganize. Step-by-step
+opposition useless. Number of covering positions should be reduced to
+the minimum.</p>
+
+<p>Retreat; trains at once put into march. Other forces at once put into
+order of march. All roads used, separate roads for divisions.</p>
+
+<p>Effective rear guard from troops whose strength and morale is least
+impaired.</p>
+
+<p>Divisional cavalry and as much artillery as can effectively be used.
+Use artillery at long range to keep the enemy deployed, destroy
+bridges, etc. </p>
+<a name="Page_212" id="Page_212"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_9" id="CHAPTER_9"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213"></a>CHAPTER 9.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Feeding Men.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+In Camp</span>.&mdash;You will usually have plenty of food but continual
+inspecting is necessary to have it properly cared for, prepared and
+served. The kitchen must be kept clean: company commanders inspect
+daily and insist on the following:</p>
+
+<p>1. Have cooks and enlisted men come to attention at the command of the
+first man who sees you approach.</p>
+
+<p>2. Have all refrigerators opened, and put your head in far enough to
+detect any bad odors.</p>
+
+<p>3. Check the bill of fare and see that food not consumed one day is
+utilized later&mdash;waste bread for bread pudding, for example.</p>
+
+<p>4. See that doors close properly, that windows are screened and roof
+is tight&mdash;allow no flies.</p>
+
+<p>5. Have floors, tables and refrigerators scrubbed daily.</p>
+
+<p>6. Have the ground around the mess shack raked and thoroughly policed.
+Towels hung out to dry must be so hung as not to fall to the ground.
+Raked ground does not allow flies to build undisturbed.</p>
+
+<p>7. Taste the coffee and look in the coffee bins.</p>
+
+<p>8. Inspect pans, knives, meat grinder (have latter taken apart for you
+occasionally).</p>
+
+<p>9. See that the mess sergeant looks after the incinerator properly;
+that he makes the cooks use what he tells them to. Cooks should not be
+allowed to help themselves to things; the mess sergeant should weigh
+out or set out just what is to be used each day.</p>
+
+<p>10. Have the food served hot and in individual portions as far as
+possible; see that the food is not put on the table too soon.</p>
+
+<p>11. During each month talk with an old soldier, a raw recruit and a
+non-commissioned officer about the mess to see what the men think of
+it.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214"></a><span class="sc">
+On The March</span>.&mdash;(1. i.d.r., 669-673.)</p>
+
+<p>If portable kitchens accompany troops, the men should fall in in
+single file and be helped to food as they pass by in companies.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+For Individual Cooking</span>.&mdash;Rations issued might be: 1 carton of
+hard-tack, 1 ration of bacon, 1 potato, 2 tablespoons of rice, 1
+heaping tablespoon of coffee, sugar.</p>
+
+<p>Fires for individual cooking are best made out of small dried twigs to
+produce a hot fire large enough for a group of four men.</p>
+
+<p>There are two methods of cooking with the issue mess-kit.</p>
+
+<p>First Method: Each man cooking for himself. As there are but two
+cooking utensils, the tin cup and the frying pan, the cooking must be
+systematized in order to cook four articles on the two utensils. To do
+this, the rice is first cooked in the tin cup filling the tin cup
+one-third full of water throwing in the rice. The water is brought to
+a boil and boiled until the individual grains of rice are soft
+through. The tin cup is then removed from the fire, the water poured
+off, and the cup covered with the lid of the mess tin, the rice being
+allowed to steam. In the meantime, the bacon should be fried in the
+frying pan, the grease being saved. When the rice is well steamed, it
+is turned out in the lid of the meat can, then the bacon placed on top
+of it. The tin cup is washed out and the man is then ready to fry his
+potato and boil his coffee. The cup is filled two-thirds full of water
+and the coffee placed in it and boiled until the desired strength is
+attained. To prevent the coffee from boiling over, a canteen of water
+should be handy and water thrown in whenever the coffee begins to boil
+over. When the coffee is strong enough, the addition of cold water
+will settle the grounds. In the meantime, cut the potatoes very thin
+and fry them in the bacon grease and the meal is ready: hard-tack,
+potatoes, rice, bacon and coffee.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215"></a>Second Method: Squads of four may specialize; one man to collect the
+frying pans and fry all the bacon, another the potatoes, another the
+rice and coffee, and the other for collection of wood. Either method
+may be followed.</p>
+
+<p>Mess-kits should be cleaned immediately after using, sand being used
+for scouring. Mess-kits must be cleaned thoroughly.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+In The Trenches</span>.&mdash;Usually rations and stores will be carried up to the
+trenches by the supports and the reserves. If this is not possible and
+it becomes necessary that men from the front line trenches be
+employed, not more than 10 per cent of the men in the firing line are
+to be away from the trenches at the same time.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Rations And Cooking</span>:</p>
+
+<p>(a) Ration parties from the support and reserve trenches will be made
+up in complete units, <i>i.e.</i>, platoons or companies.</p>
+
+<p>(b) The company mess sergeant will accompany the ration parties for
+his company and will report his arrival to the company commander.</p>
+
+<p>(c) Great care is to be taken that ration and carrying parties make as
+little noise as possible.</p>
+
+<p>(d) Cooking if possible will be done behind the front line trenches,
+and should be concentrated by sections or companies. Steps must be
+taken to insure that as little smoke as possible is made by the cook's
+fires.</p>
+
+<p>(e) Waste in any form will be discouraged.</p>
+
+<p>(f) Arrangements should be made to insure that soup or some hot drink
+be available for the men between midnight and 7 a.m.</p>
+
+<p>Each company commander must see that timely requisitions for rations
+are made and to have no delays at meal times. Food should be brought
+up in tin boilers about the size of wash boilers so that two men can
+handle one of them easily without a relief. In front line, men send
+mess kit relayed from hand to hand to these boilers at stations in
+each platoon or section and <a name="Page_216" id="Page_216"></a>they are relayed back. Sometimes men in
+the front line are relieved for a few minutes. Always carry 24 hours
+rations.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<b>Camping and Camp Sanitation.</b></p>
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-indent: 0em;">
+General Principles:</p>
+
+<p>Great care must be exercised in selecting a camp site, but it must
+never be forgotten that the tactical situation is of paramount
+importance.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">The following principles govern the selection:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Sufficient supply of pure water.</li>
+<li>Good roads, but not too near a main highway on account of dust
+ and noise.</li>
+<li>Wood and forage must be obtainable.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">The ground should:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Give ample room without crowding.</li>
+<li>Have porous soil.</li>
+<li>Have high elevation to make site dry.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Avoid:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Marshy ground and mosquitoes.</li>
+<li>Woods or dense vegetation.</li>
+<li>Ravines or depressions in terrain or dry stream beds subject to
+ sudden freshets.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Water must be obtainable:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Arrange immediately where to obtain
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Drinking and cooking water.</li>
+ <li>Water for animals.</li>
+ <li>Water for bathing and washing.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em;">In the case of running water, the point furthest up-stream shall be
+guarded for drinking and cooking water. Bathing shall be done at a
+point furthest down-stream.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Successful military camping depends upon three (3) things:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Discipline.</li>
+<li>Cooking.</li>
+<li>Sanitation.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217"></a>Discipline means control; it means order. Nowhere are these more
+essential. Confusion is loss of control, loss of time, and loss of
+respect by the men.</p>
+
+<p>Upon arrival at a favorable camp site get the men off their feet. Do
+not wait around. As C.O. have your decisions made and the work
+organized, so that each squad will be under a leader. Keep squads
+together, allowing none to stray off until the work is done, then let
+everyone rest except the sentinels.</p>
+
+<p>Do not omit to post sentinels over the water supply and at important
+points, even though you have not decided upon the exact location of
+camp.</p>
+
+<p>Organize the work by platoons or squads and rotate, if camp is to be
+made every few days.</p>
+
+<p>Discipline in camp means more than order and dispatch, however, men
+must understand that they are under discipline when off duty&mdash;that
+they cannot disregard sanitary measures, eat promiscuously, destroy
+property, vegetation, or timber and must police the grounds at all
+times. Papers, cigarette butts, and newspapers, should never be
+allowed on the ground near camp. Eatables should never be kept in
+tents to draw vermin. Where possible, in dry weather, the company
+street should be wet down to keep the dust out of the tents. Have men
+ditch around tents immediately upon making camp. Though it may seem
+somewhat of a hardship, a sudden down pour of rain, will recompense
+them for this labor many times over. In ditching the tents, completely
+circle them, for if this is not done a great deal of rain will come in
+the front of the tent.</p>
+
+<p>Food means everything to a soldier. The camp cooking is a barometer of
+the organized efficiency and of the enlisted men's attitude. Nothing
+else can do so much to help or hinder.</p>
+
+<p>The Company Commander should realize the controlling power exercised
+by the company cook and keep the matter in his own hands. He should
+accept no excuse for burnt or dirty food.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218"></a>If officers mess with their companies they will appreciate the
+attitude of the men and be able to judge the real situation. Officers
+will be well repaid for doing this, as it gives them an idea of the
+food that is being served their men.</p>
+
+<p>In the mechanical details of preparing food, the fire is of first
+importance. A quick method of cooking is by laying a pair of large
+green logs on the surface of the ground just wide enough to place the
+pots between them, so that the bottom of the pots will be resting upon
+them. Build a fire between these logs, making sure to place the logs
+parallel to the direction of the wind.</p>
+
+<p>A pit may be dug, with a sloping bottom, and across this may be placed
+the pots, and if iron rails are available, the utensils may be placed
+on these. For longer stays this pit may be lined with stone. Stones
+retain the heat and less wood is required. Four trenches radiating
+from a central chimney will give one flue whatever may be the
+direction of the wind. (For more specific data on the subject of fires
+and camp cooking, see Manual for Army Cooks&mdash;U.S.A.&mdash;also notes in
+i.d.r., pp. 154-155.)</p>
+
+<p>Make a rule never to allow food to remain in tin cans after opening
+them. Remember to place kitchen near available water supply and
+furthest from latrines, horse picket lines, or dumps of any kind.</p>
+
+<p>Sanitation comes last in the thoughts of the enlisted man, but it is
+no less important for that.</p>
+
+<p>The first requisite is cleanliness. Food receptacles must be scoured
+and covers and cracks in tin ware scraped as well as scalding the tins
+themselves. Have boiling hot water in tanks (galvanized iron ash cans
+are good) for men to wash mess kits in after meals. One can should
+contain soapy water so as to cut the grease from the dishes, and the
+second tank should contain clean, boiling water for scalding the kits.
+Scraps of food should be scraped from the mess tins before immersing
+them in water, otherwise washing water <a name="Page_219" id="Page_219"></a>becomes filled with small
+particles of food. Wiping cloths will greatly add to the convenience
+of the men and takes but a short time to make them clean and fit for
+use again.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Care must be exercised over three kinds of waste:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>Garbage.</li>
+<li>Kitchen slops.</li>
+<li> Excreta.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Garbage can be burned in the kitchen fires. It should never stand
+exposed to the air, but should be tightly covered in iron cans, and
+should be disposed of every twenty-four hours. Kitchen help have an
+aversion to prompt disposal of garbage and need watching. Fly traps
+should be made of muslin and used freely about the kitchen.</p>
+
+<p>Kitchen slops, fats, greasy water, etc., must be drained into covered
+pits, never allowing them to be tossed on the ground around the cook
+tent. A hole dug and partially filled with stones with a barrel placed
+upside down on them, makes a very good receptacle for kitchen slops.
+The barrel should be placed so that the inverted top will be a little
+way beneath the surface of the ground. A hole should be bored in the
+bottom of the barrel and a funnel inserted, through which the slops
+may be poured. If the soil is porous, a trough may be dug and covered
+with mosquito netting or cheese cloth, and the water poured through
+this and allowed to drain off.</p>
+
+<p>Excreta is the most deadly form of waste, and too much care cannot be
+exercised in disposing of it. Impress upon every man that he must
+cover completely with dirt all excreta so that flies may not have a
+chance to approach it.</p>
+
+<p>For short stops and while working in the field &quot;straddle,&quot; latrines
+are the best. These are shallow trenches the width of a shovel, about
+12 inches wide, and several feet in length. For long stops a deep
+<a name="Page_220" id="Page_220"></a>latrine is dug of the following dimensions: 2 feet wide, 6 feet deep
+by 15 feet long. Two posts with crotches, driven at the ends of this
+trench, supporting a substantial pole to make a seat * * * for
+convenience a hand rail placed in front of this improvised seat will
+add to the comfort of the men.</p>
+
+<p>A more permanent latrine is made by covering the pit with a wooden
+box, in the top of which are cut holes of the necessary diameter. To
+these holes should be fitted spring covers which will shut down
+tightly. A wooden frame boarded around this arrangement makes a
+satisfactory enclosure.</p>
+
+<p>A urinal made of two long boards joined together to form a V-shaped
+trough and drained by a pipe into the pit completes the whole. A pitch
+sufficient for rapid drainage should be given the urinal trough.</p>
+
+<p>When necessary to utilize separate urinals, a hole filled with stone
+and sprinkled daily with quicklime is sufficient for short periods. At
+night there should be a galvanized iron can placed in each company
+street and emptied before reveille each morning. This can must be
+disinfected by burning out, as must be the latrines when earth or sand
+is not used as a covering each time.</p>
+
+<p>Pits must be covered daily with quicklime, ashes, earth and filled
+when within two (2) feet of the surface. Their position should be
+distinctly marked so as to prevent reopening.</p>
+
+<p>It is a safe rule never to use an old camp ground, but select a new
+one, even if less conveniently located. Camp sites should be changed
+if it is found that the soil is becoming polluted, or if the ground is
+cut up and dusty from constant use.</p>
+
+<p>The condition in which a camp site is left by an organization will
+clearly indicate the efficiency and discipline in a command.</p>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_10" id="CHAPTER_10"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221"></a>CHAPTER 10.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Personal Hygiene and First Aid.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>This is a purely arbitrary grouping of topics for the purpose of
+saving space. Either of the topics mentioned could be treated at
+length; detailed information will be found in any of the reference
+books mentioned in the bibliography.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Personal Hygiene</span> means &quot;the preservation of health by attention to the
+care of the body;&quot; it is determined by the formation of correct
+habits. Cleanliness of person, clothing and bedding should become a
+habit of life with the soldier; but some men will always require
+watching and admonition. These habits are: personal cleanliness;
+regulation of diet; avoidance of excesses (eating, drinking and sexual
+matters); wearing suitable clothing; keeping the bodily processes at
+work (kidneys, bowels and skin); taking sufficient exercise,
+preferably in the open air; rest of body and mind, with recreation for
+the latter; maintaining the surroundings in which one lives in a
+cleanly state.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Bathing</span> is easily the most important requirement in matters of
+personal hygiene; men should bathe as often as conditions of life in
+barracks and camp will permit. On the march a vigorous &quot;dry rub&quot; with
+a coarse towel will often prove an excellent substitute when water is
+not available. <i>Teeth</i> should be cleaned at least twice daily.
+<i>Clothing</i> should be kept clean, particularly underclothing. <i>Diet</i> is
+not a matter which a soldier can determine to any extent for himself;
+but he can follow a certain few precautions:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Don't eat hurriedly; chew the food properly.</li>
+<li>Don't overload the stomach.</li>
+<li>Don't eat green or overripe fruit.</li>
+<li>Don't eat anything while away from camp or barracks, whose
+materials or manner of preparation seem questionable.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222"></a>Don't bring a &quot;grouch&quot; to the table with you.</li>
+<li>Don't eat on the march; don't drink too much water on the march.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Sexual Indulgence</span> is a matter to be handled tactfully, but with
+absolute frankness. Men should be taught that it is not a matter of
+necessity; that their health will not suffer by any lack of it; that
+they themselves will be the sufferers for any violations of rules of
+health. The procedure directed by the War Department for purposes of
+combatting infection is as follows:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+<li>That physical inspections of enlisted men be made twice each month
+for the detection of venereal disease.</li>
+<li>That any soldier who exposes himself to infection shall report for
+cleansing and preventive treatment immediately upon return to camp or
+garrison.</li>
+<li>That any soldier who fails so to report, if found to be suffering
+from a venereal infection, shall be brought to trial by court martial
+for neglect of duty.</li>
+<li>That men so infected shall be confined strictly to the limits of
+the post during the infectious stages of the disease.</li>
+<li>That all officers serving with troops shall do their utmost to
+encourage healthful exercises and physical recreation and to supply
+opportunities for cleanly social and interesting mental occupations
+for the men under their command.</li>
+<li>That company and medical officers shall take advantage of favorable
+opportunities to point out the misery and disaster that follow upon
+moral uncleanliness; and the fact that venereal disease is never a
+trivial affair.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em;">With a great many men these precautions and measures will not be
+necessary but for the sake of those who are ignorant or neglectful,
+proper steps should at all times be taken.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Exercise</span>.&mdash;A sufficient amount of exercise to maintain health is
+ordinarily provided by military drills and other duties requiring
+active movement. But this should <a name="Page_223" id="Page_223"></a>be regarded only as the minimum of
+exercise; athletic work should be encouraged (and this will be done by
+the present activities of those &quot;higher up&quot;); bayonet training will be
+found an excellent medium of accomplishing a double purpose;
+calisthenics should be short but snappy and vigorous. A vigorous
+policy of an officer as regards things of this sort will ward off a
+great many minor ills and particularly &quot;colds,&quot; which are often the
+result of poor ventilation.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Cleanliness Of Surroundings</span>.&mdash;Men should be taught that cleanliness of
+surroundings is not merely for purposes of inspection; but that it is
+absolutely necessary where a great number of men are living together
+in close quarters. Quarters should be well policed; the company street
+should be kept clean; refuse of all sorts should be kept in
+receptacles provided for that purpose and frequently removed. A police
+squad appointed daily should be charged with this work, and the
+corporal of the same made responsible for the condition of quarters
+and the company street.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Preventable Diseases</span>.&mdash;Men should be given a certain amount of
+theoretical knowledge of preventable diseases. These matters will be
+taken care of to a large extent by the Medical Corps; but men should
+be taught just what precautions are necessary to avoid recourse to the
+hospital.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Venereal</span> diseases have already been touched upon.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Typhoid Fever</span> is a germ disease and communicable. Vaccination is the
+first preventive; protection of water supply is the second; thorough
+disposal of wastes is a third; and sharp punishment for violation of
+sanitary regulations is a fourth. Habits of personal cleanliness will
+do much to prevent any such disease.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Dysentery</span> is very common in field service, but may be prevented by
+same methods as for typhoid fever, save for vaccination; men suffering
+from this malady should be isolated, if possible, and utmost
+precaution taken to prevent spread of the disease.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224"></a><span class="sc">
+Malaria</span> is a mosquito disease; get rid of mosquitoes and then you will
+get rid of the carrier of the germs. Quinine may act as a preventive.
+Cases should be isolated, if possible.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Tonsilitis And Colds</span> may be combatted very effectively by proper
+precautions as to ventilation.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Measles</span>.&mdash;Very important but little known; isolation recommended.</p>
+
+<p>There are many other diseases concerning which the men should be
+instructed, but lack of space prevents further treatment of them. They
+should be taught the proper treatment of blistered feet, for they
+incapacitate a great many men; the chief causes are ill-fitting shoes
+and our old friend &quot;uncleanliness.&quot; Shoes are the most important
+article of clothing of the infantryman; each man should have one pair
+well broken in for marching, and two other pairs. Socks should be
+soft, smooth and without holes&mdash;also <i>clean</i>. Further steps for the
+prevention of blisters are; hardening of the skin by appropriate baths
+for the feet; soaping the feet; or adopting some other means of
+reducing the friction of the foot against the sock. <i>Treatment</i>&mdash;Wash
+the feet; open the blister at the lowest point, with a clean needle;
+dress with vaseline or other ointment and protect with adhesive
+plaster, care being taken not to shut out the air. Zinc oxide plaster
+is excellent. Sterilize a needle; thread it with a woolly thread and
+run it through blister, leaving ends projecting about one-half inch;
+this will act as a wick and dry up blister in short time.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+First Aid</span>.&mdash;Explain to the men the uses of the first aid packet and of
+the pouch carried by the Medical Corps. (This pouch is being replaced
+by web-belts with pockets.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Wounds</span> may be classed as ordinary cuts, inside wounds, lacerated,
+punctured and poisoned wounds. For ordinary minor wounds&mdash;iodine and
+exposure to the air are usually sufficient. <i>War wounds</i> are usually
+caused by something having an explosive effect and may <a name="Page_225" id="Page_225"></a>be accompanied
+by hemorrhage, shock and even loss of function; they may be arterial
+or venous.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Poisoned Wounds</span> are of two sorts; external and internal.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Diagnosis Tag</span>.&mdash;This tag placed on a soldier shows wound, name, rank,
+regiment, treatment received, etc. This tag should be carefully read
+before further treatment is accorded.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Treatment Of Wounds</span>.&mdash;The compress, of the first aid packet will
+always prove of help.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Bleeding Wounds</span>.&mdash;The bandage of the first aid packet will stop all
+ordinary bleeding; but in aggravated cases the bleeding may be stopped
+by pressure on the artery, between the wound and the heart. This may
+be done by hand or by means of the forceps in the medical pouch. The
+points of compression should be learned and located; in front of the
+ear just above the socket of the jaw; in the neck in front of the
+strongly marked muscle reaching from behind the ear to the upper part
+of the breast bone; in the hollow behind the collar bone; just behind
+the inner border of the larger muscle of the arm; the femoral artery
+at the middle of the groin where the artery passes over the bone.
+Bleeding may also be stopped to some extent by elevating the wounded
+part. A tourniquet may be improvised by using the compress, running a
+stick or the bayonet through the band, and taking up the slack by
+twisting.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Poisoned Wounds</span>.&mdash;For a <i>snakebite</i> make a tight constriction just
+above the wound; make an incision at the bite and suck out the poison.
+<i>Do it quickly</i>. If this is impossible, follow the same plan but give
+a stimulant; repeatedly loosen the constriction and let a little of
+the poison into the system at a time to be neutralized. In cases of
+chemical poisoning do not follow the usual method of treating
+poisoning. <i>Do not make the patient vomit</i>, but give him something fat
+or albuminous such as raw eggs or milk. This forms mercurial
+albuminate. <a name="Page_226" id="Page_226"></a><i>Ptomaine</i> poisoning (symptoms are headache, cramps,
+nausea, high fever and chills, etc.). Drink salt water, vomit and
+repeat the procedure to clean out the stomach. A purgative should also
+be taken. Ice cream and milk kept too long are frequent causes of this
+sort of poisoning, as are dishes kept in the icebox over night.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Fainting, Heat Exhaustion And Shock</span> are all of the same class;
+symptoms are the same&mdash;weak pulse, paleness and low temperature,
+tendency to fall to ground. Often follows taking too much water on the
+march. Treatment should be in nature of stimulant; make patient lie
+down, get blood to his head, wrap him in blankets, give him hot
+drinks, etc.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Sunstroke</span>.&mdash;Symptoms and treatment are different. Patient has a high
+temperature. Keep his head high and feet low; disrobe him and pour
+cold water on him; keep him in a cool place until temperature lowers
+to 101; then remove cold water and temperature will go down itself. Do
+not apply cold water too long as the temperature may go to sub-normal
+which is just as dangerous as a temperature abnormally high.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Burns And Scalds</span>.&mdash;Air should be shut out; otherwise treat like
+blister, care being taken not to remove skin. Do not put on anything
+that will stick and do not try to remove anything that has a tendency
+to stick; put on linseed oil and water, cotton and a loose bandage.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Freezing And Frostbites</span>.&mdash;Use ice water and snow to start with. Keep
+the patient cool until he is thawed out. Massage and gradually work up
+to a warmer temperature.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Fractures</span> are of three kinds; simple, compound and comminuted.</p>
+
+<p>Simple: Bones do not penetrate the skin (may be single or double).</p>
+
+<p>Compound: Bones penetrate the skin and cause infection.</p>
+
+<p>Comminuted: Bone is shattered.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227"></a>Indications of a fracture are: Pain, redness, swelling and mobility
+where it ought not to be.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Treatment</span>.&mdash;Find out the kind of fracture. Paint the wound and put on
+first aid packet; replace the clothes and splint the break. Splints
+should not be too long so as to cause any friction or annoyance to the
+patient. They may be made out of any available material, such as
+rifle, bayonet, shingle, piece of board, scabbard, etc. Bind them
+firmly but not too tightly.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Artificial Respiration</span>.&mdash;This subject is worthy of more treatment than
+it can be accorded here. Any text on first aid will explain thoroughly
+the Schaefer method, which is now the standard method in the army.
+Points to be remembered in this method are; remove foreign articles
+from the mouth; curl the little finger over the 12th rib; avoid the
+pelvic bones; hold the arms straight and apply the pressure by means
+of the whole body brought forward; take care not to break a rib; do
+not give up too soon.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Trench Foot</span>.&mdash;This is due to long standing with legs and feet in wet
+clothes. There are three types:</p>
+
+<p>Mild: Symptoms are numbness and a slight swelling.</p>
+
+<p>Medium: Additional symptom of a bluing of the leg; also large
+blisters.</p>
+
+<p>Severe: Gangrene sets in.</p>
+
+<p>Tight clothes help to bring on these things. Keep the shoes, socks and
+breeches loose; keep the clothes dry; furnish the men with hot food in
+the trenches and so keep up the circulation. <i>Do not use grease</i>.
+Trench foot can be avoided by proper treatment, and punishment should
+follow upon its contraction.</p>
+<a name="Page_228" id="Page_228"></a>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_11" id="CHAPTER_11"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229"></a>CHAPTER 11.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Signaling.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>This chapter proposes to cover a large amount of ground in a small
+compass; hence treatment must be brief. A more liberal treatment will
+be found at different sources; here a few suggestions and hints will
+be given.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Semaphore</span>.&mdash;Time spent, 61 hours: 6 sessions &frac12; hours, 1 session 1
+hour, 1 conference 2 hours. It is easy to say &quot;just learn the
+semaphore,&quot; but to learn it quickly and well is another matter. A few
+suggestions as to the methods followed by others will usually prove
+helpful. Learn the semaphore by what may be called the &quot;cycle&quot; method,
+<i>i.e.</i>, teach and illustrate how the successive letters are formed by
+moving the arm or arms around the body in a clockwise direction
+through successive stages. There are a few exceptions to the rule as
+will be pointed out; but they only serve as a few landmarks and help
+to fix the whole matter more firmly in mind.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+First Cycle</span>.&mdash;1 arm. A to G. One arm always at the interval. Be sure
+to make the &quot;D&quot; with right arm straight overhead&mdash;then it is more
+distinct at a distance. (Plate.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Second Cycle</span>.&mdash;2 arms. H to N, inclusive, with exception of J. One arm
+always in the A position. In making I always be sure that the left
+hand is at the A position. Some men insist in making this letter wrong
+by crossing the body with the left hand uppermost. This is very
+awkward and also very indistinct at a distance. P changes arms but
+retains same relative position of flags.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Third Cycle</span>.&mdash;2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U
+actually resembles that letter.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Third Cycle</span>.&mdash;2 arms. O to S. One arm always in B position. In letter
+O, left arm is in B position; in all others, right arm.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230"></a><span class="sc">
+Fourth Cycle</span>.&mdash;2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U
+actually resembles that letter.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Doubles</span>.&mdash;L, U, R, N. These letters are keys to many others and should
+be promptly learned.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Opposites</span>.&mdash;V and K, O and W, Q and Y, S and M, Z and H, X and I, M
+follows L in cycle and is opposite of S, S follows E in cycle and is
+opposite of M, K precedes L in cycle and is opposite of V. Figures are
+first 10 letters of alphabet, preceded by crossing flags overhead.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Instructing</span>.&mdash;This plan of teaching the semaphore will be found very
+helpful, for it helps to reason out the alphabet for the student. By
+fixing firmly in mind a few things the student can soon reason out the
+alphabet for himself by a very logical plan.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Second Step</span>.&mdash;After the men have been taught the alphabet they should
+either pair off and one man send to the other, or one man should be
+selected to send for the entire class. At first only letters should be
+sent until the men have learned the alphabet thoroughly. In this way
+the key characters of the alphabet can be fixed in mind, as well as
+their relation to the other letters.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Third Step</span>.&mdash;The men should next be paired off and instructed to send
+simple messages to each other. You should insist that there be no
+other communication between the men than by means of their flags.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Fourth Step</span>.&mdash;Proceed to simple qualification tests, four men working
+in two pairs and the pairs alternating in sending and receiving. One
+man of first pair should read for his companion to send. On the other
+end, one man should read and the other copy. The distances should be
+such as to preclude the possibility of conversation. Forty letters per
+minute is a fair test; or this system may be followed: Have a good
+signalman send 10 combinations of 5 letters each to the whole class.
+The men should read these and write <a name="Page_232" id="Page_232"></a>them
+down, <i>one combination at a time</i>. Time limit should be 3 minutes.</p>
+
+<br />
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_231" id="Page_231"></a><a href="images/plate13.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate13.png" width="90%" alt="Plate 13: Semaphore Letters" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+
+<p><span class="sc">
+Wig Wag</span>.&mdash;Time spent: Same as semaphore course. The alphabet can be
+found in any standard signal book, or in the &quot;Manual for
+Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates.&quot; The dots are made to the
+right of the body, the dashes to the left; interval at the end of a
+word by dipping the flag once to the front, at the end of a sentence
+by dipping it twice, and at the end of a message by dipping it three
+times. The alphabet should be learned first according to the same
+general plan as in the semaphore; <i>i.e.</i>, the key letters to certain
+combinations should first be learned. The following grouping of
+letters may be found helpful:</p>
+
+<p class="cen">E I S H; T M O; A U V; N D B; R F L; K C Y; W P J; G Z Q.</p>
+
+<p>The instructor can find many other groupings that will aid him. It
+should also be pointed out that each number from one to ten consists
+of five characters, and that each succeeding number follows the
+previous one according to a regular method.</p>
+
+<p>After the men have studied the alphabet sufficiently, have them send
+to each other, limiting the work at first to letters only. Then
+gradually work up to the point where they may send simple messages.
+Make them rely upon the flags for communicating during the practice.
+Do not permit conversation&mdash;separate the men by a considerable
+distance. In both wig wag and semaphore instruction the same plan
+should be followed as in teaching a foreign language; <i>i.e.</i>, confine
+all communication to the medium under study. Qualification tests are
+similar to those for the semaphore, except that less speed can be
+exacted; 15 characters per minute or 10 combinations of 5 letters each
+to be received and written down in 5 minutes.</p>
+
+<p>In both the semaphore and the wig wag men should be taught the
+conventional signals used in field work. These can be found in any
+manual on the subject.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<a name="Page_233" id="Page_233"></a>Points To Remember.</p>
+
+<p>The semaphore is a quicker means of communication than the wig wag;
+but the wig wag can be used in a prone position under shelter.</p>
+
+<p>Lanterns can be used at night for semaphoring.</p>
+
+<p>Acetylene lamps can be used at night in place of the wig wag. In this
+case a short flash represents a dot, a long flash a dash.</p>
+
+<p>A few men in each company should be developed into expert signalers;
+some men always show aptitude for this sort of thing.</p>
+
+<p>Frequent use should be made of signaling in field work.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Letter Codes.</b></p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em;">
+Infantry.</p>
+
+<p class="cen">For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.</p>
+
+<div class="ctr">
+<table border="1" cellpadding="3" cellspacing="0" width="85%" summary="Letter Codes">
+<tr>
+<td width="35%" class="tdcenter">Letter of alphabet</td>
+<td width="30%" class="tdcenter">If signaled from the <br />rear to the firing line</td>
+<td width="35%" class="tdcenter">If signaled from the <br />firing line to the rear</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;AM</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Ammunition going forward.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Ammunition required.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;CCC</td>
+<td class="tdleft" valign="top">Charge (mandatory at all times).</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Am about to charge if no instructions to the contrary.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;CF</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Cease firing</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Cease firing.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;DT</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Double time or "rush."</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Double time or "rush."</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;F</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Commence firing.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FB</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Fix bayonets.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;FL</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Artillery fire is causing us losses.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;G</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Move forward.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Preparing to move forward.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;HHH</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Halt.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;K</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Negative.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;LT</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Left.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;O <br />(Ardois and semaphore only).</td>
+<td class="tdleft">What is the (R.N., etc.)? <br />Interrogatory.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">What is the (R.N., etc.)? <br />Interrogatory.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<span style="font-size: 12pt; font-weight: bold;">..--..</span>
+<br />(All methods but Ardois and semaphore).</td>
+<td class="tdleft">What is the (R.N., etc.)? <br />Interrogatory.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">What is the (R.N., etc.)? <br />Interrogatory.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;P</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Affirmative.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Affirmative.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;RN</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Range.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Range.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;RT</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Right.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Right.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;SSS</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Support going forward.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Support needed.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;SUF</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Suspend firing.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Suspend firing.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="tdleft">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;T</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Target.</td>
+<td class="tdleft">Target</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_234" id="Page_234"></a><b>Arm Signals.</b></p>
+
+<p>The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either arm
+may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line &quot;retreat
+back&quot; at once to prevent misunderstandings.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Forward March</span>.&mdash;Carry
+the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
+the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. This signal
+is also used to execute quick time from double time.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Halt</span>.&mdash;Carry
+the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and hold
+the arm vertically.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Double Time, March.</span>&mdash;Carry
+the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
+the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squads Right, March.</span>&mdash;Raise
+the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
+between the vertical and horizontal positions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squads Left, March.</span>&mdash;Raise
+the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
+downward and horizontal positions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squads Right About, March</span>
+(if in close order) or, <span class="sc">To The Rear, March</span>
+(if in skirmish line).&mdash;Extend the arm vertically above the head;
+carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several times
+between the vertical and downward positions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Change Direction Or Column Right (Left),
+March.</span>&mdash;The hand on the side
+toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried across
+the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a
+horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction.</p>
+
+<p>As <span class="sc">Skirmishers, March.</span>&mdash;Raise
+both arms laterally until horizontal.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235"></a>As <span class="sc">Skirmishers, Guide Center, March.</span>&mdash;Raise
+both arms laterally until
+horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
+to the horizontal; repeat several times.</p>
+
+<p>As <span class="sc">Skirmishers, Guide Right (Left),
+March.</span>&mdash;Raise both arms laterally
+until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
+the horizontal position: swing the other upward until vertical and
+return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Assemble, March.</span>&mdash;Raise
+the arm vertically to its full extent and
+describe horizontal circles.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Range, Or Change Elevation.</span>&mdash;To
+announce the RANGE, extend the arm,
+toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist
+closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by
+opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
+equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short
+horizontal line with forefinger. <i>To change elevation</i>, indicate the
+<i>amount of increase or decrease</i> by fingers as above; point upward to
+indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">What Range Are You Using? Or What Is The
+Range?</span>&mdash;Extend the arms
+toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
+on the other hand, fist closed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Are You Ready? Or I Am
+Ready.</span>&mdash;Raise the hand, fingers extended and
+joined, palm toward the person addressed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Commence Firing.</span>&mdash;Move
+the arm extended in full length, hand palm
+down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fire Faster.</span>&mdash;Execute
+rapidly the signal &quot;<span class="sc">Commence
+Firing.</span>&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fire Slower</span>.&mdash;Execute
+slowly the signal &quot;<span class="sc">Commence
+Firing.</span>&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">To Swing The Cone Of Fire To The Right,
+Or Left</span>.&mdash;Extend the arm in
+full length to the front, <a name="Page_236" id="Page_236"></a>palm to the right (left); swing the arm to
+right (left), and point in the direction of the new target.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Fix Bayonet</span>.&mdash;Simulate
+the movement of the right hand in &quot;Fix
+Bayonet.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Suspend Firing</span>.&mdash;Raise
+and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
+position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Cease Firing</span>.&mdash;Raise
+the forearm as in <i>suspend firing</i> and swing it
+up and down several times in front of the face.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Platoon</span>.&mdash;Extend
+the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
+describe small circles with the hand.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Squad</span>.&mdash;Extend
+the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
+the hand, up and down from the wrist.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Rush</span>.&mdash;Same as <i>double time</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The signals <span class="sc">Platoon</span> and
+<span class="sc">Squad</span> are intended primarily for communication
+between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal
+<span class="sc">Platoon</span>
+or <span class="sc">Squad</span>
+indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the signal
+which follows to be executed by platoon or squad.</p>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_12" id="CHAPTER_12"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237"></a>CHAPTER 12.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Guard Duty.</h3>
+
+<div class='ctr'>
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="7" width="30%" summary="Time Spent">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="35%" class="tdright" style="white-space: nowrap" valign="top">Time spent:</td>
+ <td width="65%" class="tdleft" style="white-space: nowrap">Study, 2 hours.<br />
+ Conference, 2 hours.<br />
+ Formal guard mounting.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>Guards are divided roughly into four classes:</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Exterior&mdash;(Which come more properly under head of field service).</li>
+<li>Interior&mdash;Their purpose is to preserve order, protect property and
+enforce police regulations.</li>
+<li>Military Police&mdash;Also treated of in field service.</li>
+<li>Provost Guards&mdash;Used in the absence of military police to aid civil
+authorities in preserving order among soldiers beyond the interior
+guard.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Here we are concerned chiefly with interior guards. We shall make up a
+brief summary of what an officer must know and what he ought to teach
+his non-coms. and men. Also we shall touch upon the subject of guard
+duty as it has been changed by trench warfare.</p>
+
+<p>An officer ought to have a good grasp of the following subjects
+relative to guard duty:</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Guard mounting (both formal and informal).</li>
+<li>Posting reliefs.</li>
+<li>Preparation and running of rosters.</li>
+<li>General orders&mdash;also special orders at post No. 1.</li>
+<li>Duties of the following in reference to guard duty:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Commanding officer.</li>
+<li>Officer of the day.</li>
+<li>Adjutant.</li>
+<li>Sergeant Major.</li>
+<li>Commander of the guard.</li>
+<li>Sergeant of the guard.</li>
+<li>Corporal of the guard.</li>
+<li>Musicians.</li>
+<li>Orderlies and color sentinels.</li>
+<li>Privates of the guard.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238"></a>Compliments of the guard.</li>
+<li>Prisoners: &nbsp; General.<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4.5em;">Garrison.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4.5em;">Awaiting trial.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 4.5em;">Awaiting result of trial.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: .5em;">How is an officer arrested? Can an enlisted man arrest him?</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: .5em;">How is a non-com. arrested?</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: .5em;">How is a soldier arrested?</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: .5em;">How is a civilian arrested?</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: .5em;">(See a.w. No. 68.)</span></li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>An officer ought to-teach to his non-coms. as much of the above as is
+consistent with time and other demands; he ought to teach to his
+privates all that is necessary to the proper discharge of their duties
+in this connection.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Formal Guard
+Mounting</span>.&mdash;Here follow a few reminders that may help the
+reader to keep the ceremony in mind:</p>
+
+<p>1. Weather conditions permitting, guard mounting takes place every day
+at the discretion of the C.O.</p>
+
+<p>2. Tour of duty is 24 hours; there are 3 reliefs, 2 hours on and 4
+hours off. No organization is detailed for guard duty more than once
+in 5 days if this can be prevented.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Ceremony</span>.&mdash;
+1. The band takes post, its left 12 paces to the right of
+where the right of the guard is to be.</p>
+
+<p>2. Adjutant's Call.&mdash;The Adjutant marches to the parade ground
+(Sergeant Major on his left) and takes post 12 paces in front of and
+facing the center of where the guard is to rest. The Sergeant Major
+continues on, marches by the left flank and takes post 12 paces to the
+left of the band and facing in the direction the line is to extend.</p>
+
+<p>3. The details are marched to the parade ground by the senior
+non-commissioned officers, halted and dressed as follows:</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239"></a><span class="sc">First
+Detail</span>.&mdash;Non-commissioned officer.&mdash;1. Detail; 2. Halt. The
+detail is halted against the left arm of the Sergeant Major; the
+non-commissioned officer steps out, faces the Sergeant Major at a
+distance slightly greater than the front of the detail and commands:
+1. Right; 2. Dress. The detail dresses on the line formed by the
+Sergeant Major and the Commander of the detail. 3. Front. The
+Commander of the detail salutes and reports: &quot;The detail is correct&quot;
+(or otherwise). When the report is made the Sergeant Major returns the
+salute. The Commander of the detail passes by the right of the guard
+and takes post in rear of the right file of his detail.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Other
+Details</span>.&mdash;Non-commissioned officers.&mdash;1. Detail; 2. Halt; 3.
+Right; 4. Dress; 5. Front. Each commander of a detail halts his
+detail, dresses it on the general line, salutes and reports as does
+the first; then takes his post in a similar manner. Should the
+commander of a detail not be a non-commissioned officer he passes by
+the right of the guard and retires.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">Sergeant
+Major</span>.&mdash;He takes one step to the right, draws sword and
+verifies the detail, and then commands: &quot;Count off.&quot; He completes the
+last squad if necessary and indicates the division into platoons: then
+takes his post and commands: 1. Open ranks; 2. March. This is executed
+as laid down in the Infantry Drill Regulations. 3. Front. He then
+moves parallel to the front rank until opposite the center, turns to
+the right, halts half-way to the Adjutant, salutes and reports: &quot;Sir,
+the details are correct&quot; (or otherwise).</p>
+
+<p>5. <span class="sc">Adjutant</span>:
+&quot;Take your post.&quot; (Adjutant draws saber.)</p>
+
+<p>6. <span class="sc">Sergeant
+Major</span>.&mdash;Faces about, approaches to within two paces of the
+center of the guard, turns; to the right and moves three paces beyond
+the left of the guard, turns to the left, halts on the line of the
+front rank, faces about and brings his sword to the order. (When <a name="Page_240" id="Page_240"></a>the
+Sergeant Major has reported the Officer of the Guard takes his post,
+as shown in the diagram, and draws saber.)</p>
+
+<p>7. <span class="sc">Adjutant</span>.&mdash;1.
+Officer (officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2.
+Front and center; 3. March. At &quot;Center&quot; the officer carries saber; at
+&quot;March&quot; the officer advances and halts 3 paces from the Adjutant,
+remaining at the carry; non-commissioned officers pass by the flank,
+move along the front and form in order of rank from right to left, 3
+paces behind the officer, remaining at the right shoulder. If there is
+no officer of the guard the non-commissioned officers halt 3 paces
+from the Adjutant. The Adjutant assigns them to their positions in
+order of rank&mdash;commander of the guard; leader of the first platoon;
+leader of the second platoon, etc., and commands: 1. Officer
+(officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2. Posts; 3. March. At the
+command &quot;March&quot; they take their posts as prescribed in the School of
+the Company with open ranks (Platoon leaders 3 paces in front of
+center of their platoons).</p>
+
+<p>8. <span class="sc">Adjutant</span>:
+&quot;Inspect your guard, sir.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>9. <span class="sc">Officer Of The Guard</span>.&mdash;Faces
+about and commands: &quot;Prepare for
+inspection.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>10. <span class="sc">Adjutant</span>
+(after the inspection is ended, and after posting himself
+30 paces in front of and facing center of the guard&mdash;at the same time
+the new Officer of the Day takes position about 30 paces behind the
+Adjutant, facing the guard, and with the old officer of the day 1 pace
+in rear and 3 paces to the right): 1. Parade; 2. Rest; 3. Sound off.
+(The band, playing passes in front of the Officer of the Guard to the
+left of the line, returns to its post and ceases to play.) 1. Guard;
+2. Attention; 3. Close ranks; 4. March. (As in the School of the
+Company.) 1. Present; 2. Arms. He then faces the new officer of the
+day, salutes, and reports: &quot;Sir, the guard is formed.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>11. <span class="sc">New Officer
+Of The Day</span> (returning salute): &quot;March the guard in
+review, sir.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241"></a>12. <span class="sc">Adjutant</span>.&mdash;He
+carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to the
+order and commands: &quot;1. At trail, platoons right; 2. March; 3. Guard;
+4. Halt.&quot; The band takes post 12 paces in front of the first platoon,
+the Adjutant 6 paces from the flank and abreast of the Commander of
+the Guard, and the Sergeant Major 6 paces from the flank of the second
+platoon. Adjutant commands: &quot;1. Pass in review; 2. Forward; 3. March.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>13. <span class="sc">Commander Of
+The Guard</span> (as the guard reaches a position 6 paces
+from the Officer of the Day): 1. Eyes; 2. Right; (at 6 paces beyond
+the Officer of the Day) 3. Front.</p>
+
+<p>At 12 paces beyond the Officer of the Day the Adjutant and the
+Sergeant-Major halt, salute and retire.</p>
+
+<p>14. <span class="sc">Commander
+Of The Guard</span> (as the Adjutant and the Sergeant Major
+retire): 1. Platoons, right by squads; 2. March. The guard is then
+marched to its post; the old guard is then relieved and sentinels
+posted according to the principles laid down in the Manual of Interior
+Guard Duty. (See diagrams at the end of this chapter.)</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Guard
+Duty In The Trenches</span>.&mdash;It differs from guard duty as we are
+accustomed to it. The challenge is not &quot;Who is there?&quot; but rather a
+sudden and imperative &quot;Hands up.&quot; The party challenged throws up his
+hands and gives the countersign in a low voice. Sentinels are posted
+in the front line and in the line of dugouts, one at each entrance to
+a dugout to give immediate warning. Watchers are posted at places
+having a good range of view; at night they keep watch over the
+parapets rather than through the loopholes since the latter afford
+only a narrow range of view. Auto riflemen (6 or 7 to a post) are used
+as watchers, one being on duty at a time. They should have a favorable
+background to provide concealment.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242"></a>
+<a href="images/plate14.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate14.png" width="85%" alt="Plate 14" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="70%;"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244"></a>
+<a href="images/plate14a.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate14a.png" width="85%" alt="Plate 14a" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 85%;">
+<a href="images/plate15.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate15.png" width="95%" alt="Plate 15" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_13" id="CHAPTER_13"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245"></a>CHAPTER 13.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Company Administration.</h3>
+<br />
+
+<p>Company administration is a very broad subject and can be really
+learned only by experience. However, this chapter will attempt to
+point out a few suggestions and practices that may prove of some
+assistance, particularly to the new officer. We shall treat briefly of
+the first organization of the company; then we shall try to reproduce
+in some slight measure the actual work of a day in camp (more
+particularly of a training camp such as Plattsburg); then finally we
+shall treat of the orderly room and some of the problems that come up
+in army paper work.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Notes on Organization.</b></p>
+
+<p class="cen">(By <span class="sc">Major
+W.H. Waldron</span> Twenty-Ninth Infantry.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>1. <span class="sc">
+Prepare In Advance To Receive Men Assigned To Company</span>.</p>
+
+<p>(a) Detail one of the Lieutenants in charge of the company mess.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Duties</span>.&mdash;Secure
+the necessary kitchen and dining room equipment and
+prepare everything to start the mess; make up a bill-of-fare for a
+week based on the ration components and supplies available; secure the
+rations and issue them to the cooks daily. Train a mess Sergeant in
+the duties that fall to him. In fine, this Lieutenant will have
+complete charge of the company mess, the cooking, and serving of the
+meals, training of cooks and men detailed for duty in connection with
+the mess.</p>
+
+<p>(b) Detail the other Lieutenant in charge of property.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Duties</span>.&mdash;Procure
+all the articles of individual and company equipment
+from the Regimental Supply Officer. Get into the company storeroom and
+prepare <a name="Page_246" id="Page_246"></a>it for issue. Train the Company Supply Sergeant in the duties
+that will fall to him.</p>
+
+<p>(c) This leaves the Company Commander free to organize the orderly
+room and make the necessary preparations to receive the men as they
+report.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">If In Cantonment</span>.&mdash;Lay
+out the quarters into platoon sections and
+subdivide these into squads, allowing space for platoon leaders and
+guides. Starting at the end of the quarters plainly mark each squad
+section, 8 beds, four on each side of the aisle with the number of the
+squad&mdash;first squad, second squad, etc.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">If In Tents</span>.&mdash;Number
+the tents, one for each squad, leaving two tents
+in the center for platoon leaders, guides, etc. Prepare a sheet having
+a space for each squad, large enough to enter eight names in it.
+Prepare a measuring post where the men can be measured for height as
+they report.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span class="sc">Men Reporting</span>:</p>
+
+<p>(a) When the men arrive they will be sent to Regimental Headquarters
+direct. There they will receive their assignment to a company. When so
+assigned they will be directed to join the company.</p>
+
+<p>(b) A table on which is spread the squad assignment sheet is located
+at the head of the company street. Nearby is located the measuring
+post. When a man reports, look him over, receive him in the company,
+make him feel at home. Make him feel that he is welcome. This little
+act will pay you large dividends in contentment and company <i>esprit de
+corps</i> later on. Turn him over to the man in charge of the measuring
+post to get his height. Assign him to a squad corresponding to his
+height. Enter his name in the squad space to which he is assigned and
+send him to the section of the cantonment designated for that
+particular squad. Detail a few of the first men who report for duty to
+assist in this work.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247"></a>Say you have 16 squads. They will run in height about as follows:</p>
+
+<p>1st squad, over 6 feet; 2nd, 6 feet; 3rd, 6 feet; 4th, 5 feet 11
+inches; 5th, 5 feet 11 inches; 6th, 5 feet 10 inches; 7th, 5 feet 10
+inches; 8th, 5 feet 9 inches; 9th, 5 feet 9 inches; 10th, 5 feet 8
+inches; 11th, 5 feet 8 inches; 12th, 5 feet 7 inches; 13th, 5 feet 7
+inches; 14th, 5 feet 6 inches; 15th, 5 feet 6 inches; 16th, 5 feet 5
+inches. If there are more squads put them in the 5 feet 7 to 5 feet 9
+inches class.</p>
+
+<p>(c) As soon as practicable place one member of the squad in charge for
+the ensuing 24 hours, change this detail every day until every man of
+the squad has had an opportunity to demonstrate his ability. This will
+assist you greatly in the selection of your non-commissioned officers.</p>
+
+<p>(d) Should the entire company be assigned in a body, line them up in a
+row according to height and assign them to squads. Place the most
+likely looking man in each squad in charge for the time being.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span class="sc">Issue Of Equipment</span>:</p>
+
+<p>(a) The articles of camp equipment, bedding and poncho should be
+issued as soon as practicable. These are necessary for the immediate
+comfort of the men.</p>
+
+<p>(b) Hold the articles of personal equipment for issue later on. Do not
+dump the entire equipment on a man all at once. There is nine-tenths
+of it that he knows nothing about. He does not know what it is for. As
+the training progresses you can issue it to him, an article or two at
+a time until he has finally gotten all of it. Before issuing an
+article, explain at a company formation, what it is for, the purpose
+it serves and where it is carried.</p>
+
+<p>(c) Uniforms and clothing should be procured as soon as practicable.
+The commanding officer will indicate whether or not the clothing will
+be requisitioned for in bulk or on individual clothing slips. The
+supply officer will provide a quartermaster publication which <a name="Page_248" id="Page_248"></a>shows
+the sizes of clothing by the numbers. Seek out a couple of tailors in
+the company, have them measure the men and make a record of the sizes
+of clothing that they require. Shoes will have to be fitted to each
+man. Make them large enough. The average recruit will want to wear a
+shoe at least one size too small for him. When he gets the pack on and
+drags it around all day his feet will swell and fill his small shoes
+to the bursting point. Do not let the men decide what size shoes they
+will wear; you decide it for them and make them plenty big. This work
+of measuring the men can be started right out the first day. The
+captain that gets in his requisition first, properly made out, will be
+the first to get his clothing.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span class="sc">Organization</span>:</p>
+
+<p>(a) As soon as practicable get the company organized into permanent
+squads. Try out squad leaders for a few days. You will soon be able to
+select the men that you will want for non-commissioned officers. Be
+careful in their selection so that you will not have to make many
+changes. Don't be in too much of a hurry about making sergeants; try
+them out as corporals first. Try to get a good man and start him in as
+mess sergeant. A man with hotel experience, especially the kitchen and
+dining room end of the business, give him a trial. Your lieutenant in
+charge of the mess can tell in a day or two how he stacks up. Make it
+plain that the men detailed from day to day are merely acting
+non-commissioned officers and that you are merely placing them in
+charge to give them an opportunity to demonstrate their ability. It's
+better to work this proposition out in a systematic manner than it is
+to jump in and make a lot of non-commissioned officers that you will
+have to break later on to make way for better men.</p>
+
+<p>Give your acting non-commissioned officers all the responsibility you
+can. Assign tasks with their squads and see how they get away with it.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249"></a>(b) At one of the first formations explain the rules of camp
+sanitation and personal cleanliness and the necessity for their strict
+observance.</p>
+
+<p>(c) Start right out with a system of rigid inspections so that the men
+will acquire habits of cleanliness and tidiness of their surroundings.
+Once this is acquired it is easily maintained. The reverse of this
+statement is equally true. Let a company get started in a slovenly,
+untidy manner and it is difficult to get it back on the right track
+again.</p>
+
+<p>(d) As soon as uniforms are issued have every man dispose of his
+civilian clothing, dress suit cases, trunks, etc. There is no place
+for them in the cantonments or tents. Strip right down to uniforms and
+allow no civilian clothing around.</p>
+
+<p>(e) Before issuing rifles provide places for their safe keeping in
+cantonments. If wooden trunks are used, a wire staple driven into the
+upright of the bed at the height of the slacking swivel forms an
+excellent support; simply hook the slacking swivel into the staple.</p>
+
+<p>(f) Get every man interested in the company. Be personally interested
+in every man yourself. Do not permit any swearing at the men or around
+the barracks. Explain the idea of military courtesy and the salute and
+insist on its being carried out at all times. By doing all of these
+things and systematizing your work of training and instruction right
+from the start you lay the foundation for a &quot;good company.&quot; Fifteen
+good companies make a &quot;good regiment&quot; and so on up to the division,
+and that's what we want &quot;good divisions&quot;&mdash;the basis of which lies in
+the &quot;good company&quot; which you are going to command.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Day's
+Routine</span>.&mdash;The day's routine will soon develop and cannot be a
+stereotyped thing. It will be determined to a large extent by local
+conditions. But in <a name="Page_250" id="Page_250"></a>all training camps some such model as the
+following will no doubt be followed:</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Reveille</span>:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call, 5.30 a.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">March, 5.40 a.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 5.45 a.m.</span></p>
+
+<p>At first call the non-commissioned officer in charge of quarters, or
+some other charged with that duty, will go through the barracks and
+awaken the men. After a short time this may be dispensed with.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Mess</span>:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call (followed by mess call), 5.55 a.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 6.00 a.m.</span></p>
+
+<p>Allow the men approximately 20 minutes for breakfast and the privilege
+of returning individually&mdash;this for purposes of attending to the calls
+of nature.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Sick Call</span>,
+6.30 a.m.&mdash;Have the non-commissioned officer in charge of
+quarters put through this call; the sick will report to the orderly
+room, be entered on the sick report and marched to the hospital by the
+same non-commissioned officer. All men answering sick call should be
+questioned as to the nature of their trouble and its cause; men who
+are trying to dodge work should be caught up with. Care should be
+exercised in making out the sick report; be careful what you put on it
+and where you put it. The sick report will be treated further under
+&quot;Paper Work.&quot;</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Morning Instruction</span>:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call, 6.50 a.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 7.00 a.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Recall, 12.00 m.</span></p>
+
+<p>Utilize this time according to the schedule laid down by higher
+authorities. It will no doubt be insisted that the schedule be closely
+adhered to; but this can be done without completely destroying
+individual initiative.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Mess</span>:<a name="Page_251" id="Page_251"></a><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call (followed by mess call), 12.10 p.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 12.15 p.m.</span></p>
+
+<p>Allow 30 minutes for noon mess. The men may not consume it all; but
+judgment must be used in this matter. After mess have the company
+formed and marched back to barracks. This plan should be followed for
+a time, at least, particularly with &quot;green&quot; men purely for
+disciplinary purposes.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Afternoon Instruction</span>:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call, 1.20 p.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 1.30 p.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Recall, 4,30 p.m.</span></p>
+
+<p>Same general procedure as for morning work.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Sick Call</span>,
+4.45 p.m.&mdash;When the sick report is sent to the hospital in
+the afternoon, it is customary to make a new entry for all men who are
+in the hospital. In this way a running account is kept and quickly
+referred to without running all through the book.</p>
+
+<p>The time from recall to retreat at 5.30 or thereabouts can usually be
+used to advantage in cleaning up and getting ready for this ceremony.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Retreat</span>.&mdash;(Formal&mdash;on
+the parade grounds).<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call, 5.30 p.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 5.35 p.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Retreat, 5.50 p.m.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Mess</span>:<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">First call, followed by mess call, 6.00 p.m.</span><br />
+<span style="margin-left: 2.5em;">Assembly, 6.05 p.m.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">School Call</span> (except Saturdays), 7.00 p.m.</p>
+<p><span class="sc">Tattoo</span>, 9.00 p.m.</p>
+<p><span class="sc">Call To Quarters</span>, 9.30 p.m.</p>
+<p><span class="sc">Taps</span>, 9.45 p.m.</p>
+
+<p>At taps lights should be out and absolute quiet should prevail. This
+rule should be insisted upon from the very beginning of the training
+period. A check roll call is often taken at taps and the company
+reported <a name="Page_252" id="Page_252"></a>to the Officer of the Day. Likewise, the company is reported
+to the Officer of the Day at reveille, retreat and mess formations;
+however, these things are determined entirely by local conditions.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Sundays And Holidays</span>.&mdash;Calls are &frac12; hour later, except retreat,
+tattoo, call to quarters and taps. In case an entertainment is given
+on the post, taps usually follow its close by a half hour.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Details</span> for any
+day should be published at retreat formation the day
+previous; bulletins and notices should also be published to the
+company at this formation.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Paper Work</span>.&mdash;Paper
+work in the Army is generally viewed askance. A
+certain amount of it is absolutely necessary, but the amount can be
+reduced by careful attention to the way in which the work is done. A
+good first sergeant and a good company clerk will take a load of
+trouble off the shoulders of the company commander in this respect;
+but usually these men must be trained. Instructions on the blank forms
+should be carefully read the first time a certain paper is made out.
+Attend to all paper work promptly and make a note of anything that
+cannot be handled immediately. Do not let anything get into the
+company files until it has been O.K'd. by the company commander or
+initialed by the officers. Have a basket for the company commander and
+one for the other officers where they may expect to find matters that
+are of interest to them. Get reports, requisitions and other papers in
+on time. Do not wait until they are called for. Establish a daily, as
+well as a monthly, system of doing things in the orderly room and then
+stick to it as nearly as possible. Have a file for:</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>General orders, post and W.D.</li>
+<li>Special orders.</li>
+<li>Memorandums, bulletins and notices may be included under this
+ head.</li>
+<li>Company orders.</li>
+<li>Document file (copies of letters, etc.).</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253"></a>The needs for files will be determined largely by local conditions.
+The point is to have things where they can be found readily under an
+appropriate heading; and to have them accessible to others besides the
+company clerk. Keep a copy of everything, as nearly as possible, but
+do not clutter up your company files with unimportant items. Keep your
+orderly room looking as neat as possible.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Military Correspondence</span>.&mdash;A
+very important feature of Army Paper Work.
+Neatness, brevity and clarity are to be sought&mdash;ceremonial forms are
+avoided.</p>
+
+<p>References to Army Regulations: Paragraphs 225, 512, 776, 778, 779,
+780, 786, 789, 790, 822 (g.o. 23 w.d.).</p>
+
+<p>A letter consists of three parts; heading, body and signature. The
+heading consists of designation of the command, place and date, all
+placed in the upper right-hand corner. At the left, and with a margin
+of about an inch, should be:</p>
+
+<div>
+<span style="margin-left: 1.5em;">From:</span><br />
+<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1.5em;">To:</span><br />
+<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Subject:</span><br />
+</div>
+<br />
+
+<p>A double space should be left between these lines.</p>
+
+<p>The body should be divided into numbered paragraphs, each paragraph
+treating of but one topic. The lines should be single-spaced, but a
+double space should be left between the paragraphs. The signature
+should be made without any unnecessary forms.</p>
+
+<p>Any good treatise on this subject will show the proper forms for a
+military letter.</p>
+
+<p>Indorsements follow the signature in succession on the same page or on
+added pages. They are very brief, follow a prescribed form and, if
+necessary, are paragraphed in the same way as the letter. Letters
+should <a name="Page_254" id="Page_254"></a>be made in three, four, five or six copies, according to
+destination. They should always be handled through military channels;
+time will be lost if you try to dodge it.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Morning Report</span>.&mdash;This
+is a complete record of daily events and should
+be kept with great care. It is submitted daily to the proper
+authority, checked and returned. Any standard work on this subject
+will show the proper method of making entries. Be sure to make entry
+of all events affecting your company, its numbers or condition. If
+there is no change, say so.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Ration Return</span>.&mdash;This
+form is made out in duplicate for periods of from
+10 days to a month. In case men join the company after the ration
+return has been submitted for a given period, one ration for each man
+for each day from date of joining to date of submitting next return,
+may be drawn on the next return. The same plan is followed in making
+deductions for men in the hospital or absent from the company. For
+ration allowances see a.r. 1202-1252.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Sick Report</span>.&mdash;A
+commissioned officer of the company and the medical
+officer sign on one line following the last entry for the occasion.
+Neither may encroach on the territory of the other and both enter
+their opinions as to whether the sickness is in line of duty. No
+erasures are allowed.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Duty Roster</span>.&mdash;For
+any roster the key word should be &quot;equality of all
+duties.&quot; It means the difference between contentment and
+dissatisfaction among your men. Keep an exact list of men available
+for every duty and detail them in exact rotation; adjust to complete
+satisfaction any little differences that arise. Let the men know that
+you want to give them a square deal and they will respond. The longest
+man off duty is the first man to be called. In the regular service the
+roster covers guard duty and other duties, notably kitchen, police and
+other fatigue work.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255"></a><span class="sc">Monthly
+Return</span>.&mdash;The form is self explanatory. Read the instructions
+on the blanks before filling them in. By keeping in the company a
+record of events you can easily fill out the return properly when the
+time comes.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Service
+Record</span>.&mdash;References in Army Regulations: Paragraphs 115, 118,
+124, 135, 138, 938, 1337, 1361, 1451, 1535. Article 16.</p>
+
+<p>The service record is a complete personal history of the soldier and
+follows him wherever he goes. It contains: a descriptive list, report
+of assignment, record of prior service, current enlistment, military
+record, record of allotments, clothing account and settlement,
+deposits, indorsements (this latter to give reasons for change of
+status or station of the soldier).</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Discharge</span>.&mdash;Discharges
+are of three kinds: honorable, dishonorable and
+plain discharge. The first is on a white sheet and entitles the
+soldier to re-enlist; the second is on a yellow sheet and is given
+following sentence of a general court-martial; the third is on a blue
+sheet and is given on account of physical disability&mdash;it does not
+entitle the soldier to re-enlist.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Final Statement</span>,
+a.r., Art. 21.&mdash;The final statement is issued to
+every enlisted man upon his discharge unless he has forfeited all pay
+and allowances and has no deposits due him.</p>
+
+<p>The final statement is not to be prepared on the type-writer. Money
+amounts shall be written in both figures and words. The final
+statement should show the amount due the soldier for: additional pay;
+clothing; deposits; pay detained; miscellaneous causes. It also should
+show the amounts due the United States by the soldier for various
+reasons. In addition it should also state the period covered by the
+last pay of the soldier.</p>
+
+<p>Officers signing and certifying to the various entries are
+responsible.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Muster Roll</span>
+a.r. <span class="sc">Article</span>
+42.&mdash;The muster roll is made bi-monthly and
+great care should be taken <a name="Page_256" id="Page_256"></a>in its preparation to make it both correct
+and complete. All officers and enlisted men are taken up on the muster
+roll from the date of receipt of notice of assignment. The following
+are entered on the rolls:</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Commissioned officers belonging to the organization, in order of
+rank.</li>
+<li>Commissioned officers attached to the organization, in order of
+rank.</li>
+<li>Non-commissioned officers in order of grade.</li>
+<li>All others except musicians and privates, alphabetically arranged
+in order of grade.</li>
+<li>Musicians.</li>
+<li>Privates.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>All names, except those entered by rank, are entered in alphabetical
+order with the last name first.</p>
+
+<p>The names of enlisted men attached to the company are borne on a
+detachment roll. This is not true of officers attached to an
+organization, however.</p>
+
+<p>Remarks should be entered according to the model which can be obtained
+from the Adjutant General's Office.</p>
+
+<p>All changes should be noted which affect the status of the soldier. An
+excellent idea for retaining this data is to keep a separate card for
+each man and to enter thereon anything that affects his status.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Pay Roll</span>.
+a.r. 1315-1383.&mdash;The pay roll is made out monthly in
+triplicate, one copy being retained and two copies being sent to the
+Quartermaster. On the pay roll there are four certificates to be
+signed:</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>The commander of the organization examines the roll carefully and
+certifies that all entries are correct.</li>
+<li>The inspecting and mustering officer signs certifying that all are
+present or accounted for&mdash;or notes exceptions.</li>
+<li>The commanding officer witnesses the payment of each man and
+certifies to that effect.</li>
+<li>The commanding officer certifies that the duplicate and triplicate
+are exact copies of the original.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257"></a><span class="sc">Names</span>.&mdash;The
+last name is entered first; <i>e.g.</i>, Smith, John A. But the
+soldier signs as follows: John A. Smith.</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Losses</span>.&mdash;The
+losses should follow immediately on the next line after
+the last entry. They include those by reason of: Discharge, transfer,
+retirement, desertion and the fact that the man has been dropped.</p>
+
+<p>Each officer should check his knowledge and be sure that he knows the
+purpose of, and is familiar with the following papers: (References are
+to Army Regulations and to Adjutant and Quartermaster forms.)</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Morning Report (a.r. 280).</li>
+<li>Daily Sick Report (a.r. 280), (339 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Duty Roster (a.r. 282), (339 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Company Fund Book (a.r. 280), (452 q.m.c.).</li>
+<li>Delinquency Record (a.r. 280), (509 q.m.c.).</li>
+<li>Property Responsibility:<br />
+ &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Quartermaster (a.r. 280), (501cc q.m.c.).<br />
+ &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ordnance (a.r. 280), (501c q.m.c.).</li>
+<li>Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account (a.r.
+ 280), (29 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Memorandum Receipts (a.r. 281), (448 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts (par. 1, g.o., 6, 1916),
+ (448b a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Summary Court Records (a.r. 9570), (594 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Statement of Clothing charged to Enlisted man (165b q.m.c.).</li>
+<li>Abstract of Clothing (180 q.m.c.).</li>
+<li>Company Target Records (307 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Individual Clothing Slips (165 q.m.c.).</li>
+<li>Files of Orders (a.r. 280).</li>
+<li>Correspondence Book with Index (a.r. 280).</li>
+<li>Document File.</li>
+<li>Record of Rifles (p. 14, Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1965).</li>
+<li>Record of Sizes of Clothing (g.o. 48, 1911).</li>
+<li><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258"></a>Company Return (a.r. 811), (30 a.g.o.).</li>
+<li>Muster Roll (a.g. 807).</li>
+<li>Returns (a.g. 811).</li>
+<li>Return of Casualties.</li>
+<li>Pay Roll (366 q.m.c.).</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>As well as numerous other forms for special occasions which are not
+here listed.</p>
+
+<p>Except for the morning report, sick report, duty roster,
+correspondence book and various files, practically all the
+afore-mentioned records are now kept at regimental headquarters
+instead of in the company orderly room.</p>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_14" id="CHAPTER_14"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259"></a>CHAPTER 14.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Conferences.</h3>
+
+<p class="cen">(Time&mdash;2 hours each day in afternoon.)</p>
+<br />
+
+<p>1. Know your subject and be thoroughly prepared.</p>
+
+<p>2. Have an outline to refer to, showing main points you wish to cover.</p>
+
+<p>3. Do not allow a man to give an entire chapter in reply to a
+question. Make your questions short and specific&mdash;and require answers
+to be the same.</p>
+
+<p>4. Get every man on his feet at least once every day.</p>
+
+<p>5. Have a laugh every little while&mdash;keep the men awake.</p>
+
+<p>6. Vary your system of calling on men so that no one will know when he
+is likely to be called on.</p>
+
+<p>7. Avoid reading to the men.</p>
+
+<p>8. Require men to put things on the blackboard when possible.</p>
+
+<p>9. In case of a conference for which no time has been given for
+preparation, use all possible schemes to get the points home without
+having either a lecture or a study period. Allot&mdash;a definite time and
+require definite results&mdash;<i>e.g.</i>, allow 10 minutes for a rough map
+showing the placing of a picket&mdash;15 minutes for an outline of a
+certain chapter, etc.</p>
+
+<p>10. Never forget that there are 2 sides to every conference&mdash;what you
+plan to give and what you plan to get. You must test the men to see
+how well they know the work but you must also make sure that every man
+knows it when he goes out even if he didn't when he came in.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%"><b>Study</b>.</p>
+
+<p>The study period usually comes after a full day in the open, and the
+warm air and artificial light soon <a name="Page_260" id="Page_260"></a>make the most ardent soldier doze
+off into cat-naps. Something must be done to counteract these
+influences and keep the men on the job. The terror of the next day's
+conference will not do it, as that time seems safely distant, with all
+night ahead.</p>
+
+<p>Assign the men three to five questions on the work to be studied,
+which will be asked in conference and which require a pretty general
+knowledge of the subject. Every man will then have a definite
+objective and a certain minimum of attainment for the evening. Or
+reverse the process and let each of the class write several questions
+about what they have studied. The following day let these questions,
+with the names of the men who asked them, be read before the class and
+answered. The effect of reading the name of the writer is to insure
+careful preparation of the question and study of the subject. A good
+question can hardly be asked without a basis of knowledge, and a
+foolish question condemns its author.</p>
+
+<p>Another plan is to let the men, whenever possible, instruct the class.
+Announce that any man may be called upon to take charge, and the
+uncertainty will keep everyone studying. This plan will also give the
+men valuable practice in teaching others. Their periods of
+instruction, of course, must be limited, and unsatisfactory parts of
+their work reviewed before the conference is dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>Another way to stimulate study is to have a short discussion, talk or
+quiz just before the close of the study hour, when the men, if left to
+themselves, will incline to look at their watches more often than at
+their books. A brief explanation of the work assigned, with emphasis
+upon a few especially important points, makes good use of this closing
+time, especially when the men are required to write down the points
+emphasized.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<a name="Page_261" id="Page_261"></a><b>Syllabus: Small Problems for Infantry.</b></p>
+
+<p class="cen">(References, f.s.r., p. 26-30, 33-39.)</p>
+
+<p>First Problem: Advance Guard and Point:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;Small patrol sent ahead from advance
+party for disclosing enemy's position and strength, in time for
+larger bodies to make suitable defensive and offensive dispositions.
+Function primarily warning; but to give specific information, it may
+have to fight and thus feel enemy out.</li>
+
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Formed zig-zag; distance from advance party =?</li>
+<li>Controlled by leader of advance party.</li>
+<li>Speed must be great enough not to impede the main column.
+ Must not halt at first sign of enemy, nor go off on a flank.</li>
+<li>Interest and co-operation of inferiors, by adequate
+ explanation of situation and of individual duties
+ (&quot;repeats&quot;).</li>
+<li>Rules for estimating numerical strength of the moving body of
+ troops (cf., f.s.r., sec. 27).</li>
+<li>Point as a &quot;march outpost&quot; (=?) when the column is halted.
+ Only then may the A.G. point make any lateral arrangement of
+ its members (cf. 3 above).</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Second Problem: Advance Guard Connecting File, cf., f.s.r., reference
+above:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;Two men (usually) for liaison en
+route where elements too widely separated or roads too curved and
+wooded. Distance 200 to 5 yards apart.</li>
+
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Constant touch with elements before and behind.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262"></a>Relay both ways messages sent to or from remoter parts of the
+ column. Speed and accuracy of signaling.</li>
+<li>Guide to be forward in daytime, at night on the main body.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Third Problem: Advance Guard Flank Patrol, pp. 31-32:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;For protecting a marching column from
+attack, by warning it on the basis of information gained in
+reconnaissance. Interval between men depends on circumstances.</li>
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Start from near head of the column, <i>i.e.</i>, from smallest
+ element in the advance guard that can afford to cut down its
+ numbers.</li>
+<li>Speed rather than safety, to keep abreast of own column and
+ to force the enemy to disclose himself by firing on F.P.
+ rather than on main body.</li>
+<li>Sent to investigate suspicious areas, <i>e.g.</i> in woods, behind
+ houses.</li>
+<li>Action in case of firing on main body; advance and
+ counterfire, deployed.</li>
+<li>Get-away man in rear of column.</li>
+<li><i>Stick to the job</i>: no wandering or chasing of enemy beyond
+ range of column. Job is to warn and protect against flank
+ attack.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+
+<p>Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function: <br />
+Body of infantry, amounting to 1/8 to 1/2; the Support
+ (depending on the number of cavalry ahead) cf., f.s.r., p.
+ 28.<br />
+<a name="Page_263" id="Page_263"></a>Duty.&mdash;To back up the point and the advance cavalry (if any) if
+ fired upon; remove enemy bodies and other obstacles.</li>
+
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Describe general mission to inferiors.</li>
+<li>Explain individual duties to inferiors.</li>
+<li>Send out point and connecting files.</li>
+<li>Form in platoon; zig-zag.</li>
+<li>Keep going; prosecute engagements briskly, not to delay main
+ column.</li>
+<li>Procedure under fire: deploys and drops, when fired upon;
+ looks for enemy's direction and assigns target and range.
+ Advance under cover if any, when fire light; when heavy seek
+ to divert fire to you away from main body of advance guard to
+ facilitate latter's disposition for advance to your support.<br />
+ Seek to drive off a weaker enemy, and to hold off a stronger.</li>
+<li>Speedy decisions. Value of imaginary situations, while on the
+ march; and planning your commands.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Fifth Problem: Combat Patrol:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;Contrasted with covering detachment,
+which is large enough to offer considerable resistance, the combat
+patrol is primarily to <i>Warn</i>, especially against flank attacks. Size
+varies widely because of looseness in definition, <i>e.g.</i>, 100 men
+might be <i>covering detachment</i> for a regiment, but a combat patrol
+for a brigade.</li>
+
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Comparison of thin line versus thin column, regarding: (a)
+ vulnerability, (b) fatigue, (c) tactical advantage, when
+ <a name="Page_264" id="Page_264"></a>engagement materializes, (e) control of movement and of
+ fire.</li>
+<li>Agent between advance and main body.</li>
+<li>Attack any enemy of reasonable size that attacks main body.</li>
+<li>Corn as concealment versus corn as obstruction to sight.</li>
+<li>Vulnerability of charging cavalry.</li>
+<li>Lieutenant as tactical chief, sergeant as disciplinarian, in
+ a platoon; except when?</li>
+<li>Messages concise, not ambiguous, written versus oral?
+ Repeats.</li>
+<li>Limitations of use of map. Vegetation changes; errors in
+ contouring.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+
+<p>Sixth Problem and Seventh Problem: Two Pickets:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;Outpost contrasted with advance guard
+in that former is stationed around a camp or bivouac, while latter
+precedes a marching column. To check enemy attempting to attack main
+body, and hold him till larger force is able to deploy. Consists of
+outpost reserve, outpost line of supports, line of outguards
+(pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts), plus sentinels, patrols,
+etc.<br />
+Picket ordinarily merely warns of an attack, but may offer
+resistance.</li>
+
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Smooth posting of outpost very desirable; influence of delay
+ on spirits of men, after day's march.</li>
+<li>Outpost support sends out pickets.</li>
+<li>Picket sends out sentry squads, cossack posts, sentinels,
+ etc.</li>
+<li>Provisional dispositions by leaders of outguard elements;
+ importance of good sketch; intrenchments?</li>
+<li><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265"></a>Confirmation and alteration by higher officers; especially
+ changes at night regarding layout and manning. Fire
+ ineffective at night except at short ranges.</li>
+<li>6. Roster = ?</li>
+<li>Instructions regarding enemy's position and strength, and the
+ friendly outguards to right and left.</li>
+<li>Mode of numbering elements (from right to right). Arrangement
+ for smooth withdrawal of each element upon stronger one.</li>
+<li>Disposition of strangers; use for information.</li>
+<li>Need of explicit arrangements in case of attack in day or
+ night.</li>
+<li>Sleep near arms.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Eighth Problem&mdash;Cossack Post and Sentry Squad:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Cossack Post: 4 men in charge of a corporal (usually)
+ primarily to observe and warn; secondarily to keep
+ concealed, and intercept strangers who might be useful to
+ enemy or to us.</li>
+<li>Sentry Squad: 8 men in charge of a corporal. Duties similar
+ but strength is greater. Posts double sentinel.</li>
+<li>Post important enough for a cossack post is often doubled
+ into a sentry squad at night.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+
+<li>Principles:
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Opportunity to &quot;pick off&quot; enemies ought to be ignored until
+ position of c.p. or s.s. or of its supporting body has
+ unquestionably been learned by enemy. Then fire away.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266"></a><i>Stop</i> enemy's patrolling. Is as important as to <i>force</i> your
+ own observation.</li>
+<li>Advantages of s.s. over c.p. for night work: (a) strength,
+ (b) sureness, (c) adequacy of observation before firing
+ alarm.</li>
+<li>Use of prisoners, and papers on dead bodies.</li>
+<li>Value of imagining yourself in position of enemy commander in
+ deciding what enemy dispositions you will combat him with.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Ninth Problem: Reconnoitering Patrol:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;Gather information in the field. No
+resistance unless compelled. Concealment and flight rather than
+resistance by fire: opposite of &quot;covering detachment.&quot;</li>
+<li>Principles.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Judgment in deciding what equipment is appropriate to the
+ particular patrol.</li>
+<li>Sketch copies; contours as guides for concealed route.</li>
+<li>Fight only in self defence.</li>
+<li>How to question hidden sentinel without disclosing his
+ position to enemy.</li>
+<li>Judicious choice of cover in approaching destination.</li>
+<li>Dating and placing of messages.</li>
+<li>Rate of passage of troops: &quot;Rule of 2-2-2.&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Tenth Problem&mdash;Visiting Patrol:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function:<br />
+
+Two men or more sent from supports and pickets liaison between
+ adjoining <a name="Page_267" id="Page_267"></a>outguards. More useful at night, because of
+ reduced visibility of terrain between outguards.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Inform the sending body of conditions at sentinel posts.</li>
+<li>Prevent enemy from penetrating lines between posts.</li>
+<li>Exchange information between adjoining posts.</li>
+<li>Take back captured strangers to commander.</li>
+<li>Reenforce feeling of mutual support among the isolated
+ sentinels.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li>B. Principles.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Keen sight and hearing; silence.</li>
+<li>Need of signals. Both countersign and check&mdash;countersign.</li>
+<li>Equipment; nothing that rattles or glistens.</li>
+<li>Disposition: leader in front, because of need for quick
+ decision.</li>
+<li>Distance not over two miles even in most open country.</li>
+<li>Danger of startling a friend sentinel by unwarned approach.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Eleventh Problem&mdash;Detached Post:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;Posted where connection cannot be
+easily maintained with other elements of outpost. Sent usually by
+outpost reserve or by main body, and retires to them, rather than to
+the line of supports. Function same as element of outpost
+proper,&mdash;<i>observation, resistance, reconnaissance</i>; but less
+resistance than <i>warning</i>. May be as small as 2 men, or as large as a
+support, depending on location and importance of detached position. </li>
+<li>Principles.<a name="Page_268" id="Page_268"></a>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Established under precautions, because of danger of enemy
+ breaking between the main body and the detached post.</li>
+<li>Entrenchment: what time of day? What other circumstances?
+ Treatment of bridges? Night?</li>
+<li>Requisitioning order: Need of payment; for justice, for
+ military advantage later (reassure farmers through whose
+ territory you will need to pass and keep supplied).</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Twelfth Problem&mdash;Requisitioning Detachment or Patrol:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;A patrol may have any mission: here
+it is sent to take (on payment) the provender designated. A.r.d. sent
+by commander with specific instructions, is legal; a raid for booty
+illegal. (See f.s.r., sec, 290.)</li>
+<li>Principles.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Preparation essential.</li>
+<li>Sending of men singly or in pairs across open spaces.</li>
+<li>Deliberate start on <i>wrong</i> road to deceive enemy scouts.</li>
+<li>Not to fire unless obliged,&mdash;until return trip.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Thirteenth Problem&mdash;A Contact Patrol:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: upper-alpha">
+<li>Definition and Function.&mdash;A small patrol sent out from a
+stationary body of troops, usually at night, to find out whether
+enemy is starting a retreat. (Compact formation in column.)</li>
+<li>Principles.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Travel light, but prepare to spend some time lying still.</li>
+<li>Route rear and parallel to a road, but not on it.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269"></a>Do not attack enemy patrols unless necessary.</li>
+<li>Get through enemy line of observation and watch support or
+ larger body.</li>
+<li>Return together when you have definite information. Do not
+ send single messengers.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<p>Fourteenth Problem.&mdash;A Small Outguard:</p>
+
+<p>The principles used in 14 are same as those listed under 1-13; and
+should be clinched by assigning yourself the problem of completely
+arranging an outpost for a brigade to be encamped or bivouacked at
+some assigned position on the Hunter's Town sheet. Exchange
+solutions, for mutual criticism.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%"><b>Examinations.</b></p>
+
+<p>The following examinations, given at the second Plattsburg Training
+Camp, will enable students of military matters to form some idea as to
+where they stand in their grasp of the subject:</p>
+
+<p>Plattsburg Training Camp:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Explain the &quot;Position of the Soldier.&quot; (Par. 51, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Being at parade rest, explain position of right foot. (Par. 53,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain the &quot;Hand Salute.&quot; (Par. 58, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li> (1) &nbsp;&nbsp; Give length of full step (a) in quick time, (b) in double time.<br />
+(2) &nbsp;&nbsp; How is the full step measured? (Par. 60, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain &quot;Halt&quot; from quick time. (Par. 70, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain position of butt of rifle at &quot;Order Arms&quot; standing.
+ (Par. 77, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain position of left forearm at present arms. (Par. 78,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270"></a>At parade rest under arms (rifle), explain position of left
+ hand. (Par. 90, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>The squad being in line explain &quot;Squad Right.&quot; (Par. 119,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>The company in line, give commands and explain &quot;To dismiss the
+company.&quot; (Par. 174, i.d.r.)</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;' />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Being in any formation assembled, give commands and explain
+ movements for deploying the squad as skirmishers. (Par. 124,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>When deployed as skirmishers (a) How do the men march? (b) How
+ are the pieces carried? (c) Who is the guide? (d) What is the
+ normal interval between skirmishers? (e) What is the length of
+ the front of the squad when deployed at normal intervals? (Par.
+ 124, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>In what formations are the loadings executed? (Par. 133, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, what does
+ each squad leader do? (Par. 200, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>In what direction does a deployed line face on halting? (Par.
+ 203.)</li>
+<li>Being in skirmish line, explain the movement &quot;Platoon columns.&quot;
+ March. (Par. 213, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>What is the purpose of the advance in a succession of thin
+ lines? (Par. 219, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Name three classes of fire. Which class is normally employed in
+ action? (Par. 241-2-3, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Why is it necessary to have proper distribution of fire? (Par.
+ 246, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain briefly the functions of platoon leaders, platoon
+ guides and squad leaders in the fire fight. (Par. 252, i.d.r.)</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;' />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Explain the position of parade rest (without arms). (Par. 53,<a name="Page_271" id="Page_271"></a>
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Being in the position of the soldier, explain the position of
+ the heels, feet and knees. (Par. 51, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Give the commands for and explain the execution of &quot;Right Face.&quot;</li>
+<li>Being at a halt, give the commands for moving forward in quick
+ time and explain the execution thereof. (Par. 62, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Being in march in quick time, give the commands necessary
+ to march in double time and explain the execution thereof,
+ (Par. 63, i.d.r.) <br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; What is the length of step and the rate of steps per minute
+ in double time? (Par. 60, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>At &quot;Right Shoulder Arms&quot;:<br />
+
+(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Explain the position of the trigger guard. (Par. 83,
+ i.d.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; What is the position of the barrel? (Par. 88, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>In the rifle salute (right shoulder arms), describe the
+ position of the:<br />
+
+(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Left forearm on first count, (Par. 93, i.d.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; Left hand on first count. (Par. 93, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain the position of the left forearm on the second count of
+ right shoulder arms from order arms. (Par. 83, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>The squad being in line explain &quot;Squad right about.&quot; (Par. 121,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain the execution of &quot;Right by Squads,&quot; 2 March. (Par. 183,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;' />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>What are the two general classes of military information? (Par.<a name="Page_272" id="Page_272"></a>
+ 9, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>What do you understand by the term &quot;reconnaissance?&quot; (Par. 11,
+ f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Name the various kinds of patrols. (Note to Par. 23,
+ f.s.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; What are the advantages of small patrols over strong
+ patrols? (Par. 24, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>What governs the formation adopted by the patrol? (Par. 26,
+ f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>What is a field message? (Par. 32, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; What is the function of an advance guard? (Par. 40, f.s.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; What of a flank guard? (Par. 53, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; What is an outpost? (Par. 60, f.s.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; How are the outguards classified? (Par. 64, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>Define a successful march. (Par. 96, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>What rules govern the halts of a column of troops on the march?
+ (Par. 102, f.s.r.)</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; From a certain point off the road you observe a column of
+ troops marching on the road. You can distinguish that these
+ troops are infantry in column of squads. It requires 20
+ minutes for them to pass a given point. How much infantry
+ is in the column? (Par. 27, f.s.r.)<br />
+
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; The day is still, no wind blowing, further to the rear you
+ can see a broken cloud of dust extending in prolongation of
+ the road but cannot see the cause. What does this indicate?
+ (Par. 27, f.s.r.)</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;' />
+
+<p>Harvard College. School of the Soldier:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Define depth, distance, interval, front, base, point of rest,
+ deployment, pace. (i.d.r. definitions.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273"></a>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; What is the guide of the leading subdivision, in column of
+ subdivisions, charged with? (Par. 20, i.d.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; What is the guide of the subdivisions in rear charged with?
+ (Par. 20, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>What are orders, commands and signals. (Par. 31, 37, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Describe position of the soldier or attention (without arms.)
+ (i.d.r. 51.)</li>
+<li>What are the rests? Describe each. (Par. 52, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Describe about face. (Par. 57, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Being at a halt, or marching in quick time, to march in
+ double time. Describe commands and how executed. (Par. 63,
+ i.d.r.)<br />
+
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; Marching in double time, to resume quick time. Describe
+ commands and how executed. (Par. 64, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>What are the rules that govern the carrying of the piece? (Par.
+ 75, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>What general rules govern the execution of the manual of arms?
+ (Par. 76, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Give the rate per minute and length of the half step and full
+ step in quick and double time. (Par. 60, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>What are the arm signals for: Column left, march; halt; as
+ skirmishers, march; assemble, march; suspend firing; range, 250
+ yards; fix bayonets. (Par. 43, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain the execution of the command &quot;Right Dress.&quot; (Par. 107,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;' />
+
+<p>School of the Squad:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>To suspend firing: Give the commands and describe execution.
+ Same, to cease firing. (Par. 149-150, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274"></a>Describe in detail the execution of &quot;Squads Right.&quot; (Par. 119,
+ i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Give the commands and explain execution for taking intervals.
+ How does it differ from taking distances? (Pars. 109, 110, 111,
+ 112, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Describe in detail &quot;Right oblique, March.&quot; (Par. 116, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Explain the use of &quot;In place, Halt.&quot; (Par. 14, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>When can the following commands be used: Resume March. (Par. 14,
+ i.d.r.) Oblique March. (Par. 117, i.d.r.) By the right flank,
+ March. (Par. 71, i.d.r.) Take Arms. (Par. 114, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Describe by what commands and in what manner a squad is formed.</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements
+ for turning on a moving pivot.<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements
+ for turning on a fixed pivot.</li>
+<li>Being in any formation, assembled, give the commands and
+ describe the movements for deploying as skirmishers.</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 25%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;' />
+
+<p>School of the Company:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 1em;">
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal">
+<li>Give the proper commands for the following movements:<br />
+
+(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Company being in line, to march to the front in column of
+ squads. (Par. 183, i.d.r.)<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; Company being in line, to form column of squads to the
+ flank. (Par. 178, i.d.r.)<br />
+(c) &nbsp;&nbsp; Company being in line, to form skirmish line. (Par. 206,
+ 200, 202, i.d.r.)<br />
+(d) &nbsp;&nbsp; <a name="Page_275" id="Page_275"></a>Company being in column of squads, to form line to the right
+ so the leading squad shall be on the right of the line.
+ (Par. 188, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Being in line, to align the company. Give the commands and
+ explain the movement. (Pars. 175, 107, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>The company having gone from line into column of squads by the
+ command: &quot;Squads right, March,&quot; state the position of the
+ captain, two lieutenants and right and left guides. (Pars. 163,
+ 168 and Plate II, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>Show by diagram: (a) A company of two platoons in column of
+ platoons, (b) A company of three platoons in line of platoons.
+ (Plate II, i.d.r.)</li>
+<li>What commands are given to form the company?</li>
+<li>(a) &nbsp;&nbsp; Who is the pivot in executing &quot;Company Left?&quot;<br />
+(b) &nbsp;&nbsp; Who is the pivot in executing &quot;Left Turn?&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Military Science and Tactics.</b></p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">
+Minor Tactics.</p>
+
+<p class="cen"><span class="sc" style="margin-bottom: 1em;">Map:
+Gettysburg&mdash;Antietam (Hunterstown Sheet).</span></p>
+
+<p>First Problem: An Advance Party&mdash;Situation I:</p>
+
+<p><i>Your battalion</i> and the <i>machine gun</i> company occupy <i>Center Mills</i>,
+in enemy's country. The remainder of the <i>Harvard Regiment</i> is
+encamped <i>two miles north of Center Mills</i>. The Battalion has an
+outguard <i>at J. Fohl, 1150 yards southeast</i> of Center Mills. <i>It is
+mid-winter;</i> there is <i>no snow</i>, but the <i>streams are frozen</i>.</p>
+
+<p>At 6.45 a.m., 1 Feb., 17, your battalion and the machine gun company
+are <i>hurriedly assembled, pieces are loaded</i>, and the column, <i>your
+company in the lead</i>, <a name="Page_276" id="Page_276"></a>is marched out of town, over the southeast
+road. Your captain calls the <i>officers and non-commissioned officers</i>
+to the head of the company and gives the following verbal order:</p>
+
+<p><i>A Blue force, estimated at one battalion with machine guns, is
+marching north from Granite Hill Sta. Blue patrols have been reported
+in vicinity of Henderson meeting house (700 yards north of
+Hunterstown). There are no Red troops south of here. Our battalion and
+the machine gun company are going to take up a position on the 712-707
+hills, which flank this road, about 3 miles south of here. This
+company will be the advance guard. The main body, which is the rest of
+our column, follows at 600 yards. Lieutenant Allen, your platoon (1st)
+and the second platoon will constitute the</i> <span class="sc">Advance
+Party</span>. <i>The third
+and fourth platoons will form the</i> <span class="sc">Support</span>,
+<i>and will follow the
+advance party at 300 yards. Here is a map for you. Follow this road
+(pointing and indicating on map) through J. Fohl&mdash;554-534&mdash;Bridge
+S.H., to crossroads 666, where you will halt and establish a</i>
+<span class="sc">March Outpost</span>.
+<i>I will be with the support. When we reach the outguard at J.
+Fohl the column will halt and the advance guard will move out. Posts.</i></p>
+
+<p>The column halts at the outguard. You are Lieutenant Allen.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>Your instructions, and dispositions in detail.</p>
+
+<p>Situation II:</p>
+
+<p>The <i>advance party</i> has just cleared roadfork 534 when it is fired
+upon from the woods along the stream about <i>500 yards southeast</i>.
+There are probably <i>20 rifles firing upon you</i>. The enemy's fire is
+well-directed. The <i>point</i> has crossed the first bridge, 300 yards
+south of 534. The <i>support</i> has halted; but is not under fire.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>Your instructions and dispositions.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277"></a>Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point&mdash;Situation I:</p>
+
+<p>The situation is the same as in the First Problem.</p>
+
+<p>You are the commander of the point.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>Your instructions and dispositions as the <i>point</i> clears the outguard.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>The <i>point</i> has just crossed the first bridge 300 yards southeast of
+534, when you hear firing and observe that the <i>advance party</i> is
+being fired upon from the woods directly east of you. A few moments
+later you note a few dismounted men crossing the island about 400
+yards to the east. The firing has ceased.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>Your instructions and dispositions.</p>
+
+<p>Situation III:</p>
+
+<p>The <i>advance guard</i> has resumed its march. When the point reaches
+Bridge S.H., it is fired upon from the woods 400 yards to the east.
+About ten cavalrymen are hurriedly mounting, others are already riding
+into the woods.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>Your instructions and dispositions.</p>
+
+<p>Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol&mdash;</p>
+
+<p>Situation:</p>
+
+<p>The situation is the same as in the <i>First Problem</i>, and follows
+<i>Situation III, Second Problem</i>.</p>
+
+<p>When the <i>advance party</i> is two hundred yards from the roadfork where
+unimproved road leads northeast, about 600 yards southeast of Bridge
+S.H., Lieutenant Allen gives the following instructions to Corporal
+Adams, 3d Squad:</p>
+
+<p><i>Corporal, about fifteen Blue cavalry have been driven back through
+those woods (pointing out woods to east). When we reach the roadfork
+in front of us take your squad and comb the woods until you reach
+southern <a name="Page_278" id="Page_278"></a>edge. From there go east until you observe the crossroads
+(616) which are about 1200 yards beyond. Return over first improved
+road running southwest to the crossroads (666) about 1-&frac12; miles south
+of here and just under the hilltop, where you will rejoin advance
+party.</i></p>
+
+<p>You are Corporal Adams.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>Your instructions, dispositions, and route of the patrol.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p class="cen"><span class="sc">Map Reading. Visibility Problems.</span></p>
+
+<p class="cen" style="margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<span class="sc">Map: Gettysburg&mdash;Antietam (Hunterstown Sheet</span>).</p>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Note</span>.&mdash;<i>Observation points 707 and 712 are the hills referred to in
+the First Problem under Minor Tactics.</i></p>
+
+<p><i>Where one point is invisible from another, state points of
+interference.</i></p>
+
+<p><i>Problem 1</i>. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see the roadfork 535
+(about 1500 yards south)?</p>
+
+<p><i>Problem 2</i>. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road,
+and has crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544). Can this patrol
+see the Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and
+crossroads 616?</p>
+
+<p><i>Problem 3</i>. Can the sentinel at 712 see the roadfork 581 (1850 yards
+southwest from 712)?</p>
+
+<p><i>Problem 4</i>. Can the sentinel at 712 see the crossroads 561 (about
+1200 yards southeast)?</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;" />
+
+<p>General Situation&mdash;Hunterstown Sheet.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Harvard Regiment</i> camps the night of May 31-June 1 on Opossum
+Creek just west of Friends Grove S.H. (A-7) in hostile territory. The
+regiment is part of a brigade, the remainder of the brigade being in
+camp one day's march north of Center Mills.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279"></a>Problem I: An Advance Guard Point:</p>
+
+<p>At daylight of June 1st the regimental commander receives the
+following message from brigade headquarters: &quot;Our aeroplanes report a
+large force of the enemy near Hunterstown. Move at once on
+Hunterstown. Develop the strength of this enemy and locate his exact
+position. I will send reinforcements to you by motor-train if
+necessary.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Officers call is sounded, and this information transmitted to all the
+officers of the regiment. The <i>First Battalion</i> is designated as
+<i>advance guard</i> and ordered to move out at once by crossroads 554 and
+561, and road forks 535 and 552 towards Hunterstown. Major A,
+commanding the First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of
+&quot;D&quot; company as advance party and C company and the remainder of D
+company as support.</p>
+
+<p>Lieut. X, commanding the advance party, calls up all his
+non-commissioned officers and explains the situation to them. He then
+says: &quot;Sergeant Mason, take 4 men and move out on that road (pointing)
+as the point. At crossroads and road forks semaphore W.W. and I will
+indicate the direction. The remainder of these two platoons will be
+the advance party. I will be with it. Move out.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>You are Sergeant Mason.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) What instructions, and information do you give the point before
+you reach crossroads 554?</p>
+
+<p>After passing crossroads 561 about 300 yards one of your men reports
+about a squad of hostile cavalry on the road south of road fork 544,
+1500 yards east of you.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Problem II: An Advance Guard Connecting File:</p>
+
+<p>Situation as in preceding problem.</p>
+
+<p>After the advance party has moved out about 100 yards, Captain Y,
+commanding the support, says: &quot;Smith, you take Jones and move out as
+connecting file.&quot; After Smith and Jones have moved about 100 <a name="Page_280" id="Page_280"></a>yards,
+he says: &quot;Donnelly, you take Burke and move out as connecting file.&quot;
+You are Donnelly.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) What instructions do you give Burke before reaching crossroads
+554?</p>
+
+<p>After passing crossroads 561 you go about 150 yards without seeing the
+connecting file in rear of you.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Problem III: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol:</p>
+
+<p>Situation as in preceding problem.</p>
+
+<p>On arriving at crossroads 561 Lieut. X commanding the advance party
+calls up Sergeant Clifford and says: &quot;Sergeant, the point has just
+reported a squad of hostile cavalry about a mile down this road
+(pointing toward road fork 544). Take <i>your squad</i> and scout down this
+road. I will take the next road to the left leading to Hunterstown.
+Rejoin me on that road.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>You are Sergeant Clifford.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) What formation do you adopt for your patrol?</p>
+
+<p>Nothing happens until you arrive near road fork 544, when you hear
+firing from the woods southwest of you. This fire is not directed
+toward you. There is evidently about a squad firing. You can see no
+enemy in any direction.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Problem IV: Platoon as an Advance Party:</p>
+
+<p>General situation same as before.</p>
+
+<p>You are Lieut. X commanding the advance party. You have arrived near
+the small orchard southeast of road fork 535. A sharp fire is suddenly
+opened from the woods to the southeast, apparently from a <i>squad or
+small platoon</i>.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) Give your orders and dispositions.</p>
+
+<p>After firing about a minute the fire of the enemy stops. You move out
+into the road and can see no sign of your point or connecting files.
+The support is closing up on you.</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) What do you do?</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_281" id="Page_281"></a>Visibility Problems:</p>
+
+<p>(<i>a</i>) Can a man on hill 712 see a man at crossroads 554 in
+Hunterstown? (Disregard trees.)</p>
+
+<p>(<i>b</i>) A man stands at the point where contour 680 crosses the road
+followed in above problem, just south of hill 707. Where does the
+roadbed first become invisible?</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;" />
+
+<p class="cen" style="margin-bottom: 1em;">
+<span class="sc">Map: Gettysburg&mdash;Antietam (Hunterstown Sheet)</span>.</p>
+
+<p>First Problem: A Connecting File&mdash;Situation I:</p>
+
+<p>The Harvard Regiment is in camp in hostile country the night May 1-2
+in the corn field 1000 yards east of Boyd S.H., just northeast of
+cross roads 488. The line of outguards extends approximately through
+Boyd S.H., Hill 527, McElheny.</p>
+
+<p>At 1.00 a.m.; May 1st, the regimental commander receives the following
+telephone message from brigade headquarters at Gettysburg (just off
+the map to the south)&mdash;An enemy force estimated strength one regiment
+is in camp 6 miles north of Center Mills. His patrols were seen
+yesterday by our advance cavalry near Guernsey and Center Mills. It is
+reliably reported that this force will march by Center Mills and
+Guernsey on Biglersville to-morrow morning to destroy a large amount
+of rolling stock at that point. Move at once toward Center Mills to
+stop and drive back this force.</p>
+
+<p>Officers call is sounded. The situation is explained to the officers
+and they are told to have their companies ready to move at 2.00 a.m.
+The 1st battalion is designated as advance guard.</p>
+
+<p>The advance guard is directed to move across the field to road fork
+511 thence north by the main road. The <i>first platoon</i> of &quot;A&quot; company
+is designated as advance party. &quot;B&quot; company and the remainder of &quot;A&quot;
+company form the support. As the advance party moves out Captain Smith
+commanding the support, says to <a name="Page_282" id="Page_282"></a>Private Long, &quot;Long, you and Williams
+move out as connecting files. This is a dark night so be careful to
+keep connection both front and rear.&quot; Before Long is out of sight; he
+says, &quot;Scott, you and Hunt move out as connecting files following
+Long.&quot; You are Scott.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>(a) What instructions do you give Hunt?</p>
+
+<p>(b) What do you do up to the time you reach the main road at 511?</p>
+
+<p>Situation II:</p>
+
+<p>After you have passed road fork in <i>Table Rock</i> about 100 yards you
+notice that Hunt who has been watching to the rear does not seem to be
+alert. You look back and can see no sign of the connecting file in
+rear of you. It is still dark.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point&mdash;General Situation same as in
+Problem I:</p>
+
+<p>Sergeant Hill and four men constitute the point. The situation has
+been explained to Sergeant Hill by the advance party commander.</p>
+
+<p>About daylight the point arrives at crossroads 600. A sharp fire
+evidently from about a squad is received from the house on the rise
+500 yards north along the road. You are Sergeant Hill.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol&mdash;Situation I&mdash;General
+Situation same as Problem I:</p>
+
+<p>Up to daylight no flank patrols have been sent out. When the support
+reaches Table Rock the support commander calls Corporal Bell and says
+to him &quot;Corporal take your squad as a flank patrol up this road to the
+right. Take the left hand road at the first two road forks and follow
+the road past the church and <a name="Page_283" id="Page_283"></a>school-house until you reach this road
+again about 1-&frac12; miles north of here. Report every thing you have
+seen when you rejoin. Your squad consists of seven men besides
+yourself.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>(a) The disposition of your squad on the march.</p>
+
+<p>(b) What do you do when you hear the firing near crossroads 600?</p>
+
+<p>Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party&mdash;Situation&mdash;General Situation
+same as in the First Problem:</p>
+
+<p>When you arrive at a point about 200 yards south of hill 646 you hear
+firing 1000 yards north of you. You cannot see who is firing nor can
+you see the point. You are Lieutenant Clark commanding the advance
+party.</p>
+
+<p>Required:</p>
+
+<p>What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Visibility Problems:</p>
+
+<p>(a) When the point arrives at hill 647 can it see the crossroads 610
+to the northeast?</p>
+
+<p>(b) When the flank patrol reaches Benders' Church crossroads can it
+see an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile
+to the northeast?</p>
+
+<p>(c) Looking north along the Center Mills road from hill 647 where does
+the road first become invisible?</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;" />
+
+<p class="cen" style="margin-bottom: 1em;"><span class="sc">Map: Hunterstown Sheet</span>.</p>
+
+<p>General Situation:</p>
+
+<p>The Harvard regiment encamped on the night of July 12-13 at
+Biglerville (B-8) in hostile territory. The remainder of the brigade
+of which the regiment is a part is in camp 5 miles west of
+Biglerville.</p>
+
+<p>Problem I:</p>
+
+<p>At daylight, July 13, the regimental commander receives the following
+message from brigade headquarters:</p>
+
+<p>&quot;<a name="Page_284" id="Page_284"></a>It is reported that the enemy is in force near Heidlersburg. Move on
+Heidlersburg at once; locate the position of the enemy, and develop
+his strength. Reinforcements will be sent you, if necessary.&quot;</p>
+
+<p>This information is transmitted to all officers of the regiment. The
+First Battalion is ordered to move out at once as advance guard on
+Biglerville-610-582 road toward Heidlersburg. Major Dunn, commanding
+First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of C Company as
+advance party, and D Company and the remainder of C Company as
+support.</p>
+
+<p>Lieut. Gibbs, commanding the advance party, explains the situation to
+his non-commissioned officers, and then orders:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p style="text-indent: 0em;">&quot;Sergeant Dow, take four men and move out on that road
+ (indicating road to Heidlersburg) as point. The remainder of these
+ two platoons will be the advance party and will follow you at 200
+ yards. I shall be with it. Move out.&quot;</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>You are Sergt. Dow.</p>
+
+<p>How do you place your men, and what information and instructions do
+you give the point before you pass the orchard east of Biglerville?</p>
+
+<p>Situation 2:</p>
+
+<p>You are still Sergt. Dow.</p>
+
+<p>The point has reached crossroads 582. You are informed by a farmer
+living at crossroads 582 that about half an hour before there were
+some soldiers half a mile north of 582 on the road to Center Mills. He
+says he does not know where they went.</p>
+
+<p>What do you do?</p>
+
+<p>Problem II:</p>
+
+<p>The advance party has arrived at crossroads 582. Information has come
+to Lieut. Gibbs, both from the point and from the farmer direct, that
+Red Soldiers have been seen on road to north leading to Center Mills.
+Lieut. Gibbs on arrival at 582 sends out a squad under <a name="Page_285" id="Page_285"></a>Sergt. Jones
+to patrol north on the Center Mills road half a mile, then east by
+farm road to corner, then by fence south of house and barn to Opossum
+Creek and down creek to main road again.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">The advance party then proceeds about 300 yards easterly from 582,
+when the point signals &quot;Enemy in small numbers in creek bottom due
+north.&quot;</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>What does Lieut. Gibbs and the advance party do?</li>
+<li>What does he tell the point to do?</li>
+<li>What does the flank patrol under Sergt. Jones do?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Problem III:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Because of the action taken in Problem II the Reds have ceased to
+menace the left flank of the advance guard:</p>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>What does the advance party and its commander do?</li>
+<li>What does he tell the point to do?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Another Situation&mdash;Problem IV:</p>
+
+<p>Enemy is in the vicinity of Hunterstown. Your brigade has marched
+south through Guernsey to road fork 610, and has turned east, and is
+about to camp in grass field north of road 610-582, 1-3 of a mile west
+of 582. Your battalion is to form the outpost. You are its major.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Where do you post:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>The outpost reserve?</li>
+<li>The outpost supports?</li>
+<li>The outguards?<br />
+
+(<span class="sc">Note</span>:
+The sector up to and including the road Center
+ Mills&mdash;554-534&mdash;Bridge S.H. is covered by another brigade
+ to your left.)</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>Problem V:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">On the same general scheme as in Problem IV. You are Sergt. Robinson
+of Support No. 1. You are ordered by its commander to move out with 3
+squads to form a <a name="Page_286" id="Page_286"></a>picket, outguard No. 1, putting out observation
+posts on the road about half a mile south of the support.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>State what directions you give to your picket and how you move
+ to your position.</li>
+<li>Where do you post the picket and its observation posts?</li>
+<li>What orders and instructions do you give on arrival at the
+ place selected?</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+<a name="CHAPTER_15" id="CHAPTER_15"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_287" id="Page_287"></a>CHAPTER 15.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<h3>Trench Warfare.</h3>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>General Principles.</b></p>
+<br />
+
+<p>1. Defense may be made in depth by all organizations, down to and
+including the platoon, or it may be made laterally.</p>
+
+<p>2. The smallest active segment, be it only three men, must have a
+chief and a second in command, who is responsible for the proper
+upkeep and defense of the segment. All occupants of active segments
+must know all instructions which should be simple.</p>
+
+<p>3. Any troops in charge of a portion of trench must never abandon it,
+no matter what happens, even if surrounded.</p>
+
+<p>4. All ground lost must be retaken at once by immediate counter attack
+launched by the unit which lost the ground. As a matter of fact a
+counter attack is difficult for a platoon or company; it is really
+necessary for it to be made by a battalion.</p>
+
+<p>5. Each company must provide for emplacements for mine throwers to be
+served by the artillery and for pneumatic guns to be served by their
+own men.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Instructions to be Issued by Battalion Commander.</b></p>
+
+<p>1. Disposition of companies in sector assigned (best done by sketch
+showing sectors assigned to companies).</p>
+
+<p>2. Special orders to companies (concerns field of fire to be obtained
+not only in own sector, but also in those adjoining it).</p>
+
+<p>3. Improvement of defense. (Brief reports from company commanders to
+be followed by work being done on order of battalion commander after
+inspection.)</p>
+
+<p>4. Organization of watching (not sentry duty) (by company commander
+under supervision of battalion commander).</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_288" id="Page_288"></a>5. Organization of observation (not sentry duty) (by company commander
+under supervision of battalion commander).</p>
+
+<p>6. Organization of supply (procuring, routing, etc., of tools,
+ammunition, food, water, etc.), (by company commander under
+supervision of battalion commander).</p>
+
+<p>7. Organization of liaison (communication) (runners, telephone,
+telegraph visual signaling, pigeons, etc., by company commander under
+the supervision of battalion commander). <i>All telephonic communication
+must be in code</i>.</p>
+
+<p>8. Organization of supplies to include amounts to be expected daily
+from the rear.</p>
+
+<p>9. Knowledge of enemy must be imparted to company commanders in order
+to assist them in making their dispositions.</p>
+
+<p>10. Frequent reports to be made of existing conditions at the front
+for information of higher commanders.</p>
+
+<p>11. Lateral defense of boyaux must not be overlooked.</p>
+
+<p>12. Wide turning movements are not possible. Enveloping movements are
+possible only on local attacks against small portions of the hostile
+line after it has been pierced. All main attacks are confined to
+purely frontal attacks.</p>
+
+<p>13. The most important obstacle is barbed wire entanglements.</p>
+
+<p>14. Communication (liaison) between and co-ordination and co-operation
+of, the different elements of a command is of the utmost importance.</p>
+
+<p>15. Artillery co-operates more closely than ever with infantry. Its
+reconnaissance officers accompany infantry lines in order to obtain
+information. <i>There is a certain number of artillery observers
+attached to each battalion of infantry</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The general method of attack is to smother the defense with a torrent
+of explosive shells, kept up incessantly for one or more days, and
+shatter the defense so they will offer but slight resistance to the
+infantry; <a name="Page_289" id="Page_289"></a>then rush forward with the infantry and seize the positions
+while the enemy is demoralized, and consolidate them before
+reenforcements can be brought up.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em; text-indent: 3em;">
+The artillery bombardment is necessary to prepare the way for the
+ infantry advance. It has for its objects:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>To destroy the hostile artillery, wire entanglements and
+ infantry trenches.</li>
+
+<li>To produce curtains of fire and prevent bringing up
+ reenforcements.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p><i>Light guns are assigned to</i> <span class="sc">Each Battalion Of Infantry</span>, subject only
+to orders of regimental and battalion commanders concerned.</p>
+
+<p>Save under exceptional circumstances the light gun is always attached
+to the Machine Gun Company for the attack.</p>
+
+<p>The essential role of the light gun is to destroy with direct fire the
+visible machine guns; they are employed separately and not grouped.</p>
+
+<p>The infantry is divided into two classes: Holding troops&mdash;and
+attacking or shock troops. Holding troops are those doing routine or
+trench duty; shock troops are picked organizations of young and
+vigorous men and are kept in camps well behind the battle front.
+Holding troops are two weeks in and two weeks out of the trenches.</p>
+
+<p>All specialist groups, <i>i.e.</i>, Machine Gun Companies, etc., are
+officered, allowing company and battalion commanders to concentrate
+them, if the situation requires.</p>
+
+<p><i>They play the normal part in combat if they do not receive special
+instructions.</i></p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Attack of a Defensive Position.</b></p>
+
+<p>Unity of command in depth must be preserved everywhere, unless there
+is an imperative reason for doing otherwise.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_290" id="Page_290"></a>The front of each regiment should be divided between two or three
+battalions.</p>
+
+<p><i>Each battalion commander having to look after a front of from 500 to
+600 yards, can exercise efficient control of his command.</i></p>
+
+<p>In preparing for an assault, seniors must take steps to organize it
+and make all necessary preparations themselves, and not leave all the
+responsibility with the juniors.</p>
+
+<p>In the assault each unit must know its special task beforehand, and it
+should be rehearsed in rear of the line of trenches. Each commander
+must know the exact time he is to start and must start on time.</p>
+
+<p>The first waves of men are placed at 4 or 5 pace interval. Chief of
+section can command only a front of 80 to 100 paces and it is
+necessary to form the section in two (2) waves. The first containing
+the grenadiers and automatic riflemen, the latter in the center. The
+second wave contains the riflemen and rifle grenadiers, the latter in
+the center.</p>
+
+<p>If the terrain is cut up by woods, villages, etc., the proportion of
+grenadiers may be increased by taking them from the sections in
+support and the automatic riflemen sent back to the second wave.</p>
+
+<p>If the distance to cross exceeds 300 or 400 yards, the number of
+automatic riflemen should be increased.</p>
+
+<p><i>Two or three sections are usually placed abreast on the company
+front, which thus covers two to three hundred yards.</i></p>
+
+<p>The support sections follow the leading sections of their company at
+about 50 yards, marching in two lines, if possible in two lines of
+squad columns at 20 yard intervals.</p>
+
+<p>The first wave of the support is usually formed of the one-half
+section of specialists.</p>
+
+<p>The echeloning of the specialists in front is also the most favorable
+formation to progress by rushes in a terrain cut up by shell holes.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_291" id="Page_291"></a>The chief of section is between the two (2) waves of his section.</p>
+
+<p>The captain is usually in front of the support sections.</p>
+
+<p>The support sections are closely followed by a powerful line of
+machine guns, which are thrown into the fight when needed to reenforce
+the leading units.</p>
+
+<p>&quot;Trench Cleaners&quot; usually march immediately after the leading sections
+and may be taken from the support sections. They are armed with
+pistols, knives and hand grenades.</p>
+
+<p>The captain can use his section complete, or take out the specialists
+and use them for a particular purpose.</p>
+
+<p>The specialists carry only the weapons of their specialty and have
+their loads lightened. The ordinary riflemen carry the usual packs and
+equipment.</p>
+
+<p>Officers no longer lead the assault, but direct it. They are equipped
+with the rifle and bayonet, the same as the enlisted man.</p>
+
+<p>Each unit of the first wave of the attack is given a definite
+objective. Different waves must not break upon the first wave.</p>
+
+<p>Fire is opened by the assaulting troops only at short ranges, the
+advance being protected by a curtain of artillery fire. The advancing
+line makes use of shell holes and all other available cover.</p>
+
+<p>When the first section reaches its objective it is joined by the half
+section of riflemen; it immediately organizes the captured ground.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Attacking From Trenches</span>.&mdash;The
+commanders of brigades and battalions,
+with the commander of the artillery detailed to support them, study on
+the ground the artillery plan so far as it affects them. Immediately
+after the advance of the infantry begins, the artillery supporting it
+commences an intense bombardment with the object of forcing the enemy
+to take cover. At the moment laid down in the table of artillery fire
+the barrage lifts clear of the trench and the infantry rush <a name="Page_292" id="Page_292"></a>in and
+capture it. The infantry must be taught that their success depends
+upon their getting within 75 yards of the barrage before it lifts, in
+order that they may reach the trenches before the enemy can man them.
+The secret of a successful assault is exact synchronization of the
+movements of the infantry with those of the barrage.</p>
+
+<p>The pace of a barrage depends, to a certain extent, on the pace of the
+infantry, which varies with the condition of the ground, the length of
+the advance, the number of enemy trenches to be crossed, etc. It may
+be from 15 to 75 yards per minute. The pace of the barrage should be
+quicker at first, and should gradually slow down as the men become
+exhausted, in order to give them time to get close to the barrage and
+pull themselves together for the final rush.</p>
+
+<p>In an attack each unit must have sufficient driving power in itself to
+carry it through to its objective and enable it to hold its ground
+when it gets there. When a number of trenches have to be carried,
+considerable depth will be required, and the frontage must be reduced.
+A brigade usually has a front in attack of 250 to 350 yards, but this
+may be increased to 1,000 or 1,200 yards.</p>
+
+<p>A battalion should have a front of 250 to 350 yards. The battalion
+must be organized in depth in a series of waves. Two companies are
+usually put abreast in the first line and the others in the second
+line. Each company in both lines attacks in column of platoons at
+about 50 yards' distance, with intervals of three to five paces
+between men, so there would be eight lines of waves, of two platoons
+each. The 8th and 16th platoons, the two in rear forming the eighth
+wave, are usually not employed in the attack, but are left behind as a
+nucleus to form on in case of heavy casualties.</p>
+
+<p>The front line must not be less than 200 yards from the enemy's front
+line.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_293" id="Page_293"></a>The leading two or three waves are likely to meet machine gun fire,
+and generally move in extended order. Not more than two waves can be
+accommodated in one trench. Subsequent waves will move in line or in
+line of section columns in single file. Russian saps must be run out
+as far as possible across &quot;No Man's Land&quot; to be opened up immediately
+after the assault, as approach trenches. Ladders or steps are
+necessary to assist the leading waves in leaving the trenches, as they
+must move in lines. Provision must be made for bridges over the first
+line trenches for the rear waves. In the original assault line will be
+more suitable for both leading and rear waves. In later stages it is
+better for the rear waves to move in small and handy columns. In the
+original assault the distance between waves may be 75 to 100 yards; in
+later stages they may follow each other at 50 yards.</p>
+
+<p>In the original assault, zero, or the time for the assault to begin,
+may be fixed for the moment at which our barrage lifts from the enemy
+front trench, the infantry timing their advance so as to be close
+under our barrage before it lifts. In the later stages zero must be
+the moment at which our barrage commences, and this commencement will
+be the signal for the infantry to leave their trenches. Each wave is
+assigned its own objective. All watches must be synchronized in order
+that all units may start off at the appointed time.</p>
+
+<p>The first wave is composed of bombers and rifle grenade men, and
+attacks the enemy's first line of trenches. It must go straight
+through to its objective, following the artillery barrage as closely
+as possible. The second and third waves, composed of riflemen with
+bayonets and Lewis guns, re-enforce the first wave after the latter
+has occupied the enemy's first line trench, and attack the second line
+trench. The fourth wave takes up tools, ammunition and sand bags and
+assists in consolidating the line. The fifth wave is a mopping-up
+party to clear the enemy's dugouts. The sixth wave comprises
+<a name="Page_294" id="Page_294"></a>battalion headquarters and has two Lewis guns, kept for a special
+purpose. The seventh and eighth waves, if used, seize and consolidate
+the enemy's third line trench.</p>
+
+<p>Bombing squads (1 non-commissioned officer and 8 men) are on the flank
+of each attacking wave. Battalion bombers are assigned a special task.</p>
+
+<p>All movements must be over the top of the ground. The pace throughout
+should be a steady walk, except for the last 30 or 40 yards, when the
+line should break into a steady double time, finishing up the last 10
+yards with a rush.</p>
+
+<p>Barrage is continued 20 or 30 minutes after the objective has been
+reached.</p>
+
+<p>Mopping parties must be trained with great care under selected
+officers. They should always wear a distinguishing mark. They must at
+once dispose of any occupants who may have emerged from their dugouts,
+and picket the dugout entrances.</p>
+
+<p>The ultimate unit in the assault is the platoon. It must be organized
+and trained as a self-contained unit, capable of producing the
+required proportion of riflemen, bombers, rifle bombers, Lewis
+gunners, and carriers, all trained to work in combination.</p>
+
+<p>Assaulting troops should have twelve hours of daylight in the trenches
+before the assault begins, to enable them to get acquainted with the
+ground and get some rest. All ranks must be given a hot meal,
+including hot tea or coffee, before the assault.</p>
+
+<p>Take every precaution to prevent the enemy from realizing that the
+assault is about to take place. Bayonets must not be allowed to show.
+No increase in rate of artillery fire. No unusual movements must be
+made in the trenches, and there must be no indication of the impending
+assault until the barrage is dropped.</p>
+
+<p>When the trench has been taken, it should be consolidated at once to
+prevent counterattack. To protect this consolidation, throw out an
+outpost line, the posts consisting of one non-commissioned officer and
+6 riflemen <a name="Page_295" id="Page_295"></a>with a Lewis gun, about 150 to 200 yards apart and 100 to
+300 yards beyond the line. These posts should be established in
+shellholes, which are to be converted into fire trenches, protected by
+wire entanglements, as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p>Approach trenches toward the enemy should be blockaded and hand and
+rifle grenadiers posted to guard them. The main captured trench should
+be converted at once into a fire trench facing the enemy. If it is
+badly knocked to pieces, a new trench may be constructed 40 or 50
+yards in front of the captured line. The commander must reorganize in
+depth to provide supports and reserves for counterattacks. Situation
+reports should be sent back frequently. Rough sketches are better than
+messages.</p>
+
+<p>Tanks follow infantry as closely as possible to deal with strong
+points. They are employed in sections of four.</p>
+
+<p>Machine guns may be used to provide covering fire for attacking
+infantry, cover its withdrawal if the attack fails, fill gaps in the
+assaulting lines, assist in the consolidation of positions and repel
+counterattacks.</p>
+
+<p>Lewis guns are of great value in knocking out hostile machine guns.
+They usually move on the flanks of the second wave of assault. Later
+they are used to back up patrols and to hold the outpost line while
+the garrison line is being consolidated.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as consolidation begins, wire entanglements should be
+constructed. Every effort should be made to secure the objective
+against recapture. Any men available should be used to continue the
+offensive.</p>
+
+<p>All commanders down to and including company commanders must keep some
+portion of their command as a reserve. The company commander needs his
+reserve to work around points which are holding against the leading
+lines, to protect his flanks in case the companies on his right and
+left are delayed in their advance and to exploit his success and gain
+ground to the <a name="Page_296" id="Page_296"></a>front. He must keep it well in hand behind the company.</p>
+
+<p>Battalion reserves must start with the assaulting column and get
+across &quot;No Man's Land&quot; as soon as possible; they must not get out of
+hand. Such a reserve is usually checked in the vicinity of the enemy's
+front line trench, where it can be thrown in to assist the advance or
+extend a flank as needed.</p>
+
+<p>The brigade reserve is kept well in hand just clear of the friendly
+front line and support trenches. Reserves of companies and battalions
+must start moving over the top of the ground with the rest of the
+assaulting troops.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Defense Of Trenches</span>.&mdash;The
+latest methods consist in constructing,
+supporting and strong points at the most favorable points to be held,
+such as villages, woods, etc. These are separated by intervals not too
+great for mutual support. They are of such resisting power that they
+must be taken before the attack can progress. In the intervals between
+them fire and communicating trenches are constructed, but these are
+only held lightly. Dummy trenches may be placed in these intervals.
+Lines of the various works are so traced that they bring enfilading
+fire on troops attacking adjacent positions. The lines need not be
+continuously occupied, but the obstacles extend in an unbroken line
+along the whole front. Wire entanglements are set in front of
+important positions in belts 20 feet wide, in two or three rows, each
+20 yards apart.</p>
+
+<p>Each supporting point usually is occupied by a battalion, and consists
+of a series of trenches formed into strong points, each held by a
+garrison of one or more platoons or a company. The supporting points
+are from 600 to 800 yards in depth and have a front of 600 to 1,000
+yards. The first line of strong points is occupied by one or two
+companies in firing and cover trenches, while the remainder of the
+battalion <a name="Page_297" id="Page_297"></a>occupies the support and reserve trenches. Bomb-proofs are
+built along the cover trenches and are connected with the firing
+trenches. Approach trenches are protected on both flanks by wire
+entanglements. Strong points in support and reserve trenches are
+prepared for an all-around defense and divided into two or more
+separate strong points by wire entanglements.</p>
+
+<p>A body of infantry attacked is to oppose to the assailant its high
+powered weapons, machine guns, automatic rifles, rifle grenades and
+hand grenades and to reserve for the counter attack the grenadiers and
+riflemen. There is always one line upon which the resistance must be
+made with the greatest energy; for its defense the following methods
+have been found successful. Machine guns should be placed where they
+can secure the best flanking fire, and every one put out of action
+should immediately be replaced by an automatic rifle. If machine gun
+barrage fire is to play its role successfully at the moment of
+assault, the guns must survive the bombardment. Their protection is
+secured by placing them under shelter during the bombardment and
+making their emplacements as nearly invisible as possible. They should
+be echeloned in depth as far as practicable. They are generally placed
+in re-entrants of the firing trenches and cover the intervals between
+the adjoining supporting and strong points. Where the ground will
+permit they are often placed in concealed positions 20 to 30 yards in
+front of the trenches, to break up attacks made by hostile infantry.
+Not too many should be placed in the front line, and they should be
+echeloned in depth so as to confuse their disposition. The value of
+machine guns depends on the possibility of using them suddenly for
+brief periods, and in using them as long as they are effective.
+Machine guns disposed for flanking fire must be well covered by
+grenadiers; this is also true of automatic rifles.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_298" id="Page_298"></a>Automatic rifles, rifle grenades and hand grenades are used to
+constitute a barrage to keep back the enemy. The entire front should
+be defended by a barrage of hand grenades, while the barrage of
+automatic rifles and rifle grenades is superposed farther to the
+front, up to 400 yards.</p>
+
+<p>All riflemen and those grenadiers not employed in forming barrages are
+reserved to make a counterattack.</p>
+
+<p>Companies on the second line operate on similar principles; machine
+guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades are arranged so as to cover
+every portion of the first line that might be invaded. After a short
+preparation by fire from these, the grenadiers and riflemen make the
+counterattack.</p>
+
+<p>The captains in charge of the two lines are responsible for the
+arrangement of the machine guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades,
+the distribution of barrages and the distribution of groups for the
+counterattack. The real strength of the defense consists, not in
+holding the fire and cover trenches, nor even the support trenches,
+but in holding the supporting and strong points until the
+counterattack can be launched.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Liaison</span>.&mdash;The
+question of liaison in battle is of the utmost
+importance, and complete co-ordination of the different arms is
+absolutely necessary. Each battalion sends an officer or
+non-commissioned officer and a cyclist to the colonel, and each
+colonel sends a soldier to the battalion commander.</p>
+
+<p>The principal means of communication are the telephone, telegraph,
+wireless, aeroplane, mounted messengers, autos and motorcycles; and at
+the front runners, visual signals, rockets and carrier pigeons.</p>
+
+<p>Each battalion commander is connected by telephone with each company
+commander, with the artillery observers, with the artillery commander,
+with his own colonel and with the adjacent battalions on either side.</p>
+
+<p>The signallers of assaulting companies move with the company
+commander. All signallers should be <a name="Page_299" id="Page_299"></a>given a special training in
+repeating a message several times to a known back station which may
+not be able to reply forward.</p>
+
+<p>At the commencement of the assault the pigeons and pigeon carriers
+must be kept back at battalion headquarters, and sent forward as soon
+as the position has been gained.</p>
+
+<p>Runners can be relied upon when all other means fail. They must be
+trained with their companies. Runners should be lightly equipped and
+wear a distinctive mark. They must be familiar with all the principal
+routes to all the principal centers within their battalion sector. The
+quicker they go the safer they are. Company and platoon runners must
+go forward with their respective commanders. Messages to be carried
+long distances will be relayed. Never send a verbal message by a
+runner; ignore any received; all messages must be written.</p>
+
+<p>Company and battalion commanders must be prepared to assist artillery
+liaison officers in getting their messages back. Liaison officers must
+be exchanged by all the assaulting battalions with the battalion on
+either flank.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Trench Orders</span>.&mdash;(Battalion):
+Trenches are usually divided into a
+certain number of bays; the number of men to defend these bays depends
+upon the length of trench allotted to each company. Each section is
+detailed to guard a certain number of bays.</p>
+
+<p>Non-commissioned officers and men must always wear their equipment by
+day and night. Every company will &quot;Stand To&quot; arms daily one-half hour
+before dusk and one-half hour before dawn, and will remain until
+dismissed by the company commander.</p>
+
+<p>The enemy's trenches are so close that it is very important for the
+men to have their rifle sights always at battle sight, so that there
+will be no necessity to alter their sights in case of alarm. By night
+all <a name="Page_300" id="Page_300"></a>bayonets are to be fixed and half of the men on duty in the
+trenches are to be sitting on the firing platform with their rifles by
+their side. In case of attack, especially at night, it should be
+impressed upon the men that they fire low.</p>
+
+<p>Section commanders are responsible that the men under their command
+have sufficient standing room for the purpose of firing over the
+parapet. They must have a clear field of fire, and not only be able to
+see the enemy trenches but the ground in the immediate vicinity of
+their trench. When making new trenches parapets should be at least
+five feet thick at the top in order to be bullet proof.</p>
+
+<p>Repairs or alterations of the parapet should be reported at once by
+the section commander to the platoon commander, who will report it to
+superior authority. Repairing of trenches, fatigue, etc., will be
+carried on either by day or night according to company arrangement.
+Certain hours will be allotted for these tasks and no man is to be
+employed upon any kind of work out of these hours. No man should leave
+his post in the trenches at any time without the permission of the
+non-commissioned officer in charge of that post. At night there should
+be at least one sentry post to each ten yards of parapet. At night,
+double sentries should be posted if possible, and no sentry should be
+kept on duty for longer than an hour at a time. The arrangement should
+be such that when one sentry is doing his last half hour, his comrade
+will be doing his first half hour.</p>
+
+<p>Sentries at night should always have their rifles resting on the
+parapet, ready to fire at a moment's notice. As few sentries as
+possible should be posted by day, so as to give as much rest as
+possible to the remainder of the men.</p>
+
+<p>By day any existing loop-holes may be used by a sentry for observation
+purposes, but this must be strictly prohibited at night, when the
+sentry must look over <a name="Page_301" id="Page_301"></a>the parapet. If a sentry is continually fired
+at, the section commander will post him in another position, but not
+too far from his original position. There is no excuse for a man going
+to sleep on sentry duty; if he is sick he should report the fact to
+the non-commissioned officer, who will report to superior authority.</p>
+
+<p>An armed party of the enemy approaching the trench under a flag of
+truce should be halted at a distance, ordered to lay down their arms,
+and the matter at once reported to the company commander. If the party
+fails to halt when ordered to do so, or does not convey a flag of
+truce, they should be fired upon. An unarmed party should be halted in
+the same way. It is not necessary to challenge at night; open fire at
+once. This is modified only by special instructions.</p>
+
+<p>Men especially picked for listening patrols and sharp-shooters will be
+given special privileges. All loud talking must be checked at night by
+officers and non-commissioned officers. All working parties must wear
+their equipment and carry their rifles. All picks and shovels will be
+returned after use to the company store room. Ration parties and
+parties carrying materials for repairs, etc., need not wear their
+equipment or carry rifles; they should be accompanied by a fully armed
+non-commissioned officer as an escort. Not more than 20 men are to be
+away from the company at one time; one non-commissioned officer and
+four men per platoon.</p>
+
+<p>Rifles must be kept clean and in good condition while in the trenches.
+They will be cleaned every morning during an hour appointed by the
+company commander for the purpose. Platoon commanders will be
+responsible that section commanders superintend this work. All rifles
+except those used by sentries are to be kept in racks during the day.</p>
+
+<p>Trenches must be kept in sanitary condition. Platoon commanders will
+be responsible for the latrines in their sections of the trenches. All
+water for <a name="Page_302" id="Page_302"></a>drinking and cooking is to be taken from a water cart or
+tank provided for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a place designated by the
+commanding officer. No soldier will be buried nearer than 300 yards
+from the trenches.</p>
+
+<p>In every platoon a non-commissioned officer will be detailed for duty
+by day; he will do no night duty. He will post the day sentries and
+see that they are on the alert and carry out their orders correctly.
+He will be responsible for the cleanliness of his lines and will
+frequently visit the latrines. He will see that all loose ammunition
+is collected.</p>
+
+<p>The platoon commander will always send a non-commissioned officer to
+draw rations and he will be responsible for their delivery.</p>
+
+<p>The passing along of messages by word of mouth will not be used. All
+messages should be written.</p>
+
+<p>Special instructions will be issued as to precautions against gas.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Selection of Site.</b></p>
+
+<p>(a) Fire trench should be selected with due regard to tactical
+requirements and the economy of men.</p>
+
+<p>(b) Every fire trench should have a good field of fire, at least 250
+yards.</p>
+
+<p>(c) The trenches should have the best possible cover.</p>
+
+<p>(d) The forward position on a slope for the first line has the best
+advantage. The support trench should be on the reverse slope from 100
+to 600 yards in rear of the first line to prevent direct observation
+and to be practically free from artillery fire. The reserve trench is
+usually from &frac12; to 1 mile in rear of the first line. Remember that
+the first line, the support line, and the reserve line are all fire
+trenches. Do not put them on a crest.</p>
+
+<p>(e) The communicating trenches (boyaux) should be zigzagged, wide and
+deep, and should follow the low ground. The longest straight trench
+should not exceed <a name="Page_303" id="Page_303"></a>thirty paces. The angle made by each turn should be
+less than 140 degrees.</p>
+
+<p>(f) The fire trenches should have salients and re-entrants so as to
+flank the wire entanglements. The bays are usually 27 feet long with 9
+feet of traverse.</p>
+
+<p>(g) There are two problems in the siting of trenches, one for those to
+be constructed under fire and another for those that will be
+constructed without any danger from fire. Trenches built under fire
+are usually made by connecting up individual shelters made by the
+front line when forced to halt. Trenches built under quiet conditions
+can be laid out according to the best possible plan.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%">
+<b>Trench Construction.</b></p>
+
+<p>Several kinds of difficulties face the trench digger: Sand, clay,
+water and bullets. In order to overcome them he must be familiar with
+the general arrangement of a trench, the principles which govern its
+construction and the standard trench as it has been worked out in the
+present war at the cost of thousands of lives.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">General Arrangement</span>.&mdash;A
+position is a combination of trenches,
+consisting of: The fire trench, or first line, nearest the enemy; the
+cover trench, just behind the first line, where all but sentinels of
+the fire trench garrison are held in dugouts or shelters; the support
+trench, from 150 to 200 yards in rear of the cover trench, and the
+reserve, from 800 to 1,200 yards still further to the rear.</p>
+
+<p>The support trench is placed far enough from the first line to prevent
+the enemy from shelling both trenches at once. By a concentration of
+artillery fire and a determined advance of the hostile infantry the
+first line may be captured. The support trench must be so organized
+that it will then act as a line of resistance upon which the enemy's
+advance will break. Lieutenant Colonel Azan of the French army says:
+&quot;As long as <a name="Page_305" id="Page_305"></a>the support trenches are
+strongly held, the position is not in the hands of the enemy.&quot;</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a href="images/plate16.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate16.png" width="90%" alt="Plate 16: Trenches" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>The reserve is usually a <i>strong point</i>, so organized that it can
+maintain independent resistance for several days if necessary, should
+the enemy obtain control of adjacent areas.</p>
+
+<p>Where possible trenches should be on reverse slopes, with the
+exception of the first line; but usually the outline of a trench is
+determined in actual combat, or is a part of hostile trench converted.
+Under these circumstances it cannot be arranged according to tactical
+ideals.</p>
+
+<p>Artillery and the automatic gun are the determining factors in trench
+warfare to-day. The effect of artillery fire must be limited in its
+area as far as possible, and trenches are, therefore, cut by
+<i>traverses</i>, which are square blocks of earth not less than nine feet
+square, left every 27 feet along the trench. They should overlap the
+width of the trench by at least one yard, thereby limiting the effect
+of shell burst to a single <i>bay</i>, the 27-foot length of firing trench
+between two traverses. Sharp angles have the same effect as traverses,
+but angles of more than 120 degrees cannot be utilized in this way.</p>
+
+<p>The sides of the trench are kept as nearly perpendicular as possible,
+to give the maximum protection from shell burst and the fall of high
+angle projectiles. The <i>parados</i>, the bank of earth to the rear of the
+trench, has been developed during the war to give protection from
+flying fragments of shells exploding to the rear, and to prevent the
+figure of a sentinel from being outlined through a loop-hole against
+the sky. The <i>berm</i>, a ledge or shelf left between the side of the
+trench and the beginning of the parados, has come into general use in
+order to take the weight of the parados off the earth at the immediate
+edge of the trench, and so prevent the reverse slope from caving in
+easily under bombardment or heavy rain.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_306" id="Page_306"></a>
+<a href="images/plate16a.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate16a.png" width="90%" alt="Plate 16a: Trenches" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p><a name="Page_307" id="Page_307"></a>Automatic guns have made it necessary to break the line of the trench
+at every opportunity, in order to secure a flanking fire for these
+arms. Auto-rifles and machine guns have tremendous effectiveness only
+in depth, and flanking fire gives them their greatest opportunity.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Trench Construction.</span>&mdash;The
+methods of building trenches are the same
+whether the work is carried on under fire or not. In an attack, upon
+reaching the limit of advance, the men immediately dig themselves in,
+and later connect these individual holes to make a continuous line of
+trench.</p>
+
+<p>Most of the digging must be done at night, and must be organized to
+obtain the most work with the least confusion. There are three ways of
+increasing the efficiency of the men. In the first of these, squad
+shifts, the squad leader divides his men into reliefs and gives each
+man a limited period of intensive work. Reliefs may be made by squads
+or by individuals. The second way of increasing efficiency is to
+induce competition among the man and squads, thus making the work a
+game in which each soldier's interest will be aroused in the effort to
+do better than the others. The third method is to assign a fixed
+amount of work to each man. An average task, which all ought to
+accomplish in a given time, is found by experience, and those who
+finish before their time is up are relieved from further work during
+that shift, and allowed to return to their shelters.</p>
+
+<p>Continual care must be used to check up the tools on hand, as the men
+are prone to leave them where they were working rather than carry them
+back and forth to work. Each unit must guard its property from
+appropriation by neighbors on its flanks.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">System of Laying Out Trenches.</span>&mdash;The
+trace of the trench is first
+staked out, particularly at traverses and corners when the work is to
+be done at night. Measurements should be exact, and the men should be
+<a name="Page_308" id="Page_308"></a>required to line the limits of each trench so as not to exceed them
+in digging. All sod should be taken up carefully and used on the
+parapet for concealment or on the berm to make a square back wall for
+the dirt of the parapet. If possible this should be done with the
+parados wall, so as to make it as inconspicuous as possible from the
+front.</p>
+
+<p>Men should begin to dig at the center of the trench and throw the dirt
+as far out on the sides as possible, so that as they go deeper the
+earth can be thrown just over the berm. The slope of the sides will be
+kept steep and the men prevented from widening the trench as they dig.
+In sandy soil the sides of the trench should be allowed to reach their
+angle of repose (which is wider at the top than required), then the
+trench walls supported with <i>revettments</i> to the proper width, which
+are filled in behind with sand. Always dig to full depth before
+beginning to revet, as it is impossible to dig deeper afterwards
+without loosening the revetting.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Revettments.</span>&mdash;Every
+trench at points needs support, and this
+<i>revetting</i> may be done with any of the following materials: Sod;
+corduroy of logs laid lengthwise; sand bags (size 20 in. x 10 in. x 5
+in.); galvanized iron; chicken wire and cloth made in a frame about
+six feet long; <i>hurdles</i>, wicker mats made by driving three-inch
+stakes into the ground, leaving uprights as high above the ground as
+the depth of the trench, then weaving withes and slender saplings
+between the uprights; expanded metal; <i>gabions</i>, cylindrical baskets
+made like hurdles except that the stakes are driven in a circle;
+<i>fascines</i>, bundles of faggots about 10 inches in diameter by 9 feet
+long. The faggots are laid together on a horse or between stakes
+driven in the ground, then &quot;choked,&quot; or bound tightly together, by a
+rope 3 feet 8 inches long with loops at each end, tightened with two
+stiff levers. The bundle is then bound with wire at intervals of two
+feet. The circumference of a fascine should be 25 inches.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_309" id="Page_309"></a>
+<a href="images/plate17.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate17.png" width="85%" alt="Plate 17: Revettments" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p><a name="Page_310" id="Page_310"></a>Capt. Powell of the C.E.F. found during 18 months' service in the
+trenches, that a separate construction for the bottom and firing step
+from that of the parapet made repair much simpler when the trench was
+damaged by shell fire. The upper part of the trench usually suffers
+most, while the bottom section, if unattached, often remains intact
+and the drainage system needs only to be cleared out. If the portion
+above the firing step is one piece with that below, however, the whole
+trench has to be reconstructed.</p>
+
+<p>There is nothing more important than the supports used to keep
+revetting in place. With sods, sand bags, concrete and gabions, a
+proper arrangement in the first place will make other support
+unnecessary.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Sod</span>
+should be placed carefully, with a slope of not more than one
+inch on four, with the vegetation uppermost. This type is least
+affected by rain.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Sand Bags</span>
+should be used like brickwork, laid in alternate headers
+(binders) and stretchers. Their use should be confined as far as
+possible to emergency and repair work, because after a few weeks the
+bags rot and cannot be moved about. If the trench wall has been
+demolished by artillery fire, the particles of cloth make digging out
+the bottom of the trench a very difficult matter.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Concrete Work</span>
+has been used extensively by the Germans, but the
+chips fly like bullets under shell explosion, and the concrete cracks
+and disintegrates in severe weather. It is used in the bottom of
+trenches for drainage and for the firing step.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Gabions</span>
+may be set into the wall of the trench and filled with
+earth, or used at corners to prevent the wearing down of the edge,
+which reduces the protective effect of the trench. Set in at a slight
+angle they will hold the side without further re-enforcement.</p>
+
+<p>With the other forms of revetting some secondary support is required.
+This is usually furnished by sinking <a name="Page_311" id="Page_311"></a>stakes into the bottom of the
+trench and securing their upper ends to a &quot;dead man&quot;&mdash;a stake or log
+sunk in the ground more than three feet away. The tendency is to sink
+the dead men too near to the trench, and to attach too many wires to
+one of them. It is important to sink the stakes at least one foot
+below the bottom of the trench. By digging holes for them instead of
+driving them in directly, the sides of the trench need not be
+disturbed by the concussion of driving the stakes. This is especially
+important in sandy soils. Stakes should be placed about two feet
+apart. Dead men should be buried deeply enough to prevent cutting by
+shell explosions.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Trench Armament.</span>&mdash;A
+few machine guns are set in concealed
+emplacements along the trench to cover important salients. The
+automatic rifle is used over the parapet. Besides these there is the
+rifle grenade and trench mortar. The rifle grenade has a simple
+emplacement. After securing the proper elevation, the butt of the
+rifle is placed between posts or blocks of wood and the muzzle rested
+against a log on the wall of the trench. A trench mortar emplacement
+is dug in the rear wall of the trench, or a shell hole is utilized,
+care being taken to conceal it from aerial observation.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Loopholes.</span>&mdash;Loopholes
+are still much in use for observation, but
+they are employed less and less for firing, as they are difficult to
+conceal from the enemy and almost useless when the enemy is close.
+They should cut the parapet diagonally, not directly to the front, and
+should be concealed by vegetation and by a curtain over the opening
+when they are not in use. Sheet steel plates with small peep holes are
+used on the parapet. They are set up with a slope to the rear to
+deflect bullets.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Trench Bottoms.</span>&mdash;In
+clay or hard soil special arrangements must be
+made for drainage. Where possible the trench should have a convex
+surface and should be smooth. A rough bottom means delay in reliefs,
+and <a name="Page_313" id="Page_313"></a>possible injuries. Where trenches are
+used for long periods board walks should be constructed. Under these
+drains or sink holes can be placed to collect water. A sink hole may
+be constructed by digging a pit filled with small stones, or a barrel
+may be sunk into the ground and filled with stone. Where there is not
+sufficient slope to carry off the water, or at the lowest point of a
+drainage system, a water hole should be dug in front of the trench
+large enough to handle the drainage water.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_312" id="Page_312"></a>
+<a href="images/plate18.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate18.png" width="85%" alt="Plate 18: Trench Bottoms" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Communication Trench (or Boyau).</span>&mdash;Running
+to the rear and joining
+the different parallel resistance trenches are communication trenches
+or boyaux. These are for transportation of men and material as well as
+for communication. Communication trenches should be made wide enough
+to allow travel for men with loads, should be at least seven feet deep
+and as smooth as possible on the bottom. Rough places will delay
+traffic. They are dug with turns every 20 or 30 yards to prevent their
+being swept by gun fire. When boyaux are built by night sharp zig-zag
+corners should be used, or the angles will not be acute and protection
+will be lost. During daylight when the directions can be seen, the
+construction may be a serpentine curve, with no stretch of more than
+30 yards visible from one point.</p>
+
+<p>Boyaux are sometimes used for lateral defence and often emplacements
+for automatic guns are arranged to cover stretches of them. Bombing
+stations are placed near by to protect the guns and to clear the boyau
+of the enemy. At these points the boyau is left straight for a short
+distance in front. Where provision is made for lateral or frontal
+defence by rifle fire, firing steps are constructed. If this is
+inconvenient for movement along the boyau, individual emplacements
+must be made in the side wall for firing. Sentry posts are dug at
+right angles to the boyau.</p>
+
+<p>Arrangements for passage of men moving in opposite directions may be
+made by extending short spurs at the
+<a name="Page_315" id="Page_315"></a>corners, enlarging the boyau at the bends, digging niches or passing
+points here and there, or constructing island traverses with the boyau
+running around on each side.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_314" id="Page_314"></a>
+<a href="images/plate19.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate19.png" width="85%" alt="Plate 19: Types of Boyaux" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>Every boyau should be marked where it meets a trench with a sign
+indicating the place and trench. Without this messengers, reliefs and
+re-enforcements may easily be lost in the maze of trenches.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Latrines</span>
+should be run out about 20 feet from boyaux at points
+directly in rear of lateral trenches. If possible they should be
+placed so that men cannot enter them without passing near the platoon
+leaders. This will prevent men from leaving the front line, under the
+pretense of going to latrines, during bombardments or mining
+operations. The trench leading to a latrine should be constructed like
+a boyau, and the pit should be close to the side nearest the enemy, to
+give the best possible protection from shell fire. There are three
+types of trench latrines: Deep boxes which are covered and have rough
+seats; short straddle trenches or trenches equipped with a single
+horizontal bar, and portable cans, used where the ground or the
+limited space make it impossible to dig pits. These cans should be
+emptied daily into holes behind the trenches, which are covered after
+the cans are emptied into them.</p>
+
+<p>Urinals should be separate from the latrines. They may be either holes
+about three feet deep filled with stone, troughs with a covered pit at
+the end, or portable cans.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Shelters.</span> For
+the protection of men not actually on duty three forms
+of shelters are used. The <i>splinter-proof</i> is a form of light shelter
+whose covering affords protection only against splinters. These are
+usually on the reserve line. About 12 inches to 20 inches of earth
+over a roof of logs or planks will afford protection from splinters
+and shrapnel. Curved sheets of iron may also be used. The <i>deep
+shelter</i> or <i>bomb-proof</i> is a chamber constructed by digging from the
+surface and <a name="Page_317" id="Page_317"></a>constructing a roof. To
+protect against eight-inch shells the top of the chamber should be
+twenty feet below the surface. Heavy beams or sections of railroad
+iron are laid across the roof. Above them is a layer of earth several
+feet thick; then another layer of timber extending to undisturbed
+ground on the sides with concrete, crushed stone, metal, etc., above
+to make a percussion surface for exploding projectiles that penetrate
+the upper layer of earth. This layer fills in the rest of the space to
+the level of the ground.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_316" id="Page_316"></a>
+<a href="images/plate20.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate20.png" width="80%" alt="Plate 20: Shelters" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>Shelters should not exceed six feet in width, but can be of any
+length. This will prevent the crushing in of the roof timber by the
+explosion of a projectile buried in the upper layer of earth. The
+principles of constructing shelters will be considered under
+&quot;Dugouts,&quot; as they are similar for the two types.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Dugouts</span>
+are chambers tunnelled into the ground with twenty feet or
+more of undisturbed earth above them. They are used in the cover
+trenches and sometimes in the first line. Enough of them must be built
+to shelter the garrison of each sector, allowing one man per yard of
+front. They must also be built for machine gun and trench mortar
+detachments.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Sentries</span>
+must be stationed in observation posts which command the
+ground in front of each dugout. They must be connected with the
+dugouts by telephone or speaking tube.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Position.</span>&mdash;Dugouts
+must always be on the side of the trench toward
+the enemy. This prevents flying shells from falling into the
+entrances. They should connect with lateral trenches, not with boyaux,
+as men at the entrance obstruct traffic through the boyaux.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Entrances</span>
+and exits must be well concealed, with not less than five
+feet of head cover. This should be provided with a bursting layer. All
+dugouts must have at least two openings, one on the opposite side of
+the <a name="Page_318" id="Page_318"></a>traverse or angle from the other. It is well to have an exit
+behind the parados leading to a surprise position for a machine gun
+and bombers. All openings must have a sill 6 inches to 8 inches high,
+to prevent water from entering the dugout.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Galleries</span>
+leading to dugouts should be built at an incline of 45
+degrees. Their dimensions should be 2 feet 6 inches by 6 feet. Frames
+are of squared timber. The sill and two side posts should be not less
+than 6 inches square, and the frames in the passageways 2 feet 6
+inches by 4 feet 6 inches. They must be placed at right angles to the
+slope of the gallery, with distance pieces between uprights. In
+treacherous soil the frames rest on sills. Steps in the passageway are
+1 foot broad and 1 foot high.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Bomb-traps</span>,
+extensions of the gallery about 3 feet long, should be
+dug beyond the point where the entrance to the dugout chamber leads
+off from the gallery. These will catch bombs thrown in from the
+surface and protect the chamber from the effects of their explosion.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Interior</span>.
+The standard section is 6 feet by 8 feet, to allow for
+bunks on each side. Frames of 6 by 6 timber spaced 2 feet 6 inches
+apart support the sides and roof. Roof planking should be 2 inches
+thick, and the sides should be covered with 1-&frac12; inch plank or
+corrugated iron. Two shovels and two picks for emergencies should
+always be kept in each dugout. The construction of the chamber should
+be that of a very strong box, so that it will stand strain, if
+necessary, from within as well as from without.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Depots for Supplies</span>
+must be near the headquarters of the platoon,
+company, battalion and regiment. Shelters may be made with ammunition
+boxes set into the side of the trench. Places should be provided for
+the following: Food, ammunition for rifles and auto-rifles, grenades,
+rockets, tools and other supplies. Places must also <a name="Page_319" id="Page_319"></a>be arranged in
+the front line for ammunition, rockets and hand and rifle grenades.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Telephones</span>.
+Communication is established as speedily as possible
+with the various units. In the forward trenches wires do not last long
+under bombardment and fire left open along the side of the trench,
+where quick repairs can be made. All soldiers must be taught to
+respect these wires and to care for them when they are found under
+foot or hanging. Conduits are dug for wires to battalion and
+regimental headquarters, and these are fairly safe from shell fire.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Departure Parallel</span>.
+In preparing for an advance upon the enemy, a
+straight line trench without traverses, and with steps at the end for
+exit to the surface, is built in front of the first line trench. This
+line of departure is generally brought within about 200 yards of the
+hostile line by means of <i>saps</i>, short trenches run out from the front
+line to the new parallel. Since this line of departure can be seen by
+the enemy, it is sometimes better to construct steps in the front line
+trench itself, or when possible to build a <i>Russian sap</i>. This is a
+tunnel very near the ground, which can be broken through at a moment's
+notice when troops are ready to advance.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Machine Gun Emplacements</span>.&mdash;Shell-holes
+with a good field of fire and
+emplacements along boyaux are the best location for machine guns. Few
+guns are placed in the front line, and these only at strong points in
+the line, which command a maximum field of effectiveness. Shell-holes
+may be imitated for machine gun emplacements, but in any case they
+should be connected by underground passage with the trenches. Thus
+when trenches are destroyed by bombardment the machine guns remain
+intact. The field of fire for each machine gun should be carefully
+determined and marked by three stakes, one for the position of the
+gun, the other two for the limits of the field of fire. Using these
+as <a name="Page_321" id="Page_321"></a>guides, the gun can be fired correctly at
+night. During the day it is never left in place nor fired from its
+actual emplacement.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_320" id="Page_320"></a>
+<a href="images/plate21.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate21.png" width="85%" alt="Plate 21: Boyau Arrangement" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Listening Posts</span>.&mdash;These
+stations are usually carried out to the edge
+of the entanglements nearest the enemy. The listening station must be
+large enough for half a squad, and often has an automatic rifle and
+grenade thrower. There should be not more than two posts for each
+battalion. They are not occupied during the day. They are hard to
+defend and easily captured by a raiding party which cuts the wire to
+one of the flanks and comes in from the rear. The boyau leading to the
+post should be zig-zagged. The post itself should be deep enough for
+good head cover.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Wire Entanglements</span>.&mdash;The
+object of the entanglement is not to stop
+completely the advance of the enemy, but to delay him at close range
+under machine gun, auto rifle and rifle fire, and within range of
+grenades and bombs. Entanglements should be concealed as much as
+possible from the enemy's trenches and from aerial observation. If
+possible, they should be placed on a reverse slope or in a dead angle.
+They should be from 50 to 100 yards in front of the trench, so that
+artillery fire directed upon the trench will not be effective on the
+wire. At the same time the wire must not be far enough advanced so
+that the enemy's raiding parties can cut the entanglements.</p>
+
+<p>Wire entanglements are classified as high entanglements, low
+entanglements and loose wire.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">High Entanglements</span>
+are strung on metal or wood posts about four feet
+high, both wire and posts being painted for camouflage. The driving of
+posts must be muffled, and metal screw posts are used when near the
+enemy's line. Posts are placed in two parallel lines, two yards apart,
+spaced alternately so that the posts in one line are opposite the
+middle of the interval in the other.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;"><a name="Page_322" id="Page_322"></a>Tracing Entanglements</span>
+is done by a sergeant followed by two stake
+placers, two holders and two drivers, who in turn are followed by men
+attaching wire. Two men carry each roll of wire, and each pair (there
+are twelve pairs in all) strings one wire. A panel between stakes is
+composed of four strands. Each wire should be wrapped around each
+post. The same arrangement of panels should run between the two lines
+of posts. The entanglements are in three lines about 20 yards apart,
+the nearest being 20 yards from the front line trench. The
+entanglement nearest the enemy should be constructed first, so that
+men always work nearest their own trenches. All wire entanglements
+should be at all points commanded by the flanking fire of machine
+guns. High entanglements (known as abatis) may be made by felling
+trees toward the enemy, and similar entanglements made of brushwood
+are useful in emergency.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Low Entanglements</span>
+are formed of pickets two feet high, 2-&frac12; inches
+in diameter, wired in all directions. Vegetation renders the
+entanglement invisible from the enemy and from aerial observation.
+This type may also be placed in shallow excavations which are
+concealed from the enemy and partly protected from artillery fire.
+Sharpened stakes, with their points hardened by fire, driven obliquely
+into the ground, may also be used.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p><span style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%;">Loose Wire</span>
+in the form of loops of small diameter fastened to
+stakes, or wire laid along the ground and attached at the ends, or
+spirals of barbed wire in racks, is used for entanglements. It is
+reported that this form is coming into considerable use, but the
+details have not been published. Such entanglements are much harder to
+locate by aerial observation.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 45%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;" />
+
+<p>The following are a number of criticisms made by Lieut. Henri Poire of
+the French army, detailed as instructor at Plattsburg, upon the system
+of field works <a name="Page_323" id="Page_323"></a>constructed by the 17th and 18th Provisional Training
+Regiments. The ground was of loose sand, with some gravel at a depth
+of about six feet.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">1. Dimensions of trenches as laid out were not followed.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Bottom of trenches behind firing steps too narrow.</li>
+<li>Firing step too deep. It should never be more than 3 feet 4
+ inches below berm of parapet.</li>
+<li>Parapet much too thin in most cases. It should be at least
+ three feet thick.</li>
+<li>Communication trenches (boyaux) generally too narrow.</li>
+<li>Islands in communication trenches should never be less than
+ 10 x 12 yards&mdash;otherwise one shell will demolish the entire
+ passageway.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>2. Revettment work not well anchored. In some cases too many wires
+from supports fastened to one dead man. Another fault is that dead
+men were not buried deeply enough in the ground, nor far enough back
+from the trench. In one case a dead man (a stake) supported all four
+sides of an island in a communication trench. The destruction of this
+post would have completely blocked every passage around the island.
+Furthermore, dead men rot quickly and tend to break off. It is
+necessary, therefore, to have a number of them, each holding only a
+portion of the weight. All projecting branches and irregularities
+along a trench should be removed by occupying troops.</p>
+
+<p>3. Too many loop-holes. Except for snipers, riflemen and automatic
+riflemen fire over the parapet.</p>
+
+<p>4. Machine gun loop-holes not wide enough. They should not be less
+than 36 inches wide. There must be vegetation planted in front and a
+curtain hung over the <a name="Page_324" id="Page_324"></a>loop-holes to prevent detection. The growing
+plants in front will be easily swept away at the first discharge.</p>
+
+<p>5. Remember never to imitate shell-holes until after a real
+bombardment by the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>6. The dugouts made were never deep enough and afforded no
+protection. In fact it would be far better to have none than to be
+caught inside when a shell exploded in a shallow one, because the
+confinement of the explosion would intensify the effect.</p>
+
+<p>7. Shelters were all too wide. Six feet is the maximum.</p>
+
+<p>The platoon headquarters dugout should be of the same width as the
+trench, not over three feet, but as long as necessary. Company
+headquarters is six feet wide and of whatever depth required.</p>
+
+<p>8. In digging, not enough care was used to conceal the fresh earth
+from the enemy. Make false emplacements to utilize this dirt; also dig
+dummy trenches about one foot deep, leaving the sides sharp so that
+they will show clearly on aerial photographs.</p>
+
+<p>9. In using plants as camouflage, distinct care must be exercised
+not to put growing plants too freely nor to place them where they
+never existed. The actual ground conditions must be copied.</p>
+
+<p>10. Some latrines were not arranged with the stools close beneath
+the wall nearest the enemy. This caused the loss of protection, which
+it is imperative to consider, as many casualties occur here.</p>
+
+<p>11. Too many listening posts. They are easily captured by hostile
+fighting patrols. There should never be more than two listening posts
+to a battalion.</p>
+
+<p>12. The observation stations in many instances had no good field of
+fire or were outlined against the sky on the crest of some rise. The
+site for an observation post should always be placed over the crest
+and have a good field of fire for use in case of attack.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%"><a name="Page_325" id="Page_325"></a>
+<b>Occupation.</b></p>
+
+<p style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%; margin-bottom: .2em; text-indent: 0em;">
+I. Relief in the Trenches.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: upper-alpha; margin-top: .4em">
+<li><span class="sc">The Two Main Classes Of Relief:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>General Relief. Applied to the relief of a whole position
+ manned by a division or more. Executed when large units are
+ going to &quot;full rest&quot; in the rear or being removed from one
+ part of the front to another. Executed in the same way as
+ interior relief; i.e., by successive relief of the
+ battalions involved.</li>
+
+<li>Interior Relief. Applied to the relief of one sector or
+ portion of a sector manned by a brigade or less.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">General Principles Of Relief:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Interior relief is executed about once every six days; more
+ frequently when the stay in the trenches is particularly
+ arduous, less frequently when it is unusually comfortable.</li>
+<li>The battalion is the relieving unit.</li>
+<li>&quot;It is advisable to arrange the relief between units which
+ have friendly relations to one another; e.g., battalions of
+ the same regiment; and, so far as possible, to assign each
+ unit to the same trenches on each relief. This promotes
+ continuity of effort.</li>
+<li>Relief is executed at night; the hour must be varied; secrecy
+ is imperative.</li>
+<li>Prompt execution is essential, to prevent fatigue of the
+ troops and congestion of the boyaux.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">The Mechanism Of Relief:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Reconnaissance, 24 hours in advance, by the captain of each
+ relieving company, accompanied by his platoon leaders and
+ non-commissioned officers. He ascertains:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>The plan of occupation; i.e., the dispositions and
+ duties of the unit to be relieved.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_326" id="Page_326"></a>The shelter accommodations.</li>
+ <li>Work being done and proposed.</li>
+ <li>Condition of the wire and other defences.</li>
+ <li>The available water supply.</li>
+ <li>Artillery support.</li>
+ <li>Communications.</li>
+ <li>The location, amount and condition of stores.</li>
+ <li>Danger points.</li>
+ <li>All available information of the enemy; his habits,
+ location of his snipers, what work he is doing.</li>
+ <li>The ways and means of liaison, both lateral and from
+ front to rear.<br />
+ To the success of this reconnaissance, the closest
+ co-operation between all officers of the companies
+ relieving and relieved, is indispensable.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li>The march from billets to the trenches:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Transportation, by auto-trucks and wagons, is utilized
+ to a point as near the lines as possible, to carry the
+ packs of the men, the auto rifles, extra ammunition and
+ other heavy equipment. When the distance is great the
+ men themselves should be carried by auto-truck; this
+ saves time and fatigue. The men will carry rifles loaded
+ and locked, full cartridge belts, gas masks, and all
+ other lighter equipment, with rations for 24 hours at
+ least. Grenades will be secured in the trenches.<br />
+ Electric torches will be carried by company and platoon commanders.</li>
+<li>The strictest discipline must be maintained. On arrival
+ within sight of the enemy, noise and smoking (or other
+ lights) will be prohibited.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_327" id="Page_327"></a>Guides, from the company to be relieved, will meet the
+ relieving company promptly at a point definitely agreed
+ upon in advance.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li>The march through the boyaux (communicating trenches):<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Distance; often as much three or four miles.</li>
+<li>Order of march: company in single file, captain at the
+ head; each platoon leader at the head of his platoon; a
+ non-commissioned officer at rear of each platoon.</li>
+<li>The column must be kept closed up. Each man must consider
+ himself a connecting file, guiding on the head, and
+ behave accordingly. A guide should accompany the
+ commander of the last platoon.</li>
+<li>Rate of march: roughly, about 40 yards per minute. It
+ takes 250 men about 20 minutes to pass a given point.</li>
+<li>Route and right of way:<br />
+
+The first line and support trenches will never be used
+ as roads. Separate boyaux should, if possible, be
+ assigned to the troops relieving and relieved. In no
+ case will one company cross the path of another. In case
+ of two columns meeting, one moving forward, the other to
+ the rear, the former has the right of way.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+
+<li>No man of the unit in occupation will leave his post until
+ he has actually been relieved and has transmitted all orders
+ and information relative to that post.</li>
+<li>Liaison must be established, immediately on arrival, with the
+ units on the flanks and with headquarters in the rear.
+ Captains must make <a name="Page_328" id="Page_328"></a>sure that their runners are thoroughly
+ acquainted with the routes of communication.</li>
+<li>As soon as relief is accomplished both captains will report
+ that fact to their respective commanders.</li>
+<li>The relieving commander then inspects his trenches. He
+ ascertains that all his watchers are at their posts and that
+ the balance of his men know their posts and duties and are
+ prepared to assume them quickly.</li>
+<li>The duties of the relieved commander are:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+ <li>To turn over his sector thoroughly policed and in good
+ condition as regards its construction and the new work,
+ if any, in progress.</li>
+ <li>To turn over his supplies in good condition and fully
+ accounted for.</li>
+ <li>After reporting the relief, to march his men back to
+ billets as promptly and secretly as possible, in column
+ of files, platoon leaders in the rear of their platoons,
+ a non-commissioned officer and guide at the head of each.</li>
+ <li>On the evening preceding relief, to send his cooks back
+ to billets so that his men may be provided with a hot
+ meal immediately on arrival.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li>If an attack occurs during the march through the boyaux, to or
+ from relief, the company affected occupies the nearest
+ defensive position and at once notifies its battalion
+ commander. If an attack occurs during the actual process of
+ relief, the senior officer present takes command.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="font-weight: bold; font-size: 115%; margin-bottom: .2em; text-indent: 0em;">
+<a name="Page_329" id="Page_329"></a>II. The Stay in the Trenches.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: upper-alpha; margin-top: .4em">
+<li><span class="sc">The Four Objects Of A Trench Commander:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Security of his sector.</li>
+<li>Protection of his troops.</li>
+<li>Constant and accurate observation.</li>
+<li>A continuous offensive.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">His Plan Of Defense:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>General principles of defense:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Arrangement in depth. The most dependable defense is in
+ prearranged counter attacks. The system of defense must
+ react like a helical spring.</li>
+<li>Tenacity of defense.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Each unit must be prepared to hold its post to the last
+ extremity.</li>
+<li>Orders to withdraw will never be obeyed unless
+ unmistakably valid.</li>
+<li>All ground lost must be retaken at once in counter attack
+ by the unit which lost it.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Apportionment of responsibility. Each active segment must
+ have a commander responsible for its defense, upkeep and
+ sanitation, and the discipline and instruction of his men.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Basis: <br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>The plan of defense turned over by the preceding commander.
+ This will usually suffice for the first 24 hours after
+ relief.</li>
+<li>General information of the enemy's lines, dispositions, and
+ intentions, based chiefly on aerial photographs.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">Organization Of Defense:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Allocation of front. (The front of an American battalion will
+ average about 1,000 yards.)<br />
+
+Diagrams: A. The Regiment. B. The Battalion. C. The Company. D.
+ The Platoon. </li>
+
+<li>Distribution of effectives. Determined chiefly by the terrain<a name="Page_330" id="Page_330"></a>
+ and by 3.</li>
+<li>Employment of the several arms:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Machine guns. Crew of 8 men per gun. (Furnished by
+ detachments of a machine gun company.) Located by the
+ infantry commander, in concealed emplacements behind the
+ first line, to deliver successive barrages from flanking
+ positions. Effective range: up to 700 yards.</li>
+<li>Automatic rifles. Crew of 3 men per rifle. Usually posted to
+ enfilade the entanglements of the first line. They
+ concentrate the fire effect of from 7 to 10 riflemen.
+ Effective range: up to 300 yards.</li>
+<li>Rifle Grenadiers. Located near enough to first line to hold
+ the enemy trenches under fire and deliver effective barrages
+ near the mouths of our own communicating trenches. Should be
+ located near observation posts so that their fire can be
+ promptly corrected.</li>
+<li>Trench mortars. Located similarly to (c). Manned by
+ riflemen.</li>
+<li>Bombers. One supply man to each 2 grenadiers. Used for
+ protection of auto-rifles, in counter attacks, for
+ protection of communicating trenches and fighting in close
+ quarters.</li>
+<li>Riflemen. Posted to deliver frontal fire. Grouped according
+ to the plan of counter attacks.</li>
+<li>As many men as possible should be instructed in the use of
+ the enemy's weapons.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">Liaison:</span><a name="Page_331" id="Page_331"></a><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>By telephone. Quickest and most accurate. Maintained
+ between each platoon and its company headquarters, and
+ between adjoining companies. Especially subject to
+ destruction in bombardment. Wireless and ground telegraphy
+ are used only between brigade and division headquarters.</li>
+<li>By runners (&quot;liaison agents&quot;). Five detailed from each
+ company to battalion headquarters; one sent to each
+ adjoining company headquarters; one from each platoon to
+ company headquarters; four or five on duty at each platoon
+ headquarters; five from each machine gun company to
+ battalion headquarters. Messages sent by them should, if
+ practicable, be written and signed, and should be receipted
+ for by the addressee.</li>
+<li>By rockets and flares. Quickest means of liaison with the
+ artillery in rear.</li>
+<li>Domestic (message carrying) grenades.</li>
+<li>Dogs and carrier pigeons. Sent out to the rear from
+ battalion headquarters.</li>
+<li>One searchlight&mdash;with a radius of 3 miles&mdash;is furnished to
+ each company.</li>
+<li>Noise. Klaxon signals, etc., give warning of gas attacks.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">Observation:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Observers: <br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Must be men of infinite patience, keen hearing and
+ eyesight.</li>
+<li>They are located behind the first line in positions
+ combining good view with concealment.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_332" id="Page_332"></a>Each is provided with a panoramic map, made from
+ aeroplane photographs, of the enemy's trenches. On this
+ must be promptly noted every slightest change in the
+ trace, height of parapet, etc., of the enemy's line. Such
+ notes greatly assist in locating machine gun
+ emplacements.</li>
+<li>Each observer will also record in a note book everything
+ of importance, with the time observed.</li>
+<li>A report of changes, with an abstract of observer's
+ notes, is forwarded daily to regimental headquarters.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Watchers (sentinels):<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Stationed, one near the door of each dugout, in the
+ first line, support and intermediate trenches.</li>
+<li>They must be carefully concealed.</li>
+<li>They must watch over the parapet (never through slits or
+ loopholes) so as to have unrestricted view.</li>
+<li>They are furnished with signal rockets and flares for
+ prompt communication with the artillery, and have
+ authority to use them.</li>
+<li>Double sentinels are posted at night.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Listening Posts:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Located, usually in shell holes, just inside the
+ entanglements. Connected with front line by tunnels.
+ Protected from grenades by heavy gratings, when
+ possible, and by concealment.</li>
+<li>Occupied by 4 men (1 in command), in 3 reliefs. Usually
+ occupied only at night unless our trenches are on a
+ reverse slope.</li>
+<li>Chief function is protection of the entanglements.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Microphone Posts.&mdash;Installed usually behind the first line.<a name="Page_333" id="Page_333"></a>
+ Intercept the enemy's telephone and ground-telegraph
+ messages and any loud conversation in his trenches.</li>
+<li>Fixed Patrols.&mdash;Generally remain in shell holes in front of
+ our entanglements.</li>
+<li>Reconnoitering Patrols:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Composed of from 3 to 5 men, commanded by a
+ non-commissioned officer. Sent out at night only.</li>
+<li>The company commander must promptly notify commanders of
+ adjoining companies of the dispatch of these patrols,
+ their time of departure, route and probable time of
+ return.</li>
+<li>Men should be assigned to this duty by roster.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">Trench Work:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Constant battle with the elements, care for drainage,
+ revettment, sanitation and storage.</li>
+<li>Repair of the effects of bombardment.</li>
+<li>New work, for better security, communication and observation.</li>
+<li>Work in the open.<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Usually consists of repair or rearrangement of wire
+ entanglements, digging new listening posts, etc.</li>
+<li>Effected by parties detailed by roster.</li>
+<li>They are guarded by fighting patrols, composed like
+ reconnaissance patrols. Their best protection is in silence
+ and concealment.</li>
+<li>Adjoining companies must be notified of their dispatch,
+ location and probable time of return.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_334" id="Page_334"></a>This work, like all operations conducted outside the
+ protection of the trenches, offers a valuable tonic to the
+ morale.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">Offensive Operations:</span><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Sniping:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Snipers constitute one of the most dependable and
+ productive agencies of attrition.</li>
+<li>The best shots of the company are especially trained and
+ assigned for this duty exclusively.</li>
+<li>They operate in pairs and post themselves to cover any
+ exposed portions of the enemy's trenches, especially his
+ communicating trenches.</li>
+<li>They should be well supplied with all necessary special
+ equipment; <i>e.g.</i>, sniperscopes, telescopic sights, painted
+ headgear, etc.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Mining Operations.</li>
+<li>Raiding:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Object of raids: destruction of the enemy's defenses,
+ disturbance of his morale, collection of prisoners and
+ information.</li>
+<li>The personnel of raiding parties will usually include: A
+ commander and second in command, bayonet men, bombers,
+ engineers, signal men, stretcher bearers. Their numbers and
+ proportions are regulated by the nature and difficulty of
+ the task.</li>
+<li>Co-ordination with the artillery barrage is the essential of
+ their success. The limit of advance, extent of operations,
+ and time of return will therefore be set in advance and
+ rigidly adhered to.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li style="margin-top: .4em"><span class="sc">Role Of The Trench Commander:</span><a name="Page_335" id="Page_335"></a><br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Inspections: The men will be formally inspected twice daily at
+ the general &quot;stand to&quot; by the company commander. Particular
+ attention will be paid to the health of the men, condition of
+ their feet and their clothing. Each man must have at least one
+ pair of dry socks always available. Arms, gas masks, and other
+ equipments will also be rigidly inspected.</li>
+<li>Roster: The company commander will carefully supervise the
+ preparation of the duty roster. An obviously equal distribution
+ of the arduous duties involved in trench life is essential to
+ the maintenance of morale.</li>
+<li>Reports and Records: (Additional to those already required by
+ regulations.) Log Book, Report of Casualties, Wind Report
+ (daily), Bombardment Report (daily), Intelligence Report, which
+ will include observer's notes and changes (twice daily), and a
+ daily report of Work completed and Undertaken.</li>
+<li>&quot;One principle which the trench commander should never forget is
+ the necessity for his frequent presence in the midst of his men.
+ * * * Direct contact with the troops on as many occasions as
+ possible is the most certain way to gain their confidence.&quot;</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Duties of the Company Commander.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>To inspect the sector his company is to occupy, one day in
+ advance of occupying it.</li>
+<li>To assign segments to the platoons.</li>
+<li>To prepare a plan of defense.</li>
+<li>To connect by liaison with the companies on his flanks.</li>
+<li>To have an agent or runner at Battalion Headquarters.<a name="Page_338" id="Page_338"></a></li>
+<li>To prepare a plan for counter attacks.</li>
+<li>To report to the Battalion Commander when his company has taken
+ up its position:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Its situation.</li>
+<li>Security.</li>
+<li>Liaison.</li>
+<li>State of position left by predecessor.</li>
+<li>Defense of sector.</li>
+<li>Plan of counter attacks.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>To inspect the trenches frequently to see that everything is in
+ proper condition and that his men are in jubilant spirits.</li>
+<li>To have platoon guides report to Battalion Headquarters on the
+ date for the relief of his company and act as guides to the
+ company that relieves him.</li>
+<li>To keep a special log book in which the following are kept:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Work completed by his unit.</li>
+<li>Work under way.</li>
+<li>Work proposed.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Turn over to his successor:<br />
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;">
+<li>Measures taken for security.</li>
+<li>Plan of attacks.</li>
+<li>Plan of counterattacks.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Have one officer on duty at all times.</li>
+<li>&quot;Stand to&quot; will take place one (1) hour before daylight, and all
+ available men will attend. There will be a thorough inspection.
+ Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing position of every
+ man will be tested to see if he can hit the bottom of our wire.
+ Gas helmets will be inspected.</li>
+<li>Time table&mdash;allot hours of work, rest and meals.</li>
+<li>Supplies&mdash;make timely requisitions for them&mdash;<a name="Page_339" id="Page_339"></a>be especially
+ watchful about meals and rations&mdash;have no delays.</li>
+<li>To have one watcher and one relief on duty near Company
+ Headquarters at all times.</li>
+<li>To get a good field of fire to the front and cover the sectors
+ of each company on flanks.</li>
+<li>(Subject to change)<br />
+ <ul style="list-style-type: none;">
+ <li>Red Rocket-Artillery Barrage wanted.</li>
+ <li>White Rocket Gas Attack.</li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+<li>To report twice daily all changes in wind direction.</li>
+<li>To report to Battalion Commander when relieved.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 60%;">
+<a name="Page_336" id="Page_336"></a><a href="images/image-3.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/image-3.png" width="80%" alt="diagram of trenches1" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 25%;" />
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 60%;">
+<a name="Page_337" id="Page_337"></a><a href="images/image-4.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/image-4.png" width="80%" alt="diagram of trenches2" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Duties of Platoon Leaders as Officers on Duty with Company.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Report with old officer at company headquarters.</li>
+<li>Make frequent inspections of all trenches occupied by company.</li>
+<li>Visit each Listening Post; at least once during tour of duty.</li>
+<li>Visit all sentinels and receive their reports.</li>
+<li>See that one non-commissioned officer per platoon is on duty.</li>
+<li>Receive reports of non-commissioned officers after they have
+ posted sentinels.</li>
+<li>At end of tour hand over to new officer all orders, a report of
+ work in progress, and any useful information.</li>
+<li>Report with new officer at Company Headquarters on completion of
+ tour.</li>
+<li>To report anything unusual to Company Headquarters.</li>
+<li>To send dead and wounded to dressing station trenches.</li>
+<li>To send patrols to front at night.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Duties of Platoon Leaders.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Must accompany company commander on inspection of trenches one
+ day previous to occupying them.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_340" id="Page_340"></a>Make necessary reliefs for his men in his segment.</li>
+<li>Make a plan of defense and counterattack for his position or
+ approve the one left there.</li>
+<li>Establish sniping posts and arrange reliefs.</li>
+<li>Establish Listening Posts and arrange reliefs.</li>
+<li>Assign non-commissioned officer to duty with platoon and arrange
+ relief.</li>
+<li>Instruct every man as to his place in case of attack.</li>
+<li>Establish liaison with platoons on both flanks; and one runner
+ to Company Headquarters.</li>
+<li>Have one platoon guide report to Company Headquarters on day his
+ platoon is to be relieved.</li>
+<li>On completion of posting his platoon, report to his company
+ commander.</li>
+<li>Turn over to platoon relieving him all orders and data
+ pertaining to his position.</li>
+<li>Be especially attentive to rigid military discipline; <i>i.e.</i>,
+ every soldier to be neat; equipment must be clean at all times;
+ to render the required salute when not observing or firing at
+ the enemy.</li>
+<li>Have one non-commissioned officer on duty at all times.</li>
+<li>To inspect rifles, equipment and latrines twice daily.
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+<li>To have at least one latrine in working order at all times.</li>
+<li>To have a sentry on duty at each platoon dugout at all
+ times.</li>
+<li>Establish one Observation Post in daytime.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li><b>In Front Line Trenches:</b>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+<li>No smoking or talking to be allowed at night.</li>
+<li>Every man to wear his equipment except packs.</li>
+<li>Have rifle within reaching distance.</li>
+<li>All reliefs to be within kicking distance of soldier on
+ duty.</li>
+</ol>
+</li>
+<li>Inspect at &quot;Stand to&quot; and report results to Company
+ Headquarters, especially if each man has <a name="Page_341" id="Page_341"></a>170 rounds of
+ ammunition and necessary grenades and bombs.</li>
+<li>To be especially attentive to sanitation and care of the men's
+ feet.</li>
+<li>To have one (1) watcher and relief on duty at all times near
+ platoon dugouts.</li>
+<li>To get a good field of fire to his front and to cover the sector
+ of each platoon on his flanks.</li>
+<li>Make requisition for material.</li>
+<li>To see that all of his men are properly fed.</li>
+<li>Report to company commander when relieved.</li>
+<li>Must know what every man is doing at all times.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Duties of Non-Commissioned Officer on Duty (Each Platoon).</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>To make frequent inspections of the position occupied by his
+ platoon.</li>
+<li>To be responsible that each soldier knows his duties.</li>
+<li>To report anything of special importance to officer on duty.</li>
+<li>On being relieved to report with the new non-commissioned
+ officer to the officer on duty.</li>
+<li>After posting sentinels to report &quot;All is Well&quot; to officer on
+ duty.</li>
+<li>Explain to his sentinel his duties, the position of Section and
+ Platoon Commanders and of sentries on either side; and to
+ caution his sentries when friendly patrols are out, the probable
+ time and place of return.</li>
+<li>Bayonets will always be fixed in front line trenches.</li>
+<li>At night time to have double sentinel.</li>
+<li>To see that each sentinel in daytime has a periscope.</li>
+<li>Rifles to be loaded; no cartridge shall be in the chamber
+ except when necessary to shoot.</li>
+<li>To report to Company Headquarters any change in direction of
+ wind.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_342" id="Page_342"></a>Patrols.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Usual orders about patrols.</li>
+<li>Always go out at night via the Listening Post; tell the men in
+ the Listening Post your mission and probable time of return.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Sentinels.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>To sound Klaxon horn on approach of gas attack.</li>
+<li>To report immediately to non-commissioned officer on duty any
+ change in direction of wind.</li>
+<li>In cold weather to work bolt frequently to keep it from
+ freezing.</li>
+<li>At night to challenge only in case of necessity, and then only
+ in a low tone. Challenge &quot;<i>Hands up.</i>&quot;</li>
+<li>Number of posts depends on assumed nearness of enemy and local
+ conditions. Normally one per platoon by day and three double
+ sentinels per platoon at night.</li>
+<li>Relief kept close at hand. Report &quot;All is Well,&quot; or otherwise,
+ when officer passes.</li>
+<li>Screened from observation.</li>
+<li>Remain standing unless height of parapet renders this
+ impossible.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Machine Guns.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Non-commissioned officer and one (1) watcher on duty at all
+ times.</li>
+<li>Except in emergency they will not be fired from their regular
+ emplacements.</li>
+<li>Unless emplacements are well concealed, guns will not be mounted
+ except between evening and morning &quot;stand to.&quot;</li>
+<li>Before dusk each gun will be sighted on some particular spot
+ either in front of or behind the enemy's line.</li>
+<li>Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_343" id="Page_343"></a>Snipers.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal;">
+<li>Sniping Post consists of one (1) observer and one (1) rifleman
+ with relief of two (2) men posted close by.</li>
+<li>Sniping post should be well concealed.</li>
+<li>Daily report from each post, of
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .1em">
+<li>Any work done by enemy.</li>
+<li>Enemy seen; place, uniform, apparent age, physique,
+ equipment.</li>
+<li>Any other information of interest.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Sniper to be appointed from each section.</li>
+<li>Must be intelligent, alert, good scout, good shot, courageous.</li>
+<li>Snipers should spend 24 hours in trenches with those of command
+ which theirs is to relieve, before relief takes place.</li>
+<li>No night work required of these men since they must be
+ constantly on the alert during the day.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_344" id="Page_344"></a>Organization of a Platoon&mdash;Rifle Company&mdash;Table No. 7</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">PLATOON</p>
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;">Platoon Headquarters<br />
+1 Lieut.<br />
+1 Sgt.<br />
+4 Privates.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="ctr">
+<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="70%" summary="Organization of a Platoon">
+<tr>
+<td width="18%">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;1st Section</td>
+<td width="18%">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;2d Section</td>
+<td width="18%">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;3d Section</td>
+<td width="16%">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;4th Section</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Hand Bombers</td>
+<td>Rifle Grenadiers</td>
+<td>Riflemen</td>
+<td>Auto-Riflemen</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>3 Teams, each</td>
+<td>1 Team of</td>
+<td>1 Sgt.</td>
+<td>1 Sgt. and 2 Corps.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>1 Leader</td>
+<td>6 Grenadiers</td>
+<td rowspan="2">2 Squads of <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;8 men each</td>
+<td>4 Teams, each</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>1 Thrower</td>
+<td rowspan="3">3 Carriers <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;(May be <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;subdivided)</td>
+<td>1 Gunner</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>1 Carrier</td>
+<td rowspan="2">4 Extra <br />&nbsp;&nbsp;riflemen<a name="FNanchor_R_18" id="FNanchor_R_18"></a>
+ <a class="noline" href="#Footnote_R_18"><span style="font-size: 80%;">[R]</span></a></td>
+<td>2 Carriers</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>1 Scout</td>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>2 Corps.</td>
+<td>2 Corps.</td>
+<td>1 Sgt. and 2 Cpls.</td>
+<td>1 Sgt. and 2 Cpls.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>4 Pvts. 1st Cl.</td>
+<td>1 Pvt. 1st Cl.</td>
+<td>6 Pvts. 1st Cl.</td>
+<td>4 Pvts. 1st Cl.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>6 Pvts.</td>
+<td>6 Pvts.</td>
+<td>12 Pvts.</td>
+<td>8 Pvts.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>Total&mdash;12</td>
+<td>Total&mdash;9</td>
+<td>Total&mdash;21</td>
+<td>Total&mdash;15</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="note"><p><a name="Footnote_R_18" id="Footnote_R_18"></a><a class="noline" href="#FNanchor_R_18">[R]</a> Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With
+Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.</p></div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 105%;">
+<a name="Page_345" id="Page_345"></a><i>Suggested Organization of Platoon in Close Order and for
+Administration.</i></p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="ctr" style="text-align: center;">
+<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="90%" summary="Platoon in Close Order">
+<tr>
+<td width="15%">1st Squad</td>
+<td width="14%">2d Squad</td>
+<td width="14%">3d Squad</td>
+<td width="14%">4th Squad</td>
+<td width="14%">5th Squad</td>
+<td width="14%">6th Squad</td>
+<td width="15%">7th Squad</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td valign="top">Bomber Section <br />(less 1 bomber <br />team)</td>
+<td valign="top">&frac12; Auto Rifle <br />Section <br />i.e., Cpl and <br />2 teams</td>
+<td valign="top">&frac12; Auto Rifle <br />Section <br />i.e., Cpl and <br />2 teams</td>
+<td valign="top">Grenadier <br />Section</td>
+<td valign="top">1 Rifle Squad</td>
+<td valign="top">1 Rifle Squad</td>
+<td valign="top">1 Bomber Team <br />plus 4 extra <br />riflemen<a name="FNanchor_S_19" id="FNanchor_S_19"></a>
+ <a class="noline" href="#Footnote_S_19"><span style="font-size: 80%;">[S]</span></a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>1 Corp</td>
+<td>1 Cpl.</td>
+<td>1 Cpl.</td>
+<td>1 Cpl.</td>
+<td>1 Cpl.</td>
+<td>1 Cpl.</td>
+<td>1 Cpl.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>7 Pvts.</td>
+<td>6 Pvts.</td>
+<td>6 Pvts.</td>
+<td>7 Pvts.</td>
+<td>7 Pvts.</td>
+<td>7 Pvts.</td>
+<td>7 Pvts.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+<td>(Extra Cpl. in <br />File Closers)</td>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+<td>&nbsp;</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 2em;">Right Guide&mdash;Automatic Gun Sgt. &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Left Guide&mdash;Rifle Sgt.<br />
+Chief of Platoon&mdash;Lieut. File closer or acting 1st Sgt.&mdash;Sgt.-Asst.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 1em; margin-left: 2em;">Note.&mdash;If desirable the 4 mechanics and 4 privates (signalmen) who are
+not assigned to platoons regularly, can be used to fill the blank
+files in the 2d and 3d squads.</p>
+
+<div class="note"><p><a name="Footnote_S_19" id="Footnote_S_19"></a><a href="#FNanchor_S_19">[S]</a> Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With
+Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.</p></div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_346" id="Page_346"></a>Deployments.</p>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">General Principles:</p>
+
+<p>(a) The following plans for deployment are not to be regarded as
+rigid. The positions of the various squads depends upon tactical
+considerations.</p>
+
+<p>(b) The platoon in attack will be used only for accomplishment of
+its offensive mission. Moppers-up, additional carriers, etc., will be
+furnished by other organizations.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: upper-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Being in line, to form single skirmish line to the front.
+
+ <ul style="list-style-type: none;">
+ <li>1. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right (left or
+ center). 2. March.</li>
+ <li>Executed as described in pars. 206 and 208, i.d.r.</li>
+ <li>Normal interval to be ordered, 4 or 5 paces.</li>
+ <li>This formation to be regarded as exceptional.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+</li>
+<li>Being in column of squads, to form single skirmish line. Same
+ command as in (A). Executed as described in para 207 and 208,
+ i.d.r.</li>
+<li>Being in line to form double skirmish line to the front (<i>i.e.</i>,
+ to take the &quot;Formation for Attack&quot; in the diagram.)
+
+<ul style="list-style-type: none; margin-right: 10em;">
+<li>1. In two lines. 2. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right
+ (left or center). 3 March.</li>
+<li>Executed according to the principles in pars. 206 and 208,
+ i.d.r., except that at the command March the even-numbered
+ squads stand fast while the odd-numbered squads form the
+ first line by deploying on the base squad as in the case of
+ deployment in single line. Similarly, the even-numbered
+ squads form the second line by deploying on their base squad
+ after the odd-numbered squads have moved forward about 20
+ paces.</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_347" id="Page_347"></a><a href="images/image-5.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/image-5.png" width="95%" alt="Normal Battle Formation in Attack" /></a>
+</div>
+<br />
+</li>
+<li>Being in line or column of squads to deploy in line of squad<a name="Page_348" id="Page_348"></a>
+ columns in one or two lines. Use same commands and execute in
+ same manner as described in (A), (B), (C), except that in the
+ command &quot;Squad Columns&quot; is substituted for &quot;as skirmishers,&quot;
+ and in the execution each corporal on approaching the line
+ forms his squad in &quot;squad column&quot; instead of deploying it as
+ skirmishers.
+
+<br />
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a href="images/plate22.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate22.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 22: Company in Columns of Squads" /></a>
+</div>
+<br />
+<i>E.G.</i> 1. In two lines&mdash;2. Squad columns (so many) paces, Guide
+ right (left or center)&mdash;3. March.<br />
+
+This gives a &quot;Formation of Approach&quot; as the French describe it,
+ or as an &quot;Artillery Formation&quot; as the British describe it; which
+ may be used directly or indirectly (by means of echelons) for
+ advancing when not liable to infantry fire.</li>
+<li>Being in above formation to vary the intervals.<a name="Page_349" id="Page_349"></a><br />
+1. Squad columns (so many) paces, 2. Guide right (left or
+ center). Executed in the same manner as similar movement
+ described in i.d.r. 126.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+General Principles of the Platoon Formation in the Assault of
+Fortified Positions in Trenches. (Points of Resistance, Etc.).</p>
+
+<p>1. The platoon is now a complete fighting unit within itself. It
+contains riflemen, bombers, auto-riflemen, and rifle grenadiers. With
+this combination the platoon commander has, under his immediate
+control, all the different kinds of fire available to the infantry.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a href="images/plate23.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate23.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 23: Sketch of Infantry Platoon" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+
+<p><a name="Page_350" id="Page_350"></a>2. This formation was developed so that the platoon commander could
+meet the different contingencies that arise from being opposed by
+points of resistance in a &quot;Trench-to-Trench&quot; attack or the
+&quot;Semi-Open-Warfare;&quot; that is the secondary stage of a push.</p>
+
+<p>3. When strong opposition develops, the principle on which the platoon
+works is to develop or surround the point of resistance, the platoon
+acting either alone or in conjunction with neighboring platoons. The
+four different kinds of fire are then used to their best advantages to
+silence or diminish the enemy fire thus making this manoeuvre
+possible.</p>
+
+<p>4. In order to obtain success it is first necessary to impress on the
+officers and men that the primary advantage of the entire formation is
+its mobility, and the scope it gives to the initiative of the platoon
+section, squad and team leaders. In studying this formation it is
+first necessary to free the mind of all parade ground formations and
+to feel that there is nothing to hinder any desired movement of the
+sections, so long as the movement is not contrary to the operation
+orders for the attack. Until this idea is grasped thoroughly no
+progress can be made.</p>
+
+<p>5. There is no typical or &quot;normal formation.&quot; The one given at the
+beginning of this instruction here is a drill or parade ground
+formation, and while it may be used under actual conditions of
+warfare, it is simply utilized at this time as a basis from which the
+necessary variations may be worked out. In an attack, every platoon in
+the battalion may use a different formation.</p>
+
+<p>6. The formation to be used is decided upon after a careful study of
+air-photographs. As far as possible all points of resistance are
+picked out and the best method of meeting the situations that may
+arise are then considered. The platoon is then arranged so as to best
+facilitate this manoeuvre. It must be realized that there will be
+other platoons on the flanks and in the rear, <a name="Page_351" id="Page_351"></a>and their dispositions
+must be studied with a view of their probable bearing on the points of
+resistance.</p>
+
+<p>7. In order to know how to get results it is first necessary to have a
+very clear conception of the uses and limitations of the different
+weapons in the platoon.</p>
+
+<p>Briefly they can be used in the following ways:</p>
+
+ <ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em;">
+ <li>The auto-rifles open up a point blank fire on the strong point as
+soon as it is discovered. Their function is to either draw the fire of
+the enemy or to silence him by a hit or forcing him to take cover.
+Their work may be compared to the work of the field artillery in a
+barrage. They cover the movement of the infantry across the open. The
+auto rifles so place themselves at such points that their line of fire
+will in no way interfere with the manoeuvre of the commander of the
+platoon or the remaining units of the platoon interfere with the
+effective use of the auto rifles of the platoon.</li>
+
+<li>The rifle grenadiers advance at once just as close as possible,
+but at all costs to within effective grenade range. They then take
+cover in shell holes, trenches, etc., and open up a rapid fire. They
+are the long distance howitzers of the platoon and are very valuable.
+By a well placed grenade the whole resistance may be overcome. This
+section usually works around a flank.</li>
+
+<li>The riflemen work up by squad as far as practicable and to a
+flank, when an opportunity presents itself, the squad opens fire in
+such a manner as to protect advance of other squads or teams.</li>
+
+<li>The bombers endeavor to get well around behind the enemy and
+taking advantage of cover get to within bomb range. They may be
+compared to the close range howitzers or trench mortars.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>When all four sections are in action at proper ranges, the opposition
+can probably last but a short time, and as soon as the machine guns
+cease fire the platoon, especially the riflemen, go after the
+remainder of the garrison with the bayonet.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 80%;">
+<a href="images/plate26.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate26.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 26: Platoon from Line to Double Extended Skirmish Line" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 70%;">
+<a name="Page_352" id="Page_352"></a><a href="images/plate27.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate27.png" width="100%" alt="Plate 27: Section Columns Fully Extended" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p><a name="Page_353" id="Page_353"></a>It may happen that the barrage put up will so demoralize the enemy
+that the riflemen can advance before his machine guns are even put out
+of action. This operation allows the rifle men to get in with the
+bayonet, if the resistance is not sooner overcome.</p>
+
+<p>When the different sections are getting to their places, they usually
+find enough shell holes or old trenches to obtain cover. They should
+not move as entire sections, but as small groups of three or four at a
+time.</p>
+
+<p>8. After the encircling movement has once begun, the platoon commander
+loses all control, and the action is then conducted by the section,
+squad or team leaders. They must be trained to act on their own
+initiative, as further orders are rarely practicable.</p>
+
+<p>The resistance will finally be overcome, either because the enemy will
+retreat or surrender under the menace of encirclement, or by the
+losses caused by our fire or by the attack at close range of our
+bombers or else by the final assault with the bayonet led by our
+riflemen.</p>
+
+<p>It must be remembered that under an artillery barrage it is never
+possible to issue verbal orders, so the sections must be trained to
+understand and obey the arm signals of its officer, or more often to
+work without orders.</p>
+
+<p>9. A sequence of command must be arranged in each section, squad and
+team down to the last man.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Remarks Regarding The Forming Of Wave From Close Order.</p>
+
+<p>The sketch of deployment attached is an illustration of one of the
+formations that may be adopted. It is given as an example. Any other
+wave formation may be practically as easily formed up. The platoon
+commander simply calls out the squads he wants in the first line.</p>
+
+<p><i>It must not be imagined that this transition from close order to
+extended is done in the field when actually under fire or as a result
+of surprise.</i></p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_354" id="Page_354"></a>Before the platoon goes into an attack it is all arranged so as to
+allow it to be changed with ease from column of sections at extended
+intervals (formation for approach) to the wave formation decided upon.
+This arrangement is made when the platoon is miles to the rear.</p>
+
+<p>When the change is made from column of sections to the wave formation
+there must be no crossing of sections as they go to their places.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Some of the Many Questions a Platoon Commander Should Ask Himself on
+Taking Over a Trench, <br />and at Frequent Intervals Afterwards.</p>
+
+<p>1. <i>I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all
+circumstances, and to do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I
+doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as</i>
+<span class="sc">Offensive</span> <i>as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle
+grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?</i></p>
+
+<p>2. Do I connect up all right with the platoons on my right and left?
+Do I know the position of my nearest support?</p>
+
+<p>3. Does every man know his firing position and can he fire from it,
+over the parapet, at the foot of the wire?</p>
+
+<p>4. Where are my S.A.A. and bomb stores? Are they under cover from the
+weather?</p>
+
+<p>5. Do all my men know their duties in case of attack&mdash;bombers
+especially?</p>
+
+<p>6. Are all my rifles and ammunition clean and in good order? Have all
+the men got rifle covers? Are the magazines kept charged?</p>
+
+<p>7. Is my wire strong enough?</p>
+
+<p>8. Are my parapets and traverses bullet-proof everywhere?</p>
+
+<p>9. Where are my sally ports?</p>
+
+<p>10. Where are my listening posts? Are my listening patrols properly
+detailed?</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_355" id="Page_355"></a>11. What points in front particularly require patrolling at night?</p>
+
+<p>12. Are my sentries in their right places? Are they properly posted by
+N.C.O's.? Have they received proper instructions?</p>
+
+<p>13. Have I got the S.O.S. message in my pocket, and do I know the
+orders regarding its use?</p>
+
+<p>14. Are the trenches as clean and as sanitary as they might be? Are
+live rounds and cases properly collected? Are my bags for refuse and
+empties in position?</p>
+
+<p>15. Are my trenches as dry as I might make them?</p>
+
+<p>16. Am I doing all I can to prevent my men getting &quot;Trench Feet&quot;?</p>
+
+<p>17. How can I prevent my parapets and dugouts from falling in?</p>
+
+<p>18. Have I got at least one loophole, from which men can snipe, for
+every section? Have I pointed out to Section Commanders the portion of
+the enemy's trench they are responsible for keeping under fire, and
+where his loopholes are?</p>
+
+<p>19. Have my men always got their smoke helmets on and are they in good
+order?</p>
+
+<p>20. Are the arrangements, in case of gas attack, complete and known to
+all ranks?</p>
+
+<p>21. Are the orders as to wearing equipment carried out?</p>
+
+<p>22. Are my men using wood from the defences as firewood?</p>
+
+<p>23. Are my men drinking water from any but authorized sources?</p>
+
+<p>24. <i>I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all
+circumstances, and I do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I
+doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as</i>
+<span class="sc">Offensive</span> <i>as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle
+grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?</i></p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_356" id="Page_356"></a>Defensive Measure Against Gas Attacks.</p>
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">
+I. Introduction.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">A. General Considerations:</p>
+
+<p>In the absence of suitable means of protection the poison gases used
+in war are extremely deadly and the breathing of only very small
+quantities of them may cause death or serious injury. This being the
+case, it is essential that not the slightest time should be lost in
+putting on the anti-gas device on the gas alarm being given.</p>
+
+<p>It cannot be too strongly insisted on that the measures to meet
+hostile gas attacks afford <i>perfect protection</i>, and if they are
+carried out properly no one will suffer from gas poisoning.</p>
+
+<p>The whole basis of protecting troops against gas lies (a) in keeping
+the appliances in perfect working order; (b) in learning to adjust
+them rapidly under all conditions, and (c) in ensuring that every man
+is given immediate warning. These results can only be attained:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>By frequent and thorough inspection of all protective
+ appliances.</li>
+<li>By thorough instruction and training in their use.</li>
+<li>By every man understanding and complying with all standing
+ orders on the subject of defense against gas.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>If these are effectually carried out, there is nothing to fear from
+hostile gas attacks. Officers must impress this on their men, as an
+important object of all anti-gas instruction should be to inspire
+complete confidence in the efficacy of the methods which are adopted.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">B. Nature of Gas Attacks:</p>
+
+<p class="sc">(1) Gas Clouds:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em;">
+This method of making a gas attack is entirely dependent on the
+direction of the wind. The gas is carried up to the trenches
+compressed in steel cylinders. <a name="Page_357" id="Page_357"></a>These are dug in at the bottom of the
+trench and connected with pipes leading out over the parapet. When the
+valves of the cylinders are opened, the gas escapes with a hissing
+sound, which, on a still night, can frequently be heard at a
+considerable distance. It mixes with the air and is carried by the
+wind towards the opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes forward.
+A continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, the color of which
+may vary:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em; margin-right: 10em;">
+<li>Because of the weather conditions. In very dry air it may be
+ almost transparent and slightly greenish in color, while in
+ damp weather it forms a white cloud.</li>
+<li>Because it may be mixed with smoke of any color.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>A cloud attack can only take place when there is a steady but not too
+strong wind blowing from the enemy's lines towards our own. A wind
+between 4 and 8 miles an hour is the most likely condition. An 8-mile
+wind will carry the gas cloud twice as quickly as a man walks rapidly.</p>
+
+<p>Gas attacks may occur at any time of the day, but are most likely to
+be made during the night or in the early morning.</p>
+
+<p>Gentle rain is without appreciable effect on a gas attack, but strong
+rain washes down the gas. Fogs have hardly any effect and may, in
+fact, be taken advantage of to make an attack unexpectedly. Water
+courses and ponds are no obstruction to a gas cloud.</p>
+
+<p>The gas used by the enemy is generally a mixture of chlorine and
+phosgene, both of which are strongly asphyxiating. The gases are
+heavier than air, and therefore, tend to flow along the ground and
+into trenches, shelters, craters and hollows. The gas cloud may flow
+round slight eminences, thus leaving patches of country which remain
+free from gas.</p>
+
+<p>Chlorine and phosgene strongly attack the mucous membranes of the
+respiratory organs, causing bad <a name="Page_358" id="Page_358"></a>coughing. In strong concentrations of
+gas, or by longer exposure to low concentrations, the lungs are
+injured and breathing becomes more and more difficult and eventually
+impossible, so that the unprotected man dies of suffocation. Death is
+sometimes caused by two or three breaths of the gas. Even when very
+dilute, chlorine can be recognized by its peculiar smell, which is
+like chloride of lime, but stronger and more irritating.</p>
+
+<p>Both chlorine and phosgene also exert a strongly corrosive action on
+metals, so that the metal parts of arms must be carefully protected by
+greasing them.</p>
+
+<p>The speed with which the gas cloud approaches depends entirely on the
+wind velocity. Gas attacks have been made with wind velocities varying
+from 3 to 20 miles per hour, <i>i.e.</i>, from 1-&frac12; to 10 yards per
+second. In a 9-mile wind, the gas would reach trenches 100 yards
+distant in 20 seconds.</p>
+
+<p>Gas attacks have been made on fronts varying from 1 to 5 miles; their
+effects at points up to 8 miles behind the front trenches have been
+sufficiently severe to make it necessary to wear helmets.</p>
+
+<p class="sc" style="margin-top: .1em; margin-bottom: .1em;">(2) Gas Projectiles:</p>
+
+<p>The use of these is not entirely dependent on the direction of the
+wind. In gas projectiles such as shells, hand grenades, and trench
+mortar bombs, a part or the whole of the explosive charge is replaced
+by a liquid which is converted into gas by the explosion. The
+explosive force and noise of detonation of these projectiles is less
+than that of the ordinary kind, and a large number of them are usually
+discharged into a comparatively small space. After the explosion, the
+irritant chemicals form a small gas cloud, though some may sink to the
+ground and remain active for a considerable time.</p>
+
+<p>For using gas shells, the best condition is calm, or a wind of low
+velocity.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_359" id="Page_359"></a>Gas projectiles can be used in all types of country. Woods, bushes,
+corn fields and clumps of buildings may hold the gas active for a
+considerable time.</p>
+
+<p>Two kinds of shell gases are used by the enemy, viz., lachrymators,
+which mainly affect the eyes, and poison gases, which may affect the
+eyes and are just as deadly as the gases used in the form of clouds.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(1) Tear, Or Lachrymatory Shells:</p>
+
+<p>These shells on explosion drive the liquid chemical which they contain
+into the air as a mist. They cause the eyes to water strongly and
+thereby gradually put men out of action.</p>
+
+<p>Their actual smell may be slight. Large concentrations of lachrymators
+begin to affect the lungs and cause sickness, coughing and general
+irritation.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(2) Poison Shells:</p>
+
+<p>Besides the comparatively harmless lachrymators the enemy also uses
+projectiles which contain a gas, the action of which is very similar
+to that of phosgene. Because of their slight detonation, these shells
+are liable to be mistaken for blinds, but they emit large quantities
+of a gas which attacks the lungs strongly and is very dangerous, and
+even in slight cases may cause serious after effects.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(3) Smoke:</p>
+
+<p>The enemy may make use of smoke, either in the form of a cloud or
+emitted from shells and bombs. Smoke may be used with gas or between
+gas clouds; it may also be used alone to distract attention from a
+real discharge of gas, to cover the advance of infantry, or merely as
+a false gas attack.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(4) Mine And Explosion Gases:</p>
+
+<p>The poisonous gases which occur in mines, and which are formed in
+large quantities when high explosive goes off in an enclosed space,
+<i>e.g.</i>, from a direct hit in a shelter, or on the explosion of a
+charge in a mine, are not protected against by the ordinary anti-gas
+<a name="Page_360" id="Page_360"></a>appliances. The chief of these gases is carbon monoxide. Protection
+against such gases will not be considered in these notes.</p>
+
+<p>Officers are held responsible that all the anti-gas appliances for
+protecting their men are maintained in perfect condition, and that all
+ranks under their command are thoroughly trained in the use of these
+appliances and in all other measures which may affect their safety
+against gas.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Summary of Protective Measures:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+<li>Provision to each man of individual protective devices.</li>
+<li>Arrangement for the inspection of those appliances and training
+ in their use and instruction in all other measures of gas
+ defense.</li>
+<li>Provision of protected and gas-proof shelters.</li>
+<li>Weather observations to determine periods when the conditions
+ are favorable to a hostile gas attack.</li>
+<li>Arrangement of signals and messages; for immediate warning of a
+ gas attack.</li>
+<li>Provision of appliances for clearing gas from trenches and
+ shelters.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">C. Protection of Shelters:</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(1) Methods Of Protection:</p>
+
+<p>Protection of dugouts, cellars, buildings, etc., is given if all
+entrances are closed by well-fitting doors or by blankets sprayed with
+hypo. solution. Practically no gas passes through a wet blanket, and
+the protection depends on getting a good joint at the sides and bottom
+of a doorway, so as to stop all draughts. This can be effected by
+letting the blanket rest on battens, fixed with a slight slope,
+against the door frame. The blanket should overlap the outer sides and
+a fold should lie on the ground at the bottom. A pole is fastened to
+the blanket, which allows the latter to be rolled up on the frame and
+causes it to fall evenly.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_361" id="Page_361"></a>Wherever possible, particularly where there is likely to be movement
+in and out of the shelter, two blankets fitted in this way but sloping
+in opposite directions should be provided. There should be an interval
+of at least three feet between the two frames, and the larger this
+vestibule is made the more efficient is the dugout.</p>
+
+<p>When not in use, the blankets should be rolled up and held so that
+they can be readily released, and should be sprayed occasionally with
+water or a little Vermorel sprayer solution.</p>
+
+<p>If the blankets became stiff from a deposit of chemicals, they should
+be sprayed with water.</p>
+
+<p>All ranks must be taught how to use gas-proof dugouts, <i>e.g.</i>, how to
+enter a protected doorway quickly, replacing the blanket immediately,
+and carrying in as little outside air as possible.</p>
+
+<p>The protection afforded by these means is just as complete against
+lachrymatory gases as it is against cloud gas and poisonous shell
+gases.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(2) Shelters Which Should Be Protected:</p>
+
+<p>The following should always be protected:</p>
+
+<p>Medical aid posts and advanced dressing stations; Company, Battalion
+and Brigade Headquarters; signal shelters and any other place where
+work has to be carried out during a gas attack.</p>
+
+<p>In addition to the above, it is desirable to protect all dugouts,
+cellars and buildings within the shell area, particularly those of
+artillery personnel. It should be noted, however, that the protection
+of dugouts for troops in the front line of trenches is usually
+inadvisable on account of the delay involved in getting men out in
+time of attack. It is desirable to protect stretcher bearers' dugouts
+with a view to putting casualties in them.</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">D. Protection of Weapons and Equipment:</p>
+
+<p>Arms and ammunition and the metal parts of special equipment (<i>e.g.</i>,
+telephone instruments) must be <a name="Page_362" id="Page_362"></a>carefully protected against gas by
+greasing them or keeping them completely covered. Otherwise,
+particularly in damp weather, they may rust or corrode so badly as to
+refuse to act. A mineral oil must be used for this purpose. The
+following in particular should be protected:</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(1) Small Arms And S.A.A.</p>
+
+<p>Machine guns and rifles must be kept carefully cleaned and well oiled.
+The effects of corrosion of ammunition are of even more importance
+than the direct effects of gas upon machine guns and rifles.</p>
+
+<p>Ammunition boxes must be kept closed. Vickers belts should be kept in
+their boxes until actually required for use. The wooden belt boxes are
+fairly gas-tight, but the metal belt boxes should be made gas-tight by
+inserting strips of flannelette in the joint between the lid and the
+box.</p>
+
+<p>Lewis magazines should be kept in some form of box, the joints of
+which are made as gas-tight as possible with flannelette.</p>
+
+<p>A recess should be made, high up in the parapet if possible, for
+storing ammunition and guns. A blanket curtain, moistened with water
+or sprayer solution, will greatly assist in keeping the gas out.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(2) Hand And Rifle Grenades:</p>
+
+<p>Unboxed grenades should be kept covered as far as possible. All safety
+pins and working parts, especially those made of brass, should be kept
+oiled to prevent their setting from corrosion by the gas.</p>
+
+<p class="sc3">(3) Light Trench Mortars And Their Ammunition:</p>
+
+<p>As far as the supply of oil permits, the bore and all bright parts of
+light trench mortars and their spare parts should be kept permanently
+oiled. When not in use, mortars should be covered with sacking or
+similar material.</p>
+
+<p>Unboxed ammunition should be kept covered as far as possible and the
+bright parts oiled immediately after <a name="Page_363" id="Page_363"></a>arrival. Ammunition which has
+been in store for some time should be used up first.</p>
+
+<p>Sentries must be prepared to give the alarm on the first appearance of
+gas, as a few seconds delay may involve very serious consequences.
+Signals must be passed along by all sentries as soon as heard.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">The earliest warning of a gas attack is given:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>By the noise of the gas escaping from the cylinders.</li>
+<li>By the appearance of a cloud of any color over the enemy's
+ trenches. If the attack takes place at night, the cloud will
+ not be visible from a distance.</li>
+<li>By the smell of the gas in listening posts.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li><span class="sc">Action To Be Taken In The Trenches On Gas Alarm:</span>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Respirators to be put on immediately by all ranks (a
+ helmet, if no box respirator is available).</li>
+<li>Rouse all men in trenches, dug-outs and mine shafts, warn
+ officers and artillery observation posts and all employed
+ men.</li>
+<li>Artillery support to be called for by company commanders by
+ means of prearranged signals.</li>
+<li>Warn battalion headquarters and troops in rear.</li>
+<li>All ranks stand to arms in the front trenches and elsewhere
+ where the tactical situation demands.</li>
+<li>Blanket curtains at entrances to protected shelters to be
+ let down and carefully fixed.</li>
+<li>Movement to cease except where necessary.</li>
+</ol>
+<br />
+</li>
+<li><span class="sc">Action To Be Taken In Billets And Back Areas:</span>
+
+<ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>All men in cellars or houses to be roused.</li>
+<li><a name="Page_364" id="Page_364"></a>The blanket curtains of protected collars, etc., to be let
+ down and fixed in position.</li>
+<li>Box respirators to be put on immediately, the gas is
+ apparent.</li>
+</ol>
+
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">H. Action During a Gas Attack:</p>
+
+<p class="sc">(1) Protective Measures:</p>
+
+<p>There should be as little moving about and talking as possible in the
+trenches. Men must be made to realize that with the gas now used by
+the enemy, observance of this may be essential for their safety.</p>
+
+<p>When an attack is in progress, all bodies of troops or transport on
+the move should halt and all working parties cease work until the gas
+cloud has passed.</p>
+
+<p>If a relief is going on, units should stand fast as far as possible
+until the gas cloud has passed.</p>
+
+<p>Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only be moved up if the
+tactical situation demands it.</p>
+
+<p>If troops in support or reserve lines of trenches remain in, or go
+into, dug-outs, they must continue to wear their anti-gas appliances.</p>
+
+<p>Officers and N.C.O's must on no account remove or open up the masks of
+the box respirators or raise their helmets to give orders. The
+breathing tube may be removed from the mouth when it is necessary to
+speak, but it must be replaced.</p>
+
+<p>Men must always be on the look-out to help each other in case an
+anti-gas device is damaged by fire or accident. When a man is wounded,
+he must be watched to see that he does not remove his respirator or
+helmet until he is safely inside a protected shelter; if necessary,
+his hands should be tied.</p>
+
+<p>Men must be warned that if they are slightly gassed before adjusting
+their respirators or helmets they must not remove them. The effect
+will wear off.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">(2) Tactical Measures:</p>
+
+<p>From the point of view of protection against gas, nothing is gained by
+men remaining in unprotected <a name="Page_365" id="Page_365"></a>dug-outs or by moving to a flank or to
+the rear. It is, therefore, desirable that on tactical and
+disciplinary grounds all men in the front line of trenches should be
+forbidden to do these things. In support or reserve lines where there
+are protected dug-outs, it is advisable for men to stay in them unless
+the tactical situation makes it desirable for them to come out.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing is gained by opening rapid rifle fire unless the enemy's
+infantry attacks. A slow rate of fire from rifles and occasional short
+bursts of fire from machine guns will lessen the chance of their
+jamming from the action of the gas and tends to occupy and steady the
+infantry.</p>
+
+<p>It should be remembered that the enemy's infantry cannot attack while
+the gas discharge is in progress and is unlikely to do so for an
+appreciable time&mdash;at least 10 minutes&mdash;after it has ceased. It is, in
+fact, a common practice for the enemy infantry to retire to the second
+and third line of trench whilst gas is being discharged. There is,
+therefore, no object in opening an intense S.O.S. barrage of artillery
+on &quot;No man's land&quot; during the actual gas cloud and it is advisable
+that the warning to the artillery of a gas attack should be a signal
+differing from the ordinary S.O.S. signal, as the latter may have to
+be sent later if an infantry attack develops.</p>
+
+<p>It must be remembered that smoke may be used by the enemy at the same
+time as, or alternately with, the gas and that under cover of a smoke
+cloud he may send out assaulting or raiding parties. A careful
+look-out must, therefore, be kept; hostile patrols or raiders may be
+frustrated by cross-fire of rifles and machine guns and should an
+assault develop the ordinary S.O.S. procedure should be carried out.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">I. Precautions Against Gas Shells:</p>
+
+<p>Owing to the small explosion which occurs with these shells, they are
+liable to be mistaken for blinds, and <a name="Page_366" id="Page_366"></a>even when the gas is smelt men
+may not realize its possibly dangerous character at once and so may
+delay putting on respirators or helmets until too late. Men sleeping
+in dug-outs may be seriously affected unless they are roused. Men in
+the open air are unlikely to be seriously affected by poison gas
+shells, provided they put on respirators or helmets on first
+experiencing the gas. The following points should therefore be
+attended to:</p>
+
+<p>(i.) All shells which explode with a small detonation or appear to be
+blind should be regarded with particular attention; the respirator or
+helmet should be put on at the first indication of gas and blanket
+protection of shelters adjusted.</p>
+
+<p>(ii.) Arrangements must be made for giving a <i>Local</i> alarm in the event
+of a sudden and intense bombardment with poison gas shells, but care
+must be taken that this alarm is not confused with the main alarm.
+Strombos horns must on no account be used to give warning of a gas
+shell bombardment.</p>
+
+<p>(iii.) All shelters in the vicinity of an area bombarded with poison
+gas shells must be visited and any sleeping men roused.</p>
+
+<p>(iv.) Box respirators or helmets should continue to be worn throughout
+the area bombarded with poison gas shells until the order is given by
+the local unit Commander for their removal.</p>
+
+<p>Lachrymatory or &quot;tear&quot; shells are frequently used by the enemy for the
+purpose of hindering the movements of troops, for preventing the
+bringing up of supports, or for interfering with the action of
+artillery. Owing to the deadly nature of poison gas shells, however,
+the precautions given in paragraph 60 above, must be taken for all gas
+shells. The goggles are intended for use after lachrymatory
+bombardments only, in cases where the irritant gas persists in the
+neighborhood.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_367" id="Page_367"></a>K. Action Subsequent to a Gas Attack:</p>
+
+<p class="sc">1. General:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">The most important measure to be taken after a cloud gas attack is to
+prepare for a further attack. The enemy frequently sends several
+successive waves of gas at intervals varying from a few minutes up to
+several hours and it is therefore necessary to be on the alert to
+combat this procedure. The following measures should be adopted as
+soon as the gas cloud has passed:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em">
+<li>Removal of respirators.&mdash;Anti-gas fans should be used to
+ assist in clearing the trenches of gas, so as to admit of
+ respirators being removed. Respirators and helmets must not
+ be removed until permission has been given by the Company
+ Commander.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-top: .2em;">A sharp look out must be kept for a repetition of the gas attack, as
+long as the wind continues in a dangerous quarter.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">2. Movement:</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Owing to the enemy gas sometimes causing bad after effects, which are
+intensified by subsequent exertion, the following points should be
+attended to:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent4" style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>No man suffering from the effects of gas, however slightly,
+ should be allowed to walk to the dressing station.</li>
+<li>The clearing of the trenches and dugouts should not be
+ carried out by men who have been affected by the gas.</li>
+<li>After a gas attack, troops in the front trenches should be
+ relieved of all fatigue and carrying work for 24 hours by
+ sending up working parties from companies in rear.</li>
+<li>Horses which have been exposed to the gas should not be
+ worked for 24 hours if it can be avoided.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p class="sc">3. Clearing Dugouts And Other Shelters:</p>
+
+<p>It is essential that no dugout be entered after a gas attack event
+with box respirators or helmets adjusted, <a name="Page_368" id="Page_368"></a>until it has been
+ascertained that it is free from gas. The only efficient method of
+clearing dugouts from gas is by thorough ventilation. The older method
+of spraying is not efficient.</p>
+
+<p>An appreciable quantity of gas may be retained in the clothing of men
+exposed to gas attacks and also in bedding, coats, etc., left in
+shelters. Precaution should, therefore, be taken to air all clothing.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">4. Ventilation:</p>
+
+<p><i>Natural Ventilation</i>.&mdash;Unless a shelter has been thoroughly
+ventilated by artificial means, as described below, it must not be
+slept in or occupied without wearing respirators, until at least 12
+hours after a gas attack. It must not be entered at all without
+respirators on for at least 3 hours. The above refers to cloud gas
+attacks. In the case of gas shell bombardments the times cannot be
+definitely stated, as they depend on the nature of the gas used and
+the severity of the bombardment. With lachrymatory gases the times
+after which shelters can be used without discomfort may be
+considerably longer than those mentioned above.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ventilation by Fire</i>.&mdash;All kinds of shelters can be efficiently and
+rapidly cleared of gas by the use of fires. Shelters with two openings
+are the easiest to ventilate and where possible, dugouts with only one
+entrance should have a second opening made, even a very small one, to
+assist in ventilation.</p>
+
+<p>In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a short passage,
+the best results are obtained if the fire is placed in the center of
+the floor of the dugout and at a height of about 9 inches.</p>
+
+<p>In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a long and nearly
+horizontal passage, the best results are obtained if the fire is
+placed about one-third of the distance from the inner end of the
+passage.</p>
+
+<p>In dugouts provided with two or more exits, the fire should be placed
+at the inner end of one of the exit passages.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_369" id="Page_369"></a>In general, 1 pound of dry wood per 200 cubic feet of air space is
+sufficient for clearance of any gas. The best fuel is split wood, but
+any fuel which does not smoulder or give off thick smoke can be used.
+The materials for the fire, <i>e.g.</i>, the split wood, newspaper, and a
+small bottle of paraffine for lighting purposes, should be kept in a
+sand bag, enclosed in a biscuit tin provided with a lid. An improvised
+brazier should be kept ready for use.</p>
+
+<p>The fire must be kept burning for at least ten minutes and the
+atmosphere in the shelter should be tested from time to time.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ventilation by Fanning</i>.&mdash;Dugouts can be ventilated by producing air
+currents in them by means of special anti-gas fans.</p>
+
+<p>If no anti-gas fans are available, ventilation can be assisted by
+flapping with improvised fans such as sand bags, ground sheets, etc.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">5. Cleaning Of Arms And Ammunition:</p>
+
+<p>Rifles and machine guns must be cleaned after a gas attack and then
+re-oiled. Oil cleaning will prevent corrosion for 12 hours or more,
+but the first available opportunity must be taken to dismantle machine
+guns and clean all parts in boiling water containing a little soda. If
+this is not done, corrosion continues slowly even after oil cleaning
+and may ultimately put the gun out of action.</p>
+
+<p>After a gas attack, S.A.A. should be carefully examined. All rounds
+affected by gas must be replaced by new cartridges immediately and the
+old ones cleaned and expended as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p>All hand and rifle grenades exposed to the gas should have their
+safety-pins and working parts cleaned and re-oiled.</p>
+
+<p>All bright parts of light trench mortars, together with all
+accessories and spare parts exposed to the gas, must be cleaned and
+wiped dry as soon as possible after the <a name="Page_370" id="Page_370"></a>attack and in any case within
+24 hours, after which they should be thoroughly coated afresh with
+oil. The same applies to ammunition which may have been exposed to the
+gas.</p>
+
+<p>Ammunition which, for any reason, had not been oiled, must be cleaned
+and oiled and expended as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p>For details regarding the cleaning of guns and artillery ammunition
+and signal equipment, see paragraphs 116 and 123.</p>
+
+<p class="sc">6. Treatment Of Shell Holes:</p>
+
+<p>In the neighborhood of shelters or battery positions where gas from
+shell holes is causing annoyance, the holes and the ground round them
+should be covered with at least a foot of fresh earth. Shell holes so
+treated should not be disturbed, as the chemical is not thereby
+destroyed and only disappears slowly.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Concealment From Aerial Observers.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em;">A.</p>
+
+<ol class="indent7" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>An aeroplane cannot conduct reconnaissance at a height of less
+ than 5,000 feet without being within easy range of
+ anti-aircraft artillery; nor of less than 2,000 feet without
+ coming into range of machine-gun and rifle fire.</li>
+<li>To be observed from such heights, objects on the ground must be
+ distinguished by:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>Motion.</li>
+ <li>Color contrast.</li>
+ <li>Line contrast, or</li>
+ <li>Shadows.</li>
+ </ol>
+</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .1em;">B. Concealment:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent7" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em;">
+<li>&nbsp;
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>On warning of hostile aircraft, troops on the march should
+ withdraw to the side of the road (if possible, into shade),
+ or lie down flat in the road and remain motionless.</li>
+ <li>If it is necessary to continue the march, this should be<a name="Page_371" id="Page_371"></a>
+ done in broken detachments, which are far less distinct
+ than continuous column.</li>
+ <li>Troops in a trench should crouch down in the shadowy side
+ and remain motionless.</li>
+ <li>Faces should never be turned up, as the high lights on
+ cheek-bones and foreheads then show up distinctly.</li>
+ <li>Bright metal on arms, equipment and headgear must be kept
+ covered.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Artillery wagon-trains, etc., should if possible be halted
+ promptly on warning. When halted, their neutral coloring
+ protects them.</li>
+<li>Trenches are best concealed:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em">
+ <li>By avoiding, in construction, a too regular outline, and
+ following as far as possible the contours of the ground.</li>
+ <li>By coloring the parapet and parados to match the ground.
+ This may be done most quickly by painted canvas; if the
+ latter is not available, by planting or strewing the loose
+ earth with surrounding herbage. In this work care must be
+ taken not to make the covering itself too conspicuous by
+ brightness or monotony of coloring.</li>
+ <li>By covering the trench itself, where convenient, with a thin
+ material, colored like the parapet and parados.</li>
+ <li>By avoiding all overt movement of troops in the trenches
+ under observation.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li>Buildings, <i>e.g.</i>, ammunition dumps, hangars, etc., can be
+ completely concealed by being painted the color of the
+ ground they stand on and fitted with canvas curtains,
+ similarly painted and stretched from the eaves to the
+ <a name="Page_372" id="Page_372"></a>ground at a horizontal angle of 35 degrees. These curtains
+ completely eliminate shadows.</li>
+<li>Success in each work of concealment by camouflage is best
+ assured by the assistance of an aeroplane observer to test
+ and correct it.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .5em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Orders Governing Intrenchment Problems at Second Plattsburg Training
+Camp.</p>
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: .5em">
+Headquarters Plattsburg Training Camp,<br />
+Plattsburg Barracks, New York.<br />
+September 22, 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Divisional Entrenching Problem.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;">General Situation:</p>
+
+<p>The Salmon river forms the boundary line between two states, the
+&quot;Blue&quot; on the north and the &quot;Red&quot; on the south. War has been declared
+and the Red Army is mobilizing near Keeseville. Mobilization by the
+first Blue Army at Plattsburg has been completed.</p>
+
+<p>Special Situation, Blue:</p>
+
+<p>Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river against
+strong detachments of the Red Army. The commanding general of the Blue
+Army has decided to establish a second position on the line, <i>Bluff
+Point to the bend</i> (248) <i>in the Saranac river</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The following order is issued by the Division Commander:</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5em; margin-right: 5em;">
+ <p class="sc" style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">Headquarters, 101st Div.,<br />
+ Plattsburg, N.Y.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br />
+ 23 Sept., '17, 9:00 a.m.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
+
+
+ <p class="sc">Field Orders,<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">No. 1.</span></p>
+
+ <p>1. Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river.</p>
+
+ <p>2. This division and 1 Brigade 102 Division will entrench along the
+ line: <i>Bluff Point</i>&mdash;<i>Chateaugay Branch Railroad</i>&mdash;<i>Saranac River</i>
+ (248).</p>
+
+ <p><a name="Page_373" id="Page_373"></a>3. (a) The Chief of Artillery will prepare the positions, and lines of
+ communication for his Brigade, determine his sectors, and submit his
+ plan of action.</p>
+
+ <p>(b) The 1st Brig. and 2 Bns. 267th Inf. will entrench the sector,
+ <i>Saranac River</i> (248) to <i>Sand Road</i>, exclusive. The 2nd Brig. will
+ entrench the sector <i>Sand Road to Bluff Point</i>, both inclusive. The
+ supports will entrench on the line, <i>Saranac River</i> (182)&mdash;<i>Cliff
+ Haven</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>(c) The Reserve&mdash;1 Brig. 102 Div. less 2 Bns., will construct
+ crossings on the <i>Saranac River</i>&mdash;under direction of the Chief of
+ Engineers, and prepare them for defense.</p>
+
+ <p>(d) The Chief of Engineers will supply tools for entrenching and lay
+ out the lines of entrenchments. He will repair the following trunk
+ roads: <i>Peru Road</i>, <i>Sand Road</i>, <i>Lake-Shore Road</i>; and construct a
+ transverse trunk line road from <i>Pulp Mill to O'Connell's Farm</i>, and
+ the necessary tram lines. The Engineer Depot for stores and material
+ will be established at <i>Plattsburg Barracks</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>(e) The Chief Signal Officer will establish necessary lines of
+ communication, utilizing equipment at <i>Plattsburg Barracks, Central
+ Station</i>. Aero Squadron at <i>Chazy</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>4. (a) The Chief Medical Officer will establish his dressing stations
+ in the <i>Butts</i> of the rifle range and in ravine on <i>O'Connell's Farm</i>.
+ A field hospital will be established at the <i>Lozier Works</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>(b) Ammunition train and supply train will be parked in the <i>Fair
+ Ground</i>. Ammunition distributing stations at railroad spurs,
+ <i>Plattsburg Barracks</i>, and <i>O'Connell's Farm</i>. The Division Ordnance
+ Officer will locate the Ammunition Dumps along transverse trunk line
+ road.</p>
+
+ <p>(c) Field trains, until further orders, at north end of <i>Plattsburg
+ Barracks Reservation</i>. Distributing point, <i>Plattsburg Railroad
+ Station</i>&mdash;Regimental <a name="Page_374" id="Page_374"></a>Supply Stations: <i>Saranac River</i> 182;
+ intersection <i>Peru Road</i> and <i>Rifle Range Road</i>, <i>Sand Hole</i> in <i>Rifle
+ Range</i>, <i>Sand Road on O'Connell's Farm</i>, <i>Ravine on O'Connell's Farm</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>(d) The commander of trains will establish traffic regulations for all
+ roads.</p>
+
+ <p>5. Messages to <i>Statistical Office</i>.</p>
+
+ <p style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;"><span class="sc" style="margin-right: 2.5em;">Wolf,</span><br />
+ Major General.</p>
+
+ <p style="margin-left: 1em;">Official copy:<br />
+ <span class="sc" style="margin-left: 3em;">J.A. Baer,</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 5em;">Genl. Staff,</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 7em;">Chief of Staff.</span></p>
+
+ <br />
+
+ <p style="margin-left: 1em;">Copies to:<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">Brig. and Regt. Commanders.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C. of E.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">Div. Q.M.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.S.O.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.M.O.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">Div. O.O.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C. of Tr.</span></p>
+
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 15%;' />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5em; margin-right: 5em;">
+ <p class="sc" style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">Headquarters, 1st Brigade, 101st Division,<br />
+ Plattsburg Barracks, N.Y.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br />
+ 23rd Sept., 1917, 6 p.m.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
+
+ <p class="sc">Field Orders,<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">No. 1.</span></p>
+
+ <p>1. Strong detachments of the Red Army, now mobilizing at <i>Keeseville</i>,
+ are south of the <i>Salmon River</i>. Our advance troops are holding the
+ line of the <i>Salmon River</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>2. Our division and one brigade, 102nd Division, will entrench and
+ occupy the line <i>Bluff Point-Chateaugay Branch (D. &amp; H.R.R.), Saranac
+ River</i> (248). This brigade, reinforced by two Battalions, 267th
+ Infantry, will entrench and occupy the sector, <i>Saranac River</i> (248),
+ <i>Sand Road</i>, exclusive.</p>
+
+ <p>3. (a) The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th infantry will entrench and
+ occupy the sector from the <i>Saranac River</i> to a point 600 yards east.</p>
+
+ <p><a name="Page_375" id="Page_375"></a>(b) The 266th Infantry, the sector from a point 600 yards east of the
+ <i>Saranac River</i>, connecting with the trenches of the 267th Infantry,
+ to a point 100 yards east of <i>Peru Road</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>(c) The 265th Infantry, the sector from a point 100 yards east of the
+ <i>Peru Road</i>, and connecting with the trenches of the 266th Infantry,
+ to the <i>Sand Road</i> exclusive.</p>
+
+ <p>(d) The Brigade Machine Gun Battalion will organize and maintain
+ strong points along line regimental reserves. The C.O. of this
+ organization will, at once, consult with the regimental commanders
+ relative to preparation of machine gun emplacements and probable need
+ for re-enforcements within their respective sectors.</p>
+
+ <p>(e) The Brigade Signalmen will establish telephonic communications
+ between Brigade and Regimental Headquarters.</p>
+
+ <p>4. (a) The regimental commanders and senior officers of the two
+ battalions, 267th Infantry, will at once report to the Chief Engineer
+ of the Division for plan of entrenchments in their respective sectors.</p>
+
+ <p>(b) Tools and materials for entrenching will be supplied at the trench
+ sites.</p>
+
+ <p>5. Messages to Brigade Headquarters near <i>Peru Road</i>, east Savoy
+ Hotel.</p>
+
+ <p style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">
+ <span class="sc" style="margin-right: 2.5em;">Goodrich,</span><br />
+ Brigadier General, Commanding.</p>
+
+ <p style="margin-left: 1em;">Official copy:<br />
+ <span class="sc" style="margin-left: 3em;">Wm. Kirby,</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 5em;">Major of Cavalry, U.S.R.,</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 7em;">Adjutant.</span></p>
+
+ <p style="margin-left: 1em;">Copies to:<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., 265th Infantry.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., 266th Infantry.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th Infantry.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., Brigade M.G. Co.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">Headquarters, 101st Division.</span></p>
+
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 15%;' />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5em; margin-right: 5em;">
+ <p class="sc" style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">
+ Headquarters, 1st Battalion, 265th Infantry<a name="Page_376" id="Page_376"></a><br />
+ Plattsburg Barracks, N.Y.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<br />
+ Oct. 16, 1917.&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
+
+ <p class="sc">Field Orders,<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">No. 1.</span></p>
+
+ <p>Blue print of trenches; scale 24 inches equals 1 mile.</p>
+
+ <p>1. The enemy strongly occupies a line of trenches immediately <i>South</i>
+ of the <i>Chateaugay Branch Railroad</i>, the center of their line being
+ about opposite the center sector of our first line of trench, <i>Sand
+ Road-Target Range Fence</i>, their line of trenches being within 50 yards
+ of the railroad at that point, and then retiring slightly from the
+ railroad to the <i>East</i> and <i>West</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>The 264th Infantry occupies the section of trenches directly to the
+ East of us and the 266th Infantry occupies the section of trenches
+ directly to the West of us.</p>
+
+ <p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">2. This battalion will take up a defensive position in the nearly
+ completed line of trenches, <i>Sand Road-Target Range Fence</i>, and as
+ rapidly as possible complete the trench system in the following order
+ of work:</p>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha; margin-top: .2em; margin-bottom: .2em;">
+ <li>Deepen all trenches to at least three feet.</li>
+ <li>Construct latrines.</li>
+ <li>Provide cover.</li>
+ <li>Revet work previously done.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ <p>3. a. Front lines, <i>i.e.</i>, fire, communicating and support trenches:
+ Company &quot;B&quot; will occupy the <i>East</i> sector, <i>i.e.</i>, <i>Sand Road</i> to
+ <i>Belgium Boyau</i>, inclusive, including <i>Slum Boyau</i> and the salient at
+ <i>South</i> end Reserve Trench immediately in rear of <i>East</i> end of
+ Support trench.</p>
+
+ <p>Company &quot;C&quot; will occupy the <i>Central</i> sector, <i>i.e.</i>, from <i>East</i>
+ sector (<i>Belgium Boyau</i>, exclusive), to <i>Cardona Boyau</i>, inclusive,
+ including <i>Poire Boyau</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>Company &quot;A&quot; will occupy the <i>West</i> sector, <i>i.e.</i>, from <i>Central</i>
+ sector (<i>Cardona Boyau</i>, exclusive), to and including salient near
+ <i>Southwest</i> corner of <i>Target Range Fence</i>.</p>
+
+ <p><a name="Page_377" id="Page_377"></a>b. Reserve Line: Company &quot;D&quot; will occupy the line from the <i>Target
+ Range Fence</i> on the <i>West</i> to a point 165 yards <i>East</i> of the <i>Verdun
+ Salient</i>, one-half of the Company occupying the sector, <i>Target Range
+ Fence</i>, to a point 75 yards <i>East</i> of the <i>Rams Horn Boyau</i>, including
+ <i>Rams Horn Boyau</i>, and the other half of the Company occupying the
+ sector from a point 75 yards <i>East</i> of the <i>Rams Horn Boyau</i> to a
+ point 165 yards <i>East</i> of the <i>Verdun Salient</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>c. Machine Guns: Headquarters, 1st Platoon and 1st Platoon Machine Gun
+ Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company &quot;A,&quot; for
+ assignment to the shell craters (converted) and dugouts (constructed
+ for machine guns), four in all, in the <i>West</i> sector.</p>
+
+ <p>Headquarters, 2nd Platoon and Third Section (2nd Platoon) Machine Gun
+ Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company &quot;C,&quot; for
+ assignment to the shell crater (converted), and dugout (constructed
+ for machine gun), two in all, in the <i>Central</i> sector. Fourth section
+ (2nd Platoon), Machine Gun Company, will report to the Commanding
+ Officer, Company &quot;B,&quot; for assignment to the shell crater (converted),
+ two in all, in the <i>East</i> sector.</p>
+
+ <p>d. Trench Mortars: Two trench mortars have been assigned to the
+ <i>Central</i> sector and the Commanding officer, Company &quot;C,&quot; is charged
+ with the construction of emplacements therefor and the manning of
+ them.</p>
+
+ <p>4. a. Dressing stations have been established in the <i>Butts</i> of the
+ rifle range and in ravine on <i>O'Connell's Farm</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>b. Ammunition distributing points are located at <i>Plattsburg Barracks</i>
+ and <i>O'Connell's Farm</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>c. Regimental supply stations are located at <i>Saranac River</i> (182),
+ intersection <i>Peru Road</i> and <i>Rifle Range Road</i>, <i>Sand Hole in Rifle
+ Range</i>, <i>Sand Road</i> on <i>O'Connell's Farm</i>, and <i>Ravine</i> on
+ <i>O'Connell's Farm</i>.</p>
+
+ <p>5. Battalion Headquarters are located in dugout in <i>Support</i> trench
+ (West Tremont), midway between <a name="Page_378" id="Page_378"></a><i>Rams Horn</i> and <i>Poire Boyaux</i>, to
+ which place messages will be sent.</p>
+
+ <p style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">
+ <span class="sc" style="margin-right: 2.5em;">Boschen,</span><br />
+ Captain, 56th Infantry, Commanding.</p>
+
+ <p style="margin-left: 1em;">Copies to:<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., 265th Infantry.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., Companies A, B, C and D.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., M.G. Company.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., Headquarters Company.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">R.S.O.</span></p>
+
+</div>
+
+<hr style='width: 15%;' />
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5em; margin-right: 5em;">
+ <p class="sc" style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">Hdqtrs. 1st Batt., 265th Infty.,<br />
+ Plattsburg Bcks., N.Y., <i>Oct. 17, 1917.</i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</p>
+
+ <p class="sc">Field Orders,<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">No. 2</span></p>
+
+ <ol class="indent5" style="list-style-type: decimal">
+ <li>Dispositions:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>The assignment of companies to sectors is as announced in
+ Field Orders No. 1, these headquarters.</li>
+ <li>Company commanders are charged with the details of occupation
+ of the trenches and the proper disposition of the
+ &quot;specialists&quot; (bombers, grenadiers, auto-riflemen, etc.),
+ directing particular attention to the active and passive
+ areas of their sectors.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Fields Of Fire</span>: Company commanders must arrange for and obtain
+ the best fields of fire in their own sectors, and provide
+ for protection of visible areas in adjoining sectors by
+ lateral fire.</li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Improvements Or Changes In Trenches</span>: Company commanders before
+ making any changes or improvements in trenches will render to
+ battalion headquarters brief recommendations of changes
+ desired. These recommendations will be submitted at 11.00
+ a.m. and 3.00 p.m., after which hours the <a name="Page_379" id="Page_379"></a>battalion
+ commander will inspect and if deemed necessary will be
+ ordered. </li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Organization For Watching And Observation:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Each company commander will organize a system for watching
+ the enemy by day and will establish look-out posts for this
+ purpose; this system will be augmented at night by patrols
+ if necessary.</li>
+ <li>The watching of the enemy must be continuous and long
+ occupation of the sector will not warrant any laxity.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+</li>
+<li><span class="sc">Organization For Supply</span>:
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Company commanders will make the necessary details for
+ obtaining supplies; these details to be in charge of Mess or
+ Supply Sergeants and will not exceed three squads for each
+ lettered company.</li>
+ <li><i>Food</i>: Machine guns details and members of the Medical Corps
+ assigned to each sector are attached to the lettered
+ companies for rations.</li>
+ <li>Cooked food will be at the <i>Food Station</i> at 6.00 a.m., 11.50
+ a.m. and 5.00 p.m. daily, and will be distributed at that
+ point.</li>
+ <li>Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an
+ appropriate detail (about 2 squads) to proceed to <i>Food
+ Station</i>, which is located at the wire entanglement on the
+ <i>west</i> side of the <i>Target Range</i> about 400 yards <i>north of
+ Brigade Headquarters</i>.</li>
+ <li>The details mentioned above will proceed via trenches,
+ leaving same at junction of <i>Tipperary</i> trench and <i>Rams
+ Horn</i> boyau in the following order:
+
+ <ul style="list-style-type: none">
+ <li style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Co. D: Detail will clear junction <i>Rams Horn</i> boyau and
+ <i>Tipperary</i> trench at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m.</li>
+ <li style="margin-bottom: .2em;">
+ <a name="Page_380" id="Page_380"></a>Co. A: Detail will clear junction <i>Tremont</i> trench, and
+ <i>Rams Horn</i> boyau at 5.30 a.m., 11.00 a.m. and 4.30 p.m.,
+ proceeding via <i>Rams Horn</i> boyau.</li>
+ <li style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Co. B: Detail will clear junction <i>Tremont</i> trench, and
+ <i>Poire</i> boyau at 5.35 a.m., 11.05 a.m. and 4.55 p.m.,
+ proceeding via <i>Poire</i> boyau and <i>Tipperary</i> trench.</li>
+ <li style="margin-bottom: .2em;">Co. C: Detail will clear junction <i>Tremont</i> trench and <i>Slum</i>
+ boyau at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m., proceeding via
+ <i>Slum</i> boyau and <i>Tipperary</i> trench.</li>
+ </ul>
+
+ </li>
+ <li>These details will return to their respective sectors via
+ the indicated routes, moving in reverse order at five-minute
+ intervals, and company commanders will make necessary
+ arrangements for distribution of food within their
+ respective sectors.</li>
+ <li>Company commanders will cause the necessary police after each
+ meal to insure sanitary condition of trenches.</li>
+ <li>Food containers will be held in company until the next meal
+ hour when they will be returned to the <i>Food Station</i>.</li>
+ <li><i>Water</i>: Water wagon will be at the <i>Food Station</i> from 10.00
+ a.m. to 4.30 p.m. daily.</li>
+ <li>Containers for water will be furnished by Regimental Supply
+ Officer at the <i>Food Station</i>.</li>
+ <li>All men will carry full canteens of water when entering the
+ trenches.</li>
+ <li>Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an
+ appropriate detail (about 2 squads), to proceed to the <i>Food
+ Station</i> to procure water in containers; these details will
+ proceed via the routes indicated in paragraph 5, section &quot;e&quot;:
+ Co. D, 2.00 p.m.; Co. A, 2.05 p.m.; Co. B, 2.10 p.m.; Co. C,
+ 2.15 p.m.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_381" id="Page_381"></a>These details will return to their respective sectors in
+ reverse order at five-minute intervals.</li>
+ <li><i>Miscellaneous</i>: Details for obtaining tools, ammunition,
+ trench supplies, etc., will be arranged for as required.</li>
+ <li>Requisitions for miscellaneous supplies required will be
+ submitted by company commanders to the Regimental Supply
+ Officer not later than 3.00 p.m., October 17, 1917.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Organization For Liaison:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>The Signal Officer will establish necessary telephonic
+ communications.</li>
+ <li>Each organization will detail one runner to report to the
+ battalion commander at regimental headquarters at 8.00 a.m.</li>
+ <li>Four runners will be detailed for duty with each company
+ headquarters and one runner will be detailed for duty with
+ each platoon headquarters. These runners should be lightly
+ equipped and wear a distinctive mark.</li>
+ <li>At least two men per section must be able to act as guides to
+ all company headquarters of the battalion.</li>
+ <li>Verbal messages will not be sent by runners; all messages
+ must be written.</li>
+ <li>Company commanders, or their representatives, will report
+ daily at battalion headquarters at 5.00 p.m.</li>
+ <li>There must be accurate communication between platoons in
+ company, and companies in battalion, in order to insure
+ co-ordinated action.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Defense:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Immediately after the occupation of the trenches, company
+ commanders will make a careful estimate of all tactical
+ situations presented in their sectors and will plan for a
+ stubborn defense. Care must be exercised in <a name="Page_382" id="Page_382"></a>providing for
+ defense in depth and lateral defense. The front line
+ trenches of each sector will be held until actually entered
+ by the enemy, and no sector will be abandoned until the
+ occupants are actually forced out.</li>
+ <li>The main line of resistance will be the support trenches
+ (<i>Tremont</i>) and special attention must be given to the
+ preparation for defense. If the front line trenches of any
+ sector be captured by the enemy there will be no withdrawal
+ from any other sector of the front line trenches for the
+ purpose of establishing a continuous line in the support
+ trench.</li>
+ <li>The company commander of the reserve will organize parties
+ for counterattacks and these parties will be held in
+ readiness at convenient points to insure prompt movement to
+ the front.</li>
+ <li>Continuous occupation of the trenches without fire action
+ must not cause a feeling of security and result in being
+ surprised by the enemy.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Stand To</span>: &quot;Stand to&quot; will take place at 5.00 a.m. and 5.00 p.m.,
+ daily. At this formation every available man will be
+ present. Rifles, ammunition, equipment, clothing, etc., will
+ be inspected. Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing
+ position of every man will be tested to see whether he can
+ hit the bottom edge of our wire. Gas helmets and respirators
+ will be inspected if worn. After &quot;stand to&quot; in the morning
+ and before &quot;stand to&quot; in the evening rifles will be
+ thoroughly cleaned and oiled.</li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Trench Orders:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Current &quot;Trench Standing Orders&quot; recently published from
+ Brigade Headquarters are in force.</li>
+ <li><a name="Page_383" id="Page_383"></a>During the occupation of the trenches it will be assumed
+ that, the trenches are under the observation and fire of the
+ enemy and all movement in the trenches will be conducted
+ accordingly. All movements of troops, either individuals or
+ groups, will be via the trenches at all times.</li>
+ <li>No one will be allowed to go overland between trenches or to
+ enter the trenches by the flank. All persons will enter the
+ trenches from the reserve trenches and no visitors will be
+ allowed in the trenches except on passes issued from the
+ Regimental Headquarters.</li>
+ <li>Commanding officers, Companies A and B, are responsible for
+ the posting of the necessary sentinels along the flanks of
+ the position (during the day), with instructions covering the
+ provisions contained in paragraph 9, sections &quot;b&quot; and &quot;c.&quot;</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+ <li><span class="sc">Reports:</span>
+
+ <ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha">
+ <li>Company commanders will submit by 1.00 p.m., October 18,
+ 1917, a report showing the dispositions and plan of defense
+ of their respective sectors.</li>
+ <li>Frequent reports of information obtained and any change of
+ conditions at the front will be made to battalion
+ headquarters when necessary.</li>
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+ </ol>
+
+ <p style="text-align: right; margin-right: 3em;">
+ <span class="sc" style="margin-right: 2.5em;">Boschen,</span><br />
+<i>Captain, 56th Infantry, Commanding.</i></p>
+
+ <p style="margin-left: 1em;">Copies to:<br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O. 265th Infty.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O. Cos, A, B, C and D.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O. M.G. Co.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">C.O., Hdq. Co.</span><br />
+ <span style="margin-left: 3em;">R.S.O.</span></p>
+
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_384" id="Page_384"></a>Company Organization (in Detail):</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Company Headquarters:</p>
+
+<div class="indent4">
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;">1 Captain, commanding company,<br />
+1 First Lieutenant (senior), second in command,<br />
+1 First Sergeant, armed with pistol,<br />
+1 Mess Sergeant, armed with rifle,<br />
+1 Supply Sergeant, armed with rifle,<br />
+1 Corporal, company clerk, armed with rifle,<br />
+4 Mechanics, armed with rifle,<br />
+5 Wagoners (from Supply Company),<br />
+4 Cooks, armed with rifle,<br />
+2 Buglers, armed with pistol,<br />
+4 Privates, first class, company agent and signalmen.</p>
+
+ <div class="indent4">
+ <p style="text-indent: -1em;"><i>Equipment</i>: 15 rifles, 5 pistols, 8 automatic rifles (for
+ replacement), 40 trench knives (to be distributed as needed), 2
+ bicycles. Following from Supply Company: 1 rolling kitchen,
+ 4-mule; 1 combat wagon, 4-mule; 1 ration and baggage wagon,
+ 4-mule; 1 ration cart, 2-mule; 1 water cart, 2-mule; 16 mules,
+ draft.</p>
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<p><i>4 Platoons, each organized as follows</i> (numbered 1 to 4 in company):</p>
+<br />
+
+<p style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Headquarters:</p>
+
+<div class="indent4">
+<p style="text-indent: -1em;">1 First Lieutenant; 1st and 4th Platoons commanded by First
+ Lieutenants; 2nd and 3rd Platoons commanded by Second
+ Lieutenants, armed with pistol.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: -1em;">1 Sergeant, assistant to platoon commander, armed with pistol and
+ rifle.</p>
+
+<p><i>Equipment</i>: 1 rifle, 2 pistols.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: -1em;">1st <span class="sc">Section</span>: Bombers and rifle grenadiers:</p>
+
+<p>1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle,</p>
+
+<p>3 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle, 1 trained as rifle
+ grenadier; remainder trained as bombers,</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_385" id="Page_385"></a>6 Privates, first class, 2 armed with pistol and rifle, and
+ remainder with rifle only; 1 trained as rifle grenadier, and
+ remainder as bombers.</p>
+
+<p>12 Privates, armed with rifles; 4 trained as rifle grenadiers,
+ remainder trained as bombers. </p>
+
+<p><i>Equipment</i>: 22 rifles, 6 pistols.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: -1em;">2nd <span class="sc">Section</span>: Riflemen:</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;">2 Corporals, armed with pistols and rifles,<br />
+3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle,<br />
+7 Privates, armed with rifle,<br />
+<i>Equipment</i>: 12 rifles, 2 pistols.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: -1em;">3rd <span class="sc">Section</span>: Riflemen:</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;">2 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle,<br />
+3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle,<br />
+7 Privates, armed with rifle.<br />
+<i>Equipment</i>: 12 rifles, 2 pistols.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: -1em;">4th <span class="sc">Section</span>: Auto-riflemen:</p>
+<p style="text-indent: 0em;">1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle,<br />
+1 Corporal, armed with pistol and rifle,<br />
+3 Privates, first class; 1 armed with rifle, 2 armed with pistols;
+auto-rifle gunners, including 1 extra,<br />
+6 Privates, armed with rifle.<br />
+<i>Equipment</i>: 9 rifles, 4 pistols, 2 auto-rifles.</p>
+
+</div>
+
+<p><span class="sc">Note</span>.&mdash;Sections numbered from 1 to 16 in company.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Personnel:</p>
+
+<p style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Commissioned:</p>
+
+<div class='indent4' style="line-height: 1em;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="30%" summary="Commissioned Officers">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" width="75%">Captain</td>
+ <td class="tdright" width="25%"> 1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">First Lieutenants</td>
+ <td class="tdright">3</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" valign="top" style="height: .5em;">Second Lieutenants</td>
+ <td class="tdright"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;2</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Total</td>
+ <td class="tdright"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;6</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Enlisted:<a name="Page_386" id="Page_386"></a></p>
+
+<div class='indent4' style="line-height: 1em;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="30%" summary="Enlisted">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" width="75%">First Sergeant</td>
+ <td class="tdright" width="15%">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Mess Sergeant</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Supply Sergeant</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Sergeants</td>
+ <td class="tdright">12</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Corporals</td>
+ <td class="tdright">33</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Mechanics</td>
+ <td class="tdright">4</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Wagoners (from Supply Company)</td>
+ <td class="tdright">(5)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Cooks</td>
+ <td class="tdright">4</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Buglers</td>
+ <td class="tdright">2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Privates, first class</td>
+ <td class="tdright">64</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Privates</td>
+ <td class="tdright"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;128</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft">Total</td>
+ <td class="tdright"><span style="text-decoration: underline;">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;250</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Equipment:</p>
+
+<div class='indent4' style="line-height: 1em;">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" width="40%" summary="Equipment">
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" colspan="2">Rifles</td>
+ <td class="tdright" width="15%">239</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" colspan="2">Pistols</td>
+ <td class="tdright">69</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" colspan="2">Auto rifles</td>
+ <td class="tdright">16</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" colspan="2">Trench knives</td>
+ <td class="tdright">40</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" colspan="2">Bicycles</td>
+ <td class="tdright">2</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdleft" colspan="3">From Supply Company:</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft" width="70%">Rolling kitchen, 4-mule</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright" width="5%">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Combat wagon, 4-mule</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Ration and baggage wagon, 4-mule</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Ration cart, 2-mule</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Water cart, 2-mule</td>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td>&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">Mules, draft</td>
+ <td class="tdright">
+ <span style="text-decoration: underline;">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;16</span></td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+
+</div>
+
+<br /><br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+Trench Standing Orders.</p>
+
+<p>1. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Duties.</span>&mdash;A. One officer per company and one non-commissioned
+officer per platoon will always be on duty. During their tour of duty
+they will not be in their dugouts. They will frequently visit all
+trenches occupied by their units. Every listening post will be visited
+at least once by an officer during his tour of duty.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_387" id="Page_387"></a>B. The officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will, when his
+tour of duty is completed, turn over to the officer or
+non-commissioned officer relieving him all orders, a report of the
+work in progress, if any, and any other information of use.</p>
+
+<p>C. At night the officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will
+frequently patrol the trench line, to see that the sentries are alert
+and to receive any reports they may desire to make.</p>
+
+<p>D. The-non-commissioned officer coming on duty will go round and post
+new sentinels with the non-commissioned officer coming off duty.</p>
+
+<p>E. The length of the tour of duty will depend upon the number of
+officers and non-commissioned officers on duty. Normally each tour
+should be, by night, two hours; by day, four hours. This may be
+modified, however, so that all officers and non-commissioned officers
+will have an equal amount of this duty while in the trenches.</p>
+
+<p>F. Non-commissioned officers, after posting sentinels, will report
+&quot;all is well&quot; or otherwise to the officers on duty.</p>
+
+<p>G. No man will be detailed for a duty in the trench without being
+given suitable warning of this duty and be informed at which hour he
+will come on duty.</p>
+
+<p>H. The Company Commander will be responsible for sending any report
+required by Battalion Headquarters.</p>
+
+<p>2. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Sentries.</span>&mdash;A.
+The number of sentry posts required will depend on
+the assumed propinquity or distance of the enemy, strength of
+obstacles, ease with which sentry posts can be re-enforced and other
+local conditions. Normally by day this should be one sentinel for each
+platoon and at night three double sentinels for each platoon. There
+must be sentries enough to insure alarm being given promptly in case
+of attack and that local resistance is sufficient until help can
+arrive.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_388" id="Page_388"></a>B. The next relief will remain within an easy distance of the sentry
+on post, usually in shelters provided for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>C. Every sentry is to be regularly posted by a non-commissioned
+officer who will explain to him his duties and ascertain that the
+sentry is aware of the position of the section and platoon commanders
+and of the sentries on either side, and whether there are any patrols
+or working parties out in front.</p>
+
+<p>D. Every sentinel will report when an officer passes his post, &quot;All is
+well,&quot; or otherwise.</p>
+
+<p>E. Every sentinel by day will be provided with a head-cover to blend
+with the ground (this may be improvised), and while observing the
+ground to the front will remain perfectly still. An empty sand bag or
+some other suitable material may be utilized for this purpose.</p>
+
+<p>3. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Patrols.</span>&mdash;A.
+It is the duty of all the troops holding the front
+lines to establish a command of the ground in front of their parapet
+up to the enemy's wire. This can be done by extended and constant
+patrolling by night and reconnaissance by day so that the ground is
+thoroughly well known to as large a portion as possible of officers
+and men and so no enemy can move or remain in his front by night or
+day without detection. One of the particular duties of these patrols
+is to observe the condition of the wire entanglements.</p>
+
+<p>B. Every patrol must have definite orders as to its mission; broadly
+speaking, patrols may be divided into two classes: (1) reconnoitering
+patrols, (2) fighting patrols.</p>
+
+<p>C. The first duty of reconnoitering patrols is to obtain the
+information for which they are sent out. They fight only in
+self-defense or if any especially favorable opportunity arises to
+inflict loss upon the enemy without prejudice to their mission. They
+usually consist of two to six men, under an officer or
+non-commissioned officer.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_389" id="Page_389"></a>D. Fighting patrols are sent out for the express purpose of causing
+loss or damage to the enemies by such means as engaging the enemy's
+patrols or working parties, or by raiding saps, listening posts or
+trenches. For identification purposes they should always endeavor to
+secure at least one prisoner. Their strength depends upon the
+resistance they are likely to meet with.</p>
+
+<p>E. Company commanders are responsible for the orders given to patrols,
+subject to any instructions which may be issued by higher authority.
+They are also responsible that all troops, whom it concerns, including
+companies on both flanks, are warned when and where patrols will be
+out, length of time they will be out, and of the points to which they
+will return.</p>
+
+<p>F. Information gained by patrols is of little value unless transmitted
+quickly to those whom it concerns. Patrol reports will be made out by
+the commander of the patrol immediately upon his return and sent at
+once to the company commander unless orders to the contrary have been
+given.</p>
+
+<p>4. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Stand To.</span>&mdash;A.
+&quot;Stand to&quot; will take place one-half hour after a
+relief has been posted and one-half hour before being relieved. At
+this parade every available man will be present. Rifles, equipment,
+clothing, etc., will be inspected. Firing steps will be tested as soon
+as practicable after reliefs have been posted to see that each man can
+fire on the foot of the nearest part of the wire entanglement which he
+is required to cover by his fire. The same procedure will be gone
+through at the &quot;stand to&quot; one-half hour before being relieved. Other
+&quot;stand tos&quot; may be ordered in the discretion of the company commander.
+These should be sufficiently often to insure that every man turns out
+promptly and knows his place in case of attack.</p>
+
+<p>5. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Machine Guns.</span>&mdash;A.
+The concealment of machine gun emplacements is
+important. Consequently, it is only at night or in case of attack that
+machine gun <a name="Page_390" id="Page_390"></a>crews will occupy their defense emplacements. At night
+guns should take up other position than their defense emplacements and
+fire a stated number of rounds in order to test out the guns and
+mislead the enemy as to their numbers and real emplacements, after
+which they will at once go back to their defense emplacements.</p>
+
+<p>B. The guns and their crews will be tactically under the orders of the
+company commander in whose sector they are located, but no alteration
+will be made by him in their disposition or arcs of fire; he will,
+however, bring before the senior machine gun instructor any
+suggestions for improvements in machine gun dispositions for defense.</p>
+
+<p>C. Two men per gun will always be on duty with the guns.</p>
+
+<p>D. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun.</p>
+
+<p>E. Officers and non-commissioned officers in charge of guns will
+remain in close proximity to the guns. They will frequently inspect
+their guns, emplacements, etc. They are responsible for cleanliness
+and maintenance of the emplacements.</p>
+
+<p>F. Machine gun commanders are responsible for guns always being ready
+for action, and that emplacements are clear of all material except
+such as is required for the service of the guns; that embrasures or
+loopholes are kept clear of all obstructions which may interfere with
+fire or view.</p>
+
+<p>6. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Reliefs.</span>&mdash;A.
+Reconnaisance. Prior to taking over the line of
+trenches the company commander, accompanied by his senior First
+Lieutenant and First Sergeant, will reconnoiter the trenches.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">B. Points to be noted by the company commanders. The following points
+will be specially noted by company commanders before taking over
+trenches:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Plan of occupation (number of men holding lines to be taken
+ over, their distribution and duties).</li>
+<li><a name="Page_391" id="Page_391"></a>Shelter accommodations.</li>
+<li>Work being done and proposed.</li>
+<li>Conditions of the wire and defenses generally.</li>
+<li>Information as to the enemy, his habits, snipers, and the work
+ he is doing, etc.</li>
+<li>Water supply.</li>
+<li>Artillery support.</li>
+<li>Communications.</li>
+<li>Danger points.</li>
+<li>Location and condition of stores.</li>
+<li>Liaison.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>7. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Guides.</span>&mdash;A.
+Arrangements will be made between the company
+commanders of the incoming and outgoing companies as to the rendezvous
+where guides will be provided by the latter to conduct the incoming
+troops to the trenches.</p>
+
+<p>B. One guide per platoon, one for each company and one for battalion
+headquarters will be provided. These guides must know the exact spot
+where they will meet the relief troops and the best way to conduct the
+units to the particular section of the trench they will occupy.</p>
+
+<p>8. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Smoking and Talking.</span>&mdash;A.
+After leaving the rendezvous there will
+be no smoking and talking until arrival in trenches. Strictest march
+discipline will be enforced on the way to and from the trenches.</p>
+
+<p>9. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Procedure on Arrival at Trenches.</span>&mdash;A.
+The troops being relieved
+will not leave the trenches until the relieving troops are in position
+and the new sentries have been posted, all trench stores have been
+handed over and receipted for, and orders to move have been received
+from the Company Commander.</p>
+
+<p>B. Platoon commanders will at once personally see that all sentinels
+are properly posted, that the non-commissioned officer is on duty,
+that every man knows his place in case of attack, and that both flanks
+of his platoon are in liaison with the adjoining platoon.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_392" id="Page_392"></a>C. When reliefs are completed, Platoon Commanders will report to that
+effect to the Company Commander.</p>
+
+<p>D. Men will not be dismissed until the Company Commander has received
+the reports from all of his Platoon Commanders that everything is in
+order.</p>
+
+<p style="margin-bottom: .2em;">10.
+<span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Log Books.</span>&mdash;A.
+Each Company Commander will keep a log book in
+which will be entered:</p>
+
+<ol class="indent1" style="list-style-type: decimal; margin-top: .2em">
+<li>Work done.</li>
+<li>Number of men working.</li>
+<li>Hours worked.</li>
+<li>Any information obtained from sentries, patrols, or other
+ sources.</li>
+</ol>
+
+<p>They will also enter in this book a list of any trench stores that
+come into their possession.</p>
+
+<p>11. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Equipment.</span>&mdash;A.
+Equipment will be worn in the front trenches.
+Haversacks, packs, and trench tools need not be worn, these will be
+left in the shelters. In support and reserve trenches, they will be
+worn at the discretion of the Company Commander.</p>
+
+<p>B. Ration and carrying parties will wear equipment and carry rifles
+unless otherwise ordered.</p>
+
+<p>C. Pieces will be assumed to be loaded and locked at all times.</p>
+
+<p>D. In the firing trenches bayonets will be fixed at night.</p>
+
+<p>E. Non-commissioned officers and men of the firing line will at all
+times be in possession of their rifles and bayonets. The rifles of men
+in the support and reserve trenches or dugouts will be where they can
+be quickly seized, even in the dark.</p>
+
+<p>12. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Stretcher Bearers.</span>&mdash;A.
+Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a
+point designated by the Company Commander.</p>
+
+<p>13. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Discipline.</span>&mdash;A.
+Sleeping in the firing trenches will not be
+permitted.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Page_393" id="Page_393"></a>B. No man will enter the firing trench, except in discharge of his
+duty, unless so ordered by his Company or Platoon Commander.</p>
+
+<p>C. Sentries will remain standing unless the height of the parapet
+renders this impossible.</p>
+
+<p>D. Saluting and standing at attention, etc., will be as carefully
+adhered to as when in camp except that sentinel will not let this
+interfere with their duties.</p>
+
+<p>14. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Rations and Cooking.</span>&mdash;A.
+Cooking will be done in the rear of the
+reserve at a point to be designated.</p>
+
+<p>B. Company Quartermaster Sergeants will accompany ration parties,
+which will be limited in size to the actual needs for bringing up
+cooked rations from the point where cooking is done, to the trenches.
+At no time should this exceed ten per cent of the effective strength
+of the unit from which sent.</p>
+
+<p>C. Care will be taken that as little noise as possible be made by
+these carrying parties.</p>
+
+<p>15. <span style="font-size: 105%; font-weight: bold;">Sanitation.</span>&mdash;A.
+The importance of strict attention to sanitation
+will be impressed upon all ranks.</p>
+
+<p>B. The commanding officer of each unit is responsible for sanitation
+in his sector. He will make frequent inspections of latrines, refuse
+pits and trenches to ascertain that no unsanitary conditions exist.</p>
+
+<p>C. Latrines will be constructed in the trenches, excreta kept covered
+at all times and such disinfectants as may be provided will be used at
+regular intervals. When filled within eighteen inches of the top, pits
+will be filled with earth and labeled.</p>
+
+<p>D. Urinal cans will be provided and men required to use these cans and
+contents will be emptied as often as necessary into deep pits at least
+one hundred yards from the trenches. Empty tin cans, particles of food
+and other refuse will be collected in receptacles kept in the trenches
+for that purpose and carried to the rear and buried in pits. This is
+usually done at night.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 115%; font-weight: bold;">
+<a name="Page_394" id="Page_394"></a>Emergency Dumps for Companies (Material).</p>
+
+<div style="margin-left: 5em; margin-right: 5em;">
+
+<p>1. Any large shell crater will do for these or holes can be dug 10' x
+10' x 5' deep.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Contents Of Dump.</p>
+
+<div class="indent1">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="50%" summary="Contents of Dump">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdright">10</td>
+ <td width="95%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;rolls barbed wire.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">8</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;coils French accordion wire.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">30</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;long screw stakes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">50</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;short screw stakes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">4</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;prepared wire blocks (gooseberries).</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Stores For Company.</p>
+
+<div class="indent1">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="50%" summary="Contents of Dump">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdright">100</td>
+ <td width="95%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;very flares.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">6</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;S.O.S. rockets.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">2</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;verminal sprayers.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;strombos horn. (gas alarm)</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;rubber boots.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">&nbsp;</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;periscopes.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">200</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;revolver ammunition.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;log book.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;set maps.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;set air photos.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">1</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;defense scheme.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<p>2. These are taken over and signed for. Each dugout must have a gas
+blanket and some form of gas alarm (usually empty shell case.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Stores At Battalion Headquarters.</p>
+
+<div class="indent1">
+ <table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" width="50%" summary="Contents of Dump">
+ <tr>
+ <td width="5%" class="tdright">1</td>
+ <td width="95%" class="tdleft">&nbsp;strombos horn.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">2</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp; verminal sprayers.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">300</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;very flares.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">20</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;S.O.S. rockets.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">500</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;revolver ammunition.</td>
+ </tr>
+ <tr>
+ <td class="tdright">50</td>
+ <td class="tdleft">&nbsp;ground flares.</td>
+ </tr>
+ </table>
+</div>
+
+</div>
+
+<br />
+
+<div class="img" style="width: 60%;">
+<a href="images/plate28.png">
+<img border="0" src="images/plate28.png" width="90%" alt="Plate 28: Firing Trench" /></a>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<a name="Conclusion" id="Conclusion"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<br />
+
+<h2><a name="Page_396" id="Page_396"></a>Conclusion.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<p>The present army of the United States had its inception at Plattsburg
+in 1915. The first regiment of the Business Mens' Training Camp will
+go down in history as the first chapter of preparedness.</p>
+
+<p>The training camps of 1916, not only at Plattsburg, but at various
+other places throughout the United States, constituted the second
+chapter.</p>
+
+<p>We are just finishing chapter three in the officers' training camps of
+1917.</p>
+
+<p>This book brings together the essential points of the instruction
+given at the second and probably the last of the officers' training
+camps at Plattsburg, in such a way that an officer may refresh his
+memory when he is about to take up with his men any of the subjects
+covered.</p>
+
+<p>It is hardly necessary to add that no attempt has been made to cover
+fully any branch of the work. The bibliography provides for further
+study and the books in it should be at every officer's command.</p>
+
+<p>As the war progresses many changes will be made; not only will methods
+change but some branches now considered essential may be cast aside as
+useless.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing but work can make the pages of any military book have real
+meaning. This book gives what are now considered the essentials of
+military training. If it has brought to the conscientious officer
+points he might otherwise have forgotten to the detriment of his
+command, it will have served its purpose.</p>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+<a name="Bibliography" id="Bibliography"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<br />
+
+<h2><a name="Page_397" id="Page_397"></a>Bibliography.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter II. I.D.R.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Balck &quot;Tactics&quot; Vol. 1. Infantry.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Howell &quot;Lectures on the Swiss Army.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Bjornstadt &quot;Lectures on the German Army.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Drill and Field Training&quot; (English)&mdash;Imperial Army Series.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Instructions on the Offensive Conduct of Small Units.&quot; War
+Department, May, 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on the methods of attack and defense to meet the Conditions
+of Modern Warfare.&quot; Army War College, April, 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Privates Manual. (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Instructions for assembling the Infantry Pack,&quot; Ordnance
+Department. Pamphlet No. 1717 Manual of Military Training. (Moss.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter III. Physical Training.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual of Physical Training.&quot; (Koehler.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Field Physical Training of the Soldier.&quot; Special Regulation No.
+23.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Voice Culture. (Robert Lloyd.) (In lecture form.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter IV. Small Arms Firing Manual.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Bull's Eye Scorebook.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">U.S. Marines Scorebook.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;How to Shoot.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on training for Rifle Fire in Trench Warfare.&quot; Army War
+Coll., April, 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;The Rifle in War.&quot; (Eames.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Suggestions to Military Riflemen.&quot; (Whelen.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Musketry&quot; sheets from First Camp, Plattsburg, New York.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Control of the Firing Line.&quot; Army Service School.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Musketry Training.&quot; (Pickering.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;<a name="Page_398" id="Page_398"></a>A Synopsis of the Rifle in War.&quot; Army Service Schools.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">British&mdash;&quot;Aids in Musketry.&quot; &quot;Fire Problems.&quot; (Pilcher.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Fire Orders&quot;&mdash;&quot;Direction and Control&quot;&mdash;&quot;Musketry&quot;&mdash;Imperial Army
+Series.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Lecture and Lessons on Musketry and Instructions for Officers and
+N.C.O.S. Musketry Diagrams.&quot; (Clutterbuck.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Bayonet Training.&quot; Army War College, March, 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;British Manual of the Bayonet.&quot; Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1715 and No.
+1866. (Pistol.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Bombing.&quot; (McClintock.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Grenade Training&quot;&mdash;Plattsburg Training Camp.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Grenade Warfare.&quot; Army War College. </p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter V. Military Sketching And Map Heading.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Military Map Reading.&quot; (Sherrill.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Military Sketching and Map Reading.&quot; (Grieves.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;An Officer's Notes&quot; (Parker.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Topography.&quot; (Sherrill.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Engineers Field Manual.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual of Infantry Training.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Training Manual in Topography, Map Reading and Reconnaissance.&quot;
+(By Major Spalding, U.S.A.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Military Sketching and Map Reading.&quot; (Capt. Barnes.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter VI. Articles Of War.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;A Guide to the Articles of War.&quot; (Professor Eugene Waumbaugh.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">Manual of Courts Martial. </p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+<a name="Page_399" id="Page_399"></a>Chapter VII. Army Regulations.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons.&quot; Translated from the
+French by the Army War College, 1917, War Department Document No.
+626. a.r., 1913.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter VIII. (Field Work.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Field Fortification.&quot; Army Service Schools, 1916.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;E.F.M.&quot; and Addendum thereto.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Elements of Trench Warfare.&quot; (Waldron.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Field Entrenchments.&quot; (Solano.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Scouting and Patrolling.&quot; (Waldron.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Scout Instruction.&quot; (McKenney.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Scout's Handwork.&quot; (McKenney.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;The 2nd Matabele War.&quot; (Baden Powell.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Aids to Scouting.&quot; (Baden Powell.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual of Military Training.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Small Problems in Infantry.&quot; (Bjornstadt.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;S.M. Tactics.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;A Military Primer.&quot; (Marshall &amp; Simonds.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Technique of Modern Tactics.&quot; (Von Allen.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Night Movements.&quot; (Burnett.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Night Operations for Infantry.&quot; (Dawkins.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter IX. (Feeding Men.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual for Army Cooks.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Mess Sergeant's Handbook.&quot; (Holbrook.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Mess Officer's Assistant.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Mess Account Book.&quot; (Frink.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Handling the Straight Army Ration.&quot; (Holbrook.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual of Military Training.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Field Service.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter X. (Personal Hygiene And First Aid.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual of Military Training.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Lectures on Military Sanitation and Management of Sanitation
+Service,&quot; Army Service Schools.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;<a name="Page_400" id="Page_400"></a>Lectures&quot; delivered at Plattsburg Training Camp, 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Elements of Military Hygiene.&quot; (Ashburn.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Red Cross Pamphlet on First Aid.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual for Non-Coms. and Privates.&quot; </p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter Xi. (Signaling.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;United States Signal Book.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Infantry Drill Regulations.&quot;</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter XII. (Guard Duty.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Manual of Interior Guard Duty.&quot;</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter XIII. (Company Administration.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Company Administration.&quot; (Waldron.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Army Paper Work.&quot; (Perrin-Smith Pub. Co.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Organizations.&quot; (Waldron.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Synopsis of Work Done at 1st Plattsburg Camp.&quot; (Farley.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Army Paper Work.&quot; (Moss.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Army Regulations.&quot;</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter XIV. (Conferences. Study. S.p.i. Examinations.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Examinations in Military Science,&quot; Harvard University, 1917.</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">
+Chapter Xv. (Trench Warfare.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Field Fortifications.&quot; (Lt. Henri Poire.) Plattsburg, N.Y., 1917.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;The French Automatic Rifle.&quot; (Capt. Gene Loriot.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on Liaison in Modern Warfare.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Notes on the Method of Attack and Defense to Meet the Conditions
+of Modern Warfare.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;<a name="Page_401" id="Page_401"></a>Machine Gun Tactics.&quot; (Applin.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Grenades, Hand and Rifle.&quot; (Solano.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Training for the Trenches.&quot; (Vickers.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Studies in Leading Troops.&quot; (Vernois.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Tactical Decisions and Orders.&quot; (Buddecke.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Problems in Leading Troops&mdash;Army Service Schools.&quot;</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Battle Orders.&quot; (Von Kiesling.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;70 Problems.&quot; (Morrison.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Tactical Principles and Problems.&quot; (Hanna.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Technique of Modern Tactics.&quot; (Bond and McDonough.)</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">&quot;Estimating Tactical Situations.&quot; (Fitch.)</p>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="noindent">The Book Department, Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas,
+or the United States Infantry Association, Washington, D.C., will get
+any books available.</p>
+<a name="Page_402" id="Page_402"></a>
+
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+
+
+
+<a name="INDEX" id="INDEX"></a><hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<br />
+<h2><a name="Page_403" id="Page_403"></a>INDEX.</h2><span class="totoc"><a href="#toc">ToC</a></span>
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 1.</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>Schedules; <a href='#Page_1'>1</a></li>
+</ul>
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 2.</p>
+
+
+<ul><li>Infantry drill regulations; <a href='#Page_31'>31</a>
+ <ul><li>School of the soldier; <a href='#Page_31'>31</a>
+ <ul><li>Instruction without arms; <a href='#Page_31'>31</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Attention; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a>
+ <ul><li>Position of; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a></li>
+ <li>Heels together and on a line; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a></li>
+ <li>Feet turned out equally, forming angle of 45 degrees; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a></li>
+ <li>Knees extended without stiffness; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a></li>
+ <li>Trunk erect upon hips; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a></li>
+ <li>Shoulders falling naturally; <a href='#Page_32'>32</a></li>
+ <li>Arms hanging naturally; <a href='#Page_33'>33</a></li>
+ <li>Head erect, chin raised; <a href='#Page_33'>33</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Rests; <a href='#Page_33'>33</a>
+ <ul><li>Position of rest and at ease; <a href='#Page_33'>33</a></li>
+ <li>Fall out; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Rest; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>At ease; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Parade rest; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Eyes right; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Right face; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Right half face; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>About face; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Hand salute; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Forward march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Double time, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Mark time, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Half step, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Right step, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Squad, halt; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>By right flank, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>To the rear, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li>
+ <li>Change step, march; <a href='#Page_34'>34</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Manual of arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a>
+ <ul><li>Purpose; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Commands and cautions; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a>
+ <ul><li>Order, arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Present, arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Port, arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Right shoulder, arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Left shoulder, arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Parade, rest; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Trail, arms; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Rifle salute; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Fix bayonet; <a href='#Page_35'>35</a></li>
+ <li>Unfix bayonet; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Inspection arms; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>School of the squad; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a>
+ <ul><li>Object; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Composition of squad; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Fall in; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Fall out; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Count off; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Inspection arms&mdash;right dress, front; <a href='#Page_36'>36</a></li>
+ <li>Guide right; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Take interval; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>To reform; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Take distance; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Assemble, march; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Stack arms; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Take arms; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Oblique, march; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>In place, halt; <a href='#Page_37'>37</a></li>
+ <li>Resume march; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a></li>
+ <li>Right turn; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a></li>
+ <li>Right half turn; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a></li>
+ <li>Squad right about; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>School of the company; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a>
+ <ul><li>Object; <a href='#Page_38'>38</a></li>
+ <li>Composition; <a href='#Page_39'>39</a></li>
+ <li>Fall in; <a href='#Page_39'>39</a></li>
+ <li>Platoon movements; <a href='#Page_40'>40</a>
+ <ul><li>Leading platoon; <a href='#Page_40'>40</a></li>
+ <li>Rear platoon; <a href='#Page_40'>40</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Questions which come up in daily military life; <a href='#Page_40'>40</a></li>
+ <li>Answers; <a href='#Page_41'>41</a></li>
+ <li>Insignia; <a href='#Page_41'>41</a>
+ <ul><li>For second lieutenants; <a href='#Page_41'>41</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Company right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Platoons right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Right turn, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Column right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Platoons, column right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right, column right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right, platoons, column right, march; <a href='#Page_42'>42</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right about, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Right into line, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Right front into line, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Platoons, right front into line, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Route step, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Right by twos, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right front into line, march; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>Dismiss the company; <a href='#Page_43'>43</a></li>
+ <li>To fall in company when it cannot be formed by squads; <a href='#Page_44'>44</a></li>
+ <li>For muster; <a href='#Page_44'>44</a></li>
+ <li>In aligning company; <a href='#Page_44'>44</a></li>
+ <li>To march squad without unnecessary commands; <a href='#Page_44'>44</a></li>
+ <li>As skirmishers, march; <a href='#Page_44'>44</a></li>
+ <li>Assemble, march; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Kneel; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Lie down; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Rise; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Loadings and firings; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Arming; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Sight-setting announced; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Fire at will; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Clip fire; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Unload; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a></li>
+ <li>Extended order; <a href='#Page_45'>45</a>
+ <ul><li>Corporal cautions; <a href='#Page_46'>46</a></li>
+ <li>Left face; <a href='#Page_46'>46</a></li>
+ <li>Company right; <a href='#Page_46'>46</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Deployments; <a href='#Page_46'>46</a>
+ <ul><li>As skirmishers, guide right, march; <a href='#Page_46'>46</a></li>
+ <li>To deploy from column or squad; <a href='#Page_46'>46</a></li>
+ <li>Assemble, march; <a href='#Page_47'>47</a></li>
+ <li>Platoons, assemble; <a href='#Page_47'>47</a></li>
+ <li>Platoons, columns; <a href='#Page_47'>47</a></li>
+ <li>Squad columns; <a href='#Page_47'>47</a></li>
+ <li>No. 1's forward, march; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a></li>
+ <li>Captain points out new line; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a></li>
+ <li>Disadvantage; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a></li>
+ <li>Advantage; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Being in skirmish line; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a>
+ <ul><li>By platoon; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Commands; <a href='#Page_48'>48</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>School of the Battalion; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a>
+ <ul><li>Basis; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>Arrangement; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>Number; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>Center; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>Band; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>Dressing; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>To form the battalion; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a>
+ <ul><li>Other than ceremonies; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>For ceremonies; <a href='#Page_49'>49</a></li>
+ <li>To dismiss the battalion; <a href='#Page_50'>50</a></li>
+ <li>To rectify the alignment; <a href='#Page_50'>50</a></li>
+ <li>To rectify the column; <a href='#Page_50'>50</a></li>
+ <li>Helpful hints to beginners; <a href='#Page_50'>50</a></li>
+ <li>In column of squads; <a href='#Page_50'>50</a></li>
+ <li>In column of companies; <a href='#Page_51'>51</a></li>
+ <li>Line of companies; <a href='#Page_53'>53</a></li>
+ <li>In battalion line; <a href='#Page_54'>54</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Inspections; <a href='#Page_55'>55</a>
+ <ul><li>Special points of company; <a href='#Page_55'>55</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Battalion inspection; <a href='#Page_56'>56</a></li>
+ <li>Regimental inspection; <a href='#Page_56'>56</a></li>
+ <li>Ceremonies; <a href='#Page_56'>56</a>
+ <ul><li>Battalion review; <a href='#Page_56'>56</a></li>
+ <li>Battalion parade; <a href='#Page_57'>57</a></li>
+ <li>Regimental parade; <a href='#Page_58'>58</a></li>
+ <li>Regimental review; <a href='#Page_58'>58</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Fire direction; <a href='#Page_58'>58</a></li>
+ <li>Fire control; <a href='#Page_58'>58</a></li>
+ <li>Fire discipline; <a href='#Page_58'>58</a></li>
+ <li>The colonel; <a href='#Page_59'>59</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_59'>59</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_60'>60</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>The major; <a href='#Page_60'>60</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_60'>60</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>The general; <a href='#Page_61'>61</a>
+ <ul><li>Duties; <a href='#Page_61'>61</a></li>
+ <li>Special; <a href='#Page_62'>62</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Battalion staff; <a href='#Page_63'>63</a>
+ <ul><li>Positions; <a href='#Page_63'>63</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_64'>64</a></li>
+ <li>Position; <a href='#Page_65'>65</a></li>
+ <li>Duties:
+ <ul><li>before fire action; <a href='#Page_65'>65</a></li>
+ <li>during the action; <a href='#Page_65'>65</a></li></ul>
+ </li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Buglers; <a href='#Page_66'>66</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_66'>66</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_66'>66</a></li>
+ <li>Must be proficient in; <a href='#Page_67'>67</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Range estimators; <a href='#Page_67'>67</a></li>
+ <li>Platoon leader; <a href='#Page_68'>68</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_68'>68</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_68'>68</a></li>
+ <li>Thereafter; <a href='#Page_69'>69</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>First sergeant; <a href='#Page_70'>70</a></li>
+ <li>Guides; <a href='#Page_70'>70</a>
+ <ul><li>General rules; <a href='#Page_70'>70</a>
+ <ul><li>Equipment; <a href='#Page_70'>70</a></li>
+ <li>Close order; <a href='#Page_71'>71</a></li>
+ <li>Taking intervals and distances; <a href='#Page_71'>71</a></li>
+ <li>To form the company; <a href='#Page_72'>72</a></li>
+ <li>Alignments; <a href='#Page_72'>72</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Exercise for; <a href='#Page_74'>74</a></li>
+ <li>Result; <a href='#Page_74'>74</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Platoon Guides; <a href='#Page_75'>75</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_75'>75</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_75'>75</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Corporal; <a href='#Page_76'>76</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_76'>76</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_76'>76</a></li>
+ <li>Thereafter; <a href='#Page_76'>76</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>The private; <a href='#Page_78'>78</a>
+ <ul><li>Position; <a href='#Page_78'>78</a></li>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_79'>79</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Packs; <a href='#Page_81'>81</a>
+ <ul><li>Cartridge belt; <a href='#Page_81'>81</a></li>
+ <li>To attach first-aid pouch; <a href='#Page_82'>82</a></li>
+ <li>To attach canteen cover; <a href='#Page_82'>82</a></li>
+ <li>To attach pack carrier to haversack; <a href='#Page_82'>82</a></li>
+ <li>To attach cartridge belt to haversack; <a href='#Page_83'>83</a></li>
+ <li>To attach bayonet scabbard to haversack; <a href='#Page_83'>83</a></li>
+ <li>To attach intrenching tool carrier to haversack; <a href='#Page_83'>83</a></li>
+ <li>To assemble the full equipment (without rations); <a href='#Page_84'>84</a>
+ <ul><li>To make the pack; <a href='#Page_85'>85</a></li>
+ <li>To assemble the pack; <a href='#Page_85'>85</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>To assemble the full equipment (with rations); <a href='#Page_86'>86</a>
+ <ul><li>To make the pack; <a href='#Page_86'>86</a></li>
+ <li>To assemble the pack; <a href='#Page_86'>86</a></li>
+ <li>To adjust to the soldier; <a href='#Page_86'>86</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>To assemble full equipment, less the pack (with rations); <a href='#Page_87'>87</a></li>
+ <li>To assemble full equipment, less the pack (without rations); <a href='#Page_88'>88</a></li>
+ <li>To discard pack without removing equipment from body; <a href='#Page_88'>88</a></li>
+ <li>Care of equipment; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a>
+ <ul><li>Leather; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a></li>
+ <li>Woolen clothes; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a></li>
+ <li>Mending; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a></li>
+ <li>Cloth equipment&mdash;dry cleaning; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a></li>
+ <li>Washing; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Instructions on making packs; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a>
+ <ul><li>Methods; <a href='#Page_89'>89</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Adjusting cartridge belt; <a href='#Page_90'>90</a></li>
+ <li>Distribution of intrenching tools in the squad; <a href='#Page_90'>90</a></li></ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 3.</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>Physical training; <a href='#Page_91'>91</a>
+<ul><li> Physical training; <a href='#Page_91'>91</a></li>
+<li> Bayonet training; <a href='#Page_91'>91</a></li>
+<li> Time schedule; <a href='#Page_91'>91</a></li>
+<li> Formations; <a href='#Page_92'>92</a></li>
+<li> Second formation; <a href='#Page_93'>93</a></li>
+<li> Commands; <a href='#Page_93'>93</a>
+ <ul><li> Kinds of and how given; <a href='#Page_93'>93</a></li>
+ <li> First lesson; <a href='#Page_94'>94</a></li>
+ <li> Second lesson; <a href='#Page_95'>95</a></li>
+ <li> Third lesson; <a href='#Page_96'>96</a></li>
+ <li> Fourth lesson; <a href='#Page_98'>98</a></li>
+ <li> Fifth lesson; <a href='#Page_99'>99</a></li></ul>
+</li></ul>
+</li>
+<li>Voice culture; <a href='#Page_103'>103</a></li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 4.</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>Use of modern arms; <a href='#Page_105'>105</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li> Small arms firing; <a href='#Page_106'>106</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li> Slow fire; <a href='#Page_109'>109</a></li>
+ <li> Rapid fire; <a href='#Page_109'>109</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ <li> Pistol; <a href='#Page_112'>112</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li> Nomenclature and care; <a href='#Page_112'>112</a></li>
+ <li> Manual for the pistol; <a href='#Page_112'>112</a></li>
+ <li> Position; <a href='#Page_116'>116</a>
+ <ul>
+<li> The grip; <a href='#Page_116'>116</a></li>
+<li> The trigger squeeze; <a href='#Page_117'>117</a></li>
+<li> Position and aiming drills; <a href='#Page_117'>117</a></li>
+<li> Quick fire; <a href='#Page_118'>118</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+<li> Classes of fire; <a href='#Page_118'>118</a>
+ <ul>
+<li> Slow fire; <a href='#Page_118'>118</a></li>
+<li> Quick fire; <a href='#Page_118'>118</a></li>
+<li> Automatic fire; <a href='#Page_118'>118</a></li>
+<li> Trench; <a href='#Page_118'>118</a></li>
+<li> Score; <a href='#Page_119'>119</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+<li> Course; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a>
+ <ul>
+<li> Slow fire; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a></li>
+<li> Quick fire; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a></li>
+<li> Automatic fire; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a></li>
+<li> Trench fire; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a></li></ul>
+ </li></ul>
+ </li>
+<li> Bayonet training; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a>
+ <ul>
+<li> Functions of; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a></li>
+<li> General practice; <a href='#Page_120'>120</a></li>
+<li> Technique of bayonet combat; <a href='#Page_121'>121</a></li>
+<li> Manual of the bayonet; <a href='#Page_122'>122</a></li>
+<li> Progressive exercises; <a href='#Page_124'>124</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+<li> Machine guns; <a href='#Page_128'>128</a>
+ <ul>
+<li> Mode of action; <a href='#Page_128'>128</a></li>
+<li> Fire; <a href='#Page_129'>129</a></li>
+<li> Inconspicuousness; <a href='#Page_129'>129</a></li>
+<li> Offensive reinforcement of a front momentarily stationary; <a href='#Page_130'>130</a></li>
+<li> Defensive; <a href='#Page_130'>130</a></li>
+<li> General rules for installation; <a href='#Page_131'>131</a></li>
+<li> Employment of fire and instruction; <a href='#Page_132'>132</a></li>
+<li> Resume; <a href='#Page_132'>132</a></li>
+<li> Points before firing; <a href='#Page_133'>133</a></li>
+<li> Points during firing; <a href='#Page_133'>133</a></li>
+<li> Points after firing; <a href='#Page_133'>133</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+<li> Grenade instruction; <a href='#Page_134'>134</a>
+ <ul>
+<li> Introduction; <a href='#Page_134'>134</a></li>
+<li> Working of grenades in use; <a href='#Page_136'>136</a></li>
+<li> Instruction in throwing; <a href='#Page_138'>138</a></li>
+<li> Instruction in grenade organization; <a href='#Page_139'>139</a></li>
+<li> Points to remember; <a href='#Page_141'>141</a></li></ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 5.</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>Map sketching; <a href='#Page_143'>143</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Class room&mdash;map reading; <a href='#Page_143'>143</a></li>
+ <li>Taking up map scales; <a href='#Page_143'>143</a></li>
+ <li>Field work&mdash;strict scale map making; <a href='#Page_145'>145</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Road sketch; <a href='#Page_146'>146</a></li>
+ <li>Area sketch; <a href='#Page_146'>146</a></li>
+ <li>Problem; <a href='#Page_150'>150</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Class room&mdash;problem; <a href='#Page_150'>150</a></li>
+ <li>Field work&mdash;problem; <a href='#Page_154'>154</a></li>
+ <li>Class room&mdash;problem; <a href='#Page_155'>155</a></li>
+ <li>Field work&mdash;problem; <a href='#Page_157'>157</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>problem; <a href='#Page_158'>158</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+<li>Map reading; <a href='#Page_159'>159</a></li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 6.</p>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Helpful references to the articles of war; <a href='#Page_161'>161</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Military law; <a href='#Page_161'>161</a></li>
+ <li>Article 1; <a href='#Page_161'>161</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Definitions; <a href='#Page_161'>161</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 2; <a href='#Page_161'>161</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Persons subject to military law; <a href='#Page_161'>161</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Articles 3-18; <a href='#Page_162'>162</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Courts martial classified; <a href='#Page_162'>162</a></li>
+ <li>Method of entering a charge against a man; <a href='#Page_163'>163</a></li>
+ <li>Specification; <a href='#Page_164'>164</a></li>
+ <li>General remarks; <a href='#Page_164'>164</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 31; <a href='#Page_164'>164</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Order of voting; <a href='#Page_164'>164</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 39; <a href='#Page_164'>164</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Limit upon prosecutions; <a href='#Page_164'>164</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 54; <a href='#Page_165'>165</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Fraudulent enlistment; <a href='#Page_165'>165</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 58; <a href='#Page_165'>165</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Desertion; <a href='#Page_165'>165</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 61; <a href='#Page_166'>166</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Absence without leave; <a href='#Page_166'>166</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 62; <a href='#Page_166'>166</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Disrespect toward President and others; <a href='#Page_166'>166</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 63; <a href='#Page_166'>166</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Disrespect toward a superior officer; <a href='#Page_166'>166</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 64; <a href='#Page_167'>167</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Assaulting or wilfully disobeying superior officer; <a href='#Page_167'>167</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 65; <a href='#Page_167'>167</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Insubordinate conduct toward a non-commissioned officer; <a href='#Page_167'>167</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 68; <a href='#Page_167'>167</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Disorders; <a href='#Page_167'>167</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 69; <a href='#Page_168'>168</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Breaking arrest; <a href='#Page_168'>168</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 75; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Misbehavior before the enemy; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 83; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Neglect of military property; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 84; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Waste or unlawful disposal of property issued to soldiers; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 85; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Drunk on duty; <a href='#Page_169'>169</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 86; <a href='#Page_170'>170</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Misbehavior of sentinel; <a href='#Page_170'>170</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 92; <a href='#Page_170'>170</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Murder or rape; <a href='#Page_170'>170</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 93; <a href='#Page_170'>170</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Various crimes; <a href='#Page_170'>170</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 94; <a href='#Page_171'>171</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Frauds against the government; <a href='#Page_171'>171</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 95; <a href='#Page_171'>171</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman; <a href='#Page_171'>171</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Article 96; <a href='#Page_171'>171</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>General articles, the catch all; <a href='#Page_171'>171</a></li>
+ <li>Examples; <a href='#Page_172'>172</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Problem 1; <a href='#Page_172'>172</a></li>
+ <li>Problem 2; <a href='#Page_172'>172</a></li>
+ <li>Problem 3; <a href='#Page_172'>172</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 7.</p>
+
+<ul><li>Notes on army regulations; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Authority exercised; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Abusive language; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Respect to superiors; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Remarks by officers; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Furloughs; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Men on furloughs; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Men in foreign countries; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>No payments; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Desertion; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Abandoned clothes; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Reward; <a href='#Page_175'>175</a></li>
+ <li>Costs of apprehension; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>No pay or clothes; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>Will be restored; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>Absent without leave; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>Discharge of enlisted men; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>Final statements; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>Certificate; <a href='#Page_176'>176</a></li>
+ <li>Loss of discharge certificate; <a href='#Page_177'>177</a></li>
+ <li>Physical disability certificate; <a href='#Page_177'>177</a></li>
+ <li>Death of soldier; <a href='#Page_177'>177</a></li>
+ <li>Effects; <a href='#Page_177'>177</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Will be delivered; <a href='#Page_177'>177</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Medal of honor; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Certificate of merit; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Quarters; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Saturday; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Neglect of rooms; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Destruction of tableware; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Chiefs of squads; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Premises; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Company commanders; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Arms; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a></li>
+ <li>Accountability and responsibility; <a href='#Page_178'>178</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Example; <a href='#Page_179'>179</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Loss of public property; <a href='#Page_179'>179</a></li>
+ <li>Ration; <a href='#Page_179'>179</a></li>
+ <li>Forfeiture; <a href='#Page_179'>179</a></li>
+ <li>Pay; <a href='#Page_179'>179</a></li>
+ <li>Allotments; <a href='#Page_180'>180</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Class A; <a href='#Page_180'>180</a></li>
+ <li>Class B; <a href='#Page_180'>180</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Compensation for death or disability; <a href='#Page_181'>181</a></li>
+ <li>Additional insurance; <a href='#Page_182'>182</a></li>
+ <li>Deposits; <a href='#Page_182'>182</a></li>
+ <li>A lost deposit book; <a href='#Page_182'>182</a></li>
+ <li>Payment; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Withdrawal of deposits; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Interest; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Forfeiture; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Officers and men; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Furloughed to reserve; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Transportation; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Discharged soldier; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Transfer of claims; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ <li>Notes on the laws of war; <a href='#Page_183'>183</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 8.</p>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Practice marches; <a href='#Page_187'>187</a></li>
+<li>Field work; <a href='#Page_188'>188</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>An order; <a href='#Page_188'>188</a></li>
+ <li>Do not deploy too early; <a href='#Page_188'>188</a></li>
+ <li>Fire direction; <a href='#Page_189'>189</a></li>
+ <li>The troops; <a href='#Page_189'>189</a></li>
+ <li>Defense; <a href='#Page_190'>190</a></li>
+ <li>Leadership; <a href='#Page_190'>190</a></li>
+ <li>Communications; <a href='#Page_191'>191</a></li>
+ <li>Night operations; <a href='#Page_191'>191</a></li>
+ <li>Patrols; <a href='#Page_191'>191</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Leader; <a href='#Page_191'>191</a></li>
+ <li>Conduct of; <a href='#Page_192'>192</a></li>
+ <li>Report; <a href='#Page_192'>192</a></li>
+ <li>Return; <a href='#Page_193'>193</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Advance guard; <a href='#Page_193'>193</a></li>
+ <li>Rear guard; <a href='#Page_194'>194</a></li>
+ <li>Flank guard; <a href='#Page_194'>194</a></li>
+ <li>Camps; <a href='#Page_194'>194</a></li>
+ <li>March outpost; <a href='#Page_194'>194</a></li>
+ <li>Outpost; <a href='#Page_195'>195</a></li>
+ <li>Outline of field service regulations; <a href='#Page_197'>197</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Land forces of U.S.; <a href='#Page_197'>197</a></li>
+ <li>Military information; <a href='#Page_197'>197</a></li>
+ <li>Transmission of information; <a href='#Page_198'>198</a></li>
+ <li>Questions and answers on; <a href='#Page_206'>206</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 9.</p>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Feeding men; <a href='#Page_213'>213</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>In camp; <a href='#Page_213'>213</a></li>
+ <li>On the march; <a href='#Page_214'>214</a></li>
+ <li>For individual cooking; <a href='#Page_214'>214</a></li>
+ <li>In the trenches; <a href='#Page_215'>215</a></li>
+ <li>Rations and cooking; <a href='#Page_215'>215</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+<li>Camping and camp sanitation; <a href='#Page_216'>216</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>General principles; <a href='#Page_216'>216</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 10.</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>Personal hygiene and first aid; <a href='#Page_221'>221</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Personal hygiene; <a href='#Page_221'>221</a></li>
+ <li>Bathing; <a href='#Page_221'>221</a></li>
+ <li>Sexual indulgence; <a href='#Page_222'>222</a></li>
+ <li>Exercise; <a href='#Page_222'>222</a></li>
+ <li>Cleanliness of surroundings; <a href='#Page_223'>223</a></li>
+ <li>Preventable diseases; <a href='#Page_223'>223</a></li>
+ <li>Typhoid fever; <a href='#Page_223'>223</a></li>
+ <li>Dysentery; <a href='#Page_223'>223</a></li>
+ <li>Malaria; <a href='#Page_224'>224</a></li>
+ <li>Tonsilitis and colds; <a href='#Page_224'>224</a></li>
+ <li>Measles; <a href='#Page_224'>224</a></li>
+ <li>First aid; <a href='#Page_224'>224</a></li>
+ <li>Grounds; <a href='#Page_224'>224</a></li>
+ <li>Poisoned wounds; <a href='#Page_225'>225</a></li>
+ <li>Diagnosis tag; <a href='#Page_225'>225</a></li>
+ <li>Treatment of wounds; <a href='#Page_225'>225</a></li>
+ <li>Bleeding wounds; <a href='#Page_225'>225</a></li>
+ <li>Fainting, heat exhaustion and shock; <a href='#Page_226'>226</a></li>
+ <li>Sunstroke; <a href='#Page_226'>226</a></li>
+ <li>Burns and scalds; <a href='#Page_226'>226</a></li>
+ <li>Freezing and frostbites; <a href='#Page_226'>226</a></li>
+ <li>Fractures; <a href='#Page_226'>226</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Treatment; <a href='#Page_227'>227</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Artificial respiration; <a href='#Page_227'>227</a></li>
+ <li>Trench foot; <a href='#Page_227'>227</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 11.</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>Signaling; <a href='#Page_229'>229</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Semaphore; <a href='#Page_229'>229</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>First cycle; <a href='#Page_229'>229</a></li>
+ <li>Second cycle; <a href='#Page_229'>229</a></li>
+ <li>Third cycle; <a href='#Page_229'>229</a></li>
+ <li>Fourth cycle; <a href='#Page_230'>230</a></li>
+ <li>Doubles; <a href='#Page_230'>230</a></li>
+ <li>Instructing; <a href='#Page_230'>230</a></li>
+ <li>Second step; <a href='#Page_230'>230</a></li>
+ <li>Third step; <a href='#Page_230'>230</a></li>
+ <li>Fourth step; <a href='#Page_230'>230</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Wig wag; <a href='#Page_232'>232</a></li>
+ <li>Points to remember; <a href='#Page_233'>233</a></li>
+ <li>Letter codes; <a href='#Page_233'>233</a></li>
+ <li>Arm signals; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Forward, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>Halt; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>Double time, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>Squads left, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>Squads right about, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>Change direction or column right, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>As skirmishers, march; <a href='#Page_234'>234</a></li>
+ <li>As skirmishers, guide center, march; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>As skirmishers, guide right, march; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Assemble, march; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Range, or change elevation; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>What range are you using?; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Are you ready?; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Commence firing; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Fire faster; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Fire slower; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>To swing the cone of fire; <a href='#Page_235'>235</a></li>
+ <li>Fix bayonet; <a href='#Page_236'>236</a></li>
+ <li>Suspend firing; <a href='#Page_236'>236</a></li>
+ <li>Cease firing; <a href='#Page_236'>236</a></li>
+ <li>Platoon; <a href='#Page_236'>236</a></li>
+ <li>Squad; <a href='#Page_236'>236</a></li>
+ <li>Rush; <a href='#Page_236'>236</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 12.</p>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Guard duty; <a href='#Page_237'>237</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Guards; <a href='#Page_237'>237</a></li>
+ <li>Formal guard mounting; <a href='#Page_238'>238</a></li>
+ <li>Ceremony; <a href='#Page_238'>238</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>First detail; <a href='#Page_239'>239</a></li>
+ <li>Other details; <a href='#Page_239'>239</a></li>
+ <li>Sergeant major; <a href='#Page_239'>239</a></li>
+ <li>Adjutant; <a href='#Page_239'>239</a>, <a href='#Page_240'>240</a>, <a href='#Page_241'>241</a></li>
+ <li>Officer of the guard; <a href='#Page_240'>240</a></li>
+ <li>New officer of the day; <a href='#Page_240'>240</a></li>
+ <li>Commander of the guard; <a href='#Page_241'>241</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Guard duty in the trenches; <a href='#Page_241'>241</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 13.</p>
+
+
+<ul>
+<li>Company administration; <a href='#Page_245'>245</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Notes on organization; <a href='#Page_245'>245</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Prepare in advance to receive men; <a href='#Page_245'>245</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_245'>245</a></li>
+ <li>If in cantonments; <a href='#Page_246'>246</a></li>
+ <li>If in tents; <a href='#Page_246'>246</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Men reporting; <a href='#Page_246'>246</a></li>
+ <li>Issue of equipment; <a href='#Page_247'>247</a></li>
+ <li>Organization; <a href='#Page_248'>248</a></li>
+ <li>Day's routine; <a href='#Page_249'>249</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Reveille; <a href='#Page_250'>250</a></li>
+ <li>Mess; <a href='#Page_250'>250</a>, <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>Sick call; <a href='#Page_250'>250</a>, <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>Morning instruction; <a href='#Page_250'>250</a></li>
+ <li>Afternoon instruction; <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>Retreat; <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>School call; <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>Tattoo; <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>Call to quarters; <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ <li>Taps; <a href='#Page_251'>251</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Sundays and holidays; <a href='#Page_252'>252</a></li>
+ <li>Details; <a href='#Page_252'>252</a></li>
+ <li>Paper work; <a href='#Page_252'>252</a></li>
+ <li>Military correspondence; <a href='#Page_253'>253</a></li>
+ <li>Morning report; <a href='#Page_254'>254</a></li>
+ <li>Ration return; <a href='#Page_254'>254</a></li>
+ <li>Sick report; <a href='#Page_254'>254</a></li>
+ <li>Duty roster; <a href='#Page_254'>254</a></li>
+ <li>Monthly return; <a href='#Page_255'>255</a></li>
+ <li>Service record; <a href='#Page_255'>255</a></li>
+ <li>Discharge; <a href='#Page_255'>255</a></li>
+ <li>Final statement; <a href='#Page_255'>255</a></li>
+ <li>Muster roll; <a href='#Page_255'>255</a></li>
+ <li>Pay roll; <a href='#Page_256'>256</a></li>
+ <li>Names; <a href='#Page_257'>257</a></li>
+ <li>Losses; <a href='#Page_257'>257</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 14.</p>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Conferences; <a href='#Page_259'>259</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Study; <a href='#Page_259'>259</a></li>
+ <li>Syllabus: Small problems for infantry; <a href='#Page_261'>261</a></li>
+ <li>Examinations; <a href='#Page_269'>269</a></li>
+ <li>Military science and tactics; <a href='#Page_275'>275</a></li>
+ <li>Minor tactics; <a href='#Page_275'>275</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+
+<p class="sc2" style="text-align: center; text-indent: 0em; margin-bottom: 1em">Chapter 15.</p>
+
+<ul>
+<li>Trench warfare; <a href='#Page_287'>287</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>General principles; <a href='#Page_287'>287</a></li>
+ <li>Instructions to be issued by battalion commander; <a href='#Page_287'>287</a></li>
+ <li>Attack of a defensive position; <a href='#Page_289'>289</a></li>
+ <li>Attacking from trenches; <a href='#Page_291'>291</a></li>
+ <li>Defense of trenches; <a href='#Page_296'>296</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Liaison; <a href='#Page_298'>298</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Trench orders; <a href='#Page_299'>299</a></li>
+ <li>Selection of site; <a href='#Page_302'>302</a></li>
+ <li>Trench construction; <a href='#Page_303'>303</a>, <a href='#Page_307'>307</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>General arrangement; <a href='#Page_303'>303</a></li>
+ <li>System of laying out trenches; <a href='#Page_307'>307</a></li>
+ <li>Revettments; <a href='#Page_308'>308</a></li>
+ <li>Sod; <a href='#Page_310'>310</a></li>
+ <li>Sand bags; <a href='#Page_310'>310</a></li>
+ <li>Concrete work; <a href='#Page_310'>310</a></li>
+ <li>Gabions; <a href='#Page_310'>310</a></li>
+ <li>Trench armament; <a href='#Page_311'>311</a></li>
+ <li>Loopholes; <a href='#Page_311'>311</a></li>
+ <li>Trench bottoms; <a href='#Page_311'>311</a></li>
+ <li>Communication trench; <a href='#Page_313'>313</a></li>
+ <li>Latrines; <a href='#Page_315'>315</a></li>
+ <li>Shelters; <a href='#Page_315'>315</a></li>
+ <li>Dugouts; <a href='#Page_317'>317</a></li>
+ <li>Sentries; <a href='#Page_317'>317</a></li>
+ <li>Position; <a href='#Page_317'>317</a></li>
+ <li>Entrances; <a href='#Page_317'>317</a></li>
+ <li>Galleries; <a href='#Page_318'>318</a></li>
+ <li>Bomb-traps; <a href='#Page_318'>318</a></li>
+ <li>Interior; <a href='#Page_318'>318</a></li>
+ <li>Depots for supplies; <a href='#Page_318'>318</a></li>
+ <li>Telephones; <a href='#Page_319'>319</a></li>
+ <li>Departure parallel; <a href='#Page_319'>319</a></li>
+ <li>Machine gun emplacements; <a href='#Page_319'>319</a></li>
+ <li>Listening posts; <a href='#Page_321'>321</a></li>
+ <li>Wire entanglements; <a href='#Page_321'>321</a></li>
+ <li>High entanglements; <a href='#Page_321'>321</a></li>
+ <li>Tracing entanglements; <a href='#Page_322'>322</a></li>
+ <li>Low entanglements; <a href='#Page_322'>322</a></li>
+ <li>Loose wire; <a href='#Page_322'>322</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Criticisms by Lieut Henri Poire; <a href='#Page_322'>322</a></li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+<li>Occupation; <a href='#Page_325'>325</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Two main classes of relief; <a href='#Page_325'>325</a></li>
+ <li>General principles of relief; <a href='#Page_325'>325</a></li>
+ <li>Mechanism of relief; <a href='#Page_325'>325</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Attack during the march; <a href='#Page_328'>328</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>The stay in the trenches; <a href='#Page_329'>329</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Four objects of a trench commander; <a href='#Page_329'>329</a></li>
+ <li>His plan of defense; <a href='#Page_329'>329</a></li>
+ <li>Organization of defense; <a href='#Page_329'>329</a></li>
+ <li>Liaison; <a href='#Page_331'>331</a></li>
+ <li>Observation; <a href='#Page_331'>331</a></li>
+ <li>Trench work; <a href='#Page_333'>333</a></li>
+ <li>Offensive operations; <a href='#Page_334'>334</a></li>
+ <li>Rule of the trench commander; <a href='#Page_335'>335</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Duties of the company commander; <a href='#Page_335'>335</a></li>
+ <li>Duties of platoon leaders as officers on duty; <a href='#Page_339'>339</a></li>
+ <li>Duties of platoon leaders; <a href='#Page_339'>339</a></li>
+ <li>In front line trenches; <a href='#Page_340'>340</a></li>
+ <li>Duties of non-commissioned officer on duty; <a href='#Page_341'>341</a></li>
+ <li>Patrols; <a href='#Page_342'>342</a></li>
+ <li>Sentinels; <a href='#Page_342'>342</a></li>
+ <li>Machine guns; <a href='#Page_342'>342</a></li>
+ <li>Snipers; <a href='#Page_343'>343</a></li>
+ <li>Organization of a platoon; <a href='#Page_344'>344</a></li>
+ <li>Deployments; <a href='#Page_346'>346</a></li>
+ <li>Normal battalion formation in attack; <a href='#Page_347'>347</a></li>
+ <li>General principles of the platoon formation in assault of
+ <ul>
+ <li>fortified positions; <a href='#Page_349'>349</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Remarks regarding forming of wave from close order; <a href='#Page_353'>353</a></li>
+ <li>Some questions a platoon commander should ask himself; <a href='#Page_354'>354</a></li>
+ <li>Defensive measure against gas attacks; <a href='#Page_356'>356</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>General considerations; <a href='#Page_356'>356</a></li>
+ <li>Nature of gas attacks; <a href='#Page_356'>356</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Gas clouds; <a href='#Page_356'>356</a></li>
+ <li>Gas projectiles; <a href='#Page_358'>358</a></li>
+ <li>Tear or lachrymatory shells; <a href='#Page_359'>359</a></li>
+ <li>Poison shells; <a href='#Page_359'>359</a></li>
+ <li>Smoke; <a href='#Page_359'>359</a></li>
+ <li>Mine and explosion gases; <a href='#Page_359'>359</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Protection of shelters; <a href='#Page_360'>360</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Methods of protection; <a href='#Page_360'>360</a></li>
+ <li>Shelters which should be protected; <a href='#Page_361'>361</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Protection of weapons and equipment; <a href='#Page_361'>361</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Small arms and S.A.A.; <a href='#Page_362'>362</a></li>
+ <li>Hand and rifle grenades; <a href='#Page_362'>362</a></li>
+ <li>Light trench mortars; <a href='#Page_362'>362</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Action to be taken in trenches on gas alarm; <a href='#Page_363'>363</a></li>
+ <li>Action to be taken in billets and back areas; <a href='#Page_363'>363</a></li>
+ <li>Action during gas attack; <a href='#Page_364'>364</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Protective measures; <a href='#Page_364'>364</a></li>
+ <li>Tactical measures; <a href='#Page_364'>364</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Precautions against gas shells; <a href='#Page_365'>365</a></li>
+ <li>Action subsequent to a gas attack; <a href='#Page_367'>367</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>General; <a href='#Page_367'>367</a></li>
+ <li>Movement; <a href='#Page_367'>367</a></li>
+ <li>Clearing dugouts and other shelters; <a href='#Page_367'>367</a></li>
+ <li>Ventilation; <a href='#Page_368'>368</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Natural; <a href='#Page_368'>368</a></li>
+ <li>By fire; <a href='#Page_368'>368</a></li>
+ <li>By fanning; <a href='#Page_369'>369</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Cleaning arms and ammunition; <a href='#Page_369'>369</a></li>
+ <li>Treatment of shell holes; <a href='#Page_370'>370</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Concealment from aerial observers; <a href='#Page_370'>370</a></li>
+ <li>Orders governing intrenchment problems; <a href='#Page_372'>372</a></li>
+ <li>Company organization; <a href='#Page_384'>384</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Company headquarters; <a href='#Page_384'>384</a></li>
+ <li>Headquarters; <a href='#Page_384'>384</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Personnel; <a href='#Page_385'>385</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Commissioned; <a href='#Page_385'>385</a></li>
+ <li>Enlisted; <a href='#Page_386'>386</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Equipment; <a href='#Page_386'>386</a></li>
+ <li>Trench standing orders; <a href='#Page_386'>386</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Duties; <a href='#Page_386'>386</a></li>
+ <li>Sentries; <a href='#Page_387'>387</a></li>
+ <li>Patrols; <a href='#Page_388'>388</a></li>
+ <li>Stand to; <a href='#Page_389'>389</a></li>
+ <li>Machine guns; <a href='#Page_389'>389</a></li>
+ <li>Reliefs; <a href='#Page_390'>390</a></li>
+ <li>Guides; <a href='#Page_391'>391</a></li>
+ <li>Smoking and talking; <a href='#Page_391'>391</a></li>
+ <li>Procedure on arrival at trenches; <a href='#Page_391'>391</a></li>
+ <li>Log books; <a href='#Page_392'>392</a></li>
+ <li>Equipment; <a href='#Page_392'>392</a></li>
+ <li>Stretcher bearers; <a href='#Page_392'>392</a></li>
+ <li>Discipline; <a href='#Page_392'>392</a></li>
+ <li>Rations and cooking; <a href='#Page_393'>393</a></li>
+ <li>Sanitation; <a href='#Page_393'>393</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ <li>Emergency dumps for companies (material); <a href='#Page_394'>394</a>
+ <ul>
+ <li>Contents of dump; <a href='#Page_394'>394</a></li>
+ <li>Stores for company; <a href='#Page_394'>394</a></li>
+ <li>Stores at battalion headquarters; <a href='#Page_394'>394</a></li>
+ </ul>
+ </li>
+ </ul>
+</li>
+<li>Conclusion; <a href='#Page_396'>396</a></li>
+<li>Bibliography; <a href='#Page_397'>397</a></li>
+</ul>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL***</p>
+<p>******* This file should be named 14625-h.txt or 14625-h.zip *******</p>
+<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br />
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625">https://www.gutenberg.org/1/4/6/2/14625</a></p>
+<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.</p>
+
+<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.</p>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+<a href="https://gutenberg.org/license">https://gutenberg.org/license)</a>.
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations. To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">https://www.gutenberg.org</a>
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a>
+
+ (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+ 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a>
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/image-1.jpg b/old/14625-h/images/image-1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d2ec07f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/image-1.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/image-2.jpg b/old/14625-h/images/image-2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1725d0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/image-2.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/image-3.png b/old/14625-h/images/image-3.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b53421
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/image-3.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/image-4.png b/old/14625-h/images/image-4.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9c24c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/image-4.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/image-5.png b/old/14625-h/images/image-5.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4cf98f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/image-5.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate10.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate10.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5cc64f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate10.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate11.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate11.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04f9c8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate11.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate12.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate12.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d870688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate12.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate13.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate13.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..093ea0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate13.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate14.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate14.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..24791ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate14.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate14a.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate14a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35d9796
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate14a.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate15.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate15.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cebfa3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate15.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate16.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate16.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e77324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate16.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate16a.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate16a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8d0ce6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate16a.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate17.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate17.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e225cf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate17.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate18.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate18.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c29a2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate18.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate19.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate19.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4f2695e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate19.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate20.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate20.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5783db7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate20.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate21.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate21.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6a9399
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate21.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate22.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate22.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1da226f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate22.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate23.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate23.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4ab062
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate23.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate26.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate26.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1a3aea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate26.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate27.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate27.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..948a7a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate27.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate28.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate28.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee257d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate28.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate3.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate3.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa65e55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate3.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate4.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate4.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..afe0d78
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate4.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate5.jpg b/old/14625-h/images/plate5.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5bf8b7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate5.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate7.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate7.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d42eccb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate7.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate8.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate8.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9446586
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate8.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625-h/images/plate9.png b/old/14625-h/images/plate9.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbe4d85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625-h/images/plate9.png
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/14625.txt b/old/14625.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69c4e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15124 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Military Instructors Manual, by James P. Cole
+and Oliver Schoonmaker
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Military Instructors Manual
+
+Author: James P. Cole and Oliver Schoonmaker
+
+Release Date: January 9, 2005 [eBook #14625]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Juliet Sutherland, Jeannie Howse, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+ file which includes the original illustrations.
+ See 14625-h.htm or 14625-h.zip:
+ (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625/14625-h/14625-h.htm)
+ or
+ (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625/14625-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL
+
+by
+
+CAPTAIN JAMES P. COLE, 59th INFANTRY
+Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training Regiment,
+Plattsburg, N.Y.
+
+and
+
+MAJOR OLIVER SCHOONMAKER, 76th DIVISION
+Assistant Instructor 3rd Battalion, 17th Provisional Training
+Regiment, Plattsburg, N.Y.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ TO
+ COLONEL WOLF
+
+ Under whose careful supervision so many have
+ received their Military Training in order that
+ they may show the world in battle the true spirit
+ of American manhood.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Acknowledgment.
+
+
+To have prepared this book within the time allotted to it, without the
+assistance of Candidates ALCOTT FARRAR ELWELL and LYLE MILTON PROUSE
+would have been impossible, and grateful recognition is made of their
+services. Not only much of the manual labor, but the preparation of
+entire chapters, has been in their hands.
+
+Candidates CHARLES HUNTINGTON JACOBS and MICHAEL FRANCIS MCALEER have
+rendered very valuable assistance and we wish to thank the following
+candidates for the loan of materials used elsewhere, for typewriting
+and other work:
+
+ GLENN MACK AINSWORTH.
+ PHILIP M. BROWN.
+ NELSON P. BUMP.
+ EDWIN G. BURROWS.
+ PHILIP DOREMUS.
+ WALTER LANE HARDENBROOK.
+ ALBERT BLANCHARD KELLOGG.
+ HENRY PRATT MCKEAN.
+ LOREN RAY PIERCE.
+ HARRY RAPHAEL SAFTEL.
+ ROLAND EMERY PACKARD.
+ HOYT SHERMAN.
+
+
+
+
+
+Introduction.
+
+
+The officer of to-day has big problems to face at short notice. His
+training has necessarily been so intensive that he cannot absorb a
+large amount of it. He has little time to make out schedules or even
+to look over the hasty notes he may have made during his training
+period, yet he finds himself facing problems which force him to
+immediate action.
+
+This book so condenses and systematizes general military instruction
+and the work done at Plattsburg so that it may be easily utilized in
+training other troops. No broad claim for originality is made except
+in the arrangement of all available material; the bibliography makes
+acknowledgment to all texts so utilized. Besides bringing helpful
+reminders to new officers regarding the elements of modern warfare,
+much of the material will be found of radical importance, as it is
+practically new and never before condensed. Since under the new army
+organization the platoon leader virtually has assumed the roll of a
+captain of a company, it is not enough for him to know simply his own
+part; he must be ready with all the information that his
+non-commissioned officers and men should know, and more important
+still, he must know how to teach them. Having little or no time to
+work over and digest for himself this mass of new material pouring in
+upon him, the officer may find in this book, material condensed and
+already arranged.
+
+It is hoped that this work will serve to recall to many officers,
+valuable points of military training which would otherwise be lost,
+to them in the mass of notes never looked at since the day they were
+made. More than this, every reader will find help in planning his
+work, saving thereby precious hours already too full of necessary
+duties, and will find fresh material for progress in the game of war.
+
+It is the purpose of this book to help men who are in the service of
+the United States, and through them to share in bringing victory.
+
+
+
+
+Table of Contents.
+
+ PAGE.
+
+Chapter 1. SCHEDULES 1
+
+Chapter 2. INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS 31
+
+Chapter 3. PHYSICAL TRAINING 91
+ VOICE CULTURE.
+
+Chapter 4. USE OF MODERN ARMS 105
+ 1. S.A.F.M.
+ 2. Range Practice.
+ 3. Pistol.
+ 4. Bayonet.
+ 5. Machine Guns.
+ 6. Grenade Instruction.
+
+Chapter 5. MAP SKETCHING 143
+
+Chapter 6. ARTICLES OF WAR. (Courts-Martial.) 161
+
+Chapter 7. ARMY REGULATIONS 175
+
+Chapter 8. PRACTICE MARCHES 187
+ FIELD WORK.
+
+Chapter 9. FEEDING MEN 213
+ CAMPING AND CAMP SANITATION.
+
+Chapter 10. PERSONAL HYGIENE 221
+ FIRST AID.
+
+Chapter 11. SIGNALING 229
+
+Chapter 12. GUARD DUTY 237
+
+Chapter 13. COMPANY ADMINISTRATION 245
+
+Chapter 14. CONFERENCES 259
+ Study.
+ Small Problems in Infantry.
+ Examinations.
+
+Chapter 15. TRENCH WARFARE 287
+ 1. General Principles.
+ 2. Siting Trenches.
+ 3. Construction.
+ 4. Occupation.
+
+CONCLUSION 396
+
+BIBLIOGRAPHY 397
+
+CHAPTER INDEX 403
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 1.
+
+Schedules.
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., August 27 to September 1, 1917_
+
+ Organization. | | |
+Issue of Equipment. | | Drill |
+ Organization of | Drill | Physical |
+ Barracks | I.D.R. | M.P.T. |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | | |
+Monday, Aug. 27 | | |
+7.00-12.00 a.m. | | |
+1.30-4.30 p.m. | | |
+ | | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+Tuesday, Aug. 28 | Without arms | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | pgs. 1-30 |
+ | pars 48-73 | |
+ | --------------- | |
+ | 8.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | With arms | |
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | |
+ | pars 48-100 | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+Wednesday, Aug. 29 | --------------- | pgs. 1-33 |
+ | 8.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | par. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | par. 48-100 | pgs. 1-36 |
+ | | |
+Thursday, Aug. 30 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+ | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|=================|==================|
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | par. 48-100 | pgs. 1-39 |
+ | | |
+Friday, Aug. 31 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 101-132 | |
+ | | |
+ | 9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|====================================|
+Saturday, Sept. 1. | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+====================|=====================================
+
+ | | |
+ | Musketry | |
+ Practice | Training | |
+ March | S.A.F.M. | Study | Conferences
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+ | | par. 1-21 |
+ | | par. 48-73- |
+ | | 101-132 |
+ | | I.D.R. |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | 1.30-3.30 p.m. |
+ | | par. 1-21 |
+ | | S.A.F.M. | 2.30-4.30 p.m.
+ | | | Care of arms and
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | equipment
+ | | par. 74-100 |
+ | | I.D.R. |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | 2.30-3.30 p.m. |
+ | | par. 1-31 |
+Without arms | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | S.A.F.M. | 3.30-4.30 p.m.
+10.45-11.45 a.m. | par. 1-21 | -------------- | Assembling and
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | adjusting pack
+ | | par. 159-198 |
+ | | I.D.R. |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+10.45-11.45 a.m. | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | 2.30-4.30 p.m.
+With arms | par. 1-31 | par. 159-198 | Assembling and
+ | | I.D.R. | adjusting pack
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=================|================|================|==================
+ | | |
+ | | |
+With arms and | | 7.00-9.00 p.m. | 3.30-4.30 p.m.
+light pack | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 199-257- | Military
+10.45-11.45 a.m. | par. 1-31 | 758-765 | Courtesy
+ | | I.D.R. |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=================|================|================|==================
+
+======================================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917_
+
+ | | Drill |
+ | Drill | Physical |
+ | I.D.R. | M.P.T. |
+===================|================|===================|
+Monday, Sept. 3 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-42 |
+ | 159-193 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Tuesday, Sept. 4 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 48-100 | pgs. 1-45 |
+ | 158-198 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Wednesday, Sept. 5 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-48 |
+ | 158-198 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Thursday, Sept. 6 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.30 p.m. |
+ | pars. 48-100 | pgs. 1-52 |
+ | 159-198 | |
+===================|================|===================|
+Friday, Sept. 7 | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | pars. 101-158 | pgs. 1-55 |
+ | 159-198 | |
+===================|====================================|
+Saturday, Sept. 8 | As prescribed by Senior Instructor.
+===================|=====================================
+
+Musketry | | Companies
+Training | Semaphore | Practice March
+S.A.F.M. | Signalling | Full Kit
+=================|==================|=================
+8.45-9.45 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.45 a.m. |
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+10.00-11.00 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | 8.45-9.45 a.m.
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+8.45-9.45 p.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.15 a.m. |
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+10.30-11.30 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | | 8.45-10.15 a.m.
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+8.45-9.45 a.m. | |
+par. 1-31 | 9.45-10.15 a.m. |
+ | |
+=================|==================|=================
+
+======================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 3 to September 8, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Grenade Instruction [A] | Bayonet Drill |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lesson 1 |
+Monday, Sept. 3 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 2 |
+Tuesday, Sept. 4 | 11.30-12.00 m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 3 |
+Wednesday, Sept. 5 | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+ | | |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 4 |
+Thursday, Sept. 6 | 11.30-12.00 m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+ | | 4.00-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Lessons 1 and 5 |
+Friday, Sept. 7 | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | Notes on |
+ | | Bayonet Training |
+===================|=========================|==================|
+Saturday, Sept. 8 | As prescribed by Senior Instructor.
+===================|=============================================
+
+Voice Culture | Conferences | Study
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | pars. 1-158 I.D.R
+11.30-12.00 m. | par. 1-100 I.D.R. | pgs. 7-46
+ | pgs. 7-46 M.G.D. | M.G.D.
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 159-174 I.D.R.
+ | pars. 101-158 I.D.R. | pgs. 47-88
+ | pgs. 7-88 M.G.D. | M.G.D.
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | Physical Exam. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 175-198 I.D.R.
+11.00-12.00 m. | pars. 159-174 | part III--U.S.
+ | part 5, 6, 10, 19 | Signal Book
+ | U.S.S.B. |
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | par. 792-798 I.D.R.
+ | pars. 175-198, 1-61 | par. 1-61
+ | S.A.F.M. | S.A.F.M.
+===================|=========================|====================
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+11.00-12.00 m. | pars. 792-798 I.D.R. | par. 199-220 1-61
+ | 1-61 S.A.F.M. | S.A.F.M.
+ | |
+===================|=========================|====================
+
+==================================================================
+
+[Footnote A: As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917_
+
+ | | |
+ | Drill | Musketry Training |
+ | I.D.R. | S.A.F.M. |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | 7.00-7.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 133-150 | 8.30-9.30 a.m. |
+ | ------------------ | pars. 35-43 |
+Monday, Sept. 10 | 7.30-8.00 a.m. | Sight setting |
+ | pars. 123-127 | and loadings |
+ | ------------------ | |
+ | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | | 9.30-10.30 a.m. |
+ | | pars. 35-51 |
+Tuesday, Sept. 11 | Same as for Monday | Sight setting |
+ | | and loadings |
+====================|====================|===================|
+Wednesday, Sept. 12 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 p.m. |
+ | pars. 199-211 | pars. 35-57 |
+ | ------------------ | Sight setting |
+ | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | and loadings |
+ | pars. 159-198 | |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | |
+Thursday, Sept. 13 | pars. 199-224 | 10.00-11.00 a.m. |
+ | ------------------ | pars. 35-60 |
+ | 8.00-8.30 a.m. | Sight setting |
+ | pars. 159-198 | and loadings |
+====================|====================|===================|
+ | 7.00-8.30 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 a.m. |
+Friday, Sept. 14 | pars. 159-224 | pars. 35-61 |
+ | | Sight setting |
+ | | and loadings |
+====================|====================|===================|
+Saturday, Sept. 15 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+==============================================================
+
+First Aid Manual, | Signaling |
+N.C.O's and | Morse Code | Practice March
+Privates | (wig wag) | Full Kit
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+ | |
+9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+Wounds | 10.30-11.00 a.m. |
+pgs. 286-288 | |
+ | |
+ | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+ | |
+ | 10.30-11.00 a.m. | 8.30-9.30 a.m.
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+9.30-10.30 a.m. | |
+Fractures | 10.30-11.00 a.m. |
+pgs. 288-290 | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+ | |
+ | |
+ | | 8.30-10.00 a.m.
+ | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+9.30-10.00 a.m. | |
+Resuscitation | 10.00-11.00 a.m. |
+pgs. 290-296 | |
+ | |
+====================|====================|==================
+
+============================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 10 to September 15, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Grenade Instruction | Drill, Physical |
+ | [B] | M.P.T. |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Monday, Sept. 10 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-58 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Tuesday, Sept. 11 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-61 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+Wednesday, Sept. 12 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+ | | pgs. 1-64 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Thursday, Sept. 13 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-67 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=====================|=================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | 3.30-4.00 p.m. |
+Friday, Sept. 14 | 11.00-11.30 a.m. | pgs. 1-70 |
+ | | pgs. 133-134 |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+=====================|=======================================|
+Saturday, Sept. 15 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+==============================================================
+
+Bayonet Drill | Conference | Study
+ | |
+===============|======================|============================
+ | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | Mon. | 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | pars. 123-127, | | pars. 123-127,
+ | 199-223 I.D.R. | | 199-223 I.D.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | -------------------- | | ------------------
+ | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M. | | pars. 32-61 S.A.F.M.
+===============|======================| |=====================
+ | | | 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | | pars. 225-248 I.D.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | pars. 225-248 I.D.R. | | --------------------
+ | pgs. 5-11 | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | Notes on | | pgs. 5-11
+ | Bayonet Training | | Notes on
+ | | | Bayonet Training
+===============|======================|======|=====================
+ | 1.30-3.30 p.m. | Tues.| 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | pars. 249-257 I.D.R. | | pars. 249-257 I.D.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 12-19 | | pgs. 12-19
+ | Notes on | | Notes on
+ | Bayonet Training | | Bayonet Training
+===============|======================|======|=====================
+ | 1.30-2.30 p.m. | Wed. | 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | Patrolling, messages,| | Patrolling, messages,
+ | orders, etc. | | orders, etc.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 12-24 F.S.R. | | pgs. 12-24 F.S.R.
+ | -------------------- | | --------------------
+ | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | Notes on | | Notes on
+ | Grenade Warfare | | Grenade Warfare
+===============|======================|======|=====================
+ | 1.30-2.30 p.m. |Thurs.| 7.00-8.00 p.m.
+ | Advance and | | Advance and
+ | Rear Guards | | Rear Guards
+ | pgs. 25-34 F.S.R. | | pgs. 25-24 F.S.R.
+4.00-4.30 p.m. | -------------------- | | --------------------
+ | 2.30-3.30 p.m. | | 8.00-9.00 p.m.
+ | Training & | | Training &
+ | Employment of | | Employment of
+ | Bombers | | Bombers
+===================================================================
+
+===================================================================
+
+[Footnote B: As prescribed by Senior Grenade Instructor.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., September 17 to September 22, 1917_
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Musketry Training |
+ | | S.A.F.M. |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+ | | |
+Monday, Sept. 17 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 |
+ | close order only | |
+ | | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+Tuesday, Sept. 18 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 |
+ | close order only | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+Wednesday, Sept. 19 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-61 |
+ | close order only | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+ | | |
+Thursday, Sept. 20 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-70 |
+ | close order only | |
+ | | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+Friday, Sept. 21 | 7.00-8.00 a.m. | 8.00-8.30 a.m. |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pars. 32-70 |
+ | close order only | |
+====================|==================|===================|
+Saturday, Sept. 22 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+============================================================
+
+Drill, Physical | Sketching | Study
+M.P.T. | [C] |
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-73, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | pgs. 20-34
+ | | Notes on Bayonet
+ | | Training
+ | | pars. 232-257, I.D.R.
+ | | pars. 258-276, I.D.R.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-76, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | Outposts
+ | | pgs. 35-42, F.S.R.
+ | | pars. 277-289, I.D.R.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-79, 133-184 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | Orders
+ | | pgs. 43-50, F.S.R.
+ | | pars. 290-326, I.D.R.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11.30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-82, 133-132 | 1.30-4:30 p.m. | Marches
+ | | pgs. 51-65, F.S.R.
+ | | pars. 1-9, 14-18,
+ | | E.F.M.
+===================|=================|======================
+8.30-9.00 a.m. | 9.00-11:30 a.m. | 7.00-9.00 p.m.
+pgs. 1-85, 133-134 | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | pars. 37-42, 61-72,
+ | | 101-109, E.F.M.
+============================================================
+
+============================================================
+
+[Footnote C: As prescribed by Senior Instructor in Sketching.]
+
+_September 24-29, 1917_. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES.
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917._
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical |
+ | | M.P.T. |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Monday, Oct. 1 | 1/2 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-198 | pgs. 86-89 and 142 |
+ | | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Tuesday, Oct. 2 | Company | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 90-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 48-198 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Wednesday, Oct. 3 | Battalion | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 90-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Thursday. Oct. 4 | Battalion | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 17-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=================|=====================|
+Friday, Oct. 5 | Battalion | 1/2 hour |
+ | 1/2 hour | pgs. 17-93 and 142 |
+ | pars. 258-289 | Arm Combinations |
+==================|=======================================|
+Saturday, Oct. 6 |As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+===========================================================
+
+Bayonet | Range Practice | Signalling
+ [D] | [E] |
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1 hour
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | Semaphore and
+ | | Wigwag
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1 hour
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | Semaphore and
+ | | Wigwag
+==========|==================|=================
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+===============================================
+
+===============================================
+
+
+[Footnote D: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote E: Per schedule Senior Instructor Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 1 to October 6, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | Pistol |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Monday, Oct. 1 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Patrolling | Nomenclature |
+ | | 1/2 hour |
+ | | Manual |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Tuesday, Oct. 2 | | Same as for Monday |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Wednesday, Oct. 3 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Patrolling | Manual |
+ | | 1/2 hour |
+ | | Position and Aiming |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Thursday, Oct. 4 | | Same as for Wednesday |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Friday, Oct. 5 | 1 hour | Same as for Wednesday |
+ | Patrolling | |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+==================|==============|=======================|
+Saturday, Oct. 6 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+==================|=======================================
+
+Conference | Study |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 258-274, I.D.R. | pars. 263-285, I.D.R. |
+Prob. 1 to Situation 3. | Problem 1, S.P.I. |
+S.P.I. | |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 275-285, I.D.R. | pars. 286-304, I.D.R. |
+Situation 3, Prob. 1, to | Problem 2, S.P.I. |
+end of Problem, S.P.I. | |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 286-304, I.D.R. | pars. 305-326, I.D.R. |
+Problem 2, S.P.I. | Problem 3 to Situation 4 |
+ | S.P.I. |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 305-326, I.D.R. | pars. 327-349, I.D.R. |
+Prob. 3 to Situation 4, | Situation 4, Problem 3 to |
+S.P.I. | end of Problem, S.P.I. |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+2 hours | 7.00-9.00 p.m. |
+pars. 327-349, I.D.R. | Per later |
+Situation 4, Prob. 3, to | announcement |
+end of Problem, S.P.I. | |
+==========================|===========================|=======
+
+==============================================================
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917_.
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical Drill |
+ | | M.P.T. |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Monday, October 8 | 1 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Tuesday, October 9 | 1 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Wednesday, October 10 | 1/2 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Thursday, October 11 | 1 hour | |
+ | pars. 48-289 | |
+ | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 123-158 | pgs. 17-93, 133-142 |
+ | 199-224 | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Friday, October 12 | | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Saturday, October 13 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+=============================================================
+
+ Bayonet | Range Practice | Signaling
+ [F] | [G] |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. | 1/2 hour
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+ | |
+1/2 hour | 7-30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+==========|=================|============
+ | |
+=========================================
+
+=========================================
+
+[Footnote F: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote G: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 8 to October 13, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | |
+ | (Company) [H] | Conferences |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Monday, October 8 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Prob. 4 to Situation 5 |
+ | | exclusive, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 596-622, I.D.R. |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Tuesday, October 9 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Situation 5, Prob. 4 to |
+ | | end of Problem, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 623-660, I.D.R. |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Wednesday, October 10 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 5, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 661-677, I.D.R. |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Thursday, October 11 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 6, S.P.I. |
+ | | pars. 678-707, I.D.R. |
+ | | |
+======================|=====================|=========================|
+Friday, October 12 | 7.00-11.30 a.m. | |
+ | 1.30-4.30 p.m. | |
+ | Advance and rear | |
+ | guards, outposts, | |
+ | patroling, messages | |
+ | and orders | |
+======================|===============================================|
+Saturday, October 13 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+======================|================================================
+
+ | |
+Study | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 4, S.P.I | |
+pars. 596-660, I.D.R. | |
+ | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 5, S.P.I. | |
+pars. 661-677, I.D.R. | |
+ | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 6, S.P.I. | |
+pars. 678-707, I.D.R. | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 7 to | |
+Situation 5, exclusive | |
+pars. 350-370, I.D.R. | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+ | |
+ | |
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+as per later | |
+announcement | |
+ | |
+=======================|=======|=======
+
+=======================|=======|=======
+
+[Footnote H: To include conferences and critique on the ground of
+exercise conducted.]
+
+_October 15-17, 1917_. CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES.
+_October 18-19, 1917_. OCCUPATION OF THE TRENCHES FROM 8.00 A.M.
+_October 18, 1917_ TO 8.00 A.M. _October 19, 1917._
+_October 20, 1917_. 7.30 A.M.-11 A.M. CONFERENCE OF TRENCH OCCUPATION,
+11 A.M. INSPECTION.
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917_
+
+ | Drill, I.D.R. | Physical Drill |
+ | | M.P.T. |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Monday, October 22 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Tuesday, October 23 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Wednesday, October 24 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Thursday, October 25 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | pars. 48-289 | pgs. 17-93 |
+ | | pg. 149 |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Friday, October 26 | | |
+======================|===============|=====================|
+Saturday, October 27 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+=============================================================
+
+ Bayonet | Range Practice | Signaling
+ [I] | [J] |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. | 1/2 hour
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m. |
+ | 1.15-4.15 p.m. |
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+ | |
+=============|==================|===========
+
+============================================
+
+[Footnote I: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote J: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 22 to October 27, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | |
+ | [K] | Conferences |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Monday, October 22 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 350-370, I.D.R. |
+ | | Review Problems 1-6 |
+ | | S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Tuesday, October 23 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 371-401, I.D.R |
+ | | Prob. 7 to Situation 5 |
+ | | S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Wednesday, October 24 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 402-442, I.D.R. |
+ | | Situation 6, Prob. 7 |
+ | | to end of prob. |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Thursday, October 25 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 442-494, I.D.R. |
+ | | Problem 8, S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Friday, October 26 | | 7.00-11.30 a.m. |
+ | | 1.30-4.30 p.m. |
+ | | Companies in attack |
+ | | and defense (to include |
+ | | siting of trenches) |
+======================|=============|=========================|
+Saturday, October 27 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+======================|========================================
+
+ | |
+Study | |
+========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 371-401, I.D.R. | |
+Prob. 7 to Situation 5, | |
+S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 402-441, I.D.R. | |
+Situation 6, Prob. 7 to | |
+end of Prob. S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 442-494, I.D.R. | |
+Prob. 8, S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+pars. 495-536, I.D.R. | |
+Problem 9, S.P.I. | |
+========================|========|========
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+as per later | |
+announcement | |
+ | |
+ | |
+========================|========|========
+
+========================|========|========
+
+[Footnote K: To include conferences and critique on the ground of
+exercise conducted.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917_
+
+ | Drill | Physical Drill |
+ | | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Monday, October 29 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Tuesday, October 30 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Wednesday, October 31 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Thursday, November 1 | 1 hour | 1/2 hour |
+ | Attack Formation | |
+ | [Trench] | |
+=======================|==================|==================|
+Friday, November 2 | | |
+=======================|==================|===================
+Saturday, November 3 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+=======================|======================================
+
+ Bayonet | Signaling | Range Practice
+ [L] | [M] |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | 1/2 hour | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+1/2 hour | | 7.30-11.30 a.m.
+ | | 1.15-4.15 p.m.
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+ | |
+==============|===========|=================
+
+============================================
+
+[Footnote L: Per Bayonet Program.]
+
+[Footnote M: Rifle, pistol, machine gun, estimating distances, etc.,
+as prescribed by Senior Instructor of Musketry Training.]
+
+
+SCHEDULE OF INSTRUCTION, PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP
+_Plattsburg, N.Y., October 29 to November 3, 1917_--(_Concluded_)
+
+ | Field Work | Conferences |
+ | [N] | |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Monday, October 29 | | 2 hours |
+ | | pars. 495-536, I.D.R. |
+ | | Problem 9, S.P.I. |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Tuesday, October 30 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 10, S.P.I. |
+ | | Battle Fire Training |
+ | | (lesson scheduled |
+ | | later) |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Wednesday, October 31 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 11, S.P.I. |
+ | | Battle Fire Training |
+ | | (lesson scheduled |
+ | | later) |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Thursday, November 1 | | 2 hours |
+ | | Problem 12, S.P.I. |
+ | | Battle Fire Training |
+ | | (lesson scheduled |
+ | | later) |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Friday, November 2 | Battalions in attack | |
+ | and defense | |
+ | (Field Kit) | |
+======================|======================|=======================|
+Saturday, November 3 | As prescribed by Senior Instructors.
+======================|===============================================
+
+ | |
+Study | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 10, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 11, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 12, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+3 hours--1 hour daily | |
+and 7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+Problem 13, S.P.I. | |
+Battle Fire Training | |
+(lesson scheduled later) | |
+=========================|========|=========
+7.00-9.00 p.m. | |
+as per later | |
+announcement[O] | |
+=========================|========|=========
+
+=========================|========|=========
+
+[Footnote N: To include conferences and critique on the ground of
+exercise conducted.]
+
+[Footnote O: During the week each Battalion will be given 1/2 day's
+instruction in camouflage under direction Senior Engineer Instructor.]
+
+
+SCHEDULES.
+
+_November 5th-9th, 1917._
+
+ Infantry Drill Regulations, 2 hours.
+ March in full kit, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Signaling, 1/2 hour.
+ Physical drill, 2-1/2 hours,
+ Bayonet, 2-1/2 hours,
+ Machine gun instruction, 7-1/2 hours.
+ Field fortification, 10 hours.
+ Conferences, 10 hours.
+ Study, 10 hours.
+In the study and conferences the following will be taken up:
+ Manual of Courts-Martial--pp. 305 to end.
+ First Aid.
+ Personal Hygiene.
+ Camp Sanitation.
+
+_November 12th-17th, 1917._
+
+ Physical, drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Bayonet drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Battalion ceremonies, 1-1/2 hours.
+ Battalion march, full kit, 2-1/2 hours.
+ Field fortification and trench warfare, 23 hours.
+ Study and conferences, 10 hours.
+In the study and conference's the following will be taken up:
+ Trench Warfare.
+ Grenades
+ Gas Attack and Defense.
+ Communication.
+
+_November 19th-23rd, 1917._
+
+Physical, drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+Bayonet drill, 2-1/2 hours.
+Infantry Drill Regulations, 2-1/2 hours.
+Company administration and Army regulations, 40 hours.
+Ceremonies, parades and reviews, 5 hours.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 2.
+
+Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+
+The greatest lesson of the present war is that the keynote of success
+is discipline. In trenches the direct control of the men is even less
+than in extended order in open warfare, and only thoroughly
+disciplined troops with a trusted leader can hope to succeed.
+
+The successful officer will show anger or irritation only in rare
+cases, and then by design: he will know his men individually and be as
+considerate of them as possible, ready to do himself what he asks to
+have done; just in administering punishments; clear in giving his
+commands and insistent that they be carried out promptly; he will
+learn from drilling his men the quickest way a desired result can be
+accomplished, and to give the necessary commands in the most effective
+manner.
+
+He will read his Infantry Drill Regulations through each month and
+will always find something that he never knew or has forgotten. He
+will always consult it before going to drill. In explaining movements
+he will use blackboard diagrams in conferences. On the field he will
+take the fewest possible men and have movement executed by the numbers
+properly before the other men. Then have all the men go through the
+movement a number of times.
+
+The object of each exercise or drill should be explained to the men
+whenever possible.
+
+"Success in battle is the ultimate object of all military training."
+
+
+School of the Soldier.
+
+INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.
+
+The object of the facings and marchings is to give the soldier
+complete control of his body in drills so that he can move easily and
+promptly at any command.
+
+Attention.
+
+POSITION OF ATTENTION.--This is the position a soldier assumes when in
+ranks or whenever the command _attention_ is given.
+
+In the training of anyone nothing equals the importance of a proper
+posture; it is the very foundation upon which the entire fabric of any
+successful training must be founded.
+
+Instructors must persist in the development of this position until the
+men assume it from habit.
+
+At the command, 1. Company (Squad, etc.), 2. Attention, the following
+position is assumed:
+
+ 1. HEELS TOGETHER AND ON A LINE.--If the heels are not on a line,
+the hips and sometimes even the shoulders, are thrown out of line.
+ 2. FEET TURNED OUT EQUALLY, FORMING AN ANGLE OF 45 DEGREES.--If the
+feet are not turned out equally, the result will be the same as above.
+ 3. KNEES EXTENDED WITHOUT STIFFNESS.--Muscles should be contracted
+just enough to keep the knees straight. If locked, men tire easily and
+faint if at attention a long time.
+ 4. THE TRUNK ERECT UPON THE HIPS, the spine extended throughout its
+entire length; the buttocks well forward.
+ The position of the trunk, spine and buttocks is most essential. In
+extending the spine the men must feel that the trunk is being
+_stretched up_ from the waist until the back is as straight as it can
+be made.
+ In stretching the spine the _chest_ should be _arched_ and raised,
+_without_, however, _raising the shoulders or interfering with natural
+respiration_.
+ 5. SHOULDERS FALLING NATURALLY and moved back until they are square.
+ Being square, means having the shoulder ridge and the point of the
+shoulder at right angles to a general anterior-posterior plane running
+through the body. They should never be forced back of this plane, but
+out rather in line with it.
+ 6. ARMS HANGING NATURALLY, thumbs against the seams of the trousers,
+fingers extended, and back of hand turned out.
+ The arms must not be forcibly extended nor held rigidly; if they are,
+a compensating faulty curve will occur in the lumbar region.
+ 7. HEAD ERECT, CHIN RAISED until neck is vertical, eyes fixed upon
+some object at their own height.
+ Every tendency to draw the chin in must be counteracted.
+ 8. When this position is correctly assumed, the men will be taught to
+_incline the body forward_ until the weight rests chiefly upon the
+balls of the feet, heels resting lightly upon the ground.
+ When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of the head
+should pass in front of the ear, shoulder and thighs, and find its
+base at the balls of the feet.
+ Every tendency toward rigidity _must be avoided_; all muscles are
+contracted only enough to maintain this position, which is one of
+co-ordination, of _physical and mental alertness_, that makes for
+mobility, activity and grace. A man who faints standing at attention
+has not taken the proper position.
+
+
+Rests.
+
+POSITION OF REST AND AT EASE.--When men are standing _at rest_ or _at
+ease_ they must be cautioned to avoid assuming any position that will
+nullify the object of the position of Attention. Standing on one leg,
+folding arms, allowing shoulders or head to droop forward, must be
+discountenanced persistently until the men form the habit of resting
+with feet separated but on the same line, hands elapsed behind the
+back,--head, shoulders and trunk erect, (m.p.t., pp. 21 and 22.)
+
+ FALL OUT.--Leave ranks.
+ REST.--One foot in place. Can talk.
+ AT EASE.--One foot in place. Silence.
+ PARADE REST.--Do not slouch down on right foot. Keep chest well up.
+ EYES RIGHT, 2. FRONT.--Have it snappy.
+ RIGHT FACE.--To face _in marching_ and advance, turn on the ball of
+either foot and step off with the other foot in the new line of
+direction. (Do not confuse with the ordinary command, "Right Face.")
+ RIGHT HALF FACE.--45 degrees, used to show position in Right Oblique.
+ ABOUT FACE.--Have weight well back. Not necessary to move right foot
+after turn is made.
+ HAND SALUTE.--Manner of rendering is index to manner in which all
+other duties are performed.
+ FORWARD MARCH.--Shift weight to right foot, _mentally_.
+ DOUBLE TIME, MARCH.--Tendency to go too fast. Time it. 30 steps in 10
+seconds. Take one step quick time, then take up double time.
+ MARK TIME, MARCH.--Given as either foot strikes the ground. To resume
+full step, _Forward, March._
+ HALF STEP, MARCH.--All steps and marchings executed from a halt,
+except Right Step, begin with left foot.
+ RIGHT STEP, MARCH. BACKWARD, MARCH.--Executed in quick time only and
+at trail, without command. 15 inch Step.
+ SQUAD, HALT.--Given as either foot strikes the ground.
+ BY THE RIGHT FLANK, MARCH.--Step off with right foot.
+ TO THE REAR, MARCH.--Given as right foot strikes the ground. If
+marching in double time, turn to the rightabout taking 4 steps, in
+place, in cadence, and step off with left foot.
+ CHANGE STEP, MARCH.--Being in march; given as either foot strikes the
+ground.
+
+
+Manual of Arms.
+
+PURPOSE.--To make the man so accustomed to the rifle that he handles
+it without a thought.
+
+Eight rules govern the carrying of the piece. See paragraph 75,
+Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+Six rules govern the execution of the manual. See paragraph 76,
+Infantry Drill Regulations.
+
+
+Commands and Cautions.
+
+ORDER, ARMS.--See that all the fingers of the right hand are around
+the piece.
+
+PRESENT, ARMS.--Left forearm horizontal and against the body.
+
+PORT, ARMS.--Right forearm horizontal. Left forearm against the body.
+
+RIGHT SHOULDER, ARMS.--Insist on an angle of 45 degrees. Trigger guard
+in hollow of shoulder. Right hand does the work.
+
+LEFT SHOULDER, ARMS.--Right hand in next to last position grasps small
+of stock.
+
+PARADE, REST.--Left hand grasps piece just below stacking swivel.
+Right foot straight back 6 inches.
+
+TRAIL, ARMS.--Piece at angle of about 30 degrees, about 3 inches off
+the ground.
+
+RIFLE SALUTE.--Left forearm horizontal.
+
+FIX BAYONET.--Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is fixed.
+
+UNFIX BAYONET.--Parade Rest and resume order after bayonet is unfixed.
+
+INSPECTION ARMS.--Be sure men glance down in chamber and keep hold of
+bolt handle.
+
+Parade, Rest can be executed only from order arms, and the command
+Attention follows Parade, Rest.
+
+Any movement not in the manual, _e.g._, Right, Face, breaks the
+execution of movements by the numbers. The number of counts in the
+execution of each command must be remembered.
+
+Distinguish between _raise_ and _carry_ and _throw_.
+
+
+School of the Squad.
+
+OBJECT.--To give basic element, the squad, its first lesson in team
+work.
+
+Team work wins battles just as it does football games.
+
+Avoid keeping men too long at the same movement.
+
+COMPOSITION OF SQUAD.--7 men and a corporal. Never less than 6 nor
+more than 11 men.
+
+FALL IN.--Instructor 3 paces in front of where center is to be.
+
+FALL OUT.--If under arms, always preceded by Inspection Arms. Does not
+mean dismissed.
+
+COUNT OFF.--Right file front and rear do not execute eyes right. Front
+and rear rank men count off together.
+
+INSPECTION ARMS.--
+RIGHT DRESS, FRONT:
+
+ (1) Company Commander must establish base file or files before
+ giving the command Right Dress.
+ (2) Right flank men remain facing to front.
+ (3) Be sure first four men are on desired line and rest of
+ company can easily be made to conform.
+ (4) Right guide may be established at any point desired and at
+ command Right Dress all march to their proper positions
+ without other command, and at the trail.
+ (5) Have men beyond base files step forward until one pace
+ beyond where new line is to be and then dress back on line
+ established.
+
+GUIDE RIGHT.--Keep head and eyes off the ground. Close in or open out
+gradually.
+
+TAKE INTERVAL, TO THE RIGHT, MARCH, SQUAD, HALT.--(At command "To the
+Right") Rear rank falls back 60 inches. At March, all face to right
+and leading man of each rank steps off, followed by the others at
+four-pace intervals, rear-rank men marching abreast of their file
+leaders. When halted all face to the front.
+
+To REFORM, ASSEMBLE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.
+
+TAKE DISTANCE, MARCH.--1-2-3-4 front rank, 1-2-3-4 rear rank, 4-pace
+intervals. Guide in each four is right.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--No. 1, Front rank stands fast.
+
+STACK ARMS.--Piece of even number front rank: butt between his feet,
+barrel to front. Even number rear rank passes piece to file leader.
+
+TAKE ARMS.--Loose pieces are returned by even numbers front rank. If
+No. 2 of rear rank is absent, No. 1 rear rank takes his place in
+making or breaking stacks and resumes his post. Pieces are never
+stacked with bayonet fixed.
+
+OBLIQUE, MARCH.--Taught from Right half face. Half faced to front
+after obliquing, Forward, March. If at half step or mark time while
+obliquing, Oblique, March.
+
+IN PLACE, HALT.--All halt and stand fast without changing position of
+pieces.
+
+RESUME MARCH.--Only given after In place, Halt.
+
+RIGHT TURN.--Turn on moving pivot is used by subdivisions of a column
+in executing change of direction.
+
+Each rank successively and on same ground executes movement. All
+except pivot man execute two right obliques. No marking time. Arriving
+on new line, all take the half step, glance toward marching flank and
+take full step without command as last man arrives on the line.
+
+RIGHT HALF TURN.--Executed in similar manner.
+
+SQUADS RIGHT.--Turn on fixed pivot is used in all formations from line
+into column and the reverse. No half step. Right flank man faces to
+right in marching and marks time. Rest of front rank oblique once to
+new position. Step off on 5th step.
+
+SQUAD RIGHT ABOUT.--Front rank twice executes squads right.
+
+In rear rank, No. 3 with No. 4 abreast of him on his left and followed
+in column by the second and first moves straight forward until on
+prolongation of new line he is to occupy; faces to right in marching
+and proceeds to place. Then all face to the right in marching, mark
+time and glance toward marching flank. As last man arrives on new line
+all step off without command on 9th step.
+
+Deploying as skirmishers and following the corporal are covered under
+Company Extended Order.
+
+
+School of the Company.
+
+The company is the basic fighting and administrative unit, and must be
+easily handled and capable of promptly carrying out the will of its
+commander.
+
+Team work among the squads, so that the company can be easily managed
+as a whole, is the purpose of company drill.
+
+Close order drill is for discipline.
+
+Numerical designations of squads or platoons do not change.
+
+Center squad is middle or right middle squad of the company.
+
+ 8 (6-11) men = 1 squad.
+ 7 (2-7) squads = 1 platoon.
+ 4 platoons = 1 company (250 men, 6 officers).
+ 4 (2-6) companies = 1 battalion (1,026 officers and men).
+ 3 battalions = 1 regiment (3,755, including medical detachment).
+ 2 regiments = 1 brigade (8,210 officers and men).
+ 2 brigades = 1 division (27,152 officers and men).
+
+First Sergeant when not commanding a platoon is opposite the 3rd file
+from outer flank of first platoon, in line of file closers.
+
+FALL IN.--First Sergeant 6 paces front of center, facing company.
+Right guide takes post at such point that the center will be 6 paces
+from and opposite the First Sergeant.
+
+Squad leaders salute and report all present; or Private(s) ----
+absent. First Sergeant does not return salute of squad leaders.
+
+Captain takes post 12 paces in front of center of company in time to
+receive report of First Sergeant, "Sir, all present or accounted for,"
+or names of unauthorized absentees. E.G. A man in hospital might be
+reported absent by squad leader if he did not know where he was, but
+First Sergeant would know, and would not report him absent.
+
+Captain returns salute of First Sergeant who then takes his post
+_without command_.
+
+
+PLATOON MOVEMENTS IN PLATOON COLUMN.
+
+_Leading Platoon, C.O._
+
+On Right into Line ... Right Turn.
+Column Right ... Right Turn.
+Right Front into Line ... Continue. (Caution) If halted, Forward.
+
+
+_Rear Platoon, C.O._
+
+On Right into Line ... Continue. (caution) If halted, Forward.
+Column Right ... Continue. (caution) If halted, Forward.
+Right Front into Line ... Right Oblique
+
+
+QUESTIONS WHICH COME UP IN DAILY MILITARY LIFE.
+
+It is well to have a solution on hand.
+
+(1) The company is in line reversed,--16th squad where 1st squad
+should be. Bring the company into proper line, 1-2-3-4; 5-6-7-8;
+9-10-11-12; 13-14-15-16.
+
+(2) You are platoon leader. Your platoon is drilling separately and
+you get assembled in company line.
+
+16-15-14-13; 12-11-10-9; 4-3-2-1; 5-6-7-8.
+
+What commands do you give to get the platoon into line properly
+arranged?
+
+(3) You are in charge of the company and find yourself marching into
+the company street in reverse order. What commands do you give to
+correct this?
+
+(4) You are marching your company to the rear along a road through a
+narrow cut. Suddenly around a bend comes an ambulance. To let it pass,
+you must immediately reduce your marching front. What is the quickest
+method? (This can be used also in arranging the advance party of the
+outguard.)
+
+(5) You are marching your company in company front, and wish to march
+in column of platoons. What do you command?
+
+ANSWERS.
+
+ (1) Right (left) by squads.
+ Column left (right).
+ Squads right (left)
+ Company, Halt.
+ (2) Forward; 2 March.
+ On left into line; 2 Platoon; 3 Halt.
+ (3) On right (left) into line.
+ (4) 1 Squads right; 2 March.
+ 2 By the left flank; 2 March.
+ (5) 1 Right by squads; 2 March.
+ 2 Platoons left front into line; Double time;
+ 2 March.
+
+On the O.D. Shirt Collar Insignia is worn as follows:
+
+"On the right side, in the middle of the collar, the letters (U.S.),
+(U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.), and the insignia of rank; the letters one inch
+from the end of the collar and the insignia of rank one-half inch from
+letters."
+
+"On the left side in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the
+end, the insignia of the arm of the service."
+
+
+_For Second Lieutenants._
+
+On the right side, in the middle of the collar, and one inch from the
+end, the letters (U.S.), (U.S.R.), (U.S.N.A.).
+
+On the left side, in the middle of the collar and one inch from the
+end, the insignia of the arm of service.
+
+When the Star Spangled Banner is played, an officer in uniform if
+uncovered stands at Attention. If covered he salutes. An officer
+"Presents his compliments" only to his juniors.
+
+1. COMPANY RIGHT, MARCH; COMPANY, Halt; Forward March.
+ Being in line to turn. Right-flank man is pivot. Right guide steps
+back at command March, and marks time.
+
+2. PLATOONS RIGHT, MARCH; Company, Halt; Forward March.
+ Line to Column Platoons, reverse.
+ Guides must be covering.
+
+3. SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH; Company, Halt.
+ Line to Column Squads, reverse.
+ Line of Platoon to Column Platoons, reverse.
+
+4. RIGHT TURN, MARCH; Forward, March.
+ Line to change direction. Right guide is pivot. Men do not glance
+toward flank. Rear rank begins oblique on same ground as front rank.
+ All take full step at command, Forward, March.
+
+5. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ First Platoon Leader, Right Turn.
+ Other Platoon Leaders (if halted), Forward; (if marching), cautions,
+continue the march. All Platoons execute right turn on same ground.
+ Column of Platoons to change direction.
+
+6. COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Column Squads to change direction.
+
+7. PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Column Squads to Line of Platoons.
+
+8. SQUADS RIGHT, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Right by Squads, March.
+ Line to Column Squads and change direction.
+ Right guide posts himself and takes 4 short steps. Right Squad
+conforms.
+
+9. SQUADS RIGHT, PLATOONS, COLUMN RIGHT, MARCH.
+ Platoons right by Squads, March.
+ Line to line of Platoons. Guide same as in 8.
+
+10. SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH; Company, Halt.
+ To face or march to the rear.
+ _About Face_; Forward, March.
+ To the rear a few paces.
+
+11. ON RIGHT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front.
+ Column Platoons or Squads to line to side.
+ If executed in double time, leading squad marches double time until
+halted.
+
+12. RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front.
+ Column Platoons or Squads to line (front).
+ In double time, halting and aligning are omitted. Guide is toward side
+of first unit in line. If halted, leader of leading unit commands,
+Forward.
+
+13. PLATOONS, RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH; Company, Halt, Front.
+ Column Squads to Column Platoons.
+ Line of Platoons to Company line.
+
+14. ROUTE STEP, MARCH.
+ Muzzles kept elevated. Ranks cover, preserve distances. (If halted,
+at rest.)
+ At ease, March. Silence preserved. (Halted, at ease.)
+
+15. RIGHT BY TWOS, MARCH.
+ All but 2 right files of leading Squad execute in place, Halt.
+ RIGHT BY FILES, MARCH.
+ To diminish the front in Column Squads.
+
+16. SQUADS RIGHT FRONT INTO LINE, MARCH.
+ Twos right front into line, march.
+ Twos or files, to Column Squads. Leading file or files halt.
+ N.B.--If right by twos, then left into line or reverse.
+
+DISMISS THE COMPANY.--First Sergeant places himself 3 paces to front.
+2 paces from nearest flank, salutes, faces toward opposite flank,
+commands, Inspection Arms, Port Arms, Dismissed.
+
+TO FALL IN COMPANY WHEN IT CANNOT BE FORMED BY SQUADS.--Inspection
+Arms.
+ Right Shoulder Arms.
+ Roll Call. Each man as name is called, executes Order Arms.
+
+FOR MUSTER, COMMANDS ARE: Open Ranks, MARCH, FRONT. (At command Open
+Ranks, Rear Rank drops back 4 steps, 5 counts.)
+ (As mustering officer approaches) Right Shoulder Arm's. Attention to
+Muster.
+ Each man, as name is called, answers "Here" and comes to Order Arms.
+ Company Commander is on right flank, in same place as "Prepare for
+Inspection."
+
+IN ALIGNING COMPANY.--Captain places himself 2 paces from and facing
+the flank toward which dress is made, verifies alignment and commands
+Front.
+ (Platoon leaders same position for Platoon alignment.)
+
+TO MARCH SQUAD WITHOUT UNNECESSARY COMMANDS.--The Corporal commands,
+_Follow Me_.
+ Men always at ease. Squad conform to pace of Corporal, and carry
+pieces as he does.
+ In line or skirmish line, No. 2 front rank follows in trace of
+Corporal at 3 paces. Others guide on No. 2.
+
+AS SKIRMISHERS, MARCH.--At run. Rear rank men on right of file
+leaders. All conform to Corporals gait. In squad alone, skirmish line
+is formed on No. 2, front rank, Corporal ahead when advancing, in rear
+when halted.
+ Regular interval in skirmish line 1/2 pace = 1 yard per man.
+ Squad deployed = 10 paces.
+ Any number of paces may be specified, _e.g._ As Skirmishers, at 10
+paces, March.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--Men form on corporal. If he continues to advance,
+move in double time, form and follow. Do not assemble while marching
+to rear.
+
+KNEEL.--Left forearm and left lower leg form straight line.
+
+LIE DOWN.--On both knees, then both elbows.
+
+RISE.--Stand on point marked by both knees.
+ (When deployed, may sit instead of kneel.)
+
+LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.--Loadings are executed only in line and skirmish
+line.
+ Firings are always executed at a halt.
+ When kneeling and lying down in double rank, rear rank does not
+load, aim or fire.
+ In both cease firing and suspend firing pieces are loaded and
+locked. (Sec. 150, i.d.r., April, 1917, is incorrect.)
+ 1. AIMING.--Target carefully pointed out.
+ 2. SIGHT-SETTING ANNOUNCED. (Battle sight if none announced.)
+ 3. (If by volley), Ready, Aim, Squad FIRE.
+ To continue volley firing, Aim, Squad FIRE.
+ Volley fire is used against large, compact enemy or in fire of
+position.
+
+FIRE AT WILL.--Normally employed in attack and defense; 3 shots per
+minute at effective ranges (600 to 1,200 yards); 5 to 6 shots per
+minute at close ranges (up to 600 yards).
+
+CLIP FIRE:
+ Used (1) To steady men.
+ (2) To produce a short burst of fire.
+
+UNLOAD.--Safety lock up.
+
+
+EXTENDED ORDER.
+
+ A squad acting alone, as one out on a patrol or for instruction,
+the corporal acts as the leader of a small platoon leading the advance,
+and in rear when halted.
+ Men come to trail as they come on the skirmish line.
+ On halting, a deployed line faces front (direction of real or
+assumed enemy), and takes cover.
+
+CORPORAL CAUTIONS.--By the Right Flank (if halted). Corporal steps out
+looking back to get his 10-pace interval. Squad Halt.
+
+LEFT FACE.--Base squad deploys as soon as it has room.
+ Guide of a deployed squad is center without command.
+ Captain indicates point on which corporal of base squad is to march.
+
+COMPANY RIGHT is executed as explained for front rank of Company, but
+at 1/2 pace intervals.
+
+
+DEPLOYMENTS.
+
+_From Line, to Form Skirmish Line to Front._
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT, MARCH.--1. If marching, corporal
+commands, Follow Me. Corporal of base squad moves straight to front,
+deploys as soon as possible and advances until Company, Halt, is
+given.
+ Other squads move to left front and place squads on the line.
+ If guide is center, other corporals on right of center squad move to
+the right, and squads on the left to the left, and bring their squads
+on the line.
+ If guide is left, other corporals move to right front.
+
+2. If at halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal, 3 paces in
+front of the former line, as soon as it has room.
+ Other squads are conducted by the left flank, to their places.
+
+TO DEPLOY FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS, FORMING SKIRMISH LINE TO THE
+FRONT.--If at a halt, base squad deploys abreast of its corporal 3
+paces in front of its former position.
+ If marching, base squad deploys and moves straight to the front.
+ If guide is right, other corporals move to left front and place
+squads on line.
+ If guide is center, corporals in front move to right (if at a halt,
+to right rear), the corporals in rear of center squad move to left and
+come on line in succession.
+ Column of twos or files are deployed by same commands in same manner.
+ If deployment in an oblique direction is desired, the captain points
+out desired direction.
+ Column of squads may be turned to the flank or rear and then deployed.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--In skirmish line, men assemble at a run, to their
+places individually. Squads do not assemble and march to places as
+units as do platoons.
+
+PLATOONS, ASSEMBLE.--Men assemble individually on the run, in their
+platoons and are then marched to relative position on base platoon as
+indicated by position or command of captain.
+
+PLATOON COLUMNS.--Platoon leaders should be sure to go through center
+of platoon.
+ Platoon guides in rear.
+ Columns should be 20 yards apart, or more.
+ (Used to take advantage of few favorable routes where cover is poor
+or ground difficult.)
+
+SQUAD COLUMNS.--Men oblique and follow squad leader. No advantage in
+cover, but used to advance more quickly over rough or brush grown
+ground.
+ (It might be desirable to teach men to take squad columns from
+column of squads.)
+ In assembling from Platoon or Squad columns, the men reform by
+platoons or squads and are conducted by their leaders to point
+indicated by captain.
+ _Thin lines_ are used to cross wide stretches under artillery fire or
+heavy, long range rifle fire which cannot be profitably returned.
+
+No. 1's FORWARD, MARCH.
+ First line is led by platoon leader, right platoon.
+ Second line is led by platoon guide, right platoon.
+ Third line is led by platoon leader, next platoon, etc.
+ Quick time, unless conditions otherwise demand.
+
+CAPTAIN POINTS OUT NEW LINE.--Original intervals preserved.
+
+DISADVANTAGE.--Serious loss of control over company.
+
+ADVANTAGE.--Offers less definite target and is less likely to draw
+fire.
+
+
+BEING IN SKIRMISH LINE.
+
+BY PLATOON (2 PLATOONS, SQUADS, 4 MEN, ETC.), FROM THE RIGHT,
+RUSH.--Leader of rush usually platoon leader.
+
+ (1) Selects new line.
+ (2) Cease firing.
+ (3) Prepare to rush.
+ (4) Follow me.
+ (5) Commence firing.
+
+When whole company rushes, it is led by Captain. Platoon leader lead
+their platoons.
+
+
+COMMANDS.
+
+Commands should be so given as to be distinctly heard by all the men
+who have to execute them. It is unfair to expect good execution of a
+slovenly command or one that cannot be heard. A sufficient interval
+should be allowed between the preparatory command and the command of
+execution, proportioned to the size of the command, so that each man
+has time to grasp the movement before execution is required.
+
+
+School of the Battalion.
+
+BASIS.--4 companies to a battalion.
+
+ARRANGEMENT.--Right to left by rank of Captains. After formation order
+is not kept with reference to rank of Captains.
+
+NUMBER.--From right to left in whatever direction.
+
+CENTER.--Actual center or right center company.
+
+BAND.--Places itself as if it were an adjoining battalion on right.
+
+DRESSING.--Each company is dressed by its Captain who places himself
+on the flank toward which the dress is to be made.
+
+In battalion line beside the guide (or beside flank file of the front
+rank if guide is not in line) facing front.
+
+In column of companies--2 paces from the guide and facing down the
+line.
+
+
+To Form the Battalion.
+
+OTHER THAN CEREMONIES.--Column of squads. Adjutant does not take his
+post until companies are formed. Each Captain halts company and
+salutes Adjutant. Adjutant returns salutes and when last Captain has
+saluted, faces Major and reports "Sir, the Battalion is formed." He
+joins Major without command.
+
+FOR CEREMONIES.--Or when directed, Battalion is formed in line.
+Adjutant places himself 6 paces to right of right company and facing
+in direction line is to extend. Guides precede companies on line by 20
+paces. Adjutant causes guides to cover. Companies are halted one pace
+in rear of line and dressed to right against arm of guide. When guides
+of left company have been posted, Adjutant by shortest route moves to
+post facing Battalion midway between post of Major and center of
+Battalion. Adjutant commands: 1. Guides, 2. Posts, 3. Present, 4.
+Arms. He then faces about and reports, "Sir, the Battalion is formed."
+Major commands, "Take your post, sir."
+
+TO DISMISS THE BATTALION.--Dismiss your companies.
+
+TO RECTIFY THE ALIGNMENT.--See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraphs
+273-274.
+
+TO RECTIFY THE COLUMN.--See Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraph 275.
+
+HELPFUL HINTS TO BEGINNERS.--These hold good with few exceptions.
+ When in column of squads; first command of Captain begins with word
+"Column."
+ When in column of companies; first command of Captain begins with
+word "Squads."
+
+IN COLUMN OF SQUADS.--
+
+Major: _On right (left) into line._
+
+First Captain: Squads right. (Captain marches beside right guide.)
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (If halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: (Upon uncovering preceding company) Squads right.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+First Captain: Right Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: (Coming on line). Company Halt, Right Dress, Front.
+
+Major: _Right (left) front into line._
+
+First Captain: Column right.
+
+Rear Captains: Column half right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: (Halts and allows company to pass him and form column
+of squads to right.) Squads left, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: When company in column of squads arrives one pace in
+rear of the right flank of the company that has formed in line. Column
+half right, March. The Captain then takes 5 paces beyond the flank of
+the last company in line, allows company to pass him, and as rear
+guide reaches him, commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left
+Dress, Front.
+
+Major: _Line of companies at_ (seven) paces, guide left (right).
+(Close on first company from column of squads is no longer used in
+Battalion drill.)
+
+First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Rear Captains: Column half right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: (When company reaches a position 7 paces to the flank
+of the leading company.) Column half right.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+All Captains: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+Major: _Column of companies, first company_ squads right (left).
+
+First Captain: Squads right.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward.).
+
+As each company reaches the point where the first company formed line
+the Captain commands: Squads right, March.
+
+IN COLUMN OF COMPANIES OR CLOSE COLUMN OF COMPANIES.--
+
+Major: _On right (left) into line._
+
+First Captain: Right turn.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: Each Captain takes 5 paces beyond the left flank of the
+company that has just executed the turn and commands: Right turn,
+March.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+First Captain: Right Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: (As they come on line.) Company Halt, Right Dress,
+Front.
+
+Major: _Right (left) front into line._
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Second Capt: Right by Squads.
+
+Third and fourth Captains: Squads Right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: Halt, Left Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: Column half left, March, Column half right March.
+Taking 5 paces from the flank of the company last on line and allowing
+the company to pass by him until the rear guide reaches him, Captain
+commands: Squads left, March, Company Halt, Left Dress, Front.
+
+Major: _Close on first company_ (Never any other).
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: Halt.
+
+Rear Captains: As each successive company closes to 8 paces from the
+company immediately in front, the Captain commands: Company Halt.
+
+Major: _Extend on fourth company._ (Never any other.)
+
+First Captain: Continue to march (if halted, forward).
+
+Rear Captains: Company.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Rear Captains: Halt. Then as each company in rear of the leading
+company gets the proper distance (company front plus 5 paces) the
+Captain commands: Forward March.
+
+Close column not extended in double time.
+
+Major: _Column of squads, first company_ squads right (left).
+
+First Captain: Squads right.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to march (if halted, forward). As each company
+reaches the point where the first company formed column of squads, the
+Captain commands: Squads right, March.
+
+Major: _Column right (left)._
+
+First Captain: Right turn.
+
+Rear Captains: Continue to March (if halted, forward).
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+First Captain: When the marching flank of the company is one pace from
+the new line the Captain commands: Forward March.
+
+Rear Captains: Other companies march squarely up to the turning point
+and each changes direction at the Captain's command: Right turn,
+March, Forward, March.
+
+LINE OF COMPANIES OR CLOSE LINE OF COMPANIES.
+
+Major: _Battalion right (left)._
+
+First Captain: Column right.
+
+Flank Captains: Column half right.
+
+Major: _March_.
+
+Flank Captains: When each company has moved 7 paces to the flank of
+the base company the command is: Column half right, March. The
+companies are then marched echeloned with an interval of 7 paces.
+
+Major: _Battalion_.
+
+First Captain: Company.
+
+Major: _Halt_.
+
+Flank Captains: Continue to march. As each company comes into line
+with the base company the Captain commands: Company, Halt.
+
+Major: _Close on first (fourth) company._
+
+_Extend on first (fourth) company._ Both movements executed in the
+same manner.
+
+First Captain: (If marching.) Halt. (If halted, cautions "Stand
+Fast.")
+
+Flank Captains: Squads right.
+
+Major: _March._
+
+Flank Captains: Right Oblique, March. (When the company has closed
+sufficiently): Forward March, Squads left, March. (Then as the company
+comes on the line with first company): Company, Halt.
+
+Major: _Column of Squads, first (fourth) company, forward._
+
+First Captain: Forward.
+
+Flank Captains: Column half right (left).
+
+Major: _March._
+
+Flank Captains: As their companies come onto the line behind the
+leading company (at 4.4 paces) the Captain commands: Column half
+right, March.
+
+
+IN BATTALION LINE.
+
+Major: _Close on first (fourth) company._
+
+First Captain: Stand fast (Caution).
+
+Second Captain: Squads right, column right.
+
+Third and fourth Captains: Squads right, column half right.
+
+Major: _March._
+
+Second, third and fourth Captains: As each company reaches a point 8
+paces behind the company just preceding it into close column, the
+command is given: Column half right, March. (Cautioning "Guide left"
+when closing on first company--"Guide right" when closing on fourth
+company): Squads left, March, Company, Halt.
+
+Major: _Halt._
+
+First Captain: Right Dress, Front.
+
+Rear Captains: (As they come on the line): Company Halt, Right Dress,
+Front.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE No. 2A. CO. I--N.E. PROPER ARRANGEMENT OF SHELTER
+TENTS.]
+
+[Illustration: PLATE No. 2B. LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT FOR INSPECTION.
+TENT PINS SHOULD BE LAID IN ECHELON THREE INCHES APART.]
+
+
+Inspections.
+
+(Kitchen and mess inspections have been covered under Feeding Men.)
+
+Daily inspection of the barracks should be made and rigid discipline
+enforced as to the floors being kept clean, scrubbed once a week,
+bedding and bed clothes aired out of doors every Tuesday, shoes
+cleaned and kept in order under bunks, lockers under bunks, toilet
+articles and books all kept in order. Sheets, comforters and blankets
+should be shaken out, folded as for pack and laid on top of pillow
+until afternoon, each day.
+
+In inspecting men every week see that hair is kept short and feet
+clean and in good condition, toe nails trimmed. Insist on woolen
+socks.
+
+Equipment must be inspected carefully, each week, to see that it is in
+good condition.
+
+
+SPECIAL POINTS OF COMPANY INSPECTION.
+
+After Open Ranks, March, given from usual position in front of
+Company, the Captain takes his post 3 paces in front of Right Guide,
+facing to the left and commands:
+
+1. Front. 2. Prepare for Inspection.
+
+The Lieutenants are 3 paces in front of the center of their
+respectives Platoons, facing to front.
+
+If equipment is also to be inspected, commands are as follows:
+
+1. Close Ranks. 2. March. Stack Arms. Backward, March. Take Interval
+to the Right, March. Company, Halt.
+
+1. Unsling Equipment. 2. Open Packs. Close Packs. Sling Equipment.
+
+
+Battalion Inspection.
+
+At command, Prepare for Inspection, given by the Major, each Captain
+commands, Open Ranks. They do not salute when the Major and Inspector
+approach.
+
+The Lieutenants take their places as in Company Inspection. Each
+Captain commands:
+
+Company Attention. Prepare for Inspection.
+
+Lieutenants face about and stand at ease, after being inspected or
+passed.
+
+After inspection:
+
+Close Ranks, march.
+
+Rest.
+
+
+Regimental Inspection.
+
+Commands mean and principles are same as for Battalion. (Look up Post
+of Colonel, par. 754, Infantry Drill Regulations.)
+
+
+Ceremonies.
+
+BATTALION REVIEW.
+
+After Battalion is formed in line, Major faces front.
+
+When Reviewing Officer halts, Major turns about and commands:
+
+Present Arms; turns to front and salutes. Major turns about; commands
+Order Arms, and again faces front.
+
+When Reviewing Officer is within 6 paces, the Major salutes, takes
+post on the right and accompanies him.
+
+On arriving at the right of the line again, Major salutes, halts,
+takes his post in front of Battalion and commands:
+
+Pass in Review. Squads Right, March.
+
+Major and Staff execute Eyes Right and take post on right of Reviewing
+Officer remaining until Battalion has passed, when he salutes and
+rejoins it.
+
+Double time is given by Major when the Battalion comes to its original
+starting place and the Battalion passes in review as before except
+that Eyes Right is omitted and Major salutes only when he leaves
+Reviewing Officer.
+
+Major and Staff may be dismounted at discretion of Commanding Officer.
+
+
+BATTALION PARADE.
+
+When band sounds off, the Reviewing Officer and his Staff stands, if
+dismounted, with arms folded: if mounted they remain at attention at a
+convenient distance in front of the center and facing the Battalion.
+
+The Battalion is not presented for Battalion Parade.
+
+The Lieutenants take posts in front of center of their Platoons at
+Captain's command for dressing his Company on the line.
+
+After Guides Posts, the Adjutant commands:
+
+(To Battalion) Parade Rest.
+
+(To Band) Sound Off.
+
+Battalion, Attention. Present Arms.
+
+At conclusion of National Anthem Adjutant reports:
+
+Sir: The parade is formed.
+
+The Major directs: _Take your post, sir_.
+
+Major then commands: _Order Arms_.
+
+At conclusion of Manual of Arms, Major directs: _Receive the reports,
+sir_.
+
+Captains report "'C' Company present or accounted for," or "'C'
+Company, 1 officer, 7 enlisted men are absent."
+
+Publish the orders, sir:
+
+After publishing them, Adjutant commands: Officers, Center, March. At
+command Center, Officers face center: at command March, march to
+center and halt, facing front.
+
+Commands Forward and Halt are given by Senior Officer. Left Officer of
+center Company is guide and marches on the Major. Halt at 6 paces from
+Major, salute and come down with the Major.
+
+At command Officers Posts, March, Officers face about at command
+"posts" and are conducted by Senior Officer who halts them 3 paces
+from line. Officers, Halt. Posts, March. Face outward at command,
+Posts, step off with 4 pace intervals. Lieutenants go to their posts
+by shortest route, in rear of Company.
+
+
+REGIMENTAL PARADE.
+
+Lieutenants remain in file closers.
+
+At command, Officers Center, Captains remain at their posts with their
+Companies.
+
+
+REGIMENTAL REVIEW.
+
+Regiment formed in line or line of masses.
+
+Colonel commands: Pass in Review.
+
+Each Major commands: 1, _Squads Right_; 2, _March_.
+
+If in line of masses, Colonel commands: "Pass in Review." Major of
+Right Battalion commands: _Column of Squads, First Company Squads,
+Right, March_.
+
+ FIRE DIRECTION IS THE FUNCTION OF THE CAPTAIN AND HIGHER
+ COMMANDERS. ABOVE THE GRADE OF CAPTAIN AND DIRECTION IS
+ PRINCIPALLY TACTICAL. WITH A CAPTAIN IT IMPLIES THE ABILITY TO
+ ISSUE CORRECT FIRE ORDERS TO MEET GIVEN SITUATIONS IN ORDER
+ THAT THE FIRE OF THE COMPANY MAY BE AS EFFECTIVE AS POSSIBLE.
+
+ FIRE CONTROL IS THE COMBINED PRODUCT OF THE FIRE UNIT
+ COMMANDERS AND THE FIRERS. THE FIRE UNIT IS THE PLATOON.
+
+ FIRE DISCIPLINE MEANS STRICT ATTENTION TO THE SIGNALS AND
+ ORDERS OF THE COMMANDER, AND IS THE FACULTY DEVELOPED IN THE
+ MEN BY INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING, OF COMMENCING, CEASING, OR
+ DIMINISHING FIRE, OR OF CONCENTRATING IT UPON A DEFINED OBJECT
+ IN OBEDIENCE TO THE DELIBERATE WILL OF THE COMMANDER.
+
+NOTE.--It is to be remembered that all grades of commanders are
+supposed to be familiar with the duties of all below them.
+
+In issuing orders all Officers, in addition to announcing where they
+will be found will give the location of the next higher Commander.
+
+The authorities for statements under the Platoon Leader and below are
+not given after each statement but the paragraphs from which they are
+deduced are given under the heading for each grade. This course was
+thought necessary to avoid repetition.
+
+
+I. THE COLONEL.
+
+POSITION--(369, 380, 528--i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. Advancing to the battlefield: as
+ (a) Independent commander ordinarily with the advance guard
+ in order that he may:
+ 1. Receive information promptly.
+ 2. Personally see the situation (reconnoiter).
+ 3. Order the deployment.
+ 4. Begin the action strictly in accordance with his own
+ wishes.
+ (b) Subordinate commander (427, i.d.r.).
+ After receiving his order for the action, precedes his
+ command as far as possible in order to:
+ 1. Personally reconnoiter the ground.
+ 2. Be prepared to issue his orders promptly.
+
+Note--For a discussion of the position of leaders see Subject V.
+
+ 2. During the action; such as will enable him to:
+ (a) Observe the progress of events.
+ (b) Receive and transmit messages and orders.
+ (c) Be in constant, direct, and easy communication with the
+ reserve. (369, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ a. After having received his orders, the regimental commander
+ leads his regiment forward in a column, or in line of columns,
+ until the time arrives for issuing the regimental order, he
+ then: (426, i.d.r.)
+ b. Assigns targets and sectors or tasks to battalions and special
+ units. (312, 381 and 426, i.d.r.)
+ c. Provides for necessary reconnaissance to front and flank. (428,
+ i.d.r.)
+ d. Announces his position and also that of the next higher
+ commander.
+ e. Controls the reserve as the tactical situation demands. (441,
+ i.d.r.)
+ f. Regulates ammunition supply. (316, f.s.r. and 552, i.d.r.) See
+ also full discussion of the ammunition supply in Subject VIII.
+
+Note--The colonel is assisted in the performance of his duties by the
+regimental staff.
+
+
+II. THE MAJOR.
+
+The battalion is the attack unit whether acting alone or as part of a
+larger force. (305, i.d.r.)
+
+POSITION:
+
+ (The general rules for a colonel apply)
+
+ 1. Where he can best:
+ a. Direct the reinforcing of the firing line from the
+ support. (315, i.d.r.)
+ b. Observe the progress of events, (369, i.d.r.)
+ c. Maintain contact with regimental headquarters. (369,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+ 2. On the firing line when all the supports have joined. (315,
+ i.d.r.) (See Subject V.)
+
+GENERAL.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ 1. Conducts his battalion according to sector and mission assigned
+ him.
+ 2. Directs first disposition of battalion by tactical orders,
+ giving subordinates--
+ a. Information of the enemy.
+ b. Position of supporting and neighboring troops.
+ c. The general object to be attained.
+ d. The special problem for each company (291, i.d.r.)
+ (This includes making the primary apportionment of the
+ target.) (303, i.d.r.)
+ e. If practicable, the point or time at which the fire fight
+ is to open. (304, i.d.r.)
+ f. Orders for flank protection and reconnaissance, unless
+ specifically provided for by higher authority. (293, 397
+ and 398, i.d.r.)
+ g. His position and that of the next higher commander.
+ 3. Controls supports, dispatches reinforcements from support to
+ firing line. (226 and 297, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Controls subsequent movements by suitable orders or commands.
+ (291, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Regulates ammunition supply--(See Subject VIII, also Pars.
+ 316-317, f.s.r.) (The combat train is the immediate reserve
+ supply of the battalion.)
+ a. Is responsible for the proper use of the combat train.
+ b. Insures maintenance of the prescribed allowance at all
+ times.
+ c. Causes combat trains to march immediately in rear of the
+ battalion unless directed otherwise. (548, i.d.r.)
+ d. When battalion deployed on his own initiative, indicates
+ whether extra ammunition shall be issued. (294, i.d.r.)
+ e. When battalion deployed pursuant to orders from higher
+ authority, causes issue of extra ammunition unless
+ specifically ordered not to do so. (294, 548, i.d.r.)
+ f. When combat wagons are emptied, directs them to proper
+ rendezvous to be refilled. (548, i.d.r.)
+ g. Sees that combat wagons and belts of men are refilled as
+ soon as possible after an engagement. (553, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Maintains contact with adjoining troops. (399 i.d.r.)
+ 7. May harmonize ranges used by the companies on the firing line.
+ 8. Determines when bayonets shall be fixed. (318, i.d.r.)
+ 9. Subject to orders from higher authority, determines the point
+ from which the charge to be made. (319, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Orders the charge. (318, i.d.r.)
+
+SPECIAL.
+
+ 1. _In attack_:
+ a. May select formation in which companies advance. (212,
+ i.d.r.)
+ b. Designates--
+ 1. The direction of the objective. (303, i.d.r.)
+ 2. The companies for the firing line.
+ 3. The companies for the support.
+ 4. The order and front of the companies in the firing line.
+ 5. The right or left company of the firing line as the base
+ company.
+ 6. May indicate when the advance by rushes is to start.
+ (311, i.d.r.)
+ 2. _In defense_:
+ a. Describes front of each company. (292, i.d.r.)
+ b. Assigns sector of fire. (244, 302, i.d.r.)
+ c. Locates fire, communicating and cover trenches.
+ d. Directs preparation of obstacles.
+ e. Assigns companies to construct trenches and obstacles.
+ f. Details troops to occupy trenches. (321, i.d.r.)
+ g. Causes firing line and supports to fix bayonets when a
+ charge by the enemy is imminent. (324, i.d.r.)
+ h. Seeks opportunities for counter attacks. (326, i.d.r.)
+
+
+III. BATTALION STAFF.
+
+POSITIONS:
+
+Battalion Adjutant }
+Battalion Sergeant Major } with Major.
+
+ Mounted orderlies--both with Major (one with major and one with
+ Adjutant) until horses are sent to rear when both may be with
+ the horses or one take the horses and the other remain with the
+ major, as he may direct.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ All assist the major in any way directed, by
+ a. Reconnaissance. (565, i.d.r., 25, f.s.r.)
+ b. Observation of the firing line.
+ c. Maintaining contact with regimental headquarters.
+ d. Maintaining contact with the support.
+ e. Receiving, communicating, and sending visual signals from and
+ to front and rear.
+ f. Observing fire effect and progress of events.
+ g. Keeping copies of all orders, messages, and other data
+ necessary, for his war diary. (35, f.s.r.)
+
+When there is only one range finder to the battalion, the Battalion
+Sergeant Major is the Battalion Range Taker. When not actually engaged
+in taking ranges, he assists the Major as above or, preferably, he may
+be charged with the duty of maintaining communication with the
+companies of the firing line.
+
+The major designates a sergeant to take charge of the battalion combat
+train. Under the Major's direction, he
+ a. Conducts combat train as far to the front with the battalion
+ as directed.
+ b. Issues ammunition to the battalion.
+ c. Takes combat train to rendezvous for refilling, under
+ direction of the regimental commander.
+ d. Rejoins battalion, if it is not in action, or, if it be
+ engaged, joins or establishes communication with the
+ regimental reserve. (548, 549 and 553, i.d.r.)
+ (This sergeant is not provided for in the present
+ organization. Recommendation has been made to the War
+ Department that he be included in the Tables of
+ Organization.)
+
+IV. THE CAPTAIN.
+(The Fire Director.)
+
+POSITION: _Where he can best:_
+
+ 1. Control his four platoons. (248, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Observe fire effect. (249, i.d.r.)
+ 3. See the major and platoon chiefs. (234, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES: _Before fire action:_
+
+ 1. Conducts his company to place of deployment assigned by the
+ major's orders (297, i.d.r.) in best manner. (212, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Designates target, and allots part to each platoon. (245 and
+ 249, i.d.r.) (See Overlapping Method, page 15, Subject V. Fire
+ Tactics.)
+ 3. Determines the range. (240 and 249, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Announces the sight setting. }
+ 5. Indicates class of fire and } (249, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Time to open fire. }
+ 7. Informs the subordinates as to the location of the battalion
+ commander, and, when necessary, announces his own position.
+
+_During the Action:_
+
+ 1. Observes fire effect. (249, 414, 415, i.d.r., and 216,
+ s.a.f.m.)
+ 2. Corrects material errors in sight setting. (249, i.d.r.)
+ 3. Prevents exhaustion of ammunition supply. (249, 550, 551,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 4. Distributes ammunition received from rear. (249, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Provides for the collection and distribution of the ammunition
+ of the dead and wounded. (551, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Is on the alert for the Major's signals or commands. (226 and
+ 234, i.d.r.)
+ 7. In the absence of express directions from the major, if
+ commanding a flank company, determines when advances by rushes
+ shall be attempted. (311, i.d.r.)
+ 8. Indicates size of fractions to rush. (311, i.d.r.)
+ 9. Leads a rush by entire company. (223, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Leads the charge. (319, i.d.r.)
+ 11. When necessary, designates new platoon leaders and sees that new
+ squads are organized and new squad leaders designated to replace
+ those disabled. (104, 375, i.d.r.)
+
+V. BUGLERS.
+
+POSITION:
+
+Join the Captain when the company deploys. (164, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES: (235, i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. _One Bugler_--
+ a. Observes the enemy.
+ b. Observes the target.
+ c. Observes for fire effect.
+ d. Watches platoon leaders for signals.
+ e. Transmits signals to platoon leaders.
+ 2. _The other_--
+ a. Watches the Major for signals and repeats them back.
+ b. Transmits information to the Major.
+ 3. BOTH--
+ a. Repeat bugle signals "charge." (319, i.d.r.)
+ b. Carry field glasses, message pads, pencils and signal flags.
+ (i.u.a.e.m., 387, i.d.r.)
+ c. Act as messengers.
+
+ ALL OF THE ABOVE IMPLIES THAT THEY MUST BE PROFICIENT IN:
+ a. Signaling--Hand, Arm and Letter Codes.
+ b. Observation for fire effect.
+ c. Location and definition or description of targets.
+ d. Bugle calls.
+
+
+VI. RANGE ESTIMATORS.
+
+Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
+estimators in the company are designated "Range Finders." (240,
+i.d.r.)
+
+The term "Range Finder" is a misnomer as a range finder is an
+instrument. The school uses the term "Range Estimator" when applied to
+an individual. The attention of the War Department has been called to
+this.
+
+The range estimators are given special training in the estimation of
+ranges.
+
+When an action is pending, the Captain receives from the Major the
+primary apportionment of the target or sector of fire. (303, i.d.r.)
+
+The Captain returns to the company, and, avoiding dangerous grouping,
+assembles the platoon leaders and range estimators, and points out to
+both the target of the Battalion and Company.
+
+The Range Estimators immediately begin their estimation of the range
+to the company target; the Captain meanwhile continues with his
+instructions to the Platoon Leaders.
+
+The instructions to the Platoon Leaders completed, the Range
+Estimators announce to the Captain either their individual estimates,
+or the mean of their estimates as deduced by one of the estimators.
+The Range Estimators then take their customary posts (240, i.d.r.),
+and the Captain indicates to the Platoon Leaders the range to be used.
+
+The Range Estimators act in an advisory capacity to the Captain. The
+mean of their estimates will usually be the most accurate deduction
+available in battle. The adoption by the Captain of the range thus
+determined, however, is not obligatory.
+
+Range Estimators should be ready to signal their estimates of the
+range to the platoon leaders at any time during the action.
+
+
+VII. THE PLATOON LEADER.
+
+(The Fire Controller.)
+
+POSITION: Where he can best:
+
+ 1. Control the squads constituting his platoon. (252, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Observe the target and fire effect. (252, 414, 415, i.d.r., and
+ 216, s.a.f.m.)
+ 3. Observe the captain for signals or commands. (234, 251, i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ (6, 42, 104, 229, 231-233, 244, 245-257, 319, 375, 550, i.d.r.)
+ Controls the fire of his platoon and in his fire orders.
+
+ 1. Receives his orders from the company commander.
+ 2. If necessary, may indicate the fire position that has been
+ ordered.
+ 3. Announces sight setting.
+ 4. Points out designated target to his platoon, if practicable,
+ otherwise to his corporals only, or
+ 5. When the target cannot be seen, indicates an aiming target. (247
+ and 251, i.d.r., call this an aiming "point", but the occasions
+ upon which infantry would use an aiming "point" are so rare that
+ it is believed aiming "target" is a more accurate term as it
+ includes both point and line.)
+ 6. Assigns target so as to insure that the entire front or sector
+ given him by the company commander will be covered with fire.
+ 7. Gives class of fire.
+ 8. Announces rate of fire.
+ 9. If commanding a flank platoon, details a man to watch for
+ signals from the combat patrols.
+ 10. When his Corporals have signaled that their squads are ready to
+ fire, signals the Captain by looking toward him and holding up
+ his hand.
+ 11. When Captain signals a "commence firing", repeats same to the
+ corporals.
+
+THEREAFTER:
+
+ 1. Observes for fire effect.
+ 2. When platoon is not firing, insures that the front assigned is
+ kept under constant observation for any appearance of the enemy
+ or any change of position.
+ 3. Changes sight-setting of his platoon when necessary.
+ 4. Regulates rate of fire.
+ 5. Increases rate of fire when large and distinct targets appear
+ and decreases it when the target becomes small and indistinct.
+ 6. Prevents decrease in rate of fire when--
+ (1) Changing sight-setting,
+ (2) Preparing for rushes,
+ (3) Fixing bayonets,
+ (4) Transmitting firing data to supports,
+ (5) Distributing ammunition.
+ 7. Increases the rate of fire to cover the advance of adjacent
+ units. For this purpose progress and movements of adjoining
+ units are kept under observation.
+ 8. Maintains direction of advance of his platoon in rushing, so as
+ not to blanket fire of adjacent units.
+ 9. Is on the alert for Captain's commands or signals, for this
+ purpose he may use his platoon guide.
+ 10. May use his platoon guide to observe adjoining units.
+ 11. Must understand all signals.
+ 12. Leads his platoon in advancing and charging.
+ 13. Prevents changing fire to unauthorized targets.
+ 14. Insures distribution of ammunition brought up from the rear and
+ the collection and distribution of same from the dead and
+ wounded. (540, i.d.r.).
+ 15. In coming up with re-enforcements, he takes over the duties of
+ disabled platoon leaders of the platoon into which his men have
+ dropped, or it may be some other section of the line needs his
+ service in which case he goes there.
+ 16. Endeavors to preserve the integrity of squads, designates new
+ squad leaders to replace those disabled, organizes new squads
+ when necessary, sees that every man is placed in a squad and
+ takes every opportunity for restoring order in the firing line.
+ (104, 375, i.d.r.)
+ 17. In "Advance by thin lines", leads odd numbered lines. (218,
+ i.d.r.).
+
+
+VIII. THE FIRST SERGEANT.
+
+Commands a Platoon, Never a Guide.
+
+
+GUIDES.
+
+GENERAL RULES:
+
+1. Guides must be resourceful, have good health, vigorous physique,
+keen eyesight, presence of mind and courage, with good judgment,
+military training and experience. They must be able to read maps, make
+sketches and send clear and concise messages.
+
+2. EQUIPMENT.--Guides are equipped with whistle, watch, compass,
+message book, knife, pencil, wire cutters, map, pace scale and glasses
+if possible.
+
+3. As instructors they go where needed.
+
+4. As file closers they insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.
+
+5. In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
+charged with the step and direction.
+
+CLOSE ORDER.--The guides of the right and left, or leading and rear,
+platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear guides
+respectively of the company when it is in line or in column of squads.
+Other guides are in the line of file closers.
+
+In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
+the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
+in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
+flanks of the platoon does not change.
+
+The guides of a column of squads place themselves on the flank
+opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file closers to
+the other flank, the Captain commands: 1. _File closers on left
+(right) flank;_ 2. March. The file closers dart through the column;
+the captain and guides change.
+
+In column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the side
+of the guide.
+
+Men in the line of file closers do not execute the loadings or
+firings.
+
+Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
+of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
+the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements.
+
+IN TAKING INTERVALS AND DISTANCES.--Unless otherwise directed, the
+right and left guides, at the first command, place themselves in the
+line of file closers, and with them take a distance of 4 paces from
+the rear rank. In taking intervals, at the command "March", the file
+closers face to the flank and each steps off with the file nearest
+him. In _assembling_ the guides and file closers resume their places
+in line.
+
+To FORM THE COMPANY.--At the sounding of the assembly the first
+sergeant takes position 6 paces in front of where the center of the
+company is to be, faces it, draws saber, and commands "Fall in".
+
+The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
+where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
+center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
+sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
+right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
+posts.
+
+For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company, when
+small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close order
+movements only are executed. The single rank executes all movements as
+explained for the front rank of the company.
+
+ALIGNMENTS.--The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School
+of the Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file.
+The rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the
+front and covers his file leader.
+
+At each alignment the Captain places himself in prolongation of the
+line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
+made, verifies the alignment and commands: "Front".
+
+Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify the
+alignments.
+
+In "Company right" the right guide steps back on the command "March",
+aligning the first two men next to him as he does so, to establish the
+correct line.
+
+In "Platoon right" the Captain announces the guide and the guides
+cover promptly.
+
+In "Right turn" the right guide is the pivot of the front rank.
+
+In "Column right" the right flank man of the leading squad is the
+pivot, _not the guide_.
+
+In "Right by squads" the right guide (when he has posted himself in
+front of the right squad) takes four short steps and then resumes the
+full step. The right squad conforms.
+
+"Squads right about." If the company or platoons are in column of
+squads, file closers turn about toward the column and take posts. If
+in line, each darts through the nearest interval between squads. The
+right and left guides place themselves in the new front rank. File
+closers on facing about, maintain their relative positions.
+
+When the company executes "About face", guides place themselves in the
+new front rank.
+
+In "Right front into line, double time" halting and aligning commands
+are omitted. Guide is toward side of the first unit.
+
+In "Take interval" or "Take distance" guides drop back at the first
+command.
+
+In "Squads right" or "Platoons, column right" interior guides of
+platoons cross the company. A good rule for beginners is always to
+cross over (except in "column right").
+
+Guide of a company in line is right (unless otherwise announced).
+
+Guide of a platoon in line is right.
+
+Guide of a battalion in line is center.
+
+Guide of a line of subdivisions is center.
+
+Guide of a deployed line is center.
+
+Guide of a squad is toward the side of the guide of the company.
+
+Guide of successive formations into line is toward the point of rest.
+
+File closers remain on the same side of the company except when in so
+doing they would be left in front of the company.
+
+If the battalion is in line, the guide away from the point of rest (in
+each company) comes to the "Right shoulder arms" at the command to
+dress.
+
+At the command "Eyes right", guides who are charged with the direction
+do not execute "Eyes right", but simply salute.
+
+At "Retreat" guides unarmed stand at "Attention". Only officers
+salute.
+
+In "Stack arms" the right guide should align the stacks.
+
+In squads (acting alone) the corporal is the guide; number 2 of the
+front rank, if the corporal is not in line.
+
+The guides of rear units are charged with the step, trace and
+distance.
+
+EXERCISE FOR GUIDES.--Lay out a course of arbitrary distance; 200
+yards will answer the purpose. Instruct the guides to march the course
+as they would if they were guiding a company, but being sure to count
+their steps (a pebble transferred to the left hand at 100 steps is
+often found useful).
+
+RESULT.--The number of steps will range from 205 to 225. After getting
+the number of steps taken by each man, show them that they should have
+taken 240 steps and that each man took too long a step. Have them
+march back guiding on two points in line as before, cautioning them to
+cut down the length of the step to 30 inches from the start, and not
+to wait until they get half way down the course and find that they
+have less than 120 steps.
+
+RESULT.--All of the men, even after the caution, will have taken too
+long a step.
+
+Instructor times the guides both ways, and calls attention to the fact
+that in ALL cases the cadence was under 120 steps per minute.
+
+After repeating above as much as desired have the men march in pairs,
+one man keeping time and the other counting steps and marching on two
+points.
+
+They may check up every 10 seconds if desired.
+
+
+IX. PLATOON GUIDES.
+
+POSITION:
+
+ 1. Behind the firing line, on left of platoon leader. (163,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 2. Advancing in line--behind center of platoon. (213 and 223,
+ i.d.r.) To insure prompt and orderly advance.
+ 3. "Advance by thin lines"--lead even numbered lines. (218, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Advancing in squad or platoon column--in rear.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ (104, 213, 223, 229, 255, 367, 375, and 376, i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. The platoon leader's assistant and may be assigned any duty the
+ platoon leader sees fit.
+ 2. Keeps adjoining units under observation.
+ 3. Watches firing line.
+ 4. Checks every breach of fire discipline.
+ 5. Prevents skulking, men leaving the ranks at any time to care for
+ wounded, etc.
+ 6. Designates new squad leaders and organizes new squads when
+ necessary.
+ 7. Attaches men that have become separated from squads to other
+ squads.
+ 8. Insures prompt and orderly advance.
+ 9. On joining firing line from the support takes over duties of
+ sergeants disabled.
+ 10. May receive and transmit signals to the Captain.
+ 11. If the platoon leader is disabled, he takes over his duties.
+ Hence he should know what the platoon leader is doing and how.
+ 12. When taking over the duties of the platoon leader he calls the
+ senior corporal of his platoon out to act as guide.
+
+
+X. CORPORAL.
+
+POSITION:
+
+ 1. Marching in line, as center skirmisher of squad (124, i.d.r.)
+ or
+ 2. When skirmish line is halted, immediately behind his squad.
+
+ Note.--The School has recommended to the War Department that the
+ Infantry Drill Regulations be changed to provide that the
+ Corporal's position be as prescribed above and in paragraph 20,
+ page 10.
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ Paragraphs 42, 222, 252, 254, 255, 411, and 551, i.d.r., cover in
+ general the corporal's duties.
+ The squad leader (Corporal) controls the fire of his squad, he must
+ understand the duties of the private and in issuing his fire
+ orders:
+
+ 1. Receives his instructions from the platoon leader.
+ 2. Points out indicated objective to his squad.
+ 3. Takes as the squad target that portion of the platoon target
+ which corresponds to the position of the squad in the platoon.
+ 4. Announces sight setting.
+ 5. Announces class and rate of fire.
+ 6. When his squad is ready to fire looks toward the platoon leader
+ and holds up his hand. At the platoon leader's signal to
+ commence firing he sees that the squad opens fire.
+
+THEREAFTER:
+
+ 1. Makes all fire from the shoulder.
+ 2. Makes all use ordered rate of fire.
+ 3. Insures that all fire at designated objective.
+ 4. Prevents slighting of invisible portions of the target for more
+ visible parts.
+ 5. Prevents men from changing fire to unauthorized targets not in
+ the assigned front or sector.
+ 6. Maintains constant observation to the front; when squad is
+ firing, for effect of fire--when squad is not firing, for
+ appearance of enemy.
+ 7. Insures prompt obedience to orders to suspend and cease firing.
+ 8. Makes men utilize ground to fullest extent for concealment in
+ firing and advancing.
+ 9. In sight-setting, changing sights and fixing bayonets, has front
+ rank perform operation first (rear-rank men increasing rate of
+ fire) and then the rear-rank follow while the front-rank men
+ make up for loss of fire for the rear rank, thus insuring that
+ the rate of fire for the squad does not fall off.
+ 10. Prevents increasing vulnerability of squad while preparing for
+ a rush, and rushes as soon after cease firing as possible.
+ 11. When other squads of his platoon, are rushing, or the platoon
+ which is covering the same target as is his platoon, is rushing
+ he has his squad increase its rate of fire to make up for lost
+ fire effect of the rushing element.
+ 12. In rushing causes men to spring to feet running at full speed,
+ all men to drop to the ground at the same time, and those who
+ are in rear to crawl up to the line.
+ 13. When re-enforcing the firing line, takes over the duties of
+ disabled squad leaders. For this purpose his squad may drop into
+ line at one place and he may move to the next squad on the right
+ or left where there is a squad leader needed. If there are no
+ vacancies caused by disabled squad leaders, he drops into line
+ and assists the squad leaders who are there.
+ 14. Prevents decreasing rate of fire when men are transmitting data
+ to arriving supports.
+ 15. Prevents wasting of ammunition.
+ 16. Prevents use of 30 rounds in right pocket section of belts
+ except on order of an officer.
+ 17. Distributes ammunition of dead and wounded and ammunition
+ brought up from the rear.
+ 18. Prevents decreasing the rate of fire while ammunition is being
+ distributed.
+ 19. Looks to the rear only at his platoon leader's whistle
+ "Attention." Pays no attention to any other except suspend
+ firing.
+ 20. Takes his position in rear of his squad when it is firing and
+ remains there, where he can control its fire, and only crawls
+ into line and adds his rifle when all control is lost. (Short
+ ranges.)
+ 21. To control his squad he does not walk up and down behind his
+ squad but rolls along behind his line and keeps down.
+ 22. Leads his squad in moving to the front or rear.
+ 23. Must know thoroughly the drill regulation signals and have a
+ good practical knowledge of the theory of fire.
+ 24. In rushing, maintains the direction of advance of his squad so
+ as not to blanket the fire of squads in his rear.
+ 25. Takes advantage of every lull in the action and every favorable
+ opportunity to reorganize his squad and get it more under
+ control.
+ 26. Checks every breach of fire discipline, abates excitement, and
+ prevents any man from leaving the squad to go to the rear for
+ any purpose whatsoever.
+ 27. If called out of line to act as guide, notifies designated
+ private (103, i.d.r.) to take command of squad.
+
+
+XI. THE PRIVATE.
+
+POSITION:
+
+ Deployed in line: One man per yard (125, i.d.r.), unless a greater
+ extension is directed in the order for deployment. (126,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+DUTIES:
+
+ (6, 42, 104, 133, 134, 138, 139, 149, 152-156, 203, 209, 233, 247,
+ 251, 254, 255, 319, 354, 367, i.d.r., and 209, s.a.f.m.)
+
+ The individual soldier must be trained:
+
+ 1. To recognize targets from description quickly.
+ 2. To describe and define targets.
+ 3. To use rear sight in describing targets.
+ 4. To use horizontal and vertical clock systems, singly or in
+ combination in describing target.
+ 5. To set sights quickly and accurately as ordered.
+ 6. To bring piece to shoulder, aim carefully and deliberately from
+ habit, and to reload quickly.
+ 7. To fire at the ordered rate. (Par. 18, Standard for Field
+ Firing.)
+ 8. To fire at the part of the designated objective which
+ corresponds to his position in the firing line.
+ 9. To continue firing in the designated sector and not to change
+ therefrom unless ordered.
+ 10. Not to slight invisible parts of the target for more visible
+ ones.
+ 11. To maintain constant observation to the front.
+ 12. To utilize folds of ground for concealment in advancing and
+ firing.
+ 13. To select firing positions.
+ 14. To understand effects of visibility and the selection of
+ backgrounds.
+ 15. To fire from all positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps
+ of earth and rocks, depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways and
+ windows.
+ 16. To obey promptly orders to suspend and cease firing.
+ 17. To ignore whistle signals, except suspend firing.
+ 18. To watch closely for the expected target after having suspended
+ firing.
+ 19. To obey promptly all orders from his squad leader.
+ 20. To drop into the nearest interval when reinforcing the firing
+ line and obey the orders of the nearest squad leader.
+ 21. To transmit firing data to men of the supports coming into the
+ line rapidly and accurately, without decreasing his rate of
+ fire.
+ 22. To call for range and target when reinforcing the firing line.
+ 23. To have confidence in his own ability to hit.
+ 24. To a system of sight setting and fixing bayonets in order that
+ there may be no cessation of fire in the unit during this
+ operation.
+ 25. To prepare for rushes without decreasing fire of the unit
+ unduly.
+ 26. To avoid unnecessary movement in preparing for rushes.
+ 27. To spring forward at command "Rush" or "Follow Me" without
+ preliminary rising.
+ 28. To avoid bunching in rushing.
+ 29. Not to swerve to the right or left in search of cover but to
+ advance in a straight line, in order not to blanket the fire of
+ men in his rear.
+ 30. To drop quickly at end of rush and crawl up to line if in rear
+ of it.
+ 31. To remain with his own company, but if he accidentally becomes
+ detached from his company or squad to join the nearest one.
+ 32. To maintain silence except when transmitting or receiving firing
+ data and charging.
+ 33. To retain presence of mind.
+ 34. To be careful not to waste ammunition.
+ 35. To use the thirty rounds of ammunition in the right pocket
+ section of the belt only upon the order of an officer.
+ 36. To remain with the firing line after bringing up ammunition.
+ 37. To utilize ammunition of dead and wounded.
+ 38. Never to attempt to care for dead or wounded during the action.
+ 39. To have confidence in his ability to use the bayonet.
+ 40. To a firm determination to close with the enemy.
+ 41. To preserve the line in charging.
+ 42. To understand that a charge should be slow and steady (the
+ faster men must not run away from the slower ones).
+ 43. To form up immediately after the charge and follow the enemy
+ with fire, not attempting a disorganized pursuit.
+ 44. To understand that it is suicidal to turn his back to an enemy
+ and that, if he cannot advance, he must intrench and hold on
+ until dark.
+ 45. To count distant groups of object or beings.
+ 46. To recognize service targets.
+ 47. NEVER TO FIRE UNTIL HE UNDERSTANDS WHAT THE TARGET IS, AT WHAT
+ PART HE IS TO FIRE, AND WITH WHAT SIGHT SETTING.
+
+
+Packs.
+
+INSTRUCTIONS FOR ASSEMBLING THE INFANTRY EQUIPMENT, MODEL OF 1910.
+
+1. THE CARTRIDGE BELT.--(a) To assemble the belt.
+ Place the adjusting strap on the ground, eyeleted edge to the front;
+place the pocket sections on the ground in prolongation of the
+adjusting strap, pockets down, tops of pockets to the front; insert
+end of adjusting strap in outer loop of metal guide, from the upper
+side, carry it under the middle bar and up through the inner loop;
+engage the wire hook on the end of adjusting strap in the eyelets;
+provided on the inner surface of the belt.
+
+(b) To adjust the belt.
+ Adjust the belt to fit loosely about the waist--i.e., so that when
+buckled it may rest well down over the hip bones on the sides of the
+body and below the pit of the abdomen in front. Care should be taken
+that the adjustment be made equally from both ends of the adjusting
+strap, so that the center eyelet will be in the middle of the belt.
+
+(c) To fill the belt.
+ Unsnap the flap of the pocket and the interior retaining strap; lay
+the retaining strap out flat in prolongation of the pocket, insert a
+clip of cartridges, points of bullets up, in front of the retaining
+strap; press down until the base of the clip rests on the bottom of
+the pocket; pass the retaining strap over the bullet points and fasten
+it to the outside of the pocket by means of the fastener provided;
+insert a second clip of cartridges, points of bullets down, in rear of
+the first clip; press down until the points of the bullets rest on the
+bottom of the pocket; close the flap of the pocket and fasten by means
+of the fastener provided.
+
+The remaining nine pockets are filled in like manner.
+
+2. TO ATTACH THE FIRST-AID POUCH.--Attach the pouch under the second
+pocket of the right section of the belt by inserting one hook of the
+double-hook attachment in the eyelet, from the inside of the belt;
+pinch the base of the pocket, bringing eyelets close together, and
+insert the other hook in the same manner in the adjoining eyelet.
+ Place the first-aid packet in the pouch and secure the cover.
+
+3. TO ATTACH THE CANTEEN COVER.--Attach the canteen cover to the belt
+under the rear pocket of the right section in the same manner as the
+first-aid pouch.
+ Place the canteen and cup (assembled) in the cover and secure the
+flaps.
+
+4. TO ATTACH THE PACK CARRIER TO THE HAVERSACK.--Spread the haversack
+on the ground, inner side down, outer flap to the front (Fig. 4);
+place the buttonholed edge of the pack carrier on the buttonholed edge
+of the haversack, lettered side of carrier up; buttonholes of carrier
+superimposed upon the corresponding ones of the haversack; lace the
+carrier to the haversack by passing the ends of the coupling strap
+down through the corresponding buttonholes of the carrier and
+haversack nearest the center of the carrier, bringing the ends up
+through the next buttonholes and continuing to the right and left,
+respectively, to the sides.
+
+5. TO ATTACH THE CARTRIDGE BELT TO THE HAVERSACK.--Place the haversack
+and pack carrier (assembled) on the ground, inner side down (Fig. 5);
+place the cartridge belt, pockets down, tops to the front, along the
+junction of the haversack and carrier; insert hook on rear of belt
+suspender in the center eyelet of the adjusting strap, so that the end
+of the hook will be on the outside of the belt; insert hooks on ends
+of front belt suspenders in the eyelets between the second and third
+pockets from the outer ends of the belt, so that the end of the hooks
+will be on the outside of the belt.
+
+6. TO ATTACH THE BAYONET SCABBARD TO THE HAVERSACK.--Attach the
+scabbard by passing its lower end through the loop provided on the
+side of the haversack body, then engage the double-hook attachment in
+the eyelets on the outer flap on the haversack, inserting the hooks
+from the inside.
+ Place the bayonet in the scabbard.
+
+7. TO ATTACH THE INTRENCHING TOOL CARRIER TO THE HAVERSACK.--Fold the
+outer flap of the haversack over so that the meat-can pouch is
+uppermost; pass the intrenching tool carrier underneath the meat-can
+pouch and engage the double-hook attachment in the eyelets in the flap
+provided, inserting the hooks from the underside.
+ Place the intrenching tool in the carrier and secure.
+ Place the meat-can, knife, fork, and spoon in the meat-can pouch.
+ The equipment is now assembled and is never disassembled except to
+detach the pack carrier and its contents as hereinafter provided for.
+
+
+To ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.
+
+(_With Rations._)
+
+Place the assembled equipment on the ground, suspender side of
+haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haversack spread out,
+inside flap and pack carrier extended their full length to the rear
+(Fig. 6).
+
+Place three cartons of hard bread in the center of the haversack body,
+the lower one on the line of attachment of the inside flap; lay the
+remaining carton of hard bread, the condiment can and the bacon can on
+the top of these, the condiment can and the bacon can at the bottom,
+top of the bacon can to the front; the socks and toilet articles are
+rolled, towel on the outside, into a bundle of the same approximate
+dimensions as a carton of hard bread, and are placed in front of the
+two rows thus formed.
+
+The inside flap of the haversack is folded over these articles, the
+end of the flap being turned in so that the flap, thus shortened,
+extends about 2 inches beyond the top of the upper row; the sides of
+the haversack are folded over the sides of the rows; the upper binding
+straps are passed through the loops on the outside of the inside flap,
+each strap through the loop opposite the point of its attachment to
+the haversack body, and fastened by means of the buckle on the
+opposite side, the strap being passed through the opening in the
+buckle next to its attachment, over the center bar, and back through
+the opening of the buckle away from its attachment; the strap is
+pulled tight to make the fastening secure; the outer flap of the
+haversack is folded over and fastened by means of the lower haversack
+binding strap and the buckle on the inside of the outer flap; the
+strap is pulled tight, drawing the outer flap snugly over the filled
+haversack.
+
+The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the reception
+of the pack (Fig. 7).
+
+If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu
+of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner
+described above, except that two cartons of hard bread and the bacon
+can form the bottom layer, the bacon can on the bottom; the condiment
+can, the emergency ration, and the toilet articles form the top layer.
+
+If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack
+rations, it is packed on top of the top layer.
+
+TO MAKE THE PACK (Fig. 8).--Spread the shelter half on the ground and
+fold in the triangular ends, forming an approximate square from the
+half, the guy on the inside; fold the poncho once across its shortest
+dimension, then twice across its longest dimension, and lay it in the
+center of the shelter half; fold the blanket as described for the
+poncho and place it on the latter; place the shelter tent pins in the
+folds of the blanket, in the center and across the shortest dimension;
+fold the edges of the shelter half snugly over the blanket and poncho
+and, beginning on either of the short sides, roll tightly and
+compactly. This forms the pack.
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK (Fig. 9).--Place the pack in the pack carrier and
+grasp the lower suspension rings, one in each hand; place the right
+knee against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down and force
+the pack up close against the bottom of the packed haversack; without
+removing the knee, pass the lower carrier binding strap over the pack
+and secure it by means of the opposite buckle; in a similar manner
+secure the lower haversack binding strap and then the upper carrier
+binding strap.
+ Engage the snap hook on the pack suspenders in the lower suspension
+rings.
+ The equipment is now assembled and packed as prescribed for the full
+equipment.
+
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT.
+
+(_Without Rations._)
+
+Place the assembled equipment on the ground as heretofore described;
+fold up the inside flap of the haversack so that its end will be on a
+line with the top of the haversack body; fold up the lower haversack
+strap in the same manner.
+
+TO MAKE UP THE PACK.--Fold the poncho, blanket and shelter half, and
+make up the pack as heretofore prescribed, except that the condiment
+and bacon can (the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles
+and socks are rolled in the pack. In this case the pack is rolled,
+beginning on either of the long sides instead of the short sides, as
+heretofore described.
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE PACK.--Place the pack on the haversack and pack
+carrier, its upper end on a line with the upper edge of the haversack
+body; bind it to the haversack and carrier by means of the haversack
+and pack binding straps; fold down the outer flap on the haversack and
+secure it by means of the free end of the middle haversack banding
+strap and the buckle provided on the underside of the flap; engage the
+snap hooks of the pack suspenders in the lower suspension rings.
+
+The equipment is now packed and assembled (Fig. 10).
+
+TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER.--Put on the equipment,
+slipping the arms one at a time through the pack suspenders as through
+the sleeves of a coat; by means of the adjusting buckles on the belt
+suspenders, raise or lower the belt until it rests well down over the
+hip bones on the sides and below the pit of the abdomen in front;
+raise or lower it in rear until the adjusting strap lies smoothly
+across the small of the back; by means of the adjusting buckles on the
+pack suspenders, raise or lower the load on the back until the top of
+the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders, the pack
+suspenders, from their point of attachment to the haversack to the
+line of tangency with the shoulder, being horizontal. _The latter is
+absolutely essential to the proper adjustment of the load_.
+
+The position of the belt is the same whether filled or empty.
+
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.
+
+(_With Rations._)
+
+(Fig. 11.)
+
+Detach the carrier from, the haversack; place the rest of the
+equipment on the ground as heretofore described; place the four
+cartons of hard bread, the bacon can, the condiment can, and the
+toilet articles in one row in the middle of the haversack body, the
+toilet articles at the top, the bacon can at the bottom, top to the
+front, the row extending from top to bottom of the haversack; fold the
+inside flap over the row thus formed; fold the sides of the haversack
+up and over; pass the three haversack binding straps through the loops
+on the inside flap and secure by means of the buckles on the opposite
+side of the haversack; pass the lower haversack binding strap through
+the small buttonhole in the lower edge of the haversack, fold the
+outer flap of the haversack over the whole and secure by means of the
+buckle on its underside and the lower haversack binding strap.
+
+Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes
+in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the
+ends of the pack suspenders.
+
+If one haversack ration and one emergency ration are carried in lieu
+of two haversack rations, the haversack is packed in the manner
+described above, except that one emergency ration is substituted for
+two of the cartons of hard bread.
+
+If one emergency ration is carried in addition to the two haversack
+rations, it is packed on top of the layer.
+
+
+TO ASSEMBLE THE FULL EQUIPMENT LESS THE PACK.
+
+(_Without Rations._)
+
+Detach the carrier from the haversack; place the rest of the equipment
+on the ground as heretofore described; fold up the inside flap of the
+haversack until its upper end is on a line with the top of the
+haversack body; fold the sides of the haversack over, pass the three
+haversack binding straps through the loops on the inside flap and
+secure by means of the buckles on the opposite side of the haversack;
+pass the lower haversack binding strap through the small buttonhole in
+the lower edge of the haversack; place the condiment and bacon can
+(the former inside the latter) and the toilet articles and socks in
+the bottom of the pouch thus formed; fold the outer flap of the
+haversack over the whole and secure by means of the buckle on its
+underside and the lower haversack binding strap.
+
+Pass the haversack suspension rings through the contiguous buttonholes
+in the lower edge of the haversack and engage the snap hooks on the
+ends of the pack suspenders.
+
+TO ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TO THE SOLDIER.--Put on the equipment as
+prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the cartridge belt as
+prescribed for the full equipment. Adjust the pack suspenders so that
+the top of the haversack is on a level with the top of the shoulders.
+
+
+TO DISCARD THE PACK WITHOUT REMOVING THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE BODY.
+
+Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap them
+into the eyelets on top of the belt and in rear of the rear pockets of
+the right and left pocket sections; support the bottom of the pack
+with the left hand and with the right hand grasp the coupling strap at
+its middle and withdraw first one end, then the other; press down
+gently on the pack with both hands and remove it. When the pack has
+been removed, lace the coupling strap into the buttonholes along the
+upper edge of the carrier. Adjust the pack suspenders.
+
+For illustration of how packs are made up and carried, see Privates'
+Manual, Chapter 2.
+
+
+CARE OF EQUIPMENT.
+
+LEATHER.--1. Keep leather clean. Use material furnished by Ordnance
+Department, or castile soap and water.
+
+2. Oil leather frequently to keep it pliable. Use Neatsfoot oil,
+Viscol or Harness soap.
+
+3. Dry in the shade; never in the sun or in artificial heat. Always
+store in a cool, dry place without artificial heat. Shoe polishes are
+almost always injurious.
+
+WOOLEN CLOTHES.--Wash in tepid or cold water with a non-alkaline soap;
+do not wring it out; dry in the shade.
+
+MENDING.--Always keep equipment ready for use.
+
+CLOTH EQUIPMENT.--DRY CLEANING.--Scrub with a stiff brush frequently.
+
+WASHING.--Only under the direction of an officer.
+
+Dissolve 1 piece of Q.M. soap (not yellow), in 9 cups of water. One
+cup will clean the equipment of one man. Apply with a brush and lather
+well. Rub soap directly on persistent spots. Wash off in cold water
+and dry in the shade.
+
+
+INSTRUCTIONS ON MAKING PACKS.
+
+FOUR METHODS:
+
+ Full equipment with rations.
+ Full equipment without rations.
+ Full equipment less pack, with rations.
+ Full equipment less pack, without rations.
+
+ Haversack, Weight 9-1/4
+ Carrier Cartridge belt, canteen, Weight 11-1/2
+ Suspenders Mess Rations Weight 10-1/2
+ Mess pouch Gun 9
+ Clothing 7
+ -------
+ 40
+
+ADJUSTING CARTRIDGE BELT.--1. Fits loosely around waist. 2. Resting on
+hips. 3. Hole between buckles. Insert ammunition: First, clip in
+front, points up, fastened with retaining strap, Second clip points
+down. First aid pouch under 4th pocket, left. Canteen under rear
+pocket, right. Bayonet between 3rd and 4th pocket, left. (New bayonet
+scabbard fastens on haversack.)
+
+
+DISTRIBUTION OF INTRENCHING TOOLS IN THE SQUADS.
+
+ No. 3 rear of each odd-numbered squad ... Bolo
+ No. 3 rear of each even-numbered squad ... Hand Axe.
+ No. 1 rear of each squad ... Pick Mattock.
+ Nos. 1, 2 and 3 front of each squad ... Shovels
+ No. 2 rear of each squad ... Wire Cutter.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 3.
+
+Physical Training.
+
+
+Only the carefully trained and conditioned man can make victory
+possible. For this reason the first and most important concern of a
+nation at war is the physical training of its soldiers.
+
+The setting-up exercises are the basis for all other activities and
+their disciplinary value is almost as great as their physical value.
+
+PHYSICAL TRAINING.--Each period should include exercises for all parts
+of the body. Following the setting-up exercises the following should
+be given in the order named: marching, jumping, double timing,
+gymnastic contests, and concluding or restorative exercises.
+
+Rifle exercises have for their purpose the development of "handiness"
+with the piece. They should be used moderately and with frequent
+rests, for they develop big muscles at the expense of agility--a
+muscle bound man cannot use his strength.
+
+BAYONET TRAINING in addition to its military value calls into play
+every muscle of the body and makes for alertness, agility, quick
+perception, decision, aggressiveness and confidence.
+
+
+Time Schedule.
+
+A.M. (Begins 1/2 hour P.M. (End 1/2 hour
+after breakfast): before retreat):
+
+1. Disciplinary exercises, 1. Bayonet training, 30
+ 2 minutes. minutes.
+2. Starting positions, 1 2. Games and contests,
+ minute. 30 minutes.
+3. Setting up exercises, Alternating daily with:
+ 20 minutes. 1. Bombing practice, 20
+4. Marching and marching minutes.
+ exercises, 5 to 8 2. Conditioning exercises,
+ minutes. 15 minutes.
+5. Jumping, 5 to 8 minutes. Double timing.
+6. Double timing, 5 minutes Vaulting and overcoming
+ obstacles.
+ 3. Rifle practice, 10 minutes.
+
+Instructions must be:
+
+ 1. An inspiration to the men.
+ 2. Well prepared themselves.
+ 3. Stripped for action.
+ 4. An example to the men.
+ 5. Must make drill attractive.
+ 6. Never have men overdo. Temper the exercises to the endurance of
+ the weakest man.
+ 7. Accompany every exercise with the proper breathing.
+ 8. See that the men are clothed according to the season.
+ 9. Have the drills short and snappy.
+ 10. Have frequent rests at the beginning--less frequent as work
+ progresses.
+
+The platoon is the best unit for physical drills.
+
+FORMATIONS.--When exercising in small squads, the men "fall in" in a
+single rank and, after having "counted off" by fours, threes or twos,
+as the instructor may direct, distance is taken at the command: Take
+distance, March, Squad Halt. At "March" No. 1 moves forward, being
+followed by the other numbers at intervals of four paces. Halt is
+commanded when all have taken their distances.
+
+At the discretion of the instructor the distance may be any number of
+paces, the men being first cautioned to that effect.
+
+When distance is taken from the double rank, No. 1 of the rear rank
+follows No. 4 of the front rank, and he is in turn followed by the
+other numbers of the rear rank.
+
+If the instructor desires the files to cover, he commands: In file
+_Cover_. Nos. 1 stand fast, the others moving to the right with the
+side step, until the Nos. 1 are covered.
+
+To return to the original formation, the instructor commands: Assemble
+March. No. 1 of the front rank stands fast and the other members move
+forward to their original places.
+
+_Second Formation._ To the right and left. Take interval, March.
+
+_Front Rank:_ _Rear Rank:_
+No. 1, 6 steps right step. No. 1, 3 steps right step.
+No. 2, 3 steps right step. No. 2, Stands fast.
+No. 3, Stands fast. No. 3, 3 steps left step.
+No. 4, 3 steps left step. No. 4, 6 steps left step.
+
+
+Commands.
+
+KINDS OF COMMANDS, AND HOW GIVEN.--There are two kinds, _preparatory_
+and _executive_.
+
+The _preparatory command_ describes and specifies what is desired and
+the _executive command_ calls what has been described into action.
+
+The tone of the command should always be animated, distinct, and of a
+loudness proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.
+
+Instructors should cultivate a proper command, as its value as a
+tributary to the success of any military drill cannot be
+overestimated.
+
+After an exercise has been described, its various movements or parts
+should be performed at _executive words_, which indicate not only the
+movement that is desired but the manner of the execution. Thus: 1.
+Trunk forward, 2. Bend, 3. Recover (or Raise), here the word _bend_ is
+drawn to indicate moderately slow execution; the recovery being a
+little faster, the word _recover_ should be spoken to indicate it.
+
+The word Recover should always be used to bring the men back to the
+original position.
+
+If it is desired to continue an exercise, the command Exercise should
+be used and the cadence or rhythm should be indicated by words or
+numerals. If numerals are used, they should equal the number of
+movements composing the exercise. Thus an exercise of two movements
+will be repeated at _one, two_; one of four movements will require
+four counts, etc.
+
+The numeral or word preceding the command Halt should always be given
+with a rising inflection in order to prepare the men for the command
+Halt.
+
+Thus: 1. Thrust arms forward, 2. Exercise one, two, one, two, one,
+Halt.
+
+If any movement of any exercise is to be performed with more energy
+than the others, the word or numeral corresponding to that movement
+should be emphasized.
+
+FIRST LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. 1. Attention; 2. At Ease; 3.
+Rest; 4. Facings.
+ B. Starting Positions. (m.p.t., pp. 25 to 29.)
+ C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions)[P]:
+
+ 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and forward.
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head backward; same, forward.
+ (38.)
+ 4. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn trunk right; same, left. (40.)
+ 5. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Half bend knees slowly. (35.)
+ 6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.)
+ 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Raise and lower shoulders. (32.)
+ 8. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right; same,
+ left. (37.)
+ 9. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Stretch arms sideward. (43.)
+ 10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Raise knees forward alternatingly.
+ (41.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward; exhale,
+ lowering arms.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in column in quick time and halting.
+ 2. Same, marking time, marching forward and halting.
+ 3. Same, marching on toes.
+
+[Footnote P: Note.--Jumping and double-timing exercises and contests
+should not be included in the first week's work.
+Bracketed numbers refer to pages in "Manual of Physical Training,"
+where similar exercises are illustrated and described.]
+
+
+SECOND LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises. Same as in first lesson.
+ B. Starting positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises (every exercise has two motions):
+
+ 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms sideward.
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes. (33.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right; same, left. (41.)
+ 4. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Turn trunk sideward, right;
+ same, left. (40.)
+ 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Full bend knees, slowly. (39.)
+ 6. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (36.)
+ 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward and
+ backward. (35.)
+ 8. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right; same,
+ left. (31.)
+ 9. From Attention. Stretch arms forward and sideward.
+ 10. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (34.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend right and left leg forward.
+ (44.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms sideward and upward;
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in column in quick time, mark time, marching in
+ quick time and halting. (88.)
+ 2. Marching on toes. (89.)
+ 3. Marching on toes and rocking.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Rise on toes and arms forward, 2 Raise. Swing arms downward
+ and bend knees; swing arms forward and extend knees, and
+ recover Attention.
+ 2. Jumping in place. (193.)
+
+ F. Double Timing:
+
+ 1. Double timing, change to quick time and halting. (92.)
+
+ G. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Breathing exercise, raising and lowering arms sideward.
+
+
+THIRD LESSON.--A disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson.
+ B. Starting Positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises:
+
+ 1. Arms forward, 2. Raise. Swing arms downward and sideward. (4
+ motions.)
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on right and left toes,
+ alternatingly. (4 motions.) (46.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Bend head forward and backward. (4
+ motions.) (38.)
+ 4. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4
+ motions.) (53.)
+ 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes and full bend knees
+ slowly. (4 motions.) (39.)
+ 6. Fingers in rear of head, 2. Place. Bend trunk forward. (2
+ motions.) (42.)
+ 7. Arms to thrust, 2. Raise. Move shoulders forward, upward,
+ backward, and recover. (4 motions.)
+ 8. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk sideward, right, and
+ left. (4 motions.) (37.)
+ 9. From Attention. Stretch arms sideward, upward, sideward, and
+ recover. (4 motions.)
+ 10. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Bend trunk backward. (2
+ motions.) (34.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2 Place. Extend right and left leg backward.
+ (2 motions.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Inhale, raising arms forward, upward; and
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward, down.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in quick time, raising knees. (89.)
+ 2. Thrusting arms sideward.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Standing broad jump.
+ 2. Three successive broad jumps.
+
+ F. Double Timing:
+
+ 1. Double timing. (92.)
+ 2. Double timing, marking time in the double and forward.
+ 3. Double timing and halting from the double.
+
+ G. Gymnastic Contests. Two of these games should be included in
+ each lesson. See pp. 39-40.
+ H. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Breathing exercise, as in 12.
+
+
+FOURTH LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises, as in first lesson.
+ B. Starting Positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises:
+
+ 1. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Extend arms forward; swing
+ sideward, forward, and recover. (4 motions.)
+ 2. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Rise on toes quickly. (2 motions.)
+ (33.)
+ 3. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Turn head right and left. (4
+ motions.) (41.)
+ 4. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Turn trunk right and left. (4
+ motions.)
+ 5. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Half bend knees, quickly. (2
+ motions.) (35.)
+ 6. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk forward. (2 motions.)
+ 7. Hands on shoulders, 2. Place. Move elbows forward, and
+ stretch backward. (2 motions.) (45.)
+ 8. Arms upward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk sideward, right and left.
+ (4 motions.)
+ 9. From Attention. Stretch, arms forward, sideward, upward,
+ sideward, forward, and recover. (6 motions.)
+ 10. Arms sideward, 2. Raise. Bend trunk backward. (2 motions.)
+ 11. Hands on hips, 2. Place. Extend legs sideward. (2 motions.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: 1. Inhale, raising arms forward, upward;
+ exhale, lowering arms sideward.
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. Marching in quick time, raising knees, and rising on toes of
+ other foot.
+ 2. Raising heels.
+ 3. Thrusting arms sideward.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Three successive standing broad jumps.
+ 2. Jumping in place, raising knees.
+
+ F. Double Timing:
+
+ 1. Double timing.
+ 2. Raising heels.
+ 3. Double timing, sideward, crossing legs.
+
+ G. Gymnastic Contests.
+ H. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Swing arms forward, upward, relaxed.
+ 2. Breathing exercise, as in 12.
+
+
+FIFTH LESSON.--A. Disciplinary Exercises.
+ B. Starting Positions.
+ C. Setting-up Exercises:
+
+ 1. Arms to thrust. Thrust arms upward; swing downward; forward;
+ upward, and recover. (4 motions.) (55.)
+ 2. Hands in rear of head. Rise on toes and rock. (2 motions.)
+ (39.)
+ 3. Hands on hips. Bend head forward and backward. (4 motions.)
+ 4. Hands on shoulders. Turn trunk right and left, stretching
+ arms sideward. (4 motions.) (52.)
+ 5. Full bend knees. Hands on ground between knees, squatting
+ position, extend right and left leg backward, alternatingly.
+ (4 motions.) (65.)
+ 6. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk forward and stretch arms
+ sideward. (2 motions.) (51.)
+ 7. From Attention. Curl shoulders forward and stretch backward.
+ (2 motions.) (38.)
+ 8. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk sideward, right and left,
+ extending arms sideward. (4 motions.) (65.)
+ 9. From Attention. Flex forearms vertically; extend upward; flex
+ and recover. (4 motions.) (54.)
+ 10. Hands on shoulders. Bend trunk backward, stretching arms
+ sideward. (2 motions.) (56.)
+ 11. From Attention. Raise arms forward and extend leg forward;
+ stretch arms sideward, extending leg backward; move arms and
+ leg to first position and recover Attention. (4 motions.)
+ (53.)
+ 12. Breathing Exercise: Raise arms sideward; upward; and lower
+ laterally quickly. (4 motions.)
+
+ D. Marching Exercises:
+
+ 1. March in quick time and swing extended leg forward, ankle
+ high.
+ 2. Raising knee and hopping on other foot.
+ 3. From arms forward. Swing arms upward.
+
+ E. Jumping Exercises:
+
+ 1. Standing hop, step and jump.
+ 2. Preliminary running broad jumps.
+ 3. Broad jump from a walking start of four paces. (197.)
+
+ F. Double timing.
+
+ 1. Double timing.
+ 2. Double timing sideward, crossing leg in front.
+ 3. Double timing, raising knees.
+
+ G. Gymnastic Contests.
+ H. Concluding Exercises:
+
+ 1. Bend trunk forward and backward, relaxed.
+ 2. Breathing exercise, as in 12.
+
+For further work for recruits and work to be given trained soldiers,
+see Special Regulation No. 23, "Field Physical Training of the
+Soldier."
+
+To prevent grumbling, keep men at work. Idle men are the ones who
+growl. The French consider periods spent in the trenches as periods of
+rest; instead of letting the men go on pass when relieved, they
+restore discipline by close order drill.
+
+The physical benefit is less than half of physical exercises. There
+should be mental exertion in every exercise. But the most important
+part is the disciplinary benefit. The exercises must teach men to jump
+at commands, and by this means must make the organization a
+homogeneous mass.
+
+The principal thing in the position of attention is "chest lifted; and
+arched." There should be a stretch upward at the waist. The position
+should give the impression of a man as proud of himself as he can be.
+This is a bluff which works, not only by making a good first
+impression on others, but by causing the man himself to live up to it.
+
+Insist on precision. Especially when men are losing interest, don't
+let the work sag, but make it interesting by requiring concentration.
+At the beginning of each exercise, wake the men up by calling them to
+attention until they do it well, giving the facings, etc.
+
+COMMANDS.--There is a tone at which each voice carries best. Each man
+must find it for himself. To make commands understood, enunciate
+carefully with lips and teeth. Sound especially first and last letters
+of words. Officer's posture adds to effect of command. His personality
+is impressed on his men largely by his voice. Preparatory command
+should be vibrant and cheerful--not a harsh tone that grates on the
+men and antagonizes them. The command of execution must be short and
+sharp; drill can be made or marred by it.
+
+MARCHING.--A cadence faster than 120 a minute adds snap to marching,
+but snap can not be gained in proportion as the cadence is run up.
+Snap is attained chiefly by the proper gait. Soldiers should march,
+not with knees always slightly bent, but should straighten them
+smartly at the end of each step. This adds drive to the step, and
+gives the men confidence and a mob spirit of courage. After long drill
+at attention, this spirit can be carried into extended order work.
+
+Marching exercises are useful and can be greatly varied. The command
+"Exercise" should always be given as the left foot strikes the ground.
+"Exercise" is a command of execution, and the first movement should be
+executed at once when it is given. The count "One" is given when this
+first position is reached. The command to stop all marching exercises
+is "Quick time--March."
+
+In all exercises the instructor should cultivate the ability to pick
+mistakes. He can develop this until he can watch much larger groups
+than at first.
+
+
+Voice Culture.
+
+Mastery of the voice is a necessity for every officer; for without it
+the giving of commands will soon make his throat look and feel like a
+piece of raw Hamburg steak. Quality of voice is more effective than
+quantity. Brute force may produce a roar that has tremendous volume at
+a short distance; but the sound will not carry unless it is so placed
+that it gets the benefit of the resonance spaces in the head. If the
+tone is produced properly, so that it has the singing quality
+necessary in all right commands, quantity of tone will come of itself.
+
+This singing quality has nothing to do with music; it may be attained
+by a man who can hardly distinguish a bar of music from a bar of soap.
+It depends upon three principles, which are very simple in themselves
+but can not be applied without careful practise. The first covers
+proper use of the breath. Air must be drawn into the lungs by
+expanding the diaphragm and abdomen, a process best seen in the
+natural breathing of a man who is lying on his back with all muscles
+relaxed. Filling the upper part of the lungs by raising the chest puts
+the work on the comparatively small muscles between the ribs; but
+filling the base of the lungs by pulling downward brings into play the
+diaphragm, the largest muscle in the body. The sensation which
+accompanies proper deep control of the breath is as if the tone were
+not pushed out of the mouth, but drawn in and upwards. It is partly
+described by the phrases of singing teachers, "drawn tone" and
+"singing on the breath."
+
+The diaphragm must not only relieve the muscles between the ribs, but,
+still more important, the small muscles of the throat. The second
+great principle of voice production is that the throat must be
+perfectly relaxed. Any tension there interferes with the free
+vibration which is essential for strong and resonant tone. This
+relaxation is most easily gained by drawing the chin in slightly,
+loosening the muscles under it. The base of the tongue can be relaxed
+by rolling the letter "R," even to the extent of making two syllables
+of such words as "gr-rand." Talking with the teeth closed loosely will
+also help to ease incorrect, tension about the throat. If the throat
+is properly relaxed, there will be no sensation in it during the
+production of the voice. Any sensation between the diaphragm and the
+resonance chambers of the head is a sign of wrong and harmful tension.
+
+The use of these resonance chambers is required by the third
+principle--that the tone must be reinforced by resonance in all the
+hollow spaces of the head. These are found in the nose, above the
+palate and even above the eyes. They have the same effect as the
+sounding board of a musical instrument, in giving quality to the tone.
+The best way to put this principle into practice is to learn the
+sensation of the clear and ringing tone which is produced by proper
+placing of the voice. Exercises containing the letters "M" and "N"
+will give this effect. This does not mean that the sound should be
+nasal; it should be made in the nose, but not through it. Another way
+to increase resonance is to think of crying the words rather than
+talking them. A slightly whining intonation or a sound like that of a
+laugh has more ring to it than an ordinary flat talking tone.
+
+These principles should not be neglected because they are simple. They
+can not be mastered without work, and unless they are mastered the
+voice will not be heard at a distance and will not last under the work
+of giving commands. Further suggestions on the manner of giving
+commands will be found under Physical Training.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 4.
+
+Use of Modern Arms.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #3]
+
+
+Small Arms Firing.
+
+Under this heading we have many phases of the training and exercises
+given to our armed forces. It has been found best to use simple every
+day methods to get the best results.
+
+There are two principal factors--the rifle and the pistol. The former
+only will be taken up now. The scheme is to make the soldier a good
+shot singly and collectively, in time of peace and in time of war.
+
+The course of instruction at this camp was arranged as follows:
+
+ (a) Nomenclature and care of the rifle.
+ (b) Sighting drills.
+ (c) Position and aiming drills.
+ (d) Deflection and aiming drills.
+ (e) Range practice.
+ (f) Estimating distance drill.
+ (g) Combat firing.
+
+(a) Every man should be taught the names of the principal parts (see
+cut) of the rifle and how to clean and keep it clean.
+
+(b) If time permits, the sighting bar described on page 26, s.a.f.m.
+should be used. To illustrate the normal and peep sight make a drawing
+on a blackboard of page 30, s.a.f.m.
+
+Using a sand bag or some convenient rest for the rifle. The instructor
+sights it on some object showing the normal and peep sight. Using the
+above rests have a marker hold a disk against a large piece of paper
+towards which the rifle is pointed. There is a pin hole in the center
+of the bull's eye on the disk. The range should be about 50 feet, and
+the bull's eye about 1 inch in diameter. The marker moves it about
+until the man sighting tells him to "hold," at which time he marks the
+center with the point of a pencil. This is done three times, the three
+points are then connected. The triangle thus formed is then used by
+the instructor to show the man whether he took too much or too little
+front sight or whether he leaned to one side or the other while
+aiming.
+
+Use for this exercise both the normal and peep sight.
+
+To show the effect of canting the piece use a sight setting of 1,000
+yards, take out the bolt, aim the rifle while lying on a sand bag at a
+1-inch bull's eye 50 feet away. Then look through the bore of the
+rifle and have the place where the target would be approximately hit
+by a bullet marked. Cant the piece to the right and aim at the same
+bull's eye. Then look through the bore of the rifle and mark the place
+where the bullet would approximately strike the target. The last mark
+would be lower and to the right of the first mark. It should be
+readily seen that in canting the piece to the right your sight is to
+the right of its original position--that is right windage. Also by
+canting it to the right your elevation is lowered, that is, lessened.
+Canting the piece to the left would make the bullet strike low and to
+the left.
+
+(c) Preliminary command "Position and aiming drill," command of
+execution "Squad (platoon, or company) Ready." At the command "Ready"
+each man faces half right and carries the right foot about 1 foot to
+the right, in such a position that will insure the greatest firmness
+and steadiness, raises the piece and drops it into the left hand at
+the balance, left thumb along the stock, muzzle at the height of the
+breast. If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is
+similar--if kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh--if
+sitting the elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down the left
+hand steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the
+butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. From the
+position of ready the four exercises--position, aiming, trigger
+squeeze, and rapid fire--are given. These exercises given on pages
+38-42, s.a.f.m. should be carefully studied. Do not leave it to the
+sergeant, etc., to do--give your company your own instruction when
+practicable, and in time of battle they will know you and you will
+know them, and there will grow up between you that mutual
+understanding which is necessary for the real success of any
+undertaking. Do not forget to give these exercises in all positions of
+firing, namely, standing, sitting, kneeling, and prone.
+
+(d) A change of one point of windage at the 100 yard range will change
+the point struck by the bullet of the next shot 4 inches. If right
+windage is taken the bullet will strike to the right, if left windage
+is taken it will strike to the left:
+
+ number of
+ Range. windage. direction. inches change.
+ 100 1 point right or left 4
+ 200 1 point right or left 8
+ 300 1 point right or left 12
+ 500 1 point right or left 20
+ 600 1 point right or left 24
+
+Remember to take windage in the direction you want the bullet to
+strike.
+
+A change of 25 yards in your sight setting raises or lowers the point
+struck by the bullet of the next shot at the 100 yards range 1 inch:
+
+ Number inches
+ Range. Change in sight. change on target.
+ 100 25 yards 1
+ 200 25 yards 2
+ 300 25 yards 3
+ 500 25 yards 5
+ 600 25 yards 6
+ 300 75 yards 9
+ 500 150 yards 30
+
+(e) Range practice.
+
+Target details must be thoroughly familiar with paragraphs 106-110,
+s.a.f.m. Scorers must be familiar with the method of recording
+scores. The following schedule is the one that was followed at this
+camp:
+
+SLOW FIRE.
+
+=====+==========+=====+======+==========+====================+==========
+Range| Time |Shots|Target| Position | Sights |Ammunition
+-----|----------|-----|------|----------|--------------------|----------
+ 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | Leaf | Guard
+ 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Kneeling | Leaf | Guard
+ 100 | No limit | 15 | A | Standing | Leaf | Guard
+ 200 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+ 200 | No limit | 15 | A | Kneeling | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+ 300 | No limit | 15 | A | Prone | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+ 300 | No limit | 15 | A | Sitting | 10 leaf, 5 battles | Service
+=====+==========+=====+======+==========+====================+==========
+
+
+RAPID FIRE.
+
+=====+=========+=====+=======+========================+======+==========
+Range| Time |Shots|Target |Position |Sights|Ammunition
+-----|---------|-----|-------|------------------------|------|----------
+ 100 | 1 min | 10 | D | Prone | Leaf | Service
+ 100 | 1 min. | 10 | H | Prone | Leaf | Service
+ 200 | 1 min. | 10 | D | Kneeling from standing | Leaf | Service
+ 200 | 1 min. | 10 | H | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service
+ 300 | 1'-10" | 10 | D | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service
+ 300 | 1'-10" | 10 | H | Prone from standing | Leaf | Service
+=====+=========+=====+=======+========================+======+==========
+
+At each range with the rapid fire 5 additional shots should be fired
+with the battle sight and with half the allotted time.
+
+(f) A course should be laid off in an open field. The base should be
+marked. At least 5 natural objects whose distances are to be estimated
+should be placed so that they are clearly visible from the base. The
+objects should be men standing, kneeling or prone, and should be
+placed from 550 to 1,200 yards from the base. Each company should be
+conducted to the base and extended along it, backs towards the
+objects, in single rank. Each man should have a pencil and paper. The
+objects whose distances are to be estimated are pointed out by the
+company commander and the men told to estimate and record their
+estimates. At the conclusion of the exercise, the company commander
+should read off the correct distances, and have each man figure his
+per cent of error. It is important that the men know the correct
+distances while the objects are still in view.
+
+For record, paragraph 85, s.a.f.m. should be followed.
+
+Remember that there are four principal ways to estimate distances by:
+1, it cannot be more than a certain distance, and it cannot be less
+than a certain distance--take the mean; 2, divide the distance into a
+certain number of familiar lengths; select a halfway point, estimate
+this and multiply by 2; 3, estimate the distance along a parallel
+line, as a road having well defined objects; 4, take the mean of
+several estimates.
+
+(g) In combat the platoon is the fire unit. The fire of the company,
+battalion or regiment is nothing more than the combined fire of all
+the fire units. The enemy can be imaginary, outlined or represented.
+The exercise must be conducted under an assumed tactical situation.
+The commander must lead his men according to the assumptions made by
+the umpire. Signals are used to indicate the enemy's actions,
+strength, etc. The situation should be simple, and after the exercise
+a critique should be held on the ground. Combat practice with ball
+ammunition against disappearing targets, and at estimated ranges, gets
+excellent results. The officer conducting the exercise will prohibit
+the advance if it would be impossible were the enemy real.
+
+Have every man play the game.
+
+A point to be remembered is that for battle sight the sight slide must
+be as far to the rear as it will go. If it is part way up the leaf,
+the drift correction cut in the slot upon which it moves will throw it
+to the left, and left windage will be taken.
+
+Point blank range is 530 yards. Battle sight is set for this distance
+because this is the extreme range at which a bullet would strike a man
+kneeling between the rifle and the target.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #4.]
+
+Pistol.
+
+NOMENCLATURE AND CARE.--The soldier is first taught the nomenclature
+of the parts of the pistol. Ordinance Pamphlet No. 1866 gives this
+information, (See cut of pistol.)
+
+
+MANUAL FOR THE PISTOL.
+
+1. The pistol being in the holster: 1. Raise, 2. Pistol.
+
+At the command Raise, unbutton the flap of the holster with the right
+hand and grasp the stock, back of hand outward.
+
+At the command Pistol, draw the pistol from the holster, reverse it,
+muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three
+fingers; forefinger outside of the guard; barrel to the rear, and
+inclined to the front at an angle of about thirty degrees; hand as
+high as the neck and six inches in front of the point of the right
+shoulder. This is the position of Raise Pistol, and it may be
+similarly taken from any position.
+
+2. To withdraw magazine, pistol in any position: 1. Withdraw. 2.
+Magazine.
+
+At the command Magazine, place pistol, barrel down, in left hand and
+clasp barrel in full grip of left hand, thumb clasped over barrel in
+front of trigger guard, butt of pistol up, barrel pointing to the left
+front and slightly downward. With tip of right forefinger press stud
+releasing magazine and then place tip of same finger under projection
+at front of magazine base. Raise magazine about an inch then close
+thumb and second finger on sides of magazine, giving a secure grasp
+with which it can be withdrawn from socket, placed inside belt (in
+pocket of shirt or otherwise disposed of without throwing it away).
+Right hand then grasps stock, back of hand to the left.
+
+3. To open chamber, the pistol in any position: 1. Open. 2. Chamber.
+
+Carry the pistol to the left hand (if not already there) barrel to the
+left, front end of slide grasped between the thumb and forefinger of
+left hand; right hand grasping stock, back of hand up; right thumb
+under slide stop. Hold left hand steady and push forward with right
+hand till slide reaches end of stroke; engage slide stop, and come to
+Raise Pistol. Should the pistol be cocked and locked, it will be
+unlocked so that the slide can move.
+
+4. To close chamber, being at Raise Pistol, chamber open: 1. Close. 2.
+Chamber.
+
+At the command Chamber, release slide top with right thumb and let
+hammer down gently. To let hammer down, pull downward with point of
+right thumb till hammer presses against grip safety and forces it
+home; then while continuing this pressure on hammer, pull trigger; and
+while continuing pull on trigger, let the hammer down. While letting
+hammer down, grasp stock firmly between the palm and last three
+fingers to prevent pistol rotating in hand.
+
+5. To insert magazine, pistol being in any position, no magazine in
+socket: 1. Insert. 2. Magazine.
+
+Lower pistol into left hand as in Withdrawn Magazine, grasp magazine
+with tip of right forefinger on projection at base of magazine,
+withdraw from pocket and insert in pistol. To make sure that magazine
+is home, strike base of magazine with palm of right hand. Bring the
+pistol to the position of Raise Pistol.
+
+6. To return pistol, being at Raise Pistol: 1. Return. 2. Pistol.
+
+Lower the pistol and raise the flap of the holster with the right
+thumb; insert the pistol in the holster and push it down; button the
+flap with the right hand. If the pistol be loaded and cocked the
+command. 1. Lock, 2. Pistol must precede the command "Return."
+
+7. To load, having loaded magazine in pistol, pistol in any position,
+chamber empty: 1. Load. 2. Pistol.
+
+Place pistol in left hand, barrel down, butt of pistol up, barrel
+pointing to left front and downward, slide grasped between thumb and
+forefinger. Push forward with right hand until the slide is fully
+open, then release slide allowing it to move forward and load
+cartridge into chamber. Come to Raise Pistol. If the last shot in the
+magazine has been fired, to reload; same command, but execute
+Withdrawn Magazine, Insert Magazine, Close Chamber. As soon as the
+pistol is loaded, it will be immediately locked by the commands. 1.
+Lock. 2. Pistol. Should the command for locking pistol be
+inadvertently omitted it will be locked without command.
+
+8. To unload pistol, being in any position, loaded:
+
+Execute by the commands, Withdraw Magazine, Open Chamber, Close
+Chamber, Insert Magazine.
+
+9. To inspect pistol, it being in the holster: 1. Inspection. 2.
+Pistol.
+
+Execute, Raise Pistol.
+
+To inspect the pistol more minutely, add 3. Withdraw. 4. Magazine. 5.
+Open. 6. Chamber.
+
+To avoid accidents, individual men out of ranks, in barracks or camp
+will first Withdraw Magazine then Open Chamber whenever the pistol is
+removed from the holster for cleaning, for examination, or for any
+other purpose. Accidental discharges will not occur if the above rule
+is always observed, and failure to observe it must be considered a
+military offense, whether or not accident results.
+
+10. Whenever men fall in ranks with the automatic pistol the officer
+or non-commissioned officer in charge will command:
+
+ 1. Raise, 2. Pistol;
+ 1. Withdraw, 2. Magazine;
+ 1. Open, 2. Chamber;
+ 1. Close, 2. Chamber.
+
+ 1. Insert, 2. Magazine.
+ 1. Return, 2. Pistol.
+
+When falling in the above commands are given after chamber of rifles
+have been opened and closed, and the order resumed--the rifle being
+held against the left wrist. The commander of any company or
+detachment thereof is responsible for giving the necessary commands to
+put the pistols in a safe condition.
+
+11. The pistol with cartridge in chamber is habitually carried cocked
+and locked, whether in the hand or in the holster. The hammer will not
+be lowered while a cartridge is in the chamber.
+
+12. In campaign, the pistol should habitually be carried with a
+magazine in the socket, loaded with seven ball cartridges, chamber
+empty, hammer down. The extra magazines should also be loaded with
+seven ball cartridges each.
+
+When action seems imminent, the pistol should be loaded by command. It
+may then be returned by command to the holster till the time for its
+use arrives.
+
+13. Recruits are first taught the motions of loading and firing
+without using cartridges. However, the automatic action and the effect
+of ball cartridges in operating the slide cannot be taught without
+firing ball cartridges. Practice without cartridges is very necessary
+to acquire facility in the exact movements of the manual and in
+aiming, holding and trigger squeeze.
+
+To execute the movements without cartridges, first Withdraw Magazine,
+Open Chamber, and Examine both Pistols and magazines to assure that
+none contain ball cartridges.
+
+14. All the movements in loading pistol should be practiced without
+looking at it. In order to do this successfully it is necessary to
+know exactly where the magazines are carried so the hand may find them
+without fumbling. Also, since the projection at the front of the
+magazine base is on the same side as the bullets, and the magazine
+must be inserted in the socket with these to the front, the magazine
+should be carried in the pocket with the projection to the left and
+should be withdrawn from the pocket with the same grasp as is
+prescribed for Withdrawn Magazine.
+
+15. This manual must be practiced with all the precision and exactness
+required for the manual for the rifle. Accidents will be reduced to a
+minimum and familiarity with the pistol gained.
+
+
+POSITION
+
+Stand firmly on both feet, body perfectly balanced and erect and
+turned at such an angle as is most comfortable when the arm is
+extended toward the target; the feet far enough apart (about 8 to 10
+inches) as to insure steadiness; weight of body borne equally upon
+both feet; right arm fully extended but not locked; left arm hanging
+naturally.
+
+THE GRIP.--Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb and last
+three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, the thumb
+extended along the stock. The barrel hand and fore-arm should be as
+nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed toward the
+target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause tremors but
+should be firm enough to avoid losing grip. The lower the stock is
+grasped the greater will be the movement or jump of the muzzle caused
+by recoil. If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of
+the stock, the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon
+toward the opposite side.
+
+The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle,
+generally to the left. The position and pressure of the thumb along
+the stock overcomes much of this movement.
+
+To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same
+grip for each shot, not only must the hand grasp the stock at the same
+point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uniform.
+
+THE TRIGGER SQUEEZE.--The trigger must be squeezed in the same manner
+as in rifle firing. The pressure of the forefinger on the trigger
+should be steadily increased and should be straight back, not
+sideways. The pressure should continue to that point beyond which the
+slightest movement will release the sear. Then when the aim is true,
+the additional pressure is applied and the pistol fired. When the
+pistol is fired the greatest effort should be taken to hold the pistol
+to the mark as nearly as possible. This will be of great benefit in
+automatic firing.
+
+POSITION AND AIMING DRILLS.--The Squad is formed with an interval of
+one pace between files. Black pasters are used as aiming points. The
+pasters are ten paces distant from the squad. The instructor command,
+1. Raise, 2. Pistol and cautions "Position and Aiming Drill." The men
+take the position prescribed in paragraph 3. At the command, 1. Squad,
+2. Fire, slowly extend the arm till it is nearly horizontal, the
+pistol directed at a point; about six inches below the bull's-eye. At
+the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger guard and
+gradually feel the trigger. Inhale enough air to comfortably fill the
+lungs and gradually raise the piece until the line of sight is
+directed at the point of aim, _i.e._, just below the bull's-eye at six
+o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark, gradually
+increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that point where
+the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. Then, when
+the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire the piece
+is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the sights.
+The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the hammer
+falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the squeezing
+of the trigger has had on his aim.
+
+When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position
+the exercise is conducted "At Will."
+
+QUICK FIRE.--Being at the Raise Pistol, chamber and magazine empty, 1.
+Quick Fire Exercise, 2. One. Lower the forearm until it is nearly
+horizontal, pistol pointing at the target, 3. Two. Thrust the pistol
+forward to the position of aim, snapping the pistol just before the
+arm reaches its full extension. Then look through sights to verify the
+pointing. 4. Three. Return to Raise Pistol and cock the pistol.
+
+In this exercise the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon the mark.
+He should constantly practice pointing the pistol until he acquires
+the ability to direct it on the mark in the briefest interval of time
+and practically without the aid of the sights. In other words, the
+pistol in this exercise is accurately pointed instead of accurately
+aimed. In night firing pointing the pistol is the only method that can
+be used. After careful practice in this exercise it is surprising what
+good results can be obtained at night.
+
+This exercise should then be practiced from the position of the pistol
+in the holster instead of Raise Pistol.
+
+CLASSES OF FIRE: 1. SLOW FIRE.--As described above. Target L or A or
+improvised target.
+
+2. QUICK FIRE.--Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked, at the command
+"Commence Firing" fire and return to Raise Pistol after each shot
+following the principles of Quick Fire Exercise. Target E, five yards
+apart, one for each man firing. This firing should be done by the
+numbers as described in Quick Fire Exercise.
+
+3. AUTOMATIC FIRE (TARGET E).--Being at Raise Pistol, pistols locked.
+At the command "Commence Firing" empty the magazine in seven seconds,
+keeping the arm extended. Target E, 5 yards apart, one for each man
+firing.
+
+4. TRENCH FIRE (TARGET E).--Two lines of targets. The first line is
+composed of F targets, 5 yards apart, one figure for each man firing.
+The second line is composed of two E figures, one yard apart, for each
+man firing, placed in a trench immediately in rear of the figures of
+the first line. This gives for each firer a group of three figures,
+one placed on top at the near edge of the trench and the other two in
+the trench immediately in rear. In case a trench is not available the
+rifle pit can be used. A gutter, sunken road, embankment, or hedge can
+be used for this purpose so long as trench fire is simulated.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #5. TRENCH TARGET COURSE FOR THE AUTOMATIC
+PISTOL.]
+
+The firing line advances at a walk from 100 yards takes up a double
+time 50 yards from trench, fires one shot at the double time when
+within ten yards of the first target continues to the trench and fires
+the remaining six shots, automatic fire, at the two targets in the
+trench in rear of the first line target.
+
+SCORE (TARGET E, BOBBING).--A score will be seven shots. Targets will
+be marked after the men in the firing line have completed their
+scores. All loading and firing should be done by command.
+
+COURSE: 1. SLOW FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of five
+scores.
+2. QUICK FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores.
+3. AUTOMATIC FIRE.--10 yards. Minimum of one maximum of three scores.
+4. TRENCH FIRE.--Minimum of one maximum of three scores.
+
+
+Bayonet Training.
+
+A. THE FUNCTIONS OF BAYONET TRAINING ARE:
+
+ 1. To teach the correct use of the bayonet until it becomes
+ instinctive.
+ 2. To develop the fighting spirit.
+ 3. To develop speed, accuracy, and cooerdination.
+
+B. GENERAL PRINCIPLES:
+
+ 1. Fencing, in modern combat, is out of the question. Almost every
+ fight will consist of but one or two motions. Hence the class
+ must be taught that the best defence is the quickest offensive.
+ 2. Every available means of offence, with hands and feet as well as
+ with rifle and bayonet, is a part of bayonet training.
+ 3. Teamwork is essential. Men must be taught, especially in the
+ combat, to exercise, to seize every opportunity to act together.
+ 4. Personal control during combat, especially at night, will be
+ nearly impossible. Control should be practiced, therefore, in
+ the form of clear instructions delivered to the men before
+ assault, and fulfilled individually.
+ 5. In every assault and combat exercise, the men must be taught
+ never to leave an enemy alive, or who may be alive, behind them.
+
+C. TECHNIQUE OF BAYONET COMBAT:
+
+ 1. The _point_ is the main reliance. Its use should be practiced
+ in every possible situation, until a correct choice or
+ combination of long point, short point, and jab, and the
+ execution thereof, becomes a matter of instinct.
+ 2. The point must always be directed at a definite target. The most
+ vulnerable points of the body are: Lower abdomen, base of the
+ neck, small of the back (on either side of the spine), chest,
+ and thighs. Bony parts of the trunk must be avoided by accurate
+ aim.
+ 3. The use of the rifle as a club, swinging or striking, is
+ valuable only:
+ a. When the point is not available.
+ b. In sudden encounters at close quarters, when a sharp butt
+ swing to the crotch may catch an opponent unguarded.
+ c. After parrying a swinging butt blow, when a butt strike to
+ the jaw is often the quickest possible riposte.
+ The use of butt swings overhead or sidewise to the head or
+ neck, is to be avoided; they are slow, inaccurate, easily
+ parried or side-stepped, and leave the whole body unguarded.
+ After every butt blow a thrust must immediately follow, since
+ no butt blow, of itself, is apt to be fatal.
+ 4. The parries must be regarded and practiced chiefly as means of
+ opening the opponent's guard; hence, a thrust must immediately
+ follow each parry.
+ 5. The foot movements shown in the old manual are useful only to
+ promote quickness and steadiness. They should, therefore, be
+ practiced in combination with the points and butt blows, and so
+ combined can be executed in the oblique directions as well as at
+ right angles. The left foot moves in the direction of the
+ thrust.
+
+D. MANUAL OF THE BAYONET: There are only 7 exercises to learn in the
+ new bayonet drill:
+
+ 1. _Guard_.--Point of the bayonet directed at the opponent's
+ throat, the rifle held easily and naturally with both hands,
+ barrel inclined slightly to the left, right hand at the height
+ of the navel and grasping the small of the stock, left hand
+ holding the rifle at a convenient position above the lower
+ band, so that the left arm is slightly bent, making an angle of
+ about 150 degrees. The legs should be well separated and in an
+ easy position. Lean forward, on your toes, left knee slightly
+ bent, right foot flat on the ground and turned to the right
+ front. Remember in this position to have your eye on your
+ opponent, do not restrain your muscles, keep them taut, but
+ flexible.
+ 2. "_High Port_."--The hands hold the rifle as in guard; the left
+ wrist level with, and directly in front of the left shoulder;
+ the right hand above the right groin and on level with the
+ navel.
+ Remember that the barrel in this position is to the rear. This
+ position is assumed on the advance without command.
+ 3. "_Long Point_."--Being in the position of "guard," grasp the
+ rifle firmly, vigorously deliver the point to the full extent
+ of the left arm, butt along side and close to the right
+ forearm; body inclined forward; left knee well bent, right leg
+ braced, and weight of the body pressed well forward with the
+ fore part of the right foot, heel raised. The right hand gives
+ the power to the point, while the left guides it. If a point is
+ made in the oblique direction the left foot should move in that
+ direction. This exercise is done in 3 counts. At 1 the point is
+ made; at 2, the withdrawal; at 3, resume the guard. The
+ withdrawal must be straight back, and not with the downward
+ motion, until the right hand is well behind the hip.
+ 4. _Right (Left) Parry_.--1. Straighten the left arm, without
+ bending the wrist or twisting the rifle in the hand, and force
+ the rifle forward far enough to the right (left) to ward off
+ the opponent's weapon, 2. Resume "guard."
+ Remember to keep your eyes on the weapon to be parried.
+ 5. _Short Point_.--1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the
+ muzzle and draw the rifle back to the full extent of the right
+ arm, butt either high or low as a low or high point is to be
+ made. 2. Deliver the point vigorously to the full extent of the
+ left arm. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Resume the "guard."
+ 6. _Jab Point_.--1. Shift the left hand quickly toward the muzzle,
+ draw the rifle back, and shift the right hand up the rifle and
+ grasp it above the rear sight, at the same time bringing the
+ rifle to an almost vertical position close to the body. Bend the
+ knees. 2. Straighten the knees, jab the point of the bayonet
+ upward into the throat or under the chin of the
+ opponent--chiefly by a body movement. 3. Withdrawal. 4. Carry
+ the rifle forward with the left hand, grasping the small of the
+ stock with the right. 5. Resume guard. Remember in the first
+ motion to have the hands at least 4 inches apart.
+ 7. _Butt swing--butt strike_--out.--1. Swing the butt up at the
+ opponent's ribs, forearms, etc., using a full arm blow, bringing
+ the rifle to a horizontal position over the left shoulder, butt
+ to the front. 2. Advance the rear foot, and dash the butt into
+ the opponent's face. 3. Advance the rear foot and at the same
+ time slash the bayonet down on the opponent's head or neck. 4.
+ Resume the "guard."
+ (The easiest guard to a swing at the crotch is simply to get
+ the left knee in the opponent's right.)
+
+E. PROGRESSIVE EXERCISES:
+
+ 1. The class works in pairs with scabbards on bayonets. One man
+ alternately in each pair signals; the other promptly executes
+ the movement, at the target, designated by the signal. The
+ following signals are suggested:
+ The hand, placed against the body, indicates the target.
+ Long point--Back of hand outward.
+ Short point--Palm of hand outward.
+ Jab point--Hand horizontal against chin, palm down.
+ High port--Fist against left breast.
+ Parry right (left)--Hand waved to right (left).
+ Butt swing--Fist against crotch.
+ Butt strike--Fist against jaw.
+ Instead of signals, thrusting sticks are then used. These are
+ strong wands having a padding of paper and burlap over one end
+ and a rope ring tied to the other. Points and butt swings are
+ executed at the padding and rings, respectively, as these are
+ presented. The man holding the stick must remember to stand to
+ one side of the man with the bayonet.
+ 2. AS IN FIRST EXERCISE.--One man thrusts with a stick: the other
+ parries.
+ 3. THRUSTS ARE PRACTICED AT DUMMIES, first from a distance of five
+ feet, then by advancing two paces or more. To simulate fighting
+ conditions, a frame is then arranged in which dummies are slung
+ on ropes passed over pullies, and so manipulated that as the man
+ withdraws his bayonet from one dummy another swings at, him from
+ a different direction.
+ 4. As SOON AS PROFICIENCY HAS BEEN GAINED in the above exercises,
+ the assault practice is taken up.
+ a. _A course is laid out as follows:_
+ (1) A fire trench about 60 yards long, well _revetted_.
+ (2) 20 yards in front of the trench, smooth wire
+ entanglements.
+ (3) 15 yards further, another trench, parallel to the first,
+ 60 yards long, 4 feet deep and 4 feet wide. In this
+ trench prone dummies are placed, one per yard.
+ (4) 15 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to
+ the trenches.
+ (5) 15 yards further, a hurdle 4 feet high and 60 yards
+ long, parallel to the trenches.
+ (6) 10 yards further, a low trip wire, stretched parallel to
+ the trenches.
+ (7) 10 yards further, 60 dummies, hung on frames, parallel to
+ the trenches.
+ (8) 15 yards further, a large trench, 60 yards long, 6 feet
+ deep, 10 feet wide, containing 60 prone dummies, 1 per
+ yard.
+ b. _Procedure:_
+ Each platoon, in turn, enters the first trench at skirmish
+ intervals, bayonets fixed. On signal, all move out at a
+ walk, guiding carefully in line on a leader previously
+ designated. After passing each obstacle, the line is again
+ carefully formed. On each of the swinging dummies one of
+ the seven movements of the manual is used; a long or short
+ point is used on each prone dummy. All go down into the
+ last trench together, with a good loud yell, point of the
+ bayonet level with the toe, and land on the dummies in the
+ bottom, stabbing as they land. This course should be
+ repeated several times at quick time, then at double time,
+ and finally at a run. Remember that in the advance the
+ rifle is carried at high port.
+ 5. COMBAT EXERCISES (to be used in conjunction with the assault
+ practice):
+ a. _Equipment for each man:_
+ Thrusting stick or other wooden rod with wooden ball or
+ thick padding covering one end. (Old rifles with
+ spring-bayonets are even better.)
+ Plastron.
+ Baseball mask.
+ Pair of broadsword or single stick gloves.
+ b. _Procedure_:
+ The class is formed in two lines of about equal numbers,
+ facing each other, about fifty paces apart, with intervals
+ in each line of about two paces. A leader is designated
+ for each line. The instructor stands at one end of the
+ space between; an assistant at the other end. On the
+ instructor's whistle, the lines advance, guiding carefully
+ on their leaders. When about ten paces apart, they charge,
+ each seeking to break and roll up the opposing line.
+ Sticks are carried and used as rifles with bayonets fixed.
+ Any other use disqualifies. Use of the butt is barred. One
+ thrust on the plastron or mask, or two hits on the
+ extremities, disables the recipient, who must promptly
+ retire--or be retired. The combat continues until the
+ second whistle, blown not more than 30 seconds after
+ contact; when they cease fighting promptly, separate, and
+ form as before.
+ c. _Criticism:_
+ After each combat, the instructor will criticize the manner
+ of advance and of fighting, especially the alignment kept
+ in the advance and the team work in combat, and the
+ advantage taken of opponents' mistakes. He counts the
+ casualties and awards the decision. He must continually
+ urge the men never to lag behind nor advance ahead of the
+ line, never to allow large gaps to occur in the line, and
+ always to seize the advantage given by opponents who
+ disregard these principles.
+ d. _The terrain for this exercise_ should be frequently varied.
+ It may also be conducted at night, the opposing sides
+ being clearly distinguished.[Q]
+
+[Footnote Q: The last exercise was devised and perfected by M. Jules
+Leslabay, Master of Fencing, Harvard R.O.T.C., 1917. It is more
+completely described in his "Manual of Bayonet Training."]
+
+
+Machine Guns.
+
+1. Properties of the machine guns are divided into three general
+classes: Mode of action, fire, and inconspicuousness.
+
+ (a) THE MODE OF ACTION.--The machine gun acting only by its fire
+ can prepare an attack or repulse an offensive movement, but it
+ does not conquer ground. The latter role is almost exclusively
+ that of infantry which is fitted for crossing all obstacles.
+ When it will suffice to act by fire, employ the machine gun in
+ preference to infantry, preserving the latter for the combined
+ action of movement and fire. By the employment of the machine
+ gun economize infantry, reserving a more considerable portion
+ of it for manoeuvre purposes.
+ (b) FIRE.--Machine gun fire produces a sheath, dense, deep but
+ narrow. The increase of the width of the sweeping fire gives to
+ the sheath a greater breadth, but when the density becomes
+ insufficient, the effect produced is very weak. Machine gun
+ fire will have its maximum power upon an objective of narrow
+ front and great depth. With the infantry fighting normally in
+ thin lines the preceding conditions will generally only be
+ realized when these lines are taken in the flank. "The fire of
+ the machine gun parallel to the probable front of the enemy--a
+ flanking fire--must therefore be the rule." The fire
+ perpendicular to the front will be employed generally on
+ certain necessary points of passage as, bridges, roads,
+ defiles, cuts, roadways, communicating trenches, etc., where
+ the enemy is generally forced to take a deep formation with a
+ narrow front, or where he is in massed formation.
+ (c) INCONSPICUOUSNESS.--By reason of its small strength the machine
+ gun section can utilize the smallest cover, and can consequently
+ hide from the enemy; the machine gun therefore, more than the
+ infantry, has the chance to act by surprise. The opening of the
+ fire by surprise will be the rule; the machine gun will avoid
+ revealing itself upon objectives not worth the trouble. Flank
+ action and surprise are the two conditions to try for under all
+ circumstances.
+
+2. OFFENSIVE REINFORCEMENT OF A FRONT MOMENTARILY STATIONARY.--The
+machine guns assisted by small elements of infantry cover thoroughly
+the getting in hand of the main body, the machine guns presenting to
+the enemy a line of little vulnerability. The machine guns assist in
+securing the possession of the ground previously taken, and will
+permit time to prepare for the resumption of the forward movement.
+Preparation of the attack--machine gun fire completes the preparation
+done by the artillery, either by acting on the personnel or by opening
+breaches in the accessary defenses. At times the machine guns alone
+may be charged with the preparation of the attack where it is
+necessary to act very quickly as in pursuit, exploitation of a
+success. Whatever the situation, concentrate the machine gun fire on
+one or several points. Machine guns cover the flanks of attacking
+troops. They follow the advance of these troops remaining on the
+flanks, so as to be able to fire instantly on all points from which an
+attack might come. Machine guns will likewise be employed in intervals
+created intentionally or accidentally between units. It is here a
+powerful weapon which can rapidly be put into action by the Commander.
+The personnel and material must be protected as far as possible from
+the effects of fire.
+
+3. DEFENSIVE.--It is here that the flanking fire is especially
+necessary. In the defensive preparation of a position the machine guns
+must be so placed that they will provide along the front several
+successive fire barriers. The machine guns must be ready at all times
+to stop by instantaneous fire all hostile attack. In order to have
+machine gun protection at all, it is absolutely necessary that they be
+protected from bombardment. This is best done by the following: Place
+the machine guns under solid cover; make their emplacement invisible;
+echelon the machine guns in depth. The cover must be placed where it
+can be hidden from the sight of the enemy, such as a counter slope, a
+position where it is impossible to blend it, relief with an
+accentuated slope of the ground, woods, brush, etc. It is essential
+that the principal parts of the machine gun casemate be prepared in
+the rear. Only in this manner will the work be done solidly and
+rapidly. While the machine gunners and helpers do the excavating,
+specialists in rear prepare the parts for assembling. The latter are
+then transported to the position and, the casemate is established,
+hiding the work with the greatest care from enemy observation.
+Remember that it is of the utmost importance that the machine gun be
+invisible, so the firing emplacements must be made outside of the
+shelter, but near enough for the gun to be brought out instantly and
+put into action. All communicating trenches leading to the firing
+emplacement must be concealed. Enough emplacements should be built to
+avoid firing daily from the emplacements especially reserved for cases
+of attack. Do not place too many machine guns in the first line; in
+case of a violent bombardment they are sure to be destroyed. The
+object to be attained is to install the machine guns in conditions
+such that if the enemy penetrates our first line, by aid of his
+bombardment or asphyxiating gas, his infantry, as it advances, comes
+under the fire of machine guns echeloned previously in depth, under
+whose fire it must stop. It is not a matter of sweeping a wide sector,
+but of giving over certain strips of ground flanking fire which will
+cut down surely the enemy's waves when they push forward. The
+commander should, therefore, divide between the first line and the
+terrain in rear, the machine guns which he controls, organizing for
+each particular case a firing emplacement in accord with the
+surrounding ground and the purpose in view.
+
+
+GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION.
+
+Machine gunners must under no circumstances abandon their positions.
+They must, when necessary, allow themselves to be surrounded and
+defend themselves in their place to the end. In many cases the
+heroism and tenacity of a few machine gunners have permitted the rapid
+retaking of a lost position. To provide for this resistance to a
+finish, the machine gun emplacements must fulfil the following
+conditions:
+
+ 1. Be surrounded by a wire entanglement of irregular trace and as
+invisible as possible.
+ 2. In the enclosure thus created having several firing emplacements,
+in case one or more becomes useless.
+ 3. The personnel must have all the means for protection against gas
+and have in addition rations, water and abundant ammunition.
+
+
+EMPLOYMENT OF FIRE AND INSTRUCTION.
+
+The more grazing the fire of a machine gun the more effective it is.
+This causes the principal employment of the machine gun to be at
+distances where the trajectory is flattest, that is under 800 or 1,000
+yards. However, the effort to obtain a grazing fire must not exclude
+long distance fire. This latter will always be justified when directed
+upon important objectives, or necessary points of passage. For this
+fire to have some efficacy, it is necessary to calculate the range
+with the greatest precision. On the defensive indirect fire will be
+employed sometimes to annoy the supply, reliefs, etc. To give results,
+great quantities of ammunition will have to be expended. All of the
+officers and non-commissioned officers and as many men as possible
+must be capable of firing the machine gun, so that at the time of an
+attack no gun will remain idle for want of personnel. It is, moreover,
+essential to keep up the training of the personnel by having them fire
+at least twice a month, and, if possible, once a week.
+
+
+RESUME.
+
+Machine guns must be utilized in the greatest measure in order to
+_economize the infantry._
+
+Seek to employ them always in a, _flank fire_.
+
+Conceal them so as to get _surprise fire_.
+
+_Echelon_ them and _shelter_ them so as to avoid their premature
+destruction.
+
+
+POINTS BEFORE FIRING.
+
+ 1. Thoroughly overhaul the gun to see that no part is deficient,
+and that the mechanism works freely.
+ 2. See that the barrel is clean and dry.
+ 3. See that the barrel mouthpiece is tight.
+ 4. See that small hole in gas regulator is to the rear.
+ 5. Thoroughly oil all working parts, especially the cam slot and
+exterior of the bolt, and the striker post and piston.
+ 6. Weigh and adjust the mainspring.
+ 7. See that the mounting is firm.
+ 8. Examine the magazines and ammunition.
+ 9. See that the spare parts and oil reserve are handy.
+
+POINTS DURING FIRING
+
+ 1. During a temporary cessation of fire, re-oil all working parts.
+ 2. Replace a partly emptied magazine with a full one.
+ 3. Examine the mounting to see that it is firm.
+ 4. See that empty magazines are refilled without delay.
+
+POINTS AFTER FIRING.
+
+ 1. Unload.
+ 2. Oil the bore and chamber, piston rod and gas cylinder.
+ 3. Sort out live rounds from empty cases.
+ 4. See that mainspring is eased.
+ 5. Thoroughly clean and oil the gun on returning to quarters. Clean
+the bore daily for several days.
+
+It is of the greatest importance that the points before, during, and
+after firing, should be carefully attended to as otherwise the number
+of stoppages will be unnecessarily increased.
+
+Nine out of ten stoppages are due to want of care.
+
+Immediate action must become instinctive and automatic.
+
+
+Grenade Instruction.
+
+INTRODUCTION.--War, as it is being fought on the western front, has
+brought to light many new weapons; but no other weapon that this
+struggle has brought forth exceeds the grenade in importance. It is
+not a new weapon, but its present importance is entirely new. Its
+extensive use has grown out of conditions on the western front;
+conditions which have never been seen previous to this war. The fact
+that armies have taken to "digging themselves in" has necessitated the
+use of some other weapon than the rifle. The rifle with its flat
+trajectory is of little use against an enemy who is completely hidden
+from view and who can go on existing under ground. Hence the reversion
+to the ancient grenade--but with all its modern improvements. The
+grenade has shown itself to be the weapon that can solve the problem
+of seeking out an enemy who is under ground; its trajectory is high
+and its fire is plunging, so that it can be thrown from a place of
+concealment and protection and into a place equally well concealed
+from ordinary view.
+
+The importance of the grenade may be judged from its extensive use by
+both the Allies and the Germans; and also by the formations now
+adopted by both British and French armies for the purpose of
+exploiting its use. In a British Battalion the normal percentage of
+expert bombers is 25. In the French Company 36 per cent of the men are
+devoted to grenade work.
+
+A grenade has been defined as a slow moving, high trajectory missile
+containing high explosive and exploding by contact or time fuse.
+Grenades may be divided roughly into two classes--1, hand grenades,
+and 2, rifle grenades, and each of these classes may be subdivided as
+regards means of explosion, into 1, time fuse, or 2, percussion
+grenades.
+
+Among the time-fuse hand grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 5,
+Stokes bomb, smoke bombs, fumite bombs, etc. The Mills is easily the
+most important and has come to be the standard adopted by the Allies.
+The percussion grenade is little used--the most important among those
+of this type is the so-called "mushroom," named from its shape.
+
+Chief among the rifle grenades may be mentioned the Mills No. 23, the
+Hale No. 3 and the Newton No. 24. Just as the Mills hand grenade has
+become the standard, so has the Mills rifle grenade attained that
+pre-eminence. A more detailed description of the various sorts of
+grenades cannot be attempted in this brief space; but one or two
+diagrams at the close of the chapter may serve to clarify the subject
+to some extent.
+
+Any course in grenade training should have a three-fold purpose:
+
+ 1st. To give the individual a practical knowledge of the working
+of the grenades in use.
+ 2nd. To teach him how to throw them.
+ 3rd. To make him acquainted with the general principles of
+organization and the execution of a grenade attack, either as a
+separate operation or as a part of a general attack. The time spent on
+any such course of training is a matter to be settled in the light of
+local considerations; but for purposes of preliminary training of a
+great number of men a period of two weeks is usually sufficient, with
+time allotted according to some such plan as this: (1) 10 separate
+half-hour sessions of practice in throwing from various positions and
+at the various targets; (2) 2 hours of study and a like amount of time
+spent in a conference for the purpose of clearing up matters that are
+hazy. In this brief time (only 9 hours) the foundation may be laid for
+a more thorough training of the specialists later on. In any such
+course the use of dummy grenades should always precede the use of any
+live ones; and men should be taught caution above all other things.
+This is a point easily lost sight of when men are using only dummies;
+but it is well worth remembering, for obvious reasons.
+
+
+FIRST: GIVING THE INDIVIDUAL A PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE WORKING OF
+THE GRENADES IN USE.--The differences in the construction and the uses
+of hand and rifle grenades should be brought out clearly. The various
+sorts of grenades should be explained and men should not forget the
+importance of knowing the grenades of the enemy as well as our own.
+This knowledge may one day prove of no little importance. As has
+already been stated, the Mills No. 5 is the standard among hand
+grenades of the Allies. It conforms to the general description of hand
+grenades; _i.e._, it is an egg-shaped projectile, more or less hollow,
+and loaded with a charge of explosive. Besides this it has an
+apparatus for setting off the bursting charge. It weighs 1 pound 5
+ounces approximately, and 4 ounces of this is high explosive. The
+shell being of serrated cast-iron, an explosion will scatter a sort of
+shrapnel over an area equal to three times the height. No more need be
+said of the effectiveness of such a weapon. Among rifle grenades the
+Mills is also the standard more or less, although the French make
+great use of a rifle grenade that fits over the muzzle of the rifle,
+fired by ball cartridge, in contrast to the Mills No. 23, which has a
+rod running down the barrel of the rifle and which is propelled by the
+explosion of a blank cartridge. The maximum range of this grenade with
+a 5-1/2-inch stem is 120 yards, the gun being fired at an angle of 45
+degrees. The Newton Improved (a rifle grenade which explodes on
+contact) has a range of 250 yards; the Hale No. 3 also explodes on
+contact and has a range of 200-225 yards.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #7]
+
+SECOND: INSTRUCTION IN THROWING.--As previously stated the use of
+dummy grenades should precede the use of any live ones. Due
+precautions should be taken at all times, even when working with dummy
+grenades, for a habit of carelessness is not to be tolerated with this
+sort of weapon. Men should be instructed to throw from standing,
+kneeling and prone positions; although this last-named position is
+little used. Distance is important but ACCURACY IS ESSENTIAL. Men
+should always be taught to throw at a definite target, even when
+throwing in the open during preliminary work. The men may work in
+groups, one group throwing and the other returning. This method keeps
+all hands occupied and furnishes a medium for a little competition,
+which is a very helpful thing in training of this sort. A manual of
+the following sort may be of use in acquiring the proper sort of
+throw.
+
+ 1. Pick up the grenade with the left hand.
+ 2. Prepare to throw--face to the right and transfer the grenade to
+ the right hand.
+ 3. Take aim--left hand and arm extended up and straight toward the
+ target, right hand and arm behind the thrower in the same plane
+ as the left.
+ 4. Withdraw pin with left hand.
+ 5. Throw--use a straight overhead motion and do not bend the arm at
+ the elbow. It is not a baseball throw. The tendency for most of
+ us Americans is to follow a perfectly natural habit--try to use
+ the baseball throw. This is to be discouraged for several
+ reasons, the chief one being that the grenade weighs about a
+ pound and a half, whereas our baseball weighs only a third of
+ this amount. Then, too, it often happens in the trenches that a
+ grenade duel will last for hours. Under such circumstances the
+ last grenade may decide the issue and endurance will be a
+ mighty telling factor. Hence, the insistence upon the overhead
+ throw.
+
+The preliminary throwing should take place in the open but always with
+a definite target, an outline of a section of trench being the best
+sort of target. Another excellent idea is to have a target arranged
+according to the diagram shown herewith and to keep score. This
+procedure will also add incentive for competition and will produce
+results. After men have thrown in the open for a sufficient period,
+they should proceed to the next stage: This is the stage of throwing
+in a cage or from behind and over obstacles. There are three distinct
+phases of this feature of the training: (1.) The thrower sees the
+target but must throw over an obstacle. (2.) The target is invisible;
+the thrower is aided by an observer and a periscope; the observer
+notes the fall of the grenades and gives directions as follows--"So
+many yards right or left" or "Shorten or lengthen so many yards." (3.)
+Actual throwing in trenches. This stage immediately precedes that of
+"working up a trench."
+
+THIRD: INSTRUCTION IN GRENADE ORGANIZATION.--Men should be given a
+certain amount of theoretical instruction as to the composition of the
+armies now on the western front; this in order that they may see the
+part that grenadiers and bombers are playing in the struggle. They
+should be shown the organization of the British Infantry and how the
+first section of each platoon is composed exclusively of bombers
+and--rifle grenadiers; they should also be taught how the bombers and
+grenadiers are concentrated in the French organization. The typical
+bombing squad consists of 7 or 8 men and a leader who take positions
+as follows: 1 and 2, bayonet men; 3, first thrower; 4, first carrier;
+5, leader; 6, rifle bomber; 7, second thrower; 8, second carrier; 9,
+rifle bomber. One of these bayonet men may be reserved to act as a
+sniper. The leader acts as an observer and directs the work of the
+bombers. The rifle bombers outrange the hostile bombers and also
+afford protection on the flanks. Every man must be taught his job and
+must be thoroughly instructed in the work of the squad as a whole in
+order that each man may be able to fill any position and that there
+may be perfect teamwork.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #8]
+
+POINTS TO REMEMBER.
+
+ 1. Men should always have a definite target for their throwing--an
+outline of a trench is usually to be preferred.
+ 2. Caution in handling grenades should be made a habit.
+ 3. Accuracy is essential.
+ 4. Training should be progressive, both for men and organizations.
+ 5. Keep up competition among the men; rivalry will increase practice
+and men will throw grenades for recreation. This will get results. Let
+two men throw at each other. A good shot will make the other man move.
+ 6. Insist upon the straight overhead throw. It is less tiresome and
+when developed properly will give equal accuracy with any other
+method.
+ 7. Teamwork in a bombing squad is essential.
+ 8. Under new methods of warfare every infantryman is a bomber; but
+specialists must be trained.
+ 9. Officer must be a real leader and the best fighter in his
+platoon.
+ 10. Qualification tests should be arranged and the better qualified
+men taken for special training in this art.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 5.
+
+Map Sketching.
+
+
+Map sketching is an important factor in trench warfare to-day as it is
+in a war of movement. A fairly accurate map will indicate more than
+many words and in much less time. Time is the great factor in war.
+Instruction must also be rapid. Here are ten lessons which would
+occupy a week if taken morning and afternoon. The aim of the
+instruction as in company rifle shooting is to train many men to do a
+satisfactory job, not to make a few finished topographers. Neatness,
+accuracy and initiative are cardinal points.
+
+For the instructor, reference should be made to _Grieves'_ "_Military
+Sketching and Map Reading_", 2nd edition, if he desires to supplement
+any points given here.
+
+
+LESSON 1. (CLASS ROOM--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+_Problem--Map Reading._
+
+Study the conventional signs found in the "Manual for Non-commissioned
+Officers and Privates of Infantry of the Army of the U.S.," 1917, page
+273, or in Grieves, pages 28-35. These conventional signs are not
+universal and must be used only as indications of the general
+practice.
+
+In map sketching in the field few conventional signs are used, and the
+items of importance are written on the map, such as WOODS, CULTIVATED,
+HEDGE, SWAMP, etc.
+
+TAKING UP MAP SCALES.--There are three ways of indicating the relation
+between the actual distance on the ground and the space the same
+distance occupies on the map:
+
+1. The graphic scale is a straight line divided into units, as miles,
+yards, feet or meters, which represents the actual ground distance.
+Thus if 6" = 1 mile the line would be six inches long and marked at
+one end and 1 mile at the other, three inches being marked 1/2 mile,
+etc. It is important to always have this graphic scale on a map so
+that if the paper gets wet or is stretched from its original size the
+scale will change in the same proportion.
+
+2. A Statement in words or figures, e.g., 3 inches equal one mile,
+meaning that 3 inches measured anywhere on the map represent 1 mile on
+the actual ground.
+
+3. The Representative Fraction (generally known abbreviated as R.F.)
+having a number above the line that shows the unit length on the map
+and below the line the number of units which are in the corresponding
+actual ground distance. For example, if 1" = 1 mile, then the R.F. is:
+
+ 1" (map distance)
+ -----------------------------------
+ 63,360" (1 mile--ground distance)
+
+if 3" = 1 mile the R.F. is:
+ 3" (map distance) 1
+ ----------------------------------- or -------
+ 63,360" (1 mile--ground distance) 21120
+
+if 6" = 1 mile:
+ 6" 1
+ -------- or -------
+ 63360" 10560
+
+if 12" = 1 mile:
+ 12" 1
+ --------- or ------
+ 63360" 5280
+
+In reading a map one must know the scale and also where the North is.
+This is always indicated by an arrow pointing either to the magnetic
+North or the true North. If to the magnetic North the needle will have
+but one barb away from the true North. The angle between the magnetic
+and the true North is the declination.
+
+Placing the map in proper relation to the ground so that points of the
+compass coincide on map and ground is called _orienting the map_.
+
+In map work there is one vital point to remember; practically all the
+ground surface is in its present form as a result of water action
+
+ 1. Look for the water courses, that is the drainage system. It will
+give the general slope of the land.
+ 2. Look for the high points between the water courses, remembering
+that there is always a valley then a hill then a valley again
+continued in succession.
+ 3. Finally locate towns, railroads, main highways and work down to the
+minor details.
+
+In measuring a map to get the actual distances on the ground, copy the
+graphic scale on any piece of paper and apply this directly or if your
+distances exceed your scale use the edge of a piece of paper and then
+apply it to the graphical scale on the map.
+
+
+LESSON 2. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+_Problem--Stride Scale Map Making_.
+
+Producing a map from the actual ground requires certain instruments.
+The second lesson takes up the preparation of the stride scale on the
+alidade and the different kinds of maps, made in military sketching.
+
+The alidade is a triangular ruler with one or more working scales on
+it beside other measurements. The _working scale_ is, for infantry,
+the stride or the space of ground covered from left foot to left foot
+again in walking, reduced to the proper map distance. This varies with
+individuals of course. Any scale of units, however, can be used as,
+horse trot, telegraph poles, etc.
+
+The working scale for each man is made by having him step off a
+measured course, say 440 yards. The ground should not be too even as a
+general average is needed, moreover the pace must be the natural gait
+of the individual under ordinary circumstances. Let him count the
+course three times then average the three results for the final
+estimate.
+
+Now to convert this into a working scale for the alidade made on a
+scale of six inches to the mile; take the case of a man who takes 220
+strides in 440 yards:
+
+ 440 yards = 15,840 inches
+ 15,840 / 220 = 72, or his stride in inches
+ then 880 strides = 1 mile or 6" on the scale.
+
+It is better to have a scale of 1,000 strides which is easily done by
+the proportion:
+
+1,000 sts. : 880 sts. : : x : 6
+ x = 6.8
+
+now draw a line 6.8 inches long and a diagonal line from it; divide
+this diagonal line into 10 equal parts for each 100 paces at any
+convenient scale and draw a line from the end of the tenth part to the
+end of the 6.8 inches line; draw lines parallel to this line from each
+of the divisions. The 6.8" line is then divided into 10 equal parts;
+each of these parts may be divided in the same manner into tenths.
+
+Your scale is ready to be pasted or transferred to the alidade and
+each 6.8. inches on the map will equal 1,000 of your strides on the
+ground, or about 1-1/12 miles (2,000 yards).
+
+There are two general classes of sketches:
+
+1. ROAD SKETCH.--A traverse (passing over) made along a definite rout
+showing all features of military importance for a distance of 200 or
+300 yards on each side of the road. A road sketch is always made on a
+scale of 3 inches to 1 mile.
+
+2. AREA SKETCH.--A map of a definite locality. There are 3 kinds of
+area sketches according to opportunity for observation:
+
+ (a) Position Sketch--when access may be had to the whole area.
+ (b) Outpost Sketch--where part of the ground must be mapped without
+ passing over it. This form is applicable particularly to trench
+ warfare. Intersection and resection are used to locate points
+ within the enemy's lines.
+ (c) Place Sketch--when sketch must be made from one point, as when
+ the proximity of the enemy would prevent any movement; as from
+ trench observation stations, etc.; also an elaboration of the
+ _landscape_ or _horizon_ sketch which is used everywhere in the
+ trenches today. From one point an actual outline of the
+ opposite trench and background is made in perspective,
+ reference points on the horizon being marked on the edge of a
+ pad at arm's length. These marks are then prolonged on the
+ paper and the horizon is sketched. In like manner the middle
+ distance and the foreground come under observation and are put
+ on in one below the other.
+
+Time must be allowed the men to make their stride scales and to paste
+or transfer them to their alidades.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #9]
+
+LESSON 3. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+The problem is to make a Position Sketch about one mile square closing
+the traverse. First considering the sketch board, compass, pencils,
+etc.; next the orienting, sighting and pacing; finally the uses of
+intersection and resection and in making allowance for error.
+
+The sketch board should be about 12 to 18 inches square, being used
+with or without a tripod. A cheap camera tripod is excellent. The
+board should have a compass attached so that it will remain in the
+same relative position on the board. If iron thumb tacks are used
+avoid getting them too near the compass. A hard pencil must be used to
+obtain good results. The paper must be smooth and where possible
+covered with another sheet fastened on but one side which will
+readily fold back when one desires to work on the sketch.
+
+By always placing the board so that the compass reads North it will be
+oriented correctly. Care must be used when near electric wires or
+masses of metal as automobiles, railroad tracks, etc., which will
+attract the needle from its true azimuth (N. and S. direction) and
+thus throw off the whole map. In such cases it is far better to back
+sight and use the compass only at intervals to verify the sights.
+
+This brings up the matter of sighting. It is important to make long
+shots thus reducing the amount of individual error. In taking a
+sighting point make sure it can be recognized when reached and make
+sure to look at the reverse side in order to recognize it in case of
+back sighting if necessary. Always carry several large-headed pins
+using one at your present station and resting the side of the alidade
+against it, swinging the other end for sighting.
+
+After sighting and lining the sight on your sketch, step off evenly to
+pace the distance. Time is always a factor in military mapping and
+where possible make mental notes as you go along as to where roads or
+other important features are located, so that you can place them in
+their proper place on the map when you have reached the next station.
+It is well always to set a good pace for here time can be readily
+saved.
+
+Making an _intersection_ is very simple. For as the sketcher moves
+along he ties his map together by sighting at any prominent object
+near his area, running these lines very lightly and only where he
+assumes the points to lie on his map. An abbreviation on the line or a
+number referring to a list off to one side will answer to recall the
+object. At any other station where the same point can be seen a
+similar line is drawn and where the two lines cross will be the
+location of the object. In the case of three lines not crossing at the
+same point take the middle of the triangle so formed.
+
+_Resection_ is just the reverse of this process. The mapper wants to
+know where he is located on the map. If he is properly oriented and
+can aim at two points on the ground which he has located on the map,
+he places a pin at one of these locations on the map and aims with the
+alidade at the object on the ground drawing a line towards himself;
+this is repeated with the other known point and where the two lines
+cross on the map will be the point he is standing at.
+
+In intersection the greatest accuracy is obtained by running the rays
+so as to meet as nearly as possible at right angles.
+
+In running a traverse the sketcher must expect to find some error at
+his closing point. This error must be distributed over the whole
+traverse so as not to have all the error concentrated at one point.
+
+
+LESSON 4. (FIELD WORK--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Make a simple sketch, containing topographical details using
+the traverse made during the preceding lesson. Use of conventional
+signs should be emphasized and the appreciation of features of
+military importance impressed. A tendency is to put in details to a
+point of confusion. Judgment must be developed to choose telling
+points.
+
+A sharp pencil is always needed in sketching; in putting in the
+topographical details special attention must be given to the pencil.
+Keep the point sharp and make clear, distinct signs.
+
+
+LESSON 5. (CLASS ROOM--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Contours, the Vertical Interval, Use of the Slope Board, Map
+Distance, Visibility and Profiles.
+
+A contour is an imaginary line on the surface of the earth all points
+of which have the same elevation from a base or datum level, sea level
+usually being this base. Slice an apple into pieces 1/2-inch thick;
+where the cuts come may represent the contour lines. Take these
+individual slices, beginning at the bottom and outline them on a sheet
+of paper with a pencil (having run a nail through the apple first to
+keep each piece in place). The resulting circles will represent the
+apple's outline at 1/2-inch intervals.
+
+Contours are always at equal elevations from each other, and the
+Vertical Interval (known by the abbreviation V.I.) is the measure
+between successive contour lines. In military maps the V.I. is always
+the same for each map scale:
+
+ 1 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 60 feet.
+ 3 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 20 feet.
+ 6 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 10 feet.
+ 12 inch to the mile, the V.I. is 5 feet.
+
+Note that the V.I. changes in proportion to the scale, a map on a 3
+inch to the mile scale is 3 times as large as one on a scale of 1 inch
+to the mile, while the V.I. is 1/3 as great, hence the former shows 3
+times as many contours as the latter.
+
+Map Distance means the horizontal distance between two contour lines
+on a map and indicates a certain degree of slope. As the scale
+increases the V.I. decreases in proportion and the M.D. therefore
+remains the same for the same degree of slope whatever the scale of
+the map. By computation we find that a one degree slope rises one foot
+for every 57.3 feet horizontal distance, so a one degree slope would
+have a 20 foot rise in 1,146 feet horizontal distance, this distance
+equals .65 of an inch on the map if the scale is 3" to 1 mile.
+
+The term "Map Distance" is also loosely used to denote distance
+between points as measured on the map. Care should be taken to
+distinguish between these two meanings.
+
+Distances between contours, scale 3" to 1 mile: 1/2 deg. slope = 1.3", 1 deg.
+slope =.65", 2 deg. slope =.32", 3 deg. slope =.22". These distances are
+already on the alidade and if you get a slope of 2 deg. with the slope
+board and have the distance from your station on the map to the point
+of aim either by pacing, intersection or resection, apply the M.D.
+scale as many times as it will go. This will give the number of
+contour lines crossing the traverse and the difference in elevation.
+The spacing of the contours may not be even between your station and
+the point of aim in which case the position of the contours must be
+estimated by eye.
+
+If your elevation above the datum or sea level is unknown at the start
+assume any elevation which is great enough to put the datum lower than
+the lowest spot of the area to be sketched.
+
+The sketching board is easily made to serve as a slope board in this
+manner. Hang a plumb bob about an inch below the center of a straight
+edge of the board while pointing at the horizon, using the back of the
+board. Mark a point 5.7" directly below and draw a semicircle through
+it with the same radius. Now mark the point below the center zero and
+from it divide the arc using chords one tenth of an inch long. This
+will give a scale reading in degrees. By sighting along the top of the
+board at some object at the height of the eye from the ground the
+degree of slope is shown by the plumb bob on the scale below. Care
+must be exercised to prevent the wind from disturbing the reading. A
+protractor may be used in the same manner by sighting along the top
+and using a plumb bob to record the angle.
+
+In reading maps it is important to know whether points are visible
+from each other due to intervening ridges or other topographical
+features. This can be told by laying off accurately the distance on
+the map between the points in question and using as datum the lowest
+of the 3 points, then draw vertical lines, from the 2 higher points,
+making them in proportion to their elevation with any convenient
+scale. Draw a line between the first and last points and, if the
+intervening vertical cuts this line the second point is not visible
+from the first. Take for example, two points A and B, 1,760 yards
+apart, by the map, A 500 feet and B 450 feet above sea level, the
+intervening point C is 475 feet above sea level and 500 yards from B.
+As B is the lowest we will call its elevation zero or at datum, then
+elevation of A is 50 feet and C 25 feet.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #10]
+
+Another method of deciding visibility is by proportion. Measure the
+distance between the three points A, B, and C, and obtain their
+elevations above the datum (lowest of the 3) and using similar
+triangles. Take the same case as above, letting X represent the point
+above which the view is clear at 1,260 yards from point A, the line of
+sight passes through this point.
+
+1760 (A--B) : 500 (B--C) : : 50 (elev. A) : X
+ solving, X = 14.2
+
+Now, since the ground at point C is 25 feet above the base and the
+line of sight passes within 14.2 feet of the base at this place, an
+observer at A is unable to see B.
+
+The matter of profiling is very simple. Merely mark where the contours
+cut the edge of a piece of co-ordinate paper and extend the proper
+elevations, then pass a line through these points, remembering that
+the surface of the ground has a natural curve.
+
+
+LESSON 6. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--By use of the slope scale on the sketch board and the
+contour interval scale on the alidade, each man will secure vertical
+data on the flat sketch made in the fourth lesson. Certain critical
+elevations will be determined and marked with red flags before hand.
+The elevations of two points on the ground will be furnished, one as
+the datum and the other as a check. Draw in contours of this sketch
+with the help of drainage lines and elevations already secured.
+
+The chief points to be considered are to take slopes from points
+established on the sketch; to take several sights and average the
+angle of slope; to properly lay off the elevation by using the slope
+scale on the alidade; and finally to put in the contours along these
+lines of sight _on the spot_ thus allowing for difference in
+topography between the point of sight and the station from which the
+elevation is taken. Careful note must be made of the drainage systems
+as these are the keynotes to the sketch and finally the contours are
+connected together, keeping in mind always that no contour stops
+unless it makes a closed curve or goes off the map. Remember also
+that contours make fingers pointing up stream and are blunt around
+hill sides. Contours cross streams to opposite points and break at
+roads, continuing on the other side. Uniform slopes have
+equally-spaced contours. Do not try to measure every slope, two
+intersecting elevation sights on a hill will check the height. Put the
+intervening contours in by eye.
+
+
+LESSON 7. (CLASSROOM--FOUR HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Completing the map sketch previously made and making a
+landscape sketch.
+
+It is important to complete a map and no matter how good it is, if
+certain points are omitted, the value of the work is very much
+decreased. The sketcher must clear the sketch of all unnecessary lines
+and notes and make his lettering clear on the map. Be sure that the
+following items are on the sketch before it is turned in.
+
+ 1. Location of the ground shown.
+ 2. Line of magnetic north shown by an arrow, and if declination is
+known, the true north also.
+ 3. Graphic scale and representative fraction--R.F.
+ 4. Vertical interval--V.I.
+ 5. Sketcher's name and organization to which he belongs.
+ 6. Date.
+
+A landscape sketch is a place sketched with details shown in
+perspective. The horizon is always of military importance and should
+be shown as well as intervening crests, woods, houses, etc. Landscape
+sketching in trench warfare is a necessary accomplishment of the
+observer. The beginner will at first be confused by a mass of details,
+but he must note only the outline of the features sketched. First draw
+the sky line and crests, then fill in the other details with fewest
+lines possible. Unnecessary shading tends to detract from the
+clearness of the sketch. There will be great difficulty in getting the
+perspective, note the size of objects, the further away they are the
+smaller they seem. Make them so. In making the sketch, hold the pad in
+front with one eye closed, the upper edge of the pad horizontal; a
+string 20 inches long is tied to the pad and held between the teeth to
+insure the same distance from the eye each time. Moreover, if it is
+desired to locate objects by deflection of an angle from a reference
+point, this can be done by using _mils_. One mil is 1-6400 of a
+circle. At 20 inches a half-inch interval subtends 25 mils.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #11]
+
+The paper is oriented by bringing the sector desired along the upper
+edge of the pad. The points desired are then in proper positions, both
+horizontally and vertically.
+
+Place a mark at the upper edge for points desired. The sky line should
+be located first. Now carry these lines down, having drawn three
+horizontal lines about 1/2 inch apart, beginning with the highest
+point on the top line. Marks locating the other features are likewise
+transposed in vertical and horizontal portions.
+
+Now draw sky line connecting transposed marks, then such other points
+as crests, trenches, houses, etc. After practice most other features
+can be drawn in without reorienting, the sky line having been drawn.
+The vertical elevation should be slightly exaggerated. Objects in the
+background should be drawn in lightly while nearby features are
+indicated by _heavy lines_. Avoid details, draw only silhouette, shade
+only in showing woods.
+
+
+LESSON 8. (FIELD WORK--FIVE HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Make complete area sketch including contours, with no data
+furnished other than the initial elevation.
+
+Before commencing the work summarize the important points involved.
+
+ 1. If possible select a base line.
+ 2. Locate as many points by intersection as possible.
+ 3. Make traverse by road, check locations by resection.
+ 4. At good observation points observe and complete the sketch as far
+as possible.
+
+At each station keep the following points in view:
+
+ 1. Back sight on previous station.
+ 2. Select new sighting point ahead.
+ 3. Determine elevation by slope board.
+ 4. Put in contours where possible noting the drainage and critical
+points of the general slope and the terrain.
+ 5. Put in details along traverse just made of all topographical
+features of military importance.
+ 6. Determine your present elevation.
+ 7. Make as many shots for intersection as you can and mark them.
+ 8. Look for possible resection shots.
+
+
+LESSONS 9 AND 10. (FIELD WORK--NINE HOURS.)
+
+PROBLEM.--Make a road sketch of about 12 miles with scale of 3 inches
+to the mile, V.I. 20 feet. This should include details of military
+importance to a distance of 300 yards on either side of the road.
+
+Keep in mind these points:
+
+ 1. Start carefully and give attention to every part of the map.
+ 2. Keep the board properly oriented.
+ 3. Watch the water drainage systems.
+ 4. Put down all necessary details at each _setup_.
+ 5. Note high hills and towns not on immediate route, condition of
+roads, fences, cultivation, hedges, cuts and fills, bridges (kind and
+length), railroads, telegraph and telephone lines, schools, churches,
+etc., notice particularly woods and points of concealment for hostile
+troops.
+
+Do the work at each station for elevation, contours and the noting of
+necessary details so that the sketch will be complete as you go along.
+Make certain that the title of the sketch, scale, orientation, etc.,
+are all clearly indicated, for a road map may have to be completed by
+another or may be called for suddenly when it will be useless without
+these details.
+
+Remember there are but two things absolutely essential to a good road
+sketch; a good traverse and the location of the drainage system in its
+relation to this traverse. With this control approximate contours can
+be drawn by anyone having a knowledge of the principles of topography.
+Never plot unimportant details. Prominent buildings and farm houses
+are of value for locating oneself. Woods and orchards are shown for
+tactical reasons but no one can expect to show every fence, ditch or
+bit of cover that might hide a patrol.
+
+
+Map Reading.
+
+(GETTYSBURG 3" MAP--HUNTERSTOWN SHEET.) Plattsburg Barracks, N.Y.,
+Sept. 17, 1917:
+
+1. What is the shortest distance by road from Biglersville to Texas?
+
+2. Describe the road between Texas and Table Rock.
+
+3. Is it a cut or a fill along the railroad about 1/2 mile east of
+Granite Hill Station?
+
+4. What is meant by 931 on Chestnut Hill?
+
+5. Can a man on the summit of hill 712 (about one mile southwest of
+Plainview) be seen from the town of Plainview?
+
+6. Point out two fords on the Conewago River.
+
+7. Where is the highest point on the road from Plainview to
+Heidlersburg?
+
+8. Describe the fences along the road from Texas to Table Rock
+Station.
+
+9. Is Hill 566 S.W. from D. Wert visible from Henderson Meeting House?
+
+10. Of what material is the bridge at Bridge School House constructed?
+
+Harvard College:
+
+1. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see road fork 535 (about 1,500 yards
+south)?
+
+2. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road, and has
+crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544.) Can this patrol see the
+Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and cross roads 616?
+
+3. Can the sentinel at 712 see the road fork 518 (1,850 yards
+southwest from 712)?
+
+4. Can the sentinel at 712 see the cross roads 561 (about 1,200 yards
+southeast)?
+
+Assuming the height of a man as 5' 0" above the ground and trees and
+buildings as 30' 0".
+
+1. Is the ground at road fork 552 near D. Wirt visible to a patrol on
+Hill 712? If not what is the obstructing point? Turn in profile, using
+cross section paper.
+
+2. Disregarding trees, is a man standing on Bridge 523 near Bridge
+S.H. visible from Hill 712?
+
+Solve by any method desired indicating the method.
+
+1. Make a profile from location of the letter "U" of Chestnut Hill
+near Center Mills to Hill 712, 2-1/2 miles to the south.
+
+2. Is the location of the letter "B" of Beatrich visible from "U" of
+Chestnut Hill? If not what obstructs?
+
+1. Can a man on Hill 712 see a man at cross roads 554 in Hunterstown
+(disregard trees)?
+
+2. To a man standing at the point where contour 680 crosses the road
+just south of 707, where does the roadbed first become invisible?
+
+1. When the point arrives at Hill 647 can it see the road fork 610 to
+the northwest?
+
+2. When the flank patrol reaches Benders Church cross roads can it see
+an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile to
+the northeast?
+
+3. Looking north along the Center Mills road from Hill 647, where does
+the road first become invisible?
+
+1. What does 1/21120 mean?
+
+2. What direction is the general drainage system on this sheet?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 6.
+
+Helpful References to the Articles of War.
+
+(Extracted from M.C.M. and Guide to the Articles of War--Waumbaugh's
+Lectures.)
+
+
+MILITARY LAW is the body of rules that governs members of the army.
+Military Law is based upon the Articles of War approved by Congress,
+August 27, 1916, effective March 1, 1917. This body of rules defines:
+
+ (1) Punishable offenses of members of the army.
+ (2) The Method of determining guilt.
+ (3) Punishment.
+
+The present Articles of War are revisions of those from the
+Revolution.
+
+
+ARTICLE 1.
+
+DEFINITIONS:
+
+ (1) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a
+ commissioned officer (and no one else).
+ (2) The word "soldier" to include non-commissioned officer or any
+ other enlisted man.
+
+
+ARTICLE 2.
+
+PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW:
+
+ (1) All officers and soldiers of the Regular Army.
+ (2) All volunteers in the service of the U.S.
+ (3) All other persons lawfully called, drafted or ordered into such
+ service.
+ (4) West Point cadets.
+ (5) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for
+ service with the army, by order of the President.
+ (6) All retainers to the camp, or accompanying or serving with the
+ army in time of war, both within and without territorial
+ jurisdiction of U.S.
+ (7) All persons under sentence by court-martial.
+
+
+ARTICLES 3-18.
+
+COURTS MARTIAL CLASSIFIED:
+
+ (A) General Courts Martial.
+ Appointed by
+ (1) President,
+ (2) Commanding officer of department or territorial division.
+ (3) Commanding officer of separate army division brigade.
+ (4) Commanding officer of district or force empowered by
+ President.
+ Jurisdiction.
+ Over all persons subject to Military Law as regards all
+ offenses punishable by Military Law.
+ Sentence.
+ Everything.
+ (B) Special Courts Martials (3 to 5 officers inclusive).
+ Appointed by
+ (1) Commanding officer of district, garrison, fort or camp.
+ (2) Commanding officer of brigade, detached battalion.
+ Jurisdiction.
+ Over any person subject to military law (except an officer),
+ and for any crime not capital. (Only soldiers excluding
+ those having certificate of eligibility for promotion.)
+ Sentence.
+ (1) No power to adjudge dishonorable discharge.
+ (2) No confinement in excess of six (6) months.
+ (3) No forfeiture of pay in excess of six (6) months.
+ (C) Summary Courts Martial (one (1) officer).
+ Appointed by
+ (1) Commanding officer of garrison, fort, camp, etc.
+ (2) Commanding officer of regiment, detached battalion, etc.
+ (N.B.) When but one (1) officer is present with command he
+ shall be the summary court martial.
+ Jurisdiction.
+ (1) Only privates holding no certificate of eligibility for
+ promotion--and
+ (2) For crimes not capital.
+ Sentence.
+ (1) Confinement not over 3 months.
+ (2) No dishonorable discharge.
+ (3) No punishment over one (1) month without higher
+ authority.
+
+
+METHOD OF ENTERING A CHARGE AGAINST A MAN:
+
+Example:
+
+ Charge: Violation of the ---- Article of War.
+
+ Specification: In that (rank, name, organization) did at
+ (place) on or about (date) etc. (brief description
+ of offence committed).
+
+ Signed
+ (Name)
+ (Rank and Branch of Service)
+
+In cases where there are more than one charge the number of each A.W.
+is put down in the charge. A description of each offence is put down
+separately under SPECIFICATION.
+
+Note that double lines are drawn under CHARGE, single line under
+SPECIFICATION.
+
+
+GENERAL REMARKS:
+
+The three (3) Courts Martial are alike in the following:
+
+ (a) Composed only of officers of Army or Marine Corps on detached
+ service with the Army by order of the President.
+ (b) Pass upon both law and fact.
+ (c) Criminal Courts only.
+ (d) Unable to promulgate any finding that does not require approval
+ of appointing authority.
+
+The three (3) Courts Martial differ in the following:
+
+ (a) Number of members.
+ (b) Appointing authority.
+ (c) Punishments.
+
+
+ARTICLE 31.
+
+ORDER OF VOTING:
+
+Members in General or Special Courts Martial shall vote from junior to
+senior.
+
+
+ARTICLE 39.
+
+LIMITATIONS UPON PROSECUTIONS:
+
+Military offences fall into three (3) groups:
+
+ (1) War desertion, mutiny, murder. Have no limitations.
+ (2) Burglary, etc. (A W. 93) and frauds against Government (A.W.
+ 94). Prosecution limited to 3 years.
+ (3) All other offences. 2 years.
+
+In some cases the Statute of Limitations is suspended (A.W. 39),
+especially in cases of absence from the United States.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following Articles of War are the important ones for officers to
+be acquainted with in the ordinary course of his duties:
+
+
+ARTICLE 54.
+
+FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT:
+
+Punishment: Court Martial.
+
+ "Any person procuring himself to be enlisted by means of
+ willful misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications
+ for enlistment and shall receive pay or allowance," ...
+ This offense requires two (2) steps:
+ (1) Misrepresentation or concealment.
+ (2) Receiving pay or allowances.
+
+
+ARTICLE 58.
+
+DESERTION:
+
+Punishment: (Wartime) Death or Court Martial. (Peacetime) Court
+Martial.
+
+ "Any person--who deserts or attempts to desert in time of War
+ ... death or such other punishment as the court martial may
+ direct ... any other time any punishment except death."
+ Essential features are:
+ (1) An intent not to return.
+ (2) An overt act of separation from duty.
+ Drunkenness tends to show absence of the intent.
+ Minority is no defense.
+ Enlistment while in desertion does not remove the charge
+ of desertion.
+
+
+ARTICLE 61.
+
+ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE:
+
+Punishment: Court Martial.
+
+ "Any person who fails to repair at the fixed time to duty, or
+ goes from same without leave of absence, or absents himself from
+ his command, guard, quarters, station or camp without proper
+ leave...."
+ Does not require to prove intent, yet persons ignorant of
+ military law, drunk or victims of mistake are dealt with gently.
+
+
+ARTICLE 62.
+
+DISRESPECT TOWARD PRESIDENT, VICE-PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY OF
+WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES:
+
+Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal from the service,
+ (Soldier) Court martial.
+
+ "Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words
+ against the President, etc.... any other person subject to
+ military law who so offends."
+ Contemptuous language is objectionable and liable to court
+ martial whether
+ (1) Used in public or private.
+ (2) In official or private capacity.
+ (3) Written or spoken.
+ (4) True or untrue.
+
+
+ARTICLE 63.
+
+DISRESPECT TOWARD A SUPERIOR OFFICER:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with
+ disrespect toward his superior officer...."
+ Unlike Article 62, disrespect toward a superior officer requires
+ no words--acting or neglecting to act (such as rudeness or failure
+ to salute) are enough.
+
+
+ARTICLE 64.
+
+ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER:
+
+Punishment: Death or court-martial.
+
+ (1) "Any person subject to military law who on any pretense
+ whatsoever, strikes his superior officer--lifts a weapon, or
+ offers violence against him, being in the execution of his
+ office."
+ (2) "Or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior
+ officer."
+ Drunkenness here tends to show absence of the essential
+ willfullness.
+ Self defense is not forbidden nor violence to suppress mutiny.
+
+
+ARTICLE 65.
+
+INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD A NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICER:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ (1) "Any soldier who assaults or attempts or threatens to
+ strike or assault."
+ (2) "Or willfully disobeys the lawful order of a
+ non-commissioned officer while in the execution of his office."
+ (3) "Or uses threatening or insulting language."
+ (4) "Or behaves in an insubordinate or disrespectful manner."
+ Drunkenness will not have the effect here of showing an absence
+ of willfullness.
+
+
+ARTICLE 68.
+
+
+DISORDERS:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "All officers and non-commissioned officers have power to quell
+ disorders and to order officers who take part in the same into
+ arrest, and other persons into arrest or confinement.
+ Whosoever, being so ordered:
+ (1) Refuses to obey.
+ (2) Draws a weapon.
+ (3) Otherwise threatens or does violence shall be punished."
+ This is one instance (except a.w., 67, mutiny) where even a
+ corporal might order a general into arrest.
+ This is the only instance:
+ (1) Where anyone other than a commissioned officer can put an
+ officer under arrest.
+ (2) Where anyone other than an officer can order, arrest or
+ confinement of a soldier except on power given by C.O.
+
+
+ARTICLE 69.
+
+BREAKING ARREST:
+
+Punishment: (Officer) Dismissal, (Soldier) Court-martial.
+
+ "Any officer charged with crime shall be placed in arrest by
+ C.O.... in exceptional cases ... confined."
+ "A soldier charged with crime ... shall be placed in confinement
+ ... when charged with minor offense placed in arrest."
+ "Any person placed in arrest ... shall be restricted to
+ barracks, quarters, tent, unless limits are enlarged by proper
+ authority."
+ "An officer or any other person breaking his arrest or who
+ escapes from confinement before being set at liberty by proper
+ authority shall be punished by...."
+ To break arrest is punishable even though a person is innocent
+ of the charge or ought to have been released.
+
+
+ARTICLE 75.
+
+MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY:
+
+Punishment: Death or court-martial.
+
+ "Any officer or soldier who:
+ (1) Misbehaves before the enemy--runs away, or shamefully
+ abandons post.
+ (2) Or speaks words inducing others to do so.
+ (3) Or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage.
+ (4) Occasions false alarms in camp or quarters shall suffer
+ ...."
+ The word "enemy" implies "any hostile body" such as a mob or
+ riot crowd.
+
+
+ARTICLE 83.
+
+NEGLECT OF MILITARY PROPERTY:
+
+Punishment: Make good the loss and court-martial.
+
+ "Any person subject to military law who willfully or through
+ neglect suffers to be lost, damaged, or wrongfully disposed of,
+ any military property belonging to United States of
+ America--shall make good the loss and...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 84.
+
+WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSAL OF PROPERTY ISSUED TO SOLDIERS:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of any property
+ issued for military service shall be punished...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 85.
+
+DRUNK ON DUTY:
+
+Punishment: (War time) dismissal and court-martial, (Peace time)
+court-martial.
+
+ "Any officer ... drunk on duty shall ... in time of war be
+ dismissed ... and
+ Any other person subject to military law, drunk on duty ...
+ shall be punished...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 86.
+
+MISBEHAVIOR OF A SENTINEL:
+
+Punishment: (War time) death or court-martial, (Peace time)
+court-martial.
+
+ "Any sentinel found:
+ (1) Drunk.
+ (2) Asleep.
+ (3) Or who leaves before being regularly relieved shall be
+ punished...."
+
+
+ARTICLE 92.
+
+MURDER OR RAPE:
+
+Punishment: Death or life imprisonment.
+
+ "Any person who commits murder or rape shall suffer death or
+ life imprisonment as the court-martial may direct."
+ No person shall be tried for murder or rape committed in the
+ limits of the U.S.A. in time of peace. This is left to civil
+ courts.
+
+
+ARTICLE 93.
+
+VARIOUS CRIMES:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "Any person who commits
+ (1) Manslaughter,
+ (2) Mayhem (cutting),
+ (3) Arson,
+ (4) Burglary,
+ (5) Larceny,
+ (6) Embezzlement,
+ (7) Perjury,
+ (8) Assault with intent to commit any felony.
+ (9) Assault with intent to do bodily harm. shall be
+ punished...."
+ Definition of these crimes is left to local law.
+
+
+ARTICLE 94.
+
+FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ Article of War No. 94 is equivalent to prohibiting any person
+ subject to military law from defrauding or attempting, or
+ conspiring to defraud the Government of the U.S.A.--also from
+ stealing, embezzling any Government property.
+
+
+ARTICLE 95.
+
+CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND A GENTLEMAN:
+
+Punishment: Dismissal.
+
+ "Any officer or cadet convicted of unbecoming conduct shall be
+ dismissed...."
+ Misconduct may be official or unofficial.
+
+
+ARTICLE 96.
+
+GENERAL ARTICLE, THE CATCH ALL:
+
+Punishment: Court-martial.
+
+ "... all disorders and neglects to the prejudice of good
+ military discipline.
+ All conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military
+ service.
+ All crimes and offences not capital shall be taken cognizance of
+ by
+ (1) General,
+ (2) Special,
+ (3) Summary court-martials according to the nature and degree
+ of the offense and punished....
+ Article of War 96 covers all crimes and is handy when no other
+ Article of War fits. It is wise, however, to use this Article
+ sparingly on Charges, finding if possible the exact Article
+ necessary to cover the case at hand."
+
+
+EXAMPLES.
+
+PROBLEM 1:
+
+Charge.--Violation of ---- Article of War.
+
+Specification.--In that Private John Doe, Company C. 301st Regiment
+Infantry, did at Albany, New York, on or about September 15th, 1917,
+dress himself in the uniform of a 1st Lieutenant and attend a dance at
+Odd Fellows Hall.
+
+(Signed) JOHN HANCOCK,
+ Captain, 301st Infantry.
+
+Under what article of war, if any, does this belong?
+
+
+PROBLEM 2:
+
+Charge.--Violation of ---- and ---- Articles of War.
+
+Specification.--In that Sergeant James Hopkins, Company H, 205th
+Infantry, did at Franconia, N.H., on or about July 4th return to
+barracks intoxicated.
+
+In that Sergeant James Hopkins, moreover, refused to appear at
+reveille July 5th.
+
+(Signed) WILLIAM HITCHCOCK,
+ Captain, 205th Infantry.
+
+Under what articles of war do these offenses belong?
+
+What kind of court-martial required?
+
+
+PROBLEM 3:
+
+Charge.--Violation of ---- Article of War.
+
+Specification.--In that Captain George Jones, 125th Infantry did at
+Laconia, Maine, on or about August 20, 1917, make a speech in which he
+stated that the Reichstag of Germany was a more efficient and
+democratic body than the United States Congress.
+
+(Signed) ALBERT SMITH,
+ Major, 125th Infantry.
+
+Under what article of war does this offense belong?
+
+
+NO. ARTICLES OF WAR. PUNISHMENT.
+54. Fraudulent enlistment Court martial
+58. Desertion War: Death or court martial
+ Peace: Except death
+61. Absence without leave Court martial
+62. Disrespect to Presidents Officer: Dismissal
+ Vice-President, Secretary Soldier: Court martial
+ of War, Congress, etc.
+63. Disrespect to superior officer Court martial
+64. Assaulting or disobeying Death or court martial
+ superior officer
+65. Insubordination to a Court martial
+ non-commissioned officer
+69. Arrest or confinement Officer: Dismissal
+ of accused persons Soldier: Court martial
+75. Misbehavior before the enemy Death or court martial
+83. Loss, etc., military property Make good the loss and court martial
+84. Loss of military property Court martial
+ issued to soldiers
+85. Drunk on duty { Officers--
+ { War: Dismissal
+ { Peace: Court martial
+ { Soldiers: Court martial
+86. Misbehavior of sentinel { War: Death or
+ { Peace: Court martial (except death)
+93. Various crimes Court martial
+94. Frauds against the Government Court martial
+95. Conduct unbecoming an officer Dismissal
+96. General article Court martial
+ (General or special)
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 7.
+
+Notes on Army Regulations
+
+
+1. OBEDIENCE required in the military service--strict and prompt.
+
+2. AUTHORITY EXERCISED with firmness, kindness and justice--prompt and
+lawful punishment.
+
+3. ABUSIVE LANGUAGE or conduct by superiors forbidden.
+
+4. RESPECT TO SUPERIORS will be extended upon all occasions, whether
+on duty or not.
+
+5. REMARKS BY OFFICERS or soldiers upon others in the military
+service, whether praise or censure, public or private, written or
+spoken, is prohibited. Any effort to affect legislation for a personal
+favor will be entered against a man's military record.
+
+106. FURLOUGHS not granted to men about to be discharged. Not more
+than five per cent of a company shall be absent at one time.
+
+109. MEN ON FURLOUGH may not leave the United States.
+
+111. FOR MEN IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES furlough can begin on date of
+reaching United States.
+
+113. No PAYMENTS made to men while on furlough. Arms not to be taken
+on furlough or while reporting sick.
+ (N.B.--There will unquestionably be a modification of this ruling,
+as the custom abroad is to have every man keep his complete equipment
+with him whenever possible.)
+
+116. DESERTION. Property lost or destroyed will be charged against
+deserter.
+
+117. ABANDONED CLOTHES turned over to Quartermaster. Personal effects
+sold and credited to United States.
+
+121. REWARD OF $50 for apprehension and delivery of deserter or
+military prisoner.
+
+127. COSTS OF APPREHENSION will be charged against deserter.
+
+129. NO PAY OR CLOTHES drawn by soldier awaiting trial on charge of
+desertion.
+
+131. WILL BE RESTORED to duty only by court martial or authority
+competent to order trial.
+
+132. ABSENT WITHOUT LEAVE. Enlisted man forfeits all pay and
+allowances while away.
+ Soldier will not be charged with desertion until commanding officer
+has reason to believe he intended to desert. Absence of less than 24
+hours will not be noted upon the muster roll.
+
+139. DISCHARGE of enlisted man only
+ 1. By order of President or Secretary of War.
+ 2. By order of General Court Martial.
+ 3. By order of United States court or justice or judge, on writ of
+ habeas corpus.
+ 4. By command of territorial department.
+ 5. By disability in line of duty.
+ 6. By sentence of civil court.
+ 7. By purchase.
+(N.B.--In time of war it is probable that the last two methods would
+not be effective for discharge from the service.)
+
+140. FINAL STATEMENTS. The company commander will furnish each
+enlisted man a final statement (or duplicate) or a full statement in
+writing explaining why such final statement is not furnished. No final
+statement will be furnished a soldier who has forfeited all pay and
+allowances or who has no deposits due him.
+
+147. CERTIFICATE will give
+ 1. Character certified by company commander.
+ 2. Whether recommended for re-enlistment.
+ In case of negative opinion, the soldier should be notified at
+ least 30 days prior to discharge. In that case the company
+ commander shall convene a board of three officers (if possible) to
+ determine what kind of discharge shall be given. The soldier will
+ be given a hearing.
+
+151. LOSS OF DISCHARGE CERTIFICATE. Discharge certificates will not be
+made in duplicate. Upon proper proof of loss or destruction without
+fault of person entitled to it, the War Department will issue a
+certificate of service, showing date of enlistment and discharge from
+the army and character given in original certificate.
+ Discharge certificates should never be forwarded to the War
+Department in correspondence unless called for.
+
+159. PHYSICAL DISABILITY CERTIFICATE issued when an enlisted man is
+permanently unfitted for service, in line of duty. Certificates of
+disability not made in duplicate.
+
+162. DEATH OF SOLDIER.
+ 1. Effects are secured.
+ 2. Nearest relatives notified.
+ 3. Adjutant General of army notified.
+
+In active service the War Department requires the following reports:
+ 1. Report of company commander to Adjutant General, covering death
+ and disposal of remains.
+ 2. Report of surgeon or company commander embodying
+ a. Cause of death.
+ b. Whether in line of duty.
+ c. Whether due to another soldier's misconduct.
+ 3. Inventory of effects in duplicate.
+
+163. EFFECTS, when not claimed within reasonable time, sold and
+credited to United States.
+ No authority for officers to pay debts of dead soldiers.
+ Trinkets will not be sold but sent to the Adjutant General's office.
+
+165. EFFECTS will be delivered, if called for, to legal representative
+of deceased after arrears are paid.
+
+167. MEDAL OF HONOR. Authorized by Congress to be awarded to officers
+and men for extreme acts of gallantry in action, beyond line of duty.
+Recommendations will be considered by standard of extraordinary merit,
+and must have incontestible proof.
+
+184. CERTIFICATE OF MERIT. Granted by President to any enlisted man in
+the service for distinguished acts in line of duty, on recommendation
+of company commander, based upon statement of eye witness, preferably
+the immediate company commander. $200 permanent additional pay is
+allowed.
+
+285. QUARTERS. Name of each soldier on bunk. Arms on rack.
+Accoutrements hung up by the belts.
+
+287. SATURDAY INSPECTION preceded by thorough policing. Leaders of
+squads will see that everything is clean.
+
+1011. NEGLECT OF ROOMS or furniture by officer or soldier a military
+offense. All necessary costs shall be paid by him.
+
+1178. DESTRUCTION OF TABLEWARE or kitchen utensils by soldiers will be
+charged against their pay.
+
+288. CHIEFS OF SQUADS are responsible
+ 1. For cleanliness of men.
+ 2. For their proper equipment for duty.
+ 3. For their proper dress when going "on pass."
+
+374. PREMISES shall be policed daily after breakfast.
+
+290. COMPANY COMMANDER will see that public property held by men is
+kept in good order, and missing or spoiled articles paid for.
+
+292. ARMS shall not be taken down without proper supervision and by
+order of commissioned officer.
+ No changing of parts or finish.
+ Tompions (muzzle plugs) in small arms forbidden.
+
+657. ACCOUNTABILITY AND RESPONSIBILITY--Both devolve upon persons
+entrusted with public property.
+ Responsibility without accountability devolves upon one to whom
+property is entrusted, but who does not have to make returns
+therefor. Responsibility does not end until property has been given
+back to accountable officer and a receipt taken, or he has been
+relieved by regulations or by orders.
+ Accountability without responsibility occurs when an officer holds
+proper memorandum receipts for property delivered to others.
+
+EXAMPLE.--The Company Commander is accountable and responsible for the
+rifles turned over to his company. He is accountable without
+responsibility when each enlisted man has been issued a rifle and has
+signed a receipt for it. Each enlisted man is then responsible for his
+rifle, without accountability, until he returns it in proper
+condition. In general, therefore: Accountability requires evidence of
+the disposition that has been made of property. Responsibility implies
+possession, and requires return of the property or payment for it.
+
+685. LOSS OF PUBLIC PROPERTY by neglect of any officer or soldier
+shall be paid by him, at such rates as a survey of the property may
+determine.
+ Charges will be made only after conclusive proof, and not without a
+survey if the soldier demands one.
+ Signing the payroll will be regarded as an acknowledgment of the
+justice of the charge.
+
+1202. RATION is the allowance of food for one person or animal for one
+day.
+
+1229. FORFEITURE of ration is made when a soldier overstays furlough.
+
+1339. PAY for continuous service is credited a soldier if he enlists
+within three months after honorable discharge.
+ For privates an increase of $3 per month is allowed up to and
+including the third enlistment, beyond this $1 per month increase
+given up to and including the seventh enlistment.
+ For non-commissioned officers the increase of $3 per month continues
+to and includes the seventh enlistment.
+ No increased pay is given after the seventh enlistment to private or
+non-commissioned officer.
+
+1347. ALLOTMENTS (revised by Act of Congress, October, 1917).
+ The new law does away with future pensions. Allotments may be made to:
+ 1. Family.
+ 2. Bank.
+
+ For married men or those with dependents, such as children, parents
+divorced wives, whose support is required by court order, allotments
+are compulsory, and must not be less than $15 a month and not more
+than one-half of his pay. The Company Commander is responsible for
+finding who comes under this rule. By this arrangement soldiers cannot
+shirk the support of dependents.
+ The government will double the amount allotted by each soldier, to a
+limit of $37.50 a month. In cases where the soldier allots half of his
+pay the government will add to the allotment according to the
+following scale, even though it more than doubles the amount paid by
+the soldier:
+
+ Class A.
+ Wife, no child, $15.
+ Wife, one child, $25.
+ Wife, two children, $32.50.
+ For each additional child, $5 more.
+ No wife living, one child, $5.
+ Two children, $12.50.
+ Three children, $20.
+ Four children, $30.
+ For each additional child, $5.
+ Class B.
+ One parent, $10.
+ Two parents, $20.
+ Each grandchild, brother, sister or additional dependent, $5.
+ Nurses can make allotment.
+
+When both A and B classes are in need of allotment from a soldier's
+pay, and he has allotted half of his pay to Class A, he may allot an
+additional one-seventh of his pay for the support of Class B
+dependents, and the government will pay the sums listed above to the
+Class B dependents, to the limit of $20 a month. Payments under this
+act were begun November 1, 1917. In case less than one-half of a
+soldier's pay is allotted, the Secretary of War may require the
+allotment to be increased up to one-half of the pay.
+
+COMPENSATION FOR DEATH OR DISABILITY in line of duty. In all cases
+must be applied for. In case of death, monthly compensation shall be
+as follows per month:
+
+ Widow, $25.
+ Widow and 1 child, $35.
+ Widow and 2 children, $47.50.
+ Each additional child, $5.
+ One child alone, $20.
+ Two children, $30.
+ Three children, $40.
+ Each additional child, $5.
+ Widowed mother, $20.
+ For transportation of body, $100.
+
+ No women can receive compensation from two sources. The government
+will continue to pay compensation to a dependent wife until her death
+or remarriage, and to children until they are 18 years old, unless
+they are insane or helpless, in which case it will continue to pay the
+compensation during such incapacity.
+ In case of total disability, compensation will be as follows per
+month:
+
+ Soldier alone, $30.
+ With wife, no child, $45.
+ With wife, one child, $55.
+ With wife, two children, $65.
+ Three children or more, $75.
+ No wife living, one child, $40.
+ No wife living, each additional child, $10.
+ Soldier and widowed mother, $40.
+
+ In case of total disability where attendance is needed, $20 per month
+will be added to the compensation, unless the soldier is blind,
+bedridden, or has lost both feet or hands, in which case the
+compensation will be $100 per month, with no extra allowance for
+attendance. In case of partial disability, compensation will be a
+percentage of the amount paid in case of total disability. These
+annuities continue only during the life of the person for whom they
+are first paid.
+
+ADDITIONAL INSURANCE.--Uniform compensation for all ranks can go only
+to blood relations. In case of death or disability in line of duty, it
+is paid in monthly instalments for 20 years. Insurance is from $1,000
+to $10,000 in multiples of $500. The rate is exceedingly low.
+Insurance must be applied for within 120 days after entering the
+service. Premiums are paid monthly, quarterly or yearly from the pay
+of the insured man. After the war this insurance must be converted
+within five years into a policy either of straight life insurance,
+20-year payment or endowment, maturing at the age of 62. In case of
+death when there is no blood relationship, the reserve value,
+according to the American insurance mortality tables, is paid to the
+estate. None of these payments can be attached for debt, nor legal
+action started against them except in a United States Court. The
+maximum lawyer's fee in any such case is $500.
+
+1361. DEPOSITS of not less than $5 may be made by an enlisted man (not
+retired) to any quartermaster. Deposit book, signed by quartermaster
+and company commander, given to man who makes the deposit. This book
+is not transferable.
+
+1363. A LOST DEPOSIT BOOK is not replaced without an affidavit of the
+soldier, testifying that he has not sold nor assigned it.
+
+1364. PAYMENT made only on final statement. The soldier should be
+informed of the importance of keeping the deposit book.
+
+1365. WITHDRAWAL OF DEPOSIT when discharged or furloughed to reserve.
+
+1366. INTEREST on sum greater than $5 is 4 per cent.
+
+1368. FORFEITURE due to desertion, but not by sentence of court
+martial. Deposits not exempt from liabilities due the United States.
+
+1371. OFFICERS AND MEN lose pay while confined by civil authorities.
+
+1375. FURLOUGHED TO RESERVE or discharged, a soldier is given a final
+statement in duplicate. This must be presented to be valid.
+
+1378. TRANSPORTATION and subsistence is allowed to the point of
+enlistment, or for the same distance. Not subject to deduction for
+debts due the United States.
+
+1380. DISCHARGED SOLDIER under charge of fraudulent enlistment is not
+entitled to transportation and subsistence.
+
+1383. TRANSFER OF CLAIMS on the government made by an enlisted man are
+only recognized after discharge or furlough to the reserve. They must
+be in writing and must be endorsed by a commissioned officer or other
+responsible person known to the quartermaster.
+
+1437. No one is allowed to accompany sick or wounded from the battle
+line to the rear except those specifically authorized.
+
+1530. Ammunition lost or used without orders or not in line of duty
+shall be charged to the soldier using it.
+
+
+NOTES ON THE LAWS OF WAR.
+
+ (From Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons, translated from
+ the French at the Army War College, 1917. War Department
+ Document No. 626.)
+
+The laws of war were instituted under the generous error that certain
+well-organized peoples had entirely emerged from barbarism and that
+they considered themselves bound by the placing of their signatures to
+international conventions, freely agreed to.
+
+An infinite number of acts minutely and officially investigated have
+established that our troops and our Nation should never count on the
+observance of these laws and that the atrocities committed prove to be
+not only individual violations dishonoring merely the perpetrator, but
+violations premeditated and ordered in cold blood by the commanders
+with the moral support of the heads of the enemy nation.
+
+These laws are nevertheless repeated here in order that:
+
+1. The knowledge of how the war should have been conducted may develop
+in the heart of each man the sentiment of hate (applicable only to
+foes such as we actually have), that in no case should a chief of
+platoon tolerate any intercourse between his men and the enemy other
+than that of the rifle; this duty is explicit and not to be departed
+from except in the case of the wounded and prisoners incapable of
+doing harm.
+
+2. That every violator of these laws, taken in the act, shall be the
+subject of an immediate report with witnesses, then sent to the
+division headquarters to be tried as to the facts of the case.
+
+The laws of war resulted from the Geneva convention, from the
+declaration of St. Petersburg (Petrograd), and from the different
+Hague conventions. All these diplomatic papers were signed by Germany,
+Austria-Hungary, Turkey and Bulgaria.
+
+The following are the principal articles:
+
+Protect the wounded on the field of battle from pillage and from bad
+treatment; respect ambulances and evacuation convoys; respect the
+personnel exclusively concerned with the transportation, treatment and
+guarding of wounded; do not treat this personnel as prisoners of war
+if it falls into the hands of the enemy; but return such personnel, as
+well as material, when its retention shall be no longer necessary for
+the care of the wounded prisoners.
+
+Refrain from employing any projectile which weighs less than 400 grams
+that is either explosive or loaded with incendiary or inflammable
+material, from all projectiles having for their sole object the
+spreading of asphyxiating or harmful gases, all expanding bullets or
+those which will easily flatten out inside the human body, such as
+jacketed bullets whose jacket does not entirely cover the core or is
+nickel.
+
+Forbid the use of poisons or of poisoned arms, killing or wounding an
+enemy who has thrown down his arms and surrendered; declarations that
+there will be no quarter; refrain from bombarding towns and cities
+which are not defended, from firing on churches, historical monuments,
+edifices devoted to the arts, to science, to charity, to sick and
+wounded and which are marked by a conspicuous signal known to the
+enemy.
+
+Prisoners should be treated as to rations, housing and clothing the
+same as troops of the country which has captured them. All their
+personal belongings, except their arms and military papers, should be
+left in their possession.
+
+The following should be inviolate: The emissary--that is to say, an
+individual authorized by a belligerent to enter into talks with the
+authorities of the other side and coming under a white flag; also his
+trumpeter, his standard bearer, and his interpreter. He loses his
+inviolability if it is proven that he has profited by his privilege to
+provoke or commit treachery.
+
+An undisguised military man can never be treated as a spy.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 8.
+
+Practice Marches.
+
+
+"Special attention should be paid to the fitting of shoes and the care
+of the feet." (i.d.r., 627.)
+
+Short marches from 2 to 4 miles should be made daily and at a uniform
+rate until the troops become hardened. Particular attention must
+always be paid to the rate of march--it is imperative for the leading
+element to keep a uniform rate per hour.
+
+Be careful and see to it that your troops march on the right-hand side
+of the road, and during halts, no one, not even officers, must be
+permitted on the left. Keep closed up, and during the last mile of
+your march have your company sing some real snappy song, and they will
+come in in jubilant spirits. Keep the muzzles of your rifles always
+elevated on the march so that men marching in rear wont be bothered.
+
+On the march the first halt is for 15 minutes taken after 45 minutes
+of marching. The men should be taught to use this time to adjust their
+clothing and equipment, and answer the calls of nature. Do not halt
+where there are houses, etc., on this first halt, as a great many men
+want to relieve themselves.
+
+The succeeding halts are for 10 minutes after 50 minutes of
+marching--except of course during a forced march--when you would march
+for a longer period. During rainy or very hot weather the halts should
+be made oftener.
+
+Do not have any straggling, remember if a man falls out he must have a
+certificate signed by an officer stating the cause. Have one officer
+march in rear of the company. Be careful about the use of water. Have
+your men take a good drink early in the morning just after reveille,
+and on the march use their canteen sparingly. One canteen of water
+must last one man one day. Do not allow men to drink until after the
+second halt.
+
+On reaching camp the kitchens are put up, latrines are dug, and tents
+are pitched. When everything has been tended to each man should give
+his feet a good salt water bath. Put them in the water and let them
+remain there for 2 minutes. Do not dry them by rubbing, but sponge
+them--this will harden the feet. This should be done for the first
+three days, after which it can be dispensed with. A change of socks
+daily should be made, take one pair of socks from the pack, and wash
+out the dirty pair.
+
+Try to avoid night marching.
+
+The leading company in each regiment regulates the rate of march.
+
+"The marching efficiency of an organization is judged by the amount of
+straggling and elongation and the condition of the men at the end of
+the march." (i.d.r., 632.)
+
+Remember a sanitary squad should be detailed daily to police the
+immediate vicinity after each halt.
+
+
+Field Work.
+
+Field work will be classified under the following heads: Orders,
+Deployment, Fire, Attack, Defense, Leadership, Communications, Night
+Operations, Patrols, Advance Guards, Rear Guards, Flank Guards, Camp,
+March Outpost, and Outpost.
+
+(a) AN ORDER is the will of the commander expressed verbally or in
+writing to his subordinates. It should be clear, concise and to the
+point. A field order should be given as follows:
+ 1. Information of the enemy and supporting troops.
+ 2. General plan of the commander.
+ 3. Dispositions of the troops.
+ 4. Instructions for the trains.
+ 5. Place where messages are to be sent.
+
+(b) DO NOT DEPLOY too early. It is very fatiguing, and has a tendency
+to disorganize the skirmish line. The major designates the companies
+to be on the firing line, and those to remain in support. The distance
+between the firing line and support is from 50 to 500 yards. The
+support should be as close as possible under cover.
+
+(c) FIRE DIRECTION is the function of the company commander. He gives
+each platoon its sector or objective, determines the range, target,
+indicates the class of fire, and the time to open fire. Fire control
+is given to platoon commanders. The platoon is the fire unit. "Fire
+control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight setting
+and target, and resume a well directed fire. The best troops are those
+that submit longest to fire control." Fire discipline is the function
+of the individual soldier. "It implies that in a firing line without
+leaders, each man retains his presence of mind and directs effective
+fire upon the target."
+
+(d) THE TROOPS march in column of squads until under the observation
+of the enemy. Platoon columns are used in crossing ground where there
+is cover. Squad columns are used across the artillery zone. At
+approximately 800 yards a skirmish line is formed. Thin lines may then
+be used to advance to the attack. Remember the Major has assigned each
+company in the firing line an objective. Be sure to watch out for
+flank protection. If the Major has forgotten to have combat patrols on
+the exposed flank or flanks, it is up to the flank company to send out
+a combat patrol. This patrol should be slightly in advance of the
+front line, and off to the right or left. The advance is made by a
+fraction rushing forward. These rushes are from 20 to 80 yards. When a
+rush is made the remaining troops fire faster. The firing line should
+not be reinforced by less than a platoon. The Major determines when to
+fix bayonets. The front rank men fix bayonets first, the rear rank men
+fire faster, then the rear rank men fix bayonets while the front rank
+fire faster. A battalion is the smallest unit in the firing line to
+inaugurate a charge. Remember the battalion is the attack unit.
+
+In changing sight setting follow same plan as fixing bayonet, _i.e._,
+each front rank first, the rear rank man firing faster, etc.
+
+(e) DEFENSE.--In defense the line is usually stronger and the support
+weaker than in the attack. Do not give up your ground unless you have
+written orders from the High Command. Watch out for flank protection
+by combat patrols.
+
+(f) LEADERSHIP.--A good leader should possess self reliance,
+initiative, aggressiveness, superior knowledge, and have a conception
+of teamwork. Make your work a game in which each man has a part to
+play. Reward merit and give the disagreeable things to be done to the
+"knockers." A leader must know his men. Never give them a job to do
+that you couldn't do yourself. Train yourself to estimate the
+situation quickly and calmly. Have your men well disciplined, well
+drilled, well equipped, and well dressed. It might be called
+unmilitary by some of the sterner characters in our service, but we
+believe by occasionally drawing comparisons to something real
+amusing--a good joke--you show your men that the "old Man" is really
+made of human stuff. Be sympathetic, and it has been shown by
+experience that, for some slight breach of discipline a "little talk"
+in the orderly room does the most good, and is the best form of
+punishment. Do your work cheerfully, and your men will do likewise.
+Keep yourself abreast of the times in all matters military--remember
+your men look to you in time of action and excitement and you must be
+ready to deliver the goods. Work out and plan your orders, etc.,
+simply. Morale is the greatest asset an organization can have. Keep
+all your troubles and have the men keep theirs within the company.
+Have _esprit de corps_. The real successful leader knows and plays the
+game.
+
+(g) COMMUNICATIONS.--Communication is maintained by wireless,
+telegraph, telephone, signals, runners, carrier pigeons, aeroplanes,
+motor cars, patrols, and connecting files. Each unit usually maintains
+communication with the next higher command, and with similar commands
+on the flanks.
+
+(h) NIGHT OPERATIONS.--They are used to minimize losses from hostile
+fire, to escape observation, and to gain time. The ground to be
+traversed at night should be carefully looked over in daylight. Some
+distinctive badge should be worn by our troops. The bayonet is chiefly
+used at night. Avoid firing. The enemy should be surprised. Place
+obstacles in front of your own lines at night. Usually 50 yards is the
+maximum range to fire at night.
+
+(i) PATROLS.--"A commander may be excused for being defeated, but
+never for being surprised."
+
+
+PATROLS.
+
+Commander selects leader, strength, gives it a mission, when to report
+back, and where to send messages. He gives it a number if more than
+one patrol is sent out, information of the enemy, and location of any
+friendly patrols that may be or have been sent out. Patrol leader is
+then allowed to ask questions.
+
+_Patrol Leader_.--He should have a compass, watch, pencil, note-book,
+knife, and a map of the country. He should then do the following:
+
+ 1. Assemble his men.
+ 2. Inspect them.
+ a. To see if they are fit for this duty.
+ b. That they have no valuable maps or papers, that their
+ equipment does not rattle or shine.
+ c. Rations and water.
+ 3. He repeats the instruction that he has received.
+ 4. He explains any signals that are to be used.
+ 5. Designates a rallying point in case they are scattered.
+ 6. Details a second in command.
+ 7. Takes a formation that will favor the escape of at least one
+ man.
+
+_Conduct of the Patrol_.--1. Move cautiously but not timidly.
+ 2. Do not flinch or show consciousness of it in case you become
+ suddenly aware that you are under the observation of the enemy.
+ Not knowing that you are aware of his presence he will let you
+ come on, and suddenly, when you see cover, make a dash for it
+ and escape.
+ 3. Do not get lost.
+ 4. Do not allow yourself to think of the enemy as being in one
+ direction only.
+ 5. In entering or passing through woods take an extended skirmish
+ line formation.
+ 6. In passing any short defile bridge or ford, send one man ahead.
+ 7. If you suspect the presence of the enemy under certain cover, a
+ good way to find out is to let one man approach within a
+ reasonable distance and then, acting as though he had been
+ discovered, turn and run. This will generally draw his fire.
+ 8. Keep quiet. Forbid unnecessary talking.
+ 9. From time to time select suitable rallying points in case you
+ become separated.
+ 10. Remember that you do not fight unless in self defense.
+
+_Report_.--1. Do not report the presence of small patrols unless you
+have been ordered to do so. Locate the main body or a large command.
+ 2. Determine his strength, kind of troops and movements.
+ 3. Remember the indispensable qualities of a report are: accuracy
+ as to facts, simplicity, clearness, legibility and correct
+ spelling. Surmises must not be given as facts. Separate what you
+ know and what has been told you. A report should not be
+ expressed carelessly in ten words when it could be clearly
+ stated in twenty. Send a sketch if practicable.
+ 4. Do not send a verbal message.
+ 5. Address it to C.O. Support or C.O. Advance Guard, etc., not to
+ the commander of a certain body of troops. Give date, place and
+ time.
+ 6. Remember to state what you intend to do.
+ 7. In hostile country send two messages by different routes. In
+ friendly country one will suffice.
+ 8. When the capture of your message is likely, give messenger a
+ false one that will be easily found and conceal the true message
+ carefully.
+
+_Return_.--1. Do not return over the same route as you avoid ambuscade
+and widen your field of reconnaissance.
+ 2. Report any special features of military value that you have
+ seen to your C.O.
+ 3. Compliment your men.
+
+(j) _Advance Guard._--"An advance guard is a detachment of the main
+body which precedes it and covers it on the march" (i.d.r. 639). The
+commander of troops designates the advance guard, the distance between
+it and the main body, and also designates a commander. The advance
+guard commander if he has more than a battalion designates the
+reserve, support, distance between them. If the advance guard is a
+battalion or less it would have no reserve, and in that case the
+advance guard commander would designate the support, advance party,
+and the distance between them. In the former case the support
+commander would designate the advance party, and the distance between
+the support and the advance party. In both cases the advance party
+commander designates the point, and the distance between the point and
+the advance party. Usually it is the duty of the advance party to send
+out flank patrols. The strength varies from 1/20 to 1/3 of the main
+body. Remember "the formation of the advance guard must be such that
+the enemy will first be met by a patrol, then in turn by one or more
+larger detachments, each capable of holding the enemy until the next
+in rear has time to deploy before coming under effective fire." The
+advance guard must be aggressive. Do not put up with a cautious point.
+Have a double connecting file, and if possible every 100 yards. "Each
+element of the column sends the necessary connecting files to its
+front." On the road in order are: point--advance
+party--support--reserve (if there is one)--main body. Have the point
+precede the advance party, all the remaining elements follow the one
+ahead. This has been found by experience to be the best method of
+getting "there."
+
+(k) _Rear Guards_.--"A rear guard is a detachment detached to protect
+the main body from attack in the rear." "The general formation is that
+of the advance guard reversed." i.e. rear point, rear party, support,
+and main body. "In retreat a column is preceded by a body of troops
+designated 'leading troops,' whose principle duty is to clear the road
+of obstacles and to facilitate the withdrawal of the command."
+
+(l) _Flank Guards_.--As their name imply protect the flanks. They
+should be in constant communication with the column. Their formation
+usually conforms to that of patrols.
+
+(m) _Camps_.--The four principal factors to be considered in the
+selection of the camp site are: near a good road or roads, have good
+drainage, plenty of room to accommodate your troops, and have a good
+water supply. Immediately after camp is made sinks are dug for the
+disposal of excreta. One should be dug for each company on the
+opposite flank from the kitchen for the disposal of human excreta, and
+one near the kitchen for the disposal of wastes, etc., that cannot be
+burned around the kitchen.
+
+(n) _March Outpost_.--A march outpost is usually an advance guard
+halted, with observers in each unit on the alert. A cossack post
+might be established on a good near by observation point. The march
+outpost is the protection furnished the main body at short halts, or
+on making camp before the outpost is established.
+
+(o) _Outpost_.--The outpost may be best illustrated by circles:
+
+Each support is numbered from right to left. Each outguard in each
+support is numbered from right to left. Each sentinel post in each
+outguard is numbered from right to left. Outguards are divided into
+three classes, cossack posts, sentry squads and packets. A cossack
+post consists of 4 men, 1 posted in observation near the posts of the
+remaining three.
+
+A sentry squad consists of one squad, posts a double sentinel post in
+observation near the post of the squad. A picket consists of two or
+more squads not exceeding half a company. It furnishes cossack posts,
+sentry squads, sentinel posts, and patrols. It is usually placed at
+the more important points of the outguard line, as a road fork, etc.
+The post furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away. There
+should be also a sentinel post near the picket in observation. If the
+outguard consists of two or more companies there is a reserve. The
+reserve is held at some suitable point, where it can readily support
+the line. The reserve maintains connection with the main body and the
+support. The support occupies the line to be held. This line should be
+entrenched. The support maintains communication with its outguards and
+with each support on its flanks. It also sends out the necessary
+reconnoitering patrols. The outguards furnish sentinel posts and
+maintain communication with them, and with the outguards on each
+flank. It is the duty of the support commander to inspect his line and
+make such changes in the outguards as he deems necessary, then to
+report to the outpost commander with a sketch if practicable of his
+line when his dispositions are completed. The outpost commander should
+inspect the line, order such changes as he deems necessary, and
+report with a sketch of the outpost line to the commander of troops
+when his outpost has taken up its position. "The support commander
+must practice the greatest economy on men consistent with the
+requirements of practical security." Instead of using outguards along
+the whole front, part of it may be covered by patrols.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #12 DIAGRAM OF OUTPOST LINE]
+
+Outline of Field Service Regulations.
+
+LAND FORCES OF U.S.
+
+ Regular Army.
+ Organized Land Militia.
+ Volunteer forces.
+
+ How Grouped:
+ Mobile Army.
+ Coast Artillery.
+
+Mobile Army:
+
+For offensive operations against enemy and so requires maximum degree
+of mobility.
+
+Basis of organization the division, a self-contained unit composed of
+all necessary arms and services.
+
+Coast Artillery:
+ (1) Permanent fortifications for defense against naval attack.
+ (2) Semi-permanent fortifications for protection of permanent from
+raiders.
+ (3) Organization of mobile troops to prevent landing of enemy.
+
+
+MILITARY INFORMATION.
+
+Essential:
+ (1) To enable War Department to estimate equipment and size of force
+necessary.
+ (2) To enable commander properly to estimate the situation in the
+field of operations.
+
+
+TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION.
+
+Wire, Signaling, Radio and Messenger:
+ Message.--Concise, written information sent by messenger or wire.
+ Source always given.--"Heard" separated from "seen."
+ Report.--Formal account of some enterprise.
+ War Diary.--Record of events kept in campaigns.
+ Maps.
+
+Reconnaissance:
+ The work of individuals or units in gathering information.
+ To keep contact with the enemy--to be acquainted with the terrain;
+to protect flanks and rear and guard against surprise.
+ Reconnaissance begins on entering theater of operations and lasts
+through campaign.
+ Effected by patrols and air craft.
+
+Indications of enemy:
+ Tracks on road.
+ Abandoned camps and clothing.
+ Infantry, thick, low cloud of dust.
+ Cavalry, high, thin cloud of dust.
+ Artillery and wagons, broken cloud.
+
+Determination of Enemy Forces:
+ Timing past a given point.
+ Cavalry (walk), 110 per minute.
+ Cavalry (trot), 200 per minute.
+ Infantry, 175 per minute.
+ Artillery and wagons, 5 per minute.
+
+Security:
+ Those measures taken to protect a command from enemy observation,
+annoyance and surprise.
+ Obtained by covering the front with detachments.
+ March.--Advance, flank and rear guards.
+ Camp.--Outposts.
+ March and camp detachments.--To give warning and resist attack until
+such time as detachment in rear can deploy.
+
+Advance Guard:
+ Detachment from main body to cover its advance.
+ Against surprise for information.
+ Push back small bodies.
+ Check enemy's advance until deployment in rear.
+ Seize good position and locate enemy lines.
+ Remove obstacles.
+ Strength 1-20 to 1-3 of entire command.
+
+Divisions of Advance Guard:
+ Cavalry point.
+ Infantry point.
+ Advance party.
+ Support.
+ Reserve.
+
+Leading Troops:
+ A detachment protecting the head of a column in retreat.
+
+Rear Guard:
+ Detachments protecting the rear of a retreating column.
+ Formation like that of advance guard.
+
+Flank Patrols:
+ Detachments for protecting the flanks of marching column.
+
+March Outpost:
+ Detachments for protection of column halted on march.
+ Formation, that of the marching protection.
+
+Outpost:
+ The detachments forming the protection for a force in camp or
+bivouac.
+
+Divisions of Outpost:
+ Reserve.
+ Line of supports.
+ Line of outguards.
+ Pickets.
+
+Sentinel Posts:
+ Sentry squads. Cossack posts. Sentinels.
+ Detached posts (from support).
+
+Hours of Special Danger:
+ Evening and dawn; thus good times to relieve outposts.
+
+Examining Post:
+ Intelligence and a place where prisoners, etc., are brought in.
+
+Orders:
+ The expression of the will of a commander, either written or verbal.
+ Letters of instruction--plans of the superior leaders.
+
+Field Orders:
+ Regulate tactical and strategical actions of troops.
+
+General Orders Include:
+ (1) All necessary detailed instructions.
+ (2) All standing instructions (avoid repetition).
+ (3) Proceedings of general and special courts-martial.
+
+Special Orders:
+ Relate to assignment and movement of individuals, not necessary to
+be communicated to the whole command.
+
+ Bearers of verbal orders must _repeat._
+
+Field Orders:
+ (1) Heading.--Title, place, date, hour and number.
+ (2) Distribution of troops.--Division of command.
+ (3) Body:
+ (a) Information of enemy and supporting troops.
+ (b) General plan of commander.
+ (c) Detailed tactical dispositions to carry out general plan.
+ (d) Instructions for trains--also the positions of ammunition
+ and dressing stations.
+ (4) Ending.--Authentication and method of sending.
+
+Marches and Convoys:
+ Successful march.--That which places troops at destination on time,
+and in best possible condition.
+
+Rates of March:
+ Infantry.--2 to 2-1/2 miles per hour.
+ Cavalry.--4 miles (walk), 8 miles (trot), 12 miles (gallop).
+ Artillery.--(Same.)
+
+Average Marches:
+ Infantry.--15-20 miles per day.
+ Cavalry.--25 miles per day.
+ Artillery.--15-20 miles per day.
+ Load of pack mules equals 250 pounds.
+
+March Orders, State:
+ (1) Object of march.
+ (2) Distribution of troops.
+ (3) Order of march of main body.
+ (4) Manner of forming the column.
+
+Halts:
+ First hour, 15 minutes' rest. Each successive hour, a 10-minute
+rest.
+ Weather conditions create exceptions to above rule.
+
+Marches in Peace:
+ (1) Changing station.
+ (2) Practice.
+
+In War:
+ (1) Concentration.
+ (2) In presence of enemy.
+ (3) Forced marches.
+ (4) Night marches.
+
+Convoys (on Land):
+ Those trains by which supplies are forwarded to an army from depots,
+etc., in the rear--also trains bringing supplies collected by
+requisition.
+
+Security Furnished by an Escort:
+ (1) Advance guard.
+ (2) Main body.
+ (3) Flank guard when necessary.
+ (4) Rear guard.
+
+Favorable places for attacking convoys:
+ Through woods defile.
+ Over hedges.
+ Sharp bends.
+ Ascending or descending slopes.
+ Farming corral, watering.
+ Whenever conditions are such that escort cannot quickly prepare for
+defense.
+
+Conducting Prisoners:
+ 10 foot soldiers to every 100 prisoners.
+
+Infantry:
+ The principal arm, charged with the main field work. Its role is
+the role of the entire force and its success is the success of the
+whole force.
+
+Artillery:
+ The close supporting arm of the infantry.
+ Its targets are those most dangerous in the eyes of the infantry.
+
+Cavalry:
+ Reconnaissance--supports the other arms and is valuable in pursuit.
+
+Combat:
+ Offensive.
+ Defensive.
+ (a) Temporary.
+ (b) Passive defense.
+
+Combat Principles:
+ Fire superiority.
+ Unity of command.
+ Simple and direct plans and methods.
+ All troops necessary to mission must be assigned at beginning.
+ Detachments justifiable only when they can contribute directly to
+success of main battle.
+ Some reserves must be kept.
+ Flank protection and reconnaissance.
+
+Fire Superiority:
+ Must be gained early and maintained.
+
+Frontage of Units:
+ Depth in formation for combat rather than extension of line.
+
+Reserves:
+
+Fresh troops must be on hand to
+
+ (1) Give fire line impetus.
+ (2) To penetrate enemy lines.
+ (3) To fill gaps and help reorganization.
+ (4) To meet counter attacks.
+
+Plan of Action:
+ Mission of army is to win battle.
+ Offensive action must be the rule.
+ When enemy is near every available means must be taken to gain
+information, in order to prepare for deployment.
+
+Offensive Combat:
+The attack develops into 2 parts.
+ (1) Assaulting hostile position at selected points.
+ (2) Threaten or assault all other parts of enemy line in order
+to hold enemy from reinforcing operations.
+
+Enveloping Attack:
+ Advantage of converging fire upon position.
+
+Holding Attack:
+ An attack for holding enemy in one place, while assaults made at
+another point.
+
+Assaults:
+ The local concentrated offensive.
+
+Pursuit:
+ Only by energetic pursuit can the full fruit of victory be gleaned.
+Its purpose is to cause the greatest loss in personnel and morale
+possible cavalry and artillery active.
+
+Defensive Combat:
+ Passive defense--to gain time, or to hold certain points pending
+results in other parts of the line.
+ Defense seeking a favorable decision--a parrying of blows while
+seeking a favorable opening.
+ Counter attack the crisis of this form.
+ Counter attack--made by launching reserves at the flank, while the
+enemy is fully committed to the attack.
+
+Defensive Positions:
+ Requisites:
+ Clear field of fire.
+ Flanks naturally secure.
+ Extent of ground suitable to strength of force.
+ Effective corps for reserves.
+ Good lines of retreat.
+ Good communication.
+
+Position in Readiness:
+ A position intended to resist the advance of an enemy in the
+immediate vicinity information of whose movements is not full enough
+to warrant definite action.
+
+Withdrawal From Action:
+ Troops most readily disengaged from the enemy should be withdrawn
+first.
+ Demands highest order of skill in troop leadership.
+ Covering Positions--those positions chosen to cover the retreating
+force.
+ Retreat--a step by step opposition to the enemy's advance on a
+prearranged plan.
+ Delaying actions:
+ 1. Advance delayed as long as possible, consistent with safe
+ withdrawal.
+ 2. Delayers must hold position.
+
+Night Combat:
+ Offensive advisable.
+ 1. Where fire superiority is impossible by day.
+ 2. To avoid heavy losses by advance to assaulting position by
+ day.
+ 3. To capture posts or patrols.
+ 4. To surprise for moral effect.
+
+Defensive:
+ Obstacles in front of position.
+ Trenches heavily manned and supports drawn close.
+
+Shelter:
+ Troops under canvas--in camp.
+ Troops on ground without canvas--bivouac.
+ Troops in huts or villages--cantonment.
+ Tactical considerations are paramount in the selection of camp sites
+in the theater of operations.
+
+Selection of Camp Site:
+ 1. Suitably large to accommodate command.
+ 2. Water supply sufficient and accessible.
+ 3. Good roads to and in camp.
+ 4. Wood and grass forage near at hand.
+ 5. Sandy subsoil for drainage.
+ 6. Hot weather shade--cold protection.
+
+ To maintain the efficiency of a command, troops must have adequate
+shelter.
+
+Sanitary Considerations Around Camp:
+ Latrines on opposite side of camp from kitchens.
+ Short camps, straddle trenches.
+ Long camps, trenches 2 by 6 by 12 with seats.
+ Have latrines screened.
+ Burn the trenches out daily and keep covered.
+ Wash boxes and paint with tar.
+
+
+QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ON F.S.R.
+
+1. How are the land forces of the U.S. organized?
+
+_Ans_.--The _Mobile Army_ consisting of Regular Army, organized land
+militia when called to Federal service, drafted army, volunteers and
+the field artillery and the _Coast Artillery._
+
+Basis of organization is the Division composed of all arms and
+self-sufficient. Several divisions may be grouped into a field army,
+to which are attached field army troops. These are organized into a
+brigade for purpose of supply and administration when necessary
+through numbers.
+
+Coast Artillery is charged with the care and use of land and coast
+fortifications, including submarine mines and torpedo defenses.
+
+2. What is the object of collecting military information?
+
+_Ans_.--To enable the War Department to decide upon the size of army
+or expedition, the proportions of different arms, the character of
+clothing, equipment, etc., needed for any operation.
+
+Information collected by the Gen. Staff in time of peace should
+include geography, physical resources, and military strength of the
+various nations.
+
+3. Define reconnaisance.
+
+_Ans_.--Reconnaisance is used to designate the work of troops or
+individuals when gathering information in the field.
+
+It is necessary during combat for the tactical use of troops.
+
+It is carried on by: (a) aero squadron; (b) independent cavalry; (c)
+divisional cavalry; (d) by infantry as reconnoitering patrols.
+
+4. What are some indications of the presence of the enemy?
+
+_Ans_.--Clothing or material on roads or in abandoned camps.
+
+A thick, low cloud of dust indicates infantry.
+
+A high, thin cloud cavalry.
+
+A broken cloud artillery or wagon trains.
+
+How would you determine from these indications what the number and
+organization of the enemy might be?
+
+_Ans_.--Estimate strength by length of time it takes to pass a given
+point. Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard
+per man, cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per trooper, and artillery
+in single column 20 yards per gun or caisson, a given point would be
+passed in one minute by about: 175 infantry, 110 cavalry at walk, 200
+cavalry at trot, 5 guns or caissons.
+
+5. Suppose on patrol and safely concealed for sighting the enemy at no
+great distance, by what rough method would you ascertain the
+approximate strength of the force assuming it to be composed of
+infantry, cavalry and artillery?
+
+See answer No. 4.
+
+6. What is the composition and arrangement of the advance guard?
+
+_Ans_.--All arms of the service. In open country much cavalry and
+field artillery, the latter seldom assigned to command smaller than a
+brigade. Also machine guns, ambulance company if the force is large
+and engineers for purpose of removing obstacles to the march.
+
+Large command; advance cavalry, support, reserve.
+
+Small command; point, advance party, support, reserve.
+
+Strength should be 1/20 to 1/3, depending on size of command and
+character of terrain.
+
+Advance guard increases in size proportionately with size of command.
+Why?
+
+7. Define: (a) Outguard; they constitute small detachments farthest to
+the front and nearest to the enemy.
+
+(b) Cossack post; observation group at indicated point consisting of
+four men, post single sentinel.
+
+(c) Picket; small command up to platoon placed in line of outguards at
+more important points such as road forks.
+
+8. What is an order?
+
+_Ans_.--Orders are used by commanders of divisions and separate
+brigades for regulating the movement and supply of field trains,
+fixing position of distributing points for rations and forage, in
+short, have to do with supplies of all kinds, especially food.
+
+ Form:
+ The heading.
+ The distribution of troops (in certain orders).
+ The body.
+ The ending.
+
+ The Body contains:
+ 1. Information about the enemy and our supporting troops.
+ 2. General plan of the commander.
+ 3. Disposition of the troops.
+ 4. Instructions for the trains.
+ 5. Where the commander may be found or messages are to be sent.
+
+9. During an advance what is the general order of advance of a column?
+
+_Ans_.--Cavalry and horse artillery.
+ Infantry and light artillery.
+ Engineering and signal troops.
+ Trains.
+
+10. What is the average march per day of various arms?
+
+_Ans_.--Infantry, 15 miles per day.
+ Infantry in large bodies, 12 miles per day.
+ Cavalry, 25 miles per day.
+ Field artillery, 15 to 20 miles per day.
+ Horse artillery, same as cavalry, to which it may be attached.
+
+Forced marches are from 28 to 30 miles for infantry.
+
+11. How is the escort distributed in guarded convoys?
+
+_Ans._--Advance guard, with advance cavalry 3 to 5 miles ahead.
+
+Main body may be opposite most important point of the train, usually
+opposite its center.
+
+Section of infantry at head and tail of train.
+
+Flank guard--if necessary.
+
+Rear guard--1/6 of escort.
+
+What places are most favorable for attacking convoy?
+
+When passing through woods, defile, or over bridge, when going around
+sharp bends in the road; when convoy is forming corral.
+
+12. Discuss uses of the various arms in combat.
+
+_Ans._--Infantry: The most important arm, charged with the main work
+of the battle.
+
+Artillery: Supporting arm of infantry. Its target is the opposing arm
+most dangerous to the infantry.
+
+Cavalry: Reconnaisance before combat, support of other arms during
+combat.
+
+13. What is the difference between the attack and the assault?
+
+_Ans._--In combat where the force is as large or larger than a
+division, a simultaneous advance against the entire hostile front is
+out of the question. Attack is made up of a number of local combats.
+Some where enemy is engaged with view to driving him out. This is
+called the assault. Other parts of attack with fewer troops simply to
+keep the enemy from coming to the support of those troops of the
+assaulted lines. The entire advance against the enemy is the attack.
+
+After the firing lines have advanced some distance the weak and the
+strong points of the enemy's lines are disclosed. The weak points of
+course are selected.
+
+14. Discuss the manner in which a pursuit should be carried out?
+
+_Ans._--If enemy commences withdrawal before front lines have given
+way, troops in action push forward until enemy in their front are
+driven away. Cavalry and horse artillery are thrown against flanks of
+retreating enemy, or on their front. Purpose to further disorganize
+the enemy, beat him to bridges, defiles, etc. In meantime reserve is
+sent into the pursuit, while troops engaged are assembling to
+constitute a new reserve. General scheme is to keep in continuous
+contact with enemy, giving him no chance to reorganize. Boldness
+necessary.
+
+15. What are the different kinds of defense, and what is the purpose
+of each?
+
+_Ans._--(a) Passive; to retain position for specified time with or
+without combat, or to prevent enemy from carrying position.
+
+(b) Defense seeking favorable decision; troops forced temporarily to
+assume the defensive, with intention of assuming the offensive at
+first favorable opportunity.
+
+16. What is the purpose of the counter attack?
+
+_Ans._--To win victory, stave off defeat or prevent lines from being
+entered. It may be launched either at the enemy's strong or weak
+points depending on conditions. If enemy are beaten off and
+disorganized at some point, it may be good opportunity to follow up
+the advantage by counter attack. Also at other points where weakness
+develops. Counter attack is made at strength of enemy to prevent him
+from penetrating the defensive position.
+
+17. How should advance position be organized and held?
+
+_Ans._--Force should not be so weak that it can be driven back to main
+body before it accomplishes its purpose, nor so strong that it will
+hold out too long, thereby committing the entire force to action in
+advance line instead of the line selected.
+
+Trenches. What is position in readiness?
+
+Troops placed in readiness for action where it is intended to resist
+the advance of enemy in immediate vicinity, but knowledge of his
+movements not yet sufficiently definite to decide upon plan of action.
+Preliminary to taking up offensive, or more usually to taking up and
+occupying defensive position. Hasten deployment when time comes.
+
+18. If it becomes necessary to withdraw troops from action state steps
+necessary to insure the safety of troops during the withdrawal and
+retreat.
+
+_Ans._--Last reserves should be used. If none, troops least pressed
+used to cover withdrawal. Cavalry and artillery used unsparingly.
+Depends on the terrain. First covering position well to the rear so as
+not to suffer demoralization. On flanks of line of retreat. There
+should also be facilities to withdraw the occupying force. Firing line
+made as strong as possible, minimum of reserves held. Use M.G. Perhaps
+successive covering points necessary further to rear before advance of
+enemy can be checked. When a few miles to the rear, or far enough to
+free troops from all contact with the enemy, reorganize. Step-by-step
+opposition useless. Number of covering positions should be reduced to
+the minimum.
+
+Retreat; trains at once put into march. Other forces at once put into
+order of march. All roads used, separate roads for divisions.
+
+Effective rear guard from troops whose strength and morale is least
+impaired.
+
+Divisional cavalry and as much artillery as can effectively be used.
+Use artillery at long range to keep the enemy deployed, destroy
+bridges, etc.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 9.
+
+Feeding Men.
+
+
+IN CAMP.--You will usually have plenty of food but continual
+inspecting is necessary to have it properly cared for, prepared and
+served. The kitchen must be kept clean: company commanders inspect
+daily and insist on the following:
+
+ 1. Have cooks and enlisted men come to attention at the command of
+the first man who sees you approach.
+ 2. Have all refrigerators opened, and put your head in far enough
+to detect any bad odors.
+ 3. Check the bill of fare and see that food not consumed one day is
+utilized later--waste bread for bread pudding, for example.
+ 4. See that doors close properly, that windows are screened and roof
+is tight--allow no flies.
+ 5. Have floors, tables and refrigerators scrubbed daily.
+ 6. Have the ground around the mess shack raked and thoroughly
+policed. Towels hung out to dry must be so hung as not to fall to the
+ground. Raked ground does not allow flies to build undisturbed.
+ 7. Taste the coffee and look in the coffee bins.
+ 8. Inspect pans, knives, meat grinder (have latter taken apart for
+you occasionally).
+ 9. See that the mess sergeant looks after the incinerator properly;
+that he makes the cooks use what he tells them to. Cooks should not be
+allowed to help themselves to things; the mess sergeant should weigh
+out or set out just what is to be used each day.
+ 10. Have the food served hot and in individual portions as far as
+possible; see that the food is not put on the table too soon.
+ 11. During each month talk with an old soldier, a raw recruit and a
+non-commissioned officer about the mess to see what the men think of
+it.
+
+ON THE MARCH.--(1. i.d.r., 669-673.)
+
+If portable kitchens accompany troops, the men should fall in in
+single file and be helped to food as they pass by in companies.
+
+FOR INDIVIDUAL COOKING.--Rations issued might be: 1 carton of
+hard-tack, 1 ration of bacon, 1 potato, 2 tablespoons of rice, 1
+heaping tablespoon of coffee, sugar.
+
+Fires for individual cooking are best made out of small dried twigs to
+produce a hot fire large enough for a group of four men.
+
+There are two methods of cooking with the issue mess-kit.
+
+First Method: Each man cooking for himself. As there are but two
+cooking utensils, the tin cup and the frying pan, the cooking must be
+systematized in order to cook four articles on the two utensils. To do
+this, the rice is first cooked in the tin cup filling the tin cup
+one-third full of water throwing in the rice. The water is brought to
+a boil and boiled until the individual grains of rice are soft
+through. The tin cup is then removed from the fire, the water poured
+off, and the cup covered with the lid of the mess tin, the rice being
+allowed to steam. In the meantime, the bacon should be fried in the
+frying pan, the grease being saved. When the rice is well steamed, it
+is turned out in the lid of the meat can, then the bacon placed on top
+of it. The tin cup is washed out and the man is then ready to fry his
+potato and boil his coffee. The cup is filled two-thirds full of water
+and the coffee placed in it and boiled until the desired strength is
+attained. To prevent the coffee from boiling over, a canteen of water
+should be handy and water thrown in whenever the coffee begins to boil
+over. When the coffee is strong enough, the addition of cold water
+will settle the grounds. In the meantime, cut the potatoes very thin
+and fry them in the bacon grease and the meal is ready: hard-tack,
+potatoes, rice, bacon and coffee.
+
+Second Method: Squads of four may specialize; one man to collect the
+frying pans and fry all the bacon, another the potatoes, another the
+rice and coffee, and the other for collection of wood. Either method
+may be followed.
+
+Mess-kits should be cleaned immediately after using, sand being used
+for scouring. Mess-kits must be cleaned thoroughly.
+
+IN THE TRENCHES.--Usually rations and stores will be carried up to the
+trenches by the supports and the reserves. If this is not possible and
+it becomes necessary that men from the front line trenches be
+employed, not more than 10 per cent of the men in the firing line are
+to be away from the trenches at the same time.
+
+RATIONS AND COOKING:
+
+(a) Ration parties from the support and reserve trenches will be made
+up in complete units, _i.e._, platoons or companies.
+
+(b) The company mess sergeant will accompany the ration parties for
+his company and will report his arrival to the company commander.
+
+(c) Great care is to be taken that ration and carrying parties make as
+little noise as possible.
+
+(d) Cooking if possible will be done behind the front line trenches,
+and should be concentrated by sections or companies. Steps must be
+taken to insure that as little smoke as possible is made by the cook's
+fires.
+
+(e) Waste in any form will be discouraged.
+
+(f) Arrangements should be made to insure that soup or some hot drink
+be available for the men between midnight and 7 a.m.
+
+Each company commander must see that timely requisitions for rations
+are made and to have no delays at meal times. Food should be brought
+up in tin boilers about the size of wash boilers so that two men can
+handle one of them easily without a relief. In front line, men send
+mess kit relayed from hand to hand to these boilers at stations in
+each platoon or section and they are relayed back. Sometimes men in
+the front line are relieved for a few minutes. Always carry 24 hours
+rations.
+
+
+Camping and Camp Sanitation.
+
+GENERAL PRINCIPLES:
+
+Great care must be exercised in selecting a camp site, but it must
+never be forgotten that the tactical situation is of paramount
+importance.
+
+The following principles govern the selection:
+ (1) Sufficient supply of pure water.
+ (2) Good roads, but not too near a main highway on account of dust
+ and noise.
+ (3) Wood and forage must be obtainable.
+
+ The ground should:
+ (1) Give ample room without crowding.
+ (2) Have porous soil.
+ (3) Have high elevation to make site dry.
+
+ Avoid:
+ (1) Marshy ground and mosquitoes.
+ (2) Woods or dense vegetation.
+ (3) Ravines or depressions in terrain or dry stream beds subject to
+ sudden freshets.
+
+ Water must be obtainable:
+ (1) Arrange immediately where to obtain
+ (a) Drinking and cooking water.
+ (b) Water for animals.
+ (c) Water for bathing and washing.
+ In the case of running water, the point furthest up-stream shall be
+guarded for drinking and cooking water. Bathing shall be done at a
+point furthest down-stream.
+
+Successful military camping depends upon three (3) things:
+ (1) Discipline.
+ (2) Cooking.
+ (3) Sanitation.
+
+Discipline means control; it means order. Nowhere are these more
+essential. Confusion is loss of control, loss of time, and loss of
+respect by the men.
+
+Upon arrival at a favorable camp site get the men off their feet. Do
+not wait around. As C.O. have your decisions made and the work
+organized, so that each squad will be under a leader. Keep squads
+together, allowing none to stray off until the work is done, then let
+everyone rest except the sentinels.
+
+Do not omit to post sentinels over the water supply and at important
+points, even though you have not decided upon the exact location of
+camp.
+
+Organize the work by platoons or squads and rotate, if camp is to be
+made every few days.
+
+Discipline in camp means more than order and dispatch, however, men
+must understand that they are under discipline when off duty--that
+they cannot disregard sanitary measures, eat promiscuously, destroy
+property, vegetation, or timber and must police the grounds at all
+times. Papers, cigarette butts, and newspapers, should never be
+allowed on the ground near camp. Eatables should never be kept in
+tents to draw vermin. Where possible, in dry weather, the company
+street should be wet down to keep the dust out of the tents. Have men
+ditch around tents immediately upon making camp. Though it may seem
+somewhat of a hardship, a sudden down pour of rain, will recompense
+them for this labor many times over. In ditching the tents, completely
+circle them, for if this is not done a great deal of rain will come in
+the front of the tent.
+
+Food means everything to a soldier. The camp cooking is a barometer of
+the organized efficiency and of the enlisted men's attitude. Nothing
+else can do so much to help or hinder.
+
+The Company Commander should realize the controlling power exercised
+by the company cook and keep the matter in his own hands. He should
+accept no excuse for burnt or dirty food.
+
+If officers mess with their companies they will appreciate the
+attitude of the men and be able to judge the real situation. Officers
+will be well repaid for doing this, as it gives them an idea of the
+food that is being served their men.
+
+In the mechanical details of preparing food, the fire is of first
+importance. A quick method of cooking is by laying a pair of large
+green logs on the surface of the ground just wide enough to place the
+pots between them, so that the bottom of the pots will be resting upon
+them. Build a fire between these logs, making sure to place the logs
+parallel to the direction of the wind.
+
+A pit may be dug, with a sloping bottom, and across this may be placed
+the pots, and if iron rails are available, the utensils may be placed
+on these. For longer stays this pit may be lined with stone. Stones
+retain the heat and less wood is required. Four trenches radiating
+from a central chimney will give one flue whatever may be the
+direction of the wind. (For more specific data on the subject of fires
+and camp cooking, see Manual for Army Cooks--U.S.A.--also notes in
+i.d.r., pp. 154-155.)
+
+Make a rule never to allow food to remain in tin cans after opening
+them. Remember to place kitchen near available water supply and
+furthest from latrines, horse picket lines, or dumps of any kind.
+
+Sanitation comes last in the thoughts of the enlisted man, but it is
+no less important for that.
+
+The first requisite is cleanliness. Food receptacles must be scoured
+and covers and cracks in tin ware scraped as well as scalding the tins
+themselves. Have boiling hot water in tanks (galvanized iron ash cans
+are good) for men to wash mess kits in after meals. One can should
+contain soapy water so as to cut the grease from the dishes, and the
+second tank should contain clean, boiling water for scalding the kits.
+Scraps of food should be scraped from the mess tins before immersing
+them in water, otherwise washing water becomes filled with small
+particles of food. Wiping cloths will greatly add to the convenience
+of the men and takes but a short time to make them clean and fit for
+use again.
+
+Care must be exercised over three kinds of waste:
+ (1) Garbage.
+ (2) Kitchen slops.
+ (3) Excreta.
+
+Garbage can be burned in the kitchen fires. It should never stand
+exposed to the air, but should be tightly covered in iron cans, and
+should be disposed of every twenty-four hours. Kitchen help have an
+aversion to prompt disposal of garbage and need watching. Fly traps
+should be made of muslin and used freely about the kitchen.
+
+Kitchen slops, fats, greasy water, etc., must be drained into covered
+pits, never allowing them to be tossed on the ground around the cook
+tent. A hole dug and partially filled with stones with a barrel placed
+upside down on them, makes a very good receptacle for kitchen slops.
+The barrel should be placed so that the inverted top will be a little
+way beneath the surface of the ground. A hole should be bored in the
+bottom of the barrel and a funnel inserted, through which the slops
+may be poured. If the soil is porous, a trough may be dug and covered
+with mosquito netting or cheese cloth, and the water poured through
+this and allowed to drain off.
+
+Excreta is the most deadly form of waste, and too much care cannot be
+exercised in disposing of it. Impress upon every man that he must
+cover completely with dirt all excreta so that flies may not have a
+chance to approach it.
+
+For short stops and while working in the field "straddle," latrines
+are the best. These are shallow trenches the width of a shovel, about
+12 inches wide, and several feet in length. For long stops a deep
+latrine is dug of the following dimensions: 2 feet wide, 6 feet deep
+by 15 feet long. Two posts with crotches, driven at the ends of this
+trench, supporting a substantial pole to make a seat * * * for
+convenience a hand rail placed in front of this improvised seat will
+add to the comfort of the men.
+
+A more permanent latrine is made by covering the pit with a wooden
+box, in the top of which are cut holes of the necessary diameter. To
+these holes should be fitted spring covers which will shut down
+tightly. A wooden frame boarded around this arrangement makes a
+satisfactory enclosure.
+
+A urinal made of two long boards joined together to form a V-shaped
+trough and drained by a pipe into the pit completes the whole. A pitch
+sufficient for rapid drainage should be given the urinal trough.
+
+When necessary to utilize separate urinals, a hole filled with stone
+and sprinkled daily with quicklime is sufficient for short periods. At
+night there should be a galvanized iron can placed in each company
+street and emptied before reveille each morning. This can must be
+disinfected by burning out, as must be the latrines when earth or sand
+is not used as a covering each time.
+
+Pits must be covered daily with quicklime, ashes, earth and filled
+when within two (2) feet of the surface. Their position should be
+distinctly marked so as to prevent reopening.
+
+It is a safe rule never to use an old camp ground, but select a new
+one, even if less conveniently located. Camp sites should be changed
+if it is found that the soil is becoming polluted, or if the ground is
+cut up and dusty from constant use.
+
+The condition in which a camp site is left by an organization will
+clearly indicate the efficiency and discipline in a command.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 10.
+
+Personal Hygiene and First Aid.
+
+
+This is a purely arbitrary grouping of topics for the purpose of
+saving space. Either of the topics mentioned could be treated at
+length; detailed information will be found in any of the reference
+books mentioned in the bibliography.
+
+PERSONAL HYGIENE means "the preservation of health by attention to the
+care of the body;" it is determined by the formation of correct
+habits. Cleanliness of person, clothing and bedding should become a
+habit of life with the soldier; but some men will always require
+watching and admonition. These habits are: personal cleanliness;
+regulation of diet; avoidance of excesses (eating, drinking and sexual
+matters); wearing suitable clothing; keeping the bodily processes at
+work (kidneys, bowels and skin); taking sufficient exercise,
+preferably in the open air; rest of body and mind, with recreation for
+the latter; maintaining the surroundings in which one lives in a
+cleanly state.
+
+BATHING is easily the most important requirement in matters of
+personal hygiene; men should bathe as often as conditions of life in
+barracks and camp will permit. On the march a vigorous "dry rub" with
+a coarse towel will often prove an excellent substitute when water is
+not available. _Teeth_ should be cleaned at least twice daily.
+_Clothing_ should be kept clean, particularly underclothing. _Diet_ is
+not a matter which a soldier can determine to any extent for himself;
+but he can follow a certain few precautions:
+
+ 1. Don't eat hurriedly; chew the food properly.
+ 2. Don't overload the stomach.
+ 3. Don't eat green or overripe fruit.
+ 4. Don't eat anything while away from camp or barracks, whose
+materials or manner of preparation seem questionable.
+ 5. Don't bring a "grouch" to the table with you.
+ 6. Don't eat on the march; don't drink too much water on the march.
+
+SEXUAL INDULGENCE is a matter to be handled tactfully, but with
+absolute frankness. Men should be taught that it is not a matter of
+necessity; that their health will not suffer by any lack of it; that
+they themselves will be the sufferers for any violations of rules of
+health. The procedure directed by the War Department for purposes of
+combatting infection is as follows:
+
+1. That physical inspections of enlisted men be made twice each month
+for the detection of venereal disease.
+
+2. That any soldier who exposes himself to infection shall report for
+cleansing and preventive treatment immediately upon return to camp or
+garrison.
+
+3. That any soldier who fails so to report, if found to be suffering
+from a venereal infection, shall be brought to trial by court martial
+for neglect of duty.
+
+4. That men so infected shall be confined strictly to the limits of
+the post during the infectious stages of the disease.
+
+5. That all officers serving with troops shall do their utmost to
+encourage healthful exercises and physical recreation and to supply
+opportunities for cleanly social and interesting mental occupations
+for the men under their command.
+
+6. That company and medical officers shall take advantage of favorable
+opportunities to point out the misery and disaster that follow upon
+moral uncleanliness; and the fact that venereal disease is never a
+trivial affair.
+
+With a great many men these precautions and measures will not be
+necessary but for the sake of those who are ignorant or neglectful,
+proper steps should at all times be taken.
+
+EXERCISE.--A sufficient amount of exercise to maintain health is
+ordinarily provided by military drills and other duties requiring
+active movement. But this should be regarded only as the minimum of
+exercise; athletic work should be encouraged (and this will be done by
+the present activities of those "higher up"); bayonet training will be
+found an excellent medium of accomplishing a double purpose;
+calisthenics should be short but snappy and vigorous. A vigorous
+policy of an officer as regards things of this sort will ward off a
+great many minor ills and particularly "colds," which are often the
+result of poor ventilation.
+
+CLEANLINESS OF SURROUNDINGS.--Men should be taught that cleanliness of
+surroundings is not merely for purposes of inspection; but that it is
+absolutely necessary where a great number of men are living together
+in close quarters. Quarters should be well policed; the company street
+should be kept clean; refuse of all sorts should be kept in
+receptacles provided for that purpose and frequently removed. A police
+squad appointed daily should be charged with this work, and the
+corporal of the same made responsible for the condition of quarters
+and the company street.
+
+PREVENTABLE DISEASES.--Men should be given a certain amount of
+theoretical knowledge of preventable diseases. These matters will be
+taken care of to a large extent by the Medical Corps; but men should
+be taught just what precautions are necessary to avoid recourse to the
+hospital.
+
+VENEREAL diseases have already been touched upon.
+
+TYPHOID FEVER is a germ disease and communicable. Vaccination is the
+first preventive; protection of water supply is the second; thorough
+disposal of wastes is a third; and sharp punishment for violation of
+sanitary regulations is a fourth. Habits of personal cleanliness will
+do much to prevent any such disease.
+
+DYSENTERY is very common in field service, but may be prevented by
+same methods as for typhoid fever, save for vaccination; men suffering
+from this malady should be isolated, if possible, and utmost
+precaution taken to prevent spread of the disease.
+
+MALARIA is a mosquito disease; get rid of mosquitoes and then you will
+get rid of the carrier of the germs. Quinine may act as a preventive.
+Cases should be isolated, if possible.
+
+TONSILITIS AND COLDS may be combatted very effectively by proper
+precautions as to ventilation.
+
+MEASLES.--Very important but little known; isolation recommended.
+
+There are many other diseases concerning which the men should be
+instructed, but lack of space prevents further treatment of them. They
+should be taught the proper treatment of blistered feet, for they
+incapacitate a great many men; the chief causes are ill-fitting shoes
+and our old friend "uncleanliness." Shoes are the most important
+article of clothing of the infantryman; each man should have one pair
+well broken in for marching, and two other pairs. Socks should be
+soft, smooth and without holes--also _clean_. Further steps for the
+prevention of blisters are; hardening of the skin by appropriate baths
+for the feet; soaping the feet; or adopting some other means of
+reducing the friction of the foot against the sock. _Treatment_--Wash
+the feet; open the blister at the lowest point, with a clean needle;
+dress with vaseline or other ointment and protect with adhesive
+plaster, care being taken not to shut out the air. Zinc oxide plaster
+is excellent. Sterilize a needle; thread it with a woolly thread and
+run it through blister, leaving ends projecting about one-half inch;
+this will act as a wick and dry up blister in short time.
+
+FIRST AID.--Explain to the men the uses of the first aid packet and of
+the pouch carried by the Medical Corps. (This pouch is being replaced
+by web-belts with pockets.)
+
+WOUNDS may be classed as ordinary cuts, inside wounds, lacerated,
+punctured and poisoned wounds. For ordinary minor wounds--iodine and
+exposure to the air are usually sufficient. _War wounds_ are usually
+caused by something having an explosive effect and may be accompanied
+by hemorrhage, shock and even loss of function; they may be arterial
+or venous.
+
+POISONED WOUNDS are of two sorts; external and internal.
+
+DIAGNOSIS TAG.--This tag placed on a soldier shows wound, name, rank,
+regiment, treatment received, etc. This tag should be carefully read
+before further treatment is accorded.
+
+TREATMENT OF WOUNDS.--The compress, of the first aid packet will
+always prove of help.
+
+BLEEDING WOUNDS.--The bandage of the first aid packet will stop all
+ordinary bleeding; but in aggravated cases the bleeding may be stopped
+by pressure on the artery, between the wound and the heart. This may
+be done by hand or by means of the forceps in the medical pouch. The
+points of compression should be learned and located; in front of the
+ear just above the socket of the jaw; in the neck in front of the
+strongly marked muscle reaching from behind the ear to the upper part
+of the breast bone; in the hollow behind the collar bone; just behind
+the inner border of the larger muscle of the arm; the femoral artery
+at the middle of the groin where the artery passes over the bone.
+Bleeding may also be stopped to some extent by elevating the wounded
+part. A tourniquet may be improvised by using the compress, running a
+stick or the bayonet through the band, and taking up the slack by
+twisting.
+
+POISONED WOUNDS.--For a _snakebite_ make a tight constriction just
+above the wound; make an incision at the bite and suck out the poison.
+_Do it quickly_. If this is impossible, follow the same plan but give
+a stimulant; repeatedly loosen the constriction and let a little of
+the poison into the system at a time to be neutralized. In cases of
+chemical poisoning do not follow the usual method of treating
+poisoning. _Do not make the patient vomit_, but give him something fat
+or albuminous such as raw eggs or milk. This forms mercurial
+albuminate. _Ptomaine_ poisoning (symptoms are headache, cramps,
+nausea, high fever and chills, etc.). Drink salt water, vomit and
+repeat the procedure to clean out the stomach. A purgative should also
+be taken. Ice cream and milk kept too long are frequent causes of this
+sort of poisoning, as are dishes kept in the icebox over night.
+
+FAINTING, HEAT EXHAUSTION AND SHOCK are all of the same class;
+symptoms are the same--weak pulse, paleness and low temperature,
+tendency to fall to ground. Often follows taking too much water on the
+march. Treatment should be in nature of stimulant; make patient lie
+down, get blood to his head, wrap him in blankets, give him hot
+drinks, etc.
+
+SUNSTROKE.--Symptoms and treatment are different. Patient has a high
+temperature. Keep his head high and feet low; disrobe him and pour
+cold water on him; keep him in a cool place until temperature lowers
+to 101; then remove cold water and temperature will go down itself. Do
+not apply cold water too long as the temperature may go to sub-normal
+which is just as dangerous as a temperature abnormally high.
+
+BURNS AND SCALDS.--Air should be shut out; otherwise treat like
+blister, care being taken not to remove skin. Do not put on anything
+that will stick and do not try to remove anything that has a tendency
+to stick; put on linseed oil and water, cotton and a loose bandage.
+
+FREEZING AND FROSTBITES.--Use ice water and snow to start with. Keep
+the patient cool until he is thawed out. Massage and gradually work up
+to a warmer temperature.
+
+FRACTURES are of three kinds; simple, compound and comminuted.
+
+ Simple: Bones do not penetrate the skin (may be single or double).
+ Compound: Bones penetrate the skin and cause infection.
+ Comminuted: Bone is shattered.
+
+Indications of a fracture are: Pain, redness, swelling and mobility
+where it ought not to be.
+
+TREATMENT.--Find out the kind of fracture. Paint the wound and put on
+first aid packet; replace the clothes and splint the break. Splints
+should not be too long so as to cause any friction or annoyance to the
+patient. They may be made out of any available material, such as
+rifle, bayonet, shingle, piece of board, scabbard, etc. Bind them
+firmly but not too tightly.
+
+ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION.--This subject is worthy of more treatment than
+it can be accorded here. Any text on first aid will explain thoroughly
+the Schaefer method, which is now the standard method in the army.
+Points to be remembered in this method are; remove foreign articles
+from the mouth; curl the little finger over the 12th rib; avoid the
+pelvic bones; hold the arms straight and apply the pressure by means
+of the whole body brought forward; take care not to break a rib; do
+not give up too soon.
+
+TRENCH FOOT.--This is due to long standing with legs and feet in wet
+clothes. There are three types:
+
+ Mild: Symptoms are numbness and a slight swelling.
+ Medium: Additional symptom of a bluing of the leg; also large
+blisters.
+ Severe: Gangrene sets in.
+
+Tight clothes help to bring on these things. Keep the shoes, socks and
+breeches loose; keep the clothes dry; furnish the men with hot food in
+the trenches and so keep up the circulation. _Do not use grease_.
+Trench foot can be avoided by proper treatment, and punishment should
+follow upon its contraction.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 11.
+
+Signaling.
+
+
+This chapter proposes to cover a large amount of ground in a small
+compass; hence treatment must be brief. A more liberal treatment will
+be found at different sources; here a few suggestions and hints will
+be given.
+
+SEMAPHORE.--Time spent, 61 hours: 6 sessions 1/2 hours, 1 session 1
+hour, 1 conference 2 hours. It is easy to say "just learn the
+semaphore," but to learn it quickly and well is another matter. A few
+suggestions as to the methods followed by others will usually prove
+helpful. Learn the semaphore by what may be called the "cycle" method,
+_i.e._, teach and illustrate how the successive letters are formed by
+moving the arm or arms around the body in a clockwise direction
+through successive stages. There are a few exceptions to the rule as
+will be pointed out; but they only serve as a few landmarks and help
+to fix the whole matter more firmly in mind.
+
+FIRST CYCLE.--1 arm. A to G. One arm always at the interval. Be sure
+to make the "D" with right arm straight overhead--then it is more
+distinct at a distance. (Plate.)
+
+SECOND CYCLE.--2 arms. H to N, inclusive, with exception of J. One arm
+always in the A position. In making I always be sure that the left
+hand is at the A position. Some men insist in making this letter wrong
+by crossing the body with the left hand uppermost. This is very
+awkward and also very indistinct at a distance. P changes arms but
+retains same relative position of flags.
+
+THIRD CYCLE.--2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U
+actually resembles that letter.
+
+THIRD CYCLE.--2 arms. O to S. One arm always in B position. In letter
+O, left arm is in B position; in all others, right arm.
+
+FOURTH CYCLE.--2 arms. T and U. Right arm in position of C. Letter U
+actually resembles that letter.
+
+DOUBLES.--L, U, R, N. These letters are keys to many others and should
+be promptly learned.
+
+OPPOSITES.--V and K, O and W, Q and Y, S and M, Z and H, X and I, M
+follows L in cycle and is opposite of S, S follows E in cycle and is
+opposite of M, K precedes L in cycle and is opposite of V. Figures are
+first 10 letters of alphabet, preceded by crossing flags overhead.
+
+INSTRUCTING.--This plan of teaching the semaphore will be found very
+helpful, for it helps to reason out the alphabet for the student. By
+fixing firmly in mind a few things the student can soon reason out the
+alphabet for himself by a very logical plan.
+
+SECOND STEP.--After the men have been taught the alphabet they should
+either pair off and one man send to the other, or one man should be
+selected to send for the entire class. At first only letters should be
+sent until the men have learned the alphabet thoroughly. In this way
+the key characters of the alphabet can be fixed in mind, as well as
+their relation to the other letters.
+
+THIRD STEP.--The men should next be paired off and instructed to send
+simple messages to each other. You should insist that there be no
+other communication between the men than by means of their flags.
+
+FOURTH STEP.--Proceed to simple qualification tests, four men working
+in two pairs and the pairs alternating in sending and receiving. One
+man of first pair should read for his companion to send. On the other
+end, one man should read and the other copy. The distances should be
+such as to preclude the possibility of conversation. Forty letters per
+minute is a fair test; or this system may be followed: Have a good
+signalman send 10 combinations of 5 letters each to the whole class.
+The men should read these and write them down, _one combination at a
+time_. Time limit should be 3 minutes.
+
+[Illustration: Plate 13]
+
+WIG WAG.--Time spent: Same as semaphore course. The alphabet can be
+found in any standard signal book, or in the "Manual for
+Non-Commissioned Officers and Privates." The dots are made to the
+right of the body, the dashes to the left; interval at the end of a
+word by dipping the flag once to the front, at the end of a sentence
+by dipping it twice, and at the end of a message by dipping it three
+times. The alphabet should be learned first according to the same
+general plan as in the semaphore; _i.e._, the key letters to certain
+combinations should first be learned. The following grouping of
+letters may be found helpful:
+
+E I S H; T M O; A U V; N D B; R F L; K C Y; W P J; G Z Q.
+
+The instructor can find many other groupings that will aid him. It
+should also be pointed out that each number from one to ten consists
+of five characters, and that each succeeding number follows the
+previous one according to a regular method.
+
+After the men have studied the alphabet sufficiently, have them send
+to each other, limiting the work at first to letters only. Then
+gradually work up to the point where they may send simple messages.
+Make them rely upon the flags for communicating during the practice.
+Do not permit conversation--separate the men by a considerable
+distance. In both wig wag and semaphore instruction the same plan
+should be followed as in teaching a foreign language; _i.e._, confine
+all communication to the medium under study. Qualification tests are
+similar to those for the semaphore, except that less speed can be
+exacted; 15 characters per minute or 10 combinations of 5 letters each
+to be received and written down in 5 minutes.
+
+In both the semaphore and the wig wag men should be taught the
+conventional signals used in field work. These can be found in any
+manual on the subject.
+
+
+POINTS TO REMEMBER.
+
+The semaphore is a quicker means of communication than the wig wag;
+but the wig wag can be used in a prone position under shelter.
+
+Lanterns can be used at night for semaphoring.
+
+Acetylene lamps can be used at night in place of the wig wag. In this
+case a short flash represents a dot, a long flash a dash.
+
+A few men in each company should be developed into expert signalers;
+some men always show aptitude for this sort of thing.
+
+Frequent use should be made of signaling in field work.
+
+
+Letter Codes.
+
+INFANTRY.
+
+For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.
+
+--------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
+ Letter of | If signaled from the rear | If signaled from the firing
+ alphabet | to the firing line | line to the rear
+--------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
+ AM | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required.
+ CCC | Charge (mandatory at | Am about to charge if
+ | all times). | no instructions to the
+ | | contrary.
+ CF | Cease firing | Cease firing.
+ DT | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush."
+ F | Commence firing. |
+ FB | Fix bayonets. |
+ FL | Artillery fire is causing |
+ | us losses. |
+ G | Move forward. | Preparing to move forward.
+ HHH | Halt. |
+ K | Negative. |
+ LT | Left. |
+ O | What is the (R.N., etc.)? | What is the (R.N., etc.)?
+ (Ardois and | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.
+ semaphore | |
+ only). | |
+ | |
+ ..--.. | What is the (R.N., etc.)? | What is the (R.N., etc.)?
+ (All methods | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.
+ but Ardois | |
+ and | |
+ semaphore). | |
+ P | Affirmative. | Affirmative.
+ RN | Range. | Range.
+ RT | Right. | Right.
+ SSS | Support going forward. | Support needed.
+ SUF | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing.
+ T | Target. | Target
+--------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
+
+
+Arm Signals.
+
+The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals either arm
+may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing line "retreat
+back" at once to prevent misunderstandings.
+
+FORWARD MARCH.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
+the arm horizontally, thrusting it in direction of march. This signal
+is also used to execute quick time from double time.
+
+HALT.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and hold
+the arm vertically.
+
+DOUBLE TIME, MARCH.--Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
+the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.
+
+SQUADS RIGHT, MARCH.--Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
+between the vertical and horizontal positions.
+
+SQUADS LEFT, MARCH.--Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
+it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
+downward and horizontal positions.
+
+SQUADS RIGHT ABOUT, MARCH (if in close order) or, TO THE REAR, MARCH
+(if in skirmish line).--Extend the arm vertically above the head;
+carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several times
+between the vertical and downward positions.
+
+CHANGE DIRECTION OR COLUMN RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.--The hand on the side
+toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried across
+the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a
+horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction.
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE CENTER, MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally until
+horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
+to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+As SKIRMISHERS, GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT), MARCH.--Raise both arms laterally
+until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
+the horizontal position: swing the other upward until vertical and
+return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.
+
+ASSEMBLE, MARCH.--Raise the arm vertically to its full extent and
+describe horizontal circles.
+
+RANGE, OR CHANGE ELEVATION.--To announce the RANGE, extend the arm,
+toward the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist
+closed; by keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated; by
+opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
+equal to the hundreds of yards; to add 50 yards describe a short
+horizontal line with forefinger. _To change elevation_, indicate the
+_amount of increase or decrease_ by fingers as above; point upward to
+indicate increase and downward to indicate decrease.
+
+WHAT RANGE ARE YOU USING? OR WHAT IS THE RANGE?--Extend the arms
+toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
+on the other hand, fist closed.
+
+ARE YOU READY? OR I AM READY.--Raise the hand, fingers extended and
+joined, palm toward the person addressed.
+
+COMMENCE FIRING.--Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm
+down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.
+
+FIRE FASTER.--Execute rapidly the signal "COMMENCE FIRING."
+
+FIRE SLOWER.--Execute slowly the signal "COMMENCE FIRING."
+
+TO SWING THE CONE OF FIRE TO THE RIGHT, OR LEFT.--Extend the arm in
+full length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to
+right (left), and point in the direction of the new target.
+
+FIX BAYONET.--Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix
+Bayonet."
+
+SUSPEND FIRING.--Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
+position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.
+
+CEASE FIRING.--Raise the forearm as in _suspend firing_ and swing it
+up and down several times in front of the face.
+
+PLATOON.--Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
+describe small circles with the hand.
+
+SQUAD.--Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
+the hand, up and down from the wrist.
+
+RUSH.--Same as _double time_.
+
+The signals PLATOON and SQUAD are intended primarily for communication
+between the captain and his platoon leaders. The signal PLATOON or
+SQUAD indicates that the platoon commander is to cause the signal
+which follows to be executed by platoon or squad.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 12.
+
+Guard Duty.
+
+Time spent: Study, 2 hours.
+ Conference, 2 hours.
+ Formal guard mounting.
+
+Guards are divided roughly into four classes:
+ 1. Exterior--(Which come more properly under head of field service).
+ 2. Interior--Their purpose is to preserve order, protect property
+and enforce police regulations.
+ 3. Military Police--Also treated of in field service.
+ 4. Provost Guards--Used in the absence of military police to aid
+civil authorities in preserving order among soldiers beyond the
+interior guard.
+
+Here we are concerned chiefly with interior guards. We shall make up a
+brief summary of what an officer must know and what he ought to teach
+his non-coms. and men. Also we shall touch upon the subject of guard
+duty as it has been changed by trench warfare.
+
+An officer ought to have a good grasp of the following subjects
+relative to guard duty:
+ 1. Guard mounting (both formal and informal).
+ 2. Posting reliefs.
+ 3. Preparation and running of rosters.
+ 4. General orders--also special orders at post No. 1.
+ 5. Duties of the following in reference to guard duty:
+ 1. Commanding officer.
+ 2. Officer of the day.
+ 3. Adjutant.
+ 4. Sergeant Major.
+ 5. Commander of the guard.
+ 6. Sergeant of the guard.
+ 7. Corporal of the guard.
+ 8. Musicians.
+ 9. Orderlies and color sentinels.
+ 10. Privates of the guard.
+ 6. Compliments of the guard.
+ 7. Prisoners: General.
+ Garrison.
+ Awaiting trial.
+ Awaiting result of trial.
+
+ How is an officer arrested? Can an enlisted man arrest him?
+ How is a non-com. arrested?
+ How is a soldier arrested?
+ How is a civilian arrested?
+ (See a.w. No. 68.)
+
+An officer ought to-teach to his non-coms. as much of the above as is
+consistent with time and other demands; he ought to teach to his
+privates all that is necessary to the proper discharge of their duties
+in this connection.
+
+FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING.--Here follow a few reminders that may help the
+reader to keep the ceremony in mind:
+
+1. Weather conditions permitting, guard mounting takes place every day
+at the discretion of the C.O.
+
+2. Tour of duty is 24 hours; there are 3 reliefs, 2 hours on and 4
+hours off. No organization is detailed for guard duty more than once
+in 5 days if this can be prevented.
+
+CEREMONY.--1. The band takes post, its left 12 paces to the right of
+where the right of the guard is to be.
+
+2. Adjutant's Call.--The Adjutant marches to the parade ground
+(Sergeant Major on his left) and takes post 12 paces in front of and
+facing the center of where the guard is to rest. The Sergeant Major
+continues on, marches by the left flank and takes post 12 paces to the
+left of the band and facing in the direction the line is to extend.
+
+3. The details are marched to the parade ground by the senior
+non-commissioned officers, halted and dressed as follows:
+
+FIRST DETAIL.--Non-commissioned officer.--1. Detail; 2. Halt. The
+detail is halted against the left arm of the Sergeant Major; the
+non-commissioned officer steps out, faces the Sergeant Major at a
+distance slightly greater than the front of the detail and commands:
+1. Right; 2. Dress. The detail dresses on the line formed by the
+Sergeant Major and the Commander of the detail. 3. Front. The
+Commander of the detail salutes and reports: "The detail is correct"
+(or otherwise). When the report is made the Sergeant Major returns the
+salute. The Commander of the detail passes by the right of the guard
+and takes post in rear of the right file of his detail.
+
+OTHER DETAILS.--Non-commissioned officers.--1. Detail; 2. Halt; 3.
+Right; 4. Dress; 5. Front. Each commander of a detail halts his
+detail, dresses it on the general line, salutes and reports as does
+the first; then takes his post in a similar manner. Should the
+commander of a detail not be a non-commissioned officer he passes by
+the right of the guard and retires.
+
+4. SERGEANT MAJOR.--He takes one step to the right, draws sword and
+verifies the detail, and then commands: "Count off." He completes the
+last squad if necessary and indicates the division into platoons: then
+takes his post and commands: 1. Open ranks; 2. March. This is executed
+as laid down in the Infantry Drill Regulations. 3. Front. He then
+moves parallel to the front rank until opposite the center, turns to
+the right, halts half-way to the Adjutant, salutes and reports: "Sir,
+the details are correct" (or otherwise).
+
+5. ADJUTANT: "Take your post." (Adjutant draws saber.)
+
+6. SERGEANT MAJOR.--Faces about, approaches to within two paces of the
+center of the guard, turns; to the right and moves three paces beyond
+the left of the guard, turns to the left, halts on the line of the
+front rank, faces about and brings his sword to the order. (When the
+Sergeant Major has reported the Officer of the Guard takes his post,
+as shown in the diagram, and draws saber.)
+
+7. ADJUTANT.--1. Officer (officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2.
+Front and center; 3. March. At "Center" the officer carries saber; at
+"March" the officer advances and halts 3 paces from the Adjutant,
+remaining at the carry; non-commissioned officers pass by the flank,
+move along the front and form in order of rank from right to left, 3
+paces behind the officer, remaining at the right shoulder. If there is
+no officer of the guard the non-commissioned officers halt 3 paces
+from the Adjutant. The Adjutant assigns them to their positions in
+order of rank--commander of the guard; leader of the first platoon;
+leader of the second platoon, etc., and commands: 1. Officer
+(officers) and non-commissioned officers; 2. Posts; 3. March. At the
+command "March" they take their posts as prescribed in the School of
+the Company with open ranks (Platoon leaders 3 paces in front of
+center of their platoons).
+
+8. ADJUTANT: "Inspect your guard, sir."
+
+9. OFFICER OF THE GUARD.--Faces about and commands: "Prepare for
+inspection."
+
+10. ADJUTANT (after the inspection is ended, and after posting himself
+30 paces in front of and facing center of the guard--at the same time
+the new Officer of the Day takes position about 30 paces behind the
+Adjutant, facing the guard, and with the old officer of the day 1 pace
+in rear and 3 paces to the right): 1. Parade; 2. Rest; 3. Sound off.
+(The band, playing passes in front of the Officer of the Guard to the
+left of the line, returns to its post and ceases to play.) 1. Guard;
+2. Attention; 3. Close ranks; 4. March. (As in the School of the
+Company.) 1. Present; 2. Arms. He then faces the new officer of the
+day, salutes, and reports: "Sir, the guard is formed."
+
+11. NEW OFFICER OF THE DAY (returning salute): "March the guard in
+review, sir."
+
+12. ADJUTANT.--He carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to the
+order and commands: "1. At trail, platoons right; 2. March; 3. Guard;
+4. Halt." The band takes post 12 paces in front of the first platoon,
+the Adjutant 6 paces from the flank and abreast of the Commander of
+the Guard, and the Sergeant Major 6 paces from the flank of the second
+platoon. Adjutant commands: "1. Pass in review; 2. Forward; 3. March."
+
+13. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD (as the guard reaches a position 6 paces
+from the Officer of the Day): 1. Eyes; 2. Right; (at 6 paces beyond
+the Officer of the Day) 3. Front.
+
+At 12 paces beyond the Officer of the Day the Adjutant and the
+Sergeant-Major halt, salute and retire.
+
+14. COMMANDER OF THE GUARD (as the Adjutant and the Sergeant Major
+retire): 1. Platoons, right by squads; 2. March. The guard is then
+marched to its post; the old guard is then relieved and sentinels
+posted according to the principles laid down in the Manual of Interior
+Guard Duty. (See diagrams at the end of this chapter.)
+
+GUARD DUTY IN THE TRENCHES.--It differs from guard duty as we are
+accustomed to it. The challenge is not "Who is there?" but rather a
+sudden and imperative "Hands up." The party challenged throws up his
+hands and gives the countersign in a low voice. Sentinels are posted
+in the front line and in the line of dugouts, one at each entrance to
+a dugout to give immediate warning. Watchers are posted at places
+having a good range of view; at night they keep watch over the
+parapets rather than through the loopholes since the latter afford
+only a narrow range of view. Auto riflemen (6 or 7 to a post) are used
+as watchers, one being on duty at a time. They should have a favorable
+background to provide concealment.
+
+[Illustration: Plate 14]
+
+[Illustration: Plate 14A.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 13.
+
+Company Administration.
+
+
+Company administration is a very broad subject and can be really
+learned only by experience. However, this chapter will attempt to
+point out a few suggestions and practices that may prove of some
+assistance, particularly to the new officer. We shall treat briefly of
+the first organization of the company; then we shall try to reproduce
+in some slight measure the actual work of a day in camp (more
+particularly of a training camp such as Plattsburg); then finally we
+shall treat of the orderly room and some of the problems that come up
+in army paper work.
+
+
+Notes on Organization.
+
+(By MAJOR W.H. WALDRON, Twenty-Ninth Infantry.)
+
+
+1. PREPARE IN ADVANCE TO RECEIVE MEN ASSIGNED TO COMPANY.
+
+(a) Detail one of the Lieutenants in charge of the company mess.
+
+DUTIES.--Secure the necessary kitchen and dining room equipment and
+prepare everything to start the mess; make up a bill-of-fare for a
+week based on the ration components and supplies available; secure the
+rations and issue them to the cooks daily. Train a mess Sergeant in
+the duties that fall to him. In fine, this Lieutenant will have
+complete charge of the company mess, the cooking, and serving of the
+meals, training of cooks and men detailed for duty in connection with
+the mess.
+
+(b) Detail the other Lieutenant in charge of property.
+
+DUTIES.--Procure all the articles of individual and company equipment
+from the Regimental Supply Officer. Get into the company storeroom and
+prepare it for issue. Train the Company Supply Sergeant in the duties
+that will fall to him.
+
+(c) This leaves the Company Commander free to organize the orderly
+room and make the necessary preparations to receive the men as they
+report.
+
+IF IN CANTONMENT.--Lay out the quarters into platoon sections and
+subdivide these into squads, allowing space for platoon leaders and
+guides. Starting at the end of the quarters plainly mark each squad
+section, 8 beds, four on each side of the aisle with the number of the
+squad--first squad, second squad, etc.
+
+IF IN TENTS.--Number the tents, one for each squad, leaving two tents
+in the center for platoon leaders, guides, etc. Prepare a sheet having
+a space for each squad, large enough to enter eight names in it.
+Prepare a measuring post where the men can be measured for height as
+they report.
+
+2. MEN REPORTING:
+
+(a) When the men arrive they will be sent to Regimental Headquarters
+direct. There they will receive their assignment to a company. When so
+assigned they will be directed to join the company.
+
+(b) A table on which is spread the squad assignment sheet is located
+at the head of the company street. Nearby is located the measuring
+post. When a man reports, look him over, receive him in the company,
+make him feel at home. Make him feel that he is welcome. This little
+act will pay you large dividends in contentment and company _esprit de
+corps_ later on. Turn him over to the man in charge of the measuring
+post to get his height. Assign him to a squad corresponding to his
+height. Enter his name in the squad space to which he is assigned and
+send him to the section of the cantonment designated for that
+particular squad. Detail a few of the first men who report for duty to
+assist in this work.
+
+Say you have 16 squads. They will run in height about as follows:
+
+1st squad, over 6 feet; 2nd, 6 feet; 3rd, 6 feet; 4th, 5 feet 11
+inches; 5th, 5 feet 11 inches; 6th, 5 feet 10 inches; 7th, 5 feet 10
+inches; 8th, 5 feet 9 inches; 9th, 5 feet 9 inches; 10th, 5 feet 8
+inches; 11th, 5 feet 8 inches; 12th, 5 feet 7 inches; 13th, 5 feet 7
+inches; 14th, 5 feet 6 inches; 15th, 5 feet 6 inches; 16th, 5 feet 5
+inches. If there are more squads put them in the 5 feet 7 to 5 feet 9
+inches class.
+
+(c) As soon as practicable place one member of the squad in charge for
+the ensuing 24 hours, change this detail every day until every man of
+the squad has had an opportunity to demonstrate his ability. This will
+assist you greatly in the selection of your non-commissioned officers.
+
+(d) Should the entire company be assigned in a body, line them up in a
+row according to height and assign them to squads. Place the most
+likely looking man in each squad in charge for the time being.
+
+3. ISSUE OF EQUIPMENT:
+
+(a) The articles of camp equipment, bedding and poncho should be
+issued as soon as practicable. These are necessary for the immediate
+comfort of the men.
+
+(b) Hold the articles of personal equipment for issue later on. Do not
+dump the entire equipment on a man all at once. There is nine-tenths
+of it that he knows nothing about. He does not know what it is for. As
+the training progresses you can issue it to him, an article or two at
+a time until he has finally gotten all of it. Before issuing an
+article, explain at a company formation, what it is for, the purpose
+it serves and where it is carried.
+
+(c) Uniforms and clothing should be procured as soon as practicable.
+The commanding officer will indicate whether or not the clothing will
+be requisitioned for in bulk or on individual clothing slips. The
+supply officer will provide a quartermaster publication which shows
+the sizes of clothing by the numbers. Seek out a couple of tailors in
+the company, have them measure the men and make a record of the sizes
+of clothing that they require. Shoes will have to be fitted to each
+man. Make them large enough. The average recruit will want to wear a
+shoe at least one size too small for him. When he gets the pack on and
+drags it around all day his feet will swell and fill his small shoes
+to the bursting point. Do not let the men decide what size shoes they
+will wear; you decide it for them and make them plenty big. This work
+of measuring the men can be started right out the first day. The
+captain that gets in his requisition first, properly made out, will be
+the first to get his clothing.
+
+4. ORGANIZATION:
+
+(a) As soon as practicable get the company organized into permanent
+squads. Try out squad leaders for a few days. You will soon be able to
+select the men that you will want for non-commissioned officers. Be
+careful in their selection so that you will not have to make many
+changes. Don't be in too much of a hurry about making sergeants; try
+them out as corporals first. Try to get a good man and start him in as
+mess sergeant. A man with hotel experience, especially the kitchen and
+dining room end of the business, give him a trial. Your lieutenant in
+charge of the mess can tell in a day or two how he stacks up. Make it
+plain that the men detailed from day to day are merely acting
+non-commissioned officers and that you are merely placing them in
+charge to give them an opportunity to demonstrate their ability. It's
+better to work this proposition out in a systematic manner than it is
+to jump in and make a lot of non-commissioned officers that you will
+have to break later on to make way for better men.
+
+Give your acting non-commissioned officers all the responsibility you
+can. Assign tasks with their squads and see how they get away with it.
+
+(b) At one of the first formations explain the rules of camp
+sanitation and personal cleanliness and the necessity for their strict
+observance.
+
+(c) Start right out with a system of rigid inspections so that the men
+will acquire habits of cleanliness and tidiness of their surroundings.
+Once this is acquired it is easily maintained. The reverse of this
+statement is equally true. Let a company get started in a slovenly,
+untidy manner and it is difficult to get it back on the right track
+again.
+
+(d) As soon as uniforms are issued have every man dispose of his
+civilian clothing, dress suit cases, trunks, etc. There is no place
+for them in the cantonments or tents. Strip right down to uniforms and
+allow no civilian clothing around.
+
+(e) Before issuing rifles provide places for their safe keeping in
+cantonments. If wooden trunks are used, a wire staple driven into the
+upright of the bed at the height of the slacking swivel forms an
+excellent support; simply hook the slacking swivel into the staple.
+
+(f) Get every man interested in the company. Be personally interested
+in every man yourself. Do not permit any swearing at the men or around
+the barracks. Explain the idea of military courtesy and the salute and
+insist on its being carried out at all times. By doing all of these
+things and systematizing your work of training and instruction right
+from the start you lay the foundation for a "good company." Fifteen
+good companies make a "good regiment" and so on up to the division,
+and that's what we want "good divisions"--the basis of which lies in
+the "good company" which you are going to command.
+
+DAY'S ROUTINE.--The day's routine will soon develop and cannot be a
+stereotyped thing. It will be determined to a large extent by local
+conditions. But in all training camps some such model as the
+following will no doubt be followed:
+
+ REVEILLE:
+ First call, 5.30 a.m.
+ March, 5.40 a.m.
+ Assembly, 5.45 a.m.
+
+At first call the non-commissioned officer in charge of quarters, or
+some other charged with that duty, will go through the barracks and
+awaken the men. After a short time this may be dispensed with.
+
+ MESS:
+ First call (followed by mess call), 5.55 a.m.
+ Assembly, 6.00 a.m.
+
+Allow the men approximately 20 minutes for breakfast and the privilege
+of returning individually--this for purposes of attending to the calls
+of nature.
+
+SICK CALL, 6.30 a.m.--Have the non-commissioned officer in charge of
+quarters put through this call; the sick will report to the orderly
+room, be entered on the sick report and marched to the hospital by the
+same non-commissioned officer. All men answering sick call should be
+questioned as to the nature of their trouble and its cause; men who
+are trying to dodge work should be caught up with. Care should be
+exercised in making out the sick report; be careful what you put on it
+and where you put it. The sick report will be treated further under
+"Paper Work."
+
+ MORNING INSTRUCTION:
+ First call, 6.50 a.m.
+ Assembly, 7.00 a.m.
+ Recall, 12.00 m.
+
+Utilize this time according to the schedule laid down by higher
+authorities. It will no doubt be insisted that the schedule be closely
+adhered to; but this can be done without completely destroying
+individual initiative.
+
+ MESS:
+ First call (followed by mess call), 12.10 p.m.
+ Assembly, 12.15 p.m.
+
+Allow 30 minutes for noon mess. The men may not consume it all; but
+judgment must be used in this matter. After mess have the company
+formed and marched back to barracks. This plan should be followed for
+a time, at least, particularly with "green" men purely for
+disciplinary purposes.
+
+ AFTERNOON INSTRUCTION:
+ First call, 1.20 p.m.
+ Assembly, 1.30 p.m.
+ Recall, 4,30 p.m.
+
+Same general procedure as for morning work.
+
+SICK CALL, 4.45 p.m.--When the sick report is sent to the hospital in
+the afternoon, it is customary to make a new entry for all men who are
+in the hospital. In this way a running account is kept and quickly
+referred to without running all through the book.
+
+The time from recall to retreat at 5.30 or thereabouts can usually be
+used to advantage in cleaning up and getting ready for this ceremony.
+
+ RETREAT.--(Formal--on the parade grounds).
+ First call, 5.30 p.m.
+ Assembly, 5.35 p.m.
+ Retreat, 5.50 p.m.
+
+ MESS:
+ First call, followed by mess call, 6.00 p.m.
+ Assembly, 6.05 p.m.
+
+ SCHOOL CALL (except Saturdays), 7.00 p.m.
+ TATTOO, 9.00 p.m.
+ CALL TO QUARTERS, 9.30 p.m.
+ TAPS, 9.45 p.m.
+
+At taps lights should be out and absolute quiet should prevail. This
+rule should be insisted upon from the very beginning of the training
+period. A check roll call is often taken at taps and the company
+reported to the Officer of the Day. Likewise, the company is reported
+to the Officer of the Day at reveille, retreat and mess formations;
+however, these things are determined entirely by local conditions.
+
+SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS.--Calls are 1/2 hour later, except retreat,
+tattoo, call to quarters and taps. In case an entertainment is given
+on the post, taps usually follow its close by a half hour.
+
+DETAILS for any day should be published at retreat formation the day
+previous; bulletins and notices should also be published to the
+company at this formation.
+
+PAPER WORK.--Paper work in the Army is generally viewed askance. A
+certain amount of it is absolutely necessary, but the amount can be
+reduced by careful attention to the way in which the work is done. A
+good first sergeant and a good company clerk will take a load of
+trouble off the shoulders of the company commander in this respect;
+but usually these men must be trained. Instructions on the blank forms
+should be carefully read the first time a certain paper is made out.
+Attend to all paper work promptly and make a note of anything that
+cannot be handled immediately. Do not let anything get into the
+company files until it has been O.K'd. by the company commander or
+initialed by the officers. Have a basket for the company commander and
+one for the other officers where they may expect to find matters that
+are of interest to them. Get reports, requisitions and other papers in
+on time. Do not wait until they are called for. Establish a daily, as
+well as a monthly, system of doing things in the orderly room and then
+stick to it as nearly as possible. Have a file for:
+
+ 1. General orders, post and W.D.
+ 2. Special orders.
+ 3. Memorandums, bulletins and notices may be included under this
+ head.
+ 4. Company orders.
+ 5. Document file (copies of letters, etc.).
+
+The needs for files will be determined largely by local conditions.
+The point is to have things where they can be found readily under an
+appropriate heading; and to have them accessible to others besides the
+company clerk. Keep a copy of everything, as nearly as possible, but
+do not clutter up your company files with unimportant items. Keep your
+orderly room looking as neat as possible.
+
+MILITARY CORRESPONDENCE.--A very important feature of Army Paper Work.
+Neatness, brevity and clarity are to be sought--ceremonial forms are
+avoided.
+
+References to Army Regulations: Paragraphs 225, 512, 776, 778, 779,
+780, 786, 789, 790, 822 (g.o. 23 w.d.).
+
+A letter consists of three parts; heading, body and signature. The
+heading consists of designation of the command, place and date, all
+placed in the upper right-hand corner. At the left, and with a margin
+of about an inch, should be:
+
+ From:
+
+ To:
+
+ Subject:
+
+A double space should be left between these lines.
+
+The body should be divided into numbered paragraphs, each paragraph
+treating of but one topic. The lines should be single-spaced, but a
+double space should be left between the paragraphs. The signature
+should be made without any unnecessary forms.
+
+Any good treatise on this subject will show the proper forms for a
+military letter.
+
+Indorsements follow the signature in succession on the same page or on
+added pages. They are very brief, follow a prescribed form and, if
+necessary, are paragraphed in the same way as the letter. Letters
+should be made in three, four, five or six copies, according to
+destination. They should always be handled through military channels;
+time will be lost if you try to dodge it.
+
+MORNING REPORT.--This is a complete record of daily events and should
+be kept with great care. It is submitted daily to the proper
+authority, checked and returned. Any standard work on this subject
+will show the proper method of making entries. Be sure to make entry
+of all events affecting your company, its numbers or condition. If
+there is no change, say so.
+
+RATION RETURN.--This form is made out in duplicate for periods of from
+10 days to a month. In case men join the company after the ration
+return has been submitted for a given period, one ration for each man
+for each day from date of joining to date of submitting next return,
+may be drawn on the next return. The same plan is followed in making
+deductions for men in the hospital or absent from the company. For
+ration allowances see a.r. 1202-1252.
+
+SICK REPORT.--A commissioned officer of the company and the medical
+officer sign on one line following the last entry for the occasion.
+Neither may encroach on the territory of the other and both enter
+their opinions as to whether the sickness is in line of duty. No
+erasures are allowed.
+
+DUTY ROSTER.--For any roster the key word should be "equality of all
+duties." It means the difference between contentment and
+dissatisfaction among your men. Keep an exact list of men available
+for every duty and detail them in exact rotation; adjust to complete
+satisfaction any little differences that arise. Let the men know that
+you want to give them a square deal and they will respond. The longest
+man off duty is the first man to be called. In the regular service the
+roster covers guard duty and other duties, notably kitchen, police and
+other fatigue work.
+
+MONTHLY RETURN.--The form is self explanatory. Read the instructions
+on the blanks before filling them in. By keeping in the company a
+record of events you can easily fill out the return properly when the
+time comes.
+
+SERVICE RECORD.--References in Army Regulations: Paragraphs 115, 118,
+124, 135, 138, 938, 1337, 1361, 1451, 1535. Article 16.
+
+The service record is a complete personal history of the soldier and
+follows him wherever he goes. It contains: a descriptive list, report
+of assignment, record of prior service, current enlistment, military
+record, record of allotments, clothing account and settlement,
+deposits, indorsements (this latter to give reasons for change of
+status or station of the soldier).
+
+DISCHARGE.--Discharges are of three kinds: honorable, dishonorable and
+plain discharge. The first is on a white sheet and entitles the
+soldier to re-enlist; the second is on a yellow sheet and is given
+following sentence of a general court-martial; the third is on a blue
+sheet and is given on account of physical disability--it does not
+entitle the soldier to re-enlist.
+
+FINAL STATEMENT, a.r., Art. 21.--The final statement is issued to
+every enlisted man upon his discharge unless he has forfeited all pay
+and allowances and has no deposits due him.
+
+The final statement is not to be prepared on the type-writer. Money
+amounts shall be written in both figures and words. The final
+statement should show the amount due the soldier for: additional pay;
+clothing; deposits; pay detained; miscellaneous causes. It also should
+show the amounts due the United States by the soldier for various
+reasons. In addition it should also state the period covered by the
+last pay of the soldier.
+
+Officers signing and certifying to the various entries are
+responsible.
+
+MUSTER ROLL. a.r. ARTICLE 42.--The muster roll is made bi-monthly and
+great care should be taken in its preparation to make it both correct
+and complete. All officers and enlisted men are taken up on the muster
+roll from the date of receipt of notice of assignment. The following
+are entered on the rolls:
+
+ 1. Commissioned officers belonging to the organization, in order of
+rank.
+ 2. Commissioned officers attached to the organization, in order of
+rank.
+ 3. Non-commissioned officers in order of grade.
+ 4. All others except musicians and privates, alphabetically arranged
+in order of grade.
+ 5. Musicians.
+ 6. Privates.
+
+All names, except those entered by rank, are entered in alphabetical
+order with the last name first.
+
+The names of enlisted men attached to the company are borne on a
+detachment roll. This is not true of officers attached to an
+organization, however.
+
+Remarks should be entered according to the model which can be obtained
+from the Adjutant General's Office.
+
+All changes should be noted which affect the status of the soldier. An
+excellent idea for retaining this data is to keep a separate card for
+each man and to enter thereon anything that affects his status.
+
+PAY ROLL. a.r. 1315-1383.--The pay roll is made out monthly in
+triplicate, one copy being retained and two copies being sent to the
+Quartermaster. On the pay roll there are four certificates to be
+signed:
+
+ 1. The commander of the organization examines the roll carefully and
+certifies that all entries are correct.
+ 2. The inspecting and mustering officer signs certifying that all
+are present or accounted for--or notes exceptions.
+ 3. The commanding officer witnesses the payment of each man and
+certifies to that effect.
+ 4. The commanding officer certifies that the duplicate and triplicate
+are exact copies of the original.
+
+NAMES.--The last name is entered first; _e.g._, Smith, John A. But the
+soldier signs as follows: John A. Smith.
+
+LOSSES.--The losses should follow immediately on the next line after
+the last entry. They include those by reason of: Discharge, transfer,
+retirement, desertion and the fact that the man has been dropped.
+
+Each officer should check his knowledge and be sure that he knows the
+purpose of, and is familiar with the following papers: (References are
+to Army Regulations and to Adjutant and Quartermaster forms.)
+
+ (1) Morning Report (a.r. 280).
+ (2) Daily Sick Report (a.r. 280), (339 a.g.o.).
+ (3) Duty Roster (a.r. 282), (339 a.g.o.).
+ (4) Company Fund Book (a.r. 280), (452 q.m.c.).
+ (5) Delinquency Record (a.r. 280), (509 q.m.c.).
+ (6) Property Responsibility:
+ Quartermaster (a.r. 280), (501cc q.m.c.).
+ Ordnance (a.r. 280), (501c q.m.c.).
+ (7) Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account (a.r.
+ 280), (29 a.g.o.).
+ (8) Memorandum Receipts (a.r. 281), (448 a.g.o.).
+ (9) Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts (par. 1, g.o., 6, 1916),
+ (448b a.g.o.).
+ (10) Summary Court Records (a.r. 9570), (594 a.g.o.).
+ (11) Statement of Clothing charged to Enlisted man (165b q.m.c.).
+ (12) Abstract of Clothing (180 q.m.c.).
+ (13) Company Target Records (307 a.g.o.).
+ (14) Individual Clothing Slips (165 q.m.c.).
+ (15) Files of Orders (a.r. 280).
+ (16) Correspondence Book with Index (a.r. 280).
+ (17) Document File.
+ (18) Record of Rifles (p. 14, Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1965).
+ (19) Record of Sizes of Clothing (g.o. 48, 1911).
+ (20) Company Return (a.r. 811), (30 a.g.o.).
+ (21) Muster Roll (a.g. 807).
+ (22) Returns (a.g. 811).
+ (23) Return of Casualties.
+ (24) Pay Roll (366 q.m.c.).
+
+As well as numerous other forms for special occasions which are not
+here listed.
+
+Except for the morning report, sick report, duty roster,
+correspondence book and various files, practically all the
+afore-mentioned records are now kept at regimental headquarters
+instead of in the company orderly room.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 14.
+
+Conferences.
+
+(Time--2 hours each day in afternoon.)
+
+
+1. Know your subject and be thoroughly prepared.
+
+2. Have an outline to refer to, showing main points you wish to cover.
+
+3. Do not allow a man to give an entire chapter in reply to a
+question. Make your questions short and specific--and require answers
+to be the same.
+
+4. Get every man on his feet at least once every day.
+
+5. Have a laugh every little while--keep the men awake.
+
+6. Vary your system of calling on men so that no one will know when he
+is likely to be called on.
+
+7. Avoid reading to the men.
+
+8. Require men to put things on the blackboard when possible.
+
+9. In case of a conference for which no time has been given for
+preparation, use all possible schemes to get the points home without
+having either a lecture or a study period. Allot--a definite time and
+require definite results--_e.g._, allow 10 minutes for a rough map
+showing the placing of a picket--15 minutes for an outline of a
+certain chapter, etc.
+
+10. Never forget that there are 2 sides to every conference--what you
+plan to give and what you plan to get. You must test the men to see
+how well they know the work but you must also make sure that every man
+knows it when he goes out even if he didn't when he came in.
+
+
+Study.
+
+The study period usually comes after a full day in the open, and the
+warm air and artificial light soon make the most ardent soldier doze
+off into cat-naps. Something must be done to counteract these
+influences and keep the men on the job. The terror of the next day's
+conference will not do it, as that time seems safely distant, with all
+night ahead.
+
+Assign the men three to five questions on the work to be studied,
+which will be asked in conference and which require a pretty general
+knowledge of the subject. Every man will then have a definite
+objective and a certain minimum of attainment for the evening. Or
+reverse the process and let each of the class write several questions
+about what they have studied. The following day let these questions,
+with the names of the men who asked them, be read before the class and
+answered. The effect of reading the name of the writer is to insure
+careful preparation of the question and study of the subject. A good
+question can hardly be asked without a basis of knowledge, and a
+foolish question condemns its author.
+
+Another plan is to let the men, whenever possible, instruct the class.
+Announce that any man may be called upon to take charge, and the
+uncertainty will keep everyone studying. This plan will also give the
+men valuable practice in teaching others. Their periods of
+instruction, of course, must be limited, and unsatisfactory parts of
+their work reviewed before the conference is dismissed.
+
+Another way to stimulate study is to have a short discussion, talk or
+quiz just before the close of the study hour, when the men, if left to
+themselves, will incline to look at their watches more often than at
+their books. A brief explanation of the work assigned, with emphasis
+upon a few especially important points, makes good use of this closing
+time, especially when the men are required to write down the points
+emphasized.
+
+
+Syllabus: Small Problems for Infantry.
+
+(References, f.s.r., p. 26-30, 33-39.)
+
+First Problem: Advance Guard and Point:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Small patrol sent ahead from advance
+party for disclosing enemy's position and strength, in time for
+larger bodies to make suitable defensive and offensive dispositions.
+Function primarily warning; but to give specific information, it may
+have to fight and thus feel enemy out.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Formed zig-zag; distance from advance party =?
+ 2. Controlled by leader of advance party.
+ 3. Speed must be great enough not to impede the main column.
+ Must not halt at first sign of enemy, nor go off on a flank.
+ 4. Interest and co-operation of inferiors, by adequate
+ explanation of situation and of individual duties
+ ("repeats").
+ 5. Rules for estimating numerical strength of the moving body of
+ troops (cf., f.s.r., sec. 27).
+ 6. Point as a "march outpost" (=?) when the column is halted.
+ Only then may the A.G. point make any lateral arrangement of
+ its members (cf. 3 above).
+
+Second Problem: Advance Guard Connecting File, cf., f.s.r., reference
+above:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Two men (usually) for liaison en
+route where elements too widely separated or roads too curved and
+wooded. Distance 200 to 5 yards apart.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Constant touch with elements before and behind.
+ 2. Relay both ways messages sent to or from remoter parts of the
+ column. Speed and accuracy of signaling.
+ 3. Guide to be forward in daytime, at night on the main body.
+
+Third Problem: Advance Guard Flank Patrol, pp. 31-32:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--For protecting a marching column from
+attack, by warning it on the basis of information gained in
+reconnaissance. Interval between men depends on circumstances.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Start from near head of the column, _i.e._, from smallest
+ element in the advance guard that can afford to cut down its
+ numbers.
+ 2. Speed rather than safety, to keep abreast of own column and
+ to force the enemy to disclose himself by firing on F.P.
+ rather than on main body.
+ 3. Sent to investigate suspicious areas, _e.g._ in woods, behind
+ houses.
+ 4. Action in case of firing on main body; advance and
+ counterfire, deployed.
+ 5. Get-away man in rear of column.
+ 6. _Stick to the job_: no wandering or chasing of enemy beyond
+ range of column. Job is to warn and protect against flank
+ attack.
+
+Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party:
+
+ A. Definition and Function:
+
+ Body of infantry, amounting to 1/8 to 1/2 the Support
+ (depending on the number of cavalry ahead) cf., f.s.r., p.
+ 28.
+ Duty.--To back up the point and the advance cavalry (if any) if
+ fired upon; remove enemy bodies and other obstacles.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Describe general mission to inferiors.
+ 2. Explain individual duties to inferiors.
+ 3. Send out point and connecting files.
+ 4. Form in platoon; zig-zag.
+ 5. Keep going; prosecute engagements briskly, not to delay main
+ column.
+ 6. Procedure under fire: deploys and drops, when fired upon;
+ looks for enemy's direction and assigns target and range.
+ Advance under cover if any, when fire light; when heavy seek
+ to divert fire to you away from main body of advance guard to
+ facilitate latter's disposition for advance to your support.
+ Seek to drive off a weaker enemy, and to hold off a stronger.
+ 7. Speedy decisions. Value of imaginary situations, while on the
+ march; and planning your commands.
+
+Fifth Problem: Combat Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Contrasted with covering detachment,
+which is large enough to offer considerable resistance, the combat
+patrol is primarily to _Warn_, especially against flank attacks. Size
+varies widely because of looseness in definition, _e.g._, 100 men
+might be _covering detachment_ for a regiment, but a combat patrol
+for a brigade.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Comparison of thin line versus thin column, regarding: (a)
+ vulnerability, (b) fatigue, (c) tactical advantage, when
+ engagement materializes, (e) control of movement and of
+ fire.
+ 2. Agent between advance and main body.
+ 3. Attack any enemy of reasonable size that attacks main body.
+ 4. Corn as concealment versus corn as obstruction to sight.
+ 5. Vulnerability of charging cavalry.
+ 6. Lieutenant as tactical chief, sergeant as disciplinarian, in
+ a platoon; except when?
+ 7. Messages concise, not ambiguous, written versus oral?
+ Repeats.
+ 8. Limitations of use of map. Vegetation changes; errors in
+ contouring.
+
+Sixth Problem and Seventh Problem: Two Pickets:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Outpost contrasted with advance guard
+in that former is stationed around a camp or bivouac, while latter
+precedes a marching column. To check enemy attempting to attack main
+body, and hold him till larger force is able to deploy. Consists of
+outpost reserve, outpost line of supports, line of outguards
+(pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts), plus sentinels, patrols,
+etc.
+
+ Picket ordinarily merely warns of an attack, but may offer
+resistance.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Smooth posting of outpost very desirable; influence of delay
+ on spirits of men, after day's march.
+ 2. Outpost support sends out pickets.
+ 3. Picket sends out sentry squads, cossack posts, sentinels,
+ etc.
+ 4. Provisional dispositions by leaders of outguard elements;
+ importance of good sketch; intrenchments?
+ 5. Confirmation and alteration by higher officers; especially
+ changes at night regarding layout and manning. Fire
+ ineffective at night except at short ranges.
+ 6. Roster =?
+ 7. Instructions regarding enemy's position and strength, and the
+ friendly outguards to right and left.
+ 8. Mode of numbering elements (from right to right). Arrangement
+ for smooth withdrawal of each element upon stronger one.
+ 9. Disposition of strangers; use for information.
+ 10. Need of explicit arrangements in case of attack in day or
+ night.
+ 11. Sleep near arms.
+
+Eighth Problem--Cossack Post and Sentry Squad:
+
+ A. Definition and Function:
+
+ 1. Cossack Post: 4 men in charge of a corporal (usually)
+ primarily to observe and warn; secondarily to keep
+ concealed, and intercept strangers who might be useful to
+ enemy or to us.
+ 2. Sentry Squad: 8 men in charge of a corporal. Duties similar
+ but strength is greater. Posts double sentinel.
+ 3. Post important enough for a cossack post is often doubled
+ into a sentry squad at night.
+
+ B. Principles:
+
+ 1. Opportunity to "pick off" enemies ought to be ignored until
+ position of c.p. or s.s. or of its supporting body has
+ unquestionably been learned by enemy. Then fire away.
+ 2. _Stop_ enemy's patrolling. Is as important as to _force_ your
+ own observation.
+ 3. Advantages of s.s. over c.p. for night work: (a) strength,
+ (b) sureness, (c) adequacy of observation before firing
+ alarm.
+ 4. Use of prisoners, and papers on dead bodies.
+ 5. Value of imagining yourself in position of enemy commander in
+ deciding what enemy dispositions you will combat him with.
+
+Ninth Problem: Reconnoitering Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Gather information in the field. No
+resistance unless compelled. Concealment and flight rather than
+resistance by fire: opposite of "covering detachment."
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Judgment in deciding what equipment is appropriate to the
+ particular patrol.
+ 2. Sketch copies; contours as guides for concealed route.
+ 3. Fight only in self defence.
+ 4. How to question hidden sentinel without disclosing his
+ position to enemy.
+ 5. Judicious choice of cover in approaching destination.
+ 6. Dating and placing of messages.
+ 7. Rate of passage of troops: "Rule of 2-2-2."
+
+Tenth Problem--Visiting Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function:
+
+ Two men or more sent from supports and pickets liaison between
+ adjoining outguards. More useful at night, because of
+ reduced visibility of terrain between outguards.
+
+ 1. Inform the sending body of conditions at sentinel posts.
+ 2. Prevent enemy from penetrating lines between posts.
+ 3. Exchange information between adjoining posts.
+ 4. Take back captured strangers to commander.
+ 5. Reenforce feeling of mutual support among the isolated
+ sentinels.
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Keen sight and hearing; silence.
+ 2. Need of signals. Both countersign and check--countersign.
+ 3. Equipment; nothing that rattles or glistens.
+ 4. Disposition: leader in front, because of need for quick
+ decision.
+ 5. Distance not over two miles even in most open country.
+ 6. Danger of startling a friend sentinel by unwarned approach.
+
+Eleventh Problem--Detached Post:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--Posted where connection cannot be
+easily maintained with other elements of outpost. Sent usually by
+outpost reserve or by main body, and retires to them, rather than to
+the line of supports. Function same as element of outpost
+proper,--_observation, resistance, reconnaissance_; but less
+resistance than _warning_. May be as small as 2 men, or as large as a
+support, depending on location and importance of detached position.
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Established under precautions, because of danger of enemy
+ breaking between the main body and the detached post.
+ 2. Entrenchment: what time of day? What other circumstances?
+ Treatment of bridges? Night?
+ 3. Requisitioning order: Need of payment; for justice, for
+ military advantage later (reassure farmers through whose
+ territory you will need to pass and keep supplied).
+
+Twelfth Problem--Requisitioning Detachment or Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--A patrol may have any mission: here
+it is sent to take (on payment) the provender designated. A.r.d. sent
+by commander with specific instructions, is legal; a raid for booty
+illegal. (See f.s.r., sec, 290.)
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Preparation essential.
+ 2. Sending of men singly or in pairs across open spaces.
+ 3. Deliberate start on _wrong_ road to deceive enemy scouts.
+ 4. Not to fire unless obliged,--until return trip.
+
+Thirteenth Problem--A Contact Patrol:
+
+ A. Definition and Function.--A small patrol sent out from a
+stationary body of troops, usually at night, to find out whether
+enemy is starting a retreat. (Compact formation in column.)
+
+ B. Principles.
+
+ 1. Travel light, but prepare to spend some time lying still.
+ 2. Route rear and parallel to a road, but not on it.
+ 3. Do not attack enemy patrols unless necessary.
+ 4. Get through enemy line of observation and watch support or
+ larger body.
+ 5. Return together when you have definite information. Do not
+ send single messengers.
+
+Fourteenth Problem.--A Small Outguard:
+
+ The principles used in 14 are same as those listed under 1-13; and
+should be clinched by assigning yourself the problem of completely
+arranging an outpost for a brigade to be encamped or bivouacked at
+some assigned position on the Hunter's Town sheet. Exchange
+solutions, for mutual criticism.
+
+
+Examinations.
+
+The following examinations, given at the second Plattsburg Training
+Camp, will enable students of military matters to form some idea as to
+where they stand in their grasp of the subject:
+
+Plattsburg Training Camp:
+
+ 1. Explain the "Position of the Soldier." (Par. 51, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Being at parade rest, explain position of right foot. (Par. 53,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 3. Explain the "Hand Salute." (Par. 58, i.d.r.)
+ 4. (1) Give length of full step (a) in quick time, (b) in double time.
+ (2) How is the full step measured? (Par. 60, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Explain "Halt" from quick time. (Par. 70, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Explain position of butt of rifle at "Order Arms" standing.
+ (Par. 77, i.d.r.)
+ 7. Explain position of left forearm at present arms. (Par. 78,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 8. At parade rest under arms (rifle), explain position of left
+ hand. (Par. 90, i.d.r.)
+ 9. The squad being in line explain "Squad Right." (Par. 119,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 10. The company in line, give commands and explain "To dismiss the
+ company." (Par. 174, i.d.r.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ 1. Being in any formation assembled, give commands and explain
+ movements for deploying the squad as skirmishers. (Par. 124,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 2. When deployed as skirmishers (a) How do the men march? (b) How
+ are the pieces carried? (c) Who is the guide? (d) What is the
+ normal interval between skirmishers? (e) What is the length of
+ the front of the squad when deployed at normal intervals? (Par.
+ 124, i.d.r.)
+ 3. In what formations are the loadings executed? (Par. 133, i.d.r.)
+ 4. At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line, what does
+ each squad leader do? (Par. 200, i.d.r.)
+ 5. In what direction does a deployed line face on halting? (Par.
+ 203.)
+ 6. Being in skirmish line, explain the movement "Platoon columns."
+ March. (Par. 213, i.d.r.)
+ 7. What is the purpose of the advance in a succession of thin
+ lines? (Par. 219, i.d.r.)
+ 8. Name three classes of fire. Which class is normally employed in
+ action? (Par. 241-2-3, i.d.r.)
+ 9. Why is it necessary to have proper distribution of fire? (Par.
+ 246, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Explain briefly the functions of platoon leaders, platoon
+ guides and squad leaders in the fire fight. (Par. 252, i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. Explain the position of parade rest (without arms). (Par. 53,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 2. Being in the position of the soldier, explain the position of
+ the heels, feet and knees. (Par. 51, i.d.r.)
+ 3. Give the commands for and explain the execution of "Right Face."
+ 4. Being at a halt, give the commands for moving forward in quick
+ time and explain the execution thereof. (Par. 62, i.d.r.)
+ 5. (a) Being in march in quick time, give the commands necessary
+ to march in double time and explain the execution thereof,
+ (Par. 63, i.d.r.)
+ (b) What is the length of step and the rate of steps per minute
+ in double time? (Par. 60, i.d.r.)
+ 6. At "Right Shoulder Arms":
+ (a) Explain the position of the trigger guard. (Par. 83,
+ i.d.r.)
+ (b) What is the position of the barrel? (Par. 88, i.d.r.)
+ 7. In the rifle salute (right shoulder arms), describe the
+ position of the:
+ (a) Left forearm on first count, (Par. 93, i.d.r.)
+ (b) Left hand on first count. (Par. 93, i.d.r.)
+ 8. Explain the position of the left forearm on the second count of
+ right shoulder arms from order arms. (Par. 83, i.d.r.)
+ 9. The squad being in line explain "Squad right about." (Par. 121,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 10. Explain the execution of "Right by Squads," 2 March. (Par. 183,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+ 1. What are the two general classes of military information? (Par.
+ 9, f.s.r.)
+ 2. What do you understand by the term "reconnaissance?" (Par. 11,
+ f.s.r.)
+ 3. (a) Name the various kinds of patrols. (Note to Par. 23,
+ f.s.r.)
+ (b) What are the advantages of small patrols over strong
+ patrols? (Par. 24, f.s.r.)
+ 4. What governs the formation adopted by the patrol? (Par. 26,
+ f.s.r.)
+ 5. What is a field message? (Par. 32, f.s.r.)
+ 6. (a) What is the function of an advance guard? (Par. 40, f.s.r.)
+ (b) What of a flank guard? (Par. 53, f.s.r.)
+ 7. (a) What is an outpost? (Par. 60, f.s.r.)
+ (b) How are the outguards classified? (Par. 64, f.s.r.)
+ 8. Define a successful march. (Par. 96, f.s.r.)
+ 9. What rules govern the halts of a column of troops on the march?
+ (Par. 102, f.s.r.)
+ 10. (a) From a certain point off the road you observe a column of
+ troops marching on the road. You can distinguish that these
+ troops are infantry in column of squads. It requires 20
+ minutes for them to pass a given point. How much infantry
+ is in the column? (Par. 27, f.s.r.)
+ (b) The day is still, no wind blowing, further to the rear you
+ can see a broken cloud of dust extending in prolongation of
+ the road but cannot see the cause. What does this indicate?
+ (Par. 27, f.s.r.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+Harvard College. School of the Soldier:
+
+ 1. Define depth, distance, interval, front, base, point of rest,
+ deployment, pace. (i.d.r. definitions.)
+ 2. (a) What is the guide of the leading subdivision, in column of
+ subdivisions, charged with? (Par. 20, i.d.r.)
+ (b) What is the guide of the subdivisions in rear charged with?
+ (Par. 20, i.d.r.)
+ 3. What are orders, commands and signals. (Par. 31, 37, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Describe position of the soldier or attention (without arms.)
+ (i.d.r. 51.)
+ 5. What are the rests? Describe each. (Par. 52, i.d.r.)
+ 6. Describe about face. (Par. 57, i.d.r.)
+ 7. (a) Being at a halt, or marching in quick time, to march in
+ double time. Describe commands and how executed. (Par. 63,
+ i.d.r.)
+ (b) Marching in double time, to resume quick time. Describe
+ commands and how executed. (Par. 64, i.d.r.)
+ 8. What are the rules that govern the carrying of the piece? (Par.
+ 75, i.d.r.)
+ 9. What general rules govern the execution of the manual of arms?
+ (Par. 76, i.d.r.)
+ 10. Give the rate per minute and length of the half step and full
+ step in quick and double time. (Par. 60, i.d.r.)
+ 11. What are the arm signals for: Column left, march; halt; as
+ skirmishers, march; assemble, march; suspend firing; range, 250
+ yards; fix bayonets. (Par. 43, i.d.r.)
+ 12. Explain the execution of the command "Right Dress." (Par. 107,
+ i.d.r.)
+
+ * * * * *
+
+School of the Squad:
+
+ 1. To suspend firing: Give the commands and describe execution.
+ Same, to cease firing. (Par. 149-150, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Describe in detail the execution of "Squads Right." (Par. 119,
+ i.d.r.)
+ 3. Give the commands and explain execution for taking intervals.
+ How does it differ from taking distances? (Pars. 109, 110, 111,
+ 112, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Describe in detail "Right oblique, March." (Par. 116, i.d.r.)
+ 5. Explain the use of "In place, Halt." (Par. 14, i.d.r.)
+ 6. When can the following commands be used: Resume March. (Par. 14,
+ i.d.r.) Oblique March. (Par. 117, i.d.r.) By the right flank,
+ March. (Par. 71, i.d.r.) Take Arms. (Par. 114, i.d.r.)
+ 7. Describe by what commands and in what manner a squad is formed.
+ 8. (a) Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements
+ for turning on a moving pivot.
+ (b) Being in line, give the commands and describe the movements
+ for turning on a fixed pivot.
+ 9. Being in any formation, assembled, give the commands and
+ describe the movements for deploying as skirmishers.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+School of the Company:
+
+ 1. Give the proper commands for the following movements:
+ (a) Company being in line, to march to the front in column of
+ squads. (Par. 183, i.d.r.)
+ (b) Company being in line, to form column of squads to the
+ flank. (Par. 178, i.d.r.)
+ (c) Company being in line, to form skirmish line. (Par. 206,
+ 200, 202, i.d.r.)
+ (d) Company being in column of squads, to form line to the right
+ so the leading squad shall be on the right of the line.
+ (Par. 188, i.d.r.)
+ 2. Being in line, to align the company. Give the commands and
+ explain the movement. (Pars. 175, 107, i.d.r.)
+ 3. The company having gone from line into column of squads by the
+ command: "Squads right, March," state the position of the
+ captain, two lieutenants and right and left guides. (Pars. 163,
+ 168 and Plate II, i.d.r.)
+ 4. Show by diagram: (a) A company of two platoons in column of
+ platoons, (b) A company of three platoons in line of platoons.
+ (Plate II, i.d.r.)
+ 5. What commands are given to form the company?
+ 6. (a) Who is the pivot in executing "Company Left?"
+ (b) Who is the pivot in executing "Left Turn?"
+
+
+Military Science and Tactics.
+
+MINOR TACTICS.
+
+MAP: GETTYSBURG--ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET).
+
+First Problem: An Advance Party--Situation I:
+
+_Your battalion_ and the _machine gun_ company occupy _Center Mills_,
+in enemy's country. The remainder of the _Harvard Regiment_ is
+encamped _two miles north of Center Mills_. The Battalion has an
+outguard _at J. Fohl, 1150 yards southeast_ of Center Mills. _It is
+mid-winter;_ there is _no snow_, but the _streams are frozen_.
+
+At 6.45 a.m., 1 Feb., 17, your battalion and the machine gun company
+are _hurriedly assembled, pieces are loaded_, and the column, _your
+company in the lead_, is marched out of town, over the southeast
+road. Your captain calls the _officers and non-commissioned officers_
+to the head of the company and gives the following verbal order:
+
+_A Blue force, estimated at one battalion with machine guns, is
+marching north from Granite Hill Sta. Blue patrols have been reported
+in vicinity of Henderson meeting house (700 yards north of
+Hunterstown). There are no Red troops south of here. Our battalion and
+the machine gun company are going to take up a position on the 712-707
+hills, which flank this road, about 3 miles south of here. This
+company will be the advance guard. The main body, which is the rest of
+our column, follows at 600 yards. Lieutenant Allen, your platoon (1st)
+and the second platoon will constitute the_ ADVANCE PARTY. _The third
+and fourth platoons will form the_ SUPPORT, _and will follow the
+advance party at 300 yards. Here is a map for you. Follow this road
+(pointing and indicating on map) through J. Fohl--554-534--Bridge
+S.H., to crossroads 666, where you will halt and establish a_ MARCH
+OUTPOST. _I will be with the support. When we reach the outguard at J.
+Fohl the column will halt and the advance guard will move out. Posts._
+
+The column halts at the outguard. You are Lieutenant Allen.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions, and dispositions in detail.
+
+Situation II:
+
+The _advance party_ has just cleared roadfork 534 when it is fired
+upon from the woods along the stream about _500 yards southeast_.
+There are probably _20 rifles firing upon you_. The enemy's fire is
+well-directed. The _point_ has crossed the first bridge, 300 yards
+south of 534. The _support_ has halted; but is not under fire.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions.
+
+Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point--Situation I:
+
+The situation is the same as in the First Problem.
+
+You are the commander of the point.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions as the _point_ clears the outguard.
+
+Required:
+
+The _point_ has just crossed the first bridge 300 yards southeast of
+534, when you hear firing and observe that the _advance party_ is
+being fired upon from the woods directly east of you. A few moments
+later you note a few dismounted men crossing the island about 400
+yards to the east. The firing has ceased.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions.
+
+Situation III:
+
+The _advance guard_ has resumed its march. When the point reaches
+Bridge S.H., it is fired upon from the woods 400 yards to the east.
+About ten cavalrymen are hurriedly mounting, others are already riding
+into the woods.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions and dispositions.
+
+Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol--
+
+Situation:
+
+The situation is the same as in the _First Problem_, and follows
+_Situation III, Second Problem_.
+
+When the _advance party_ is two hundred yards from the roadfork where
+unimproved road leads northeast, about 600 yards southeast of Bridge
+S.H., Lieutenant Allen gives the following instructions to Corporal
+Adams, 3d Squad:
+
+_Corporal, about fifteen Blue cavalry have been driven back through
+those woods (pointing out woods to east). When we reach the roadfork
+in front of us take your squad and comb the woods until you reach
+southern edge. From there go east until you observe the crossroads
+(616) which are about 1200 yards beyond. Return over first improved
+road running southwest to the crossroads (666) about 1-1/2 miles south
+of here and just under the hilltop, where you will rejoin advance
+party._
+
+You are Corporal Adams.
+
+Required:
+
+Your instructions, dispositions, and route of the patrol.
+
+
+MAP READING. VISIBILITY PROBLEMS.
+
+MAP: GETTYSBURG--ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET).
+
+NOTE.--_Observation points 707 and 712 are the hills referred to in
+the First Problem under Minor Tactics._
+
+_Where one point is invisible from another, state points of
+interference._
+
+_Problem 1_. Can a sentinel standing at 707 see the roadfork 535
+(about 1500 yards south)?
+
+_Problem 2_. An enemy patrol is marching north on the 544-616 road,
+and has crossed the stream (750 yards north of 544). Can this patrol
+see the Red outguard at 707 from any point between stream and
+crossroads 616?
+
+_Problem 3_. Can the sentinel at 712 see the roadfork 581 (1850 yards
+southwest from 712)?
+
+_Problem 4_. Can the sentinel at 712 see the crossroads 561 (about
+1200 yards southeast)?
+
+ * * * * *
+
+General Situation--Hunterstown Sheet.
+
+The _Harvard Regiment_ camps the night of May 31-June 1 on Opossum
+Creek just west of Friends Grove S.H. (A-7) in hostile territory. The
+regiment is part of a brigade, the remainder of the brigade being in
+camp one day's march north of Center Mills.
+
+Problem I: An Advance Guard Point:
+
+At daylight of June 1st the regimental commander receives the
+following message from brigade headquarters: "Our aeroplanes report a
+large force of the enemy near Hunterstown. Move at once on
+Hunterstown. Develop the strength of this enemy and locate his exact
+position. I will send reinforcements to you by motor-train if
+necessary."
+
+Officers call is sounded, and this information transmitted to all the
+officers of the regiment. The _First Battalion_ is designated as
+_advance guard_ and ordered to move out at once by crossroads 554 and
+561, and road forks 535 and 552 towards Hunterstown. Major A,
+commanding the First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of
+"D" company as advance party and C company and the remainder of D
+company as support.
+
+Lieut. X, commanding the advance party, calls up all his
+non-commissioned officers and explains the situation to them. He then
+says: "Sergeant Mason, take 4 men and move out on that road (pointing)
+as the point. At crossroads and road forks semaphore W.W. and I will
+indicate the direction. The remainder of these two platoons will be
+the advance party. I will be with it. Move out."
+
+You are Sergeant Mason.
+
+(_a_) What instructions, and information do you give the point before
+you reach crossroads 554?
+
+After passing crossroads 561 about 300 yards one of your men reports
+about a squad of hostile cavalry on the road south of road fork 544,
+1500 yards east of you.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Problem II: An Advance Guard Connecting File:
+
+Situation as in preceding problem.
+
+After the advance party has moved out about 100 yards, Captain Y,
+commanding the support, says: "Smith, you take Jones and move out as
+connecting file." After Smith and Jones have moved about 100 yards,
+he says: "Donnelly, you take Burke and move out as connecting file."
+You are Donnelly.
+
+(_a_) What instructions do you give Burke before reaching crossroads
+554?
+
+After passing crossroads 561 you go about 150 yards without seeing the
+connecting file in rear of you.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Problem III: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol:
+
+Situation as in preceding problem.
+
+On arriving at crossroads 561 Lieut. X commanding the advance party
+calls up Sergeant Clifford and says: "Sergeant, the point has just
+reported a squad of hostile cavalry about a mile down this road
+(pointing toward road fork 544). Take _your squad_ and scout down this
+road. I will take the next road to the left leading to Hunterstown.
+Rejoin me on that road."
+
+You are Sergeant Clifford.
+
+(_a_) What formation do you adopt for your patrol?
+
+Nothing happens until you arrive near road fork 544, when you hear
+firing from the woods southwest of you. This fire is not directed
+toward you. There is evidently about a squad firing. You can see no
+enemy in any direction.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Problem IV: Platoon as an Advance Party:
+
+General situation same as before.
+
+You are Lieut. X commanding the advance party. You have arrived near
+the small orchard southeast of road fork 535. A sharp fire is suddenly
+opened from the woods to the southeast, apparently from a _squad or
+small platoon_.
+
+(_a_) Give your orders and dispositions.
+
+After firing about a minute the fire of the enemy stops. You move out
+into the road and can see no sign of your point or connecting files.
+The support is closing up on you.
+
+(_b_) What do you do?
+
+Visibility Problems:
+
+(_a_) Can a man on hill 712 see a man at crossroads 554 in
+Hunterstown? (Disregard trees.)
+
+(_b_) A man stands at the point where contour 680 crosses the road
+followed in above problem, just south of hill 707. Where does the
+roadbed first become invisible?
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MAP: GETTYSBURG--- ANTIETAM (HUNTERSTOWN SHEET).
+
+First Problem: A Connecting File--Situation I:
+
+The Harvard Regiment is in camp in hostile country the night May 1-2
+in the corn field 1000 yards east of Boyd S.H., just northeast of
+cross roads 488. The line of outguards extends approximately through
+Boyd S.H., Hill 527, McElheny.
+
+At 1.00 a.m.; May 1st, the regimental commander receives the following
+telephone message from brigade headquarters at Gettysburg (just off
+the map to the south)--An enemy force estimated strength one regiment
+is in camp 6 miles north of Center Mills. His patrols were seen
+yesterday by our advance cavalry near Guernsey and Center Mills. It is
+reliably reported that this force will march by Center Mills and
+Guernsey on Biglersville to-morrow morning to destroy a large amount
+of rolling stock at that point. Move at once toward Center Mills to
+stop and drive back this force.
+
+Officers call is sounded. The situation is explained to the officers
+and they are told to have their companies ready to move at 2.00 a.m.
+The 1st battalion is designated as advance guard.
+
+The advance guard is directed to move across the field to road fork
+511 thence north by the main road. The _first platoon_ of "A" company
+is designated as advance party. "B" company and the remainder of "A"
+company form the support. As the advance party moves out Captain Smith
+commanding the support, says to Private Long, "Long, you and Williams
+move out as connecting files. This is a dark night so be careful to
+keep connection both front and rear." Before Long is out of sight; he
+says, "Scott, you and Hunt move out as connecting files following
+Long." You are Scott.
+
+Required:
+
+(a) What instructions do you give Hunt?
+
+(b) What do you do up to the time you reach the main road at 511?
+
+Situation II:
+
+After you have passed road fork in _Table Rock_ about 100 yards you
+notice that Hunt who has been watching to the rear does not seem to be
+alert. You look back and can see no sign of the connecting file in
+rear of you. It is still dark.
+
+Required:
+
+What do you do?
+
+Second Problem: An Advance Guard Point--General Situation same as in
+Problem I:
+
+Sergeant Hill and four men constitute the point. The situation has
+been explained to Sergeant Hill by the advance party commander.
+
+About daylight the point arrives at crossroads 600. A sharp fire
+evidently from about a squad is received from the house on the rise
+500 yards north along the road. You are Sergeant Hill.
+
+Required:
+
+What do you do?
+
+Third Problem: An Advance Guard Flank Patrol--Situation I--General
+Situation same as Problem I:
+
+Up to daylight no flank patrols have been sent out. When the support
+reaches Table Rock the support commander calls Corporal Bell and says
+to him "Corporal take your squad as a flank patrol up this road to the
+right. Take the left hand road at the first two road forks and follow
+the road past the church and school-house until you reach this road
+again about 1-1/2 miles north of here. Report every thing you have
+seen when you rejoin. Your squad consists of seven men besides
+yourself."
+
+Required:
+
+(a) The disposition of your squad on the march.
+(b) What do you do when you hear the firing near crossroads 600?
+
+Fourth Problem: Platoon as Advance Party--Situation--General Situation
+same as in the First Problem:
+
+When you arrive at a point about 200 yards south of hill 646 you hear
+firing 1000 yards north of you. You cannot see who is firing nor can
+you see the point. You are Lieutenant Clark commanding the advance
+party.
+
+Required:
+
+What do you do?
+
+Visibility Problems:
+
+(a) When the point arrives at hill 647 can it see the crossroads 610
+to the northeast?
+
+(b) When the flank patrol reaches Benders' Church crossroads can it
+see an enemy patrol at the house midway on the road 534-554 one mile
+to the northeast?
+
+(c) Looking north along the Center Mills road from hill 647 where does
+the road first become invisible?
+
+ * * * * *
+
+MAP: HUNTERSTOWN SHEET.
+
+General Situation:
+
+The Harvard regiment encamped on the night of July 12-13 at
+Biglerville (B-8) in hostile territory. The remainder of the brigade
+of which the regiment is a part is in camp 5 miles west of
+Biglerville.
+
+Problem I:
+
+At daylight, July 13, the regimental commander receives the following
+message from brigade headquarters:
+
+"It is reported that the enemy is in force near Heidlersburg. Move on
+Heidlersburg at once; locate the position of the enemy, and develop
+his strength. Reinforcements will be sent you, if necessary."
+
+This information is transmitted to all officers of the regiment. The
+First Battalion is ordered to move out at once as advance guard on
+Biglerville-610-582 road toward Heidlersburg. Major Dunn, commanding
+First Battalion, designates the first two platoons of C Company as
+advance party, and D Company and the remainder of C Company as
+support.
+
+Lieut. Gibbs, commanding the advance party, explains the situation to
+his non-commissioned officers, and then orders:
+
+ "Sergeant Dow, take four men and move out on that road
+ (indicating road to Heidlersburg) as point. The remainder of these
+ two platoons will be the advance party and will follow you at 200
+ yards. I shall be with it. Move out."
+
+You are Sergt. Dow.
+
+How do you place your men, and what information and instructions do
+you give the point before you pass the orchard east of Biglerville?
+
+Situation 2:
+
+You are still Sergt. Dow.
+
+The point has reached crossroads 582. You are informed by a farmer
+living at crossroads 582 that about half an hour before there were
+some soldiers half a mile north of 582 on the road to Center Mills. He
+says he does not know where they went.
+
+What do you do?
+
+Problem II:
+
+The advance party has arrived at crossroads 582. Information has come
+to Lieut. Gibbs, both from the point and from the farmer direct, that
+Red Soldiers have been seen on road to north leading to Center Mills.
+Lieut. Gibbs on arrival at 582 sends out a squad under Sergt. Jones
+to patrol north on the Center Mills road half a mile, then east by
+farm road to corner, then by fence south of house and barn to Opossum
+Creek and down creek to main road again.
+
+The advance party then proceeds about 300 yards easterly from 582,
+when the point signals "Enemy in small numbers in creek bottom due
+north."
+
+ (a) What does Lieut. Gibbs and the advance party do?
+ (b) What does he tell the point to do?
+ (c) What does the flank patrol under Sergt. Jones do?
+
+Problem III:
+
+Because of the action taken in Problem II the Reds have ceased to
+menace the left flank of the advance guard:
+
+ (a) What does the advance party and its commander do?
+ (b) What does he tell the point to do?
+
+Another Situation--Problem IV:
+
+Enemy is in the vicinity of Hunterstown. Your brigade has marched
+south through Guernsey to road fork 610, and has turned east, and is
+about to camp in grass field north of road 610-582, 1-3 of a mile west
+of 582. Your battalion is to form the outpost. You are its major.
+
+Where do you post:
+
+ (a) The outpost reserve?
+ (b) The outpost supports?
+ (c) The outguards?
+
+ (NOTE: The sector up to and including the road Center
+ Mills--554-534--Bridge S.H. is covered by another brigade
+ to your left.)
+
+Problem V:
+
+On the same general scheme as in Problem IV. You are Sergt. Robinson
+of Support No. 1. You are ordered by its commander to move out with 3
+squads to form a picket, outguard No. 1, putting out observation
+posts on the road about half a mile south of the support.
+
+ (a) State what directions you give to your picket and how you move
+ to your position.
+ (b) Where do you post the picket and its observation posts?
+ (c) What orders and instructions do you give on arrival at the
+ place selected?
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER 15.
+
+Trench Warfare.
+
+General Principles.
+
+
+1. Defense may be made in depth by all organizations, down to and
+including the platoon, or it may be made laterally.
+
+2. The smallest active segment, be it only three men, must have a
+chief and a second in command, who is responsible for the proper
+upkeep and defense of the segment. All occupants of active segments
+must know all instructions which should be simple.
+
+3. Any troops in charge of a portion of trench must never abandon it,
+no matter what happens, even if surrounded.
+
+4. All ground lost must be retaken at once by immediate counter attack
+launched by the unit which lost the ground. As a matter of fact a
+counter attack is difficult for a platoon or company; it is really
+necessary for it to be made by a battalion.
+
+5. Each company must provide for emplacements for mine throwers to be
+served by the artillery and for pneumatic guns to be served by their
+own men.
+
+
+Instructions to be Issued by Battalion Commander.
+
+1. Disposition of companies in sector assigned (best done by sketch
+showing sectors assigned to companies).
+
+2. Special orders to companies (concerns field of fire to be obtained
+not only in own sector, but also in those adjoining it).
+
+3. Improvement of defense. (Brief reports from company commanders to
+be followed by work being done on order of battalion commander after
+inspection.)
+
+4. Organization of watching (not sentry duty) (by company commander
+under supervision of battalion commander).
+
+5. Organization of observation (not sentry duty) (by company commander
+under supervision of battalion commander).
+
+6. Organization of supply (procuring, routing, etc., of tools,
+ammunition, food, water, etc.), (by company commander under
+supervision of battalion commander).
+
+7. Organization of liaison (communication) (runners, telephone,
+telegraph visual signaling, pigeons, etc., by company commander under
+the supervision of battalion commander). _All telephonic communication
+must be in code_.
+
+8. Organization of supplies to include amounts to be expected daily
+from the rear.
+
+9. Knowledge of enemy must be imparted to company commanders in order
+to assist them in making their dispositions.
+
+10. Frequent reports to be made of existing conditions at the front
+for information of higher commanders.
+
+11. Lateral defense of boyaux must not be overlooked.
+
+12. Wide turning movements are not possible. Enveloping movements are
+possible only on local attacks against small portions of the hostile
+line after it has been pierced. All main attacks are confined to
+purely frontal attacks.
+
+13. The most important obstacle is barbed wire entanglements.
+
+14. Communication (liaison) between and co-ordination and co-operation
+of, the different elements of a command is of the utmost importance.
+
+15. Artillery co-operates more closely than ever with infantry. Its
+reconnaissance officers accompany infantry lines in order to obtain
+information. _There is a certain number of artillery observers
+attached to each battalion of infantry_.
+
+The general method of attack is to smother the defense with a torrent
+of explosive shells, kept up incessantly for one or more days, and
+shatter the defense so they will offer but slight resistance to the
+infantry; then rush forward with the infantry and seize the positions
+while the enemy is demoralized, and consolidate them before
+reenforcements can be brought up.
+
+ The artillery bombardment is necessary to prepare the way for the
+ infantry advance. It has for its objects:
+ (1) To destroy the hostile artillery, wire entanglements and
+ infantry trenches.
+ (2) To produce curtains of fire and prevent bringing up
+ reenforcements.
+
+_Light guns are assigned to_ EACH BATTALION OF INFANTRY, subject only
+to orders of regimental and battalion commanders concerned.
+
+Save under exceptional circumstances the light gun is always attached
+to the Machine Gun Company for the attack.
+
+The essential role of the light gun is to destroy with direct fire the
+visible machine guns; they are employed separately and not grouped.
+
+The infantry is divided into two classes: Holding troops--and
+attacking or shock troops. Holding troops are those doing routine or
+trench duty; shock troops are picked organizations of young and
+vigorous men and are kept in camps well behind the battle front.
+Holding troops are two weeks in and two weeks out of the trenches.
+
+All specialist groups, _i.e._, Machine Gun Companies, etc., are
+officered, allowing company and battalion commanders to concentrate
+them, if the situation requires.
+
+_They play the normal part in combat if they do not receive special
+instructions._
+
+
+Attack of a Defensive Position.
+
+Unity of command in depth must be preserved everywhere, unless there
+is an imperative reason for doing otherwise.
+
+The front of each regiment should be divided between two or three
+battalions.
+
+_Each battalion commander having to look after a front of from 500 to
+600 yards, can exercise efficient control of his command._
+
+In preparing for an assault, seniors must take steps to organize it
+and make all necessary preparations themselves, and not leave all the
+responsibility with the juniors.
+
+In the assault each unit must know its special task beforehand, and it
+should be rehearsed in rear of the line of trenches. Each commander
+must know the exact time he is to start and must start on time.
+
+The first waves of men are placed at 4 or 5 pace interval. Chief of
+section can command only a front of 80 to 100 paces and it is
+necessary to form the section in two (2) waves. The first containing
+the grenadiers and automatic riflemen, the latter in the center. The
+second wave contains the riflemen and rifle grenadiers, the latter in
+the center.
+
+If the terrain is cut up by woods, villages, etc., the proportion of
+grenadiers may be increased by taking them from the sections in
+support and the automatic riflemen sent back to the second wave.
+
+If the distance to cross exceeds 300 or 400 yards, the number of
+automatic riflemen should be increased.
+
+_Two or three sections are usually placed abreast on the company
+front, which thus covers two to three hundred yards._
+
+The support sections follow the leading sections of their company at
+about 50 yards, marching in two lines, if possible in two lines of
+squad columns at 20 yard intervals.
+
+The first wave of the support is usually formed of the one-half
+section of specialists.
+
+The echeloning of the specialists in front is also the most favorable
+formation to progress by rushes in a terrain cut up by shell holes.
+
+The chief of section is between the two (2) waves of his section.
+
+The captain is usually in front of the support sections.
+
+The support sections are closely followed by a powerful line of
+machine guns, which are thrown into the fight when needed to reenforce
+the leading units.
+
+"Trench Cleaners" usually march immediately after the leading sections
+and may be taken from the support sections. They are armed with
+pistols, knives and hand grenades.
+
+The captain can use his section complete, or take out the specialists
+and use them for a particular purpose.
+
+The specialists carry only the weapons of their specialty and have
+their loads lightened. The ordinary riflemen carry the usual packs and
+equipment.
+
+Officers no longer lead the assault, but direct it. They are equipped
+with the rifle and bayonet, the same as the enlisted man.
+
+Each unit of the first wave of the attack is given a definite
+objective. Different waves must not break upon the first wave.
+
+Fire is opened by the assaulting troops only at short ranges, the
+advance being protected by a curtain of artillery fire. The advancing
+line makes use of shell holes and all other available cover.
+
+When the first section reaches its objective it is joined by the half
+section of riflemen; it immediately organizes the captured ground.
+
+
+Attacking From Trenches.--The commanders of brigades and battalions,
+with the commander of the artillery detailed to support them, study on
+the ground the artillery plan so far as it affects them. Immediately
+after the advance of the infantry begins, the artillery supporting it
+commences an intense bombardment with the object of forcing the enemy
+to take cover. At the moment laid down in the table of artillery fire
+the barrage lifts clear of the trench and the infantry rush in and
+capture it. The infantry must be taught that their success depends
+upon their getting within 75 yards of the barrage before it lifts, in
+order that they may reach the trenches before the enemy can man them.
+The secret of a successful assault is exact synchronization of the
+movements of the infantry with those of the barrage.
+
+The pace of a barrage depends, to a certain extent, on the pace of the
+infantry, which varies with the condition of the ground, the length of
+the advance, the number of enemy trenches to be crossed, etc. It may
+be from 15 to 75 yards per minute. The pace of the barrage should be
+quicker at first, and should gradually slow down as the men become
+exhausted, in order to give them time to get close to the barrage and
+pull themselves together for the final rush.
+
+In an attack each unit must have sufficient driving power in itself to
+carry it through to its objective and enable it to hold its ground
+when it gets there. When a number of trenches have to be carried,
+considerable depth will be required, and the frontage must be reduced.
+A brigade usually has a front in attack of 250 to 350 yards, but this
+may be increased to 1,000 or 1,200 yards.
+
+A battalion should have a front of 250 to 350 yards. The battalion
+must be organized in depth in a series of waves. Two companies are
+usually put abreast in the first line and the others in the second
+line. Each company in both lines attacks in column of platoons at
+about 50 yards' distance, with intervals of three to five paces
+between men, so there would be eight lines of waves, of two platoons
+each. The 8th and 16th platoons, the two in rear forming the eighth
+wave, are usually not employed in the attack, but are left behind as a
+nucleus to form on in case of heavy casualties.
+
+The front line must not be less than 200 yards from the enemy's front
+line.
+
+The leading two or three waves are likely to meet machine gun fire,
+and generally move in extended order. Not more than two waves can be
+accommodated in one trench. Subsequent waves will move in line or in
+line of section columns in single file. Russian saps must be run out
+as far as possible across "No Man's Land" to be opened up immediately
+after the assault, as approach trenches. Ladders or steps are
+necessary to assist the leading waves in leaving the trenches, as they
+must move in lines. Provision must be made for bridges over the first
+line trenches for the rear waves. In the original assault line will be
+more suitable for both leading and rear waves. In later stages it is
+better for the rear waves to move in small and handy columns. In the
+original assault the distance between waves may be 75 to 100 yards; in
+later stages they may follow each other at 50 yards.
+
+In the original assault, zero, or the time for the assault to begin,
+may be fixed for the moment at which our barrage lifts from the enemy
+front trench, the infantry timing their advance so as to be close
+under our barrage before it lifts. In the later stages zero must be
+the moment at which our barrage commences, and this commencement will
+be the signal for the infantry to leave their trenches. Each wave is
+assigned its own objective. All watches must be synchronized in order
+that all units may start off at the appointed time.
+
+The first wave is composed of bombers and rifle grenade men, and
+attacks the enemy's first line of trenches. It must go straight
+through to its objective, following the artillery barrage as closely
+as possible. The second and third waves, composed of riflemen with
+bayonets and Lewis guns, re-enforce the first wave after the latter
+has occupied the enemy's first line trench, and attack the second line
+trench. The fourth wave takes up tools, ammunition and sand bags and
+assists in consolidating the line. The fifth wave is a mopping-up
+party to clear the enemy's dugouts. The sixth wave comprises
+battalion headquarters and has two Lewis guns, kept for a special
+purpose. The seventh and eighth waves, if used, seize and consolidate
+the enemy's third line trench.
+
+Bombing squads (1 non-commissioned officer and 8 men) are on the flank
+of each attacking wave. Battalion bombers are assigned a special task.
+
+All movements must be over the top of the ground. The pace throughout
+should be a steady walk, except for the last 30 or 40 yards, when the
+line should break into a steady double time, finishing up the last 10
+yards with a rush.
+
+Barrage is continued 20 or 30 minutes after the objective has been
+reached.
+
+Mopping parties must be trained with great care under selected
+officers. They should always wear a distinguishing mark. They must at
+once dispose of any occupants who may have emerged from their dugouts,
+and picket the dugout entrances.
+
+The ultimate unit in the assault is the platoon. It must be organized
+and trained as a self-contained unit, capable of producing the
+required proportion of riflemen, bombers, rifle bombers, Lewis
+gunners, and carriers, all trained to work in combination.
+
+Assaulting troops should have twelve hours of daylight in the trenches
+before the assault begins, to enable them to get acquainted with the
+ground and get some rest. All ranks must be given a hot meal,
+including hot tea or coffee, before the assault.
+
+Take every precaution to prevent the enemy from realizing that the
+assault is about to take place. Bayonets must not be allowed to show.
+No increase in rate of artillery fire. No unusual movements must be
+made in the trenches, and there must be no indication of the impending
+assault until the barrage is dropped.
+
+When the trench has been taken, it should be consolidated at once to
+prevent counterattack. To protect this consolidation, throw out an
+outpost line, the posts consisting of one non-commissioned officer and
+6 riflemen with a Lewis gun, about 150 to 200 yards apart and 100 to
+300 yards beyond the line. These posts should be established in
+shellholes, which are to be converted into fire trenches, protected by
+wire entanglements, as soon as possible.
+
+Approach trenches toward the enemy should be blockaded and hand and
+rifle grenadiers posted to guard them. The main captured trench should
+be converted at once into a fire trench facing the enemy. If it is
+badly knocked to pieces, a new trench may be constructed 40 or 50
+yards in front of the captured line. The commander must reorganize in
+depth to provide supports and reserves for counterattacks. Situation
+reports should be sent back frequently. Rough sketches are better than
+messages.
+
+Tanks follow infantry as closely as possible to deal with strong
+points. They are employed in sections of four.
+
+Machine guns may be used to provide covering fire for attacking
+infantry, cover its withdrawal if the attack fails, fill gaps in the
+assaulting lines, assist in the consolidation of positions and repel
+counterattacks.
+
+Lewis guns are of great value in knocking out hostile machine guns.
+They usually move on the flanks of the second wave of assault. Later
+they are used to back up patrols and to hold the outpost line while
+the garrison line is being consolidated.
+
+As soon as consolidation begins, wire entanglements should be
+constructed. Every effort should be made to secure the objective
+against recapture. Any men available should be used to continue the
+offensive.
+
+All commanders down to and including company commanders must keep some
+portion of their command as a reserve. The company commander needs his
+reserve to work around points which are holding against the leading
+lines, to protect his flanks in case the companies on his right and
+left are delayed in their advance and to exploit his success and gain
+ground to the front. He must keep it well in hand behind the company.
+
+Battalion reserves must start with the assaulting column and get
+across "No Man's Land" as soon as possible; they must not get out of
+hand. Such a reserve is usually checked in the vicinity of the enemy's
+front line trench, where it can be thrown in to assist the advance or
+extend a flank as needed.
+
+The brigade reserve is kept well in hand just clear of the friendly
+front line and support trenches. Reserves of companies and battalions
+must start moving over the top of the ground with the rest of the
+assaulting troops.
+
+
+Defense Of Trenches.--The latest methods consist in constructing,
+supporting and strong points at the most favorable points to be held,
+such as villages, woods, etc. These are separated by intervals not too
+great for mutual support. They are of such resisting power that they
+must be taken before the attack can progress. In the intervals between
+them fire and communicating trenches are constructed, but these are
+only held lightly. Dummy trenches may be placed in these intervals.
+Lines of the various works are so traced that they bring enfilading
+fire on troops attacking adjacent positions. The lines need not be
+continuously occupied, but the obstacles extend in an unbroken line
+along the whole front. Wire entanglements are set in front of
+important positions in belts 20 feet wide, in two or three rows, each
+20 yards apart.
+
+Each supporting point usually is occupied by a battalion, and consists
+of a series of trenches formed into strong points, each held by a
+garrison of one or more platoons or a company. The supporting points
+are from 600 to 800 yards in depth and have a front of 600 to 1,000
+yards. The first line of strong points is occupied by one or two
+companies in firing and cover trenches, while the remainder of the
+battalion occupies the support and reserve trenches. Bomb-proofs are
+built along the cover trenches and are connected with the firing
+trenches. Approach trenches are protected on both flanks by wire
+entanglements. Strong points in support and reserve trenches are
+prepared for an all-around defense and divided into two or more
+separate strong points by wire entanglements.
+
+A body of infantry attacked is to oppose to the assailant its high
+powered weapons, machine guns, automatic rifles, rifle grenades and
+hand grenades and to reserve for the counter attack the grenadiers and
+riflemen. There is always one line upon which the resistance must be
+made with the greatest energy; for its defense the following methods
+have been found successful. Machine guns should be placed where they
+can secure the best flanking fire, and every one put out of action
+should immediately be replaced by an automatic rifle. If machine gun
+barrage fire is to play its role successfully at the moment of
+assault, the guns must survive the bombardment. Their protection is
+secured by placing them under shelter during the bombardment and
+making their emplacements as nearly invisible as possible. They should
+be echeloned in depth as far as practicable. They are generally placed
+in re-entrants of the firing trenches and cover the intervals between
+the adjoining supporting and strong points. Where the ground will
+permit they are often placed in concealed positions 20 to 30 yards in
+front of the trenches, to break up attacks made by hostile infantry.
+Not too many should be placed in the front line, and they should be
+echeloned in depth so as to confuse their disposition. The value of
+machine guns depends on the possibility of using them suddenly for
+brief periods, and in using them as long as they are effective.
+Machine guns disposed for flanking fire must be well covered by
+grenadiers; this is also true of automatic rifles.
+
+Automatic rifles, rifle grenades and hand grenades are used to
+constitute a barrage to keep back the enemy. The entire front should
+be defended by a barrage of hand grenades, while the barrage of
+automatic rifles and rifle grenades is superposed farther to the
+front, up to 400 yards.
+
+All riflemen and those grenadiers not employed in forming barrages are
+reserved to make a counterattack.
+
+Companies on the second line operate on similar principles; machine
+guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades are arranged so as to cover
+every portion of the first line that might be invaded. After a short
+preparation by fire from these, the grenadiers and riflemen make the
+counterattack.
+
+The captains in charge of the two lines are responsible for the
+arrangement of the machine guns, automatic rifles and rifle grenades,
+the distribution of barrages and the distribution of groups for the
+counterattack. The real strength of the defense consists, not in
+holding the fire and cover trenches, nor even the support trenches,
+but in holding the supporting and strong points until the
+counterattack can be launched.
+
+
+Liaison.--The question of liaison in battle is of the utmost
+importance, and complete co-ordination of the different arms is
+absolutely necessary. Each battalion sends an officer or
+non-commissioned officer and a cyclist to the colonel, and each
+colonel sends a soldier to the battalion commander.
+
+The principal means of communication are the telephone, telegraph,
+wireless, aeroplane, mounted messengers, autos and motorcycles; and at
+the front runners, visual signals, rockets and carrier pigeons.
+
+Each battalion commander is connected by telephone with each company
+commander, with the artillery observers, with the artillery commander,
+with his own colonel and with the adjacent battalions on either side.
+
+The signallers of assaulting companies move with the company
+commander. All signallers should be given a special training in
+repeating a message several times to a known back station which may
+not be able to reply forward.
+
+At the commencement of the assault the pigeons and pigeon carriers
+must be kept back at battalion headquarters, and sent forward as soon
+as the position has been gained.
+
+Runners can be relied upon when all other means fail. They must be
+trained with their companies. Runners should be lightly equipped and
+wear a distinctive mark. They must be familiar with all the principal
+routes to all the principal centers within their battalion sector. The
+quicker they go the safer they are. Company and platoon runners must
+go forward with their respective commanders. Messages to be carried
+long distances will be relayed. Never send a verbal message by a
+runner; ignore any received; all messages must be written.
+
+Company and battalion commanders must be prepared to assist artillery
+liaison officers in getting their messages back. Liaison officers must
+be exchanged by all the assaulting battalions with the battalion on
+either flank.
+
+
+Trench Orders.--(Battalion): Trenches are usually divided into a
+certain number of bays; the number of men to defend these bays depends
+upon the length of trench allotted to each company. Each section is
+detailed to guard a certain number of bays.
+
+Non-commissioned officers and men must always wear their equipment by
+day and night. Every company will "Stand To" arms daily one-half hour
+before dusk and one-half hour before dawn, and will remain until
+dismissed by the company commander.
+
+The enemy's trenches are so close that it is very important for the
+men to have their rifle sights always at battle sight, so that there
+will be no necessity to alter their sights in case of alarm. By night
+all bayonets are to be fixed and half of the men on duty in the
+trenches are to be sitting on the firing platform with their rifles by
+their side. In case of attack, especially at night, it should be
+impressed upon the men that they fire low.
+
+Section commanders are responsible that the men under their command
+have sufficient standing room for the purpose of firing over the
+parapet. They must have a clear field of fire, and not only be able to
+see the enemy trenches but the ground in the immediate vicinity of
+their trench. When making new trenches parapets should be at least
+five feet thick at the top in order to be bullet proof.
+
+Repairs or alterations of the parapet should be reported at once by
+the section commander to the platoon commander, who will report it to
+superior authority. Repairing of trenches, fatigue, etc., will be
+carried on either by day or night according to company arrangement.
+Certain hours will be allotted for these tasks and no man is to be
+employed upon any kind of work out of these hours. No man should leave
+his post in the trenches at any time without the permission of the
+non-commissioned officer in charge of that post. At night there should
+be at least one sentry post to each ten yards of parapet. At night,
+double sentries should be posted if possible, and no sentry should be
+kept on duty for longer than an hour at a time. The arrangement should
+be such that when one sentry is doing his last half hour, his comrade
+will be doing his first half hour.
+
+Sentries at night should always have their rifles resting on the
+parapet, ready to fire at a moment's notice. As few sentries as
+possible should be posted by day, so as to give as much rest as
+possible to the remainder of the men.
+
+By day any existing loop-holes may be used by a sentry for observation
+purposes, but this must be strictly prohibited at night, when the
+sentry must look over the parapet. If a sentry is continually fired
+at, the section commander will post him in another position, but not
+too far from his original position. There is no excuse for a man going
+to sleep on sentry duty; if he is sick he should report the fact to
+the non-commissioned officer, who will report to superior authority.
+
+An armed party of the enemy approaching the trench under a flag of
+truce should be halted at a distance, ordered to lay down their arms,
+and the matter at once reported to the company commander. If the party
+fails to halt when ordered to do so, or does not convey a flag of
+truce, they should be fired upon. An unarmed party should be halted in
+the same way. It is not necessary to challenge at night; open fire at
+once. This is modified only by special instructions.
+
+Men especially picked for listening patrols and sharp-shooters will be
+given special privileges. All loud talking must be checked at night by
+officers and non-commissioned officers. All working parties must wear
+their equipment and carry their rifles. All picks and shovels will be
+returned after use to the company store room. Ration parties and
+parties carrying materials for repairs, etc., need not wear their
+equipment or carry rifles; they should be accompanied by a fully armed
+non-commissioned officer as an escort. Not more than 20 men are to be
+away from the company at one time; one non-commissioned officer and
+four men per platoon.
+
+Rifles must be kept clean and in good condition while in the trenches.
+They will be cleaned every morning during an hour appointed by the
+company commander for the purpose. Platoon commanders will be
+responsible that section commanders superintend this work. All rifles
+except those used by sentries are to be kept in racks during the day.
+
+Trenches must be kept in sanitary condition. Platoon commanders will
+be responsible for the latrines in their sections of the trenches. All
+water for drinking and cooking is to be taken from a water cart or
+tank provided for this purpose.
+
+Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a place designated by the
+commanding officer. No soldier will be buried nearer than 300 yards
+from the trenches.
+
+In every platoon a non-commissioned officer will be detailed for duty
+by day; he will do no night duty. He will post the day sentries and
+see that they are on the alert and carry out their orders correctly.
+He will be responsible for the cleanliness of his lines and will
+frequently visit the latrines. He will see that all loose ammunition
+is collected.
+
+The platoon commander will always send a non-commissioned officer to
+draw rations and he will be responsible for their delivery.
+
+The passing along of messages by word of mouth will not be used. All
+messages should be written.
+
+Special instructions will be issued as to precautions against gas.
+
+
+Selection of Site.
+
+(a) Fire trench should be selected with due regard to tactical
+requirements and the economy of men.
+
+(b) Every fire trench should have a good field of fire, at least 250
+yards.
+
+(c) The trenches should have the best possible cover.
+
+(d) The forward position on a slope for the first line has the best
+advantage. The support trench should be on the reverse slope from 100
+to 600 yards in rear of the first line to prevent direct observation
+and to be practically free from artillery fire. The reserve trench is
+usually from 1/2 to 1 mile in rear of the first line. Remember that
+the first line, the support line, and the reserve line are all fire
+trenches. Do not put them on a crest.
+
+(e) The communicating trenches (boyaux) should be zigzagged, wide and
+deep, and should follow the low ground. The longest straight trench
+should not exceed thirty paces. The angle made by each turn should be
+less than 140 degrees.
+
+(f) The fire trenches should have salients and re-entrants so as to
+flank the wire entanglements. The bays are usually 27 feet long with 9
+feet of traverse.
+
+(g) There are two problems in the siting of trenches, one for those to
+be constructed under fire and another for those that will be
+constructed without any danger from fire. Trenches built under fire
+are usually made by connecting up individual shelters made by the
+front line when forced to halt. Trenches built under quiet conditions
+can be laid out according to the best possible plan.
+
+
+Trench Construction.
+
+Several kinds of difficulties face the trench digger: Sand, clay,
+water and bullets. In order to overcome them he must be familiar with
+the general arrangement of a trench, the principles which govern its
+construction and the standard trench as it has been worked out in the
+present war at the cost of thousands of lives.
+
+
+General Arrangement.--A position is a combination of trenches,
+consisting of: The fire trench, or first line, nearest the enemy; the
+cover trench, just behind the first line, where all but sentinels of
+the fire trench garrison are held in dugouts or shelters; the support
+trench, from 150 to 200 yards in rear of the cover trench, and the
+reserve, from 800 to 1,200 yards still further to the rear.
+
+The support trench is placed far enough from the first line to prevent
+the enemy from shelling both trenches at once. By a concentration of
+artillery fire and a determined advance of the hostile infantry the
+first line may be captured. The support trench must be so organized
+that it will then act as a line of resistance upon which the enemy's
+advance will break. Lieutenant Colonel Azan of the French army says:
+"As long as the support trenches are strongly held, the position is
+not in the hands of the enemy."
+
+[Illustration: Plate #16]
+
+The reserve is usually a _strong point_, so organized that it can
+maintain independent resistance for several days if necessary, should
+the enemy obtain control of adjacent areas.
+
+Where possible trenches should be on reverse slopes, with the
+exception of the first line; but usually the outline of a trench is
+determined in actual combat, or is a part of hostile trench converted.
+Under these circumstances it cannot be arranged according to tactical
+ideals.
+
+Artillery and the automatic gun are the determining factors in trench
+warfare to-day. The effect of artillery fire must be limited in its
+area as far as possible, and trenches are, therefore, cut by
+_traverses_, which are square blocks of earth not less than nine feet
+square, left every 27 feet along the trench. They should overlap the
+width of the trench by at least one yard, thereby limiting the effect
+of shell burst to a single _bay_, the 27-foot length of firing trench
+between two traverses. Sharp angles have the same effect as traverses,
+but angles of more than 120 degrees cannot be utilized in this way.
+
+The sides of the trench are kept as nearly perpendicular as possible,
+to give the maximum protection from shell burst and the fall of high
+angle projectiles. The _parados_, the bank of earth to the rear of the
+trench, has been developed during the war to give protection from
+flying fragments of shells exploding to the rear, and to prevent the
+figure of a sentinel from being outlined through a loop-hole against
+the sky. The _berm_, a ledge or shelf left between the side of the
+trench and the beginning of the parados, has come into general use in
+order to take the weight of the parados off the earth at the immediate
+edge of the trench, and so prevent the reverse slope from caving in
+easily under bombardment or heavy rain.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #16A]
+
+Automatic guns have made it necessary to break the line of the trench
+at every opportunity, in order to secure a flanking fire for these
+arms. Auto-rifles and machine guns have tremendous effectiveness only
+in depth, and flanking fire gives them their greatest opportunity.
+
+
+Trench Construction.--The methods of building trenches are the same
+whether the work is carried on under fire or not. In an attack, upon
+reaching the limit of advance, the men immediately dig themselves in,
+and later connect these individual holes to make a continuous line of
+trench.
+
+Most of the digging must be done at night, and must be organized to
+obtain the most work with the least confusion. There are three ways of
+increasing the efficiency of the men. In the first of these, squad
+shifts, the squad leader divides his men into reliefs and gives each
+man a limited period of intensive work. Reliefs may be made by squads
+or by individuals. The second way of increasing efficiency is to
+induce competition among the man and squads, thus making the work a
+game in which each soldier's interest will be aroused in the effort to
+do better than the others. The third method is to assign a fixed
+amount of work to each man. An average task, which all ought to
+accomplish in a given time, is found by experience, and those who
+finish before their time is up are relieved from further work during
+that shift, and allowed to return to their shelters.
+
+Continual care must be used to check up the tools on hand, as the men
+are prone to leave them where they were working rather than carry them
+back and forth to work. Each unit must guard its property from
+appropriation by neighbors on its flanks.
+
+
+System of Laying Out Trenches.--The trace of the trench is first
+staked out, particularly at traverses and corners when the work is to
+be done at night. Measurements should be exact, and the men should be
+required to line the limits of each trench so as not to exceed them
+in digging. All sod should be taken up carefully and used on the
+parapet for concealment or on the berm to make a square back wall for
+the dirt of the parapet. If possible this should be done with the
+parados wall, so as to make it as inconspicuous as possible from the
+front.
+
+Men should begin to dig at the center of the trench and throw the dirt
+as far out on the sides as possible, so that as they go deeper the
+earth can be thrown just over the berm. The slope of the sides will be
+kept steep and the men prevented from widening the trench as they dig.
+In sandy soil the sides of the trench should be allowed to reach their
+angle of repose (which is wider at the top than required), then the
+trench walls supported with _revettments_ to the proper width, which
+are filled in behind with sand. Always dig to full depth before
+beginning to revet, as it is impossible to dig deeper afterwards
+without loosening the revetting.
+
+
+Revettments.--Every trench at points needs support, and this
+_revetting_ may be done with any of the following materials: Sod;
+corduroy of logs laid lengthwise; sand bags (size 20 in. x 10 in. x 5
+in.); galvanized iron; chicken wire and cloth made in a frame about
+six feet long; _hurdles_, wicker mats made by driving three-inch
+stakes into the ground, leaving uprights as high above the ground as
+the depth of the trench, then weaving withes and slender saplings
+between the uprights; expanded metal; _gabions_, cylindrical baskets
+made like hurdles except that the stakes are driven in a circle;
+_fascines_, bundles of faggots about 10 inches in diameter by 9 feet
+long. The faggots are laid together on a horse or between stakes
+driven in the ground, then "choked," or bound tightly together, by a
+rope 3 feet 8 inches long with loops at each end, tightened with two
+stiff levers. The bundle is then bound with wire at intervals of two
+feet. The circumference of a fascine should be 25 inches.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #17]
+
+Capt. Powell of the C.E.F. found during 18 months' service in the
+trenches, that a separate construction for the bottom and firing step
+from that of the parapet made repair much simpler when the trench was
+damaged by shell fire. The upper part of the trench usually suffers
+most, while the bottom section, if unattached, often remains intact
+and the drainage system needs only to be cleared out. If the portion
+above the firing step is one piece with that below, however, the whole
+trench has to be reconstructed.
+
+There is nothing more important than the supports used to keep
+revetting in place. With sods, sand bags, concrete and gabions, a
+proper arrangement in the first place will make other support
+unnecessary.
+
+
+Sod should be placed carefully, with a slope of not more than one
+inch on four, with the vegetation uppermost. This type is least
+affected by rain.
+
+
+Sand Bags should be used like brickwork, laid in alternate headers
+(binders) and stretchers. Their use should be confined as far as
+possible to emergency and repair work, because after a few weeks the
+bags rot and cannot be moved about. If the trench wall has been
+demolished by artillery fire, the particles of cloth make digging out
+the bottom of the trench a very difficult matter.
+
+
+Concrete Work has been used extensively by the Germans, but the
+chips fly like bullets under shell explosion, and the concrete cracks
+and disintegrates in severe weather. It is used in the bottom of
+trenches for drainage and for the firing step.
+
+
+Gabions may be set into the wall of the trench and filled with
+earth, or used at corners to prevent the wearing down of the edge,
+which reduces the protective effect of the trench. Set in at a slight
+angle they will hold the side without further re-enforcement.
+
+With the other forms of revetting some secondary support is required.
+This is usually furnished by sinking stakes into the bottom of the
+trench and securing their upper ends to a "dead man"--a stake or log
+sunk in the ground more than three feet away. The tendency is to sink
+the dead men too near to the trench, and to attach too many wires to
+one of them. It is important to sink the stakes at least one foot
+below the bottom of the trench. By digging holes for them instead of
+driving them in directly, the sides of the trench need not be
+disturbed by the concussion of driving the stakes. This is especially
+important in sandy soils. Stakes should be placed about two feet
+apart. Dead men should be buried deeply enough to prevent cutting by
+shell explosions.
+
+
+Trench Armament.--A few machine guns are set in concealed
+emplacements along the trench to cover important salients. The
+automatic rifle is used over the parapet. Besides these there is the
+rifle grenade and trench mortar. The rifle grenade has a simple
+emplacement. After securing the proper elevation, the butt of the
+rifle is placed between posts or blocks of wood and the muzzle rested
+against a log on the wall of the trench. A trench mortar emplacement
+is dug in the rear wall of the trench, or a shell hole is utilized,
+care being taken to conceal it from aerial observation.
+
+
+Loopholes.--Loopholes are still much in use for observation, but
+they are employed less and less for firing, as they are difficult to
+conceal from the enemy and almost useless when the enemy is close.
+They should cut the parapet diagonally, not directly to the front, and
+should be concealed by vegetation and by a curtain over the opening
+when they are not in use. Sheet steel plates with small peep holes are
+used on the parapet. They are set up with a slope to the rear to
+deflect bullets.
+
+
+Trench Bottoms.--In clay or hard soil special arrangements must be
+made for drainage. Where possible the trench should have a convex
+surface and should be smooth. A rough bottom means delay in reliefs,
+and possible injuries. Where trenches are used for long periods
+board walks should be constructed. Under these drains or sink holes
+can be placed to collect water. A sink hole may be constructed by
+digging a pit filled with small stones, or a barrel may be sunk into
+the ground and filled with stone. Where there is not sufficient slope
+to carry off the water, or at the lowest point of a drainage system, a
+water hole should be dug in front of the trench large enough to handle
+the drainage water.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #18]
+
+Communication Trench (or Boyau).--Running to the rear and joining
+the different parallel resistance trenches are communication trenches
+or boyaux. These are for transportation of men and material as well as
+for communication. Communication trenches should be made wide enough
+to allow travel for men with loads, should be at least seven feet deep
+and as smooth as possible on the bottom. Rough places will delay
+traffic. They are dug with turns every 20 or 30 yards to prevent their
+being swept by gun fire. When boyaux are built by night sharp zig-zag
+corners should be used, or the angles will not be acute and protection
+will be lost. During daylight when the directions can be seen, the
+construction may be a serpentine curve, with no stretch of more than
+30 yards visible from one point.
+
+Boyaux are sometimes used for lateral defence and often emplacements
+for automatic guns are arranged to cover stretches of them. Bombing
+stations are placed near by to protect the guns and to clear the boyau
+of the enemy. At these points the boyau is left straight for a short
+distance in front. Where provision is made for lateral or frontal
+defence by rifle fire, firing steps are constructed. If this is
+inconvenient for movement along the boyau, individual emplacements
+must be made in the side wall for firing. Sentry posts are dug at
+right angles to the boyau.
+
+Arrangements for passage of men moving in opposite directions may be
+made by extending short spurs at the corners, enlarging the boyau at
+the bends, digging niches or passing points here and there, or
+constructing island traverses with the boyau running around on each
+side.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #19]
+
+Every boyau should be marked where it meets a trench with a sign
+indicating the place and trench. Without this messengers, reliefs and
+re-enforcements may easily be lost in the maze of trenches.
+
+
+Latrines should be run out about 20 feet from boyaux at points
+directly in rear of lateral trenches. If possible they should be
+placed so that men cannot enter them without passing near the platoon
+leaders. This will prevent men from leaving the front line, under the
+pretense of going to latrines, during bombardments or mining
+operations. The trench leading to a latrine should be constructed like
+a boyau, and the pit should be close to the side nearest the enemy, to
+give the best possible protection from shell fire. There are three
+types of trench latrines: Deep boxes which are covered and have rough
+seats; short straddle trenches or trenches equipped with a single
+horizontal bar, and portable cans, used where the ground or the
+limited space make it impossible to dig pits. These cans should be
+emptied daily into holes behind the trenches, which are covered after
+the cans are emptied into them.
+
+Urinals should be separate from the latrines. They may be either holes
+about three feet deep filled with stone, troughs with a covered pit at
+the end, or portable cans.
+
+
+Shelters. For the protection of men not actually on duty three forms
+of shelters are used. The _splinter-proof_ is a form of light shelter
+whose covering affords protection only against splinters. These are
+usually on the reserve line. About 12 inches to 20 inches of earth
+over a roof of logs or planks will afford protection from splinters
+and shrapnel. Curved sheets of iron may also be used. The _deep
+shelter_ or _bomb-proof_ is a chamber constructed by digging from the
+surface and constructing a roof. To protect against eight-inch
+shells the top of the chamber should be twenty feet below the surface.
+Heavy beams or sections of railroad iron are laid across the roof.
+Above them is a layer of earth several feet thick; then another layer
+of timber extending to undisturbed ground on the sides with concrete,
+crushed stone, metal, etc., above to make a percussion surface for
+exploding projectiles that penetrate the upper layer of earth. This
+layer fills in the rest of the space to the level of the ground.
+
+[Illustration: Plate No. 20.]
+
+Shelters should not exceed six feet in width, but can be of any
+length. This will prevent the crushing in of the roof timber by the
+explosion of a projectile buried in the upper layer of earth. The
+principles of constructing shelters will be considered under
+"Dugouts," as they are similar for the two types.
+
+
+Dugouts are chambers tunnelled into the ground with twenty feet or
+more of undisturbed earth above them. They are used in the cover
+trenches and sometimes in the first line. Enough of them must be built
+to shelter the garrison of each sector, allowing one man per yard of
+front. They must also be built for machine gun and trench mortar
+detachments.
+
+
+Sentries must be stationed in observation posts which command the
+ground in front of each dugout. They must be connected with the
+dugouts by telephone or speaking tube.
+
+
+Position.--Dugouts must always be on the side of the trench toward
+the enemy. This prevents flying shells from falling into the
+entrances. They should connect with lateral trenches, not with boyaux,
+as men at the entrance obstruct traffic through the boyaux.
+
+
+Entrances and exits must be well concealed, with not less than five
+feet of head cover. This should be provided with a bursting layer. All
+dugouts must have at least two openings, one on the opposite side of
+the traverse or angle from the other. It is well to have an exit
+behind the parados leading to a surprise position for a machine gun
+and bombers. All openings must have a sill 6 inches to 8 inches high,
+to prevent water from entering the dugout.
+
+
+Galleries leading to dugouts should be built at an incline of 45
+degrees. Their dimensions should be 2 feet 6 inches by 6 feet. Frames
+are of squared timber. The sill and two side posts should be not less
+than 6 inches square, and the frames in the passageways 2 feet 6
+inches by 4 feet 6 inches. They must be placed at right angles to the
+slope of the gallery, with distance pieces between uprights. In
+treacherous soil the frames rest on sills. Steps in the passageway are
+1 foot broad and 1 foot high.
+
+
+Bomb-traps, extensions of the gallery about 3 feet long, should be
+dug beyond the point where the entrance to the dugout chamber leads
+off from the gallery. These will catch bombs thrown in from the
+surface and protect the chamber from the effects of their explosion.
+
+
+Interior. The standard section is 6 feet by 8 feet, to allow for
+bunks on each side. Frames of 6 by 6 timber spaced 2 feet 6 inches
+apart support the sides and roof. Roof planking should be 2 inches
+thick, and the sides should be covered with 1-1/2 inch plank or
+corrugated iron. Two shovels and two picks for emergencies should
+always be kept in each dugout. The construction of the chamber should
+be that of a very strong box, so that it will stand strain, if
+necessary, from within as well as from without.
+
+
+Depots for Supplies must be near the headquarters of the platoon,
+company, battalion and regiment. Shelters may be made with ammunition
+boxes set into the side of the trench. Places should be provided for
+the following: Food, ammunition for rifles and auto-rifles, grenades,
+rockets, tools and other supplies. Places must also be arranged in
+the front line for ammunition, rockets and hand and rifle grenades.
+
+
+Telephones. Communication is established as speedily as possible
+with the various units. In the forward trenches wires do not last long
+under bombardment and fire left open along the side of the trench,
+where quick repairs can be made. All soldiers must be taught to
+respect these wires and to care for them when they are found under
+foot or hanging. Conduits are dug for wires to battalion and
+regimental headquarters, and these are fairly safe from shell fire.
+
+
+Departure Parallel. In preparing for an advance upon the enemy, a
+straight line trench without traverses, and with steps at the end for
+exit to the surface, is built in front of the first line trench. This
+line of departure is generally brought within about 200 yards of the
+hostile line by means of _saps_, short trenches run out from the front
+line to the new parallel. Since this line of departure can be seen by
+the enemy, it is sometimes better to construct steps in the front line
+trench itself, or when possible to build a _Russian sap_. This is a
+tunnel very near the ground, which can be broken through at a moment's
+notice when troops are ready to advance.
+
+
+Machine Gun Emplacements.--Shell-holes with a good field of fire and
+emplacements along boyaux are the best location for machine guns. Few
+guns are placed in the front line, and these only at strong points in
+the line, which command a maximum field of effectiveness. Shell-holes
+may be imitated for machine gun emplacements, but in any case they
+should be connected by underground passage with the trenches. Thus
+when trenches are destroyed by bombardment the machine guns remain
+intact. The field of fire for each machine gun should be carefully
+determined and marked by three stakes, one for the position of the
+gun, the other two for the limits of the field of fire. Using these as
+guides, the gun can be fired correctly at night. During the day it
+is never left in place nor fired from its actual emplacement.
+
+[Illustration: No. 21]
+
+Listening Posts.--These stations are usually carried out to the edge
+of the entanglements nearest the enemy. The listening station must be
+large enough for half a squad, and often has an automatic rifle and
+grenade thrower. There should be not more than two posts for each
+battalion. They are not occupied during the day. They are hard to
+defend and easily captured by a raiding party which cuts the wire to
+one of the flanks and comes in from the rear. The boyau leading to the
+post should be zig-zagged. The post itself should be deep enough for
+good head cover.
+
+
+Wire Entanglements.--The object of the entanglement is not to stop
+completely the advance of the enemy, but to delay him at close range
+under machine gun, auto rifle and rifle fire, and within range of
+grenades and bombs. Entanglements should be concealed as much as
+possible from the enemy's trenches and from aerial observation. If
+possible, they should be placed on a reverse slope or in a dead angle.
+They should be from 50 to 100 yards in front of the trench, so that
+artillery fire directed upon the trench will not be effective on the
+wire. At the same time the wire must not be far enough advanced so
+that the enemy's raiding parties can cut the entanglements.
+
+Wire entanglements are classified as high entanglements, low
+entanglements and loose wire.
+
+
+High Entanglements are strung on metal or wood posts about four feet
+high, both wire and posts being painted for camouflage. The driving of
+posts must be muffled, and metal screw posts are used when near the
+enemy's line. Posts are placed in two parallel lines, two yards apart,
+spaced alternately so that the posts in one line are opposite the
+middle of the interval in the other.
+
+
+Tracing Entanglements is done by a sergeant followed by two stake
+placers, two holders and two drivers, who in turn are followed by men
+attaching wire. Two men carry each roll of wire, and each pair (there
+are twelve pairs in all) strings one wire. A panel between stakes is
+composed of four strands. Each wire should be wrapped around each
+post. The same arrangement of panels should run between the two lines
+of posts. The entanglements are in three lines about 20 yards apart,
+the nearest being 20 yards from the front line trench. The
+entanglement nearest the enemy should be constructed first, so that
+men always work nearest their own trenches. All wire entanglements
+should be at all points commanded by the flanking fire of machine
+guns. High entanglements (known as abatis) may be made by felling
+trees toward the enemy, and similar entanglements made of brushwood
+are useful in emergency.
+
+
+Low Entanglements are formed of pickets two feet high, 2-1/2 inches
+in diameter, wired in all directions. Vegetation renders the
+entanglement invisible from the enemy and from aerial observation.
+This type may also be placed in shallow excavations which are
+concealed from the enemy and partly protected from artillery fire.
+Sharpened stakes, with their points hardened by fire, driven obliquely
+into the ground, may also be used.
+
+
+Loose Wire in the form of loops of small diameter fastened to
+stakes, or wire laid along the ground and attached at the ends, or
+spirals of barbed wire in racks, is used for entanglements. It is
+reported that this form is coming into considerable use, but the
+details have not been published. Such entanglements are much harder to
+locate by aerial observation.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The following are a number of criticisms made by Lieut. Henri Poire of
+the French army, detailed as instructor at Plattsburg, upon the system
+of field works constructed by the 17th and 18th Provisional Training
+Regiments. The ground was of loose sand, with some gravel at a depth
+of about six feet.
+
+ 1. Dimensions of trenches as laid out were not followed.
+ (a) Bottom of trenches behind firing steps too narrow.
+ (b) Firing step too deep. It should never be more than 3 feet 4
+ inches below berm of parapet.
+ (c) Parapet much too thin in most cases. It should be at least
+ three feet thick.
+ (d) Communication trenches (boyaux) generally too narrow.
+ (e) Islands in communication trenches should never be less than
+ 10 x 12 yards--otherwise one shell will demolish the entire
+ passageway.
+
+ 2. Revettment work not well anchored. In some cases too many wires
+from supports fastened to one dead man. Another fault is that dead
+men were not buried deeply enough in the ground, nor far enough back
+from the trench. In one case a dead man (a stake) supported all four
+sides of an island in a communication trench. The destruction of this
+post would have completely blocked every passage around the island.
+Furthermore, dead men rot quickly and tend to break off. It is
+necessary, therefore, to have a number of them, each holding only a
+portion of the weight. All projecting branches and irregularities
+along a trench should be removed by occupying troops.
+
+ 3. Too many loop-holes. Except for snipers, riflemen and automatic
+riflemen fire over the parapet.
+
+ 4. Machine gun loop-holes not wide enough. They should not be less
+than 36 inches wide. There must be vegetation planted in front and a
+curtain hung over the loop-holes to prevent detection. The growing
+plants in front will be easily swept away at the first discharge.
+
+ 5. Remember never to imitate shell-holes until after a real
+bombardment by the enemy.
+
+ 6. The dugouts made were never deep enough and afforded no
+protection. In fact it would be far better to have none than to be
+caught inside when a shell exploded in a shallow one, because the
+confinement of the explosion would intensify the effect.
+
+ 7. Shelters were all too wide. Six feet is the maximum.
+ The platoon headquarters dugout should be of the same width as the
+trench, not over three feet, but as long as necessary. Company
+headquarters is six feet wide and of whatever depth required.
+
+ 8. In digging, not enough care was used to conceal the fresh earth
+from the enemy. Make false emplacements to utilize this dirt; also dig
+dummy trenches about one foot deep, leaving the sides sharp so that
+they will show clearly on aerial photographs.
+
+ 9. In using plants as camouflage, distinct care must be exercised
+not to put growing plants too freely nor to place them where they
+never existed. The actual ground conditions must be copied.
+
+ 10. Some latrines were not arranged with the stools close beneath
+the wall nearest the enemy. This caused the loss of protection, which
+it is imperative to consider, as many casualties occur here.
+
+ 11. Too many listening posts. They are easily captured by hostile
+fighting patrols. There should never be more than two listening posts
+to a battalion.
+
+ 12. The observation stations in many instances had no good field of
+fire or were outlined against the sky on the crest of some rise. The
+site for an observation post should always be placed over the crest
+and have a good field of fire for use in case of attack.
+
+
+Occupation.
+
+I. Relief in the Trenches.
+
+
+ A. THE TWO MAIN CLASSES OF RELIEF:
+ 1. General Relief. Applied to the relief of a whole position
+ manned by a division or more. Executed when large units are
+ going to "full rest" in the rear or being removed from one
+ part of the front to another. Executed in the same way as
+ interior relief; i.e., by successive relief of the
+ battalions involved.
+ 2. Interior Relief. Applied to the relief of one sector or
+ portion of a sector manned by a brigade or less.
+
+ B. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF RELIEF:
+
+ 1. Interior relief is executed about once every six days; more
+ frequently when the stay in the trenches is particularly
+ arduous, less frequently when it is unusually comfortable.
+ 2. The battalion is the relieving unit.
+ 3. It is advisable to arrange the relief between units which
+ have friendly relations to one another; e.g., battalions of
+ the same regiment; and, so far as possible, to assign each
+ unit to the same trenches on each relief. This promotes
+ continuity of effort.
+ 4. Relief is executed at night; the hour must be varied; secrecy
+ is imperative.
+ 5. Prompt execution is essential, to prevent fatigue of the
+ troops and congestion of the boyaux.
+
+ C. THE MECHANISM OF RELIEF:
+
+ 1. Reconnaissance, 24 hours in advance, by the captain of each
+ relieving company, accompanied by his platoon leaders and
+ non-commissioned officers. He ascertains:
+ (1) The plan of occupation; i.e., the dispositions and
+ duties of the unit to be relieved.
+ (2) The shelter accommodations.
+ (3) Work being done and proposed.
+ (4) Condition of the wire and other defences.
+ (5) The available water supply.
+ (6) Artillery support.
+ (7) Communications.
+ (8) The location, amount and condition of stores.
+ (9) Danger points.
+ (10) All available information of the enemy; his habits,
+ location of his snipers, what work he is doing.
+ (11) The ways and means of liaison, both lateral and from
+ front to rear.
+ To the success of this reconnaissance, the closest
+ co-operation between all officers of the companies
+ relieving and relieved, is indispensable.
+
+ 2. The march from billets to the trenches:
+ (a) Transportation, by auto-trucks and wagons, is utilized
+ to a point as near the lines as possible, to carry the
+ packs of the men, the auto rifles, extra ammunition and
+ other heavy equipment. When the distance is great the
+ men themselves should be carried by auto-truck; this
+ saves time and fatigue. The men will carry rifles loaded
+ and locked, full cartridge belts, gas masks, and all
+ other lighter equipment, with rations for 24 hours at
+ least. Grenades will be secured in the trenches.
+ Electric torches will be carried by company and platoon
+ commanders.
+ (b) The strictest discipline must be maintained. On arrival
+ within sight of the enemy, noise and smoking (or other
+ lights) will be prohibited.
+ (c) Guides, from the company to be relieved, will meet the
+ relieving company promptly at a point definitely agreed
+ upon in advance.
+
+ 3. The march through the boyaux (communicating trenches):
+ (a) Distance; often as much three or four miles.
+ (b) Order of march: company in single file, captain at the
+ head; each platoon leader at the head of his platoon; a
+ non-commissioned officer at rear of each platoon.
+ (c) The column must be kept closed up. Each man must consider
+ himself a connecting file, guiding on the head, and
+ behave accordingly. A guide should accompany the
+ commander of the last platoon.
+ (d) Rate of march: roughly, about 40 yards per minute. It
+ takes 250 men about 20 minutes to pass a given point.
+ (e) Route and right of way:
+ The first line and support trenches will never be used
+ as roads. Separate boyaux should, if possible, be
+ assigned to the troops relieving and relieved. In no
+ case will one company cross the path of another. In case
+ of two columns meeting, one moving forward, the other to
+ the rear, the former has the right of way.
+
+ 4. No man of the unit in occupation will leave his post until
+ he has actually been relieved and has transmitted all orders
+ and information relative to that post.
+
+ 5. Liaison must be established, immediately on arrival, with the
+ units on the flanks and with headquarters in the rear.
+ Captains must make sure that their runners are thoroughly
+ acquainted with the routes of communication.
+
+ 6. As soon as relief is accomplished both captains will report
+ that fact to their respective commanders.
+
+ 7. The relieving commander then inspects his trenches. He
+ ascertains that all his watchers are at their posts and that
+ the balance of his men know their posts and duties and are
+ prepared to assume them quickly.
+
+ 8. The duties of the relieved commander are:
+ (1) To turn over his sector thoroughly policed and in good
+ condition as regards its construction and the new work,
+ if any, in progress.
+ (2) To turn over his supplies in good condition and fully
+ accounted for.
+ (3) After reporting the relief, to march his men back to
+ billets as promptly and secretly as possible, in column
+ of files, platoon leaders in the rear of their platoons,
+ a non-commissioned officer and guide at the head of each.
+ (4) On the evening preceding relief, to send his cooks back
+ to billets so that his men may be provided with a hot
+ meal immediately on arrival.
+
+ D. If an attack occurs during the march through the boyaux, to or
+ from relief, the company affected occupies the nearest
+ defensive position and at once notifies its battalion
+ commander. If an attack occurs during the actual process of
+ relief, the senior officer present takes command.
+
+
+II. The Stay in the Trenches.
+
+
+ A. THE FOUR OBJECTS OF A TRENCH COMMANDER:
+
+ 1. Security of his sector.
+ 2. Protection of his troops.
+ 3. Constant and accurate observation.
+ 4. A continuous offensive.
+
+ B. HIS PLAN OF DEFENSE:
+
+ 1. General principles of defense:
+ (a) Arrangement in depth. The most dependable defense is in
+ prearranged counter attacks. The system of defense must
+ react like a helical spring.
+ (b) Tenacity of defense.
+ 1. Each unit must be prepared to hold its post to the last
+ extremity.
+ 2. Orders to withdraw will never be obeyed unless
+ unmistakably valid.
+ 3. All ground lost must be retaken at once in counter attack
+ by the unit which lost it.
+ (c) Apportionment of responsibility. Each active segment must
+ have a commander responsible for its defense, upkeep and
+ sanitation, and the discipline and instruction of his men.
+
+ 2. Basis:
+ (a) The plan of defense turned over by the preceding commander.
+ This will usually suffice for the first 24 hours after
+ relief.
+ (b) General information of the enemy's lines, dispositions, and
+ intentions, based chiefly on aerial photographs.
+
+ C. ORGANIZATION OF DEFENSE:
+
+ 1. Allocation of front. (The front of an American battalion will
+ average about 1,000 yards.)
+ Diagrams: A. The Regiment. B. The Battalion. C. The Company. D.
+ The Platoon.
+ 2. Distribution of effectives. Determined chiefly by the terrain
+ and by 3.
+ 3. Employment of the several arms:
+ (a) Machine guns. Crew of 8 men per gun. (Furnished by
+ detachments of a machine gun company.) Located by the
+ infantry commander, in concealed emplacements behind the
+ first line, to deliver successive barrages from flanking
+ positions. Effective range: up to 700 yards.
+ (b) Automatic rifles. Crew of 3 men per rifle. Usually posted to
+ enfilade the entanglements of the first line. They
+ concentrate the fire effect of from 7 to 10 riflemen.
+ Effective range: up to 300 yards.
+ (c) Rifle Grenadiers. Located near enough to first line to hold
+ the enemy trenches under fire and deliver effective barrages
+ near the mouths of our own communicating trenches. Should be
+ located near observation posts so that their fire can be
+ promptly corrected.
+ (d) Trench mortars. Located similarly to (c). Manned by
+ riflemen.
+ (e) Bombers. One supply man to each 2 grenadiers. Used for
+ protection of auto-rifles, in counter attacks, for
+ protection of communicating trenches and fighting in close
+ quarters.
+ (f) Riflemen. Posted to deliver frontal fire. Grouped according
+ to the plan of counter attacks.
+ (g) As many men as possible should be instructed in the use of
+ the enemy's weapons.
+
+ D. LIAISON:
+
+ (a) By telephone. Quickest and most accurate. Maintained
+ between each platoon and its company headquarters, and
+ between adjoining companies. Especially subject to
+ destruction in bombardment. Wireless and ground telegraphy
+ are used only between brigade and division headquarters.
+ (b) By runners ("liaison agents"). Five detailed from each
+ company to battalion headquarters; one sent to each
+ adjoining company headquarters; one from each platoon to
+ company headquarters; four or five on duty at each platoon
+ headquarters; five from each machine gun company to
+ battalion headquarters. Messages sent by them should, if
+ practicable, be written and signed, and should be receipted
+ for by the addressee.
+ (c) By rockets and flares. Quickest means of liaison with the
+ artillery in rear.
+ (d) Domestic (message carrying) grenades.
+ (e) Dogs and carrier pigeons. Sent out to the rear from
+ battalion headquarters.
+ (f) One searchlight--with a radius of 3 miles--is furnished to
+ each company.
+ (g) Noise. Klaxon signals, etc., give warning of gas attacks.
+
+ E. OBSERVATION:
+
+ (a) Observers:
+ 1. Must be men of infinite patience, keen hearing and
+ eyesight.
+ 2. They are located behind the first line in positions
+ combining good view with concealment.
+ 3. Each is provided with a panoramic map, made from
+ aeroplane photographs, of the enemy's trenches. On this
+ must be promptly noted every slightest change in the
+ trace, height of parapet, etc., of the enemy's line. Such
+ notes greatly assist in locating machine gun
+ emplacements.
+ 4. Each observer will also record in a note book everything
+ of importance, with the time observed.
+ 5. A report of changes, with an abstract of observer's
+ notes, is forwarded daily to regimental headquarters.
+ (b) Watchers (sentinels):
+ 1. Stationed, one near the door of each dugout, in the
+ first line, support and intermediate trenches.
+ 2. They must be carefully concealed.
+ 3. They must watch over the parapet (never through slits or
+ loopholes) so as to have unrestricted view.
+ 4. They are furnished with signal rockets and flares for
+ prompt communication with the artillery, and have
+ authority to use them.
+ 5. Double sentinels are posted at night.
+ (c) Listening Posts:
+ 1. Located, usually in shell holes, just inside the
+ entanglements. Connected with front line by tunnels.
+ Protected from grenades by heavy gratings, when
+ possible, and by concealment.
+ 2. Occupied by 4 men (1 in command), in 3 reliefs. Usually
+ occupied only at night unless our trenches are on a
+ reverse slope.
+ 3. Chief function is protection of the entanglements.
+ (d) Microphone Posts.--Installed usually behind the first line.
+ Intercept the enemy's telephone and ground-telegraph
+ messages and any loud conversation in his trenches.
+ (e) Fixed Patrols.--Generally remain in shell holes in front of
+ our entanglements.
+ (f) Reconnoitering Patrols:
+ 1. Composed of from 3 to 5 men, commanded by a
+ non-commissioned officer. Sent out at night only.
+ 2. The company commander must promptly notify commanders of
+ adjoining companies of the dispatch of these patrols,
+ their time of departure, route and probable time of
+ return.
+ 3. Men should be assigned to this duty by roster.
+
+F. TRENCH WORK:
+
+ 1. Constant battle with the elements, care for drainage,
+ revettment, sanitation and storage.
+ 2. Repair of the effects of bombardment.
+ 3. New work, for better security, communication and observation.
+ 4. Work in the open.
+ (a) Usually consists of repair or rearrangement of wire
+ entanglements, digging new listening posts, etc.
+ (b) Effected by parties detailed by roster.
+ (c) They are guarded by fighting patrols, composed like
+ reconnaissance patrols. Their best protection is in silence
+ and concealment.
+ (d) Adjoining companies must be notified of their dispatch,
+ location and probable time of return.
+ (e) This work, like all operations conducted outside the
+ protection of the trenches, offers a valuable tonic to the
+ morale.
+
+ G. OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS:
+
+ 1. Sniping:
+ (a) Snipers constitute one of the most dependable and
+ productive agencies of attrition.
+ (b) The best shots of the company are especially trained and
+ assigned for this duty exclusively.
+ (c) They operate in pairs and post themselves to cover any
+ exposed portions of the enemy's trenches, especially his
+ communicating trenches.
+ (d) They should be well supplied with all necessary special
+ equipment; _e.g._, sniperscopes, telescopic sights, painted
+ headgear, etc.
+
+ 2. Mining Operations.
+
+ 3. Raiding:
+ (a) Object of raids: destruction of the enemy's defenses,
+ disturbance of his morale, collection of prisoners and
+ information.
+ (b) The personnel of raiding parties will usually include: A
+ commander and second in command, bayonet men, bombers,
+ engineers, signal men, stretcher bearers. Their numbers and
+ proportions are regulated by the nature and difficulty of
+ the task.
+ (c) Co-ordination with the artillery barrage is the essential of
+ their success. The limit of advance, extent of operations,
+ and time of return will therefore be set in advance and
+ rigidly adhered to.
+
+ H. ROLE OF THE TRENCH COMMANDER:
+
+ 1. Inspections: The men will be formally inspected twice daily at
+ the general "stand to" by the company commander. Particular
+ attention will be paid to the health of the men, condition of
+ their feet and their clothing. Each man must have at least one
+ pair of dry socks always available. Arms, gas masks, and other
+ equipments will also be rigidly inspected.
+ 2. Roster: The company commander will carefully supervise the
+ preparation of the duty roster. An obviously equal distribution
+ of the arduous duties involved in trench life is essential to
+ the maintenance of morale.
+ 3. Reports and Records: (Additional to those already required by
+ regulations.) Log Book, Report of Casualties, Wind Report
+ (daily), Bombardment Report (daily), Intelligence Report, which
+ will include observer's notes and changes (twice daily), and a
+ daily report of Work completed and Undertaken.
+ 4. "One principle which the trench commander should never forget is
+ the necessity for his frequent presence in the midst of his men.
+ * * * Direct contact with the troops on as many occasions as
+ possible is the most certain way to gain their confidence."
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+Duties of the Company Commander.
+
+ 1. To inspect the sector his company is to occupy, one day in
+ advance of occupying it.
+ 2. To assign segments to the platoons.
+ 3. To prepare a plan of defense.
+ 4. To connect by liaison with the companies on his flanks.
+ 5. To have an agent or runner at Battalion Headquarters.
+ 6. To prepare a plan for counter attacks.
+ 7. To report to the Battalion Commander when his company has taken
+ up its position:
+ (a) Its situation.
+ (b) Security.
+ (c) Liaison.
+ (d) State of position left by predecessor.
+ (e) Defense of sector.
+ (f) Plan of counter attacks.
+ 8. To inspect the trenches frequently to see that everything is in
+ proper condition and that his men are in jubilant spirits.
+ 9. To have platoon guides report to Battalion Headquarters on the
+ date for the relief of his company and act as guides to the
+ company that relieves him.
+ 10. To keep a special log book in which the following are kept:
+ (a) Work completed by his unit.
+ (b) Work under way.
+ (c) Work proposed.
+ 11. Turn over to his successor:
+ (a) Measures taken for security.
+ (b) Plan of attacks.
+ (c) Plan of counterattacks.
+ 12. Have one officer on duty at all times.
+ 13. "Stand to" will take place one (1) hour before daylight, and all
+ available men will attend. There will be a thorough inspection.
+ Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing position of every
+ man will be tested to see if he can hit the bottom of our wire.
+ Gas helmets will be inspected.
+ 14. Time table--allot hours of work, rest and meals.
+ 15. Supplies--make timely requisitions for them--be especially
+ watchful about meals and rations--have no delays.
+ 16. To have one watcher and one relief on duty near Company
+ Headquarters at all times.
+ 17. To get a good field of fire to the front and cover the sectors
+ of each company on flanks.
+ 18. (Subject to change) Red Rocket-Artillery Barrage wanted.
+ White Rocket Gas Attack.
+ 19. To report twice daily all changes in wind direction.
+ 20. To report to Battalion Commander when relieved.
+
+
+Duties of Platoon Leaders as Officers on Duty with Company.
+
+ 1. Report with old officer at company headquarters.
+ 2. Make frequent inspections of all trenches occupied by company.
+ 3. Visit each Listening Post; at least once during tour of duty.
+ 4. Visit all sentinels and receive their reports.
+ 5. See that one non-commissioned officer per platoon is on duty.
+ 6. Receive reports of non-commissioned officers after they have
+ posted sentinels.
+ 7. At end of tour hand over to new officer all orders, a report of
+ work in progress, and any useful information.
+ 8. Report with new officer at Company Headquarters on completion of
+ tour.
+ 9. To report anything unusual to Company Headquarters.
+ 10. To send dead and wounded to dressing station trenches.
+ 11. To send patrols to front at night.
+
+
+Duties of Platoon Leaders.
+
+ 1. Must accompany company commander on inspection of trenches one
+ day previous to occupying them.
+ 2. Make necessary reliefs for his men in his segment.
+ 3. Make a plan of defense and counterattack for his position or
+ approve the one left there.
+ 4. Establish sniping posts and arrange reliefs.
+ 5. Establish Listening Posts and arrange reliefs.
+ 6. Assign non-commissioned officer to duty with platoon and arrange
+ relief.
+ 7. Instruct every man as to his place in case of attack.
+ 8. Establish liaison with platoons on both flanks; and one runner
+ to Company Headquarters.
+ 9. Have one platoon guide report to Company Headquarters on day his
+ platoon is to be relieved.
+ 10. On completion of posting his platoon, report to his company
+ commander.
+ 11. Turn over to platoon relieving him all orders and data
+ pertaining to his position.
+ 12. Be especially attentive to rigid military discipline; _i.e._,
+ every soldier to be neat; equipment must be clean at all times;
+ to render the required salute when not observing or firing at
+ the enemy.
+ 13. Have one non-commissioned officer on duty at all times.
+ 14. To inspect rifles, equipment and latrines twice daily.
+ (a) To have at least one latrine in working order at all times.
+ (b) To have a sentry on duty at each platoon dugout at all
+ times.
+ (c) Establish one Observation Post in daytime.
+ 15. In Front Line Trenches:
+ (a) No smoking or talking to be allowed at night.
+ (b) Every man to wear his equipment except packs.
+ (c) Have rifle within reaching distance.
+ (d) All reliefs to be within kicking distance of soldier on
+ duty.
+ 16. Inspect at "Stand to" and report results to Company
+ Headquarters, especially if each man has 170 rounds of
+ ammunition and necessary grenades and bombs.
+ 17. To be especially attentive to sanitation and care of the men's
+ feet.
+ 18. To have one (1) watcher and relief on duty at all times near
+ platoon dugouts.
+ 19. To get a good field of fire to his front and to cover the sector
+ of each platoon on his flanks.
+ 20. Make requisition for material.
+ 21. To see that all of his men are properly fed.
+ 22. Report to company commander when relieved.
+ 23. Must know what every man is doing at all times.
+
+
+Duties of Non-Commissioned Officer on Duty (Each Platoon).
+
+ 1. To make frequent inspections of the position occupied by his
+ platoon.
+ 2. To be responsible that each soldier knows his duties.
+ 3. To report anything of special importance to officer on duty.
+ 4. On being relieved to report with the new non-commissioned
+ officer to the officer on duty.
+ 5. After posting sentinels to report "All is Well" to officer on
+ duty.
+ 6. Explain to his sentinel his duties, the position of Section and
+ Platoon Commanders and of sentries on either side; and to
+ caution his sentries when friendly patrols are out, the probable
+ time and place of return.
+ 7. Bayonets will always be fixed in front line trenches.
+ 8. At night time to have double sentinel.
+ 9. To see that each sentinel in daytime has a periscope.
+ 10. Rifles to be loaded; no cartridge shall be in the chamber
+ except when necessary to shoot.
+ 11. To report to Company Headquarters any change in direction of
+ wind.
+
+
+Patrols.
+
+ 1. Usual orders about patrols.
+ 2. Always go out at night via the Listening Post; tell the men in
+ the Listening Post your mission and probable time of return.
+
+
+Sentinels.
+
+ 1. To sound Klaxon horn on approach of gas attack.
+ 2. To report immediately to non-commissioned officer on duty any
+ change in direction of wind.
+ 3. In cold weather to work bolt frequently to keep it from
+ freezing.
+ 4. At night to challenge only in case of necessity, and then only
+ in a low tone. Challenge "_Hands up._"
+ 5. Number of posts depends on assumed nearness of enemy and local
+ conditions. Normally one per platoon by day and three double
+ sentinels per platoon at night.
+ 6. Relief kept close at hand. Report "All is Well," or otherwise,
+ when officer passes.
+ 7. Screened from observation.
+ 8. Remain standing unless height of parapet renders this
+ impossible.
+
+
+Machine Guns.
+
+ 1. Non-commissioned officer and one (1) watcher on duty at all
+ times.
+ 2. Except in emergency they will not be fired from their regular
+ emplacements.
+ 3. Unless emplacements are well concealed, guns will not be mounted
+ except between evening and morning "stand to."
+ 4. Before dusk each gun will be sighted on some particular spot
+ either in front of or behind the enemy's line.
+ 5. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun.
+
+
+Snipers.
+
+ 1. Sniping Post consists of one (1) observer and one (1) rifleman
+ with relief of two (2) men posted close by.
+ 2. Sniping post should be well concealed.
+ 3. Daily report from each post, of
+ (a) Any work done by enemy.
+ (b) Enemy seen; place, uniform, apparent age, physique,
+ equipment.
+ (c) Any other information of interest.
+ 4. Sniper to be appointed from each section.
+ 5. Must be intelligent, alert, good scout, good shot, courageous.
+ 6. Snipers should spend 24 hours in trenches with those of command
+ which theirs is to relieve, before relief takes place.
+ 7. No night work required of these men since they must be
+ constantly on the alert during the day.
+
+Organization of a Platoon--Rifle Company--Table No. 7
+
+ PLATOON
+
+ Platoon Headquarters
+ 1 Lieut.
+ 1 Sgt.
+ 4 Privates.
+
+1st Section | 2d Section | 3d Section | 4th Section
+ Hand Bombers |Rifle Grenadiers| Riflemen | Auto-Riflemen
+----------------+----------------+-------------------+--------------------
+ 3 Teams, each | 1 Team of | 1 Sgt. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Corps.
+1 Leader | 6 Grenadiers | 2 Squads of | 4 Teams, each
+1 Thrower | 3 Carriers | 8 men each | 1 Gunner
+1 Carrier | (May be | 4 Extra | 2 Carriers
+1 Scout | subdivided) | riflemen[R] |
+2 Corps. | 2 Corps. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Cpl. | 1 Sgt. and 2 Cpls.
+4 Pvts. 1st Cl. | 1 Pvt. 1st Cl. | 6 Pvts. 1st Cl. | 4 Pvts. 1st Cl.
+6 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 12 Pvts. | 8 Pvts.
+ Total--12 | Total--9 | Total--21 | Total--15
+
+[Footnote R: Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With
+Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.]
+
+
+_Suggested Organization of Platoon in Close Order and for
+Administration._
+
+1st Squad | 2d Squad | 3d Squad | 4th Squad |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------|
+Bomber Section | 1/2 Auto Rifle | 1/2 Auto Rifle | |
+(less 1 bomber | Section i.e., | Section i.e., | Grenadier |
+ team) | Cpl and 2 teams | Cpl and 2 teams | Section |
+ | | | |
+ 1 Corp | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. |
+ 7 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 6 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. |
+ | | | (Extra Cpl. in |
+ | | | File Closers) |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------+
+
+
+5th Squad | 6th Squad | 7th Squad |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------|
+ 1 Rifle Squad | 1 Rifle Squad | 1 Bomber Team |
+ | | plus 4 extra |
+ | | riflemen[S] |
+ | | |
+ 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. | 1 Cpl. |
+ 7 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. | 7 Pvts. |
+ | | |
+ | | |
+---------------+-----------------+-----------------+
+
+Right Guide--Automatic Gun Sgt. Left Guide--Rifle Sgt.
+Chief of Platoon--Lieut. File closer or acting 1st Sgt.--Sgt.-Asst.
+
+Note.--If desirable the 4 mechanics and 4 privates (signalmen) who are
+not assigned to platoons regularly, can be used to fill the blank
+files in the 2d and 3d squads.
+
+[Footnote S: Runners: Attached to 3d Section and 7th Squad. With
+Platoon commander when company is in extended order formation.]
+
+
+Deployments.
+
+GENERAL PRINCIPLES:
+
+ (a) The following plans for deployment are not to be regarded as
+rigid. The positions of the various squads depends upon tactical
+considerations.
+ (b) The platoon in attack will be used only for accomplishment of
+its offensive mission. Moppers-up, additional carriers, etc., will be
+furnished by other organizations.
+ A. Being in line, to form single skirmish line to the front.
+ 1. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right (left or
+ center). 2. March.
+ Executed as described in pars. 206 and 208, i.d.r.
+ Normal interval to be ordered, 4 or 5 paces.
+ This formation to be regarded as exceptional.
+ B. Being in column of squads, to form single skirmish line. Same
+ command as in (A). Executed as described in para 207 and 208,
+ i.d.r.
+ C. Being in line to form double skirmish line to the front (_i.e._,
+ to take the "Formation for Attack" in the diagram.)
+ 1. In two lines. 2. As skirmishers (so many) paces, guide right
+ (left or center). 3 March.
+ Executed according to the principles in pars. 206 and 208,
+ i.d.r., except that at the command March the even-numbered
+ squads stand fast while the odd-numbered squads form the
+ first line by deploying on the base squad as in the case of
+ deployment in single line. Similarly, the even-numbered
+ squads form the second line by deploying on their base squad
+ after the odd-numbered squads have moved forward about 20
+ paces.
+
+[Illustration: NORMAL BATTALION FORMATION IN ATTACK]
+
+ D. Being in line or column of squads to deploy in line of squad
+ columns in one or two lines. Use same commands and execute in
+ same manner as described in (A), (B), (C), except that in the
+ command "Squad Columns" is substituted for "as skirmishers,"
+ and in the execution each corporal on approaching the line
+ forms his squad in "squad column" instead of deploying it as
+ skirmishers.
+ _E.G._ 1. In two lines--2. Squad columns (so many) paces, Guide
+ right (left or center)--3. March.
+ This gives a "Formation of Approach" as the French describe it,
+ or as an "Artillery Formation" as the British describe it; which
+ may be used directly or indirectly (by means of echelons) for
+ advancing when not liable to infantry fire.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #22]
+
+ E. Being in above formation to vary the intervals.
+ 1. Squad columns (so many) paces, 2. Guide right (left or
+ center). Executed in the same manner as similar movement
+ described in i.d.r. 126.
+
+
+General Principles of the Platoon Formation in the Assault of
+Fortified Positions in Trenches. (Points of Resistance, Etc.).
+
+1. The platoon is now a complete fighting unit within itself. It
+contains riflemen, bombers, auto-riflemen, and rifle grenadiers. With
+this combination the platoon commander has, under his immediate
+control, all the different kinds of fire available to the infantry.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #23]
+
+2. This formation was developed so that the platoon commander could
+meet the different contingencies that arise from being opposed by
+points of resistance in a "Trench-to-Trench" attack or the
+"Semi-Open-Warfare;" that is the secondary stage of a push.
+
+3. When strong opposition develops, the principle on which the platoon
+works is to develop or surround the point of resistance, the platoon
+acting either alone or in conjunction with neighboring platoons. The
+four different kinds of fire are then used to their best advantages to
+silence or diminish the enemy fire thus making this manoeuvre
+possible.
+
+4. In order to obtain success it is first necessary to impress on the
+officers and men that the primary advantage of the entire formation is
+its mobility, and the scope it gives to the initiative of the platoon
+section, squad and team leaders. In studying this formation it is
+first necessary to free the mind of all parade ground formations and
+to feel that there is nothing to hinder any desired movement of the
+sections, so long as the movement is not contrary to the operation
+orders for the attack. Until this idea is grasped thoroughly no
+progress can be made.
+
+5. There is no typical or "normal formation." The one given at the
+beginning of this instruction here is a drill or parade ground
+formation, and while it may be used under actual conditions of
+warfare, it is simply utilized at this time as a basis from which the
+necessary variations may be worked out. In an attack, every platoon in
+the battalion may use a different formation.
+
+6. The formation to be used is decided upon after a careful study of
+air-photographs. As far as possible all points of resistance are
+picked out and the best method of meeting the situations that may
+arise are then considered. The platoon is then arranged so as to best
+facilitate this manoeuvre. It must be realized that there will be
+other platoons on the flanks and in the rear, and their dispositions
+must be studied with a view of their probable bearing on the points of
+resistance.
+
+7. In order to know how to get results it is first necessary to have a
+very clear conception of the uses and limitations of the different
+weapons in the platoon.
+
+Briefly they can be used in the following ways:
+
+(a) The auto-rifles open up a point blank fire on the strong point as
+soon as it is discovered. Their function is to either draw the fire of
+the enemy or to silence him by a hit or forcing him to take cover.
+Their work may be compared to the work of the field artillery in a
+barrage. They cover the movement of the infantry across the open. The
+auto rifles so place themselves at such points that their line of fire
+will in no way interfere with the manoeuvre of the commander of the
+platoon or the remaining units of the platoon interfere with the
+effective use of the auto rifles of the platoon.
+
+(b) The rifle grenadiers advance at once just as close as possible,
+but at all costs to within effective grenade range. They then take
+cover in shell holes, trenches, etc., and open up a rapid fire. They
+are the long distance howitzers of the platoon and are very valuable.
+By a well placed grenade the whole resistance may be overcome. This
+section usually works around a flank.
+
+(c) The riflemen work up by squad as far as practicable and to a
+flank, when an opportunity presents itself, the squad opens fire in
+such a manner as to protect advance of other squads or teams.
+
+(d) The bombers endeavor to get well around behind the enemy and
+taking advantage of cover get to within bomb range. They may be
+compared to the close range howitzers or trench mortars.
+
+When all four sections are in action at proper ranges, the opposition
+can probably last but a short time, and as soon as the machine guns
+cease fire the platoon, especially the riflemen, go after the
+remainder of the garrison with the bayonet.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #27]
+
+It may happen that the barrage put up will so demoralize the enemy
+that the riflemen can advance before his machine guns are even put out
+of action. This operation allows the rifle men to get in with the
+bayonet, if the resistance is not sooner overcome.
+
+When the different sections are getting to their places, they usually
+find enough shell holes or old trenches to obtain cover. They should
+not move as entire sections, but as small groups of three or four at a
+time.
+
+8. After the encircling movement has once begun, the platoon commander
+loses all control, and the action is then conducted by the section,
+squad or team leaders. They must be trained to act on their own
+initiative, as further orders are rarely practicable.
+
+The resistance will finally be overcome, either because the enemy will
+retreat or surrender under the menace of encirclement, or by the
+losses caused by our fire or by the attack at close range of our
+bombers or else by the final assault with the bayonet led by our
+riflemen.
+
+It must be remembered that under an artillery barrage it is never
+possible to issue verbal orders, so the sections must be trained to
+understand and obey the arm signals of its officer, or more often to
+work without orders.
+
+9. A sequence of command must be arranged in each section, squad and
+team down to the last man.
+
+
+REMARKS REGARDING THE FORMING OF WAVE FROM CLOSE ORDER.
+
+The sketch of deployment attached is an illustration of one of the
+formations that may be adopted. It is given as an example. Any other
+wave formation may be practically as easily formed up. The platoon
+commander simply calls out the squads he wants in the first line.
+
+_It must not be imagined that this transition from close order to
+extended is done in the field when actually under fire or as a result
+of surprise._
+
+Before the platoon goes into an attack it is all arranged so as to
+allow it to be changed with ease from column of sections at extended
+intervals (formation for approach) to the wave formation decided upon.
+This arrangement is made when the platoon is miles to the rear.
+
+When the change is made from column of sections to the wave formation
+there must be no crossing of sections as they go to their places.
+
+
+Some of the Many Questions a Platoon Commander Should Ask Himself on
+Taking Over a Trench, and at Frequent Intervals Afterwards.
+
+1. _I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all
+circumstances, and to do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I
+doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as_
+OFFENSIVE _as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle
+grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?_
+
+2. Do I connect up all right with the platoons on my right and left?
+Do I know the position of my nearest support?
+
+3. Does every man know his firing position and can he fire from it,
+over the parapet, at the foot of the wire?
+
+4. Where are my S.A.A. and bomb stores? Are they under cover from the
+weather?
+
+5. Do all my men know their duties in case of attack--bombers
+especially?
+
+6. Are all my rifles and ammunition clean and in good order? Have all
+the men got rifle covers? Are the magazines kept charged?
+
+7. Is my wire strong enough?
+
+8. Are my parapets and traverses bullet-proof everywhere?
+
+9. Where are my sally ports?
+
+10. Where are my listening posts? Are my listening patrols properly
+detailed?
+
+11. What points in front particularly require patrolling at night?
+
+12. Are my sentries in their right places? Are they properly posted by
+N.C.O's.? Have they received proper instructions?
+
+13. Have I got the S.O.S. message in my pocket, and do I know the
+orders regarding its use?
+
+14. Are the trenches as clean and as sanitary as they might be? Are
+live rounds and cases properly collected? Are my bags for refuse and
+empties in position?
+
+15. Are my trenches as dry as I might make them?
+
+16. Am I doing all I can to prevent my men getting "Trench Feet"?
+
+17. How can I prevent my parapets and dugouts from falling in?
+
+18. Have I got at least one loophole, from which men can snipe, for
+every section? Have I pointed out to Section Commanders the portion of
+the enemy's trench they are responsible for keeping under fire, and
+where his loopholes are?
+
+19. Have my men always got their smoke helmets on and are they in good
+order?
+
+20. Are the arrangements, in case of gas attack, complete and known to
+all ranks?
+
+21. Are the orders as to wearing equipment carried out?
+
+22. Are my men using wood from the defences as firewood?
+
+23. Are my men drinking water from any but authorized sources?
+
+24. _I am here for two purposes: To hold this line under all
+circumstances, and I do as much damage as possible to the enemy? Am I
+doing all I can to make this line as strong as possible? Am I as_
+OFFENSIVE _as I might be with organized snipers, sniperscopes, rifle
+grenades, catapults, etc., and patrols?_
+
+
+Defensive Measure Against Gas Attacks.
+
+I. Introduction.
+
+A. General Considerations:
+
+In the absence of suitable means of protection the poison gases used
+in war are extremely deadly and the breathing of only very small
+quantities of them may cause death or serious injury. This being the
+case, it is essential that not the slightest time should be lost in
+putting on the anti-gas device on the gas alarm being given.
+
+It cannot be too strongly insisted on that the measures to meet
+hostile gas attacks afford _perfect protection_, and if they are
+carried out properly no one will suffer from gas poisoning.
+
+The whole basis of protecting troops against gas lies (a) in keeping
+the appliances in perfect working order; (b) in learning to adjust
+them rapidly under all conditions, and (c) in ensuring that every man
+is given immediate warning. These results can only be attained:
+
+ (1) By frequent and thorough inspection of all protective
+ appliances.
+ (2) By thorough instruction and training in their use.
+ (3) By every man understanding and complying with all standing
+ orders on the subject of defense against gas.
+
+If these are effectually carried out, there is nothing to fear from
+hostile gas attacks. Officers must impress this on their men, as an
+important object of all anti-gas instruction should be to inspire
+complete confidence in the efficacy of the methods which are adopted.
+
+
+B. Nature of Gas Attacks:
+
+(1) GAS CLOUDS:
+
+This method of making a gas attack is entirely dependent on the
+direction of the wind. The gas is carried up to the trenches
+compressed in steel cylinders. These are dug in at the bottom of the
+trench and connected with pipes leading out over the parapet. When the
+valves of the cylinders are opened, the gas escapes with a hissing
+sound, which, on a still night, can frequently be heard at a
+considerable distance. It mixes with the air and is carried by the
+wind towards the opposing trenches, spreading out as it goes forward.
+A continuous wave of gas and air is thus formed, the color of which
+may vary:
+
+ (a) Because of the weather conditions. In very dry air it may be
+ almost transparent and slightly greenish in color, while in
+ damp weather it forms a white cloud.
+ (b) Because it may be mixed with smoke of any color.
+
+A cloud attack can only take place when there is a steady but not too
+strong wind blowing from the enemy's lines towards our own. A wind
+between 4 and 8 miles an hour is the most likely condition. An 8-mile
+wind will carry the gas cloud twice as quickly as a man walks rapidly.
+
+Gas attacks may occur at any time of the day, but are most likely to
+be made during the night or in the early morning.
+
+Gentle rain is without appreciable effect on a gas attack, but strong
+rain washes down the gas. Fogs have hardly any effect and may, in
+fact, be taken advantage of to make an attack unexpectedly. Water
+courses and ponds are no obstruction to a gas cloud.
+
+The gas used by the enemy is generally a mixture of chlorine and
+phosgene, both of which are strongly asphyxiating. The gases are
+heavier than air, and therefore, tend to flow along the ground and
+into trenches, shelters, craters and hollows. The gas cloud may flow
+round slight eminences, thus leaving patches of country which remain
+free from gas.
+
+Chlorine and phosgene strongly attack the mucous membranes of the
+respiratory organs, causing bad coughing. In strong concentrations of
+gas, or by longer exposure to low concentrations, the lungs are
+injured and breathing becomes more and more difficult and eventually
+impossible, so that the unprotected man dies of suffocation. Death is
+sometimes caused by two or three breaths of the gas. Even when very
+dilute, chlorine can be recognized by its peculiar smell, which is
+like chloride of lime, but stronger and more irritating.
+
+Both chlorine and phosgene also exert a strongly corrosive action on
+metals, so that the metal parts of arms must be carefully protected by
+greasing them.
+
+The speed with which the gas cloud approaches depends entirely on the
+wind velocity. Gas attacks have been made with wind velocities varying
+from 3 to 20 miles per hour, _i.e._, from 1-1/2 to 10 yards per
+second. In a 9-mile wind, the gas would reach trenches 100 yards
+distant in 20 seconds.
+
+Gas attacks have been made on fronts varying from 1 to 5 miles; their
+effects at points up to 8 miles behind the front trenches have been
+sufficiently severe to make it necessary to wear helmets.
+
+(2) GAS PROJECTILES:
+
+The use of these is not entirely dependent on the direction of the
+wind. In gas projectiles such as shells, hand grenades, and trench
+mortar bombs, a part or the whole of the explosive charge is replaced
+by a liquid which is converted into gas by the explosion. The
+explosive force and noise of detonation of these projectiles is less
+than that of the ordinary kind, and a large number of them are usually
+discharged into a comparatively small space. After the explosion, the
+irritant chemicals form a small gas cloud, though some may sink to the
+ground and remain active for a considerable time.
+
+For using gas shells, the best condition is calm, or a wind of low
+velocity.
+
+Gas projectiles can be used in all types of country. Woods, bushes,
+corn fields and clumps of buildings may hold the gas active for a
+considerable time.
+
+Two kinds of shell gases are used by the enemy, viz., lachrymators,
+which mainly affect the eyes, and poison gases, which may affect the
+eyes and are just as deadly as the gases used in the form of clouds.
+
+(1) TEAR, OR LACHRYMATORY SHELLS:
+
+These shells on explosion drive the liquid chemical which they contain
+into the air as a mist. They cause the eyes to water strongly and
+thereby gradually put men out of action.
+
+Their actual smell may be slight. Large concentrations of lachrymators
+begin to affect the lungs and cause sickness, coughing and general
+irritation.
+
+(2) POISON SHELLS:
+
+Besides the comparatively harmless lachrymators the enemy also uses
+projectiles which contain a gas, the action of which is very similar
+to that of phosgene. Because of their slight detonation, these shells
+are liable to be mistaken for blinds, but they emit large quantities
+of a gas which attacks the lungs strongly and is very dangerous, and
+even in slight cases may cause serious after effects.
+
+(3) SMOKE:
+
+The enemy may make use of smoke, either in the form of a cloud or
+emitted from shells and bombs. Smoke may be used with gas or between
+gas clouds; it may also be used alone to distract attention from a
+real discharge of gas, to cover the advance of infantry, or merely as
+a false gas attack.
+
+(4) MINE AND EXPLOSION GASES:
+
+The poisonous gases which occur in mines, and which are formed in
+large quantities when high explosive goes off in an enclosed space,
+_e.g._, from a direct hit in a shelter, or on the explosion of a
+charge in a mine, are not protected against by the ordinary anti-gas
+appliances. The chief of these gases is carbon monoxide. Protection
+against such gases will not be considered in these notes.
+
+Officers are held responsible that all the anti-gas appliances for
+protecting their men are maintained in perfect condition, and that all
+ranks under their command are thoroughly trained in the use of these
+appliances and in all other measures which may affect their safety
+against gas.
+
+Summary of Protective Measures:
+
+ (a) Provision to each man of individual protective devices.
+ (b) Arrangement for the inspection of those appliances and training
+ in their use and instruction in all other measures of gas
+ defense.
+ (c) Provision of protected and gas-proof shelters.
+ (d) Weather observations to determine periods when the conditions
+ are favorable to a hostile gas attack.
+ (e) Arrangement of signals and messages; for immediate warning of a
+ gas attack.
+ (f) Provision of appliances for clearing gas from trenches and
+ shelters.
+
+
+C. Protection of Shelters:
+
+(1) METHODS OF PROTECTION:
+
+Protection of dugouts, cellars, buildings, etc., is given if all
+entrances are closed by well-fitting doors or by blankets sprayed with
+hypo. solution. Practically no gas passes through a wet blanket, and
+the protection depends on getting a good joint at the sides and bottom
+of a doorway, so as to stop all draughts. This can be effected by
+letting the blanket rest on battens, fixed with a slight slope,
+against the door frame. The blanket should overlap the outer sides and
+a fold should lie on the ground at the bottom. A pole is fastened to
+the blanket, which allows the latter to be rolled up on the frame and
+causes it to fall evenly.
+
+Wherever possible, particularly where there is likely to be movement
+in and out of the shelter, two blankets fitted in this way but sloping
+in opposite directions should be provided. There should be an interval
+of at least three feet between the two frames, and the larger this
+vestibule is made the more efficient is the dugout.
+
+When not in use, the blankets should be rolled up and held so that
+they can be readily released, and should be sprayed occasionally with
+water or a little Vermorel sprayer solution.
+
+If the blankets became stiff from a deposit of chemicals, they should
+be sprayed with water.
+
+All ranks must be taught how to use gas-proof dugouts, _e.g._, how to
+enter a protected doorway quickly, replacing the blanket immediately,
+and carrying in as little outside air as possible.
+
+The protection afforded by these means is just as complete against
+lachrymatory gases as it is against cloud gas and poisonous shell
+gases.
+
+(2) SHELTERS WHICH SHOULD BE PROTECTED:
+
+The following should always be protected:
+
+Medical aid posts and advanced dressing stations; Company, Battalion
+and Brigade Headquarters; signal shelters and any other place where
+work has to be carried out during a gas attack.
+
+In addition to the above, it is desirable to protect all dugouts,
+cellars and buildings within the shell area, particularly those of
+artillery personnel. It should be noted, however, that the protection
+of dugouts for troops in the front line of trenches is usually
+inadvisable on account of the delay involved in getting men out in
+time of attack. It is desirable to protect stretcher bearers' dugouts
+with a view to putting casualties in them.
+
+
+D. Protection of Weapons and Equipment:
+
+Arms and ammunition and the metal parts of special equipment (_e.g._,
+telephone instruments) must be carefully protected against gas by
+greasing them or keeping them completely covered. Otherwise,
+particularly in damp weather, they may rust or corrode so badly as to
+refuse to act. A mineral oil must be used for this purpose. The
+following in particular should be protected:
+
+(1) SMALL ARMS AND S.A.A.
+
+Machine guns and rifles must be kept carefully cleaned and well oiled.
+The effects of corrosion of ammunition are of even more importance
+than the direct effects of gas upon machine guns and rifles.
+
+Ammunition boxes must be kept closed. Vickers belts should be kept in
+their boxes until actually required for use. The wooden belt boxes are
+fairly gas-tight, but the metal belt boxes should be made gas-tight by
+inserting strips of flannelette in the joint between the lid and the
+box.
+
+Lewis magazines should be kept in some form of box, the joints of
+which are made as gas-tight as possible with flannelette.
+
+A recess should be made, high up in the parapet if possible, for
+storing ammunition and guns. A blanket curtain, moistened with water
+or sprayer solution, will greatly assist in keeping the gas out.
+
+(2) HAND AND RIFLE GRENADES:
+
+Unboxed grenades should be kept covered as far as possible. All safety
+pins and working parts, especially those made of brass, should be kept
+oiled to prevent their setting from corrosion by the gas.
+
+(3) LIGHT TRENCH MORTARS AND THEIR AMMUNITION:
+
+As far as the supply of oil permits, the bore and all bright parts of
+light trench mortars and their spare parts should be kept permanently
+oiled. When not in use, mortars should be covered with sacking or
+similar material.
+
+Unboxed ammunition should be kept covered as far as possible and the
+bright parts oiled immediately after arrival. Ammunition which has
+been in store for some time should be used up first.
+
+Sentries must be prepared to give the alarm on the first appearance of
+gas, as a few seconds delay may involve very serious consequences.
+Signals must be passed along by all sentries as soon as heard.
+
+The earliest warning of a gas attack is given:
+
+ (a) By the noise of the gas escaping from the cylinders.
+ (b) By the appearance of a cloud of any color over the enemy's
+ trenches. If the attack takes place at night, the cloud will
+ not be visible from a distance.
+ (c) By the smell of the gas in listening posts.
+
+ (1) ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN THE TRENCHES ON GAS ALARM:
+ (a) Respirators to be put on immediately by all ranks (a
+ helmet, if no box respirator is available).
+ (b) Rouse all men in trenches, dug-outs and mine shafts, warn
+ officers and artillery observation posts and all employed
+ men.
+ (c) Artillery support to be called for by company commanders by
+ means of prearranged signals.
+ (d) Warn battalion headquarters and troops in rear.
+ (e) All ranks stand to arms in the front trenches and elsewhere
+ where the tactical situation demands.
+ (f) Blanket curtains at entrances to protected shelters to be
+ let down and carefully fixed.
+ (g) Movement to cease except where necessary.
+
+ (2) ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN BILLETS AND BACK AREAS:
+ (a) All men in cellars or houses to be roused.
+ (b) The blanket curtains of protected collars, etc., to be let
+ down and fixed in position.
+ (c) Box respirators to be put on immediately, the gas is
+ apparent.
+
+
+H. Action During a Gas Attack:
+
+(1) PROTECTIVE MEASURES:
+
+There should be as little moving about and talking as possible in the
+trenches. Men must be made to realize that with the gas now used by
+the enemy, observance of this may be essential for their safety.
+
+When an attack is in progress, all bodies of troops or transport on
+the move should halt and all working parties cease work until the gas
+cloud has passed.
+
+If a relief is going on, units should stand fast as far as possible
+until the gas cloud has passed.
+
+Supports and parties bringing up bombs should only be moved up if the
+tactical situation demands it.
+
+If troops in support or reserve lines of trenches remain in, or go
+into, dug-outs, they must continue to wear their anti-gas appliances.
+
+Officers and N.C.O's must on no account remove or open up the masks of
+the box respirators or raise their helmets to give orders. The
+breathing tube may be removed from the mouth when it is necessary to
+speak, but it must be replaced.
+
+Men must always be on the look-out to help each other in case an
+anti-gas device is damaged by fire or accident. When a man is wounded,
+he must be watched to see that he does not remove his respirator or
+helmet until he is safely inside a protected shelter; if necessary,
+his hands should be tied.
+
+Men must be warned that if they are slightly gassed before adjusting
+their respirators or helmets they must not remove them. The effect
+will wear off.
+
+(2) TACTICAL MEASURES:
+
+From the point of view of protection against gas, nothing is gained by
+men remaining in unprotected dug-outs or by moving to a flank or to
+the rear. It is, therefore, desirable that on tactical and
+disciplinary grounds all men in the front line of trenches should be
+forbidden to do these things. In support or reserve lines where there
+are protected dug-outs, it is advisable for men to stay in them unless
+the tactical situation makes it desirable for them to come out.
+
+Nothing is gained by opening rapid rifle fire unless the enemy's
+infantry attacks. A slow rate of fire from rifles and occasional short
+bursts of fire from machine guns will lessen the chance of their
+jamming from the action of the gas and tends to occupy and steady the
+infantry.
+
+It should be remembered that the enemy's infantry cannot attack while
+the gas discharge is in progress and is unlikely to do so for an
+appreciable time--at least 10 minutes--after it has ceased. It is, in
+fact, a common practice for the enemy infantry to retire to the second
+and third line of trench whilst gas is being discharged. There is,
+therefore, no object in opening an intense S.O.S. barrage of artillery
+on "No man's land" during the actual gas cloud and it is advisable
+that the warning to the artillery of a gas attack should be a signal
+differing from the ordinary S.O.S. signal, as the latter may have to
+be sent later if an infantry attack develops.
+
+It must be remembered that smoke may be used by the enemy at the same
+time as, or alternately with, the gas and that under cover of a smoke
+cloud he may send out assaulting or raiding parties. A careful
+look-out must, therefore, be kept; hostile patrols or raiders may be
+frustrated by cross-fire of rifles and machine guns and should an
+assault develop the ordinary S.O.S. procedure should be carried out.
+
+
+I. Precautions Against Gas Shells:
+
+Owing to the small explosion which occurs with these shells, they are
+liable to be mistaken for blinds, and even when the gas is smelt men
+may not realize its possibly dangerous character at once and so may
+delay putting on respirators or helmets until too late. Men sleeping
+in dug-outs may be seriously affected unless they are roused. Men in
+the open air are unlikely to be seriously affected by poison gas
+shells, provided they put on respirators or helmets on first
+experiencing the gas. The following points should therefore be
+attended to:
+
+(i) All shells which explode with a small detonation or appear to be
+blind should be regarded with particular attention; the respirator or
+helmet should be put on at the first indication of gas and blanket
+protection of shelters adjusted.
+
+(ii) Arrangements must be made for giving a _Local_ alarm in the event
+of a sudden and intense bombardment with poison gas shells, but care
+must be taken that this alarm is not confused with the main alarm.
+Strombos horns must on no account be used to give warning of a gas
+shell bombardment.
+
+(iii) All shelters in the vicinity of an area bombarded with poison
+gas shells must be visited and any sleeping men roused.
+
+(iv.) Box respirators or helmets should continue to be worn throughout
+the area bombarded with poison gas shells until the order is given by
+the local unit Commander for their removal.
+
+Lachrymatory or "tear" shells are frequently used by the enemy for the
+purpose of hindering the movements of troops, for preventing the
+bringing up of supports, or for interfering with the action of
+artillery. Owing to the deadly nature of poison gas shells, however,
+the precautions given in paragraph 60 above, must be taken for all gas
+shells. The goggles are intended for use after lachrymatory
+bombardments only, in cases where the irritant gas persists in the
+neighborhood.
+
+
+K. Action Subsequent to a Gas Attack:
+
+1. GENERAL:
+
+The most important measure to be taken after a cloud gas attack is to
+prepare for a further attack. The enemy frequently sends several
+successive waves of gas at intervals varying from a few minutes up to
+several hours and it is therefore necessary to be on the alert to
+combat this procedure. The following measures should be adopted as
+soon as the gas cloud has passed:
+
+ (a) Removal of respirators.--Anti-gas fans should be used to
+ assist in clearing the trenches of gas, so as to admit of
+ respirators being removed. Respirators and helmets must not
+ be removed until permission has been given by the Company
+ Commander.
+
+A sharp look out must be kept for a repetition of the gas attack, as
+long as the wind continues in a dangerous quarter.
+
+2. MOVEMENT:
+
+Owing to the enemy gas sometimes causing bad after effects, which are
+intensified by subsequent exertion, the following points should be
+attended to:
+ (a) No man suffering from the effects of gas, however slightly,
+ should be allowed to walk to the dressing station.
+ (b) The clearing of the trenches and dugouts should not be
+ carried out by men who have been affected by the gas.
+ (c) After a gas attack, troops in the front trenches should be
+ relieved of all fatigue and carrying work for 24 hours by
+ sending up working parties from companies in rear.
+ (d) Horses which have been exposed to the gas should not be
+ worked for 24 hours if it can be avoided.
+
+3. CLEARING DUGOUTS AND OTHER SHELTERS:
+
+It is essential that no dugout be entered after a gas attack event
+with box respirators or helmets adjusted, until it has been
+ascertained that it is free from gas. The only efficient method of
+clearing dugouts from gas is by thorough ventilation. The older method
+of spraying is not efficient.
+
+An appreciable quantity of gas may be retained in the clothing of men
+exposed to gas attacks and also in bedding, coats, etc., left in
+shelters. Precaution should, therefore, be taken to air all clothing.
+
+4. VENTILATION:
+
+_Natural Ventilation_.--Unless a shelter has been thoroughly
+ventilated by artificial means, as described below, it must not be
+slept in or occupied without wearing respirators, until at least 12
+hours after a gas attack. It must not be entered at all without
+respirators on for at least 3 hours. The above refers to cloud gas
+attacks. In the case of gas shell bombardments the times cannot be
+definitely stated, as they depend on the nature of the gas used and
+the severity of the bombardment. With lachrymatory gases the times
+after which shelters can be used without discomfort may be
+considerably longer than those mentioned above.
+
+_Ventilation by Fire_.--All kinds of shelters can be efficiently and
+rapidly cleared of gas by the use of fires. Shelters with two openings
+are the easiest to ventilate and where possible, dugouts with only one
+entrance should have a second opening made, even a very small one, to
+assist in ventilation.
+
+In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a short passage,
+the best results are obtained if the fire is placed in the center of
+the floor of the dugout and at a height of about 9 inches.
+
+In dugouts provided with a single exit at the end of a long and nearly
+horizontal passage, the best results are obtained if the fire is
+placed about one-third of the distance from the inner end of the
+passage.
+
+In dugouts provided with two or more exits, the fire should be placed
+at the inner end of one of the exit passages.
+
+In general, 1 pound of dry wood per 200 cubic feet of air space is
+sufficient for clearance of any gas. The best fuel is split wood, but
+any fuel which does not smoulder or give off thick smoke can be used.
+The materials for the fire, _e.g._, the split wood, newspaper, and a
+small bottle of paraffine for lighting purposes, should be kept in a
+sand bag, enclosed in a biscuit tin provided with a lid. An improvised
+brazier should be kept ready for use.
+
+The fire must be kept burning for at least ten minutes and the
+atmosphere in the shelter should be tested from time to time.
+
+_Ventilation by Fanning_.--Dugouts can be ventilated by producing air
+currents in them by means of special anti-gas fans.
+
+If no anti-gas fans are available, ventilation can be assisted by
+flapping with improvised fans such as sand bags, ground sheets, etc.
+
+5. CLEANING OF ARMS AND AMMUNITION:
+
+Rifles and machine guns must be cleaned after a gas attack and then
+re-oiled. Oil cleaning will prevent corrosion for 12 hours or more,
+but the first available opportunity must be taken to dismantle machine
+guns and clean all parts in boiling water containing a little soda. If
+this is not done, corrosion continues slowly even after oil cleaning
+and may ultimately put the gun out of action.
+
+After a gas attack, S.A.A. should be carefully examined. All rounds
+affected by gas must be replaced by new cartridges immediately and the
+old ones cleaned and expended as soon as possible.
+
+All hand and rifle grenades exposed to the gas should have their
+safety-pins and working parts cleaned and re-oiled.
+
+All bright parts of light trench mortars, together with all
+accessories and spare parts exposed to the gas, must be cleaned and
+wiped dry as soon as possible after the attack and in any case within
+24 hours, after which they should be thoroughly coated afresh with
+oil. The same applies to ammunition which may have been exposed to the
+gas.
+
+Ammunition which, for any reason, had not been oiled, must be cleaned
+and oiled and expended as soon as possible.
+
+For details regarding the cleaning of guns and artillery ammunition
+and signal equipment, see paragraphs 116 and 123.
+
+6. TREATMENT OF SHELL HOLES:
+
+In the neighborhood of shelters or battery positions where gas from
+shell holes is causing annoyance, the holes and the ground round them
+should be covered with at least a foot of fresh earth. Shell holes so
+treated should not be disturbed, as the chemical is not thereby
+destroyed and only disappears slowly.
+
+
+Concealment From Aerial Observers.
+
+A. 1. An aeroplane cannot conduct reconnaissance at a height of less
+ than 5,000 feet without being within easy range of
+ anti-aircraft artillery; nor of less than 2,000 feet without
+ coming into range of machine-gun and rifle fire.
+ 2. To be observed from such heights, objects on the ground must be
+ distinguished by:
+ (a) Motion.
+ (b) Color contrast.
+ (c) Line contrast, or
+ (d) Shadows.
+
+B. Concealment:
+ 1. (a) On warning of hostile aircraft, troops on the march should
+ withdraw to the side of the road (if possible, into shade),
+ or lie down flat in the road and remain motionless.
+ (b) If it is necessary to continue the march, this should be
+ done in broken detachments, which are far less distinct
+ than continuous column.
+ (c) Troops in a trench should crouch down in the shadowy side
+ and remain motionless.
+ (d) Faces should never be turned up, as the high lights on
+ cheek-bones and foreheads then show up distinctly.
+ (e) Bright metal on arms, equipment and headgear must be kept
+ covered.
+ 2. Artillery wagon-trains, etc., should if possible be halted
+ promptly on warning. When halted, their neutral coloring
+ protects them.
+ 3. Trenches are best concealed:
+ (a) By avoiding, in construction, a too regular outline, and
+ following as far as possible the contours of the ground.
+ (b) By coloring the parapet and parados to match the ground.
+ This may be done most quickly by painted canvas; if the
+ latter is not available, by planting or strewing the loose
+ earth with surrounding herbage. In this work care must be
+ taken not to make the covering itself too conspicuous by
+ brightness or monotony of coloring.
+ (c) By covering the trench itself, where convenient, with a thin
+ material, colored like the parapet and parados.
+ (d) By avoiding all overt movement of troops in the trenches
+ under observation.
+ 4. Buildings, _e.g._, ammunition dumps, hangars, etc., can be
+ completely concealed by being painted the color of the
+ ground they stand on and fitted with canvas curtains,
+ similarly painted and stretched from the eaves to the
+ ground at a horizontal angle of 35 degrees. These curtains
+ completely eliminate shadows.
+ 5. Success in each work of concealment by camouflage is best
+ assured by the assistance of an aeroplane observer to test
+ and correct it.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+Orders Governing Intrenchment Problems at Second Plattsburg Training
+Camp.
+
+HEADQUARTERS PLATTSBURG TRAINING CAMP,
+PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, NEW YORK.
+SEPTEMBER 22, 1917.
+
+DIVISIONAL ENTRENCHING PROBLEM.
+
+General Situation:
+
+The Salmon river forms the boundary line between two states, the
+"Blue" on the north and the "Red" on the south. War has been declared
+and the Red Army is mobilizing near Keeseville. Mobilization by the
+first Blue Army at Plattsburg has been completed.
+
+Special Situation, Blue:
+
+Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river against
+strong detachments of the Red Army. The commanding general of the Blue
+Army has decided to establish a second position on the line, _Bluff
+Point to the bend_ (248) _in the Saranac river_.
+
+The following order is issued by the Division Commander:
+
+HEADQUARTERS, 101st Div.,
+PLATTSBURG, N.Y.
+23 Sept., '17, 9:00 A.M.
+
+FIELD ORDERS,
+No. 1.
+
+1. Our advanced troops are holding the line of the Salmon river.
+
+2. This division and 1 Brigade 102 Division will entrench along the
+line: _Bluff Point_--_Chateaugay Branch Railroad_--_Saranac River_
+(248).
+
+3. (a) The Chief of Artillery will prepare the positions, and lines of
+communication for his Brigade, determine his sectors, and submit his
+plan of action.
+
+(b) The 1st Brig. and 2 Bns. 267th Inf. will entrench the sector,
+_Saranac River_ (248) to _Sand Road_, exclusive. The 2nd Brig. will
+entrench the sector _Sand Road to Bluff Point_, both inclusive. The
+supports will entrench on the line, _Saranac River_ (182)--_Cliff
+Haven_.
+
+(c) The Reserve--1 Brig. 102 Div. less 2 Bns., will construct
+crossings on the _Saranac River_--under direction of the Chief of
+Engineers, and prepare them for defense.
+
+(d) The Chief of Engineers will supply tools for entrenching and lay
+out the lines of entrenchments. He will repair the following trunk
+roads: _Peru Road_, _Sand Road_, _Lake-Shore Road_; and construct a
+transverse trunk line road from _Pulp Mill to O'Connell's Farm_, and
+the necessary tram lines. The Engineer Depot for stores and material
+will be established at _Plattsburg Barracks_.
+
+(e) The Chief Signal Officer will establish necessary lines of
+communication, utilizing equipment at _Plattsburg Barracks, Central
+Station_. Aero Squadron at _Chazy_.
+
+4. (a) The Chief Medical Officer will establish his dressing stations
+in the _Butts_ of the rifle range and in ravine on _O'Connell's Farm_.
+A field hospital will be established at the _Lozier Works_.
+
+(b) Ammunition train and supply train will be parked in the _Fair
+Ground_. Ammunition distributing stations at railroad spurs,
+_Plattsburg Barracks_, and _O'Connell's Farm_. The Division Ordnance
+Officer will locate the Ammunition Dumps along transverse trunk line
+road.
+
+(c) Field trains, until further orders, at north end of _Plattsburg
+Barracks Reservation_. Distributing point, _Plattsburg Railroad
+Station_--Regimental Supply Stations: _Saranac River_ 182;
+intersection _Peru Road_ and _Rifle Range Road_, _Sand Hole_ in _Rifle
+Range_, _Sand Road on O'Connell's Farm_, _Ravine on O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+(d) The commander of trains will establish traffic regulations for all
+roads.
+
+5. Messages to _Statistical Office_.
+
+WOLF,
+Major General.
+
+Official copy:
+ J.A. BAER,
+ Genl. Staff,
+ Chief of Staff.
+
+Copies to:
+ Brig. and Regt. Commanders.
+ C. of E.
+ Div. Q.M.
+ C.S.O.
+ C.M.O.
+ Div. O.O.
+ C. of Tr.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+HEADQUARTERS, 1ST BRIGADE, 101ST DIVISION,
+PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, N.Y.
+23RD SEPT., 1917, 6 P.M.
+
+FIELD ORDERS
+No. 1.
+
+1. Strong detachments of the Red Army, now mobilizing at _Keeseville_,
+are south of the _Salmon River_. Our advance troops are holding the
+line of the _Salmon River_.
+
+2. Our division and one brigade, 102nd Division, will entrench and
+occupy the line _Bluff Point-Chateaugay Branch (D. & H.R.R.), Saranac
+River_ (248). This brigade, reinforced by two Battalions, 267th
+Infantry, will entrench and occupy the sector, _Saranac River_ (248),
+_Sand Road_, exclusive.
+
+3. (a) The 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th infantry will entrench and
+occupy the sector from the _Saranac River_ to a point 600 yards east.
+
+(b) The 266th Infantry, the sector from a point 600 yards east of the
+_Saranac River_, connecting with the trenches of the 267th Infantry,
+to a point 100 yards east of _Peru Road_.
+
+(c) The 265th Infantry, the sector from a point 100 yards east of the
+_Peru Road_, and connecting with the trenches of the 266th Infantry,
+to the _Sand Road_ exclusive.
+
+(d) The Brigade Machine Gun Battalion will organize and maintain
+strong points along line regimental reserves. The C.O. of this
+organization will, at once, consult with the regimental commanders
+relative to preparation of machine gun emplacements and probable need
+for re-enforcements within their respective sectors.
+
+(e) The Brigade Signalmen will establish telephonic communications
+between Brigade and Regimental Headquarters.
+
+4. (a) The regimental commanders and senior officers of the two
+battalions, 267th Infantry, will at once report to the Chief Engineer
+of the Division for plan of entrenchments in their respective sectors.
+
+(b) Tools and materials for entrenching will be supplied at the trench
+sites.
+
+5. Messages to Brigade Headquarters near _Peru Road_, east Savoy
+Hotel.
+
+GOODRICH,
+Brigadier General, Commanding.
+
+Official Copy:
+ WM. KIRBY,
+ Major of Cavalry, U.S.R.,
+ Adjutant.
+
+Copies to:
+ C.O., 265th Infantry.
+ C.O., 266th Infantry.
+ C.O., 1st and 2nd Battalions, 267th Infantry.
+ C.O., Brigade M.G. Co.
+ Headquarters, 101st Division.
+
+HEADQUARTERS, 1ST BATTALION, 265TH INFANTRY
+PLATTSBURG BARRACKS, N.Y.
+OCT. 16, 1917.
+
+FIELD ORDERS
+No. 1.
+
+Blue print of trenches; scale 24 inches equals 1 mile.
+
+1. The enemy strongly occupies a line of trenches immediately _South_
+of the _Chateaugay Branch Railroad_, the center of their line being
+about opposite the center sector of our first line of trench, _Sand
+Road-Target Range Fence_, their line of trenches being within 50 yards
+of the railroad at that point, and then retiring slightly from the
+railroad to the _East_ and _West_.
+
+The 264th Infantry occupies the section of trenches directly to the
+East of us and the 266th Infantry occupies the section of trenches
+directly to the West of us.
+
+2. This battalion will take up a defensive position in the nearly
+completed line of trenches, _Sand Road-Target Range Fence_, and as
+rapidly as possible complete the trench system in the following order
+of work:
+ a. Deepen all trenches to at least three feet.
+ b. Construct latrines.
+ c. Provide cover.
+ d. Revet work previously done.
+
+3. a. Front lines, _i.e._, fire, communicating and support trenches:
+Company "B" will occupy the _East_ sector, _i.e._, _Sand Road_ to
+_Belgium Boyau_, inclusive, including _Slum Boyau_ and the salient at
+_South_ end Reserve Trench immediately in rear of _East_ end of
+Support trench.
+
+Company "C" will occupy the _Central_ sector, _i.e._, from _East_
+sector (_Belgium Boyau_, exclusive), to _Cardona Boyau_, inclusive,
+including _Poire Boyau_.
+
+Company "A" will occupy the _West_ sector, _i.e._, from _Central_
+sector (_Cardona Boyau_, exclusive), to and including salient near
+_Southwest_ corner of _Target Range Fence_.
+
+b. Reserve Line: Company "D" will occupy the line from the _Target
+Range Fence_ on the _West_ to a point 165 yards _East_ of the _Verdun
+Salient_, one-half of the Company occupying the sector, _Target Range
+Fence_, to a point 75 yards _East_ of the _Rams Horn Boyau_, including
+_Rams Horn Boyau_, and the other half of the Company occupying the
+sector from a point 75 yards _East_ of the _Rams Horn Boyau_ to a
+point 165 yards _East_ of the _Verdun Salient_.
+
+c. Machine Guns: Headquarters, 1st Platoon and 1st Platoon Machine Gun
+Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company "A," for
+assignment to the shell craters (converted) and dugouts (constructed
+for machine guns), four in all, in the _West_ sector.
+
+Headquarters, 2nd Platoon and Third Section (2nd Platoon) Machine Gun
+Company, will report to the Commanding Officer, Company "C," for
+assignment to the shell crater (converted), and dugout (constructed
+for machine gun), two in all, in the _Central_ sector. Fourth section
+(2nd Platoon), Machine Gun Company, will report to the Commanding
+Officer, Company "B," for assignment to the shell crater (converted),
+two in all, in the _East_ sector.
+
+d. Trench Mortars: Two trench mortars have been assigned to the
+_Central_ sector and the Commanding officer, Company "C," is charged
+with the construction of emplacements therefor and the manning of
+them.
+
+4. a. Dressing stations have been established in the _Butts_ of the
+rifle range and in ravine on _O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+b. Ammunition distributing points are located at _Plattsburg Barracks_
+and _O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+c. Regimental supply stations are located at _Saranac River_ (182),
+intersection _Peru Road_ and _Rifle Range Road_, _Sand Hole in Rifle
+Range_, _Sand Road_ on _O'Connell's Farm_, and _Ravine_ on
+_O'Connell's Farm_.
+
+5. Battalion Headquarters are located in dugout in _Support_ trench
+(West Tremont), midway between _Rams Horn_ and _Poire Boyaux_, to
+which place messages will be sent.
+
+BOSCHEN,
+Captain, 56th Infantry, Commanding.
+
+Copies to:
+ C.O., 265th Infantry.
+ C.O., Companies A, B, C and D.
+ C.O., M.G. Company.
+ C.O., Headquarters Company.
+ R.S.O.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+HDQTRS. 1ST BATT., 265TH INFTY.,
+PLATTSBURG BCKS., N.Y., _Oct. 17, 1917._
+
+FIELD ORDERS
+No. 2
+
+ 1. DISPOSITIONS:
+ a. The assignment of companies to sectors is as announced in
+ Field Orders No. 1, these headquarters.
+ b. Company commanders are charged with the details of occupation
+ of the trenches and the proper disposition of the
+ "specialists" (bombers, grenadiers, auto-riflemen, etc.),
+ directing particular attention to the active and passive
+ areas of their sectors.
+
+ 2. FIELDS OF FIRE: Company commanders must arrange for and obtain
+ the best fields of fire in their own sectors, and provide
+ for protection of visible areas in adjoining sectors by
+ lateral fire.
+
+ 3. IMPROVEMENTS OR CHANGES IN TRENCHES: Company commanders before
+ making any changes or improvements in trenches will render to
+ battalion headquarters brief recommendations of changes
+ desired. These recommendations will be submitted at 11.00
+ a.m. and 3.00 p.m., after which hours the battalion
+ commander will inspect and if deemed necessary will be
+ ordered.
+
+ 4. ORGANIZATION FOR WATCHING AND OBSERVATION:
+ a. Each company commander will organize a system for watching
+ the enemy by day and will establish look-out posts for this
+ purpose; this system will be augmented at night by patrols
+ if necessary.
+ b. The watching of the enemy must be continuous and long
+ occupation of the sector will not warrant any laxity.
+
+ 5. ORGANIZATION FOR SUPPLY:
+ a. Company commanders will make the necessary details for
+ obtaining supplies; these details to be in charge of Mess or
+ Supply Sergeants and will not exceed three squads for each
+ lettered company.
+ b. _Food_: Machine guns details and members of the Medical Corps
+ assigned to each sector are attached to the lettered
+ companies for rations.
+ c. Cooked food will be at the _Food Station_ at 6.00 a.m., 11.50
+ a.m. and 5.00 p.m. daily, and will be distributed at that
+ point.
+ d. Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an
+ appropriate detail (about 2 squads) to proceed to _Food
+ Station_, which is located at the wire entanglement on the
+ _west_ side of the _Target Range_ about 400 yards _north of
+ Brigade Headquarters_.
+ e. The details mentioned above will proceed via trenches,
+ leaving same at junction of _Tipperary_ trench and _Rams
+ Horn_ boyau in the following order:
+ Co. D: Detail will clear junction _Rams Horn_ boyau and
+ _Tipperary_ trench at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m.
+ Co. A: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench, and
+ _Rams Horn_ boyau at 5.30 a.m., 11.00 a.m. and 4.30 p.m.,
+ proceeding via _Rams Horn_ boyau.
+ Co. B: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench, and
+ _Poire_ boyau at 5.35 a.m., 11.05 a.m. and 4.55 p.m.,
+ proceeding via _Poire_ boyau and _Tipperary_ trench.
+ Co. C: Detail will clear junction _Tremont_ trench and _Slum_
+ boyau at 5.40 a.m., 11.10 a.m. and 4.40 p.m., proceeding via
+ _Slum_ boyau and _Tipperary_ trench.
+ f. These details will return to their respective sectors via
+ the indicated routes, moving in reverse order at five-minute
+ intervals, and company commanders will make necessary
+ arrangements for distribution of food within their
+ respective sectors.
+ g. Company commanders will cause the necessary police after each
+ meal to insure sanitary condition of trenches.
+ h. Food containers will be held in company until the next meal
+ hour when they will be returned to the _Food Station_.
+ i. _Water_: Water wagon will be at the _Food Station_ from 10.00
+ a.m. to 4.30 p.m. daily.
+ j. Containers for water will be furnished by Regimental Supply
+ Officer at the _Food Station_.
+ k. All men will carry full canteens of water when entering the
+ trenches.
+ l. Company commanders will detail the Mess Sergeant, with an
+ appropriate detail (about 2 squads), to proceed to the _Food
+ Station_ to procure water in containers; these details will
+ proceed via the routes indicated in paragraph 5, section "e":
+ Co. D, 2.00 p.m.; Co. A, 2.05 p.m.; Co. B, 2.10 p.m.; Co. C,
+ 2.15 p.m.
+ m. These details will return to their respective sectors in
+ reverse order at five-minute intervals.
+ n. _Miscellaneous_: Details for obtaining tools, ammunition,
+ trench supplies, etc., will be arranged for as required.
+ o. Requisitions for miscellaneous supplies required will be
+ submitted by company commanders to the Regimental Supply
+ Officer not later than 3.00 p.m., October 17, 1917.
+
+ 6. ORGANIZATION FOR LIAISON:
+ a. The Signal Officer will establish necessary telephonic
+ communications.
+ b. Each organization will detail one runner to report to the
+ battalion commander at regimental headquarters at 8.00 a.m.
+ c. Four runners will be detailed for duty with each company
+ headquarters and one runner will be detailed for duty with
+ each platoon headquarters. These runners should be lightly
+ equipped and wear a distinctive mark.
+ d. At least two men per section must be able to act as guides to
+ all company headquarters of the battalion.
+ e. Verbal messages will not be sent by runners; all messages
+ must be written.
+ f. Company commanders, or their representatives, will report
+ daily at battalion headquarters at 5.00 p.m.
+ g. There must be accurate communication between platoons in
+ company, and companies in battalion, in order to insure
+ co-ordinated action.
+
+ 7. DEFENSE:
+ a. Immediately after the occupation of the trenches, company
+ commanders will make a careful estimate of all tactical
+ situations presented in their sectors and will plan for a
+ stubborn defense. Care must be exercised in providing for
+ defense in depth and lateral defense. The front line
+ trenches of each sector will be held until actually entered
+ by the enemy, and no sector will be abandoned until the
+ occupants are actually forced out.
+ b. The main line of resistance will be the support trenches
+ (_Tremont_) and special attention must be given to the
+ preparation for defense. If the front line trenches of any
+ sector be captured by the enemy there will be no withdrawal
+ from any other sector of the front line trenches for the
+ purpose of establishing a continuous line in the support
+ trench.
+ c. The company commander of the reserve will organize parties
+ for counterattacks and these parties will be held in
+ readiness at convenient points to insure prompt movement to
+ the front.
+ d. Continuous occupation of the trenches without fire action
+ must not cause a feeling of security and result in being
+ surprised by the enemy.
+
+ 8. STAND TO: "Stand to" will take place at 5.00 a.m. and 5.00 p.m.,
+ daily. At this formation every available man will be
+ present. Rifles, ammunition, equipment, clothing, etc., will
+ be inspected. Rapid loading will be practiced. The firing
+ position of every man will be tested to see whether he can
+ hit the bottom edge of our wire. Gas helmets and respirators
+ will be inspected if worn. After "stand to" in the morning
+ and before "stand to" in the evening rifles will be
+ thoroughly cleaned and oiled.
+
+ 9. TRENCH ORDERS:
+ a. Current "Trench Standing Orders" recently published from
+ Brigade Headquarters are in force.
+ b. During the occupation of the trenches it will be assumed
+ that, the trenches are under the observation and fire of the
+ enemy and all movement in the trenches will be conducted
+ accordingly. All movements of troops, either individuals or
+ groups, will be via the trenches at all times.
+ c. No one will be allowed to go overland between trenches or to
+ enter the trenches by the flank. All persons will enter the
+ trenches from the reserve trenches and no visitors will be
+ allowed in the trenches except on passes issued from the
+ Regimental Headquarters.
+ d. Commanding officers, Companies A and B, are responsible for
+ the posting of the necessary sentinels along the flanks of
+ the position (during the day), with instructions covering the
+ provisions contained in paragraph 9, sections "b" and "c."
+
+ 10. REPORTS:
+ a. Company commanders will submit by 1.00 p.m., October 18,
+ 1917, a report showing the dispositions and plan of defense
+ of their respective sectors.
+ b. Frequent reports of information obtained and any change of
+ conditions at the front will be made to battalion
+ headquarters when necessary.
+
+BOSCHEN,
+_Captain, 56th Infantry._
+_Commanding._
+
+Copies to:
+ C.O. 265th Infty.
+ C.O. Cos, A, B, C and D.
+ C.O. M.G. Co.
+ C.O., Hdq. Co.
+ R.S.O.
+
+
+Company Organization (in Detail):
+
+Company Headquarters:
+
+ 1 Captain, commanding company,
+ 1 First Lieutenant (senior), second in command,
+ 1 First Sergeant, armed with pistol,
+ 1 Mess Sergeant, armed with rifle,
+ 1 Supply Sergeant, armed with rifle,
+ 1 Corporal, company clerk, armed with rifle,
+ 4 Mechanics, armed with rifle,
+ 5 Wagoners (from Supply Company),
+ 4 Cooks, armed with rifle,
+ 2 Buglers, armed with pistol,
+ 4 Privates, first class, company agent and signalmen.
+
+ _Equipment_: 15 rifles, 5 pistols, 8 automatic rifles (for
+ replacement), 40 trench knives (to be distributed as needed), 2
+ bicycles. Following from Supply Company: 1 rolling kitchen,
+ 4-mule; 1 combat wagon, 4-mule; 1 ration and baggage wagon,
+ 4-mule; 1 ration cart, 2-mule; 1 water cart, 2-mule; 16 mules,
+ draft.
+
+_4 Platoons, each organized as follows_ (numbered 1 to 4 in company):
+
+
+Headquarters:
+
+ 1 First Lieutenant; 1st and 4th Platoons commanded by First
+ Lieutenants; 2nd and 3rd Platoons commanded by Second
+ Lieutenants, armed with pistol.
+
+ 1 Sergeant, assistant to platoon commander, armed with pistol and
+ rifle.
+
+ _Equipment_: 1 rifle, 2 pistols.
+
+ 1st SECTION: Bombers and rifle grenadiers:
+
+ 1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle,
+
+ 3 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle, 1 trained as rifle
+ grenadier; remainder trained as bombers,
+
+ 6 Privates, first class, 2 armed with pistol and rifle, and
+ remainder with rifle only; 1 trained as rifle grenadier, and
+ remainder as bombers.
+
+ 12 Privates, armed with rifles; 4 trained as rifle grenadiers,
+ remainder trained as bombers.
+
+ _Equipment_: 22 rifles, 6 pistols.
+
+2nd SECTION: Riflemen:
+ 2 Corporals, armed with pistols and rifles,
+ 3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle,
+ 7 Privates, armed with rifle,
+ _Equipment_: 12 rifles, 2 pistols.
+
+3rd SECTION: Riflemen:
+ 2 Corporals, armed with pistol and rifle,
+ 3 Privates, first class, armed with rifle,
+ 7 Privates, armed with rifle.
+ _Equipment_: 12 rifles, 2 pistols.
+
+4th SECTION: Auto-riflemen:
+ 1 Sergeant, armed with pistol and rifle,
+ 1 Corporal, armed with pistol and rifle,
+ 3 Privates, first class; 1 armed with rifle, 2 armed with pistols;
+ auto-rifle gunners, including 1 extra,
+ 6 Privates, armed with rifle.
+ _Equipment_: 9 rifles, 4 pistols, 2 auto-rifles.
+
+NOTE.--Sections numbered from 1 to 16 in company.
+
+
+Personnel:
+
+Commissioned:
+
+ Captain 1
+ First Lieutenants 3
+ Second Lieutenants 2
+ ----
+ Total 6
+ ====
+
+Enlisted:
+
+ First Sergeant 1
+ Mess Sergeant 1
+ Supply Sergeant 1
+ Sergeants 12
+ Corporals 33
+ Mechanics 4
+ Wagoners (from Supply Company) (5)
+ Cooks 4
+ Buglers 2
+ Privates, first class 64
+ Privates 128
+ -----
+ Total 250
+ =====
+
+
+Equipment:
+
+Rifles 239
+Pistols 69
+Auto rifles 16
+Trench knives 40
+Bicycles 2
+From Supply Company:
+ Rolling kitchen, 4-mule 1
+ Combat wagon, 4-mule 1
+ Ration and baggage wagon, 4-mule 1
+ Ration cart, 2-mule 1
+ Water cart, 2-mule 1
+ Mules, draft 16
+ ====
+
+
+Trench Standing Orders.
+
+1. Duties.--A. One officer per company and one non-commissioned
+officer per platoon will always be on duty. During their tour of duty
+they will not be in their dugouts. They will frequently visit all
+trenches occupied by their units. Every listening post will be visited
+at least once by an officer during his tour of duty.
+
+B. The officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will, when his
+tour of duty is completed, turn over to the officer or
+non-commissioned officer relieving him all orders, a report of the
+work in progress, if any, and any other information of use.
+
+C. At night the officer and non-commissioned officer on duty will
+frequently patrol the trench line, to see that the sentries are alert
+and to receive any reports they may desire to make.
+
+D. The-non-commissioned officer coming on duty will go round and post
+new sentinels with the non-commissioned officer coming off duty.
+
+E. The length of the tour of duty will depend upon the number of
+officers and non-commissioned officers on duty. Normally each tour
+should be, by night, two hours; by day, four hours. This may be
+modified, however, so that all officers and non-commissioned officers
+will have an equal amount of this duty while in the trenches.
+
+F. Non-commissioned officers, after posting sentinels, will report
+"all is well" or otherwise to the officers on duty.
+
+G. No man will be detailed for a duty in the trench without being
+given suitable warning of this duty and be informed at which hour he
+will come on duty.
+
+H. The Company Commander will be responsible for sending any report
+required by Battalion Headquarters.
+
+2. Sentries.--A. The number of sentry posts required will depend on
+the assumed propinquity or distance of the enemy, strength of
+obstacles, ease with which sentry posts can be re-enforced and other
+local conditions. Normally by day this should be one sentinel for each
+platoon and at night three double sentinels for each platoon. There
+must be sentries enough to insure alarm being given promptly in case
+of attack and that local resistance is sufficient until help can
+arrive.
+
+B. The next relief will remain within an easy distance of the sentry
+on post, usually in shelters provided for this purpose.
+
+C. Every sentry is to be regularly posted by a non-commissioned
+officer who will explain to him his duties and ascertain that the
+sentry is aware of the position of the section and platoon commanders
+and of the sentries on either side, and whether there are any patrols
+or working parties out in front.
+
+D. Every sentinel will report when an officer passes his post, "All is
+well," or otherwise.
+
+E. Every sentinel by day will be provided with a head-cover to blend
+with the ground (this may be improvised), and while observing the
+ground to the front will remain perfectly still. An empty sand bag or
+some other suitable material may be utilized for this purpose.
+
+3. Patrols.--A. It is the duty of all the troops holding the front
+lines to establish a command of the ground in front of their parapet
+up to the enemy's wire. This can be done by extended and constant
+patrolling by night and reconnaissance by day so that the ground is
+thoroughly well known to as large a portion as possible of officers
+and men and so no enemy can move or remain in his front by night or
+day without detection. One of the particular duties of these patrols
+is to observe the condition of the wire entanglements.
+
+B. Every patrol must have definite orders as to its mission; broadly
+speaking, patrols may be divided into two classes: (1) reconnoitering
+patrols, (2) fighting patrols.
+
+C. The first duty of reconnoitering patrols is to obtain the
+information for which they are sent out. They fight only in
+self-defense or if any especially favorable opportunity arises to
+inflict loss upon the enemy without prejudice to their mission. They
+usually consist of two to six men, under an officer or
+non-commissioned officer.
+
+D. Fighting patrols are sent out for the express purpose of causing
+loss or damage to the enemies by such means as engaging the enemy's
+patrols or working parties, or by raiding saps, listening posts or
+trenches. For identification purposes they should always endeavor to
+secure at least one prisoner. Their strength depends upon the
+resistance they are likely to meet with.
+
+E. Company commanders are responsible for the orders given to patrols,
+subject to any instructions which may be issued by higher authority.
+They are also responsible that all troops, whom it concerns, including
+companies on both flanks, are warned when and where patrols will be
+out, length of time they will be out, and of the points to which they
+will return.
+
+F. Information gained by patrols is of little value unless transmitted
+quickly to those whom it concerns. Patrol reports will be made out by
+the commander of the patrol immediately upon his return and sent at
+once to the company commander unless orders to the contrary have been
+given.
+
+4. Stand To.--A. "Stand to" will take place one-half hour after a
+relief has been posted and one-half hour before being relieved. At
+this parade every available man will be present. Rifles, equipment,
+clothing, etc., will be inspected. Firing steps will be tested as soon
+as practicable after reliefs have been posted to see that each man can
+fire on the foot of the nearest part of the wire entanglement which he
+is required to cover by his fire. The same procedure will be gone
+through at the "stand to" one-half hour before being relieved. Other
+"stand tos" may be ordered in the discretion of the company commander.
+These should be sufficiently often to insure that every man turns out
+promptly and knows his place in case of attack.
+
+5. Machine Guns.--A. The concealment of machine gun emplacements is
+important. Consequently, it is only at night or in case of attack that
+machine gun crews will occupy their defense emplacements. At night
+guns should take up other position than their defense emplacements and
+fire a stated number of rounds in order to test out the guns and
+mislead the enemy as to their numbers and real emplacements, after
+which they will at once go back to their defense emplacements.
+
+B. The guns and their crews will be tactically under the orders of the
+company commander in whose sector they are located, but no alteration
+will be made by him in their disposition or arcs of fire; he will,
+however, bring before the senior machine gun instructor any
+suggestions for improvements in machine gun dispositions for defense.
+
+C. Two men per gun will always be on duty with the guns.
+
+D. Range cards will be prepared and kept with each gun.
+
+E. Officers and non-commissioned officers in charge of guns will
+remain in close proximity to the guns. They will frequently inspect
+their guns, emplacements, etc. They are responsible for cleanliness
+and maintenance of the emplacements.
+
+F. Machine gun commanders are responsible for guns always being ready
+for action, and that emplacements are clear of all material except
+such as is required for the service of the guns; that embrasures or
+loopholes are kept clear of all obstructions which may interfere with
+fire or view.
+
+6. Reliefs.--A. Reconnaisance. Prior to taking over the line of
+trenches the company commander, accompanied by his senior First
+Lieutenant and First Sergeant, will reconnoiter the trenches.
+
+B. Points to be noted by the company commanders. The following points
+will be specially noted by company commanders before taking over
+trenches:
+
+ 1. Plan of occupation (number of men holding lines to be taken
+ over, their distribution and duties).
+ 2. Shelter accommodations.
+ 3. Work being done and proposed.
+ 4. Conditions of the wire and defenses generally.
+ 5. Information as to the enemy, his habits, snipers, and the work
+ he is doing, etc.
+ 6. Water supply.
+ 7. Artillery support.
+ 8. Communications.
+ 9. Danger points.
+ 10. Location and condition of stores.
+ 11. Liaison.
+
+7. Guides.--A. Arrangements will be made between the company
+commanders of the incoming and outgoing companies as to the rendezvous
+where guides will be provided by the latter to conduct the incoming
+troops to the trenches.
+
+B. One guide per platoon, one for each company and one for battalion
+headquarters will be provided. These guides must know the exact spot
+where they will meet the relief troops and the best way to conduct the
+units to the particular section of the trench they will occupy.
+
+8. Smoking and Talking.--A. After leaving the rendezvous there will
+be no smoking and talking until arrival in trenches. Strictest march
+discipline will be enforced on the way to and from the trenches.
+
+9. Procedure on Arrival at Trenches.--A. The troops being relieved
+will not leave the trenches until the relieving troops are in position
+and the new sentries have been posted, all trench stores have been
+handed over and receipted for, and orders to move have been received
+from the Company Commander.
+
+B. Platoon commanders will at once personally see that all sentinels
+are properly posted, that the non-commissioned officer is on duty,
+that every man knows his place in case of attack, and that both flanks
+of his platoon are in liaison with the adjoining platoon.
+
+C. When reliefs are completed, Platoon Commanders will report to that
+effect to the Company Commander.
+
+D. Men will not be dismissed until the Company Commander has received
+the reports from all of his Platoon Commanders that everything is in
+order.
+
+10. Log Books.--A. Each Company Commander will keep a log book in
+which will be entered:
+
+ 1. Work done.
+ 2. Number of men working.
+ 3. Hours worked.
+ 4. Any information obtained from sentries, patrols, or other
+ sources.
+
+They will also enter in this book a list of any trench stores that
+come into their possession.
+
+11. Equipment.--A. Equipment will be worn in the front trenches.
+Haversacks, packs, and trench tools need not be worn, these will be
+left in the shelters. In support and reserve trenches, they will be
+worn at the discretion of the Company Commander.
+
+B. Ration and carrying parties will wear equipment and carry rifles
+unless otherwise ordered.
+
+C. Pieces will be assumed to be loaded and locked at all times.
+
+D. In the firing trenches bayonets will be fixed at night.
+
+E. Non-commissioned officers and men of the firing line will at all
+times be in possession of their rifles and bayonets. The rifles of men
+in the support and reserve trenches or dugouts will be where they can
+be quickly seized, even in the dark.
+
+12. Stretcher Bearers.--A. Stretcher bearers will be stationed at a
+point designated by the Company Commander.
+
+13. Discipline.--A. Sleeping in the firing trenches will not be
+permitted.
+
+B. No man will enter the firing trench, except in discharge of his
+duty, unless so ordered by his Company or Platoon Commander.
+
+C. Sentries will remain standing unless the height of the parapet
+renders this impossible.
+
+D. Saluting and standing at attention, etc., will be as carefully
+adhered to as when in camp except that sentinel will not let this
+interfere with their duties.
+
+14. Rations and Cooking.--A. Cooking will be done in the rear of the
+reserve at a point to be designated.
+
+B. Company Quartermaster Sergeants will accompany ration parties,
+which will be limited in size to the actual needs for bringing up
+cooked rations from the point where cooking is done, to the trenches.
+At no time should this exceed ten per cent of the effective strength
+of the unit from which sent.
+
+C. Care will be taken that as little noise as possible be made by
+these carrying parties.
+
+15. Sanitation.--A. The importance of strict attention to sanitation
+will be impressed upon all ranks.
+
+B. The commanding officer of each unit is responsible for sanitation
+in his sector. He will make frequent inspections of latrines, refuse
+pits and trenches to ascertain that no unsanitary conditions exist.
+
+C. Latrines will be constructed in the trenches, excreta kept covered
+at all times and such disinfectants as may be provided will be used at
+regular intervals. When filled within eighteen inches of the top, pits
+will be filled with earth and labeled.
+
+D. Urinal cans will be provided and men required to use these cans and
+contents will be emptied as often as necessary into deep pits at least
+one hundred yards from the trenches. Empty tin cans, particles of food
+and other refuse will be collected in receptacles kept in the trenches
+for that purpose and carried to the rear and buried in pits. This is
+usually done at night.
+
+
+Emergency Dumps for Companies (Material).
+
+1. Any large shell crater will do for these or holes can be dug 10' x
+10,' x 5' deep.
+
+
+CONTENTS OF DUMP.
+
+ 10 rolls barbed wire.
+ 8 coils French accordion wire.
+ 30 long screw stakes.
+ 50 short screw stakes.
+ 4 prepared wire blocks (gooseberries).
+
+
+STORES FOR COMPANY.
+
+ 100 very flares.
+ 6 S.O.S. rockets.
+ 2 verminal sprayers.
+ 1 strombos horn. (gas alarm)
+ rubber boots.
+ periscopes.
+ 200 revolver ammunition.
+ 1 log book.
+ 1 set maps.
+ 1 set air photos.
+ 1 defense scheme.
+
+2. These are taken over and signed for. Each dugout must have a gas
+blanket and some form of gas alarm (usually empty shell case.)
+
+
+STORES AT BATTALION HEADQUARTERS.
+
+ 1 strombos horn.
+ 2 verminal sprayers.
+ 300 very flares.
+ 20 S.O.S. rockets.
+ 500 revolver ammunition.
+ 50 ground flares.
+
+[Illustration: Plate #28]
+
+
+
+
+Conclusion.
+
+
+The present army of the United States had its inception at Plattsburg
+in 1915. The first regiment of the Business Mens' Training Camp will
+go down in history as the first chapter of preparedness.
+
+The training camps of 1916, not only at Plattsburg, but at various
+other places throughout the United States, constituted the second
+chapter.
+
+We are just finishing chapter three in the officers' training camps of
+1917.
+
+This book brings together the essential points of the instruction
+given at the second and probably the last of the officers' training
+camps at Plattsburg, in such a way that an officer may refresh his
+memory when he is about to take up with his men any of the subjects
+covered.
+
+It is hardly necessary to add that no attempt has been made to cover
+fully any branch of the work. The bibliography provides for further
+study and the books in it should be at every officer's command.
+
+As the war progresses many changes will be made; not only will methods
+change but some branches now considered essential may be cast aside as
+useless.
+
+Nothing but work can make the pages of any military book have real
+meaning. This book gives what are now considered the essentials of
+military training. If it has brought to the conscientious officer
+points he might otherwise have forgotten to the detriment of his
+command, it will have served its purpose.
+
+
+
+
+Bibliography.
+
+
+CHAPTER II. I.D.R.
+
+ Balck "Tactics" Vol. 1. Infantry.
+
+ Howell "Lectures on the Swiss Army."
+
+ Bjornstadt "Lectures on the German Army."
+
+ "Drill and Field Training" (English)--Imperial Army Series.
+
+ "Instructions on the Offensive Conduct of Small Units." War
+Department, May, 1917.
+
+ "Notes on the methods of attack and defense to meet the Conditions
+of Modern Warfare." Army War College, April, 1917.
+
+ Privates Manual. (Moss.)
+
+ "Instructions for assembling the Infantry Pack," Ordnance
+Department. Pamphlet No. 1717 Manual of Military Training. (Moss.)
+
+
+CHAPTER III. PHYSICAL TRAINING.
+
+ "Manual of Physical Training." (Koehler.)
+
+ "Field Physical Training of the Soldier." Special Regulation No.
+23.
+
+ Voice Culture. (Robert Lloyd.) (In lecture form.)
+
+
+CHAPTER IV. SMALL ARMS FIRING MANUAL.
+
+ Bull's Eye Scorebook.
+
+ U.S. Marines Scorebook.
+
+ "How to Shoot." (Moss.)
+
+ "Notes on training for Rifle Fire in Trench Warfare." Army War
+Coll., April, 1917.
+
+ "The Rifle in War." (Eames.)
+
+ "Suggestions to Military Riflemen." (Whelen.)
+
+ "Musketry" sheets from First Camp, Plattsburg, New York.
+
+ "Control of the Firing Line." Army Service School.
+
+ "Musketry Training." (Pickering.)
+
+ "A Synopsis of the Rifle in War." Army Service Schools.
+
+ British--"Aids in Musketry." "Fire Problems." (Pilcher.)
+
+ "Fire Orders"--"Direction and Control"--"Musketry"--Imperial Army
+Series.
+
+ "Lecture and Lessons on Musketry and Instructions for Officers and
+N.C.O.S. Musketry Diagrams." (Clutterbuck.)
+
+ "Notes on Bayonet Training." Army War College, March, 1917.
+
+ "British Manual of the Bayonet." Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1715 and No.
+1866. (Pistol.)
+
+ "Notes on Bombing." (McClintock.)
+
+ "Notes on Grenade Training"--Plattsburg Training Camp.
+
+ "Notes on Grenade Warfare." Army War College.
+
+
+CHAPTER V. MILITARY SKETCHING AND MAP HEADING.
+
+ "Military Map Reading." (Sherrill.)
+
+ "Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Grieves.)
+
+ "An Officer's Notes" (Parker.)
+
+ "Topography." (Sherrill.)
+
+ Engineers Field Manual.
+
+ "Manual of Infantry Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Training Manual in Topography, Map Reading and Reconnaissance."
+(By Major Spalding, U.S.A.)
+
+ "Military Sketching and Map Reading." (Capt. Barnes.)
+
+
+CHAPTER VI. ARTICLES OF WAR.
+
+ "A Guide to the Articles of War." (Professor Eugene Waumbaugh.)
+
+ Manual of Courts Martial.
+
+
+CHAPTER VII. ARMY REGULATIONS.
+
+ "Manual for Commanders of Infantry Platoons." Translated from the
+French by the Army War College, 1917, War Department Document No.
+626. a.r., 1913.
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII. (FIELD WORK.)
+
+ "Notes on Field Fortification." Army Service Schools, 1916.
+
+ "E.F.M." and Addendum thereto.
+
+ "Elements of Trench Warfare." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Field Entrenchments." (Solano.)
+
+ "Scouting and Patrolling." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Scout Instruction." (McKenney.)
+
+ "Scout's Handwork." (McKenney.)
+
+ "The 2nd Matabele War." (Baden Powell.)
+
+ "Aids to Scouting." (Baden Powell.)
+
+ "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Small Problems in Infantry." (Bjornstadt.)
+
+ "S.M. Tactics."
+
+ "A Military Primer." (Marshall & Simonds.)
+
+ "Technique of Modern Tactics." (Von Allen.)
+
+ "Night Movements." (Burnett.)
+
+ "Night Operations for Infantry." (Dawkins.)
+
+
+CHAPTER IX. (FEEDING MEN.)
+
+ "Manual for Army Cooks."
+
+ "Mess Sergeant's Handbook." (Holbrook.)
+
+ "Mess Officer's Assistant."
+
+ "Mess Account Book." (Frink.)
+
+ "Handling the Straight Army Ration." (Holbrook.)
+
+ "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Field Service." (Moss.)
+
+
+CHAPTER X. (PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID.)
+
+ "Manual of Military Training." (Moss.)
+
+ "Lectures on Military Sanitation and Management of Sanitation
+Service," Army Service Schools.
+
+ "Lectures" delivered at Plattsburg Training Camp, 1917.
+
+ "Elements of Military Hygiene." (Ashburn.)
+
+ "Red Cross Pamphlet on First Aid."
+
+ "Manual for Non-Coms. and Privates."
+
+
+CHAPTER XI. (SIGNALING.)
+
+ "United States Signal Book."
+
+ "Infantry Drill Regulations."
+
+
+CHAPTER XII. (GUARD DUTY.)
+
+ "Manual of Interior Guard Duty."
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII. (COMPANY ADMINISTRATION.)
+
+ "Company Administration." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Army Paper Work." (Perrin-Smith Pub. Co.)
+
+ "Notes on Organizations." (Waldron.)
+
+ "Synopsis of Work Done at 1st Plattsburg Camp." (Farley.)
+
+ "Army Paper Work." (Moss.)
+
+ "Army Regulations."
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV. (CONFERENCES. STUDY. S.P.I. EXAMINATIONS.)
+
+ "Examinations in Military Science," Harvard University, 1917.
+
+
+CHAPTER XV. (TRENCH WARFARE.)
+
+ "Field Fortifications." (Lt. Henri Poire.) Plattsburg, N.Y., 1917.
+
+ "The French Automatic Rifle." (Capt. Gene Loriot.)
+
+ "Notes on Liaison in Modern Warfare."
+
+ "Notes on the Method of Attack and Defense to Meet the Conditions
+of Modern Warfare."
+
+ "Machine Gun Tactics." (Applin.)
+
+ "Grenades, Hand and Rifle." (Solano.)
+
+ "Training for the Trenches." (Vickers.)
+
+ "Studies in Leading Troops." (Vernois.)
+
+ "Tactical Decisions and Orders." (Buddecke.)
+
+ "Problems in Leading Troops--Army Service Schools."
+
+ "Battle Orders." (Von Kiesling.)
+
+ "70 Problems." (Morrison.)
+
+ "Tactical Principles and Problems." (Hanna.)
+
+ "Technique of Modern Tactics." (Bond and McDonough.)
+
+ "Estimating Tactical Situations." (Fitch.)
+
+
+The Book Department, Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas,
+or the United States Infantry Association, Washington, D.C., will get
+any books available.
+
+
+
+
+
+INDEX.
+
+
+CHAPTER 1. PAGE.
+
+Schedules; 1
+
+CHAPTER 2.
+
+Infantry drill regulations; 31
+ School of the soldier; 31
+ Instruction without arms; 31
+ Attention; 32
+ Position of; 32
+ Heels together and on a line; 32
+ Feet turned out equally, forming angle of 45 degrees; 32
+ Knees extended without stiffness; 32
+ Trunk erect upon hips; 32
+ Shoulders falling naturally; 32
+ Arms hanging naturally; 33
+ Head erect, chin raised; 33
+ Rests; 33
+ Position of rest and at ease; 33
+ Fall out; 34
+ Rest; 34
+ At ease; 34
+ Parade rest; 34
+ Eyes right; 34
+ Right face; 34
+ Right half face; 34
+ About face; 34
+ Hand salute; 34
+ Forward march; 34
+ Double time, march; 34
+ Mark time, march; 34
+ Half step, march; 34
+ Right step, march; 34
+ Squad, halt; 34
+ By right flank, march; 34
+ To the rear, march; 34
+ Change step, march; 34
+ Manual of arms; 35
+ Purpose; 35
+ Commands and cautions; 35
+ Order, arms; 35
+ Present, arms; 35
+ Port, arms; 35
+ Right shoulder, arms; 35
+ Left shoulder, arms; 35
+ Parade, rest; 35
+ Trail, arms; 35
+ Rifle salute; 35
+ Fix bayonet; 35
+ Unfix bayonet; 36
+ Inspection arms; 36
+ School of the squad; 36
+ Object; 36
+ Composition of squad; 36
+ Fall in; 36
+ Fall out; 36
+ Count off; 36
+ Inspection arms--right dress, front; 36
+ Guide right; 37
+ Take interval; 37
+ To reform; 37
+ Take distance; 37
+ Assemble, march; 37
+ Stack arms; 37
+ Take arms; 37
+ Oblique, march; 37
+ In place, halt; 37
+ Resume march; 38
+ Right turn; 38
+ Right half turn; 38
+ Squads right; 38
+ Squad right about; 38
+ School of the company; 38
+ Object; 38
+ Composition; 39
+ Fall in; 39
+ Platoon movements; 40
+ Leading platoon; 40
+ Rear platoon; 40
+ Questions which come up in daily military life; 40
+ Answers; 41
+ Insignia; 41
+ For second lieutenants; 41
+ Company right, march; 42
+ Platoons right, march; 42
+ Squads right, march; 42
+ Right turn, march; 42
+ Column right, march; 42
+ Platoons, column right, march; 42
+ Squads right, column right, march; 42
+ Squads right, platoons, column right, march; 42
+ Squads right about, march; 43
+ Right into line, march; 43
+ Right front into line, march; 43
+ Platoons, right front into line, march; 43
+ Route step, march; 43
+ Right by twos, march; 43
+ Squads right front into line, march; 43
+ Dismiss the company; 43
+ To fall in company when it cannot be formed by squads; 44
+ For muster; 44
+ In aligning company; 44
+ To march squad without unnecessary commands; 44
+ As skirmishers, march; 44
+ Assemble, march; 45
+ Kneel; 45
+ Lie down; 45
+ Rise; 45
+ Loadings and firings; 45
+ Arming; 45
+ Sight-setting announced; 45
+ Fire at will; 45
+ Clip fire; 45
+ Unload; 45
+ Extended order; 45
+ Corporal cautions; 46
+ Left face; 46
+ Company right; 46
+ Deployments; 46
+ As skirmishers, guide right, march; 46
+ To deploy from column or squad; 46
+ Assemble, march; 47
+ Platoons, assemble; 47
+ Platoons, columns; 47
+ Squad columns; 47
+ No. 1's forward, march; 48
+ Captain points out new line; 48
+ Disadvantage; 48
+ Advantage; 48
+ Being in skirmish line; 48
+ By platoon; 48
+ Commands; 48
+ School of the Battalion; 49
+ Basis; 49
+ Arrangement; 49
+ Number; 49
+ Center; 49
+ Band; 49
+ Dressing; 49
+ To form the battalion; 49
+ Other than ceremonies; 49
+ For ceremonies; 49
+ To dismiss the battalion; 50
+ To rectify the alignment; 50
+ To rectify the column; 50
+ Helpful hints to beginners; 50
+ In column of squads; 50
+ In column of companies; 51
+ Line of companies; 53
+ In battalion line; 54
+ Inspections; 55
+ Special points of company; 55
+ Battalion inspection; 56
+ Regimental inspection; 56
+ Ceremonies; 56
+ Battalion review; 56
+ Battalion parade; 57
+ Regimental parade; 58
+ Regimental review; 58
+ Fire direction; 58
+ Fire control; 58
+ Fire discipline; 58
+ The colonel; 59
+ Position; 59
+ Duties; 60
+ The major; 60
+ Position; 60
+ The general; 61
+ Duties; 61
+ Special; 62
+ Battalion staff; 63
+ Positions; 63
+ Duties; 64
+ Position; 65
+ Duties: before fire action; 65
+ during the action; 65
+ Buglers; 66
+ Position; 66
+ Duties; 66
+ Must be proficient in; 67
+ Range estimators; 67
+ Platoon leader; 68
+ Position; 68
+ Duties; 68
+ Thereafter; 69
+ First sergeant; 70
+ Guides; 70
+ General rules; 70
+ Equipment; 70
+ Close order; 71
+ Taking intervals and distances; 71
+ To form the company; 72
+ Alignments; 72
+ Exercise for; 74
+ Result; 74
+ Platoon Guides; 75
+ Position; 75
+ Duties; 75
+ Corporal; 76
+ Position; 76
+ Duties; 76
+ Thereafter; 76
+ The private; 78
+ Position; 78
+ Duties; 79
+ Packs; 81
+ Cartridge belt; 81
+ To attach first-aid pouch; 82
+ To attach canteen cover; 82
+ To attach pack carrier to haversack; 82
+ To attach cartridge belt to haversack; 83
+ To attach bayonet scabbard to haversack; 83
+ To attach intrenching tool carrier to haversack; 83
+ To assemble the full equipment (without rations); 84
+ To make the pack; 85
+ To assemble the pack; 85
+ To assemble the full equipment (with rations); 86
+ To make the pack; 86
+ To assemble the pack; 86
+ To adjust to the soldier; 86
+ To assemble full equipment, less the pack (with
+ rations); 87
+ To assemble full equipment, less the pack (without
+ rations); 88
+ To discard pack without removing equipment from
+ body; 88
+ Care of equipment; 89
+ Leather; 89
+ Woolen clothes; 89
+ Mending; 89
+ Cloth equipment--dry cleaning; 89
+ Washing; 89
+ Instructions on making packs; 89
+ Methods; 89
+ Adjusting cartridge belt; 90
+ Distribution of intrenching tools in the squad; 90
+
+CHAPTER 3.
+
+Physical training; 91
+ Physical training; 91
+ Bayonet training; 91
+ Time schedule; 91
+ Formations; 92
+ Second formation; 93
+ Commands; 93
+ Kinds of and how given; 93
+ First lesson; 94
+ Second lesson; 95
+ Third lesson; 96
+ Fourth lesson; 98
+ Fifth lesson; 99
+Voice culture; 103
+
+CHAPTER 4.
+
+Use of modern arms; 105
+ Small arms firing; 106
+ Slow fire; 109
+ Rapid fire; 109
+ Pistol; 112
+ Nomenclature and care; 112
+ Manual for the pistol; 112
+ Position; 116
+ The grip; 116
+ The trigger squeeze; 117
+ Position and aiming drills; 117
+ Quick fire; 118
+ Classes of fire; 118
+ Slow fire; 118
+ Quick fire; 118
+ Automatic fire; 118
+ Trench; 118
+ Score; 119
+ Course; 120
+ Slow fire; 120
+ Quick fire; 120
+ Automatic fire; 120
+ Trench fire; 120
+ Bayonet training; 120
+ Functions of; 120
+ General practice; 120
+ Technique of bayonet combat; 121
+ Manual of the bayonet; 122
+ Progressive exercises; 124
+ Machine guns; 128
+ Mode of action; 128
+ Fire; 129
+ Inconspicuousness; 129
+ Offensive reinforcement of a front momentarily stationary; 130
+ Defensive; 130
+ General rules for installation; 131
+ Employment of fire and instruction; 132
+ Resume; 132
+ Points before firing; 133
+ Points during firing; 133
+ Points after firing; 133
+ Grenade instruction; 134
+ Introduction; 134
+ Working of grenades in use; 136
+ Instruction in throwing; 138
+ Instruction in grenade organization; 139
+ Points to remember; 141
+
+CHAPTER 5.
+
+Map sketching; 143
+ Class room--map reading; 143
+ Taking up map scales; 143
+ Field work--strict scale map making; 145
+ Road sketch; 146
+ Area sketch; 146
+ Problem; 150
+ Class room--problem; 150
+ Field work--problem; 154
+ Class room--problem; 155
+ Field work--problem; 157
+ problem; 158
+Map reading; 159
+
+
+CHAPTER 6.
+
+Helpful references to the articles of war; 161
+ Military law; 161
+ Article 1; 161
+ Definitions; 161
+ Article 2; 161
+ Persons subject to military law; 161
+ Articles 3-18; 162
+ Courts martial classified; 162
+ Method of entering a charge against a man; 163
+ Specification; 164
+ General remarks; 164
+ Article 31; 164
+ Order of voting; 164
+ Article 39; 164
+ Limit upon prosecutions; 164
+ Article 54; 165
+ Fraudulent enlistment; 165
+ Article 58; 165
+ Desertion; 165
+ Article 61; 166
+ Absence without leave; 166
+ Article 62; 166
+ Disrespect toward President and others; 166
+ Article 63; 166
+ Disrespect toward a superior officer; 166
+ Article 64; 167
+ Assaulting or wilfully disobeying superior officer; 167
+ Article 65; 167
+ Insubordinate conduct toward a non-commissioned officer; 167
+ Article 68; 167
+ Disorders; 167
+ Article 69; 168
+ Breaking arrest; 168
+ Article 75; 169
+ Misbehavior before the enemy; 169
+ Article 83; 169
+ Neglect of military property; 169
+ Article 84; 169
+ Waste or unlawful disposal of property issued to soldiers; 169
+ Article 85; 169
+ Drunk on duty; 169
+ Article 86; 170
+ Misbehavior of sentinel; 170
+ Article 92; 170
+ Murder or rape; 170
+ Article 93; 170
+ Various crimes; 170
+ Article 94; 171
+ Frauds against the government; 171
+ Article 95; 171
+ Conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman; 171
+ Article 96; 171
+ General articles, the catch all; 171
+ Examples; 172
+ Problem 1; 172
+ Problem 2; 172
+ Problem 3; 172
+
+
+CHAPTER 7.
+
+Notes on army regulations; 175
+ Authority exercised; 175
+ Abusive language; 175
+ Respect to superiors; 175
+ Remarks by officers; 175
+ Furloughs; 175
+ Men on furloughs; 175
+ Men in foreign countries; 175
+ No payments; 175
+ Desertion; 175
+ Abandoned clothes; 175
+ Reward; 175
+ Costs of apprehension; 176
+ No pay or clothes; 176
+ Will be restored; 176
+ Absent without leave; 176
+ Discharge of enlisted men; 176
+ Final statements; 176
+ Certificate; 176
+ Loss of discharge certificate; 177
+ Physical disability certificate; 177
+ Death of soldier; 177
+ Effects; 177
+ Will be delivered; 177
+ Medal of honor; 178
+ Certificate of merit; 178
+ Quarters; 178
+ Saturday; 178
+ Neglect of rooms; 178
+ Destruction of tableware; 178
+ Chiefs of squads; 178
+ Premises; 178
+ Company commanders; 178
+ Arms; 178
+ Accountability and responsibility; 178
+ Example; 179
+ Loss of public property; 179
+ Ration; 179
+ Forfeiture; 179
+ Pay; 179
+ Allotments; 180
+ Class A; 180
+ Class B; 180
+ Compensation for death or disability; 181
+ Additional insurance; 182
+ Deposits; 182
+ A lost deposit book; 182
+ Payment; 183
+ Withdrawal of deposits; 183
+ Interest; 183
+ Forfeiture; 183
+ Officers and men; 183
+ Furloughed to reserve; 183
+ Transportation; 183
+ Discharged soldier; 183
+ Transfer of claims; 183
+ Notes on the laws of war; 183
+
+
+CHAPTER 8.
+
+Practice marches; 187
+Field work; 188
+ An order; 188
+ Do not deploy too early; 188
+ Fire direction; 189
+ The troops; 189
+ Defense; 190
+ Leadership; 190
+ Communications; 191
+ Night operations; 191
+ Patrols; 191
+ Leader; 191
+ Conduct of; 192
+ Report; 192
+ Return; 193
+ Advance guard; 193
+ Rear guard; 194
+ Flank guard; 194
+ Camps; 194
+ March outpost; 194
+ Outpost; 195
+ Outline of field service regulations; 197
+ Land forces of U.S.; 197
+ Military information; 197
+ Transmission of information; 198
+ Questions and answers on; 206
+
+
+CHAPTER 9.
+
+Feeding men; 213
+ In camp; 213
+ On the march; 214
+ For individual cooking; 214
+ In the trenches; 215
+ Rations and cooking; 215
+Camping and camp sanitation; 216
+ General principles; 216
+
+
+CHAPTER 10.
+
+Personal hygiene and first aid; 221
+ Personal hygiene; 221
+ Bathing; 221
+ Sexual indulgence; 222
+ Exercise; 222
+ Cleanliness of surroundings; 223
+ Preventable diseases; 223
+ Typhoid fever; 223
+ Dysentery; 223
+ Malaria; 224
+ Tonsilitis and colds; 224
+ Measles; 224
+ First aid; 224
+ Grounds; 224
+ Poisoned wounds; 225
+ Diagnosis tag; 225
+ Treatment of wounds; 225
+ Bleeding wounds; 225
+ Fainting, heat exhaustion and shock; 226
+ Sunstroke; 226
+ Burns and scalds; 226
+ Freezing and frostbites; 226
+ Fractures; 226
+ Treatment; 227
+ Artificial respiration; 227
+ Trench foot; 227
+
+
+CHAPTER 11.
+
+Signaling; 229
+ Semaphore; 229
+ First cycle; 229
+ Second cycle; 229
+ Third cycle; 229
+ Fourth cycle; 230
+ Doubles; 230
+ Instructing; 230
+ Second step; 230
+ Third step; 230
+ Fourth step; 230
+ Wig wag; 232
+ Points to remember; 233
+ Letter codes; 233
+ Arm signals; 234
+ Forward, march; 234
+ Halt; 234
+ Double time, march; 234
+ Squads right, march; 234
+ Squads left, march; 234
+ Squads right about, march; 234
+ Change direction or column right, march; 234
+ As skirmishers, march; 234
+ As skirmishers, guide center, march; 235
+ As skirmishers, guide right, march; 235
+ Assemble, march; 235
+ Range, or change elevation; 235
+ What range are you using?; 235
+ Are you ready?; 235
+ Commence firing; 235
+ Fire faster; 235
+ Fire slower; 235
+ To swing the cone of fire; 235
+ Fix bayonet; 236
+ Suspend firing; 236
+ Cease firing; 236
+ Platoon; 236
+ Squad; 236
+ Rush; 236
+
+
+CHAPTER 12.
+
+Guard duty; 237
+ Guards; 237
+ Formal guard mounting; 238
+ Ceremony; 238
+ First detail; 239
+ Other details; 239
+ Sergeant major; 239
+ Adjutant; 239, 240, 241
+ Officer of the guard; 240
+ New officer of the day; 240
+ Commander of the guard; 241
+ Guard duty in the trenches; 241
+
+
+CHAPTER 13.
+
+Company administration; 245
+ Notes on organization; 245
+ Prepare in advance to receive men; 245
+ Duties; 245
+ If in cantonments; 246
+ If in tents; 246
+ Men reporting; 246
+ Issue of equipment; 247
+ Organization; 248
+ Day's routine; 249
+ Reveille; 250
+ Mess; 250, 251
+ Sick call; 250, 251
+ Morning instruction; 250
+ Afternoon instruction; 251
+ Retreat; 251
+ School call; 251
+ Tattoo; 251
+ Call to quarters; 251
+ Taps; 251
+ Sundays and holidays; 252
+ Details; 252
+ Paper work; 252
+ Military correspondence; 253
+ Morning report; 254
+ Ration return; 254
+ Sick report; 254
+ Duty roster; 254
+ Monthly return; 255
+ Service record; 255
+ Discharge; 255
+ Final statement; 255
+ Muster roll; 255
+ Pay roll; 256
+ Names; 257
+ Losses; 257
+
+
+CHAPTER 14.
+
+Conferences; 259
+ Study; 259
+ Syllabus: Small problems for infantry; 261
+ Examinations; 269
+ Military science and tactics; 275
+ Minor tactics; 275
+
+
+CHAPTER 15.
+
+Trench warfare; 287
+ General principles; 287
+ Instructions to be issued by battalion commander; 287
+ Attack of a defensive position; 289
+ Attacking from trenches; 291
+ Defense of trenches; 296
+ Liaison; 298
+ Trench orders; 299
+ Selection of site; 302
+ Trench construction; 303, 307
+ General arrangement; 303
+ System of laying out trenches; 307
+ Revettments; 308
+ Sod; 310
+ Sand bags; 310
+ Concrete work; 310
+ Gabions; 310
+ Trench armament; 311
+ Loopholes; 311
+ Trench bottoms; 311
+ Communication trench; 313
+ Latrines; 315
+ Shelters; 315
+ Dugouts; 317
+ Sentries; 317
+ Position; 317
+ Entrances; 317
+ Galleries; 318
+ Bomb-traps; 318
+ Interior; 318
+ Depots for supplies; 318
+ Telephones; 319
+ Departure parallel; 319
+ Machine gun emplacements; 319
+ Listening posts; 321
+ Wire entanglements; 321
+ High entanglements; 321
+ Tracing entanglements; 322
+ Low entanglements; 322
+ Loose wire; 322
+ Criticisms by Lieut Henri Poire; 322
+Occupation; 325
+ Two main classes of relief; 325
+ General principles of relief; 325
+ Mechanism of relief; 325
+ Attack during the march; 328
+ The stay in the trenches; 329
+ Four objects of a trench commander; 329
+ His plan of defense; 329
+ Organization of defense; 329
+ Liaison; 331
+ Observation; 331
+ Trench work; 333
+ Offensive operations; 334
+ Rule of the trench commander; 335
+ Duties of the company commander; 335
+ Duties of platoon leaders as officers on duty; 339
+ Duties of platoon leaders; 339
+ In front line trenches; 340
+ Duties of non-commissioned officer on duty; 341
+ Patrols; 342
+ Sentinels; 342
+ Machine guns; 342
+ Snipers; 343
+ Organization of a platoon; 344
+ Deployments; 346
+ Normal battalion formation in attack; 347
+ General principles of the platoon formation in assault of
+ fortified positions; 349
+ Remarks regarding forming of wave from close order; 353
+ Some questions a platoon commander should ask himself; 354
+ Defensive measure against gas attacks; 356
+ General considerations; 356
+ Nature of gas attacks; 356
+ Gas clouds; 356
+ Gas projectiles; 358
+ Tear or lachrymatory shells; 359
+ Poison shells; 359
+ Smoke; 359
+ Mine and explosion gases; 359
+ Protection of shelters; 360
+ Methods of protection; 360
+ Shelters which should be protected; 361
+ Protection of weapons and equipment; 361
+ Small arms and S.A.A.; 362
+ Hand and rifle grenades; 362
+ Light trench mortars; 362
+ Action to be taken in trenches on gas alarm; 363
+ Action to be taken in billets and back areas; 363
+ Action during gas attack; 364
+ Protective measures; 364
+ Tactical measures; 364
+ Precautions against gas shells; 365
+ Action subsequent to a gas attack; 367
+ General; 367
+ Movement; 367
+ Clearing dugouts and other shelters; 367
+ Ventilation; 368
+ Natural; 368
+ By fire; 368
+ By fanning; 369
+ Cleaning arms and ammunition; 369
+ Treatment of shell holes; 370
+ Concealment from aerial observers; 370
+ Orders governing intrenchment problems; 372
+ Company organization; 384
+ Company headquarters; 384
+ Headquarters; 384
+ Personnel; 385
+ Commissioned; 385
+ Enlisted; 386
+ Equipment; 386
+ Trench standing orders; 386
+ Duties; 386
+ Sentries; 387
+ Patrols; 388
+ Stand to; 389
+ Machine guns; 389
+ Reliefs; 390
+ Guides; 391
+ Smoking and talking; 391
+ Procedure on arrival at trenches; 391
+ Log books; 392
+ Equipment; 392
+ Stretcher bearers; 392
+ Discipline; 392
+ Rations and cooking; 393
+ Sanitation; 393
+ Emergency dumps for companies (material); 394
+ Contents of dump; 394
+ Stores for company; 394
+ Stores at battalion headquarters; 394
+Conclusion; 396
+Bibliography; 397
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MILITARY INSTRUCTORS MANUAL***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 14625.txt or 14625.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/4/6/2/14625
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations. To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/14625.zip b/old/14625.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0fb613b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/14625.zip
Binary files differ
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.25.1) at 2026-03-03 20:57:40 +0000